SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2014 PDF

Siemens AG 2013
Industrial Controls
SIRIUS
Catalog
IC 10
Edition
2014
Answers for industry.
so_IC10_2014_EN_umschlag.indd 3
19.12.2013 12:53:22
Siemens AG 2013
Related catalogs
Miscellaneous
IC 10 AO
Industrial Controls
SIRIUS 3R_1*
in sizes S00/S0 to S12
Products for Automation and Drives

Interactive Catalog, DVD
PDF/E-Book (E86060-K1010-A191-A3-7600)
E86060-D4001-A510-D3-7600
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and

LV 10
Electrical Installation Technology
SENTRON SIVACON ALPHA
Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring
Devices, Switchboards and Distribution Systems
Industry Mall
Information and Ordering Platform
in the Internet:
E86060-K8280-A101-A1-7600
www.siemens.com/industrymall
Safety Integrated
Safety Technology for
Factory Automation
SI 10
E86060-K7010-A101-A3-7600
Industrial Communication
SIMATIC NET
Information and Download Center

Digital versions of the catalogs are available
in the Internet
www.siemens.com/sirius/catalogs
IK PI
Response E-mail
Please send your comments and suggestions
for improvement to
catalogs.industry@siemens.com
(include the catalog name in the subject field)
E86060-K6710-A101-B7-7600
SIMATIC
Products for
Totally Integrated Automation
and Micro Automation
ST 70
E86060-K4670-A101-B4-7600
SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors
Type series 1LE1, 1MB1 and 1PC1
Frame sizes 80 to 315
Power range 0.3 to 250 kW
CA 01
D 81.1
E86060-K5581-A111-A6-7600
SITRAIN
Training for Industry
ITC
Only available in German

E86060-K6850-A101-C4
Trademarks
Technical Assistance
Registered trademarks
All product designations may be registered trademarks or
product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies.
Third parties using these trademarks or product names for their
own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trademark
owners.
Expert technical assistance
for Industrial controls:
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
Fax: +49 (911) 895-5907
Further information about industrial controls:

www.siemens.com/sirius
E-Mail: technicalassistance@siemens.com
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS
Industrial Controls
1 Introduction
Catalog IC 10 2014
2 Industrial Communication
3 Switching Devices
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
for Switching Motors
The products and systems described in this

catalog are manufactured/distributed under
application of a certified
quality management
system in accordance
with EN ISO 9001
(for the Certified
Registration Nos. see
www.siemens.com/system-certificates/ce). The
certificate is recognized
by all IQNet countries.
Supersedes:
Catalog IC 10 2012 (English edition)
Catalog News IC 10 N up to 09/2013
Refer to the Industry Mall for current updates
of this catalog:
The products contained in this catalog can also
be found in the Interactive Catalog CA 01.
Order No.:
E86060-D4001-A510-D3-7600 (DVD)
4 Switching Devices
Special Applications
5 Switching Devices
Contactor Relays and Relays
6 Switching Devices
Soft Starters and
Solid-State Switching Devices
7 Protection Equipment
8 Load Feeders and Motor Starters

for Use in the Control Cabinet
9 Motor Starters for Use in the Field,
High Degree of Protection
10 Monitoring and Control Devices
11 Safety Technology
Please contact your local Siemens branch

Siemens AG 2013
12 Position and Safety Switches
13 Commanding and Signaling Devices
Printed on paper from

sustainably managed
forests and controlled
sources.
14 Parametrization, Configuration and

Visualization with SIRIUS
15 Products for Specific Requirements
www.pefc.org
16 Appendix
Siemens AG 2013
NEW
CM 1243-2 communication module

AS-i master for SIMATIC S7-1200
CM AS-i Master ST
communication module for ET 200SP
AS-Interface digital I/O modules IP67 - K60

for use in the field, high degree of protection
Article No.: 3RK7243-2AA30-0XB0
Article No.: 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1
Article No.: 3RK2200-0CQ00-0AA3,

3RK2100-1CQ00-0AA3
Page 2/28
Page 2/33
Page 2/49
AS-Interface digital I/O modules IP67 K45

for use in the field, high degree of protection
30 V power supply units

for AS-Interface
AS-Interface DCM 1271 data decoupling

module for SIMATIC S7-1200
Article No.: 3RK2200-0DQ20-0AA3,

3RK2100-1CQ20-0AA3
Article No.: 3RX9511-0AA00, 3RX9512-0AA00,

3RX9513-0AA00
Article No.: 3RK7271-1AA30-0AA0
Page 2/53
Page 2/72
Page 2/76
AS-Interface Extension Plug Compact

for expansion of an AS-Interface segment
Addressing unit
for AS-Interface
IO-Link master module CM 4xIO-Link

communication module for ET 200SP
Article No.: 3RK1901-1MX02
Article No.: 3RK1904-2AB02
Article No.: 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0
Page 2/80
Page 2/81
Page 2/95
PROFINET communication module

for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protector, size S0

for small rated currents
SIRIUS 3RV2 circuit breaker acc. to UL 489/

CSA C22.2 No.5, size S0 with screw terminal
Article No.: 3RW4900-ONC00
Article No.: 3RV2021-0..10, 3RV2021-0..20,

3RV2021-1.A.0, 3RV2321-1.C.0
Article No.: 3RV2721-4.D10, 3RV2821-4.D10
Page 6/37
Pages 7/19, 7/22
Pages 7/24, 7/25
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3RB24 solid-state overload relay

for IO-Link
SIRIUS 3RA2 load feeder

size S0 with spring-type terminals
SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starter
Article No.: 3RB2483-4A.1
Article No.: 3RA2120-1., 3RA2220-1.
Article No.: 3RM1.
Page 7/139
Pages 8/16, 8/24
Page 8/83
SIMATIC ET 200S motor starter

High Feature
SIRIUS M200D PROFINET motor starter

with PROFIenergy
Motor management system

SIMOCODE pro S
Article No.: 3RK1301-.....-0AB4,

3RK1301-.....-1AB4
Article No.: 3RK1395-. +

3RK1335-0AS01-0AA0
Article No.: 3UF7020
Page 8/108
Page 9/45
Page 10/14
Motor management system

SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET
Ground-fault module
for SIMOCODE pro V
Multifunction module
for SIMOCODE pro S
Page 10/14
Page 10/16
Page 10/17
SIRIUS 3UG46 residual-current

monitoring relay
Residual current transformer
SIRIUS 3UG4 insulation monitor

for ungrounded DC/AC networks
Article No.: 3UG4625
Article No.: 3UL23
Article No.: 3UG4581, 3UG4582, 3UG4583
Page 10/101
Page 10/104
Page 10/105
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relay

for stand-alone installation for IO-Link
SIRIUS 3UG48 residual current monitoring

device for IO-Link
SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15 temperature monitoring

relay for IO-Link
Article No.: 3UG48
Article No.: 3UG4825
Article No.: 3RS1440/3RS1441, 3RS1540
Page 10/123
Page 10/140
Page 10/160
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay
SIRIUS 3RK3 Modular Safety System

ASIsafe basic and extended central units
SIRIUS 3SE5 position switch

with rounded plunger, control cabinet type,
degree of protection IP40
Article No.: 3SK11, 3SK12
Article No.: 3RK3121, 3RK3122
Article No.: 3SE5232-0HC05-1AB.
Page 11/10
Page 11/39
Page 12/14
Non-contact RFID safety switch
Motor starter and soft starter block libraries

for SIMATIC PCS 7
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal)
Article No.: 3SE631
Article No.: 3ZS1630, 3ZS1633
Article No.: 3ZS1322
Page 12/101
Pages 14/9, 14/17
Page 14/20
SIMOCODE pro block library

for SIMATIC PCS 7, V7 and V8
AS-Interface block library

for SIMATIC PCS 7, V7
Modular Safety System ES

Premium Version
Article No.: 3UF7982, 3ZS1632
Article No.: 3ZS1635
Article No.: 3ZS1314-6C
Page 14/28
Page 14/31
Page 14/35
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Power supplies
SITOP compact
Power supplies
SITOP lite, SITOP smart and SITOP modular
Power supplies SIPLUS extreme for use in severe

ambient conditions
Article No.: 6EP1332-5BA20
Article No.: 6EP133.-1LB00, 6EP133.-2BA20,

6EP1536-3AA00
Article No.: 6AG1334-2BA20-4AA0,

6AG1337-3BA00-7AA0
Page 15/42
Pages 15/41, 15/44, 15/45
Pages 15/44, 15/46
PSE202U power supplies

SITOP redundancy modules
PSE200U power supplies

selectivity module with signaling interface
SIPLUS HCS3200 heating control system

compact design for heating control systems with
integrated power outputs
Article No.: 6EP196.-2BA00
Article No.: 6EP1961-2BA31, 6EP1961-2BA41
Article No.: 6BK1932-0BA00-0AA0
Page 15/48
Page 15/49
Page 15/54
SIPLUS HCS716I rack

mounting frame without flange
Rack mounting frame narrow version with

expansion frame for SIPLUS HCS716I
SIPLUS HCS716I power output modules

LA716I and LA716I HP
Article No.: 6BK1700-2AA70-0AA0
Article No.: 6BK1700-2AA80-0AA0,

6BK1700-3AA00-0AA0
Article No.: 6BK1700-4BA80-0AA0,

6BK1700-4CA00-0AA0
Page 15/64
Page 15/64
Page 15/68
SIDOOR automatic door controllers

for elevators
Condition Monitoring Systems

SIPLUS CMS2000
SIPLUS ECC1000/ECC2000 charging

controllers for electric vehicle charging stations
Article No.: 6FB11
Article No.: 6AT800.
Article No.: 5TT3200-.KK.0,

6FE1021-3CM10-.AA0
Page 15/95
Page 15/135
Pages 15/154, 15/158
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Technical Assistance.
Our Technical Assistance for Industrial Controls will help you

with all technical enquiries concerning our products and systems
both before and after delivery.
Our experts will provide you with specialist support over the phone in connection with:
Product selection
Conversion from old to new codes
Conversion from non-Siemens
codes
Special versions
Special requirement
Commissioning
Operation
As an option, you can also use our code

conversion tool for old, new and
competitor code conversion:
www.siemens.com/sirius/conversiontool
To ensure that you always speak with

the right person, our telephone assistance system comes in two steps. In the
first step we note your questions and
forward them to the right contact person.
In the second step your personal contact then phones you back.
This way you receive an expert answer
quickly and easily.
Contact data
Tel.: +49 (911) 895 5900
Fax: +49 (911) 895 5907
E-Mail:
technical-assistance@siemens.com
Technical Support on the Internet
www.siemens.com/sirius/support
Support Request on the Internet
www.siemens.com/automation/
support-request .
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Answers for industry.

Integrated technologies, vertical market expertise and services
for greater productivity, energy efficiency, and flexibility.
The Siemens Industry Sector is the

world's leading supplier of innovative
and environmentally friendly products
and solutions for industrial companies.
End-to-end automation technology and
industrial software, solid market expertise, and technology-based services are
the levers we use to increase our customers productivity, efficiency and
flexibility. With a global workforce of
more than 100 000 employees,
the Industry Sector comprises the
Industry Automation, Drive Technologies, and Customer Services divisions,
as well as the Metals Technologies
Business Unit.
We consistently rely on integrated technologies and, thanks to our bundled

portfolio, we can respond more quickly
and flexibly to our customers' wishes.
With our globally unmatched range of
automation technology, industrial
control and drive technology as well
as industrial software, we equip companies with exactly what they need over
their entire value chain from product
design and development to production,
sales and service. Our industrial customers benefit from our comprehensive
portfolio, which is tailored to their
market and their needs.
Market launch times can be reduced by

up to 50% due to the combination of
powerful automation technology and
intelligent industrial software from
Siemens Industry. At the same time,
the costs for energy or waste water
for a manufacturing company can be
reduced significantly. In this way, we
increase our customers competitive
strength and make an important contribution to environmental protection
with our energy-efficient products and
solutions.
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
(53(QWHUSULVH5HVRXUFH3ODQQLQJ
3/03URGXFW/LIHF\FOH0DQDJHPHQW
0DQDJHPHQW/HYHO
3URGXFW'HVLJQ
3URGXFWLRQ3ODQQLQJDQG6LPXODWLRQ
'DWD0DQDJHPHQW
0(60DQXIDFWXULQJ([HFXWLRQ6\VWHPV
6,0$7,&,7
2SHUDWLRQV/HYHO
0DLQWHQDQFH
$VVHW0DQDJHPHQW
6,0$7,&3&6
2SHUDWRU6\VWHP
(QHUJ\
0DQDJHPHQW
(QJLQHHULQJ
6WDWLRQ
7,$3RUWDO
&RQWURO/HYHO
6,0$7,&3&6
$XWRPDWLRQ
6\VWHPV
6,180(5,.
&RPSXWHU1XPHULF&RQWURO
6,027,21
0RWLRQ&RQWURO
6,0$7,&1(7
,QGXVWULDO
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
6,0$7,&&RQWUROOHUV
0RGXODU3&EDVHG
)LHOG/HYHO
352),%863$
3URFHVV,QVWUXPHQWDWLRQ
7RWDOO\
,QWHJUDWHG
$XWRPDWLRQ
6,0$7,&'LVWULEXWHG,2
6,0$7,&,GHQW
,QGXVWULDO,GHQWLFDWLRQ
+$57
,2/LQN
Setting standards in
productivity and competitiveness.
Totally Integrated Automation.
10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
TIA is characterized by its unique continuity.

It provides maximum transparency at all levels
with reduced interfacing requirements covering
the field level, production control level, up to the
corporate management level. With TIA you also
profit throughout the complete life cycle of your
plant starting with the initial planning steps
through operation up to modernization, where
we offer a high measure of investment security resulting from continuity in the further development
of our products and from reducing the number of
interfaces to a minimum.
3ODQW(QJLQHHULQJ
&2026
(WKHUQHW
6,0$7,&:LQ&&
6&$'$6\VWHP
The unique continuity is already a defined

characteristic at the development stage of
our products and systems.
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
6,0$7,&+0,
+XPDQ0DFKLQH,QWHUIDFH
The result: maximum interoperability covering

the controller, HMI, drives, up to the process
control system. This reduces the complexity of
the automation solution in your plant. You will
experience this, for example, in the engineering
phase of the automation solution in the form of
reduced time requirements and cost, or during
operation using the continuous diagnostics facilities of Totally Integrated Automation for increasing the availability of your plant.
6,5,86,QGXVWULDO&RQWUROV
352),1(7
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),%86
6,1$0,&6'ULYH6\VWHPV
6,7233RZHU6XSSO\
$6,QWHUIDFH
.1;*$00$LQVWDEXV
/RZ9ROWDJH'LVWULEXWLRQ
7RWDOO\
,QWHJUDWHG
3RZHU
6,027,&60RWRUV
Thanks to Totally Integrated Automation, Siemens provides

an integrated basis for the implementation of customized
automation solutions in all industries from inbound to
outbound.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11
Siemens AG 2013
Equipment Manufacturing Plant Amberg

Awards include "Factory of the Year", "Bavarian Quality Award"
and "The Best Factory/Industrial Excellence"
At Siemens Amberg, some 2 400 employees develop and manufacture industrial controls for the world market.
Manufacturing includes the comprehensive SIRIUS product range used for
switching and protecting loads,
e.g. of motors, in particular in mechanical engineering.
In the industry competition "The Best
Factory/Industrial Excellence Award
2011", the equipment manufacturing
plant Amberg was honored as a national
winner. The lead factory for industrial
controls achieved the highest overall
ranking and also excelled in all scoring
categories such as business model,
strategy, added value, product and process implementation, service and customer integration, along with continuous improvement.
12
Siemens IC 10 2014
The industry competition is staged under the auspices of the Federation of

German Industries (BDI), several European business schools, including
INSEAD in Paris, the Technical University
of Eindhoven as well as the WHU-Otto
Beisheim School of Management.
The key question of this industry competition, which has taken place in
Germany since 1995, is: "What are the
key factors of production excellence
that will guarantee the company a longterm competitive advantage and will
turn a factory into an outstanding differentiating factor?"
The ten-person jury, headed up by the
deans of internationally-renowned
management schools in Germany,
France, Spain, and the Netherlands, not
only scrutinized the operative unit itself
but also the entire process chain, from
the product idea, through development
and manufacturing, right up to the final
customer, along with interfaces and

partners, such as suppliers.
Over the past few years, winning
awards has become a normal occurrence in the equipment manufacturing
plant Amberg. In 2007, it won the
"Factory of the Year" award in the segment of "Excellent complexity management". In 2010 an additional outside
award followed: the coveted Bavarian
Quality Award.
The Amberg Siemens plants have made
it a tradition to be at the top of national
and international rankings. These
awards are proof of our high quality
standards not only with respect to our
products, but also to our processes.
They demonstrate that we have
achieved optimal mastery over the productivity and competitiveness showcased by our products and systems.
Introduction
1/2
1/4
1/6
1/8
1/9
1/10
1/11
Controls made easy:

SIRIUS modular system
SIRIUS Planning Efficiency
SIRIUS configurators
SIRIUS apps
Energy-efficient controls:
SIRIUS brings down energy costs
Industrial communication:
SIRIUS for AS-Interface
SIRIUS for IO-Link
1/12
Systematic industrial safety

technology:
SIRIUS Safety Integrated
1/13
Applications:
SIRIUS supports you where
UL is concerned
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Controls made easy:

Overview
SIRIUS has long been synonymous world-wide with industrial
controls, and was a trendsetter in this field from the very beginning.
The SIRIUS modular system with its components for the switching, starting, protection and also monitoring of motors and industrial systems stands for the fast, flexible and space-saving
design of control cabinets.
More space in the control cabinet
The modular system packs powerful performance into its
compact sizes:
Integrated monitoring relay in the motor feeder
Application monitoring in the main circuit
Integrated plug-in design combined with spring-type
terminals
Achieve faster results with pre-configured components

Simply connect pre-configured components via the infeed
system and save wiring outlay:
Time-saving plug-in design for motor feeders
Replacement of the compact starters and load feeders
without disconnecting the main circuit wiring
Reduce effort and downtimes
Solutions for direct-on-line starters, reversing starters,
contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting, soft starters and
safe load feeders
Less wiring
The SIRIUS modular system is based on IO-Link:
Less wiring outlay for actuators
Connection of up to four starters with one IO-Link connection
saves space
Full transparency right down to the field level
Simple installation
1/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
The consistent further development of SIRIUS takes even better

account of current market requirements, particularly the call for
fewer variants, greater flexibility and reduced cost and time. The
advantages for you are: higher productivity and cost efficiency
in your company.
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Controls made easy:

Time savings with full functionality
Select and order functions directly from the Siemens Industry
Mall.
Quick and easy product search
Reliability and elimination of errors by means of pre-mounted
elements
Prefabricated function modules save engineering and time
From old to new: The new conversion tool

Every automation system becomes obsolete at some time.
Replacing installed products used to involve significant time and
costs. But now, with the new conversion tool, you'll find the right
product more quickly this allows you to conveniently switch to
SIRIUS Innovations:
A user-friendly interface enables intuitive searches.
Simply enter the article number of the current device or
descriptive text (e.g. *contactor*).
The search result provides you with the article number of the
desired device, including current data and information for
using the new product.
Order conveniently through the Industry Mall.
You can find more information under
www.siemens.com/sirius/conversion-tool.
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/3
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Controls made easy:

Overview
With Planning Efficiency, Siemens Industry has provided
answers to typical questions that often come up in electrical
planning:
What is the right product for my application?
Where can I find product data?
How can I design processes in a more efficient and
time-saving way?
Planning Efficiency brings together the whole of Siemens
Industry's electronic support. At each stage of the project, online
functions make the everyday life of the planner easier through
greater efficiency. At the same time, Planning Efficiency focuses
on aspects such as optimization in the configuring of control
cabinets.
In this early phase in electrical planning in particular, savings of
up to 80 % can be made in time and costs.
IC01_00205
In order to supply planners with everything they need and make

modern electrical planning easier when configuring control
cabinets, the electronic support provided by Planning Efficiency
focuses on four advantages:
Get to the right product faster with intuitive product selection
Time savings of up to 80 % with universal product data for
your CAE and CAD system
User-friendly compilation of project-specific documentation
Comprehensive support anywhere, anytime
1/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Controls made easy:

Process phases
In each process phase, Siemens Industry provides comprehensive and online functions free of charge. This enables you
Concept &
selection
Mechanical
design
Electrical
design
access to all the information and product data you need worldwide and around the clock.
Plantdocumentation
Installation / service /
commissioning /
diagnostics
Ordering
With the intuitive operation of the configurators, you can quickly

and easily create individual feeders. The corresponding 3D
models and dimensional drawings for the control cabinets are
provided for this purpose.
Additional types of data for mechanical and electrical engineering can be directly called up via the CAx Download Manager.
The universal CAx data types can be quickly and easily integrated into various CAE systems, e.g. E.series, WSCAD,
ELCAD, COMOS etc.
With only a few clicks, the standard-compliant plant documentation can be compiled individually in mySupport. Simply select
the desired chapters from the existing manuals of the installed
Siemens products. With this solution, quality goes up and workload comes down.
The 12 CAx data types in detail:

Internal circuit
diagrams
Terminal connection
diagrams
Product
master data
Characteristic
curves
Dimensional
drawings
Operating
instructions
3D models
Product images
Manuals
Data sheets
Certificates
EPLAN Electric
P8 Macros
IC01_00265
The benefits for EPLAN users

Internal circuit diagrams
With the exchange format EPLAN Data Archived Zipped (.edz),

the overall time required for integration can be reduced even
further. With just a few clicks, the contained data types can be
imported for any number of article numbers, and they remain
linked. In this way, the installed Siemens products can be represented across different circuit diagram pages quickly and easily.
Connection diagrams
Product master data
Operating Instructions
Product pictures
Data sheets
IC01_00264
Without Planning Efficiency a lot of time used to be wasted in

manual data transmission. Now you can concentrate on the
essentials again.
All the information and product data you need are provided by
Siemens Industry and are easily accessible.
This makes configuring control cabinets more efficient and
makes your everyday work easier.
Planning Efficiency
For more information see

www.siemens.com/planning-efficiency.
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/5
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Controls made easy:

Overview
For the SIRIUS product range, we offer a variety of configurators.
These facilitate the selection of the right products and systems
for your application.
Simply choose the desired characteristics and after a few clicks,
the optimal solution will be presented to you.
Detection/Signaling
SIRIUS 3SB3/3SF5 pushbuttons and indicator lights
Individual control elements or complete enclosures can be
assembled just the way you want them.
All combinations of buttons, enclosures and switching
elements can be selected individually.
SIRIUS 3SE5/3SF position switches

Selection of basic switch, actuator head, as well as a
matching actuator can be performed in just a few clicks.
Individual elements can be mixed and matched and
assembled to create your individual versions.
Evaluating
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays

Fast and user-friendly creation of safety-related applications
(e.g. EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring)
Simply enter the number of sensors or outputs and select any
combination of accessories.
Once the configuration is complete, you are presented with
the article numbers along with technical data and 3D models
corresponding to the products.
1/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
The products can then be ordered conveniently through the

Industry Mall.
You can find more information under
www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators.
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Controls made easy:

Switching/Protecting/Starting
SIRIUS Innovations system configurator
The easy way to find the right combination of motor starter protectors/circuit breakers, contactors and matching accessories
Input of motor data and your desired features
Once configuration is complete, you are presented with all the
necessary product numbers along with technical data and
3D models corresponding to the products
It also allows for more complex designs such as 3-phase
busbar systems, along with complete infeed systems

Create individual motor starters or a complex motor starter
group
Individual selection options, such as direct or reversing
starting, spring-type or screw terminals, as well as motor
current and control voltage
Graphic representation of the design during configuration
Automatic calculation of the matching motor starter
protector/circuit breaker (for group configuration)
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starter and infeed system for 3RA6

Simple usage from individual compact starters or also with
corresponding infeed system and AS-i connection
In the final configuration, you will be presented with additional
technical information such as CAD data and product data
sheets as well as characteristic curves, operating instructions,
manuals etc.
SIRIUS 3RW soft starters

Easy and quick selection option of matching soft starters
Note: For the proper dimensioning of the soft starter, you
should use the Win-Soft starter tool. The link to the software is
provided in the configurator.
SIRIUS 3RF solid-state switching devices

Simple selection of individual solid-state switching devices by
means of technical characteristics (e.g. zero-point switching,
spring-type terminal and rated current)
Once configuration is complete, you receive the article
numbers corresponding to the products.
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/7
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Overview
Apps for SIRIUS Planning Efficiency
Online Support app
The Online Support app allows you to access over 300 000
documents on all Siemens Industry products, anywhere and any
time. Whether you need help with implementing your project or
with troubleshooting, or want to expand your plant or plan a new
one, you now have around-the-clock access to FAQs, manuals,
certificates, characteristic curves, sample applications and
tools, product news and more.
The app is available free of charge from the Apple App Store and
on Google Play (Android Market) using the search string:
"Siemens Industry Online Support".
www.siemens.com/sirius/support-app.
Industry Online
Support App
SIRIUS Innovations DVD - also available as a web app

Thanks to the modular design of SIRIUS Innovations, our
products are particularly easy to plan for the control cabinet,
install and monitor. All the advantages of SIRIUS Innovations are
available offline in 9 languages with 3D animations, films and
screen recordings of our planning and configuring tools. Ask
your sales contact person about the SIRIUS Innovations DVD.
SIRIUS Innovations
Assembly and handling
The SIRIUS Innovations DVD is now also available as a web

app1) (Ge/En): www.siemens.com/sirius/dvd.
Applications
Planning and configuration
Product overview
Connection to the automation level
SIRIUS Innovations
WebApp
1)
Optimized for use with a resolution of 1024 x 768 on iPads and tablet PCs.
Interactive control cabinet

The interactive control cabinet shows you a selected product
overview, and provides you with useful information and technical
data on the relevant components, thus allowing you to plan your
control cabinet in advance, efficiently and easily. This saves
precious time during project implementation.
Discover the interactive control cabinet1) at
www.siemens.com/sirius/cabinet.
Interactive control
cabinet
1)
Now also available as an iPad app in the Apple App Store.
1/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
IC01_00271
Controls made easy:

SIRIUS apps
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Energy-efficient controls:
SIRIUS brings down energy costs
Overview
Energy-efficient products SIRIUS reduces power loss
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
Energy management in industry
Overview of the energy management process
Whether you are a plant operator, planner or machine manufacturer: Energy-efficient production is a challenge and an opportunity in equal measure.
Energy-efficient production as a success factor
In order to harness energy potential, with our vast portfolio, we
always maintain a clear view of the overall product development
and production process. Because maximum energy efficiency in
production can only be achieved through perfect interaction of
all components.
3RR2 monitoring relay, 3RB3 overload relay, 3RT2 contactor,

3RW soft starter, 3RV2 motor starter protector/circuit breaker and
3RA6 compact starter
SIRIUS Innovations controls are characterized by extremely low

intrinsic power loss. This not only lowers energy costs, but also
reduces the amount of waste heat in the control cabinet. This
achieves higher packing density in the control cabinet and
reduces the required cooling capacity in the control cabinet.
Energy-measuring products
That is why it is important to first create an awareness for existing

energy-saving potential, recognize (identify) and assess
(evaluate) opportunities for optimization through precise analysis. Finally, appropriate measures must be implemented
(realized).
With our full-range portfolio of energy-efficient drive solutions,
automation and services, you too will reach maximum energy
efficiency, higher productivity and lasting competitiveness in
your company.
Three columns of energy efficiency with innovative SIRIUS
products
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor management and control device,
200D motor starter, ET 200S High-Feature motor starter/direct-on-line
starter
SIRIUS innovations
Energy-efficient
products
Energy-measuring
products
Energy-optimized
drive solutions
XSWR

Communication-capable SIRIUS switching and protection

devices deliver measured energy data without any additional
installation outlay.
Best drive solutions in terms of energy
HQHUJ\VDYLQJ
The
Siemens
standard
Energy management can be instrumental in increasing plant

productivity to bring about a significant improvement to the
competitive ability of a company in all industries.
Increasingly
important with
regard to energy
management acc. to
ISO 50001
Biggest lever for

energy savings
In order to design processes for optimal energy efficiency, it is

not enough to simply measure the energy flow and deploy
energy-efficient products. The greatest lever for saving energy
can be derived from closely examining the application:
With which load profile is the system being operated?
IC01_00245
Example applications in the Internet:

www.siemens.com/sirius/energysaving Applications
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/9
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Industrial Communication:
SIRIUS for AS-Interface
Overview
AS-i from Siemens has everything in its favor
Complete AS-i product range for bus-based standard and
safety technology from a single source
Consistent integration of the Siemens AS-i devices into the
SIMATIC programming and diagnostics concepts and into the
TIA Portal engineering framework
Integration of ASIsafe applications into SIMATIC safety
programming (e. g. distributed safety)
Planning, calculation and verification of the whole safety chain
based on ASIsafe in the Safety Evaluation Tool
(TV-approved)
Integration of lower-level AS-i networks into the PCS 7 process
control system
Global spare parts logistics, consulting and service
Engineering in the Totally Integrated Automation Portal
(TIA Portal)
AS-Interface
AS-Interface the smart communication standard for universal connection of the field level to the control system
The AS-Interface (AS-i) the Actuator-Sensor-Interface, to be
more precise is a smart bus system for the field level that connects all the sensors and actuators in the field to the higher-level
control system more simply, flexibly and efficiently than any
other.
The structure of a complex automation system is not always
clear at first glance. The field level in particular, with its large
numbers of devices with real-time requirements, needs a clear
structure.
That is exactly what the AS-i fieldbus delivers: Via a simple twowire cable the yellow AS-i cable in an AS-i network up to
62 bus nodes can be connected to the AS-i master and
simultaneously supplied with power. The standard here is robust
data transmission in a rugged environment with a high degree of
protection for the AS-interface.
AS-i = simple!
AS-i = flexible!
AS-i = efficient!
Only one cable for

data and energy
Flexible topologies
User-friendly
addressing
Open standard
Time-saving
Expandability
assembly/installation
Safety engineering
Engineering in the
TIA Portal
Fast device
replacement
User-friendly
maintenance
Device and
network diagnostics
Ruggedness and
stability
IC01_00210
The TIA Portal as a key component of TIA is an innovative engineering framework for all automation tasks. It combines control
programming and configuration of visualization, and integrates
the parameterization of operating mechanisms and networks,
together with the programming of fail-safe applications.
The TIA Portal is particularly intuitive to operate. For example,
configuring is easy using drag & drop from the hardware catalog, and you get realistic displays of all network nodes and components down to actuator/sensor level.
In addition, the engineering framework allows you to get started
quickly in safety programming by means of a library with certified safety functions.
Device and network diagnostics:
Diagnostics and error signals can also be tracked through all
bus hierarchies down to the lowest actuator/sensor level and
described in plain text. The basis for this is a realistic depiction
of the bus topology concerned.
The TIA Portal also sets standards where efficiency is concerned. Data from lower-level AS-i networks can be flexibly
integrated using drag & drop based on SIMATIC HMI and
WinCC. All you need do is "drag" the signal information from
any AS-i slave into the control display of an HMI basic panel.
Furthermore, integrated web servers and diagnostics based
on user-specific websites allow the data from all connected
AS-i networks to be displayed and integrated into user-specific control concepts (e.g. website for documenting and
operating a SIMATIC S7-1200).
Whatever your industry, the TIA Portal allows you not just to work
more efficiently, but also to achieve lasting increases in productivity and competitiveness.
www.siemens.com/as-interface
www.siemens.com/tia-portal.
1/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Industrial Communication:
SIRIUS for IO-Link
Overview
Engineering and visualization
IO-Link
engineering:
SIMATIC
S7-PCT
Visualization:
SIMATIC HMI
WinCC
Switching cabinet installation
Field installation
Controller
S7-300/
S7-400
Controller
S7-1200
PROFINET
SIMATIC
ET 200eco PN
with IO-Link
master
ET 200SP (ET 200S)

with IO-Link master
SIRIUS
3RA6
compact
starters
SIRIUS
3UG48
relay
SIRIUS
3RA2 load feeders
with 3RA27
function modules
SIRIUS
3RB24
overload
relays
SIRIUS
3RS14/
3RS15
relays
K20
IO-Link
module
SIRIUS
3RT2 contactor
with SIRIUS
3RR24 relay
Actuators
RFID
system
RF200
RFID
system
RF200
Standard
sensors
IK10_30141c
IO-Link
IO-Link more than just a further interface

IO-Link is a smart concept for the uniform connection of switching devices and sensors to the control level by means of a lowcost point-to-point connections.
The IO-Link communication standard below fieldbus level enables central error diagnostics and localization down to actuator/sensor level, and facilitates both start-up and maintenance
by allowing parameter data to be dynamically changed directly
from the application.
The increasing intelligence of field devices and their integration
into automation as a whole now allows data to be accessed right
down to the lowest field level. The result was: greater plant availability and less engineering work.
As an open interface, IO-Link can be integrated into all standard
fieldbus and automation systems.
The advantages of IO-Link at a glance
Engineering reduced engineering times
- Standardized, open system for greater flexibility
(non-Siemens IO-Link devices can be integrated
in engineering)
- Uniform, transparent configuring and programming through
integrated engineering (SIMATIC STEP 7)
- Unassigned function blocks for SIMATIC for easy parameterization and diagnostics, and for reading out measured values
- Efficient engineering thanks to pre-integration of Siemens
devices into SIMATIC HMI
- Low error rate in CAD circuit diagram design as a result of
reduced control current wiring
Installation and commissioning reduced start-up times
- Faster assembly with minimized error rate as a result of
- Less space required in the control cabinet
- Low-cost circuitry where there are several feeders by making
unlimited use of existing Siemens components
Operation and maintenance greater plant availability

- High transparency in the system right down to field level
- Reduction in downtimes and maintenance times thanks to
system-wide diagnostics and faster fault correction
- Support of predictive maintenance
- High transparency through integration into energy management systems, reading out of current values and diagnostic
signals
- Shorter changeover times, even for field devices, by means
of parameter and recipe management
Transparency in the process through IO-Link
High system availability and data transparency are market requirements that must also be met by the connecting of innovative control technology to a control system. A systematic diagnostics concept and efficient handling of parameter data are
required for this purpose in automation.
With the aid of the IO-Link communication standard, a communication link is established between switchgear and controller,
and this allows data to be exchanged efficiently. Based on a
standard cable, it is therefore possible to integrate parameter,
process and diagnostic data and measured values into the plant
automation with ease. For example, the available diagnostic
data allow potential errors to be detected quickly, thus avoiding
lengthy plant down times.
As a consequence of their basic function, such as overload protection (SIRIUS 3RB24), many controls have measured values.
The availability of these via IO-Link now allows conclusions to be
drawn at an early stage concerning wear and tear in the application.
At the same time the option of parameterizing via IO-Link supports the device not just when parameters concerning operating
time are changed, but also when the device is replaced. In the
case of a spare part, for example, the parameters can be quickly
transmitted to a new device via the communication system.
www.siemens.com/io-link.
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/11
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Systematic industrial safety technology:

Overview
Take the new SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays for example: They are
modularly expandable, and can integrate compact motor starters such as the SIRIUS 3RM1 very simply via the the rear panel
device connector. Or the SIRIUS 3RK3 Modular Safety System:
this provides a high degree of functionality as an autonomous
safety control downstream of a standard control, and also makes
smart safety solutions possible via AS-Interface.
The SIMOCODE pro modular motor management system combines all required protection, monitoring, safety and control functions for motor feeders. It can be connected to fail-safe controllers via PROFIBUS or PROFINET and shut down motors in
emergency situations.
Safety Integrated safety engineering for machines and plants
Manufacturers and operators of machines must fulfill numerous

requirements: reducing costs, improving productivity, and ensuring the safety of machines.
The industrial safety technology from Siemens offers innovative,
economical solutions for the functional safety of machinery.
Machine safety compliance with directives
Before any machines or plant can be supplied or operated, they
must meet the fundamental safety requirements of the
EU Directives.
In order to ensure compliance with the European Machinery
Directive, it is recommended that the suitably harmonized
European standards EN 62061 or EN ISO 13849-1 should be
applied. This gives manufacturers and operators legal certainty
regarding compliance with both national regulations and the
EC Directive.
The machine manufacturer uses the CE marking to document
the compliance with all relevant directives and regulations in the
free movement of goods. As the European directives are recognized worldwide, their use is of great help when exporting to
other countries.
Control technology for safety solutions SIRIUS Safety Integrated
SIRIUS Safety Integrated uses fail-safe communication via

standard fieldbus systems, such as ASIsafe via AS-Interface
and PROFIsafe via PROFIBUS and PROFINET, to solve even
networked safety tasks of greater complexity. This opens the
door to flexible safety solutions for compact machines or largescale plants naturally compliant with current standards up to
SIL 3/PL e.
The aim of safety technology is therefore to allow people, machines and the environment to be protected and statutory safety
requirements to be satisfied.
A particular highlight: The world's first integrated ASIsafe connection to the distributed I/O system ensures even more consistency. With the SIMATIC AS-i F-Links, AS-i networks can be connected quite simply to safety controls via PROFIsafe via the
SIMATIC ET 200SP.
The quick and easy way to safe machinery
Your partner for machine and plant safety
In addition to the statutory regulations governing the protection

of people there are also economic reasons for avoiding personal
injury and the resulting down times, and for protecting both machinery and equipment from damage.
With Safety Integrated, Siemens has provided the smart answer

to constantly increasing requirements for the functional safety of
a machine and for its cost-effectiveness and flexibility. Our comprehensive portfolio of safe controls, control technology and
drive technology provides scalable solutions for precisely tailored safety concepts for protecting people, machines and the
environment. Our products meet the current safety standards in
the industry, including IEC, ISO, NFPA and UL.
Safety Integrated benefits machine manufacturers and plant

operators in many ways:
Lower costs for hardware, assembly and engineering
Higher availability thanks to faster diagnostics and fewer
down times
At the same time, using modular safety concepts allows them to
modernize their plants more easily and at lower cost.
Smart controls ensure the functional safety of machinery
Our SIRIUS Safety Integrated controls are a central element of
the Siemens Safety Integrated concept, based on Totally Integrated Automation. Whether for reliable detecting, commanding
and signaling, monitoring and evaluating or starting and safe
disconnection, our SIRIUS Safety Integrated controls provide
cost-effective solutions for the safety of your machine or plant.
1/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
As a partner for machine and plant safety, Siemens also supports users with examples of functions and up-to-date know-how
concerning international standards and directives. In addition to
the free TV-approved Safety Evaluation Tool for evaluating
safety functions in accordance with EN 62061 and
EN ISO 13849-1, requirements-based training is available on
CE marking, functional safety and risk assessment, and on our
Safety Integrated Products.
www.siemens.com/safety-integrated.
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Applications:
SIRIUS supports you where UL is concerned
Overview
UL partner since 1969
NSB0_01920a
Enlisting the expertise of a partner such as Siemens is a wise

move for anyone who wishes to avoid unnecessary aggravation
and save both time and money.
Ever since 1969 our production facility in Amberg, where the
complete diversity of our low-voltage controls and distribution
portfolio is developed and produced, has been working closely
with Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Our consideration not only of EU directives and IEC standards
but also UL standards begins as early as in our products' development phase. This has resulted in a wide-ranging portfolio of
UL-certified low-voltage switchgear, controlgear and protection
circuit technology.
IEC
UL
IEC/UL
CSA/cUL/UL
SIRIUS applications
We support you where UL is concerned

Product liability laws in the USA are way stricter than in Europe.
Whoever plans to export products to North America should have
them UL-certified, particularly when it comes to electrical equipment. We can help you with our comprehensive know-how and
broad portfolio of UL-certified low-voltage controls
Who or what is UL?
UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) is one of the worlds leading organizations for testing and certification in the field of product safety. This independent, nonprofit US organization was
founded in 1894 at the request of American fire insurance companies to analyze the fire hazards posed by electrically operated
devices.
Today, UL tests and certifies the most varying materials, components and end products for their reliable operation, particularly
with regard to potential personal injury and fire formation. The organization maintains subsidiaries in numerous European countries. Detailed information on the US organization as well as contact details for the various European subsidiaries are also
available on the Internet at www.ul.com.
Differences between UL and IEC
The IEC standards for the IEC market merely specify the minimum safety requirements of a device or system. Technical details of the safety requirements constructional implementation
are up to the manufacturers.
In contrast, the standards for the American market are far more
detailed. Depending on the standard, the required process may
be monitored from product design to product production down
to application, mounting and operation.
NFPA79 is the electrical standard for industrial machinery outside the control cabinet. As such it differs from and is the counterpart to the control cabinet standard UL 508A.
As a result we have comprehensive know-how on the subject of

UL certification and approval, ranging from production down to
the wiring of control cabinets (panels) according to UL standards, and we would be pleased to pass this knowledge on to
you as part of our application consulting service.
Our portfolio of low-voltage controls ensures your being on the
safer side in terms of UL and facilitates the easy and fast assembly of control cabinets according to UL.
Cost-efficiency in the construction and operation of
industrial control panels for North America
Stay flexible for a highly diverse range of solutions and addons with our comprehensive and matched product portfolio,
from the supply of the industrial control panel to the machine's
smallest actuator.
Benefit from efficient stock-keeping thanks to the universal
applicability of the products (IEC-UL/CSA).
Arrive at a uniform operating and maintenance concept
through our standard system.
Save space and costs through coordinated product interfaces
and compact designs.
Experience convenient, efficient local operation thanks to
easy-to-use systems.
UL-certified SIRIUS products and systems
UL-certified products to be found in this catalog include
for example:
Controls, from motor-protective circuit breakers and starters to
contactors and overload relays
Circuit breakers for plant and transformer protection
Detection and command devices
Transformers and power supplies
You will also find a complete selection of controls and components according to UL in catalog LV 16.
On the Internet you will find information on, for example,
UL standards, UL classification and a number of technical
particularities of UL.
Under "Information Material" "Standards and Approvals" we
have summarized the available products and product groups.
A table lists the UL standards to which the products conform
and contains links to the corresponding UL reports.
www.siemens.com/applicationconsulting/ul.
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/13
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
1
Notes
1/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Price groups
PG 230, 250, 41B, 41H, 41L, 42C, 42D,
42F, 42J, 5K1, 5K2, 5N3
2/3
2/14
2/15
2/16
2/17
2/18
2/41
2/20
2/24
2/25
Ch. 12
Ch. 13
Ch. 13
Ch. 13
2/28
2/30
2/31
2/33
2/36
2/39
2/41
2/45
Introduction
AS-Interface
Introduction
Communication overview
System components
AS-Interface specification
- AS-i Power24V expansion
ASIsafe
Introduction
DP/AS-i F-Link
SIRIUS 3RK3
Modular Safety System
AS-Interface safety monitors
AS-Interface safety modules
SIRIUS 3SF1, 3SF3 mechanical safety
switches for AS-Interface
SIRIUS 3SF2 cable-operated switches
for AS-Interface
SIRIUS EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom
pushbuttons for AS-Interface
AS-Interface F adapters for
EMERGENCY-STOP devices
Masters
Masters for SIMATIC S7
- CM 1243-2
- CP 243-2
- CP 343-2P/CP 343-2
Masters for SIMATIC ET 200
- CM AS-i Master for ET 200SP
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
DP/AS-i Link 20E
DP/AS-i F-Link
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Slaves
I/O modules for use in the field,
high degree of protection
2/48
- Digital I/O modules, IP67 - Introduction
- Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60
2/49
2/51
- Digital I/O modules, IP68/IP69K - K60R
2/53
2/55
2/57
- Analog I/O modules, IP67 - K60
2/61
I/O modules for use in
the control cabinet
2/65
Special integrated solutions
Modules with special functions
2/67
- Counter modules
2/68
- Ground-fault detection modules
2/69
- Overvoltage protection modules
Ch. 3 Contactors and contactor assemblies
- SIRIUS function modules
for AS-Interface
Ch. 8 Motor starters for use in
the control cabinet
Ch. 9 Motor starters for use in the field,
high degree of protection
D311) SINAMICS G110D distributed inverters
Ch. 13 Commanding and signaling devices
Ch. 13 8WD4 signaling columns
2/70
AS-Interface connections for LOGO!
Power supply units and
data decoupling modules
2/71
AS-Interface power supply units
2/72
Ch. 15 24 V power supply units
2/74
S22.5 data decoupling modules
2/76
Data decoupling modules
for S7-1200
1)
See Catalog D31 "SINAMICS and

Motors for Single-Axis Drives".
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Siemens AG 2013
Siemens AG 2013
Transmission media
2/78
AS-Interface shaped cables
System components and accessories
2/79
Repeaters
2/80
Extension plugs
2/81
Addressing units
2/83
Analyzer
2/86
Miscellaneous accessories
Software
Ch. 14 AS-Interface block library for
SIMATIC PCS 7
2/89
2/90
2/94
2/95
2/97
2/98
2/99
2/100
2/101
Ch.3
Ch.7
Ch. 8
Ch. 10
Ch. 10
Ch. 10
ID102)
Ch. 14
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
2
IO-Link
Introduction
System components
IO-Link specification
Masters
Masters for SIMATIC ET 200SP
- CM 4xIO-Link
IO-Link master modules for ET 200S
- IO-Link 4SI electronic modules
- SIRIUS 4SI electronic modules
IO-Link master modules for
ET 200eco PN
Input modules
General data
K20 IO-Link modules
Industrial controls
Contactors and contactor assemblies
- SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link
Overload relays
- SIRIUS 3RB24 solid-state overload
relays for IO-Link
Motor starters for use in the control
cabinet
- SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters
Monitoring relays
- SIRIUS 3RR24 monitoring relays for
mounting onto 3RT2 contactors for
IO-Link
- SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relays for
stand-alone installation
for IO-Link
- SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15
temperature monitoring relays
for IO-Link
RFID systems
Software
See Catalog ID 10
"Industrial Identification Systems".
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Overview
Article No.
Page
3RK3
2/20
3RK1
2/24
3RK1
2/25
3SF1, 3SF3
Ch. 12
3SF2
Ch. 12
AS-Interface: ASIsafe
ASIsafe enables the integration of safety-related components in an AS-Interface network,
for example:
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons
Protective door switches
Safety light arrays
The simple wiring of AS-Interface, which is a major advantage, is maintained.
Modular Safety System (MSS)
Supplementing the service-proven concept of the safety monitors, the new 3RK3 Modular
Safety System offers for example the following functions for ASIsafe:
Up to 50 enabling circuits including muting function
Expandable fail-safe and non-fail-safe inputs/outputs
Control of up to 12 ASIsafe outputs or
12 fail-safe independent switch-off groups
Memory module for parameters, e.g. for device replacement
3RK3
Optional PROFIBUS interface for diagnostics and parameterization

Intuitive graphic parameterization and diagnostics software MSS ES
AS-i Power24V capability
Your advantage: Easy to configure safety functions up to Category 4, PL e, SIL 3
For monitoring safe stations and for linking AS-Interface inputs and outputs
Ensures safe disconnection
Available with one or two release circuits with two-channel configuration
All versions with removable screw terminals or spring-type terminals
All safety monitors in revised Version 3 with additional options
Filtering out of brief single-channel interruptions in the sensor circuit with the expanded
safety monitor Version 3
Safety monitor
Expanded safety monitor with integrated safe slave for controlling a distributed safe AS-i
output or for safe coupling a safe signal from one AS-i network to another AS-i network
Configuration software ASIMON V3 with graphic function diagram presentation
Your advantage: Easy to configure safety functions up to Category 4, PL e, SIL 3
Complete portfolio of ASIsafe modules
For connection of safety switches with contacts (e.g. position switches) as well as
solid-state safety sensors (ESPE)
Degree of protection IP65/IP67 or IP20
K45F
Very compact dimensions, from 20 mm width

Up to four safe inputs per module
Up to one safe output per module
Standard outputs are available on the module in addition
Up to Category 4, PL e, SIL 3
Your advantage: Easy integration of safe signals, be it in the control cabinet or in the field
S45F SlimLine module,

safe AS-i output
SIRIUS 3SF1, 3SF3 mechanical safety switches for AS-Interface
Plastic with degree of protection IP65 and metal with degree of protection IP66/IP67
ASIsafe electronics integrated in the enclosure, with low power consumption < 60 mA
Available with separate actuator or interlocking
Your advantage: Conventional wiring of safety functions no longer required.
Position switch
SIRIUS 3SF2 cable-operated switches for AS-Interface
Degree of protection IP65
Direct connection of cable-operated switches for detection of signals
Metal enclosures
Cable-operated switch
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/3
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3SF5
Ch. 13
3SF5
Ch. 13
3RK7
2/28
AS-Interface master connections:
6GK7
2/30, 2/31
3RK7
2/33
AS-Interface: ASIsafe (continued)

SIRIUS EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons for AS-Interface
Degree of protection IP65/IP67

EMERGENCY-STOP directly on AS-Interface using integrated modules
EMERGENCY-STOP for
mounting on front plate
Metal or plastic version

Your advantage: Easy direct connection of service-proven control elements to ASIsafe
AS-Interface F adapters for EMERGENCY-STOP devices
Connection of an EMERGENCY-STOP device according to ISO 13850 to AS-Interface
Is snap-mounted from behind onto the EMERGENCY-STOP device (actuator)
Can be used up to Category 4, PL e, SIL 3
Your advantage: Easy direct connection of service-proven control elements to ASIsafe
F adapter
AS-Interface: Masters
The AS-Interface master connects SIMATIC control systems to AS-Interface. It automatically
organizes the data traffic on the AS-Interface cable and sees not only to processing the
signals but also to performing the parameter setting, monitoring and diagnostics functions.
CM 1243-2 for SIMATIC S7-1200

CP 343-2P, CP 343-2 for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M
CP 243-2 for SIMATIC S7-200
Characteristics:
Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves
Connection of up to 496 inputs and 496 outputs per master or AS-Interface network
CM 1243-2 for
SIMATIC S7-1200
Integrated analog value transmission

Simple configuration by adopting the actual configuration on the AS-Interface network
Easy operation in the input/output address area of the SIMATIC S7 comparable to standard
I/O modules
Monitoring of the control supply voltage on the AS-Interface shaped cable
Your advantage: Easy connection to SIMATIC controllers
CP 343-2, CP 343-2P
for SIMATIC S7-300
Masters for SIMATIC ET 200
CM AS-i Master ST for SIMATIC ET 200SP
Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves per master
Connection of up to 496 inputs and 496 outputs per AS-Interface network
Integrated analog value transmission (input/output via data record communication)
Simple configuration by adopting the actual configuration on the AS-Interface network
Easy operation in the input/output address area of the SIMATIC (or other controller)
comparable to standard I/O modules
CM AS-i Master ST for
SIMATIC ET 200SP
Monitoring of the control supply voltage on the AS-Interface shaped cable

Integrated ground-fault monitoring
Your advantage: Easy connection of AS-i networks to distributed I/Os
2/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
Routers
3RK3
2/41
6GK1
2/36, 2/39, 2/45
3RK1, 3RK2
2/49, 2/51, 2/53,

2/55
AS-Interface: Routers
As an alternative to the CPs, it is also possible to use a link as AS-Interface master

at any position beneath the PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.
PROFIBUS slave or PROFINET IO device and AS-Interface master (single or double master
in case of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and IE/AS-i LINK PN IO)
Connection of up to 62 AS-Interface slaves per AS-Interface network
Connection of up to 496 digital inputs and 496 outputs per AS-i network,
with doubling of the project data volume for double master versions
Integrated ground-fault monitoring

(in case of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and IE/AS-i LINK PN IO)
User-friendly local diagnostics and local startup by means of a full graphic display and
control keys or through a web interface with a standard browser
(in case of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and IE/AS-i LINK PN IO)
Configuring and uploading of AS-Interface configuration in STEP 7 possible

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E User-friendly selection of AS-Interface slaves
Safety-related transition from ASIsafe to PROFIsafe also available as DP/AS-i F-Link
Your advantage: Optimum transition to PROFIBUS or PROFINET, integrated in STEP 7
DP/AS-i F-Link
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
AS-Interface: Slaves
Slaves contain the AS-Interface electronics and connection options for sensors and actuators in the field and in the control cabinet. A total of up to 62 slaves can be connected to one
bus. The slaves then exchange their data in cyclic mode with a control module (master).
I/O modules for use in the field, high degree of protection
Digital I/O modules IP67 K60, K60R, K45 and K20
Degree of protection IP65/IP67 or IP68/IP69K
Modules available with up to degree of protection IP68/IP69K
ATEX-certified modules available for Ex Zone 22
Connection sockets in M8/M12
K20 digital module
Up to eight inputs and four outputs

A/B technology available
Contacting protected against polarity reversal
Standard rail mounting and wall mounting possible
Mounting of the module on the base plate using just one screw
Diagnostics LEDs
K45 digital module
Your advantage: Reduction of mounting and startup times by up to 40 %
K60 digital module
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/5
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RK1
2/57
3RG9, 3RK1
2/60
3RK1
2/67
3RK1
2/68
3RK1
2/69
AS-Interface: Slaves (continued)

Analog I/O modules, IP67 K60

Detects or transmits analog signals locally
2-/4-channel
Input modules for up to four sensors with current signal, with voltage signal or with thermal
resistor
Output modules for current or voltage
Fast analog modules available for higher access speeds
K60 analog module
Your advantage: Easy integration of analog values

I/O modules for use in the control cabinet
No M12 plugs required for connection
Up to 16 inputs
Narrow design of the SlimLine modules with width from 22.5 mm
Removable, finger-safe terminal blocks that cannot be mixed up (SlimLine)
Flat design of the flat modules for small control cabinets and confined conditions
Connection with screw terminals or spring-type terminals
Standard rail mounting and wall mounting possible
SlimLine
Diagnostics LEDs
Your advantage: Modules enable use in control cabinets and small local control cabinets.
F90 module
Flat module
Modules with special functions: Counter modules
For evaluation of pulses
Connection with screw terminals or spring-type terminals
Your advantage: Evaluation of pulses which exceed even the clock frequency of
AS-Interface
Counter module
Modules with special functions: Ground-fault detection modules
Display using LEDs
Two signaling outputs
Your advantage: Automatic diagnostics of ground faults on AS-Interface
Ground-fault detection
module
Modules with special functions: Overvoltage protection modules
Discharge through ground cable with oil-proof outer sheath
Protection at transition of lightning protection zones
Your advantage: The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module protects downstream
AS-Interface devices or individual sections in AS-Interface networks from conducted
overvoltages
Overvoltage protection
module
2/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RT2, 3RA23,
3RA24
Ch. 3
3RA2712
Ch. 3
3RA6
Ch. 8
3RK1
Ch. 9
3RK1
Ch. 9
3RK1
Ch. 9

Power contactors for switching motors and contactor assemblies
Notable reduction of wiring in the control circuit
Integrated mechanical interlocking

Prevention of wiring errors in the main circuit
Connection to AS-Interface through function modules
3RT20 1.-1B...-0CC0
contactor
SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface
For mounting onto SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors
Reduction of control current wiring through plug-in design and integrated monitoring of
circuit breaker/motor starter protector and contactor
Reduced space requirement in the control cabinet through fewer digital inputs and outputs
in the control system
SIRIUS 3RA2712...
function module for
AS-Interface
Easy configuration through operation of feeders instead of individual contactors

Enhanced operational reliability and quick wiring thanks to spring-type connections
Small number of variants by using identical modules for size S00 and S0 contactors
Your advantage: Shortening of mounting and startup times
Motor starters for use in the control cabinet
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters, 3RA61 direct-on-line starters, 3RA62 reversing starters
Very compact load feeders with the integrated functionality of a solid-state overload relay
As direct-on-line or reversing starters for motors up to 15 kW/400 V
Easy expansion into a communication-capable load feeder using
AS-i add-on modules
On-site safe disconnection also possible using AS-i add-on modules
3RA61 compact starter
Standardized integration of the loads in higher-level control systems using AS-i

Your advantage: Compact solution with minimum wiring outlay for actuating direct-on-line
and reversing starters in the control cabinet
Motor starters for use in the field, high degree of protection
SIRIUS M200D motor starters for AS-Interface
High degree of protection IP65 for cabinet-free design
As direct-on-line or reversing starters for motors up to 5.5 kW/400 V
Mechanical or electronic switching for high switching frequencies
Optional with manual operation and brake control
SIRIUS M200D motor

starter
Expanded diagnostics and parameterization possible through AS-Interface

Easy and consistent integration in STEP 7 through AS-Interface
Your advantage: The correct solution for all simple applications in conveyor systems with
spatially distributed drives
SIRIUS MCU motor starters for AS-Interface
Direct-on-line or reversing starters up to 5.5 kW at 400 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Integrated overload and short-circuit protection with SIRIUS 3RV motor starter protectors/
circuit breakers Class 10 with short-circuit breaking capacity Icu = 50 kA at 400 V AC
Overload protection with thermal release (bimetal)

SIRIUS MCU motor starter Your advantage: Factory-wired motor starters in high degree of protection for use in the field
Motor starters for AS-Interface, 24 V DC
Direct-on-line starters, double starters or reversing starters
Up to 70 W
Quick stop function
Your advantage: Simple motor starter in service-proven module design for 24 V DC motors
Motor starter for
AS-Interface, 24 V DC
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/7
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3SF58
Ch. 13
8WD4
Ch. 13
3RK1
2/70
3RX9
2/71
6EP
Ch. 15

Commanding and signaling devices
SIRIUS 3SF5 pushbuttons and indicator lights

Modular construction according to individual requirements
Up to 6 signaling points
Metal and plastic version
Any change of equipment possible even after installation
Indicator lights with integrated LED
Your advantage: Complete 3SB3 operating system with simple AS-Interface connection for
your plant
Pushbutton
8WD4 signaling columns

Many optical and acoustic elements can be combined
Up to three signaling elements can be connected using an adapter element
With LEDs or incandescent lamps
Your advantage: Signaling columns for monitoring production sequences and for visual or
acoustic warnings in emergency situations, with easy AS-Interface connection
Signaling column
AS-Interface slave for the connection of LOGO!
Distributed controller functionality
Your advantage: Distributed intelligence can be used on-site and can be connected to the
control system through AS-Interface
Connections for LOGO!
AS-Interface: Power supply units and data decoupling modules

AS-Interface power supply units generate a controlled direct voltage of 30 V DC with high
stability and low residual ripple in conjunction with data decoupling. They are an integral
component of the AS-Interface network and enable the simultaneous transmission of data
and energy on one cable.
In conjunction with data decoupling modules, AS-Interface can also be operated with
standard power supply units.
With wide performance spectrum from 2.6 to 8 A
Separation of data and energy by means of the integrated data decoupling
UL/CSA approval means the power supplies can be used worldwide.
2.6 A version with output power restricted to max. 100 W
(for use in NEC Class 2 circuits)
Certified for global use
IP20, 3 A
Integrated ground-fault and overload detection save the need for additional components
and make applications reliable
Diagnostics memory, remote signaling and remote RESET allow fast detection of faults in
the system
The ultra-wide input range enables single- and two-phase applications
(8 A version)
Your advantage: Optimum performance for each application
IP20, 8 A
Standard 24 V power supply units (SITOP), without data decoupling
Performance spectrum 2.5 A to 40 A
Overload and short-circuit proof in every performance class
Add-on modules for signaling, redundancy, buffering and UPS
Single-phase, two-phase and three-phase versions
SITOP PSU100M,
24 V DC, 20 A
2/8
Your advantage: Economical alternatives in conjunction with data decoupling modules
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RX9
2/72
3RK1
2/74
3RK7
2/76
3RX9
2/78
AS-Interface: Power supply units and data decoupling modules (continued)

Standard 30 V power supply units without data decoupling

Power spectrum 3 A, 4 A and 8 A
Overload and short-circuit proof in every performance class
Diagnostics: With output voltage > 26.5 V DC
LED and signaling contact for output voltage 30V O.K.
Primary-side connection to 120 V AC / 230 V AC (1-phase) with automatic range selection
PSN130S
30 V DC, 8 A
Your advantage: Economical alternatives in conjunction with data decoupling modules while
making full use of the maximum AS-Interface cable length
Degree of protection IP20, narrow design 22.5 mm
Supply of several AS-i networks with a single power supply unit
Single and double data decoupling
Operation with 24 V DC or 30 V DC
Your advantage: Cost-effective installation of AS-i networks in conjunction with standard
power supply units
S22.5 data decoupling

module
DCM 1271 data decoupling module for SIMATIC S7-1200
Simple data decoupling in IP 20 design
Operation with 24 V DC or 30 V DC
Your advantage: Cost-effective installation of AS-i networks in conjunction with standard
power supply units in the design of a SIMATIC S7-1200 module
DCM 1271 data

decoupling module
AS-Interface: Transmission media

AS-Interface shaped cable for connection of network stations.
No polarity reversal thanks to trapezoidal shape
Cables made of optimized material for different operating conditions
Special version according to UL Class 2 available
Your advantage: Fast replacement and connection to AS-Interface by piercing method
Shaped cable
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/9
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RK1, 6GK1
Repeaters: 2/79
AS-Interface: System components and accessories
Accessories comprise tools for mounting, installation and operating as well as individual
components.
Repeaters and extension plugs
Repeaters for extending the AS-Interface cable by 100 m per repeater
Extension plugs:
2/80
Extension plug for extending the AS-Interface segment to max. 200 m

Parallel switching of several repeaters possible (star configuration option)
Maximum size increases (when combined) to more than 600 m
Easy mounting
IP67 module enclosure
Repeater
Your advantage: Lower infrastructure costs, more possibilities of use and greater freedom
for plant planning
Compact extension plug

Addressing units
3RK1
2/81
3RK1
2/83
Reading out and adjusting the slave address 0 to 31 or 1A to 31A, 1B to 31B, with automatic
addressing aid and prevention of double addresses
Reading out the slave profile (IO, ID, ID2) and reading out and setting the ID1 code
Input/output test when commissioning the slaves, on all digital and analog slaves
according to AS-Interface Specification V 3.0, including safe input slaves and complex
CTT2 slaves
Display of the operational current in case of direct connection of an AS-i slave
(measuring range from 0 to 150 mA)
Addressing unit
for AS-Interface V 3.0
Storage of complete network configurations (profiles of all slaves) to simplify the

addressing
Your advantage: Easiest way to address and test the slaves
AS-Interface analyzers
Diagnostics units for completely checking the quality and function of an
AS-Interface installation
Transmission of collected data through an RS 232 interface to a PC, evaluation by software
Easy and user-friendly operation
Automatically generated test logs
Analyzer
Advanced trigger functions enable exact analysis

Process data can be monitored online
In addition to digital I/O data it is possible to view analog values and safety slaves in data
mode
Your advantage: Preventative testing of an AS-Interface network is possible, recorded logs
facilitate remote diagnostics
3RK2, 3RG7,
AS-Interface system manual, individual components such as sealing caps, cable adapters, 3RK1, 3RX9,
3UF7, 6ES7
distributors, M12 plugs and cables, etc.
2/86
M12 sealing cap
Cable terminating piece
AS-Interface: Software
AS-Interface block library for SIMATIC PCS 7
Engineering software and runtime software
Easy connection of AS-Interface to PCS 7
Engineering work reduced to positioning and connecting the function blocks in the CFC
AS-i block library
for PCS 7
2/10
With no additional configuring steps required for connection to the PCS 7 Maintenance
Station, diagnostics for the AS-i system is optimally guaranteed
Your advantage: Easy connection of AS-Interface to PCS 7, little engineering and
configuration
Siemens IC 10 2014
3ZS1
Ch. 14
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
IO-Link
Dynamic changing of sensor/actuator parameters directly by the PLC
IO-Link is an open communication standard for sensors and actuators - defined by the
Profibus User Organization (PNO).
2/89
Devices can be exchanged during operation, without a PC or programming device,

through re-parameterization using the user program by means of a function block (FB) or
parameter server
IO-Link family
Fast commissioning thanks to central data storage

Consistent diagnostic information as far as the sensor/actuator level
Uniform and greatly reduced wiring of different sensors/actuators/controls
Your advantage: Fast commissioning and flexible maintenance thanks to central data
storage, less wiring work because no passive distributors are needed
IO-Link: Masters
The IO-Link master modules form the heart of the IO-Link system.
IO-Link master modules for ET 200SP
CM 4xIO-Link electronic module
6ES7
2/95
6ES7
2/97
3RK1
2/98
6ES7
2/99
IO-Link master as serial communication module with 4 ports (channels) according to

IO-Link Specification V1.1
Module exchange with automatic data recovery without engineering for
IO-Link master and device
Up to four IO-Link devices (3-wire connections) can be connected to each IO-Link master
module
CM 4x IO-Link
for ET 200SP
Data transmission rates COM1 (4.8 kBd), COM2 (38.4 kBd), COM3 (230.4 kBd),
automatic adjustment to the data transmission rate supported by the device
Your advantage: Easy connection of IO-Link connections to distributed I/Os
IO-Link 4SI electronic module
Up to 4 IO-Link devices (three-conductor connection) can be connected
Up to 4 standard actuators/sensors (two-conductor/three-conductor connection) can be
connected
SIRIUS 4SI electronic modules
Up to 16 SIRIUS controls can be connected with IO-Link (grouped)
Supports firmware update (STEP 7 V5.4 SP4 and higher)
SIRIUS 4SI electronic

module for ET 200S
IO-Link master modules for ET 200eco PN
Up to 4 IO-Link devices (three-conductor connection) can be connected
Up to 8 standard sensors (8 DI) and up to 4 standard actuators (4 DO) can be connected
in addition
Your advantage: Easy connection to the control system in IP20 as well as in IP65/IP67

ET 200eco PN
IO-Link: Input modules

IO-Link input modules make full use of the potential of IO-Link and are a more attractive
solution economically than a direct sensor connection.
K20 IO-Link modules
2/100
3RK5
2/101
Four or eight digital inputs

Connection sockets in M8/M12
Contacting protected against polarity reversal
Your advantage: Reduction of mounting and startup times by up to 40 %
K20 IO-Link module with
four digital inputs
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/11
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RT2, 3RA23,
3RA24
Ch. 3
3RA2711
Ch. 3
3RB24
Ch. 7
3RA64, 3RA65
Ch. 8
3RR24
Ch. 10
3UG48
Ch. 10
IO-Link: Industrial controls
Starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta starting can be
connected to IO-Link through function modules without any additional, complicated wiring.
Power contactors for switching motors and contactor assemblies
3RT201.-1B...-0CC0
contactor
SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link
Connection of the communication-capable 3RT2, 3RA23, 3RA24 power contactors
to IO-Link
Reduction of control current wiring through plug-in technology, feeder groups and
integrated monitoring of circuit breaker/motor starter protector and contactor
SIRIUS 3RA2711 function
module for IO-Link
Reduced space requirement in the control cabinet through fewer digital inputs and
outputs in the control system
Simple user program through operation of feeders instead of individual contactors
Enhanced operational reliability and quick wiring thanks to spring-type connections
Can be flexibly combined with many automation solutions using the open, standardized
IO-Link wiring system
Small number of variants by using identical modules for size S00 and S0 contactors
Your advantage: Shortening of mounting and startup times
Overload relays
SIRIUS 3RB24 solid-state overload relays for IO-Link
Diagnostics and current value transmission via IO-Link
Current measuring modules (3RB29) for current values from 0.3 ... 630 A
Controlling direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta starters via IO-Link
in conjunction with contactors
Full motor protection through PTC connection
SIRIUS 3RB24
overload relay
Your advantage: Communication-capable overload relay enables remote diagnostics and

preventative maintenance
Compact starter
3RA64, 3RA65 compact starters for IO-Link
Integrated functionality of a circuit breaker, contactor and solid-state overload relay and
various functions of optional mountable accessories
Can be used for direct starting of standard induction motors up to 32 A
(approx. 15 kW/400 V)
Compact design offers enormous savings in space and wiring in the control cabinet
Low variance of devices thanks to wide setting ranges for the rated current and wide
voltage ranges
SIRIUS 3RA64
compact starter
Your advantage: The diagnostics data of the process collected by the 3RA6 compact
starter, e.g. short circuit, end of service life, limit position etc., are not only indicated on the
compact starter itself but also transmitted to the higher-level control system through IO-Link.
Monitoring relays
3RR24 monitoring relays for IO-Link
Monitoring relays for mounting onto 3RT2 contactors
Parameterization and diagnostics via the display on the device or via IO-Link
Adjustable warning and switch-off limit values and on/tripping delay times
All current measured values available in the control system
Your advantage: Communication-capable monitoring relay enables remote diagnostics
and preventative maintenance.
SIRIUS 3RR24
SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relays for stand-alone installation for IO-Link
Monitoring of
- Network (3UG481)
- Current (3UG482)
- Voltage (3UG483)
- Power factor (3UG484)
- Speed (3UG485)
Parameterization and diagnostics via the display on the device or via IO-Link
Adjustable warning and switch-off limit values and on/tripping delay times
SIRIUS 3UG48

Your advantage: Communication-capable monitoring relay enables remote diagnostics
and preventative maintenance.
2/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RS14, 3RS15
Ch. 10
6GT2
Catalog ID 10
IO-Link: Industrial controls (continued)

SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15 temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link
Measuring the temperature of solids, liquids and gases

Use of resistance sensors (3RS14) or thermocouples (3RS15)
Parameterization and diagnostics via the display on the device or via IO-Link;
adjustable warning and switch-off limit values and on/tripping delay times
Your advantage: Independent monitoring easily linked to the control system
SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15
IO-Link: RFID systems

SIMATIC RF200 RFID system in the HF range
SIMATIC RF210R, SIMATIC RF220R, SIMATIC RF260R products
Simple identification tasks (read-only), such as reading an ID number
No RFID-specific programming, ideal for those new to RFID
Simple connection via master modules for IO-Link, such as
SIMATIC ET 200S and ET 200eco
Use with the tried and tested ISO 15693 transponders (MOBY D)
RFID systems for IO-Link:
SIMATIC RF210R,
SIMATIC RF220R,
SIMATIC RF260R (top)
IO-Link: IODD files

IO-Link Device Description (IODD) files provide the device description for IO-Link
2/94
Comprehensive IODD catalog of SIEMENS IO-Link devices

Can be downloaded from
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29801139/133100
IO-Link: Software
STEP 7 PCT
Ch. 14
Engineering software for configuring the IO-Link master modules for ET 200S and
ET 200eco
Available as a stand-alone version or integrated into STEP 7 (Version 5.5 SP1 or later)
Retrieval of parameter and diagnostics data from the IO-Link devices
connected to the master
Monitoring of the process image of the IO-Link devices
STEP 7 PCT
Open interface for importing further IODDs

Free-of-charge download from
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37936752
IO-Link Call function block
IOL_CALL
DWORD
INT
BOOL
INT
INT
INT
INT
ANY
REQ
DONE
BUSY
ID
CAP
RD_WR
PORT
IOL_INDEX
IOL_SUBINDEX
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
DWORD
DWORD
ERROR
STATUS
IOL_STATUS
LEN
RECORD_IOL_DATA
RD_LEN
INT
Ch. 14
STEP 7 function block for easy acyclical data exchange in the user program
Free-of-charge download from
IC01_00197
BOOL
IO-Link Call
function block
WinCC flexible template project
Ch. 14
Easy integration of IO-Link devices into the user program by using ready-made
WinCC flexible templates
Free-of-charge download of the project from
WinCC flexible
template project
Note:
Screw terminals
Spring-type terminals
Combicon connectors (plug-in screw terminals)
FastConnect
The terminals are indicated in the selection and
ordering data by orange backgrounds.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/13
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Introduction
AS-Interface is a single master system. For automation systems

from Siemens, there are communications processors (CPs) communications modules (CMs) and routers (links) that control the
process or field communication as masters, and actuators and
sensors that are activated as AS-Interface slaves.
AS-Interface is an open, international standard according to

EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2 for process and field communication. Leading manufacturers of actuators and sensors all over
the world support the AS-Interface. Interested companies are
provided with the electrical and mechanical specifications by
the AS-Interface Association.
Telecontrol and
substation
control
Laptop
PC
Remote access,
e.g. via
teleservice
S7-1200 with
CP 1242-7
Controller
Controller
Control and
monitoring system
Motion Control
Systems
PC/PG/IPC
Database
Server
Telecontrol and
substation control
IWLAN
Controller
Security
Numeric
Control
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access
Point
Controller
Controller
Notebook
PC/PG
Industrial Ethernet
Switches
Access
Point
IWLAN
RCoax Cable
Controller
Field device for
intrinsically safe area
PC/PG/IPC
Control and
monitoring system
Numeric
Control
Link
Wireless
Devices
Coupler
Link
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS PA
RF180C
ASM456
Field devices
Mobile
Panel
Field devices
SIMOCODE
pro
RFID
system
Code
reading
systems
Mobile
Panel
DP-Slave
Link
IO-Link
module
Compact
starter
Protection and
monitoring
devices
Sensors
IOLink
module
Power
supply
LOGO!
Drives
RFID
system
IO-Link
master
Motion Control
Systems
Sensors
Access
Point
Link
Power
supply
Protection and
monitoring
devices
Controller
SINAMICS
Drives
Code
reading
systems
Client
Module
Compact
starter
AS-Interface
Compact Compact
starter
feeder
Slaves
Field device
Slaves
Signalling column
Benefits
G_IK10_XX_30049
Overview
Application
A key feature of AS-Interface technology is the use of a shared

two-conductor cable for data transmission and the distribution of
auxiliary power to the sensors/actuators. A power supply unit
which meets the requirements of the AS-Interface transmission
method and has an external data decoupling module if required
is used for the distribution of auxiliary power. The AS-Interface
cable used for the wiring is mechanically coded and hence protected against polarity reversal and can be easily contacted by
the insulation piercing method.
Elaborately wired control cables in the control cabinet and marshalling racks can be replaced by AS-Interface.
The AS-Interface cable can be connected to any points thanks
to a specially developed cable and connection by the insulation
piercing method.
With this concept you become extremely flexible and achieve
high savings.
I/O data exchange

The AS-i master transmits automatically the inputs and outputs
between the control system and the digital and analog
AS-Interface slaves.
Slave diagnostics information is forwarded to the control system
when required.
AS-Interface masters according to the AS-Interface Specification V2.1 or V3.0 support integrated analog value processing.
This means that data exchange with analog AS-Interface slaves
is just as easy as with digital slaves.
Command interface
In addition to I/O data exchange with binary and analog
AS-Interface slaves the AS-Interface masters provide a number
of other functions through the command interface.
Hence it is possible, for example, for slave addresses to be issued, parameter values transferred or configuration information
read out from user programs.
You can find more information on the Internet, see
2/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Introduction
System components
Network components such as repeaters and extension plugs

(cannot be used for AS-i Power24V)
Modules for connection of standard sensors/actuators
Actuators and sensors with integrated AS-i slave
Safety modules for transmitting safety-related data through
AS-Interface
Addressing units for setting the slave addresses during
commissioning
To implement communication, a system installation has the

following main components:
Master interface modules for central control units such as
SIMATIC S7, ET 200/ET 200SP distributed peripherals, or
routers from PROFIBUS/PROFINET to AS-Interface
Power supply units, if required in combination with a data
decoupling module for the power supply to the slaves
SIMATIC/
SIMOTION
SINUMERIK
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
DP/AS-i F-Link
S7-300
CP343-2(P)
AS-Interface
power supply
CM AS-i Master
for ET 200SP
DP/AS-i Link Advanced

DP/AS-i Link 20E
S7-300
CP343-2(P)
AS-Interface
power supply
S7-200
with CP243-2
S7-1200
with CM 1243-2
IE/AS-i Link PN IO
AS-Interface
Digital and analog
K20, K45, K60 field modules
Safe position
switch with
door interlock
Safe
EMERGENCY-STOP
and field module
PROFIBUS DP
Signaling
columns
Pushbuttons
Indicator lights
Safe and standard control cabinet

modules S22.5 and S45
24 V DC
power
supply
MSS
Advanced
MSS
ASIsafe
3RA2 load
feeders
3RA6
compact
starters
SIRIUS
M200D motor
starters or
G110D
inverters
G_IK10_XX_20027j
Load feeders
with safe
AS-i outputs
Example of a configuration with the system components
Features
Standard
EN 50295 / IEC 62026-2
Topology
Line, star or tree structure

(same as electrical wiring)
Transmission medium
Unshielded two-wire cable (2 x 1.5 mm2)

for data and auxiliary power
Connection methods
Contacting of the AS-Interface cable

by insulation piercing method
Maximum cable length
100 m without repeater

200 m with extension plug
300 m with two repeaters in series connection
600 m with extension plugs and two repeaters
connected in parallel
Larger cable lengths are also possible when
additional repeaters are connected in parallel
Maximum cycle time
5 ms in full expansion with standard addresses

10 ms in full expansion with A/B addresses,
profile-specific for Spec 3.0 slaves
Number of stations
per AS-Interface line
31 slaves acc. to AS-Interface Spec. V2.0

62 slaves (A/B technology) acc. to
AS-Interface Spec. V2.1 and V3.0
Number of binary
sensors and actuators
Max. 124 DI/124 DO according to Spec. V2.0

Access control
Cyclic polling master/slave procedure

Cyclic data acceptance from host (PLC, PC)
Error safeguard
Identification and repetition of faulty message

frames
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/15
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Introduction
Specification 2.0, 2.1 and 3.0
Overview
Scope of the AS-Interface specification

Maximum number of slaves
Number of digital inputs
Number of digital outputs
Digital
Analog
ASIsafe
DI
DO
Version 2.0
31
31
31
31 4 = 124
31 4 = 124
Version 2.1
62
31
31
62 4 = 248
62 3 = 186
Version 3.0
62
62
31
62 8 = 496
62 8 = 496
Basic data of AS-Interface Specification 2.0

AS-Interface Specification 2.0 describes a fieldbus system
with an AS-i master and up to 31 AS-i slaves.
Each AS-i slave has up to 4 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs.
With full expansion, the complete transmission of all input/output data requires max. 5 ms cycle time.
Expansions of AS-Interface Specification 2.1
AS-Interface Specification 2.1 enables the number of network
stations to be doubled from 31 to 62 as follows:
The standard slaves continue to occupy one AS-i address
(1...31).
Slaves with extended addressing divide an address into an
A address (1A...31A) and a B address (1B...31B).
Up to 62 A/B slaves can be connected accordingly
to one AS-Interface network.
Mixed operation of standard slaves and A/B slaves is possible
without difficulty. The AS-i master identifies automatically
which type of slave is connected. No special adjustments are
required of the user.
Expansions of AS-Interface Specification 3.0

AS-Interface Specification 3.0 enables the connection of
nearly 1000 digital inputs/outputs (profile S-7.A.A: 8DI/8DO as
A/B slave).
New profiles have also enabled the option of expanded
addressing for analog slaves.
Acceleration of analog value transmission through
"Fast Analog Profile".
Variable use of analog modules: Optional parameterization of
resolution (12/14 bit) and 1- and 2-channel capability.
Asynchronous serial protocol 100 baud or 50 baud,
bidirectional.
AS-Interface master for A/B slaves
To be able to operate A/B slaves on an AS-Interface network you
must use master modules that meet the minimum requirements
of Specification 2.1.
Another function of the AS-Interface Specification V2.1 is the

integrated analog value transmission function. Access to both
analog values and digital values is possible without the need for
any special function blocks.
Available masters
Version 2.1
CP 243-2 (S7-200)
Version 3.0
CP 343-2, 343-2P (S7-300/ET 200M), DP/AS-i Link Advanced, DP/AS-i F-Link,

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, IE/AS-i Link PN IO, CM 1243-2 (S7-1200),
CM AS-i Master ST for ET 200SP
The AS-Interface specification relevant for the respective slave

is noted in the "Selection and ordering data".
For the exact slave profile see AS-Interface system manual.
Communication cycle
Maximum cycle time (digital signals)
Version 2.0
5 ms
Version 2.1
5 ms with 31 slaves
10 ms with 62 slaves
Version 3.0
5 ms with 31 slaves
10 ms with 62 slaves, supplementary,
up to 20 ms with A/B slaves using 4DI/4DO,
up to 40 ms with A/B slaves using 8DI/8DO
Each address is queried in max. 5 ms cycle time. If two A/B

slaves are operated on one basic address (e.g. 12A and 12B),
a maximum 10 ms will be required for updating the data of both
slaves.
More information
AS-Interface system manual
More information is available in the AS-Interface system manual.
The AS-Interface system manual can be downloaded free of
charge, see
2/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
All slave types can be mixed and used on a single AS-Interface

network.
More information, e.g. whether an AS-Interface slave is a standard slave or an A/B slave, can be seen in the section "Selection
and ordering data" or the "AS-Interface system manual".
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Introduction
AS-i Power24V expansion
AS-Interface data decoupling modules for AS-i Power24V,

left: S22.5 data decoupling module,
right: DCM 1271 data decoupling module for SIMATIC S7-1200
Parallel wiring frequently dominates, above all, in applications

with very few I/Os. Although AS-Interface is similarly well suited
for small applications, its use is often prevented by the cost of
the 30 V AS-Interface power supply unit which is required in
addition. Through the expansion of AS-Interface with
AS-i Power24V and the resulting possibility of using existing
standard 24 V DC power supply units in AS-i networks,
AS-Interface is now also attractive for applications with a very
tight budget.
Data and power in standard AS-Interface networks up to now
One of the great advantages of AS-Interface is the ability to convey not only data, but also the power needed for the connected
slaves and sensors over the same unshielded two-conductor cable. This is owed to the service-proven AS-Interface power supply units which provide integrated data decoupling as well as
overload and short-circuit protection and integrated ground-fault
monitoring.
The new technology
Requirements for operation of an AS-i Power24V network

When 24 V power supply units are used, the maximum network range of 50 m must be observed in order to reach slaves
and sensors with a sufficient level of voltage (at least 18 V).
The power supply units must comply with the PELV (Protective
Extra Low Voltage) or SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) standards, have a residual ripple of < 250 mVpp, and in the event
of a fault must limit the output voltage to a maximum of 40 V.
We recommend SITOP power supply units, see Chapter 15.
When used in conjunction with standard 24 V power supply
units, each AS-Interface network requires Power24V-capable
data decoupling with adapted ground-fault detection, see
page 2/68.
For reliable operation of an AS-i network with 24 V voltage, it is
important that the masters, slaves and other components are
approved for AS-i Power24V. AS-i Power24V-capable AS-i
components can also be used without restriction in standard
30 V AS-i networks.
The use of repeaters or extension plugs in AS-i Power24V
networks is not permitted.
Benefits
AS-i Power24V networks incur no additional costs for an
AS-Interface power supply unit because an already existing
24 V power supply unit can be used. This brings the user several
benefits:
The level of standardization of very small applications can be
increased further.
The additional advantages of a modern communication system in terms of commissioning, maintenance and diagnostics
can be fully exploited.
Application
Construction of an AS-i Power24V network
PROFINET
Through the expansion of AS-Interface with AS-i Power24V it is

now also possible to use 24 V standard power supply units in
AS-i networks. The communication technology of AS-Interfaces
works at the same high level of quality with an operating voltage
of both 30 V DC and 24 V DC.
S7-1200 with DCM 1271, CM 1243-2

and 24 V standard power supply unit
Key data of AS-i Power24V

Up to 62 standard slaves and up to 31 safe slaves
Topology
Any
Range
Up to 50 m
Components
24 V power supply unit with little residual ripple and

limitation to max. 40 V
AS-i Power24V-capable data decoupling with integrated
ground-fault detection
Up to 50 m
AS-Interface
I/O modules
NSB0_02245
Number of
slaves
AS-i Power24V-capable masters, slaves and components
Construction of an AS-i Power24V network with an AS-Interface

DCM 1271 data decoupling module and S7-1200 (simple network)
More information
Complete overview of AS-i Power24V-capable units currently
available from Siemens see
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/17
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Introduction
Safety is included
ASIsafe enables the integration of safety-related components,
such as EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons, protective door
switches or safety light arrays, in an AS-Interface network. These
are fully compatible with the familiar AS-Interface components
(masters, slaves, power supplies, repeaters, etc.) in accordance
with IEC 62026-2 and are operated in conjunction with them on
the yellow AS-Interface cable.
Tested safety
The system was tested and approved by TV (Germany), NRTL
(USA) and INRS (France). The transmission method for safetyrelated signals is configured for implementing applications up to
PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 and up to SIL 3 according to
IEC 62061/IEC 61508.
ASIsafe solutions
ASIsafe Solution local:
3RK3 Modular Safety System
ASIsafe Solution PROFIsafe:

DP/AS-i F-Link
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Operational
control
Safety-oriented
processing
Operational
control
Controls
z. B. SIMATIC S7-300
Safe control
e.g. SIMATIC S7-300F
PROFINET
PROFIsafe
F-Link
F-Link
ASIsafe
ASIsafe
F-Link
ASIsafe
PROFIBUS
IE AS-i
Link
SIMATIC
S7-1200
MSS
MSS
ASIsafe
ASIsafe
DP AS-i
Link
MSS
ASIsafe
Secure data
Safety-oriented processing
Standard data
Safety cell
The DP/AS-i F-Link allows AS-Interface to be used with fail-safe

SIMATIC or SINUMERIK controllers. As a link in bus-based
safety technology it ensures that ASIsafe telegrams are converted to the PROFIsafe protocol.
The allocation of tasks is as follows:
Identify: the safe sensors on the AS-Interface bus detect
safety-related signals.
Evaluate: the fail-safe SIMATIC or SINUMERIK control present
performs the evaluation.
Realize: the F-DO/F-RO modules (fail-safe digital/relay output
modules) in the central controller or in the ET 200 fail-safe
distributed peripherals react at PROFIsafe level.
Higher-level control
In ASIsafe solutions, higher-level operational control of the
nodes on the AS-Interface bus is performed by the central
SIMATIC or SINUMERIK control.
2/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
IC01_00167
IC01_00168
Overview
Safety-related data
Standard data
Safety cell
The local ASIsafe solution requires the Modular Safety System

(MSS) and safe slaves. Neither fail-safe controllers nor special
masters are required.
The allocation of tasks is as follows:
Identify: the safe sensors on the AS-Interface bus detect
safety-related signals.
Evaluate: The Modular Safety System monitors safe sensors
(e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP) and performs the evaluation.
Realize: Shutdown is performed locally via ASIsafe in
conjunction with safe AS-i outputs or via safe outputs
integrated into the MSS.
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Introduction
The safe nodes (ASIsafe modules, EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons, position switches with built-in ASIsafe etc.) send their
information to the master in response to a master call in the same
way as the standard nodes. The DP/AS-i F-Link or the Modular
Safety System monitors transmissions from the safe nodes. In
the event of a fault, they switch to safe condition or send a shutdown signal to one or more distributed safe AS-i outputs, which
in turn switch to safe condition.
Configuring safety functions
In order to implement safe functions, the information from the
safe and standard nodes must be combined logically and further parameters set. The configuration of the safety functions depends on which safety solution is being used:
PROFIsafe ASIsafe solution:
In conjunction with the DP/AS-i F-Link as a safe master, all
safety functions and combinations are configured via STEP 7
and processed in the controller.
ASIsafe Solution local:
In conjunction with the Modular Safety System all safety functions and combinations are configured using the MSS ES software and processed in the MSS.
Benefits
No fail-safe PLC or master is required with the Modular Safety
System for the ASIsafe Solution local
Alternatively integration in SIMATIC / SINUMERIK safety architectures with DP/AS-i F-Link (ASIsafe Solution PROFIsafe)
Simple system structure thanks to standardized AS-Interface
technique
Safety-related and standard data on the same bus
Existing systems can be expanded quickly and easily
Optimum integration in TIA (Safety Diagnostics) and Safety
Integrated
Inclusion of the safety signals in the plant diagnostics, also on
existing HMI panels
Approved to PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3
according to IEC 61508
ASIsafe is certified by TV (Germany), NRTL (USA) and INRS
(France)
Application
Integrated safety technology in the AS-Interface system is used
wherever EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons, protective door interlocks, stop Category 0 and 1, two-hand operator controls and
light arrays are installed.
More information
For more information and circuit examples for safety systems
with the Modular Safety system and DP/AS-i F-Link, see
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/19
Safe communication
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Overview
Application
All the MSS that can be used for the AS-Interface bus support
the same safety functions. Differences exist in the number of
inputs/outputs and expansion modules that can be connected,
and hence in the number of independent enabling circuits.
Several MSS can be used on the same AS-Interface bus.
AS-Interface is available in the following versions:
MSS ASIsafe basic
A total of up to 10 independent (2-channel) enabling circuits
- 2 of these enabling circuits via safe outputs integrated into
the central unit
- And another 8 enabling circuits via ASIsafe, e.g. with local,
safe AS-i outputs
MSS ASIsafe basic (left) and

MSS ASIsafe extended with two expansion modules (right)
The Modular Safety System (MSS) is the centerpiece of ASIsafe

Solution local. It allows safety-related response to signals from
the ASIsafe nodes connected in the AS-i network, such as safe
input modules, EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons or position
switches.
The MSS thus supports safety-related applications up to
Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or SIL3 according to
IEC 62061.
Safe disconnection takes place via the local safe outputs of
the MSS or via the distributed safe AS-Interface outputs in the
AS-Interface network.
The safety functions are configured within the MSS using the
MSS ES software. The configuration can be transmitted directly
in the MSS via the system interface with the aid of a PC cable or
memory module. If the DP interface module is used, transmission via PROFIBUS DP is also possible.
The MSS supports a large number of different safety functions.
These can be tailored to individual needs in the form of readymade function blocks.
The safety functions supported include the following:
EMERGENCY-STOP
Safety shutdown mat
Protective door monitoring
Protective door tumbler mechanism
Approval switches
Two-hand operator controls
ESPE monitoring
Muting
Mode selector switches
MSS ASIsafe extended

the central unit
- In addition, up to 8 enabling circuits via a maximum of
2 expansion modules
safe AS-i outputs
MSS Advanced
the central unit
- In addition, up to 36 enabling circuits via a maximum of
9 expansion modules
safe AS-i outputs
Expandability
All versions above can be expanded by adding a DP interface
module and a diagnostics module. In addition, various safety
and non-safety expansion modules can be selected for the MSS,
and these can be used in any combination, see Chapter 11
"Safety Technology".
Comparison of the three MSS versions
MSS 3RK3
ASIsafe basic
ASIsafe extended Advanced
Number of independent (2-channel)

enabling circuits
2 ... 10
2 ... 20
Inputs
1/2 F-DI and 6 DI 2/4 F-DI and 4 DI

(expandable)
Outputs
1 F-DO and
1 F-RO
1 F-DO and 1 F-RO

(expandable)
Number of
expansion modules
--
Up to 2
Up to 9
Up to 10
Up to 12
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/8 F-DI
(expandable)
Connection to ASIsafe
Number of safe
AS-i outputs
Number of safe
AS-i inputs
-- Not available
2/20
2 ... 50
Up to 8
Up to 31
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Software for startup, testing and diagnostics: Modular Safety System ES (MSS ES)
MSS ES is the engineering software for the configuration,
startup and diagnostics of the 3RK3 Modular Safety System.
All function elements can be positioned using drag & drop. All
functions whether safety or logic functions are available as
blocks and can also be easily combined with one another.
MSS ES makes it possible to test the safety application by forcing. Outputs can be individually set in order to test in advance
the reaction of the downstream safety function. In addition, the
parameterization can be downloaded to the MSS via PROFIBUS.
The integrated macro function allows you to compile a library of
your own function elements for reuse in other projects. In addition, the parameterization software is suitable for use as a reliable diagnostics tool: the status of each element as well as the
configuration as a whole can be viewed online.
MSS ES user interface showing the ISO-Plan display
Selection and ordering data

PU (UNIT, SET, M) = 1 Version
DT Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals
PS*= 1 UNIT
PG = 42B
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Central units
3RK3 ASIsafe basic
Central units for connecting to
AS-Interface with safety-related inputs
and outputs
3RK3121-1AC00
3RK3121-2AC00
3RK3122-1AC00
3RK3122-2AC00
3RK3131-1AC10
3RK3131-2AC10
1/2 safe inputs

6 standard inputs
1 two-channel relay output
1 two-channel electronic output
3RK3121-1AC00
3RK3121-2AC00
Memory module 3RK3931-0AA00 is

included in the scope of supply
No expansion modules can be
connected
3RK3 ASIsafe extended
AS-Interface with safety-related inputs
and outputs
2/4 safe inputs
4 standard inputs
3RK3122-1AC00
3RK3122-2AC00

Max. 2 expansion modules can be
connected
3RK3 Advanced
AS-Interface with safety-related
inputs and outputs
4/8 safe inputs
3RK3131-1AC10
3RK3131-2AC10
Max. 9 expansion modules can be

connected
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Illustrations are approximate
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/21
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
DT Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals
PS*= 1 UNIT
PG = 42B
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Expansion modules
4/8 F-DI
Safety-related input modules
8 inputs
3RK3211-1AA10
3RK3211-1AA10
3RK3211-2AA10
3RK3221-1AA10
3RK3221-2AA10
3RK3231-1AA10
3RK3231-2AA10
3RK3251-1AA10
3RK3251-2AA10
3RK3242-1AA10
3RK3242-2AA10
3RK3321-1AA10
3RK3321-2AA10
3RK3311-1AA10
3RK3311-2AA10
3RK3211-2AA10
2/4 F-DI 1/2 F-RO
Safety-related input/output modules
4 inputs
2 single-channel relay outputs
3RK3221-1AA10
3RK3221-2AA10
2/4 F-DI 2F-DO
4 inputs
2 two-channel electronic outputs
3RK3231-1AA10
3RK3231-2AA10
4/8 F-RO
Safety-related output modules
3RK3251-1AA10
3RK3251-2AA10
4 F-DO
3RK3242-1AA10
3RK3242-2AA10
8 DI
Standard input module
8 inputs
3RK3321-1AA10
3RK3321-2AA10
8 DO
Standard output module
8 electronic outputs
3RK3311-1AA10
2/22
3RK3311-2AA10
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
DT Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals
PS*= 1 UNIT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Interface modules
DP interface
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s,
RS 485, cyclic and acyclic data
exchange
3RK3511-1BA10
3RK3511-1BA10
3RK3611-3AA00
3RK3511-2BA10
3RK3511-2BA10
Operating and monitoring modules

Diagnostics module
--
For direct display of errors,

e.g. of crossover
3RK3611-3AA00
More information
For more information and technical specifications on the Modular Safety System (MSS), see Chapter 11 "Safety Technology"
For more information on the Modular Safety System ES (MSS ES)
software, see Chapter 14 "Parameterization, Configuration and
Visualization with SIRIUS".
Manuals for the Modular Safety System (MSS) see

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/23
PG = 42B
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Version
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Basic safety monitors

Version 3
With screw terminals, removable terminals,
width 45 mm
One enabling circuit (monitor type 1)
3RK1105-1AE04-0CA0
1 unit
42C
Two enabling circuits (monitor type 2)
3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1105-1AE04-2CA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1105-1BE04-2CA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1105-1BE04-4CA0
1 unit
42C
Expanded safety monitors

Version 3
width 45 mm
3RK1105-1BE04-0CA0
Expanded safety monitors with integrated safe slave

Version 3
With screw terminals, removable terminals, width 45 mm
Two enabling circuits including control of a safe
AS-i output/safe coupling (monitor type 6)
Basic safety monitors
Version 3
With spring-type terminals, removable terminals,
width 45 mm
3RK1105-1AG04-0CA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1105-1BG04-0CA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1105-1AG04-2CA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1105-1BG04-2CA0
1 unit
42C
Two enabling circuits including control of a safe

AS-i output/safe coupling (monitor type 6)
3RK1105-1BG04-4CA0
1 unit
42C
ASIsafe CD
3RK1802-2FB06-0GA1
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-5AA00
1 unit
42C
Sealable covers
For securing against unauthorized configuration of the
safety monitor
3RP1902
5 units
41H
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing
3RP1903
1 10 units
41H
Expanded safety monitors

Version 3
width 45 mm
Expanded safety monitors with integrated safe slave

Version 3
width 45 mm
Accessories
Included in the scope of supply:
ASIMON V3 configuration software on CD ROM, for PC
with the 32-bit operating systems Windows XP,
Windows Vista Business/Ultimate, Windows 7
Cable sets
PC configuration cable for communication between PC
(serial interface) and safety monitor,
length approx. 1.50 m
Transfer cable between two safety monitors,
length approx. 0.25 m
3RK1901-5AA00
2/24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Overview
AS-Interface safety modules: K45F (left), K20F (center) and

S22.5F (right)
The platform of the K45F modules covers the following variations:

Connection of ("mechanical") switches/safety sensors
with contacts:
- K45F 2F-DI: Two safety-related inputs in operation up to
Category 2 according to EN ISO 13849-1. If Category 4 is
required, a two-channel input is available on the module.
- K45F 2F-DI/2DO: There are also two standard outputs in addition to the safe inputs. Supplied from the yellow AS-i cable
- K45F 2F-DI/2DO Uaux: same as K45F 2F-DI/2DO, but supplied from the black 24 V DC cable
- K45F 4F-DI: Four safety-related inputs in operation up to
Category 2, two for Category 4. Extremely compact double
slave (uses two full AS-i addresses).
Connection of solid-state switches / safety sensors
(non-contact protective devices, ESPE):
- K45F LS (light sensor): Safe input module for the connection
of electronic safety sensors with testing semiconductor outputs (OSSD)
In particular non-contact protective devices such as active,
optoelectronic light arrays and light curtains for Type 2 and
Type 4 according to IEC 61496.
Transmitters as well as receivers are supplied with power
from the yellow AS-i cable. Matching sensor cables and optionally a separate transmitter supply module are available
as accessories.
S22.5F SlimLine safety modules for use in control cabinets
and local control cabinets
The S22.5F SlimLine safety module has two safety inputs. The
safe connection of signals to ASIsafe networks in the cabinet is
also possible therefore. For operation up to Category 2, both inputs can be separately assigned; if Category 4 is required, a
two-channel input is available on the module.
In addition there are two S22.5F module versions which have two
standard outputs in addition to the two safety inputs; power is
supplied either from only the yellow AS-Interface cable or as
auxiliary voltage from the black 24 V DC cable.
S45F SlimLine module, safe AS-i output
Safety modules for AS-Interface (ASIsafe modules) are available

for field use in degree of protection IP67 (K20F and K45F
compact modules) and for the control cabinet (S22.5F SlimLine
modules) in degree of protection IP20.
A very compact module with an optimum price/performance
ratio is thus available for every application.
All modules for the connection of (mechanical) switches and
safety sensors with contacts feature crossover monitoring of the
connected sensor line. On versions for the connection of
solid-state switches and safety sensors (e.g. light arrays) the
crossover monitoring must be performed by the sensor.
The following modules are available for selection:
K20F compact safety modules for use in the field
Being only 20 mm wide, the K20F module is particularly well
suited for applications where modules need to be arranged in
the most confined space. The K20F modules are connected to
the AS-Interface with a round cable with M12 cable box instead
of with the AS-Interface flat cable. This enables extremely compact installation. The flexibility of the round cable means that it
can also be used on moving machine parts without any problems. The K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as
their non-encapsulated design makes them particularly light in
weight.
S45F SlimLine safety modules with safe outputs for the safe
distributed disconnection of actuators
With the safe SlimLine-Module S45F, the shutdown signal, for example from the Modular Safety System, can be used through the
ASIsafe for distributed safety-related disconnection.
To this end, the module has a dual-channel relay output with
which an enabling circuit up to safety category 4 and Performance Level e according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3 according to EN 62061 / IEC 61508 can be deactivated safely.
As an additional possibility the module offers normal switching
of the output using an AS-i standard output bit.
The module has three digital inputs and two digital outputs for
the additional connection of sensors and actuators. These can
be used, inter alia, for the necessary monitoring of downstream
contactors of the feedback circuit.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/25
K45F compact safety modules for use in the field
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1205-0BQ30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Version
K20F compact safety modules

I/O type
Uaux 24 V
2 F-DI
--
3RK1205-0BQ30-0AA3
K45F compact safety modules
Modules supplied without mounting plate
3RK1205-0BQ00-0AA3
I/O type
Uaux 24 V
2 F-DI
--
3RK1205-0BQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 F-DI1)
--
3RK1205-0CQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI/2 DO
--
3RK1405-0BQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI/2 DO
3RK1405-1BQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI LS type 22)
--
3RK1205-0BQ21-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI LS type 43)
--
3RK1205-0BQ24-0AA3
1 unit
42C
S22.5F SlimLine safety modules

Connection
I/O type
Uaux 24 V
Screw
2 F-DI
--
3RK1205-0BE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI/2 DO
--
3RK1405-0BE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI/2 DO
3RK1405-1BE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI
--
3RK1205-0BG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI/2 DO
--
3RK1405-0BG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
2 F-DI/2 DO
3RK1405-1BG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Spring-type
3RK1205-0BE00-0AA2
S45F SlimLine safety modules

Connection
I/O type
Uaux 24 V
Screw
1F-RO/3DI/2DO
3RK1405-1SE15-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Spring-type
1F-RO/3DI/2DO
3RK1405-1SG15-0AA2
1 unit
42C
3RK1405-1SE15-0AA2
Available or possible
-- Not available or not possible
1)
Module occupies two AS-Interface addresses

Connection of previous Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7843 (type 2)
through socket 1/3
3) Connection of previous Siemens light curtain FS 400 3RG7846 (type 4)
through socket 1/3, other makes through socket 2/3
2)
2/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
ASIsafe
Accessories
DT
Article No.
For wall mounting
For standard rail mounting
24 V supply modules for K45F LS (light sensor)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1901-2EA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-2DA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1NP00
1 unit
42C
Black version
3RK1901-1AA00
1 unit
42C
Red version
3RK1901-1AA01
1 unit
42C
AS-Interface M12 sealing caps

For free M12 sockets
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
AS-Interface M12 sealing caps, tamper-proof

3RK1901-1KA01
100 10 units
42C
Version
K45 mounting plates

For mounting K45F
3RK1901-2EA00
Optional, for transmitter power supply for large
protective field widths
Max. current carrying capacity 200mA
Input bridges for K45F
3RK1901-1AA00
3RK1901-1KA00
3RK1901-1KA01

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/27
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
CM 1243-2
Overview
Design
The CM 1243-2 communication module is positioned to the left

of the S7-1200 CPU and linked to the S7-1200 via lateral
contacts.
It has:
Terminals for two AS-i cables (internally jumpered) via two
screw terminals each respectively
One terminal for connection to the functional ground
LEDs for indication of the operating state and fault statuses of
the connected slaves
The screw terminals (included in scope of supply) can be removed to facilitate installation.
Function
The CM 1243-2 supports all specified functions of the
AS-Interface Specification V3.0.
CM 1243-2 communication module for S7-1200
The CM 1243-2 communication module is the AS-Interface

master for the SIMATIC S7-1200 and has the following features:
Supports all AS-Interface master functions according to the
AS-Interface Specification V3.0
Indication of the operating state on the front of the device
displayed via LED
Display of operating mode, AS-Interface voltage faults,
configuration faults and peripheral faults via LED behind the
front panel
Compact enclosure in the design of the SIMATIC S7-1200
Suitable for AS-i power 24V: In combination with the optional
DCM 1271 data decoupling module, a standard 24 V power
supply unit can be used.
Configuration and diagnostics via the TIA portal
The values of the digital AS-i slaves can be activated via the process image of the S7-1200. During configuration of the slaves in
the TIA Portal, the values of the analog AS-i slaves can also be
accessed directly in the process image.
It is also possible to exchange all data of the AS-i master and the
connected AS-i slaves with the S7-1200 via the data record
interface.
Changeover of the operating mode, automatic application of
the slave configuration and the re-addressing of a connected
AS-i slave can be implemented via the control panel of the
CM 1243-2 in the TIA Portal.
The optional DCM 1271 data decoupling module has an integrated detection unit for detecting ground faults on the AS-Interface cable. The integrated overload protection also disconnects
the AS-Interface cable if the drive power required exceeds 4 A.
Notes on safety
The use of this product requires suitable protective measures
(e.g. network segmentation for IT security among others) in
order to ensure safe plant operation,
see www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Configuration
To configure CM 1243-2, you require STEP 7 V11+ SP2 or
STEP 7 V12 or higher.
For STEP 7 V11+ SP2 or higher, you require the additional Hardware Support Package for CM 1243-2, which is available via the
Service & Support portal,
see under
The software enables user-friendly configuration and diagnostics of the AS-Interface master and any connected slaves.
Alternatively, you can also apply the AS-Interface ACTUAL
configuration at the "touch of a button" via the control panel
integrated in the TIA Portal/STEP 7.
2/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
CM 1243-2
More flexibility and versatility in the use of SIMATIC S7-1200 as

the result of a significant increase in the number of digital and
analog inputs/outputs available
Very easy configuration and diagnostics of the AS-Interface
via the TIA Portal (STEP 7 V11+ SP2 or higher)
No need for the AS-i power supply unit with AS-i Power24V:
The AS-Interface cable is supplied through an existing
24 V DC PELV power supply unit. For decoupling, the
AS-i DCM 1271 data decoupling module is required,
see page 2/76
LEDs for indication of fault statuses for fast diagnostics
Monitoring of AS-Interface voltage facilitates diagnostics
Application
The CM 1243-2 is the AS-Interface master connection for the
12xx CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-1200. Connection to the
AS-Interface greatly increases the number of inputs and outputs
available for S7-1200 (max. 496 DI/496 DO on the AS-Interface
per CM).
The integrated analog value processing also makes the analog

values available at the AS-Interface for the S7-1200 (per CM up
to 31 standard analog slaves, each with up to 4 channels, or up
to 62 A/B analog slaves, each with up to 2 channels).

Version
DT
Article No.
CM 1243-2 communication modules
3RK7243-2AA30-0XB0
DT
Article No.
3RK1901-3MA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
AS-Interface masters for SIMATIC S7-1200

Corresponds to AS-Interface Specification V3.0;
Dimensions (W H D / mm): 30 100 75
3RK7243-2AA30-0XB0
Accessories
Version
Price
per PU
5-pole screw terminals for AS-i master CM 1243-2 and

AS-i DCM 1271 data decoupling module
With screw terminals
More information
The manuals are available free of charge on the Internet, see

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/29
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
CP 243-2
Overview
Design
The CP 243-2 is connected like an expansion module to the

S7-200. It has:
Two screw terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface
cable
LEDs in the front panel for indicating the operating state and
functional readiness of all connected slaves
Two pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the
slaves, for switching over the operating state and for adopting
the existing ACTUAL configuration as the DESIRED configuration
Function
The CP 243-2 supports all specified functions of the extended
CP 243-2
The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master for the SIMATIC S7-200

and has the following features:
(Analog Profiles 7.3 and 7.4)
extended AS-Interface specification V2.1
Display of the operating state and readiness for operation of
connected slaves by means of LEDs in the front panel
Fault indications (e.g. AS-Interface voltage fault, configuration
fault) by means of LEDs in the front panel
In the process image of the S7-200, the CP 243-2 occupies

one digital input byte (status byte), one digital output byte
(control byte), and 8 analog input and 8 analog output words.
The CP 243-2 thus occupies two (logic) slots. The operating
mode of the CP 243-2 can be set with the status byte and the
control byte using the user program. Depending on the operating mode, the CP 243-2 saves either the digital or analog
I/O data of the AS-Interface slaves or diagnostic values in the
analog address area of the S7-200, or it enables master calls
(e.g. re-addressing of the slaves).
Configuration
All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of
a button. No further configuration of the CP is required.
Benefits
More flexibility and versatility in the use of SIMATIC S7-200 as
the result of the distinct increase in the number of digital and
analog inputs/outputs available
Shorter startup times through simple configuration at the press
of a button
Reduction of standstill and servicing times in the event of a

fault thanks to the LED indicators
Status of the CP
- Display of all the slaves connected and their readiness for
operation
- Monitoring of the AS-Interface mains voltage
Application
The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master connection for the
22x CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-200. By means of connection to
AS-Interface, the number of inputs and outputs available for the
S7-200 is greatly increased (max. 248 DI / 186 DO on the
AS-Interface per CP).
Analog values (per CP a maximum of 31 standard analog

slaves with up to 4 channels each) also become available on
the AS-Interface for the S7-200 thanks to the integrated analog
value processing. On the S7-200, up to two CP 243-2 communications processors can be operated simultaneously.

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
CP 243-2 communications processors
For connection of the SIMATIC S7-200 to AS-Interface;
corresponds to AS-Interface Specification V2.1;
not approved for AS-i Power24V;
dimensions (W x H x D / mm): 71 x 80 x 62
(dimensions without fixing lugs)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
Price
per PU
6GK7243-2AX01-0XA0
6GK7243-2AX01-0XA0
More information
The manuals are also available on the Internet at
2/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
CP 343-2P, CP 343-2
Overview
The CP 343-2P / CP 343-2 is connected like an I/O module to the
S7-300. It has:
Two terminal connections for direct connection of the
AS-Interface cable
the readiness for operation of all connected and activated
slaves
Pushbuttons for switching over the master operating state and
for adopting the existing ACTUAL configuration of the AS-i
slave as the DESIRED configuration
Function
The CP 343-2P / CP 343-2 supports all specified functions of the
extended AS-Interface Specification V3.0.
CP 343-2P / CP 343-2
The CP 343-2P is the AS-Interface master for the

SIMATIC S7-300 and the ET 200M distributed I/O station, with
user-friendly parameterizing options.
The CP 343-2 is the basic version of the module.
The CP 343-2P / CP 343-2 performs the following features:
Integrated analog value transmission (all analog profiles)
Status displays of operating states and indication of the readiness for operation of connected slaves by means of LEDs in
the front panel
Fault indications (e.g. AS-Interface voltage fault, configuration
fault) by means of LEDs in the front panel
Suitable for AS-i Power24V (from product version 2/firmware
version 3.1) and for standard AS-i with 30 V voltage.
With CP 343-2P additionally: Supports the configuration of the
AS-Interface-network with STEP 7 V5.2 and higher
The CP 343-2P / CP 343-2 occupies 16 bytes each in the I/O address area of the SIMATIC S7-300. The digital I/O data of the
standard slaves and A slaves are saved in this area. The digital
I/O data of the B slaves and the analog I/O data can be accessed with the S7 system functions for read/write data record.
If required, master calls can be performed with the command
interface, e.g. read/write parameters, read/write configuration.
Configuration
All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of
a button. No further configuration of the CP is required.
With CP 343-2P additionally
The CP 343-2P also supports configuring of the AS-Interface
network with STEP 7 V5.2 and higher. Specifying the AS-i configuration in HW-Config facilitates the setting of slave parameters
and documentation of the plant. Uploading the ACTUAL configuration of an already configured AS-Interface network is also
supported. The saved configuration cannot be overwritten at the
press of a button and is therefore tamper-proof.
Benefits
Shorter startup times through simple configuration at the press
of a button
Using it in the ET 200M distributed I/O system allows flexible
machine-related structures to be constructed
Provides diagnostics of the AS-Interface network
Well suited also for complex applications thanks to connection
options for 62 slaves and integral analog value processing
fault thanks to the LED indicators:
- Status of the AS-Interface network
- Slaves connected and their readiness for operation
- Monitoring of the AS-Interface mains voltage
Lower costs for stock keeping and spare parts because the
CP can be used for the SIMATIC S7-300 as well as for the
ET 200M
With CP 343-2P additionally: Improved plant documentation
and support for service assignments thanks to a description
of the AS-Interface configuration in the STEP 7 project
No need for the AS-i power supply unit with AS-i Power24V:
The AS-Interface cable is supplied through an existing
24 V DC PELV power supply unit. An AS-i data decoupling
module (e.g. 3RK1901-1DE12-1AA0) is required for the
decoupling, see page 2/76.
Operation with AS-Interface power supply (see page 2/76)
possible without restrictions.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/31
Design
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
CP 343-2P, CP 343-2
Application
The CP 343-2P / CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master connection

for the SIMATIC S7-300 and the ET 200M.
Through connection to AS-Interface it is possible to access max.
248 DI/248 DO per CP, using 62 A/B slaves with 4DI/4DO each.
With the integrated analog value processing, it is easy to transmit analog signals (per CP up to 62 A/B analog slaves with a
maximum of 2 channels each or up to 31 standard analog slaves
with a maximum of 4 channels each).
The CP 343-2P is the further development of the CP 343-2 and

contains its entire functionality. An existing STEP 7 user program
for a CP 343-2 can thus be used without restrictions with a
CP 343-2P. It is only in STEP 7 HW-Config that the two modules
are configured differently, with the CP 343-2P offering additional
options. This is why the CP 343-2P is recommended.

Version
DT
Article No.
CP 343-2P communications processors
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6GK7343-2AH11-0XA0
1 unit
42C
6GK7343-2AH01-0XA0
1 unit
42C
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0
1 unit
230
With spring-type terminals
6ES7392-1BJ00-0AA0
1 unit
230
With FastConnect connection
6ES7392-1CJ00-0AA0
1 unit
2AP
For connection of SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M to

AS-Interface;
configuration of the AS-i network using the SET key or
STEP 7 (V5.2 and higher);
without front connector;
6GK7343-2AH11-0XA0
CP 343-2 communications processors
Basic version for connection of SIMATIC S7-300 and
ET 200M to AS-Interface
Configuration of the AS-i network using the SET key;
without front connector;
6GK7343-2AH01-0XA0
Accessories
Version
Price
per PU
Front connector, 20-pole
More information
The manuals are available on the Internet at
Information about AS-i block library for PCS 7 for easy
connection of AS-Interface to PCS 7 see
Chapter 14 "Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization
with SIRIUS" "AS-Interface Block Library for SIMATIC PCS 7"
Industry Mall: "Automation"
"Industrial controls"
"Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization with
SIRIUS" "AS-Interface Block Library for SIMATIC PCS 7"
2/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
Master for SIMATIC ET 200
CM AS-i Master for ET 200SP
Design
The CM AS-i Master ST has an ET 200SP module enclosure with
a width of 20 mm. A BaseUnit is required for use in the ET 200SP.
The CM AS-i Master ST can be plugged onto type C0 BaseUnits
(BU) with automatic coding.
The CM AS-i Master ST has LED indicators for diagnostics,
operation, AS-i voltage and AS-i slave status.
The CM AS-i Master ST offers informative front-side module
inscription for
Plain-text marking of the module type and function class
2D matrix code (article number and serial number)
Circuit diagram
Color coding of the CM module type: Blue
Hardware and firmware version
Complete order number
CM AS-i Master ST for SIMATIC ET 200SP
The CM AS-i Master ST communication module is designed for

use in the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system and has the
following features:
User-friendly configuration with graphic display of the AS-i line
in TIA Portal V12.0 or in other systems by using GSD
Supply via AS-Interface cable
Suitable for AS-i Power24V and for AS-Interface
with 30 V voltage
Integrated ground-fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable
Through connection to AS-Interface and in combination with
ET 200SP, the number of digital inputs and outputs available
for the control system is greatly increased
(max. 496 DI / 496 DO on the AS-Interface per CM).
Integrated analog value processing (all analog profiles)
Basic unit: ET 200SP distributed I/O system
The SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is a scalable and
highly flexible I/O system for connecting the process signals to
a central control system via PROFINET.
Up to eight CM AS-i Master STs can be plugged into a SIMATIC
ET 200SP with IM 155-6 PN ST standard interface module.
For more information see "ET 200SP System Manual" at
Function
The CM AS-i Master ST supports all specified functions of the
The input/output values of the digital AS-i slaves can be activated via the cyclic process image. The values of the analog
AS-i slaves can be reached via data record transfer.
If required, master calls can be performed with the command
interface, e.g. read/write parameters, read/write configuration.
Changeover of the operating mode, automatic application of the
slave configuration and the re-addressing of a connected AS-i
slave can be implemented via the control panel of the CM AS-i
Master ST in the TIA Portal.
Notes on safety
Configuration
Configuration of the CM AS-i Master ST requires TIA Portal V12
or the updated version of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 or the GSD file.
The TIA Portal enables user-friendly configuration and diagnostics of the AS-i master and any connected slaves.
Alternatively, you can also apply the AS-Interface ACTUAL configuration as the DESIRED configuration at the "touch of a button"
via the control panel integrated in the TIA Portal or an optional
expansion button. Configuration with the GSD file is possible
only with the button.
Configuration of an AS-Interface network with CM AS-i Master ST via

TIA Portal
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/33
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
The CM AS-i Master ST for ET 200SP enables modular, easy and

high-performance expansion of AS-Interface networks via engineering in the TIA Portal.
Together with the interface module, a scalable PROFINET/

AS-i Link or PROFIBUS/AS-i Link can be assembled.
Up to eight CM AS-i masters can be plugged into one ET 200SP

station with IM 155-6PN ST. The maximum configuration depends on the interface module used.
Multiple masters as well as single masters can thus be implemented in the ET 200SP depending on the number of modules.
Application
Configuration examples of AS-Interface networks with CM AS-i Master ST for SIMATIC ET 200SP
Controller
e. g. S7-1500
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
SIMATIC ET 200SP
with 2 x CM AS-i masters
AS-Interface
Pushbuttons
and indicator
lights
Field
module
AS-Interface
3RA6
compact
starter
M200D
motor starter
Signal
columns
SIMATIC ET 200SP
with CM AS-i master
AS-Interface
Pushbuttons Field
and indicator module
lights
3RA6
compact
starter
M200D
motor starter
Signal
columns
IC01_00237
Benefits
Configuration of AS-Interface networks under a SIMATIC ET 200SP

Version
DT
Article No.
CM AS-i Master ST communication modules
Including server module

(bus adapter must be ordered separately)
Including server module and bus adapter 2 x RJ45
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1
1 unit
42C
6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0
1 unit
255
6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0
1 unit
255
AS-Interface master for SIMATIC ET 200SP,

can be plugged onto BaseUnit type C0
Corresponds to AS-Interface Specification V3.0
Dimensions (W H D / mm): 20 x 73 x 58
3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1
PROFINET IM 155-6PN ST interface modules
6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0
2/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Masters
DT
Article No.
Connection 2 x RJ45
Connection 2 x FC (FastConnect)
Version
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
1 unit
255
6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
1 unit
255
DT
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
255
Version
Variable bus adapters for PROFINET

For connection of the Ethernet cable to the
PROFINET IM interface module
6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Accessories
Article No.
BaseUnits
6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0
Price
per PU
BU20-P6+A2+4D BaseUnit
for CM AS-i Master ST to ET 200SP
Type C0
For connection of AS-Interface cable to the
CM AS-i master
6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0
More information
Manuals
Industry Mall
CM AS-i Master ST manual see

More information
see Industry Mall at "Automation Technology"
"Industrial Communication" "AS-Interface" "Masters"
"Masters for SIMATIC ET 200"
BaseUnits manual see

ET 200SP system manual see

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/35
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
Overview
Functionality
'30
'36
$6L0
,.B
31
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is a compact router between

PROFIBUS (DP Slave) and AS-Interface, with the following
features:
Single and double AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface Specification V3.0) for connection of 62 AS-Interface
slaves or 124 AS-Interface slaves (with a double master)
User-friendly local diagnostics and startup by means of a full
graphic display and control keys or through a web interface
with a standard browser on the PC screen
Optimum TIA integration using STEP 7
Integration in non-Siemens engineering tools using the
PROFIBUS GSD file
Vertical integration (standard web interface) through Industrial
Ethernet
Supply voltage from the AS-Interface shaped cable or alternatively with 24 V DC (optional)
Suitable for AS-i Power24V (from product version 4 / firmware
version 2.2) and for Standard AS-i with 30 V voltage
Module exchange without entering the connection parameters
(e.g. PROFIBUS address) using C-PLUG (optional)
Design
Compact plastic enclosure in degree of protection IP20 for
standard rail mounting
COMBICON plug-in screw terminals
Compact design:
- Pixel graphics display in the front panel for detailed display
of the operating state and readiness for operation of all connected AS-Interface slaves
- 6 pushbuttons for starting up and testing the AS-Interface
line directly on the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
- LED display of the operating state of PROFIBUS DP and
AS-Interface
- Integrated Ethernet port (RJ45 socket) for user-friendly
startup, diagnostics and testing of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
through a web interface using a standard browser
Small mounting depth thanks to recessed plug mounting
Operation without fans and batteries
2/36
Siemens IC 10 2014
Communications
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced enables a PROFIBUS DP master to
cyclically access the I/O data of all the slaves of a lower-level
AS-Interface segment. Also supported are the expanded slave
types with higher I/O data volume according to AS-i Specification V3.0.
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced occupies the following address
area:
As a single master: 32 bytes of input data and 32 bytes of output data in which the I/O data of the connected AS-Interface
slaves (standard and A/B slaves) of an AS-i line are stored.
As double master, double the number of bytes
Optional additional I/O bytes for data from analog slaves
The size of the input/output image can be compressed so that
only the actually required I/O address area is occupied in the
system of the DP master. The integrated evaluation of analog
signals is just as easy as access to digital values because the
analog process data also lie directly in the I/O address area of
the CPU.
PROFIBUS DP-V1 Masters also provide the option of triggering
AS-Interface Master calls over the acyclic PROFIBUS services
(e.g. write parameters, amend addresses, read diagnostic values). Using an operating display in AS-i Link it is possible to fully
commission the lower-level AS-Interface line.
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is equipped with an additional Ethernet
port which enables use of the integrated web server. The web
server can be called up with any standard web browser
(e.g. Internet Explorer) without additional software. It allows all
diagnostics information to be shown on the PC and the bus configuration and, if applicable, any adjustments, to be displayed.
Firmware updates are also possible using this port.
The optional C-PLUG supports module exchange without entering the connection parameters (PROFIBUS address etc.),
keeping downtimes to a minimum in the event of a fault.
Diagnostics
The following diagnostics is possible using LEDs, the display
and control keys, web interface or STEP 7:
Operating state of the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
Status of the link as a PROFIBUS DP slave
Diagnostics of the AS-Interface network
Message frame statistics
Standard diagnostics pages in the web interface for fast diagnostics access through Ethernet using a standard browser
For the use of the web interfaces no network settings are
necessary on the PC (Zeroconf procedure).
The reporting of diagnostic events is optionally possible via
E-Mail or SNMP Trap. The integrated diagnostic buffer saves
the events including time stamp.
Notes on safety
Configuration
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be configured as follows:
With STEP 7 as of V5.4: With STEP 7 the AS-Interface configuration can be uploaded in STEP 7. Furthermore, AS-Interface
slaves can also be conveniently configured in HW-Config
(slave selection dialog).
By adopting the ACTUAL configuration of the AS-Interface on
the display
Alternatively DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be integrated into
the engineering tool over the PROFIBUS GSD file
(e.g. STEP 7 versions below V5.4 or engineering tools from
third-party software houses).
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
Application
Short startup times through simple configuration at the press

of a button and testing of the AS-Interface line using the
display or web interface
slave failure thanks to user-friendly diagnostics using the display or web interface and through simple module exchange
with the help of the C-PLUG exchange medium
Reduced amount of engineering work thanks to user-friendly
configuration of Siemens slaves using the slave catalog in
HW-Config (STEP 7)
Costs saved by the double AS-Interface master when large
volumes of project data are involved
Saves the need for AS-i power supply with AS-i Power24V:
The AS-Interface cable assembly is fed through an existing
24 V DC PELV power supply unit. For decoupling, an AS-i data
decoupling module is required, see power supply units and
data decoupling modules.
Standard mode with AS-Interface power supply (see power
supply units and data decoupling modules) possible without
restrictions, whereby no further operational voltage is required.
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is a PROFIBUS DP-V1 slave

(according to IEC 61158/IEC 61784) and an AS-Interface master
(based on AS-Interface Specification V3.0 according to
IEC 62026-2). It enables transparent data access to
AS-Interface from PROFIBUS DP.
Exchanging data with the PROFIBUS DP master
PROFIBUS DP masters (DP-V0) can exchange I/O data with
AS-Interface in cyclic mode. PROFIBUS DP masters with acyclic
services (DP-V1) are able in addition to initiate AS-Interface
master calls (e.g. reading/writing the AS-i configuration during
normal operation). As such, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is particularly well suited for a distributed construction and for connection of a lower-level AS-Interface network.
Single masters
For applications with typical volumes of project data, it is sufficient to use the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in its version as an
AS-Interface single master. The single master can operate up to
248 DI/248 DO, using 62 A/B slaves with 4 DI/4 DO each.
Double masters
For applications with large volumes of project data, the
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is used in its version as an AS-Interface
double master. In this case, twice the volume of project data can
be used on two AS-Interface lines running independently of
each other. The double master can operate up to 496 DI/496 DO,
using 2 AS-i networks each with 62 A/B slaves with 4DI/4DO
each.
PC with
SOFTNET-DP
S7-400
with CP 443-5 Extended
S7-300
e.g. with CP 342-5
SIMATIC HMI
PROFIBUS
DP/AS-i
LINK
Advanced
ET 200pro
PG, e.g.
with CP 5621
ET 200S
When DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is used
as double master
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
Slave
Safe
slave with
EMERGENCYSTOP
Laser
scanner
MSS
ASIsafe
3RA6
fuseless
compact
starter
Power
supply
Safe slave with

EMERGENCYSTOP
MSS
ASIsafe
IK10_40018a
LOGO!
Power
supply
Integration of AS-Interface on PROFIBUS through DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as single/double master
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/37
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Version
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Router between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface;
Degree of protection IP20;
including COMBICON plug-in screw terminals for connection of an AS-Interface cable (two AS-Interface cables for
double masters) and the optional 24 V supply;
corresponds to AS-Interface Specification 3.0;
dimensions (W x H x D / mm): 90 x 132 x 88.5
Combicon connection
Single master with display
6GK1415-2BA10
1 unit
42C
Double master with display
6GK1415-2BA20
1 unit
42C
C-PLUG
6GK1900-0AB00
1 unit
5N3
6XV1830-0EH10
1M
5K1
Without PG connection socket
1 unit
250
1 unit
250
PROFIBUS FastConnect Stripping Tool
6ES7972-0BA60-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB60-0XA0
6GK1905-6AA00
With PG connection socket
1 unit
5K2
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AE0
Accessories
Exchange medium for the simple exchange of devices in
the event of a fault; for accommodating configuration and
application data; can be used in SIMATIC NET products
with a C-PLUG slot
PROFIBUS FastConnect Standard Cable GP
FastConnect standard type with special design
for fast installation, 2-core, shielded
PROFIBUS FastConnect
RS485 bus connectors with angled cable feeder (35)
With insulation displacement connection,
the max. transmission rate is 12 Mbit/s
Activatable terminating resistor is integrated
Preset stripping tool for speedy stripping of PROFIBUS

FastConnect bus cables
IE FC RJ45 Plug 90
RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet, with robust
metal enclosure and integrated insulation displacement
contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90 cable feeder
1 pack = 1 unit
1 pack = 10 units
1 pack = 50 units
1 unit
5K1
1 10 units
5K1
1 50 units
5K1
More information
AS-i block library for PCS 7 for easy connection of AS-Interface
to PCS 7 see
Chapter 14
Industry Mall: "Automation"
"Industrial controls"
2/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E
Design
Setting of PROFIBUS DP address is possible by pressing a
button
LED indication of the PROFIBUS DP slave address, DP bus
faults and diagnostics
Two pushbuttons for switching over the operating state and for
adopting the existing ACTUAL configuration as the DESIRED
configuration
Functionality
Communications
The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E enables a DP master to access all
the slaves of an AS-Interface network.
'30
'36
$6L0
,.B
31
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E connects PROFIBUS DP to

AS-Interface and has the following features:
PROFIBUS DP slave and AS-Interface master
Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves, each with 4 digital inputs and
4 digital outputs as well as analog slaves can be connected
Supply from AS-Interface cable; hence no additional power
supply required
Suitable for AS-i Power24V (from product version 2 /
firmware version 3.1) and for Standard AS-i with 30 V voltage
Supports the uploading of the AS-Interface configuration in
STEP 7 V5.2 and higher
The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E occupies a standard 32 bytes of

input data and 32 bytes of output data in which the digital
I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves (standard and
A/B slaves) of an AS-i line are stored.
system of the DP master.
The analog I/O data can be accessed with the S7 system functions for read/write data records.
Configuration
The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is configured as follows:
With STEP 7 as of Version V5.1 SP2:
With STEP 7 configuring the AS-Interface configuration can be
uploaded in STEP 7 V5.2 and higher. Furthermore, AS-Interface slaves from Siemens can also be conveniently configured in HW Config (slave selection dialog).
By adopting the ACTUAL configuration of the AS-Interface by
using the SET pushbutton on the front panel
Alternatively, DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can be integrated by
means of the PROFIBUS GSD file in the engineering tool (e.g.
for STEP 7 V5.1 and lower or for non-Siemens engineering
tools).
Benefits
Reduction of installation costs because the power is supplied
entirely via the AS-Interface cable, which means that no additional power supply is required
Short startup times thanks to easy configuration at the touch
of a button
The LED indicators help reduce downtime and service times if

a slave fails
Easy and fast startup through reading out the AS-Interface
configuration
Application
The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is a PROFIBUS DP slave
(according to IEC 61158 / IEC 61784) and an AS-Interface
master (according to IEC 62026-2). It enables the AS-Interface
to be operated on PROFIBUS DP.
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can operate up to 248 DI/248 DO
when using 62 A/B slaves with 4DI/4DO each.
PROFIBUS DP Masters (DP-V0) can exchange digital I/O data

cyclically with the AS-Interface.
PROFIBUS DP masters with acyclic services (DP-V1) are also
able to exchange analog I/O data and initiate AS-Interface master calls (e.g. reading/writing the AS-i configuration during normal operation).
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/39
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
PC/IPC
with
CP 5621
S7-400
E.g. with
CP 443-5 Extended
S7-300 with DP-Master
PROFIBUS
DP/AS-Interface
Link 20E
AS-Interface
Safe
slave with
EMERGENCYSTOP
Digital/analog slaves
3RA6
compact
starter
Laser
scanners
IK10_40008a
LOGO!
Power
supply
MSS
ASIsafe
Transition from PROFIBUS DP to AS-Interface using DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Router between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface in degree of
protection IP20;
including screw terminals for connection of the AS-Interface
cable;
(dimensions without fixing lugs)
Screw terminals
}
6GK1415-2AA10
1 unit
42C
6XV1830-0EH10
1M
5K1
- Without PG connection socket
6ES7972-0BA52-0XA0
1 unit
250
- With PG connection socket
6ES7972-0BB52-0XA0
1 unit
250
- Without PG connection socket
6ES7972-0BA60-0XA0
1 unit
250
- With PG connection socket
6ES7972-0BB60-0XA0
1 unit
250
6GK1905-6AA00
1 unit
5K2
6GK1 415-2AA10
Accessories
PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable GP
FastConnect standard type with special design
for fast installation, 2-core, shielded
With insulation displacement connection,
the max. transmission rate is 12 Mbit/s
Activatable terminating resistor is integrated
RS485 bus connector with 90 cable feeder
RS485 bus connector with angled cable feeder (35)

Preset stripping tool for speedy stripping of
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus cables
More information
2/40
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i F-Link
Design
Rugged, slim plastic enclosure, degree of protection IP20, for
standard mounting rail or wall mounting (with adapter)
Compact design:
- LEDs in the front panel for indicating the operating state and
- 2 buttons on the front for startup and call-up of diagnostics
information
- 4 LEDs for display of the operating state of the device, of
PROFIBUS DP and the AS-Interface network
- Front PROFIBUS DP connection with sub D connector
- Removable terminal blocks for connection of AS-i +/- and
control supply voltage (over 24 V DC PELV power supply
unit)
- Narrow width (45 mm)
Fast device replacement in the event of a fault
Functionality
DP/AS-i F-Link
'30
'36
Communication principle
$6L0
,.B
31
The DP/AS-i F-Link is a compact, safety-related router between

PROFIBUS (DP Slave) and AS-Interface, with the following features:
Monitoring the inputs of safety-related digital AS-i slaves
(ASIsafe slaves) and forwarding of data through PROFIsafe.
No additional safety-related components required for the
AS-Interface (e.g. MSS ASIsafe Modular Safety System)
Can be used up to PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 and to
SIL 3 according to IEC 62061/IEC 61508.
Supports all AS-Interface master functions according to
the AS-Interface Specification V3.0
Typically easy transmission of non-safety-related input/output
data of all AS-i slaves
Direct integration in PROFIBUS networks.
Optional integration in PROFINET environments through
PROFINET/PROFIBUS gateway (IE/PB Link PN IO) or through
SIMATIC S7-315/317/319 F PN/DP or S7-416F-3 PN/DP
Connection to ET 200S with IM-F-CPU using DP master
module is possible
Optimum TIA integration in STEP 7 using Object Manager, integration in non-Siemens engineering tools using PROFIBUS
GSD file
Local diagnostics using LEDs and display with control keys
The PROFIBUS DP master or the safe control communicates

with the AS-Interface slaves over the DP/AS-i F-Link.
The AS-Interface process data are mapped in different data
areas for non-safety-related input and output data and safetyrelated input data.
Diagnostics
Extensive diagnostics is possible using the four LEDs, display
and control keys or SIMATIC S7. Further details can be found in
the manual.
Configuration
The DP/AS-i F-Link is configured as follows:
With STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP1: In particular, Siemens
AS-Interface slaves can be conveniently configured via the
slave selection dialog.
Uploading the actual configuration of an already configured
AS-Interface network in a STEP 7 project is possible.
Alternatively, DP/AS-i F-Link can be integrated by means of
the PROFIBUS GSD file in the engineering tool.
As a startup aid, it is also possible to adopt the ACTUAL configuration in the appliance storage device directly on the appliance to activate the AS-interface slaves.
Programming
In contrast to the MSS ASIsafe Modular Safety System, the
DP/AS-i F-Link is a pure gateway, which does not run through its
own safety logic. Programming of the safety function is implemented at the level of the higher-level fail-safe PLC, e.g.:
With Distributed Safety, Version V5.4 SP1 or higher for
SIMATIC S7-300F/416F
With the SAFETY INTEGRATED "SI-Basic" or
"SI-COMFORT NCU" Software for SINUMERIK 840D pl/sl
The safety and standard range can access the digital and
analog I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves directly
through the I/O address area of the CPU.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/41
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i F-Link
Benefits
Application
Gaps in (bus-based) safety technology closed: safety-related

signals (EMERGENCY-STOP, door interlock, light curtains
etc.) collected with AS-i and transferred to higher-level F-PLC.
This enables:
- Quick installation, easy commissioning: Use of AS-i virtues in
the field now fully consistent for Safety Integrated
- Cost-effective solution as ASIsafe is ideally suited for the
collection of "fewer but more distributed fail-safe bits"
Price advantage: As a fully fledged AS-i master according to
Specification V3.0, more inputs and outputs can be used, e.g.:
- Up to 248 DI/248 DO when using 62 A/B slaves with 4DI/4DO
each
- Up to 62 digital or analog slaves
Investment protection:
- Connection to PROFIBUS networks, such as
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or DP/AS-Interface Link 20E
- Downward compatibility to AS-Interface specification V2
- Open for modern automation concepts with AS-i
Teaching the code sequences of ASIsafe slaves is possible at
the press of a button
Reduced amount of engineering work thanks to user-friendly
configuration of all AS-i slaves from Siemens using the slave
selection dialog in HW-Config (STEP 7), including setting the
F-parameter of the ASIsafe slaves modeled on PROFIsafe
slaves
Cost-savings thanks to programming of the safety logic
with the familiar, powerful commands of the distributed safety
packages from the fail-safe SIMATIC PLC in F-FBD or F-LAD,
incl. TV-certified function blocks for typical safety applications
Use in machine tools under SINUMERIK 840 D (pI/sl) possible
slave failure thanks to user-friendly diagnostics using the display and through simple module exchange (only a few settings by control keys are required, without use of the configuring tool)
2/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
Links between PROFIsafe and ASIsafe

The DP/AS-i F-Link is a PROFIBUS DP-V1 slave (according to
IEC 61158 and IEC 61784) and an AS-Interface master (based
on AS-Interface Specification V3.0 according to IEC 62026-2).
It enables transparent data access to AS-Interface from
PROFIBUS DP. The DP/AS-i F-Link is also an AS-i master with
which safety-related input data can be passed from ASIsafe
slaves via the PROFIsafe protocol to a fail-safe CPU with
PROFIBUS DP master. No additional safety cabling or monitoring is required (in particular no MSS ASIsafe Modular Safety
System).
The transmission of binary values or analog values is possible
depending on the slave type. All slaves according to AS-Interface Specification V2.0, V2.1 or V3.0 can be used as AS-i slaves.
PROFIBUS DP masters according to DP-V0 or DP-V1 can exchange I/O data with lower-level AS-i slaves in cyclic mode.
PROFIBUS DP masters with acyclic services according to DP-V1
are able in addition to initiate AS-i command calls (e.g. reading/writing the AS-i configuration during normal operation). In
addition to digital I/O data, analog data can also be saved with
high performance in the cyclic I/O of a fail-safe S7-300/
S7-416 F-CPU.
In configuring mode the DP/AS-i F-Link reads in the configuration data of the peripherals on the AS-Interface. Slave addresses
can be set using the display and the control keys, and the code
sequences of safe AS-i slaves can be taught.
During operation, four display LEDs and the display provide detailed diagnostics information, which directly localizes the fault if
required. Using the PLC user program it is possible to read out
diagnostics data records and make them available to a higherlevel operating and monitoring system (e.g. WinCC flexible or
TRANSLINE HMI).
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i F-Link
Network connectivity
The DP/AS-i F-Link can be used in PROFIBUS and PROFINET

networks as follows:
HMI
SIMATIC
S7-300F
PROFIBUS
F-DI
AI/AO
DI/DO
SIMATIC
ET 200S
DP/AS-i
F-Link
(Spec. 3.0)
Motor
Optional
ASIsafe
module
SIRIUS
cableoperated
switch
SIRIUS
position
switch
SIRIUS
EMERGENCYSTOP
Light
curtain
Analog
Digital
Digital
I/O module I/O module I/O module
K60
K60R
K20
MSS
ASIsafe
Motor
SIRIUS
EMERGENCYSTOP
NSB0_01817b
AS-Interface
Integration in PROFIBUS networks under SIMATIC F PLC
HMI
SIMATIC
S7-300F
SIMATIC
ET 200S
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
F-DI
AI/AO
DI/DO
SIMATIC
ET 200pro
DP/AS-i
F-Link
(Spec. 3.0)
Motor
Motor
Optional
ASIsafe
module
SIRIUS
SIRIUS
cableposition
operated switch
switch
SIRIUS Light
EMER- curtain
GENCYSTOP
Analog
Digital
I/O module I/O module
K60
K60R
Digital
I/O module
K20
MSS
ASIsafe
Motor
SIRIUS
EMERGENCYSTOP
NSB0_01818b
AS-Interface
Integration in PROFINET networks under SIMATIC F PLC (alternatively through IE/PB Link)
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/43
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i F-Link
Further network connectivity options
Integration in PROFINET networks under SIMATIC F PLC
through IE/PB Link
Integration in SINUMERIK Power Line and Solution Line
Integration under non-Siemens fail-safe control systems using
PROFIBUS GSD file, see

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RK3141-1CD10
1 unit
42C
3RK3141-2CD10
1 unit
42C
DP/AS-i F-Link
Router between PROFIBUS DP and
AS-Interface for safety-related data transmission from
ASIsafe to PROFIBUS DP PROFIsafe in degree of
protection IP20;
not approved for AS-i Power24V;
DP/AS-i F-Link
More information
For more accessories for the PROFIBUS connection
see page 2/40.
For the DP/AS-i F-Link manual see
Circuit examples for safety systems with DP/AS-i F-Link see
The F-Link Object Manager must be installed for configuration
with STEP 7 / HW-Config see
2/44
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Overview
Communications
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
'30
'36
$6L0
*B,.B;;B
31
The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is a compact router between

PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet (PROFINET IO Device) and
AS-Interface, with the following features:
Single and double AS-Interface master (according to
AS-Interface Specification V3.0) for connection of 62 AS-Interface slaves or 124 AS-Interface slaves (with a double master)
User-friendly local diagnostics and startup by means of a full
graphic display and control keys or through a web interface
with a standard browser on the PC screen
Optimum TIA integration using STEP 7
Integration in non-Siemens engineering tools using the
PROFINET GSD file
Vertical integration (standard web interface) through Industrial
Ethernet
Supply via AS-Interface cable or with 24 V DC
Suitable for AS-i Power24V (from product version 4/firmware
version 2.2) and for AS-Interface with 30 V voltage
Module exchange without entering the connection parameters
(IP address etc.) using C-PLUG (optional)
Design
COMBICON plug-in screw terminals
Compact design:
- Pixel graphics display in the front panel for detailed display
of the operating state and readiness for operation of all
connected AS-Interface slaves
- Six pushbuttons for starting up and testing the AS-Interface
line directly on the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
- LED display of the operating state of PROFINET IO and
AS-Interface
- Integrated 2-port switch (RJ45 socket) for connection to
Industrial Ethernet
Small mounting depth thanks to recessed plug mounting
The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO enables a PROFINET IO controller to

cyclically access the I/O data of all the slaves of a lower-level
AS-Interface segment. Also supported are the expanded slave
types with higher I/O data volume according to AS-i Specification V3.0.
The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO occupies the following address area:
As a single master with full expansion: 62 bytes of input data
and 62 bytes of output data in which the I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves (standard and A/B slaves) of an
AS-i line are stored.
As double master, double the number of bytes
Optional additional I/O bytes for data from analog slaves
system of the IO controller.
The integrated evaluation of analog signals is just as easy as access to digital values because the analog process data also lie
directly in the I/O address area of the CPU.
PROFINET IO controllers are able in addition to initiate AS-Interface master calls (e.g. to write parameters, change addresses,
read diagnostic values) through the acyclic PROFINET services.
Using an operating display in AS-Interface Link it is possible to
fully commission the lower-level AS-i line.
The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is equipped with two Ethernet ports
which are connected by an internal switch. With the Ethernet it is
possible in addition to use the integrated web server. The web
server can be called up with any standard web browser (e.g.
Internet Explorer) without additional software. It enables the PC
to present all diagnostics information and to display the set bus
configuration and parameters as well as their adaptation where
applicable. Firmware updates are also possible using this port.
The optional C-PLUG supports module exchange without entering the connection parameters (e.g. IP address), keeping downtimes to a minimum in the event of a fault.
Diagnostics
The following diagnostics is possible using the display and
control keys, web interface or STEP 7:
Operating state of the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Status of the link as a PROFINET IO device
Diagnostics of the AS-Interface network
Message frame statistics
Standard diagnostics pages in the web interface for fast diagnostics access through Ethernet using a standard browser
The reporting of diagnostic events is optionally possible via
E-Mail or SNMP Trap. The integrated diagnostic buffer saves
the events including time stamp.
Notes on safety
Configuration
The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is configured as follows:
STEP 7 V5.4 or higher is required for configuring the full functional scope of the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO. With STEP 7 configuring the AS-Interface configuration can be uploaded in STEP 7
V5.4 SP2 and higher. Furthermore, AS-Interface slaves from
Siemens can also be conveniently configured in HW Config
(slave selection dialog).
Alternatively, IE/AS-i LINK PN IO can be integrated by means
of the PROFINET GSD file in the engineering tool (e.g. for
STEP 7 V5.4 SP2 and lower, TIA portal, or for non-Siemens
engineering tools).
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/45
Functionality
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Application
Short startup times through simple configuration at the press

of a button and testing of the AS-Interface line using the display or web interface
slave failure thanks to user-friendly diagnostics using the display or web interface
Saves the need for AS-i power supply with AS-i Power24V:
The AS-Interface cable assembly is fed through an existing
24 V DC PELV power supply unit. For decoupling, an AS-i data
decoupling module is required, see power supply units and
data decoupling modules.
Standard mode with AS-Interface power supply (see power
supply units and data decoupling modules) possible without
restrictions, whereby no further operational voltage is required
The DP/AS-i LINK PN IO is a PROFINET IO device (according to

IEC 61158/IEC 61784) and an AS-Interface master (based on
AS-Interface Specification V3.0 according to IEC 62026-2). It enables transparent data access to AS-Interface from Industrial
Ethernet.
Exchanging data with PROFINET IO controllers
PROFINET IO controllers can exchange I/O data with AS-Interface in cyclic mode and can perform AS-i master calls in addition with acyclic services (e.g. reading/writing the AS-i configuration during normal operation). IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is, therefore,
suitable for distributed configurations and for integrating a lowerlevel AS-Interface network.
Single masters
For applications with typical volumes of project data, it is
sufficient to use the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO in its version as an
AS-i single master. The single master can operate up to
248 DI/248 DO, using 62 A/B slaves with 4DI/4DO each.
Double masters
For applications with large volumes of project data, the
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is used in its version as an AS-i double master. In this case, twice the volume of project data can be used on
two AS-i lines running independently of each other. The double
master can operate up to 496 DI/496 DO, using 2 AS-i networks
with 62 A/B slaves each with 4DI/4DO each.
PC
with SOFTNET PN IO
S7-300
e.g. with CP 343-1
S7-400
with CP 443-1
Advanced
SIMATIC HMI
SCALANCE
X208
PROFINET
IE/AS-i
LINK
PN IO
Industrial Ethernet
ET 200pro
ET 200S
When IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is used
as double master
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
LOGO!
Power
supply
Safe
Slave
slave with
EMERGENCYSTOP
Laser
scanner
MSS
ASIsafe
3RA6
fuseless
compact
starter
Power
supply
Integration of AS-Interface on PROFINET through IE/AS-i LINK PN IO as single/double master
2/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
Safe
slave with
EMERGENCYSTOP
MSS
ASIsafe
G_IK10_XX_40017
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Routers
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Wireless communication
Sample uses are applications which up to now have been performed with fault-prone tow chain or collector wire technology.
Maintenance costs are thus reduced.
Using an upstream IWLAN client module, e.g.

SCALANCE W746-1PRO, an AS-Interface line can be integrated
in the PROFINET world by wireless means.
S7-400 with CP 443-1

Radio cell 1
Radio cell 2
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Field PG
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
SIMATIC HMI
Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
IE/AS-i
LINK
PN IO
IE/AS-i
LINK
PN IO
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
G_IK10_XX_30143
AS-Interface
IE/AS-i
LINK
PN IO
Driverless transportation system (AGVS)
Wireless communication between Industrial Ethernet and AS-Interface components

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Router between PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet and
AS-Interface in degree of protection IP20;
including COMBICON plug-in screw terminals for
connection of an AS-Interface cable, (two AS-Interface
cables for double masters) and the optional 24 V supply;
corresponds to AS-Interface Specification 3.0;
dimensions (W x H x D / mm): 90 x 132 x 88.5
Combicon connection
Single master with display
6GK1411-2AB10
1 unit
42C
Double master with display
6GK1411-2AB20
1 unit
42C
C-PLUG
6GK1900-0AB00
1 unit
5N3
1 pack = 1 unit
1 unit
5K1
10 units
5K1
1 pack = 50 units
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AE0
1 pack = 10 units
50 units
5K1
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
Accessories
Exchange medium for the simple exchange of devices in
the event of a fault; for accommodating configuration and
application data; can be used in SIMATIC NET products
with a C-PLUG slot
IE FC RJ45 Plug 90
RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet, with robust
metal enclosure and integrated insulation displacement
contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90 cable feeder
More information
Manuals see http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29992487/13330
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/47
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
I/O modules for use in the field, high degree of
protection: Digital I/O modules, IP67 - Introduction
Overview
K60
K20
Three coordinated series of AS-Interface compact modules with

digital and analog compact modules and a high degree of protection are available for use in the field:
Series K60 (digital and analog)
Series K45 (digital)
Series K20 (digital)
All compact modules are characterized by particularly simple
handling. The K60 and K45 modules are mounted with a mounting plate. The mounting plate is used to mount the AS-Interface
flat cables and enables mounting on a wall or standard mounting
rail.
The particularly narrow K20 modules are directly mounted without a mounting plate and connected to the AS-Interface using a
round cable.
K45
Connection types
For flexible connection of different sensors and actuators, the
following PIN assignments are available on the I/O modules with
M12 sockets:
Standard assignment
With the standard assignment, one sensor/actuator is connected
per M12 socket. In this case the signal for the outputs is acquired at PIN4 while the signal for the inputs is acquired at PIN4
and PIN2. As the result, sensors can be connected directly to
PIN2 and PIN4.
Y assignment
With the Y assignment, two sensors or two actuators can be connected to one M12 socket. In this case, both PIN4 and PIN2 are
provided for one sensor signal and one actuator signal on each
M12 socket.
Y-II assignment
The Y-II assignment offers the following options:
Individual connection of a sensor/actuator to one M12 socket
Connection of two sensors/actuators to one M12 socket
as follows:
- The signal of the first sensor/actuator is connected to PIN4 of
the first socket.
- The signal of the second sensor/actuator is connected to
PIN2 of the first socket and to PIN4 of the second socket.
In this case, the second socket is not required and is closed
with a sealing cap.
2/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
Overview of digital compact modules

The following table provides an overview of the important
features of the digital compact modules.
.
Version
K60
K45
K20
8 inputs/2 outputs
--
--
8 inputs
--
4 inputs/4 outputs
4 inputs/3 outputs
--
--
4 inputs/2 outputs
--
--
4 inputs
2 inputs/2 outputs
--
4 outputs
3 outputs
--
--
Flat cable
Round cable
AS-Interface connection Flat cable /

round cable
I/O connection method
M12
M12/M8
M12/M8
Pin assignment
Standard/Y-II/Y
Standard/Y
Standard/Y
Degree of protection
IP65/IP67/IP68/IP69K IP65/IP67
IP65/IP67
ATEX 3D (Zone 22)
--
--
Extended
address mode
Available
-- Not available
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
protection: Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60
Overview
Mounting and connection of the AS-Interface shaped cables

Assembly of the K60 modules is performed with a mounting
plate which accommodates the AS-Interface shaped cables.
Two different mounting plates are offered for
Wall mounting
Standard rail mounting
The mounting plate and the compact module are joined together
by means of a screw, with simultaneous contacting of the AS-Interface cable by the service-proven insulation piercing method.
Addressing and connection of the sensors/actuators
Addressing of the K60 modules is performed using an addressing socket integrated in the compact module. The addresses
can also be assigned after installed.
K60 modules with a maximum of four digital inputs and outputs
These compact modules contain the M12 standard connections
for inputs and outputs. Using M12 standard connectors,
a maximum of four sensors and four actuators can be connected
to the compact module.
K60 data couplers

An AS-Interface data coupler has been added to the K60 compact module range. Integrated in this module are two AS-i slaves
which are connected to two different AS-i networks. Each of the
two integrated slaves has four virtual inputs and four virtual
outputs. The bidirectional data transmission of four data bits
between two AS-i networks is thus possible in a simple and costeffective manner. The data coupler needs its own address in
each AS-i network.
Each AS-i network works with a different cycle time depending
on the number of stations. Hence two AS-i networks are not necessarily synchronous. For this reason the AS-i data coupler can
be used to transmit only standard data and no safety data.
K60 compact modules for use in hazardous areas (ATEX)
Two versions of the K60 modules are available for operation in
Zone 22 hazardous areas according to Classification II 3D
(dusty atmosphere, non-conductive dust). The version with four
inputs and four outputs has the designation (Ex) II 3D Ex tD A22
IP65X T75C and the version with four inputs has the designation
(Ex) II 3D Ex tD A22 IP65X T60C.
Special conditions have to be observed for the safe operation of
these devices. In particular the module must be protected by
suitable protective measures from mechanical damage.
K60 compact modules with a maximum of eight digital inputs

These modules have eight digital inputs for connection through
M12 plugs.
The module requires two AS-Interface addresses for processing
all eight inputs. The addressing can thus be performed through
a double addressing socket integrated in the module.
K60 compact modules with four digital inputs and outputs
according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0
The extended address mode (A/B addresses) AS-Interface
Specification 3.0 enables the connection of up to 62 slaves on
one AS-Interface network. With the extended address mode,
four outputs are now possible even with A/B slaves (instead of
only three outputs possible up to now with Specification 2.1).
Hence with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there are
now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-i network.
Please note, however,
that these modules can be used only with a master according
to AS-i Specification 3.0
that the cycle times for the outputs may be up to 20 ms.
More information
For other conditions for safe operation see
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/49
The K60 digital AS-Interface compact modules are characterized by optimized handling characteristics and user-friendliness. They permit the mounting times and startup times of
AS-Interface to be reduced by up to 40 %.
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves

DT Article No.
Version
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K60

PNP transistor
Width 60 mm
Connection method: M12
Type
3RK1400-1DQ000AA3
Current
Slave type
carrying
capacity of
outputs
Pin
assignment
Sensor
power
supply off
2A
A/B
Special
AS-i
3RK2400-1HQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
Standard
Y-II
AS-i
3RK1200-0DQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
A/B
Y-II
AS-i
3RK2200-0DQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
A/B
Y-II
Uaux
3RK2200-1DQ00-1AA3
1 unit
42C
2A
Standard
Y-II
AS-i
3RK1400-1DQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2A
Standard
Standard AS-i
3RK1400-1CQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
1A
Standard
Y-II
AS-i
3RK1400-1DQ01-0AA3
1 unit
42C
1A
Standard
Standard AS-i
3RK1400-1DQ03-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2A
A/B (Spec. 3.0)
Y-II
AS-i
3RK2400-1DQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2A
A/B (Spec. 3.0)
Y-II
Uaux
3RK2400-1DQ00-1AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs/
3 outputs
2A
A/B
Y-II
AS-i
3RK2400-1FQ03-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs/
2 outputs
2A
Standard
Y-II
AS-i
3RK1400-1MQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs
--
Standard
Y-II
AS-i
3RK1200-0CQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
A/B
Y-II
AS-i
3RK2200-0CQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2x2 inputs/
2x2 outputs
1A
Standard
AS-i
3RK1400-1DQ02-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 outputs
2A
Standard
Y-II
--
3RK1100-1CQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2A
A/B (Spec. 3.0)
Y-II
--
3RK2100-1CQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
8 inputs/
2 outputs1)
1)
8 inputs
4 inputs/
4 outputs
Digital I/O modules IP67 K60,

version ATEX (Ex) II 3D Ex tD A22 IP65X T75C/60C
PNP transistor
Width 60 mm
Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA
Connection method: M12
Type
Current carrying capacity

of outputs
Slave
type
Pin
assignment
4 inputs/
4 outputs
2A
Standard Y-II
3RK1400-1DQ05-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs
--
Standard Y-II
3RK1200-0CQ05-0AA3
1 unit
42C
3RK1408-8SQ00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Wall mounting
3RK1901-0CA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CB01
1 unit
42C

3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
Sealing sets
3RK1902-0AR00
100
42D
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K60 data couplers

Type
Current carrying capacity of

outputs
Slave
type
Pin
assignment
Data coupler
4 inputs/4 outputs (virtual)
--
Standard --
Accessories
K60 mounting plates
Suitable for all K60 compact modules
3RK1901-0CA00
3RK1901-1KA00
5 units
For K60 mounting plate and standard distributor

Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate
3RK1902-0AR00
1)
One set contains one straight and one shaped seal
2/50
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
protection: Digital I/O modules, IP68/IP69K K60R
Overview
Connection
NSA0_00339e
Operation in particularly harsh environments
K60R
IP68
K60R
IP68
K60R
IP68
Distributor
K60R module in degree of protection IP68/IP69K
Modules with degree of protection IP67 cannot be used in areas

exposed to permanently high levels of humidity, in applications
with drilling emulsions and cutting oils or when cleaning with
high-pressure cleaners. The answer for these applications is
provided by the expansion of the K60 compact modules with the
K60R module with degree of protection IP68/IP69K.
The K60R modules are connected instead of the AS-Interface
flat cable using a round cable with M12 cable box.
The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power
supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable.
Degree of protection IP68 permits many new applications that
were impossible with the former field modules with degree of
protection IP67. In applications such as filling plants or machine
tools, the K60R with degree of protection IP68 enables the module to be used directly in zones exposed to permanent loading
by humidity. It is thus possible to make even more rigorous savings in wiring with AS-Interface. For more information on IP68
test conditions see section "IP68/IP69K tests."
3RK1901-1TR00
IP67
K60R connection options
In the IP67 environment, the service-proven standard components are connected using flat cables. Spur lines are laid into the
IP68 environment by means of an AS-Interface M12 feeder
(3RK1901-1NR..). The module is connected with a round cable
to an M12 cable box. For this purpose, the module has an M12
bus connection instead of the former addressing socket. The
AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage are
routed together in a 4-pole round cable. There must be no
ground conductor in this round cable. Connection to ground is
made through the mounting plate.
In the IP68 environment, only cables with extruded M12 plugs
may be used.
Cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, such as is regularly performed in the food and drinks industry for instance, is possible
without difficulty (IP69K).
To connect more than one K60R module to one spur line,

the spur line can be split again using a T distributor
(3RK1901-1TR00) with degree of protection IP68.
In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the

AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. With the K60R module,
a round cable connection is possible for direct connection to a
round cable. No adapter is required.
Please note the following conditions:

The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface apply. For all
M12 connecting cables, the maximum permissible current is
limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to
just 0.34 mm. For connection of the K60R modules, the aforementioned M12 connecting cables can be used for the spur
lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic resistance
(approx. 0.11/m) must be taken into account.
For round cable connections with shared AS-i and Uaux in a
single cable, the following maximum lengths apply:
- Per spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m
- Total of all round cable segments in an AS-Interface network:
maximum 20 m
Mounting
The same mounting plates are used as for the K60 modules. Instead of using flat cables, the K60R is connected using a 4-pole
round cable with an M12 connection. With the K60R the mounting plate thus serves only as a fixture and ground terminal.
Addressing
Addressing is performed using the same socket as for the bus
connection. Connecting the module to the addressing unit takes
place over a 3-pole standard M12 cable.
When the mounting is finished, the module is connected with the
addressing cable to the addressing unit and addressed. The addressing cable is then removed and the module connected to
the bus cable.
IP68/IP69K tests
K60R modules were tested with the following tests:
Stricter test than IP67: 90 min at 1.8 m depth of water
(IP67: 30 min at 1 m depth of water)
Salt water test: Five months in salt water, 20 cm deep, at room
temperature
Test with particularly creepable oil: Five months completely
under oil at room temperature
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/51
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves

protection: Digital I/O modules, IP68/IP69K K60R
Test with drilling emulsion: Five months at room temperature
(components of the drilling emulsion: Anionic and non-ionic
emulsifiers, paraffinic low-aromatic mineral oil, boric acid
alkanolamines, corrosion inhibitors, oil content 40 %)
Test in oil bath (Excelence 416 oil) with alternating oil bath
temperature: 130 cycles of 15 to 55 C, two months
Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner according to IP69K:
80 to 100 bar, 10 to 15 cm distance, time per side > 30 s, water
temperature 80 C
To simulate requirements as realistically as possible, the

modules were artificially aged prior to the tests by 15 temperature cycles of -25/+85 C. During the test, the modules were
connected to 3RX1 connecting cables. Unassigned connections were closed with 3RK1901-1KA00 sealing caps.
Note:
Sealing caps and M12 connections must be tightened with the
correct torque.

Version
DT
Article No.
Digital I/O modules IP68/IP69K - K60R
Wall mounting
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1400-1CR00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CB01
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
4 inputs/4 outputs
Width 60 mm
IP68/IP69K
Standard assignment
Current carrying capacity:
- 200 mA (inputs)
- 2 A (outputs)
3RK1400-1CR00-0AA3
Standard slave
Accessories
K60 mounting plates
Suitable for all K60 and K60R compact modules
3RK1901-0CA00
3RK1901-1KA00
AS-Interface M12 feeders, current carrying capacity up to 4 A
For flat cable
For
Cable
length
Cable end in
feeder
AS-i/Uaux
M12 socket
--
Not available
3RK1901-1NR20
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12 cable
box
1m
Not available
3RK1901-1NR21
1 unit
42C
2m
Not available
3RK1901-1NR22
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1NR04
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1TR00
1 unit
42C
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 unit
42D
AS-i/Uaux
M12 cable
box
3RK1901-1NR21
AS-Interface M12 feeders, 4-fold, current carrying capacity
up to 4 A
For flat cable
For
AS-i/Uaux
4-fold M12
-socket
delivery
includes coupling module
3RK1901-1NR04
Cable
length
Cable end in
feeder
Not available
M12-T distributors
IP68
3RK1901-1TR00
1 x M12 plug
2 x M12 box
M12 connecting cables
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
3-pole
For addressing AS-i slaves with M12 bus connection
Cable length 1.5 m
2/52
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Overview
Addressing of the K45 compact modules is performed using an
addressing socket integrated in the module. The addresses can
be assigned even when mounted.
K45 modules with a maximum of four digital inputs and outputs
These compact modules contain up to four M12 standard connections or M8 standard connections for inputs and outputs.
Using M12 standard connectors or M8 standard connectors, a
maximum of four sensors and four actuators can be connected
to the compact module. Depending upon the module, the sockets can have a double assignment.
Pin assignment: Y i.e. via a socket, two sensors or
one sensor/one actuator is connected.
K45 modules with a maximum of eight digital inputs
K45 compact modules
The K45 series of compact modules supplements the large K60

compact modules which have a proven track record in industry.
They are the logical consequence for rounding off the bottom
end of the existing product range.
The acclaimed advantages of the existing K60 compact modules are fully emulated by the K45 modules. The K45 modules,
however, have a considerably smaller footprint and mounting
depth.
Yet in spite of these small dimensions all the modules have large
labels and an integrated addressing socket.
Two mounting plates are offered for the K45 compact modules:
The mounting plate for wall mounting has a hole pattern that is
identical to that of the K60 compact modules. This means that
K60 compact modules can be mounted together with K45
modules in an aligned arrangement. The shaped cables can
be inserted in the recesses of the mounting plates where they
cause no hindrance.
The mounting plate for standard rail mounting
Connection of the AS-Interface shaped cables
The mounting plate and the compact module are joined together
by means of a screw, with simultaneous contacting of the AS-Interface cable by the service-proven insulation piercing method.
These modules have eight digital inputs for connection through

M12 plugs. The sockets have a double assignment
The module requires two AS-Interface addresses for processing
all eight inputs. The addresses can be assigned through a double addressing socket integrated in the module.
K45 modules with four digital inputs and outputs
according to AS-i Specification 3.0
The extended address mode (A/B addresses) according to
AS-Interface Specification 3.0 enables the connection of up to
62 slaves on one AS-i network. With this extended address
mode, four outputs are now possible even with A/B slaves (instead of only three outputs possible up to now with Specification
2.1). Hence with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there
are now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one
AS-Interface network.
Please note, however,
that these modules can be used only with a master according
to AS-i Specification 3.0
that the cycle times for the outputs may be up to 20 ms.
Depending upon the module, the sockets can have a double
assignment.
Now, mounting the AS-Interface shaped cables is in fact easier

than ever. The yellow and black AS-Interface shaped cable can
be inserted into the mounting plates from the left or right regardless of the position of the coding lug. The correct polarity of the
applied voltages is thus guaranteed.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/53
Addressing and connection of the sensors/actuators
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves

DT Article No.
Version
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Digital I/O modules, IP67 - K45

PNP transistor
Width 45 mm
Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA
Type
Current
Slave type Pin
carrying
assigncapacity of
ment
outputs
Uaux
24 V
Connection
methods
8 inputs1)
--
A/B
--
M12
3RK2200-0DQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs
--
Standard
Standard --
M12
3RK1200-0CQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
Standard
Standard --
M8 screw
3RK1200-0CT20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
A/B
Standard --
M12
3RK2200-0CQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
A/B
Standard --
M8 screw
3RK2200-0CT20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 x 2 inputs
--
A/B
--
M12
3RK2200-0CQ22-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 inputs/
2 outputs
2 A2)
Standard
Standard
M12
3RK1400-1BQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 x (1 input/
1 output)
0.2 A
Standard
--
M12
3RK1400-0GQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 x (1 input/
1 output)
0.2 A
A/B
Y
(Spec. 3.0)
--
M12
3RK2400-0GQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 x (1 input/
1 output)
0.5 A
A/B
Y
(Spec. 3.0)
M12
3RK2400-1GQ20-1AA3
1 unit
42C
4 outputs
1A
A/B
Standard
(Spec. 3.0)
M12
3RK2100-1CQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
3 outputs
1A
A/B
Standard
M12
3RK2100-1EQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 outputs
1A
Standard
Standard
M12
3RK1100-1CQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 outputs/
2 inputs
2A
A/B
Standard
M12
3RK2400-1BQ20-0AA3
1 unit
42C
For wall mounting
3RK1901-2EA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-2DA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
For free M8 sockets
3RK1901-1PN00
100 10 units
42C
3RK14000GQ20-0AA3
Accessories
K45 mounting plates
3RK1901-2EA00
AS-Interface sealing caps
3RK1901-1KA00
3RK1901-1PN00
1)
Available
-- Not available
2/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
2)

The typical current carrying capacity per output increases with version
"E12" from 1.5 to 2 A (available since approx. 07/2003).

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
The flexibility of the round cable means that it can also be used
on moving machine parts without any problems. The K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as their non-encapsulated design makes them particularly light in weight.
In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the
AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. In this case, the K20
modules support direct connection to the round cable. No flat to
round cable adapter is required.
The K20 compact module range includes standard AS-Interface
modules, as well as an ASIsafe version for the connection of
safety-related sensors, such as EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons or protective door monitoring. All standard AS-Interface
K20 modules support, as far as technically possible, the expanded address mode (A/B addresses) according to AS-Interface specification 2.1, which enables connection of 62 stations
to an AS-Interface network. The K20 module with four inputs and
four outputs works in expanded address mode according to ASInterface specification 3.0 which, for the first time, supports four
outputs with an A/B slave, thus enabling 248 inputs and 248 outputs in a fully expanded AS-Interface network.
Digital I/O modules IP67 - K20
The K20 compact module series rounds off the AS-Interface

compact modules with a particularly slim design and a width of
a mere 20 mm. Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions,
these modules are particularly suited for handling machine applications in the field of production engineering where modules
need to be arranged in the smallest of spaces.
For particularly space-saving dimensions, the sensors and actuators are connected over M8 plug-in connectors. Alternatively,
M12 connectors with Y assignment can be used.
Robotics is yet another application area. Instead of the AS-Interface flat cable, the K20 modules are connected to AS-Interface
over a round cable with M12 cable box.
The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power
supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable.
This enables extremely compact installation.

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Digital I/O modules, IP67 K20

Width 20 mm
3RK2200-0CT30-0AA3
Type
Current
carrying
capacity
of outputs
Slave type
Pin
assignment
4 inputs
--
A/B
Standard M8
3RK2200-0CT30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
--
A/B
3RK2200-0CQ30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 inputs/
2 outputs
A/B
Standard M8
3RK2400-1BT30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
A/B
3RK2400-1BQ30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 outputs
A/B
Standard M8
(Spec. 3.0)
3RK2100-1CT30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs/
4 outputs
Standard
Standard M8
3RK1400-1CT30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
A/B
Standard M8
(Spec. 3.0)
3RK2400-1CT30-0AA3
1 unit
42C
2 safe
inputs
--
Standard
3RK1205-0BQ30-0AA3
1 unit
42C

Y-II
Connection
methods
M12
M12
M12
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/55
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Version
DT Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Accessories
AS-Interface sealing caps
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
For free M8 sockets
3RK1901-1PN00
100 10 units
42C
AS-Interface compact distributors,

for AS-Interface flat cable
3RK1901-1NN10
1 unit
42C
3RX9801-0AA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1KA00
3RK1901-1PN00
Current carrying capacity up to 8 A

3RK1901-1NN10
AS-Interface M12 feeders
3RX9801-0AA00
For flat cable
For
Cable
length
Cable end in
feeder
AS-i
M12 socket
--
Available

Degree of protection IP67/IP68/IP69K
3RK1901-1NR10
3RK1901-1NR11
For flat cable
For
Cable
length
Cable end in
feeder
AS-i
M12 socket
--
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR10
1 unit
42C
AS-i
M12
cable box
1m
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR11
1 unit
42C
AS-i
M12
cable box
2m
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR12
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12 socket
--
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR20
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12
cable box
1m
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR21
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12
cable box
2m
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR22
1 unit
42C
Cable
length
Cable end in
feeder
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR04
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1TR00
1 unit
42C
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
1 unit
250
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 unit
42D
AS-Interface M12 feeders, 4-fold

For flat cable
For
AS-i/Uaux
4-fold M12
-socket,
delivery
includes
coupling module
3RK1901-1NR04
M12 T distributors
IP68
3RK1901-1TR00
1 x M12 plug
2 x M12 box
M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs
For connection of two sensors to one M12 socket with
Y assignment
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
M12 connecting cables
3-pole
For addressing AS-i slaves with M12 bus connection
Cable length 1.5 m
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
2/56
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
protection: Analog I/O modules, IP67 K60
Benefits
Analog modules are just as easy to integrate in AS-Interface
as digital modules
Analog values can be easily detected and issued locally
Preprocessing of the analog value transmission in the master
enables rapid evaluation of the analog values
Up to four values can be detected using one analog module
Faster transmission and conversion of analog values thanks to
the new option for a switchover to single-channel operation
In addition, Specification 3.0 now also offers:
A/B technology, now also with analog modules
On average, double fast transmission times
(only 3 or 4 cycles, depending on the resolution selected)
Variable adjustable mode: 12 bit or 14 bit resolution,
1 or 2-channel, selectable over the ID1 code
Extra simple handling of analog value processing with
masters of Specification 3.0, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
K60 analog compact module
AS-Interface analog modules from the K60 compact series detect or issue analog signals locally. These modules are linked to
the higher-level controller through an AS-Interface master according to specification 2.1 or specification 3.0.
The analog modules are divided into the following groups:
Input modules
- for sensors with current signal
- for sensors with voltage signal
- for sensors with thermal resistor
Output modules
- for current actuators
- for voltage actuators
The input modules according to profile 7.3/7.4 are available with
two or four input channels. It is possible in addition to convert the
two-channel module to using only one input channel, thus enabling very short times before the analog value is available. The
conversion is effected by means of a jumper plug at socket 3.
The transmission times achieved with analog modules according to Profile 7.A.9 are shorter by half than those achieved with
Profile 7.3/7.4. Operation is adjustable in this case, e.g. it is possible to choose with the ID1 Code whether the module is operated with one or two channels.
The output modules are configured as two-channel modules as
standard.
The input and output channels are electrically separated from
the AS-Interface network. If sensors with a higher power requirement are to be connected, more power can be supplied through
the auxiliary voltage as an alternative to the internal supply.
In the manual, the modules are presented in great detail along
with their technical specifications and in-depth notes on operation. Sample function blocks round off the manual.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/57
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Version
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Analog I/O modules IP67 - K60,

analog profile 7.3
Slave type: Standard
Width 60 mm
3RK1207-1BQ44-0AA3
Inputs
Type
Measuring range
1 or 2 inputs
(selectable using
jumper plug at
socket 3)
Current
4 ... 20 mA or
20 mA
(selectable)1)
3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Voltage
10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
3RK1207-2BQ40-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Thermal resistance Pt 100 or

Ni 100 or
0 ... 600
(selectable)1)
3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Current
4 ... 20 mA or
20 mA
(selectable)
3RK1207-1BQ44-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Voltage
10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
3RK1207-2BQ44-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Thermal resistance Pt 100 or

Ni 100 or
0 ... 600
(selectable)
3RK1207-3BQ44-0AA3
1 unit
42C
4 inputs
Outputs
Type
Output range
2 outputs
Current
for 2-wire
actuators
4 ... 20 mA or
20 mA or
0 ... 20 mA
(selectable)1)
3RK1107-1BQ40-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Voltage
for 2-wire
actuators
10 V or
0 ... 10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
3RK1107-2BQ40-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Analog I/O modules IP67 - K60,

analog profile 7.A.9
Slave type: A/B (Spec. 3.0)
Width 60 mm
Inputs
Type
Measuring range
1 or 2 inputs
(variably
adjustable)
Current
4 ... 20 mA or
20 mA
(selectable)
3RK2207-1BQ50-0AA3
1 unit
42C
Voltage
10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
3RK2207-2BQ50-0AA3
1 unit
42C
3RK2207-2BQ50-0AA3
1)
Some modules are available in the extended temperature range (from -25 to 70 C) and for use in difficult environmental conditions
(coated according to environment standard IEC 60721).
Description
SIPLUS Article No.
Corresponds to module
SIPLUS AS-Interface 2AA, IP67
SIPLUS AS-Interface 2AI, IP67
SIPLUS AS-Interface 2AI, IP67
6AG1107-1BQ40-7AA3
6AG1207-1BQ40-7AA3
6AG1207-3BQ40-7AA3
3RK1107-1BQ40-0AA3
3RK1207-1BQ40-0AA3
3RK1207-3BQ40-0AA3
For more information see www.siemens.com/siplus-extreme
2/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Version
Accessories
Manual "AS-Interface Analog Modules K60"
see
K60 mounting plates
Wall mounting
3RK1901-0CA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CB01
1 unit
42C
M12 sealing caps
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
Sealing sets
3RK1902-0AR00
100
5 units
42D
3RK1901-1AA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CA00
3RK1901-1KA00
For mounting plate K60 and distributor
3RK1902-0AR00

Jumper plugs
For changing over the 2-channel input modules
3RK1901-1AA00

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/59
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Introduction
Overview
SlimLine S22.5/S45
Flat module
For AS-Interface applications inside control cabinets, there are

various module series for the most diverse requirements:
SlimLine S22.5
SlimLine S45
F90 module
Flat module
All modules of these series can be snap-mounted directly on a
standard mounting rail or be fastened using screws.
AS-Interface modules in IP20 have direct terminals for the
AS-Interface cables and therefore do not require a base.
F90 module
Series
Spectrum
Mounting onto TH35

standard mounting rails
Wall mounting
using push-in lugs
(type 3RP1 903)
Other possibilities
SlimLine S22.5
4I (standard and A/B modules)
--
--
--
--
--
--
Integrated lugs for screw fixing
4O
2I/2O (steady-state/relay outputs)
Counters1)
Ground-fault detection modules1)
SlimLine S45
4I/4O (steady-state/relay outputs)

4I/4O with floating I/Os
4I/3O (A/B modules)
4I/4O (A/B modules Spec. 3.0)
F90 module
4I/4O (screw terminals)

4I/4O (connection using
Combicon connector)
16I
Flat module
4I/4O (screw terminals)
Available
-- Not available
1)
For more information about these modules

see "Modules with Special Functions" from page 2/67.
2/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
SlimLine
Overview
An addressing socket integrated at the front enables the module
to be addressed also when it is installed.
In addition to the digital input/output modules, there are modules
of design S22.5 with special functions. These include:
Counter modules
Ground-fault detection modules
For more information about these modules see
the section "Modules with special functions" on page 2/67
Industry Mall: Section "Automation"
"SIRIUS Industrial Controls"
"Industrial Communication"
"AS-Interface" "Slaves"
"Modules with Special Functions"
SlimLine S45 module (left) and S22.5 module (right)
The AS-Interface series of modules for the "SlimLine" control

cabinet with degree of protection IP20 creates space in the cabinet and in distributed local boxes.
For these modules, the priority was placed on a narrow design.
They have a width of only 22.5 mm or 45 mm.
Standard sensors/actuators and the AS-Interface cable can be
connected using removable screw terminals or spring-type terminals.
Integrated adapters enable mounting onto a standard mounting
rail. Disassembly from the standard mounting rail is quick and
easy and requires no tools.
With an additional accessory (push-in lugs), the modules can
also be screwed on.
The AS-Interface Specification 3.0 adds a number of completely

new features to the AS-Interface bus system. The extended address mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to
62 slaves on one AS-Interface network. With the extended address mode according to Specification 3.0, four outputs are now
possible for the first time even with A/B slaves (instead of only
three outputs possible up to now with Specification 2.1). Hence
with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there are now
248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-Interface
network.
Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves according to Specification 3.0 are also available for the control cabinet
as SlimLine S45 modules.
Note:
Please note that the modules according to Specification 3.0 can
be used only with a new master according to AS-Interface
Specification 3.0, and that the cycle times for the outputs must
not exceed 20 ms.
All modules are fitted at the front with LEDs which indicate the
module's status.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/61
SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45 series
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
SlimLine

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Version
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
SlimLine S22.5 modules

Inputs: PNP transistor
Width 22.5 mm
Type
Connection Slave type
Inputs
Outputs
4 inputs
Screw
Standard
2-wire
--
3RK1200-0CE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
--
3RK1200-0CE02-0AA2
1 unit
42C
A/B slave
2- and
3-wire
--
3RK2200-0CE02-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Spring-type Standard
2-wire
--
3RK1200-0CG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
--
3RK1200-0CG02-0AA2
1 unit
42C
A/B slave
2- and
3-wire
--
3RK2200-0CG02-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2-wire
PNP tran- }
sistor 2 A
3RK1400-0BE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
3RK1200-0CE00-0AA2
2 inputs/ Screw
2 outputs
Standard
2-wire
Relays
3RK1402-0BE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
2-wire
PNP tran- B
sistor 2 A
3RK1400-0BG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2-wire
Relays
3RK1402-0BG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
--
PNP tran- }
sistor 1 A
3RK1100-1CE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
--
PNP tran- A
sistor 1 A
3RK1100-1CG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
3RK1400-0BG00-0AA2
4 outputs Screw
SlimLine S45 modules

Inputs: PNP transistor
Width 45 mm
Type
Connection Slave type
4 inputs/ Screw
4 outputs
Inputs
Outputs
Standard
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran- }
sistor 1 A
3RK1400-1CE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran- }
sistor 2 A
3RK1400-1CE01-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
floating
PNP tran- }
sistor
1 A floating
3RK1402-3CE01-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
Relays
3RK1402-3CE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
PNP tran- A
sistor 2 A
3RK2400-1CE01-0AA2
1 unit
42C
3RK1400-1CG00-0AA2
A/B
2- and
(Spec. 3.0) 3-wire
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran- A
sistor 1 A
3RK1400-1CG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran- B
sistor 2 A
3RK1400-1CG01-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
floating
PNP tran- A
sistor 1 A
floating
3RK1402-3CG01-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Standard
2- and
3-wire
Relays
3RK1402-3CG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
A/B
2- and
(Spec. 3.0) 3-wire
PNP tran- B
sistor 2 A
3RK2400-1CG01-0AA2
1 unit
42C
A/B slave
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran- }
sistor 2 A
3RK2400-1FE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Spring-type A/B slave
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran- A
sistor 2 A
3RK2400-1FG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Sealable covers
To secure against unauthorized addressing
3RP1902
5 units
41H
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing
3RP1903
1 10 units
41H
4 inputs/ Screw
3 outputs
Accessories
2/62
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
F90 module

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Version
F90 modules
Standard slave
Width 90 mm
With Combicon version:
Delivery without Combicon connector
3RG9002-0DB00
Type
Connection
Inputs
Outputs
4 inputs/
4 outputs
Screw
2- and
3-wire
PNP
transistor
PNP
transistor
1A
3RG9002-0DB00
1 unit
42C
2- and
3-wire
PNP
transistor
PNP
transistor
2A
3RG9002-0DA00
1 unit
42C
2- and
3-wire
PNP
transistor
floating
PNP
transistor
2A
3RG9002-0DC00
1 unit
42C
2- and
3-wire
PNP
transistor
PNP
transistor
1A
3RG9004-0DB00
1 unit
42C
2- and
3-wire
PNP
transistor
PNP
transistor
2A
3RG9004-0DA00
1 unit
42C
2- and
3-wire
PNP
transistor
floating
PNP
transistor
2A
3RG9004-0DC00
1 unit
42C
Screw
PNP
transistor
--
3RG9002-0DE00
1 unit
42C
Combicon
PNP
transistor
--
3RG9004-0DE00
1 unit
42C
3RX9810-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Combicon
16 inputs
Accessories
Combicon connector sets
For 4I/4O modules with Combicon connection;
one set comprises:
4 x 5-pole plug for connection
Standard sensors/actuators
2 x 4-pole plug for AS-Interface and external auxiliary
voltage

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/63
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Flat module
Overview
The flat module for the control cabinet in degree of protection

IP20 has 4 inputs and 4 outputs.
The module is fitted at the front with an LED which indicates the
module's status.
With the integrated lugs, the modules can be screwed on.
An integrated addressing socket enables the module to be
addressed when it is installed.
Standard sensors/actuators and the AS-Interface cable can be
connected using screw terminals.
Flat module

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Flat modules
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
Price
per PU
3RK1400-0CE00-0AA3
4 inputs/4 outputs
200 mA for all I/Os
3RK1400-0CE00-0AA3
2/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
AS-Interface communication modules
Overview
3RK1400-0CD01-0AA3 AS-Interface communication
modules for printed circuit board installation
AS-Interface communication modules for

printed circuit board installation
aux
NC
+
E1
A1
0
E2
A2
0
E3
A3
0
E4
A4
0
+
ASIASI+
NSA0_00079a
AS-Interface communication module 3RK1400-0CD00-0AA3 (left),

AS-Interface communication module 3RK2400-1FD00-0AA2 (right)

NC
+
E1
A1
0
E2
A2
0
E3
A3
0
E4
A4
0
+
PROG
ASI
ASI+
3RK1400-0CD01-0AA3
With the 4I/4O module 3RK1400-0CD01-0AA3 for printed circuit

board mounting, it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts
to be queried or indicator lights to be operated, the necessary
energy for the inputs and outputs being provided from the auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV). If (+) is connected to Uaux + and (NC)
to Uaux - , the outputs are not short-circuit and overload proof; if
Uaux - is connected to (0), the outputs are overload and short-circuit proof (maximum summation current 200 mA). In this case,
the module does not respond even to invoking by a master when
the switching outputs are overloaded.
3RG9 005-0SA00 AS-Interface communication modules
for printed circuit board installation
aux
NC
+
E1
A1
0
E2
A2
0
E3
A3
0
E4
A4
0
+
NSA0_00078a
3RK1400-0CD00-0AA3
With the 4I/4O module for printed circuit board mounting, it is

possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or indicator lights to be operated, the necessary energy being provided by the AS-Interface system (yellow AS-Interface cable).
ASIASI+
NSA0_00080a
Note:
If the switching outputs are overloaded, the module does not
respond to invoking by a master.
3RG9005-0SA00
With the 4I/4O module for printed circuit board mounting, it is

possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or indicator lights to be operated, the power for inputs and outputs
being provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV). If (+) is
connected to Uaux+ and (NC) to Uaux- , the outputs are not shortcircuit and overload proof; if Uaux- is connected to (0), the outputs are overload and short-circuit proof (maximum summation
current 200 mA). In this case, the module does not respond even
to invoking by a master when the switching outputs are overloaded.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/65
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
AS-Interface communication modules
3RK1400-1CD00-0AA2, 3RK2400-1FD00-0AA2
AS-Interface communication modules for printed circuit
board installation

Connection
Connection pad
Connection
Connection pad
AS-i +
27, 29
AS-i +
27, 29
AS-i -
28, 30
AS-i -
28, 30
Sensor+
17, 18, 23, 24
Sensor+
17, 18, 23, 24
Sensor-
13, 14, 19, 20
Sensor-
13, 14, 19, 20
IN1
21
IN1
21
IN2
22
IN2
22
IN3
15
IN3
15
IN4
16
IN4
16
Not assigned
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 25, 26
Uaux + (L24+)
2, 4
Uaux - (M24)
1, 3
OUT1
OUT2
10
OUT3
OUT4
6 (not assigned for 3RK2400-1FD00-0AA2 4I/3O module)
OUT-
7, 8
Not assigned
11, 12, 25, 26
With the 4I module for printed circuit board mounting, it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-conductor sensors to
be connected, the power for inputs being provided from the
AS-Interface cable.
With the 4I/4O or 4I/3O module for printed circuit board mounting, it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-conductor sensors according to IEC 947-5-2 to be connected.
Up to four indicator lights via the 4I/4O module or up to three indicator lights via the 4I/3O module can also be controlled. The
power for short-circuit proof solid-state switching outputs is provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV).
Mounting is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-Board

Connector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and
horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example:
180 version for vertical mounting (AMP):
Type 530843-2
90 version for horizontal mounting (AMP):
Type 650118-1
If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does
not respond to invoking by a master.
Mounting is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-Board Connector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example:
180 version for vertical mounting (AMP):
Type 530843-2
90 version for horizontal mounting (AMP):
Type 650118-1
If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does
not respond to invoking by a master.

Version
Slave type DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Standard
3RK1400-0CD00-0AA3
1 unit
42C
3RK1400-0CD01-0AA3
1 unit
42C
3RG9005-0SA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1400-1CD00-0AA2
5 units
42C
A/B
3RK2400-1FD00-0AA2
5 units
42C
Standard
3RK1200-0CD00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
4 inputs / 4 outputs
Supply of I/Os using AS-Interface cable
(max. 200 mA)
- Printed circuit board with solder pins,
protected by enclosure
Supply of I/Os using external auxiliary voltage

(24 V PELV)
- Printed circuit board with solder pins,
Standard
protected by enclosure
- Printed circuit board with solder pins for horizontal Standard
mounting
3RK1400-0CD00-0AA3
Supply of outputs using external auxiliary voltage
Standard
(24 V PELV)
- Printed circuit board with gold-plated direct
connector for 30-pole male connector socket for
simple installation with direct connector
4 inputs / 3 outputs
Supply of outputs using external auxiliary voltage
(24 V PELV)
- Printed circuit board with gold-plated direct
3RG9005-0SA00
4 inputs
Printed circuit board with gold-plated direct
2/66
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Counter modules
Overview
U IN1
NSA0_00084
300 s t
1 ms
Maximum frequency for the counter module
If the time criterion stipulated in the figure is violated, the count

value is rejected.
The counter is active only for the reset parameter P2 (default).
The counter is deleted when P2 is set, and the incoming count
pulses are not registered until after P2 is reset again.
Note:
Counter module with spring-type terminals
The counter module is used to send hexadecimally coded count

values (LSB=D0, MSB=D3) to a higher-level controller.
The count value is increased by one for each valid count pulse
at terminal 8. Beginning at 0, the module counts up to 15 and
then begins again at 0. The controller adopts the current value
and determines the number of pulses between two host invocations through subtraction from the previous value. The total number of count pulses is determined by adding these differences.
A customized function block is necessary or must be

programmed.
ASi+ ASi-
Terminal 4: Bus connection ASi +

Terminal 5: Bus connection ASi Terminal 6: Unused
ASi
ADDR
For the values sent to be unambiguous, no more than 15 count

values are allowed between two host invocations or AS-Interface
master invocations at terminal 8. The maximum permissible
transmission frequency is calculated from these times:
IN1
fTRmax = 15 / Tmax
A further condition for the maximum frequency is the required
pulse shape. For the counter to accept a pulse as valid, a Low
must have been applied at the input for at least 300 s and a
High for at least 1 ms.
This results in a maximum frequency
of fZmax = 1 / 1.3 ms = 769 Hz
independently of the control system (see figure).
IN1
NSA0_00085
Tmax : max. possible transmission time from the slave to the host
Terminal 7: Sensor supply +

Terminal 8: Counter input
Terminal 9: Sensor supply -
Counter module connection options

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1200-0CE03-0AA2
1 unit
42C
3RK1200-0CG03-0AA2
1 unit
42C
Counter modules
Width 22.5 mm
3RK1200-0CE03-0AA2
3RK1200-0CG03-0AA2

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/67
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Overview
"Ground faults in any control circuit must not lead to unintentional

starting or potentially hazardous movements or prevent the machine from stopping." (IEC 60204-1/VDE 0113-1).
The AS-Interface ground-fault detection module is used to meet
these requirements. Using this module from the SlimLine series,
ground faults in AS-Interface systems can be reliably detected
and reported.
The following ground faults are detected:
Ground fault from AS-i "+"
Ground fault from AS-i "-"
Ground fault from sensors and actuators which are
supplied from the AS-Interface voltage.
Note:
Not suitable for AS-Interface Power24V.
Ground-fault detection module

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1408-8KE00-0AA2
1 unit
42C
3RK1408-8KG00-0AA2
1 unit
42C

Width 22.5 mm
3RK1408-8KE00-0AA2
2/68
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Overvoltage protection modules
With the AS-Interface overvoltage protection module, it is now

also possible to integrate AS-Interface in the overall overvoltage
protection concept of a plant or machine.
The module has the same design and degree of protection
(IP67) as the AS-Interface K45 compact modules. It is a passive
module without AS-i IC and as such does not need its own
address on the AS-Interface network. The module can be used
to protect the AS-Interface cable and the cable for the auxiliary
voltage from overvoltage. Overvoltages are discharged through
a ground cable with a green/yellow oil-proof outer sheath. This
cable is fixed in the module and must be connected with low
resistance to the system's ground.
Rated discharge current Isn
AS-Interface overvoltage protection module
The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module (protection

module) protects downstream AS-Interface devices or individual
sections in AS-i networks from conducted overvoltages which
can be caused by switching operations and remote lightning
strikes. The location of the protection module forms within the
lightning protection zone concept the transition from zone 1 to
2/3. Direct lightning strikes must be coped with using additional
protective measures at the transitions from lightning protection
zone 0A to 1.
The rated discharge current is the peak value of a surge current

of the form 8/20 s (microseconds), for which the protection
module is designed in accordance with a specified test program. With waveform 8/20, 100 % of the value is achieved after
8 s and 50 % after 20 s.
Protection level Up
The protection level of a protection module is the highest momentary value of the voltage at the terminals, established in individual tests and characterizes the capability of a protection
module to limit overvoltages to a residual level.
Configuration guidelines
ASInterface
OVP
ASInterface
Application
NSA0_00093a
Device without ground terminal

Grounding of the mounting plate
Application
Device with
ground terminal
Mounting plate
OVP = Overvoltage protection
The grounding of protection modules and the units to be protected must be effected through a shared grounding point.
If insulated devices are protected, their mounts must be

included in the grounding points.
Sample application
Zone 1
OVP
A
Zone 2
ASInterface
ASInterface
Zone 1
ASInterface
ASInterface
OVP
B
protected range
Protection approx. 0.5 m to the left
Equipotential bonding
(system earth)
Protection approx. 5 m to the right
NSA0_00092a
OVP = Overvoltage protection

Version
DT
Article No.
AS-Interface overvoltage protection module
3RK1901-1GA01

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/69
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Slaves
Overview
Every LOGO! can now be connected to the AS-Interface system
Using the AS-Interface connection for LOGO!, an intelligent

slave can be integrated in the AS-Interface system. With the
modular interface, it becomes possible to integrate the different
basic units in the system according to their functionality. Similarly, functionalities can be quickly and easily adapted to new
requirements by exchanging the basic unit.
The interface module provides four inputs and four outputs on
the system. These inputs and outputs do not actually exist in
hardware terms, however, but are only virtually present through
the interface on the bus.
AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RK1400-0CE10-0AA2
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
4 virtual inputs
4 virtual outputs
3RK1400-0CE10-0AA2
2/70
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Power Supply Units and Data Decoupling Modules
AS-Interface power supply unit for 3 A

AS-Interface power supply units feed 30 V DC into the
AS-Interface cable and supply the AS-Interface components.
They include power-optimized data decoupling for the separation of communication signals and control supply voltage. As the
result, AS-Interface is able to convey both data and power along
a single line. The power supply units are resistant to overloads
and short circuits.
Dimensions
AS-Interface power supply units have compact dimensions in
widths of 50 / 70 / 120 mm. No distances from other devices
need to be observed when mounting the power supply units.
Features
Higher rating: The power supply units deliver currents of 2.6 to
8 A.
Integrated data decoupling: As the result, AS-Interface is able
to convey both data and power along a single line.
Integrated ground-fault detection: The power supply units perform the reliable detection and signaling of ground faults according to IEC 60204-1. The AS-Interface voltage can be disconnected automatically in the event of a ground fault.
Integrated overload detection: An output overload is detected
and reported over a diagnostics LED.
Diagnostics memory: Any ground faults or overloads on the
output side are stored in a diagnostics memory until the device is RESET.
Remote RESET and remote signaling: Using relay contacts, a
ground fault can be signaled and evaluated by a central controller and/or indicator light.
Diagnostics LEDs: Three different LEDs indicate the status of
the AS-Interface power supply locally at the power supply unit.
Ultra-wide input range / two-phase connection: The ultra-wide
input range of 120 to 500 V of the 8 A version means that the
supply units can be used in virtually any network worldwide.
In addition, this version dispenses with the need for an N conductor as the device can be connected directly between
2 phases of a network.
Operation with 24 V DC: The 3 A power supply unit is also
available as a version with a 24 V DC input. This power supply
unit is suitable for use in battery-powered systems or in systems with UPS (uninterruptible power supply).
Removable terminal blocks with spring-type connections:
For easy exchanging of devices, each power supply unit has
three removable terminal blocks: for the input side, for the output side and for Signal/RESET connections.
Benefits
Complete solution for supplying AS-Interface networks while
making full use of the maximum possible cable length per
AS-i segment
Only AS-i masters and AS-i slaves need to be connected to
the AS-Interface cable in order to operate AS-Interface
Compact, space-saving dimensions
Reliable power supply even for large numbers of AS-Interface
modules with a high power requirement
Integrated ground-fault and overload detection saves the
need for additional components and enhances safety
Fast fault detection and reduced downtimes thanks to diagnostics memory, remote signaling and remote RESET
Reduced downtimes as the result of removable terminal
blocks which enable the fast exchanging of devices
Ultra-wide input range of the 8 A version permits single-phase
and two-phase operation and saves the need for an N conductor
Can be used world-wide, thanks to, for example,
UL/CSA approval (UL 508)
With the 2.6 A version the output power is restricted to max.
100 W for use in NEC Class 2 circuits

Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
AS-Interface power supply units, IP20

AS-i single output 30 V DC
With integrated ground-fault detection
With the 2.6 A version, the output power is restricted to
max. 100 W (for use in NEC Class 2 circuits)
Dimensions: Width: 50 mm (3 A/2.6 A); 70 mm (5 A),
120 mm (8 A); Height: 125 mm; Depth: 125 mm
3RX9501-0BA00
Output current
Input voltage
2.6 A/max. 100 W
120/230 V AC (selectable)
3RX9501-2BA00
1 unit
42C
3A
3RX9501-0BA00
1 unit
42C
3A
24 V DC
3RX9501-1BA00
1 unit
42C
5A
3RX9502-0BA00
1 unit
42C
8A
120/230 ... 500 V AC

(selectable)
3RX9503-0BA00
1 unit
42C
3RX9503-0BA00
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/71
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Overview
Dimensions
The 30 V power supply units have compact dimensions

in widths of 50 and 70 mm. No distances from other devices
need to be observed when mounting the power supply units.
Features
Primary clocked power supply units for connection to a
single-phase AC network
Power for currents of 3, 4 and 8 A
The output voltage is floating, and resistant to short-circuits
and no-load operation. In the event of an overload, the output
voltage will be reduced or switched off. After a short-circuit or
overload the devices will start up again automatically.
In the event of a device fault, the output voltage will be limited
to max. 37 V.
Modular installation devices in degree of protection IP20 and
safety class I.
Diagnostics: With an output voltage > 26.5 V DC, the green
LED (30V O.K.) is lit and the signaling contact 13-14 is closed.
PSN130S 30 V power supply units for 3 A, 4 A and 8 A
The PSN130S 30 V power supply units feed 30 V DC into

the AS-Interface cable and supply the AS-Interface components, but do not include data decoupling. Data decoupling
modules are needed in addition therefore to separate communication signals and control supply voltage, see page 2/74
and 2/76.
The power supply units are resistant to overload and short circuits.
Benefits
Low-cost alternative solution for supplying AS-Interface networks while making full use of the maximum possible cable
length per AS-i segment
Cost advantage particularly for multiple networks
Compact, space-saving dimensions
Reliable power supply even for large numbers of AS-Interface

modules with a high power requirement
Can be used world-wide thanks to, for example,
UL/CSA approval (UL 508)
Application
Configuration examples of AS-Interface networks with a 30 V power supply unit
PROFINET
S7-1200 and
CM 1243-2 multiple AS-i master with
DCM 1271 data decoupling module
PSN130S
30 V power
supply unit
IC01_00222
IC01_00221
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO double master

and
double data decoupling module
PSN130S
30 V power supply unit
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
Configuration of AS-Interface multiple networks, each with one PSN130S 30 V power supply unit (examples with schematic representation):
Left: Double network based on the S22.5 double data decoupling module and IE/ASi LINK PN IO double master
Right: Triple network based on the SIMATIC S7-1200 with DCM 1271 data decoupling modules and CM 1243-2 communication processors
2/72
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Technical specifications
Version
3A
4A
8A
Version
3A
4A
8A
Input data
Input voltage, rated value Ue
V AC
120 / 230 V, single-phase,

automatic selection
UL
UL 508 / CSA 22.2
Pollution degree
EN 60950
Overvoltage category and

electrical separation
EN 50178 and IEC 61558
Input voltage range
V AC
85 ... 132 / 174 ... 264
Mains frequency
Hz
50 / 60
Power consumption at full load, typ. W
Approvals
103
139
270
Output data
EMC
Emitted interference (class B)
EN 61000-6-3
Output voltage, rated value Ua
V DC 30
Line harmonics limit
EN 61000-3-2
Residual ripple
mVss
< 150
Interference immunity
EN 61000-6-2
Output current, rated value

at -20 C ... +60 C
Max. output current

at +60 C ... +70 C
Operating data
Ambient temperature
Degree of efficiency in rated conditions

Degree of efficiency
87
88
90
Power loss, typ.
12
17
25
Output overvoltage protection
< 37
Current limit, typ.
5.5
11
Operation
-20 ... +70
Transport / storage
-40 ... +85
Pollution degree
Humidity class
Climate class according to

DIN 50010, relative air humidity max. 100 %, without condensation
Protection and monitoring
Safety
Electrical separation
primary / secondary
Output voltage
PELV / SELV according to
EN 60950 and EN 50178
Safety class
IP20
Dimensions and weight

Width
mm
50
Height x depth
mm
125 x 126.5
50
Weight
kg
0.4
70
0.4
0.7

Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
PSN130S 30 V DC power supply units

(without AS-i data decoupling)
Output voltage 30 V DC
Dimensions: Width: 50 mm (3 A / 4 A); 70 mm (8 A),
Height: 125 mm; Depth: 126.5 mm
3RX9511-0AA00
Output current
Input voltage
3A
120 / 230 V AC (automatic selection)
3RX9511-0AA00
1 unit
42C
4A
3RX9512-0AA00
1 unit
42C
8A
3RX9513-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Screw terminals
3RX9512-0AA00
3RX9513-0AA00
More information
Operating instructions and more technical information see

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/73
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Overview
Application
The AS-Interface data decoupling module is designed for

AS-Interface networks with 30 V supply or 24 V supply
(AS-iPower24V).
Operation of an AS-i network with the data decoupling module
and a 30 V standard power supply unit is technically equivalent
to the use of an AS-Interface power supply unit and offers the
service-proven features of AS-Interface for all applications.
AS-Interface Power24V uses a 24 V power supply unit in conjunction with a data decoupling module and is particularly suitable for
Compact machines using AS-Interface input/output modules
Applications in the control cabinet for AS-Interface connection
of SIRIUS Innovations contactors and compact starters
(3RT2 contactors through 3RA27 function modules or
3RA6 compact starters through 3RA69 AS-i add-on modules).
AS-Interface S22.5 double data decoupling modules

Left: screw terminal version, right: spring-type terminal version
With the aid of the S22.5 data decoupling module, the AS-Interface network can also be supplied with 24 V DC or 30 V DC from
a standard power supply unit and the transmission of data and
power can be realized along one cable.
The combination of data decoupling modules and standard
power supply units is therefore a cost-efficient alternative to the
service-proven AS-Interface power supply units.
The quality of the data signals and the reliable operation of the
AS-i network are not negatively affected as the result.
Features of the S22.5 data decoupling module
Narrow design: 22.5 mm wide
Version with screw or spring-type terminals
Versions for single and double data decoupling
Operation with 24 V DC or 30 V DC, grounded or non-grounded
Adjustable current limiting up to 2 x 4 A
Integrated ground-fault detection with fault storage
Diagnostics LEDs and signaling contacts
RESET by button or remote RESET
The integrated ground-fault detection works with a grounded
and non-grounded supply: The connection of negative pole and
ground (upstream from the data decoupling module) customary
with 24 V DC power supplies is permitted. A ground fault to the
negative or positive pole on the AS-Interface network (downstream from the data decoupling module) is detected and stored
as a fault and will be signaled using LEDs and a relay contact.
Benefits
Compatible expansion of the AS-Interface system
An existing standard power supply unit with 24 V DC or
30 V DC can be used for supplying AS-i networks
The AS-Interface system can also be used in tightly budgeted
applications because no AS-Interface power supply unit
needs to be purchased
Applications benefit in addition from the advantages of a
modern bus system:
- High level of standardization
- Additional diagnostics and maintenance information
- Faster commissioning
Easy and cost-efficient design of single and multiple networks
is possible
2/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
When using the double data decoupling module or other data

decoupling units, several AS-Interface networks can be operated with a single power supply unit. This results in an additional
cost advantage.
Note:
Extra Low Voltage) or SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) standards, have a residual ripple of < 250 mVpp, and in the event of
a fault, must limit the output voltage to a maximum of 40 V. We
recommend SITOP power supply units, see Chapter 15
"Products for Specific Requirements" "Stabilized Power
Supplies"or PSN130S 30 V power supplies, see page 2/72.
Note on AS-i Power24V:
The length of an AS-i Power24V network is restricted to 50 m in
order to limit the voltage drop along the cable.
AS-i masters, AS-i slaves and the sensors and actuators supplied through the AS-i cable must be designed for the reduced
voltage. Sensors and actuators for the standard voltage range of
10 to 30 V can be supplied with sufficient voltage.
Please also continue to observe the requirements specified in
the section "Extension of AS-i Power24V" for implementation of
AS-i Power24V, see page 2/17.
For more information on AS-i Power24V,
see "AS-Interface System Manual"
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Construction of an AS-i Power24V network with an AS-Interface S22.5 data decoupling module
PROFINET
S7-300 with CP 343-2 / CP 343-2P
S7-300 with CP 343-2 / CP 343-2P

Single
data
decoupling unit
Up to 50 m
Up to 50 m
AS-Interface
NSB0_02191a
AS-Interface
Double
data
decoupling
module
I/O modules
PROFINET
I/O modules
NSB0_02192a
AS-Interface
I/O modules
Construction of an AS-i Power24V network with an AS-Interface S22.5 data decoupling module: Left: single network, Right: multiple network

Version
DT
Article No.
Price PU (UNIT,
per PU
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Screw terminals

width 22.5 mm, height 101 mm, depth 115 mm
Single data decoupling module, 1 x 4 A
3RK1901-1DE12-1AA0
1 unit
42C
Double data decoupling module, 2 x 4 A
3RK1901-1DE22-1AA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1DE12-1AA0

width 22.5 mm, height 105 mm, depth 115 mm
Single data decoupling module, 1 x 4 A
3RK1901-1DG12-1AA0
1 unit
42C
Double data decoupling module, 2 x 4 A
3RK1901-1DG22-1AA0
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1DG12-1AA0
Circuit diagrams
Y[G}GkjG
OY[G ZYG}SGwls}SGzls}P
}GcGY\WG}G
yltv{lGylzl{
Y[G}Gkj
OXWGUUUGZYG}SG
[GhGn
wls}SGzls}PG
R
jXZ
X Y
X Y
Z
R
sR
[
ylzl{
lhy{o
mh|s{
hzpX
lhy{o
mh|s{
hzpY
pGeG
pGeG
pGeG
yltv{lGylzl{
Y[G}Gkj
[GhGn
OXWGUUUGZYG}SGwls}SGzls}PG
R
X Y
jXZ
X
Y
Z
]
ml
_
hzpXR hzpXT
jX[
hzpX
dGYS\GVGZSWGVGZS\GVG[SWGhGOPG
Single data decoupling module

uziWWYX_]
ylzl{
lhy{o
mh|s{
hzpX
ml
`
XY
jX[ jY[
hzpY
dGYS\GVGZSWGVZS\GVG[SWGhGOPG
XX
_
XW
hzpXR hzpXT
hzpYR hzpYT
hzpX
uziWWYX_\
Y[G}GkjG
OY[G ZYG}SG
wls}SGzls}P
}GcGY\WG}G
R
sR
t
[
\
dGYS\GVGZSWGVZS\GVG[SWGhGOPG
Double data decoupling module

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/75
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Data decoupling modules for S7-1200
Overview
Application
The AS-Interface data decoupling module is designed for

AS-Interface networks with 30 V supply or 24 V supply
(AS-Interface Power24V).
Operation of an AS-i network with the data decoupling module
and a 30 V standard power supply unit is technically equivalent
to the use of an AS-Interface power supply unit and offers the
service-proven features of AS-Interface for all applications.
AS-Interface Power24V uses a 24 V power supply unit in conjunction with a data decoupling module and is particularly suitable for
Compact machines using AS-Interface input/output modules
Applications in the control cabinet for AS-Interface connection
of SIRIUS Innovations contactors and compact starters
(3RT2 contactors through 3RA27 function modules or 3RA6
compact starters through 3RA69 AS-i add-on modules).
Note:
DCM 1271 data decoupling module for SIMATIC S7-1200
With the aid of the DCM 1271 data decoupling module,

the AS-Interface network can also be supplied with 24 V DC or
30 V DC from a standard power supply unit and the transmission
of data and power can be realized along one cable.
The DCM 1271 data decoupling module has the same enclosure
design as the S7-1200 module and is therefore ideal for combining with the CM 1243-2 AS-i master.
Features of the DCM 1271 data decoupling module
Design: S7-1200, 30 mm wide, degree of protection IP 20
Detachable terminals (scope of supply)
Single data decoupling
Supply of several AS-i networks with a single power supply
unit
Operation with 24 V DC or 30 V DC, grounded or
non-grounded
Current limiting at 4 A
Integrated ground-fault detection
Diagnostics LEDs for ground faults and overloads
Signaling contacts for ground-fault detection
Extra Low Voltage) or SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) standards, have a residual ripple of < 250 mVpp, and in the event of
a fault, must limit the output voltage to a maximum of 40 V. We
recommend SITOP power supply units, see Chapter 15
"Products for Specific Requirements" "Stabilized Power
Supplies"or PSN130S 30 V power supplies, see page 2/72.
Note on AS-i Power24V:
The length of an AS-i Power24V network is restricted to 50 m in
order to limit the voltage drop along the cable.
AS-i masters, AS-i slaves and the sensors and actuators supplied through the AS-i cable must be designed for the reduced
voltage. Sensors and actuators for the standard voltage range of
10 to 30 V can be supplied with sufficient voltage.
Please also continue to observe the requirements specified in
the section "Extension of AS-i Power24V" for implementation of
AS-i Power24V, see page 2/17.
Construction of an AS-i Power24V network with AS-Interface
PROFINET
S7-1200 with DCM 1271, CM 1243-2

The integrated ground-fault detection works with a grounded

and non-grounded supply: The connection of negative pole and
ground (upstream from the data decoupling module) customary
with 24 V DC power supplies is permitted. A ground fault to the
negative or positive pole on the AS-Interface network (behind
the data decoupling module) is identified and signaled via LED
and a transistor output.
Up to 50 m
AS-Interface
An existing standard power supply unit with 24 V DC or

30 V DC can be used for supplying AS-i networks
The AS-Interface system can also be used in tightly budgeted
applications because no AS-Interface power supply unit
needs to be purchased
Applications benefit in addition from the advantages of a
modern bus system:
- High level of standardization
- Additional diagnostics and maintenance information
- Faster commissioning
2/76
Siemens IC 10 2014
I/O modules
NSB0_02245
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Data decoupling modules for S7-1200

DT
Article No.
DCM 1271 data decoupling modules
3RK7271-1AA30-0AA0
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1901-3MA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-3MB00
1 unit
42C
Version
With screw terminals, removable terminals

(included in the scope of supply)
3RK7271-1AA30-0AA0
Accessories
Version
Price
per PU
5-pole screw terminals for AS-i master CM 1243-2 and

AS-i DCM 1271 data decoupling module
3-pole screw terminal for AS-i DCM 1271 data decoupling module for connecting the power supply unit
Circuit diagrams
1L+
+
-A1
1M
DCM 1271
Data Decoupling Module
max. 4 A
EFD
ASI OL
max
max. 50 mA
+
2L+
NSB0_02244
DIAG
EARTH
FAULT
ASI
2M DQ ASI+ ASI-
DCM 1271 single data decoupling module
More information
The manuals are available free of charge on the Internet, see
For more information on AS-i Power24V,
see "AS-Interface System Manual",

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/77
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Transmission Media
Overview
To enable use in the most varied ambient conditions (e.g. in an

oily environment), the AS-Interface cable is available in different
materials (rubber, TPE, PUR).
For special applications it is also possible to use an unshielded
standard round cable H05VV-F 2 x 1.5 mm according to AS-i
Specification. With AS-Interface, data and energy for the sensors (e.g. BERO proximity switches) and actuators (e.g. indicator lights) are transmitted over the yellow AS-Interface cable.
The black AS-Interface cable must be used for actuators with a
24 V DC supply (e.g. solenoid valves) and a high power requirement.
Suitable for operation in tow chains
The use of the AS-Interface shaped cables with TPE and PUR
outer sheath was checked in a tow chain test with the following
conditions:
Chain length
AS-Interface shaped cable
Travel
10
The actuator-sensor interface the networking system used for

the lowest field area is characterized by very easy mounting
and installation. A new connection method was developed specially for AS-Interface.
Bending radius
mm
75
Travel speed
m/s
Acceleration
m/s2
Number of cycles
10 million
The stations are connected using the AS-Interface cable. This

two-wire AS-Interface shaped cable has a trapezoidal shape,
thus ruling out polarity reversal.
Duration of test
approx. 3 years
(11 000 cycles per day)
Connection is effected by the insulation piercing method. In

other words, male contacts pierce the shaped AS-Interface
cable and make reliable contact with the two wires. Cutting to
length and stripping are superfluous. Consequently, AS-Interface stations (e.g. I/O modules, intelligent devices) can be connected in the shortest possible time and exchanging devices is
quick.
After termination of the 10 million cycles, only slight wear was

visible due to the lugs of the tow chain. No damage to the cores
and core insulation could be detected.
Note:
When using a tow chain, the cables must be installed in such a
way that they are not subject to tensile forces. On no account
may the cables be twisted, but they must be routed flat through
the tow chain.

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Material
Color
Quantity
Rubber
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100-m roll
3RX9010-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
1-km drum
3RX9012-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100-m roll
3RX9020-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
1-km drum
3RX9022-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100-m roll
3RX9013-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
1-km drum
3RX9014-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100-m roll
3RX9023-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
1-km drum
3RX9024-0AA00
1 unit
42C
TPE special version according to

UL Class 2
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100-m roll
3RX9017-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100-m roll
3RX9027-0AA00
1 unit
42C
PUR
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100-m roll
3RX9015-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
1-km drum
3RX9016-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100-m roll
3RX9025-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
1-km drum
3RX9026-0AA00
1 unit
42C
3RX90..-0AA00
TPE
2/78
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
System Components and Accessories
Repeaters
Overview
Design of an AS-Interface network with repeaters

Parallel switching of several repeaters possible
(star configuration)
Combination of series and parallel switching possible
The following conditions apply:
When used without an extension plug no more than two
repeaters are permitted between AS-i master and slave
(repeaters connected in series).
When used with an extension plug no more than one repeater
is permitted between AS-i master and slave.
The AS-Interface repeater is used to extend the AS-Interface

cable.
In its basic version, an AS-i network comprises one segment
with a maximum cable length of 100 m. An extension plug
(see next page) can be used to increase the cable length for
a segment to a maximum of 200 m.
If this is insufficient, however, you can use one or more
repeaters.
A repeater adds an extra segment to an existing segment. The
extra segment can have a cable length of up to 100 m (without
extension plug) or up to 200 m (with an extension plug in the
extra segment).
Each segment requires a separate AS-i power supply unit.
Electrical separation of the two AS-Interface shaped cable
lines
Slaves can be used on both sides of the repeater.
The additional power supply can increase the current infeed
for slaves/sensors and lower the voltage drop on the AS-i
cable.
Separate display of the correct AS-Interface voltage for each
segment.
Installed in K45 module enclosure IP67 with mounting plate
Easy mounting
Benefits
More possibilities of use and greater freedom for plant
planning through extension of the AS-Interface network
Reduced downtime and servicing times in the event of a fault
thanks to separate display of the correct AS-Interface voltage
for each side
100 m
100 m
100 m
Power supply
Repeater
Repeater
Power
supply
G_IK10_XX_20011a
AS-Interface repeater
In safety-related applications the following also applies:

When used without an extension plug, no more than two
repeaters are permitted between evaluation unit
(e.g. MSS ASIsafe Modular Safety System) and ASIsafe input
slave or safe output module.
When used with an extension plug, no more than one repeater is
permitted between evaluation unit (e.g. MSS ASIsafe Modular
Safety System) and ASIsafe input slave or safe output module.
AS-Interface
Power
supply
Master
Slave
Repeater
Power supply
Design of an example AS-Interface network with repeaters

(without extension plug)
Note:
The AS-Interface repeater is not suitable for AS-i Power24V networks. It is recommended for use in AS-Interface networks with
AS-Interface power supply units (e.g. 3RX9501-0BA00).
Application
The repeater is used to extend the AS-Interface network. In this
case there are AS-Interface slaves and one AS-Interface power
supply unit on each side of the repeater.
In the case of a line topology with two repeaters and three extension
plugs, the AS-Interface network can be extended by 600 m overall,
see example design with extension plug on the next page.

Version
DT
Article No.
Repeaters for AS-Interface
6GK1210-0SA01
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C
For cable extension, including mounting plate
6GK1 210-0SA01
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/79
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Extension plugs
Overview
The extension plug is available in the following versions:

Compact extension plug: Passive component that can be
connected directly onto the AS-Interface shaped cable
Extension plug plus: The Extension plug plus has an integrated A/B slave that enables any undervoltage supply to be
signaled to the AS-Interface master. It has an M12 plug and
can be connected to the AS-Interface M12 feeder with degree
of protection IP67.
Design of an AS-Interface segment with an extension plug
With an AS-Interface segment with a cable length of more than
100 m and up to a maximum of 200 m, the extension plug is installed in a radius of approx. 10 m at that point of the network
which is furthest from the power supply unit. The extension plug
is not allowed to be used in AS-Interface networks smaller than
100 m. As with all AS-Interface networks, any network structure
(line, tree, star) is possible when using the extension plug. Only
one extension plug is required per 200 m segment even with a
tree or star structure.
AS-Interface extension plug:

left: extension plug compact, right: extension plug plus
Note:
With the extension plug, it is possible to double the cable length

possible in an AS-Interface segment from 100 to 200 m.
Only one power supply unit is needed to supply power to the
slaves on the up to 200 m long segment.
With the compact extension plug and the M12 feeder

3RK1901-1NR10 (4 A), the AS-Interface shaped cable has to
be terminated using the cable terminating piece,
see "miscellaneous accessories".
The AS-Interface extension plug is not suitable for
AS-i Power24V networks.
Master
Extension Slave
Plug
Slave
Repeater
Power
supply
Slave
200 m
Slave Extension Repeater

Plug
200 m
Slave
Slave
Extension
Plug
NSA0_00371c
Power
supply
Power
supply
200 m
600 m
Maximum network size with repeaters and extension plug (master at center of network)

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
AS-Interface extension plugs compact

}
Doubling of the cable length to 200 m per AS-Interface
segment
With direct connection to AS-Interface shaped cable
3RK1901-1MX02
1 unit
42C
AS-Interface extension plugs plus

}
Doubling of the cable length to 200 m per AS-Interface
segment
Mounting on AS-Interface M12 feeders
(to be ordered separately)
Undervoltage monitoring signal through integrated
AS-Interface slave to AS-Interface master
3RK1901-1MX01
1 unit
42C
3RX9801-0AA00
1 unit
42C
3RX9801-0AA00

Transition of shaped AS-Interface cable to a standard
round cable
3RK1901-1NR10
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1NR10

Transition of AS-Interface cable without Uaux,
with M12 socket
Max. 4 A
3RK1901-1MX02
3RK1901-1MX01
Accessories
2/80
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Addressing units
The innovated addressing unit for AS-Interface of the

AS-i Specification V3.0
The addressing unit is used to assign an address during commissioning to each AS-Interface slave. The device detects a
connected slave module or a complete AS-i network and displays the found module in the LCD display. Via the Up/Down
keys each address can be individually set. By turning the rotary
switch, further commissioning functions are selected intuitively.
The innovative device has been adapted to the current
AS-i Specification V3.0 and can now also handle the I/O data of
the latest slaves.
Functionality
Reading out and adjusting the slave address 0 to 31 or 1A to
31A, 1B to 31B, with automatic addressing aid and prevention
of double addresses
Reading out the slave profile (IO, ID, ID2)
Reading out and adjusting the ID1 code
Input/output test when commissioning the slaves:
Read input signals and write outputs with all digital and analog
slaves according to AS-Interface Specification V3.0, including
safe input slaves and complex CTT2 slaves
Measuring the voltage on the AS-Interface cable
(measuring range from 2 to 35 V)
Display of the operational current in case of direct connection
of an AS-i slave (measuring range from 0 to 150 mA)
Storage of complete network configurations (profiles of all
slaves) to simplify the addressing
Adjusting the slave parameters for commissioning
Reading out the identification and diagnostics of CTT2 slaves
Reading out the code table of safe input slaves (ASIsafe)
Benefits
Increased power supply to the slaves to 150 mA
Better utilization of the battery capacity thanks to improved
circuitry
Support for the current AS-i Specification V3.0
Expanded display for simultaneously displaying input and
output states
Clearly recognizable display of status of digital inputs/outputs
in binary format (0 / 1), optionally also available as hexadecimal values
Intuitive display of analog data either as decimal, hexadecimal
or as a percentage (e.g. 100 % corresponds to input/output
value 20 mA)
I/O data of complex slaves (CTT2 profile) can be displayed
Decoded display of the input data of safe input slaves, including code table
Simplification of the operating steps when setting the slave
address with automatic read back of the set address
Addressing cable, ready for operation even without screwing
in tight into the M12 socket, thus faster availability of the addressing unit
Proven compact housing with smooth keys and rotary switch
Connection of standard AS-i networks possible with 30 V as
well as Power24V networks
Complex slaves with high operating current can be addressed
without external supply
Longer operating time per battery pack
Can be used with all types of digital and analog slaves
Comprehensive and fast input/output test of plants, even for
A/B modules with 4 DI / 4 DO and current analog modules with
an A/B address
Faster and more reliable commissioning of the AS-Interface
modules
One-hand operation possible, with unique selection of the
functions
Universal applicability for all AS-i networks
Note:
For operation of the addressing unit on an AS-Interface cable
with connected power supply unit, the following applies:
The AS-Interface addressing unit is suitable for standard AS-i
networks and AS-i Power24V networks (operational voltage on
the AS-Interface cable min. 19 V).
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/81
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Addressing units
3RK1904-2AB02 AS-Interface addressing unit
Parameters
Measuring range
Voltage
Current (for slaves)
V
A
2 ... 35
0 ... 0.150
Measuring accuracy in % of the measured value

Voltage
Current (for slaves)
%
%
3.5 + 2 digits
5 + 2 digits
Input resistance for voltage measurement
300
Power supply
Standard power supply
Recommendation for current-intensive application
Automatic disconnection for a longer battery life
4 batteries 1.5 V type AA, IEC LR6 (NEDA15) or corresponding batteries (preferably NiMH)
4 high-grade alkaline manganese batteries 1.5 V type AA
Approx. 5 minutes (or approx. 1 minute when data exchange is active) after last operation
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Relative air humidity, max.
Altitude above sea level, max.
Location
C
C
%
m
Mechanical design
Dimensions, W x H x D
Connection
Weight with batteries
mm
kg
0 ... +50
-20 ... +75 without batteries
75, condensation not permitted
2000
Only indoors
IP40
84 x 195 x 35
M12 socket: Pin 1: ASI+; Pin 3: ASIPin 2, 4, 5: Not used
0.450

Version
3RK1904-2AB02
DT
Article No.
Price PU (UNIT,
per PU
SET, M)
PS*
PG
AS-Interface addressing unit V 3.0

}
For AS-Interface modules and sensors and actuators with
integrated AS-Interface according to AS-i Specification V3.0
For setting the AS-i address of standard slaves, and slaves with
extended addressing mode (A/B slaves)
With input/output test function and many other commissioning
functions
Battery operation with 4 batteries type AA (IEC LR6, NEDA 15)
Scope of supply:
- Addressing unit with 4 batteries
- Addressing cable, with M12 plug to addressing plug
(hollow plug), length 1.5m
3RK1904-2AB02
1 1 unit
42C
Addressing cable, with M12 plug to M12 socket2)

For addressing slaves with M12 connection,
e.g. K20 or K60R modules or light curtains
Length 1.5 m, 3-pole, 3 x 0.34 mm2
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 1 unit
42D

}
Transition of AS-Interface cable to a standard round cable
Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface cable
M12 socket for connection of standard round cable
3RX9801-0AA00
1 1 unit
42C

A
Transition of AS-Interface cable without Uaux, with M12 socket
Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface cable
3RK1901-1NR10
1 1 unit
42C
M12 cable plug3)

Extruded M12 plug (angled cable feeder 90),
other cable end open
Length: 5 m, 5-pole, color: Black
3RK1902-4HB50-5AA0
1 1 unit
42D
M12 plug straight3)

For screw fixing, 5-pole screw terminal, max. 0.75 mm2,
A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
1 1 unit
42D
Accessories
C
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
3RX9801-0AA00
3RK1901-1NR10
3RK 1902-4HB50-5AA0
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
Z236A
Addressing cable, with M12 plug to addressing plug

(hollow plug)1)
Included in the scope of supply of the addressing unit
Length 1.5 m
1)
Can be ordered only via GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH,

see Chapter 16 "Appendix" "External partners"
2)
Not included in scope of supply of the 3RK1904-2AB02 addressing unit.
2/82
Siemens IC 10 2014
3)
For connecting the addressing unit to an AS-i network via AS-Interface

M12 feeder, a connecting cable (M12 plug to M12 connector) must be
produced and requires the following wiring:
- M12 cable plug: Pin 1 / core brown M12 plug: Pin 1
- M12 cable plug: Pin 3 / core blue M12 plug: Pin 3
- Pin 2, 4, 5 not connected.
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Analyzer
Benefits
Simple and user-friendly operation enables diagnostics of
AS-Interface networks without help from specialists
Speedy troubleshooting thanks to intuitive display in statistics
mode
Test logs provide verification of the state and quality of the
installation for service and approval
Recorded logs facilitate remote diagnostics by technical
assistance
Comprehensive trigger functions enable exact analysis
Process data can be monitored online
Application
Online statistics
AS-Interface analyzer
The AS-Interface analyzer is used to test AS-Interface networks.

Installation errors, e.g. loose contacts or EMC interference under
extreme loads, can be revealed by this device.
Thanks to the easy-to-use software the user can assess the
quality of complete networks even if he lacks detailed specialist
knowledge of AS-Interface. In addition it is an easy matter with
the AS-Interface analyzer to create test logs from the records
produced, thus providing documentation for startups and service assignments.
For advanced AS-Interface users there are trigger functions for
detailed diagnostics.
Connection
Online statistics, overview
Master
M12 feeder
Slave
Slave
Slave
NSA0_00359c
Slave
AS-Interface Analyzer
PC
Connection of AS-Interface analyzer to PC and AS-Interface network
The AS-Interface analyzer follows the communication on the

AS-Interface network as a passive station. The unit is supplied
simultaneously from the AS-Interface cable.
This analyzer interprets the physical signals on the AS-Interface
network and records the communication.
The data thus obtained are transferred through an RS 232 interface to a PC such as a notebook, for evaluation with the supplied
diagnostics software.
Online statistics, details, e.g. here a fault on slave 5
This mode provides a quick overview of the existing AS-Interface

system. The error rates are displayed per slave in a traffic-light
function (green, yellow, red).
The bus configuration and the currently transmitted data of the
slaves are shown in a well arranged presentation.
With the expanded statistics function, it is possible to determine
the error rates as the number of transmitted or faulty bus message frames.
The bundle error overview shows in steps how many multiple
repetitions of message frames occurred in order to enable a selective and look-ahead assessment of the transmission quality.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/83
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Analyzer
Test log
Data mode
Presentation of the I/O data: Safety data

Example of a test log
The recorded data of the online statistics are easy to output and
document using a test log. Verification of the state of the plant
can thus be provided for approvals or service assignments.
The integrated measurement assistant records the bus signals
for a variable duration, thereby triggering creation of an automatic test log. A standardized quality test of AS-i plants is thus
possible.
Note:
The AS-Interface analyzer is suitable for standard AS-i networks
and AS-i Power24V networks (operational voltage min. 20 V).
Presentation of the I/O data: Analog values
In this mode, the analyzer shows not only the digital

input/output values but also the current analog values and the
input status of the safety slaves.
Trace mode
Presentation of message frames in trace mode
The presentation of message frames in the style of a classic

fieldbus analyzer is indispensable for complex troubleshooting.
Extensive trigger functions and recording and viewing filters are
available for this purpose.
An external trigger input and trigger output round off the scope
of functions in order to find even the most difficult errors.
For troubleshooting in connection with ASIsafe applications,
changes of status in the code tables of safety slaves are identified and assessed.
2/84
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Analyzer

DT
Article No.
AS-Interface analyzers
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1904-3AB01
1 unit
42C
3RX9801-0AA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1NR10
1 unit
42C
3RK1902-4HB50-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Version
For testing AS-Interface actuator/sensor interface

systems
For troubleshooting and service assignments in
installations and networks with AS-Interface systems
3RK1904-3AB01
Dimensions (W x H x D): 145 x 30 x 92 mm

Scope of supply:
- AS-Interface analyzers
- RS 232 cable for connecting to PC
- USB-to-serial/RS 232 adapter
- Screwdriver
- Magnetic adhesive tape for fastening the analyzer to
metal surfaces
- Service case with foam insert,
dimensions (W x H x D / mm): approx. 260 x 70 x 200
- Diagnostics software (CD-ROM) for PC
(Windows 95/98, ME, 2000, NT, XP,
Vista Home Basic, Home Premium,
Business, Ultimate, Windows 7)
Accessories
Transition of shaped AS-Interface cable to a standard
round cable
3RX9801-0AA00
Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface

cable
Transition of AS-Interface cable without Uaux,
with M12 socket
3RK1901-1NR10
Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface

cable
Max. 4 A
M12 cable plugs
Cable: PUR, 5-pole
Length: 5 m
3RK1902-4HB50-5AA0
Color: Black
Extruded M12 plug (angled cable feeder 90),
other cable end open

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/85
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Version
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
AS-Interface system manual

The AS-Interface system manual can be downloaded
free of charge, see
3RK2703-3AB02-1AA1
AS-Interface compact distributors,
for AS-Interface flat cable
3RK1901-1NN10
1 unit
42C
3RX9801-0AA00
1 unit
42C

3RK1901-1NN10

3RX9801-0AA00
For flat cable For
Cable length Cable end in

feeder
AS-i
--
M12 socket
Available

3RK1901-1NR10
3RK1901-1NR11
For flat cable For

feeder
AS-i
M12 socket
--
Not available
3RK1901-1NR10
1 unit
42C
AS-i
M12
cable box
1m
Not available
3RK1901-1NR11
1 unit
42C
AS-i
M12
cable box
2m
Not available
3RK1901-1NR12
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12 socket
--
Not available
3RK1901-1NR20
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12
cable box
1m
Not available
3RK1901-1NR21
1 unit
42C
AS-i/Uaux
M12
cable box
2m
Not available
3RK1901-1NR22
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1NR04
1 unit
42C
M12-T distributors
IP68
1 x M12 plug
2 x M12 box
3RK1901-1TR00
1 unit
42C
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
1 unit
250
AS-Interface M12 feeders, 4-fold

For flat cable For
AS-i/Uaux
3RK1901-1NR04
3RK1901-1TR00

feeder
4-fold M12
-socket,
delivery
includes coupling module
Not available
For connection of two sensors to one M12 socket

with Y assignment
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
2/86
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
3RK1901-1KA01
100 10 units
42C
3RK1901-1PN00
100 10 units
42C
3RK1901-1MD00
100 10 units
42C
- For M16 gland
3RK1901-3QM00
1 unit
42C
- For M20 gland
3RK1901-3QM10
1 unit
42C
- For M16 gland
3RK1901-3QM01
1 unit
42C
- For M20 gland
3RK1901-3QM11
1 unit
42C
Cable clips for cable adapters
3RK1901-3QA00
100 10 units
42C
Cable terminating pieces
3RK1901-1MN00
1 10 units
42C
For wall mounting
3RK1901-2EA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-2DA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CA00
1 unit
42C
For wall mounting
3RK1901-0CB01
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1KA00
AS-Interface M12 sealing caps,
tamper-proof
3RK1901-1KA01
For free M8 sockets
3RK1901-1PN00
AS-Interface M20 seals
For AS-Interface cable, shaped
For insertion in M20 glands
3RK1901-1MD00
Cable adapters for flat cables
Connection of AS-Interface cable to metric gland with
insulation piercing method
Continuation using standard cable
3RK1901-3QM00
Continuation using pins
3RK1901-3QA00
For sealing of open cable ends
(shaped AS-Interface cable) in IP67
3RK1901-1MN00
K45 mounting plates
3RK1901-2EA00
K60 mounting plates
3RK1901-0CA00

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/87
Siemens AG 2013
AS-Interface
Version
DT
Article No.
Sealing sets
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1902-0AR00
100
5 units
42D
3RT1900-1SB50
100 380 units
41B

3RK1902-0AR00

Inscription labels
For K45 and K60 compact modules
20 x 9 mm, pastel turquoise
19 frames with 20 labels each
3RK1902-4GB50-4AA0
Control cables, assembled at one end

Angular M12 socket for screw fixing, 4-pole, 4 x 0.34 mm2,
A-coded, black PUR sheath, max. 4 A
Cable length 5 m
C
3RK1902-4GB50-4AA0
1 unit
42D
Angular M12 socket

For screw fixing, 4-pole screw terminals, max. 0.75 mm2,
A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
1 unit
42D
M12 plug, straight

A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
1 unit
42D
M12 plug, angled

A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4DA00-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Cable length 1.5 m
3RK1902-4HB15-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Cable length 5 m
3RK1902-4HB50-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Cable length 10 m
3RK1902-4HC01-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Control cable, assembled at both ends

Straight M12 plug, straight M12 socket, for screw fixing,
3-pole, 3 x 0.34 mm2,
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
3RK1902-4DA00-5AA0
Control cable, assembled at one end
M12 plugs, angled, for screw fixing, 5-pole, 5 x 0.34 mm2,
3RK1902-4H...-5AA0
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
Cable length 1.5 m

Also for addressing AS-i slaves with
M12 bus connection (e.g. K20, K60R compact modules,
M200D motor starters)
More information
The AS-Interface system manual can be downloaded free of
charge, see
2/88
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Introduction
Parameter and diagnostics data are transmitted in addition to

the cyclic operating data for the connected sensors/actuators.
The simple, unshielded three-wire cable customary for standard
sensors is used for this purpose.
IO-Link is an open communication standard for sensors and

actuators - defined by the Profibus User Organization (PNO).
IO-Link technology is based on the point-to-point connection of
sensors and actuators to the control system.
Telecontrol and
substation
control
Laptop
PC
Remote access,
e.g. via
teleservice
S7-1200 with
CP1242-7
Controller
Controller
Control and
monitoring system
Motion Control
Systems
PC/PG/IPC
Database
Server
Telecontrol and
substation control
IWLAN
Controller
Security
Numeric
Control
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access
Point
Controller
Controller
Notebook
PC/PG
Industrial Ethernet
Switches
Access
Point
IWLAN
RCoax Cable
Controller
PC/PG/IPC
Control and
monitoring system
Numeric
Control
Link
Wireless
Devices
Coupler
Link
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS PA
RF180C
ASM456
Field devices
Mobile
Panel
Field devices
SIMOCODE
pro
RFID
system
Code
reading
systems
Mobile
Panel
DP-Slave
Link
IO-Link
module
Protection and
monitoring
devices
Sensors
IOLink
module
Power
supply
LOGO!
Compact
starter
Drives
RFID
system
IO-Link
master
Motion Control
Systems
Sensors
Access
Point
Link
Power
supply
Protection and
monitoring
devices
Controller
SINAMICS
Drives
Code
reading
systems
Client
Module
Compact
starter
AS-Interface
Compact Compact
starter
feeder
Slaves
Field device
Slaves
Signalling column
Benefits
G_IK10_XX_30049
Field device for

intrinsically safe area
Application
Engineering
Standardized, open system for greater flexibility (non-Siemens
IO-Link devices can be integrated in engineering)
Uniform, transparent configuring and programming through
integrated engineering (SIMATIC STEP 7)
Unassigned SIMATIC function blocks for easy parameterization,
diagnostics and read-out of measured values
Efficient engineering thanks to pre-integration into SIMATIC HMI
Low error rate in CAD circuit diagram design as a result of reduced control current wiring
IO-Link can be used in the following main applications:

Easy connection of complex IO-Link sensors/actuators with a
large number of parameters and diagnostic data to the control
system
Replacement of sensor boxes for connecting binary sensors
with the IO-Link input modules optimized in terms of cabling
Optimized cable connection of switching devices to the control system
Simple transmission of energy values from the device to the
control system for integration into a user program or power
management
Installation and commissioning

Faster assembly with minimized error rate as a result of
Less space required in the control cabinet
Low-cost circuitry where there are several feeders by making
full use of existing components
In these cases, all the diagnostics data are transmitted to the

higher-level control system through IO-Link. The parameter settings can be changed during operation. Central data storage
means that it is possible to exchange an IO-Link sensor/actuator
without a PC or programming device.
Operation and maintenance

High transparency in the system right down to field level and
integration into power management systems
Reduction in downtimes and maintenance times thanks to
system-wide diagnostics and faster fault correction
Support of predictive maintenance
Shorter changeover times, even for field devices, by means of
parameter and recipe management
Integration of the device configuration in the STEP 7 environment

guarantees:
Quick and easy engineering
Consistent data storage
Quick localization and rectification of faults
Integration in STEP 7
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/89
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Introduction
System components
Overview
To implement communication, a system installation has the

following main components:
An IO-Link master
Several IO-Link devices, usually sensors (RFID systems),
actuators or combinations of these
A standard 3-wire sensor/actuator cable
IO-Link product family

IO-Link
engineering:
SIMATIC
S7-PCT
Visualization:
SIMATIC HMI
WinCC
Switching cabinet installation
Field installation
Controller
S7-300/
S7-400
Controller
S7-1200
PROFINET
SIRIUS
3RA2 load feeders
with 3RA27
function modules
Actuators
Example of a configuration with the system components
2/90
Siemens IC 10 2014
SIRIUS
3RB24
overload
relays
SIRIUS
3RS14/
3RS15
relays
K20
IO-Link
module
SIRIUS
3RT2 contactor
with SIRIUS
3RR24 relay
RFID
system
RF200
RFID
system
RF200
Standard
sensors
IK10_30141c
SIRIUS
3RA6
compact
starters
SIRIUS
3UG48
relay
SIMATIC
ET 200eco PN
with IO-Link
master
ET 200SP (ET 200S)

with IO-Link master
IO-Link
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Introduction
Compatibility of IO-Link
Analog signals
IO-Link guarantees compatibility between IO-Link-capable

modules and standard modules as follows:
IO-Link sensors can be operated both on IO-Link modules
(masters) and standard input modules.
IO-Link sensors/actuators as well as today's standard sensors/actuators can be used on IO-Link masters.
If conventional components are used in the IO-Link system,
then of course only the standard functions are available at this
point.
Another advantage of IO-Link technology is that analog signals

are digitized already in the IO-Link sensor itself and are digitally
transmitted by the IO-Link communication. As the result, faults
are prevented and there is no extra cost for cable shielding.
Load feeders and motor starters
Grouping of motor starters
Through IO-Link it is possible to control not only sensors but also

actuators in the form of load feeders and motor starters.
The SIRIUS controls allow four starters to be combined to form a

group.
ET 200S/ET 200SP with

digital I/O modules
Point-to-point
connection
through IO-Link
Classic
wiring
Sensor
box
K20
Sensors
Actuators
IO-Link compatibility also permits connection of standard sensors/actuators, i.e. conventional sensors/actuators can also be
connected to IO-Link. This is particularly effective with the
IO-Link input modules, which allow several sensors to be
connected at one time via a cable to the controller.
Actuators
Sensors
NSA0_00489c
ET 200S/ET 200SP
with IO-Link master
Enhanced through IO-Link input modules
Possibilities for connecting load feeders and motor starters to IO-Link or

in the conventional way
Connection of a motor starter group made up of three 3RA64 direct-online starters and a 3RA65 reversing starter
In this way up to 16 starters can be operated on a single IO-Link

master. This leads to a reduction in the installation space and
control wiring required.
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/91
System components
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Introduction
System components
Overload and monitoring relays
By combining overload/monitoring relays with IO-Link it is now

possible to send data that has already been recorded and
1
evaluated in the monitoring relays directly to the controller.

This avoids the use of duplicated sensors.
3
3UG48
monitoring
relay
3UG46
monitoring
relay
Feeder
Feeder
IO-Link
master
IO-Link
PLC
1
PLC
3UG48
monitoring
relay
3UG48
monitoring
relay
Analog
signal
converter
3UG46
monitoring
relay
3UG46
monitoring
relay
Motor
Motor
1 Signaling of limit value violation plus measurement data
transmission to PLC
2 Autonomous operation without PLC
IC01_00175
Current
transformers

transmission to PLC
3 Signaling of limit value violation to PLC
Possibilities for connecting overload relays to IO-Link or in the conventional way
Wireless communication
Using an upstream IWLAN client module, such as
SCALANCE W746-1PRO, allows IO-Link to be be integrated into
the PROFINET world via a distributed I/O. Possible uses include
acting as an alternative to fault-prone cable carrier or collector
wire technology. The individual diagnostics options offered by
the various IO-Link devices provide greater transparency for the

production process. Just like the parameter data for a device,
these diagnostics data can be evaluated remotely using the
possibilities offered by SIMATIC. This supports remote maintenance down to the lowest level in the field.
Pump station
Maintenance station
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE W784
Access Point
ET 200SP (ET 200S)

with IO-Link master
3RA6 Compact
starter
Control room
SIMATIC HMI
KTP 1500 Basic
SIMATIC
S7-300
SCALANCE
W786-xPRO
Outdoor
Access Point
Wireless communication between Industrial Ethernet and IO-Link components
2/92
Siemens IC 10 2014
IC01_00198a
IO-Link
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Introduction
System components
IO-Link components
IO-Link devices (continued)
Masters
IO-Link RFID systems
IO-Link master modules for ET 200SP
SIMATIC RF200 RFID system in the HF range
CM 4xIO-Link
SIMATIC RF210R, SIMATIC RF220R,

SIMATIC RF260R products
Simple identification tasks (read-only), such as reading

an ID number
4SI IO-Link electronic module

See this chapter
SIMATIC RF210R,
SIMATIC RF220R,
SIMATIC RF260R
CM 4x IO-Link
for ET 200SP
see Catalog ID 10 "Industrial Identification Systems"
STEP 7 PCT
Switching with IO-Link
Engineering software for configuring the IO-Link master

modules for ET 200SP, ET 200S and ET 200eco
Available as a stand-alone version or integrated into

STEP 7 (Version 5.5 SP1 or later)
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors, 3-pole, up to 18.5 kW
Retrieval of parameter and diagnostics data from the

IO-Link devices connected to the master
Open interface for importing further IODDs
IOL_CALL
ID
CAP
RD_WR
PORT
IOL_INDEX
IOL_SUBINDEX
DONE
BUSY
BOOL
BOOL
ERROR
STATUS
IOL_STATUS
BOOL
DWO
DWO
RD_LEN
LEN
RECORD_IOL_DATA
Power contactors for switching motors

Contactor assemblies
SIRIUS 3RA2711
function modules
for IO-Link
SIRIUS 3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies

SIRIUS 3RA24 cont. assembl. for wye-delta starting
SIRIUS 3RA27 function modules for IO-Link
Freely available for download from

Industry Online Support1)
For direct-on-line starters, reversing starters and

wye-delta starters
IO-Link Call function block
See Chapter 3 in IC 10 "Switching Devices Contactors

and Contactor Assemblies for Switching Motors"
STEP 7 function block for easy acyclical data exchange

in the user program
Motor starters for use in the control cabinet
INT
IC01_00197
INT
ANY
REQ
Simple connection via master modules for IO-Link, such

as SIMATIC ET 200S and ET 200eco
Software
Monitoring of the process image of the IO-Link devices
BOOL
No RFID-spec. programming, ideal for those new to RFID
Use with the tried and tested ISO 15693 transponders

(MOBY D)
STEP 7 PCT
DWORD
INT
BOOL
INT
INT
INT
IO-Link master, software, cables
SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters

3RA64 direct-on-line starters
IO-Link Call
function block
3RA65 reversing starters

Infeed systems for 3RA6
WinCC flexible template project

Easy integration of IO-Link devices into the user program by using ready-made WinCC flexible templates
SIRIUS 3RA64
direct-on-line
starter
Contactors with IO-Link

Overload relays
WinCC flexible
template project
SIRIUS 3RB24 solid-state overload relays for IO-Link

IODD files
Evaluation module
IO-Link Device Description (IODD) files provide the

device description for IO-Link
Current measuring modules from 0.3 to 630 A
Comprehensive IODD catalog of SIEMENS IO-Link

devices
SIRIUS 3RB24
overload relays
Controlling direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta

starters via IO-Link in conjunction with contactors
Full motor protection
Diagnostics and current value transmission via IO-Link
Cable
See Chapter 7 in IC 10 "Protection Equipment"
3-wire standard cable
Monitoring with IO-Link
see for example catalog ID 10 "Industrial Identification

Systems"
Monitoring relays
SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relays for IO-Link
IO-Link devices
Monitoring voltage, current, residual current, network,

speed or p.f. according to device design
Detection with IO-Link
On/tripping delay time can be adjusted
IO-Link input modules

K20 input module
4 inputs, M12 connections
SIRIUS 3UG48
monitoring relays
See chapter 10 "Monitoring and Control Devices"

SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15 temperature monitoring relays for
IO-Link
8 inputs, standard M8 connections

K20 input module
See chapter 8 in IC 10 "Load Feeders and Motor

Starters for Use in the Control Cabinet"
See chapter 2 in IC 10 "Industrial Communication"
Temperature monitoring with connected sensors

Two limit values, can be adjusted separately
1)
2)
3)
4)
SIRIUS 3RS14
temperature
monitoring relays
SIRIUS 3RR24 monitoring relays for IO-Link
Monitoring of current, phase failure, open circuit and
phase sequence
Designed for mounting on 3RT2 contactors
SIRIUS 3RR24
monitoring relays
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/93
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Introduction
IO-Link specification
Principles of the IO-Link specification
Service data (SD)
According to the IO-Link specification, communication functions

as follows:
Transmission takes place via an unshielded three-wire cable
no more than 20 m long, of the kind normally used for standard
sensors
Analog values which have already been digitized are transmitted in the form of message frames, which may correspond to
+/- 10 V or 4 to 20 mA
Digital communication from 0 to 24 V on the so-called
C/Q cable
Most of the values transmitted are measured values from the
sensors
The sensors and actuators are described by the IO-Link
Device Description (IODD)
While the IO-Link specification permits an infinite number of
ports, an IO-Link master currently only supports four ports.
Only one IO-Link device (slave) can be connected to each
port (point-to-point connection)
The transmission rates between IO-Link master and the
devices are as follows:
- via COM1: 4 800 Bd
- via COM2: 38 400 Bd
- via COM3: 230 400 Bd
The average cycle time is 2 ms for the reading/writing of
16 data bits at a transmission rate of 38 400 Bd
With the aid of the service data, parameter values or device statuses can be read out. It is also possible to write the parameter
values or transmit commands via the service data. Service data
are always exchanged acyclically and in response to an inquiry
from the IO-Link master.
IO-Link protocol
The IO-Link master can contain the parameter server. The parameter server can also be implemented centrally in the PLC or
in a system server. In this case the IO-link master passes on the
corresponding information.
For the dialog between device and master, IO-Link uses a standard protocol, the standard asynchronous communication interface (UART) in "semi-duplex" mode.
The IO-Link protocol supports both the Standard IO mode (SIO)
and the IO-Link communication mode (COM).
Interface hardware:
Compatible with sensors according to IEC 60947-5-2 and actuators
Communication and switching possible alternately
IO-Link master
1
2
C/Q
COM
Serial,
bidirectional
communication
SIO / IO-Link
Via events it is possible to transmit device events or statuses

such as contamination, overheating, short circuits etc., from the
the device via the IO-Link master to the PLC or to visualize them.
The events are sent on the initiative of the devices via the "event
flag", which the master evaluates. The master itself can also generate events.
Three categories of event are defined:
Error signals (errors)
Maintenance data (warnings)
Device functions (notifications)
Data storage
As of Specification V1.1, a data storage concept has been created for IO-Link. In this concept, the IO-Link device initiates the
storage of its data on a higher-level parameter server. In the
event that a device is replaced, the parameter server can restore
the original parameterization. It is therefore possible to replace
the devices without re-parameterization.
IO-Link master
The IO-Link master is the interface to higher-level control systems. The IO-Link master presents itself as a normal fieldbus
node, and is integrated into the appropriate network configurator
via the relevant device description (e.g. GSD, FDCML, EDS
etc.).
The IO-Link Device Description (IODD) has been defined to provide a full, transparent description of system characteristics as
far as the IO-Link device. It is based on the open XML standard.
L+
SIO
Standard IO
switching
operation
Events
IO-Link Device Description (IODD)
IO-Link device
IC01_00176
Overview
The IODD contains information on communication characteristics, device parameters, identification, process and diagnostics
data, and is supplied by the manufacturer. The design of the
IODD is the same for all devices from all manufacturers, and is
always presented in the same way by the IODD Interpreter Tools.
This therefore ensures that the handling is the same for all
IO-Link devices, whatever the manufacturer.
New in IO-Link Specification 1.1
The structure of the protocol and its message frames depends on the
types of data to be transmitted.
The IO-Link Specification is currently available in Version 1.1,

and standardized according to IEC 61131-9.
Data types
Specification 1.1 offers the following new features compared

with the previous Specification 1.0:
Transmission of up to 32 bytes of process or service data
in a single cycle.
Data storage concept
In the IO-Link specification a distinction is made between the

following data types:
Process data
The process data of the devices are transmitted cyclically in a
data frame, provided the process data width does not exceed
2 bytes. In the case of larger process data widths up to 32 bytes,
parts are transmitted one after the other in several cycles. As of
Version V1.1 of the specification, up to 32 bytes of process data
can be transferred in a single cycle.
2/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Masters
IO-Link master module for ET 200SP
CM 4xIO-Link
Overview
Module integration
To integrate the module you need the engineering tool STEP 7
V5.5 and higher or STEP 7 V11 TIA Portal.
Configuration
S7-PCT V3.0 and higher is required in addition for IO-Link
configuration.
The following diagram shows a PROFINET configuration in
which PROFINET ET 200SP and ET 200ecoPN devices are
integrated with IO-Link masters.
IO-Link master CM 4xIO-Link
The CM 4xIO-Link communication module is the IO-Link master,

for use in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Configuration of a PROFINET network with lower-level

IO-Link masters
Features
IO-Link master as serial communication module with 4 ports
according to IO-Link specification V1.1
Module exchange with automatic data recovery without
engineering for IO-Link master and device
Up to four IO-Link devices (3-wire connections)
can be connected to each IO-Link master module.
Data transmission rates COM1 (4.8 kBd),
COM2 (38.4 kBd), COM3 (230.4 kBd), automatic adjustment
to the transmission rate supported by the device
Port-by-port parameterizable diagnostics
PROFIenergy support
Parameterization of IO-Link parameters by S7-PCT V3.0 and
higher
The address areas for exchanging the cyclic data (process values) are defined by IO-Link in the device view of the PROFINET
device.
Central data storage

If the communication module is pulled off the BaseUnit, part of
the electronic coding element will remain in the BaseUnit. Stored
in this part are the parameters of the CM 4xIO-Link and the parameters of the IO-Link devices. When a new (not yet parameterized) IO-Link master is plugged on, it will adopt the parameters
from the electronic coding element.
Device view with setting of the address area by IO-Link via TIA Portal
Startup
For commissioning, S7-PCT V3.0 and higher is required in addition to an engineering tool in order to parameterize the IO-Link
master.
Connection
All type A0 BaseUnits can be used for the CM 4xIO-Link
communication module, i.e. all variants of the BaseUnit
(without/with infeed, -AUX).
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/95
Configuration
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Masters
IO-Link master module for ET 200SP
CM 4xIO-Link

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
CM 4xIO-Link communication modules
6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0
DT
Article No.
6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0
Version
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
255
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
255
IO-Link master for SIMATIC ET 200SP,

can be plugged onto BaseUnit A0
Corresponds to IO-Link specification V1.1
6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0
Accessories
Version
Price
per PU
BaseUnits
BaseUnit BU15-P16+A10+2D for
CM 4xIO-Link to ET 200SP
For opening a new voltage group via the plugged-in
peripheral module
Current carrying capacity per process terminal max. 2 A
6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0
More information
Manuals
Industry Mall
Manual "SIMATIC IO-Link System" see

More information
see Industry Mall at "Automation Technology"
"Industrial Communication" "IO-Link" "Masters"
"IO-Link Master Module for ET 200SP"
System manual "ET 200SP Distributed I/O System" see

2/96
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Masters
4SI IO-Link electronic modules
The 4SI IO-Link electronic module is an IO-Link master and enables easy integration of sensors and actuators from different
manufacturers in the SIMATIC ET 200S multifunctional, distributed I/O system at a total of four ports.
Features
Up to four IO-Link devices (3-wire connections)
3RA6 compact starters or load feeders with 3RA27 function
modules can even be bundled in groups of four devices on
one IO-Link port.
It is possible therefore to connect up to 16 load feeders to the
control system at one IO-Link master module.
Up to four standard sensors (2-wire/3-wire connection) can be
connected.
The 4SI IO-Link electronic module has a width of 15 mm and
can be used with the following universal terminal modules:
- TM-E15S26-A1 (screw terminals)
- TM-E15C26-A1 (spring-type terminals)
- TM-E15N26-A1 (FastConnect)
Supports firmware update (STEP 7 V5.4 SP4 and higher).
Corresponds to IO-Link Specification V1.0
4SI IO-Link electronic module for ET 200S

Version
Connection
DT
4SI IO-Link
electronic modules
Screw terminals, spring-type A

terminals or FastConnect,
depending on universal
terminal module
Article No.
Price
per PU
6ES7138-4GA50-0AB0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
250
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4GA50-0AB0
Accessories
Version
Connection
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Universal terminal modules for ET 200S

Connection
Module type
Screw
TM-E15S26-A1
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
1 unit
250
Spring-type
TM-E15C26-A1
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
1 unit
250
FastConnect
TM-E15N26-A1
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
1 unit
250
More information
Product manual "SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O 4SI IO-Link
electronic modules" see
More information and technical specifications
see Industry Mall under "Automation"
"IO-Link Master Modules for ET 200S".

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/97
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Masters
Overview
The SIRIUS 4SI electronic module allows the simple and

cost-effective connection of SIRIUS devices with IO-Link to the
multifunctional, distributed I/O system SIMATIC ET 200S at a
total of four ports.
Features
Up to 4 SIRIUS devices can be connected at the 4 ports of the
SIRIUS 4SI electronic module.
3RA6 compact starters or load feeders with 3RA27 function
modules can even be bundled in groups of four devices on
one IO-Link port.
It is possible therefore to connect up to 16 load feeders to the
control system at one IO-Link master module.
The SIRIUS 4SI electronic module has a width of 15 mm and
can be used with the following universal terminal modules:
- TM-E15S26-A1 (screw terminals)
- TM-E15C26-A1 (spring-type terminals)
- TM-E15N26-A1 (FastConnect)
Supports firmware update (STEP 7 V5.4 SP5 and higher)
Corresponds to IO-Link Specification V1.0
SIRIUS 4SI electronic module for ET 200S

Version
Connection
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
SIRIUS 4SI
electronic modules
Screw terminals,
}
spring-type terminals or
FastConnect, depending on
universal terminal module
3RK1005-0LB00-0AA0
Version
Connection
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42F
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1005-00LB00
-0AA00
Accessories
Price
per PU

Connection
Module type
Screw
TM-E15S26-A1
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
1 unit
250
Spring-type
TM-E15C26-A1
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
1 unit
250
FastConnect
TM-E15N26-A1
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
1 unit
250
More information
Manual "Distributed I/O system ET 200S - 4SI SIRIUS electronic
module" see
"IO-Link Master Modules for ET 200S".
2/98
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Masters
The ET 200eco PN IO-Link master module is an IO-Link master

and enables easy connection of sensors and actuators from different manufacturers to the I/Os directly in the machine's field
area.
Features
Up to four IO-Link devices (3-wire connection)
Up to eight standard sensors (8 DI) and up to four standard
actuators (4 DO) can be connected in addition.

Version
Connection
DT
Article No.

ET 200eco PN
M12
6ES7148-6JA00-0AB0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
250
Block I/Os in IP65
6ES7148-6JA00-0AB0
More information
Manual "SIMATIC Distributed I/O ET 200eco PN"
see
"IO-Link Master Modules for ET 200eco PN".

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/99
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Input modules
General data
Benefits
Overview
IO-Link input modules
Using IO-Link technology, it is basically possible to connect

standard sensors to IO-Link masters. However, connecting
standard sensors directly to the IO-Link master does not exploit
the full potential of IO-Link. The solution lies in the technology of
the IO-Link modules. Their use is a more economically attractive
solution in comparison with the direct connection of a sensor.
IO-Link input modules are a sensible addition to the ET 200S
distributed peripherals. The IO-Link input module technology
enhances IO-Link via a pure point-to-point cable connection
towards decentralized structures. The maximum cable length
of an IO-Link connection between an IO-Link module and an
IO-Link master is 20 m. The use of sensor boxes with accordingly complex and error-prone wiring is no longer necessary.
The use of IO-Link input modules has the following benefits:

Economical use of innovative IO-Link technology also for binary sensors
Optimum use of all ports of the IO-Link master
Connection of several binary sensors/actuators to one port of
the IO-Link master, hence low-cost connection of also binary
sensors/actuators to the control system through IO-Link
Reduction of digital input modules in the peripheral station
Use of parameters also for binary sensors (e.g. NC contacts,
NO contacts and input delay can be parameterized)
Reduction of cabling and hence less risk of wiring errors by
dispensing with sensor boxes
Expansion toward distributed structures using pure
point-to-point wiring
Easy and elegant integration of sensors within a radius of 20 m
around an ET 200S station
Possibility of transmitting parameter and diagnostic signals
(e.g. sensor supply overload)
Can also be used in harsh ambient conditions thanks to the
very compact design and degree of protection IP67
Application
IO-Link input modules are particularly used where sensor boxes
had previously been used for the connection of binary sensors.
Digital input module (4DI)
Sensor boxes
Transmission of parameter and diagnostic signals
NSA0_00477a
The IO-Link input modules also offer the possibility of transmitting parameters and diagnostic signals. This enables for example the inputs of modules to be parameterized as NC contacts
or NO contacts through IO-Link. An overload or short circuit in
the sensor supply is signaled to the control system through the
IO-Link master.
M8 and M12 terminals
M8 and M12 terminals are available for connecting the sensors.
Connection to the IO-Link master is made using a standard M12
connecting cable.
Standard sensors
Former technology with sensor boxes

IO-link master
NSA0_00478a
IO-link modules
Standard sensors
Technology with IO-Link input modules
2/100
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Input modules
K20 IO-Link modules

Pin
assignment
Connection
methods
DT Article No.
4 inputs
M12
8 inputs
Standard
M8
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK5010-0BA10-0AA0
1 unit
42C
3RK5010-0CA00-0AA0
1 unit
42C
Type
K20 IO-Link modules
3RK5010-0BA10-0AA0
3RK5010-0CA00-0AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
2/101
Siemens AG 2013
IO-Link
Input modules
K20 IO-Link modules
Accessories
Version
DT Article No.
M12 sealing caps

M8 sealing caps
For free M8 sockets
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
3RK1901-1PN00
100 10 units
42C
3RK1901-1KA00
3RK1901-1PN00
3RK1902-4GB50-4AA0

Angular M12 socket for screw fixing, 4-pole,
4 x 0.34 mm2,
Cable length 5 m
3RK1902-4GB50-4AA0
1 unit
42D
C
Angular M12 sockets
for screw fixing, 4-pole screw terminals, max. 0.75 mm2,
A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
1 unit
42D
M12 plugs, straight

C
A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
1 unit
42D
M12 plugs, angled

C
A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4DA00-5AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
3RK1902-4DA00-5AA0
M12 plugs, angled, for screw fixing, 5-pole,
5 x 0.34 mm2,
3RK1902-4H...-5AA0
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
Cable length 1.5 m
3RK1902-4HB15-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Cable length 5 m
3RK1902-4HB50-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Cable length 10 m
3RK1902-4HC01-5AA0
1 unit
42D
Control cable, assembled at both ends

C
Straight M12 plug, straight M12 socket, for screw fixing,
2
3-pole, 3 x 0.34 mm ,
Cable length 1.5 m
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 unit
42D
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
1 unit
250

For connection of two sensors to one M12 socket
with Y assignment
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
More information
see Industry Mall under "Automation Technology"
"Industrial Communication" "IO-Link"
"IO modules" "IO-Link K20 Modules".
2/102
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Switching Devices Contactors

and Contactor Assemblies
for Switching Motors
3/2
3/6
3/13
3/40
3/64
3/65
3/91
3/96
3/112
3/117
3/127
3/135
3/145
3/150
3/158
3/164
3/173
3/180
3/181
3/183
3/184
3/188
3/193
Introduction
Power contactors
for switching motors
General data
SIRIUS 3RT20 contactors, 3-pole,
3 ... 18.5 kW
Accessories for 3RT2 contactors
Spare parts for 3RT2 contactors
15 ... 250 kW
SIRIUS 3RT12 vacuum contactors,
3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
Accessories for 3RT1 contactors
Spare parts for 3RT1 contactors
3TF6 vacuum contactors, 3-pole,
335 ... 450 kW
3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid
system, 3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
3TF2 contactors, 3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Notes:
3RT1 contactors in sizes S00/S0 to S12
and 3RA1 contactor assemblies in sizes
S00/S0 to S3 can be found
- in the Catalog Add-On
IC 10 AO 2014
in the DVD box IC 01
IC 10 AO 2014
at the Information and Download
Center
- in the interactive catalog CA 01
- in the Industry Mall
Conversion tool,
e.g. from 3RT10 to 3RT20 see
www.siemens.com/sirius/conversion-tool
Coupling contactors
SIRIUS 3RT20 coupling contactors
(interface), 3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
3RA23, 3RA13, 3RA24, 3RA14
contactor assemblies
SIRIUS 3RA23 reversing contactor
assemblies
SIRIUS 3RA13 reversing contactor
assemblies
SIRIUS 3RA24 contactor assemblies
for wye-delta starting
3TD, 3TE contactor assemblies
3TD6 reversing contactor assemblies,
335 kW
3TE6 contactor assemblies for
wye-delta starting, 630 kW
Function modules for mounting onto
SIRIUS 3RT2 contactors
Introduction
SIRIUS function modules
SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link
SIRIUS function modules for
AS-Interface
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Price groups
PG 41A, 41B, 41H, 42F, 4N1
Siemens AG 2013
Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor Assemblies

Power Contactors for Switching Motors
Introduction
Overview
Size
Type
S00
3RT201
S0
3RT202
3RT20 contactors
Type
3RT2015
AC, DC operation
(p. 3/28, 3/30)
3RT2016
3RT2017
3RT2018
3RT2023
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
17
25
32
38
11
15
18.5
5.5
11
--
7.5
18.5
--
11
18.5
--
(p. 3/33, 3/35)
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V
400 V
kW
12
5.5
16
7.5
9
4
12
5.5
230 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
1.5
4
--
2.2
5.5
--
3
5.5
--
4
7.5
--
2.2
7.5
--
3
7.5
--
400 V
kW
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
11
11
400 V
(200 000 operating cycles)
kW
1.15
2.5
2.6
3.5
4.4
22
22
50
50
7.5
4
11
--
AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)
AC-1 (40 C, 690 V)

3RT20
Ie
18
22
40
40
40
40
Accessories for contactors

Auxiliary switch blocks On front
3RH2911
(p. 3/53)
3RH2911
(p. 3/53)
3RH2911
(p. 3/55)
3RH2921
(p. 3/55)
Timing relay blocks
3RA281.
(p. 3/186)
3RA281.
(p. 3/186)
Function modules
3RA271.-. AA00
(p. 3/157, 3/172)
3RA271.-. AA00
(p. 3/157, 3/172)
Surge suppressors
3RT2916
(p. 3/59)
3RT2926
(p. 3/59)
Lateral
3RU2 and 3RB3 overload relays (Chapter 7, "Protection Equipment" "Overload Relays")
3RU21, thermal, CLASS 10
3RU2116
0.11 ... 16 A
3RU2126
1.8 ... 40 A
3RB30/3RB31, solid-state,
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30
3RB3016
3RB3113
0.1 ... 16 A
3RB3026
3RB3123
0.1 ... 40 A
3RV20 motor starter protectors (Chapter 7, "Protection Equipment" "Motor Starter Protectors")
Type
3RV2011
Link modules
3RA2911
0.11 ... 16 A
3RV2021
11 ... 40 A
3RA2921
3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies

Complete units
Type 3RA2315
3RA2316
3RA2317
3RA2318
--
(p. 3/153)
400 V
kW
3RA2324
3RA2325
3RA2326
3RA2327
3RA2328
7.5
11
15
18.5
(p. 3/155)
4
5.5
7.5
5.5
Assembly kits/wiring modules
3RA2913-2AA.
(p. 3/156)
--
3RA2923-2AA.
(p. 3/156)
Function modules
3RA271.-. BA00
(p. 3/157)
--
3RA271.-. BA0
(p. 3/157)
3RA24 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting

Complete units
Type 3RA2415
3RA2416
3RA2417
(p. 3/168)
400 V
kW
5.5
3RA2423
3RA2425
3RA2426
22
(p. 3/170)
11
11
15/18.5
3RA2913-2BB.
7.5
(p. 3/171)
3RA2923-2BB.
(p. 3/171)
Function modules
3RA271.-. CA00
(p. 3/172)
3RA271.-. CA00
(p. 3/172)
Note:
Safety characteristics for contactors see Chapter 16, "Appendix"
"Standards and Approvals" "Overview".
3/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Size
Type
S2
3RT103
S3
3RT104
S6
3RT105
3RT10 contactors
Type
3RT1034
AC, DC operation
(p. 3/83, 3/85)
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
(p. 3/84, 3/86)
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
(p. 3/87)
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V
32
40
50
65
80
95
115
150
185
400 V
kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
230 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
7.5
18.5
18.5
--
11
22
22
--
15
30
22
--
18.5
37
45
30
22
45
55
37
22
55
55
37
37
75
110
75
45
90
132
90
55
110
160
90
400 V
kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
400 V
kW
12.6
15.1
17.9
22
29
38
45
120
160
185
215
(Chap. 4)
3RT1456

8.2
9.5
AC-1 (40 C, 690 V)

A
Ie
50
60
60
100
(Chap. 4)
3RT1446
120
3RT14 AC-1 contactors

Type
--
Ie/AC-1/40 C/ 690 V
--
140
(Chap. 4)
275

3RH1921
3RH1921
(p. 3/103)
(p. 3/105)
Terminal covers
3RT1936-4EA2
(p. 3/110)
Box terminal blocks
--
Surge suppressors
3RT1926/36
Auxiliary switch
blocks
On front
Lateral
3RT1946-4EA1/2
(p. 3/110)
-(p. 3/108)
3RT1956-4EA1/2/3
(p. 3/110)
3RT1955/56-4G
(p. 3/110)
3RT1956-1C (RC element) (p. 3/108)
3RU1136
5.5 ... 50 A
3RU1146
18 ... 100 A
--
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30
3RB2036
3RB2136
6 ... 50 A
3RB2046
3RB2146
12.5 ... 100 A
3RB2056
3RB2156
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30
3RB2.83 + 3RB2906
10 ... 100 A
50 ... 200 A
3RB2.83 + 3RB2956
20 ... 200 A
Type
3RV1031
Link modules
3RA1931
22 ... 50 A
(Chap. 7)
3RV1041
45 ... 100 A (Chap. 7)
(Chap. 7)
3RA1941
(Chap. 7)
--
3RV1063
40 ... 200 A

Complete units
Type 3RA1334
(p. 3/159)
3RA1335
3RA1336
3RA1344
(p. 3/160)
3RA1345
3RA1346
--
400 V
kW
18.5
37
45
55
(p. 3/162)
3RA1953-2A
(p. 3/162)
3RA1954-2A
(p. 3/161)
22
30
15
3RA1933-2A
(p. 3/162)
3RA1943-2A
Mechanical interlocks
3RA1924-1A/-2B
(p. 3/161)
75
90

Complete units
Type 3RA1434
(p. 3/176)
3RA1435
(p. 3/177)
400 V
kW
37
22/30
3RA1933-2B/-2C
3RA1436
3RA1444
(p. 3/178)
3RA145
45
55
75
(p. 3/179)
3RA1943-2B/-2C
--(p. 3/179)
3RA1953-2B
Siemens IC 10 2014
(p. 3/179)
3/3
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Size
Type
S10
3RT1.6
S12
3RT1.7
14
3TF6
3RT10 contactors 3RT12 and 3TF68/69 vacuum contactors

Type
AC, DC operation
3RT1064
(p. 3/87)
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
(p. 3/87)
3RT1076
--
Type
3RT1264
(p. 3/95)
3RT1265
3RT1266
3RT1275
(p. 3/95)
3RT1276
3TF68
(p. 3/123)
3TF69
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V
225
265
300
400
500
630
820
400 V
kW
110
132
160
200
250
335
450
230 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
3RT10/3RT12 kW
3RT10/3RT12 kW
55
160
200
90/315
75
160
250
132/355
90
200
250
132/400
132
250
400
250/560
160
355
400/500
250/710
200
434
600
600
260
600
800
800
110
54/78
132
66/93
160
71/112
200
84/140
250
98/161
355
168
400
191
275/330
330
330
430/610
610
700
910
(Chap. 4)
3RT1476
(Chap. 4)
--

400 V
kW
3RT10/3RT12 kW
400 V
AC-1 (40 C, 690 V)
3RT10/3RT12 A
Ie
3RT14 AC-1 contactors

Type
3RT1466
Ie/AC-1/40 C/ 690 V
400
690
--

3RH1921
3RH1921
(p. 3/103)
(p. 3/105)
-3TY7561
(p. 3/125)
Terminal covers
3RT1966-4EA1/-4EA2/-4EA3
(p. 3/110)
3TX7686/696
(p. 3/125)
Box terminal blocks
3RT1966-4G
(p. 3/110)
--
Surge suppressors
3RT1956-1C (RC element)
(p. 3/108)
3TX7572
Auxiliary switch
blocks
On front
Lateral
(p. 3/125)
--
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30
3RB2066
3RB2166
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30
3RB2.83 + 3RB2966
63 ... 630 A
-55 ... 630 A
3RB2066
3RB2166
-160 ... 630 A
3RB2066
3RB2166
160 ... 630 A
3RV1083
252 ... 630 A
Type
3RV1073
Link modules
--
160 ... 400 A
3RV1083
252 ... 630 A
--
--
--
3TD6804
(p. 3/180)

Complete units
Type --
400 V
kW
160
200
250
335
110
3RA1963-2A
132
(p. 3/162)
3RA1973-2A
(p. 3/162)
3TX7680-1A
(Industry Mall)
3RA1954-2A
(p. 3/161)
3TX7686-1A
(Industry Mall)

Complete units
Type --
400 V
kW
--
3RA1963-2B
Note:
3/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
--
3TE6804
(p. 3/182)
-(p. 3/179)
3RA1973-2B
630
(p. 3/179)
3TX7680-1B
(Industry Mall)
Siemens AG 2013

Connection methods
Support function
The contactors are available with screw terminals (box terminals

or flat connectors) or with spring-type terminals.
The 3RT20 contactors can also be ordered via an online

configurator.
Devices of the 3TF2 series are also available for connection with
flat connectors and solder pin connectors.
Configurator available in the Industry Mall
As an option the devices of the 3RT2 series are also available for
connection with ring terminal lugs, particularly versions for North
America and Japan.
The online configurator is indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbol shown on an orange background.
Screw terminals
Flat connectors
Solder pin connections
Ring terminal lug connections
The terminals are indicated in the corresponding
tables by the symbols shown on orange backgrounds.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/5
Introduction
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
The SIRIUS family of controls
3RT2 contactors and coupling contactors

Size S00 with mountable accessories
10
11
12
3
13
14
4
16
8
1
15
NSB0_02056a
The SIRIUS modular system with its components for the

switching, starting, protection and monitoring of motors and
industrial systems stands for the fast, flexible and space-saving
construction of control cabinets.
13
14
1 Contactor size S00

2 1-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable
3 1-pole auxiliary switch block, for snapping onto the front
Cable entry from the top
Cable entry from the bottom
6 3RA28 function module
7 3RA27 function module for AS-Interface, direct starting
8 3RA27 function module for IO-Link, direct starting
9 Surge suppressor with/without LED
10 Three-phase feeder terminal
Accessories see pages 3/48 to 3/63.

Contactor assemblies see pages 3/153 to 3/155.
Assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies
(mech. interlocking, wiring modules) see page 3/156.
3/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
11 Star jumper, 3-pole, without connecting terminal

12 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connecting terminal
13 Wiring modules, on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
14 Solder pin adapter
15 Connection module (adapter and connector) for contactors
with screw-type connection
16 Safety main current connector for two contactors
For contactors
For contactors and coupling contactors (interface)
Mountable overload relays see Chapter 7,

"Protection Equipment" "Overload Relays".
Fuseless load feeders see Chapter 8,
"Load Feeders and Motor Starters"
"SIRIUS 3RA2 Load Feeders".
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RT2 contactors and coupling contactors
Size S0 with mountable accessories
16
17
14
15
2
1
18
11
10
3
4
6
15
NSB0_02057a
14
7
13
8
12
1 Contactor size S0
2 1-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable
Cable entry from the top
Cable entry from the bottom
6 Surge suppressor with/without LED
7 3RA27 function module for AS-Interface, direct starting
8 3RA28 function module
9 3RA27 function module for IO-Link, direct starting
10 Pneumatic delay block
11 Mechanical latching block

12 Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connecting terminal
13 Connection module (adapter and plug) for contactors
with screw-type connection
14 Coil terminal module, on the top and bottom
15 Wiring modules, on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
16 Three-phase feeder terminal
17 Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
without connecting terminal
18 Safety main current connector for two contactors
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/7
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S2 and S3 with mountable accessories
4
5
17
11
18
21
22
10
16
12
14
6
9
15
7
19
8
16
21
13
22
23
3
24
NSB0_02183
20
2 Contactor, size S2
3 Contactor, size S3
For sizes S2 and S3:
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Solid-state timing relay block, ON-delay

Solid-state timing relay block, OFF-delay
Auxiliary switch block, solid-state time-delay
(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function)
2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above
2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below
4-pole auxiliary switch block
(terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005)
Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole,
without connecting terminal
Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with connecting terminal
2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on)
Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable
Mechanical interlock, mountable to the front
Wiring connectors on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
3/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
17 Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly),

can be mounted on the top or bottom
18 Mechanical latching interface for mounting directly onto contactor coil
19 LED module for indicating contactor operation
Only for size S2:
20 Mechanical latching
Only for sizes S2 and S3:
21 Coil repeat terminal for making contactor assemblies
22 Terminal cover for box terminal
Only for size S3:
23 Terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection
24 Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole
Accessories identical for sizes S2 and S3
Accessories differ according to size
Fuseless load feeders see Chapter 8,

"Load Feeders and Motor Starters"
"SIRIUS 3RA1 Load Feeders".
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6 to S12 with mountable accessories
(illustration for basic unit)
9
7
10
3
11
5
NSB0_01157d
3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactors, sizes S6, S10 and S12
Auxiliary switch block, solid-state time-delay

(ON or OFF-delay or wye-delta function)
4-pole auxiliary switch block
2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from above
3
4
5
6
7
2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from below

Single-pole auxiliary switch block (up to 4 can be snapped on)
2-pole auxiliary switch block, laterally mountable left or right
(identical for S0 to S12)
Surge suppressor (RC element) for plugging into top of withdrawable coil
9 Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,

different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
10 Terminal cover for box terminal, different for
sizes S6 and S10/S12
11 Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
Accessories identical for sizes S0 to S12


Siemens IC 10 2014
3/9
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RA1 contactor assemblies, 3RT1 contactors
Size S6 with accessories
4
1
2
6
1
NSB0_01668c
3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, size S6

Wiring modules on the top and bottom, 3RA1953-2A
3
4

with through-hole, 3RT1956-4BA31
Terminal cover for cable lug and bar connection

Terminal cover for box terminal different for

sizes S6 and S10/S12
Box terminal block, different for sizes S6 and S10/S12
Accessories see pages 3/161 to 3/163 and 3/103 to 3/111.

3/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RA1 contactor assemblies, 3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6, S10 and S12 with accessories
4
1
2
5
1
NSB0_01669c
3RT10 and 3RT14 air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12 or
3RT12 vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12
2
3

Wiring modules on the top and bottom, 3RA19
with through-hole, 3RT1956-4BA31
Terminal cover for box terminal,
4
5
6
Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,


Accessories different according to size
Accessories see pages 3/161 to 3/163 and 3/103 to 3/111.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/11
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RT1 contactors
Sizes S6 to S12 with accessories
6
3
4
5
NSB0_01410c
1 Air-break contactor, sizes S6, S10 and S12

2 Vacuum contactor, sizes S10 and S12
3 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1 . .. - . A .. contactors with conventional operating mechanism
(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors and
3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
4 Withdrawable coils for 3RT1 . .. - . N.. contactors with solid-state operating mechanism.
(size S10: differentiation between 3RT10/3RT14 air-break contactors and
3RT12 vacuum contactors)
(size S12: the same for air-break and vacuum contactors)
5 Withdrawable coils and laterally mountable module (plug-on) for 3RT1. .. - . P .. air-break
contactors with solid-state operating mechanism and remaining lifetime indicator
6 Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on withdrawable coils
3RT1...-.A.. with conventional operating mechanism
3RT1...-.N.. with solid-state operating mechanism
Identical for sizes S6 to S12

Different according to size
For surge suppressors see page 3/108,

for withdrawable coils see pages 3/114 and 3/115.
3/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RT20 contactors,
3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Overview
Sizes S00 and S0, up to 18.5 kW
Connection methods
The 3RT2 contactors are available with screw terminals,
spring-type terminals or ring terminal lug connections.
For short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays
see "Technical specifications" on pages 3/17 and 3/22.
For short-circuit protection of the contactors with overload relay,
see Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188.
To assemble fuseless motor feeders, you must select combinations of motor starter protector and contactor as explained in
"SIRIUS 3RA2 Load Feeders" (see Chapter 8 "Load Feeders and
Motor Starters").
Motor protection
3RU21 thermal overload relays or 3RB30 solid-state overload
relays can be fitted to the 3RT2 contactors for protection against
overload. The overload relays must be ordered separately
(see Chapter 7, "Protection Equipment" "Overload relays").
Contactor size S00 with spring-type terminals and contactor size S0

with screw terminals
Ratings of three-phase motors
Compared to the former 3RT1 series, the 3RT2 series is notable

for its higher rating: size S00 with up to 7.5 kW and size S0 with
up to 18.5 kW.
The quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor
shaft (according to the nameplate).
Standards
All contactors are available with AC or DC operation. For size S0

contactors, a UC operating mechanism is also available, which
can be controlled with both AC (50 to 60 Hz) and DC.
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (auxiliary switches)
The 3RT2 contactors are climate-proof and are suitable and
tested for use worldwide.
If the devices are used in ambient conditions which deviate from
common industrial conditions (IEC 60721-3-3 "Stationary Use,
Weather-Protected"), information must be obtained about possible restrictions with regard to the reliability and endurance of the
device and possible protective measures. In this case contact
our Technical Assistance.
3RT2 contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The
devices with ring terminal lug connection comply with degree of
protection IP20 when fitted with the related terminal cover.
Auxiliary contact complement
Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the
basic unit. The basic units size S0 contain two integrated
auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC).
All basic units (except coupling contactors) can be extended
with auxiliary switch blocks:
Additional auxiliary switches with a maximum of four auxiliary
contacts can be mounted. The combination of a 2-pole auxiliary switch for mounting on the front and an auxiliary switch for
mounting on the side is not permitted.
Of the maximum number of auxiliary contacts (integrated plus
mountable) possible on the device, no more than four NC contacts are permitted for both sizes.
In addition, complete units with permanently mounted auxiliary
switch block (2 NO + 2 NC) are offered for sizes S00 and S0.
Contact reliability
If voltages 110 V and currents 100 mA are to be switched,
the auxiliary contacts of the 3RT2 contactor or 3RH21 contactor
relay should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact
reliability.
These auxiliary contacts are suitable for electronic circuits with
currents 1 mA at a voltage 17 V.
Control supply voltage
Surge suppression
3RT2 contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors or
diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode for short
break times) for damping opening surges in the coil.
The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on
auxiliary switch block.
The surge suppressors can be plugged onto the front of size S0
contactors.
Note:
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the
NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assembly 2 to 6 times, varistor and suppressor diode
+2 to 5 ms).
S00 and S0 contactors with communication interface
The S00 and S0 contactors with communication interface are
special versions for mounting the SIRIUS function modules for
connection to the control system through IO-Link or AS-Interface
(see page 3/188 and 3/193).
When a function module is fitted, no additional auxiliary switches
can be mounted. Without a function module, the contactors can
be used like the standard versions.
Further information on IO-Link and AS-Interface see Chapter 2
"Industrial Communication".
Manuals
For more information, see
System manual "SIRIUS Innovations System Overview",
Manual "SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors/
Contactor Assemblies",
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/13
Short-circuit protection of the contactors
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Article No. scheme
Digit of the Article No.
1st - 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th

@@@
8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
13th 14th 15th 16th
3RT
SIRIUS power contactors

2nd generation
2
@
Device type (e. g. 0 = 3-pole motor contactor, 3 = 4-pole AC-1 contactor)
Contactor size (1 = S00, 2 = S0)
Power dependent on size (e. g. 27 = 15 kW)
Connection type (1 = screw, 2 = spring)
Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. A = AC standard / without)

Rated control supply voltage (e. g. P0 = 230 V, 50 Hz)
Auxiliary switches (e. g. S0: 0 = 1 NO + 1 NC integrated)

Special version
3RT
Example
Note:
The Article No. scheme is presented here merely for information
purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the
article numbers.
For your orders, please use the article numbers quoted in the
catalog in the Selection and ordering data.
Benefits
Advantages through energy efficiency
We offer you a unique portfolio for industrial energy management, using an energy management system that helps to optimally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial
energy management into three phases identify, evaluate, and
realize and we support you with the appropriate hardware and
software solutions in every process phase.
0 24
The innovative products of the SIRIUS industrial controls portfolio can also make a substantial contribution to a plant's energy
efficiency (see www.siemens.com/sirius/energysaving).
IC0
1_ 0
3RT20 contactors contribute to energy efficiency throughout the

plant as follows:
UC coils with electric control for reduced power consumption
when closing and in the closed state
Smaller power supply units in the control circuit through lower
power consumption in the closed state with 24 V DC
Reduced heating of control cabinet:
Technology-reduced inherent power loss of the contactors,
resulting in lower cooling costs and a more compact design
Accessories
Auxiliary switch blocks
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005.
Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact (NO or NC)
integrated in the basic unit. Size S0 contactors have 2 auxiliary
contacts (1 NO and 1 NC) integrated in the basic unit.
The contactors can be expanded with front-mounting 3RH2911
auxiliary switch blocks to form contactors with up to 5 auxiliary
contacts (S00) or up to 6 auxiliary contacts (S0). Of the auxiliary
contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible on the device, no
more than four NC contacts are permitted.
Single- or 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks with connection options
from above or below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring
especially for the installation of feeders. These auxiliary switch
blocks are offered only with screw terminals.
3/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
All the previously mentioned auxiliary switch variants can be

snap-fitted onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary switch
block has a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly.
If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary switch
blocks can be attached laterally on the left or on the right. These
auxiliary switch blocks can be used only when no 4-pole
auxiliary switch blocks are snapped onto the front.
The solid-state compatible 3RH2911-.NF. . auxiliary switch
blocks include 2 enclosed contacts. They are suitable in
particular for switching small voltages and currents (hard goldplated contacts) and for operation in dusty atmospheres. The
front NC auxiliary contacts are not mirror contacts. There are
also versions for mounting on the side.
For details of selecting the auxiliary switches see pages 3/47 to
3/52.
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2
Size
S00 and S0
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree 3)
690
Conventional thermal current Ith =

Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
10
Up to 230 V
101)
380 V
400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
A
3
3
2
1
1
24 V
60 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
A
10
6
3
2
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
1
0.3
0.15
24 V
60 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
A
101)
2
1
0.9
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
0.3
0.14
0.1
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1

The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the
auxiliary switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S0
AC load
Rated operational current Ie/AC-15/AC-14
For rated operational voltage Ue
DC load
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12

Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA
according to IEC 60947-5-4/EN 60947-5-4
Frequency of contact faults < 10-8

i.e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
Endurance of the auxiliary contacts

It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly,
i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
The characteristic curves apply to:
Integrated auxiliary contacts on 3RT20
3RH2911, 3RH2921 auxiliary switch blocks1)
NSB0_02061b
Basic unit
Million operating cycles (106)
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current.
30
10
5
4
3
2
1
DC-13
220 V
Basic unit with

attachable
contact block
DC-13
110 V
AC-15/AC-14
Basic unit with
attachable
contact block
0,5
DC-13
24V
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01
0,03 0,05 0,1
0,3 0,5
-DC-13 e -DC-13
220 V
110 V
e
3 4 5 6 7 10
e -DC-13
24 V
(A)
-AC-15
< 230 V
e
Diagram legend:
a = Breaking current
e = Rated operational current
1)
3RH22, 3RH29, 3RT2....-....4: Ie = 6 A for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/15
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2
Size
S00 and S0
If a shorter contact endurance is sufficient, the rated

operational current Ie/AC-4 can be increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal
switching (breaking the rated operational current
according to utilization category AC-3) in combination
with intermittent inching (breaking several times the
rated operational current according to utilization category AC-4), the contact endurance can be calculated
approximately from the following equation:
A
X = -------------------------------------------------------C A
1 + ---------- ---- 1
100 B
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
NSB0_02059
2
6
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
105
8
6
4
10
10
8
2
4
10
4 5 6
Characters in the equation:

X Contact endurance for mixed operation
in operating cycles
A Contact endurance for normal operation (Ia = Ie)
in operating cycles
B Contact endurance for inching (Ia = multiple of Ie)
in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching
operations
3RT20 17, 3RT20 18

(5,5 kW, 7,5 kW)
10
8
6
4
3RT20 15, 3RT20 16

(3 kW, 4 kW)
Contactor
7 type
10
8
6
4
6
4
10
8
6
4
2
2
400 V
10
8
6
4
500 V
Operating cycles at
690 V
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization

category AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational
current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at
least 200 000 operating cycles.
Size S00
230 V
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance

of the contactors when switching resistive and inductive
AC loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the
operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not
synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
8 10
20
7 9 12 16
3
5,5 7,5
30
40 50 60 80 a(A)
e(A)
Prated(kW)
Diagram legend:
Prated = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
Size S0
690 V
400 V
500 V
Operating cycles at
230 V
Endurance of the main contacts
6
4
10
8
6
4
107
8
6
4
8
6
4
Contactor 3RT20 23 3RT20 24 3RT20 25 3RT20 26

(5,5 kW) (7,5 kW) (11 kW)
(4 kW)
type
NSB0_02060
2
2
6
10
6
10 8 106
8
6
8
6
6
4
4
4
2
2
2
5
5 10
10 8 105
8
6
8
6
6
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4 10
10 8 104
2
2
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
2
3RT20 27, 3RT20 28

(15 kW, 18,5 kW)
4 5 6
8 10
9 12
4 5,5
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 a(A)

17 25 32 38
e(A)
Prated (kW)
7,5 11 15 18,5
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
= Rated operational current
e
3/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
3RT20 15, 3RT20 16
3RT20 17, 3RT20 18
Size
S00
S00
Dimensions (W x H x D)1)
Type
With mounted function module
With mounted auxiliary switch block

W
mm
45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73
mm
45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121
mm
45 x 57.5 x 142 / 45 x 70 x 142
General technical specifications

360
22,5 22,5
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface.
NSB0_00478c
Permissible mounting position
Upright mounting position
NSB0_00477a
Special version required

Mechanical endurance
Basic units
Basic units with snap-on auxiliary switch block
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block
Operating cycles 30 million

2)
Electrical endurance
690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts

acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
400
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
simultaneously with an NO main contact.
3RT201., 3RT231. (removable auxiliary switch block)
Yes, this applies to both the basic unit as well as to between the basic unit
and the mounted auxiliary switch block acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F
Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F, and SUVA
Have no mirror contact for size S00
3RT201., 3RT231. (permanently mounted auxiliary switch block)

3RH2919-.NF. . solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +60

-55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix C
IP20
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274
Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse

AC operation
DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
6.7/5 and 4.2/10

6.7/5 and 4.2/10
7.3/5 and 4.7/10

7.3/5 and 4.7/10
g/ms
g/ms
10.5/5 and 6.6/10

10.5/5 and 6.6/10
11.4/5 and 7.3/10

11.4/5 and 7.3/10
Shock resistance sine pulse

AC operation
DC operation
3)
Conductor cross-sections
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays

Main circuit
Fuse links, operational class gG:
LV HRC, type 3NA; DIAZED, type 5SB; NEOZED, type 5SE
- Type of coordination "1"
- Weld-free4)
A
A
A
35
20
10
50
25
10
10
10
With fuse links of operational class gG:

DIAZED, type 5SB; NEOZED, type 5SE
with short-circuit current Ik = 1 kA
10
With 230 V miniature circuit breakers, C characteristic

with short-circuit current Ik = 400 A
Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic

Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1
Short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays
See Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations"5)
Short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders
See Chapter 8 "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the Control
Cabinet" "SIRIUS 3RA2 Load Feeders"
1)
Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals.

For contact endurance of the main contacts see page 3/16.
3) For conductor cross-sections, see page 3/21.
4)
Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
5)
See http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/17
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2015, 3RT2016
3RT2017, 3RT2018
Size
S00
S00
Control
Solenoid coil operating range

AC operation
50 Hz
60 Hz
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
DC operation
Up to 50 C
Up to 60 C
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid coils (for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
27/24.3
0.8/0.75
4.2/3.3
0.25/0.25
37/33
0.8/0.75
5.7/4.4
0.25/0.25
26.4
0.81
4.4
0.24
36
0.8
5.9
0.24
31.7
0.81
4.8
0.25
43
0.8
6.5
0.25
AC operation
< 3 mA x (230 V/Us)1)
< 4 mA x (230 V/Us)1)
DC operation
< 10 mA x (24 V/Us)1)
VA
AC operation, 50 Hz, for USA/Canada

- Closing
- P.f. for closing
- Closed
- P.f. for closed
VA
VA

- Closing
- P.f. for closing
- Closed
- P.f. for closed
VA
VA
DC operation (closing = closed)
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)
Operating times2)
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time
AC operation for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
9 ... 35
3.5 ... 14
8 ... 33
4 ... 15
DC operation for 0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
30 ... 100
7 ... 13
30 ... 100
7 ... 13
ms
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
Arcing time
Operating times for 1.0 x Us2)
AC operation
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
9.5 ... 24
4 ... 14
9 ... 22
4.5 ... 15
DC operation
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
35 ... 50
7 ... 12
35 ... 50
7 ... 12
1)
The 3RT2916-1GA00 additional load module is recommended

for higher residual currents.
3/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
2)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks
(noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly 2 to 6 times,
suppressor diode +1 ms to 5 ms; varistor +2 ms to 5 ms).
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2015
3RT2016
3RT2017
3RT2018
Size
S00
S00
S00
S00
A
A
18
16
22
20
22
20
22
20
kW
kW
kW
6
10.5
18
7.5
13
22
7.5
13
22
7.5
13
22
mm2
mm2
2.5
2.5
4
2.5
4
2.5
4
2.5
A
A
A
A
7
7
6
4.9
9
9
7.7
6.7
12
11
9.2
6.7
16
14
12.4
8.9
kW
kW
kW
1.5
3
4
2.2
4
5.5
3
5.5
5.5
4
7.5
7.5
10 s current2)
56
72
96
128
At Ie/AC-3
0.42
0.7
1.24
2.2
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
Rated operational current Ie
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 60 C up to 690 V
loads1)
230 V
400 V
690 V
Rated power for AC

P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C)
Minimum conductor cross-section

for loads with Ie
At 40 C
At 60 C
Utilization category AC-1,

Switching resistive loads
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3

Rated operational currents Ie
Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage motors

at 50 and 60 Hz
Thermal load capacity
Power loss per conducting path
Up to 400 V
440 V
500 V
690 V
At 230 V
400 V
690 V
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)3)

Rated operational current Ie, maximum
Up to 400 V
6.5
8.5
8.5
11.5
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors

with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
Up to 400 V
5.5
Up to 400 V
690 V
A
A
2.6
1.8
4.1
3.3
4.1
3.3
5.5
4.4
kW
kW
kW
0.67
1.15
1.15
1.1
2
2.5
1.1
2
2.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
The following applies to a contact endurance

of about 200 000 operating cycles:
- Rated operational currents Ie
- Rated power for squirrel-cage motors
At 230 V
400 V
690 V
1)
Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc.

(increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into
account).
2) According to IEC 60947-4-1.
Rated values for various start-up conditions
see Chapter 7, "Protection Equipment" "Overload Relays".
3)
The data only apply to 3RT2516 and 3RT2517 (2 NO + 2 NC) up to a rated
operational voltage of 400 V.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/19
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2015
3RT2016
3RT2017
3RT2018
Size
S00
S00
S00
S00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1,
switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
Rated operational currents Ie (at 60 C)
- 1 conducting path
- 2 conducting paths in series
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
15
15
1.5
20
20
2.1
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
0.6
0.42
0.42
0.8
0.6
0.6
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
15
15
8.4
20
20
12
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
1.2
0.6
0.5
1.6
0.8
0.7
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
15
15
15
20
20
20
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
15
0.9
0.7
20
1.3
1
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
15
0.35
0.1
20
0.5
0.15
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
----
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
15
3.5
0.25
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
----
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
15
15
15
20
20
20
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
1.2
0.14
0.14
1.5
0.2
0.2
AC/DC
h-1
10 000
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
1 000
750
750
250
h-1
15
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5,

shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms)
- 1 conducting path
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
Contactors without overload relays
No-load switching frequency
Switching frequency z during rated
-
operation1)
Ie/AC-1
Ie/AC-2
Ie/AC-3
Ie/AC-4
Contactors with overload relays

Mean value
1)
Dependence of the switching frequency z'

on the operational current I' and operational voltage U':
z = z (Ie/I) (400 V/U)1.5 1/h
3/20
Siemens IC 10 2014
20
5
0.35
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2015
3RT2016
3RT2017
3RT2018
Size
S00
S00
S00
S00
Main and auxiliary conductors
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
mm2
mm2
AWG
Solid or stranded
Finely stranded with end sleeves (DIN 46228-1)
AWG cables, solid or stranded
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
Nm
Main conductors, auxiliary conductors and coil terminals2)

3)
Operating devices
Solid or stranded
Finely stranded without end sleeve
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1); max. 2 x 4

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 2 x 12
M3 (for Pozidriv size 2, 5 ... 6)
0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Screw terminals
mm
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5

2 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 12)
mm
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
Auxiliary conductors for front and laterally mounted auxiliary switches2)

Operating devices3)
Solid or stranded
Main conductors and auxiliary conductors

Terminal screw
Operating devices
Tightening torque
Usable ring terminal lugs
- DIN 46234 without insulation sleeve
- DIN 46237 with insulation sleeve
- JIS C2805 Type R without insulation sleeve
- JIS C2805 Type RAV with insulation sleeve
- JIS C2805 Type RAP with insulation sleeve
d3
d2
mm
Nm
mm
mm
M3, Pozidriv 2
5 ... 6
0.8 ... 1.2
d2 = min. 3.2
d3 = max. 7.5
I201_12740
1)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping

point, both cross-sections must lie in one of the ranges specified.
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation: 3.6 mm.
On spring-type terminals with conductor cross-sections 1 mm,
an insulation stop must be used see Accessories, page 3/63.
3)
Tool for opening the spring-type terminals,
see Accessories, page 3/63.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/21
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2023
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
Size
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
mm
45 x 85 x 97 / 45 x 101.5 x 97
mm
45 x 85 x 141 / 45 x 101.5 x 144
Dimensions (W x H x D) for AC operation1)
Dimensions (W x H x D) for DC operation1)
mm
45 x 85 x 107 / 45 x 101.5 x 107
mm
45 x 85 x 151 / 45 x 101.5 x 154

45 x 85 x 176 / 45 x 101.5 x 176
General data
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting
surface.
360
22,5 22,5
NSB0_00478c
45 x 85 x 166 / 45 x 101.5 x 166
NSB0_00477a
Special version required,

also applies to 3RT202.-.K.40. coupling contactors
Basic units

2)
690
kV

(acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N)
400
Mirror contacts
Integrated auxiliary switches
3RT202., 3RT232. (removable auxiliary switch block)
3RT202., 3RT232. (permanently mounted auxiliary switch block)
Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F

Permissible ambient temperature

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +60

-55 ... +80
IP20
Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse

AC operation
DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
7.5/5 and 4.7/10

10/5 and 7.5/10
8.3/5 and 5.310

10/5 and 7.5/10
g/ms
g/ms
11.8/5 and 7.4/10

15/5 and 10/10
13.5/5 and 8.3/10

15/5 and 10/10
Shock resistance sine pulse

AC operation
DC operation
3)
A
A
A

See Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations" 4)
See Chapter 8, "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the Control
Cabinet" "SIRIUS 3RA2 Load Feeders"
63
100
125
25
35
50
10
16
16
25

(weld-free protection Ik 1 kA)
10
Miniature circuit breakers 230 V, C characteristic

(short-circuit current Ik < 400 A)
10
Main circuit
- Weld-free5)
Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic
(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
1)
Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals.

3)
For conductor cross-sections, see page 3/26.
4)
See http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188
5) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
2)
3/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
32
40
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2023 ...
3RT2025
3RT2026 ...
3RT2028
3RT202.
-.NB3
3RT202.
-.NF3..
3RT202.
-.NP3
Size
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
Control
Type of operating mechanism
AC/DC
AC or DC
UC (AC/DC)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
0.7 ... 1.3 x Us1)
-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version

65
0.82
7.6
0.25
77
0.82
9.8
0.25
6.6
0.98
1.9
0.86
11.9
0.98
1.6
0.79
12.7
0.98
3.9
0.51
68/67
0.72/0.74
7.9/6.5
0.25/0.28
81/79
0.72/0.74
10.5/8.5
0.25/0.28
6.6/6.7
0.98/0.98
1.9/2.0
0.86/0.82
11.9/12.0
0.98/0.98
1.6/1.8
0.79/0.74
12.7/14.7
0.98/0.98
3.9/4.3
0.51/0.56
65
0.82
7.6
0.25
77
0.82
9.8
0.28
-----
-----
-----
73
0.76
7.2
0.28
87
0.76
9.4
0.28
-----
-----
-----
5.9/5.9
5.9/5.9
5.9/1.4
10.2/1.3
14.3/1.9
AC operation
mA
< 6 mA x
(230 V/Us)
< 7 mA x (230 V/Us)
DC operation
mA
<16 mA x (24 V/Us)
ms
ms
9 ... 38
4 ... 16
8 ... 40
4 ... 16
60 ... 80
30 ... 45
50 ... 70
35 ... 45
60 ... 80
35 ... 45
ms
ms
50 ... 170
15 ... 17.5
50 ... 170
15 ... 17.5
60 ... 75
30 ... 45
50 ... 70
35 ... 45
50 ... 75
40 ... 50
ms
10
10
10
10
10
ms
ms
10 ... 18
4 ... 16
10 ... 17
4 ... 16
65 ... 80
30 ... 45
50 ... 70
35 ... 45
60 ... 80
30 ... 50
ms
ms
55 ... 80
16 ... 17
55 ... 80
16 ... 17
60 ... 80
30 ... 45
56 ... 70
35 ... 45
60 ... 80
30 ... 50
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us2)

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
1)
2)
The following applies to Us max = 280 V: Upper limit =1.1 x Us max.

(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/23
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2023
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
Size
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
Main circuit
Load rating with AC

switching resistive loads
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 60 C up to 690 V
loads1)
230 V
400 V
690 V
Rated power for AC

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)

for loads with Ie
A
A
40
35
50
42
kW
kW
kW
13.3
23
40
15.5
27.5
47.5
mm2
mm2
10
10
10
10
A
A
A
A
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
9
17
17
17
13
25
22
18
13
32
32
32
21
38
35
32
21
kW
kW
kW
2.2
4
7.5
3
5.5
7.5
4
7.5
11
5.5
11
11
7.5
15
18.5
11
18.5
18.5
10 s current2)
80
110
150
200
260
300
At Ie/AC-3
0.4
0.5
0.9
1.6
2.7
3.8
At 40 C
At 60 C

Rated power for slipring or

squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz
Up to 400 V
440 V
500 V
690 V
At 230 V
400 V
690 V
Utilization category AC-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie)

Rated operational current Ie, max.
Up to 400 V
At 400 V
8.5
12.5
15.5
15.5
22
kW
5.5
7.5
7.5
11
A
A
4.1
3.3
5.5
5.5
7.7
7.7
9
9
12
12
kW
kW
kW
kW
0.5
1.1
2
2.5
0.73
1.5
2.6
4.6
1
2
3.5
6
1.2
2.5
4.4
7.7
1.6
3.4
6
10.3

- Rated operational currents Ie
- Rated power
for squirrel-cage motors
1)
Up to 400 V
690 V
At 110 V
230 V
400 V
690 V

account).
2)
According to IEC 60947-4-1.
Rated values for various start-up conditions
see Chapter 7, "Protection Equipment" "Overload Relays".
3/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2023
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
Size
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
35
20
4.5
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
1
0.4
0.25
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
35
35
35
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
5
1
0.8
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
35
35
35
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
35
2.9
1.4
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
20
5
2.5
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
1
0.09
0.06
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
35
35
15
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
3
0.27
0.16
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
35
35
35
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
10
0.6
0.6
AC
DC
h-1
h-1
5 000
1 500
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
1 000
1 000
1 000
300
h-1
15

- 1 conducting path
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z during rated operation1)
-
Ie/AC-1
Ie/AC-2
Ie/AC-3
Ie/AC-4
750
750
250

Mean value
1)
Dependence of the switching frequency z

on the operational current I and operational voltage U:
z = z (Ie/I) (400 V/U)1.5 1/h
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/25
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2023
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
Size
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)

Main conductors
Screw terminals
Solid or stranded
mm
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 10)1)
mm
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1); 1 x 10
AWG
2 x (16 ... 12)1); 2 x (14 ... 8)1)
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Nm

2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)
Solid or stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1); 2 x 4
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
Solid or stranded AWG (2 x)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1); 2 x (18 ... 14)1); 2 x 12
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Nm

0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors
Main conductors2)
3)
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5
Solid or stranded
mm2
2 x (1 ... 10)
mm2
2 x (1 ... 6)
mm2
2 x (1 ... 6)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 8)
Auxiliary conductors2)
Operating devices3)
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5
Solid or stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 14)
Main conductors
Terminal screw
mm
M4, Pozidriv 2
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Tightening torque
Nm
2 ... 2.5
mm
d2 = min. 4.3
mm
d3 = max. 12.2

d3
d2
I201_12740
Conductor cross-section
Terminal screw
M3, Pozidriv 2
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
mm
d2 = min. 3.2
mm
1)
d3 = max. 7.5
3)

2)
On spring-type terminals with conductor cross-sections 1 mm,
an insulation stop must be used see Accessories, page 3/63.

Type
3RT201
3RT202
Size
S00
S0
Integrated or
mountable
auxiliary switch block
Integrated
Mountable
600
600
600
A 600, Q 600
A 600, P 600
A 600, Q 600
10
10
10
s and u rated data of the auxiliary contacts

Rated voltage
V AC
Switching capacity
Uninterrupted current
3/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
At 240 V AC A
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2015
3RT2016
3RT2017
3RT2018
Size
S00
S00
S00
S00
s and u rated data

Rated insulation voltage
V AC
600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed
20
hp
hp
hp
hp
1.5
2
3
5
2
3
5
7.5
3
3
7.5
10
3
5
10
10
Rated power for three-phase motors

at 60 Hz
At 200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
Short-circuit protection1)
(contactor or overload relay)
At 600 V kA
Fuse CLASS J2)
40
40
40
40
Circuit breakers with overload protection acc. to UL 489
50
50
50
50
--3)
--3)
--3)
--3)
Combination motor controllers type E according to UL 508
Maximum horsepower ratings

(from s and u approved values)
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size
hp
--
- Open
- Enclosed
A
A
---
18
18
hp
hp
hp
hp
-----
3
3
5
5

at 60 Hz
At 200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
Overload relays
Type
3RU211
/ 3RB301
0.11 ... 16
/ 0.1 ... 16
Type
3RT2023
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
Size
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
S0
Setting range
s and u rated data

V AC
600
600
35
42
hp
hp
hp
hp
2
3
5
7.5
3
3
7.5
10
3
5
10
15
5
7.5
15
20
10
10
20
25
10
10
25
25

at 60 Hz
At 200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
(contactor or overload relay)
At 600 V kA
2)
Fuse CLASS J
125
150
70
100
At 480 V Type
A
kA
3RV202
---3)
At 600 V Type
A
kA
3RV202
---3)
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size
hp
--
- Open
- Enclosed
A
A
---
27
27
hp
hp
hp
hp
-----
7.5
7.5
10
10

at 60 Hz
At 200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
Overload relays
Type
Setting range
1)
3RU212
/ 3RB302
1.8 ... 40
/ 0.1 ... 40
For more information about short-circuit values, e.g. for protection against
short-circuit currents, see the UL reports on the individual devices,
www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals.
For the dimensioning of load feeders, see also the

Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations for UL",
2)
Values for RK5 fuses on request.
3)
Values on request.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/27
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW

AC operation
PU (UNIT, SET, M) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT201.-1A. . .
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT201.-2A. . .
Rated control DT Screw terminals

supply voltage
Us at 50/60 Hz
Configurator
Auxiliary contacts
DT Spring-type
terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC
For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail

Size S002)3)
With auxiliary contact 1 NO, Ident. No. 10
A2()
16
A2()
18
22
12
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
With auxiliary contact 1 NC, Ident. No. 01
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
5.5
7.5
22
22
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
10
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2015-1AB01
3RT2015-1AF01
3RT2015-1AP01
}
}
}
3RT2015-2AB01
3RT2015-2AF01
3RT2015-2AP01
01
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2015-1AB02
3RT2015-1AF02
3RT2015-1AP02
}
}
}
3RT2015-2AB02
3RT2015-2AF02
3RT2015-2AP02
10
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2016-1AB01
3RT2016-1AF01
3RT2016-1AP01
}
}
}
3RT2016-2AB01
3RT2016-2AF01
3RT2016-2AP01
01
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2016-1AB02
3RT2016-1AF02
3RT2016-1AP02
}
}
}
3RT2016-2AB02
3RT2016-2AF02
3RT2016-2AP02
10
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2017-1AB01
3RT2017-1AF01
3RT2017-1AP01
}
}
}
3RT2017-2AB01
3RT2017-2AF01
3RT2017-2AP01
01
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2017-1AB02
3RT2017-1AF02
3RT2017-1AP02
}
}
}
3RT2017-2AB02
3RT2017-2AF02
3RT2017-2AP02
10
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2018-1AB01
3RT2018-1AF01
3RT2018-1AP01
}
}
}
3RT2018-2AB01
3RT2018-2AF01
3RT2018-2AP01
01
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2018-1AB02
3RT2018-1AF02
3RT2018-1AP02
}
}
}
3RT2018-2AB02
3RT2018-2AF02
3RT2018-2AP02
For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators.
Other voltages according to page 3/39 on request.
1)
Guide value for 4-pole standard motors at 50 Hz 400 V AC. The actual
starting and rated data of the motor to be switched must be considered
when selecting the units.
2)
The 3RT20 contactors are also available with ring terminal lug connection.
Please contact your local Siemens representative for information about
these special versions.
3)
For size S00: Coil operating range
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 Us,
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 Us.
3/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
For accessories see page 3/48.

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT201.-1AP04-3MA0
Rated data

supply voltage
Us at 50/60 Hz
Configurator
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT201.-2AP04-3MA0
DT Spring-type terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
V AC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
For screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto

TH 35 standard mounting rail
Size S002)
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
18
22
230
3RT2015-1AP04-3MA0
3RT2015-2AP04-3MA0
22
22
230
3RT2016-1AP04-3MA0
3RT2016-2AP04-3MA0
12
5.5
22
22
230
3RT2017-1AP04-3MA0
3RT2017-2AP04-3MA0
16
7.5
22
22
230
3RT2018-1AP04-3MA0
3RT2018-2AP04-3MA0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block and varistor plugged onto the front side
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
18
22
230
3RT2015-1CP04-3MA0
3RT2015-2CP04-3MA0
22
22
230
3RT2016-1CP04-3MA0
3RT2016-2CP04-3MA0
12
5.5
22
22
230
3RT2017-1CP04-3MA0
3RT2017-2CP04-3MA0
16
7.5
22
22
230
3RT2018-1CP04-3MA0
3RT2018-2CP04-3MA0
1)
2) For size S00: Coil operating range
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 Us,
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 Us.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/29
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1A.00
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2A.00

supply voltage
Us at 50 Hz
Configurator
Auxiliary contacts
DT Spring-type
terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC

Size S02)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
40
11
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2023-1AB00
3RT2023-1AF00
3RT2023-1AP00
A
A
}
3RT2023-2AB00
3RT2023-2AF00
3RT2023-2AP00
12
5.5
40
11
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2024-1AB00
3RT2024-1AF00
3RT2024-1AP00
A
A
}
3RT2024-2AB00
3RT2024-2AF00
3RT2024-2AP00
17
7.5
40
11
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2025-1AB00
3RT2025-1AF00
3RT2025-1AP00
A
A
}
3RT2025-2AB00
3RT2025-2AF00
3RT2025-2AP00
25
11
40
11
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2026-1AB00
3RT2026-1AF00
3RT2026-1AP00
A
A
}
3RT2026-2AB00
3RT2026-2AF00
3RT2026-2AP00
32
15
50
11
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2027-1AB00
3RT2027-1AF00
3RT2027-1AP00
A
A
}
3RT2027-2AB00
3RT2027-2AF00
3RT2027-2AP00
38
18.5
50
11
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT2028-1AB00
3RT2028-1AF00
3RT2028-1AP00
A
A
B
3RT2028-2AB00
3RT2028-2AF00
3RT2028-2AP00
1)
2) The 3RT20 contactors are also available with ring terminal lug connection.
3/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

For spare parts see page 3/64.

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1A.04
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2A.04

supply voltage
Us at 50 Hz
Configurator
Auxiliary contacts
DT Spring-type
terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC
For screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
Size S02)
With mounted auxiliary switch block (removable)3)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
40
22
24
230
B
}
3RT2023-1AB04
3RT2023-1AP04
B
A
3RT2023-2AB04
3RT2023-2AP04
12
5.5
40
22
24
110
230
B
B
}
3RT2024-1AB04
3RT2024-1AF04
3RT2024-1AP04
B
B
A
3RT2024-2AB04
3RT2024-2AF04
3RT2024-2AP04
17
7.5
40
22
24
110
230
B
B
}
3RT2025-1AB04
3RT2025-1AF04
3RT2025-1AP04
B
B
A
3RT2025-2AB04
3RT2025-2AF04
3RT2025-2AP04
25
11
40
22
24
110
230
B
B
}
3RT2026-1AB04
3RT2026-1AF04
3RT2026-1AP04
B
B
A
3RT2026-2AB04
3RT2026-2AF04
3RT2026-2AP04
32
15
50
22
24
110
230
B
B
}
3RT2027-1AB04
3RT2027-1AF04
3RT2027-1AP04
B
B
A
3RT2027-2AB04
3RT2027-2AF04
3RT2027-2AP04
38
18.5
50
22
24
110
230
B
B
}
3RT2028-1AB04
3RT2028-1AF04
3RT2028-1AP04
B
B
A
3RT2028-2AB04
3RT2028-2AF04
3RT2028-2AP04
1)
3)
Article No. for the auxiliary switch block (removable): 3RH2911-.HA11


Siemens IC 10 2014
3/31
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1AL24-3MA0
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2AL24-3MA0

supply voltage
Us at 50/60 Hz
Configurator
Auxiliary contacts
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC

Size S0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block2)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
40
22
230
3RT2023-1AL24-3MA0
3RT2023-2AL24-3MA0
12
5.5
40
22
230
3RT2024-1AL24-3MA0
3RT2024-2AL24-3MA0
17
7.5
40
22
230
3RT2025-1AL24-3MA0
3RT2025-2AL24-3MA0
25
11
40
22
230
3RT2026-1AL24-3MA0
3RT2026-2AL24-3MA0
32
15
50
22
230
3RT2027-1AL24-3MA0
3RT2027-2AL24-3MA0
38
18.5
50
22
230
3RT2028-1AL24-3MA0
3RT2028-2AL24-3MA0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block and varistor plugged into the front side
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
40
22
230
3RT2023-1CL24-3MA0
3RT2023-2CL24-3MA0
12
5.5
40
22
230
3RT2024-1CL24-3MA0
3RT2024-2CL24-3MA0
17
7.5
40
22
230
3RT2025-1CL24-3MA0
3RT2025-2CL24-3MA0
25
11
40
22
230
3RT2026-1CL24-3MA0
3RT2026-2CL24-3MA0
32
15
50
22
230
3RT2027-1CL24-3MA0
3RT2027-2CL24-3MA0
38
18.5
50
22
230
3RT2028-1CL24-3MA0
3RT2028-2CL24-3MA0
1)
2)
No retrofitting of surge suppressors.
3/32
Siemens IC 10 2014


Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT201.-1B. . .
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT201.-2B. . .

supply voltage
Us
Configurator
DT Spring-type
terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S002)
A2()
12
16
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21

A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
5.5
7.5
18
22
22
22
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
10
--
24
220
}
A
3RT2015-1BB41
3RT2015-1BM41
}
B
3RT2015-2BB41
3RT2015-2BM41
01
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2015-1BB42
3RT2015-1BM42
}
B
3RT2015-2BB42
3RT2015-2BM42
10
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2016-1BB41
3RT2016-1BM41
}
B
3RT2016-2BB41
3RT2016-2BM41
01
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2016-1BB42
3RT2016-1BM42
}
B
3RT2016-2BB42
3RT2016-2BM42
10
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2017-1BB41
3RT2017-1BM41
}
B
3RT2017-2BB41
3RT2017-2BM41
01
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2017-1BB42
3RT2017-1BM42
}
B
3RT2017-2BB42
3RT2017-2BM42
10
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2018-1BB41
3RT2018-1BM41
}
B
3RT2018-2BB41
3RT2018-2BM41
01
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2018-1BB42
3RT2018-1BM42
}
B
3RT2018-2BB42
3RT2018-2BM42
With integrated coil circuit (diode)

A1(+)
A2()
12
16
5.5
7.5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
18
22
22
22
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
10
--
24
3RT2015-1FB41
3RT2015-2FB41
01
--
24
3RT2015-1FB42
3RT2015-2FB42
10
--
24
3RT2016-1FB41
3RT2016-2FB41
01
--
24
3RT2016-1FB42
3RT2016-2FB42
10
--
24
3RT2017-1FB41
3RT2017-2FB41
01
--
24
3RT2017-1FB42
3RT2017-2FB42
10
--
24
3RT2018-1FB41
3RT2018-2FB41
01
--
24
3RT2018-1FB42
3RT2018-2FB42
1)
these special contactor versions with ring terminal lug connection.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/33
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT201.-1BB4.-0CC0
3RT201. -2BB4 .-0CC0
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT201.-1BB44-3MA0
3RT201.-2BB44-3MA0

supply voltage
Us
Configurator
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S00
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
18
22
24
3RT2015-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2015-2BB44-3MA0
22
22
24
3RT2016-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2016-2BB44-3MA0
12
5.5
22
22
24
3RT2017-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2017-2BB44-3MA0
16
7.5
22
22
24
3RT2018-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2018-2BB44-3MA0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block and integrated coil circuit (diode)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
18
22
24
3RT2015-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2015-2FB44-3MA0
22
22
24
3RT2016-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2016-2FB44-3MA0
12
5.5
22
22
24
3RT2017-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2017-2FB44-3MA0
16
7.5
22
22
24
3RT2018-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2018-2FB44-3MA0
Contactor with communication interface (only available with 24 V DC coils)

A1(+)
A2()
16
1)
18
22
12
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21

A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
5.5
7.5
22
22
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
10
--
24
3RT2015-1BB41-0CC0
3RT2015-2BB41-0CC0
01
--
24
3RT2015-1BB42-0CC0
3RT2015-2BB42-0CC0
10
--
24
3RT2016-1BB41-0CC0
3RT2016-2BB41-0CC0
01
--
24
3RT2016-1BB42-0CC0
3RT2016-2BB42-0CC0
10
--
24
3RT2017-1BB41-0CC0
3RT2017-2BB41-0CC0
01
--
24
3RT2017-1BB42-0CC0
3RT2017-2BB42-0CC0
10
--
24
3RT2018-1BB41-0CC0
3RT2018-2BB41-0CC0
01
--
24
3RT2018-1BB42-0CC0
3RT2018-2BB42-0CC0
3/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1B.40
3RT202.-2B.40
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
3RT202.-1B.44
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2B.44

supply voltage
Us
Configurator
DT Spring-type
terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S02)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
40
11
24
3RT2023-1BB40
3RT2023-2BB40
12
5.5
40
11
24
220
}
B
3RT2024-1BB40
3RT2024-1BM40
}
B
3RT2024-2BB40
3RT2024-2BM40
17
7.5
40
11
24
220
}
B
3RT2025-1BB40
3RT2025-1BM40
}
B
3RT2025-2BB40
3RT2025-2BM40
25
11
40
11
24
220
}
B
3RT2026-1BB40
3RT2026-1BM40
}
B
3RT2026-2BB40
3RT2026-2BM40
32
15
50
11
24
220
}
B
3RT2027-1BB40
3RT2027-1BM40
}
B
3RT2027-2BB40
3RT2027-2BM40
38
18.5
50
11
24
220
}
B
3RT2028-1BB40
3RT2028-1BM40
}
B
3RT2028-2BB40
3RT2028-2BM40
With coil circuit plugged in (diode assembly)

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
40
11
24
3RT2023-1FB40
3RT2023-2FB40
12
5.5
40
11
24
3RT2024-1FB40
3RT2024-2FB40
17
7.5
40
11
24
3RT2025-1FB40
3RT2025-2FB40
25
11
40
11
24
3RT2026-1FB40
3RT2026-2FB40
32
15
50
11
24
3RT2027-1FB40
3RT2027-2FB40
38
18.5
50
11
24
3RT2028-1FB40
3RT2028-2FB40

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
40
22
24
3RT2023-1BB44
3RT2023-2BB44
12
5.5
40
22
24
3RT2024-1BB44
3RT2024-2BB44
17
7.5
40
22
24
3RT2025-1BB44
3RT2025-2BB44
25
11
40
22
24
3RT2026-1BB44
3RT2026-2BB44
32
15
50
22
24
3RT2027-1BB44
3RT2027-2BB44
38
18.5
50
22
24
3RT2028-1BB44
3RT2028-2BB44

1)
3)
Article No. for the auxiliary switch block (removable): 3RH2911-.HA11

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/35
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1BB44-3MA0
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2BB44-3MA0

supply voltage
Us
Configurator
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block2)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
40
22
24
3RT2023-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2023-2BB44-3MA0
12
5.5
40
22
24
3RT2024-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2024-2BB44-3MA0
17
7.5
40
22
24
3RT2025-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2025-2BB44-3MA0
25
11
40
22
24
3RT2026-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2026-2BB44-3MA0
32
15
50
22
24
3RT2027-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2027-2BB44-3MA0
38
18.5
50
22
24
3RT2028-1BB44-3MA0
3RT2028-2BB44-3MA0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block and coil circuit plugged in (varistor)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
12
5.5
40
22
24
3RT2024-1DB44-3MA0
3RT2024-2DB44-3MA0
17
7.5
40
22
24
3RT2025-1DB44-3MA0
3RT2025-2DB44-3MA0
25
11
40
22
24
3RT2026-1DB44-3MA0
3RT2026-2DB44-3MA0
32
15
50
22
24
3RT2027-1DB44-3MA0
3RT2027-2DB44-3MA0
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch block and coil circuit plugged in (diode assembly)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
40
11
24
3RT2023-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2023-2FB44-3MA0
12
5.5
40
11
24
3RT2024-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2024-2FB44-3MA0
17
7.5
40
11
24
3RT2025-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2025-2FB44-3MA0
25
11
40
11
24
3RT2026-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2026-2FB44-3MA0
32
15
50
11
24
3RT2027-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2027-2FB44-3MA0
38
18.5
50
11
24
3RT2028-1FB44-3MA0
3RT2028-2FB44-3MA0
1)
2)
No retrofitting of surge suppressors.
3/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1BB40-0CC0
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2BB40-0CC0

supply voltage
Us
Configurator
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S0
Contactors with communication interface
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
40
11
24
3RT2023-1BB40-0CC0
3RT2023-2BB40-0CC0
12
5.5
40
11
24
3RT2024-1BB40-0CC0
3RT2024-2BB40-0CC0
17
7.5
40
11
24
3RT2025-1BB40-0CC0
3RT2025-2BB40-0CC0
25
11
40
11
24
3RT2026-1BB40-0CC0
3RT2026-2BB40-0CC0
32
15
50
11
24
3RT2027-1BB40-0CC0
3RT2027-2BB40-0CC0
38
18.5
50
11
24
3RT2028-1BB40-0CC0
3RT2028-2BB40-0CC0

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/37
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
UC operating mechanism AC/DC operation (50/60 Hz and DC)
Extended operating range of solenoid coil 0.7 ... 1.3 x Us
Reduced power consumption when closing and in the closed
state
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT202.-1N.30
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C

supply voltage
Us1)
Configurator
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
400 V
400 V
690 V
kW
3RT202.-2N.30
DT Spring-type
terminals
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC/DC
Size S02)
With integrated coil circuit (varistor)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
12
5.5
40
11
21 ... 28
95 ... 130
200 ... 2803)
}
}
}
3RT2024-1NB30
3RT2024-1NF30
3RT2024-1NP30
B
B
}
3RT2024-2NB30
3RT2024-2NF30
3RT2024-2NP30
17
7.5
40
11
21 ... 28
95 ... 130
200 ... 2803)
}
}
}
3RT2025-1NB30
3RT2025-1NF30
3RT2025-1NP30
B
B
}
3RT2025-2NB30
3RT2025-2NF30
3RT2025-2NP30
25
11
40
11
21 ... 28
95 ... 130
200 ... 2803)
}
}
}
3RT2026-1NB30
3RT2026-1NF30
3RT2026-1NP30
}
}
}
3RT2026-2NB30
3RT2026-2NF30
3RT2026-2NP30
32
15
50
11
21 ... 28
95 ... 130
200 ... 2803)
}
}
}
3RT2027-1NB30
3RT2027-1NF30
3RT2027-1NP30
}
B
}
3RT2027-2NB30
3RT2027-2NF30
3RT2027-2NP30
38
18.5
50
11
21 ... 28
95 ... 130
200 ... 2803)
B
B
}
3RT2028-1NB30
3RT2028-1NF30
3RT2028-1NP30
B
B
}
3RT2028-2NB30
3RT2028-2NF30
3RT2028-2NP30

1)
2) Coil operating range: 0.7 x U
s min ...1.3 x Us max.
3)
The following applies to Us max = 280 V: Upper limit =1.1 x Us max.
3/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW
Options
Rated control supply voltages, possible on request
(change of 10th and 11th digit of the Article No.)
Rated control supply
voltage Us
Contactor type 3RT201
3RT202
3RT231,
3RT251
3RT232,
3RT252
S0
S00
S0
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
-V0
B0
--F0
P0
-V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
N2
P0
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
B0
D0
H0
F0
N2
P0
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
A4
B4
D4
W4
E4
F4
G4
M4
P4
-B4
D4
W4
E4
F4
G4
M4
P4
A4
B4
D4
W4
-F4
G4
M4
P4
-B4
D4
W4
-F4
G4
M4
--
Size S00
Sizes S00 and S0

AC operation1)
Solenoid coils for 50 Hz (exception: Size S00: 50 and 60 Hz2))
24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
110 V AC
230 V AC
240 V AC
400 V AC
Solenoid coils for 50 and 60 Hz2)
24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
230 V AC
Solenoid coils (for USA and Canada3))
50 Hz
60 Hz
110 V AC
220 V AC
120 V AC
240 V AC
Solenoid coils (for Japan)

50/60 Hz4)
60 Hz5)
100 V AC
200 V AC
400 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
440 V AC
DC operation1)
12 V DC
24 V DC
42 V DC
48 V DC
60 V DC
110 V DC
125 V DC
220 V DC
230 V DC
Examples
AC operation
DC operation

voltage
Us min ... Us max6)
3RT2023-1AP00
Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50 Hz for rated control supply voltage 230 V AC
3RT2023-1AG20
Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50/60 Hz for rated control supply voltage 110 V AC
3RT2025-2BB40
Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 24 V DC
3RT2025-2BG40
Contactor type -Size S00
3RT2. 2.-.N
S0
Size S0
UC operation (AC 50 up to 60 Hz, DC)
21 ... 28 V AC/DC
95 ... 130 V AC/DC
200 ... 280 V AC/DC7)
1)
----
B3
F3
P3
For deviating coil voltages and coil operating ranges of sizes S00 and S0,
the SITOP power 24 V DC power supply unit with wide range input (93 to
264 V AC; 30 to 264 V DC) can be used for coil excitation (see Chapter 15,
"Products for Specific Requirements" "SITOP Power Supplies").
2)
Coil operating range
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3)
Size S00:
at 50 Hz: 0.85.... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Size S0:
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us.
4)

Size S00:
at 50/60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Size S0:
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
5)
at 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us.
6)
Coil operating range: 0.7 x Us min ...1.3 x Us max.
7) The following applies to U
s max = 280 V: Upper limit =1.1 x Us max.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/39
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories for 3RT2 Contactors
General data
Overview
Auxiliary switches
Operation
See also pages 3/14 and 3/47.
In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of

110 and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied
on the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for
DC operation only.
Positively driven contacts (for contactor relays)

Definition according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix L:
Positively-driven contact elements are a combination of

"n" NO contact and "m" NC contact which are designed
in such a way that they cannot be closed simultaneously.
Mirror contacts (for power contactors)
Definition according to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F:
A mirror contact is an NC contact that cannot be closed
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches
The 3RA28 solid-state delayed auxiliary switches which can be
mounted onto the contactor are designed for applications in the
range from 24 to 240 V AC/DC (wide voltage range). Both the
electrical and mechanical connection are made by simple snapping on and locking.
The time-delay auxiliary switch is supplied with power directly by
two plug-in contacts through the coil terminals of the contactor,
in parallel with A./A2.
A protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in each module.
A sealable cover is available to protect against careless adjustment of the set times.
Note:
Mounting more auxiliary switches to the contactor is not
permitted.
OFF-delay devices for contactors
AC and DC operation
IEC 60947, EN 60947
For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting
rails. The OFF-delay devices have screw terminals.
The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out
unintentionally when there is a short-time voltage dip or voltage
failure. It supplies a downstream, DC-operated contactor with
the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the
contactor does not trip. The 3RA2916 OFF-delay devices are
specifically designed for operation with the 3RT contactors and
3RH contactor relays in the SIRIUS series.
The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a
capacitive basis, and can be energized with either AC or DC
(24 V version only for DC operation). Voltage matching, which is
only necessary with AC operation, is performed using a rectifier
bridge.
A contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors of the solenoid coil, built into the OFF-delay device, are switched in parallel. In the event of voltage failures, the capacitors are discharged
via the solenoid coil and thereby delay the opening of the
contactor.
If the command devices are upstream of the OFF-delay device
in the circuit, the OFF-delay takes effect with every opening
operation. If the opening operation is downstream of the
OFF-delay device, an OFF-delay only applies in the event of
failure of the mains voltage.
A DC-operated contactor is connected to the output according

to the input voltage that is applied.
The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the
specified minimum time.
Additional load module
Size S00 for plugging onto the front of the contactors with and
without auxiliary switch block.
The module is used for increasing the permissible residual
current and for limiting the residual voltage. It ensures the safe
opening of contactors with direct control via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs of SIMATIC controllers. It acts simultaneously as
a surge suppressor.
Surge suppressors
Without LED (also for spring-type terminals)
Sizes S00 and S0
With LED (also for spring-type terminals)
Sizes S00 and S0
All 3RT2 contactors and 3RH2 contactor relays can be retrofitted
with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the
coil. Diodes or diode assemblies (comprising noise suppression
diodes and Zener diodes for short break times) can be used.
The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on
auxiliary switch block.
Varistors, RC elements or diode assemblies can be plugged
onto the front of size S0 contactors.
Coupling contactors are supplied either without overvoltage
damping or with a suppressor diode, varistor or diode
connected as standard, according to the version.
Note:
diode assembly 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Coupling links for control by PLC
DC operation
IEC 60947 and EN 60947
The coupling link is suitable for use in any climate. It is fingersafe according to EN 50274. The terminal designations comply
with EN 50005.
System-compatible operation with 24 V DC,
operating range 17 to 30 V.
Low power consumption of 0.5 W in conformity with the technical
specifications of the solid-state systems. An LED indicates the
switching state.
Surge suppression
The 3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link has an integrated surge
suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched.
Mounting
The 3RH2924-1GP11 coupling link is mounted on the contactor
coil size S0 using a coil connection module.
3/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Dispensing with fine graduations
EMC suppression module,

three-phase for size S00 contactors
NSB0_00457c
Two electrical versions are available:

The advantages of the RC circuit lie mainly in the reduction in
the rate of rise and in its RF damping ability. The selected
values ensure effective interference suppression over a wide
range.
930 V
A so-called counter-e.m.f. (electromotive force) is produced

when motors or various inductive loads are turned off. Voltage
peaks of up to 4000 V may occur as a result, with a frequency
spectrum from 1 kHz to 10 MHz and a rate of voltage variation
from 0.1 to 20 V/ns.
400 V
4000 V
V
500 ms
Voltage curve with RC circuit
The varistor circuit can absorb a high energy level and can
also be used for frequencies ranging from 10 to 400 Hz
(closed-loop controlled operating mechanisms). There is no
limiting below the knee-point voltage, however.
NSB0_00458c
NSB0_00456c
EMC suppression modules
400 V
500 ms
t
950 V
Voltage curve without interference suppression
400 V
Capacitive input to various analog and digital signals makes it

necessary to suppress interference in the load circuit.
500 ms
Reducing contact arcing
Voltage curve with varistor circuit
The connection between the main current path and the EMC
suppression module enables contact arcing, which is responsible for contact erosion and the majority of clicking noises, to be
reduced; this in turn is conducive to an electromagnetically compatible design.
Sealable covers
Higher operational reliability
For SIRIUS contactors there are sealable covers available for

this purpose as accessories; these prevent accidental manual
operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a
bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.
Since the EMC suppression module achieves a significant reduction in radio-frequency components and the voltage level in
three phases, the contact endurance is also improved considerably. This makes an important contribution towards enhancing
the reliability and availability of the system as a whole.
When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-related

applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate
the contactors manually.
Solder pin adapters

The solder pin adapters for the contactors size S00, up to 5.5 kW
or 12 A (AC-1/AC-3), are available in two versions:
Solder pin adapter for contactors with one integrated auxiliary
contact
Solder pin adapter for contactors with mounted 4-pole
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/41
There is no need for fine graduations within each performance

class, as smaller motors inherently have a higher inductance, so
that one solution for all fixed-speed operating mechanisms up to
5.5 kW is adequate.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3RA2813
3RA2814
3RA2815
Function
ON-delay
OFF-delay
with control signal
OFF-delay without
control signal
Version
1)
Dimensions
General data
V AC
Rated insulation voltage Ui

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
300
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,

0.95 ... 1.05 times the rated frequency
Operating range of excitation

Rated power
Power consumption at 230 V AC, 50 Hz
VA

AC-140
At 24 ... 240 V, 50 Hz A
--
AC-15
At 24 ... 240 V, 50 Hz A
DC-13
At 24 V A
At 125 V A
At 250 V A
1
0.2
0.1
Short-circuit protection
DIAZED, type 5SB
With Ie at 230 V AC
h-1
2 500
With 3RT2 contactor at 230 V AC
h-1
2 500
Recovery time
ms
150
Minimum ON period
ms
--
Residual current, max.
mA
--
Voltage drop, max.

with conducting output
VA
--
Short-time loading capacity up to 10 ms
--
Switching frequency for load
200
15 %
Setting accuracy, typ.

with reference to upper limit of scale
1 %
Repeat accuracy, max.

-35
Operating cycles 10 x 106

During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80

IP20

Shock resistance
Half-sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Vibration resistance
according to IEC 60068-2-6
g/ms
15/11
Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-4, IEC 61812-1, IEC 60947-1
Varistor integrated
Any
Connection type
Screw terminals
2
Solid
mm
Finely stranded with end sleeve
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 14)

M3 (for standard screw driver size 2 or Pozidriv 2)
Terminal screws
Tightening torque
1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Nm
Connection type
0.8 ... 1.2

Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Finely stranded
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 x (24 ... 16)
1)
Dimensions with mounted function module see 3RT20 contactors,

pages 3/17 and 3/22.
3/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Version
Type
3RT2916-2BE01
Function
3RT2916-2BK01
3RT2916-2BL01
OFF-delay devices
General data
DC supply
S00 ... S3
S00/S0
S00/S0
AC supply
--
S00/S0
S00/S0
3RT20. .-1BB4.,
3RH2.. .-1BB40
3RT201.-1BF4,
3RT202.-1BF4,
3RH2.. .-1BF40
3RT201.-1BM4. /1BP4.,
3RT202.-1BM4. /1BP4.,
3RH2. . .-1BM40/1BP40
Type
360
NSB0_01064a
NSB0_01065a
360
Endurance, electrical approx.
Operating cycles >1 million

h-1
300
During operation
- Side-by-side mounting without distance
- Side-by-side mounting with 5 mm distance
C
C
-25 ... +50

-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80
Switching frequency z max. (at Tu = 60 C)

Permissible ambient temperature Tu
2)
Usp = Coil voltage
Tsp = Coil temperature
Control
Rated control supply voltage Us
Operating range
Rated frequency f
with AC supply
24 (DC)
0.9 ... 1.1 Us
Hz 5 % --
110 (AC/DC)
220/230 (AC/DC)
50/60
50/60
OFF-delay1)
(minimum times at Usp = 0.9 x Us, Tsp = 20 C)
Notes:
In practice the mean value is 1.5 times the minimum time.
S00
toff > ms
200
100
500
S0
toff > ms
100
80
300
Notes:
The total ON-delay = Contactor make-time + ton
ON-delay
(maximum at Usp = 0.9 x Us, Tsp = 20 C)
S00
ton < ms
10
60
200
S0
ton < ms
10
80
250
Installed capacity C
3RT1916-2B.01
Capacitor voltage
F
V
2 000
35
68
180
68
350
Power loss Pv max. approx.
0.4
0.5
Surge suppression
1)
Doubling the delay time can be achieved by doubling the capacitance.

Commercially available capacitors can be used, which can be connected
to terminals C+ and Z.
2)
See 3RT201 contactors, page 3/17.
With varistor, integrated
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/43
Connectable contactor sizes

Caution! Only contactors and contactor relays with DC operation can be
connected.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Version
3RT2926-2P
Pneumatic delay block1)
Function
General data
V

(pollution degree 3)
690
Electrical endurance at Ie

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +60

-50 ... +80

According to IEC 60947 utilization categories
AC-12
10
Up to 230/220 V
400/380 V
500 V
690/660 V
A
A
A
A
6
4
2.5
1.5
At 24 V
48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
4
2
0.7
0.3
0.15
10
Solid, stranded:
AWG cables
mm2
mm
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) or 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2) or 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
2 x (20 ... 16)2) or 2 x (18 ... 14)2)
Tightening torque of the terminal screws
Nm
0.8 ... 1.1
AC-15/AC-14 at Ue
DC-13 at Ue
Short-circuit test
with fuse links of operational class gG
with short-circuit current Ik = 1 kA according to IEC 60947-5-1
Time delay
10 %
Accuracy
s and u rated data

Rated voltage
V AC
1)
For size S0.

In addition to the pneumatic delay block, no other auxiliary contacts are
permitted.
Type
Version
600
A 600, Q 600
Switching capacity
2)

3RT2926-3A
Function
Mechanical latching block for 3RT2.2. contactors
General data
IEC 61812-1
Standards
690
With contactor 3RT2.2.

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +60

-50 ... +80
IP20
Operating range of the solenoid coil

At AC 50/60 Hz and DC
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid coils

of the unlocking magnet
(for cold coil and 1.0 x Us)
AC and DC operation
Approx. 4
ms
ms
18 ... 31
18 ... 26
mm2
AWG
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4

2 x 14; 1 x 12
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5
2 x 14; 1 x 12
Nm
lb.in
0.8 ... 1.1

7 ... 9.5
Command duration for de-energizing

AC operation
DC operation
Solid
AWG cables, solid
AWG cables, finely stranded with end sleeve
3/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Version
Connection modules for contactors with screw terminals
3RT1900-4RE01
3RT1916-4RD01
3RT1926-4RD01
S00, S0 connectors
S00 adapters
S0 adapters
20
25

690

kV
Rated operational voltage Ue
440
Rated frequency f
For AC operation
Hz
50/60

AC-3 at 400 V
25

V
400
During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-50 ... +80
Protective separation according to IEC 60947-1

General data
IP20
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529
Connection type
Screw terminals
Solid
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 6)
Finely stranded without/with end sleeve
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 6)
Stranded
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 6)
AWG
1 x (20 ... 10)
Tightening torque
Nm
0.6 ... 0.8
Corresponding opening tool
Short-slot screwdriver PZ2
s and u rated data

480
600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 C
16/25
At 600 V
kA
CLASS RK5 fuse
Circuit breakers
with overload protection acc. to UL 489
16
25
100
60
100
100
60
100

At 480 V Type
22
--
22
kA
65
--
65
At 600 V Type
1)
3RV202
3RV202
22
--
22
kA
10
--
10
For the dimensioning of load feeders, see
Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations for UL",
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/45
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Version
3RH2924-1GP11
Function
Coupling links for PLC for mounting on contactors
General data
IEC 60947
Standards
300
Protective separation between coil and contacts

V AC
Up to 300

Connections
IP20
Enclosure
IP40

During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Terminal screws
M3
Control side
V DC
24
Operating range
V DC
17 ... 30
Power consumption at Us
0.5
Nominal current input
mA
20
Release voltage
Function display
Yellow LED
Protection circuit
Varistor
Load side
Operating cycles 0.1 million
Switching frequency
h-1
5 000 operating cycles
Make-time
ms
Approx. 7
Break-time
ms
Approx. 4
Bounce time
ms
Approx. 2
AgSnO
Contact material
Switching voltage
V AC/DC 24 ... 250
mA
3/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
2.5
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Options
Terminal designations
Identification numbers
The terminal designations are 2-digit, e.g. 13, 14, 21, 22:
Tens digit: Sequence digit
- Related terminals have the same sequence digit
Units digit: Function digit
- 1-2 for normally closed contacts (NC)
- 3-4 for normally open contacts (NO)
The identification number indicates the number and type of the

auxiliary contacts, e.g. 40, 31, 22, 13:
1st digit: number of normally open contacts (NO)
2nd digit: number of normally closed contacts (NC)
Examples:
31 = 3 NO + 1 NC
40 = 4 NO
Selection aid for mountable auxiliary switch blocks for power contactors and contactor relays
The possible combinations of basic unit and mounted auxiliary

switch block can be found in the tables on pages 3/48 to 3/52.
Example 1
3RT20 motor contactor,
S00 with 1 NO
3-pole contactors
Article No.
Auxiliary contacts
3RT201 3RT201 3RT202
Version
S00
S00
S0
NO NC
10
01
11
2. 3. 4. 5.
5. 6. 7. 8.
14 22
11
.1
02
2.
12
Sequence
2.
digit
Type
3RH2911-@HA02
--
3RH2911-@HA03
--
3RH2911-@FA04
--
.2
.1 .1
12
.2
.2
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
.1
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
.2
03
--
.3
13
04
14
14
--
--
20
11
3.
4.
5.
3.
4.
5.
14 A2
5.
21
6.
4.
5.
6.
14
22
3.
4.
.1
.1
.1
.1
A2
5.
.2
.2
.2
.2
.1
.2
.1
.2
.1
.2
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
1)
For screw terminals

For spring-type terminals
6.
Function
digit
.1
.2
.1
.2
.1
.2
Combination

S00 with aux. switch block S0 with aux. switch block
.1
.2
21
SIRIUS
3.
SIRIUS
A1
.4
Auxiliary switch with 4 NC, Auxiliary switch with

3RH2911-.FA04
3 NC, 3RH2911-.HA03
13
Auxiliary switch with 1 NO contact

3RH2911-@HA10
SIRIUS
13 A1
3. 4. 5. 6.
Auxiliary switches without NO contact

--
5
5.
3.
According to EN 500121)
3RH2911-@HA01
3
4.
13 21
22
14
2.
1
3.
4.
13
NSB0_02112
13
3.
NSB0_02116
21
Where the columns and lines intersect (blue and green in the
example) you will find the identification number for the combination of basic unit (column) and auxiliary switch block (line).
Additional auxiliary switch blocks
Example 2
S0 with 1 NO + 1 NC
NSB0_02114
Type
IC01_00131
The auxiliary switch blocks of the 3RH29 series for mounting on

the front and side can be used for power contactors as well as
for contactor relays.
2.
Combinations according to EN 50012, EN 50011 and IEC 60947-5-1 are in

bold print. All combinations comply with EN 50005.
3.
.1
.1
4.
.1
5.
SIRIUS
13 A1
.1
4.
5.
13
21
.1
6.
A1
.1
.1
Example 1
.2
.2
.2
14 A2
Example 2
Basic unit: 3-pole 3RT2023 motor contactor with 1 NO + 1 NC
Required: 1 NO + 4 NC (Ident. No. 14)
Result: Auxiliary switch block 3RH2911-.HA03
Terminal
desig.
13
14
21
22
31
32
Result
Ident. No. 14
41
42
51
52
.2
22
21
22
31
32
A2
IC01_00132
.2
.2
14
NSB0_02120
.2
Basic unit: 3-pole 3RT2017 motor contactor with 1 NO

Required: 1 NO + 4 NC (Ident. No. 14)
Result: 3RH2911-.FA04 auxiliary switch block
13
14
41
42
51
52
Ident. No. 14
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/47
Auxiliary switch: Terminal designations and identification numbers for auxiliary contacts
Siemens AG 2013


3-pole contactors
Article No.
Auxiliary contacts
S00
Version
3RT201 3RT201 3RT202 3RT231 3RT251 3RT232 3RT252 3RH21, 3RH24
NO NC
10
01
21
13
11
5. 6. 7. 8.
S00
--
Contactor relays
S0
--
13 21
22
14
2. 3. 4. 5.
4-pole contactors
S0
11
13 21
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
S00
11
13 21
14 22
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
3. 4. 5. 6.
40E
31E
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
14 24 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
22E
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
14 22 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
5. 6. 7. 8
Front auxiliary switches

Without NO contact
3RH2911-@HA01 --
3RH2911-@HA02 --
3RH2911-@HA03 --
3RH2911-@FA04 --
.1
.2
.1 .1
.2
.2
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
.1
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
.2
11
02
12
01
01
12
12
41X
32X
23X
12
03
13
02
02
13
--
42E
33X
24
13
04
14
03
--
--
--
43
34
--
14
--
--
--
--
--
--
44E
--
--
20
11
21
10
10
21
21
50E
41E
32E
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
51X
42X
33X
22
13
23
12
12
23
--
52
43
34
23
14
24
13
--
--
--
53X
44X
--
30
21
31
20
20
31
31
60E
51X
42X
31
22
32
21
21
32
32
61
52
43
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
62X
53
44X
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
62X
53
44X
40
31
41
30
30
41
41
70
61
52
41
32
42
31
31
42
42
71X
62X
53X
50
41
51
40
40
51
51
80E
71X
62X
With 1 NO contact
3RH2911-@HA10 1
--
.3
3RH2911-@HA11 1
.1 .3
3RH2911-@HA12 1
3RH2911-@HA13 1
.4
.2
.4
.1
.1 .3
.2
.2
.4
.1
.1
.1 .3
.2
.2
.2
.4
With 2 NO contacts
3RH2911-@HA20 2
--
3RH2911-@HA21 2
3RH2911-@HA22 2
3RH2911-@FA22 2
.3
.3
.4
.4
.1 .3
.3
.2
.4
.4
.1
.1 .3
.2
.2
.3
.4
.4
.3
.1
.1 .3
.4
.2
.2 .4
.3
.3
.4
.4
With 3 NO contacts
3RH2911-@HA30 3
--
3RH2911-@HA31 3
.3
.4
.1 .3
.3
.3
.2 .4
.4
.4
With 4 NO contacts
3RH2911-@FA40 4
1)
--
.3
.3
.3
.3
.4
.4
.4
.4
Combinations according to EN 50012, EN 50011 and IEC 60947-5-1 are in bold print. All combinations comply with EN 50005.
3/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole contactors
Article No.
Auxiliary contacts
S00
Version
NO NC
10
14
2. 3. 4. 5.
21
22
5. 6. 7. 8.
11
S00
--
--
13 21
11
13 21
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
Contactor relays
S0
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
S00
11
13 21
14 22
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
3. 4. 5. 6.
40E
31E
13 23 33 43
14 24 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
13 21 33 43
14 22 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
22E
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
5. 6. 7. 8
According to EN 50005
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
51
42
33
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
62
53
44
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
62
53
44
20
11
21
10
10
21
21
50
41
32
20
11
21
10
10
21
21
50
41
32
11
02
12
01
01
12
12
41
32
23
11
02
12
01
01
12
12
41
32
23
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
51
42
33
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
51
42
33
30
21
31
20
20
31
31
60
51
42
30
21
31
20
20
31
31
60
51
42

With make-before-break
3RH2911-@FB11 --
.7
.5
.8
.6
3RH2911-@FB22 --
.3
.1
.5
.7
.4
.2
.6
.8
3RH2911-@FC22 --
.7
.7
.5
.5
.8
.8
.6
.6
1)
With complete inscription

3RH2911-1AA10 1
--
73
3RH2911-1BA10 1
--
73
3RH2911-1AA01 --
3RH2911-1BA01 --
71
3RH2911-1LA11 1
73 81
3RH2911-1MA11 1
73 81
3RH2911-1LA20 2
--
73 83
3RH2911-1MA20 2
--
73 83
74
74
71
72
72
74 82
74 82
74 84
74 84
1)
Terminals from the top or bottom; see page 3/54.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/49
01
13
4-pole contactors
S0
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole contactors
Article No.
Auxiliary contacts
S00
Version
NO NC
10
01
21
13
11
5. 6. 7. 8.
S00
--
Contactor relays
S0
--
13 21
22
14
2. 3. 4. 5.
4-pole contactors
S0
11
13 21
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
S00
11
13 21
14 22
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
3. 4. 5. 6.
40E
31E
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
14 24 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
22E
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
14 22 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
5. 6. 7. 8

With complete inscription (for contactor relays)2)
3RH2911-@GA40 4
--
53 63 73 83
3RH2911-@GA31 3
53 61 73 83
3RH2911-@GA22 2
53 61 71 83
3RH2911-@GA13 1
53 61 71 81
3RH2911-@GA04 --
51 61 71 81
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
80E
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
71E
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
62E
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
53E
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
44E
--
--
50
41
51
40
40
51
51
80E
71X
62X
41
32
42
31
31
42
42
71E
62X
53
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
62E
53
44X
14
--
--
--
--
--
--
44E
--
--
12
03
13
02
02
13
--
42
33
24
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
51
42
33
30
21
31
20
20
31
31
60
51
42
54 64 74 84
54 62 74 84
54 62 72 84
54 62 72 82
52 62 72 82
With complete inscription; special version

3RH2911-@XA40 4
-0MA0
--
53 63 73 83
3RH2911-@XA31 3
-0MA0
53 61 73 83
3RH2911-@XA22 2
-0MA0
53 61 71 83
3RH2911-@XA04 --0MA0
51 61 71 81
54 64 74 84
54 62 74 84
54 62 72 84
52 62 72 82
Solid-state compatible
3RH2911-@NF02 --
3RH2911-@NF11 1
.4
.2
3RH2911-@NF20 2
--
.3
.3
.4
.4
.1
.1
.2
.2
.3
.1
1)
Combinations according to EN 50011 and IEC 60947-5-1 are in bold print.

All combinations comply with EN 50005.
2)
Ordering data see Accessories for 3RH2 Contactor Relays, Chapter 5.
3/50
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole contactors
Article No.
Auxiliary contacts
S00
Version
NO NC
10
21
11
5. 6. 7. 8.
3RH2911-@DA02 --
3RH2911-@DA02 --
3RH2911-@DA11 1
3RH2911-@DA11 1
3RH2911-@DA20 2
--
3RH2911-@DA20 2
--
3RH2911-@DA20 2
+
3RH2911-@DA11 1
--
3RH2911-@DA20 2
+
3RH2911-@DA02 --
--
3RH2911-@DA11 1
+
3RH2911-@DA02 --
--
11
13 21
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
Lateral auxiliary switches

Left
For size S00
--
Contactor relays
S0
13 21
22
14
S00
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
S00
11
13 21
14 22
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
3. 4. 5. 6.
40E
31E
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
14 24 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
22E
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
14 22 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
5. 6. 7. 8
Right
21 31
12
--
--
02
02
--
--
--
--
--
14
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
21
--
--
11
11
--
--
--
--
--
32
--
--
22
22
--
--
--
--
--
30
--
--
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
50
--
--
40
40
--
--
--
--
--
41
--
--
31
31
--
--
--
--
--
32
--
--
22
22
--
--
--
--
--
23
--
--
13
--
--
--
--
--
--
12
03
13
02
02
13
--
--
--
--
14
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
--
--
--
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
--
--
--
30
21
31
20
20
31
31
--
--
--
50
41
51
40
40
51
51
--
--
--
22 32
41 51
42 52
21 31
22 32
21 33
22 34
41 53
21 33
42 54
22 34
23 33
24 34
43 53
23 33
44 54
24 34
43 53
21 33
44 54
22 34
43 53
21 31
44 54
22 32
41 53
21 31
2
42 54
Left
For size S0
3RH2921-@DA02 --
3RH2921-@DA02 --
3RH2921-@DA11 1
3RH2921-@DA11 1
3RH2921-@DA20 2
--
3RH2921-@DA20 2
--
22 32
Right
31 41
32 42
51 61
31 41
52 62
32 42
31 43
32 44
51 63
31 43
52 64
32 44
33 43
34 44
1)
53 63
33 43
54 64
34 44

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/51
01
13
2. 3. 4. 5.
4-pole contactors
S0
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole contactors
Article No.
Auxiliary contacts
S00
Version
NO NC
10
01
21
13
3
Left
For size S0, S00
3RH2921-@DA20 2
+
3RH2921-@DA11 1
--
3RH2921-@DA20 2
+
3RH2921-@DA02 --
--
3RH2921-@DA11 1
+
3RH2921-@DA02 --
11
5. 6. 7. 8.
S00
--
Contactor relays
S0
--
13 21
22
14
2. 3. 4. 5.
4-pole contactors
S0
11
13 21
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. 2. 3. 4.
S00
11
13 21
14 22
14 22
3. 4. 5. 6.
3. 4. 5. 6.
40E
31E
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
14 24 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
22E
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
14 22 34 44
5. 6. 7. 8
5. 6. 7. 8
41
32
42
31
31
42
42
--
--
--
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
--
--
--
23
14
24
13
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
42Z
33X
24
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
51X
42X
33X
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
60Z
51X
42X
21
--
--
11
11
--
--
--
--
--
32
--
--
22
22
--
--
--
--
--
21
12
22
11
11
22
22
--
--
--
32
23
33
22
22
33
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
51X
42X
33X
Right
53 63
31 43
54 64
32 44
53 63
31 41
54 64
32 42
51 63
31 41
52 64
32 42
For contactor relays

3RH2921-@DA02 --
3RH2921-@DA11 1
3RH2921-@DA20 2
--
Left
51 61
52 62
51 63
52 64
53 63
54 64
Solid-state compatible
Left
For size S00

3RH2911-2DE11 1
3RH2911-2DE11 1
Right
23 31
24 32
41 53
23 31
42 54
Left
For size S0, S00

3RH2921-2DE11 1
3RH2921-2DE11 1
24 32
Right
33 41
34 42
33 41
52 64
34 42
Left
For contactor relays

3RH2921-@DE11 1
51 63
51 63
52 64
1)

3/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH2911-1HA22
For contactors /
contactor relays1)
Auxiliary contacts
DT Spring-type
terminals
Version
Article No.
Type
3RH2911-2HA22
DT Screw terminals
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC
Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front

Sizes S00 and S02)
3RT2.1.,
3RT2.2.
--
--
--
--
.3
.1 .3
--
--
3RH21,
3RH24
.1
3RH2911-1HA01
3RH2911-2HA01
3RH2911-1HA02
3RH2911-2HA02
3RH2911-1HA03
3RH2911-2HA03
3RH2911-1HA10
3RH2911-2HA10
3RH2911-1HA11
3RH2911-2HA11
3RH2911-1HA12
3RH2911-2HA12
3RH2911-1HA13
3RH2911-2HA13
3RH2911-1HA20
3RH2911-2HA20
3RH2911-1HA21
3RH2911-2HA21
3RH2911-1HA22
3RH2911-2HA22
3RH2911-1HA30
3RH2911-2HA30
3RH2911-1HA31
3RH2911-2HA31
.2
.1
.1
.2
.2
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
.4
.2
.4
.1
.1 .3
.2
.2
.4
.1
.1
.1 .3
.2
.2
.2
.3
.3
.4
.4
.4
.1 .3
.3
.2
.4
.4
.1
.1 .3
.3
.2
.2
.4
.3
.3
.4
.4
.4
.3
.4
.1 .3
.3
.3
.2 .4
.4
.4
1)
For detailed information on use see page 3/48.
2)
The 3RH29 auxiliary switches are also available with ring terminal lug connection. The 8th digit of the Article No. must be changed from a "1" to a
"4", e.g. 3RH2911-1HA22 3RH2911-4HA22.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/53
Siemens AG 2013

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH2911-1FC22
For contactors /
contactor relays1)
3RH2911-2FC22
3RH2911-1LA11
Connections
Auxiliary contacts
Position
Version
3RH2911-1MA11
Article No.
Type
3RH2911-1AA01
DT Screw terminals
3RH2911-1BA01
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NO NC NO NC

Sizes S00 and S0
3RT2.1.,
3RT2.2.
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
.7
.5
.8
.6
.3
.1
.5
.7
.4
.2
.6
.8
--
--
.7
.7
.5
.5
.8
.8
.6
.6
3RH21,
3RH24
.3
.3
.3
.3
.4
.4
.4
.4
.3
.1
.1 .3
.4
.2
3RH2911-1FA40
3RH2911-2FA40
3RH2911-1FA22
3RH2911-2FA22
3RH2911-1FA04
3RH2911-2FA04
3RH2911-1FB11
3RH2911-2FB11
3RH2911-1FB22
3RH2911-2FB22
3RH2911-1FC22
3RH2911-2FC22
3RH2911-1AA10
--
3RH2911-1BA10
--
3RH2911-1AA01
--
3RH2911-1BA01
--
3RH2911-1LA11
--
3RH2911-1MA11
--
3RH2911-1LA20
--
3RH2911-1MA20
--
.2 .4
.1
.1
.1
.1
.2
.2
.2
.2
1- and 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks, cable entry from top or bottom
3RT2.1.,
3RT2.2.
Top
--
--
--
Bottom
--
--
--
3RH21,
3RH24
73
74
Top
--
--
--
Bottom
--
--
--
71
72
Top
--
--
Bottom
--
--
73 81
74 82
Top
--
--
--
Bottom
--
--
--
73 83
74 84
1)
For detailed information on use see pages 3/48 and 3/49.
3/54
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH2911-1DA02
For contactors /
contactor relays
3RH2911-2DA02
Auxiliary contacts
3RH2911-1XA22-0MA0
Version
Article No.
Type
3RH2911-2XA22-0MA0
DT Screw terminals
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Sizes S00 and S0
3RT2.1.,
3RT2.2.1)
--
53 63 73 83
53 61 73 83
53 61 71 83
--
51 61 71 81
3RH21,
3RH241)
3RH2911-1XA40-0MA0
3RH2911-2XA40-0MA0
3RH2911-1XA31-0MA0
3RH2911-2XA31-0MA0
3RH2911-1XA22-0MA0
3RH2911-2XA22-0MA0
3RH2911-1XA04-0MA0
3RH2911-2XA04-0MA0
3RH2911-1DA02
3RH2911-2DA02
3RH2911-1DA11
3RH2911-2DA11
3RH2911-1DA20
3RH2911-2DA20
3RH2921-1DA02
3RH2921-2DA02
3RH2921-1DA11
3RH2921-2DA11
3RH2921-1DA20
3RH2921-2DA20
54 64 74 84
54 62 74 84
54 62 72 84
52 62 72 82
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks,

mounting on the right and/or on the left
Left
Right
Size S00
3RT2.1.2)
--
--
41 51
21 31
42 52
22 32
41 53
21 33
42 54
22 34
43 53
23 33
44 54
Left
Size S0
3RT2.2.2)3)
--
--
24 34
Right
51 61
31 41
52 62
32 42
51 63
31 43
52 64
32 44
53 63
33 43
54 64
34 44
1)
For detailed information on use see page 3/50.
2)
3)
With 3RT232., 3RT252., mountable only on the right.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/55
Siemens AG 2013

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH2911-2DE11
For contactors /
contactor relays1)
3RH2911-1NF. .
Contacts
DT Spring-type
terminals
Version
Article No.
Type
3RH2911-2NF. .
DT Screw terminals
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC
Electronic compatible auxiliary switch blocks

For operation in dusty atmospheres
For electronic circuits with rated operational currents
Ie/AC-14 and DC-13 of 1 ... 300 mA at 3 ... 60 V
Hard gold-plated contacts
Mirror contacts acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F,
for auxiliary switches for mounting on the side
(for auxiliary switches for snapping onto the front, see footnote)
Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front2)

Sizes S00 and S0
3RT2.1.,
3RT2.2.
--
23)
13)
.4
.2
--
.3
.3
.4
.4
3RH21
.1
.1
.2
.2
.3
.1
3RH2911-1NF02
3RH2911-2NF02
3RH2911-1NF11
3RH2911-2NF11
3RH2911-1NF20
3RH2911-2NF20
--
3RH2911-2DE11
--
3RH2921-2DE11
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks,

mounting on the right and/or on the left
Left
Size S00
3RT2.1.
41 53
42 54
Left
Size S0
3RT2.2.
Right
23 31
24 32
Right
51 63
33 41
52 64
34 42
1)
2)
The 3RH2911-.NF.. auxiliary switches are also available with ring terminal
lug connection. In the 8th position of the Article No., the "1" must be
replaced with "4", e.g.: 3RH2911-1NF11 3RH2911-4NF11
3)
The following applies to size S0 contactors: The NC contacts are mirror

contacts.
3/56
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Auxiliary switch blocks, delayed
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA2813-1AW10
For
contactors voltage Us1)
Time setting
range t
Type
Output /
auxiliary contacts
Article No.
V
3RA2813-2AW10
DT Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the

front, terminal designations according to DIN 46199-5
Sizes S00 and S0
The electrical connection between the solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switch and the contactor underneath is established automatically when
it is snapped on and locked.
ON-delay
Varistor integrated
3RT2.,
3RH212)
3RH24
24 ... 240 AC/DC
0.05 ...100,
(1, 10, 100
selectable)
1 CO
3RA2813-1AW10
3RA2813-2AW10
1 NO + 1 NC
3RA2813-1FW10
3RA2813-2FW10
1 CO
3RA2814-1AW10
3RA2814-2AW10
1 NO + 1 NC
3RA2814-1FW10
3RA2814-2FW10
1 CO
3RA2815-1AW10
3RA2815-2AW10
1 NO + 1 NC
3RA2815-1FW10
3RA2815-2FW10
OFF-delay with control signal

Varistor integrated
3RT2.,
3RH212)
3RH24
24 ... 240 AC/DC
0.05 ...100,
(1, 10, 100
selectable)
OFF-delay without control signal3)

Varistor integrated
3RT2.,
3RH212)
3RH24
24 ... 240 AC/DC
0.05 ...100,
(1, 10, 100
selectable)
1)
AC voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
For technical specifications see page 3/42.
2)
Cannot be fitted onto coupling contactors.
3)
Setting of output contacts in as-supplied state not defined (bistable relay).

Application of the control supply voltage once results in contact changeover to the correct setting.
Note:
When using the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches, no
other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic
units.
Function
Function charts
Timing relay energized
Contact closed
Contact open
With 1 CO contact
With 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact
3RA2813-.AW10
A1/A2
3RA2813-.FW10
ms
t
3RA2815-.AW10
NSB0_02104
3RA2814-.FW10
A3/A2
B1/A2
>
27/28
35/36
35 ms
t
3RA2815-.FW10
200 ms
>
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t

27/28
35/36
NSB0_02073
> 35
NSB0_02100
15/18
15/16
OFF-delay
without control signal
(varistor integrated)
3RA2814-.AW10
A3/A2
B1/A2
NSB0_02101
OFF-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
200 ms
A1/A2
27/28
35/36
NSB0_02102
15/18
15/16
NSB0_02103
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches

ON-delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/57
Siemens AG 2013

Delay and latching blocks

For contactors

voltage Us
Time setting range DT Screw terminals

t
Type
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
OFF-delay devices
Sizes S00 and S0
For contactors with DC operation
Non-adjustable delay time
3RT2.1,
3RT2.2,
3RH2. . .-1BF40
110 AC/DC
3RT2.1,
3RT2.2,
3RH2. . .-1BM40
220/230 AC/DC
3RT2.1,
3RT2.2,
3RH2. . .-1BB40
24 DC
S00: > 0.1
3RT2916-2BK01
1 unit
41B
3RT2916-2BL01
1 unit
41B
3RT2916-2BE01
1 unit
41B
0.05 ...100
(1, 10, 100;
selectable)
3RA2811-1CW10
1 unit
41B
0.05 ...100
(1, 10, 100;
selectable)
3RA2812-1DW10
1 unit
41B
S0:> 0.08
S00: > 0.5
S0: > 0.3
S00: > 0.2
S0: > 0.1
3RT2916-2B.01
Delay blocks For snapping onto the front of contactors

Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output
Sizes S00 and S0
ON-delay
Two-wire design, varistor integrated
3RT201., 3RT202.,
3RH212), 3RH24
3RA2811-1CW10
24 ... 240 AC/DC1)

Varistor integrated
3RT201., 3RT202.,
3RH212), 3RH24
24 ... 240 AC/DC1)
ON-delay
3RT201., 3RT202.,
3RH212), 3RH24
24 ... 240 AC/DC1)
3RA2811-2CW10
Spring-type
terminals
0.05 ...100
(1, 10, 100;
selectable)
3RA2811-2CW10
1 unit
41B
0.05 ...100
(1, 10, 100;
selectable)
3RA2812-2DW10
1 unit
41B

Varistor integrated
3RT201., 3RT202.,
3RH212), 3RH24
24 ... 240 AC/DC1)
Pneumatic3) size S0
Auxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC4)
Screw terminals
ON-delay
3RT202.
--
0.1 ... 30
3RT2926-2PA01
1 unit
41B
1 ... 60
3RT2926-2PA11
1 unit
41B
OFF-delay
3RT2926-2P. . .
3RT202.
--
0.1 ... 30
3RT2926-2PR01
1 unit
41B
1 ... 60
3RT2926-2PR11
1 unit
41B
24 AC/DC
--
3RT2926-3AB31
1 unit
41B
110 AC/DC
--
3RT2926-3AF31
1 unit
41B
230 AC/DC
--
3RT2926-3AP31
1 unit
41B
Mechanical latching blocks

Size S0
For snapping onto the front of contactors
The contactor remains in the energized state
after a voltage failure
3RT202.
3RT2926-3A.31
For technical specifications see pages 3/43, 3/44 and 3/185.

1)
2)
3)
Certificate for versions for furnaces according to VDE 0116 on request.
4)
In addition to these, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted.
3/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Surge suppressors

For
Version
contactors
Rated control supply voltage Us1) DT Article No.2)

AC operation
DC operation
Type
V AC
V DC
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Surge suppressors without LED (also for spring-type terminals)

Size S00
For plugging onto the front side of the contactors
(with and without auxiliary switch block)
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
Varistor
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
}
A
3RT2916-1BB00
3RT2916-1BC00
3RT2916-1BD00
3RT2916-1BE00
3RT2916-1BF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
RC elements
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
A
A
3RT2916-1CB00
3RT2916-1CC00
3RT2916-1CD00
3RT2916-1CE00
3RT2916-1CF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
Noise suppression diodes --
12 ... 250
3RT2916-1DG00
1 unit
41B
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
Diode assemblies
(diode and Zener diode) for
DC operation
--
12 ... 250
3RT2916-1EH00
1 unit
41B
3RT2916-1B.00
Size S0
(prior to mounting of the auxiliary switch block)
3RT2.2
Varistor
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
}
A
3RT2926-1BB00
3RT2926-1BC00
3RT2926-1BD00
3RT2926-1BE00
3RT2926-1BF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RT2.2
RC elements
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
A
A
3RT2926-1CB00
3RT2926-1CC00
3RT2926-1CD00
3RT2926-1CE00
3RT2926-1CF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RT2.2
Diode assembly
for DC operation
---
24
30 ... 250
}
}
3RT2926-1ER00
3RT2926-1ES00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3RT2926-1E.00
1)
2)
Can be used for AC operation for 50/60 Hz. Please inquire about further
voltages.
For
Version
contactors
Type

voltage Us1)
For packs of 10 or 5 units, "-Z" and order code "X90" must be added to the
Article No.
AC
operation
DC
operation
Power
consumption P
of the LED
at Us
V AC
V DC
mW
DT Article No.2)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Surge suppressors with LED (also for spring-type terminals)

Size S00
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
Varistor
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
--
12 ... 24
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
10 ... 120
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
}
}
}
A
3RT2916-1JJ00
3RT2916-1JK00
3RT2916-1JL00
3RT2916-1JP00
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
Noise suppression
diodes
----
24 ... 70
50 ... 150
150 ... 250
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
}
A
}
3RT2916-1LM00
3RT2916-1LN00
3RT2916-1LP00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3RT2916-1J.00
Size S0
3RT2.2
Varistor
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
12 ... 24
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
10 ... 120
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
}
}
}
3RT2926-1JJ00
3RT2926-1JK00
3RT2926-1JL00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3RT2.2
Diode
assembly
--
24
20 ... 470
3RT2926-1MR00
1 unit
41B
3RT2926-1MR00
1)
voltages.

2)
Article No.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/59
Siemens AG 2013

Other function blocks

For contactors Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Type
EMC suppression modules; 3-phase, up to 7.5 kW

Size S00 (for contactors with AC or DC operation)1)
Screw terminals
3RT201
RC elements (3 x 220 /0.22 F)

Up to 400 V
Up to 575 V
Up to 690 V
3RT201
3RT2916-1PA1
3RT2916-1PA2
3RT2916-1PA3
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
A
A
C
3RT2916-1PB1
3RT2916-1PB2
3RT2916-1PB3
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3RT2916-1GA00
1 unit
41B
3RT2926-1QT00
5 units
41B
3RH2924-1GP11
1 unit
41B
Varistor
Up to 400 V
Up to 575 V
Up to 690 V
3RT2916-1PA.
}
A
C
Additional load modules

Size S00
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
For plugging onto the front side of the contactors }

with or without auxiliary switch blocks2)
For increasing the permissible residual current and
for limiting the residual voltage. It ensures the safe
opening of contactors with direct control via
230 V AC semiconductor outputs of SIMATIC
controllers. It acts simultaneously as a surge
suppressor.
Rated voltage:
AC 50/60 Hz, 180 to 255 V.
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
3RT2916-1GA00
LED modules for displaying contactor operation

Size S0
3RT2. 2
For snapping into the location hole of an inscription B

label on the front of a contactor either directly on the
contactor or on the front auxiliary switch.
The LED module is connected to coil terminals A1
and A2 of the contactor and indicates its energized
state. Yellow LED.
Rated voltage:
24 ... 240 V AC/DC with reverse polarity protection.
3RT2926-1QT00

Size S0
3RT2. 2
3RH2924-1GP11
For mounting onto the coil terminals of the

}
contactors
With LED for indicating switching state.
With integrated varistor for damping opening surges.
Operating range 17 ... 30 V DC
Power consumption: 0.5 W at 24 V DC
Permissible residual current of the electronics
(with 0 signal): 2.5 mA
Rated operational current Ie:
AC-15/AC-14 at 230 V: 3 A
DC-13 at 230 V: 0.1 A
Control kit
Sizes S00 and S0
For manual operation of the contactor contacts
for start-up and service3)
3RT2.1,
3RH2.
3RT2916-4MC00
5 units
41B
3RT2.2
3RT2926-4MC00
5 units
41B
3RT2916-4MC00
For technical specifications for coupling links see page 3/46.

1)
See also description on page 3/41.
2)
For packs of 10 units, the Article No. must be supplemented with "-Z" and
order code "X90".
3)
See also Chapter 8, "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the
Control Cabinet" "ET 200S Motor Starters" "Accessories", Article No.
3RK1903-0CA00.
3/60
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors

DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
5 units
41B
Type
Sizes S00 and S0

3RT2.1,
3RT2.2,
3RH2.1)
Sealable covers
for preventing manual operation
3RT2916-4MA10
(Not suitable for coupling contactors)
3RT2916-4MA10

Sizes S00 and S0
Screw terminals
Adapters for contactors

Ambient temperature Tu max. = 60 C
3RT1926-4RD01
3RT2 .1,
3RH2.
Size S00,
rated operational current Ie at
AC-3/400 V: 20 A
3RT1916-4RD01
1 unit
41B
3RT2. 2
Size S0,
rated operational current Ie at
AC-3/400 V: 25 A
3RT1926-4RD01
1 unit
41B
3RT2 .1,
3RT2.2,
3RH2.
Plugs for contactors

Size S00, S0
3RT1900-4RE01
1 unit
41B
3RT1900-4RE01
Coil connection modules

Size S0
3RT2.2
Connection from top
3RT2926-4RA11
1 unit
41B
Connection from below
3RT2926-4RB11
1 unit
41B
Connection diagonally
3RT2926-4RC11
1 unit
41B
3RT2926-4RA11
Spring-type
terminals
3RT2.2
Connection from top
3RT2926-4RA12
1 unit
41B
3RT2926-4RB12
1 unit
41B
3RT2926-4RA12
Covers for contactors with ring terminal lug connection

Size S00
Ring terminal lug
connections
3RT2.1,
3RH2
Covers for ring terminal lug connections
3RT2916-4EA13
10 units
41B
3RT2926-4EB13
1 unit
41B
Single covers
3RT2916-4EA13
Size S0
3RT2. 2
Covers for ring terminal lug connections

Set for one device,
comprising 4 single covers
3RT2926-4EB13
For technical specifications for connection modules see

page 3/45.
1)
Exception: contactors and contactor relays auxiliary switch block mounted

onto the front.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/61
Sealable covers
Siemens AG 2013

DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
10 units
41B
3RT1916-4KA1
4 units
41B
3RT1916-4KA2
4 units
41B
3RT2 .1
3RA2916-1A
1 unit
41B
3RT2. 2
3RA2926-1A
1 unit
41B
Type
Screw adapters for fixing the contactors

Size S0
3RT2. 2
Screw adapters for easier screw fixing

2 units required per contactor
3RT1926-4P
(1 pack contains 10 sets for 10 contactors)

NSB0_01470
3RT1926-4P
Solder pin adapters for contactors up to 5.5 kW/12 A

Size S00, up to 5.5 kW
Screw terminals
3RT2.1,
3RH21
Assembly kit for soldering contactors onto a printed A

circuit board.
For 1 contactor, 1 set is required.
3RT1916-4KA1
Solder pin adapters for contactors up to 5.5 kW / 12 A

with mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block
Size S00, up to 5.5 kW
3RT2.1,
3RH21
Assembly kit for soldering contactors with an

auxiliary switch block onto a printed circuit board.
For 1 contactor, 1 set is required.
3RT1916-4KA2
Safety main current connectors for 2 contactors

Sizes S00 and S0
For series connection of 2 contactors
3RA2926-1A
3/62
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For contactors Max. conductor cross-sections
Type
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mm2
Links for paralleling

Sizes S00 and S0
3RT201
25, stranded
3RT1916-4BB31
1 unit
41B
3RT202
50, stranded
3RT2926-4BB31
1 unit
41B
3RT1916-4BB41
1 unit
41B
3RT1916-4BB31
3RT2926-4BB31
4-pole,
with connection terminal1)2)
3RT231,
3RT251
25, stranded
3RT1916-4BB41
1)
The links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole.
2)
With sizes S00 and S0 the links for paralleling are insulated.
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Insulation stop for securely holding back the conductor insulation

on conductors up to 1 mm2
Insulation stop strip can be inserted in cable entry of the
spring-type terminal (2 strips per contactor required)
3RT1916-4JA02
For basic units S00 (3RT201. or 3RH2.),

removable individually
3RT2916-4JA02
20 units
41B
For auxiliary and control current on basic units size S0

(3RT202.) and for mountable 3RH29 auxiliary switches,
removable in pairs
3RT1916-4JA02
20 units
41B
3RA2908-1A
1 unit
41B
10 mm 7 mm, titanium gray
3RT2900-1SB10
100
816 units
41B
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
3RT2900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
Tools for opening spring-type terminals

Screwdrivers
for all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals
Length: approx. 200 mm,
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
titanium gray/black, partially insulated
3RA29 08-1A
Blank labels
IC01_00181
Unit labeling plates

for SIRIUS devices1)
3RT2900-1SB20
1)
Adhesive labels
for SIRIUS devices
PC labeling system for individual inscription

of unit labeling plates available from:
murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH
(see Chapter 16, "Appendix" "External Partners").

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/63
Screw terminals
3-pole,
with connection terminal1)2)
Siemens AG 2013

Spare Parts for 3RT2 Contactors
Solenoid coils
For screw, spring-type and ring terminal lug connection
3RT2924-5A.01
For contactors
Size
Type
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
50 Hz
50/60 Hz
60 Hz
24
42
---
---
B
B
3RT2924-5AB01
3RT2924-5AD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
48
110
---
---
B
B
3RT2924-5AH01
3RT2924-5AF01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
230
400
---
---
B
B
3RT2924-5AP01
3RT2924-5AV01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
24
42
---
B
B
3RT2924-5AC21
3RT2924-5AD21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
48
110
---
B
B
3RT2924-5AH21
3RT2924-5AG21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
220
230
---
B
B
3RT2924-5AN21
3RT2924-5AL21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
--
24
3RT2924-5AC11
1 unit
41B
110
220
---
120
240
B
B
3RT2924-5AK61
3RT2924-5AP61
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
100
200
110
220
B
B
3RT2924-5AG61
3RT2924-5AN61
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
400
440
3RT2924-5AR61
1 unit
41B
24
42
---
---
B
B
3RT2926-5AB01
3RT2926-5AD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
48
110
---
---
B
B
3RT2926-5AH01
3RT2926-5AF01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
230
400
---
---
B
B
3RT2926-5AP01
3RT2926-5AV01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
24
42
---
B
B
3RT2926-5AC21
3RT2926-5AD21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
48
110
---
B
B
3RT2926-5AH21
3RT2926-5AG21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
220
230
---
B
B
3RT2926-5AN21
3RT2926-5AL21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
--
24
3RT2926-5AC11
1 unit
41B
110
220
---
120
240
B
B
3RT2926-5AK61
3RT2926-5AP61
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
---
100
200
110
220
B
B
3RT2926-5AG61
3RT2926-5AN61
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
400
440
3RT2926-5AR61
1 unit
41B
Solenoid coils AC operation

S0
S0
3RT2023,
3RT2024,
3RT2025
3RT2026,
3RT2027,
3RT2028
3RT2325,
3RT2326,
3RT2327
3RT2526
Note:
Contactors with AC and DC coils have different depths.
Coils can only be exchanged with AC contactors and this is only
possible with AC coils.
3/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Standards
Note:
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
Auxiliary contact complement according to SUVA: Contactors

with permanently mounted auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC
are available for safety applications according to SUVA.
The 3RT1 contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are
finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Surge suppression
Connection methods
The 3RT1 contactors are available with screw terminals
(box terminals) or spring-type terminals.
The size S3 contactors have removable box terminals for the
main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring
terminal lugs or busbars.
Contact reliability
If voltages 110 V and currents 100 mA are to be switched,
the auxiliary contacts of the 3RT1 contactor or 3RH11 contactor
relay should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact
reliability.
These auxiliary contacts are particularly suitable for solid-state
circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage 17 V.
Short-circuit protection of the contactors
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relay see
"Technical specifications", pages 3/71 and 3/76. For short-circuit
protection of contactors with overload relay, see Configuration
Manual "Configuring SIRIUS"
To assemble fuseless motor feeders, you must select combinations of motor starter protector/circuit breaker and contactor as
explained in "SIRIUS 3RA1 Load Feeders" (see Chapter 8 "Load
Feeders and Motor Starters").
Motor protection
3RU11 thermal overload relays or 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state
overload relays can be fitted to the 3RT1 contactors for
protection against overload. The overload relays must be
ordered separately.
The quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor
shaft (according to the nameplate).
Surge suppression
3RT1 contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors,
diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode
for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil.
Note:
Sizes S00 and S0, up to 11 kW
For size S2 and S3 contactors, varistors and RC elements can

be snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. Diode assemblies are available in 2 different versions on
account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can
be connected either only at the bottom (assembly with motor
starter protector/circuit breaker) or only at the top (assembly with
overload relay).
The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is
specified by coding.
Exceptions:
3RT1926-1T.00 and 3RT1936-1T.00,
in this case the plug-in direction is marked with "+" and "-".
Sizes S6 to S12, > 45 to 250 kW
3RT10, contactors for switching motors,
3RT12, vacuum contactors for switching motors,
3RT14, contactors for AC-1 applications (see Chapter 4
"Contactors for Special Applications").
Operating mechanism types
Two types of solenoid operation are available:
Conventional operating mechanisms
Solid-state operating mechanism
(with two performance levels)
The contactors can be operated with an AC operating
mechanism (50 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC.
Withdrawable coils
For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced,
the solenoid coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any
other coil of the same size.
Contactor sizes S6 to S12 are supplied with mounted auxiliary
switch blocks.
For detailed information about the fitting of auxiliary switches see
Accessories, page 3/96.
3RT10 and 3RT14 contactors:
Auxiliary contacts mounted laterally and on front
3RT12 vacuum contactors:
Auxiliary contacts mounted laterally
Contactors with conventional operating mechanism
Version 3RT1. . .-.A:
For 3RT1 devices in these sizes see Catalog IC 10 AO.
The solenoid coil is switched directly on and off with the control
supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
Sizes S2 and S3, up to 45 kW
Multi-voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:

The basic units of sizes S2 and S3 are delivered only with the
main contacts and can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks.
For sizes S2 and S3, complete units with mounted auxiliary
switch block 2 NO + 2 NC are available (terminal designation
according to EN 50012); the auxiliary switch block can be
removed. For more information see Accessories, page 3/96.
Only one coil covers several close-lying control supply voltages

which are used worldwide, e.g. 110115120127 V AC/DC or
220230240 V AC/DC. Allowance is made in addition for an
operating range of 0.8 times the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the
upper (Us max) rated control supply voltage within which the
contactor switches reliably and no thermal overload occurs.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/65
Overview
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW

The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism conform to
the requirements for operation in industrial plants:
- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kV
- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kV
- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kV
- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m
Emitted interference
- Limit value class A according to EN 55011
Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT)

Main contactor contacts are working parts which therefore must
be replaced in good time when the end of their service life has
been reached. The degree of contact erosion and thus the electrical endurance (= number of operating cycles) depends on the
loading, utilization category, operating mode, etc. Up to now,
routine checks or visual inspections by the maintenance personnel were needed in order to gain an insight into the state of the
main contacts.
The remaining lifetime indication function now takes over this
task. It does not count the number of operating cycles which
does not provide information about contact erosion but instead
electronically identifies, evaluates and stores the actual progress of erosion of each one of the three main contacts, and outputs a warning when specified limits are reached. The stored
data are not lost even if the control supply voltage for A1/A2 fails.
After replacement of the main contacts, measurement of the
remaining lifetime must be reset using the "RESET" button (hold
down RESET button for about 2 s using a pen or similar tool).
60 %
40 %
20 %
green
RLT
RLT
RLT
RLT
green
60 %
60 %
60 %
60 %
orange
40 %
40 %
40 %
40 %
red
20 %
20 %
20 %
20 %
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Early warning to replace contacts

Optimum utilization of contact material
Visual inspection of the condition of contacts no longer
necessary
Reduction of ongoing operating costs
Optimum planning of maintenance measures
Avoidance of unforeseen plant downtimes
3RT1. . .-.N version: for 24 V DC PLC output
2 control options:
7 Control without a coupling link directly through a
24 V DC/ 30 mA PLC output (IEC 61131-2). Connection by
means of 2-pole plug-in connection. The screwless springtype connection is part of the scope of supply. The control
supply voltage which supplies the solenoid operating
mechanism must be connected to A1/A2.
L1/L+
N/L-
PLC output
24 V DC/30 mA
24 V DC
PLC
OFF ON
Slide switch, must be in

position PLC "ON"
2 Plug-in connection, 2-pole

3 Shutdown in an emergency
(EMERGENCY-STOP) optional
A1 A2
Note:
In connection with converters, the control cables must be routed
separately from the load cables to the converter.
new
NSB0_01150a
LED
displays
NSB0_01143e
The solenoid coil is supplied selectively with the power required

for reliable switching and holding by upstream control
electronics.
Wide voltage range for the control supply voltage Us:
Compared with the conventional operating mechanism, the
solid-state operating mechanism covers an even broader
range of control supply voltages used worldwide within one
coil version. For example, the coil for 200 to 277 V AC/DC
(Us min to Us max) covers the voltages 200-208-220-230-240254-277 V used worldwide.
Extended operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us:
The wide range for the rated control supply voltage and the
additionally allowed coil operating range of 0.8 x Us min to
1.1 x Us max results in an extended coil operating range of at
least 0.7 to 1.25 x Us, within which the contactors will operate
reliably, for the most common control supply voltages of 24,
110 and 230 V.
Bridging temporary voltage dips:
Control voltage failures dipping to 0 V (at A1/A2) are bridged
for up to approx. 25 ms to avoid unintentional tripping.
Defined ON and OFF thresholds:
For voltages above 0.8 x Us min the electronics will reliably
switch the contactor ON, and for voltages below the value
0.5 x Us min it is reliably switched OFF. The hysteresis in the
switching thresholds prevents the main contacts from chattering as well as increased wear or welding when operated in
weak, unstable networks. This also prevents thermal overloading of the contactor coil if the voltage applied is too low
(contactor does not close properly and is continuously
operated with overexcitation).
Low control power consumption when closing and in the
closed state.
Advantages:
Additional visual display of various levels of erosion by means
of LEDs on the laterally mounted solid-state module when
remaining lifetime is 60 % (green), 40 % (orange) and 20 %
(red).
Note:
Before start-up, the slide switch for PLC operation must be
moved to the "PLC ON" position (setting ex works: "PLC OFF").
7 Conventional control by applying the control supply voltage at
A1/A2 through a switching contact.
L1/L+
N/L2
Slide switch, must be in

position PLC "OFF"
Shutdown in an emergency
A1 A2
24 V DC
1
PLC
OFF ON
NSB0_01144e
Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism
Note:
The slide switch must be in the "PLC OFF" position
(= setting ex works).
3/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
2 control options:
3RT1. . .-.P version: for 24 V DC PLC output or

PLC relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT)
7 Contactor control without a coupling link directly through a

24 V DC/ 30 mA PLC output (IEC 61131-2) by way of terminals IN+/IN-.
A1
50-60 Hz
DC
L1/L+
N/L-
A2
3
Contactor ON
ON
RLT
60 %
40 %
20 %
Reset
H1
H2
A1 A2
Displays for RLT:

LED green
LED green
LED orange
LED red
RLT Reset
R1
R2
IN
IN
Solid-state module of
3RT1...-.P contactor
Plug-in connection, 7-pole
S1 Changeover switch from automatic control using PLC semiconductor output to local control
S2
S1
H1
H2
S1
-.PP3.
200-277 V
Signal for remaining

S2 Local control possibility
lifetime 20 %
PLC output
3 Shutdown in an emergency
24 V DC/30 mA
300 V
AC/DC
R1
R2
IN
RLT
NSB0_01146f
Plug-in
connection
7-pole
3RT105/3RT145
NSB0_01145b
24 V
DC
IN
To supply the solenoid and the remaining lifetime indicator with

power, the control supply voltage Us must be connected to
terminals A1/A2 of the laterally mounted electronic module. The
control inputs of the contactor are connected to a 7-pole plug-in
connection; the screwless spring-type connection is part of the
scope of supply.
The "Remaining Lifetime RLT" status signal is available at
terminals R1/R2 through a floating relay contact (hard goldplated, enclosed) and can be input to SIMOCODE, PLC or
other devices for processing, for example.
Permissible current-carrying capacity of the R1/R2 relay
output:
- Ie/AC-15/24 to 230 V: 3 A
- Ie/DC-13/24 V: 1 A
LED displays
The following states are indicated by means of LEDs on the
laterally mounted solid-state module:
- Contactor ON (energized state): green LED ("ON")
- Indication of remaining lifetime
Possibility of switching from automatic control to local control by

way of terminals H1/H2, i.e. automatic control through PLC or
SIMOCODE/PROFIBUS DP can be deactivated e.g. at start-up
or in the event of a fault and the contactor can be controlled
manually.
7 Contactor control through relay outputs at connections H1/H2,
e.g. by
- PLC or
- SIMOCODE
L1/L+
N/LPROFIBUS DP
e. g.
SIMOCODE
PLC
other
3
S1
A1 A2
H1
H2
S2
R1
R2
IN
IN
Solid-state module of
3RT1...-.P contactor
Plug-in connection, 7-pole
S1 Changeover switch from

automatic control e.g. using
SIMOCODE or PLC relay output
Signal for remaining
to local control
lifetime 20 %
S2 Local control possibility
3
NSB0_01147e
Shutdown in an emergency
Contact loading: Us/approx. 5 mA

When operated through SIMOCODE, a communication link to
PROFIBUS DP is also provided.
Article No. scheme


@@@
SIRIUS power contactors
3RT
1st generation
1
@
Device type (e.g. 0 = 3-pole motor contactor, 3 = 4-pole AC-1 contactor)
Size of the contactor (3 = S2, 4 = S3, 5 = S6, etc.)
Power dependent on size (e.g. 45 = 37 kW)
Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e.g. A = AC standard / without)

Rated control supply voltage (e.g. P0 = 230 V, 50 Hz)
Auxiliary switches (e.g. 0 = without auxiliary switches)

Special version
Example
13th 14th 15th 16th
3RT

article numbers.
catalog and in the Industry Mall.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/67
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
3RT1
Size
S2 to S12
690
For laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks
500

10
Up to 230 V
380 V
400 V
500 V
660 V2)
690 V2)
A
A
A
A
A
3
3
2
1
1
24 V
60 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
A
10
6
3
2
220 V
440 V
600 V2)
A
A
A
1
0.3
0.15
24 V
60 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
A
101)
2
1
0.9
220 V
440 V
600 V2)
A
A
A
0.3
0.14
0.1
AC load
DC load

Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA
According to IEC 60947-5-4/EN 60947-5-4
Frequency of contact faults < 10-8

i.e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
Contact endurance of the auxiliary contacts

Integrated auxiliary contacts on 3RT10
3RH1911, 3RH1921 auxiliary switch blocks1)
30
NSB0_00472
Basic unit
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1

The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the
auxiliary switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S12
10
5
4
3
2
1
Basic unit
with aux.
block
snapped on
DC-13
110 V
DC-13
220 V
AC-15/AC-14
0,5
DC-13
24 V
0,1
0,05
1)
0,01
0,01
0,03 0,05 0,1
0,3 0,5
I e -DC-13 I e -DC-13
220 V
110 V
1)
For mountable auxiliary switch blocks size S00 and laterally mountable
auxiliary switch blocks size S0 to S12: DC-13 max. 6 A.
2) For laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks, only the rated operational
voltages up to 500 V apply.
3/68
Siemens IC 10 2014
5 6 7 10
(A)
I e -AC-15 I e -DC-13
< 230 V 24 V
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
3RT1
Size
S2 and S3
Contact endurance of the main contacts

Size S2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
8
6
4
2
6
10
8
6
4
2
5
10
8
6
4
2
10
A
X = -------------------------------------------------------C A
1 + ---------- ---- 1
100 B
NSB0_00475a
20
30 40 50 60 80 100 a(A) 200 300 400

32 40 50
e(A)
Prated (kW)
400 V
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
Size S3
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
400 V
690 V
Operating cycles at
500 V

in operating cycles
in operating cycles
in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching
operations
Contactor type 3RT10 34 3RT10 35 3RT10 36

(15 kW) (18.5 kW) (22 kW)
15 18.5 22
230 V
690 V
10
6
8
6
4
4
2
2
6
10
6
8 10
6
8
4
6
4
2
2
5
10
5
8 10
6
8
4 6
4
2
2
4
10
4
8 10
10
500 V
Operating cycles at
230 V
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance

of the contactors when switching resistive and inductive
AC loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the
operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization
category AC-4 (breaking six times the rated operational
current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at
least 200 000 operating cycles.
If a shorter contact endurance is sufficient, the rated
operational current Ie/AC-4 can be increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal
switching (breaking the rated operational current
according to utilization category AC-3) in combination
with intermittent inching (breaking several times the
rated operational current according to utilization category AC-4), the contact endurance can be calculated
8
6
4
2
6
10
8
6
4
2
5
10
8
6
4
2
10
Contactor type 3RT10 44

(30 kW)
10
6
8
6
4
4
2
2
6
10
8 106
6
8
4
6
4
2
2
5
10
5
8 10
6
8
4 6
4
2
2
4
10
4
8 10
10
3RT10 45 3RT10 46
(37 kW)
(45 kW)
NSB0_00476a
20
30 40 50 60 80 100
65 80 95
30 37 45
(A) 200 300 400
a
e
600
(A)
Prated (kW)
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/69
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
3RT1
Size
S6 to S12

Sizes S6 to S12
10
8
6
4
2
500 V
8
6
4
2
6
400 V
690 V
230 V
Operating cycles at
6
4
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
Contactor type
7
3RT10 54 3RT10 55 3RT10 56 3RT10 64 3RT10 65 3RT10 66 3RT10 75 3RT10 76

(55 kW) (75 kW) (90 kW) (110 kW) (132 kW) (160 kW) (200 kW) (250 kW)
NSB0_01141
6
10
10
10 8
8
8 6
6
6 4
4
4
2
2
2
5
2
5 10
5
8 10
5 10
10 8
6
8
8 6
4
6
6 4
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
4 10
4
10
8 10
10
6
20
30 40 50 60 80 100
55
200 300 400 600 800 1000 a(A) 2000 3000

90 132 200
75 110 160 250
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
3RT12 vacuum contactors Sizes S10 and S12

400 V
690 V
500 V
230 V
Operating cycles at
107
8
6
4
Contactor 3RT1264 3RT1265 3RT1266 3RT1275 3RT1276

type
(110 kW) (132 kW) (160 kW) (200 kW) (250 kW)
107 8
6
8 6
4
6 4
4
2
2
2
6
2
6 10
8 106
6 10
10 8
6
8
8 6
4
6
6 4
4
4
2
2
2
5
2
5 10
8 105
5 10
10 8
6
8
8 6
4
6
6 4
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
4 10
4
10
8 10
40 50 60 80 100
NSB0_01142
200 300 400 600 800 1000 (A) 2000 3000

110 160 250
132 200
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
3/70
Siemens IC 10 2014
Prated (kW)
Prated (kW)
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
3RT1034
Size
S2
S3
mm
55 x 112 x 110
70 x 146 x 134
mm
55 x 112 x 159
70 x 146 x 183
Dimensions (W x H x D), DC operation
55 x 112 x 125
70 x 146 x 147
55 x 112 x 174
70 x 146 x 196
Dimensions (W x H x D), AC operation
Type
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
360
22,5 22,5
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical

mounting surface.
NSB0_00478c
General data
For DC operation and up to 22.5 inclination in front, the coil

operating range is reduced to 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
NSB0_00477a
Special version required.

Basic units
Basic units with snap-on auxiliary switch

block
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch

blocks

1)
690
1 000
kV
Protective separation between the coil and

the main contacts acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
400
690
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact
that cannot be closed simultaneously with
an NO main contact.
With removable auxiliary switch block
With non-removable auxiliary switch

block
Acc. to Swiss regulations (SUVA) on request

During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
IP20
Connection range
IP00/open (where applicable, use additional terminal covers)
Finger-safe only for vertical contact from the front
Shock resistance (AC and DC operation)

Rectangular pulse
g/ms
10/5 and 5/10
6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse
g/ms
15/5 and 8/10
10.6/5 and 6.2/10
2)
Short-circuit protection for contactors

without overload relays
Main circuit
Type of coordination "1"
125
125
160
250
250
63
63
80
125
160
Weld-free3)
16
16
50
63
100
with fuse links of operational class gG:

with short-circuit current Ik = 1 kA acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
10
with miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic

10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
See Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS"4)
See Chapter 8 "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the Control Cabinet"
"SIRIUS 3RA1 Load Feeders"
1)

3) Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
4)
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/71
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1034
S2
3RT1035
S2
3RT1036
S2
3RT1044
S3
3RT1045
S3
Control
AC/DC1)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

104
0.78
9.7
0.42
145
0.79
12.5
0.36
218
0.61
21
0.26
270
0.68
22
0.27
127/113
0.73/0.69
11.3/9.5
0.41/0.42
170/155
0.76/0.72
15/11.8
0.35/0.38
247/211
0.62/0.57
25/18
0.27/0.3
298/274
0.7/0.62
27/20
0.29/0.31
108
0.76
9.6
0.42
150
0.77
12.5
0.35
218
0.61
21
0.26
270
0.68
22
0.27
120
0.7
10.1
0.42
166
0.71
12.6
0.37
232
0.55
20
0.28
300
0.52
21
0.29
13.3
13.3
15
15
AC operation
mA
<18 mA x (230 V/Us)
<25 mA x (230 V/Us)
DC operation
mA
<12 mA x
(230 V/Us)
<38 mA x
(24 V/Us)
<38 mA x (24 V/Us)
<43 mA x (24 V/Us)
ms
ms
11 ... 30
7 ... 10
10 ... 24
7 ... 10
16 ... 57
10 ... 19
17 ... 90
10 ... 25
ms
ms
50 ... 95
20 ... 30
60 ... 100
20 ... 25
90 ... 230
14 ... 20
90 ... 230
14 ... 20
ms
10
10
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
ms
ms
13 ... 22
7 ... 10
12 ... 20
7 ... 10
18 ... 34
11 ... 18
18 ... 30
11 ... 23
ms
ms
60 ... 75
20 ... 30
70 ... 85
20 ... 25
100 ... 120

16 ... 20
100 ... 120

16 ... 20
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA
DC operation
- Closing = Closed
(with 0 signal)

(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
1)
For DC operation and up to 22.5 inclination in front, the coil operating

range is reduced to 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us (see also permissible mounting
position, page 3/71).
2) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).
3/72
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RT1046
S3
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1034
S2
3RT1035
S2
3RT1036
S2
3RT1044
S3
3RT1045
S3
3RT1046
S3
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
Utilization category AC-1
- At 40 C up to 690 V
- At 40 C up to 1 000 V
A
A
50
--
60
--
60
--
100
50
120
60
120
70
- At 60 C up to 690 V
- At 60 C up to 1 000 V
A
A
45
--
55
--
55
--
90
40
100
50
100
60
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
18
31
39
54
--
22
38
46
66
--
22
38
46
66
--
34
59
74
102
66
38
66
82
114
82
38
66
82
114
98
mm2
mm2
16
10
16
16
16
16
35
35
50
35
50
35
A
A
A
32
20
--
40
24
--
50
24
--
65
47
25
80
58
30
95
58
30
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
7.5
15
18.5
18.5
--
11
18.5
22
22
--
15
22
30
22
--
18.5
30
37
45
30
22
37
45
55
37
22
45
55
55
37
Thermal load capacity, 10 s current2)
320
400
400
600
760
760
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3
1.8
2.6
4.6
7.7
10.8
29
35
41
55
66
80
kW
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
A
A
A
15.6
15.6
--
18.5
18.5
--
24
24
--
28
28
20
34
34
23
42
42
23
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
4.7
8.2
9.8
13
--
5.4
9.5
11.8
15.5
--
7.3
12.6
15.8
21.8
--
8.7
15.1
18.4
25.4
22
10.4
17.9
22.4
30.9
30
12
22
27
38
30
Rated power for AC loads1)

with p.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C)
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V
Minimum conductor cross-section for loads with Ie

- At 40 C
- At 60 C
- Up to 500 V
- At 690 V
- At 1 000 V
at 50 and 60 Hz
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V

- Up to 400 V
- At 400 V
- Up to 400 V
- Up to 690 V
- Up to 1 000 V
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V
1)

account).
2)
Rated values for various start-up conditions see Chapter 7, "Protection
Equipment" "Overload Relays".
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/73
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1034
S2
3RT1035
S2
3RT1036
S2
3RT1044
S3
3RT1045
S3
3RT1046
S3
45
20
4.5
55
23
4.5
55
23
4.5
90
23
4.5
100
60
9
100
60
9
2
0.4
0.25
2
0.4
0.25
2
0.4
0.25
1
0.4
0.26
2
0.6
0.4
2
0.6
0.4
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
45
45
45
55
45
45
55
45
45
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
5
1
0.8
5
1
0.8
5
1
0.8
5
1
0.8
10
1.8
1
10
1.8
1
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
45
45
45
55
55
55
55
55
55
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
45
2.9
1.4
45
2.9
1.4
45
2.9
1.4
70
2.9
1.4
80
1.8
1
80
4.5
2.6
35
6
2.5
35
6
2.5
35
6
2.5
40
6
2.5
40
6.5
2.5
40
6.5
2.5
2
0.1
0.06
2
0.1
0.06
2
0.1
0.06
1
0.15
0.06
1
0.15
0.06
1
0.15
0.06
45
45
25
55
45
25
55
45
25
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
5
0.27
0.16
5
0.27
0.16
5
0.27
0.16
7
0.42
0.16
7
0.42
0.16
7
0.42
0.16
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
45
45
45
55
55
55
55
55
55
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
25
0.6
0.6
25
0.6
0.6
25
0.6
0.6
35
0.8
0.35
35
0.8
0.35
35
0.8
0.35
900
400
1000
300
900
350
850
250
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A

- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
Switching frequency
No-load switching frequency AC
h-1
5 000
5 000
No-load switching frequency DC
h-1
1 500
1 000
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
1 200
750
1 000
250
h-1
15

-
Ie/AC-1
Ie/AC-2
Ie/AC-3
Ie/AC-4
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V

Mean value
1)
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on

the operational current I' and operational voltage U':
z = z (Ie/I) (400 V/U)1.5 1/h
3/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
1 200
600
1 000
300
1 000
400
800
300
1 000
400
1 000
300
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT103.
S2
3RT104.
S3
Main conductors
Screw terminals
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Nm
lb.in
3 ... 4.5
27 ... 40
4 ... 6
36 ... 53
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 35
0.75 ... 16
2.5 ... 35
10 ... 50
10 ... 70
2.5 ... 16
AWG
18 ... 2
10 ... 2/0
Ribbon cable conductors

(Number x Width x Thickness)
mm
6 x 9 x 0.8
6 x 9 x 0.8
mm
mm
mm
mm
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 25
0.75 ... 35
0.75 ... 16
2.5 ... 50
10 ... 50
10 ... 70
2.5 ... 16
AWG
18 ... 2
10 ... 2/0

mm
6 x 9 x 0.8
6 x 9 x 0.8
mm
mm
mm
mm
2 x (0.75 ... 16)

2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2 x (0.75 ... 25)
2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2 x (2.5 ... 35)

2 x (10 ... 35)
2 x (10 ... 50)
2 x (2.5 ... 16)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 2)
2 x (10 ... 1/0)

mm
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
mm
--
10
Finely stranded with cable lug

Stranded with cable lug
mm
mm
---
10 ... 503)
10 ... 703)
AWG
--
7 ... 1/0
--
M6
Box terminals
NSB0_00479
Front clamping point connected

Stranded
Solid
NSB0_00480
Rear clamping point connected

Stranded
Solid
NSB0_00481
Both clamping points connected

Stranded
Solid
Busbar connection (bored copper bars)1)

Connecting bar (max. width)
Cable lug connection (without box terminals)2)
Terminal screws
Solid
mm
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4); max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)4); 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12
Nm
lb.in
M3
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Operating devices
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
6)
Solid
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5

mm
mm
mm
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
2 x (24 ... 14)
If bars larger than 12 mm x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT19 46-4EA1

terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2,
the 3RT19 46-4EA1 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase
clearance.
Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234, max. 20 mm wide.
An "insulation stop" must be used for conductor cross-sections 1 mm;
see "Accessories" on page 3/111.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/75
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
3RT1054
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Size
'
3RT1055,
3RT1056
3RT1064,
3RT1065,
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1076
S6
S10
S12
mm
120 x 172 x 170
145 x 210 x 202
160 x 214 x 225
mm
120 x 172 x 217
145 x 210 x 251
160 x 214 x 271
22,5 22,5
90

mounting surface.
90
NSB0_00649a
General data

1)
1 000
kV
Protective separation between the coil and the main

contacts acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
690
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be
closed simultaneously with an NO main contact.
During operation
-25 ... +60
During operation, with AS-Interface interface
-25 ... +55
During storage
-55 ... +80
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
g/ms
8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse
g/ms
13.4/5 and 6.5/10
2)
3)
Main circuit
355
355
500
630
630
315
315
400
500
500
Weld-free4)
80
160
250
250
315

10

10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) see page 3/66.
3/76
Siemens IC 10 2014
See Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS"5)
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT105.
S6
3RT106.
S10
3RT107.
S12
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC)
0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
Power consumption of the solenoid operation

(when coil is cold and rated range Us min ... Us max)
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
250/0.9
300/0.9
4.8/0.8
5.8/0.8
490/0.9
590/0.9
5.6/0.9
6.7/0.9
700/0.9
830/0.9
7.6/0.9
9.2/0.9
W
W
W
W
300
360
4.3
5.2
540
650
6.1
7.4
770
920
8.5
10
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
190/0.8
280/0.8
3.5/0.5
4.4/0.4
400/0.8
530/0.8
4/0.5
5/0.4
560/0.8
750/0.8
5.4/0.8
7/0.8
W
W
W
W
250
320
2.3
2.8
440
580
3.2
3.8
600
800
4
5
AC operation
DC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max

AC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
DC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
PLC control input acc. to IEC 61131-2
Type 2
Rated voltage
V DC
24
Operating range
V DC
17 ... 30
Power consumption
mA
30
ms
ms
20 ... 95
40 ... 60
30 ... 95
40 ... 80
45 ... 100
60 ... 100
ms
ms
25 ... 50
40 ... 60
35 ... 50
50 ... 80
50 ... 70
70 ... 100
ms
ms
95 ... 135
80 ... 90
105 ... 145

80 ... 100
120 ... 150

80 ... 100
ms
ms
100 ... 120

80 ... 90
110 ... 130

80 ... 100
125 ... 150

80 ... 100
ms
ms
35 ... 75
80 ... 90
45 ... 80
80 ... 100
60 ... 90
80 ... 100
ms
ms
40 ... 60
80 ... 90
50 ... 65
80 ... 100
65 ... 80
80 ... 100
ms
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
Operating times
For 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
For Us min ... Us max
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via A1/A2
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via PLC input
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/77
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1054
S6
3RT1055
S6
3RT1056
S6
3RT1064
S10
3RT1065
S10
3RT1066
S10
3RT1075
S12
3RT1076
S12
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
A
160
185
215
275
330
430
610
- At 60 C up to 690 V
- At 60 C up to 1 000 V
A
A
140
80
160
90
185
100
250
100
300
150
400
200
550
200
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
53
92
115
159
131
60
105
131
181
148
70
121
152
210
165
94
164
205
283
164
113
197
246
340
246
151
263
329
454
329
208
362
452
624
329
mm2
mm2
70
50
95
70
95
95
150
120
185
185
2 x 150
240
2 x 185
2 x 185
A
A
A
115
115
53
150
150
65
185
170
65
225
225
68
265
265
95
300
280
95
400
400
180
500
450
180
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
37
64
81
113
75
50
84
105
146
90
61
104
132
167
90
73
128
160
223
90
85
151
189
265
132
97
171
215
280
132
132
231
291
400
250
164
291
363
453
250
Thermal load capacity, 10 s current2)
1 100
1 300
1 480
1 800
2 400
2 400
3 200
4 000
Power loss per main conducting path

at Ie/AC-3/500 V
13
17
18
22
35
55
97
132
160
195
230
280
350
430
kW
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
A
A
A
54
48
34
68
57
38
81
65
42
96
85
42
117
105
57
125
115
57
150
135
80
175
150
80
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
16
29
37
48
49
20
38
47
55
55
25
45
57
65
60
30
54
67
82
59
37
66
82
102
80
40
71
87
112
80
48
85
105
133
113
56
98
123
148
113
- At 40 C up to 690 V

with p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V

- At 40 C
- At 60 C
- Up to 500 V
- At 690 V
- At 1 000 V
at 50 and 60 Hz
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V

- Up to 400 V
- At 400 V
- Up to 500 V
- Up to 690 V
- Up to 1 000 V
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V
1)

account).
2)
3/78
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1054
S6
3RT1055
S6
3RT1056
S6
3RT1064
S10
3RT1065
S10
3RT1066
S10
3RT1075
S12
3RT1076
S12
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
18
200
200
18
300
300
33
400
330
33
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
3.4
0.8
0.5
3.4
0.8
0.5
3.8
0.9
0.6
3.8
0.9
0.6
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
20
3.2
1.6
20
3.2
1.6
300
4
2
400
4
2
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
160
11.5
4
200
11.5
4
300
11
5.2
400
11
5.2
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
7.5
2.5
200
7.5
2.5
300
11
3
400
11
3
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
0.6
0.17
0.12
0.6
0.17
0.12
0.6
0.18
0.125
0.6
0.18
0.125
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
160
1.4
0.75
200
1.4
0.75
300
1.4
0.75
400
1.4
0.75
750
250
500
130
800
300
700
130

- 1 conducting path
Switching frequency
h-1
2 000
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
800
400
1 000
130
h-1
60

-
Ie/AC-1
Ie/AC-2
Ie/AC-3
Ie/AC-4
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
At 400 V
800
300
750
130
750
250
500
130
700
200
500
130
500
170
420
130

Mean value
1)

z = z (Ie/I) (400 V/U)1.5 1/h
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/79
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT105.
S6
3RT106.
S10
3RT107.
S12
Main conductors
With mounted box terminals
Screw terminals
Type
3RT19 55-4G (55 kW)
3RT19 56-4G
3RT19 66-4G
Nm
lb.in
M10
(hexagon socket, A/F 4)
10 ... 12
90 ... 110
M10
10 ... 12
90 ... 110
M12
20 ... 22
180 ... 195
mm
mm
mm
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16... 120
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
70 ... 240
70 ... 240
95 ... 300
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
NSB0_00479

Stranded
AWG 6 ... 2/0
6 ... 250 kcmil
3/0 ... 600 kcmil

mm
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
mm
mm
mm
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16... 120
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
120 ... 185

120 ... 185
120 ... 240
NSB0_00480

Stranded
AWG 6 ... 2/0
6 ... 250 kcmil
250 ... 500 kcmil

mm
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

Stranded
mm
mm
mm
Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120

Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185

Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
Min. 2 x 70, max. 2 x 240
AWG Max. 2 x 1/0
Max. 2 x 3/0
Min. 2 x 2/0,
max. 2 x 500 kcmil

mm
Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
Max. 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
mm
17
25
Finely stranded with cable lug2)3)

Stranded with cable lug2)3)
mm2
mm2
16 ... 95
25 ... 120
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil
NSB0_00481
Both clamping points connected1)
Busbar connections
Cable lug connection (without box terminals)
Nm
lb.in
M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
10 ... 14
90 ... 124
Solid
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4); max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)
AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Nm
lb.in
M3 (Pozidriv size 2)
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
Operating
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
devices6)
Solid
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5

mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
2 x (24 ... 14)
Minimum cross-section 16 mm.

3RT105.: When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235, use 3RT1956-4EA1
terminal cover for conductor cross-sections of 95 mm and more to ensure
phase spacing.
3RT106. and 3RT107.: When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the
3RT1966-4EA1 terminal cover must be used for conductor cross-sections
of 240 mm and more as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of
185 mm and more to keep the phase clearance.
An "insulation stop" must be used for conductor cross-sections 1 mm;
see "Accessories" on page 3/111.
3/80
Siemens IC 10 2014
2/0 ... 500 kcmil

M10 x 30 (A/F 17)
14 ... 24
124 ... 210
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1034
S2
3RT1035
S2
3RT1036
S2
3RT1044
S3
3RT1045
S3
3RT1046
S3
s and u rated data

V AC
600
45
55
50
600
90
105
105
hp
hp
hp
hp
10
10
25
30
10
15
30
40
15
15
40
50
20
25
50
60
25
30
60
75
30
30
75
100
At 600 V (contactor or overload relay)
kA
10
10
10
CLASS RK5 fuse
125
150
200
250
300
350
125
150
200
250
300
400
A
kA
3RV103
32
65
40
65
50
65
3RV104
63
65
75
65
100
65
A
kA
3RV104
32
25
40
25
50
25
3RV104
63
30
75
30
75
30
hp
--
--
A
A
---
45
45
---
90
90
hp
hp
hp
hp
-----
10
15
25
25
-----
25
30
50
50

-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
Rated power for three-phase motors at 60 Hz

- At 480 V
- At 600 V
Type
Type
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size
- Open
- Enclosed
-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
Overload relays
Setting range
1)
Type
A
3RU113
3RU114
5.5 ... 50
18 ... 100
S2 to S12
S2 to S12
Screw terminals and

spring-type terminals
Screw terminals and

Snap-on
(1- and 4-pole)
Laterally mountable
600
600
A 600, Q 600
A 300, Q 300
10
10
UL guide "Industrial Control Panels for North America",
www.siemens.com/sirius/ul-download.
Size

Rated voltage
V AC
Switching capacity
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/81
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1054
S6
3RT1055
S6
3RT1056
S6
3RT1064
S10
3RT1065
S10
3RT1066
S10
s and u rated data

V AC
600
140
195
195
600
250
330
330
hp
hp
hp
hp
40
50
100
125
50
60
125
150
60
75
150
200
60
75
150
200
75
100
200
250
100
125
250
300
At 600 V
kA
10
10
10
10
18
18
CLASS RK5/L fuse
450
500
500
700
800
800
350
450
500
500
700
800
hp
--
--
--
--
A
A
---
150
135
---
---
---
300
270
hp
hp
hp
hp
-----
40
50
100
100
-----
-----
-----
75
100
200
200


-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size
- Open
- Enclosed
-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
Overload relays
Type
Type
Size
3RB2056
3RB2066
3RT1075
S12
3RT1076
S12
s and u rated data

V AC
600
400
540
hp
hp
hp
hp
125
150
300
400
150
200
400
500
At 600 V
kA
18
30
CLASS RK5/L fuse
1000
1200
900
900
hp
--
A
A
---
600
540
hp
hp
hp
hp
-----
150
200
400
400

-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size
- Open
- Enclosed
-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
Overload relays
1)
Type
UL guide "Industrial Control Panels for North America",
www.siemens.com/sirius/ul-download.
3/82
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RB2066
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW

AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT103.-1A.00
3RT103.-3A.00
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
3RT103.-1A.04
DT Screw terminals
Rated control
supply voltage
Us at 50 Hz
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
500 V
400 V
690 V
kW
Ident. No.
Version
NO
NC
Article No.
for coil terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC

Size S2
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
32
15
50
--
--
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1034-1AB00
3RT1034-1AF00
3RT1034-1AP00
B
B
}
3RT1034-3AB00
3RT1034-3AF00
3RT1034-3AP00
40
18.5
60
--
--
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1035-1AB00
3RT1035-1AF00
3RT1035-1AP00
B
B
}
3RT1035-3AB00
3RT1035-3AF00
3RT1035-3AP00
50
22
60
--
--
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1036-1AB00
3RT1036-1AF00
3RT1036-1AP00
B
B
}
3RT1036-3AB00
3RT1036-3AF00
3RT1036-3AP00

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
32
15
50
22
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1034-1AB04
3RT1034-1AF04
3RT1034-1AP04
----
40
18.5
60
22
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1035-1AB04
3RT1035-1AF04
3RT1035-1AP04
----
50
22
60
22
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1036-1AB04
3RT1036-1AF04
3RT1036-1AP04
----

for safety applications according to SUVA
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
32
15
50
22
230
3RT1034-1AP04-3MA0
--
40
18.5
60
22
230
3RT1035-1AP04-3MA0
--
50
22
60
22
230
3RT1036-1AP04-3MA0
--

For multi-unit packing and reusable packaging
see Chapter 16, "Appendix" "Ordering Notes".

1)
2)
Article No. for the auxiliary switch block (removable): 3RH1921-1HA22
(2 NO + 2 NC according to EN 50012; Ident. No. 22).
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/83
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT104.-1A.00
3RT104.-3A.00
Rated data
3RT104.-1A.04
DT Screw terminals
Rated control
supply voltage
Us at 50 Hz
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
500 V
400 V
690 V
kW
Ident. No.
Version
Article No.
NO
NC
V AC
for coil terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
For screw and snap-on mounting onto

TH 35 and TH 75 standard mounting rail
Size S3
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
65
30
100
--
--
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1044-1AB00
3RT1044-1AF00
3RT1044-1AP00
B
B
}
3RT1044-3AB00
3RT1044-3AF00
3RT1044-3AP00
80
37
120
--
--
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1045-1AB00
3RT1045-1AF00
3RT1045-1AP00
B
B
}
3RT1045-3AB00
3RT1045-3AF00
3RT1045-3AP00
95
45
120
--
--
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1046-1AB00
3RT1046-1AF00
3RT1046-1AP00
B
B
}
3RT1046-3AB00
3RT1046-3AF00
3RT1046-3AP00

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
65
30
100
22
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RT1044-1AB04
3RT1044-1AF04
3RT1044-1AP04
----
80
37
120
22
24
110
230
B
}
}
3RT1045-1AB04
3RT1045-1AF04
3RT1045-1AP04
----
95
45
120
22
24
110
230
B
}
}
3RT1046-1AB04
3RT1046-1AF04
3RT1046-1AP04
----

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
65
30
100
22
230
3RT1044-1AP04-3MA0
--
80
37
120
22
230
3RT1045-1AP04-3MA0
--
95
45
120
22
230
3RT1046-1AP04-3MA0
--

1)
2) Article No. for the auxiliary switch block (removable): 3RH1921-1HA22
3/84
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT103.-1B.40
3RT103.-3B.40
Rated data
3RT103.-1B.44
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
500 V
400 V
690 V
kW
Ident. No.
Version
NO
NC
Article No.
for coil terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S2
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
32
15
50
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT1034-1BB40
3RT1034-1BM40
}
B
3RT1034-3BB40
3RT1034-3BM40
40
18.5
60
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT1035-1BB40
3RT1035-1BM40
}
B
3RT1035-3BB40
3RT1035-3BM40
50
22
60
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT1036-1BB40
3RT1036-1BM40
}
B
3RT1036-3BB40
3RT1036-3BM40

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
32
15
50
22
24
220
}
B
3RT1034-1BB44
3RT1034-1BM44
---
40
18.5
60
22
24
220
}
B
3RT1035-1BB44
3RT1035-1BM44
---
50
22
60
22
24
220
}
B
3RT1036-1BB44
3RT1036-1BM44
---

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
32
15
50
22
24
3RT1034-1BB44-3MA0
--
40
18.5
60
22
24
3RT1035-1BB44-3MA0
--
50
22
60
22
24
3RT1036-1BB44-3MA0
--

For multi-unit packing and reusable packaging
see Chapter 16, "Appendix" "Ordering Notes".
1)
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/85
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT104.-1B.40
3RT104.-3B.40
Rated data
3RT104.-1B.44
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Rating1) of
three-phase
motors at
50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
up to
500 V
400 V
690 V
kW
Ident. No.
Version
Article No.
NO
NC
V DC
for coil terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
For screw and snap-on mounting onto

Size S3
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
65
30
100
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT1044-1BB40
3RT1044-1BM40
}
B
3RT1044-3BB40
3RT1044-3BM40
80
37
120
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT1045-1BB40
3RT1045-1BM40
}
B
3RT1045-3BB40
3RT1045-3BM40
95
45
120
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT1046-1BB40
3RT1046-1BM40
}
B
3RT1046-3BB40
3RT1046-3BM40

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
65
30
100
22
24
220
}
B
3RT1044-1BB44
3RT1044-1BM44
---
80
37
120
22
24
220
}
B
3RT1045-1BB44
3RT1045-1BM44
---
95
45
120
22
24
220
}
B
3RT1046-1BB44
3RT1046-1BM44
---

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
65
30
100
22
24
3RT1044-1BB44-3MA0
--
80
37
120
22
24
3RT1045-1BB44-3MA0
--
95
45
120
22
24
3RT1046-1BB44-3MA0
--

1)
2)
3/86
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW

Withdrawable coils with integrated coil switch (varistor)
Auxiliary and control conductors: Screw or spring-type terminals
Main conductors: Busbar connections, for 3RT1054 (55 kW) box terminals1)
3RT105.
Size
3RT106.
Rated data
3RT107.
Auxiliary
contacts,
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C lateral
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Ratings2) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
500 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Rated control
DT Article No.
supply voltage
Us
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Opera- Version
tional
current Ie
up to
NO
NC
V AC/DC

U
S6
S10
S12
S6
S10
S12
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
Screw terminals
115
37
55
75
110
160
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1054-1AF36
3RT1054-1AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
150
45
75
90
132
185
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1055-6AF36
3RT1055-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
185
55
90
110
160
215
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1056-6AF36
3RT1056-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
225
55
110
160
200
275
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1064-6AF36
3RT1064-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1065-6AF36
3RT1065-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1066-6AF36
3RT1066-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
430
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1075-6AF36
3RT1075-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
400
610
110 127
220 240
}
}
3RT1076-6AF36
3RT1076-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
Spring-type
terminals
for coil and auxiliary
switch terminals
115
37
55
75
110
160
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1054-3AF36
3RT1054-3AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
150
45
75
90
132
185
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1055-2AF36
3RT1055-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
185
55
90
110
160
215
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1056-2AF36
3RT1056-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
225
55
110
160
200
275
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1064-2AF36
3RT1064-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1065-2AF36
3RT1065-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1066-2AF36
3RT1066-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
430
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1075-2AF36
3RT1075-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
400
610
110 127
220 240
B
B
3RT1076-2AF36
3RT1076-2AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B


1)
Alternatively the 3RT1054-1 contactor (55 kW) can be supplied with

busbar connections instead of box terminals. Without additional price.
In the 8th position of the Article No., the "1" must be replaced with "6" for
screw terminals, e.g. 3RT1054-6A.36; for spring-type terminals, the "3"
must be replaced by "2", e.g. 3RT1054-2A.36.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/87
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW

Auxiliary and control conductors: Screw or spring-type terminals
3RT105.
Size
3RT106.
Rated data
3RT107.
Auxiliary
contacts,
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C lateral
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Ratings2) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
500 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Rated control
DT Article No.
supply voltage
Us
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Opera- Version
tional
current Ie
up to
NO
NC
V AC/DC
Solid-state operating mechanisms for 24 V DC PLC output

U
S6
S10
S12
S10
S12
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
Screw terminals
115
37
55
75
110
160
96 127
200 277
A
}
3RT1054-1NF36
3RT1054-1NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
150
45
75
90
132
185
96 127
200 277
A
}
3RT1055-6NF36
3RT1055-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
185
55
90
110
160
215
96 127
200 277
A
}
3RT1056-6NF36
3RT1056-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
225
55
110
160
200
275
96 127
200 277
A
A
3RT1064-6NF36
3RT1064-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
96 127
200 277
A
A
3RT1065-6NF36
3RT1065-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
A
3RT1066-6NF36
3RT1066-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
430
96 127
200 277
A
A
3RT1075-6NF36
3RT1075-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
400
610
96 127
200 277
A
A
3RT1076-6NF36
3RT1076-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S6
A1(+)
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
Spring-type
terminals
for coil and auxiliary
switch terminals
115
37
55
75
110
160
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1054-3NF36
3RT1054-3NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
150
45
75
90
132
185
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1055-2NF36
3RT1055-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
185
55
90
110
160
215
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1056-2NF36
3RT1056-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
225
55
110
160
200
275
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1064-2NF36
3RT1064-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1065-2NF36
3RT1065-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1066-2NF36
3RT1066-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
430
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1075-2NF36
3RT1075-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
400
610
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1076-2NF36
3RT1076-2NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B

3/88
Siemens IC 10 2014
1)

busbar connections instead of box terminals. Without additional price.
In the 8th position of the Article No., the "1" must be replaced with "6" for
screw terminals, e.g. 3RT1054-6A.36; for spring-type terminals, the "3"
must be replaced by "2", e.g. 3RT1054-2A.36.
2)
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW

Auxiliary and control conductors: Screw terminals
Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT)
3RT1056-6P. .
Size
Rated data
Auxiliary
contacts,
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C lateral
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
Operational
current Ie
up to
Ratings2) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
500 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
Opera- Version
tional
current Ie
up to
NO
Article No.
NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V AC/DC
Solid-state operating mechanisms with 24 V DC PLC relay output with RLT

A1(+)
A2()
S6
S10
S12
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
115
37
55
75
110
160
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1054-1PF35
3RT1054-1PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
150
45
75
90
132
185
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1055-6PF35
3RT1055-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
185
55
90
110
160
215
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1056-6PF35
3RT1056-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
225
55
110
160
200
275
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1064-6PF35
3RT1064-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1065-6PF35
3RT1065-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1066-6PF35
3RT1066-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
430
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1075-6PF35
3RT1075-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
400
610
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1076-6PF35
3RT1076-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B

1)

busbar connections instead of box terminals.
Without additional price. In the 8th position of the Article No., the "1" must
be replaced with "6", e.g. 3RT1054-6. .35.
2) Guide value for 4-pole standard motors at 50 Hz 400 V AC. The actual

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/89
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW
Options
Rated control supply voltages, possible on request (change of 10th and 11th digit of the Article No.)
voltage Us
Contactor type 3RT103,

3RT104
S3
3RT133,
3RT134,
3RT153
S2, S3
3RT1617,
3RT1627,
3RT1647
S00, S0, S3
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
--F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
--F0
P0
U0
V0
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
C2
--G2
N2
L2
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
-B4
D4
W4
E4
F4
G4
M4
P4
-B4
D4
W4
E4
F4
G4
M4
P4
-B4
D4
--F4
G4
M4
--
----------
Size S2, S3
3RT144
Sizes S2 and S3
AC operation
Solenoid coils for 50 Hz1)
24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
110 V AC
230 V AC
240 V AC
400 V AC
24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
230 V AC
50 Hz
60 Hz
110 V AC
220 V AC
120 V AC
240 V AC

50/60 Hz3)
60 Hz4)
100 V AC
200 V AC
400 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
440 V AC
DC operation
12 V DC
24 V DC
42 V DC
48 V DC
60 V DC
110 V DC
125 V DC
220 V DC
230 V DC
Examples
AC operating
mechanism
3RT1034-1AP00
3RT1034-1AG20
Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50 Hz for rated control supply voltage 230 V AC
Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50/60 Hz for rated control supply voltage 110 V AC
DC operating
mechanism
3RT1034-3BB40
3RT1034-3BG40


voltage Us
Us min ... Us max5)
Contactor type 3RT1. 5.-.A

3RT1. 6.-.A
3RT1. 7.-.A
Size S6, S10, S12

voltage Us
Us min ... Us max5)
Contactor type 3RT1. 5.-.N

3RT1. 6.-.N
3RT1. 7.-.N
Size S6, S10, S12
3RT1. 5.-.P
3RT1. 6.-.P
3RT1. 7.-.P
S6, S10, S12
Sizes S6 to S12
UC operation (50/60 Hz AC, DC)
23 ... 26 V AC/DC
42 ... 48 V AC/DC
110 ... 127 V AC/DC
200 ... 220 V AC/DC
220 ... 240 V AC/DC
B3
D3
F3
M3
P3
240 ... 277 V AC/DC

380 ... 420 V AC/DC
440 ... 480 V AC/DC
500 ... 550 V AC/DC
575 ... 600 V AC/DC
U3
V3
R3
S3
T3
1)
Coil operating range:

at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 Us.
2)
Coil operating range (sizes S2 and S3):
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 Us.
3)
Coil operating range (sizes S2 and S3):
at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 Us.
3/90
Siemens IC 10 2014
21 ... 27.3 V AC/DC

96 ... 127 V AC/DC
200 ... 277 V AC/DC
4)
5)
Coil operating range:

at 60 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 Us.
Operating range:
0.8 x Us min to 1.1 Us max.
B3
F3
P3
-F3
P3
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
Overview
The contactors can be operated with AC (50 to 60 Hz) as well as
with DC.
Two types of solenoid operation are available:
Conventional operating mechanism, version 3RT12. .-.A
Solid-state operating mechanism, version 3RT12. .-.N
3RT12 vacuum contactors are contained in hermetically

enclosed vacuum interrupters. Neither arcs nor arcing gases are
produced. The particular benefit of 3RT12 vacuum contactors,
however, is that their electrical endurance is at least twice as
long as that of 3RT10 contactors. They are therefore particularly
well suited to frequent switching in jogging/mixed operation,
e.g. in crane control systems.
UC operation
Withdrawable coils
Note:
For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced,

the solenoid coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any
other coil of the same size.
Vacuum contactors are basically unsuitable for switching

DC voltage.
The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 lateral auxiliary contacts
(identical auxiliary switch blocks from S2 to S12). Of these, no
more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts.
Vacuum interrupters
In contrast with the 3RT10 contactors the main contacts operate in air under atmospheric conditions the contact gaps of the
:
Type
3RT1264
Size
mm
3RT1266
3RT1275
S12
145 x 210 x 206
160 x 214 x 225
3RT1276
'
3RT1265
S10
22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5
The contactors are designed for operation on a

vertical mounting surface.
NSB0_00650c
General data

1)
1000
kV

690
Mirror contacts
During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface

-55 ... +80
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
Sine pulse
g/ms
g/ms
8.5/5 and 4.2/10

13.4/5 and 6.5/10
2)
3)
Main circuit
Weld-free1)
A
A
A
500
500
400
10
800
800
500
Auxiliary circuit
(weld-free protection Ik 1 kA)
Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic
(short-circuit current Ik 400 A)
1)

3) For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) see page 3/66.
4)
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/91
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1264
S10
3RT1265
S10
3RT1266
S10
3RT1275
S12
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC)

AC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
530/0.9
630/0.9
6.1/0.9
7.4/0.9
700/0.9
830/0.9
7.6/0.9
9.2/0.9
W
W
W
W
580
700
6.8
8.2
770
920
8.5
10
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
420/0.8
570/0.8
4.3/0.8
5.6/0.8
560/0.8
750/0.8
5.4/0.8
7/0.8
W
W
W
W
460
630
3.4
4.2
600
800
4
5
DC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max

AC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
DC operation
-
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
PLC control input acc. to IEC 61131-2
Type 2
Rated voltage
V DC
24
Operating range
V DC
17 ... 30
Power consumption
mA
30
ms
ms
30 ... 95
40 ... 80
45 ... 100
60 ... 100
ms
ms
35 ... 50
50 ... 80
50 ... 70
70 ... 100
ms
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
ms
ms
105 ... 145

80 ... 100
120 ... 150

80 ... 100
ms
ms
110 ... 130

80 ... 100
125 ... 150

80 ... 100
ms
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
ms
ms
45 ... 80
80 ... 100
60 ... 90
80 ... 100
ms
ms
50 ... 65
80 ... 100
65 ... 80
80 ... 100
ms
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
Operating times
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
3/92
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RT1276
S12
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT1264
S10
3RT1265
S10
3RT1266
S10
3RT1275
S12
3RT1276
S12
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
A
A
330
300
610
550
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
113
197
246
340
492
208
362
452
624
905
mm2
mm2
185
185
2 x 185
2 x 185
225
265
300
400
500
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
73
128
160
223
320
85
151
189
265
378
97
171
215
288
428
132
231
291
400
578
164
291
363
507
728
1 800
2 120
2 400
3 200
4 000
Power loss per conducting path at Ie/AC-3
12
14
21
32
195
230
280
350
430
kW
110
132
160
200
250
A
A
97
68
115
81
140
98
175
123
215
151
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
30
55
68
94
95
37
65
81
112
114
45
79
98
138
140
56
98
124
172
183
70
122
153
212
217
h-1
2 000
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
800
300
750
250
h-1
60
- At 40 C up to 1 000 V
- At 60 C up to 1 000 V
1)
Rated power for AC loads

with p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V

- At 40 C
- At 60 C
- Up to 1000 V
Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V

- Up to 690 V
- At 400 V
The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200 000 operating

cycles:
- Up to 690 V
- Up to 1 000 V
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z during rated operation
-
Ie/AC-1
Ie/AC-2
Ie/AC-3
Ie/AC-4
at 400 V
at 400 V
at 400 V
at 400 V
3)
750
250
750
250
700
250
750
250

Mean value
1)

account).
2)
3) Dependence of the switching frequency z' on
z = z (Ie/I) (400 V/U)1.5 1/h
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/93
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
Type
Size
3RT126.
S10
3RT127.
S12
Main conductors
Screw terminals
Type
3RT19 66-4G
Nm
M12 (hexagon socket, A/F 5)

20 ... 22 (180 ... 195 lb.in)

Stranded
mm
mm
mm
70 ... 240
70 ... 240
95 ... 300
AWG
3/0 ... 600 kcmil
NSB0_00479
Ribbon cable conductors (Number x Width x Thickness) mm
Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8; max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
NSB0_00480

Stranded
mm
mm
mm
120 ... 185

120 ... 185
120 ... 240
AWG
250 ... 500 kcmil
Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8; max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

NSB0_00481
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque

Stranded
mm
mm
mm
Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185

Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
Min. 2 x 70, max. 2 x 240
AWG
Min. 2 x 2/0, max. 1 x 500 kcmil
Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
Busbar connections
Connecting bars (max. width)
mm
25
Finely stranded with cable lug1)

Stranded with cable lug1)
mm
mm
AWG
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
2/0 ... 500 kcmil
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Nm
M10 x 30 (A/F 17)

14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in)
Cable lug connection
1)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2) according to IEC 60947;

max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Solid
mm
2)
When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT1966-4EA1 terminal

cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm and more as
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm and more to
keep the phase clearance.
Type
Size

3RT1264
S10
3RT1265
S10
3RT1266
S10
3RT1275
S12
3RT1276
S12
s and u rated data

V AC
600
600
330
540

- At 200 V
- At 230 V
- At 460 V
- At 575 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
60
75
150
200
75
100
200
250
100
125
250
300
125
150
300
400
150
200
400
500
CLASS L fuse
Circuit breakers acc. to UL 489
kA
A
A
10
700
500
18
800
700
18
800
900
18
1200
1000
30
1200
1200
NEMA/EEMAC size
hp
--
--
--
- Open
- Enclosed
A
A
---
---
300
270
---
600
540

- At 200 V
- At 230 V
- At 460 V
- At 575 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
-----
-----
75
100
200
200
-----
150
200
400
400
Overload relays
Type
3RB2066
Maximum horsepower ratings (s and
u approved values)
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
1)
3/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RB2066
www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals, or the UL Guide "Industrial Control

Panels for North America", www.siemens.com/sirius/ul-download.
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 110 ... 250 kW
UC operation (50/60 Hz AC, DC)

Main conductors: Busbar connections
3RT126.
Size
3RT127.
Rated data
Auxiliary
contacts,
AC-1,
Tu: 40 C lateral
AC-2 and AC-3,

Tu: Up to 60 C
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
Operational
current Ie
up to
Ratings1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
1 000 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC
V AC/DC
Operational
current Ie
up to
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

U
S10
S12
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
225
55
110
160
200
330
110 127
220 240
A
A
3RT1264-6AF36
3RT1264-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
110 127
220 240
A
A
3RT1265-6AF36
3RT1265-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
110 127
220 240
A
A
3RT1266-6AF36
3RT1266-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
610
110 127
220 240
A
A
3RT1275-6AF36
3RT1275-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
500
610
110 127
220 240
A
A
3RT1276-6AF36
3RT1276-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Solid-state operating mechanisms for 24 V DC PLC output

U
S10
S12
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
225
55
110
160
200
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1264-6NF36
3RT1264-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
265
75
132
160
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1265-6NF36
3RT1265-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
300
90
160
200
250
330
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1266-6NF36
3RT1266-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
132
200
250
400
610
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1275-6NF36
3RT1275-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
500
160
250
355
500
610
96 127
200 277
B
B
3RT1276-6NF36
3RT1276-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B

For more 3TF68/3TF69 vacuum contactors (335 kW and 450 kW)
see page 3/123.
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/95
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks
Various auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the 3RT1 basic
units depending on the application:
3RT103.
3RT104.
contactors
without
aux. contact
Sizes S2 to S12
One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary switch blocks
(screw or spring-type connections) can be snapped on. When
the contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are opened first
and then the NO contacts are closed.
Also available are 2-pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw terminals) for cable entry from above or below in the design of a quad
block (feeder auxiliary switch).
If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary switch
blocks (screw or spring-type connections) can be attached
laterally (on the left or on the right).
Contactors
3RT103.
3RT104.
without
aux. contact
Aux. switch blocks

with 4 contacts, 3RH1921-. FA..
acc. to EN 50005
Aux. switch blocks

with 4 contacts, 3RH1921-. HA..
acc. to EN 50012
Ident. No. 40, 31, 22, 04, 22U
Ident. No. 31, 22, 13
Possible complements of
contactors with 4-pole
aux. switch blocks,
terminal designations
acc. to EN 50005
aux. switch blocks,
terminal designations
acc. to EN 50012
1 NO
Ident. No. 40, 31, 22, 02
1 NC
NSB0_00518a
Aux. switch blocks,

with 1 contact
Ident. No. 31, 22, 13
4-pole auxiliary switch blocks for 3RT1 contactors

aux. switch blocks,
terminal signations
acc. to EN 50005 or
EN 50012
The laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to

EN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary switch
blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers on the
contactor must be noted.
Ident. No.
01, 10
11
21, 12
31, 22, 13
02, 20
03, 30
04, 40
Two enclosed and two standard contacts are available with the
3RH1921-.FE22 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block,
which can be attached to the front. The laterally mountable,
solid-state compatible 3RH1921-2DE11 auxiliary switch block
contains two enclosed contacts (1 NO + 1 NC). The enclosed
contacts are suitable in particular for switching small voltages
and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and for operation in
dusty atmospheres. The NC auxiliary contacts are mirror
contacts.
uziWWW\X`
Terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012
1-pole auxiliary switch blocks for 3RT1 contactors
The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary switch

blocks are comprised of identification numbers (location
identifiers) on the basic unit and of function numbers on the
auxiliary switch blocks.
The terminal designations of the individual auxiliary switch
blocks correspond to EN 50005 or EN 50012, those of the
complete contactors with auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC
correspond to EN 50012.
The auxiliary switch blocks attached to the front can be disassembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever; the
laterally attached auxiliary switch blocks are easy to remove by
pressing on the checkered surfaces.
3/96
Siemens IC 10 2014
Size S2
A maximum of four auxiliary contacts can be attached;
the auxiliary switch blocks used can be of any version. For reasons of symmetry, when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary
switch blocks are used, one block must be attached on the right
and one on the left.
More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size S2 under
certain conditions (please ask).
Sizes S3 to S12
A maximum of eight auxiliary contacts can be attached; please
note the following:
Of these eight auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than
four NC contacts.
Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary switch
blocks
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks
Solid-state timing relay blocks with semiconductor output
The solid-state, time-delay auxiliary switch block is fitted onto the

front side of the contactor.
The timer module, which is available in the "ON-DELAY" and

"OFF-DELAY" versions with control signal, allows time-delayed
functions up to 100 s (three delay ranges). Contactors fitted with
a timing relay block close or open after a delay according to the
set time.
The timer module, which is available in the "ON-DELAY" and

"OFF-DELAY" versions, allows time-delayed functions up to
100 s (three delay ranges).
It contains a relay with one NO contact and one NC contact;
depending on the version, the relay is switched either after an
ON-delay or after an OFF-delay.
The timer module with WYE-DELTA FUNCTION is equipped with
one delayed and one instantaneous NO contact, with a dead
time of 50 ms between the two. The delay time of the NO contact
can be adjusted between 1.5 s and 30 s.
The ON-delay variant of the timing relay is connected in series

with the contactor coil; terminal A1 of this coil must not be connected.
With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay, the contactor coil
is contacted directly through the relay; terminals A1 and A2 of
the contactor coil must not be connected.
The timing relays are suitable for both AC and DC operation.
Sizes S2 and S3
Wye-delta function
NSB0_00938
A1/A2
Y -7/-8
-7/-8
t
50 ms
The timing relay block for size S0 to S3 contactors is plugged

into coil terminals A1 and A2 on top of each contactor; the timing
relay is connected both electrically and mechanically by means
of pins.
A varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp
opening surges in the contactor coil.
Configuration
The contactor on which the solid-state time-delay auxiliary

switch block is mounted operates without a delay.
Sizes S2 to S12
a) AC operation
L1
The timer module is supplied with power through two terminals

(A1/A2); the time delay of the auxiliary switch block can be activated either by a parallel link to any contactor coil or by any
power source.
The OFF-delay version operates without a control signal;
the minimum ON period is 200 ms.
A single-pole auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the
front of the contactor in addition to the timer module.
The timer module has no integrated components for overvoltage
damping.
NSB0_00454b
b) OFF-delay
NSB0_00455b
L1
K3
S1
A1 B1 A2
K3
S1
A1 B1 A2
K3
1
2
A1
A1
A2
N
Timing relay block
2 Contactor
A2
2
N
1 Timing relay block

2 Contactor
The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not permissible with AC operation (see (a) in the circuit diagram).
The 3RT1926-2D. . . OFF-delay timing relay blocks have a zero
potential start input B1. This means that if there is a parallel load
on terminal B1, activation can be simulated with AC voltage. In
this case, the additional load (e.g. contactor K3) must be wired
(see (b) in the circuit diagram).
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/97
General data
Siemens AG 2013

General data
OFF-delay device for size S00 and S0 contactors
AC and DC operation
IEC 60947, EN 60947
For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting

rails. The OFF-delay devices have screw terminals.
The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out
unintentionally when there is a short-time voltage dip or voltage
failure. It supplies a downstream, DC-operated contactor with
the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the
contactor does not trip. The 3RT1916 OFF-delay devices are
specifically designed for operation with the 3RT contactors and
3RH contactor relays in the SIRIUS series.
The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a
capacitive basis, and can be energized with either AC or DC
(24 V version only for DC operation). Voltage matching, which is
only necessary with AC operation, is performed using a rectifier
bridge.
A contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors of the solenoid coil, built into the OFF-delay device, are switched in parallel. In the event of voltage failures, the capacitors are discharged
via the solenoid coil and thereby delay the opening of the contactor.
If the command devices are upstream of the OFF-delay device
in the circuit, the OFF-delay takes effect with every opening operation. If the opening operation is downstream of the OFF-delay
device, an OFF-delay only applies in the event of failure of the
mains voltage.
Operation
In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of
110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied
on the line side, whereas the version for 24 V is designed for
DC operation only.
A DC-operated contactor is connected to the output according
to the input voltage that is applied.
The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the
specified minimum time.
Surge suppressors
Without LED (also for spring-type terminals)
Sizes S2, S3, S6 to S12
All 3RT1 contactors and 3RH1 contactor relays can be retrofitted
with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the
coil. Diodes or diode assemblies (comprising noise suppression
diodes and Zener diodes for short break times) can be used.
With the size S2 and S3 contactors, varistors, RC elements and
diode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, either on the top or underneath.
The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is
determined by a coding device.
Coupling contactors are supplied either without overvoltage
damping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard,
according to the version.
Note:
3/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
Coupling links for mounting on contactors of sizes

S2 and S3
DC operation
IEC 60947 and EN 60947
The coupling link is suitable for use in any climate. It is fingersafe according to EN 50274. The terminal designations comply
with EN 50005.
System-compatible operation with 24 V DC,
operating range 17 to 30 V.
Low power consumption in conformity with the technical specifications of the solid-state systems. An LED indicates the
switching state.
Surge suppression
The 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling link has an integrated surge
suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched.
Mounting
The 3RH1924-1GP11 coupling link is mounted directly on the
contactor coil.
Sealable covers for sizes S2 to S12
When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-related
applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate
the contactors manually.
For SIRIUS contactors there are sealable covers available for
this purpose as accessories; these prevent accidental manual
operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a
bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Contactor
Type
3RT1926-2C
3RT1926-2D
Solid-state timing relay blocks

with semiconductor output
3RT1926-2E
3RT1926-2F
3RT1926-2G
General data
V AC
250
During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III according to IEC 60664-1

Cover
Terminals
g/ms
Shock resistance
EMC tests
IP40
IP20
15/11
Hz/mm 10 ... 55/0.35

IEC 61000-6-4
Basic specification
Conductor connections
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)
Terminal screws
Tightening torque
M3
Nm
lb.in
0.8 ... 1.2

7 ... 10.3
Any
Control
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us,

0.95 ... 1.05 times the rated
frequency
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,

Rated power
VA
Varistor integrated in timing relay
--
Recovery time
ms
50
150
Minimum ON period
ms
35
200 (with OFF-delay)
Typ. %
15
Max. %
Load current
0.3
--
AC-15, 230 V, 50 Hz
--
DC-13, 24 V
--
DC-13, 110 V
--
0.2
DC-13, 230 V
--
0.1
10
--
--
Setting accuracy
With reference to upper limit of scale
Repeat accuracy
Load side
Short-time loading capacity

DIAZED protection operational class gG
Up to 10 ms A
A
Residual current
Max. mA
--
Voltage drop
With conducting output
Max. VA
3.5
--
10 x 106

With Ie at 230 V AC
h-1
2 00
2 500
h-1
2 500
5 000
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/99
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Function
Function chart
Contact closed
Contact open
1 NO contact (semiconductor output)

3RT1926-2C
L1/L+
t
A1/A2
Contactor
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
1
2
N/L-
3RT1926-2D
To be connected
optionally
2 Contactor
L1/L+
1 NO + 1 NC
3RT1926-2E
A1
A2
A1
A2
NSB0_00936
A1/A2
-7/-8
-5/-6
A2
N/L
ON-delay
A2 must only be
connected to N(L--)
from the timing relay.
S1
A1 B1
NSB0_00557
A1/A2
Timing relay
B1/A2
> 35 ms
A1/A2
Contactor
NSB0_0940a
OFF-delay
with control signal
A2 can be connected
to N(L-) using either
the contactor or the
timing relay.
NSB0_00556
A1/A2
Timing relay
NSB0_0939a

ON-delay,
two-wire design
Do not connect
1
Timing relay block
2 Contactor
6
$
$
A1
A2
27
35
28
36
NSB0_01873
OFF-delay
3RT1926-2F
>200 ms
NSB0_00937
A1/A2
-7/-8
-5/-6
6
$
A1
$
A2
27
35
28
36
NSB0_01874a
2 NO
Wye-delta function:
1 NO delayed,
1 NO instantaneous,
dead time 50 ms
3RT1926-2G
NSB0_00938
A1/A2
Y -7/-8
-7/-8
t
6
$
A1
50 ms
$
A2
27
37
28
38
NSB0_01875
3/100
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Contactor
Type
3RH1924, 3TX7090
Coupling links for mounting on contactors
acc. to IEC 60947/EN 60947
General data
300

V AC
Up to 300
During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80

Connections
IP20
Enclosure
IP40
Circuit diagram
L1 B1+
B2- N
1
A1
A2
Coupling link
Contactor
NSB0_00182a
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)

M3
Terminal screws
Control side
V DC
24
Operating range
V DC
17 ... 30
0.5
Nominal current input
mA
20
Release voltage
Function display
Yellow LED
Protection circuit
Varistor
Load side
Switching frequency
Operating cycles/h 5 000
Make-time
ms
Approx. 7
Break-time
ms
Approx. 4
Bounce time
ms
Approx. 2
AgSnO
Contact material
Switching voltage
AC/DC V
mA
24 ... 250
2.5
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/101
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Contactor
Type
3RT1926-3A
General data
V
690
During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-50 ... +80

IP20

With 3RT1.2
With 3RT1.3
Operating cycles 50 000
Solid
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4

2 x 14; 1 x 12
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5

2 x 14; 1 x 12
Nm
lb.in
0.8 ... 1.1

7 ... 9.5
Control
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Operating range of the solenoid coil

At AC 50/60 Hz and DC
W
Approx. 4
AC operation
ms
18 ... 31
DC operation
ms
18 ... 26
Power consumption of the solenoid coils of the unlocking magnet

AC and DC operation
Command duration for de-energizing
3/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Auxiliary switches
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH1921-1HA. .,
3RH1921-1FA. .
For contactors Auxiliary contacts
Ident. No.
Type
DT Screw terminals
Version
NO
3RH1921-2HA. .,
3RH1921-2FA. .
NC
Article No.
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

according to EN 50012
Sizes S2 and S31)
4-pole auxiliary switch blocks
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
31
--
--
22
--
--
13
--
--
13 21 33 43
3RH1921-1HA31
3RH1921-2HA31
3RH1921-1HA22
3RH1921-2HA22
3RH1921-1HA13
3RH1921-2HA13
3RH1921-1XA22-0MA0
3RH1921-2XA22-0MA0
3RH1921-1FA40
3RH1921-2FA40
3RH1921-1FA31
3RH1921-2FA31
3RH1921-1FA22
3RH1921-2FA22
3RH1921-1FA04
3RH1921-2FA04
3RH1921-1FC22
3RH1921-2FC22
14 22 34 44
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
13 21 31 41
14 22 32 42
Sizes S2 to S12
2)

3RT1.3 ...
3RT1.7
22
--
--
53 61 71 83
54 62 72 84

Sizes S2 and S31)
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
40
--
--
--
31
--
--
22
--
--
13 23 31 41
04
--
--
--
11 21 31 41
22 U
--
--
13 23 33 43
14 24 34 44
13 23 33 41
14 24 34 42
14 24 32 42
12 22 32 42
17 27 35 45
18 28 36 46
For multi-unit packing and reusable packaging see Chapter 16,

"Appendix" "Ordering Notes".
1)
2)
Exception: 3RT16.
Exception: 3RT12, 3RT16.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/103
Siemens AG 2013

Auxiliary switches
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH1921-1LA. .
3RH1921-1MA. .
3RH1921-1C. .

Ident. No.
Type
Version
NO
3RH1921-2C. .
DT Screw terminals
NC
Article No.
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Sizes S2 and S31)
2-pole auxiliary switch blocks with cable entry
on one side
Cable entry from above
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
11
--
--
13 21
20
--
--
--
13 23
02
--
--
--
11 21
3RH1921-1LA11
--
3RH1921-1LA20
--
3RH1921-1LA02
--
3RH1921-1MA11
--
3RH1921-1MA20
--
3RH1921-1MA02
--
3RH1921-1CA10
3RH1921-2CA10
3RH1921-1CA01
3RH1921-2CA01
3RH1921-1CD10
--
3RH1921-1CD01
--
14 22
14 24
12 22
Cable entry from below

3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
11
--
--
13 21
20
--
--
--
13 23
02
--
--
--
11 21
14 22
14 24
12 22
Sizes S2 to S122)
according to EN 50005 and EN 50012
3RT1.3 ...
3RT1.7
10
--
--
--
.3
01
--
--
--
.1
10
--
--
--
.7
01
--
--
--
.5
.4
.2
.8
.6
1)
2)
Exception: 3RT16.
Exception: 3RT12, 3RT16
3/104
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Auxiliary switches
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH1921-1DA11
3RH1921-1JA11
3RH1921-1EA. .
3RH1921-1KA. .
DT Screw terminals
Version
Type
NO
3RH1921-2DA11
3RH1921-2JA11
3RH1921-2EA. .
3RH1921-2KA..
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks

Left
Right
Sizes S2 and S3
First laterally mountable auxiliary switch block
(right or left), 2-pole
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
21 13
22 14
Left
Sizes S3 to S12
31 43
3RH1921-1DA11
3RH1921-2DA11
3RH1921-1JA11
3RH1921-2JA11
3RH1921-1EA20
3RH1921-2EA20
3RH1921-1EA11
3RH1921-1EA02
3RH1921-2EA02
3RH1921-1KA20
3RH1921-2KA20
3RH1921-1KA11
3RH1921-1KA02
32 44
Right
Second laterally mountable auxiliary switch block

3RT1.4 ...
3RT1.7
61 53
71 83
62 54
72 84

Left
Right
Sizes S2 to S12
3RT1.3 ...
3RT1.7
--
53 63
73 83
54 64
74 84
51 63
71 83
52 64
72 84
--
51 61
71 81
52 62
Left
Sizes S3 to S12
--
72 82
Right

3RT1.4 ...
3RT1.7
--
153 163
154 164
174 184
151 163
171 183
152 164
172 184
--
151 161
171 181
152 162
172 182

173 183
--
3RH1921-2KA02
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/105
Siemens AG 2013

Auxiliary switches
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH1921-2DE11,
3RH1921-2JE11
For contactors
3RH1921-1FE22
Contacts
DT Screw terminals
Version
Type
NO
3RH1921-2JE22
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NO1) NC1) NC
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks

For operation in dusty atmospheres
For solid-state circuits with rated operational currents
Ie/AC-14 and DC-13
of 1 ... 300 mA at 3 ...60 V
Mirror contacts according to IEC 60947-4-1, Appendix F

Sizes S2 and S3
3RT1.3 ...
3RT1.7
13 23 31 41
3RH1921-1FE22
3RH1921-2FE22
--
3RH1921-2DE11
--
3RH1921-2JE11
14 24 32 42

Left
Sizes S2 to S12
Right

3RT1.3 ...
3RT1.7
--
--
21 13
22 14
Left
Sizes S3 to S12
31 43
32 44
Right

3RT1.4 ...
3RT1.7
1)
--
--
61 53
71 83
62 54
72 84
1 NO + 1 NC standard auxiliary switches:

See descriptions on page 3/96.
3/106
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

and timing relay blocks

For
contactors
Auxiliary contacts

voltage Us1)
Time setting
range t
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Type
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front,
terminal designations according to DIN 46199-5
Sizes S2 to S12
With ON-delay2)
3RT10,
3RT13,
3RT14,
3RT15
1 NO + 1 NC
3RT1926-2. . . .
24 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
C
}
A
3RT1926-2EJ11
3RT1926-2EJ21
3RT1926-2EJ31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
100 ... 127 AC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
C
}
C
3RT1926-2EC11
3RT1926-2EC21
3RT1926-2EC31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
200 ... 240 AC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
B
}
B
3RT1926-2ED11
3RT1926-2ED21
3RT1926-2ED31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
24 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
}
}
}
3RT1926-2FJ11
3RT1926-2FJ21
3RT1926-2FJ31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
100 ... 127 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
B
}
B
3RT1926-2FK11
3RT1926-2FK21
3RT1926-2FK31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
200 ... 240 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
B
A
A
3RT1926-2FL11
3RT1926-2FL21
3RT1926-2FL31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
OFF-delay without control signal2)3)

3RT10,
3RT13,
3RT14,
3RT15
1 NO + 1 NC
Wye-delta function (varistor integrated)2)

3RT10,
3RT13,
3RT14,
3RT15
1 NO delayed +
1 NO instantaneous,
dead time 50 ms
24 AC/DC
1.5 ... 30
3RT1926-2GJ51
1 unit
41H
100 ... 127 AC
1.5 ... 30
3RT1926-2GC51
1 unit
41H
200 ... 240 AC
1.5 ... 30
3RT1926-2GD51
1 unit
41H
Solid-state timing relay blocks with semiconductor output

Sizes S2 and S3
For mounting onto top-lying coil terminals,
only for devices with screw terminals
ON-delay (varistor integrated)
3RT103,
3RT104,
3RT134)
3RT15
--
24 ... 66 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
B
B
B
3RT1926-2CG11
3RT1926-2CG21
3RT1926-2CG31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
--
90 ... 240 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
}
}
}
3RT1926-2CH11
3RT1926-2CH21
3RT1926-2CH31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
3RT1926-2C. . .
3RT103,
3RT104,
3RT134)
3RT15
--
24 ... 66 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
C
B
D
3RT1926-2DG11
3RT1926-2DG21
3RT1926-2DG31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
--
90 ... 240 AC/DC
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
B
B
C
3RT1926-2DH11
3RT1926-2DH21
3RT1926-2DH31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
24 DC
S2: 90 fixed
S3: 70 fixed
3RT1916-2BE01
1 unit
41H
3RT1926-2D. . .
OFF-delay devices
Sizes S2 and S3
3RT103,
3RT104
Only for contactors

with DC operation
3RT1916-2BE01
For technical specifications, operating travel diagrams and

circuit diagrams see pages 3/99 and 3/100.
1)
2)
The AC voltages are valid for 50 and 60 Hz.

Terminals A1 and A2 for the control supply voltage of the solid-state timedelay auxiliary switch must be connected to the associated contactor by
means of connecting cables.

3)

Application of the control supply voltage once results in contact changeover to the correct setting.
4)
In addition to these, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/107
Siemens AG 2013

Surge suppressors

For
contactors
Version

voltage Us1)
DT Article No.2)
Price
per PU
AC operation DC operation
Type
V AC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
V DC
Surge suppressors without LED

Sizes S2 and S3 (also for spring-type terminals)
For fitting onto the coil terminals at top or bottom
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
--
}
}
}
}
B
3RT1926-1BB00
3RT1926-1BC00
3RT1926-1BD00
3RT1926-1BE00
3RT1926-1BF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
}
B
3RT1936-1CB00
3RT1936-1CC00
3RT1936-1CD00
3RT1936-1CE00
3RT1936-1CF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
Connectable at the top

-(e.g. for contactor with overload -relay)
24
30 ... 250
}
}
3RT1936-1ER00
3RT1936-1ES00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Connectable at the bottom

(e.g. for fuseless load feeders)
24
30 ... 250
}
B
3RT1936-1TR00
3RT1936-1TS00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
Varistor
3RT1.33),
3RT1.4
RC elements
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
Diode assembly for DC operation
3RT1926-1B.00
3RT1936-1C.00
---
Sizes S6 to S12
Screw terminals
For connecting to withdrawable coil for contactors with

conventional operating mechanism 3RT1...-.A...
solid-state operating mechanism 3RT1...-.N...
3RT1.5,
3RT1.6,
3RT1956-1C.00 3RT1.7
RC elements
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
--
}
}
}
}
C
3RT1956-1CB00
3RT1956-1CC00
3RT1956-1CD00
3RT1956-1CE00
3RT1956-1CF00
Spring-type
terminals
3RT1.5,
3RT1.6,
3RT1.7
RC elements
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
--
}
A
}
A
C
3RT1956-1CB02
3RT1956-1CC02
3RT1956-1CD02
3RT1956-1CE02
3RT1956-1CF02
1)
voltages.
Article No.
3) For 3RT1.3 with AC operation mountable only at the top.
2)
For
contactors
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Type
Main current path surge suppression modules for 3RT12 vacuum contactors
Sizes S10 and S12
3RT12
For damping overvoltages and protecting motor windings

against multiple re-ignition when switching off three-phase
motors.
For connection on the contactor feeder side
(2-T1/4-T2/6-T3). For separate installation.
3/108
Rated operational voltage Ue = 690 V AC
3RT1966-1PV3
1 unit
41B
Rated operational voltage Ue = 1 000 V AC
3RT1966-1PV4
1 unit
41B
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


For
contactors
Type
DT Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT1926-3AB31
3RT1926-3AF31
3RT1926-3AP31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DT Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Article No.
Price
per PU

Size S2
For mounting on 1 contactor1)
The contactor remains in the energized state even
after a voltage failure
3RT1.3
3RT1926-3A.31
1)
24 AC/DC
110 AC/DC
230 AC/DC
A
B
B
Two front-mounted auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted in addition.
For
contactors
Version
Type
Article No.
Price
per PU

Sizes S2 and S3
For mounting onto the coil terminals of the
contactors
With LED for indicating switching state
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
Operating range: 17 ... 30 V DC

(with 0 signal): 2.5 mA
3RH1924-1GP11
Rated operational current Ie:

AC-15/AC-14 at 230 V: 3 A
DC-13 at 230 V: 0.1 A
3RH1924-1GP11
With integrated varistor for damping opening surges.
For
contactors
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Type
LED modules for displaying contactor operation

Sizes S2 to S121) (also for spring-type terminals)
3RT1.3,
3RT1.4
For snapping into the location hole of an inscription

label on the front of a contactor either directly on the
contactor or on the front auxiliary switch.
3RT1926-1QT00
5 units
41B
3RT1946-4F
1 unit
41B
The LED module is connected to coil terminals A1 and

A2 of the contactor and indicates its energized state.
Yellow LED.
Rated voltage:
24 ... 240 V AC/DC with reverse polarity protection
3RT1926-1QT00
mounted on contactor
Auxiliary terminals, 3-pole

Size S3
3RT104.
For connection of auxiliary and control cables

(0.5 to 2.5 mm2) to the main conductor connections
(for one side)
3RT1946-4F
For technical specifications for latching blocks see page 3/102.
1)
For sizes S6 to S12 the connecting leads have to be extended.
For technical specifications and circuit diagram for coupling

links see page 3/101.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/109
Siemens AG 2013

For contactors
Size
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Type
Box terminal blocks

For round and ribbon cables1)
S6
3RT1.5
(3RB205)
S10, S12
3RT195.-4G
Up to 70 mm2 2)
Up to 120 mm2
}
}
3RT1955-4G
3RT1956-4G
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Auxiliary conductor connection for box

terminals
3TX7500-0A
1 unit
41B
3RT1966-4G
1 unit
41B
3RT1.6,
Up to 240 mm2
3RT1.7
With auxiliary conductor connection
(3RB206,3
RB216)
Covers
Terminal covers for box terminals
(additional touch protection)
To be fitted at the box terminals
(2 units required per contactor)
3RT1936-4EA2
3RT103
--
3RT1936-4EA2
1 unit
41B
3RT133,
3RT153
For 4-pole contactors
3RT1936-4EA4
1 unit
41B
S3
3RT104,
3RT144
--
3RT1946-4EA2
1 unit
41B
3RT134
For 4-pole contactors
3RT1946-4EA4
1 unit
41B
S63)
3RT1.5
Length: 25 mm
3RT1956-4EA2
1 unit
41B
S10, S123) 3RT1.6,

3RT1.7
Length: 30 mm
3RT1966-4EA2
1 unit
41B
--
3RT1946-4EA1
1 unit
41B
S2
3RT1956-4EA2
Terminal covers for cable lugs and

busbar connection3)
For complying with the phase
clearances and as touch protection if
box terminal is removed
3RT1956-4EA1
S3
3RT104,
3RT144
S6
3RT1.5
Length: 100 mm
3RT1956-4EA1
1 unit
41B
S10/S12
3RT1.6,
3RT1.7
Length: 120 mm
3RT1966-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Can be screwed on free screw end;

covers one busbar connection
(1 set = 6 units)
S6
3RT1.5
M8
3TX6526-3B
1 unit
41B
S10, S12
3RT1.6,
3RT1.7
M10
3TX6546-3B
1 unit
41B
3TX6526-3B
For busbar cover between contactor and

3RB2 overload relay or wiring module for
S6
3RT1.5
Length: 27 mm
3RT1956-4EA3
1 unit
41B
S10/S124)
3RT1.6,
3RT1.7
Length: 42 mm
3RT1966-4EA3
1 unit
41B
For busbar cover of the flat line

connectors for reversing and wye-delta
assemblies
S6
3RT1.5
Length: 38 mm
3RT1956-4EA4
1 unit
41B
S2 ... S12
3RT1.3...
3RT1.7 5)
1 unit required per contactor
3RT1926-4MA10
5 units
41B
Sealable covers
IC01_00162
3RT1926-4MA10
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Connectable cross-sections of the contactors see Technical

Specifications, pages 3/75 and 3/80).
As standard for 3RT1054-1 contactor (55 kW).
Also fits on contactors S6 to S12 with box terminals.
The 3RT1966-4EA3 cover is required in addition for use in contactor
assemblies (reversing/wye-delta).
Exception: contactors and contactor relays with auxiliary switch block
mounted onto the front.
3/110
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For contactors
Max. conductor cross-sections
Size
mm2
Type
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

3RT103
3RT1936-4BB31
1 unit
41B
185
3RT1946-4BB31
1 unit
41B
95
3RT1936-4BB31
3-pole, with through hole
(star jumpers)1)2)3)
3RT1956-4BA31
1)
2)
S3
3RT104,
3RT144
S6
3RT1.5
--
3RT1956-4BA31
1 unit
41B
S10/S12
3RT1.6,
3RT1.7
--
3RT1966-4BA31
1 unit
41B

Size S2: The links for paralleling are insulated.
Size S3: A cover plate is included for touch protection.
(Can only be used when the box terminal is removed.)
Sizes S6 to S12: The 3RT1956-4EA1 (for S6) or 3RT1966-4EA1
(for S10 and S12) cover can be used for touch protection.
3)
The star jumpers to the contactors of sizes S6 and S10/S12 are approved
according to UL and CSA.
Version
DT Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

B
3RT1916-4JA02
1 20 units
41B

3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
3RA2908-1A
41B
Version
DT Article No.
Insulation stop strip can be inserted in cable entry of spring-type

terminals (2 strips per contactor required, can be removed in
pairs)
3RT1916-4JA02
For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals, up to 2.5 mm2

conductor cross-section.
Tools for opening spring-type terminal points

For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals, for conductor
cross-sections up to 2.5 mm
Not suitable for devices with removable terminal
3RA2908-1A
1 unit
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Blank labels
NSB0_01429b
Unit labeling plates for SIRIUS devices1)

10 mm 7 mm, pastel turquoise
3RT1900-1SB10
100
816 units
41B
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
19 mm 6 mm, zinc/yellow
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
Adhesive labels for SIRIUS devices
3RT1900-1SB20
1)


Siemens IC 10 2014
3/111
3-pole, with connection terminal1)2)

S2
Siemens AG 2013

Spare parts for 3RT1 Contactors
Solenoid coils
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT1934-5A.01
For contactors

50 Hz
50/60 Hz
60 Hz
Size
24
42
48
110
-----
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5AB01
3RT1934-5AD01
3RT1934-5AH01
3RT1934-5AF01
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5AB02
3RT1934-5AD02
3RT1934-5AH02
3RT1934-5AF02
230
400
---
---
B
C
3RT1934-5AP01
3RT1934-5AV01
B
B
3RT1934-5AP02
3RT1934-5AV02
-----
24
42
48
110
-----
B
B
B
C
3RT1934-5AC21
3RT1934-5AD21
3RT1934-5AH21
3RT1934-5AG21
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5AC22
3RT1934-5AD22
3RT1934-5AH22
3RT1934-5AG22
---
220
230
---
C
C
3RT1934-5AN21
3RT1934-5AL21
B
B
3RT1934-5AN22
3RT1934-5AL22
110
220
---
--100
200
120
240
110
220
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5AK61
3RT1934-5AP61
3RT1934-5AG61
3RT1934-5AN61
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5AK62
3RT1934-5AP62
3RT1934-5AG62
3RT1934-5AN62
Type
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU

S2
3RT1034
3RT1035,
3RT1036,
3RT133.,
3RT153.
--
400
440
3RT1934-5AR61
3RT1934-5AR62
24
42
48
110
-----
-----
B
B
B
}
3RT1935-5AB01
3RT1935-5AD01
3RT1935-5AH01
3RT1935-5AF01
B
B
B
B
3RT1935-5AB02
3RT1935-5AD02
3RT1935-5AH02
3RT1935-5AF02
230
400
---
---
}
C
3RT1935-5AP01
3RT1935-5AV01
B
B
3RT1935-5AP02
3RT1935-5AV02
-----
24
42
48
110
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1935-5AC21
3RT1935-5AD21
3RT1935-5AH21
3RT1935-5AG21
B
B
B
B
3RT1935-5AC22
3RT1935-5AD22
3RT1935-5AH22
3RT1935-5AG22
---
220
230
---
B
B
3RT1935-5AN21
3RT1935-5AL21
B
B
3RT1935-5AN22
3RT1935-5AL22
110
220
---
--100
200
120
240
110
220
B
B
B
B
3RT1935-5AK61
3RT1935-5AP61
3RT1935-5AG61
3RT1935-5AN61
B
B
B
B
3RT1935-5AK62
3RT1935-5AP62
3RT1935-5AG62
3RT1935-5AN62
--
400
440
3RT1935-5AR61
3RT1935-5AR62
Note:
Contactors with AC and DC coils have different depths. That is
why when replacing coils it is only possible to replace AC coils
with AC coils and DC coils with DC coils.
3/112
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Solenoid coils
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT1944-5A.01
For contactors
3RT1944-5B.42
AC
Size
Type
3RT1945-5A.01
3RT1945-5A.02
DT Screw terminals
DC
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
50 Hz
50/60 Hz
60 Hz
24
42
48
110
-----
-----
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5AB01
3RT1944-5AD01
3RT1944-5AH01
3RT1944-5AF01
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5AB02
3RT1944-5AD02
3RT1944-5AH02
3RT1944-5AF02
230
400
---
---
---
B
B
3RT1944-5AP01
3RT1944-5AV01
B
B
3RT1944-5AP02
3RT1944-5AV02
-----
24
42
48
110
-----
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5AC21
3RT1944-5AD21
3RT1944-5AH21
3RT1944-5AG21
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5AC22
3RT1944-5AD22
3RT1944-5AH22
3RT1944-5AG22
---
220
230
---
---
B
B
3RT1944-5AN21
3RT1944-5AL21
B
B
3RT1944-5AN22
3RT1944-5AL22
110
220
---
--100
200
120
240
110
220
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5AK61
3RT1944-5AP61
3RT1944-5AG61
3RT1944-5AN61
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5AK62
3RT1944-5AP62
3RT1944-5AG62
3RT1944-5AN62
Price
per PU

S3
3RT1044
3RT1045,
3RT1046,
3RT134.,
3RT1446,
3RT154.
--
400
440
--
3RT1944-5AR61
3RT1944-5AR62
24
42
48
110
-----
-----
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1945-5AB01
3RT1945-5AD01
3RT1945-5AH01
3RT1945-5AF01
B
B
B
B
3RT1945-5AB02
3RT1945-5AD02
3RT1945-5AH02
3RT1945-5AF02
230
400
---
---
---
B
C
3RT1945-5AP01
3RT1945-5AV01
B
B
3RT1945-5AP02
3RT1945-5AV02
-----
24
42
48
110
-----
-----
B
B
B
B
3RT1945-5AC21
3RT1945-5AD21
3RT1945-5AH21
3RT1945-5AG21
B
B
B
B
3RT1945-5AC22
3RT1945-5AD22
3RT1945-5AH22
3RT1945-5AG22
---
220
230
---
---
B
B
3RT1945-5AN21
3RT1945-5AL21
B
B
3RT1945-5AN22
3RT1945-5AL22
110
220
---
--100
200
120
240
110
220
-----
B
B
B
C
3RT1945-5AK61
3RT1945-5AP61
3RT1945-5AG61
3RT1945-5AN61
B
B
B
B
3RT1945-5AK62
3RT1945-5AP62
3RT1945-5AG62
3RT1945-5AN62
--
400
440
--
3RT1945-5AR61
3RT1945-5AR62
-----
-----
-----
24
42
48
60
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5BB41
3RT1934-5BD41
3RT1934-5BW41
3RT1934-5BE41
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5BB42
3RT1934-5BD42
3RT1934-5BW42
3RT1934-5BE42
-----
-----
-----
110
125
220
230
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5BF41
3RT1934-5BG41
3RT1934-5BM41
3RT1934-5BP41
B
B
B
B
3RT1934-5BF42
3RT1934-5BG42
3RT1934-5BM42
3RT1934-5BP42
-----
-----
-----
24
42
48
60
B
C
B
B
3RT1944-5BB41
3RT1944-5BD41
3RT1944-5BW41
3RT1944-5BE41
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5BB42
3RT1944-5BD42
3RT1944-5BW42
3RT1944-5BE42
-----
-----
-----
110
125
220
230
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5BF41
3RT1944-5BG41
3RT1944-5BM41
3RT1944-5BP41
B
B
B
B
3RT1944-5BF42
3RT1944-5BG42
3RT1944-5BM42
3RT1944-5BP42
Solenoid coils DC operation

S2
S3
3RT103.,
3RT133.,
3RT153.
3RT104.,
3RT134.,
3RT144.,
3RT154.
Note:
Contactors with AC and DC coils have different depths. That is
why when replacing coils it is only possible to replace AC coils
with AC coils and DC coils with DC coils.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/113
Siemens AG 2013

Solenoid coils
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT1955-5A. . 1
For contactors
Rated control supply voltage

Us min ... Us max
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Size
Type
V AC/DC
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Withdrawable coils
S6
S10
S10
S12
3/114
3RT105,
3RT145
3RT106,
3RT146
3RT126
vacuum
contactors
3RT107,
3RT147,
3RT12 7
vacuum
contactors
23 ... 26
42 ... 48
110 ... 127
200 ... 220
B
B
B
B
3RT1955-5AB31
3RT1955-5AD31
3RT1955-5AF31
3RT1955-5AM31
B
B
B
B
3RT1955-5AB32
3RT1955-5AD32
3RT1955-5AF32
3RT1955-5AM32
220 ... 240

240 ... 277
380 ... 420
440 ... 480
B
B
B
B
3RT1955-5AP31
3RT1955-5AU31
3RT1955-5AV31
3RT1955-5AR31
B
B
B
B
3RT1955-5AP32
3RT1955-5AU32
3RT1955-5AV32
3RT1955-5AR32
500 ... 550

575 ... 600
B
B
3RT1955-5AS31
3RT1955-5AT31
B
B
3RT1955-5AS32
3RT1955-5AT32
23 ... 26
42 ... 48
110 ... 127
200 ... 220
B
B
B
C
3RT1965-5AB31
3RT1965-5AD31
3RT1965-5AF31
3RT1965-5AM31
B
B
B
B
3RT1965-5AB32
3RT1965-5AD32
3RT1965-5AF32
3RT1965-5AM32
220 ... 240

240 ... 277
380 ... 420
440 ... 480
B
B
B
B
3RT1965-5AP31
3RT1965-5AU31
3RT1965-5AV31
3RT1965-5AR31
B
B
B
B
3RT1965-5AP32
3RT1965-5AU32
3RT1965-5AV32
3RT1965-5AR32
500 ... 550

575 ... 600
C
C
3RT1965-5AS31
3RT1965-5AT31
B
B
3RT1965-5AS32
3RT1965-5AT32
23 ... 26
42 ... 48
110 ... 127
200 ... 220
B
B
A
C
3RT1966-5AB31
3RT1966-5AD31
3RT1966-5AF31
3RT1966-5AM31
-----
220 ... 240

240 ... 277
380 ... 420
440 ... 480
A
C
B
C
3RT1966-5AP31
3RT1966-5AU31
3RT1966-5AV31
3RT1966-5AR31
-----
500 ... 550

575 ... 600
C
C
3RT1966-5AS31
3RT1966-5AT31
---
23 ... 26
42 ... 48
110 ... 127
200 ... 220
B
B
B
C
3RT1975-5AB31
3RT1975-5AD31
3RT1975-5AF31
3RT1975-5AM31
B
B
B
B
3RT1975-5AB32
3RT1975-5AD32
3RT1975-5AF32
3RT1975-5AM32
220 ... 240

240 ... 277
380 ... 420
440 ... 480
B
B
B
B
3RT1975-5AP31
3RT1975-5AU31
3RT1975-5AV31
3RT1975-5AR31
B
B
B
B
3RT1975-5AP32
3RT1975-5AU32
3RT1975-5AV32
3RT1975-5AR32
500 ... 550

575 ... 600
C
C
3RT1975-5AS31
3RT1975-5AT31
B
B
3RT1975-5AS32
3RT1975-5AT32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Solenoid coils
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT1955-5N. . 1
For contactors
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Size
Type
V AC/DC
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Withdrawable coils
For 24 V DC PLC output
S6
3RT105,
3RT145
21 ... 27.3
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
C
B
B
3RT1955-5NB31
3RT1955-5NF31
3RT1955-5NP31
B
B
B
3RT1955-5NB32
3RT1955-5NF32
3RT1955-5NP32
S10
3RT106,
3RT146
21 ... 27.3
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
B
B
3RT1965-5NB31
3RT1965-5NF31
3RT1965-5NP31
B
B
B
3RT1965-5NB32
3RT1965-5NF32
3RT1965-5NP32
3RT12 6
vacuum
contactors
21 ... 27.3
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
C
C
3RT1966-5NB31
3RT1966-5NF31
3RT1966-5NP31
3RT107,
3RT147,
3RT12 7
vacuum
contactors
21 ... 27.3
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
B
B
3RT1975-5NB31
3RT1975-5NF31
3RT1975-5NP31
S12
---B
B
B
3RT1975-5NB32
3RT1975-5NF32
3RT1975-5NP32
For 24 V DC PLC output/PLC relay output,

with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT)
(withdrawable coil with laterally mounted solid-state module)
S6
3RT105,
3RT145
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
B
3RT1955-5PF31
3RT1955-5PP31
---
S10
3RT106,
3RT146
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
B
3RT1965-5PF31
3RT1965-5PP31
---
S12
3RT107,
3RT147
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
B
3RT1975-5PF31
3RT1975-5PP31
---

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/115
Siemens AG 2013

Contacts and arc chutes

For contactors
Size
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Type
Contacts with fixing parts

For contactors with 3 main contacts
S2
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
Main contacts (3 NO contacts) for utilization category AC-3

(1 set = 3 movable and 6 fixed switching elements with fixing
parts)
}
}
}
3RT1934-6A
3RT1935-6A
3RT1936-6A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S3
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
B
B
B
3RT1944-6A
3RT1945-6A
3RT1946-6A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S6
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
}
}
}
3RT1954-6A
3RT1955-6A
3RT1956-6A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S10
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
}
}
}
3RT1964-6A
3RT1965-6A
3RT1966-6A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S12
3RT1075
3RT1076
}
A
3RT1975-6A
3RT1976-6A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S3
3RT1446
3RT1946-6D
1 unit
41B
S6
3RT1456
3RT1956-6D
1 unit
41B
S10
3RT1466

parts)
3RT1966-6D
1 unit
41B
S12
3RT1476
3RT1976-6D
1 unit
41B
B
B
B
3RT1964-6V
3RT1965-6V
3RT1966-6V
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
B
B
3RT1975-6V
3RT1976-6V
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
For 3RT12 vacuum contactors

S10
3RT1264
3RT1265
3RT1266
S12
3RT1275
3RT1276
3 vacuum interrupters with fixing parts
For contactors with 4 main contacts

S2
3RT1336
3RT1936-6E
1 unit
41B
S3
3RT1344
3RT1346

parts)
B
B
3RT1944-6E
3RT1946-6E
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S2
3RT103.
Arc chutes, 3-pole
3RT1936-7A
1 unit
41B
S3
3RT104.,
3RT1446
3RT1946-7A
1 unit
41B
S6
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
B
B
B
3RT1954-7A
3RT1955-7A
3RT1956-7A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S10
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
B
B
B
3RT1964-7A
3RT1965-7A
3RT1966-7A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S12
3RT1075
3RT1076
B
B
3RT1975-7A
3RT1976-7A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S6
3RT1456
3RT1956-7B
1 unit
41B
S10
3RT1466
3RT1966-7B
1 unit
41B
S12
3RT1476
3RT1976-7B
1 unit
41B
3/116
Siemens IC 10 2014
Arc chutes

Siemens AG 2013

3TF6 vacuum contactors,
3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Standards
Electromagnetic compatibility
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The 3TF68/3TF69 contactors are suitable for use in any climate.
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers
may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on
the configuration with other devices (see Accessories and Spare
Parts on page 3/125).
The 3TF68/3TF69. .-.C contactors for AC operation are fitted

with an electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism
with a high interference immunity (for EMC values see
page 3/120). The solenoid coil is connected to varistors for
protection against overvoltages.
Main contacts
Contact erosion indication with 3TF68/3TF69 vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked
during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the
contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double
slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position,
then the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters simultaneously.
The 3TF68/3TF69. .-.Q.. contactors for AC operation are designed for operation in systems with AC control supply voltage
which is subject to strong interference. The solenoid systems of
these contactors are configured in the DC economy circuit with
rectification. The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection against overvoltages.
Protection of the main current paths
An integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths
dampens the switching overvoltage rises to safe values. This
prevents multiple restricting. It can therefore be assumed that
the motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages with steep voltage rises.
Note:
Auxiliary contacts
Contact reliability
These auxiliary contacts are particularly suitable for solid-state
circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage 17 V.
During operation in installations in which the emitted interference

limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output contactors
in converters, 3TF68/3TF69. .-.Q contactors without connection of the main current path circuit are recommended.
Contactor
Type
3TF68 and 3TF69
According to IEC 60947-5-1

690
Conventional thermal current

Ith = Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
10
AC load
-
At 24 V
At 110 V
At 125 V
At 220 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
6
5.6
At 380 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 660 V
At 690 V
A
A
A
A
A
4
3.6
2.5
2.5
2.3
At 24 V
At 60 V
At 110 V
At 125 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
3.2
2.5
- At 220 V
- At 440 V
- At 600 V
A
A
A
0.9
0.33
0.22
At 24 V
At 60 V
At 110 V
At 125 V
A
A
A
A
10
5
1.14
0.98
- At 220 V
- At 440 V
- At 600 V
A
A
A
0.48
0.13
0.07
V AC
600
DC load
-

-

Rated voltage, max.
Switching capacity
A 600, P 600
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/117
Overview
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor
3TF68 and 3TF69
Operating cycles
The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or

AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on the breaking current. It is
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched
randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the
supply system.
The characteristic curves apply to 230 V AC.
4
3
2
NSB0_00651b
10
8
6
4
3
2
10
8
6
4
3
2
10
-2
10
Contactor
3 4
-1
6 8 10
3 4
0
1
2 3 4 6 8 10
6 8 10
Breaking current a ( A )
3TF68 and 3TF69
Contact erosion indication with vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be

checked during operation with the help of three white
double slides on the contactor base.
If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is
< 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the
vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum
reliability, it is recommended to replace all three vacuum
interrupters at once.
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
8
6
4
6
4
2
6
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
10
8
6
4
10
3TF68 3TF69
Contactor type
NSB0_00654a
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
2
107
8
6
4
2
2
Operating cycles at 400 V
10
8
6
4
10
10
100
200
400
600
635
1000
820
335
450
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
3/118
Siemens IC 10 2014
2000
4000
(A) 6000
e (A)
Prated (kW)
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
:
Type
Size
mm
3TF69
14
14
230 x 276 x 237
230 x 295 x 237
'
3TF68
Operating cycles 3)

kV
kV

kV
90
22,5 22,5
90

surface.
NSB0_00649a
General data
Permissible mounting position, installation instructions1)2)
Mirror contacts
One NC contact each must be connected in series for the right and left
auxiliary switch block respectively.
During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55

-55 ... +80
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
8.1/5 and 4.7/10

9/5 and 5.7/10
9.5/5 and 5.7/10

8.6/5 and 5.1/10
g/ms
g/ms
12.8/5 and 7.4/10

14.4/5 and 9.1/10
13.5/5 and 7.8/10

13.5/5 and 7.8/10
Sine pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
See "Conductor cross-sections" on page 3/122
See "Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)" on page 3/120
Main circuit
1 000
1 250
500
630
Weld-free4)
400
500

10

10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
1)
To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the
contactors.
2)
If mounted at a 90 angle (current paths are horizontally above each
other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the
normal values.
3) See "Endurance of the auxiliary contacts", page 3/118.
4)
Note:
For short-circuit protection of contactors with overload relay,
see Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS"
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/119
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF68
3TF69
Size
14
14
Control

AC operation, Us max
- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
1850/1
49/0.15
950/0.98
30.6/0.31
AC operation, Us min
- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
1200/1
13.5/0.47
600/0.98
12.9/0.43
DC economy circuit1)
- Closing at 24 V
- Closed
W
W
1010
28
960
20.6
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
1 000/0.99
11/1
1 150/0.99
11/1
For contactors of type 3TF68/3TF69..-.Q:

AC operation, Us min2)
- Closing
- Closed
(Values apply to cold and warm coil)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)3)

70 ... 100
80 ... 120
70 ... 80
DC economy circuit
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
76 ... 110
50
86 ... 280
19 ... 25
ms
10 ... 15
10
ms
ms
35 ... 90
65 ... 90
45 ... 160
30 ... 80
Arcing time
For contactors of type 3TF68/3TF69..-.Q:
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Operating times for 1.0 x U s

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)3)

70 ... 100
85 ... 100
70
DC economy circuit
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
80 ... 90
50
90 ... 125
19 ... 25
Standard
Reduced make-time
ms
ms
120
90
120
--
ms
100
300
Minimum command duration

for closing
Minimum interval time between two ON commands
At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to 10 % are possible.

2)
Including reversing contactor.
3) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.
1)
Contactor
Type
3TF6.44-.CF7 3TF6.44-.CM7 3TF6.44-.CP7 3TF6.44-.CQ7 3TF6.44-.CS7
V AC
Overvoltage type acc. to IEC 60801
110 ... 132
200 ... 240
230 ... 277
380 ... 460
500 ... 600
Burst/Surge
Degree of severity acc. to IEC 60801

Burst
Surge
Overvoltage resistance
Burst
kV
Surge
kV
3/120
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF68
3TF69
Size
14
14
A
A
A
700
630
450
910
850
800
240
415
545
720
780
323
558
735
970
1385
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 55 C up to 690 V
At 55 C 1 000 V
Rated power for AC loads with p.f. = 0.95

at 55 C
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads

with Ie
At 40C
mm2
2 x 240
At 55C
2 x 185
Ie 800 A: 2 x 60 x 5
(copper busbars)
Ie < 800 A: 2 x 240
A
A
630
435
820
580
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
200
347
434
600
600
260
450
600
800
800
mm


Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
Up to 690 V
1 000 V
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V

Up to 690 V
610
690
kW
355
400
A
A
300
210
360
250
kW
kW
kW
kW
A
97
168
210
278
290
110
191
250
335
350
No-load switching frequency AC
1/h
2 000
1 000
No-load switching frequency DC

AC-1
AC-2
AC-3
AC-4
1/h
1/h
1/h
1/h
1/h
1 000
700
200
500
150
1 000
700
200
500
150
1/h
15
15
At 400 V
The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200 000 operating cycles:
Up to 690 V
1 000 V
At 230 V
400 V
500 V1)
690 V1)
1 000 V1)
Switching frequency
Contactors with overload relays (mean value)

1)
Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 = Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V,

for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/121
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF68
3TF69
Size
14
14
Main conductors:
Screw terminals
Busbar connections

Solid or stranded
Terminal screw
- Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
AWG
mm
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
2/0 ... 500 MCM
50
50 ... 240
50 ... 240
2/0 ... 500 MCM
60 (Ue 690 V)
50 (Ue > 690 V)
Nm
lb.in
M10 x 30
14 ... 24
124 ... 210
M12 x 40
20 ... 35
177 ... 310
Nm
15 ... 25
1 x 26 or 2 x 11
A/F 6 (hexagon socket)
25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in)
15 ... 38
1 x 46 or 2 x 18
A/F 8 (hexagon socket)
35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in)
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
lb.in
2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (1 ... 2.5)2)

2 x (0.5 ... 1)2)/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
2 x (1 ... 1.5)
2 x (18 ... 12)
0.8 ... 1.4
7 ... 12
With box terminal1)

-
Connectable copper bars

Width
Max. thickness
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
mm
mm
Auxiliary conductors:
1)
2)
Solid
Pin-end connector to DIN 46231
Solid or stranded
Tightening torque
See "Accessories and Spare Parts", page 3/125.

Contactor
Type
3TF68
3TF69
Size
14
14
V AC
600
600
630
820
hp
hp
hp
hp
231
266
530
664
290
350
700
860
hp
A
A
600
540
820
810
hp
hp
hp
hp
150
200
400
400
-300
600
600
s and u rated data

Open and enclosed
(s and u approved values)
at 60 Hz
-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
SIZE
- Open
- Enclosed
at 60 Hz
-
At 200 V
At 230 V
At 460 V
At 575 V
Overload relays
Short-circuit protection with overload relays see Chapter 7,

3/122
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RB12
Type
Setting range
200 ... 820
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactors for AC control

Electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with high EMC1)
With overvoltage protection of the coil (varistor)
3TF68/69
Rated data
Auxiliary
contacts
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
AC-2 and AC-3 (up to 55 C)
AC-1
OperaRatings2) of three-phase motors at 50 Hz

tional
and
current Ie 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1 000 V
up to
690 V
OperaVersion
tional
current Ie
(at 40 C)
NO
NC
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
AC operation 50/60 Hz1)

Size 14
A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
630
200
335
434
600
--
700
110 ... 132 AC

200 ... 240 AC
A
}
3TF6844-0CF7
3TF6844-0CM7
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
630
200
335
434
600
600
700
110 ... 132 AC

200 ... 240 AC
C
A
3TF6844-8CF7
3TF6844-8CM7
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
820
260
450
600
800
--
910
110 ... 132 AC

200 ... 240 AC
A
}
3TF6944-0CF7
3TF6944-0CM7
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
820
260
450
600
800
800
910
110 ... 132 AC

200 ... 240 AC
C
C
3TF6944-8CF7
3TF6944-8CM7
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
1)

For use of 3TF6 vacuum contactors in the environment of frequency
converters, we recommend ordering a special version:
3TF6 ...-....-Z A02.
3TF68/3TF69 vacuum contactors in their basic version are supplied with
integrated overvoltage damping for the main current paths. The surge suppression circuit is not required for operation in circuits with DC choppers,
frequency converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms,
for example.
The circuit could be damaged by the voltage peaks and harmonics and
thus cause phase-to-phase short circuits. For this reason, the contactors
can also be supplied without integrated overvoltage damping. Without
additional price.
The Article No. must be supplemented by "-Z" and the order code "A02".
2)
Other voltages see page 3/124.

For accessories see page 3/125,
for spare parts see page 3/126.

Footnotes for page 3/124:

1)
2)
On these versions, a magnetic system is used in the DC economy circuit.
A varistor can be retrofitted. A 3TC4417-4AB4 reversing contactor with
preassembled connecting cable (approx. 1 m) and plug is included in the
scope of supply of the vacuum contactor.
3) On this version, a magnetic system with rectifier is used in the DC economy circuit. Varistor integrated. A 3TC4417-4A. reversing contactor with
preassembled connecting cable (approx. 1 m) is included in the scope of
supply of the vacuum contactor.
4)
For use of 3TF6 vacuum contactors in the environment of frequency
converters, we recommend ordering a special version:
3TF6 ...-....-Z A02.
3TF68/3TF69 vacuum contactors in their basic version are supplied with
integrated overvoltage damping for the main current paths. The surge suppression circuit is not required for operation in circuits with DC choppers,
frequency converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms,
for example.
The circuit could be damaged by the voltage peaks and harmonics and
thus cause phase-to-phase short circuits. For this reason, the contactors
can also be supplied without integrated overvoltage damping. Without
additional price.
The Article No. must be supplemented by "-Z" and the order code "A02".
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/123
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactors for DC operation and for AC operation which is subject to strong interference
Main conductors: busbar connections
DC solenoid system with 3TC44 reversing contactor for series resistor
A1
A2
3TF68,
3TF69
V
V
Main
contactor
6 Connecting
NSB0_01374a
cable, 1 m
3TC44
Reversing
contactor
3TF6.33-.Q.7
Rated data
Auxiliary
contacts
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TF6833-1DB4
1 unit
41B
3TF6833-8DB4
1 unit
41B
3TF6933-1DB4
1 unit
41B
24 DC
3TF6933-8DB4
1 unit
41B
AC-1
OperaRatings1) of three-phase motors at

tional
50 Hz and
current Ie 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1 000 V
up to
690 V
OperaVersion
tional
current Ie
(at 40 C)
NO
NC
--
700
24 DC
600
700
24 DC
--
910
24 DC
800
910
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Article No.
Price
per PU
DC operation DC economy circuit2)3)

Size 14
A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 31 43 53 61 71 83
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 32 44 54 62 72 84
630
200
820
260
335
450
434
600
600
800
AC operation 50/60 Hz with DC economy circuit3)4)

For AC operation which is subject to strong interference
Size 14
A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 31 43 53 61 71 83
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 32 44 54 62 72 84
630
200
335
434
600
820
260
450
600
800
--
700
110 ... 120 AC

220 ... 240 AC
380 ... 420 AC
C
A
C
3TF6833-1QG7
3TF6833-1QL7
3TF6833-1QV7
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
600
700
220 ... 240 AC
3TF6833-8QL7
1 unit
41B
--
910
110 ... 120 AC

220 ... 240 AC
380 ... 420 AC
C
A
C
3TF6933-1QG7
3TF6933-1QL7
3TF6933-1QV7
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
800
910
110 ... 120 AC

220 ... 240 AC
C
C
3TF6933-8QG7
3TF6933-8QL7
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
For footnotes see page 3/123.

For accessories see page 3/125,
for spare parts see page 3/126.
Rated control supply voltages (change of 10th and 11th digit of the Article No.)
voltage Us
Contactor type 3TF6844-.C..,

3TF6944-.C..

voltage Us
Size 14
AC operation
Contactor type 3TF6833-.D..,

3TF6933-.D..
Size 14
DC operation
Solenoid coils for 50/60 Hz
Solenoid coils for DC economy circuit
110 ... 132 V AC
F7
24 V DC
B4
200 ... 240 V AC
M7
110 V DC
F4
230 ... 277 V AC
P7
125 V DC
G4
380 ... 460 V AC
Q7
220 V DC
M4
500 ... 600 V AC
S7
230 V DC
P4
3/124
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Accessories
Version

voltage Us
V AC
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
V DC
Varistors2)
--
24 ... 48
3TX7572-3G
1 unit
41B
For DC economy circuit; for lateral snapping -onto auxiliary switches

--
48 ... 127
3TX7572-3H
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 C
3TX7572-3J
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TX7572-3.
1)
2)
The surge suppressor (varistor) is included in the scope of supply of the

3TF68 and 3TF69 contactors with AC operation.
Includes the peak value of the alternating voltage on the DC side.
Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks with screw terminals

For operation in dusty atmospheres and in solid-state circuits
with rated operational currents
Ie AC-14 and DC-13 of 1 ... 300 mA at 3 ... 60 V
For mounting onto the side of contactors
3TY7561-1UA00
1 unit
41B
3TX7090-0D
1 unit
41B
3TX7686-0A
1 unit
41B
3TX7696-0A
1 unit
41B
3TX7680-0D
1 unit
41B
3TX7680-0E
1 unit
41B
3TX7570-1E
1 unit
41B
3TX7690-1F
1 unit
41B
With 1 changeover contact.

2nd auxiliary switch block, left or right
(replacement for 3TY6561-1U, 3TY6561-1V)
Mounting on the left
5TY7561-1.
Mounting on the right
51
61
52 54
62 64

For snapping onto the side of auxiliary switch,
with surge suppression.
Operating range: 17 V to 30 V DC.
Power consumption: 0.5 W at 24 V DC.
Fitted with varistor.1)
Terminal covers
For protection against inadvertent contact with exposed busbar
connections
Can be screwed onto free screw end on middle connecting bar.
2 units required per contactor.
(1 set = 2 units)
3TX76.6-0A
Links for paralleling (star jumpers), 3-pole

Link for paralleling
without connection terminals2)
Cover plates for links for paralleling
A cover plate must be used in order to protect against inadvertent
contact with exposed busbar connections (EN 50274).
Box terminals for laminated copper bars

Without auxiliary conductor connection for 3TF68 (1 set = 3 units)
With single covers for protection against inadvertent contact
(EN 50274)
With auxiliary conductor connection for 3TF69 (1 set = 3 units)
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary conductors:
Solid 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) mm2
Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) mm2
Solid or stranded 2 x (18 ... 12) AWG
Tightening torque 0.8 ... 1.4 Nm (7 ... 12 lb.in)
1)
Technical specifications for coupling links see

"Accessories for 3RT10 Contactors", page 3/101.
2)
The link for paralleling can be reduced by one pole
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/125
Surge suppressors1) Varistors
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 335 ... 450 kW
Spare parts
Version
Auxiliary contacts
Version
DT Screw terminals
Connections
Article No.
NO
NC
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
NC

Left
For lateral mounting
Right
1st auxiliary switch block

(replacement for 3TY7561-1A/ -1B)
1
3TY7561-1.A00
--
13 21
31 43
14 22
32 44
13 25
35 43
14 26
36 44
1st auxiliary switch block

1
--
2nd auxiliary switch block

(replacement for 3TY7561-1K/ -1L)
1
--
53 61
71 83
54 62
72 84
3TY7561-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3TY7561-1EA00
1 unit
41B
3TY7561-1KA00
1 unit
41B
3TY7681-1G
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
For reconnection of the coil with DC economy circuit

--
--
B1 25
--
B2 26
Version
For type
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Solenoid coils
AC operation1)
The solenoid coils are fitted as standard with varistors
against overvoltage; the coil is supplied with switch-on
electronics.
DC operation
1)
3TF68
3TY7683-0C..
3TF69
3TY7693-0C..
3TF68
3TY7683-0D..
3TF69
3TY7693-0D..
DC economy circuit
The solenoid coils for size 14 are supplied without

reversing contactor.
3TY76.3-0. . .
Vacuum interrupters
Set with 3 vacuum interrupters with components
1)
3TF68
3TY7680-0B
1 unit
41B
In order to ensure reliable operation of the contactors,

3TF69
only original replacement interrupters should be used.
3TY7690-0B
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Rated control supply voltages for solenoid coils: The 10th and 11th digit of
the Article No. must be supplemented according to page 3/124.
Version
Rated control supply DT Screw terminals

voltage Us
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC
3TC44 reversing contactors

Complete with series resistor, 1 m connecting
cable and plug-in connector
110 ... 120

220 ... 240
380 ... 420
D
D
D
3TY7684-0QG7
3TY7684-0QL7
3TY7684-0QV7
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
For 3TF68. .-.Q
110 ... 120

220 ... 240
380 ... 420
D
D
D
3TY7683-0QG7
3TY7683-0QL7
3TY7683-0QV7
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
For 3TF69. .-.Q
110 ... 120

220 ... 240
380 ... 420
D
D
D
3TY7693-0QG7
3TY7693-0QL7
3TY7693-0QV7
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
For 3TF68. .-.Q, 3TF69. .-.Q
Solenoid coils for main contactor, with rectifier bridge
3/126
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3TB5 contactors with DC solenoid system,
3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Overview
The 3TB5 contactors are suitable for use in any climate.
Auxiliary contacts
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers

may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on
the configuration with other devices (see Accessories and Spare
Parts on page 3/133).
The contactors are equipped with two lateral auxiliary switch

blocks each with 1 NO + 1 NC contact. Further auxiliary switch
blocks cannot be fitted to the DC-operated contactors.
Contactor
Type
3TB50
3TB52 ... 3TB56
Size
8 ... 12

690
Conventional thermal current

Ith = Rated operational current Ie/AC-12
10
AC load
-
At 24 V
At 110 V
At 125 V
At 220 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
6
5.6
At 380 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 660 V
At 690 V
A
A
A
A
A
4
3.6
2.5
2.5
--
At 24 V
At 60 V
At 110 V
At 125 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
3.2
2.5
10
10
8
6
- At 220 V
- At 440 V
- At 600 V
A
A
A
0.9
0.33
0.22
2
0.6
0.4
At 24 V
At 60 V
At 110 V
At 125 V
A
A
A
A
10 (10)
5 (7)
1.14 (3.2)
0.98 (2.5)
10 (10)
5 (4)
2.4 (1.8)
2.1 (1.6)
- At 220 V
- At 440 V
- At 600 V
A
A
A
0.48 (0.9)
0.13 (0.33)
0.075 (0.22)
1.1 (0.9)
0.32 (0.27)
0.21 (0.18)
V AC
600
DC load
-
Rated operational current Ie/DC-13 1)

-

Rated voltage, max.
Switching capacity
1)
A 600, P 600
Values in brackets apply to auxiliary contacts with delayed NC contact.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/127
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Contactor
3TB5
The characteristic curves show the contact

endurance of the contactors when switching
resistive and inductive AC loads (AC-1/AC-3)
depending on the breaking current and rated
operational voltage. It is assumed that the
operating mechanisms are switched
randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase
angle of the supply system.
The rated operational current Ie complies with
utilization category AC-4 (breaking six times
the rated operational current) and is intended
for a contact endurance of approx. 200 000
operating cycles.
If a shorter contact endurance is sufficient, the
rated operational current Ie/AC-4 can be
increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation,
i.e. normal switching (breaking the rated
operational current according to utilization
category AC-3) in combination with intermittent inching (breaking several times the rated
operational current according to utilization
category AC-4), the contact endurance can
be calculated approximately from the
following equation:
A
X = ---------------------------------------------------------C A
1 + --------- ---- 1
100 B
in operating cycles
in operating cycles
in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total
switching operations
3/128
Siemens IC 10 2014
Contactor type 3TB50 3TB54

3TB52
3TB56
10
8
6
4
NSB0_00652a
2
6
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
2
10
10
30 40 50 60 80 100
110
55
200 300 400 600 800 1000

170 250 400
90
132
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
200
(A) 4000
(A)
Prated (kW)
2000
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
:
Type
Size
mm
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
10
12
120 x 150 x 198
135 x 180 x 217
145 x 252 x 264
160 x 252 x 282
'
3TB50

surface.
22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5
NSB0_00650c
General data
Permissible mounting position,
installation instructions1)

2)
1000

690
Mirror contacts
During operation
-25 ... +55
During storage
-50 ... +80


Shock resistance (rectangular pulse)
g/ms
5/10
5.9/10
5.9/10
5.9/10
250
315
400
630
224
250
315
500

LV HRC, type 3NA; DIAZED, type 5SB
with short-circuit current Ik = 1 kA according to IEC 60947-5-1
16

10
30
60
86
Main circuit
LV HRC, type 3NA; DIAZED, type 5SB
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
Control
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
Closing = Closed
Closing delay
Opening delay3)
Arcing time
25
(The values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage,

10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

ms
ms
ms
105 ... 360

18 ... 30
10 ... 15
115 ... 400

22 ... 35
10 ... 15
105 ... 400

24 ... 55
10 ... 15
110 ... 400

40 ... 110
10 ... 15
ms
ms
120 ... 230

20 ... 26
130 ... 250

24 ... 32
115 ... 250

35 ... 50
120 ... 250

60 ... 95
Operating times for 1.0 x Us

Closing delay
Opening delay3)
1)
For reversing duty, deviations from the vertical axis are not permitted.
See "Contact endurance of the main contacts", page 3/128.
3)
The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/129
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Contactor
Type
3TB50
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
Size
10
12
A
A
170
160
230
200
325
300
425
400
kW
kW
kW
kW
61
105
138
183
76
132
173
228
114
195
260
340
152
262
345
455
mm
70
95
185
240
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
- At 40 C up to 690 V
- At 55 C up to 690 V
Rated power for AC loads1) with p.f.= 0.95 (at 55 C)
-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads with Ie
2)

The following applies to a contact endurance of about
200 000 operating cycles:
52
72
103
120
kW
kW
kW
kW
15.6
27
35
45
21
37
48
64
31
55
72
92
37.5
65
85.5
106
110
170
250
400
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
80
18
200
80
18
300
300
33
400
330
33
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
3.4
0.8
0.5
3.4
0.8
0.5
3.8
0.9
0.6
3.8
0.9
0.6
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
20
3.2
1.6
20
3.2
1.6
300
4
2
400
4
2
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
160
11.5
4
200
11.5
4
300
11
5.2
400
11
5.2
16
7.5
2.5
16
7.5
2.5
35
11
3
35
11
3
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
0.6
0.17
0.12
0.6
0.17
0.12
0.6
0.18
0.125
0.6
0.18
0.125
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A
160
160
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
160
1.4
0.75
200
1.4
0.75
300
1.4
0.75
400
1.4
0.75
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz

-
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
Max. permisible operational current Ie/AC-4

- At 400 V
Load rating with DC

- 1 conducting path

- 1 conducting path
1)
Up to 24 V A
60 V A
110 V A

account).
3/130
Siemens IC 10 2014
2)
See "Selection and Ordering Data" 3/132.
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Contactor
Type
Size
3TB50
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
10
12
35 ... 95
50 ... 120
20 x 3
M8
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
25 x 5
M10
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
2 x (25 x 3)
M10
Main circuit
Switching frequency
-
AC-1
AC-2
AC-3
AC-4
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
1 000
500
500
250
h-1
15
Main conductors:
Screw terminals

Busbars
Terminal screw
mm2
mm2
mm
16 ... 70
25 ... 70
15 x 3
M6
mm2
mm2
mm2
1 ... 2.5
0.75 ... 1.5
2 x 1 ... 2.5
mm2
--
25 ... 70
35 ... 70
50 ... 120
A
A
150
135
170
153
240
215
300
270
hp
hp
hp
hp
25
50
100
125
30
60
120
160
40
75
150
200
50
100
200
250
3RB2056
3RB2056
3RB2066
3RB2066
50 ... 200
50 ... 200
50 ... 250
200 ... 540
4
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
A
A
150
135
150
135
240
215
390
350
hp
hp
hp
hp
25
50
100
125
25
50
100
125
30
75
150
200
-125
250
3001)
3RB2056
3RB2056
3RB2066
3RB2066
50 ... 200
50 ... 200
50 ... 250
200 ... 540
4
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
Solid
Pin-end connector (DIN 46231)
Protective conductors:
s and u rated data

s rated data
- Open
- Enclosed
at 60 Hz (enclosed)
-
115 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
Overload relays
Type
- Setting range
NEMA/EEMAC size
- Contactors
- Starters (= contactors + overload relay, enclosed)
u rated data
- Open
- In enclosure
at 60 Hz
-
115 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
Overload relays
- Setting range
Type
A
NEMA/EEMAC size
- Contactors
- Starters (= contactors + overload relay, enclosed)
Short-circuit protection devices
CLASS RK5 fuses
400
400
450
600
175
175
250
600
1)
At 575/600 V AC max. rated motor current 325 A and

motor starting current 3 250 A.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/131
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW

3TB50
Size
Rated data
Auxiliary
contacts
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
AC-1
OperaRatings1) of
tional
three-phase motors
current Ie at 50 Hz and
up to
Operational
current Ie
(at 40 C)
Version
NO
NC
V DC
690 V
230 V
400 V 500 V
kW
kW
kW
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
690 V
kW
DC operation DC solenoid system

A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
110
37
55
75
90
170
24
3TB5017-0BB4
1 unit
41B
170
55
90
110
132
230
24
3TB5217-0BB4
1 unit
41B
10
250
75
132
160
200
325
24
3TB5417-0BB4
1 unit
41B
12
400
115
200
255
355
425
24
3TB5617-0BB4
1 unit
41B
1)

Options
Rated control supply voltages
Contactor type 3TB50, 3TB52, 3TB54
3TB56
Size 6, 8, 10
12
DC operation
24 V DC
B4
B4
110 V DC
F4
--
220 V DC
M4
M4
3/132
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Accessories
For contactors
Size
Version
Type

voltage Us
V AC
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
V DC
3TB50
Varistors1)
for sticking onto the
contactor base or for
mounting separately
8 ... 12
3TB52
...
3TB56
-Varistors1)
for separate screw fixing or -snapping onto TH 35
-standard mounting rail
24 ... 48 24 ... 70
48 ... 127 70 ... 150
127 ... 240 150 ... 250
240 ... 400 -400 ... 600 --
A
B
A
B
B
3TX7462-3G
3TX7462-3H
3TX7462-3J
3TX7462-3K
3TX7462-3L
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 70 B
70 ... 150 B
150 ... 250 B
3TX7522-3G
3TX7522-3H
3TX7522-3J
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
------
B
B
B
B
B
3TX7522-3R
3TX7522-3S
3TX7522-3T
3TX7522-3U
3TX7522-3V
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 250 A
3TX7462-3D
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TX7462-3.
3TX7522-3.
Surge suppressors RC elements

6
3TB50
RC elements
For lateral snapping onto
auxiliary switch or TH 35
standard mounting rail
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
3TX7522-3.
Surge suppressors Diodes

6 ... 12
3TB50
...
3TB56
Diode assemblies2)
-(diode and Zener diode)
for DC solenoid system, for
sticking onto the contactor
base or for mounting separately
3TX7462-3.
1)
2)

Not for DC economy circuit.
For contactors
Size
Type
3TB50
3TB52
10 and
12
3TB54,
3TB56
Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Terminal covers
For protection against inadvertent contact
with exposed busbar connections
Can be screwed on free screw end
For covering one busbar connection
(1 set = 6 units)
M6
3TX6506-3B
1 unit
41B
M8
3TX6526-3B
1 unit
41B
M10 B
3TX6546-3B
1 unit
41B
3TX6526-3B

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/133
Surge suppressors Varistors
Siemens AG 2013

3-pole, 55 ... 200 kW
Spare parts
For contactors
Auxiliary contacts
Version
DT Screw terminals
Connections
Article No.
Size
Type
NO
NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC

Left
For lateral mounting

6
3TB50
Right
(replacement for 3TY6501-1A/-1B)

1
--
--
--
--
--
31 43
--
--
35 43
13 21
14 22
--
31 43
3TY6501-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3TY6501-1E
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1A
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1B
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1E
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
32 44
35 43
36 44
3TY6561-1A
8 ... 12
3TB52 ...
3TB56
13 21
--
14 22
32 44
36 44
For contactors
Size
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Type

only original replacement contacts should be used.
3TY6520-0A
6
8
10
12
3TB50
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
(1 set = 3 moving and 6 fixed switching

elements)
B
B
B
B
3TY6500-0A
3TY6520-0A
3TY6540-0A
3TY6560-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
6
8
10
12
3TB50
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
1 arc chute, 3-pole
}
}
}
}
3TY6502-0A
3TY6522-0A
3TY6542-0A
3TY6562-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
Arc chutes
3TY6502-0A
Solenoid coils
DC operation1)
6
8
10
12
3TB50
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
3TY6503-0B..
3TY6523-0B..
3TY6543-0B..
3TY6563-0B..
3TY65.
1)
Rated control supply voltages for solenoid coils: The 10th and 11th digit of
the Article No. must be supplemented according to page 3/132.
3/134
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Overview
The contactors with screw terminals are finger-safe
acc. to EN 50274.
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
Connection methods
The contactors are available in versions with screw terminals,
6.3 mm plug-in terminals and solder pin connections for
soldering in printed circuit boards.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate.
Contactor
Type
3TF2
Diagram legend:
Ia = Breaking current
Ie = Rated operational current
30
NSB0_00659
Coupling links
The contact endurance for utilization

category AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends
mainly on the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are
switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized
with the phase angle of the supply system.
10
5
3
2
Contactor relays
and coupling links
DC-13
220 V
1
0,5
DC-13
110 V
DC-13
24 V
AC-15/AC-14
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1
0,3 0,5
2 3 4 5 7 10
(A)
e -DC-13
e -DC-13
e-DC-13
e-AC-15/AC-14
110 V
24 V
230 V
220 V
A
X = ---------------------------------------------------------C A
1 + --------- ---- 1
100 B
X = Contact endurance for mixed operation in
operating cycles
A = Contact endurance for normal operation
(Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
B = Contact endurance for inching
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles
C = Inching operations as a percentage of total
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
2
2
104
8
6
4
104
8
6
4
2
103
6
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
107
8
6
4
8
6
4
107
8
6
4
Contactor type 3TF28
The characteristic curves show the

contact endurance of the contactors when
switching inductive AC loads (AC-3)
depending on the breaking current and
rated operational voltage. It is assumed
that the operating mechanisms are
switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized
with the phase angle of the supply system.
The rated operational current Ie complies
with utilization category AC-4 (breaking
six times the rated operational current)
and is intended for a contact endurance of
approx. 200 000 operating cycles. If a
shorter contact endurance is sufficient,
the rated operational current Ie/AC-4 can
be increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal switching (breaking the
rated operational current according to
utilization category AC-3) in combination
with intermittent inching (breaking several
times the rated operational current
according to utilization category AC-4),
the contact endurance can be calculated
3TF20
3TK2
NSB0_00653a
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
2
2
104
8
6
4
104
8
6
4
2
103
2
103
1
8 10
2,2
20
30
40 50 60 80
(A)
(A)
Prated (kW)
Diagram legend:
= Breaking current
a
e
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/135
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
3TF20, 3TF28
3TF22, 3TF29
Size
00
00
mm
45 x 48 x 63
--
mm
45 x 48 x 91
45 x 48 x 91
mm
45 x 48 x 88
45 x 48 x 116
Type
With 3TX4490 surge suppressor
General data
Any

AC operation
DC operation
Auxiliary switch block


Screw terminals
Flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm
V
V
V
690
500
500
6901)
---

Screw terminals
kV
kV
kV
6
6
6
6
---
Up to 300
Protective separation between coil and main contacts

(according to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N)
Mirror contacts
Permissible ambient temperature2)

During operation
During storage
Yes, this applies to both the basic

Yes, acc. to IEC 60947-4-1,
unit as well as to between the basic Appendix F and SUVA
unit and the mounted auxiliary switch
block acc. to IEC 60947-4-1,
Appendix F
C
C
-25 ... +55

-55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1 Appendix C
IP00/open
Connection range for screw terminals
IP20
Finger-safe for screw terminals
Shock resistance
Without 3TX44 auxiliary switch block
- Rectangular pulse
AC operation g/ms
DC operation g/ms
8.3/5 and 5.2/10

11.3/5 and 9.2/10
---
- Sine pulse
AC operation g/ms
DC operation g/ms
13/5 and 8/10

17.4/5 and 12.9/10
---
- Rectangular pulse
AC operation g/ms
DC operation g/ms
5/5 and 3.6/10

9/5 and 6.9/10
5/5 and 3.6/10

9/5 and 7.3/10
- Sine pulse
AC operation g/ms
DC operation g/ms
7.8/5 and 5.6/10

13.9/5 and 10.1/10
7.8/5 and 5.6/10

14/5 and 11/10
With 3TX44 auxiliary switch block
3)

Main circuit4)
- Type of coordination "2"5)
- Weld-free
A
A
A
25
10
10
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
1)
Auxiliary contacts 500 V

Applies to 50/60 Hz coil:
At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, , side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the max.
ambient temperature is +40 C.
3)
See "Conductor Cross-Sections" on page 3/139.
2)
3/136
Siemens IC 10 2014
4)
According to excerpt from IEC 60947-4-1

Type of coordination "1":
Destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible. The
contactor and/or overload relay can be replaced if necessary.
The overload relay must not suffer any damage. Contact welding on the
contactor is permissible, however, if the contacts can be easily separated.
5) A short-circuit current of I 6 kA applies to type of coordination "2".
q
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF2
Size
00
Control
Solenoid coil operating range1)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Standard version:
AC operation, 60 Hz
AC operation, 50/60 Hz1)
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
15
0.41
6.8
0.42
AC operation, 50 Hz
14.4
0.36
6.1
0.46
16.5/13.2
0.43/0.38
8.0/5.4
0.48/0.42
For USA and Canada:

AC operation, 50 Hz
AC operation, 60 Hz
DC operation
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing = Closed
VA
VA
VA
VA
14.6
0.38
6.5
0.40
14.4
0.30
6.0
0.44
mA
mA
3 x (230 V/Us)
1 x (230 V/Us)
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
5 ... 19
2 ... 22
To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing an additional dead
interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
16 ... 65
2 ... 5
ms
10 ... 15
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
5 ... 18
3 ... 21
To use the 3TF2 AC-operated contactor in reversing an additional dead
interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
19 ... 31
3 ... 4
ms
10 ... 15
Permissible residual current of the electronic circuit2) (with 0 signal)

AC operation
DC operation
Values apply with coil in cold state and at operating temperature for
operating range
AC operation
- Dead interval
DC operation
Arcing time
AC operation
- Dead interval
DC operation
Arcing time
1)

At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the max.
ambient temperature is +40 C.
2)
The 3TX4490-1J additional load module is recommended

for higher residual currents see Accessories, page 3/144.
3)
varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/137
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF28,
3TF29
3TF20. .-0. . .,
3TF22. .-0. . .
3TF20. .-3. . .,
3TF20. .-6. . .,
3TF20. .-7. . .
Size
00
00
00
Main circuit
Load rating with AC

Rated operational current Ie (at 40 C)
Up to 400/380 V
690/660 V
A
A
18
18
18
18
18
--
400/380 V
690/660 V
A
A
16
16
16
16
16
--
kW
kW
kW
kW
6.0
10
13
17
6.0
10
13
17
6.0
10
13
--
mm2
2.5
2.5
2.5
Up to 220 V
230 V
380 V
A
A
A
5.1
5.1
5.1
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
5.1
4.8
4.8
4.8
8.4
6.5
5.2
5.2
8.4
6.5
---
At 110 V
115 V
120 V
kW
kW
kW
0.7
0.7
0.7
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.3
127 V
200 V
220 V
kW
kW
kW
0.8
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.2
2.4
1.4
2.2
2.4
230 V
240 V
380 V
kW
kW
kW
1.4
1.5
2.2
2.5
2.6
4.0
2.5
2.6
4.0
400 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
2.2
2.5
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
460 V
500 V
575 V
kW
kW
kW
2.7
2.9
3.2
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
660 V
690 V
kW
kW
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
---
A
A
1.9
1.4
2.6
1.8
2.6
--
At 110 V
115 V
120 V
kW
kW
kW
0.23
0.24
0.26
0.32
0.33
0.35
0.32
0.33
0.35
127 V
200 V
220 V
kW
kW
kW
0.27
0.42
0.47
0.37
0.58
0.64
0.37
0.58
0.64
230 V
240 V
380 V
kW
kW
kW
0.49
0.51
0.81
0.67
0.70
1.10
0.67
0.70
1.10
400 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
0.85
0.93
1.0
1.15
1.20
1.27
1.15
1.20
1.27
460 V
500 V
575 V
kW
kW
kW
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.33
1.45
1.30
1.33
1.45
--
660 V
690 V
kW
kW
0.86
0.89
1.10
1.15
---
10 s current
70
At Ie/AC-3
0.3
Rated power of AC loads

P.f. 1
At 230/220 V
400/380 V
500 V
690/660 V

Rated power for motors with slipring or squirrel cage

at 50 and 60 Hz and

(contact endurance approx. 200 000 operating cycles at Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated operational current Ie1)
Rated power for motors with squirrel cage
at 50 and 60 Hz and

1)
Up to 400 V
690 V
The following applies:

Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/AC-4 r Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V,
for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency
3/138
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF28,
3TF29
3TF20. .-0. . .,
3TF22. .-0. . .
3TF20. .-3. . .,
3TF20. .-6. . .,
3TF20. .-7. . .
Size
00
00
00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
10
4
1.5
0.6
16
6
2
1
16
6
2
1
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
4
1.5
16
16
6
2
16
16
6
2
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
4
16
16
16
6
16
16
16
6
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
4
1.8
0.3
--
6
3
0.5
0.1
6
3
0.5
0.1
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
6
3
1.5
0.3
10
5
2
0.5
10
5
2
0.5
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
1.5
16
16
16
2
16
16
16
2
h-1
10000
AC-1
AC-2
AC-3
h-1
h-1
h-1
1000
500
1000
h-1
15

Switching frequency
for rated operation1)
Screw terminals
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x 4

2 x (20 ... 14) AWG, 1 x 12 AWG
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 1 x 2.5

Terminal screw
Prescribed tightening torque for terminal screws
mm2
1 x 1 ... 2.5
M3
0.8 ... 1.3
7 ... 11
Solid
Nm
lb.in
Flat connectors
When using a plug-in sleeve 6.3 1
Finely stranded with 6.3 2.5
mm2
mm2
0.5 ... 1
1 ... 2.5
(only for printed circuit boards)
Solder pin cross-section
mm
0.8 x 1.2
Solder pin cross-section, plug-in base
mm2
0.32 x 1.0
1)

z = z (Ie/I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/139
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Contactor
Type
3TF20 . .-0. . .
3TF20. .-3. . .,
3TF20. .-6. . .,
3TF20. .-7. . .
Size
00
00
V AC
600
300
16
16 (10 for solder pin connection)
s and u rated data of the 3TF20 contactors

Open and enclosed

- Single-phase
At 115 V
200 V
230 V
460/575 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
1.5
--
-1
1
--
- 3-phase
At 115 V
200 V
230 V
460/575 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
-3
3
5
-3 (1 for 3TF20..-6)
3 (1 for 3TF20..-6)
--
Overload relays
Type
3UA7
Setting range
Contactor
8 ... 10
Type
3TF2
Size
00
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts according to IEC 60947-1

690

10
24 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
4
4
4
220 V
230 V
380 V
A
A
A
4
4
3
400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
3
2
1
1
24 V
48 V
110 V
A
A
A
4
2.2
1.1
125 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
1.1
0.5
---
24 V
48 V
110 V
A
A
A
2.1
1.1
0.52
125 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
0.52
0.27
---
Rated voltage, max.
V AC
600
Auxiliary switch blocks, max.
V AC
300
AC load
DC load

s, u and U rated data of the auxiliary contacts
A 600, Q 300
Switching capacity
3/140
Siemens IC 10 2014
10
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW

Size 00
AC-1: Operational current Ie = 16 A (at 55 C)
Screw terminals
Auxiliary contacts
Operational
current Ie
Ratings1) of three-phase motors Ident. No.

at 50 Hz and
At 400/
380 V
230/
220 V
400/
380 V
500 V
690/
660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT Screw terminals
Version
NO
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
1 unit
41B
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
1 unit
41B
Price
per PU
Rated data
NC
Contactors with screw terminals

for screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
Ident. No. 01
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
AC operation
5
1.3
2.2
2.9
3.8
10
01
1
--
-1
D
B
3TF2810-0AP0
3TF2801-0AP0
2.4
10
01
1
--
-1
A
A
3TF2010-0AP0
3TF2001-0AP0
DC operation
3TF20. .-0. . .,
3TF28 . .-0. . .
1.3
2.2
2.9
3.8
10
01
1
--
-1
C
C
3TF2810-0BB4
3TF2801-0BB4
2.4
10
01
1
--
-1
A
C
3TF2010-0BB4
3TF2001-0BB4
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch blocks

Terminal designations of the auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012
Ident. No. 11
A1(+)
A2()
Ident. No. 22
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
AC operation
5
1.3
2.2
2.9
3.8
11
22
1
2
1
2
D
D
3TF2911-0AP0
3TF2922-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
2.4
11
22
1
2
1
2
D
D
3TF2211-0AP0
3TF2222-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
3TF22 . .-0. . .,
3TF29 . .-0. . .
1)
1.3
2.2
2.9
3.8
11
22
1
2
1
2
D
C
3TF2911-0BB4
3TF2922-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
2.4
11
22
1
2
1
2
C
C
3TF2211-0BB4
3TF2222-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B

For accessories, see pages 3/143 and 3/144.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/141
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Size 00
Flat connectors and solder pin connections
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
Operational
current Ie
Ratings1) of three-phase motors Ident. No.

at 50 Hz and
At 400/
380 V
230/
220 V
400/
380 V
500 V
690/
660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT Article No.
A2()
NO
PS*
PG
NC
Ident. No. 01
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
Contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mmflat connectors

AC operation
9
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Version
Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
Price
per PU
2.4
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
Flat connectors
--
10
01
1
--
-1
D
D
3TF2010-3AP0
3TF2001-3AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
10
01
1
--
-1
C
D
3TF2010-3BB4
3TF2001-3BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
9
2.4
3TF20. .-3. . .
Contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors

for screw fixing (diagonal)
AC operation
9
2.4
--
10
01
1
--
-1
C
D
3TF2010-7AP0
3TF2001-7AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
10
01
1
--
-1
C
C
3TF2010-7BB4
3TF2001-7BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
9
2.4
3TF20. .-7. . .
Contactors with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards

AC operation
9
2.4
Solder pin
connections
--
10
01
1
--
-1
D
D
3TF2010-6AP0
3TF2001-6AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
10
01
1
--
-1
C
C
3TF2010-6BB4
3TF2001-6BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
9
2.4
3TF20. .-6. . .
1)
For accessories, see pages 3/143 and 3/144.
voltage Us
Contactor type 3TF20, 3TF28

Size 00
AC operation
Contactor type 3TF22, 3TF29

Size 00
AC operation
Solenoid coils for AC 50 and 60 Hz

50 Hz
60 Hz
24 V AC
110 V AC
230/220 V AC
29 V AC
132 V AC
276 V AC

B0
F0
P01)
L2
DC operation
24 V DC
60 Hz
230/220 V AC
276 V AC
P01)
DC operation
1)
Solenoid coils for AC 50/60 Hz

230 V AC
50 Hz
24 V DC
AC operation
3/142

voltage Us
B4
Operating range at 220 V:

0.85 to 1.15 Us; lower operating range limit according to IEC 60947.
Please inquire about further voltages.
B4
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
Accessories
230/
220 V
400/
380 V
500 V
Auxiliary contacts
DT Screw terminals
Ident. No. Version
Connections
Article No.
NO
NC
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC
Rated operational
current
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 at

For expansion to 2, 4 or 5 auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012
Only for 3TF2.Ident. No. 10 (with auxiliary contact 1 NO)
4
3TX44. .-.A
11
22
23
32
-1
1
2
1
2
3
2
-----
-----
}
}
}
}
3TX4401-1A
3TX4412-1A
3TX4413-1A
3TX4422-1A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
41A
3TX4420-2A
1 unit
41A
3TX4411-2A
1 unit
41A
3TX4402-2A
1 unit
41A
3TX4411-2G
1 unit
41A
3TX4440-2A
1 unit
41A
3TX4431-2A
1 unit
41A
3TX4422-2A
1 unit
41A
3TX4422-2G
1 unit
41A
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
For expansion to 3 or 5 auxiliary contacts according to EN 50005

4
20
--
--
--
11
--
--
02
--
--
--
11; U
--
--
40
--
--
--
31
--
--
22
--
--
53 61 71 83
22; 2 U
--
--
57 67 75 85
53 63
54 64
53 61
54 62
51 61
52 62
57 65
58 66
53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84
53 61 73 83
54 62 74 84
54 62 72 84
58 68 76 86
For contactors

voltage Us
Time setting range

(minimum times)
Type
V DC
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
OFF-delay devices
For DC-operated contactors for bridging
short-time power failures up to 0.8 s
3TF2. . .-0BB4
24
0.25 or 0.5
3TX4490-1H
3TX4490-1H

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/143
Siemens AG 2013

3TF2 contactors,
3-pole, 2.2 ... 4 kW
For contactors
Rated control supply voltage Power consumption

Us
of LED at Us
Type
V AC
V DC
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mW
Surge suppressors
for plugging onto contactors with and without auxiliary switch blocks
Version without LED
RC elements
3TF2. . .-0. . .,
3TF2. . .-1. . .
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
----
B
B
B
3TX4490-3R
3TX4490-3S
3TX4490-3T
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
240 ... 400

400 ... 600
---
---
B
B
3TX4490-3U
3TX4490-3V
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
----
}
B
B
3TX4490-3G
3TX4490-3H
3TX4490-3J
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
240 ... 400

400 ... 600
---
---
B
B
3TX4490-3K
3TX4490-3L
1 10 units
41B
1 10 units
41B
12 ... 250
--
3TX4490-3A
1 unit
41B
24 ... 250
--
3TX4490-3B
1 unit
41B
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
--
12 ... 24
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
10 ... 120
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
B
B
B
D
3TX4490-4G
3TX4490-4H
3TX4490-4J
3TX4490-4K
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
----
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
B
B
B
3TX4490-4A
3TX4490-4B
3TX4490-4C
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3TX4490-1J
1 unit
41B
3TF20. .-3. . .,
3TF20. .-7. . .
For contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors D
3TX4491-2A
5 units
41A
3TF2. . .-7. . .
For releasing contactors from 3TX4491-2A plug-in

bases
3TX4491-2K
1 unit
41A
3TX4490-3A
Varistors
3TF2. . .-0. . .,
3TF2. . .-1. . .
Noise suppression diodes

3TF2. . .-0. . .,
3TF2. . .-1. . .
--
Diode assemblies (diode and Zener diode)

For DC operation and short break times
3TF2. . .-0. . .,
3TF2. . .-1. . .
--
Version with LED

Varistors
3TF2. . .-0. . .,
3TF2. . .-1. . .
3TX4490-4G
3TF2. . .-0. . .,
3TF2. . .-1. . .

for plugging onto contactors with and without auxiliary switch blocks1)
For increasing the permissible residual current and for limiting the
residual voltage.
3TF2. . .-0A. .,
3TF2. . .-1A. .
230/220, 50 Hz
-230, 60 Hz
230, 50/60 Hz
Operating range 0.8 ... 1.1 Us.
Plug-in bases with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards,
width 45 mm
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 400 V (for pollution degree 3);
rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 6 kV;
rated operational current Ie: 6 A;
s and U rated data: max. 300 V, 6 A
3TX4491-2A
Release tools
1)
Dimensions as for 3TX4490-3 surge suppressor.
3/144
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Contactors
SIRIUS 3RT20 coupling contactors (interface),
3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
Overview
The 3RT201 coupling contactors cannot be extended with
DC operation
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The 3RT20 coupling contactors for switching motors are tailored
to the special requirements of working with electronic controls.
Depending on the version, the solenoid coils are supplied either

without overvoltage damping (3RT201.-1HB4. and
3RT201.-.MB4.-0KT0) or with a diode, suppressor diode or
varistor connected as standard.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are
identical to those of the 3RT20 contactors for switching motors;
see pages 3/17 and 3/22.
Contactor
Type
3RT201.-.HB4.
3RT201.-.JB4.
3RT201.-.KB4.
3RT202.-.KB4.
Size
S00
S00
S00
S0
General data

10 million
400
Control
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

At Us 17 V W
1.6
2.3
24 V W
2.8
4.5
30 V W
4.4
Permissible residual current

of the electronics (with 0 signal)
< 6 mA x (24 V/Us)
< 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Overvoltage configuration of the solenoid coil
No overvoltage
damping
Power consumption of the solenoid coil

(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
With diode
With suppressor
diode
With varistor
Operating times
Closing
- At 17 V
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
40 ... 130
30 ... 80
70 ... 270
60 ... 250
- At 24 V
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
35 ... 60
25 ... 40
65 ... 90
55 ... 80
- At 30 V
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
25 ... 50
15 ... 30
52 ... 65
43 ... 57
OFF-delay NO
ON-delay NC
ms
ms
7 ... 20
20 ... 30
Closing at 17 ... 30 V
Contactor
38 ... 65
55 ... 75
7 ... 20
20 ... 30
19 ... 21
25 ... 31
Type
3RT201.-1MB4 .-0KT0
3RT201. -1VB4.
3RT201.-1SB4.
Size
S00
S00
S00
45
45
45
With diode
With suppressor diode
Width mm
General data

400
Control
0.85 ... 1.85 x Us

(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
At Us 24 V W
1.6
Permissible residual current,

upright mounting position
On request
No overvoltage damping
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/145
Coupling contactors have a low power consumption and an

extended solenoid coil operating range.
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Contactors
3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
Contactor
Type
3RT201.-1MB4 .-0KT0
3RT201. -1VB4.
3RT201.-1SB4.
Size
S00
S00
S00
20 ... 80
30 ... 90
5 ... 20
10 ... 30
Control
Operating times
Closing
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
30 ... 120
20 ... 110
- At 24 V
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
25 ... 90
15 ... 80
- At 44 V
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
15 ... 60
10 ... 50
Opening
OFF-delay NO
ON-delay NC
ms
ms
5 ... 20
10 ... 30
- At 20.5 V

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
DC operation
Low power consumption
Extended operating range of the solenoid coil
3RT201.-1.B4.
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: Up to 60 C
Auxiliary contacts
Operational
current Ie up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
400 V
kW
3RT201.-2.B4.
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Ident. No.
Configurator
Version
Article No.
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Size S00
Diode, varistor or RC element, attachable
(no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted)
1 NO, Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1 NC, Ident. No. 01

A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
Rated control supply voltage Us = 24 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
Power consumption of the solenoid coils 2.8 W at 24 V
7
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2015-1HB41
3RT2015-1HB42
B
B
3RT2015-2HB41
3RT2015-2HB42
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2016-1HB41
3RT2016-1HB42
B
B
3RT2016-2HB41
3RT2016-2HB42
12
5.5
10
01
1
--
-1
B
}
3RT2017-1HB41
3RT2017-1HB42
B
B
3RT2017-2HB41
3RT2017-2HB42
Rated control supply voltage Us = 24 V DC, operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x Us

7
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2015-1MB41-0KT0
3RT2015-1MB42-0KT0
B
B
3RT2015-2MB41-0KT0
3RT2015-2MB42-0KT0
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2016-1MB41-0KT0
3RT2016-1MB42-0KT0
B
B
3RT2016-2MB41-0KT0
3RT2016-2MB42-0KT0
12
5.5
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2017-1MB41-0KT0
3RT2017-1MB42-0KT0
B
B
3RT2017-2MB41-0KT0
3RT2017-2MB42-0KT0
For surge suppressors, see page 3/59.

3/146
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Contactors
3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
DC operation
Integrated coil circuit
3RT201.-1.B4 .
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: Up to 60 C
Auxiliary contacts
Operational
current Ie up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
400 V
kW
3RT201.-2.B4.
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Ident. No.
Configurator
Version
Article No.
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Size S00
1 NO, Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1 NC, Ident. No. 01

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
7
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2015-1JB41
3RT2015-1JB42
B
B
3RT2015-2JB41
3RT2015-2JB42
10
01
1
--
-1
}
A
3RT2016-1JB41
3RT2016-1JB42
B
B
3RT2016-2JB41
3RT2016-2JB42
12
5.5
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2017-1JB41
3RT2017-1JB42
B
B
3RT2017-2JB41
3RT2017-2JB42

7
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2015-1VB41
3RT2015-1VB42
B
B
3RT2015-2VB41
3RT2015-2VB42
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2016-1VB41
3RT2016-1VB42
B
B
3RT2016-2VB41
3RT2016-2VB42
12
5.5
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2017-1VB41
3RT2017-1VB42
B
B
3RT2017-2VB41
3RT2017-2VB42


Siemens IC 10 2014
3/147
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Contactors
3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
DC operation
3RT201.-1.B4 .
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: Up to 60 C
Auxiliary contacts
Operational
current Ie up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
400 V
kW
3RT201.-2.B4.
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Ident. No.
Configurator
Version
Article No.
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Size S00
With integrated coil circuit (suppressor diode)
1 NO, Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1 NC, Ident. No. 01

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
7
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2015-1KB41
3RT2015-1KB42
B
}
3RT2015-2KB41
3RT2015-2KB42
10
01
1
--
-1
A
B
3RT2016-1KB41
3RT2016-1KB42
B
B
3RT2016-2KB41
3RT2016-2KB42
12
5.5
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2017-1KB41
3RT2017-1KB42
}
}
3RT2017-2KB41
3RT2017-2KB42

7
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2015-1SB41
3RT2015-1SB42
B
B
3RT2015-2SB41
3RT2015-2SB42
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2016-1SB41
3RT2016-1SB42
B
B
3RT2016-2SB41
3RT2016-2SB42
12
5.5
10
01
1
--
-1
B
B
3RT2017-1SB41
3RT2017-1SB42
B
B
3RT2017-2SB41
3RT2017-2SB42

3/148
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Contactors
3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
DC operation
3RT202.-1KB40
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: Up to 60 C
Auxiliary contacts
Operational
current Ie up to
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
400 V
kW
3RT202.-2KB40
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Ident. No.
Configurator
Version
Article No.
NO
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Size S0
With integrated coil circuit (varistor)
1 NO + 1 NC, Ident. No. 11
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
9
11
3RT2023-1KB40
3RT2023-2KB40
12
5.5
11
3RT2024-1KB40
3RT2024-2KB40
17
7.5
11
3RT2025-1KB40
3RT2025-2KB40
25
11
11
3RT2026-1KB40
3RT2026-2KB40
32
15
11
3RT2027-1KB40
3RT2027-2KB40

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/149
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Assemblies
3RA23, 3RA13, 3RA24, 3RA14 Contactor Assemblies
Overview
The 3RA23 contactor assemblies for reversing can be ordered
as follows:
Sizes S00 and S0

Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and
electrical interlock
As individual parts for customer assembly
For motor protection, either 3RU2 or 3RB3 overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation, or 3RN1 thermistor motor protection releases must be ordered separately.
Reversing contactor assemblies with communication
interface
There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks,

surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately.
The reversing contactor assemblies with communication interface are required for mounting the function modules for connection to the controller via the IO-Link or AS-Interface communication systems.
Overload relays for motor protection see Chapter 7

For more information on IO-Link and AS-Interface see Chapter 2

The 3RA23 contactor assemblies have screw or spring-type terminals (main and control circuits) and are suitable for screwing
or snapping onto TH 35 standard mounting rails.
Components for customer assembly
Complete reversing contactor assemblies

The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for
use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The contactor assemblies size S00 and S0 each consist of two
contactors with the same power, with one NC contact (S00) or
one NO contact and one NC contact (S0) in the basic unit.
The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked
(NC contact interlock).
Rated data AC-2 and AC-3
for 50 Hz 400 V AC
Rating
Operational current Ie
kW
Size
Assembly kits for all sizes are available for customer assembly
of reversing contactor assemblies.
Contactors, overload relays and for momentary-contact
operation of size S00 auxiliary switches (NO contacts) for selflocking must be ordered separately. (With S0, the NO contacts
integrated into the basic unit can be used.)
Article No.
Contactor
Assembly kit
Fully wired and tested

Screw terminals
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
3
4
5.5
7.5
7
9
12
16
S00
3RT2015-1...2
3RT2016-1...2
3RT2017-1...2
3RT2018-1...2
3RA2913-2AA1
3RA2315-8XB30-1...
3RA2316-8XB30-1...
3RA2317-8XB30-1...
3RA2318-8XB30-1...
5.5
7.5
11
12
16
25
S0
3RT2024-1...0
3RT2025-1...0
3RT2026-1...0
3RA2923-2AA1
3RA2324-8XB30-1...
3RA2325-8XB30-1...
3RA2326-8XB30-1...
15
18.5
32
38
3RT2027-1...0
3RT2028-1...0
3RA2327-8XB30-1...
3RA2328-8XB30-1...
Spring-type
terminals
Spring-type
terminals
3
4
5.5
7.5
7
9
12
16
S00
3RT2015-2...2
3RT2016-2...2
3RT2017-2...2
3RT2018-2...2
3RA2913-2AA21)
3RA2315-8XB30-2...
3RA2316-8XB30-2...
3RA2317-8XB30-2...
3RA2318-8XB30-2...
5.5
7.5
11
12
16
25
S0
3RT2024-2...0
3RT2025-2...0
3RT2026-2...0
3RA2923-2AA22)
3RA2324-8XB30-2...
3RA2325-8XB30-2...
3RA2326-8XB30-2...
15
18.5
32
38
3RT2027-2...0
3RT2028-2...0
1)
The assembly kit contains: Mechanical interlock; connecting clips for

2 contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom (for main, control and
auxiliary circuits).
2)
The assembly kit contains: Mechanical interlock; connecting clips for

2 contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom (for main circuits).
Operating times
The operating times of the individual 3RT20 contactors are rated
in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the
arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing,
providing they are interlocked by way of their auxiliary switches
(NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock.
For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval
of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V;
a dead interval of 30 ms is recommended for use with voltages
400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with
DC operation.
The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected
by the mechanical interlock.
3/150
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RA2327-8XB30-2...
3RA2328-8XB30-2...
Siemens AG 2013
Article No. scheme
@@@
SIRIUS contactor assemblies
13th 14th 15th 16th
2nd generation
Device type (e.g. 3 = reversing contactor assembly)
3
@

Type of overload relay (8X = without)
Assembly (B = ready-assembled, E = ready-assembled with communication)
Interlock (3 = mechanical and electrical)
Free auxiliary switches (e.g. S00: 0 = none, S0: 0 = 2 NO total)

Rated control supply voltage (e.g. L2 = 230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Example
3RA
3RA
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
Using wiring kits for reversing starters has the following
advantages:
Connecting combs for screw terminals also result in:
Prevention of wiring errors in the control circuit
Reduction of testing costs
Ready-jumpered actuation of the auxiliary switches and the
frame (A2)
Integrated electrical interlocking
Accessories
Selecting the auxiliary switches
The following points should be noted:
Size S00
For maintained-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the
electrical interlock.
For momentary-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the
electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary switch block with
at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor.
Size S0
For maintained-contact operation:
The contactors have two integrated auxiliary contacts
(1 NO + 1 NC); the NC contact can be used for electrical
interlocking.
For momentary-contact operation:
Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; the
NO contact in the basic unit can be used for the latching.
Surge suppression
Sizes S00 and S0
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or
varistors for damping opening surges in the coil.
As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can
either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (S00) or be
plugged into the front of the contactors (S0).
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/151
Siemens AG 2013

Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S00 up to 7.5 kW
The figure shows the version with screw terminals
6
14
12
5
11
NSB0_02064b
4
2
15
13
14
Mountable accessories (optional)

To be ordered separately
11
12
13
14
15
Auxiliary switch block, front1)

Auxiliary switch block, lateral
Surge suppressors
Solder pin adapters
Function module for connection to
the control system
Article No.
3RH2911-1. . . .
3RH2921-1DA. .
3RT2916-1. . . .
3RT1916-4KA1
3RT271.-1BA00
Page
3/53
3/55
3/59
3/62
3/157
1)
Auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 must be used.
2)
The parts 4 and 5 can only be ordered together as 3RA2912-2H

mechanical connectors.
3)
3RT201. contactors with one NC contact in the basic unit are required for
the electrical interlock. An additional NO contact is required for
momentary-contact operation.
3/152
Siemens IC 10 2014
Complete contactor assemblies

Article No.
Individual parts
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4 5 6
Q11
Q12
3RT2015
3RT2015
3RT2016
3RT2016
3RT2017
3RT2017
3RT2018
3RT208
3RA2913-2AA1
Contactor, 3 kW
Contactor, 4 kW
Contactor, 5.5 kW
Contactor, 7.5 kW
Assembly kit
comprising:
4 Mechanical interlock2)
5 2 connecting clips for 2 contactors2)
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for
connecting the main current paths, electrical
interlock included3), interruptible (NC contact
interlock)
Page
3/28, 3/33
3/28, 3/33
3/28, 3/33
3/28, 3/33
3/156
3/156
3/156
3/156
Siemens AG 2013
2)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA231. -8XE30-1BB4
3RA231.-8XB30-1A. 0
Rated control
supply voltage
Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to

at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V
400 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
3RA231.-8XB30-2A. 0
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
7
2.2
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
A
3RA2315-8XB30-1AB0
3RA2315-8XB30-1AF0
3RA2315-8XB30-1AP0
B
B
A
3RA2315-8XB30-2AB0
3RA2315-8XB30-2AF0
3RA2315-8XB30-2AP0
5.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
A
3RA2316-8XB30-1AB0
3RA2316-8XB30-1AF0
3RA2316-8XB30-1AP0
B
B
A
3RA2316-8XB30-2AB0
3RA2316-8XB30-2AF0
3RA2316-8XB30-2AP0
12
5.5
5.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
A
3RA2317-8XB30-1AB0
3RA2317-8XB30-1AF0
3RA2317-8XB30-1AP0
B
B
A
3RA2317-8XB30-2AB0
3RA2317-8XB30-2AF0
3RA2317-8XB30-2AP0
16
7.5
7.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
A
3RA2318-8XB30-1AB0
3RA2318-8XB30-1AF0
3RA2318-8XB30-1AP0
B
B
A
3RA2318-8XB30-2AB0
3RA2318-8XB30-2AF0
3RA2318-8XB30-2AP0
2.2
24 DC
3RA2315-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2315-8XB30-2BB4
5.5
24 DC
3RA2316-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2316-8XB30-2BB4
12
5.5
5.5
24 DC
3RA2317-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2317-8XB30-2BB4
16
7.5
7.5
24 DC
3RA2318-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2318-8XB30-2BB4
DC operation
With communication interface

7
2.2
24 DC
3RA2315-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2315-8XE30-2BB4
5.5
24 DC
3RA2316-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2316-8XE30-2BB4
12
5.5
5.5
24 DC
3RA2317-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2317-8XE30-2BB4
16
7.5
7.5
24 DC
3RA2318-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2318-8XE30-2BB4
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
2)
The contactors integrated in the contactor assemblies have no unassigned

auxiliary contacts. When used with a communication interface and function
module, the auxiliary contacts are unassigned.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/153
Siemens AG 2013
12
15
1
11
2
6

11
12
13
15
Auxiliary switch block, front

Surge suppressors
Function module for connection to
the control system
Article No.
3RH2921-1. . . .
3RH2921-1DA. .
3RT2926-1. . . .
3RT271.-1BA00
Page
3/53
3/55
3/59
3/157

Article No.
Individual parts
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4 5 6
1)
The parts 4 and 5 can only be ordered together as 3RA2922-2H

mechanical connectors.
3/154
Siemens IC 10 2014
Q11
Q12
3RT2024
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2027
3RT2028
3RT2028
3RA2923-2AA1
Contactor, 5.5 kW
Contactor, 7.5 kW
Contactor, 11 kW
Contactor, 15 kW
Contactor, 18.5 kW
Assembly kit
comprising:
4 Mechanical interlock1)
5 2 connecting clips for 2 contactors1)
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for
connecting the main current paths, electrical
interlock included (NC contact interlock)
NSB0_02065a
4
13
Page
3/30, 3/35
3/30, 3/35
3/30, 3/35
3/30, 3/35
3/30, 3/35
3/156
3/156
3/156
3/156
Siemens AG 2013
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA2324-8XE30-1BB4
3RA232.-8XB30-1A . 2
Rated control
supply voltage
Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to

at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V
400 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
3RA232.-8XB30-2A . 2
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
12
5.5
7.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA2324-8XB30-1AC2
3RA2324-8XB30-1AG2
3RA2324-8XB30-1AL2
B
B
B
3RA2324-8XB30-2AC2
3RA2324-8XB30-2AG2
3RA2324-8XB30-2AL2
17
7.5
11
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA2325-8XB30-1AC2
3RA2325-8XB30-1AG2
3RA2325-8XB30-1AL2
B
B
B
3RA2325-8XB30-2AC2
3RA2325-8XB30-2AG2
3RA2325-8XB30-2AL2
25
5.5
11
11
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA2326-8XB30-1AC2
3RA2326-8XB30-1AG2
3RA2326-8XB30-1AL2
B
B
B
3RA2326-8XB30-2AC2
3RA2326-8XB30-2AG2
3RA2326-8XB30-2AL2
32
7.5
15
18.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA2327-8XB30-1AC2
3RA2327-8XB30-1AG2
3RA2327-8XB30-1AL2
B
B
B
3RA2327-8XB30-2AC2
3RA2327-8XB30-2AG2
3RA2327-8XB30-2AL2
38
11
18.5
18.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA2328-8XB30-1AC2
3RA2328-8XB30-1AG2
3RA2328-8XB30-1AL2
B
B
B
3RA2328-8XB30-2AC2
3RA2328-8XB30-2AG2
3RA2328-8XB30-2AL2
12
5.5
7.5
24 DC
3RA2324-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2324-8XB30-2BB4
17
7.5
11
24 DC
3RA2325-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2325-8XB30-2BB4
25
5.5
11
11
24 DC
3RA2326-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2326-8XB30-2BB4
32
7.5
15
18.5
24 DC
3RA2327-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2327-8XB30-2BB4
38
11
18.5
18.5
24 DC
3RA2328-8XB30-1BB4
3RA2328-8XB30-2BB4
DC operation
With communication interface

12
5.5
7.5
24 DC
3RA2324-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2324-8XE30-2BB4
17
7.5
11
24 DC
3RA2325-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2325-8XE30-2BB4
25
5.5
11
11
24 DC
3RA2326-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2326-8XE30-2BB4
32
7.5
15
18.5
24 DC
3RA2327-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2327-8XE30-2BB4
38
11
18.5
18.5
24 DC
3RA2328-8XE30-1BB4
3RA2328-8XE30-2BB4
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 Us; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 Us.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/155
Siemens AG 2013
PS*
= 1 unit (unless otherwise specified)
PG
= 41B
3RA2923-2AA1
For
Size
contactors
Version
3RA2923-2AA2
DT Screw terminals
Type
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Assembly kits for making 3-pole contactor assemblies

3RT201
S00-S00
3RT202
S0-S0
The assembly kit contains:

Mechanical interlock,
2 connecting clips for 2 contactors,
wiring modules on the top and bottom
For main, auxiliary and control circuits
3RA2913-2AA1
3RA2923-2AA1
3RA2913-2AA2

Only for main circuit1)
--
--
3RA2923-2AA2
Individual components for making 3 and 4-pole

Wiring modules
3RT201
3RT202
S00-S00
S0-S0
Top (in-phase)
PS = 5 units
3RA2913-3DA1
3RA2913-3DA2
Bottom (with phase reversal)
PS = 5 units
3RA2913-3EA1
3RA2913-3EA2
Top (in-phase)
PS = 5 units
3RA2923-3DA1
3RA2923-3DA2
PS = 5 units
3RA2923-3EA1
3RA2923-3EA2
Mechanical connectors
The connectors consist of a
mechanical interlock and
two connecting clips
3RT201,
3RT231
S00-S00
For lateral interlock,

without contactor clearance
PS = 10 units B
3RA2912-2H
3RA2912-2H
3RT202,
3RT232
S0-S0
For lateral interlock,

without contactor clearance
PS = 10 units B
3RA2922-2H
3RA2922-2H
1)
Version in size S0 with spring-type terminals:

Only the wiring modules for the main circuit are included.
No connectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit.
3/156
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
PS*
PG
= 41B
3RA2711-1BA00
For
Size
contactors
Version
3RA2711-2BA00
DT Screw terminals
Type
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Function modules for connection to the control system

3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
IO-Link connection,
comprising one basic and one coupling module and an
additional module connector for assembling an IO-Link
group
3RA2711-1BA00
3RA2711-2BA00
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
AS-Interface connection,
comprising one basic and one coupling module
3RA2712-1BA00
3RA2712-2BA00
Module connector set, comprising:

A
2 module connectors, 14-pole, short + 2 interface covers
3RA2711-0EE01
3RA2711-0EE01
Accessories for 3RA27 function modules

3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
14-pole, 8 cm
For size jump S00-S0 + 1 space
3RA2711-0EE02
3RA2711-0EE02
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
14-pole, 21 cm
For various space combinations
3RA2711-0EE03
3RA2711-0EE03
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
10-pole, 8 cm
A
For separate control signal infeed within an IO-Link group
3RA2711-0EE04
3RA2711-0EE04
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
Sealable covers
3RA2910-0
3RA2910-0
Module connectors
PS = 5 units
Operator panels for IO-Link see page 3/192.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/157
Siemens AG 2013
Overview
The 3RA13 reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as
follows:
Sizes S2 and S3
Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and
electrical interlock

Rating
Operational
current Ie
Mechanical
interlock1)
Mechanical
interlock2)
Mechanical
interlock3)
Assembly kit
Fully wired and tested

3RT1034
3RA1924-1A
3RA1924-2B
--
3RA1933-2A4)
3RA1334-8XB30-1...
A
32
18.5
40
3RT1035
22
50
3RT1036
30
65
37
80
3RT1045
45
95
3RT1046
55
115
75
150
90
185
110
225
132
265
160
300
200
400
250
500
S6
3RT1044
3RT1054
3RA1335-8XB30-1...
3RA1336-8XB30-1...
3RA1924-1A
--
3RA1943-2A4)
3RA1344-8XB30-1...
3RA1346-8XB30-1...
--
--
3RA1954-2A
3RA1953-2M5)
--
--
--
3RA1954-2A
3RA1963-2A5)
--
--
--
3RA1954-2A
3RA1973-2A5)
--
3RT1055
3RT1056
S10
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
S12
3RT1075
3RT1076
Can be mounted onto the front.
2)
Laterally mountable with one auxiliary contact.
3)
Laterally mountable without auxiliary contact.
4)
The assembly kit contains: two connecting clips for contactors as well as
wiring modules on the top and bottom.
5)
The assembly kit contains a wiring module on the top and bottom.
Operating times
The operating times of the individual 3RT10 contactors are rated
in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the
arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing,
provided they are interlocked by way of their auxiliary switches
(NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock.
For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval
of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V;
a dead interval of 30 ms is recommended for use with voltages
400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with
DC operation.
The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected
by the mechanical interlock
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RA1924-2B
3RA1345-8XB30-1...
1)
3/158
Contactors, overload relays and the mechanical interlock and

for momentary-contact operation auxiliary switches
(NO contacts) for latching must be ordered separately.
Contactor
15
S3
Article No.
kW
S2
For motor protection, either 3RU11 or 3RB2 overload relays for

direct mounting or stand-alone installation or 3RN1 thermistor
motor protection releases must be ordered separately.
Assembly kits for all sizes are available for customer assembly
of reversing contactor assemblies.
The 3RA13 contactor assemblies have screw terminals. Sizes S2

to S3 are suitable for screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto
TH 35 standard mounting rails.
Size
The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for

use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The contactor assemblies consist of two contactors with the
same power, with one NC contact in the basic unit. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact
interlock).
Sizes S6 to S12

for 50 Hz 400 V AC
Complete units
Siemens AG 2013

Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S2 up to 22 kW
16
6
NSB0_00461b
15
14
4
12
14

12
14
15
16
The connecting
cables are
not shown.
Mech. interlock, front

Auxiliary switch block,
front
Auxiliary switch block,
lateral
Surge suppressors
Article No.
Page
3RA1924-1A
3RH1921-1CA. .
3/161
3/103
3RH1921-1EA. .
3/105
3RT1926-1. . . .
3RT1936-1. . . .
3/108
Individual parts
Article No.
Page
Q1
Q2
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
1 2
1 2
1 2
Contactor, 15 kW
Contactor, 18.5 kW
Contactor, 22 kW
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
4
5 6
Mech. interlock, lateral

Assembly kit
3RA1924-2B
3RA1933-2A
3/83
3/83
3/83
3/161
3/162

5
6
Rated control
supply
voltage Us1)
Operational
current Ie
up to

at 50 Hz and
500 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
2 connecting clips for two contactors with 10 mm distance

Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main
current paths
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RA133.-8XB30-1. . .
32
7.5
15
18.5
18.5
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
A
3RA1334-8XB30-1AC2
3RA1334-8XB30-1AG2
3RA1334-8XB30-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
40
11
18.5
22
22
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
A
3RA1335-8XB30-1AC2
3RA1335-8XB30-1AG2
3RA1335-8XB30-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
50
15
22
30
22
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
A
3RA1336-8XB30-1AC2
3RA1336-8XB30-1AG2
3RA1336-8XB30-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
15
18.5
22
18.5
22
30
18.5
22
22
24 DC
24 DC
24 DC
A
A
A
3RA1334-8XB30-1BB4
3RA1335-8XB30-1BB4
3RA1336-8XB30-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC operation
32
40
50
1)
7.5
11
15

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/159
Siemens AG 2013
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S3 up to 45 kW
6
16
1
5
2
NSB0_00462b
15
4
14
12
The connecting
cables are
not shown.
14
6

12
14
15
16
Mech. interlock, front

Auxiliary switch block, front
Surge suppressors

Article No.
Page
3RA1924-1A
3RH1921-1CA. .
3RH1921-1EA. .
3RT1926-1. . . .
3RT1936-1. . . .
3/161
3/103
3/105
3/108
Individual parts
1 2
1 2
1 2
4
5 6
Contactor, 30 kW
Contactor, 37 kW
Contactor, 45 kW
Assembly kit
5
6
Rated control
supply
voltage Us1)
Operational
current Ie
up to
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
500 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Article No.
Page
Q1
Q2
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RA1924-2B
3RA1943-2A
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3/84
3/84
3/84
3/161
3/162
2 connecting clips for two contactors with 10 mm distance

Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the
main current paths
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
AC operation at 50/60 Hz
65
18.5
30
37
45
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA1344-8XB30-1AC2
3RA1344-8XB30-1AG2
3RA1344-8XB30-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
80
22
37
45
55
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA1345-8XB30-1AC2
3RA1345-8XB30-1AG2
3RA1345-8XB30-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
95
22
45
55
55
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3RA1346-8XB30-1AC2
3RA1346-8XB30-1AG2
3RA1346-8XB30-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
30
37
45
37
45
55
45
55
55
24 DC
24 DC
24 DC
B
B
B
3RA1344-8XB30-1BB4
3RA1345-8XB30-1BB4
3RA1346-8XB30-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC operation
3RA134.-8XB30-1. . .
1)
65
80
95
18.5
22
22

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3/160
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
For
Size
contactors
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Type
S2
S3
}
Laterally mountable1)
Each with one auxiliary contact
(1 NC contact) per contactor (can only be
used to connect contactors which are not
more than 1 size larger or smaller).
The mounting depth of the smaller
contactor has to be adapted.)
3RA1924-2B
1 unit
41B
3RT103
3RT104
S2
S3
Can be mounted onto the front2)

Onto contactor sizes S2 and S3
(for contactors of the same size)
3RA1924-1A
1 unit
41B
Laterally mountable,
}
without auxiliary contacts
Contactor sizes S6, S10 and S12 can be
interlocked with each other as required;
no adaptation of mounting depth is necessary. Contactor clearance 10 mm.
3RA1954-2A
1 unit
41B
3RT104.-A S3
with
with
3RT105
S6
Adapter, laterally mountable, for

mechanical interlocking of contactor S3
(only for AC operation) with contactor S6
using 3RA1954-2A locking device (must
be ordered separately) incl. connecting
clips
3RA1954-2C
1 unit
41B
3RT103
3RT104
S2, S3
For the coil terminals A1 and A2 for

B
reversing starters (contactor sizes S2 and
S3). 2 x A1 and 1 x A2 required per
assembly
(one set contains 10 x A1 and 5 x A2)
3RA1923-3B
1 unit
41B
3RT105
S6
3RA1952-2A
1 unit
41B
S10
For customer assembly of reversing

3RT1.6
3RA1962-2A
1 unit
41B
3RT1.7
S12
3RA1972-2A
1 unit
41B
3RA1924-1A mounted
onto 2 contactors
3RT103
3RT104
3RT133
3RT134
3RT144
3RT153
Note:
Sizes S2 and S3:
Use 3RA1932-2C mechanical connectors.
3RT1.5
3RT1.6
3RT1.7
S6
S10
S12
3RA1954-2A
3RA1954-2C
Coil repeat terminals
3RA1923-3B
Base plates
1)
Can also be used for 4-pole contactors with sizes S2 and S3.
2)
Can also be used for size S0 4-pole contactors.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/161
Siemens AG 2013
For
Size
contactors
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Type

S2

2 connecting clips for two contactors,
3RA1933-2A
1 unit
41B
3RT104
S3

3RA1943-2A
1 unit
41B
3RT105
S6

Wiring modules on the top and bottom
(for connection with box terminal)
3RA1953-2A
1 unit
41B

Wiring modules on the top and bottom
(for connection without box terminal)
NSB0_00470
3RT103
NSB0_00471
3RA1933-2A
NSB0_01724
3RA1943-2A
3RA1953-2A
S6
S10
3RT1.7
S12
3RA1953-2M
1 unit
41B
3RA1963-2A
1 unit
41B
3RA1973-2A
1 unit
41B
NSB0_01725
3RT105
3RT1.6
3RA1953-2M
3/162
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
For
Size
contactors
Contactor Version
clearance
Type
mm
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT103
3RT104
S3-S3
S6-S6
10
10
10
NSB0_01834
3RT105
S2-S2
Top (in-phase)
3RA1933-3D
1 unit
41B
3RA1933-3E
1 unit
41B
Top (in-phase)
3RA1943-3D
1 unit
41B
3RA1943-3E
1 unit
41B
Top (in-phase, for connection

with box terminal)
3RA1953-3D
1 unit
41B
Top (with phase reversal,

for connection without box
terminal)
3RA1953-3P
1 unit
41B
NSB0_01835
3RA1953-3D
3RA1953-3P
For
Size
contactors
Contactor Interlocking
clearance
Type
mm
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 pack = 10 units for 10 combinations
3RT1.3
3RT1.4
S2-S2
S3-S3
On front
For 3-pole
contactors
3RA1932-2C
10 units
41B
3RT1.3
3RT1.4
3RT1.5
S2-S2
S3-S3
S6-S6
10
Lateral
For 3-pole
contactors
3RA1932-2D
10 units
41B
3RT1.3
S2-S2
10
Lateral
For 4-pole
contactors
3RA1932-2G
10 units
41B
3RT1.4
S3-S3
10
Lateral
For 4-pole
contactors
3RA1942-2G
10 units
41B
3RA1932-2C
3RA1932-2D
3RA1932-2G
3RA1942-2G

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/163
Wiring modules, single
Siemens AG 2013
Overview
These 3RA24 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are
designed for standard applications.
A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the

function module for wye-delta starting.
Note:
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies have screw or spring-type

terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto
Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting1) or wye-delta starting of
special motors must be customized. Help with designing such
special applications is available from Technical Assistance.
The 3RA24 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be
ordered as follows:
Size
Rating
Operational
current Ie
Motor current
kW
9.5 ... 13.8
There is also a range of accessories (lateral auxiliary switch

blocks, etc.) that must be ordered separately.
1)
Sizes S00 and S0

Fully wired and tested, with electrical and
mechanical interlock
Rated data
at 50 Hz 400 V AC
With the fully wired and tested 3RA24 contactor assemblies, the
auxiliary contacts included in the basic devices are unassigned.
For effective support from Technical Assistance you must provide the
following details:
- Rated motor voltage
- Rated motor current
- Service factor, operating values
- Motor starting current factor
- Starting time
- Ambient temperature
Article No.
Line/delta contactor
Star contactor
Complete assemblies
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
3RA2415-8XF31-1...
5.5
12
3RT2015-1....
3RT2015-1....
7.5
16
12.1 ... 17
3RT2017-1....
3RT2015-1....
3RA2416-8XF31-1...
11
25
19
... 25
3RT2018-1....
3RT2016-1....
3RA2417-8XF31-1...
11
25
19
... 25
15
32
24.1 ... 34
18.5
40
22
50
S00-S00-S00
3RT2024-1...0
3RT2024-1...0
3RA2423-8XF32-1...
3RT2026-1...0
3RT2024-1...0
3RA2425-8XF32-1...
34.5 ... 40
3RT2026-1...0
3RT2024-1...0
3RA2425-8XF32-1...
31
3RT2027-1...0
3RT2026-1...0
3RA2426-8XF32-1...
Spring-type
terminals
Spring-type
terminals
Spring-type
terminals
3RA2415-8XF31-2...
S0-S0-S0
... 43
5.5
12
3RT2015-2....
3RT2015-2....
7.5
16
12.1 ... 17
9.5 ... 13.8
3RT2017-2....
3RT2015-2....
3RA2416-8XF31-2...
11
25
19
... 25
3RT2018-2....
3RT2016-2....
3RA2417-8XF31-2...
11
25
19
... 25
15
32
24.1 ... 34
18.5
40
22
50
S00-S00-S00
3RT2024-2...0
3RT2024-2...0
3RA2423-8XF32-2...
3RT2026-2...0
3RT2024-2...0
3RA2425-8XF32-2...
34.5 ... 40
3RT2026-2...0
3RT2024-2...0
3RA2425-8XF32-2...
31
3RT2027-2...0
3RT2026-2...0
3RA2426-8XF32-2...
S0-S0-S0
... 43
Note:
The selection of contactor types refers to fused designs.
Function modules for wye-delta starting
Surge suppression
The 3RA2816-0EW20 wye-delta function module

(see page 3/172) replaces the complete wiring in the control
circuit and can be used in the voltage range from 24 to
240 V AC/DC. It is snapped onto the front of the contactor
assembly size S00 or S0.
Surge suppression (varistor) is included in the function modules

for wye-delta starting.
One function module comprises a complete module kit:

3RA2912-0 basic module with integrated control logic and
time setting
Two 3RA2911-0 coupling modules with corresponding
connecting cables
The scope of supply thus comprises a complete module kit for
one contactor assembly for wye-delta starting size S00 or S0,
regardless of the connection method.
Data of the control circuit
Wide voltage range 24 to 240 V AC/DC
Time setting range 0.5 to 60 s (3 selectable settings)
Dead interval of 50 ms, non-adjustable
3/164
Siemens IC 10 2014
Motor protection
As overload protection, the 3RU21 or 3RB3 overload relays (see
table on the next page) or 3RN1 thermistor motor protection releases can be used.
The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor
or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor
current.
"Protection Equipment" "Overload Relays"
"SIRIUS 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays".
Siemens AG 2013
Assemblies
3RT20
Accessories for
customer assembly
Rating
Function modules
Assembly kit B,
for single infeed
Without external
connection
Screw terminals
Overload relay, thermal

(CLASS 10 trip class)
3RA2816-0EW20
3RA2913-2BB11)
kW
5.5
7.5
11
11
3RA2816-0EW20
The wiring kits for sizes S00 and S0 contain the top and bottom
main conducting path connections between the line and delta
contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors
(bottom).
3RA2923-2BB12)
15
Setting range
Overload relay, solid-state

Article No.
Setting range
A
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
3RU2116-1HB0
... 10
3RU2116-1JB0
11
... 16
3RU2116-4AB0
11
... 16
3RU2126-4AB0
14
... 20
3RU2126-4BB0
18.5
20
... 25
3RU2126-4DB0
22
20
... 25
3RU2126-4DB0
5.5
Without external
connection
Spring-type
terminals
3RA2816-0EW20
3RA2913-2BB21)
7.5
11
11
3RA2816-0EW20
3RA2923-2BB22)
15
Spring-type
terminals
5.5 ... 8
3RU2116-1HC0
... 10
3RU2116-1JC0
11
... 16
3RU2116-4AC0
11
... 16
3RU2126-4AC0
14
... 20
3RU2126-4BC0
20
... 25
3RU2126-4DC0
22
20
... 25
3RU2126-4DC0
The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips; wiring

modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on
the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper and
auxiliary circuit wiring.
4 ... 16
3RB3016-1TB0
6 ... 25
3RB3026-1QB0
Spring-type
terminals
18.5
1)
Article No.
5.5 ... 8
Assembly kits with wiring modules and mechanical connectors

are available for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting.
Contactors, overload relays, function modules for wye-delta
starting or wye-delta timing relays, auxiliary switches for electrical interlock if required also infeed terminals and base plates
must be ordered separately.
2)
4 ... 16
3RB3016-1TE0
6 ... 25
3RB3026-1QE0
The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips; wiring

modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on
the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper.
Article No. scheme


@@@
SIRIUS contactor assemblies
13th 14th 15th 16th
2nd generation
Device type (e.g. 4 = contactor assembly for wye-delta starting)
4
@

Type of overload relay (8X = without)
Assembly (B = ready-assembled, E, H = ready-assembled with communication)
Interlock (3 = mechanical and electrical)
Free auxiliary switches (e.g. S00: 1 = 3 NO total, S0: 2 = 3 NO + 3 NC total)

Rated control supply voltage (e.g. L2 = 230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Example
3RA
3RA
Note:
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/165
Siemens AG 2013
identical to those of the individual 3RT2 contactors and 3RU2
overload relays
3RA2415
3RA2416
3RA2417
3RA2423
3RA2425
3RA2426
Sizes S..-S..-S..
00-00-00
00-00-00
00-00-00
0-0-0
0-0-0
0-0-0
AC operation1)
DC operation1)
Dimensions (W x H x D) with function module
Type
mm
135 x 68 x 145 / 135 x 84 x 145
135 x101 x 171 / 135 x114 x 171
mm
135 x 68 x 145 / 135 x 84 x 145
135 x101 x 181 / 135 x114 x 181
Type
Type
Type
3RT2015
3RT2015
3RT2015
General data
Individual contactors
Q11 line contactor
Q13 delta contactor
Q12 star contactor
3RT2017
3RT2017
3RT2015
3RT2018
3RT2018
3RT2016
3RT2024
3RT2024
3RT2024
3RT2026
3RT2026
3RT2024
3RT2027
3RT2027
3RT2026

2)
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors
Main circuit without overload relays3)
with single or double infeed
Highest rated current of the fuse
35
35
63
63
100
125
20
20
25
25
35
63

A
A
10
64), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit.

A
A
10
in the contactor coil circuit.
Control circuit
Short-circuit test
Main circuit
Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s
At 400 V
690 V
A
A
12
6.9
17
9
25
20.8
25
20.8
40
22.5
55
35

At 230 V
400 V
690 V
1000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3.3
5.8
5.8
--
4.7
8.2
7.5
--
7.2
12.5
18
--
7.2
12.5
18
--
12
21
20.4
--
16.6
30.1
33
--
h-1
15
15
15
15
15
15
Switching frequency with overload relay

At 400 V
690 V
A
A
12
6.9
17
9
25
20.8
25
20.8
31
22.5
44
35

At 230 V
400 V
690 V
1000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3.3
5.8
5.8
--
4.7
8.2
7.5
--
7.2
12.5
18
--
7.2
12.5
18
--
9.4
16.3
20.4
--
13.8
24
33
--
h-1
15
15
15
15
15
15

At 400 V
690 V
A
A
12
6.9
17
9
25
20.8
25
20.8
28
22.5
39
35

At 230 V
400 V
690 V
1000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
3.3
5.8
5.8
--
4.7
8.2
7.5
--
7.2
12.5
18
--
7.2
12.5
18
--
8.5
14.7
20.4
--
12.2
21.3
33
--
h-1
15
15
15
15
15
15

1)
Dimensions for devices with screw terminals/spring-type terminals.
2)
For circuit diagrams of the control circuit see "Operating Instructions",

3)
For short-circuit protection with overload relays See the Configuration

Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection Data for Fuseless and
Fused Load Feeders", Article No. 3ZX1012-0RA21-1AB0,
4)
Up to Ik < 0.5 kA; 260 V.
3/166
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S00-S00-S00 up to 11 kW
16
5
1
2
NSB0_02066b
3
6

Article No.
16 Three-phase infeed terminal2) 3RA2913-3K

Page
3/172
Individual parts
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
5
7
1)
The version with 1 NO is required for momentary-contact operation.
2)
Part 16 can only be mounted with contactors with screw terminal.
3
3
3
6
Article No.
Q111)
Q13
3RT2015 3RT2015
3RT2017 3RT2017
3RT2018 3RT2018
3RA2913-2BB1
Contactor, 5.5 kW
Contactor, 7.5 kW
Contactor, 11 kW
Assembly kit
comprising
4 Mechanical interlock
5 4 connecting clips for 3 contactors
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom
for connecting the main current paths
Function modules
3RA2816-0EW20
Page
Q12
3RT2015
3RT2015
3RT2016
3/28, 3/33
3/28, 3/33
3/28, 3/33
3/172
3/172
Note:
When using the function modules for contactor assemblies for
wye-delta starting, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be
connected to the basic units.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/167
Siemens AG 2013
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA241.-8XF31-1A . 0
3RA241.-8XE31-2BB4
Rated data AC-3
Rated control
supply voltage
Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to

at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V
400 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
3RA241.-8XF31-2A.0
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
12
3.3
5.5
9.2
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
A
3RA2415-8XF31-1AB0
3RA2415-8XF31-1AF0
3RA2415-8XF31-1AP0
A
B
A
3RA2415-8XF31-2AB0
3RA2415-8XF31-2AF0
3RA2415-8XF31-2AP0
16
4.7
7.5
9.2
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
A
3RA2416-8XF31-1AB0
3RA2416-8XF31-1AF0
3RA2416-8XF31-1AP0
B
B
A
3RA2416-8XF31-2AB0
3RA2416-8XF31-2AF0
3RA2416-8XF31-2AP0
25
5.5
11
11
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
A
3RA2417-8XF31-1AB0
3RA2417-8XF31-1AF0
3RA2417-8XF31-1AP0
B
B
A
3RA2417-8XF31-2AB0
3RA2417-8XF31-2AF0
3RA2417-8XF31-2AP0
12
3.3
5.5
9.2
24 DC
3RA2415-8XF31-1BB4
3RA2415-8XF31-2BB4
16
4.7
7.5
9.2
24 DC
3RA2416-8XF31-1BB4
3RA2416-8XF31-2BB4
25
5.5
11
11
24 DC
3RA2417-8XF31-1BB4
3RA2417-8XF31-2BB4
DC operation
For IO-Link connection

12
3.3
5.5
9.2
24 DC
3RA2415-8XE31-1BB4
3RA2415-8XE31-2BB4
16
4.7
7.5
9.2
24 DC
3RA2416-8XE31-1BB4
3RA2416-8XE31-2BB4
25
5.5
11
11
24 DC
3RA2417-8XE31-1BB4
3RA2417-8XE31-2BB4
For AS-Interface connection

12
3.3
5.5
9.2
24 DC
3RA2415-8XH31-1BB4
3RA2415-8XH31-2BB4
16
4.7
7.5
9.2
24 DC
3RA2416-8XH31-1BB4
3RA2416-8XH31-2BB4
25
5.5
11
11
24 DC
3RA2417-8XH31-1BB4
3RA2417-8XH31-2BB4
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3/168
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
16
6
17
5
1
7
2
NSB0_02067c

Article No.
16 Three-phase infeed terminal1) 3RV2925-5AB

17 Three-phase busbar1)
3RV1915-1AB

Page
Individual parts
3/171
3/171
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
5
7
1)
3
3
3
6
Article No.
Q11
Q13
Contactor, 11 kW
3RT2024 3RT2024
Contactor, 15/18.5 kW 3RT2026 3RT2026
Contactor, 22 kW
3RT2027 3RT2027
Assembly kit
3RA2923-2BB1
5 4 connecting clips for 3 contactors
6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom
for connecting the main current paths
Function modules
3RA2816-0EW20
Page
Q12
3RT2024
3RT2024
3RT2026
3/30, 3/35
3/30, 3/35
3/30, 3/35
3/171
3/172
The parts 16 and 17 Can only be mounted with contactors with screw
terminal.
Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/169
Siemens AG 2013
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA242.-8XE32-1BB4
3RA242.-8XF32-1A . 2
Rated data AC-3
Rated control
supply voltage
Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to

at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V
400 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
3RA242.-8XF32-2A . 2
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
25
7.1
11
19
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
B
3RA2423-8XF32-1AC2
3RA2423-8XF32-1AG2
3RA2423-8XF32-1AL2
A
B
B
3RA2423-8XF32-2AC2
3RA2423-8XF32-2AG2
3RA2423-8XF32-2AL2
32 / 40
11.4
15 / 18.5
19
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
B
3RA2425-8XF32-1AC2
3RA2425-8XF32-1AG2
3RA2425-8XF32-1AL2
A
B
B
3RA2425-8XF32-2AC2
3RA2425-8XF32-2AG2
3RA2425-8XF32-2AL2
50
--
22
19
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
B
3RA2426-8XF32-1AC2
3RA2426-8XF32-1AG2
3RA2426-8XF32-1AL2
B
B
B
3RA2426-8XF32-2AC2
3RA2426-8XF32-2AG2
3RA2426-8XF32-2AL2
25
7.1
11
19
24 DC
3RA2423-8XF32-1BB4
3RA2423-8XF32-2BB4
32 / 40
11.4
15 / 18.5
19
24 DC
3RA2425-8XF32-1BB4
3RA2425-8XF32-2BB4
50
--
22
19
24 DC
3RA2426-8XF32-1BB4
3RA2426-8XF32-2BB4
DC operation
For IO-Link connection

25
7.1
11
19
24 DC
3RA2423-8XE32-1BB4
3RA2423-8XE32-2BB4
32 / 40
11.4
15 / 18.5
19
24 DC
3RA2425-8XE32-1BB4
3RA2425-8XE32-2BB4
50
--
22
19
24 DC
3RA2426-8XE32-1BB4
3RA2426-8XE32-2BB4
For AS-Interface connection

25
7.1
11
19
24 DC
3RA2423-8XH32-1BB4
3RA2423-8XH32-2BB4
32 / 40
11.4
15 / 18.5
19
24 DC
3RA2425-8XH32-1BB4
3RA2425-8XH32-2BB4
50
--
22
19
24 DC
3RA2426-8XH32-1BB4
3RA2426-8XH32-2BB4
1)

- at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us;
- at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3/170
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
PS*
PG
= 41B
3RA2923-2BB1
For
Size
contactors
Version
3RA2923-2BB2
DT Screw terminals
Type
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Assembly kits1) for making 3-pole contactor assemblies

3RT201
S00
3RT202
S0

mechanical interlock,
4 connecting clips,
star jumper,
3RA2913-2BB1
3RA2923-2BB1

Only for main circuit2)
3RT202
S0
--
3RA2913-2BB2
-}
3RA2923-2BB2

mechanical interlock;
wiring modules on the top and bottom,
3-phase infeed terminals
3RV2925-5AB

4 connecting clips,
star jumper,
3RA2924-2BB1
--
3RT1916-4BA31
3RT2916-4BA32
3RA2913-3K
--
3RV2925-5AB
--
3RV1915-1AB
--
3RT1916-4BA31
3RT2916-4BA32
3RT1926-4BA31
3RT2926-4BA32
3RV1915-1AB
Three-phase infeed terminals

Infeed terminal blocks for the line contactor
for large conductor cross-sections
3RT201
S00
Conductor cross-section 6 mm2
3RT202
S0
Conductor cross-section 16 mm2
PS = 10 units A
Three-phase busbars
3RT202
S0
Bridging phase-by-phase
of all input terminals of
the line contactor (Q11) and
the delta contactor (Q13)
Links for paralleling, 3-pole

(star jumpers)
3RT201
S00
3RT202
S0
Without connection terminal

(the links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole)
1)
When using the function modules for wye-delta starting, the wiring
modules for the auxiliary current are not required.
2)


Siemens IC 10 2014
3/171
Siemens AG 2013
PS*
PG
= 41B
For contactors
Size
3RA2711-2CA00
3RA2712-1CA00
3RA2816-0EW20
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Type

3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
Comprising one basic module and two coupling modules
3RA2816-0EW20
A 3RA2816-0EW20
3RA2910-0
Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals

24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Time setting range 0.5 ... 60 s
(10, 30, 60 s selectable)

3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
Sealable covers
PS = 5 units
3RA2910-0

for connection to the control system
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
IO-Link connection,
comprising one basic module and two coupling modules,
plus an additional module connector for assembling
an IO-Link group
3RA2711-1CA00
3RA2711-2CA00
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
comprising one basic module and two coupling modules
3RA2712-1CA00
3RA2712-2CA00
3RA2711-0EE01
3RA2711-0EE01

3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0

2 module connectors, 14-pole, short
+ 2 interface covers
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
14-pole, 8 cm
3RA2711-0EE02
3RA2711-0EE02
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
14-pole, 21 cm
3RA2711-0EE03
3RA2711-0EE03
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
10-pole, 8 cm
A
For separate control signal infeed within an IO-Link group
3RA2711-0EE04
3RA2711-0EE04
3RT201,
3RT202
S00, S0
Sealable covers
3RA2910-0
3RA2910-0
Module connectors
PS = 5 units
Operator panels for IO-Link see page 3/192.

Note:
3/172
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overview
Note:
Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting1) or wye-delta starting of special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available from Technical Assistance.
The 3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be
ordered as follows:
Sizes S2 and S3
Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, reversing time
up to 10 s
Sizes S6 to S12
Only as individual parts for customer assembly
The 3RA14 contactor assemblies have screw terminals. Sizes S2

to S3 are suitable for screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto
Complete units
Fully wired and tested 3RA14 contactor assemblies have one
unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the
Q3 delta contactor.
With the preassembled contactor assembly sizes S2 and S3,
22 to 75 kW, a timing relay is laterally mounted. A dead interval
of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the time relay
function.
1)

Rated data
at 50 Hz 400 V AC
Overload relays for motor protection, see Chapter 7,

The 3RA14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are

designed for standard applications.
For effective support from Technical Assistance you must provide the
following details:
- Rated motor voltage
- Rated motor current
- Service factor, operating values
- Motor starting current factor
- Starting time
- Ambient temperature
Size
Rating P
Operational current
Ie
Motor current
kW
A
... 43
Line/delta contactor Star contactor
22
50
31
30
50
48.3 ... 65
37
80
62.1 ... 77.8
45
86
69
55
115
75
150
90
160
86
... 160
110
195
86
... 195
132
230
86
... 230
3RT1055
3RT1045
160
280
86
... 280
3RT1056
3RT1046
200
350
95
... 350
250
430
95
... 430
315
540
277
... 540
355
610
277
... 610
S2-S2-S0
S3-S3-S2
690
277
... 690
500
850
277
... 850
S6-S6-S3
S10-S10-S6
S12-S12-S10
3RA1434-8XC21-1. . .
--
3RT1036
120.7 ... 150
400
3RT1026
3RT1034
S2-S2-S2
... 86
77.6 ... 108.6
3RT1034
3RT1034
Article No.
complete assembly
3RA1435-8XC21-1. . .
3RA1436-8XC21-1. . .
3RT1044
3RT1035
3RA1444-8XC21-1. . .
3RT1045
3RT1036
3RA1445-8XC21-1. . .
3RT1054
3RT1044
--
3RT1064
3RT1054
3RT1065
3RT1055
3RT1075
3RT1064
---
3RT1065
3RT1076
3RT1066
Surge suppression
Sizes S2 and S3
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements,
varistors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in the
coil. As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors
can either be plugged onto the top or bottom coil terminals.
Sizes S6 to S12
The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
Motor protection
As overload protection, the 3RU11 or 3RB2 overload relays
(see table on the next page) or 3RN1 thermistor motor protection
releases can be used.
current.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/173
Siemens AG 2013
Assembly kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical
connectors are available for contactor assemblies for wye-delta
starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timing relays,
auxiliary switches for electrical interlock if required also infeed
terminals, mechanical interlocks and base plates must be
ordered separately.
In the case of sizes S2 to S12 only the bottom main conducting

path connection between the delta and star contactors is included in the wiring module, owing to the larger conductor
cross-section at the infeed.
Note:
The selection of contactor types refers to fused design.
Accessories for
customer assembly
Timing relays
Assembly kit A, Assembly kit B, Star jumper

for double infeed for single infeed
Base plates
kW
22 3RP1574-1N.30 3RA1933-2C 1)
3RV1935-1A
3RT1926-4BA31 3RA1932-2E
30
37 3RP1574-1N.30 3RA1933-2B 1)
3RV1935-1A
3RT1936-4BA31 3RA1932-2F
45
55 3RP1574-1N.30 3RA1943-2C1)
--
3RT1936-4BA31 3RA1942-2E
75
90 3RP1574-1N.30 --
Overload relay, thermal

Overload relay, solid-state

Setting
range
A
Setting range Article No.

A
Article No.
18
... 25
3RU1136-4DB0
28
... 40
3RU1136-4FB0
36
... 45
3RU1136-4GB0
40
... 50
3RU1136-4HB0
45
... 63
3RU1146-4JB0
70
... 90
3RU1146-4LB0
3RA1953-3D2)
3RT1946-4BA31 3RA1952-2E
--
--
--
3RT1956-4BA31 3RA1962-2E
--
--
12.5 ... 50 3RB2036-1UB0

12.5 ... 50 3RB2036-1UB0
25
... 100 3RB2046-1EB0
50
... 200 3RB2056-1FC2
110
132
160
200 3RP1574-1N.30 -250
315 3RP1574-1N.30 --
--
3RT1966-4BA31 3RA1972-2E
355
400
500
1)
Assembly kit contains wiring module on the bottom (connection between

delta and star contactor) and star jumper.
2)
Wiring module on top from reversing contactor assembly (note conductor

cross-sections).
3/174
Siemens IC 10 2014
--
--
55
... 250 3RB2066-1GC2
160
... 630 3RB2066-1MC2
160
... 630 3RB2066-1MC2
Siemens AG 2013
identical to those of the individual 3RT1 contactors and
3RU1 overload relays
3RA1435
3RA1436
3RA1444
3RA1445
Size
S2-S2-S2
S2-S2-S2
S3-S3-S2
S3-S3-S2
AC operation
mm
198 x 140 x 184
218 x 180 x 207
mm
198 x 140 x 169
218 x 180 x 194
Type
Type
Type
3RT1035
3RT1035
3RT1034
DC operation
Dimensions (W x H x D) with base plate
Type
General data
Q1 line contactor
Q3 delta contactor
Q2 star contactor
3RT1036
3RT1036
3RT1034
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1035
3RT1045
3RT1045
3RT1036
160
80
250
125
250
160
1)
Main circuit without overload relays2)
with single or double infeed
acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1
A
A
125
63

A
A
10
in the contactor coil circuit

A
A
10
in the contactor coil circuit
Control circuit
Short-circuit test
Main circuit
At 400 V
500 V
690 V
A
A
A
80
69.3
69.3
86
86
69.3
115
112.6
98.7
150
138.6
138.6

at 50 Hz and 60 Hz and
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
25.5
44
48
66
--
27.8
48
60
67
--
37
65
80
97
--
49
85
98
136
--
h-1
15
15
15
15

At 400 V
500 V
690 V
A
A
A
57
57
57
67
67
67
97
97
97
106
106
106

At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
18.2
31.6
40
55
--
21.6
38
47
65
--
32
55
69
95
--
35
60
75
104
--
h-1
15
15
15
15

At 400 V
500 V
690 V
A
A
A
51
51
51
57
57
57
85
85
85
92
92
92

At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
16.3
28
35
49
--
18.4
32
40
55
--
28
48
60
83
--
30
52
65
90
--
15
15
15
15

1)
2)
h-1
For circuit diagrams for the control circuit see Reference Manual
"Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor Assemblies",
3)
Up to Ik < 0.5 kA; 260 V.
4)
Selection data for fuseless load feeders.
For short-circuit protection with overload relay see Configuration Manual

"SIRIUS Configuration Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders",
Article No. 3ZX1012-0RA21-0AB0,
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/175
Siemens AG 2013

16
17
11
18
19
NSB0_00465d
15
10
9
10
10
8
6

4

Depth compensation required
Q3: 1.5 mm; Q2: 0 mm1)
7 Solid-state time-delay
auxiliary switch block, front2)
15 Auxiliary switch block, lateral
16 Surge suppressors
17 Three-phase infeed terminals
18 Three-phase busbars
19 Push-in lug for timing relay
screw mounting
The connecting cables

are not shown.
Article No.
Page
3RA1924-2B
Individual parts
3/161
3RT1926-2G. . .
3/107
3RH1921-1EA. .
3RT1926-1. . . .
3RT1936-1. . . .
3RV1935-5A
3RV1935-1A
3RP1903
3/105
3/108,
3/108
3/179
3/179
Article No.
Page
Q1
Q3
Q2
3RT1034
3RT1026
1 2 3
Contactor, 22/30 kW
3RT1034
8
9
Timing relay, lateral

Auxiliary switch block with
1 unassigned NO contact
Auxiliary switch block for
local control
2 units
3 units
Base plate
Assembly kit
3RP1574-1N.30
3RH1921-1CA10
3)
3RH1921-1CA01
3RH1921-1CA10
3RA1932-2E
3RA1933-2C
3/103
10
11
6
3)
3/83
3/103
3/179
3/179
The assembly kit contains the star jumper on the top and the wiring
module on the bottom for connecting the main current paths.
1)
Use the 3RA1932-2B base plate for this design.
2)
Generally possible. If a solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is

mounted onto the front of Q3, an auxiliary switch block can only be
mounted onto the side.
3)
Rated data AC-3
See Chapter 10 "Monitoring and Control Devices" "3RP, 7PV Timing

Relays" "3RP15 Timing Relays in Industrial Enclosure, 22.5 mm".
Rated control
supply
voltage Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
kW
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kW
kW
19.6
22 / 30 35
34
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
}
3RA1434-8XC21-1AC2
3RA1434-8XC21-1AG2
3RA1434-8XC21-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
19.6
22 / 30 35
34
24 DC
3RA1434-8XC21-1BB4
1 unit
41B
kW
50 / 65
DC operation
50 / 65
3RA1434-8XC21-1. . .
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3/176
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
16
17
11
18
19
NSB0_00466c
15
10
9
4
10
10
8
The connecting cables are

not shown.
12

4
7

Solid-state time-delay auxiliary
switch block, front1)
12 Mech. interlock, front
15 Auxiliary switch block, lateral
16 Surge suppressors
17 Three-phase infeed terminal
18 Three-phase busbar
19 Push-in lug for timing relay
screw mounting
Article No.
Page
3RA1924-2B
3RT1926-2G. . .
3/161
3/107
3RA1924-1A
3RH1921-1EA. .
3RT1926-1. . . .
3RT1936-1. . . .
3RV1935-5A
3RV1935-1A
3RP1903
3/161
3/105
3/108,
3/108
3/179
3/179
Individual parts
Page
Q3
Q2
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1034
3RT1034
1 2 3
1 2 3
Contactor, 37 kW
Contactor, 45 kW
3RT1035
3RT1036
8
9

local control
2 units
3 units
Base plate
Assembly kit
3RP1574-1N.30
3RH1921-1CA10
2)
3RH1921-1CA01
3RH1921-1CA10
3RA1932-2F
3RA1933-2B
3/103
10
11
6
2)
Article No.
Q1
3/83
3/83
3/103
3/179
3/179
1)
2)

Rated data AC-3

Rated control
supply
voltage Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
kW
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
kW
kW
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RA143.-8XC21-1. . .
80
25
37
51
63
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
}
3RA1435-8XC21-1AC2
3RA1435-8XC21-1AG2
3RA1435-8XC21-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
86
27
45
55
63
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
}
3RA1436-8XC21-1AC2
3RA1436-8XC21-1AG2
3RA1436-8XC21-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
25
27
37
45
51
55
63
63
24 DC
24 DC
A
A
3RA1435-8XC21-1BB4
3RA1436-8XC21-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
80
86
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/177
Siemens AG 2013
Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S3-S3-S2 Up to 75 kW
1
16
11
20
19
NSB0_00467d
15
10
8
9
10
10
The connecting cables

are not shown.

4
7
15
16
19
20
Mech. interlock, lateral,

depth compensation required
Q3: 0 mm; Q2: 27.5 mm1)
Solid-state time-delay
auxiliary switch block, front2)
Surge suppressors
Push-in lug for timing relay
screw mounting
Single-phase infeed terminals
Article No.
Page
Individual parts
Article No.
Page
Q1
Q3
Q2
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1035
3RT1036
1 2 3
1 2 3
Contactor, 55 kW
Contactor, 75 kW
3RT1044
3RT1045
8
9
3RP1574-1N.30
3RH1921-1CA10
3RH1921-1EA. .
3RT19.6-1 . . . .
3RP1903
3/105
3/108
10
3/179
3RH1921-1CA01
3RH1921-1CA10
3RA1942-2E
3RA1943-2C
3/103
3RA1943-3L

local control
2 units
3 units
Base plate
Assembly kit
3)
3/107
3RA1924-2B
3/161
3RT1926-2G. . .
3)
11
6
3/83
3/83
3/103
3/179
3/179
1)
Use the 3RA1942-2B base plate for this design.
2)

3)
Rated data AC-3


supply voltage
Us1)
Operational
current Ie up to
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
400 V
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
kW
Article No.
kW
kW
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
115
37
55
81
93
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
}
3RA1444-8XC21-1AC2
3RA1444-8XC21-1AG2
3RA1444-8XC21-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
150
47
75
103
110
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
}
3RA1445-8XC21-1AC2
3RA1445-8XC21-1AG2
3RA1445-8XC21-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
37
47
55
75
81
103
93
110
24 DC
24 DC
B
B
3RA1444-8XC21-1BB4
3RA1445-8XC21-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
3RA144.-8XC21-1. . .
1)
115
150
Coil operating range at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us; at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3/178
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Version
Size
DT Article No.

star jumper,
wiring module on the bottom
S2-S2-S0
S2-S2-S2
S3-S3-S2
}
}
}
S3-S3-S3
(Wiring module on the top is not included in the
S6-S6-S6
scope of supply.
A double infeed between the line contactor and the S6-S6-S6
delta contactor is recommended.)
S10-S10-S10
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RA1933-2C
3RA1933-2B
3RA1943-2C
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3RA1943-2B
1 unit
41B
3RA1953-2B
1 unit
41B
3RA1953-2N
1 unit
41B
3RA1963-2B
1 unit
41B
S12-S12-S12
3RA1973-2B
1 unit
41B
S3
3RA1943-3L
1 unit
41B
S2
3RV1935-5A
1 unit
41E
S2
3RV1935-1A
1 unit
41E
S2
3RT1936-4BA31
1 unit
41B
S3
3RT1946-4BA31
1 unit
41B
S61)2)
3RT1956-4BA31
1 unit
41B
S10, S121)2)
3RT1966-4BA31
1 unit
41B
Side-by-side mounting
S2, S2, S0
3RA1932-2E
1 unit
41B
10 mm distance between Q3 and Q2
S2, S2, S2
3RA1932-2F
1 unit
41B
S3, S3, S2
3RA1942-2E
1 unit
41B
10 mm distance between Q1, Q3 and Q2
S6, S6, S3
S6, S6, S6
S10, S10, S6
B
B
B
3RA1952-2E
3RA1952-2F
3RA1962-2E
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S10, S10, S10

S12, S12, S10
S12, S12, S12
B
B
B
3RA1962-2F
3RA1972-2E
3RA1972-2F
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S2, S2, S0
S2, S2, S2
S3, S3, S2
B
B
B
3RA1932-2B
3RA1932-2B
3RA1942-2B
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
NSB0_01836
NSB0_01837
3RA1953-2B
3RA1953-2N,
3RA1963-2B,
3RA1973-2B
Single-phase infeed terminals

Conductor cross-section: 95 mm2

Infeed terminal blocks for the line contactor for
large conductor cross-sections
Conductor cross-section: 50 mm2
Three-phase busbars
Bridging phase-by-phase of all input terminals of
the line contactor Q1 and the delta contactor Q3
Links for paralleling, 3-pole (star jumpers)

Without connection terminal
(the links for paralleling can be reduced by one
pole)
3RT1936-4BA31
Base plates
For customer assembly of contactor assemblies for
wye-delta starting with a laterally mounted timing
relay
For customer assembly of contactor assemblies for

wye-delta starting with a front-mounted timing
relay
10 mm distance between Q1, Q3 and Q2
1)
The 3RT1956-4EA1 (for S6) or 3RT1966-4EA1 (for S10 and S12) cover can
be used for touch protection.
2)
Sizes S6 and S10/S12 are approved as star jumpers according to UL and

CSA.

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/179
Assembly kits
Siemens AG 2013
3TD, 3TE Contactor Assemblies
3TD6 reversing contactor assemblies, 335 kW
Overview
An internal circuit diagram, a type designation and an unit labeling plate are provided on a common cover.
Auxiliary contacts
Complete units and components for customer assembly are

available. For motor protection, either overload relays for standalone installation or thermistor motor protection releases must be
ordered separately.
The contactor assemblies have 4 NO + 4 NC contacts per individual contactor. 3 NO + 3 NC contacts are unassigned for momentary-contact operation and 4 NO + 3 NC contacts unassigned for continuous contacting.
Complete units
The 3TD68 contactor assemblies each consist of two 3TF68 contactors that are mechanically interlocked with 3TX7686-1A.
Electrical interlocking is wired. The main and control circuits are
wired according to the circuit diagrams.
For the wiring of individual contactors, see the circuit diagrams

of the control circuits in the Reference Manual
"Contactors and Contactor Assemblies",
The technical specifications are identical to those of the
3TF68 individual contactors unless otherwise stated.
:
Type
3TD68
Size
14
mm
520 x 310 x 278
'
General data
Permissible mounting position, installation
instructions1)
22,5 22,5
90
90

mounting surface.
NSB0_00649a
The contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate and
the contactors are mechanically interlocked. They are fingersafe according to EN 50274.
s and u rated data

V AC
600
Uninterrupted current enclosed
550
hp
hp
hp
hp
200
229
464
582
hp
A
A
600
540
hp
hp
hp
hp
150
200
400
400

at 60 Hz
At 200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
NEMA/EEMAC SIZE
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
- Open
- Enclosed
at 60 Hz
At 200 V
230 V
460 V
575 V
3RB2066
Type
Overload relays
Setting range
1)
If the contactors are mounted at a 90 angle (conducting paths horizontally

one above the other), the following reductions apply: switching frequency:
to 80 % of the standard values.
160 ... 630


Size
Rated data AC-3
Operational
current Ie up to
Auxiliary
contacts per
direction of
rotation
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and

supply voltage
Us
Version
Article No.
690 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC
335
434
600
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V AC
Complete units
14
3/180
630
200
Siemens IC 10 2014
110 132
3TD6804-2CF7
1 unit
41B
200 240
3TD6804-2CM7
1 unit
41B

Siemens AG 2013
3TE6 contactor assemblies
for wye-delta starting, 630 kW
Overview
The contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate.
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The star-delta (wye-delta) changeover is implemented via a

lateral time relay 3RP1574 (1 ... 20 ms) or 3RP1576 (3 ... 60 ms).
3TE contactor assemblies are available as complete units and

components for customer assembly. They consist of two
3TF68 contactors, and the 3RT1075 contactor as star (wye)
contactor.
Motor protection
Control circuit (auxiliary contacts)
current.
The 3TF68 contactors have four lateral auxiliary switches, each

with 1 NO + 1 NC contact. The following auxiliary contacts are
required for the control circuit of the assembly:
Line contactor Q1: 13-14, 43-44
Star (wye) contactor Q2: 13-14, 21-22
Delta contactor Q3: 13-14, 21-22
The technical specifications are identical to those of the

3TF68 individual contactors unless otherwise stated.
Type
3TE68
Size
14
mm
665 x 325 x 278
'
22,5 22,5
90
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface.
90
NSB0_00649a
General data
Permissible mounting position, installation instructions1)
Q1 line contactor
Type
3TF68
Q2 star contactor
Type
3RT1075
Q3 delta contactor
Type
3TF68

2)
Main circuit
Up to 690 V
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
1 090
kW
kW
kW
kW
355
612
800
1 046
h-1
A
A
923
883
kW
kW
kW
kW
295
515
677
885
h-1
A
A
800
765
kW
kW
kW
kW
244
444
590
770
h-1

Up to 500 V
690 V
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V

Up to 500 V
690 V
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V

1)
If the contactors are mounted at a 90 angle (conducting paths horizontally

one above the other), the following reductions apply: switching frequency:
to 80 % of the standard values.
2)
See circuit diagrams of the control circuits in Reference Manual

"Contactors and Contactor Assemblies",
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/181
The complete unit combinations are optionally supplied without

a main conducting path connection between the line contactor
and the delta contactor.
3TE68 contactor assemblies are supplied without overload protection. Overload relays or thermistor motor protection releases
Siemens AG 2013
3TE6 contactor assemblies
for wye-delta starting, 630 kW
Contactor
Type
3TE68
Main circuit

acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/EN 60947-4-1
A
A
1 000
5001)

10

10
Rated motor current
277 ... 1 090
Overload relays
Type
3RB2066
Setting range
(The overload relays must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor current.)
160 ... 630

A
A
1 000
500
Fuse links, aM operational class: LV HRC, type 3ND

630
Fuse links, Siemens Canada, HRC fuses, Type II
1 000
Fuse links, UL-listed fuses, CLASS L
1 200
Fuse links, British Standard Fuses, BS88

A
A
1 000
500
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders

with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
Permissible back-up fuses for starters,

comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays.
Single or double infeed1)
1)
The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.

Use double infeed for higher rated motor currents; see the circuit
diagrams in the Reference Manual "Contactors and Contactor
Assemblies",

Size
Rated data AC-3
Operational
current Ie
up to

voltage Us
DT Screw terminals

at 50 Hz and
690 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V AC
Complete units, reversing time up to 10 s

Without main current path connection between line and delta contactor
14
1)
1 090
315
630
800

0.85 ... 1.15 x Us;
lower operating range limit according to IEC 60947.
3/182
Siemens IC 10 2014
1 000
110
3TE6804-5CF0
1 unit
41B
230/2201)
3TE6804-5CP0
1 unit
41B
For motor protection, overload relays for stand-alone installation

must be ordered separately; see Chapter 7,

Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Introduction
Overview
They include the key control functions required for the particular
feeder, e.g. timing and interlocking, and can be connected to the
control system by either parallel wiring or through IO-Link or
AS-Interface.
Version
SIRIUS 3RA28 function modules

for IO-Link1)
For direct-on-line starting
Timing relays: ON-delay or OFF-delay with With screw or spring-type terminals

semiconductor output

for AS-Interface1)
With screw or spring-type terminals
For reversing starting
Wiring modules
for sizes S00 and S0
(with screw terminals for main and control
circuit)
1 function module for size S00 and S0,

1 function module for size S00 and S0,
screw or spring-type connection, plus the screw or spring-type connection, plus the
1)
respective wiring modules
respective wiring modules1)
For wye-delta starting
1 function module for size S00 and S0 with 1 function module for size S00 and S0 with 1 function module for size S00 and S0 with
screw or spring-type terminals plus the
Accessories
Sealable covers
Operator panel for autonomous control of

up to four feeders
Module connector for the grouping of
starters
AS-Interface addressing unit

3RK1904-2AB02 (see Chapter 2,
"Industrial Communication")
Sealable covers
Connection cable between the operator

panel and the feeder group
Sealable covers
1)
Use of the communication-capable function modules for IO-Link or

AS-Interface requires contactors with communication interface
(see pages 3/34 and 3/37).
2)
The modules for the control current wiring, which are included in the wiring
kit, are not required.
Note:
When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are
allowed to be connected to the basic units.
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/183
The function modules for mounting onto contactors enable the

assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line,
reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated wiring of the individual components.
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
SIRIUS 3RA28 Function Modules for Mounting on 3RT2 and 3RH21 Contactors
Introduction
Overview
Application
Simply by being plugged in place, the SIRIUS function modules

enable different functionalities required for the assembly of starters to be realized in the feeder. The function modules and wiring
kits thus help to reduce the wiring work within the feeder practically to zero.
SIRIUS function modules for direct-on-line starting

All solid-state timing relays which can be mounted onto the
contactor are designed for applications in the range from 24 to
240 V AC/DC (wide voltage range). Both the electrical and
mechanical connection are made by simple snapping on and
locking.
The solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output uses two
contact legs to actuate the contactor underneath by means of a
semiconductor after the set time t has elapsed.
The switching state feedback is performed by a mechanical
switching state indicator (plunger). In addition, the auxiliary
switches in the contactors are freely accessible and can be used
for feedbacks to the control system or for signal lamps.
A sealable cover is available to protect against careless
adjustment of the set times.
SIRIUS function modules for reversing starting
The wiring kits for reversing starters enable the cost-effective
assembly of contactor assemblies. They can be used for all
applications with reversing duty up to 18.5 kW.
For detailed description see page 3/150.
SIRIUS function modules for wye-delta starting
Both interlocking and timing functions are required for the
assembly of wye-delta starters. With the function modules for
wye-delta starting and the matching link modules for the main
circuit, these starters can be assembled easily and with absolutely no errors.
The entire sequence in the control circuit is integrated in the
snap-on modules. This covers:
An adjustable star time t from 0.5 to 60 s
A non-adjustable dead interval of 50 ms
Electrical contacting to the contactors by means of coil
pick-off (contact legs)
Feedback of the switching state at the contactor using a
mechanical switch position indicator (plunger)
Electrical interlocking between the contactors
These modules do not require their own terminals and can therefore be used for contactors with both screw and spring-type terminals in the two sizes S00 and S0. To start the wye-delta starter,
only the first of the three contactors (line contactor) is actuated.
All other functions then take place inside the individual modules.
This also offers advantages if the timing function was previously
implemented in a controller, as it again results in a significant
reduction in the number of PLC outputs, the programming work
and the wiring outlay.
The kits for the main circuit include the mechanical interlock, the
star jumper, the wiring modules at the top and at the bottom, and
the required connecting clips.
A protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in the basic module.
3/184
Siemens IC 10 2014
The snap-on function modules for direct-on-line starting are

used above all for realizing timing functions independently of the
control system.
With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay it is possible for
example for the fan motor for cooling a main drive to be switched
off with a delay so that sufficient cooling after operation is guaranteed even if the plant and its control system have already
been switched off.
The ON-delay timing relays enable for example the time-delayed
starting of several drives so that the summation starting current
does not rise too high, which could result in voltage failure.
The function modules for wye-delta starting are mostly used
where current-limiting measures for starting a drive are required,
e.g. for large fans and ventilators, and a high level of availability
is essential at the same time. This technology has been used
with success for several decades and has the additional advantage of requiring relatively little know-how. Through the use of
function modules, the assembly work with simple standard components is even easier and error-free.
Benefits
The use of snap-on function modules for direct-on-line starting
(timing relays) results in the following advantages:
Reduction of control current wiring
Prevention of wiring errors
Implementation of timing functions independently of the
control system
Less space required in the control cabinet compared to a
separate timing relay
No additive protection circuit required (varistor integrated)
For advantages of using wiring kits for the assembly of reversing
starters see page 3/151.
The use of function modules for wye-delta starting results in the
following advantages:
Operation solely through the line contactor A1/A2 no further
wiring needed
Reduction of the control current wiring inside the contactor
assembly and to the higher-level control system where applicable
Prevention of wiring errors
Integrated electrical interlocking saves costs and prevents
errors
Less space needed in the control cabinet compared to using
a separate timing relay
Adjustable starting in star mode from 0.5 to 60 s
Independent of the contactor's control supply voltage
(24 to 240 V AC/DC)
Varistor integrated no additive protection circuit required
No control current wiring thanks to plug-in technology and
connecting cables
Mechanically coded assembly enables easy configuration
and reliable wiring
Fewer versions one module kit for screw and spring-type
connection and for the two sizes S00 and S0
Mechanical interlocking (with wiring kit for the main circuit)
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Introduction
Type
3RA2811
3RA2812
3RA2816
Function
ON-delay
OFF-delay
with control signal
Wye-delta function
Dimensions
See 3RT20 contactors, pages 3/17 and 3/22.
General data
V AC
300

Pollution degree 3
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,

Varistor integrated
Rated power
VA

Load current
- At 24 ... 240 V, 50 Hz
0.4
--
- At 24 ... 240 V, DC
0.4
--
AC-15
At 24 ... 240 V, 50 Hz
--
DC-13
- At 24 V
--
- At 125 V
--
0.2
- At 250 V
--
0.1
Operational class gG
--
With Ie at 230 V AC
h-1
2 500
--
h-1
2 500
--
Recovery time
ms
50
Minimum ON period
ms
--
DIAZED protection
150
35
--
Residual current
Max.
mA
--
Voltage drop
With conducting output
Max.
VA
3.5
--
Up to 10 ms
10
--
Setting accuracy
With reference to upper limit
of scale
Typ.
Repeat accuracy
Max.
15 %
1 %
10 x 106

During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80

Shock resistance
IP20
g/ms
15/11
Hz/mm
10 ... 55/0.35
IEC 61812-1, IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-4
Any
IEC 60947-4-1
Connection type
Solid
Terminal screws
Tightening torque
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
Connection type
Operating devices
Solid
Finely stranded
1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
M3 (for standard screw driver size 2 or Pozidriv 2)
0.8 ... 1.2
------
mm
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
3.0 x 0.5
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
------
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/185
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA2811-1CW10
For contactors Rated control supply voltage Us1) Time setting range t
Article No.
Type
V AC/DC
3RA2811-2CW10
DT Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output,

for snapping onto the front
The electrical connection between the timing relay and
the contactor underneath is established automatically when it is
snapped on and locked.
ON-delay
24 ... 240
3RT201.,
3RT202.,
3RH212),
3RH24
0.05 ...100
(1, 10, 100; selectable)
3RA2811-1CW10
3RA2811-2CW10
0.05 ...100
3RA2812-1DW10
3RA2812-2DW10
3RA2910-0
3RA2910-0

Varistor integrated
24 ... 240
3RT201.,
3RT202.,
3RH212),
3RH24
Accessories
Sealable covers
for 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
1)
Note:
2)

Function
Function charts
Contact closed
Contact open
1 NO contact (semiconductor output)

3RA28
Q
3RA2812-.DW10
A3/A4
NSB0_02099
OFF-delay
with control signal
NSB0_02098
3RA2811-.CW10
A3/A2
ON-delay
B1/A4
>
35 ms
t
3/186
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
For reversing starting / for wye-delta starting
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RA2816-0EW20
3RA2923-2AA1
For
contactors
Type
V AC/DC
1)
Time setting range t
3RA2923-2BB2
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Assembly kits for reversing starting

3RT201.
For size S00
3RA2913-2AA1
3RA2913-2AA2
3RT202.
For size S0
3RA2923-2AA1
3RA2923-2AA2
Assembly kits for wye-delta starting

4 connecting clips for 3 contactors;
star jumper,
3RT201.
For size S00
3RA2913-2BB1
3RA2913-2BB2
3RT202.
For size S0 (only main current for version with spring-type terminals) }
3RA2923-2BB1
3RA2923-2BB2

The electrical connection between the function module and the
contactor assembly is established automatically by snapping on and
plugging in the connecting cables.
Wye-delta function (varistor integrated)
3RT201.,
3RT202. 2)
24 ... 240
0.5 ... 60
3RA2816-0EW20
3RA2816-0EW20
24 ... 240
Basic modules
3RA2912-0
3RA2912-0
--
Coupling modules
3RA2911-0
3RA2911-0
3RA2910-0
3RA2910-0
Individual modules
Accessories
Sealable covers
for 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
1)
Note:
2)

Function
Function charts
Contact closed
Contact open
2 NO contacts (interconnected internally)

3RA2816-0EW20
A1/A2 Q1
Y Q2
Q3

NSB0_02072a
Wye-delta function
1 NO contact delayed
1 NO contact instantaneous
50 ms
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/187
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
SIRIUS 3RA27 Function Modules for IO-Link for Mounting on 3RT2 Contactors
Introduction
The SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link enable the assembly of

starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line, reversing
and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated wiring of the individual components. They include the key control
functions required for the particular feeder, e.g. timing and interlocking.
The starters are connected to the higher-level control system

through IO-Link, with the possibility of connecting up to four
starters as a group to one port of the IO-Link master.
The electrical and mechanical connection to the contactor is

established by snapping on and locking. An additive protection
circuit for the individual contactors can be dispensed with
completely because a varistor is integrated in the modules.
Feedback from the contactor contacts is performed with
Hall sensors which provide reliable feedback concerning the
switching state even under extremely dusty conditions.
The following essential signals are transmitted:

Availability of the feeder in response to an indirect inquiry from
the motor starter protector/circuit breaker
Starter control
Feedback concerning the switching state of the starter
Through this type of connection to the control system,

a maximum of wiring is saved.
Availability
Control
PLC
Feedback through
switching state
PLC
IO-Link
NSB0_02084a
Signal transmission through IO-Link
The inquiry from the motor starter protector/circuit breaker does

not take place through additive wiring between the auxiliary
switch and the module but by means of a voltage inquiry at the
contactor input.
This requires special versions of the contactors with communication interface (see pages 3/34 and 3/37).
Motor starter protector
Contactor
NSB0_02086
Overview
Availability signal through voltage pick-off
3/188
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Introduction
By grouping up to four starters it is possible to connect up to
16 starters to one master of the ET 200S. In this case all the
signals of the individual controls are made available directly in
the process image of the input through only 3 individual wires
per starter group. If the potential at the master of the ET 200S is

the same as that of the controls, a further reduction of wiring is
possible by providing the control supply voltage to the contactors by jumpering the corresponding communication wires.
Group formation for 4 starters max. per IO-Link port
Direct-online starter
IO-link master
Direct-online starter
Reversing
starter
4
Reversing
starter
Port 1
NSB0_02087b
...
Port 2
Group formation with IO-Link
In case of a malfunction, the corresponding error signals are

also sent directly to the PLC in acyclic mode. This is in addition
to transmission of the switching signals and status signals.
Possible error signals:
Device defect
No main voltage (motor starter protector tripped)
No control supply voltage
Limit position on the right / on the left
Manual mode
Process image fault
Application
The use of SIRIUS function modules with IO-Link is recommended above all in machines and plants in which there are
several motor feeders in one control cabinet. Using IO-Link, the
connection of these feeders to the automation level is easy,
quick and error-free. And with IO modules no longer needed, the
width of the ET 200S is far smaller.
This easy integration of the starters in the TIA world does not limit
the flexibility in the field in the least. For example, all function
modules have special terminals in order to enable direct local
disconnection. These terminals can be connected for example
to a position switch. The input interrupts the voltage supply to the
contactor coil directly, i.e. without going through the PLC. These
terminals are jumpered in the as-delivered state.
Local manual operation of the complete starter group is also
straight-forward using a hand-held device. The latter is easily
connected to the last starter and can be built into the front panel
of the control cabinet if required. This offers significant advantages particularly for commissioning.
Benefits
Reduction of the control current wiring to no more than three
cables for four feeders
Elimination of testing costs and wiring errors
Reduction of configuration work
Integration in TIA means clear diagnostics if a fault occurs
Dispensing with IO modules saves space in the control
cabinet
All essential timing and interlocking functions for reversing
duty and wye-delta starting are integrated
No additive protection circuit required
For further information on the IO-Link see Chapter 2 "Industrial
Communication".
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/189
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Introduction
Type
3RA2711
Dimensions
General data
1.0
Suitable for IO-Link masters acc. to specification

During operation
During storage
During transport
According to IEC 60947-1

C
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80
-40 ... +80
IP20
Operational voltage UHi
V DC
24 20 %
Power consumption, max. at UHi
30

kV
V/m
kV
kV
V rms
6/8
10 (80 MHz ... 3 GHz)
2/1
0.5/1
10 (150 kHz ... 80 MHz)
Max. length of the cables

for the input Y1Y2
EMC interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge
Field-related interference
Burst
Conductor-related interference
High frequency, asymmetric
Connection type
Solid
AWG cables
Terminal screws
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
Connection type
Operating devices
Solid
Finely stranded
AWG cables
3/190
Siemens IC 10 2014
1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
M3 (for standard screwdriver 6 mm or Pozidriv 2)
0.8 ... 1.2
mm
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
3.0 x 0.5
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
For direct-on-line starting / for reversing starting /

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Function modules for direct-on-line starting

A
3RA2711-1AA00
3RA2711-2AA00
IO-Link connection,
A
comprising one basic and one coupling module and an
additional module connector for assembling an IO-Link
group
3RA2711-1BA00
3RA2711-2BA00
3RA2913-2AA1
3RA2913-2AA2
3RA2923-2AA1
IO-Link connection
Includes one module connector for assembling
an IO-Link group
3RA2711-1AA00
3RA2711-2AA00
Function modules for reversing starting1)
3RA2711-1BA00
Assembly kits for making 3-pole contactor
assemblies3)
3RA2923-2AA1
For size S00

For size S0
- For main, auxiliary and control current
- Only for main current4)
--
--
3RA2923-2AA2
3RA2711-1CA00
3RA2711-2CA00
3RA2913-2BB1
3RA2913-2BB2
3RA2923-2BB1
3RA2923-2AA2
Function modules for wye-delta starting2)

IO-Link connection,
comprising one basic module and two coupling
modules, plus an additional module connector for
assembling an IO-Link group
3RA2711-1CA00
assemblies3)
star jumper,
3RA2923-2BB1
For size S00

For size S0
- Only for main current4)
--
-}
3RA2923-2BB2
1)
For prewired contactor assemblies for reversing starting with communication interface, see pages 3/153 and 3/155. When these contactor assemblies are used, the assembly kit for the wiring is already integrated.
For matching contactors with communication interface required

2)
For complete contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting including

function modules see pages 3/168 and 3/170.
For matching IO-Link masters see Chapter 2 "Industrial

Communication".
3)
When using the function modules for wye-delta starting, the wiring
modules for the auxiliary current are not required.
Note:
4)



Siemens IC 10 2014
3/191
Version
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Version
DT Article No.

2 module connectors, 14-pole, short
2 interface covers
14-pole, 8 cm
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA2711-0EE01
1 unit
41B
3RA2711-0EE02
1 unit
41B
14-pole, 21 cm
3RA2711-0EE03
1 unit
41B
10-pole, 8 cm
For separate control signal infeed
within an IO-Link group
3RA2711-0EE04
1 unit
41B
Sealable covers
For 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
3RA2910-0
5 units
41B
Operator panel (set), comprising:

1 x operator panel
1 x enabling module
1 x interface cover
1 x fixing terminal
3RA6935-0A
1 unit
42F
Connection cable,
length 2 m, 10- to 14-pole
3RA2711-0EE11
1 unit
41B
Enabling modules (replacement)
3RA6936-0A
1 unit
42F
Interface covers (replacement)
3RA6936-0B
5 units
42F
Accessories
Module connectors
3RA2711-0EE01
3RA2711-0EE02
3RA2910-0
Operator panels1)
3RA6935-0A
For connecting the operator panel to the communication

module
1)
Suitable only for communication through IO-Link.
3/192
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
SIRIUS 3RA27 Function Modules for AS-Interface for Mounting on 3RT2 Contactors
Introduction
Overview
The electrical and mechanical connection to the contactor is

established by snapping on and locking. An additive protection
circuit for the individual contactors can be dispensed with completely because a varistor is integrated in the modules. Feedback from the contactor contacts is performed with Hall sensors
which provide reliable feedback concerning the switching state
even under extremely dusty conditions.
Connection of the starters to the higher-level control system

takes place through AS-Interface with the Specification V2.1 in
A/B technology. As the result, up to 62 starters can be
connected to one master and the address is entered in normal
manner with an addressing unit.
Through this type of connection to the control system, a maximum of wiring is saved. The wiring outlay is reduced to the control supply voltage and the two individual wires for AS-Interface.
The following essential signals are transmitted:
Availability of the feeder in response to an indirect inquiry from
the motor starter protector
Starter control
Feedback concerning the switching state of the starter/circuit
breaker
Availability
Control
PLC
Feedback through
switching state
PLC
AS-Interface
NSB0_02085a
Signal transmission through AS-Interface
The inquiry from the motor starter protector/circuit breaker does

not take place through additive wiring between the auxiliary
switch and the module but by means of a voltage inquiry at the
contactor input.
This requires special versions of the contactors with communication interface (see pages 3/34 and 3/37).
NSB0_02086
Contactor
Availability signal through voltage pick-off
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/193
The SIRIUS function modules for AS-Interface enable the

assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line,
reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated wiring of the individual components. They include the key
control functions required for the particular feeder, e.g. timing
and interlocking.
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Introduction
Wye-delta starter
NSB0_02088a
Direct-on-line starter Reversing starter
Addr. 1a
Addr. 1b
Addr. 2a
AS-Interface
Topology with AS-Interface
This easy integration of the starters in the TIA world does not limit
the flexibility in the field in the least. For example, all function
modules have special terminals in order to enable direct local
disconnection. These terminals can be connected for example
Application
The use of SIRIUS function modules with AS-Interface is recommended above all in machines and plants requiring easy
connection of several different sensors and actuators both
inside and outside the control cabinet to the higher-level control
system. And with IO modules no longer needed, the width of the
PLC is far smaller.
3/194
Siemens IC 10 2014
to a position switch. The input interrupts the voltage supply to the

contactor coil directly, i.e. without going through the PLC. These
terminals are jumpered in the as-delivered state.
Benefits

Dispensing with IO modules saves space in the control
cabinet
All essential timing and interlocking functions for reversing
duty and wye-delta starting are integrated
No additive protection circuit required
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Introduction
Type
3RA2712
Dimensions
General data
A/B slave
Suitable for AS-i masters acc. to Spec.
2.1 or higher
AS-i Slave Profile IO.ID.ID2
7.A.E
ID1 Code (factory setting)
Slave type

During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-40 ... +80
During transport
-40 ... +80

IP20
Operational voltage
AS-Interface
26.5 ... 31.6
AUX PWR 24 V DC
24 20 %
mA
30
Size S00
Size S0
mA
mA
200
300
30
kV
6/8
V/m
10 (80 MHz ... 3 GHz)
Burst
kV
1/2
kV
0.5/1
High frequency, asymmetric
V rms
10 (150 kHz ... 80 MHz)
Power consumption, max.

AS-Interface
AUX PWR
- Maximum pick-up/hold current
Max. length of the cables
for the input Y1Y2
Connection type
Screw terminals
Solid
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG cables
AWG
2 x (20 ... 14)
Terminal screws
M3 (for standard screwdriver 6 mm or Pozidriv 2)

Nm
0.8 ... 1.2

Connection type
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Finely stranded
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
AWG cables
AWG
2 x (24 ... 16)
Siemens IC 10 2014
3/195
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Function modules for direct-on-line starting

AS-Interface connection
3RA2712-1AA00
3RA2712-2AA00
3RA2712-1BA00
3RA2712-2BA00
3RA2913-2AA1
3RA2913-2AA2
3RA2923-2AA1
3RA2712-1AA00
3RA2712-2AA00
Function modules for reversing starting1)

comprising one basic and one coupling module
3RA2712-1BA00
assemblies
3RA2923-2AA1
For size S00

For size S0
- Only for main current
--
-}
3RA2923-2AA2
3RA2923-2AA2
1)
For prewired contactor assemblies for reversing starting with communication interface, see pages 3/153 and 3/155. When these contactor assemblies are used, the assembly kit for the wiring is already integrated.
Matching contactors with communication interface required

For matching AS-Interface masters, routers and power supply
units see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication".
Note:
3/196
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
1)
3RA2712-1CA00
3RA2712-2CA00
3RA2913-2BB1
3RA2913-2BB2
3RA2923-2BB1
comprising one basic module and two coupling
modules
3RA2712-1CA00
3RA2712-2CA00
assemblies
star jumper,
3RA2923-2BB1
For size S00

For size S0
- Only for main current
--
-}
3RA2923-2BB2
3RA2923-2BB2
1)
For complete contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting including function modules, see pages 3/168 and 3/170.
Matching contactors with communication interface required

Note:
For matching AS-Interface masters, routers and power supply

units see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication".
Version
DT Article No.
Sealable covers
for 3RA27, 3RA28, 3RA29
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
5 units
41B
Accessories
3RA2910-0
3RA2910-0

Siemens IC 10 2014
3/197
Siemens AG 2013
Function Modules
Notes
3/198
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Special Applications
4/2
4/4
4/12
4/17
4/21
4/25
4/33
4/37
4/40
4/45
4/49
4/52
4/54
Ch.5
Ch.5
4/56
Ch.3
Ch.5
4/66
Introduction
Contactors for special
applications
SIRIUS 3RT14 contactors for resistive
loads (AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
loads (AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 50 A
loads (AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 60 ... 140 A
3TK1 contactors for resistive loads
(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
3TK20 contactors, 4-pole, 4 kW
2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 11 kW
2 NO + 2 NC, 18.5 kW
SIRIUS 3RT16 capacitor contactors,
12.5 ... 50 kvar
Contactors with extended
operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 Us
for railway applications
SIRIUS 3RT20 motor contactors,
5.5 ... 18.5 kW
18.5 ... 45 kW
3TB5 motor contactors, 55 ... 200 kW
3TC contactors for switching
DC voltage, 2-pole
SIRIUS 3RH21 contactor relays
3TH4 contactor relays
Contactors for switching
DC voltage
3TC contactors,1- and 2-pole,
32 ... 400 A
Notes:
3RT1 contactors in sizes S00/S0 to S12
can be found
- in the catalog Add-On
IC 10 AO 2014
IC 10 AO 2014
Center
Conversion tool
e.g. from 3RT13 to 3RT23 see
Coupling contactors
SIRIUS 3RT20 coupling contactors
(interface), 3-pole, 3 ... 15 kW
SIRIUS 3RH21 coupling contactors
for switching auxiliary circuits,
4-pole
Power relays/Miniature contactors
3TG10 contactors, 4-pole, 4 kW
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Price groups
PG 41B, 41H
Siemens AG 2013

Contactors for Special Applications
Introduction
Overview
Size
Type
S00
3RT231, 3RT251
S0
3RT232, 3RT252
4-pole 3RT23, 3RT25 contactors

Type
3RT2316
Number of main contacts
4 NO
2 NO + 2 NC
4 NO
2 NO + 2 NC
AC, DC operation
(p. 4/15, 4/16)
(p. 4/35, 4/36)
(p. 4/15, 4/16)
(p. 4/35, 4/36)
18 / 16
3RT2317
3RT2516
3RT2517
3RT2518
3RT2325
3RT2326
3RT2327
3RT2526
AC-1
Ie at 400 V [40 C/60 C]
P
22 / 20
18 / 16
22 / 20
22 / 20
35 / 30
40 / 35
50 / 42
40 / 35
40 C
kW 12
14.5
11
13
13
22
26
33
26
60 C
kW
11
13
6.5
20
23
28
15
NO
12
12
16
15.5
15.5
15.5
25
NC
--
--
--
--
25 (20)1)
7.5
7.5
AC-2 and AC-3

Ie at 400 V
--
P at 400 V (NC for DC oper.)
NO / NC kW
5.5
5.5 / 4
7.5 / 4
7.5
7.5
7.5
At 230 V
NO / NC kW
2.2
/ 2.2
/ 2.2
11 (7.5)1)
5.5

3RH2911
(Chap. 3)
3RH2911, 3RH2921
(Chap. 3)
Timing relay blocks
3RA281.
(Chap. 3)
3RA281.
(Chap. 3)
Surge suppressors
3RT2916
(Chap. 3)
3RT2926
(Chap. 3)
1)
The value in brackets applies to the NC for DC operation.
Size
Type
S2
3RT1336, 3RT1535
S3
3RT134.
S6, S10, S12

3RT145.
4-pole 3RT13, 3RT15 contactors 3-pole 3RT14 contactors

Type
3RT1336
3RT1535
3RT1344
3RT1446
3RT1456
Number of main contacts
4 NO
2 NO + 2 NC
4 NO
3 NO
3 NO
AC, DC operation
(p. 4/19)
(p. 4/39)
(p. 4/19)
(p. 4/10)
(p. 4/10)
3RT1346
3RT1466
3RT1476
AC-1 ( 690 V)
40 C
60
60
110
140
140
275
400
690
60 C
55
55
100
120
130
250
380
650
P At 400 V
40 C
kW 39
36
72
92
92
180
263
454
At 230 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
At 1 000 V
40 C
kW
kW
kW
kW
20
----
42
----
53
----
53
115
159
98
105
225
310
165
151
329
454
247
261
568
783
410
44
97
138
170
22
55
75
90
12.7
29.9
38.2
30
55
90
37
90
132
55
110
160
Ie
60 C
23
----
AC-2 and AC-3

Ie/AC-3/400 V
P at 400 V
kW 11
18.5
At 230 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
kW
kW
kW
9.5
---
5.5
---
----
----

3RH1921
(Chap. 3)
Terminal covers
3RT1936-4EA2
(Chap. 3)
Box terminal blocks
--
Surge suppressors
3RT1926/36
4/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RT1946-4EA1/2
(Chap. 3)
-(Chap. 3)
3RT1926/36
(Chap. 3)
3RT1956-4EA1/2/3
(Chap. 3)
3RT1955/56-4G
(Chap. 3)
3RT1956-1C (RC element) (Chap. 3)
Siemens AG 2013

Size
Type
-3TK1
00
3TK20
-3TG10
3TK20
3TG10
(p. 4/31)
(p. 4/68)
Introduction
3TK, 3TG contactors

Type
3TK10
AC, DC operation
(p. 4/23)
3TK11
3TK12
3TK13
3TK14
3TK15
3TK17
AC-1 (40 C, 690 V)

Ie
200
250
300
350
550
800
1000
18
20
P at 400 V
kW 132
165
197
230
362
527
658
10
13
At 230 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
kW
kW
kW
76
165
227
95
206
284
114
247
341
132
288
397
308
452
624
303
658
908
378
828
1135
6
13
17
7.5
---
Ie/AC-3/400 V
120
145
210
210
400
550
700
8.4
8.4
P at 400 V
kW
55
75
110
110
200
280
370
At 127 V
At 230 V
At 500 V
At 690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
-30
-45
-75
-75
-110
-160
-220
1.4
2.5
4
4
--
---
---
AC-2 and AC-3

On front
Lateral
-3TK1910
Terminal covers
3TK1940
Surge suppressors
3TK1930
3TK1942
3TK1944
3TK1946
3TK1934
--
--
3TX4490
(Chap. 3)
--
Note:
"Standards and Approvals".
Connection methods
Support function
The contactors are available with screw terminals (box terminals

or flat connectors) or with spring-type terminals.
The 3RT20 contactors can also be ordered via an online

configurator.
Devices of the 3TK2 series are also available for connection with
As an option the devices of the 3RT2 series are also available for
connection with ring terminal lugs, particularly versions for North
America and Japan.

The online configurator is indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbol shown on an orange
background.
Screw terminals
Flat connectors
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/3
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RT14 contactors for resistive loads
(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Overview
Size S3: AC or DC operation
Sizes S6 to S12: UC operating mechanism
(AC 50/60 Hz and DC)
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The following applies for sizes S6 to S12:

Withdrawable coils
Integrated coil circuit (varistor)
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are
3RT14 contactors are used for switching resistive loads (AC-1)
or as contactors that normally only have to carry the current, for
example for variable-speed operating mechanisms.
The accessories for the 3RT10 contactors can also be used

here.
For a general description of sizes S3 to S12, see Chapter 3,
"Power contactors for switching motors" "SIRIUS 3RT10
contactors, 3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW".
3RT1446
3RT1456
3RT1466
3RT1476
Size
S3
S6
S10
S12
mm
70 x 146 x 134
120 x 172 x
170
145 x 210 x
202
160 x 214 x
225
mm
70 x 146 x 183
120 x 172 x
217
145 x 210 x
251
160 x 214 x
271
Type
22,5 22,5
22,5 22,5
90
90
3RT1446: For DC operation and up to 22.5 inclination in front, the

coil operating range is reduced to 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
--
NSB0_00477a
Special version required.

Operating
cycles
10 million
for utilization category AC-1 at Ie
Operating
cycles
0.5 million

1 000
kV

690
Mirror contacts
Removable auxiliary switch block
Permanently fitted auxiliary switch block
Acc. to Swiss regulations (SUVA) -on request

During operation
-25 ... +60
-25 ... +60
During operation, with AS-Interface interface
--
-25 ... +55
During storage
-55 ... +80
-55 ... +80
IP20
IP00/open
Connection range
IP00 (where applicable, use additional terminal covers)
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse, for AC and DC operation
g/ms
6.8/5 and 4/10
8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse, for AC and DC operation
g/ms
10.6/5 and 6.2/10
13.4/5 and 6.5/10
1)
1)
--
2)
1)
2)
Conductor cross-sections see pages 4/8 and 4/9.

Electromagnetic compatibility see "SIRIUS 3RT10 Contactors", Chapter 3.
4/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
NSB0_00649a
360

surface.
NSB0_00478c

Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Type
3RT1446
3RT1456
3RT1466
3RT1476
Size
S3
S6
S10
S12

Main circuit
Fuse links, operational class gG: LV HRC, type 3NA
250
355
500
800
Fuse links, gR operational class: SITOR, type 3NE

250
350
500
710

10
With miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic

10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
Control circuit
Coil operating range (AC/DC)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
270
0.68
22
0.27
-----
298/274
0.7/0.62
27/20
0.29/0.31
-----
270
0.68
22
0.27
-----
300
0.52
21
0.29
-----
Standard version:
AC operation, 50 Hz
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
Closing = Closed
15
--
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
W
W
W
W
---------
250/0.9
300/0.9
4.8/0.8
5.8/0.8
300
360
4.3
5.2
490/0.9
590/0.9
5.6/0.9
6.7/0.9
540
650
6.1
7.4
700/0.9
830/0.9
7.6/0.9
9.2/0.9
770
920
8.5
10
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
W
W
W
W
---------
190/0.8
28/0.8
3.5/0.5
4,/0.4
250
320
2.3
2.8
400/0.8
530/0.8
4/0.5
5/0.4
440
580
3.2
3.8
560/0.8
750/0.8
5.4/0.8
7/0.8
600
800
4
5
VA
VA
For USA and Canada:

AC operation, 50 Hz
AC operation, 60 Hz
DC operation
VA
VA

Conventional operating mechanism
- AC operation
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
- DC operation
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
- AC operation
- DC operation
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
Closing at Us min
Closing at Us max
Closed at Us min
Closed at Us max
PLC control input (IEC 61131-2, type 2)
V DC
24, at 30 mA power consumption
Operating range
V DC
17 ... 30

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
17 ... 90
10 ... 25
---
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
90 ... 230
14 ... 20
---
ms
10 ... 15
--
Arcing time
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
18 ... 30
11 ... 23
---
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
100 ... 120

16 ... 20
---
1)
For DC operation and up to 22.5 inclination in front, the coil operating

range is reduced to 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us (see also permissible mounting
position, page 4/4).
2)
(varistor +2 to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/5
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Type
3RT1446
3RT1456
3RT1466
3RT1476
Size
S3
S6
S10
S12
Control circuit
Operating times
- For 0.8 x Us min ... 1.1 x Us max
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
20 ... 95
40 ... 60
30 ... 95
40 ... 80
45 ... 100
60 ... 100
- For Us min ... Us max
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
25 ... 50
40 ... 60
35 ... 50
50 ... 80
50 ... 70
70 ... 100

Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
95 ... 135
80 ... 90
105 ... 145

80 ... 200
120 ... 150

80 ... 100
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
100 ... 120

80 ... 90
110 ... 130

80 ... 100
125 ... 150

80 ... 100

Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
35 ... 75
80 ... 90
45 ... 80
80 ... 100
60 ... 90
80 ... 100
Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
40 ... 60
80 ... 90
50 ... 65
80 ... 100
65 ... 80
80 ... 100
ms
--
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
Type
3RT1446
3RT1456
3RT1466
3RT1476
Size
S3
S6
S10
S12
A
A
A
140
130
60
275
250
100
400
380
150
690
6501)
250
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
kW
kW
kW
50
86
107
95
165
205
145
250
315
245
430
535
690 V
1 000 V
kW
kW
148
98
285
165
430
247
740
410
mm2
mm2
50
50
2 x 70
120
240
240
2 x 240
2 x 240
Arcing time
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 60 C up to 690 V
At 1 000 V

with p.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)

for loads with Ie
At 40 C
At 0 C

With an electrical endurance of 1.3 million operating cycles
Rated power for slipring or
squirrel-cage motors
at 50 and 60 Hz (at 60 C)
1)
2)
Up to 690 V
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
At Ie/AC-1
600 A for 3RT1476-N contactor.

account).
4/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
44
97
138
170
kW
kW
kW
kW
12.7
22
29.9
38.2
30
55
55
90
37
75
90
132
55
90
110
160
12.5
20
27
55
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Type
3RT1446
3RT1456
3RT1466
3RT1476
Size
S3
S6
S10
S12
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
130
80
12
250
250
18
380
380
33
500
500
33
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
2.5
0.8
0.48
3.4
0.8
0.5
3.8
0.9
0.6
3.8
0.9
0.6
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
130
130
130
250
250
250
380
380
380
500
500
500
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
13
2.4
1.3
20
3.2
1.6
380
4
2
500
4
2
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
130
130
130
250
250
250
380
380
380
500
500
500
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
130
6
3.4
250
11.5
4
380
11
5.2
500
11
5.2
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
6
3
1.25
250
7.5
2.5
380
11
3
500
11
3
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
0.35
0.15
0.1
0.6
0.17
0.12
0.6
0.18
0.125
0.6
0.18
0.125
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
130
130
130
250
250
250
380
380
380
500
500
500
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
1.75
0.42
0.27
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
2.5
0.65
0.37
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
130
130
130
250
250
250
380
380
380
500
500
500
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
4
0.8
0.45
250
1.4
0.75
380
1.4
0.75
500
1.4
0.75
No-load switching
frequency AC
No-load switching
frequency DC
1/h
5 000
2 000
1/h
1 000
2 000
Acc. to AC-1 (AC/DC)

Acc. to AC-3 (AC/DC)
1/h
1/h
650
1 000
600
1 000

Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms)
- 1 conducting path
Switching frequency
Rated operation

z' = z (Ie/I'(400 V/U')1.5 1/h
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/7
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Type
3RT1446
Size
S3
Main conductors
Screw terminals
Box terminals
Terminal screws
Tightening torque

Nm
lb.in
4 ... 6
36 ... 53

mm
mm
2.5 ... 50
10 ... 50
Solid
Stranded
mm
mm
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 70
AWG
10 ... 2/0

mm
6 x 9 x 0.8

mm
mm
2.5 ... 50
10 ... 50
Solid
Stranded
mm
mm
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 70
AWG
10 ... 2/0

mm
6 x 9 x 0.8

mm
mm
2 x (2.5 ... 35)

2 x (10 ... 35)
Solid
Stranded
mm
mm
2 x (2.5 ... 16)

2 x (10 ... 50)
AWG
2 x (10 ... 1/0)

mm
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
mm
10

mm
mm
10 ... 503)
10 ... 703)
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
AWG
7 ... 1/0
NSB0_00479
NSB0_00480
NSB0_00481
Busbar connection (bored copper bars)

Connecting bar (max. width)1)
Cable lug connection (without box terminals)2)
Terminal screws
M6
Solid
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) according to IEC 60947;

max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)4)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)4); 2 x (18 ... 14)4); 1 x 12
Nm
lb.in
M3
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
1)
If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT1946-4EA1 terminal

cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
2)
When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm,
the 3RT1946-4EA1 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase
clearance.
3) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234.
Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
4)
4/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Type
3RT1456
3RT1466
3RT1476
Size
S6
S10
S12
Main conductors
Screw terminals
Type
3RT19 55-4G
3RT19 56-4G
3RT19 66-4G
M10
M10
M12
Nm
lb.in
10 ... 12
90 ... 110
10 ... 12
90 ... 110
20 ... 22
180 ... 195
mm
mm
mm
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
70 ... 240
70 ... 240
95 ... 300
AWG
6 ... 2/0
6 ... 250 kcmil
3/0 ... 600 kcmil

mm
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
mm
mm
mm
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 70
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
16 ... 120
120 ... 185

120 ... 185
120 ... 240
AWG
6 ... 2/0
6 ... 250 kcmil
250 ... 500 kcmil

mm
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5

Stranded
mm
mm
mm
Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70
Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120

Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185

Min. 2 x 50, max. 2 x 185
Min. 2 x 70, max. 2 x 240
AWG
Max. 2 x 1/0
Max. 2 x 3/0
Min. 2 x 2/0,
max. 2 x 500 kcmil

mm
Max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8)
Max. 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
Max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
mm
17
25
2)
3)
mm
mm
16 ... 95
25 ... 120
50 ... 240
70 ... 240
AWG
4 ... 250 kcmil
2/0 ... 500 kcmil
Nm
lb.in
M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
10 ... 14
90 ... 124
M10 x 30 (A/F 17)

14 ... 24
124 ... 210
Terminal screws
Tightening torque

Stranded
NSB0_00479
NSB0_00480

Stranded
NSB0_00481
Both clamping points connected1)
Bus connection
Cable lug connection
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Solid
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4) according to IEC 60947;

max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)4)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)4); 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)4)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)
Nm
lb.in
M3 (PZ 2)
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Operating devices6)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Solid
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5

mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
2 x (24 ... 14)
Minimum cross-section 16 mm.

3RT1456: When connecting cable lugs according to EN 46235, use
3RT1956-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm2
to keep the phase clearance.
3RT1466 and 3RT1476: When connecting cable lugs according to
EN 46234, the 3RT1966-4EA1 terminal cover must be used for conductor
cross-sections of 240 mm and more as well as EN 46235 for conductor
cross-sections of 185 mm and more to keep the phase clearance.
Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.
An "insulation stop" must be used for conductor cross-sections 1 mm
(see Accessories for 3RT10 contactors on page 3/111).
Tool for opening the spring-type terminals;
see Accessories for 3RT10 contactors on page 3/111.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/9
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Size S3: AC or DC operation

Coil circuits (varistors, diodes etc.) can be retrofitted
Auxiliary switches can be retrofitted
Main and control conductors: screw terminals
3RT1446-1A. .0
Size
Rated data AC-1,

Tu: 40 C
Auxiliary
contacts
OperaRatings of AC loads (p.f. = 0.95) at

Version
tional
current Ie

supply voltage
Us
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Up to
690 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC

AC operation
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
S3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
140
53
92
115
159
--
--
AC 24, 50 Hz B
AC 110, 50 Hz B
AC 230, 50 Hz }
3RT1446-1AB00
3RT1446-1AF00
3RT1446-1AP00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
92
115
159
--
--
24 DC
220 DC
}
B
3RT1446-1BB40
3RT1446-1BM40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC operation
A1(+) 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
S3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
140
53

Accessories and spare parts see "SIRIUS 3RT10 contactors",
Chapter 3.
4/10
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 3-pole, 140 ... 690 A
Sizes S6 to S12: UC operating mechanism AC/DC operation (50/60 Hz and DC)

Auxiliary and control conductors: screw terminals
3RT146.
Size
Rated data AC-1,

Tu: 40 C
Auxiliary
contacts
OperaRatings of AC loads (p.f. = 0.95) at

Version
tional
current Ie

supply voltage
Us
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Up to
690 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC

U
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
S6
275
105
180
225
310
110 ... 127

220 ... 240
}
}
3RT1456-6AF36
3RT1456-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S10
400
151
263
329
454
110 ... 127

220 ... 240
}
}
3RT1466-6AF36
3RT1466-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S12
690
261
454
568
783
110 ... 127

220 ... 240
A
}
3RT1476-6AF36
3RT1476-6AP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B

For 24 V DC PLC output
U
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
S6
275
105
180
225
310
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
A
3RT1456-6NF36
3RT1456-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S10
400
151
263
329
454
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
A
3RT1466-6NF36
3RT1466-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S12
690
261
454
568
783
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
A
3RT1476-6NF36
3RT1476-6NP36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
For 24 V DC PLC relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT)

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
S6
275
105
180
225
310
96 ... 127
200 ... 277
B
B
3RT1456-6PF35
3RT1456-6PP35
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S10
400
151
263
329
454
200 ... 277
3RT1466-6PP35
1 unit
41B
S12
690
261
454
568
783
200 ... 277
3RT1476-6PP35
1 unit
41B

Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/11
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 50 A
Overview
Application
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Size S0 contactors have two auxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC

integrated in the basic version.
Mountable auxiliary contacts
Size S00
General description of sizes S00 to S0, see Chapter 3,

contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW".
4 auxiliary contacts, including no more than 3 NC.

Size S0
4 additional auxiliary contacts.
Type
3RT2316
Size
S00
S0
mm
45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73
60 x 85 x 97 / 60 x 101.5 x 97
mm
45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121
60 x 85 x 141 / 60 x 101.5 x 144
mm
45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73
60 x 85 x 107 / 60 x 101.5 x 107
mm
45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121
60 x 85 x 151 / 60 x 101.5 x 154

3RT2317
3RT2325

360
22,5 22,5
NSB0_00478c
The accessories for the 3-pole 3RT20 contactors can also be

used for the 4-pole versions.
The contactors are suitable for:

For switching resistive loads
For isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded
neutral conductors
For system transfers when alternative AC power supplies are
used
For use as contactors which only carry current and do not
have to switch in case of inductive loads e.g.variable-speed
operating mechanisms
For switching mixed loads in distribution systems (e.g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors, PC power supply units) with p.f.
> 0.8 according to IEC 60947-4-1, test conditions for utilization
category AC-1.
NSB0_00477a
Operating
cycles
30 million
Electrical endurance at Ie/AC-1
Operating
cycles
Approx. 0.5 million

690
During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
10 million
IP20
Finger-safe
Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays

Main circuit
35
63
20
20
Weld-free
10
16
1)

For size S0, devices for AC and DC operation differ in depth. The following
applies: Depth (DC) = Depth (AC) + 10 mm.
4/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RT2326
3RT2327
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 50 A
Type
3RT2316
Size
S00
S0
3RT2317
3RT2325
3RT2326
3RT2327
Control circuit
AC operation
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
---
DC operation
At 50 C
At 60 C
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
---
--
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC/DC operation
VA
---
77
0.82
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
---
9.8
0.25
- Closing
- P.f.
VA
27/24.3
0.8/0.75
37/33
0.8/0.75
81/79
0.72/0.74
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
4.2/3.3
0.25/0.25
5.7/4.4
0.25/0.25
10.5/8.5
0.25/0.28
- Closing
- P.f.
VA
31.7
0.77
43
0.77
87
0.76
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
4.8
0.25
6.5
0.25
9.4
0.28
ms
ms
8 ... 35
3.5 ... 14
ms
ms
30 ... 100
7 ... 13
50 ... 170
15 ... 17.5
ms
10 ... 15
10
- Closing
- P.f.
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA, Canada
5.9

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
8 ... 33
4 ... 15
9 ... 38
4 ... 16
8 ... 40
4 ... 16
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
1)
With size S00, DC operation: Operating times for 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/13
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 50 A
Type
3RT2316
Size
S00
3RT2317
3RT2325
3RT2326
3RT2327
S0
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
At 40 C, up to 690 V
A
A
18
16
22
20
35
30
40
35
50
42
7.5
13
11
20
13
23
16
28
35
42
35
35
35
42
42
42

P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)
At 230 V
400 V
kW
kW
6
10.5

for loads with Ie
At 40 C
At 60 C
mm2
mm2
2.5
2.5
10
10

Rated power for

slipring or squirrel-cage motors
at 50 and 60 Hz
12
15.5
kW
kW
2.2
4
3
5.5
4
7.5
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
16
2.1
20
20
30
20
4.5
220 V
440 V
A
A
0.8
0.6
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
16
12
220 V
440 V
A
A
1.6
0.8
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
16
16
20
20
20
30
30
30
35
35
35
42
42
42
220 V
440 V
A
A
16
1.3
20
30
2.9
35
42
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
16
16
20
20
20
30
30
30
35
35
35
42
42
42
220 V
440 V
A
A
16
1.3
20
30
2.9
35
42
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
0.5
0.15
20
20
5
2.5
220 V
440 V
A
A
---
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
5
0.35
35
35
42
42
220 V
440 V
A
A
---
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
16
16
35
35
35
42
42
42
220 V
440 V
A
A
1.5
0.2
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
16
16
16
30
30
30
35
35
35
42
42
42
220 V
440 V
A
A
1.5
0.2
30
0.6
35
42
At 230 V
400 V
Load rating with DC

- 1 conducting path
1
0.4
20
20
30
30
30
1
1

- 1 conducting path
4/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
1
0.09
20
30
30
15
3
0.27
20
20
20
30
30
30
10
0.6
20
20
20
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 50 A

AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT231.-1A.00
3RT232.-1A.00
3RT231.-2A.00
Rated data AC-1,

Tu: 40/60 C
Auxiliary contacts
OperaRatings of AC loads
tional
(p.f. = 0.95)
Ident.
No.
Version
Rated control
supply voltage
Us
3RT232.-2A. 00
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
400 V
A
NO
kW
NC
V AC
For screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard

mounting rail
Size S001)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3 7/L4
2/T1 4/T2
6/T3 8/T4
18 / 16
12 / 11
--
--
--
24, 50/60 Hz
110, 50/60 Hz
230, 50/60 Hz
B
B
B
3RT2316-1AB00
3RT2316-1AF00
3RT2316-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2316-2AB00
3RT2316-2AF00
3RT2316-2AP00
22 / 20
14.5 / 13
--
--
--
24, 50/60 Hz
110, 50/60 Hz
230, 50/60 Hz
B
B
}
3RT2317-1AB00
3RT2317-1AF00
3RT2317-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2317-2AB00
3RT2317-2AF00
3RT2317-2AP00
Size S0
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1
3/L2
2/T1 4/T2
5/L3
7/L4 13 21
6/T3 8/T4 14 22
35 / 302)
22 / 20
11
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
A
3RT2325-1AB00
3RT2325-1AF00
3RT2325-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2325-2AB00
3RT2325-2AF00
3RT2325-2AP00
40 / 352)
26 / 23
11
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
A
3RT2326-1AB00
3RT2326-1AF00
3RT2326-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2326-2AB00
3RT2326-2AF00
3RT2326-2AP00
502)
33 / 28
11
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
A
3RT2327-1AB00
3RT2327-1AF00
3RT2327-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2327-2AB00
3RT2327-2AF00
3RT2327-2AP00
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us,
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
2)
Minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm.

Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/15
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 18 ... 50 A
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT231.-1B.40
3RT232.-1B.40
3RT231.-2B.40
Rated data AC-1,

Tu: 40/60 C
Auxiliary contacts
OperaRatings of AC loads
tional
(p.f. = 0.95)
Ident.
No.
Version
Rated control
supply voltage
Us
3RT232.-2B. 40
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
400 V
A
NO
kW
NC
V DC

mounting rail
Size S00
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3 7/L4
2/T1 4/T2
6/T3 8/T4
18 / 16
12 / 11
--
--
--
24
220
A
B
3RT2316-1BB40
3RT2316-1BM40
}
B
3RT2316-2BB40
3RT2316-2BM40
22 / 20
14.5 / 13
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2317-1BB40
3RT2317-1BM40
}
B
3RT2317-2BB40
3RT2317-2BM40
Size S0
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1
3/L2
2/T1 4/T2
5/L3
7/L4 13 21
6/T3 8/T4 14 22
35 / 301)
22 / 20
11
24
220
A
B
3RT2325-1BB40
3RT2325-1BM40
A
B
3RT2325-2BB40
3RT2325-2BM40
40 / 351)
26 / 23
11
24
220
A
B
3RT2326-1BB40
3RT2326-1BM40
A
B
3RT2326-2BB40
3RT2326-2BM40
501)
33 / 28
11
24
220
A
B
3RT2327-1BB40
3RT2327-1BM40
A
B
3RT2327-2BB40
3RT2327-2BM40
1)
Minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm.

Chapter 3.
4/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 60 ... 140 A
Overview
The accessories for the 3-pole SIRIUS 3RT10 contactors can
also be used for the 4-pole versions.
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The contactors are suitable for switching mixed loads in distribution systems (e.g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors, PC
power supply units) with p.f. > 0.8according to IEC 60947-4-1,
test conditions for utilization category AC-1.
3RT1336
3RT1344
3RT1346
Size
S2
S3
S3
mm
mm
73 x 111 x 110
73 x 111 x 159
92 x 140 x 134
92 x 140 x 183
mm
mm
73 x 111 x 125
73 x 111 x 174
92 x 140 x 147
92 x 140 x 196
Operating
cycles
10 million
Operating
cycles
Approx. 0.5 million

690
During operation
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
Type
AC operation
- With mounted auxiliary switch block
DC operation

Permissible mounting position1)
IP20
Connection range
IP00 (see also additional terminal covers)
Finger-safe only for vertical contact from

the front

Main circuit
LV HRC, 3NA; DIAZED, 5SB; NEOZED, 5SE
Type of coordination "1"1)
160
250
250
Type of coordination "2"1)
63
125
160
Weld-free
50
63
100
Control circuit
Coil operating range (AC/DC)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA
VA
VA
145
0.79
12.5
0.36
270
0.68
22
0.27
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
170/155
0.76/0.72
15/11.8
0.35/0.38
298/274
0.72/0.62
27/20
0.29/0.31
VA
- Closing
= Closed
13.3
15
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
50 ... 110
15 ... 30
110 ... 200

14 ... 20
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
4 ... 35
10 ... 30
20 ... 50
10 ... 25
ms
10 ... 15
10 ... 15
DC operation
Arcing time
1)
In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors.

2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/17
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 60 ... 140 A
Type
3RT1336
3RT1344
3RT1346
Size
S2
S3
S3
A
A
60
55
110
100
140
120
Main circuit
Load rating with AC

P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 C)
At 230 V
400 V
kW
kW
23
39
42
72
53
92

for loads with Ie
At 40 C
60 C
mm
mm
16
16
50
50
50
50

Rated power for
at 50 and 60 Hz
26
--
--
At 230 V
400 V
kW
kW
5.5
11
---
---
At 400 V
400
520
760
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
50
23
4.5
70
23
4.5
80
60
9
220 V
440 V
A
A
1
0.4
1
0.4
2
0.6
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
50
45
45
70
70
70
80
80
80
220 V
440 V
A
A
5
1
5
1
10
1.8
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
50
45
45
70
70
70
80
80
80
220 V
440 V
A
A
45
2.9
70
2.9
80
4.5
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
50
45
45
70
70
70
80
80
80
220 V
440 V
A
A
45
2.9
70
2.9
80
4.5
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
20
6
2.5
20
6
2.5
20
6.5
2.5
220 V
440 V
A
A
1
0.1
1
0.15
1
0.15
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
45
45
25
70
70
70
80
80
80
220 V
440 V
A
A
5
0.27
7
0.42
7
0.42
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
45
45
45
70
70
70
80
80
80
220 V
440 V
A
A
25
0.6
35
0.8
35
0.8
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
45
45
45
70
70
70
80
80
80
220 V
440 V
A
A
45
0.6
70
0.8
80
0.8
Maximum breaking current AC

(e.g. for isolation of load distributions)
At 50 and 60 Hz
Load rating with DC

- 1 conducting path

- 1 conducting path
4/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 60 ... 140 A

AC operation, 4 NO contacts
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT133.-1A.00
Rated data AC-1,
Tu: 40/60 C

voltage Us
Operational
current Ie
Ratings of AC loads (p.f. = 0.95)

at 50 Hz and
kW
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
400 V
V AC

mounting rail
Size S2
A1(+)
A2()
60 / 55
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 8/T4
39 / 36
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
}
3RT1336-1AB00
3RT1336-1AF00
3RT1336-1AP00
----
Size S3
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 8/T4
110 / 100
72 / 66
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
}
3RT1344-1AB00
3RT1344-1AF00
3RT1344-1AP00
----
140 / 120
92 / 79
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
}
3RT1346-1AB00
3RT1346-1AF00
3RT1346-1AP00
----

Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/19
Siemens AG 2013

(AC-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, 60 ... 140 A
DC operation, 4 NO contacts
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT1336-1. . .0
Rated data AC-1,
Tu: 40/60 C

voltage Us
Operational
current Ie
Ratings of AC loads (p.f. = 0.95)

at 50 Hz and
kW
3RT134.-1. . .0
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
400 V
V DC

mounting rail
Size S2
A1(+)
A2()
60 / 55
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 8/T4
39 / 36
24
220
}
B
3RT1336-1BB40
3RT1336-1BM40
---
Size S3
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 8/T4
110 / 100
72 / 66
24
220
B
B
3RT1344-1BB40
3RT1344-1BM40
---
140 / 120
92 / 79
24
220
B
B
3RT1346-1BB40
3RT1346-1BM40
---

Chapter 3.
4/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3TK1 contactors for resistive loads (AC-1),
4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Overview
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The contactors are used mainly for resistive loads (AC-1 and
p.f. > 0.95). They are also suitable for switching mixed loads in
distribution systems (e.g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors,
PC power supply units) with p.f. > 0.8according to
IEC 60947-4-1, test conditions for utilization category AC-1.
The contactors also comply with the requirements of the standards NFC 63-110 and NFC 20040.
Control circuit
Standards
The solenoid coils of the 3TK10 to 3TK13 contactors

(operating current up to 350 A) are designed as plug-in coils.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to
be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices.
The solenoid coils of the 3TK1 contactors can be connected at

a later stage with RC circuits (see "Accessories", page 4/24).
Type
3TK1

General data
IEC 60947-5-1
Standards
690

10
24 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
6
6
6
220 V
230 V
380 V
A
A
A
6
6
4
400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
4
1
1
1
Load rating with AC

Load rating with DC

--

24 V
60 V
110 V
A
A
A
6
6
1.8
125 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
-0.6
---
V AC,
max.
600

Rated voltage
Switching capacity
A 600, P 600
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/21
Surge suppression
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Type
3TK10
mm
W
3TK11
3TK12
3TK13
165 x 156 165 x 172 201 x 198 x 172

x 155
x 155
3TK14
3TK15
3TK17
244 x 273 x 226
22,5 22,5
90
Upright mounting position also permissible
Operating cycles
Mill.
10
for Ie/AC-1 at 55 C
Operating cycles
Mill.
0.8
1000
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55

-50 ... +70
90
NSB0_00649a

5
0.8
0.8
0.4
0.65
0.5
355
315
630
630
1000
850
820
0.4
44
0.34
1 100
0.35
52
0.35
3 500
0.26
125
0.4
990
0.35
52
0.35
1 200
0.31
65
0.34
4 000
0.22
140
0.43
0.4
IP00
Finger-safe with terminal covers

Shock resistance, sine pulse
g/ms
10/15
A
A
250
250
10
Main circuit
Auxiliary circuit
Short circuit test with fuse links of operational class gG:
Control circuit
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

50 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
VA
60 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
VA
Operating times for 1.0 x Us

Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
20 ... 40
7 ... 15
30 ... 60
10 ... 20
Arcing time
ms
10
10
A
A
200
180
250
230
300
270
350
310
550
470
800
650
1 000
850
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 50 C up to 690 V

with p.f. = 0.95 (at 40 C)
At 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
76
132
165
227
95
165
206
284
114
197
247
341
132
230
288
397
208
362
452
624
303
527
658
908
378
658
828
1 135

for load with Ie
At 40 C
mm
95
150
185
240
185
240
300
A
kW
kW
120
30
55
145
45
75
210
75
110
210
75
110
400
110
200
550
160
280
700
220
370
900
1 200
1 600
1 600
5 300
5 300
6 400
1/h
3 600
1/h
1/h
300
300

Rated power of squirrel-cage
or slipring motors at
50 Hz and 60 Hz
Short-time current at 40 C in cold state up to 10 s
Up to 400 V
At 230 V
400 V
Switching frequency1)
1)
No-load switching
frequency
AC-1
AC-3
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I' and operational voltage U': z' = z (Ie/I') (400 V/U')1.5 1/h.
4/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Type
3TK10
3TK11
3TK12
3TK13
3TK14
3TK15
3TK17
Main conductors:
Screw terminals
mm2
2 x 70
2 x 120
2 x 120
2 x 300
AWG/MCM 2 x 00
2 x 250
2 x 250
2 x 600
mm
30
30
33
55
M6
M10
M10
M10
Nm
16
16
16
lb.in
42
135
135
135
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
AWG
20 ... 14
Nm
1.2 (10 lb.in)
Terminal screw
- Tightening torque
- Tightening torque

AC operation, 4 NO contacts
3TK13
Rated data AC-1
Auxiliary
contacts

voltage Us
Operational
current Ie
up to 690 V
(at 40 C)
Rating of AC loads (p.f. = 0.95) at
230 V
400 V
690 V
1000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC
V AC
DT Screw terminals
Version
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
For screw fixing

A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 7/L4
13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 8/T4 14 22 32 44
200
75
130
225
205
220 ... 230, 50 Hz

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
24, 50 Hz
B
D
D
D
3TK1042-0AP0
3TK1042-0AU0
3TK1042-0AF0
3TK1042-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
250
90
165
280
200
220 ... 230, 50 Hz

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
24, 50 Hz
B
D
D
D
3TK1142-0AP0
3TK1142-0AU0
3TK1142-0AF0
3TK1142-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
300
110
195
340
325
220 ... 230, 50 Hz

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
24, 50 Hz
B
D
D
D
3TK1242-0AP0
3TK1242-0AU0
3TK1242-0AF0
3TK1242-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
350
130
230
395
370
220 ... 230, 50 Hz

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
24, 50 Hz
B
D
D
D
3TK1342-0AP0
3TK1342-0AU0
3TK1342-0AF0
3TK1342-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
550
205
360
620
510
220 ... 230, 50 Hz1)

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
B
D
D
3TK1442-0AP0
3TK1442-0AU0
3TK1442-0AF0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
800
300
525
905
575
220 ... 230, 50 Hz1)

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
B
D
D
3TK1542-0AP0
3TK1542-0AU0
3TK1542-0AF0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
1000
375
655
1135
--
220 ... 230, 50 Hz1)

230 ... 240, 50 Hz
110/120, 50/60 Hz
B
D
D
3TK1742-0AP0
3TK1742-0AU0
3TK1742-0AF0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
1)
At 60 Hz: 240 V.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/23
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 4 NO, 200 ... 1000 A
Accessories
For contactors
Version

voltage Us
Type
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
V AC
Surge suppressors
3TK10 ... 3TK13
RC elements
3TK14 ... 3TK17
24 ... 48
110 ... 415
D
B
3TK1930-0A
3TK1930-0B
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
48 ... 110
220 ... 600
C
B
3TK1934-0C
3TK1934-0D
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
B
B
B
B
3TK1940-0A
3TK1942-0A
3TK1944-0A
3TK1946-0A
1
1
1
1
2 units
2 units
2 units
2 units
41B
41B
41B
41B
--
B
B
3TK1920-0A
3TK1922-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3TK1924-0A
1 unit
41B
Terminal covers
3TK10, 3TK11
3TK12, 3TK13
3TK14, 3TK15
3TK17
For mounting onto contactors
Mechanical interlocking of two identical contactors

3TK10, 3TK11
3TK12, 3TK13
Locking devices, auxiliary contacts 2 NC
3TK14 ... 3TK17
Mechanical interlock
including mounting plate
Spare parts
For contactors
Version
Auxiliary contacts
Connections
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Type

3TK1
For mounting on the side
Left
1st block 1 NO + 1 NC
2nd block 1 NO + 1 NC
Right
13 21
31 43
14 22
32 44
53 61
71 83
54 62
72 84
3TK1910-3A
1 unit
41B
3TK1910-3B
1 unit
41B
D
D
D
D
3TK1960-0A
3TK1961-0A
3TK1962-0A
3TK1963-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
D
D
D
3TK1964-0A
3TK1965-0A
3TK1967-0A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
D
D
D
D
3TK1950-0A
3TK1951-0A
3TK1952-0A
3TK1953-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
D
D
D
3TK1954-0A
3TK1955-0A
3TK1957-0A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B

3TK10
3TK11
3TK12
3TK13
4 moving and 8 fixed contacts
--
3TK14
3TK15
3TK17
Arc chutes
3TK10
3TK11
3TK12
3TK13
1 arc chute, 4-pole
--
3TK14
3TK15
3TK17
Solenoid coils
3TK10, 3TK11
3TK12, 3TK13
3TK14 ... 3TK17
1)
AC operation1)
--
3TK1970-0A..
3TK1972-0A..
3TK1974-0A..
Rated control supply voltages: The 10th and 11th digit of

the Article No. must be supplemented according to the table.
For contactor type
3TK10/11/12/13 3TK14/15/17
Solenoid coil type
3TK1970-0A..,
3TK1972-0A..
3TK1974-0A..
--
B0
--
110 V
120 V
F0
F0
220 ... 230 V
240 V
P0
P0
230 ... 240 V
--
U0
U0
AC operation
50 Hz
24 V
4/24
60 Hz
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Overview
Application
Standards
Contactors with plug-in terminals
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
The main area of application for the 3TK2 contactors with flat
connectors is in household equipment. These contactors are
also suitable for simple electric controllers.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. The contactors with screw terminals are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
No auxiliary switch blocks can be retrofitted.
Connection methods
The contactors are available in versions with screw terminals,
6.3 mm plug-in terminals and solder pin connections for soldering in printed circuit boards.
The TK2 contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors are

coded and can be used in the plug-in base with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards (see "Accessories for
3TF2 contactors", Chapter 3).
Type
3TK20
Endurance of the main contacts
A
X = ---------------------------------------------------------C A
1 + --------- ---- 1
100 B
Contactor type
3TK20
10
8
6
4
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
2
5
105
8
6
10
8
6
6
4
8
6
2
106
8
6
4
2
105
8
6
4
4
2
106
8
6
4
2
5
10
8
6
2
2
10
8
6
10
8
6
4
2
4
10
8
6
4
2
2
NSB0_01629
104
8
6
10
8
6
10
8
6
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when
switching inductive AC loads (AC-3) depending on the breaking current and rated
operational voltage. It is assumed that the
operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the
phase angle of the supply system.
The rated operational current Ie complies
with utilization category AC-4 (breaking
six times the rated operational current)
and is intended for a contact endurance of
approx. 200 000 operating cycles.
If a shorter contact endurance is sufficient,
the rated operational current Ie/AC-4 can
be increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal switching (breaking the
rated operational current according to utilization category AC-3) in combination
with intermittent inching (breaking several
times the rated operational current according to utilization category AC-4), the
contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the following equation:
103
10
2
103
1
10

in operating cycles
A Contact endurance for normal operation
(Ia = Ie) in operating cycles
B Contact endurance for inching
(Ia = multiple of Ie) in operating cycles
20
30
40 50 60
a (A)
80
(A)
Diagram legend:
PN= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
Ia= Breaking current
Ie= = Rated operational current
C Inching operations as a percentage of total

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/25
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TK20
Size
H
00
mm
W
45 x 48 x 63
AC and DC operation
Any
AC operation
DC operation
Operating 10 million
cycles
30 million
10 million

Screw terminals
V
V
V
690
500
500

Screw terminals
kV
kV
kV
6
6
6
Up to 300
C
C
-25 ... +55

-55 ... +80
Protective separation between coil and main contacts

According to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
Permissible ambient temperature1)
During operation
During storage
IP00/open
IP20
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
8.3/5 and 5.2/10

11.3/5 and 9.2/10
Sine pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
13/5 and 8/10

17.4/5 and 12.9/10
2)

Main circuit3)
- Type of coordination "2"4)
- Weld-free
A
A
A
25
10
10
10
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
1)

At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, , side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period,
the max. ambient temperature is +40 C.
2)
See page 4/30.
3) According to excerpt from IEC 60947-4-1
Destruction of the contactor and the overload relay is permissible.
The contactor and/or overload relay can be replaced if necessary.
The overload relay must not suffer any damage. Contact welding on the
contactor is permissible, however, if the contacts can be easily separated.
4)
A short-circuit current of Iq 6 kA applies to type of coordination "2".
4/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TK20
Size
00
Control circuit
Coil operating range1)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Standard version:
AC operation, 60 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
15
0.41
6.8
0.42
14.4
0.36
6.1
0.46
AC operation, 50 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
16.5/13.2
0.43/0.38
8.0/5.4
0.48/0.42
For USA and Canada:

AC operation, 50 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
AC operation, 60 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
VA
VA
VA
14.6
0.38
6.5
0.40
14.4
0.30
6.0
0.44
AC operation
mA
3 x (230 V/Us)
DC operation
mA
1 x (230 V/Us)
ms
ms
5 ... 19
2 ... 22
To use the 3TK20 AC-operated contactor in reversing duty an additional
dead interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
16 ... 65
2 ... 5
Arcing time
ms
10 ... 15
ms
ms
5 ... 18
3 ... 21
To use the 3TK20 AC-operated contactor in reversing duty an additional
dead interval of 50 ms is required along with an NC contact interlock.
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
19 ... 31
3 ... 4
Arcing time
ms
10 ... 15

Permissible residual current of the electronics2) (with 0 signal)

operating range
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Dead interval

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
- Dead interval
1)

At 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON period the
max. ambient temperature is +40 C.
2)
The 3TX4490-1J additional load module is recommended
for higher residual currents (see "Accessories for 3TF2 contactors",
Chapter 3).
3) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/27
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TK20. .-0. . .
3TK20. .-3. . .,
3TK20. .-6. . .,
3TK20. .-7. . .
Size
00
00
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
Up to 400/380 V
690/660 V
A
A
18
18
18
--
400/380 V
690/660 V
A
A
16
16
16
--
kW
kW
kW
kW
6.0
10
13
17
6.0
10
13
--
mm2
2.5
2.5
Up to 220 V
230 V
380 V
A
A
A
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
8.4
6.5
5.2
5.2
8.4
6.5
---
At 110 V
115 V
120 V
kW
kW
kW
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.3
127 V
200 V
220 V
kW
kW
kW
1.4
2.2
2.4
1.4
2.2
2.4
230 V
240 V
380 V
kW
kW
kW
2.5
2.6
4.0
2.5
2.6
4.0
400 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
460 V
500 V
575 V
kW
kW
kW
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
660 V
690 V
kW
kW
4.0
4.0
---
0.3
0.3
A
A
2.6
1.8
2.6
--
At 110 V
115 V
120 V
kW
kW
kW
0.32
0.33
0.35
0.32
0.33
0.35
127 V
200 V
220 V
kW
kW
kW
0.37
0.58
0.64
0.37
0.58
0.64
230 V
240 V
380 V
kW
kW
kW
0.67
0.70
1.10
0.67
0.70
1.10
400 V
415 V
440 V
kW
kW
kW
1.15
1.20
1.27
1.15
1.20
1.27
460 V
500 V
575 V
kW
kW
kW
1.33
1.45
1.30
1.33
1.45
--
660 V
690 V
kW
kW
1.10
1.15
---

with p.f. = 1
At 230/220 V
400/380 V
500 V
690/660 V

Rated power for motors

with slipring or squirrel cage
at 50 and 60 Hz
At Ie/AC-3

(contact endurance approx. 200 000 operating cycles at Ia = 6 x Ie)
Rated power for motors with squirrel cage
at 50 and 60 Hz
Max. permissible rated operational current
Ie/AC-4 r Ie/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency
4/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
Up to 400 V
690 V
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TK20. .-0. . .
3TK20. .-3. . .,
3TK20. .-6. . .,
3TK20. .-7. . .
Size
00
00
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
(contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles.)
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
6
2
1
16
6
2
1
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
16
6
2
16
16
6
2
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
16
16
6
16
16
16
6
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
6
3
0.5
0.1
6
3
0.5
0.1
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
10
5
2
0.5
10
5
2
0.5
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
16
16
2
16
16
16
2
No-load switching
frequency
h-1
10 000
AC-1
h-1
1 000
AC-2
h-1
500
AC-3
h-1
1 000
h-1
15

Switching frequency

z = z (Ie/I ) (400 V/U )1.5 1/h
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/29
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TK20
Size
00
Screw terminals
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x 4

2 x (20 ... 14) AWG, 1 x 12 AWG
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5),

1 x 2.5
mm2
1 x 1 ... 2.5
Terminal screw
M3
Nm
lb.in
Prescribed tightening torque for terminal screws
0.8 ... 1.3

7 ... 11
Flat connectors
When using a plug-in sleeve 6.3 1
mm
0.5 ... 1
Finely stranded with 6.3 2.5
mm2
1 ... 2.5
mm2
(does not apply to

plug-in bases)
0.8 x 1.2
Type
3TK20
Size
00
Auxiliary contacts
General data
IEC 60947-5-1
Standards
690

10
24 ... 230 V
380 ... 400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
A
4
3
2
1
1
24 V
48 V
110 V
A
A
A
4
2.2
1.1
125 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
1.1
0.5
---
24 V
48 V
110 V
A
A
A
2.1
1.1
0.52
125 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
0.52
0.27
---
Load rating with AC

Load rating with DC


4/30
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TK20. .-0. . .
3TK20. .-3. . .,
3TK20. .-6. . .,
3TK20. .-7. . .
Size
00
00
s and u rated data of the 3TK20 contactors

V AC
600
300
Uninterrupted current, open and enclosed
16
16 (10 for solder pin connection)

- Single-phase
At 115 V
200 V
230 V
460/575 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5
1
1.5
--
-1
1
--
- Three-phase
At 115 V
200 V
230 V
460/575 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
-3
3
5
-3 (1 for 3TK20. .-6)

3 (1 for 3TK20. .-6)
--
Overload relays
Type
Setting range
3UA7
A
8 ... 10
Rated voltage, max.
V AC
600
Auxiliary switch blocks, max.
V AC
300
s, u and U rated data of the auxiliary contacts
A 600, Q 300
Switching capacity
10

Size 00
Rated data
Main contacts
Operational
current Ie
Ratings1) of three-phase motors

at 50 Hz and
At 400/
380 V
230/
220 V
400/
380 V
500 V
690/
660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT Screw terminals
Version
Article No.
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC
4 NO
A1(+) 1
2 NO + 2 NC
3 NO + 1 NC
3 5 7
A2( ) 2 4 6
A1(+) 1
3 5 R1
A1(+) 1
A2( ) 2
4 6
A2( ) 2 4 R2 R4
R2
3 R1 R3
Contactors with screw terminals

AC operation
9
2.4
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
D
3TK2040-0AP0
3TK2031-0AP0
3TK2022-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
2.4
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
C
3TK2040-0BB4
3TK2031-0BB4
3TK2022-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC operation
9
3TK20. .-0. . .
1)

Accessories see "3TF2 contactors", Chapter 3.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/31
Siemens AG 2013

3TK20 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Rated data
Main contacts
Operational
current Ie
Ratings1) of three-phase motors

at 50 Hz and
At 400/
380 V
230/
220 V
400/
380 V
500 V
690/
660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Version
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
NC
4 NO
A1(+) 1
3 NO + 1 NC
3 5 7
A2( ) 2 4 6
2 NO + 2 NC
A1(+) 1
3 5 R1
A1(+) 1
A2( ) 2
4 6
A2( ) 2 4 R2 R4
R2
Contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mmflat connectors

AC operation
9
3 R1 R3
Flat connectors
2.4
--
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
D
3TK2040-3AP0
3TK2031-3AP0
3TK2022-3AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
2.4
--
4
3
2
-1
2
D
D
D
3TK2040-3BB4
3TK2031-3BB4
3TK2022-3BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC operation
9
3TK20. .-3. . .
Contactors with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors

AC operation
9
2.4
--
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
C
3TK2040-7AP0
3TK2031-7AP0
3TK2022-7AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
2.4
--
4
3
2
-1
2
C
D
C
3TK2040-7BB4
3TK2031-7BB4
3TK2022-7BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC operation
9
3TK20. .-7. . .
Contactors with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards2)

AC operation
9
Solder pin
connections
2.4
--
4
3
2
-1
2
C
D
C
3TK2040-6AP0
3TK2031-6AP0
3TK2022-6AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
2.4
--
4
3
2
-1
2
D
C
C
3TK2040-6BB4
3TK2031-6BB4
3TK2022-6BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC operation
9
3TK20. .-6. . .
1)
2) Operating range at AC-1 and 220 V:
0.85 to 1.15 x Us; lower operating range limit according to IEC 60947.
Accessories see "3TF2 contactors", Chapter 3.

Contactor type 3TK20
voltage Us
Size 00
AC operation
50 Hz
60 Hz
24 V AC
29 V AC
B0
110 V AC
132 V AC
F0
230/220 V AC
276 V AC
P01)
DC operation
24 V DC
1)
B4

4/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 11 kW
Overview
Application
The contactors are suitable for:
For changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors
For switching two separate loads
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
Note:
The accessories for the 3-pole 3RT20 contactors can also be
used for the 4-pole versions.
General description of sizes S00 to S0, see Chapter 3,

contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW".
Size S0 contactors have two auxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC

integrated in the basic version.
Size S00 and S0
Four additional auxiliary contacts, including no more than 2 NC.
3RT2516
Size
S00
S0
mm
45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73
60 x 85 x 97 / 60 x 101.5 x 97
mm
45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121
60 x 85 x 141 / 60 x 101.5 x 144
mm
45 x 57.5 x 73 / 45 x 70 x 73
60 x 85 x 107 / 60 x 101.5 x 107
mm
45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 121
60 x 85 x 151 / 60 x 101.5 x 154

Type
3RT2517
3RT2518
3RT2526

mounting surface.
360
22,5 22,5
NSB0_00478c
NSB0_00477a

Operat- 30 million
ing
cycles
Operat- Approx. 0.5 million

ing
cycles

690
C
C
-25 ... +60

-55 ... +80

During operation
During storage
IP20
Finger-safe
10 million

Main circuit
Weld-free
1)
A
A
A
35
20
10
63
35
16

For size S0, devices for AC and DC operation differ in depth. The following
applies: Depth (DC) = Depth (AC) + 10 mm.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/33
Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty.
3RT25 contactors are not suitable for switching a load between
two current sources.
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 11 kW
Type
3RT2516
3RT2517
3RT2518
3RT2526
Size
S00
S00
S00
S0
Control circuit

AC operation
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
---
DC operation
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
---
AC/DC operation
--

See 3RT23 16
See 3RT23 17
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

See 3RT23 26
Operating times for 0.8 to 1.1 x Us

See 3RT23 16
See 3RT23 17
See 3RT23 26
A
A
18
16
22
20
40
35
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 60 C up to 690 V
Rated power for

AC loads
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)
At 230 V
400 V
kW
kW
6
10.5
7.5
13
13.3
23

for loads with Ie
At 40 C
mm2
2.5
2.5
10
AC1)
DC1)
A
A
9
9
12
9
16
9
25
25
25
20
NO contacts at 230 V
NC contacts at 230 V
kW
kW
2.2
2.2
3
2.2
4
2.2
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
NO contacts at 400 V
NC contacts at 400 V
kW
kW
4
4
5.5
4
7.5
4
11
11
11
7.5

(at 60 C)
Rated power for
at 50 and 60 Hz
NO contact up to 400 V
NC contact up to 400 V
Load rating with DC

- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
16
16
2.1
0.8
0.6
20
20
2.1
0.8
0.6
35
20
4.5
1
0.4
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
16
16
12
1.6
0.8
20
20
12
1.6
0.8
35
35
35
5
1
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
16
0.5
0.15
0.75
--
20
0.5
0.15
0.75
--
20
5
2.5
1
0.09
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
16
5
0.35
---
20
5
0.35
---
35
35
15
3
0.27
Utilization category DC-3/DC-52),

1)
2)
Values for devices with AC and DC operation: For 3RT25 26 with

DC operation, different values apply to AC-2 and AC-3 for the NC.
For Us >24 V, the rated operational currents Ie for the NC contact conducting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact conducting paths.
4/34
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 11 kW

AC operation, 2 NO + 2 NC1)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT251.-1A . 00
3RT251.-2A.00
Rated data
3RT252.-1A. 00
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2/AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Ident. No.
Tu: 40/60 C
Operational
current Ie
Ratings of threephase motors at

50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
At 400 V
400 V
kW
Version
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
Article No.
NO
NC
3RT252.-2A .00
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC

mounting rail
Size S002)
A1(+)
A2()
R1
R3
R2
R4
18 / 16
--
--
--
24, 50/60 Hz
110, 50/60 Hz
230, 50/60 Hz
B
B
A
3RT2516-1AB00
3RT2516-1AF00
3RT2516-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2516-2AB00
3RT2516-2AF00
3RT2516-2AP00
12/93)
5.5/43)
22 / 20
--
--
--
24, 50/60 Hz
110, 50/60 Hz
230, 50/60 Hz
B
B
}
3RT2517-1AB00
3RT2517-1AF00
3RT2517-1AP00
B
A
A
3RT2517-2AB00
3RT2517-2AF00
3RT2517-2AP00
16/93)
7.5/43)
22 / 20
--
--
--
24, 50/60 Hz
110, 50/60 Hz
230, 50/60 Hz
B
B
A
3RT2518-1AB00
3RT2518-1AF00
3RT2518-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2518-2AB00
3RT2518-2AF00
3RT2518-2AP00
11
24, 50 Hz
110, 50 Hz
230, 50 Hz
B
B
A
3RT2526-1AB00
3RT2526-1AF00
3RT2526-1AP00
B
B
A
3RT2526-2AB00
3RT2526-2AF00
3RT2526-2AP00
Size S0
A1(+)
A2()
25
R1
R3
13 21
R2
R4
14 22
11
40 / 35
1)
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3)
Values for NO contact/NC contact. The NC contact can switch no more
than 4 kW.
2)

Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/35
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 ... 11 kW
DC operation, 2 NO + 2 NC1)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT251.-1B . 40
3RT251.-2B .40
Rated data
Auxiliary contacts
AC-2/AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
AC-1,
Ident. No.
Tu: 40/60 C
Operational
current Ie
Ratings of threephase motors at

50 Hz and
Operational
current Ie
At 400 V
400 V
kW
3RT252.-1B.40
Version
Article No.
NO
NC
3RT252.-2B.40
Rated control
DT Screw terminals
supply voltage
Us
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC
Size S00
A1(+)
A2()
R1
R3
R2
R4
18 / 16
--
--
--
24
220
}
B
3RT2516-1BB40
3RT2516-1BM40
A
B
3RT2516-2BB40
3RT2516-2BM40
12/92)
5.5/42)
22 / 20
--
--
--
24
220
A
B
3RT2517-1BB40
3RT2517-1BM40
A
B
3RT2517-2BB40
3RT2517-2BM40
16/92)
7.5/42)
22 / 20
--
--
--
24
220
A
B
3RT2518-1BB40
3RT2518-1BM40
A
B
3RT2518-2BB40
3RT2518-2BM40
11
24
220
A
B
3RT2526-1BB40
3RT2526-1BM40
A
B
3RT2526-2BB40
3RT2526-2BM40
Size S0
A1(+)
A2()
25 (20)3)
R1
R3
R2
R4
11 (7.5)3)
13 21
14 22
40 / 35
1)
Values for NO contact/NC contact. The NC contact can switch no more
than 4 kW.
3)
Values in brackets for NC. (The deviating value for the NC only applies to
devices with DC operation.)
2)

Chapter 3.
4/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 18.5 kW
Overview
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts can be either laterally mounted

or snapped onto the top (auxiliary switch blocks according to
EN 50012 or EN 50005).
Note:
The accessories for the 3-pole SIRIUS 3RT10 contactors can

also be used for the 4-pole versions.
3RT15 contactors are not suitable for switching a load between
two current sources.
3RT1535
Size
S2
AC operation
Type
DC operation
mm
mm
73 x 111 x 110
73 x 111 x 159
mm
mm
73 x 111 x 125
73 x 111 x 174

Operat- 10 million
ing
cycles
Operat- Approx. 0.5 million

ing
cycles

690
C
C
-25 ... +60

-55 ... +80

During operation
During storage
IP20
Connection range
IP00 (see also additional terminal covers)

Main circuit
Weld-free
A
A
A
160
80
50
Control circuit
Solenoid coil operating range (AC/DC)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
AC operation, 50 Hz
- Closing
- P.f.
VA
VA
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
VA
145
0.79
12.5
0.36
- Closing
- P.f.
VA
VA
170/155
0.76/0.72
- Closed
- P.f.
VA
VA
15/11.8
0.35/0.38
13.3
ms
ms
4 ... 35
10 ... 30
ms
ms
50 ... 110
15 ... 30
ms
10 ... 15

AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Arcing time
1)
In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole 3RT1 contactors.

2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/37
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 18.5 kW
Type
3RT1535
Size
S2
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
At 40 C up to 690 V
At 60 C up to 690 V
A
A
60
55
Rated power for

AC loads
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C)
At 230 V
400 V
kW
kW
20
36

for loads with Ie
At 40 C
mm
16
40
kW
kW
9.5
18.5

(at 60 C)
Rated power for slipring
or squirrel-cage motors
at 50 and 60 Hz
Up to 400 V
At 230 V
400 V
Load rating with DC

- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
50
23
4.5
1
0.4
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
50
45
45
5
1
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
35
6
2.5
1
0.1
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
A
50
45
25
5
0.27
Utilization category DC-3/DC-51),

1)
For Us >24 V, the rated operational currents Ie for the NC contact conducting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact conducting paths.
4/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

4-pole, 2 NO + 2 NC, 18.5 kW

AC and DC operation, 2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts1)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT1535-1. . . .
Rated data
AC-2/AC-3,
Tu: Up to 60 C
Operational
current Ie
AC-1,
Tu: 40/60 C
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz and
At 400 V
400 V
kW

voltage Us
DT Screw terminals
Operational
current Ie
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
AC operation
Size S2
A1(+) 1 R1 R3 3
A2() 2
R2 R4 4
40
18.5
60 / 55
AC 50 Hz, 24
AC 50 Hz, 110
AC 50 Hz, 230
B
B
}
3RT1535-1AB00
3RT1535-1AF00
3RT1535-1AP00
----
60 / 55
24 DC
220 DC
}
B
3RT1535-1BB40
3RT1535-1BM40
---
DC operation
Size S2
A1(+) 1 R1 R3 3
A2() 2
40
1)
R2 R4 4
18.5

Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/39
Siemens AG 2013

12.5 ... 50 kvar
Overview
Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on
with capacitor contactors.
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
For the capacitor switching capacity of the basic 3RT10 contactor version.
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Auxiliary switches
The auxiliary switch block which is snapped onto the capacitor
contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the
case of S00 one standard NC contact and in the case of S0 and
S3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size S00 also
contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit.
The 3RT16 capacitor contactors are special versions of the

3RT10 contactors size S00 to S3. The capacitors are precharged
by means of the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors;
only then do the main contacts close.
In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary switch block can be mounted

laterally on the size S3 capacitor contactors (2 NO, 2 NC or
1 NO + 1 NC versions); type 3RH1921-1EA. .. The fitting of
auxiliary switches for capacitor contactors in sizes S00 and S0
is not expandable.
This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the

contactors.
See Chapter 3, "Power contactors for switching motors"
"SIRIUS 3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW".

identical to those of the 3RT10 contactors:
for size S00 as for the 3RT1017 contactors
Type
3RT1617-1A. .3
3RT1627-1A. .1
3RT1647-1A. .1
Size
S00
S0
S3
45 x 101 x 105
45 x 100 x 130
70 x 167 x 183
> 150 000
> 100 000
mm
W
including auxiliary switches and
connecting cables

360
22,5 22,5

surface.
NSB0_00478c
Function
Operat- 10 million
ing
cycles
Operat- > 250 000

ing
cycles

690
1 000
kV

400
690
-25 ... +60
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60947-1,

Appendix C
IP20,
coil assembly IP40
Finger-safe
IP20,
coil assembly IP20
IP20,
terminal compartment
IP00,
coil assembly IP40
Shock resistance (AC operation)

Rectangular pulse
g/ms
7.5/5 and 4.2/10
8.2/5 and 4.9/10
6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse
g/ms
9.8/5 and 5.9/10
12.5/5 and 7.8/10
10.6/5 and 6.2/10
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
Auxiliary contacts mountable laterally

(not for sizes S00 and S0)
--
--
2 NO or 2 NC or
1 NO + 1 NC
Auxiliary circuit
Short-circuit test
10

10
4/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

12.5 ... 50 kvar
Type
3RT1617-1A. .3
3RT1627-1A. .1
3RT1647-1A. .1
Size
S00
S0
S3
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
-----
61
0.82
7.8
0.24
270
0.68
22
0.27
27/24.3
0.8/0.75
4.4/3.4
0.27/0.27
64/63
0.72/0.74
8.4/6.8
0.24/0.28
298/274
0.7/0.62
27/20
0.29/0.31
26.4
0.81
4.7
0.26
61
0.82
7.8
0.24
270
0.68
22
0.27
31.7
0.77
5.1
0.27
69
0.76
7.5
0.28
300
0.52
21
0.29
mA
<3 mA x (230 V/Us)1)
<6 mA x (230 V/Us)
<25 mA x (230 V/Us)
ms
ms
8 ... 35
4 ... 30
8 ... 44
4 ... 20
17 ... 90
10 ... 25
ms
ms
10 ... 25
5 ... 30
10 ... 17
4 ... 20
18 ... 30
11 ... 23
Control
AC operation
50 Hz
60 Hz

Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

-
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
VA
VA

AC operation
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
Main circuit
Load rating with AC
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance AC capacitors
Capacitor rating at
rated power
230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar
3 7.5
3.5 15
3.5 30
400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar
5 12.5
6 25
5 50
525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar
7.5 15
7.8 30
7.5 60
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar
10 21
10 42
10 84
180
100
Max. switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
h-1
1.6 ... 2.2 x Ie
1)
The 3RT1916-1GA00 additional load module is recommended for higher

residual currents.
2)
(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms; diode assembly 2 to 6 times, for S00 noise
suppression diode 6 to 10 times).
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/41
Siemens AG 2013

12.5 ... 50 kvar
Type
3RT1617-1A. .3
3RT1627-1A. .1
3RT1647-1A. .1
Size
S00
S0
S3
M3
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
2 ... 2.5
18 ... 22

4 ... 6
36 ... 53
Main conductors
Screw terminals
Box terminals
Terminal screw
- Tightening torque
Nm
lb.in
Solid
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1);

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
according to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)1)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1);
2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
max. 1 x 10 1)2)
--
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1);
2 x (2.5 ... 6) 1)2)
--
AWG cables
- Solid
- Solid or stranded
- Stranded
AWG
AWG
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)

2 x (18 ... 14)
1 x 12
2 x (16 ... 12)

2 x (14 ... 10)
1x8
----

mm
mm
---
2.5 ... 35
10 ... 50
Solid
Stranded
mm
mm
---
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 70
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
AWG
--
10 ... 2/0

mm
--
6 x 9 x 0.8

mm
mm
---
2.5 ... 50
10 ... 50
Solid
Stranded
mm
mm
---
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 70
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
AWG
--
10 ... 2/0

mm
--
6 x 9 x 0.8

mm
mm
---
2 x (2.5 ... 35)

2 x (10 ... 35)
Solid
Stranded
mm
mm
---
2 x (2.5 ... 16)

2 x (10 ... 50)
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
AWG
--
2 x (10 ... 1/0)

mm
--
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Solid
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1);

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1);

2 x (18 ... 14)1); 1 x 12
NSB0_00479
NSB0_00480
NSB0_00481
Terminal screw
- Tightening torque
1)
Nm
lb.in

2) With 3RV1925-5AB infeed terminal for 16 mm2.
4/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
M3
0.8 ... 1.2
7 ... 10.3
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1);

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1) according to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
Siemens AG 2013

12.5 ... 50 kvar
Circuit diagrams
Size S00
Sizes S0 and S3
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
F0
A2
43
44
NSB0_00558b
NSB0_01382c
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
14 52
A1
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A2
13 51
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
F0
C1
C1

AC operation
Main, auxiliary and control conductors: Screw terminals
3RT1617-1A.03
3RT1627-1A.01
Utilization category AC-6b

Switching of AC capacitors
for an ambient temperature of 60 C1)
Auxiliary
contacts,
unassigned
Capacitor rating at
operational voltage 50/60 Hz
Version
At 230 V
At 400 V
At 525 V
At 690 V
kvar
kvar
kvar
kvar
NO
3RT1647-1A.01
voltage Us2)
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
NC
V AC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Hz
Size S00
3 7.5
5 12.5
7.5 15
10 21
24
110
230
50 / 60
B
B
}
3RT1617-1AB03
3RT1617-1AF03
3RT1617-1AP03
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
6 25
7.8 30
10 42
--
24
110
230
50
B
B
}
3RT1627-1AB01
3RT1627-1AF01
3RT1627-1AP01
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
5 50
7.5 60
10 84
--
24
110
230
50
B
B
}
3RT1647-1AB01
3RT1647-1AF01
3RT1647-1AP01
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
Size S03)
3.5 15
Size S3
3.5 30
1)
For size S3: 55 C.

Operating range: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
3)
For conductor cross-sections > 6 mm2
use 3RV1925-5AB terminals (2 units).
2)

Chapter 3.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/43
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RT2, 3RT1 contactors
Options
Rated control supply voltages, possible on request (change of the 10th and 11th position of the Article No.)
voltage Us
Contactor type 3RT231,

3RT251
3RT232,
3RT252
3RT133,
3RT134,
3RT153
3RT144
3RT1617,
3RT1627,
3RT1647
S0
S2, S3
S3
S00, S0, S3
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
-V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
-V0
B0
--F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
--F0
P0
U0
V0
B0
D0
H0
F0
N2
P0
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
C2
D2
H2
G2
N2
L2
C2
--G2
N2
L2
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
K6
P6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
G6
N6
R6
A4
B4
D4
W4
-F4
G4
M4
P4
-B4
D4
W4
-F4
G4
M4
--
-B4
D4
W4
-F4
G4
M4
--
-B4
D4
W4
E4
F4
G4
M4
P4
----------
Size S00
Sizes S00 to S3
AC operation
Solenoid coils for 50 Hz (exception: Size S00: 50 and 60 Hz1))

24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
110 V AC
230 V AC
240 V AC
400 V AC
24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
230 V AC
50 Hz
60 Hz
110 V AC
220 V AC
120 V AC
240 V AC

50/60 Hz3)
60 Hz4)
100 V AC
200 V AC
400 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
440 V AC
DC operation
12 V DC
24 V DC
42 V DC
48 V DC
60 V DC
110 V DC
125 V DC
220 V DC
230 V DC
Examples
AC operation
DC operation

voltage
3RT2325-1AP00
Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50 Hz for rated control supply voltage 230 V AC.
3RT2325-1AG20
Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50/60 Hz for rated control supply voltage 110 V AC.
3RT2526-2BB40
Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 24 V DC.
3RT2526-2BG40
Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 125 V DC.
Contactor type 3RT1456-6A...,

3RT1466-6A...,
3RT1476-6A...
Us min ... Us max5)
Size S6, S10, S12

voltage
Us min ... Us max5)
Contactor type 3RT1456-6N...,

3RT1466-6N...,
3RT1476-6N...
Size S6, S10, S12
3RT1456-6P/Q ...,
3RT1466-6P/Q ...,
3RT1476-6P/Q ...
S6, S10, S12
Sizes S6 to S12
UC operation (AC 40 to 60 Hz, DC)
23 ... 26 V AC/DC
42 ... 48 V AC/DC
110 ... 127 V AC/DC
200 ... 220 V AC/DC
220 ... 240 V AC/DC
B3
D3
F3
M3
P3
240 ... 277 V AC/DC

380 ... 420 V AC/DC
440 ... 480 V AC/DC
500 ... 550 V AC/DC
575 ... 600 V AC/DC
U3
V3
R3
S3
T3
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
2)
Size S00:
at 50 Hz: 0.85.... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Size S0 to S3:
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us.
4/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
21 ... 27.3 V AC/DC

96 ... 127 V AC/DC
200 ... 277 V AC/DC
3)
B3
F3
P3

Size S00:
at 50/60 Hz: 0.85 ...1.1 x Us
Sizes S0 to S3:
at 50 Hz: 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us.
4)
at 60 Hz: 0.8 ...1.1 x Us.
5) Coil operating range: 0.7 x U
s min ...1.3 x Us max.
-F3
P3
Siemens AG 2013

Contactors with Extended Operating Range 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us for Railway Applications
5.5 ... 18.5 kW
Overview
L+
L-
Standards
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. They
have spring-type connections as well as screw connections. The
size S00 and S0 contactors have spring-type connections for all
terminals.
S1
Rv
E1
+
Q1
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 C reduces the mechanical endurance, the current carrying capacity of the conducting paths and the switching frequency.
Control and auxiliary circuits
The solenoid coils of the contactors have an extended coil operating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard with
surge suppressors. The opening delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms
longer than for standard contactors.
Application
For operation in installations which are subject both to considerable variations in the control voltage and to high ambient temperatures, e.g. railway applications under extreme climatic
conditions, rolling mills, etc.
Also for control supply voltages with battery buffering to extend
the operating time in the event of battery charge failure.
Q1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2-
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the contactors (across the full coil operating range) is -40 to +70 C.
NSB0_02178
Ambient temperature
Circuit diagram (version with suppressor diode)
The size S00 contactors are supplied prewired with a plug-on

module containing the series resistor. The suppressor diode is
integrated. A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to
EN 50005) can be fitted additionally.
A circuit diagram showing the terminals is stuck onto each contactor. One NC of the auxiliary contacts is required for the series
resistor function. The selection and ordering data shows the
number of additional, unassigned auxiliary contacts. With size
S00 it is possible to extend the number of auxiliary contacts.
At ambient temperatures up to 70C, the size S00 contactors are
allowed to be mounted side by side.
Contactors with conventional coil
3RT202. contactors with solid-state operating mechanism,

extended operating range
These contactors have an extended operating range from 0.7 to

1.25 x Us; on size S00 the solenoid coils are fitted with suppressor diodes, on size S0 with varistors. An additional series resistor
is not required.
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage.
Note:
An additional auxiliary switch block cannot be mounted.
The contactors are energized via upstream control electronics

which ensure the coil operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us at an
ambient temperature of 70 C. They are supplied as complete
units with integrated coil electronics. A varistor is integrated for
damping opening surges in the coil.
3RT201. contactors with series resistor
The possibility of mounting auxiliary switches is the same as that

for equivalent standard contactors for switching motors in the
matching size (see exploded drawings of the 3RT20 contactors
in Chapter 3, pages 3/6 and 3/7).
a surge suppressor (suppressor diode or varistor as preferred).
At ambient temperatures up to 70 C, size S0 of these contactor

versions are allowed to be mounted side by side.
A clearance of 10 mm is required for side-by-side mounting at

ambient temperatures > 60 C 70 C.
A surge suppressor (a suppressor diode or varistor as preferred)

is integrated.
The DC solenoid systems of the contactors are modified
(to holding excitation) by means of a series resistor.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/45
Siemens AG 2013

5.5 ... 18.5 kW
Type
3RT2017
3RT202.
3RT202.-2XB40- 3RT202.-2XF400LA2
0LA2
Size
S00
S0
S0
S0

Contactors with series resistor
Special version (on request)
Ambient temperature
During operation
-40 ... +701)
-40 ... +70
During storage
-55 ... +80
-55 ... +80
Control circuit
DC
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

For cold coil and 1.0 x Us

- Closing
- Closed
W
W
13
4
---
---
---
- Closing
- Closed
W
W
2.8
2.8
4.5
4.5
---
---
Contactors with solid-state operating

mechanism
- Closing
--
--
6.7
13.2
- Closed
--
--
0.8
1.56
All details and technical specifications not mentioned here are

identical to those of the 3RT20 basic versions; see Chapter 3,
"Power contactors for switching motors" "SIRIUS 3RT20 contactors, 3-pole, 3 ... 18.5 kW".
4/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
1)
3RT20..-.K contactors without the Article No. suffix -"0LA0" are coupling
contactors, which are certified for the temperature range -25 C to +60 C.
For railway applications, an additional certification approves these contactors with a minimum distance of 10 mm for the extended temperature
range -40 C to +70 C.
Siemens AG 2013

5.5 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
For screw and snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
Solenoid coil with surge suppressor (S00)
3RT201.-2K.4.
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: 70 C
Auxiliary contacts
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at
Operational
current Ie
at
Rated control
supply voltage
Us
3RT201.-2K.42-0LA0
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
400 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V DC
3RT20 contactors for switching motors

Size S00
With conventional coil, fitted with suppressor diode
1 NO, Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
1 NC, Ident. No. 01
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
12
5.5
5.5
5.5
102)
12
5.5
5.5
5.5
012)
21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
--
24
110
}
B
3RT2017-2KB41
3RT2017-2KF41
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
24
110
}
B
3RT2017-2KB42
3RT2017-2KF42
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
With conventional coil, fitted with varistor

1 NO, Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
1 NC, Ident. No. 01
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
2)
--
24
110
B
B
3RT2017-2LB41
3RT2017-2LF41
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
24
110
B
B
3RT2017-2LB42
3RT2017-2LF42
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
12
5.5
5.5
5.5
10
12
5.5
5.5
5.5
012)
With series resistor, fitted with suppressor diode

E1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
12
5.5
5.5
5.5
--3)
--
14)
24
110
B
B
3RT2017-2KB42-0LA0
3RT2017-2KF42-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
16
7.5
10
11
--3)
--
14)
24
110
B
B
3RT2018-2KB42-0LA0
3RT2018-2KF42-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
With series resistor, fitted with varistor

E1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
12
5.5
5.5
5.5
-3)
--
14)
24
110
B
B
3RT2017-2LB42-0LA0
3RT2017-2LF42-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
16
7.5
10
11
--3)
--
14)
24
110
B
B
3RT2018-2LB42-0LA0
3RT2018-2LF42-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators

1)
2)
It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block. A clearance of 10 mm
is required for side-by-side mounting at ambient temperatures > 60 C.
3)
One 4-pole auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 can be mounted;

no distance required for mounting at up to 70 C.
4)
NC contact cannot be used because it is used for switching of the series
resistor.
Accessories see "3RT20 Contactors", Chapter 3.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/47
Siemens AG 2013

5.5 ... 18.5 kW
DC operation
Solenoid coil fitted with varistor (S0)
3RT202.-2K.40
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: 70 C
Operational
current Ie
at
Auxiliary contacts
Rating1) of
three-phase motors
at
3RT202.-2X.40-0LA2
Rated control DT Spring-type terminals

supply voltage
Us
Configurator
Ident. No. Version

Article No.
400 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC
V DC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RT20 contactors for switching motors

Size S0
With conventional operating mechanism2)
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
17
7.5
10
11
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2025-2KB40
3RT2025-2KF40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
25
5.5
11
11
11
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2026-2KB40
3RT2026-2KF40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
32
7.5
15
18.5
18.5
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2027-2KB40
3RT2027-2KF40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
With solid-state operating mechanism

A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22
17
7.5
10
11
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2025-2XB40-0LA2
3RT2025-2XF40-0LA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
25
5.5
11
11
11
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2026-2XB40-0LA2
3RT2026-2XF40-0LA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
32
7.5
15
18.5
18.5
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2027-2XB40-0LA2
3RT2027-2XF40-0LA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
38
7.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
11
24
110
B
B
3RT2028-2XB40-0LA2
3RT2028-2XF40-0LA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Accessories see "3RT20 contactors", Chapter 3.
1)
2) It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block. A clearance of 10 mm
is required for side-by-side mounting at ambient temperatures > 60 C.
4/48
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

18.5 ... 45 kW
Mounting
Overview
The resistor module of the size S2 to S3 contactors must be

mounted to the left of the contactor owing to the prefabricated
connecting cables.
Standards
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274 (exception: series resistor S2 and S3). The auxiliary conductor and coil
terminals of sizes S2 to S3 are all spring-type terminals.
Dimensions
3RT10 contactors with contactor control unit, extended

operating range
Contactors are available with:

Coils with series resistor
Coils with solid-state control unit
Attaching the series resistor increases the width of contactor

sizes S2 and S3.
varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The opening
delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the contactors (across the full coil operating range) is -40 C to +70 C.
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 C reduces the mechanical endurance, the current carrying capacity of the conducting paths and the switching frequency.
Application
They are supplied as complete units with a built-on contactor

control unit.
The contactors are energized via upstream control electronics
which ensure the coil operating range of 0.7 to 1.25 x Us at an
ambient temperature of 70 C.
A varistor is integrated for damping opening surges in the coil.
The opening delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for
standard contactors.
The possibility of mounting auxiliary switches is the same as that
for equivalent standard contactors.
Mounting
At ambient temperatures up to 70 C, sizes S2 and S3 of these
contactor versions are allowed to be mounted side by side.
Dimensions
For operation in installations which are subject both to considerable variations in the control voltage and to high ambient temperatures, e.g. railway applications under extreme climatic conditions, rolling mills, etc.
Because of the built-on contactor control unit, the height of the

size S2 and S3 contactors increases by up to 34 mm.
3RT10 contactors with series resistor

The DC solenoid systems of the contactors are modified
NSB0_00562c
A1
(-)
A2
Rv
A1
21
22
(+)
A2
(-)
Circuit diagram with series resistor
Auxiliary switches
The size S2 to S3 contactors are equipped on the front with an
auxiliary switch block with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts. The separate
series resistor, which is attached laterally next to the contactor
on the 35 mm standard mounting rail, is fitted with connecting
cables for mounting onto contactors. A circuit diagram showing
the terminals is stuck onto each contactor. The NC contact
21-22 of the auxiliary contacts is required for the series resistor
function. The selection and ordering data shows the number of
additional, unassigned auxiliary contacts.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/49
Siemens AG 2013

18.5 ... 45 kW
Type
3RT103.
3RT104.
Size
S2
S3
3RT10 contactors with series resistor

Ambient temperature
During operation
-40 ... +70
Control circuit
AC/DC
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us


Closing
Closed
W
W
46
14
78
23
--
--
3RT10 contactors with contactor control unit

Control circuit
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption
Closing
Closed
W
W

identical to those of the 3RT10 basic versions;
15
11
19
12
--
--
see Chapter 3, "Power contactors for switching motors"

"SIRIUS 3RT10 contactors, 3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW".

DC operation
Spring-type terminals for auxiliary/control circuits
Solenoid coil fitted with varistor
3RT103.-3K.44-0LA0
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: 70 C
Operational
current Ie
at
Auxiliary
contacts
Ratings of
three-phase motors at

voltage Us
Version
400 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
Article No.
NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V DC
Size S2
With series resistor
A1(+)
A2()
40
50
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
11
18.5
15
22
22
30
31 43
32 44
22
22
11)
24
110
B
B
3RT1035-3KB44-0LA0
3RT1035-3KF44-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
1)
24
110
B
B
3RT1036-3KB44-0LA0
3RT1036-3KF44-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Size S3
With series resistor
A1(+)
A2()
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
31 43
32 44
65
18.5
30
37
43
11)
24
110
B
B
3RT1044-3KB44-0LA0
3RT1044-3KF44-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
80
22
37
45
55
11)
24
110
B
B
3RT1045-3KB44-0LA0
3RT1045-3KF44-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
95
22
45
55
55
11)
24
110
B
B
3RT1046-3KB44-0LA0
3RT1046-3KF44-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
1)
The auxiliary contacts are not expandable.
4/50
Siemens IC 10 2014
Spare parts see "3RT10 contactors", Chapter 3.

Siemens AG 2013

18.5 ... 45 kW
DC operation
Contactor control unit
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RT10. .-3X.40-0LA2
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3
Tu: Up to 70 C
Auxiliary
contacts1)

up to
Ratings of
three-phase motors
at 50 Hz
400 V
400 V
kW

supply
voltage Us
Version
NO
Article No.
NC
for coil terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC

mounting rail
Size S2
U
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2(-)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
40
18.5
---
---
24
110
B
B
3RT1035-1XB40-0LA2
3RT1035-1XF40-0LA2
B
B
3RT1035-3XB40-0LA2
3RT1035-3XF40-0LA2
50
22
---
---
24
110
B
B
3RT1036-1XB40-0LA2
3RT1036-1XF40-0LA2
B
B
3RT1036-3XB40-0LA2
3RT1036-3XF40-0LA2
For screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 and TH 75

Size S3
U
A1(+)
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
A2(-)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
65
30
---
---
24
110
B
B
3RT1044-1XB40-0LA2
3RT1044-1XF40-0LA2
B
B
3RT1044-3XB40-0LA2
3RT1044-3XF40-0LA2
80
37
---
---
24
110
B
B
3RT1045-1XB40-0LA2
3RT1045-1XF40-0LA2
B
B
3RT1045-3XB40-0LA2
3RT1045-3XF40-0LA2
95
45
---
---
24
110
B
B
3RT1046-1XB40-0LA2
3RT1046-1XF40-0LA2
B
B
3RT1046-3XB40-0LA2
3RT1046-3XF40-0LA2
1)
Auxiliary switch blocks mountable as standard contactors.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/51
Siemens AG 2013

3TB5 motor contactors,
55 ... 200 kW
Overview
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal
covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices.
3TB50
3TB52 ... 3TB56
L
L
L+
LS1
S1
All details not mentioned here are identical to those of the basic
versions of the 3TB5 contactors; see Chapter 3.
1
Rv
Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the contactors (across the full coil operating range) is -50 to +70 C. Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 C and > +55 C reduces
the mechanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the
conducting paths and the switching frequency.
K1
Rv
32
K2
2
5
6
K1 A1
NSB0_00715
K2
31
A2
21
3
K2
4
7
K1
22
K2
8
K1 A1
K2 A1
A2
A2
NSB0_01357b
Series resistor
Circuit diagrams with series resistor
The DC solenoid systems of the 3TB contactors must be modified (to hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor. This series resistor is supplied separately packed with the contactors.
Reversing contactors
With the 3TB52 to 3TB56 contactors, the series resistor must be
connected using an additional K2 reversing contactor
(3RT1317-1F.40). This contactor is automatically included in the
scope of supply in the same packaging as the contactor.
With types 3TB50, the series resistor must be attached onto the
right-hand side of the auxiliary switch block by means of the enclosed mounting parts and sets of links provided. With types
3TB52 to 3TB56, the series resistor must be attached separately
next to the contactors.
Dimensions
Attaching resistors and varistors increases the width of the contactors.
Auxiliary contacts
Application
One NC contact is required for the series resistor function.

Two NO contacts and one NC contact are thus freely available.
For operation in plants which are subject both to considerable

variations in the control voltage and to high ambient temperatures, e.g. in railway applications.
Type
3TB50
3TB52
3TB54
3TB56
Size
10
12

Ambient temperature
During operation
-40 ... +70
Control circuit
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

Closing
38
40
190
295
Closed
20
21
43
59
All technical specifications not mentioned here are identical

to those of the basic versions of the 3TB5 contactors; see
Chapter 3.
4/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3TB5 motor contactors,
55 ... 200 kW

3TB50 to 3TB56 contactors
for screw fixing
Rated data
AC-2 and AC-3 at 55 C
Auxiliary
contacts2)
OperaRatings1) of
tional
three-phase motors
current Ie at
at
Version
400 V
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO

voltage Us
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
NC
V DC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Size
Contactors for switching AC voltage

DC operation
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 or EN 50005.
A1
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21 31 43
A2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14 22 32 44
110
37
55
75
90
13)
24
110
B
}
3TB5017-0LB4
3TB5017-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
170
55
90
110
132
13)
24
110
C
D
3TB5217-0LB4
3TB5217-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
10
250
75
132
160
200
13)
24
110
C
A
3TB5417-0LB4
3TB5417-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
12
400
115
200
255
355
13)
110
3TB5617-0LF4
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1)
2)
The number of auxiliary contacts cannot be increased.
3)
One NC contact used for series resistor.
Accessories
Spare parts
For contactors
Size
Remarks
Type

voltage Us
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
V DC
Solenoid coils
For contactors with extended operating range
6
3TB50
With series resistor,

without varistor
24
110
C
D
3TY6503-0LB4
3TY6503-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3TB52 and 3TC52
24
110
D
D
3TY6523-0LB4
3TY6523-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
10
3TB54
24
110
C
C
3TY6543-0LB4
3TY6543-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
12
3TB56 and 3TC56
24
110
C
C
3TY6563-0LB4
3TY6563-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
All spare parts not mentioned here are identical to those of the
basic versions of the 3TB5 contactors; see Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/53
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors for switching DC voltage,
2-pole
Overview
Standards
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
3TC44, 3TC48
3TC52, 3TC56
L
L
L+
LS1
S1
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274 (exception: series resistor). Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto
the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other
devices.
1
K2
31
Rv
All specifications and technical specifications not mentioned

here are identical to those of the standard 3TC contactors.
K1
Rv
32
K2
NSB0_00715
K1 A1
Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the contactors (across the full coil operating range) is -50 to +70 C. Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 C and > +55 C reduces
the mechanical endurance, the current-carrying capacity of the
A2
21
3
K2
4
7
K1
22
K2
8
K1 A1
K2 A1
A2
A2
NSB0_01357b
Circuit diagrams with series resistor
Reversing contactors
At ambient temperatures > 55 C, a clearance of 10 mm is required for side-by-side mounting of size 2 contactors. There is
no need to reduce the technical specifications.
With the 3TC52 and 3TC56 contactors, the series resistor must
be connected using an additional K2 reversing contactor
(3RT1317-1F.40). This contactor is automatically included in the
scope of supply in the same packaging as the contactor.
Series resistor
Dimensions
The DC solenoid systems of the 3TC contactors must be modified (to hold-in coil) by means of a series resistor. This series resistor is supplied separately packed with the contactors.
With types 3TC48, the series resistor must be attached onto the
right-hand side of the auxiliary switch block by means of the enclosed mounting parts and sets of links provided, while in the
case of the 3TC44 it must be mounted and wired between the
contactor poles. With types 3TC52 and 3TC56, the series resistor must be attached separately next to the contactors.
2
5
Attaching resistors and varistors increases the width of the contactors.
Application
Auxiliary contacts

One NC contact is required for the series resistor function.

Two NO contacts and one NC contact are thus freely available.
Type
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
Size
12

Ambient temperature
During operation
-40 ... +70
Control circuit
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

Closing
48
26
40
295
Closed
13
14
21
59

identical to those of the basic versions of the 3TC contactors;
see page 4/56.
4/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors for switching DC voltage,
2-pole
3TC44: for screw and snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rail
3TC48 to 3TC56: screw fixing
3TC48
Size
Utilization
category
Rated
Rated power
operational of loads
current Ie at
at
Auxiliary Rated
DT Screw terminals
contacts1) control supply
voltage Us
Version
750 V
220 V 440 V 600 V 750 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO NC
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V DC
Contactors for switching DC voltage

DC operation
Terminal designations according to EN 50012 and EN 50005
A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2
13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 14 22 32 44
DC-1
DC-3/DC-5
32
7.5
7
5
14
9
19.2
9
24
4
12)
24
110
B
C
3TC4417-0LB4
3TC4417-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC-1
DC-3/DC-5
75
75
16.5
13
33
27
45
38
56
45
12)
24
110
C
C
3TC4817-0LB4
3TC4817-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC-1
DC-3/DC-5
170
170
48
41
97
82
132
110
165
110
12)
24
110
C
C
3TC5217-0LB4
3TC5217-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
12
DC-1
DC-3/DC-5
400
400
88
70
176
140
240
200
300
250
12)
24
110
C
C
3TC5617-0LB4
3TC5617-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1)
2)
The number of auxiliary contacts cannot be increased.

One NC contact used for series resistor.
Accessories
Spare parts
For contactors
Size
Remarks
Type
Rated control DT Article No.

supply voltage
Us
Price
per PU
V DC
Arc chutes
2
3TC4417-0L. .
With cutout for resistor

mounting
3TY2442-0B
1 unit
41B
24
110
C
C
3TY6443-0LB4
3TY6443-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
24
110
C
C
3TY6483-0LB4
3TY6483-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Solenoid coils
2
3TC44
3TC48
With series resistor,

without varistor
All spare parts not mentioned here are identical to those of the
basic versions of the 3TC contactors; see Chapter 3.

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/55
Siemens AG 2013

Contactors for Switching DC Voltage
3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
3TC7
Overview
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1.
3TC4 and 3TC5
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are suitable for switching and controlling DC motors as well as all other
DC circuits.
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
The solenoid excitation is configured for a particularly large

operating range. It is between 0.7 or 0.8 to 1.2 Us.
The contactors are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal

covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices.
3TC74 contactors can be used at up to 750 V/400 A and 50 Hz

in AC-1 operation.
The DC motor ratings given in the tables are applicable to the

DC-3 and DC-5 utilization categories with two-pole switching
of the load or with the two conducting paths of the contactor connected in series.
One contactor conducting path can switch full power up to
220 V. For voltages over 220 V, the two conducting paths are to
be switched in series; see "Technical specifications, main circuit", page 4/58.
For voltages over 750 V, the two conducting paths (3TC74: two
contactors) are to be switched in series; see "Technical specifications, main circuit", page 4/59.
Application
The contactors are suitable for switching and controlling DC motors as well as all other DC circuits.
Auxiliary contacts
A version with an especially large actuating voltage is available

for operation in electrically driven vehicles and in switchgear
with a particularly large coil operating range (see page 4/55).

blocks each with 1 NO + 1 NC contact. On the contactors 3TC48
to 3TC56 with AC operation, a second auxiliary switch block can
be mounted on the right and left. On contactors with DC operation, expansion of the auxiliary contacts is not possible.
Type
3TC4 and 3TC7
3TC5

690

10
10
24 V
110 V
125 V
220 V
230 V
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
6
5.6
10
10
10
6
5.6
380 V
400 V
500 V
660 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
A
4
3.6
2.5
2.5
--
4
3.6
2.5
2.5
--
24 V
60 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
3.2
2.5
10
10
8
6
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
0.9
0.33
0.22
2
0.6
0.4
24 V
48 V
110 V
125 V
A
A
A
A
10
5
1.14
0.98
10
5
2.4
2.1
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
0.48
0.13
0.07
1.1
0.32
0.21
AC load
DC load

Type
3TC44 ... 3TC56

Rated voltage, max.
Switching capacity
4/56
Siemens IC 10 2014
V AC
600
A 600, P 600
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Type
3TC44 ... 3TC78
10 7
8
6
4
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
10 6
8
6
4
2
10
8
6
4
16
14
12
10
8
10 4
8
6
4
4
2
2
10
NSB0_00656
20
Mill.
18
NSB0_00655
0,5
50
10
20
40
100
200
400
600
a (A)
1000
3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors
100
150
200
250 300
a (A)
400
3TC74 and 3TC78 contactors
Legend for the diagrams:

Contactors
Type
Size
3TC44
2
3TC48
4
3TC52
8
3TC56
12
22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5

Operating cycles
Operating cycles
NSB0_00650c

10 million
1)
800
1 000

Up to 300
Up to 660
Mirror contacts2)

During operation
-25 ... +55
During storage
-50 ... +80

IP00/open, for AC operation, coil assembly IP40

g/ms
7.5/5 and 3.4/10 10/5 and 5/10
12/5 and 5.5/10
12/5 and 5.6/10
50
160
250
400
35
63
80
250

16
10
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
Main circuit
Auxiliary circuit
(Short-circuit current Ik 1 kA)
1)
2)
See the endurance diagram above.

For 3TC44, one NC contact each must be connected in series for the right
and left auxiliary switch block respectively.
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts see page 4/56.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/57
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
Size
12
70 x 85 x 141
70 x 85 x 100
100 x 183 x 180

100 x 183 x 154
135 x 238 x 232

135 x 238 x 200
160 x 279 x 310

160 x 279 x 251
mm
mm
DC operation
AC operation
Type
Control circuit
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

DC operation
- Closing = Closed
10
19
30
86
AC operation, 50 Hz coil
- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
68/0.86
10/0.29
300/0.5
26/0.24
640/0.48
46/0.23
1780/0.3
121/0.22
AC operation, 60 Hz coil
- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
95/0.79
12/0.3
365/0.45
35/0.26
730/0.38
56/0.24
2140/0.3
140/0.29
AC operation, 50/60 Hz coil
- Closing
at 50 Hz/60 Hz
- Closed
at 50 Hz/60 Hz
VA/p.f.
79/73/0.83/0.78
--
--
--
VA/p.f.
11/9/0.28/0.27
--
--
--
Operating times (for 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us)


DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay1)
ms
ms
35 ... 190
10 ... 25
90 ... 380
17 ... 28
120 ... 400

22 ... 35
110 ... 400

40 ... 110
AC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay1)
ms
ms
10 ... 40
5 ... 25
20 ... 50
5 ... 30
20 ... 50
10 ... 30
20 ... 50
10 ... 30
Arcing time
- DC-1
- DC-3/DC-5
ms
ms
20
30
32
75
220
400
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
(at 55 C)
Up to Ue 750 V
mm2
25
95
240
kW
kW
kW
kW
7
14
19.2
24
16.5
33
45
56
48
97
132
165
88
176
240
300
A
A
A
A
32
29
21
7.5
75
75
75
75
220
220
220
170
400
400
400
400
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.5
5
9
9
4
6.5
13
27
38
45
20
41
82
110
110
35
70
140
200
250
With resistive load DC-1
h-1
1 500
1 000
For inductive load DC-3/DC-5
h-1
750
600
--2 x 120
-25 x 4
M10
--2 x 150
-2 x (25 x 3)
M10

Rated power at Ue
( 220 V DC: one conducting path,
> 220 V DC: two conducting paths in series)
At 220 V
440 V
600 V
750 V
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5

(at 55 C)
Rated power at Ue
Up to 220 V
440 V
600 V
750 V
At 110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
750 V
Switching frequency
AC/DC operation
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)

Main conductors:
Solid
Pin-end connector to DIN 46231
Busbars
Terminal screw
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm
2 x (2.5 ... 10)

2 x (1.5 ... 4)
2 x 16
2 x (1 ... 6)
-M5
2 x (6 ... 16)
-2 x 35
-15 x 2.5
M6
Solid
1)
The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks. 3TC44 contactors are not allowed to be fitted with
diodes.
4/58
Siemens IC 10 2014
mm2
mm2
2 x (1 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.75 ... 1.5)
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
3TC74
3TC78
Design
1-pole contactors
2-pole contactors
78 x 352 x 276
160 x 366 x 290
Type
mm
D
Dimensions
W
Operating cycles
30 million
Operating cycles
1)
1 500
kV

630
-25 ... +55
22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5

NSB0_00650c

IP00/open
Main circuit
LV HRC, type 3NA
Auxiliary circuit (short-circuit current Ik 1 kA)
A
A
630
500
16
10
Control circuit
DC operation
At Uc = 24 V
At Uc > 24 V
0.8 ... 1.2 x Us

0.7 ... 1.2 x Us
AC operation
At Uc = 24 V
At Uc > 24 V
0.7 ... 1.15 x Us

0.7 ... 1.14 x Us
DC operation
Closing
= Closed
46
92
AC operation, 50 Hz
Closing
= Closed
VA
p.f.
80
0.95
160
0.95

Operating times
AC and DC operation
- Closing delay
- Opening delay
ms
ms
ms
60 ... 100
20 ... 35
40 ... 70
Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 (at 55 C)
500
500
mm2
2 x 150
2 x 150
At 220 V
440 V
600 V
kW
kW
kW
110
220
300
110
220
300
750 V
1200 V
1500 V
kW
kW
kW
375
---
375
600
750
At 440 V
600 V
750 V
A
A
A
7
13
15
----
800 V
1200 V
1500 V
A
A
A
----
7
13
15
Arcing time at 0.06 ... 4 x Ie
Main circuit
Load rating with DC
Rated power
Critical currents, without arc extinction
2)
Utilization categories DC-3 and DC-5, switching DC motors

A
400
With resistive load DC-1
h-1
750
1 000
For inductive load DC-3/DC-5
h-1
500
500
Permissible rated current for regenerative braking

at 110 ... 600 V
Switching frequency
AC/DC operation
1)
Endurance see page 4/57.

2) See "Selection and Ordering Data", page 4/61.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/59
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Type
3TC74
3TC78
Design
1-pole contactors
2-pole contactors
Main conductors
Screw terminals

Busbars
mm2
mm
2 x ... 150
2 x (30 x 4)
mm2
mm2
1 ... 2.5
0.75 ... 1.5
Solid
3TC44
Size Utilization
category1)
Operational Ratings of
current Ie3) DC motors at
Auxiliary
contacts2)
110 V 220 V 440 V 600 V 750 V Version
3TC48
Rated
DT Screw terminals
control supply
voltage Us
Article No.
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO
NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3TC44 to 3TC56 two-pole contactors

Terminal designations according to EN 50012
A1
A2
1/L1 3/L2
13 21 31 43
2/T1 4/T2 14 22 32 44
DC operation
Screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
2
DC-3, DC-5 32
2.5
24 DC
110 DC
220 DC
}
}
}
3TC4417-0AB4
3TC4417-0AF4
3TC4417-0AM4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
Screw fixing
4
DC-3, DC-5 75
6.5
13
27
38
45
24 DC
110 DC
220 DC
A
A
A
3TC4817-0AB4
3TC4817-0AF4
3TC4817-0AM4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
DC-3, DC-5 2204)
20
41
82
110
110
24 DC
110 DC
220 DC
C
C
C
3TC5217-0AB4
3TC5217-0AF4
3TC5217-0AM4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
12
DC-3, DC-5 400
35
70
140
200
250
24 DC
110 DC
220 DC
C
C
C
3TC5617-0AB4
3TC5617-0AF4
3TC5617-0AM4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
AC operation, 50 Hz
Screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
2
DC-3, DC-5 32
2.5
220/230 AC5)
110 / 110 AC
}
}
3TC4417-0BP0
3TC4417-0BF0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Screw fixing
4
DC-3, DC-5 75
6.5
13
27
38
45
220/230 AC5)
110 AC
A
C
3TC4817-0BP0
3TC4817-0BF0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC-3, DC-5 2204)
20
41
82
110
110
220/230 AC5)
110 AC
A
C
3TC5217-0BP0
3TC5217-0BF0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
12
DC-3, DC-5 400
35
70
140
200
250
220/230 AC5)
110 AC
C
C
3TC5617-0BP0
3TC5617-0BF0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Other rated control supply voltages according to page 4/62 on

request.
1)
Permissible load for DC-1 utilization category see detailed technical specifications in the reference manual "Contactors and Contactor Assemblies".
2) The fitting of auxiliary switches cannot be altered on DC-operated contactors.
4/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
3)
The following rated operational currents are permitted for reversing duty
with 3TC44 to 3TC56 contactors:
Contactor Rated operational voltage
110 V, 220 V 440 V
Type
3TC44
32 A
7A
3TC48
75 A
75 A
3TC52
170 A
170 A
3TC56
400 A
400 A
4) At > 600 V: I = 170 A.
e
5)
Operating range at 220 V: 0.85 to 1.15 x Us
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
3TC78
Auxiliary Rated control DT Screw

contacts supply
terminals
2)
voltage Us
Version
Article No.
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
NO NC V
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TC74
Size Utilization Opera- Ratings of
category1) tional
DC motors at
current
Ie
110 V 220 V 440 V 600 V 750 V 1200 V 1500 V
Price
per PU
3TC74 1-pole contactors Operational voltage up to 750 V

DC operation
Terminal designations acc. to EN 50005
A1
1/L1 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
2/T1 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
A2
12
DC-3, DC- 400

5
35
70
140
200
250
--
--
24 DC
110 DC
C
C
3TC7414-0EB
3TC7414-0EF
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
250
--
--
230/220 AC3) C
3TC7414-1CM
1 unit
41B
AC operation, 50 Hz
Z
1/L1 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
~A1
~A2
2/T1 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
12
DC-3, DC- 400

5
35
70
140
200
3TC78 2-pole contactors Operational voltage up to 1500 V

DC operation
A1
1/L1 3/L2 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
2/T1 4/T4 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
A2
12
DC-3, DC- 400

5
35
70
140
200
250
400
500
24 DC
110 DC
C
C
3TC7814-0EB
3TC7814-0EF
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
400
500
230/220 AC3) C
3TC7814-1CM
1 unit
41B
AC operation, 50 Hz
Z
1/L1 3/L2 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
~A1
~A2
2/T1 4/T2 14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
12
DC-3, DC- 400

5
35
70
140
1)
200
250
Permissible load for DC-1 utilization category see detailed technical specifications in the reference manual "Contactors and Contactor Assemblies".
The fitting of auxiliary switches cannot be altered on DC-operated contactors.
3)
Upper operating range limit at 230 V: 1.14 x Us.
2)

Other rated control supply voltages according to page 4/62 on

request.
Spare parts see page 4/64.
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/61
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Options
Contactor type
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52/56
3TC74/78
B0
F0
B0
F0
-F0
---
Rated control
supply voltage Us
AC operation
Solenoid coils for 50 Hz
24 V AC
110 V AC
1)
1)
M2)
--
P0
U0
P0
U0
P0
--
24 V AC
110 V AC
120 V AC
C2
G2
K2
----
----
----
220 V AC
230 V AC
N2
L2
---
---
---
24 V DC
48 V DC
60 V DC
B4
W4
E4
B4
W4
E4
B4
---
B
---
110 V DC
125 V DC
220 V DC
F4
G4
M4
F4
G4
M4
F4
-M4
F
-M
230 V DC
P4
P4
--
--
230/220 V AC
240 V AC
1)
AC operation
Solenoid coils for 50/60 Hz
DC operation
1)
2)
Operating range at 220 V or 380 V: 0.85 to 1.15 Us;

Upper operating range limit at 230 V: 1.14 Us.
Accessories
For contactors
Version
Auxiliary contacts
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Size
Type
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC
Second auxiliary switch blocks (only for AC operation)

4
3TC48
2nd auxiliary switch block, left

1
53 61
3TY6501-1K
1 unit
41B
3TY6501-1L
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1K
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1L
1 unit
41B
3TY7561-1UA00
1 unit
41B
--
54 62
2nd auxiliary switch block, right

1
--
71 83
72 84
8 and 12
3TC52,
3TC56
2nd auxiliary switch block, left

1
53 61
--
54 62
2nd auxiliary switch block, right

1
--
71 83
72 84
Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks

For operation in dusty atmospheres and in solid-state
circuits with rated operational currents
Ie AC-14 and DC-13 of 1 ... 300 mA at 3 ... 60 V
2 and 4
3TC44,
3TC48
2nd auxiliary switch block, left or right

(replacement for 3TY6561-1U, 3TY6561-1V)
Mounting:
1 CO contact
5TY7561-1.
4/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
Left
Right
51
61
52 54
62 64

Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
For contactors
Size
Version
Type

voltage Us
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
24 ... 48 24 ... 70
48 ... 127 70 ... 150
127 ... 240 150 ... 250
240 ... 400 -400 ... 600 --
A
A
A
C
C
3TX7402-3G
3TX7402-3H
3TX7402-3J
3TX7402-3K
3TX7402-3L
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
A
B
A
B
B
3TX7462-3G
3TX7462-3H
3TX7462-3J
3TX7462-3K
3TX7462-3L
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
A
B
A
B
B
3TX7462-3G
3TX7462-3H
3TX7462-3J
3TX7462-3K
3TX7462-3L
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 70 B
70 ... 150 B
150 ... 250 B
3TX7522-3G
3TX7522-3H
3TX7522-3J
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 48 -C
-24 ... 70 B
3TX7462-3R
3TX7522-3R
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
48 ... 127 -A
-70 ... 150 B
3TX7462-3S
3TX7522-3S
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
127 ... 240 -A

-150 ... 250 B
3TX7462-3T
3TX7522-3T
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
240 ... 400 -400 ... 600 --
A
B
3TX7462-3U
3TX7462-3V
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
B
B
B
B
B
3TX7522-3R
3TX7522-3S
3TX7522-3T
3TX7522-3U
3TX7522-3V
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 250 A
3TX7462-3D
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TX6506-3B
1 unit
41B
3TX6546-3B
1 unit
41B
V AC
Price
per PU
V DC
3TC441) Varistors2)
With line spacer, for
mounting onto the coil
terminal
3TC48
24 ... 48 24 ... 70
Varistors2)
For sticking onto the con48 ... 127 70 ... 150
tactor base or for mounting 127 ... 240 150 ... 250
separately
240 ... 400 -400 ... 600 --
8 and
12
3TC52,
3TC56
Varistors
For sticking onto the
contactor base or for
mounting separately
8 and
12
3TC52,
3TC56
Varistors2)
-For separate screw fixing or -snapping onto TH 35
-standard mounting rail
3TX7402-3.
3TX7462-3.
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
------
3TX7522-3.
Surge suppressors RC elements

4
3TX7462-3.,
3TX7522-3.
8 and
12
3TC48
3TC52,
3TC56
RC elements
RC elements
------
Surge suppressors Diodes

4 to 12
3TC48,
3TC52,
3TC56
Diode assemblies3)
-(diode and Zener diode) for
DC solenoid system, for
sticking onto the contactor
base or for mounting
separately
3TX7462-3.
1)
The connection piece for mounting the surge suppressor must be bent
slightly.
2)
3) Not for DC economy circuit.
For contactors
Size
Type
3TC48
8 and
12
3TC52,
3TC56
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Terminal covers
For protection against inadvertent contact with M6 B
exposed busbar connections
M10 B
Can be screwed on free screw end.
Covers one busbar connection
(1 set = 6 units).
3TX6526-3B

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/63
Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
Spare parts
For contactors
Version
Auxiliary contacts
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Size
Type
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC

Left
For mounting on the side

2 and 4
3TC44,
3TC48
8 and 12
3TC52,
3TC56
Right

(replacement for 3TY6501-1A/-1B)
1
13 21
31 43
14 22
32 44
Auxiliary switch block, left

1
13 21
3TY6501-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1A
1 unit
41B
3TY6561-1B
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
--
14 22
Auxiliary switch block, right
3TY6561-1A
--
31 43
32 44
For contactors
Size
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Type

only original replacement contacts should be used.
2
4
8
12
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
(1 set = 2 moving and 4 fixed switching

elements)
B
B
B
C
3TY2440-0A
3TY2480-0A
3TY2520-0A
3TY2560-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
2
4
8
12
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
Arc chutes, 2-pole
C
C
C
C
3TY2442-0A
3TY2482-0A
3TY2522-0A
3TY2562-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
3TY2520-0A
Arc chutes
3TY2482-0A
Solenoid coils
DC operation1)
2
4
8
12
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
3TY6443-0B..
3TY6483-0B..
3TY6523-0B..
3TY6563-0B..
AC operation1)
2
4
8
12
1)
3TC44
3TC48
3TC52
3TC56
3TY7403-0A..
3TY6483-0A..
3TY6523-0A..
3TY6566-0A..
Rated control supply voltages see table, page 4/62.

The 10th and 11th digit of the Article No. must be supplemented
accordingly.
4/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3TC contactors,
1- and 2-pole, 32 ... 400 A
For
contactors
Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Type
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

4 NO + 4 NC
3TY2741-2J
1 unit
41B
3TC78
Auxiliary switch block left,

with 2 NO + 2 NC
3TY2781-2C
1 unit
41B
Auxiliary switch block right,

with 2 NO + 2 NC
3TY2781-2D
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TC74
For
contactors
Version
Type
Rated control
supply voltage Us
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC/DC

3TC7
For sticking onto the contactor base
24
110
C
C
3TX2746-2F
3TX2746-2G
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Main contacts (1 set)
--
3TY2740-0E
1 unit
41B
--
3TY2742-0C
1 unit
41B

3TC7
Arc chutes
3TC7
For 3TC78:

Siemens IC 10 2014
4/65
Siemens AG 2013
Power Relays/Miniature Contactors

3TG10 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Overview
Application
Because they are hum-free they are suitable for use in household appliances and distribution boards in office and residential
areas. They can also be used for applications where there is little
space such as air conditioners, heating systems, pumps and
fans, i.e. for simple electrical controls.
Version
The 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors with 4 main contacts are available with screw terminals or 6.3 mm 0.8 mm flat
connectors. The versions with screw terminals are suitable for
use in any climate and finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Standards
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1
Surge suppression
Overload and short-circuit protection
The 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors have an

integrated protective circuit against opening surges.
The 3UA7 overload relay can be used for overload protection.

This applies to mounting onto contactors and to stand-alone
installation.
Type
3TG10
With 3UA7 overload relay mounted below
mm
36 x 56 x 56
mm
45 x 100 x 62
The 3TG10 miniature contactors are characterized by their width

of only 36 mm.

Endurance
Mechanical
Electrical
- AC-1 at Ie
- AC-3 at Ie
Operating cycles
3 million
Operating cycles
Operating cycles
0.1 million
0.4 million
400
kV
Protective separation
between coil and contacts acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
Up to 300

During operation1)
During storage
C
C
-25 ... + 55
-50 ... + 80
IP00, drive system IP20
Degree of protection according to IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60529
A
A
25
10
Miniature circuit breakers, C characteristic
10
Control circuit
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

AC operation, 45 ... 450 Hz
- P.f.
DC operation
VA
W
4.4
0.9 (hum-free)
4
Rated operational current Ie up to 400 V at 55 C1)
20 for screw terminals, 16 for flat connector
Rated power Ue for AC loads with p.f. = 1, 230/220 V

For screw terminals
For flat connector
kW
kW
7.5 (13 at 400 V)

6 (10 at 400 V)
Minimum conductor cross-section for load with Ie
mm2
2.5

Operational current for AC-3 at 400 V rated value
8.4
kW
Load rating with AC


with 50 and 60 Hz and at 400 V
Utilization category AC-5a (permissible nominal impedance: 0.5 )
Switching of gas discharge lamps
Per main current path at 230 V, 50 Hz
Rated power/rated operational current per lamp
Uncorrected
18 W
36 W
58 W
0.37 A
0.43 A
0.67 A
DUO switching
18 W
36 W
58 W
2 x 0.11 A
2 x 0.21 A
2 x 0.32 A
1)
If the three main current paths carry a load of 20 A, the following applies if
I > 10 A in the fourth conducting path: Permissible ambient temperature 40 C.
4/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
43
37
24
2 x 81
2 x 42
2 x 28
Siemens AG 2013

3TG10 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW
Type
3TG10
Load rating with AC
Connection
Rated power
per lamp
Capacitor
capacitance
Rated operational current

per lamp
Shunt compensation
L18 W
L36 W
L58 W
4.5 F
4.5 F
7 F
0.11 A
0.21 A
0.32 A
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
15
15
10
With ECG (single lamp)
L18 W
L36 W
L58 W
6.8 F
6.8 F
10 F
0.10 A
0.18 A
0.27 A
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
39
39
26
With ECG (two lamps)
L18 W
L36 W
L58 W
10 F
10 F
22 F
0.18 A
0.35 A
0.52 A
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
2 x 26
2 x 26
2 x 12
kW
1.6
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps

Per main current path at 230 V, 50 Hz
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction or ECG

Per main current path 230 V, 50 Hz
Load rating with DC

- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
6
2
0.8
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
16
6
1.6
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
18
18
16
6
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
20
20
20
20
- 1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
10
0.5
0.15
0
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
5
0.35
0
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
16
16
10
1.75
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
220/240 V
A
A
A
A
18
16
10
2
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5

Screw terminals
Terminal screws
Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228 Form A/D/C)
Solid
mm2
mm2
M3
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2 x (1 ... 2.5), 1 x 4
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA2908-1A) or Pozidriv 2
Permissible opening tool (screwdriver)
Flat connectors
Finely stranded 6.3 mm plug-in sleeve acc. to DIN 46245/46247
- 6.3 ... 1
- 6.3 ... 2.5
mm2
mm2
0.5 ... 1
1 ... 2.5
600
20
s and u rating (screw terminals)

AC

Open and enclosed
Single-phase/Three-phase

at 60 Hz
At 115 V
200 V
230 V
460 ... 600 V
hp
hp
hp
hp
0.5/ -1/ 3
1.5/ 3
0/ 5
Siemens IC 10 2014
4/67
Siemens AG 2013

3TG10 contactors,
4-pole, 4 kW

Rated data
Utilization category
Main
Rated control DT Article No.
contacts supply
voltage Us
AC-1
Switching of resistive
loads at 55 C
AC-2 and AC-3
OperaPower of AC
tional
loads at 50 Hz
current Ie and 400 V
up to
400 V
OperaPower of AC Version
tional
loads at 50 Hz
current Ie and 400 V
up to
400 V1)
kW
kW
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
NO NC V
4-pole Hum-free With screw terminals

Auxiliary contacts 1 NO,
Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
Auxiliary contacts 1 NC,

Ident. No. 01E
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22
Screw terminals

20
3TG10 . .-0. . .
13
8.4
--
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
B
B
3TG1010-0AC2
3TG1010-0AG2
3TG1010-0AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
}
}
}
3TG1001-0AC2
3TG1001-0AG2
3TG1001-0AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
4
3
-1
24 DC
24 DC
B
}
3TG1010-0BB4
3TG1001-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
DC operation
20
13
8.4
4-pole Hum-free With flat connectors 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm

Auxiliary contacts 1 NO,
Ident. No. 10
A1(+)
A2()
Auxiliary contacts 1 NC,

Ident. No. 01E
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13
A1(+)
A2()
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 14
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 21
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 22

16
10
8.4
Flat connectors
4
--
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
B
D
B
3TG1010-1AC2
3TG1010-1AG2
3TG1010-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
24 AC
110 AC
230 AC
D
D
B
3TG1001-1AC2
3TG1001-1AG2
3TG1001-1AL2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
4
3
-1
24 DC
24 DC
B
B
3TG1010-1BB4
3TG1001-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
DC operation
16
3TG10. .-1. . .
1)
10
8.4
8.4
4
4
The rated operational currents apply to each pole.
Accessories
Max. rated operational currents Ie/AC-1
(at 55 C) of the contactors
Max. conductor
cross-sections
Type
mm2
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Links for paralleling (insulated star jumpers)

3-pole, without connection terminal1)2)
16
--
3RT1916-4BA31
1 unit
41B
25
3RT1916-4BB31
1 unit
41B
25
3RT1916-4BB41
1 unit
41B

40
40
1)

The rated operational currents apply to each pole.
1)
Replacement for 3TX4490-2C.

Replacement for 3TX4490-2A.
3)
Replacement for 3TX4490-2B.
2)
4/68
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Price groups
PG 41A, 41B, 41H, 4N1
5/4
5/15
5/16
5/24
5/32
5/35
5/37
Introduction
Contactor relays
SIRIUS 3RH2 contactor relays,
4- and 8-pole
SIRIUS 3RH24 latched contactor relays,
4-pole
3TH4 contactor relays,
8- and 10-pole
4- and 8-pole
Coupling contactors
SIRIUS 3RH21 coupling contactors for
switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
Contactors with extended
operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 Us
5/53
Coupling relays
3TX7 coupling relays, narrow design
Relay couplers
Relay couplers with plug-in design
Semiconductor couplers
SIRIUS 3RS18 coupling relays
with industrial enclosure
Relay couplers
Coupling relays with
LZS/LZX plug-in relays
Plug-in relay couplers
Ch.4
Power relays/Miniature contactors

3TG10 contactors, 4-pole, 4 kW
5/39
5/44
5/47
5/51
Notes:
3RH1 contactor relays can be found
IC 10 AO 2014 in the DVD box IC 01
IC 10 AO 2014 at the Information
and Download Center
Conversion tool
e.g. from 3RH11 to 3RH21 see
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
5/2
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Overview
The advantages at a glance
Size
Type
S00
3RH21
S00
3RH22
3TH42
3TH43
3TH2
Article No.
Page
3RH21
5/10, 5/11
8-pole
3RH22
5/10, 5/11
4-pole, latched
3RH24
5/15
3RH2 contactor relays

Screw terminals, spring-type terminals and
ring terminal lug connections
4-pole
Coupling contactors
Coils for control by PLC
3RH21
5/32
Contactor relays
Coils with extended voltage range
3RH21
5/35
Screw terminals
3TH42
5/20
3TH43
5/21
Coils with extended voltage range
3TH42
5/37
4-pole
Screw terminals, flat connectors and solder pin connections
3TH20
5/28
8-pole
Screw terminals
3TH22
5/28
4-pole, latched
Screw terminals
3TH27
5/28
On front
3RH2911
5/12
Lateral
3RH2911
Chapter 3
Delayed, on front
3RA28
Chapter 3
Timing relay blocks
On front
3RA281.
Chapter 3
Surge suppressors
On front
3RT2916
5/13
On front
3RT2916
5/13

8-pole
10-pole
Contactor relays for
railway applications
Accessories for 3RH2 contactor relays

Note:
Safety characteristics for contactors see Chapter 16,
"Appendix" "Standards and Approvals" "Overview".
5/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
The advantages at a glance
Type
3TX7002
3TX7014
3RS18
LZS/LZX
3TG10
Article No.
Page
Width 11.5 mm (1 NO), 17.5 mm (1 CO) or

22.5 mm (2 NO, 2 CO)
3TX7002,
3TX7003
5/39
Width 6.2 mm (1 NO, 1 CO) or

12.5 mm (1 CO)
3TX7004,
3TX7005
Relay couplers
Coupling links, narrow design
Output coupling links

Input coupling links with hard gold-plating
Plug-in base couplers, complete with relay
Width 6.2 mm (1 NO, 1 CO)

Relays, replaceable
3TX7014-1..00;
3TX7015-1..00
5/44
Plug-in base couplers, complete with relay

and hard gold-plating
Width 6.2 mm (1 CO)
3TX7014-1..02;
3TX7015-1..02
5/44
Output 1 semiconductor, triac or transistor,

width 6.2, 11.5 and 12.5 mm
3TX7002,
3TX7004,
3TX7005
5/47
Protective separation up to 300 V between

contacts and relay circuits
1, 2 or 3 changeover contacts
Hard gold-plated contacts in combination
and wide voltage range versions
3RS18
5/51
Plug-in relay couplers with 2, 3 and 4 changeover

contacts
Switching capacity 12 A/10 A/6 A

Width 27 mm
Base with or without logical separation
LZS/LZX:PT
5/53
Plug-in relay couplers with 3 changeover contacts and

circular base
Switching capacity 10 A
11-pole circular base
Width 38 mm
LZS/LZX:MT
5/59
Plug-in relay couplers with 1 or 2 changeover contacts
Switching capacity 16 A/8 A

Width 15.5 mm
Base with or without logical separation
LZS/LZX:RT
5/60
Switching capacity 20 A (AC-1) or

8.4 A (AC-2, AC-3)
4-pole, hum-free
Width 36 mm
3TG10
Ch. 4
Coupling relays in industrial enclosure

Relay couplers
Coupling relays with plug-in relays
Miniature contactors (power relays)

With screw and flat connectors
Connection methods
The contactor relays and the relays are available with screw
terminals (box terminals) or with spring-type terminals.
Screw terminals
Devices of the 3TH2 series are also available for connection with
The plug-in bases for LZS/LZX coupling relays are also available
with plug-in terminals.
Flat connectors
As an option the devices of the 3RH2 series are also available

for connection with ring terminal lugs, particularly versions for
North America and Japan.

Plug-in terminals
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/3
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Overview
Contactor relays and coupling relays
Size S00 with accessories
10
1
11
11
10
2
6
12
7
NSB0_02058
11
8
13
9
1 Contactor relay
2 Coupling relay for auxiliary circuits
3 Solid-state timing relay block
4 1-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the top
5 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the top
6 1-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the bottom
7 2-pole auxiliary switch block, cable entry from the bottom

8 4-pole auxiliary switch block
9 2-pole auxiliary switch block, solid-state compatible version
(terminal designations according to EN 50005)
10 Solder pin adapter for contactor relays with 4-pole auxiliary switch block
11 Solder pin adapter for contactor and coupling relays
12 Additional load module for increasing the permissible residual current
13 Surge suppressor with LED
14 Surge suppressor without LED
5/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
14
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1,
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
The 3RH21 contactor relays can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of snap-on auxiliary switch blocks.
The 3RH2 contactor relays have screw, ring terminal lug or

spring-type terminals. The basic unit contains four contacts with
terminal designations according to EN 50011.
The 3RH2 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate.
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The devices with
ring terminal lug connection comply with degree of protection
IP20 when fitted with the related terminal cover.
The auxiliary switch block can easily be snapped onto the front
of the contactor relays. The auxiliary switch block has a centrally
positioned release lever for disassembly.
Auxiliary switches according to EN 50011
Contact reliability
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for
solid-state circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.
Surge suppression
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all 3RH2
contactor relays from the front for damping opening surges in
the coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding device.
Note:
In addition, fully mounted 3RH22 8-pole contactor relays are

available; the mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block is not removable. These versions are built according to special Swiss
regulations SUVA and are distinguished externally by a red
labeling plate.
Auxiliary switches according to EN 50005
All contactor relays with the identification numbers 40E, 31E and
22E can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks to obtain contactor relays with 5 to 8 contacts. The permissible combinations
and the resulting identification numbers can be found in the selection tables in Chapter 3, pages 3/48 to 3/52.
Of the auxiliary contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible
on the device, no more than four NC contacts are permitted.
Accessories
Manuals
The accessories for the 3RT2 contactors in size S00 can also be
used for the 3RH2 contactor relays (see pages 5/13 and 5/14
and also Chapter 3).

Manual "SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RT2 Contactors/
Contactor Assemblies",
Article No. scheme

Digit of the article No.

@@@
SIRIUS contactor relays
3RH
2nd generation
2
@
Device type (e.g. 1 = 4-pole contactor relay, 2 = 8-pole contactor relay)
Number of NO contacts (e.g. 2 = 2 NO)
Number of NC contacts (e.g. 2 = 2 NC)

Rated control supply voltage (e.g. P0 = 230 V, 50 Hz)
No significance
Special version
Example
13th 14th 15th 16th
3RH
Note:
The article No. scheme is presented here merely for information
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/5
The 3RH2911.GA .. auxiliary switch blocks are available for terminal designations according to EN 50011 or IEC 60947-5-1
(see page 5/12). They are coded, and therefore cannot be combined with contactor relays with identification numbers 31E
or 22E.
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3RH2
Size
S00
The contactor relays are designed for operation on a

360
22,5 22,5
NSB0_00478c
NSB0_00477a

(3RH2122-2K.40 coupling relays and contactor relays with extended
operating range on request)
3RH22:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between
the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (permanently
mounted) according to:
ZH 1/457
IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix L
Explanations:
There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and
NO contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
ZH1/457
Safety Rules for Controls on Power-Operated Metalworking Presses.
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear, Special requirements for positivelydriven contacts
Note:
3RH2911-.NF. solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks have no
positively-driven contacts.
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to IEC 60947-5-4
Frequency of contact faults <10-8 i.e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating
cycles
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and

DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is
assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid
valves are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the
load circuits are necessary, e.g. in the form of RC elements and freewheel diodes.
3RH21/3RH22 contactor relays1)

3RH24 latched contactor relays
3RH2911 auxiliary switch blocks1)
Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front,
max. 4-pole and for mounting onto the side in size S00
30
NSB0_02061b
Basic unit
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays

3RH2:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between
the basic unit and the front-mounted auxiliary switch block (removable)
according to:
ZH 1/457
10
5
4
3
2
1
DC-13
220 V
Basic unit with

attachable
contact block
DC-13
110 V
AC-15/AC-14
Basic unit with
attachable
contact block
0,5
DC-13
24V
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01
0,03 0,05 0,1
0,3 0,5
-DC-13 e -DC-13
220 V
110 V
e
Diagram legend:
1)
3RH22, 3RH2911: Ie = 6 A for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13.
5/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
3 4 5 6 7 10
e -DC-13
24 V
(A)
-AC-15
< 230 V
e
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
3RH21
3RH22
3RH24
Size
S00
S00
S00
mm
45 x 57.5 x 73
--
90 x 57.5 x 73
mm
45 x 57.5 x 116
45 x 57.5 x 116
--
Type
Dimensions (W x H x D) with screw terminals

Basic units
5 million
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary switch block
5 million
690
kV
Protective separation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit
400
C
C
-25 ... +60

-55 ... +80

During operation
During storage
IP20
Finger-safe
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
7.3/5 and 4.7/10

10/5 and 5/10
Sine pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
11.4/5 and 7.3/10

15/5 and 8/10
Short-circuit test with fuse links of operational class gG:

10
Test with miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

with short-circuit current Ik = 400 A acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
Auxiliary conductors and coil terminals
Screw terminals
Solid or stranded
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1), max. 2 x 4

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (20 ... 16)1), 2 x (18 ... 14)1)
Terminal screw
- Tightening torque
Nm
M3 (for Pozidriv size 2, 5 ... 6 mm)

0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals2)

Operating devices3)
mm
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 12)
Operating devices3)
mm
3.0 x 0.5; 3.5 x 0.5
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
Solid or stranded
Auxiliary conductors for front and laterally mounted auxiliary switches2)

Solid or stranded
Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals

Terminal screw
Tightening torque
d3
d2
mm
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Nm
5 ... 6
mm
0.8 ... 1.2
mm
d2 = min. 3.2
mm
d3 = max. 7.5
I201_12740
Operating devices
1)

2)
Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.
An insulation stop must be used for spring-type terminals with conductor
cross-sections 1 mm2; see "Accessories", page 5/14.
3)
Tool for opening the spring-type terminals;
see "Accessories", page 5/14.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/7
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3RH2.
Size
S00
Control circuit
AC operation
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
DC operation
At 50 C
At +60 C
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

AC operation, 50 Hz
- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
37/0.8
5.7/0.25
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
33/0.75
4.4/0.25
4.0
AC operation, 60 Hz
- Closing
- Closed
DC operation
closing = closed
(with 0 signal)
For AC operation1)
For DC operation
< 4 mA x (230 V/Us)

< 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times2)
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
operating range
AC operation
Closing
- ON-delay of NO contact
- OFF-delay of NC contact
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
3RH24 minimum operating time
ms
ms
ms
8 ... 33
9 ... 22
35
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
6 ... 25
6.5 ... 19
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
ms
4 ... 15
4.5 ... 15
30
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
5 ... 15
5 ... 15
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
ms
30 ... 100
35 ... 50
100
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
25 ... 90
30 ... 45
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
ms
7 ... 13
7 ... 12
30
With 0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

With 1.0 x Us
ms
ms
13 ... 19
13 ... 18
ms
10 ... 15
Opening
- OFF-delay of NO contact
- ON-delay of NC contact
DC operation
Closing
- ON-delay of NO contact
- OFF-delay of NC contact
Opening
- OFF-delay of NO contact
- ON-delay of NC contact
Arcing time

z = z Ie/I (Ue/U)1.5 1/h
1)
2)
The 3RT2916-1GA00 additional load module is recommended

for higher residual currents; (see page 5/13).
(noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
5/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3RH2.
Size
S00
Load side
Load rating with AC
AC-12
10
Up to 230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
A
A
A
A
101)
3
2
1
1 conducting path
24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
6
3
1
0.3
0.15
2 conducting paths in series
24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
4
2
1.3
0.65
24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
3.6
2.5
1.8
1 conducting path
24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
101)
2
1
0.3
0.14
0.1
24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
3.5
1.3
0.9
0.2
0.1
24 V
60 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
4.7
3
1.2
0.5
0.26
h-1
h-1
h-1
1 000
1 000
1 000
h-1
10 000
V AC
max. 600
Rated voltage
V AC
600
AC-15/AC-14 for rated operational voltage Us
Load rating with DC

DC-12 for rated operational voltage Us
DC-13 for rated operational voltage Us
Switching frequency
For rated operation
For utilization category
AC-12/DC-12
AC-15/AC-14
DC-13

z = z Ie/I (Ue/U)1.5 1/h
s and u rated data

Basic units and auxiliary switch blocks
Switching capacity
1)
A 600, Q 600
A
10
3RH22, 3RH29: Ie = 6 A for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/9
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole

AC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41A
Size S00
3RH2122-1A . .0
3RH2122-2A . .0
Rated operational current Contacts

Ie/AC-15/AC-14
Ident. No. Version
at 230 V
3RH2244-1A . .0
Article No.
NO
NC
3RH2244-2A . .0
DT Screw terminals1)
Rated control
supply voltage Us
at 50/60 Hz2)
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
V AC

4 NO, Ident. No. 40E
A1(+)
A2()
10
3 NO + 1 NC, Ident. No. 31E
13 23 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 24 34 44
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
13 21 31 43
A2()
14 22 34 44
14 22 32 44
40E
--
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RH2140-1AB00
3RH2140-1AF00
3RH2140-1AP00
B
B
}
3RH2140-2AB00
3RH2140-2AF00
3RH2140-2AP00
31E
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RH2131-1AB00
3RH2131-1AF00
3RH2131-1AP00
B
}
}
3RH2131-2AB00
3RH2131-2AF00
3RH2131-2AP00
22E
24
110
230
}
}
}
3RH2122-1AB00
3RH2122-1AF00
3RH2122-1AP00
B
}
}
3RH2122-2AB00
3RH2122-2AF00
3RH2122-2AP00


A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
A2() 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
A2() 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82
44E
230
3RH2244-1AP00
3RH2244-2AP00
62E
230
3RH2262-1AP00
3RH2262-2AP00
1)
The 3RH21/3RH22 contactor relays are also available with ring terminal lug
connection. Please contact your local Siemens representative for information about the special contactor versions with ring terminal lug connection.
2)
at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us.
5/10
Siemens IC 10 2014

Accessories see pages 5/12 to 5/14 and
"Accessories for 3RT2 Contactors", Chapter 3.

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41A
Size S00
3RH2122-2B. .0
3RH2244-1B. .0
Rated operational current Contacts

Ie/AC-15/AC-14
Ident. No. Version
at 230 V
Rated control
supply voltage Us
V DC
NO
NC
3RH2244-2B. .0
DT Screw terminals1)
Article No.
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU

A1(+)
A2()
10
13 23 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 24 34 44
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 22 34 44
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
40E
--
24
220
}
}
3RH2140-1BB40
3RH2140-1BM40
}
B
3RH2140-2BB40
3RH2140-2BM40
31E
24
220
}
A
3RH2131-1BB40
3RH2131-1BM40
}
B
3RH2131-2BB40
3RH2131-2BM40
22E
24
220
}
}
3RH2122-1BB40
3RH2122-1BM40
}
B
3RH2122-2BB40
3RH2122-2BM40


A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
A2() 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
A2() 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82
6
1)
44E
24
3RH2244-1BB40
3RH2244-2BB40
62E
24
3RH2262-1BB40
3RH2262-2BB40
The 3RH21/3RH22 contactor relays are also available with ring terminal lug
connection. Please contact your local Siemens representative for information about the special contactor versions with ring terminal lug connection.


Accessories see pages 5/12 to 5/14 and
"Accessories for 3RT2 Contactors", Chapter 3.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/11
3RH2122-1B. .0
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Options
Contactor type
Rated control
supply voltage Us
3RH21, 3RH22
Contactor type
Rated control
supply voltage Us
Control supply voltage at
AC operation
DC operation
Solenoid coils for 50/60 Hz and 60 Hz

50/60 Hz1)
60 Hz
12 V DC
24 V DC
42 V DC
A4
B4
D4
24 V AC
42 V AC
48 V AC
----
B0
D0
H0
48 V DC
60 V DC
110 V DC
W4
E4
F4
110 V AC
220 V AC
230 V AC
----
F0
N2
P0
125 V DC
220 V DC
230 V DC
G4
M4
P4
400 V AC
--
V0
Solenoid coils for USA and Canada2)
3RH21, 3RH22
50 Hz
60 Hz
110 V AC
220 V AC
120 V AC
240 V AC
Solenoid coils for
K6
P6
Japan3)
50/60 Hz
60 Hz
100 V AC
200 V AC
400 V AC
110 V AC
220 V AC
440 V AC
G6
N6
R6
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us.
2) Coil operating range
at 50 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us.
3)
at 50/60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us.
Accessories
The auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 50011 listed here
should preferably be used for 3RH2 contactor relays.
For auxiliary switch blocks and solid-state compatible auxiliary

switch blocks according to EN 50005 see "Accessories for 3RT2
Contactors", Chapter 3.
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41B
3RH2911-1GA22
For contactor
relays
Contactor relays
with AS block
Auxiliary contacts
Ident. No.
Version
Article No.
Type
NO
3RH2911-2GA22
DT Screw terminals
DT Spring-type
terminals
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC
Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN 50011
Blocks for the assembly of contactor relays with 8 contacts1)
3RH2140,
3RH2440,
Ident. No. 40E
80E
--
53 63 73 83
71E
53 61 73 83
62E
53 61 71 83
53E
53 61 71 81
44E
--
51 61 71 81
3RH2911-1GA40
3RH2911-2GA40
3RH2911-1GA31
3RH2911-2GA31
3RH2911-1GA22
3RH2911-2GA22
3RH2911-1GA13
3RH2911-2GA13
3RH2911-1GA04
3RH2911-2GA04
54 64 74 84
54 62 74 84
54 62 72 84
54 62 72 82
52 62 72 82
1)
The 3RH2911-.GA.. auxiliary switches are also available with ring terminal
lug connection. The 8th digit of the Article No. must be changed from a "1"
to a "4", e.g. 3RH2911-1GA22 3RH2911-4GA22.
5/12
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
More accessory parts see "Accessories for 3RT2 Contactors in
Size S00", Chapter 3.
The following accessory parts are accessories for 3RT2 contactors in size S00, which are also suitable for 3RH2 contactor
relays.
For
Version
contactors
Rated control supply voltage Us1) DT Article No.2)

AC operation
DC operation
Type
V AC
V DC
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG

(also for spring-type terminals)
3RH2.
Varistor
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
}
A
3RT2916-1BB00
3RT2916-1BC00
3RT2916-1BD00
3RT2916-1BE00
3RT2916-1BF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RH2.
RC elements
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
}
}
}
A
A
3RT2916-1CB00
3RT2916-1CC00
3RT2916-1CD00
3RT2916-1CE00
3RT2916-1CF00
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RH2.
Noise suppression diode
--
12 ... 250
3RT2916-1DG00
1 unit
41B
3RH2.
Diode assemblies
(diode and Zener diode) for
DC operation
--
12 ... 250
3RT2916-1EH00
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT2916-1B.00
1)
voltages.
2)
Article No.
For
Version
contactors
Type
Rated control
supply voltage Us1)
AC
operation
DC
operation
Power
consumption P
of the LED
at Us
V AC
V DC
mW
DT Article No.2)
Price
per PU
Surge suppressors with LED

(also for spring-type terminals)
3RH2.
Varistor
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
--
12 ... 24
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
10 ... 120
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
}
}
}
A
3RT2916-1JJ00
3RT2916-1JK00
3RT2916-1JL00
3RT2916-1JP00
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
3RH2.
Noise
suppression
diode
----
24 ... 70
50 ... 150
150 ... 250
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
}
A
}
3RT2916-1LM00
3RT2916-1LN00
3RT2916-1LP00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
3RT2916-1J.00
1)
voltages.
2)
Article No.
For
Version
contactors
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Type

3RH2.

with or without auxiliary switch blocks1)
3RT2916-1GA00
For increasing the permissible residual current and for limiting

the residual voltage. It ensures the safe opening of contactors
with direct control via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs on
SIMATIC controllers. It acts simultaneously as a surge suppressor.
Rated voltage: AC 50/60 Hz, 180 to 255 V.
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
3RT2916-1GA00
1)
For packs of 10 units, "-Z" and order code "X90" must be added to the
Article No.

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/13

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
For contactors
Rated control supply Time setting

voltage Us
range t
Type
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
OFF-delay devices
For contactor relays with DC operation
Non-adjustable delay time
3RH2. . .-1BF40
110 AC/DC
S00: > 0.1
3RT2916-2BK01
1 unit
41B
3RT2916-2BL01
1 unit
41B
3RT2916-2BE01
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
S0: > 0.08

3RH2. . .-1BM40
220/230 AC/DC
S00: > 0.5

S0: > 0.3
3RH2. . .-1BB40
24 DC
S00: > 0.2
S0: > 0.1

3RT2916-2B.01
For technical specifications, see "Accessories for 3RT20

Contactors", Chapter 3.
For contactors
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
3RH2.
For manual operation of the contactor

contacts for start-up and service
3RT2916-4MC00
5 units
41B
3RH2. 1)
Sealable covers
for preventing manual operation
3RT2916-4MA10
5 units
41B
Type
Control kit
3RT2916-4MC00
Sealable covers
Not suitable for coupling relays
3RT2916-4MA10
1)
Exception: contactors and contactor relays auxiliary switch block mounted

onto the front.
Version
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Insulation stop strip can be inserted in cable entry of the
spring-type terminal
(2 strips per contactor required)
3RT2916-4JA02
For basic units S00 (3RT201. or 3RH2.),

removable individually
3RT2916-4JA02
1 20 units
41B
3RA2908-1A
41B

Screwdrivers
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
1 unit
3RA2908-1A
5/14
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
SIRIUS 3RH24 latched contactor relays,
4-pole
Overview
Standards
Control circuit
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both
designed for uninterrupted duty.
The terminal designations comply with EN 50011.
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies can be fitted

to both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the
coil.
Auxiliary switches
The number of auxiliary contacts can be extended by means of
auxiliary switch blocks on the front (up to four contacts).
The contactor relay can also be switched on and released manually. Minimum actuating times, see "Technical Specifications",
page 5/8.
3RH2422-1A. . 0
Rated operational
current
Ie/AC-15/AC-14
at 230 V
Contacts

voltage Us
Ident. No. acc. to Version

EN 50011
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
NO
NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
E1(+) A1+
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1(+) 13 21 33 43
E1(+) A1(+) 13 21 31 43
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44
E2() A2() 14 22 34 44
E2() A2() 14 22 32 44
AC operation
AC 50/60 Hz1)
10
40 E
--
24
110
230
B
B
B
3RH2440-1AB00
3RH2440-1AF00
3RH2440-1AP00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
31 E
24
110
230
B
B
B
3RH2431-1AB00
3RH2431-1AF00
3RH2431-1AP00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
22 E
24
110
230
B
B
B
3RH2422-1AB00
3RH2422-1AF00
3RH2422-1AP00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
40 E
--
24
110
220
B
B
B
3RH2440-1BB40
3RH2440-1BF40
3RH2440-1BM40
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
31 E
24
110
220
B
B
B
3RH2431-1BB40
3RH2431-1BF40
3RH2431-1BM40
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
22 E
24
110
220
B
B
B
3RH2422-1BB40
3RH2422-1BF40
3RH2422-1BM40
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
DC operation
DC
10
1)

at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x Us
at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 Us.

Accessories see pages 5/12 and 5/13.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/15
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
Overview
Standards
Surge suppression
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
The 3TH42 and 3TH43 contactor relays are suitable for use in
any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The 3TH42 and 3TH43 contactor relays can be equipped with

RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) for damping opening surges.
The surge suppressors can be mounted directly on the coil
(see "Accessories", page 5/22).
Note:
In terms of their terminal designations, identification numbers

and identification letters, the 3TH42 and 3TH43 contactor relays
conform to the standard EN 50011 for Specific Contactor Relays.
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC

contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated
Contact reliability
Contactor relays
Type
3TH42, 3TH43

If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves
are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits
are necessary.
RC elements or freewheel diodes are suitable as protective measures for the
circuits.
30
Million operating cycles (106 )
High contact stability at low voltages and currents thanks to the

use of moving double-break contacts, suitable for solid-state
circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.
NSB0_01391a
10
AC-15/AC-14
DC-13
5
4
3
110 V
DC-13
24 V
DC-13
220 V
1
0,5
0,1
0,01
0,03 0,05
0,1
0,3
e DC-13
220 V
0,5
e DC-13
110 V
3 4 5 7 10
e DC-13
24 V
e
AC-15/AC-14
230 V
Diagram legend:
5/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
(A)
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
Type
3TH42
3TH43
mm
45 x 78 x 97
55 x 78 x 97
mm
45 x 78 x 130
55 x 78 x 130
DC operation
AC operation

360
22,5 22,5
DC operation
22,5 22,5
90
90
NSB0_00649a
AC operation
NSB0_00478c
The contactor relays are designed for operation on a


AC and DC operation
NSB0_00477a
Basic units

cycles
V
690
kV

Up to 500
During operation
-25 ... +55
During storage
-55 ... +80

IP20
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
7.7/5 and 4.4/10

9.3/5 and 5.4/10
g/ms
g/ms
12/5 and 6.8/10

14.7/5 and 8.5/10
A
A
A
16
16
20
A
A
16
16
Sine pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
Short-circuit test
- LV HRC, type 3NA
- DIAZED, type 5SB
- NEOZED Type 5SE, quick
with miniature circuit breaker
with short-circuit current Ik = 400 A acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
- C Characteristic
- B Characteristic
s and u rated data

Basic units
Max. 600 V AC, 230 V DC (acc. to UL 240 V DC)
Rated voltage
600 V AC, 600 V DC
Switching capacity
A 600, P 600
Screw terminals
Solid or stranded
Terminal screw
1)
mm2
2
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1)1); 2 x (1 ... 2.5)1); 1 x 4

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
M3.5

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/17
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3TH42, 3TH43
Control circuit
AC operation
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us1)
DC operation (except 24 V)
At 24 V DC
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.8 ... 1.2 x Us
- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
68/0.82
10/0.29

- Closing, 50 Hz
- Closed, 50 Hz
- Closing, 60 Hz
- Closed, 60 Hz
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
77/0.81
11/0.28
71/0.75
9/0.27
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada

- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
68/0.82
10/0.29
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada

- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
75/0.76
9,4/0.29 ... 0.3

- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
80/0.8
10,7/0.29

- Closing
- Closed
VA/p.f.
VA/p.f.
75 ... 90/0.73
8,5 ... 10,7/0.29 ... 0.3
6.2
DC operation up to 250 V
Closing = Closed
8 mA x (220 V/Us)
1.25 mA x (220 V/Us)
For AC operation
For DC operation
Operating times2)
Total break time = OFF-delay + arcing time
(the values apply up to and including 20 % undervoltage, 10 % overvoltage, and with the coil in the cold state and at operating temperature)
AC operation
Closing
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
8 ... 35
6 ... 20
Opening
- OFF-delay NO
- ON-delay NC
ms
ms
4 ... 18
5 ... 30
Arcing time
ms
10
Closing
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
20 ... 170
18 ... 110
Opening
- OFF-delay NO
- ON-delay NC
ms
ms
10 ... 25
15 ... 30
Arcing time
ms
10
Closing
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
10 ... 25
7 ... 20
Opening
- OFF-delay NO
- ON-delay NC
ms
ms
5 ... 18
7 ... 20
Closing
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
30 ... 70
28 ... 65
Opening
- OFF-delay NO
- ON-delay NC
ms
ms
10 ... 20
15 ... 25
DC operation
Operating times2) at 1.0 x Us

AC operation
DC operation
1)
Coils for USA, Canada and Japan: 0.85 ... 1.1 Us at 60 Hz.
2)
5/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3TH42, 3TH43
Load side
Load rating with AC
AC-12
16
A
A
A
A
10
6
4
2
230/220 V
400/380 V
500 V
690/660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
2.4
4
4
4
Up to 48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
10
2.1
0.8
0.6
Up to 48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
1.6
0.8
Up to 48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
1.3
Up to 24 V
48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
5
1
0.45
0.25
0.2
Up to 24 V
48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
2.5
0.75
0.5
0.4
Up to 24 V
48 V
110 V
220 V
440 V
600 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
2
0.9
0.8
AC-12/DC-12
AC-2
AC-3
AC-15/AC-14
DC-13
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
1 000
500
1 000
3 600
3 600
No-load switching
frequency
h-1
10 000
AC-15/AC-14 for rated operational voltage Ue

230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
Rated power of three-phase motors
Acc. to utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3, 50 Hz
Load rating with DC

DC-12, for rated operational voltage Ue
1 conducting path
DC-13, for rated operational voltage Ue

1 conducting path
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z1) in operating cycles/hour
For rated operation
For utilization category
1)
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I' and
operational voltage U': z' = z Ie/I' (Ue/U')1.5 1/h.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/19
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole

8-pole contactor relays
3TH4244-0B. .
Contacts
Number

Ie/AC-15/AC-14
at
230/
220 V
400/
380 V
500 V
690/
660 V
Contacts
DT Screw terminals

EN 50011
NO
Article No.
NC
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
A2( )
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84

A1(+)
13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84
13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82
13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82
AC operation, rated control supply voltage Us = 50 Hz 230/220 V

8
10
14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
3 NO + 3 NC and 1 NO + 1 NC make-before-break,
Ident. No. 44E, U
A1(+)
A2( )
13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
A2( )
13 23 33 47 51 61 71 85
14 24 34 48 52 62 72 86
AC1)
80 E
71 E
62 E
53 E
8
7
6
5
-1
2
3
-----
-----
}
}
}
}
3TH4280-0AP0
3TH4271-0AP0
3TH4262-0AP0
3TH4253-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
41A
44 E
44 E, U
4
3
4
3
-1
-1
}
}
3TH4244-0AP0
3TH4293-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
DC operation, rated control supply voltage Us = 24 V DC

8
1)
10
80 E
71 E
62 E
53 E
8
7
6
5
-1
2
3
-----
-----
}
}
}
}
3TH4280-0BB4
3TH4271-0BB4
3TH4262-0BB4
3TH4253-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
41A
44 E
44 E, U
4
3
4
3
-1
-1
}
}
3TH4244-0BB4
3TH4293-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
Operating range at 220 V: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us;

Note:
The solenoid coils of the 3TH42 contactor relays are available in
various voltages as spare parts (on request).
- AC operation: 3TY7403-0A..
- DC operation: 3TY4803-0B..
The contacts cannot be replaced on 3TH42 contactor relays.
5/20
Siemens IC 10 2014


Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
10-pole contactor relays
3TH4355-0A. .
Ie/AC-15/AC-14
at
Contacts
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
3TH4355-0B. .
DT Screw terminals

EN 50011
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Contacts
Number
NO
NC
NO
NC
A1(+)
A2( )
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 04

A1(+)
A2( )
13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 03
13 23 33 43 53 63 71 83 93 03
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 72 84 94 04
13 23 33 43 53 63 71 81 91 03
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 72 82 92 04
A2( )
13 23 33 43 53 63 71 81 91 01
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44 54 64 72 82 92 02
13 23 37 43 53 63 71 85 91 03
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 38 44 54 64 72 86 92 04
10
13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 91 01
14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 92 02
4 NO + 4 NC and 1 NO + 1 NC make-before-break,
Ident. No. 44E, 11U
AC operation, rated control supply voltage Us = 50 Hz 230/220 V AC

10
14 24 34 44 54 64 72 84 92 04
6 NO + 2 NC and 1 NO + 1 NC
make-before-break, Ident. No. 63E, 11U
A1(+)
13 23 33 43 53 63 71 83 91 03
13 23 37 43 53 61 71 85 91 01
14 24 38 44 54 62 72 86 92 02
1)
100 E
91 E
82 E
73 E
73 E, U
10
9
8
7
6
-1
2
3
2
----1
----1
}
}
}
}
}
3TH4310-0AP0
3TH4391-0AP0
3TH4382-0AP0
3TH4373-0AP0
3TH4346-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
41A
41A
64 E
55 E
55 E, U
6
5
4
4
5
4
--1
--1
}
}
}
3TH4364-0AP0
3TH4355-0AP0
3TH4394-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
DC operation, rated control supply voltage Us = 24 V DC1)

10
1)
10
100 E
91 E
82 E
73 E
73 E, U
10
9
8
7
6
-1
2
3
2
----1
----1
}
}
}
}
}
3TH4310-0BB4
3TH4391-0BB4
3TH4382-0BB4
3TH4373-0BB4
3TH4346-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
41A
41A
64 E
55 E
55 E, U
6
5
4
4
5
4
--1
--1
}
}
}
3TH4364-0BB4
3TH4355-0BB4
3TH4394-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
Operating range at 220 V: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us;

Note:
The solenoid coils of the 3TH43 contactor relays are available in
various voltages as spare parts (on request).
- AC operation: 3TY7403-0A..
- DC operation: 3TY4803-0B..
The contacts cannot be replaced on 3TH43 contactor relays.


Siemens IC 10 2014
5/21
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
Options
Contactor type
Rated control
supply voltage Us
3TH42/3TH43
Contactor type
AC operation
50/60 Hz
Solenoid coils for AC 50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
24 V AC
36 V AC
42 V AC
29 V AC
42 V AC
50 V AC
B0
G0
D0
48 V AC
60 V AC
110 V AC
58 V AC
72 V AC
132 V AC
H0
E0
F0
125/127 V AC
230/220 V AC
240 V AC
150/152 V AC
276 V AC
288 V AC
L0
P01)
U0
400/380 V AC
415 V AC
500 V AC
480/460 V AC
500 V AC
600 V AC
V01)
R0
S0
100-110 V AC
200-220 V AC
G62)
N62)
120 V AC
240 V AC
K62)
P62)
For USA and Canada

110 V AC
220 V AC
1)
Operating range at 220 V or 380 V: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us.
2)
Operating range at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us.
24 V AC
42 V AC
110 V AC
C2
D2
G2
115 V AC
120 V AC
220 V AC
J2
K2
N2
230 V AC
240 V AC
440 V AC
L2
P2
R2
DC operation
For Japan
100 V AC
200 V AC
3TH42/3TH43
Rated control
supply voltage Us
12 V DC
24 V DC
30 V DC
A4
B4
C4
36 V DC
42 V DC
48 V DC
V4
D4
W4
60 V DC
110 V DC
125 V DC
E4
F4
G4
220 V DC
230 V DC
240 V DC
M4
P4
Q4
Accessories
Version

voltage Us
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
AC
DC

with line spacer,
for mounting onto the coil terminal
--
24 ... 250
3TX7402-3A
1 unit
41B
Diode assemblies
(diode and Zener diode) with line spacer,
DC operation,
--
24 ... 250
3TX7402-3D
1 unit
41B
Varistors2)
with line spacer,
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
A
A
A
C
C
3TX7402-3G
3TX7402-3H
3TX7402-3J
3TX7402-3K
3TX7402-3L
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
RC elements
with line spacer,
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
240 ... 400
400 ... 600
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
---
A
A
A
B
C
3TX7402-3R
3TX7402-3S
3TX7402-3T
3TX7402-3U
3TX7402-3V
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
Covers
for switch position indicator
--
--
3TX4210-0P
1 unit
41B
Surge suppressors1) for 3TH4 contactor relays
3TX7402-3.
1)
2)
5/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
8- and 10-pole
For
contactors
Version
Rated control supply Time setting

voltage Us
range
AC 50/60 Hz
(minimum
times)
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Type
220 ... 230
0.1
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
ON-delay devices
3TH42,
3TH43
3TX4180-0A
1 unit
41B
For mounting directly onto contactor coil

without surge suppressor
3TX4090-0C
1 unit
41B
For mounting directly onto contactor coil

with surge suppressor
3TX4090-0D
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
NTC
thermistors
Time tolerance
+100 %, -50 %
3TX4180-0A
Coupling links for control by PLC for 3TH4 contactor relays

Operating range: 17 to 30 V DC
3TX4090
mounted to contactor
For contactors
Type
Rated control
supply voltage Us
50/60 Hz AC
DC
OFF-delay
(minimum times)
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
s
Price
per PU
OFF-delay devices for contactors with DC operation

Bridging of voltage interruptions up to 1.2 sec
3TX4701-0AN1
3TH42..-0BF4
3TH43. .-0BF4
110
--
0.15 or 0.3
3TX4701-0AN1
1 unit
41B
3TH42..-0BM4
3TH43..-0BM4
220
--
0.6 or 1.2
3TX4701-0AN1
1 unit
41B
3TH42..-0BP4
3TH43..-0BP4
230
--
0.6 or 1.2
3TX4701-0AN1
1 unit
41B
3TH42..-0BB4
3TH43..-0BB4
--
24
0.4 or 0.8
3TX4701-0BB4
1 unit
41B

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/23
3TH42,
3TH43
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Overview
Accessories
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
The contactor relays with 4 contacts with screw terminals can be

expanded by up to 4 contacts by adding snap-on auxiliary
switch blocks (see "Accessories", page 5/30).
The 3TH2 contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate.
Contactor relays with screw terminal are finger-safe according to
EN 50274.
The terminal designations are according to EN 50011.
Connections
The 3TH20 contactor relays with 4 auxiliary contacts are available with SIGUT screw terminals, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors, and solder pin connections.
The contactor relays with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors can
be used in the plug-in base with solder pin connections for
printed circuit boards. The contactor relays are coded, and the
plug-in base is codable in order to ensure non-interchangeability.
The 3TH22 contactor relays with 8 integrated contacts are available with screw terminals. The terminal designations are according to EN 50011.
Contact reliability
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, particularly
suitable for solid-state circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage
of 17 V.
3TH27 latched contactor relays
The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both
designed for uninterrupted duty.
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies can be fitted
to both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the
coil.
The contactor relay can also be switched on and released
manually.
A cover (with unit labeling plate) must be removed from the front
of the contactor relay for this purpose. The auxiliary switch block
is then easy to mount. The auxiliary switch blocks can be removed again by unlocking them with a laterally arranged orange
slide.
The contactor relays with screw terminals with 4 contacts according to EN 50011 with the identification number 40E can be
expanded with 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E or 44E auxiliary switch blocks
to a total of 8 contacts according to EN 50011. The identification
numbers 80E, 71E, 62E, 53E or 44E on the coded auxiliary
switch blocks apply to the complete contactors. These auxiliary
switch blocks cannot be combined with contactor relays with
identification number 31E and 33E.
All contactor relays with screw terminals with 4 contacts according to EN 50011, identification number 40E, 31E or 22E, can be
expanded with auxiliary switch blocks with identification number
40, 31, 22, 20, 11 or 02 to a total of 6 or 8 contacts according to
EN 50005. The identification numbers on the auxiliary switch
blocks apply only to the attached auxiliary switch blocks.
Surge suppression
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode for short break times) can be
plugged onto all contactors and auxiliary switch blocks with
screw terminals from the front in order to dampen opening
surges in the coil (see "Accessories", page 5/31).
The unit labeling plate must be removed for this purpose. It can
be snapped onto the attached surge suppressor.
The 3TX4490-1J additional load module (see "Accessories",
page 5/31) can be used by programmable logic controllers to increase permissible residual current, and to limit residual voltage
in semiconductor outputs.
This module ensures the safe shut-down of 3TH2 contactor relays and 3TF2 contactors with direct control via 230 V AC semiconductor outputs. It is accommodated in the same enclosure
as the 3TX4490-3. surge suppressors and can be plugged into
the contactor.
5/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3TH2

30
NSB0_00659
Coupling links
10
5
3
2
1
0,5
Contactor relays
and coupling links
DC-13
220 V
DC-13
110 V
DC-13
24 V
AC-15/AC-14
0,1
0,05
0,01
0,01 0,03 0,05 0,1
0,3 0,5
2 3 4 5 7 10
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking

current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are
switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle
of the supply system.
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or
solenoid valves are present, e.g. magnetic brakes, protective
measures for the load circuits are necessary. RC elements or
freewheel diodes are suitable as protective measures for the
circuits.
Legend for the diagram:
Ie = Rated operational current
(A)
-DC-13 e -DC-13 e-DC-13 e-AC-15/AC-14

110 V
24 V
230 V
220 V
e
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays

3TH20:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (removable) acc. to:
ZH 1/457
3TH22:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (permanently mounted)
according to:
ZH 1/457
SUVA
Explanations:
There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the
NC and NO contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the
metal-working industry.
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear, Control Circuit Devices and
Switching Elements.
Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the "Schweizer Unfallverhtungsanstalt"
(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
Contactor relays
With 3TX4 490 surge suppressor
Type
3TH20..-....
3TH22..-....
3TX4...-..
mm
45 x 48 x 63
45 x 48 x 91
45 x 33 x 28
mm
45 x 48 x 88
45 x 48 x 116
--

AC and DC operation
AC operation
DC operation
Any
cycles
30 million

Screw terminals
V
V
V
690
500
500
500
---
500
---

Screw terminals
kV
kV
kV
6
6
6
6
---
6
---
Up to 300
C
C
-25 ... +55

-55 ... +80

(according to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N)
1)
During operation
During storage
IP00/open
IP20
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
7/5 and 4/10

10/5 and 6/10
Sine pulse
- AC operation
- DC operation
g/ms
g/ms
9/5 and 6/10

13/5 and 8/10
2)
1)

Operating range at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON-period,
the maximum ambient temperature is +40 C.
2)
Conductor cross-sections, see page 5/26.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/25
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3TH2
Short-circuit test
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
Solid or stranded
Terminal screw
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
M3
Flat connectors
Finely stranded
When using a plug-in sleeve
- 6.3 ... 1
- 6,3 ... 2.5
mm2
mm2
0.5 ... 1
1 ... 2.5

(does not apply to plug-in

bases)
mm2
0.8 x 1.2
Control circuit
Solenoid coil operating range1)
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

AC operation, 50 Hz
AC operation, 60 Hz
DC operation
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
Closing = Closed

AC operation
DC operation
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
15
0.41
6.8
0.42
14.4
0.36
6.1
0.46
16.5/13.2
0.43/0.38
8.0/5.4
0.48/0.42
mA
mA
3 x (220 V/Us)
1 x (220 V/Us)

operating range
AC operation
- Closing
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
5 ... 20
4 ... 12
- Opening
OFF-delay NO
ON-delay NC
ms
ms
3 ... 24
3 ... 20
- Closing
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
16 ... 140
13 ... 40
- Opening
OFF-delay NO
ON-delay NC
ms
ms
3 ... 6
4 ... 10
ms
10
DC operation
Arcing time
AC operation
- Closing
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
6 ... 17
5 ... 12
- Opening
OFF-delay NO
ON-delay NC
ms
ms
3 ... 24
5 ... 20
- Closing
ON-delay NO
OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
18 ... 42
15 ... 26
- Opening
OFF-delay NO
ON-delay NC
ms
ms
3 ... 5
4 ... 10
DC operation
1)
Applies to 50/60 Hz coil

Operating range at 60 Hz: 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us;
at 50 Hz, 1.1 x Us, side-by-side mounting and 100 % ON-period,
the maximum ambient temperature is +40 C.
5/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
2)
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Contactor relays
Type
3TH2
Load side
Load rating with AC
10
230/220 V
400/380 V
500 V
690/660 V
A
A
A
A
4
3
2
1
110 V
230/220 V
400/380 V
500 V
690/660 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
0.2
0.55
1.1
1.5
1.5
10
Rated power of three-phase motors

Acc. to utilization category
AC-2 and AC-3

Load rating with DC

Utilization category DC-12
1 conducting path1)
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
240/220 V
A
A
A
A
4
2
1.1
0.5
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
240/220 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
4
2
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
240/220 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
6
2.5
1 conducting path
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
240/220 V
A
A
A
A
2.1
0.9
0.52
0.27
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
240/220 V
A
A
A
A
10
3.5
1.3
0.9
Up to 24 V
60 V
110 V
240/220 V
A
A
A
A
10
4.7
3
1.2
AC-12/DC-12
h-1
1 000
AC-2
AC-3
AC-15/AC-14
DC-13
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
h-1
500
1 000
1 200
1 200
1 0000
Utilization category DC-13

Switching frequency
Rated operation for utilization category
on the operational current I' and
operational voltage U'
z = z (Ie/I ) (400 V/U )1.5 1/h

1)
Contact endurance 0.1 x 106 operating cycles.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/27
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole

Contacts Rated operational current
Ie/AC-15/AC-14
at
Contacts
230/
400/
220 V 380 V
Ident. No.
acc. to
EN 50011
Number
500 V
690/
660 V
DT Screw terminals
Version
NO
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NC
A1(+) 13 23 33 43
A1(+) 13 21 33 43
A1(+) 13 21 31 43
A2( ) 14 24 34 44
A2() 14 22 34 44
A2() 14 22 32 44
AC operation
4
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
A
A
A
3TH2040-0AP0
3TH2031-0AP0
3TH2022-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
A
A
A
3TH2040-0BB4
3TH2031-0BB4
3TH2022-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
DC operation
4
3TH20. .-0A. .
With permanently mounted auxiliary switch blocks

A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
A2( ) 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
A2() 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84
A2() 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81
A1(+) 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
A2() 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82
A2() 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82
AC operation
8
3TH22. .-0A. .
--
80E
71E
62E
8
7
6
0
1
2
C
C
C
3TH2280-0AP0
3TH2271-0AP0
3TH2262-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
53E
44E
5
4
3
4
C
C
3TH2253-0AP0
3TH2244-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
80E
71E
62E
8
7
6
0
1
2
C
C
C
3TH2280-0BB4
3TH2271-0BB4
3TH2262-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
53E
44E
5
4
3
4
C
C
3TH2253-0BB4
3TH2244-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
DC operation
8
--
Latched contactor relays

E1(+) A1+
( ) 13 23 33 43
E1(+) A1(+) 13 21 33 43
E1(+) A1(+) 13 21 31 43
E2(-) A2(-) 14 24 34 44
E2() A2() 14 22 34 44
E2() A2() 14 22 32 44
AC operation
4
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
C
3TH2740-0AP0
3TH2731-0AP0
3TH2722-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
C
3TH2740-0BB4
3TH2731-0BB4
3TH2722-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
DC operation
4
3TH27..
5/28
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 at
Contacts
230/
400/
220 V 380 V
Ident. No.
acc. to
EN 50011
Number
500 V
690/
660 V
DT Flat connectors
Version
NO
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
NC
Contactor relays with 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm flat connectors

A1(+)
A2( )
13 23 33 43
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2( )
14 22 34 44
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
AC operation
3TH20. .-3. . .
For screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting

rail
2
--
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
D
C
3TH2040-3AP0
3TH2031-3AP0
3TH2022-3AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
--
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
C
3TH2040-7AP0
3TH2031-7AP0
3TH2022-7AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
For screw fixing (diagonal)

4
DC operation
For screw fixing and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting
rail
4
3TH20. .-7. . .
--
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
D
3TH2040-3BB4
3TH2031-3BB4
3TH2022-3BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
--
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
D
C
C
3TH2040-7BB4
3TH2031-7BB4
3TH2022-7BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A

4
Contactor relays with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards
A1(+)
A2( )
Solder pin
connections
13 23 33 43
A1(+)
A2( )
14 24 34 44
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2( )
14 22 34 44
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
AC operation
4
--
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
D
3TH2040-6AP0
3TH2031-6AP0
3TH2022-6AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
--
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
C
C
D
3TH2040-6BB4
3TH2031-6BB4
3TH2022-6BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
DC operation
3TH20. .-6. . .

4
Options
Contactor type
3TH20..-0...
3TH20..-3...,
3TH20..-6...,
3TH20..-7...,
3TH22, 3TH27
AC operation
Contactor type
3TH20..-0...
3TH20..-3...,
3TH20..-6...,
3TH20..-7...,
3TH22, 3TH27
B4
F4
M4
B4
---
DC operation

50 Hz
60 Hz
24 V AC
110 V AC
230/220 V AC
29 V AC
132 V AC
276 V AC
B0
F0
P01)
--P01)
24 V DC
110 V DC
220 V DC
1)
Operating range at 220 V or 380 V:


Siemens IC 10 2014
5/29
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
Accessories
Rated operational
current
Ie/AC-15/AC-14 at
Contacts
DT Screw terminals
230/ 400/
500 V Ident. No. Version
220 V 380 V
NO NC
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
NO NC
Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks for 3TH20 contactor relays

For expansion to 8 contacts according to EN 50011
Only for 3TH2040-0... (with 4 NO, Ident. No. 40E)
4
3TX4440-0A
80E
71E
62E
53E
44E
4
3
2
1
--
-1
2
3
4
------
------
}
}
}
}
}
3TX4440-0A
3TX4431-0A
3TX4422-0A
3TX4413-0A
3TX4404-0A
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
41A
41A
41A
For expansion to 6 or 8 contacts according to EN 50005

4
40E
--
--
--
53 63 73 83
3TX4440-2A
1 unit
41A
31E
--
--
54 64 74 84
53 61 73 83
3TX4431-2A
1 unit
41A
22E
--
--
54 62 74 84
53 61 71 83
3TX4422-2A
1 unit
41A
22; 2U
--
--
54 62 72 84
57 67 75 85
3TX4422-2G
1 unit
41A
20E
--
--
--
53 63
3TX4420-2A
1 unit
41A
11E
--
--
54 64
53 61
3TX4411-2A
1 unit
41A
02E
--
--
--
51 61
3TX4402-2A
1 unit
41A
11; U
--
--
52 62
57 65
3TX4411-2G
1 unit
41A
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
58 68 76 86
54 62
58 66
For contactors
Type
Rated control supply voltage Us OFF-delay

(minimum times)
50/60 Hz AC
DC
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
OFF-delay devices for contactors with DC operation

Bridging of voltage interruptions up to 0.8 sec
3TH2. . .-0BB4
--
24
0.25 or 0.5
3TX4490-1H
1 unit
41B
3TH2. . .-0BF4
110
--
0.1 or 0.2
3TX4490-1A
1 unit
41B
3TH2. . .-0BM4,
3TH2. . .-0BP4
220/230
--
0.4 or 0.8
3TX4490-1A
1 unit
41B
3TX4490-1A
5/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
4- and 8-pole
For contactors
Rated control
supply voltage Us
Power consumption
of LED at Us
Type
V AC
mW
V DC
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Surge suppressors1)
Version without LED
RC elements
3TH2. . .-0. . .
3TX4490-3A
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
----
B
B
B
3TX4490-3R
3TX4490-3S
3TX4490-3T
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
240 ... 400

400 ... 600
---
---
B
B
3TX4490-3U
3TX4490-3V
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
----
}
B
B
3TX4490-3G
3TX4490-3H
3TX4490-3J
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
240 ... 400

400 ... 600
---
---
B
B
3TX4490-3K
3TX4490-3L
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
12 ... 250
--
3TX4490-3A
1 unit
41B
24 ... 250
--
3TX4490-3B
1 unit
41B
12 ... 24
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
10 ... 120
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
B
B
B
D
3TX4490-4G
3TX4490-4H
3TX4490-4J
3TX4490-4K
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
24 ... 70
70 ... 150
150 ... 250
20 ... 470
50 ... 700
160 ... 950
B
B
B
3TX4490-4A
3TX4490-4B
3TX4490-4C
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3TX4490-1J
1 unit
41B
3TX4491-2A
5 units
41A
3TX4491-2K
1 unit
41A

3TH2. . .-0. . .
--
Diode assemblies (diode and Zener diode)

3TH2. . .-0. . .
--
Version with LED

Varistors
3TH2. . .-0. . .
24 ... 48
48 ... 127
127 ... 240
--
3TX4490-4G
3TH2. . .-0. . .
----
Additional load modules for 3TH2 contactor relays

For increasing the permissible residual current and for limiting the
residual voltage of SIMATIC semiconductor outputs
3TH2. . .-0A. .
3TX4490-1J
230/220, 50 Hz
-230, 60 Hz
-230, 50/60 Hz
-Operating range 0.8 ... 1.1 Us
Plug-in bases with solder pin connections for printed circuit boards,
width 45 mm
For 3TH2 contactor relays;
with flat connectors 1 x 6.3 mm ... 0.8 mm
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 400 V (at pollution degree 3);
rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 6 kV;
rated operational current Ie: 6 A;
s and U rated data: max. 300 V, 6 A
3TX4491-2A
3TH20. .-3. . .,
3TH20. .-7. . .
Release tools
3TH20. .-7. . .
1)
For releasing contactors from

3TX4491-2A plug-in bases

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/31
Varistors
3TH2. . .-0. . .
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
Coupling Contactors
for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole
Overview
The 3RH21 coupling contactors cannot be extended with
DC operation
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
The 3RH21 coupling contactors for switching auxiliary circuits
are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls.
Coupling contactors have a low power consumption and an

extended solenoid coil operating range.
Depending on the version, solenoid coils are supplied either
without overvoltage damping (versions 3RH21 . .-.HB40 or
3RH21 . .-.MB40-0KT0) or with a diode or suppressor diode
connected as standard.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below

are identical to those of the 3RH21 contactor contactors
(see page 5/6).
Contactor type
3RH21. .-.HB40
3RH21. .-.JB40
3RH21. .-.KB40
Size
S00
S00
S00
With diode
With suppressor diode
38 ... 65
55 ... 75
7 ... 20
20 ... 30
Control circuit
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed
At Us = 17 V
1.4
At Us = 24 V
At Us = 30 V
2.8
4.4

of the electronics for 0 signal
< 10 mA x (24 V/Us)
No overvoltage damping
Operating times
Closing at 17 V
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
40 ... 130
30 ... 80
At 24 V
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
35 ... 60
25 ... 40
At 30 V
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
25 ... 50
15 ... 30
- OFF-delay NO
- ON-delay NC
ms
ms
7 ... 20
20 ... 30
On request
Contactor type
3RH21. .-.MB40-0KT0
3RH21. .-.VB40
3RH21. .-.WB40
Size
S00
S00
S00
Control circuit
0.85 ... 1.85 x Us

(for cold coil)
Closing = Closed at Us = 24 V
1.6

of the electronics for 0 signal
< 8 mA x (24 V/Us)
Diode, varistor or RC element, Built-in diode

attachable
5/32
Siemens IC 10 2014
Built-in suppressor diode
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
Coupling Contactors
Contactor type
3RH21. .-.MB40-0KT0
3RH21. .-.VB40
3RH21. .-.WB40
Size
S00
S00
S00
20 ... 80
30 ... 90
5 ... 20
10 ... 30
Control circuit
Operating times
Closing at 20.5 V
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
30 ... 120
20 ... 110
At 24 V
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
25 ... 90
15 ... 80
At 44 V
- ON-delay NO
- OFF-delay NC
ms
ms
15 ... 60
10 ... 50
- OFF-delay NO
- ON-delay NC
ms
ms
5 ... 20
10 ... 30
On request

DC operation
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41A
3RH21. .-1.B40
Ie/AC-15/ AC-14
at 230 V
Auxiliary contacts
Ident. No. acc. to
EN 50011
DT Screw terminals
Version
Article No.
NO
3RH21. .-2.B40
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
NC

Size S00
Diode, varistor or RC element, attachable
Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (auxiliary switch blocks cannot be mounted)
A1(+)
A2()
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 22 34 44
14 24 34 44

A1(+)
13 21 31 43
A2()
14 22 32 44
Rated control supply voltage Us = 24 V DC,

operating range 0.7 to 1.25 x Us
10
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
B
B
B
3RH2140-1HB40
3RH2131-1HB40
3RH2122-1HB40
B
B
B
3RH2140-2HB40
3RH2131-2HB40
3RH2122-2HB40
-1
2
B
B
B
3RH2140-1MB40-0KT0
3RH2131-1MB40-0KT0
3RH2122-1MB40-0KT0
B
B
B
3RH2140-2MB40-0KT0
3RH2131-2MB40-0KT0
3RH2122-2MB40-0KT0

10
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
For surge suppressors, see page 5/13.

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/33
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
Coupling Contactors
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41A
3RH21. .-1.B40
Auxiliary contacts
Ident. No. acc. to
EN 50011
3RH21. .-2.B40
DT Screw terminals
Version
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU

Ie/AC-15/ AC-14
at 230 V
NO
NC

Size S00
A1(+)
A2()
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 24 34 44

A1(+)
13 21 31 43
A2()
14 22 34 44
14 22 32 44

10
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
B
}
}
3RH2140-1JB40
3RH2131-1JB40
3RH2122-1JB40
B
}
B
3RH2140-2JB40
3RH2131-2JB40
3RH2122-2JB40
-1
2
B
B
B
3RH2140-1VB40
3RH2131-1VB40
3RH2122-1VB40
B
B
B
3RH2140-2VB40
3RH2131-2VB40
3RH2122-2VB40

10
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
With integrated coil circuit (suppressor diode)

A1(+)
A2()
13 23 33 43
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 24 34 44

A1(+)
A2()
14 22 34 44
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44

10
40E
31E
22E
4
3
2
-1
2
B
}
}
3RH2140-1KB40
3RH2131-1KB40
3RH2122-1KB40
B
}
}
3RH2140-2KB40
3RH2131-2KB40
3RH2122-2KB40
-1
2
B
B
B
3RH2140-1SB40
3RH2131-1SB40
3RH2122-1SB40
B
B
B
3RH2140-2SB40
3RH2131-2SB40
3RH2122-2SB40

10
5/34
40E
31E
22E
Siemens IC 10 2014
4
3
2

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
Note:
Overview
An additional auxiliary switch block cannot be mounted.
DC operation
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1

ambient temperatures > 60 C 70 C.
The contactor relays are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The

size S00 contactor relays have spring-type connections for all
terminals.
Contactor relays with series resistor
Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the

contactor relays (across the full solenoid coil operating range) is
-40 to +70 C.
The DC solenoid systems of the contactor relays are modified

The size S00 contactor relays are supplied prewired with a plugon module containing the series resistor. A surge suppressor
(a suppressor diode or varistor as preferred) is integrated.
Uninterrupted duty at temperatures > +60 C reduces the

mechanical endurance, the current carrying capacity of the
The solenoid coils of the contactor relays have an extended coil

operating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard
with surge suppressors. The opening delay is consequently
2 to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
L+
L-
S1
E1+
For operation in installations which are subject both to considerable variations in the control voltage and to high ambient temperatures, e.g. railway applications under extreme climatic conditions, rolling mills, etc.
K1
K1
A2-
13 23 31
14 24 32
Also for control supply voltages with battery buffering to extend

the operating time in the event of battery charge failure.
NSB0_02177
Application
RV
Contactor relays with conventional coil
Circuit diagram (version with suppressor diode)
A 4-pole auxiliary switch block (according to EN 50005) can be

fitted additionally.
These contactor relays have an extended operating range from

0.7 to 1.25 x Us; the solenoid coils are fitted as standard with a
suppressor diode. An additional series resistor is not required.
Side-by-side-side mounting is permissible at ambient temperatures up to 70 C.
Contactor relays
Type
3RH21..

Ambient temperature
During operation
-40 ... +701)
During storage
-55 ... +80
Control circuit
DC
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us


- Closing
- Closed
W
W
13
4
- Closing
- Closed
W
W
2.8
2.8

identical to those of the standard versions; see page 5/4.
1)
3RH21..-.K contactor relays without the suffix -0LA0 are coupling contactor
relays that are certified for the temperature range -25 C to +60 C.
For railway applications, an additional certification approves these contactors with a minimum distance of 10 mm for the extended temperature
range -40 C to +70 C.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/35
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays

DC operation
Solenoid coil with surge suppression
3RH2122-2K.40
Ie/AC-15/AC-14
Tu: 70 C at
230 V
400 V
500 V
Contacts
690 V

voltage Us
3RH2122-2K.40-0LA0
PS*
PG
Version
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
NO
NC
Price
per PU
V DC

Size S00
With conventional coil, fitted with suppressor diode
A1(+)
A2()
10
13 21 31 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 22 32 44
1)
24
110
1)
01)
21)
13 21 33 43
A1(+)
A2()
14 22 34 44
13 23 33 43
14 24 34 44
}
A
3RH2122-2KB40
3RH2122-2KF40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
24
3RH2131-2KB40
1 unit
41A
24
3RH2140-2KB40
1 unit
41A
24
110
B
B
3RH2122-2LB40
3RH2122-2LF40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
12)
24
110
B
B
3RH2122-2KB40-0LA0
3RH2122-2KF40-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
12)
24
110
B
B
3RH2122-2LB40-0LA0
3RH2122-2LF40-0LA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
With conventional coil, fitted with varistor

A1(+)
A2()
10
13 21 31 43
14 22 32 44
With series resistor, fitted with suppressor diode

2 NO + 1 NC, Ident. No. 21X
E1(+)
A2()
10
13 23 31
14 24 32
With series resistor, fitted with varistor

2 NO + 1 NC, Ident. No. 21X
E1(+)
A2()
10
1)
2)
13 23 31
14 24 32
It is not possible to mount an auxiliary switch block.

4-pole auxiliary switch block according to EN 50005 can be mounted.
5/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays
Overview
Application
Standards
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
The contactor relays are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
Terminal covers may have to be fitted onto the connecting bars,
depending on the configuration with other devices.

The solenoid coils of the contactor relays have an extended coil
operating range from 0.7 to 1.25 x Us and are fitted as standard
with varistors to provide protection against overvoltage. The
opening delay is consequently 2 to 5 ms longer than for standard contactors.
Ambient temperature
The permissible ambient temperature for operation of the
contactors (across the full solenoid coil operating range) is
-50 to +70 C. Uninterrupted duty at temperatures < -25 C and
> +55 C reduces the mechanical endurance, the currentcarrying capacity of the conducting paths and the switching
frequency.

ambient temperatures > 55 C. There is no need to reduce the
technical specifications.
Contactor relay
Type
3TH42

During operation
-50 ... +701)
During storage
-55 ... +80
Control circuit
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

Power consumption of the solenoid coils (for cold coil)
0.7 x Us W
1.0 x Us W
1.25 x Us W
(For cold coil: Closing = Closed)
2.6
5.2
8.2

10 mA x (24 V/Us)
DC operation
Operating times
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
Closing
- 0,7 x Us
ON-delay (NO)
OFF-delay (NC)
ms
ms
70 ... 200
28 ... 33
- 1 x Us
ON-delay (NO)
OFF-delay (NC)
ms
ms
45 ... 80
30 ... 34
- 1.25 x Us
ON-delay (NO)
OFF-delay (NC)
ms
ms
40 ... 60
31 ... 35
OFF-delay (NO)
ON-delay (NC)
ms
ms
20 ... 30
22 ... 32
ms
10
Opening
- 0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Arcing time
1)
Side-by-side mounting with 10 mm distance.

identical to those of the standard versions; see page 5/16.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/37
Siemens AG 2013
Contactor Relays

3TH4244-0L. .

Ie/AC-15/AC-14
Number
230 V
400 V
500 V
690 V
Contacts1)
Ident. No.
acc. to
EN 50011

voltage Us
DT Screw terminals
Version
NO
NC
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
V DC
DC operation
A1(+)
A2( )
10
A2( )
10
A2( )
1)
10
62E
24
110
}
}
3TH4244-0LB4
3TH4244-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
}
}
3TH4253-0LB4
3TH4253-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
}
}
3TH4262-0LB4
3TH4262-0LF4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41A
41A
13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81
14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82
53E
A1(+)
14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82
44E
A1(+)
13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
24
110
13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
24
110
Contacts not extendable.
Accessories see page 5/22.
5/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
3TX7 Coupling Relays, Narrow Design
Relay couplers
Overview
The semiconductor couplers have a low power consumption
and are therefore particularly well suited for solid-state systems.
In the coupling links in double-decker design, the connections

are arranged on two levels; these units are extremely compact.
Connection method: Screw terminals or spring-type terminals.
For test purposes, versions are available with manual-0-automatic switches.
I/O devices
110 V AC
230 V AC
Electronic control
24 V DC
Pushbutton Coupling
Position
link
switch
The input and output coupling links differ with regard to the positioning of the terminals and the LEDs. For equipment identification purposes, each coupling link has a blank labeling plate.
24 V DC
Output
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Input
AC and DC operation
Actuators
110 V AC
230 V AC
M
NSB0_00186
Coupling
link
Motor
contactor
Application example: Motor control
Type
3TX7002, 3TX7003
3TX7004, 3TX7005
mm
W x 60 x 62
B x 80 x 85
300
Protective separation1) between coil and contacts

Up to 300 AC
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80
For width B see "Selection and ordering data"

During operation
During storage
Connections
Enclosure
IP20
IP30
Short-circuit test with fuse links of operational class gG
For 3TX7002, 3TX7004:
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
Solid
Terminal screws
- Corresponding opening tool
1 x (0.25 ... 4)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
M3
Screwdriver, size 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm
For 3TX7003, 3TX7005:
mm2
mm2
Solid or finely stranded

1)
1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Screwdriver, size 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA2908-1A)
For 3TX700.-1FB02, no protective separation acc. to IEC 60947-1,

Appendix N.
Type
3TX7002-,
3TX7003-
1AB00 1BB00 1FB02

1AB02
1CB00 2AB00 2AE00
1BF00
2BF02
2AF00
2AF05
Control side
0.8 ... 1.25 x Us
Operating range
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
Power consumption
At Us = 24 V AC/DC
At Us = 230 V AC/DC
W
W
Type
0.75
--
1.2
--
3TX7004, 3TX7005
0.75
--
-1.2
Exception: 3TX7005-...05
Control side
Operating range
At Us = 24 V AC/DC
At Us = 110 V AC/DC and 230 V
- Exception: 3TX7005-1LN00
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us

0.8 ... 1.1 x Us
0.7 ... 1.25 x Us
Power consumption
At Us = 24 V AC/DC
At Us = 230 V AC
At Us = 230 V DC
VA/W
VA
W
0.5
-6
1
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/39
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Relay couplers
Type
3TX7002,
3TX7003
Exception: 3TX7002-1CB00
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie1)
Conventional thermal current Ith

acc. to utilization categories (IEC 60947-5-1)
AC-15
At 24 ... 230 V
DC-13
At 24 V
At 110 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Switching current
for resistive load acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
AC-12
At 24 ... 230 V
DC-12
At 24 V
At 110 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
6
0.2
0.2
AC/DC
24 ... 250
Switching voltage
Min. contact load for 3TX700.-. . .02
1 V AC/DC/0.1 A
Type
3TX7004-1B, -1L,
3TX7005-1L
3TX7004-.M,
3TX7005-.M,
Load side
Rated operational currents Ie1)

AC-15
At 24 ... 230 V
DC-13
At 24 V
At 110 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Switching current for resistive load acc. to IEC 60947-5-1

AC-12
At 24 ... 230 V
DC-12
At 24 V
At 110 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
6
0.3
0.2
V
mA
30
20
17 ... 250
Power limit for hard gold-plating

Voltage
Current
Switching voltage
AC/DC
Min. switching voltage (reliability 1 ppm)

Standard contacts
17 V DC/5 mA
5 V DC/1 mA
1)
Capacitive loads can result in micro-welding on the contacts.
Note:
If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the endurance of the
relay couplers can be increased.
5/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
0.5 x 106
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Relay couplers
Relay couplers circuit diagrams for 3TX7002, 3TX7003
Output/input coupling
links
3TX7002-1AB00
3TX7002-1AB02
3TX7002-2A.00
3TX7002-2AF05
3TX7002-1BB00
3TX7002-1BF00
Input coupling links

3TX7002-1CB00
3TX7002-1FB02
3TX7002-2BF02
3TX7003-1CB00
3TX7003-1BB00
3TX7003-1AB00
A1
13
A1
14
A2 A2
A1 A1
12 14
A2 A2
NSB0_00189
NSB0_00188
13 23
A1
14 24
A2
11
21
NSB0_00192
NSB0_00191a
NSB0_00190
11
A1
12 14 22 24
12 14
A2
A2
11
Relay couplers circuit diagrams for 3TX7004, 3TX7005

3TX700.-1M.00
3TX700.-1BB00
3TX700.-1BF05
3TX700.-1L.0.
A1
A1
14
A1
A1
12
14
A2
13
NSB0_00205
3TX700.-1BB10
12
14
A2
11
A2
A2
NSB0_00207
11
11
NSB0_00208
3TX700.-2M.02
A
0
M
A1
A1
A2
14
12
14
A3
13
NSB0_00213
A2
A2
NSB0_00209
11
11
hGdGh
WGdGG
tGdGt
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/41
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Relay couplers

AC and DC operation for snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
voltage Us
(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
Contacts
Version
NO
Width W
CO
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
Relay coupling links 3TX7002

Screw terminals
3TX7002-1AB00
24 AC/DC
--
11.5
3TX7002-1AB00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
11)
--
11.5
3TX7002-1AB02
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
17.5
3TX7002-1BB00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC3)
--
17.5
3TX7002-1BF00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
22)
--
22.5
3TX7002-1CB00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
21) 2)
22.5
3TX7002-1FB02
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
11.5
3TX7002-2AB00
1 unit
41H
110 AC/DC4)
--
11.5
3TX7002-2AE00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC3)
12)
--
11.5
3TX7002-2AF00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
12)
--
11.5
3TX7002-2AF05
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC3)
--
11)
17.5
3TX7002-2BF02
1 unit
41H
Relay coupling links 3TX7003

Spring-type
terminals
24 AC/DC
--
11.5
3TX7003-1AB00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
17.5
3TX7003-1BB00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
22)
--
22.5
3TX7003-1CB00
1 unit
41H
--
11.5
3TX7003-2AF00
1 unit
41H

230 AC/DC
3TX7003-1BB00
1)
Hard gold-plated contacts.
2)
Different potential up to 300 V permitted; no protective separation.
3)
Observe max. permissible cable length for AC control voltage: 7 m.
4)
Observe max. permissible cable length for AC control voltage: 15 m.
Note:
For coil voltages which are not listed, SITOP DC power supplies
can be used, e.g. 6EP1331-5BA00 or 6EP1331-5BA10;
see Chapter 15, "Stabilized Power Supplies" "SITOP Power
Supplies".
Note:
A clearance of at least 10 mm between the modules or to
adjacent contacts is required for operation with rated voltage
and 100 % ON period over 24 hours a day.
5/42
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Relay couplers
Rated control supply Contacts
voltage Us
Version
(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
NO
Manual-0automatic
switch for
testing
purposes
CO
Width W
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
3TX7004 relay couplers

24 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-1LB00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
12)
Without
6.2
3TX7004-1LB02
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
With
12.5
3TX7004-1BB10
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-1LF00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
--
Without
12.51)
3TX7004-1BF05
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-1MB00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-1MF00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
12)
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-2MB02
1 unit
41H
110 AC/DC
12)
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-2ME02
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
12)
--
Without
6.2
3TX7004-2MF02
1 unit
41H
3TX7005 relay couplers

Spring-type
terminals
3TX7005-2MB02
24 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-1LB00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
12)
Without
6.2
3TX7005-1LB02
1 unit
41H
110 AC/DC3)
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-1LN00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-1LF00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-1MB00
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-1MF00
1 unit
41H
24 AC/DC
12)
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-2MB02
1 unit
41H
230 AC/DC
12)
--
Without
6.2
3TX7005-2MF02
1 unit
41H
1)
For long cables.
2)
3)
Extended operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x US.
Note:
Note:
For replacement products see 3RS18 coupling links with

industrial enclosure or other 3TX70 products.
A clearance of at least 10 mm between the modules or to adjacent contacts is required for operation with rated voltage and
100 % ON period over 24 hours a day.
Supplies".
Accessories
For coupling links
Version
DT Article No.
For linking the same potentials
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3TX7004-8AA00
1 unit
41H
3TX7004-8BA00
1 unit
41H
Type
Connecting comb, blue

3TX7004
24 terminals,
current carrying capacity for infeed
max. 26 A
Width 6.2 mm
3TX7004-8AA00
Connecting cable, blue

3TX7002 and 3TX7004 with
screw terminals
3TX7003 and 3TX7005 with
With supply cable, blue

24 terminals,
max. 12 A
Length of cable between two terminals
approx. 11 cm
3TX7004-8BA00

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/43
3TX7004-1LB0.
Screw terminals
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Overview
Benefits
Plug-in base couplers with spring-type terminals in width
6.2 mm
Fast exchange with existing wiring (plug-in relay)
Tested complete units shorter mounting time
Single relays available as components
The wire inlet and terminals can be reached from the front.
This results in faster wiring time and wiring errors are
prevented.
Linking of control supply voltage and control signals with
16-pole connecting comb
Galvanic isolation plate for isolating different voltages for
neighboring units
Integrated reverse polarity protection and
EMC arc-suppression diode
Clearly visible functional state of the relay coupler by yellow
LED
Protective separation according to IEC 61140
Device variants with hard gold-plated contacts, hence high
contact reliability
230 V AC/DC versions available
Coupling links are used to connect signals from and to a PLC.

The plug-in relays enable the relay to be replaced at the end of
its service life without detaching the wiring.
For easy linking of the signals, each terminal can be jumpered
using an external connecting comb.
Note:
A clearance of at least 10 mm between the modules or to adjacent contacts is required for operation with rated voltage and
100 % ON period over 24 hours a day.
Type
3TX7014, 3TX7015
mm
6.2 x 90 x 92
mm
1 x 89.2 x 94.2
300
between coil and contacts acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N
Up to 300 AC
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +80
Galvanic isolation plate 3TX7014-7CE00

During operation
During storage
Enclosure
Relays
IP20
IP40
For 3TX7014:
Screw terminals
Solid
Finely stranded with or without end sleeve
mm2
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
M2.5
Screwdriver, 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA29 08-1A)
Terminal screws
For 3TX7015:

mm2
2
mm
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
Screwdriver, 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA2908-1A)
Type
3TX701.-1.M
3TX701.-1.B
3TX701.-1.E
3TX701.-1.F
0.85 ... 1.1Us
0,7 ... 1.25 Us
0.8 ... 1.1 Us
0.8 ... 1.1 Us
Control side
Operating range
At Us = 24 V
At Us = 115 V
At Us = 230 V
Protection circuit
DC
AC
5/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
W
W
W
0.5
0.5
1
Freewheel diode + Reverse polarity protection
Rectifier bridge
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Type
3TX7014, 3TX7015
Load side
Rated currents1)
- AC-15
At 24 ... 230 V A
- DC-13
At 24 V A
At 110 V A
At 230 V A

1
0.2
0.1
AC/DC V
Switching voltage
24 ... 250
Min. contact load (reliability 1 ppm)

Standard contact
17 V DC/5 mA
5 V DC/1 mA
Electrical endurance at Ie acc. to AC-15
Note:
If inductive loads are connected in parallel, the endurance of the

relay couplers can be increased.
Connections
1 NO
1 CO contact
3TX7014-1AM00
3TX7015-1AM00
3TX7014-1B .. .
3TX7015-1B .. .
NO
14
(+)A1
COIL
13
COM
COIL NC NO
(-)A2 12 14
IC01_00208
COIL
-A2
13
COM
IC01_00207
+A1
COIL

(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
Contacts
Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
CO
Plug-in base couplers, width 6.2 mm,

complete with relay
24 DC
--
3TX7014-1AM00
5 units
41H
24 DC
--
3TX7014-1BM00
5 units
41H
24 AC/DC
--
3TX7014-1BB00
5 units
41H
115 AC/DC
--
3TX7014-1BE00
5 units
41H
230 AC/DC
--
3TX7014-1BF00
5 units
41H
24 DC
--
3TX7014-1BM02
5 units
41H
24 AC/DC
--
3TX7014-1BB02
5 units
41H
115 AC/DC
--
3TX7014-1BE02
5 units
41H
230 AC/DC
--
3TX7014-1BF02
5 units
41H
3TX7014-1AM00
With hard gold-plated contacts1)
1)
The versions with hard gold-plated contacts feature high contact reliability
(also for low currents) and are therefore especially suitable for solid-state
inputs of programmable logic controllers.

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/45
1)
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
Contacts
Version
DT Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
NO
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
CO
Plug-in base couplers, width 6.2 mm,

complete with relay
24 DC
--
3TX7015-1AM00
5 units
41H
24 DC
--
3TX7015-1BM00
5 units
41H
24 AC/DC
--
3TX7015-1BB00
5 units
41H
115 AC/DC
--
3TX7015-1BE00
5 units
41H
230 AC/DC
--
3TX7015-1BF00
5 units
41H
With hard gold-plated contacts1)
1)
24 DC
--
3TX7015-1BM02
5 units
41H
24 AC/DC
--
3TX7015-1BB02
5 units
41H
115 AC/DC
--
3TX7015-1BE02
5 units
41H
230 AC/DC
--
3TX7015-1BF02
5 units
41H
The versions with hard gold-plated contacts feature high contact reliability
(also for low currents) and are therefore especially suitable for electronic
inputs of programmable logic controllers.
Accessories
For coupling links Rated control supply
voltage Us
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Replacement relay modules, width 6.2 mm, 1 changeover contact

For complete unit
3TX7014 and
3TX7015
12 DC
3TX7014 and
3TX7015
24 DC
3TX7014 and
3TX7015
60 DC
24 V AC/DC
3TX7014-7BQ00
1 20 units
41H
24 V DC,
hard gold-plated
3TX7014-7BQ02
1 20 units
41H
24 V DC
3TX7014-7BM00
1 20 units
41H
24 V DC,
hard gold-plating
3TX7014-7BM02
1 20 units
41H
115 V or 230 V AC/DC
3TX7014-7BP00
1 20 units
41H
115 V or 230 V AC/DC, A

hard gold-plated
3TX7014-7BP02
1 20 units
41H
For linking the same

potentials
3TX7014-7AA00
5 units
41H
3TX7014-7CE00
1 10 units
41H

3TX7014 and
3TX7015
--
16 terminals,
current carrying capacity
for infeed max. 6 A
3TX7014-7AA00
Galvanic isolation plates

3TX7014 and
3TX7015
--
--
3TX7014-7CE00
Assignment of replacement relay modules

Plug-in base couplers
Replacement modules
Standard contacts
Us
Contact
Standard contacts
3TX701.-1AM00
--
24 V DC
1 NO
3TX7014-7BM00
--
3TX701.-1BM00
3TX701.-1BM02
24 V DC
1 CO contact
3TX7014-7BM00
3TX7014-7BM02
3TX701.-1BB00
3TX701.-1BB02
24 V AC/DC
3TX7014-7BQ00
3TX7014-7BQ02
3TX701.-1BE00
3TX701.-1BE02
115 V AC/DC
3TX7014-7BP00
3TX7014-7BP02
3TX701.-1BF00
3TX701.-1BF02
230 V AC/DC
3TX7014-7BP00
3TX7014-7BP02
More information about replacement relay modules

see Product Support:
5/46
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Overview
AC and DC operation
Surge suppression
IEC 60947, EN 60947,

IEC 60664-1, EN 60664-1 and EN 50005;
optocouplers: IEC 60747-5, EN 60747-5;
programmable controllers: IEC 61131-2
In the case of optocouplers, the contact element is a semiconductor. These are not subject to wear; so welding is not possible.
The input and output coupling links differ with regard to the positioning of the terminals and the LEDs. For equipment identification purposes, each coupling link has a blank labeling plate.
With semiconductors, the switching current is not dependent on

the inductance of the load, i.e. the switching current for a DC-13
load is the same as that for an inductive DC-12 load.

This means that coupling links with a semiconductor output are

particularly suitable for inductive loads such as solenoid valves.
It is not relevant to specify any number of operating cycles because this does not affect the endurance of the semiconductor
provided it is not overheated.
In the coupling links in double-decker design, the connections

are arranged on two levels; these units are extremely compact.
For test purposes, versions are available with manual-0-automatic switches. This design can also be supplied with springtype terminals.
Note:
Type
3TX7002
3TX7004, 3TX7005
mm
W x 60 x 62
W x 80 x 85

300
Optoelectronic coupling elements:

Up to 300
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80
For width W see

"Selection and ordering data"

During operation
During storage
For 3TX7002, 3TX7004:
Solid
Screw terminals
mm2
2
mm
Terminal screws
1 x (0.25 ... 4)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
M3
Screwdriver, size 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA29 08-1A)
For 3TX7005:
mm2
2
mm
---
1 x (0.08 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
--
Screwdriver, size 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm

(3RA2908-1A)
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/47
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Type
3TX7002-3AB00
3TX7002-3AB01
3TX7002-4AB00
3TX7002-4AG00
17 ... 30 DC
11 ... 30 DC
17 ... 30 AC/DC
88 ... 264 AC
At 17 V DC
At 24 V DC
At 30 V DC
mA
mA
mA
18
20
22
5
7
8.5
----
----
At 17 V AC/DC
At 24 V AC/DC
At 30 V AC/DC
mA
mA
mA
----
----
10
14
18
----
At 88 V AC/DC
At 230 V AC/DC
At 264 V AC/DC
mA
mA
mA
----
----
----
9
24
28
Switching current
1.8
1.5 2)
0.1
0.1
A
ms
20
20
4
200
1
20
1
20
48 ... 264
--
- 60
- 30
- 30
Minimum load current
mA
60
--
--
--
Voltage drop conducting
1.5
1.1
1.7
0.3
Control side
Operating range
Switching voltage (operating range)1)

Effective AC 50/60 Hz
DC
1)
Comply with minimum switching voltage for 3TX7002-3AB00.
2)
See derating diagram.
Type
3TX70043TX7005-
3AB04
3AC.4
3AC03
3PB54
3PB74
4PG24
3PG74
Control side
V
Operating range
110 ... 230 88 ... 253

AC/DC
AC/DC
11 ... 30 DC
At 24 V DC
At 110 V DC
At 230 V AC
W
W
VA
0.5
---
Switching voltage
0.25
---
0.2
---
--1.5
-0.2
1.5
10 ... 48
DC
10 ... 30
DC
24 ... 250 10 ... 30

AC
DC
11 ... 30
DC
10 ... 30
DC
11 ... 30
DC
Switching current
0.5
1.5
0.1
1.5
100
Duration
ms
20
Shortcircuit
proof1)
--
Short-circuit proof2)
0.2
20
--
--
Shortcircuit
proof2)
--
mA
--
5003)
50
--
--
--
--
Load side

Current
1)
In the event of a short circuit or overload, the semiconductor output

switches off. In order to operate the device again, it must be temporarily
disconnected from the power supply.
2)
In the event of a short circuit or overload, the current is limited by the

semiconductor output.
Derating diagram for 3TX7002-3AB01

(A)
Continuous
current per
channel
1,5
Separate
Between
2 modules
with 5 mm
clearance each
and 1 W power
loss each
0,5
NSB0_00187
Load side
20
40
60
u (C)
Load current as a function of ambient temperature Tu
5/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
3)
If the current falls below the minimum load current, the built-in semiconductor detects an open circuit in the load circuit. The control must be temporarily switched off for resetting.
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Semiconductor couplers circuit diagrams
3TX7002-3AB00
A1
3TX7002-3AB01
A1
13
3TX7002-4AB00
A1
13
3TX7002-4AG00
13
A1
14
A2
13
NSB0_00193
NSB0_00195
NSB0_00196
NSB0_00194
A2
14
14
A2
A2
14

3TX700.-3PB54
3TX700.-3PG74
3TX700.-3PB74
A1
3TX700.-3AC04
3TX700.-3AB04
3TX700.-3PB41
A1
A1
+13
+13
A2
A1
+13
+13
A2
14
NSB0_00214
NSB0_00215
Load
0V
Load
_
A2
14
NSB0_00216

3TX700.-3AC03
A1
A1
+13
+13
~13
~13
14
NSB0_00219
A2
~14
NSB0_00218
14
0V
+13
A2
A2
+
A2
NSB0_00217
Load
_
3TX700.-4AB04
A1
A
0
M
A1
A2
0V
3TX700.-3AC14
A3
A2
14
Load
_
Load
~14
Load
hGdGh
WGdGG
tGdGt
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/49
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays

AC and DC operation For snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
Rated control
supply voltage Us
(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
Switching
voltage
Switching Manual-0current
automatic
switch for
testing
purposes
Width W
mm
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TX7002 semiconductor couplers, 1 transistor

Screw terminals

24 DC
48 ... 264 AC
1.8
--
11.5
3TX7002-3AB00
1 unit
41H
60 < DC
1.5
--
11.5
3TX7002-3AB01
1 unit
41H

24 AC/DC
30 < DC
0.1
--
11.5
3TX7002-4AB00
1 unit
41H
110 240 AC
30 < DC
0.1
--
11.5
3TX7002-4AG00
1 unit
41H
3TX7002-3AB00
3TX7004 semiconductor couplers

3TX7004-3AB04
24 DC
48 DC
0.5
--
6.2
3TX7004-3AB04
1 unit
41H
24 DC
11 ... 30 DC
1.5
--
6.2
3TX7004-3PB54
1 unit
41H
24 DC
30 DC
--
6.2
3TX7004-3PB74
1 unit
41H
110 ... 230 AC/DC
30 DC
--
6.2
3TX7004-3PG74
1 unit
41H
24 DC
30 DC
--
12.5
3TX7004-3AC04
1 unit
41H
24 DC
30 DC
Yes
12.5
3TX7004-3AC14
1 unit
41H
24 DC
24 ... 250 AC
--
12.5
3TX7004-3AC03
1 unit
41H
0.1
--
6.2
3TX7004-4PG24
1 unit
41H

110 ... 230 AC/DC
30 DC
3TX7005 semiconductor couplers

Spring-type
terminals
3TX7005-3AB04
24 DC
48 DC
0.5
--
6.2
3TX7005-3AB04
1 unit
41H
24 DC
11 ... 30 DC
1.5
--
6.2
3TX7005-3PB54
1 unit
41H
24 DC
30 DC
--
6.2
3TX7005-3PB74
1 unit
41H
110 ... 230 AC/DC
30 DC
--
6.2
3TX7005-3PG74
1 unit
41H
24 DC
30 DC
--
12.5
3TX7005-3AC04
1 unit
41H
24 DC
30 DC
Yes
12.5
3TX7005-3AC14
1 unit
41H
24 DC
24 ... 250 AC
--
12.5
3TX7005-3AC03
1 unit
41H
0.1
--
6.2
3TX7005-4PG24
1 unit
41H

110 ... 230 AC/DC
30 DC
Note:
For replacement products, see 3RS18 coupling links with
industrial enclosure or other 3TX70 products.
Supplies".
Accessories
For coupling links
Version
DT Article No.
For linking the same potentials
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3TX7004-8AA00
1 unit
41H
3TX7004-8BA00
1 unit
41H
Type

3TX7004
24 terminals,
max. 26 A
Width 6.2 mm
3TX7004-8AA00
Connecting cable, blue

3TX7002 and 3TX7004
3TX7003 and 3TX7005
with spring-type terminals
With supply cable, blue

24 terminals,
max. 12 A
Length of cable between two terminals
approx. 11 cm
3TX7004-8BA00
5/50
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
SIRIUS 3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial Enclosure
Relay couplers
Overview
Versions:
Wide voltage range: One connection for a wide voltage range
Combination voltage: Two connections for different voltage
ranges
Versions with solid-state compatible outputs
(hard gold-plating)
1, 2 or 3 changeover contacts
The 3RS18 coupling relays are couplers in the proven 22.5 mm

industrial enclosure. This enclosure supports the same connection methods as for the 3RP15 timing relays, including springtype connection; 2 wires can be clamped.
The series comprises devices with up to 3 changeover contacts
with screw terminals or spring-type terminals as combination
voltage or wide voltage range versions.
The relay coils are protected internally with noise suppression
diodes.
Type
3RS1800-.A...
3RS1800-.B...
3RS1800-.H...
mm
22.5 x 86 x 84
22.5 x 86 x 94
22.5 x 86 x 103
Rated insulation voltage Ui pollution degree 3
500
Protective separation acc. to IEC 60947-1, Appendix N

between the coil and the contacts and between the individual contacts.
300
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80

During operation
During storage
Enclosure
Cover
IP20
IP40
A

For 3RS1800-1:
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
mm2
Solid
Terminal screw
1 x (0.5 ... 4); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
M3.5
Screwdriver, size 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA29 08-1A)
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
For 3RS1800-2:
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
Solid
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Screwdriver, size 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA2908-1A)
Control side
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Operating range
AC or DC VA/W
8/1
Load side
A

AC-15
DC-13
Switching current for resistive load

AC-12
DC-12
Switching voltage
Max. AC
Max. DC
Min. contact load
Standard contacts
At 24 ... 400 V
At 24 V A
At 110 V A
At 230 V A
3
1
0.2
0.1
At 24 ... 400 V
At 24 V
At 115 V
At 230 V
A
A
A
A
5
5
0.2
0.2
V
V
400
250
17 V DC, 5 mA at 1 ppm fault
5 V DC, 1 mA at 1 ppm fault
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/51
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
SIRIUS 3RS18 Coupling Relays with Industrial Enclosure
Relay couplers
Circuit diagrams
3RS1800-.AP00,
3RS1800-.AQ00
3RS1800-.BP00,
3RS1800-.BQ00,
3RS1800-.BW00
A1 A3 11
A2
A1 A3 11
A2
12 14
3RS1800-.HP0.,
3RS1800-.HQ0.,
3RS1800-.HW0.
A1 A3 11
21
A2
12 14 22 24
21
31
12 14 22 24 32 34
Connection of the control supply voltage Us

3RS1800-..P0.,
3RS1800-..Q0.
3RS1800-..P0.,
3RS1800-..Q0.
3RS1800-..W0.
U S = 24 V AC/DC
U S = 110 ... 120 V AC

U S = 220 ... 240 V AC
U S = 24 ... 240 V AC/DC
L+
L+
L+
A2
L
A1
A1
NSB0_02225
A3
A2
L
A2
L
NSB0_02226
A1
NSB0_02224
A3
Note:
The position of the connection points on the device is based on
the principle of logical separation, i.e. the coil terminals A1, A2,
A3 are above and the terminals for the changeover contacts 11,
12, 14 etc. are below.

Rated control supply Connection Us Contacts
voltage Us
Version
(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
CO
Coupling relays in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm

Screw terminals
Wide voltage range

24 ... 240 AC/DC
A1 - A2
2
3
31)
A
A
A
3RS1800-1BW00
3RS1800-1HW00
3RS1800-1HW01
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
Combination voltage
24 AC/DC and
110 ... 120 AC
A3 - A2 or
A1 - A2
1
2
3
31)
A
A
A
C
3RS1800-1AQ00
3RS1800-1BQ00
3RS1800-1HQ00
3RS1800-1HQ01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
41H
24 AC/DC and
220 ... 240 AC
A3 - A2 or
A1 - A2
1
2
3
31)
A
A
A
A
3RS1800-1AP00
3RS1800-1BP00
3RS1800-1HP00
3RS1800-1HP01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
41H
3RS1800-1H. . .
Coupling relays in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm

Wide voltage range
24 ... 240 AC/DC
Spring-type
terminals
A1 - A2
2
3
31)
A
A
A
3RS1800-2BW00
3RS1800-2HW00
3RS1800-2HW01
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
Combination voltage
24 AC/DC and
110 ... 120 AC
A3 - A2 or
A1 - A2
1
2
3
31)
C
A
C
C
3RS1800-2AQ00
3RS1800-2BQ00
3RS1800-2HQ00
3RS1800-2HQ01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
41H
24 AC/DC and
220 ... 240 AC
A3 - A2 or
A1 - A2
1
2
3
31)
A
A
A
A
3RS1800-2AP00
3RS1800-2BP00
3RS1800-2HP00
3RS1800-2HP01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
41H
3RS1800-2B. . .
1)
5/52
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Coupling Relays with LZS/LZX Plug-In Relays
Overview
Function
In the versions equipped with LEDs, these indicate the switching
state. The LZS:PT/MT plug-in relay couplers have a test button.
This can be used to force the plug-in relay coupler into the
switching state and to lock it. This is indicated by a raised
petrol-colored lever.
Logical separation
The terminals for the contacts and the terminals for the coil are
arranged on separate levels, e.g. above for contacts and below
for coil. Logical separation is not necessarily protective separation.
For safe isolation, transfer of the voltage of one circuit to another
circuit is prevented to a suitable degree of safety (requirements
and tests are described in IEC 60947-1 in Appendix N).
Control with solid-state output
Notes on the previous LZX series
In the case of solid-state outputs (e.g. proximity switches) with

overload and short-circuit protection, you must make allowance
during configuration for the temporarily flowing capacitor charging currents! This is possible, for example, by using a suitable
LZS plug-in relay coupler.
The complete units and accessory parts of the LZX series are no
longer listed in this catalog. The complete units of the LZS series
are fully compatible with the corresponding units of the LZX series. Prices for the LZS series are lower than for the previous LZX
series.
Surge suppression
The LZX plug-in relays are available unchanged and are used
accordingly in both the LZS and the LZX series.
The 24 V DC relays LZX:RT and LZX: PT with LEDs can be supplied with, all others without integral surge suppression (freewheel diode connected in parallel with A1/A2). The positive control supply voltage must be connected to coil terminal A1.
Mounting
The relays are plugged into the base and this is snapped onto a
TH 35 standard mounting rail according to IEC 60715.
Note:
Due to differences in geometry the LED modules, plug-in bases,
retaining brackets and labels can be combined and/or used in
only the respective series, LZS or LZX.
The LZS series offers not only service-proven screw connections
but also versions with plug-in terminals (push-in).
A retaining bracket can be ordered for the MT series that additionally fixes the relay into a plug-in base (under conditions of increased mechanical stress). For the RT and PT series, a combined retaining and ejection bracket is available which can be
used to disassemble the relay where access is difficult, for example, when relays are mounted side-by-side.
They can be mounted as required.
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/53
Plug-in relay coupling links can be ordered as complete units or

as individual modules for customer assembly.
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Relay type
LZX:RT print relay, 8-pole,

(12.7 mm) 1 CO/2 CO
LZX:PT industrial relay, 8-, 11- and 14-pole,

(22.5 mm) 2 CO/3 CO/4 CO
mm
15.5 x 78 x 71
28 x 74 x 72
mm
15.5 x 77 x 71
28 x 77 x 79
mm
15.5 x 98 x 71
28 x 98 x 79
Rated control supply voltage Us1)
24 DC

250
250
Overvoltage category
acc. to IEC 60664-1
III
III
between coil and contacts
Up to 250 V (with plug-in base LZS:RT78726)

No (for complete units with standard socket)
No
IP67
IP20
IP50
IP20
-40 ... +70

-40 ... +80
-40 ... +70

-40 ... +80
LZX:RT.D4 / LZX:PT.D5
LZX:RT.B4 / LZX:PT.B5
LZX:RT.A4 / LZX:PT.A5
Relays
Bases
During operation
During storage
C
C
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
Connection type
Screw terminals
mm2
2
Solid
mm
Screw terminals
2 x 2.5
2 x 2.5
2 x 1.5
2 x 1.5
Screwdriver, size 3.0 ... 3.5 mm x 0.5 mm (3RA29 08-1A)
Connection type
Plug-in terminals (push-in)
Plug-in terminals (push-in)
mm2
mm2
mm2
1 x (0.75 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 1.0), 2 x 1.5

1 x (0.75 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 1.0), 2 x 1.5
1 x (0.75 ... 1.0), 2 x 0.75, 1 x 1.5
1 x (0.75 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 1.0), 2 x 1.5

1 x (0.75 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.75 ... 1.0), 2 x 1.5
1 x (0.75 ... 1.0), 2 x 0.75, 1 x 1.5
Operating range at 20 C
16.8 ... 52
18 ... 52
18 ... 40.8
19.2 ... 39.6 92 ... 190
AC
DC
VA
W
-0.4
0.75
--
-0.75
1
--
Release voltage
2.4
7.2
3.6
7.2
Freewheel
diode for
complete
unit
--
Freewheel
diode in
LED
module
--
Solid
Control side
Protection circuit
86.3 ... 127 172 ... 264
34.5
69
34.5
184 ... 380
69
Load side
Switching voltage
AC/DC
24 ... 250
24 ... 250
A
A
A
A
A
16
6
---
-12
10
6
Rated operational current Ie AC-15 acc. to A

utilization categories (IEC 60947-5-1)
RT3 (1 changeover contact): 6

RT4 (2 changeover contacts): 2.5
PT2 (2 changeover contacts): 5

PT3 (3 changeover contacts): 5
PT5 (4 changeover contacts): 4 (DC coils),
2 (AC coils)
Rated operational current Ie DC-13 with

suppressor diode acc. to utilization
categories (IEC 60947-5-1)
2 at 24 V
0.27 at 230 V
PT2, PT3: 5 at 24 V
PT5: 4 at 24 V
0.5 at 230 V
10
Standard 17 V, 10 mA;
hard gold-plated 17 V/0.1 mA
Standard 17 V, 10 mA;
hard gold-plated 20 mV/1 mA
Rated currents2)
- 1 CO contact
- 2 CO contacts
- 3 CO contacts
- 4 CO contacts
Short-circuit test with fuse links of
operational class gG
with short-circuit current Ik = 1 kA
acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
DIAZED, type 5SB
Min. contact load
(reliability: 1 ppm)
(resistive load at 250 V AC)
1)
10 x 106
AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must be

increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly.
5/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
10 x 106
1 x 105
2)
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Relay type
mm
36 x 69 x 36
24 DC

250
MT industrial relay, 11-pole

(35.5 mm) 3 CO
AC and DC operation
acc. to IEC 60664-1
III
between coil and contacts
No
Degree of protection of relay/base

Relays
Bases
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
-45 ... +50

-45 ... +80
-45 ... +50

-45 ... +80
-45 ... +50

-45 ... +80
92 ... 137
184 ... 264
46
92

During operation
During storage
C
C
-40 ... +60

-45 ... +80
Connection type
Screw terminals
mm2
2
Solid
Finely stranded with or without end sleeve
mm
2 x 2.5
2 x 1.5
Screwdriver, size 1 or Pozidriv 1
Control side
Operating range at 20 C
18 ... 38
19.2 ... 38
Power consumption
AC
DC
VA
W
-1.2
2.3
--
Release voltage
2.4
9.6
--
Protection circuit
Load side
Switching voltage
AC/DC
24 ... 250
10
Rated operational current Ie /DC-13

2 at 24 V,
0.27 at 230 V
Rated operational current Ie /AC-15

5 at 24 V and 230 V
10
Rated currents2)
Short-circuit test with
fuse links of operational class gG
DIAZED, type 5SB
12 V DC/10 mA
Min. contact load

(reliability: 1 ppm)
(resistive load at 250 V AC)
1)
AC voltages, 50 Hz; for 60 Hz operation, the lower response value must be

increased by 10 %; the power loss will reduce slightly.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/55
IP50
IP20
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Circuit diagrams
(4)
42
44
(8)
11(9)
41(12)
(13)A1
11(7)
21(8)
(1)
12
14
(5)
(3)
32
34
(6)
31(9)
(13)A1
A2(14)
A2(14)
LZX:RT4
2-pole
11(9)
(3)
32
34
(7)
(2)
22
24
(6)
21(10)
31(11)
(13)A1
(4)
42
44
(8)
41(12)
A2(14)
LZX:MT32
3-pole
LZX:RT3
1-pole
(2)
22
24
(5)
(1)
12
14
(4)
NSB0_01011a
(1)
12
14
(5)
LZX:PT520, LZX:PT570, LZX:PT580

4-pole
NSB0_00250a
LZX:PT370
3-pole
NSB0_00249a
LZX:PT270
2-pole
A1
12
11
14
A2
22
21
24
A1
12
11
14
A2
22
21
24
(5)
22
(4)12
(8)32
(3)14
(9)34
NSB0_00248a
NSB0_00247a
NSB0_00251a
(2)
A1
Note:
Values in brackets: Plug-in base designations
Without brackets: Contact/coil designations
5/56
(6) (7)
21 24
Siemens IC 10 2014
(1) (11)
11 31
(10)
A2
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays

Version
Rated control supply Contacts, Width

voltage Us
number of
(at AC: 50/60 Hz)
CO
contacts
V
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mm
Complete units, 11- and 14-pole, PT series

Complete units with plug-in base
for snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
comprising:
Standard plug-in base with screw terminals
LED module (version 24 V DC: LED module with freewheel diode)
Fixing/ejection brackets
Labels
3 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
28
A
A
A
A
LZS:PT3A5L24
LZS:PT3A5R24
LZS:PT3A5S15
LZS:PT3A5T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
4 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
28
A
A
A
A
LZS:PT5A5L24
LZS:PT5A5R24
LZS:PT5A5S15
LZS:PT5A5T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
A
A
A
A
LZS:PT5B5L24
LZS:PT5B5R24
LZS:PT5B5S15
LZS:PT5B5T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
LZS:PT3A5L24

with logical separation
comprising:
Plug-in base with logical separation and screw terminals
Labels
4 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
28
Complete units, 8- and 14-pole, PT series

comprising:
Plug-in base with logical separation and plug-in terminals (push-in)
Labels
Plug-in terminals
(push-in)
2 CO contacts
24 DC
230 AC
28
A
A
LZS:PT2D5L24
LZS:PT2D5T30
1
1
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
4 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
28
A
A
A
A
LZS:PT5D5L24
LZS:PT5D5R24
LZS:PT5D5S15
LZS:PT5D5T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
LZS:PT5D5L24
Note:
Logical separation: The terminals for the contacts and the terminals for the coil are arranged on separate levels, e.g. above for
contacts and below for the coil. Logical separation is not necessarily protective separation.
Protective separation: Protective separation prevents voltage of
one circuit affecting another circuit with sufficient protection
(IEC 61140).

Siemens IC 10 2014
5/57
Screw terminals
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Version

voltage Us
number of
at AC 50/60 Hz
CO
contacts
V
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mm
Individual modules for customer assembly, PT series

Industrial relays, 8-, 11-, and 14-pole
Mini industrial relays
With test bracket and mechanical
switch position indicator, without LED1)
LZX:PT370024
24 DC
2
3
4
22.5
}
}
}
LZX:PT270024
LZX:PT370024
LZX:PT570024
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
24 AC
2
3
4
22.5
}
A
}
LZX:PT270524
LZX:PT370524
LZX:PT570524
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
115 AC
2
3
4
22.5
C
A
}
LZX:PT270615
LZX:PT370615
LZX:PT570615
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
230 AC
2
3
4
22.5
}
}
}
LZX:PT270730
LZX:PT370730
LZX:PT570730
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
24 DC
230 AC
22.5
}
}
LZX:PT580024
LZX:PT580730
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
24 DC
230 AC
22.5
}
C
LZX:PT520024
LZX:PT520730
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
With hard gold-plating
Without test bracket
Plug-in bases for PT relays

Standard plug-in bases
for mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail
--
Screw terminals
2
3
4
28
}
}
}
LZS:PT78720
LZS:PT78730
LZS:PT78740
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
2
4
28
}
}
LZS:PT78722
LZS:PT78742
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
LZS:PT78740
Plug-in bases with logical separation
--
LZS:PT78722
Plug-in terminals
(push-in)

--
2
4
28
}
}
LZS:PT7872P
LZS:PT7874P
LZS:PT7874P
1)
The test bracket is designed to be non-latching. If the test bracket is

pressed further until 90 has been reached, two small lugs break off and
the test bracket can be latched in position.
Note:
(IEC 61140).
5/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Version

voltage Us
number of
at AC 50/60 Hz
CO
contacts
V
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mm
Individual modules for customer assembly, PT series

More individual modules
LED modules
Red
With freewheel diode
24 DC
LZS:PTML0024
1 unit
41H
Without freewheel diode
24 AC/DC
LZS:PTML0524
1 unit
41H
110 230 AC/DC
LZS:PTML0730
1 unit
41H
LZS:PTML0024
--
12.5
Green
24 DC
LZS:PTMG0024
1 unit
41H
24 AC
LZS:PTMG0524
1 unit
41H
110 230 AC/DC
LZS:PTMG0730
1 unit
41H
26
LZS:PT17021
100 10 units
41H
--
26
LZS:PT17024
100 10 units
41H
--
--
26
LZS:PT17040
100 10 units
41H
6 ... 60 AC
--
26
LZS:PTMU0524
1 unit
41H
LZS:PTMU0730
1 unit
41H
LZS:PTMT00A0
1 unit
41H
3TX7004-8BA00
1 unit
41H
LZS:PT170R6
1 10 units
41H
LZS:PT170P1
1 10 units
41H
--
12.5
Fixing/ejection brackets for PT base

Screw terminals and
plug-in terminals (push-in)
LZS:PT17021

--
Fixing/ejection brackets for standard plug-in base

without logical separation
Screw terminals
Labels
LZS:PT17024
RC elements
LZS:PT17040
110 230 AC
Freewheel diodes with connection to A1
6 230 DC
--
26
Connecting cables, 24-pole

LZS:PTMU0730
Current carrying capacity 12 A,

with supply cable, blue
Connecting combs for PT screw base
6-pole,
10 A current carrying capacity, natural-colored
Connecting brackets for PT push-in base
3TX7004-8BA00
2-pole,
Individual modules for customer assembly, MT series

Industrial relays, 11-pole
Industrial relays with test bracket
LZX:MT326024
Without LED
With LED
24 DC
35.5
A
}
LZX:MT321024
LZX:MT323024
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
Without LED
With LED
24 AC
35.5
A
C
LZX:MT326024
LZX:MT328024
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
Without LED
With LED
115 AC
35.5
C
C
LZX:MT326115
LZX:MT328115
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
Without LED
With LED
230 AC
35.5
A
A
LZX:MT326230
LZX:MT328230
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
Screw terminals
Plug-in bases
--
38
LZS:MT78750
1 unit
41H
--
38
LZS:MT28800
1 unit
41H
Retaining brackets
--
LZS:MT78750
Note:
Note:
Supplies".

(IEC 61140).
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/59
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Version

voltage Us
number of
at AC 50/60 Hz
CO
contacts
V
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mm
Complete units, 8-pole, 5 mm pinning, RT series

Complete units with standard plug-in base
comprising:
Standard plug-in base with screw terminals
Labels
Screw terminals
1 CO contact
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
15.5
A
A
A
A
LZS:RT3A4L24
LZS:RT3A4R24
LZS:RT3A4S15
LZS:RT3A4T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
2 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
15.5
A
A
A
A
LZS:RT4A4L24
LZS:RT4A4R24
LZS:RT4A4S15
LZS:RT4A4T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
LZS:RT4A4T30

comprising:
Plug-in base with logical separation and screw terminals
Labels
1 CO contact
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
15.5
A
A
A
A
LZS:RT3B4L24
LZS:RT3B4R24
LZS:RT3B4S15
LZS:RT3B4T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
2 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
15.5
A
A
A
A
LZS:RT4B4L24
LZS:RT4B4R24
LZS:RT4B4S15
LZS:RT4B4T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
LZS:RT4B4T30

comprising:
Plug-in base with logical separation and plug-in terminals (push-in)
Labels
LZS:RT3D4L24
Plug-in terminals
(push-in)
1 CO contact
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
15.5
A
A
A
A
LZS:RT3D4L24
LZS:RT3D4R24
LZS:RT3D4S15
LZS:RT3D4T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
2 CO contacts
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
15.5
A
A
A
A
LZS:RT4D4L24
LZS:RT4D4R24
LZS:RT4D4S15
LZS:RT4D4T30
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41H
41H
41H
41H
Note:
(IEC 61140).
5/60
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
Version

voltage Us
number of
at AC 50/60 Hz
CO
contacts
V
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
mm
Individual modules for customer assembly, RT series

Print relays, 8-pole, 5 mm pinning
Print relays
with hard gold-plating
Version with 1 CO contact
LZX:RT314024
24 DC
230 AC
12.7
}
C
LZX:RT315024
LZX:RT315730
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
24 DC
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
12.7
}
C
C
}
LZX:RT314024
LZX:RT314524
LZX:RT314615
LZX:RT314730
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
41H
12 DC
24 DC
12.7
C
}
LZX:RT424012
LZX:RT424024
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
}
}
}
LZX:RT424524
LZX:RT424615
LZX:RT424730
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
Print relays
Version with 1 CO contact
Version with 2 CO contacts

LZS:RT78725
24 AC
115 AC
230 AC
Screw terminals
Standard plug-in bases

--
--
15.5
LZS:RT78725
1 unit
41H
--
15.5
LZS:RT78726
1 unit
41H

-LZS:RT78726
Plug-in terminals
(push-in)

--
--
15.5
LZS:RT7872P
1 unit
41H
15.5
LZS:PTML0024
1 unit
41H
}
}
LZS:PTML0524
LZS:PTML0730
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
LZS:PTMG0024
1 unit
41H
}
}
LZS:PTMG0524
LZS:PTMG0730
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
LED modules
Red
LZS:RT7872P
24 DC
--
24 AC/DC
110 ... 230 AC/DC
---
Green
24 DC
--
24 AC/DC
110 ... 230 AC/DC
---
15.5
--
--
15.5
LZS:RT17016
100 10 units
41H
--
--
15.5
LZS:RT17040
100 10 units
41H
6 ... 60 AC
110 ... 230 AC
--
15.5
}
}
LZS:PTMU0524
LZS:PTMU0730
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
--
15.5
LZS:PTMT00A0
1 unit
41H
3TX7004-8BA00
1 unit
41H
LZS:RT170R8
1 10 units
41H
LZS:RT170P1
100 10 units
41H
LZS:PTML0024
for RT base
Labels
LZS:RT17016
RC elements
Freewheel diodes with connection to A1

LZS:RT17040
6 ... 230 DC
Connecting cables, 24-pole
Current carrying capacity 12 A,
with supply cable, blue
Connecting combs for RT screw base
LZS:PTMT0730
8-pole,
Connecting brackets for PT push-in base
2-pole,
3TX7004-8BA00
Note:

Supplies".
Siemens IC 10 2014
5/61
Siemens AG 2013
Coupling Relays
More information
Notes on configuration
PT series
RT series
Mounting the LZS:PT17024 fixing/ejection bracket on the

standard plug-in base with LZS:PT787.0 screw terminal
Mounting the LZS:RT17016 fixing/ejection bracket on the

LZS:RT7872 plug-in base
2
1 Interlock
2 Direction of assembly
Mounting the coupling relay with plug-in relay
NSB0_01790a
NSB0_01788
1 Interlock
2 Direction of assembly
3 Direction of disassembly
Mounting the coupling relay with plug-in relay
NSB0_01890a
NSB0_01889
Note:
Note:
The LZS:PT17021 and LZS:PT17024 ejection brackets of the

coupling relays with plug-in relay are not status displays!
The LZS:RT17016 ejection brackets of the coupling relays with

plug-in relay are not status displays!
5/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Switching Devices
Soft Starters and Solid-State
Switching Devices
Price groups
PG 41B, 41C, 41E, 41F, 41H, 41J, 42G,
42H, 42J, 4N1
6/5
6/8
6/19
6/37
6/68
6/71
6/72
6/77
6/81
6/84
6/85
6/94
6/98
6/105
6/106
6/107
Introduction
General data
3RW30, 3RW40
for standard applications
3RW30
3RW40
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
3RW44
Solid-state switching devices
for resistive loads
General data
Solid-state relays
General data
SIRIUS 3RF21 solid-state relays,
single-phase, 22.5 mm
single-phase, 45 mm
three-phase, 45 mm
Solid-state contactors
General data
SIRIUS 3RF23 solid-state contactors,
single-phase
three-phase
Function modules
General data
SIRIUS converters for 3RF2
SIRIUS load monitoring for 3RF2
SIRIUS heating current monitoring for
3RF2
6/108
6/109
SIRIUS power controllers for 3RF2

SIRIUS power regulators for 3RF2
6/110
6/113

for switching motors
General data
three-phase
SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state reversing
contactors, three-phase
6/117
Note:
Conversion tool
e.g. from 3RF24 to 3RF34 see
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/2
Siemens AG 2013
Switching Devices Soft Starters and Solid-State Switching Devices

Soft Starters
Introduction
Overview
3RW30
3RW40
3RW44
Article No.
Page
3RW soft starters

3RW soft starters for standard applications
SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters for soft starting of three-phase asynchronous
motors
Current range of up to 106 A
Performance range of up to 55 kW (at 400 V), up to 75 hp (at 460 V)
3RW30
6/8
3RW40 soft starters
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters with the integral functions

- solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection and
- adjustable current limiting
for the soft starting and stopping of three-phase asynchronous motors
Current range of up to 432 A
Performance range of up to 250 kW (at 400 V), up to 300 hp (at 460 V)
3RW40
6/19
3RW44
6/37
3RW30 soft starters
3RW soft starters for High-Feature applications

3RW44 soft starters
In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state

SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for higher-level
requirements
Current range of up to 1 214 A
Performance range
- In inline circuit: up to 710 kW (at 400 V), up to 950 hp (at 460 V)
- In inside-delta circuit: up to 1 200 kW (at 400 V),
up to 1 700 hp (at 460 V)

SIRIUS 3RW soft starters permit soft starting and soft rampdown of three-phase asynchronous motors. Depending on the
scope of functions required it is possible to choose between:
Soft starters for standard applications
Soft starters for High-Feature applications
SIRIUS 3RW Service-proven in many applications
Functions of the SIRIUS soft starters include:
Soft starting and ramp-down
Stepless starting
Torque control and limitation
Cost-efficient operation
The advantages of SIRIUS soft starters at a glance:
Reduction of current peaks
Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting
Reduced load on the power supply network
Reduction of the mechanical load in the operating mechanism
Considerable space savings and reduced wiring compared
with conventional starters
Maintenance-free switching
Very easy handling
Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular system
(3RW30 and 3RW40)
6/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
3RF21
3RF20
3RF22
3RF23
3RF24
3RF29
3RF34 (motor)
Article No.
Page
3RF21
3RF20
3RF22
6/72
6/77
6/81
3RF23
3RF24
6/85
6/94
SIRIUS solid-state switching devices for switching resistive loads

Solid-state relays
Solid-state relays
Widths of 22.5 mm and 45 mm

Compact and space-saving design
"Zero-point switching" version
Mounting onto existing heat sinks
Complete units comprising a solid-state relay and an optimized heat sink,

"ready to use"

Versions for resistive loads "zero-point switching"
and inductive loads "instantaneous switching"
Special versions "Low Noise" and "Short-Circuit Proof"
Function modules
For extending the functionality of the 3RF21 solid-state relays and the 3RF23
solid-state contactors for many different applications:
Converters
For converting an analog input signal into an on/off ratio;

can also be used on 3RF22 and 3RF24 three-phase switching devices
3RF2900-0EA18
6/105
Load monitoring
For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads)
3RF29..-0FA08,
3RF29.0-0GA..
6/106
Heating current monitoring
For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads);

remote teach
3RF29..-0JA..
6/107
Power controllers
For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device

depending on a setpoint value.
There is a choice of full-wave control and generalized phase control.
3RF29..-0KA.
6/108
Power regulators
For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device

depending on a setpoint value.
Closed-loop control: full-wave control or generalized phase control
3RF29.0-0HA..
6/109
3RF34
3RF34
6/113
6/117
SIRIUS solid-state switching devices for switching motors

Solid-state contactors,
solid-state reversing contactors
Complete units in the insulated enclosure with integrated heat sink,

"ready to use"
Version for motors, "instantaneous switching"
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/3
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
SIRIUS 3RF solid-state switching devices
The HCS300I is a modular heating control system for the optimization of plastic processing machines. It enables individual solutions for many different heating control applications. With each
basic unit it is possible to use up to four 6-channel digital outputs
to control solid-state switching devices and four 4-channel temperature measuring modules. Current or current-and-voltage
measuring modules can be used to monitor the loads. Communication with the higher-level control system is performed via
PROFIBUS DP.
See also chapter 15, "SIPLUS HCS Heating Control Systems"
"SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller".
Three-phase solid-state contactor and single-phase solid-state relay
The SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices reliably switch a

wide range of different loads with alternating voltages in 50 and
60 Hz systems.
SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices for resistive loads:
Solid-state relays
Function modules
SIRIUS 3RF3 solid-state switching devices for switching motors:
Solid-state reversing contactors
SIRIUS 3RF2 for almost unending activity
Conventional electromechanical controlgear is often overtaxed
by the rise in the number of switching operations. A high switching frequency results in frequent failure and short replacement
cycles. However, this does not have to be the case, because
with the latest generation of our SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices we provide you with solid-state relays and contactors with a particularly long endurance for almost unending
activity even under the toughest conditions and under high
mechanical load, but also in noise-sensitive areas.
Proved time and again in service
SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices have firmly established in industrial applications. They are used above all in
applications where loads are switched frequently mainly with
resistive load controllers, with the control of electrical heat or the
control of valves and motors in conveyor systems. In addition to
its use in areas with high switching frequencies, their silent
switching means that SIRIUS is also ideally suited for use in
noise-sensitive areas, such as offices or hospitals.
The most reliable solution for any application
Compared to mechanical controlgear, our SIRIUS 3RF2 solidstate switching devices stand out due to their considerably longer service life. Thanks to the high product quality, their switching is extremely precise, reliable and, above all, insusceptible to
faults. With its variable connection methods and a wide spread
of control voltages, the SIRIUS 3RF2 family is universally applicable. Depending on the individual requirements of the application, our modular controlgear can also be quite easily expanded
by the addition of standardized function modules.
Ideal for operation with heating control systems
The 3RF2 solid-state switching devices can be used for example
in the SIPLUS HCS300I heating control system. They are optimally connected to the digital output module of the HCS300I by
means of preassembled cables. This saves considerable wiring
outlay in the control circuit and shortens mounting time.
6/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
SIPLUS heating control system
Also for switching motors

In order to achieve higher productivity, the switching frequency
is continuously increased. It is no problem for our SIRIUS solidstate contactors to switch motors. With three-phase motors up to
7.5 kW, they can reliably withstand even the highest switching
frequencies. Even a continuous change in the direction of rotation is possible with the solid-state reversing contactors. Both
versions can be perfectly combined with components from the
SIRIUS modular system. Connecting with SIRIUS motor starter
protectors or SIRIUS overload relay can be implemented without
any further steps.
Always on the sunny side with SIRIUS
Because SIRIUS 3RF2 offers even more:
The space-saving and compact side-by-side mounting ensure
reliable operation up to an ambient temperature of +60 C.
Thanks to fast configuration and the ease of mounting and
start-up, you save not only time but also expenses.
Connection methods
The solid-state switching devices are available with screw terminals (box terminals), spring-type terminals or ring terminal lugs.
Screw terminals
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3RW Soft Starters

General data
SIRIUS 3RW30
Standard applications
SIRIUS 3RW40
SIRIUS 3RW44
High-Feature applications
Rated current at 40 C
3 ... 106
12.5 ... 432
29 ... 1 214
Rated operational voltage

Motor rating at 400 V
Inline circuit
200 ... 480
200 ... 600
200 ... 6908)
kW
hp
kW
hp
1.5 ... 55
1.5 ... 75
---
5.5 ... 250

7.5 ... 300
---
15 ... 710
15 ... 950
22 ... 1 200
30 ... 1 700
-25 ... +60
-25 ... +60
0 ... +60
1)
Inside-delta circuit
Ambient temperature
Soft starting/ramp-down
Voltage ramp
Starting/stopping voltage
40 ... 100
40 ... 100
20 ... 100
Starting and ramp-down time
0 ... 201)
--
0 ... 20
--
0 ... 360
20 ... 100
Torque control
Starting/stopping torque
--
--
Torque limit
--
--
20 ... 200
Intrinsic device protection
--
Motor overload protection
--
7)
Thermistor motor protection
--
2)
Integrated remote RESET
--
3)
Adjustable current limiting
--
--
--
Breakaway pulse
--
--
Creep speed in both directions of rotation
--
--
Pump ramp-down (torque control)
--
--
4)
4) 5)
Integral bypass contact system
Overview
DC braking
--
--
Combined braking
--
--
4) 5)
Motor heating
--
--
Communications
--
--
PROFIBUS/PROFINET (optional)
External display and operator module
---
---
(optional)
Operating measured value display

Error logbook
--
--
Event list
--
--
Slave pointer function
--
--
Trace function
--
--
6)
Programmable control inputs and outputs
--
--
Number of parameter sets
Parameterization software (Soft Starter ES)
--
--
Power semiconductors (thyristors)

Screw terminals
2 controlled phases
2 controlled phases
3 controlled phases
UL/CSA
CE marking
Soft starting under heavy starting conditions
--
--
4)
Configuring support
Electronic selection slider ruler, Technical Assistance +49 (911) 895-5900
Function available, -- Function not available

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Only soft starting available for 3RW30.

Optional up to size S3 (device version).
For 3RW402. to 3RW404.; for 3RW405. and 3RW407. optional.
Calculate soft starter and motor with size allowance where required.
Not possible in inside-delta circuit.
Trace function with Soft Starter ES software.
7)
When using the motor overload protection according to ATEX, an upstream

contactor is required.
8) In inside-delta circuit up to 600 V.
More information can be found on the Internet under:

www.siemens.com/softstarter
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/5
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Selection aid for soft starters
Application
SIRIUS 3RW30
SIRIUS 3RW40
SIRIUS 3RW44
High-Feature applications
Normal starting (CLASS 10)
Pumps
Pumps with special pump ramp-down

(to prevent water hammer)
Heat pumps
Hydraulic pumps
Presses
Conveyor belts
Roller conveyors
Screw conveyors
Escalators
Piston compressors
Screw compressors
Small fans1)
Centrifugal blowers
Bow thrusters
Stirrers
Extruders
Lathes
Milling machines
Heavy starting (CLASS 20)
Very heavy starting (CLASS 30)

Large fans2)
Circular saws/bandsaws
Centrifuges
Mills
Breakers
1)
Recommended soft starter
2)
Possible soft starter
The mass inertia of the fan is <10 times the mass inertia of the motor.
The mass inertia of the fan is 10 times the mass inertia of the motor.
Boundary conditions
Type
Maximum starting time
Current loading
Starts per hour
1/h
3RW30
300
20
3RW40/44
10
300
3RW402., 3RW403., 3RW404.
20
300
3RW405., 3RW407., 3RW44
40
350
350

60
3RW44
The motor ratings listed in the Selection and Ordering Data are
rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed
on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. 3RW soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions.
In case of additional requirements, it may be necessary to
choose a larger device. In some cases, however, the safety margins taken into account in the selection also permit the listed
units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more
demanding. Detailed technical information for a configuration
which is tailored exactly to the application see "Manuals":
6/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
For the configuration of soft starters for motors with high starting
current conditions (typically I/Ie 8), we recommend consulting
our Siemens Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 911 895-5900
E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
Motor rating data in kW and hp are based on IEC 60947-4-1.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
13th 14th 15th 16th
3RW
Soft starters
SIRIUS soft starter generation
Size
Connection type (screw terminals/spring-type terminals)

Soft starter functionality (bypass, thermistor, etc.)

Special versions
Example
3RW
Note:
article numbers.
Energy management
Provision of energy data such as current, voltage
and power (3RW44) by bus to higher-level systems
Current management
Avoidance of current peaks, thus reducing the load on the grid
and the mechanical system
Reduced heating of the control cabinet
Technology-reduced inherent power loss as speed-controlled
drive systems, resulting in lower cooling costs and a more
compact design All sizes are equipped with bypass contactor,
resulting in lower power losses after start-up
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
Product advantages
We offer you a unique portfolio for industrial energy management, using an energy management system that helps to optimally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial energy management into three phases identify, evaluate, and
The soft starters contribute to energy efficiency throughout the
plant as follows:
The advantages of the SIRIUS soft starters at a glance:

Soft starting and ramp-down
(only soft starting available for 3RW30)
Stepless starting
Reduction of current peaks
Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting
Reduced load on the power supply network
Reduction of the mechanical load in the operating mechanism
Considerable space savings and reduced wiring compared
with conventional starters
Maintenance-free switching
Very easy handling
Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular system
At an installation altitude above 2000 m, max. permissible
operational voltage is reduced to 460 V.
Permissible installation altitude

NSB0_01704
105
Rated operational current e in %
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude in m
5000
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/7
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30, 3RW40 for Standard Applications
3RW30
Overview
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters reduce the motor voltage
through variable phase control and increase it in ramp-like mode
from a selectable starting voltage up to mains voltage. During
starting, these devices limit the torque as well as the current and
prevent the shocks which arise during direct starts or wye-delta
starts. In this way, mechanical loads and mains voltage dips can
be reliably reduced.
Soft starting reduces the stress on the connected equipment
and results in lower wear and therefore longer periods of troublefree production. The selectable start value means that the soft
starters can be adjusted individually to the requirements of the
application in question and unlike wye-delta starters are not
restricted to two-stage starting with fixed voltage ratios.
The SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are characterized above all by

their small space requirements. Integrated bypass contacts
mean that no power loss has to be taken into the bargain at the
power semiconductors (thyristors) after the motor has started
up. This cuts down on heat losses, enabling a more compact
design and making external bypass circuits superfluous.
Various versions of the SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starters are available:
Standard version for fixed-speed three-phase motors, sizes
S00, S0, S2 and S3, with integrated bypass contact system
Version for fixed-speed three-phase motors in a 22.5 mm
enclosure without bypass
Soft starters rated up to 55 kW (at 400 V) for standard applications in three-phase networks are available. Extremely small
sizes, low power losses and simple commissioning are just three
of the many advantages of this soft starter.
Functionality
The space required by the compact SIRIUS 3RW30 soft starter
is often only about one third of that required by a contactor assembly for wye-delta starting of comparable rating. This not only
saves space in the control cabinet and on the standard mounting rail but also does away completely with the wiring work
needed for wye-delta starters. This is notable in particular for
higher motor ratings which are only rarely available as fully wired
solutions.
At the same time the number of cables from the starter to the
motor is reduced from six to three. Compact dimensions, short
start-up times, easy wiring and fast commissioning make themselves felt as clear-cut cost advantages.
The bypass contacts of these soft starters are protected during
operation by an integrated solid-state arc quenching system.
This prevents damage to the bypass contacts in the event of a
fault, e.g. brief disconnection of the control voltage, mechanical
shocks or life-related component defects on the coil operating
mechanism or main contact spring.
6/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
The new series of devices comes with the "polarity balancing"

control method, which is designed to prevent direct current components in two-phase controlled soft starters. On two-phase
controlled soft starters the current resulting from superimposition
of the two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase.
This results for physical reasons in an asymmetric distribution of
the three phase currents during the motor ramp-up. This phenomenon cannot be influenced, but in most applications it is
non-critical.
Controlling the power semiconductors results not only in this
asymmetry, however, but also in the previously mentioned direct
current components which can cause severe noise generation
on the motor at starting voltages of less than 50 %. The control
method used for these soft starters eliminates these direct current components during the ramp-up phase and prevents the
braking torque which they can cause.
It creates a motor ramp-up that is uniform in speed, torque and
current rise, thus permitting a particularly gentle, two-phase
starting of the motors. At the same time the acoustic quality of
the starting operation comes close to the quality of a threephase controlled soft starter. This is made possible by the
on-going dynamic harmonizing and balancing of current halfwaves of different polarity during the motor ramp-up. Hence the
name "polarity balancing".
Soft starting with voltage ramp; the starting voltage setting
range Us ranges from 40 to 100 %, and the ramp time tR can
be set from 0 to 20 s.
Integrated bypass contact system to minimize power loss
Setting with two potentiometers
Simple mounting and commissioning
Mains voltages 50/60 Hz, 200 to 480 V
Two control voltage versions 24 V AC/DC and 110 to
230 V AC/DC
Wide temperature range from -25 to +60 C
The built-in auxiliary contact ensures user-friendly control and
possible further processing within the system (for status
graphs see page 6/18).
Application
The 3RW30 soft starters are suitable for soft starting of threephase asynchronous motors.
Due to two-phase control, the current is kept at minimum values
in all three phases throughout the entire starting time. Due to
continuous voltage influencing, the current and torque peaks
which are unavoidable in the case of wye-delta starters for instance do not occur.
Application areas
See "Selection aid for soft starters", page 6/6.
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Type
3RW301.
3RW302.
3RW303.
3RW304.
mm
mm
45 x 95 x 151
45 x 117 x 151
45 x 125 x 151
45 x 150 x 151
55 x 144 x 168
55 x 144 x 168
70 x 160 x 186
70 x 160 x 186

Operation
Storage
C
C
-25 ... +60; (derating from +40)

-40 ... +80
Weight
kg
0.58
1.20
1.71

(auxiliary fan not available)
Installation type1)
0.69
Stand-alone installation

PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ

PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ

5 000
(derating from 1000, see "Characteristic Curves" page 6/7); higher on request
IP20 for 3RW301. and 3RW302.;
IP00 for 3RW303. and 3RW304.
1)
10
10
10
NSB0_01897
10
Please note derating information in case of deviations.

See the Manual in Chapter "Configuration":
Type
3RW301. , 3RW302.
3RW303., 3RW304.
V
%
24
20
24
20
Hz
%
50/60
10
Control electronics
Rated values
Tolerance
Terminal
A1/A2
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Type
110 ... 230

-15/+10
3RW301.
3RW302.
110 ... 230

-15/+10
3RW303.
3RW304.
Power electronics
Tolerance
V AC
%
200 ... 480

-15/+10
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Hz
%
50/60
10
Uninterrupted duty at 40 C (% of Ie)
115
Minimum load (% of Ie)
10 (at least 2 A)
Maximum cable length between soft starter and motor
300
Type
3RW3013
3RW3014
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
A
A
A
3.6
3.3
3
6.5
6
5.5
9
8
7
12.5
12
11
17.6
17
14
0.25
0.5
24
52
80
80
116
- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 3 s

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
3.6 / 3.3
200 / 150
6.5 / 6.0
87 / 60
9/8
50 / 50
12.5 / 12.0
85 / 70
17.6 / 17.0
62 / 46

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
3.6 / 3.3
150 / 100
6.5 / 6.0
64 / 46
9/8
35 /35
12.5 / 12.0
62 / 47
17.6 / 17.0
45 / 32
Power electronics
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
According to IEC and UL/CSA1), for individual mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
Power loss
In operation after completed starting with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 C) approx.
During starting with 300 % IM (40 C)
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
for normal starting (CLASS 10) at 40 C/50 C
1)
Measurement at 60 C according to UL/CSA not required.
2)
With 300 % IM, Tu = 40 C/50 C.
3)
For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 30 %, Tu = 40 C/50 C, standalone installation vertical. The quoted switching frequencies do not apply
for automatic mode.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/9
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D)
Screw terminals
Mechanics and environment
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Type
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
A
A
A
25.3
23
21
32.2
29
26
38
34
31
13
19
188
220
256

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
25 / 23
23 / 23
32 / 29
23 / 23
38 / 34
19 / 19

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
25 / 23
15 / 15
32 / 29
16 / 16
38 / 34
12 / 12
Power electronics
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
Power loss
2)
With 300 % IM, Tu = 40 C/50 C.
3)
for automatic mode. Factors for permissible switching frequency with deviating mounting position, direct mounting, side-by-side mounting.
1)
Type
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
3RW3046
3RW3047
A
A
A
45
42
39
65
58
53
72
62.1
60
80
73
66
106
98
90
12
15
12
21
316
444
500
576
768

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
45 / 42
38 / 38
63 / 58
23 / 23
72 / 62
22 / 22
80 / 73
22 / 22
106 / 108
15 / 15

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
45 / 42
26 / 26
63 / 58
15 / 15
72 / 62
15 /15
80 / 73
15 / 15
106 / 98
10 / 10
Power electronics
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
Power loss
1)
2)
With 300 % IM, Tu = 40 C/50 C.
3)
for automatic mode.
6/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Type
3RW3003-1CB54
3RW3003-2CB54
mm
mm
22.5 x 100 x 120

--
-22.5 x 101.6 x 120

Operation
Storage
C
C
-25 ... +60; (derating from +40)

-40 ... +80
Weight
kg
0.207
Screw terminals
0.188

10
10
10
NSB0_01897
10
5 000
(derating from 1 000, see "Characteristic Curves", page 6/7); higher on
request
IP20 (IP00 terminal compartment)

Rated values
Tolerance
V
%
24 ... 230 AC/DC

10
Rated frequency at AC
Tolerance
Hz
%
50/60
10

Tolerance
V AC
%
200 ... 400

10
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Hz
%
50/60
10
Uninterrupted duty (% of Ie)
100
Minimum load1) (% of Ie); at 40 C
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor
1002)
Control electronics
Power electronics

According to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting at 40/50/60 C, A
AC-53a
According to IEC and UL/CSA for side-by-side-mounting at
A
40/50/60 C, AC-53a
Power loss
At utilization of maximum switching frequency
3 / 2.6 / 2.2
2.6 / 2.2 / 1.8
6.5
Permissible starts per hour (cannot be increased by using a fan)

For intermittent duty S4 Tu = 40 C, stand-alone installation vertical.
ON period = 70 % for 300 % Ie
1/h
1/s
1 500
0.2
Dead time after uninterrupted duty

With Ie before restart
1)
The rated motor current (specified on the motor's name plate) should at
least amount to the specified percentage of the SIRIUS soft starter unit's
rated operational current Ie.
2)
If this value is exceeded, problems with line capacities may arise, which
can result in false firing.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/11
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Motor feeders with soft starters
The type of coordination according to which the motor feeder
with soft starter is mounted depends on the application-specific
requirements. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor starter protector/circuit breaker and soft starter) is sufficient.
If type of coordination "2" is to be fulfilled, then semiconductor
fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder.
ToC
ToC
Type of coordination "1" according to IEC 60947-4-1:

After a short-circuit incident, the unit is defective and
therefore unsuitable for further use (protection of persons and system guaranteed).
After a short-circuit incident the unit is suitable for
further use (protection of persons and system guaranteed).
The type of coordination refers to soft starters in
combination with the stipulated protective device
(motor starter protector/circuit breaker/fuse), not to
any additional components in the feeder.
The types of coordination are indicated in the
corresponding tables by the symbols shown
on orange backgrounds.
Fuseless version
Q1
M
3~
Motor starter protectors1)
Soft starters
ToC
Nominal
current
Q11
Type
NSB0_01935
Q11
400 V + 10 %
Rated current
Q1
Iq max
Type
kA

3RW3003
3RV2011-1EA
50
3RW3013
3RW3014
3.6
6.5
3RV2011-1FA
3RV2011-1HA
5
5
5
8
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
9
12.5
17.6
3RV2011-1JA
3RV2011-1KA
3RV2021-4BA
5
5
5
10
12.5
20
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
25
32
38
3RV2021-4DA
3RV2021-4EA
3RV2021-4FA
55
55
55
25
32
40
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
45
63
72
3RV1031-4GA10
3RV1041-4JA10
3RV1041-4KA10
20
20
20
45
63
75
3RW3046
3RW3047
80
106
3RV1041-4LA10
3RV1041-4MA10
11
11
90
100
1)
The rated motor current must be considered when selecting the devices.
6/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Fused version (line protection only)
F1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
NSB0_01936
Q11
Line protection, maximum

Nominal
current
F1
Type
Line contactors
Rated current Size
(optional)
Q21
Type
3RW30032)
3NA38053)
20
000
3RT2015
3RW3013
3RW3014
3.6
6.5
3NA3803-6
3NA3805-6
10
16
000
000
3RT2015
3RT2015
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
9
12.5
17.6
3NA3807-6
3NA3810-6
3NA3814-6
20
25
35
000
000
000
3RT2016
3RT2018
3RT2026
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
25
32
38
3NA3822-6
3NA3824-6
3NA3824-6
63
80
80
00
00
00
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
45
63
72
3NA3130-6
3NA3132-6
3NA3132-6
100
125
125
1
1
1
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RW3046
3RW3047
80
106
3NA3136-6
3NA3136-6
160
160
1
1
3RT1045
3RT1046
1)
The type of coordination "1" refers to soft starters in combination with the
stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit breaker/fuse),
not to any additional components in the feeder.
2)
3)
Type of coordination "1"1): Iq = 65 kA at 480 V + 10 %
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
3NA3805-1 (NH00), 5SB261 (DIAZED), 5SE2201-6 (NEOZED).
Fused version with 3NE1 SITOR fuses (semiconductor and line protection)
Matching fuse bases see
Catalog LV 10 "Switch Disconnectors" and
Catalog LV 10 "Fuse Systems"
"SITOR Semiconductor Fuses"
or visit www.siemens.com/sitor
F1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
NSB0_01937
Q11
All-range fuses
Nominal
current
F1
Type
Line contactors
Rated current Size
(optional)
Q21
Type

3RW30032)
3NE1813-03)
16
000
3RT2015
3RW3013
3RW3014
3.6
6.5
3NE1813-0
3NE1813-0
16
16
000
000
3RT2015
3RT2015
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
9
12.5
17.6
3NE1813-0
3NE1813-0
3NE1814-0
16
16
20
000
000
000
3RT2016
3RT2018
3RT2026
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
25
32
38
3NE1803-0
3NE1020-2
3NE1020-2
35
80
80
000
00
00
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
45
63
72
3NE1020-2
3NE1820-0
3NE1820-0
80
80
80
00
000
000
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RW3046
3RW3047
80
106
3NE1021-0
3NE1022-0
100
125
00
00
3RT1045
3RT1046
1)
stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/circuit breaker/fuse),
not to any additional components in the feeder.
2)
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
3)
No SITOR fuse required!

Alternatively: 3NA3803 (NH00), 5SB221 (DIAZED), 5SE2206 (NEOZED).
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/13
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Fused version with 3NE3 SITOR fuses (semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protector;
alternatively, installation with contactor and overload relay possible)
F1
F3
Q21
Q1
F3
Q11
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
M
3~
Semiconductor fuses, minimum

Nom. curr.
Rated current
F3
Type
NSB0_01939
M
3~
NSB0_01938
Q11
Semiconductor fuses, maximum

Size
Rated current
F3
Type

Size
Rated current
F3
Type
Size
1)
Type of coordination "2" : Iq = 65 kA at 480 V + 10 %

3RW30032)
3
---
--
--
--
--
3RW3013
3RW3014
3.6
6.5
---
---
---
---
---
---
3NE4101
3NE4101
32
32
0
0
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
9
12.5
17.6
----
----
----
--3NE3221
--100
--1
3NE4101
3NE4101
3NE4101
32
32
32
0
0
0
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
25
32
38
----
----
----
3NE3221
3NE3222
3NE3222
100
125
125
1
1
1
3NE4102
3NE4118
3NE4118
40
63
63
0
0
0
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
45
63
72
--3NE3221
--100
--1
3NE3224
3NE3225
3NE3227
160
200
250
1
1
1
3NE4120
3NE4121
--
80
100
--
0
0
--
3RW3046
3RW3047
80
106
3NE3222
3NE3224
125
160
1
1
3NE3225
3NE3231
200
350
1
1
---
---
---
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
Semiconductor fuses max.

Nom. curr.
F3
Type
Semiconductor fuses min.
Rated current Size

F3
Type
Rated current Size

F3
Type
Cylindrical fuses
Rated current Size

F3
Type
Rated
current
A

3RW30032)
--
--
--
3NE8015-1
25
00
3NE8015-1
25
00
3NC1010 10
3RW3013
3RW3014
3.6
6.5
---
---
---
3NE8015-1
3NE8015-1
25
25
00
00
3NE8015-1
3NE8015-1
25
25
00
00
3NC2220 20
3NC2220 20
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
9
12.5
17.6
----
----
----
3NE8015-1
3NE8015-1
3NE8003-1
25
25
35
00
00
00
3NE8015-1
3NE8018-1
3NE8021-1
25
63
100
00
00
00
3NC2220 20
3NC2250 50
3NC2263 63
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
25
32
38
3NE4117
3NE4118
3NE4118
50
63
63
0
0
0
3NE8017-1
3NE8018-1
3NE8020-1
50
63
80
00
00
00
3NE8021-1
3NE8022-1
3NE8022-1
100
125
125
00
00
00
3NC2263 63
3NC2280 80
3NC2280 80
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
45
63
72
3NE4120
3NE4121
--
80
100
--
0
0
--
3NE8020-1
3NE8021-1
3NE8022-1
80
100
125
00
00
00
3NE8024-1
3NE8024-1
3NE8024-1
160
160
160
00
00
00
3NC2280 80
-----
3RW3046
3RW3047
80
106
---
---
---
3NE8022-1
3NE8024-1
125
160
00
00
3NE8024-1
3NE8024-1
160
160
00
00
---
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
Nom. curr.
Line contactors
Motor starter protectors
(optional)
400 V + 10 %
Q21
Q1
Type
Rated current
Rated current Size

F1
Type

3RW30032)
3RT2015
3RV2011-1EA
3NA38053)
20
000
3RW3013
3RW3014
3.6
6.5
3RT2015
3RT2015
3RV2011-1FA
3RV2011-1HA
5
8
3NA3803-6
3NA3805-6
10
16
000
000
3RW3016
3RW3017
3RW3018
9
12.5
17.6
3RT2016
3RT2018
3RT2026
3RV2011-1JA
3RV2011-1KA
3RV2021-4BA
10
12.5
20
3NA3807-6
3NA3810-6
3NA3814-6
20
25
35
000
000
000
3RW3026
3RW3027
3RW3028
25
32
38
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
3RV2021-4DA
3RV2021-4EA
3RV2021-4FA
25
32
40
3NA3822-6
3NA3824-6
3NA3824-6
63
80
80
00
00
00
3RW3036
3RW3037
3RW3038
45
63
72
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RV1031-4GA10
3RV1041-4JA10
3RV1041-4KA10
45
63
75
3NA3130-6
3NA3132-6
3NA3132-6
100
125
125
1
1
1
3RW3046
80
3RT1045
3RV1041-4LA10
90
3RW3047
106
3RT1046
3RV1041-4MA10
100
stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/fuse), not to any
additional components in the feeder.
1)
6/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
3NA3136-6
160
3NA3136-6
160
Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.
3)
3NA3805-1 (NH00), 5SB261 (DIAZED).
2)
1
1
---
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
3RW301.
3RW302.
3RW303.
3RW304.
3RW ambient temperature 40 C
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
operational voltage Ue
current Ie 230 V
400 V
500 V
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
kW
kW
kW
hp
Size
hp
hp
hp
3RW3003-2CB54
DT1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
0.75
1.5
2.2
1.5
3
4
----
3
4.8
7.8
0.5
1
2
0.5
1
2
1.5
3
5
----
S00
S00
S00
A
A
A
3RW3013-@BB@4
3RW3014-@BB@4
3RW3016-@BB@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
12.5
17.6
3
4
5.5
7.5
---
11
17
3
3
3
3
7.5
10
---
S00
S00
A
A
3RW3017-@BB@4
3RW3018-@BB@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
25
32
38
5.5
7.5
11
11
15
18.5
----
23
29
34
5
7.5
10
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
----
S0
S0
S0
A
A
A
3RW3026-@BB@4
3RW3027-@BB@4
3RW3028-@BB@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
45
63
72
11
18.5
22
22
30
37
----
42
58
62
10
15
20
15
20
20
30
40
40
----
S2
S2
S2
A
A
A
3RW3036-@BB@4
3RW3037-@BB@4
3RW3038-@BB@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
80
106
22
30
45
55
---
73
98
20
30
25
30
50
75
---
S3
S3
A
A
3RW3046-@BB@4
3RW3047-@BB@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
Article No. supplement for connection types

With spring-type terminals2)
1
2
Article No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us

24 V AC/DC
110 ... 230 V AC/DC
0
1
Soft starters for easy starting conditions and high switching frequency,
rated operational voltage Ue 200 ... 400 V,
rated control supply voltage Us 24 ... 230 V AC/DC
3
0.55
1.1
--
2.6
0.5
0.5
--
--

22.5
mm
1)
2)
}
}
3RW3003-1CB54
3RW3003-2CB54
Soft starter with screw terminals: delivery time class } (preferred type).
Main circuit connection: screw terminals.
Note:
The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter
should always be designed on the basis of the required rated
operational current of the motor.
The SIRIUS 3RW30 solid-state soft starters are designed for
easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were
determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the
notes on page 6/6):
Maximum starting time in s: 3
Maximum starting current in % of motor current Ie: 300
Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 20
Stand-alone installation (side-by-side see manual,
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38752095)

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/15
Rated operational voltage Ue 200 ... 480 V

3.6
6.5
9
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
Accessories
Solid or Finely
stranded stranded
with end
sleeve
TightenFor
ing torque soft starters
AWG
size
cables,
solid or
stranded
mm
AWG
mm
DT
Article No.
3RV2925-5AB
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41E
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RT1946-4F
1 unit
41B
B
}
3RT1936-4EA2
3RT1946-4EA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3RT1946-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Nm

2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4
3 ... 4
S00
(3RW301.)
S0
(3RW302.)
3RV2925-5AB
For soft starters

Type
Size
Price
per PU
Auxiliary terminals

3RW304.
S3
Covers for soft starters

Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box
terminals (2 units required per device)
3RW303.
3RW304.
S2
S3
Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections

For complying with the voltage clearances and as touch
protection if box terminal is removed
(2 units required per device)
3RW304.
S3
3RT1946-4EA1
Manual 3RW30/3RW401)
1)
The operating instructions for 3RW30 (3ZX1012-0RW30-2DA1) are

included in the scope of supply of the soft starter or are available like the
manual as a PDF download from the Service&Support portal at
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support. Search the section
"Switching Devices" "Soft Starters and Solid-State Switching Devices"
"SIRIUS 3RW Soft Starters".
6/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
For soft starters
Type

Size
DT
Article No.
Size
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules to motor starter protectors1)

3RW301.
S00
S00
3RA2921-1BA00
1 unit
41B
3RW302.
S0
S00/S0
3RA2921-1BA00
1 unit
41B
3RW3036.
S2
S2
3RA1931-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3RW3046.,
3RW3047.
S3
S3
3RA1941-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3RA2921-1BA00
3RW301.
S00
S00
3RA2911-2GA00
1 unit
41B
3RW302.
S0
S0
3RA2921-2GA00
1 unit
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA2921-2GA00
Can be used in size S0 up to maximum 32 A.
Can be used in size S00/S0 only for 3RV2 motor starter protectors.
Version
Functionality
Functions
1)
Use
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
Covers and push-in lugs (only for 3RW30 03)

Sealable covers For securing against For devices B
unauthorized adjust- with 1 or 2
ment of setting knobs CO contacts
3RP1902
5 units
41H
For devices B
with 1 or 2
CO contacts
3RP1903
1 10 units
41H
Push-in lugs
For screw fixings
3RP1902
3RP1903
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
Tool for opening spring-type terminals

in sizes S00 and S0
A
3RA2908-1A
20 mm x 7 mm, titanium gray
3RT2900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
20 mm x 7 mm, pastel turquoise
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
Screwdrivers
For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals
length approx. 200 mm, 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
3RA2908-1A
Blank labels
IC01_00181
Unit labeling plates1)

For SIRIUS devices
NSB0_01429b
3RT2900-1SB20
3RT1900-1SB20
1)
PC labeling systems for individual inscription of unit labeling plates are available from:
murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH (see Chapter 16, "Appendix" "External Partners").

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/17
Siemens AG 2013

3RW30
More information
Application examples for normal starting (CLASS 10)
Normal starting CLASS 10 (up to 20 s with 300% In motor, one start per hour)
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used
Application
Conveyor belts
Roller conveyors Compressors
Small fans1)
Pumps
Hydraulic pumps
70
10
60
10
40
20
40
10
40
10
Starting parameters
Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Starting voltage
- Starting time
50
20
Note:
These tables present sample set values and device dimensions.
They are intended only for the purposes of information and are
not binding. The set values depend on the application in question and must be optimized during commissioning.
The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary
with the help of Technical Assistance.
Status graphs
U
UN
US
The 3RW solid-state motor controllers are designed for easy

starting conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or increased switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a
larger device.
If necessary, an overload relay for heavy starting must be selected where long starting times are involved. PTC sensors are
recommended.
No capacitive elements are permitted in the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the motor (e.g. no reactive-power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static
systems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC
(Power Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during
starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to
prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the
soft starter.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses, controls and overload relays) should be dimensioned for direct starting, following
the local short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload
relays must be ordered separately. Please observe the maximum switching frequencies specified in the technical specifications.
Note:
When three-phase motors are switched on, voltage drops occur
as a rule on starters of all types (direct-on-line starters, wye-delta
starters, soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimensioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer
is dimensioned with only a small margin, it is best for the control
voltage to be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of
the main voltage) in order to avoid the potential switching off of
the soft starter.
Schematic circuit diagram of power electronics
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
NSB0_01940
Configuration
A bypass contact system is already integrated in the 3RW30 soft starter

and therefore does not have to be ordered separately.
6/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
t R on
t R on
ON 13/14
NSB0_01941
1)
%
s
Manual for SIRIUS 3RW30/40

In addition to relevant configuration, commissioning, and service
information, the manual also contains example circuits and technical specifications for all devices:
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have all the same advantages as the
3RW30 soft starters.
The SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters are characterized above all by
their small space requirements. Integrated bypass contacts
mean that no power loss has to be taken into the bargain at the
power semiconductors (thyristors) after the motor has started
up. This cuts down on heat losses, enabling a more compact
design and making external bypass circuits superfluous.
At the same time this soft starter comes with additional integrated functions such as adjustable current limiting, motor overload and intrinsic device protection, and optional thermistor motor protection. The higher the motor rating, the more important
these functions because they make it unnecessary to purchase
and install protection equipment such as overload relays.
Internal intrinsic device protection prevents the thermal overloading of the thyristors and the power section defects this can
cause. As an option the thyristors can also be protected by semiconductor fuses from short-circuiting.
Thanks to integrated status monitoring and fault monitoring, this
compact soft starter offers many different diagnostics options.
Up to four LEDs and relay outputs permit differentiated monitoring and diagnostics of the operating mechanism by indicating
the operating state as well as for example mains or phase failure,
missing load, non-permissible tripping time/CLASS setting,
thermal overloading or device faults.
Soft starters rated up to 250 kW (at 400 V) for standard applications in three-phase networks are available. Extremely small
sizes, low power losses and simple start-up are just three of the
many advantages of the SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters.
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to
ATEX directive 94/9/EC
The 3RW40 soft starter sizes S0 to S12 are suitable for the
starting of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type of
protection EEx e.
Functionality
The space required by the compact SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starter
is often only about one third of that required by a contactor assembly for wye-delta starting of comparable rating. This not only
saves space in the control cabinet and on the standard mounting rail but also does away completely with the wiring work
needed for wye-delta starters. This is notable in particular for
higher motor ratings which are only rarely available as fully wired
solutions.
At the same time the number of cables from the starter to the motor is reduced from six to three. Compact dimensions, short
start-up times, easy wiring and fast commissioning make themselves felt as clear-cut cost advantages.
The bypass contacts of these soft starters are protected during
operation by an integrated solid-state arc quenching system.
This prevents damage to the bypass contacts in the event of a
fault, e.g. brief disconnection of the control voltage, mechanical
shocks or life-related component defects on the coil operating
mechanism or main contact spring.
The starting current of particularly powerful operating mechanisms can place an unjustifiable load on the local supply system.
Soft starters reduce this starting current by means of their voltage ramp. Thanks to the adjustable current limiting, the SIRIUS
3RW40 soft starter takes even more pressure off the supply system. It leaves the set start ramp during the ramp-up the ramp
gradient is fixed by the starting voltage and the ramp time as
soon as the selected current limit is reached. From this moment
the voltage of the soft starter is controlled so that the current supplied to the motor remains constant. This process is ended either
by completion of the motor ramp-up or by tripping by the intrinsic device protection or the motor overload protection. As the
result of this function the actual motor ramp-up can well take
longer than the ramp time selected on the soft starter.
Thanks to the integrated motor overload protection according to

IEC 60947-4-2, there is no need for an additional overload relay
on the new soft starters. The rated motor current, the setting of
the overload tripping time (CLASS times) and the reset of the
motor overload protection function can be adjusted easily and
quickly. Using a 4-step rotary potentiometer it is possible to set
different overload tripping times on the soft starter. In addition to
CLASS 10, 15 and 20 it is also possible to switch off the motor
overload protection if a different motor management control device is to be used for this function, e.g. with connection to
PROFIBUS.
Device versions with thermistor motor protection evaluation are
available up to a rating of 55 kW (at 400 V). A "Thermoclick" measuring probe can be connected directly, as can a PTC of type A.
Thermal overloading of the motor, open circuits and short circuits in the sensor circuit all result in the direct disconnection of
the soft starter. And if ever the soft starter trips, various reset
options are available the same as with intrinsic device protection
and motor load protection: manually with the reset button, automatically or remotely through brief disconnection of the control
voltage.
The new series of devices comes with the "polarity balancing"
control method, which is designed to prevent direct current components in two-phase controlled soft starters. On two-phase
controlled soft starters the current resulting from superimposition
of the two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase.
This results for physical reasons in an asymmetric distribution of
the three phase currents during the motor ramp-up. This phenomenon cannot be influenced, but in most applications it is
non-critical.
Controlling the power semiconductors results not only in this
asymmetry, however, but also in the previously mentioned direct
current components which can cause severe noise generation
on the motor at starting voltages of less than 50 %.
The control method used for these soft starters eliminates these
direct current components during the ramp-up phase and prevents the braking torque which they can cause. It creates a motor ramp-up that is uniform in speed, torque and current rise,
thus permitting a particularly gentle, two-phase starting of the
motors. At the same time the acoustic quality of the starting operation comes close to the quality of a three-phase controlled
soft starter. This is made possible by the on-going dynamic harmonizing and balancing of current half-waves of different polarity during the motor ramp-up. Hence the name "polarity balancing".
Application
The SIRIUS 3RW40 solid-state soft starters are used for the soft
starting and stopping of three-phase asynchronous motors.
Due to two-phase control, the current is kept at minimum values
in all three phases throughout the entire starting time and disturbing direct current components are eliminated in addition.
This not only enables the two-phase starting of motors up to
250 kW (at 400 V) but also avoids the current and torque peaks
which occur e.g. with wye-delta starters.
Application areas
See "Selection aid for soft starters" on page 6/6.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/19
Overview
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Type
3RW402.
3RW403.
3RW404.
3RW405.
3RW407.

Screw terminals
45 x 125 x 154 55 x 144 x 170 70 x 160 x 188 120 x 198 x 250 160 x 230 x 278
45 x 150 x 154 55 x 144 x 170 70 x 160 x 188 120 x 198 x 250 160 x 230 x 278

Operation
Storage
C
C
-25 ... +60; (derating from +40)

-40 ... +80
Weight
kg
0.77
mm
mm
1.35
1.9
4.9 (.55.)
6.9 (.56.)
8.9
With auxiliary fan

(for 3RW402. ... 3RW404.)
22,5 22,5
90
90
Without auxiliary fan

(for 3RW402. ... 3RW404.)
6
Installation type1)
-- (fan integrated in the soft

starter)
10
10
10
NSB0_01897
10
NSB0_00649a
3RW402.
3RW405., 3RW407.

PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ
3RW403., 3RW404.

B

5 000
(derating from 1000, see "Characteristic Curves" page 6/7); higher on request
IP20 for 3RW402.; all others IP00
1)
PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ

Please note derating information in case of deviations.

Type
3RW402., 3RW403., 3RW404.
3RW405., 3RW407.
V
%
24 DC/AC 110 ... 230 AC/DC

20
-15/+10
115 AC 230 AC
-15/+10
Hz
%
50/60
10
Control electronics
Rated values
Tolerance
Terminal
A1/A2
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Type
3RW402.-. .B.4,
3RW403.-. .B.4,
3RW404.-. .B.4
3RW402.-. .B.5,
3RW403.-. .B.5,
3RW404.-. .B.5
3RW405.-.BB.4,
3RW407.-.BB.4
3RW405.-.BB.5,
3RW407.-.BB.5
400 ... 600

-15/+10
200 ... 460

-15/+10
400 ... 600

-15/+10
1 400
1 800
Power electronics
Tolerance
V AC
%
200 ... 480

-15/+10
Maximum blocking voltage (thyristor)
V AC
1 600
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Hz
%
50/60
10
115
Minimum load (% of minimum selectable rated motor current IM)
20 (at least 2 A)
300
6/20
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Type
3RW4024
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
Power electronics
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
A
A
A
12.5
11
10
25.3
23
21
32.2
29
26
38
34
31
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM

For the motor overload protection
10
17
23
13
19
68
188
220
256
For normal starting (CLASS 10)

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
12.5 / 11
50 / 50
25 / 23
23 / 23
32 / 29
23 / 23
38 / 34
19 / 19

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
12.5 / 11
36 / 36
25 / 23
15 / 15
32 / 29
16 / 16
38 / 34
12 / 12
For heavy starting (CLASS 15)

- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 4.5 s
- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
11 / 10
49 / 49
23 / 21
21 / 21
30 / 27
18 / 18
34 / 31
18 / 18

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
11 / 10
36 / 36
23 / 21
14 / 14
30 / 27
13 / 13
34 / 31
13 / 13

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
10 / 9
47 / 47
21 / 19
21 / 21
27 / 24
20 / 20
31 / 28
18 / 18

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
10 / 9
34 / 34
21 / 19
15 / 15
27 / 24
14 / 14
31 / 28
13 / 13
Power loss
During starting with current limit set to
300 % IM (40 C)
1)
2)
Current limit on soft starter set to 300 % IM, Tu = 40 C/50 C. Maximum

adjustable rated motor current IM dependent on CLASS setting.
3)
Type
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour at 40 C / 50 C
for automatic mode. Factors for permissible switching frequency in other
mounting position, direct mounting, side-by-side mounting, and implementation of optional auxiliary fan. See the Manual in Chapter "Configuration":
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
3RW4046
3RW4047
Power electronics
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
A
A
A
45
42
39
63
58
53
72
62.1
60
80
73
66
106
98
90

23
26
35
43
46
12
15
12
21
316
444
500
576
768

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
45 / 42
38 / 38
63 / 58
23 / 23
72 / 62
22 / 22
80 / 73
22 / 22
106 / 98
15 / 15

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
45 / 42
26 / 26
63 / 58
15 / 15
72 / 62
15 / 15
80 / 73
15 / 15
106 / 98
10 / 10

- Rated motor current IM2), starting time 4.5 s
- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
42 / 38
30 / 30
50 / 46
34 / 34
56 / 52
34 / 34
70 / 64
24 / 24
84 / 77
23 / 23

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
42 / 38
21 / 21
50 / 46
24 / 24
56 / 52
24 / 24
70 / 64
16 / 16
84 / 77
17 / 17

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
38 / 34
30 / 30
46 / 42
31 / 31
50 / 46
34 / 34
64 / 58
23 / 23
77 / 70
23 / 23

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
38 / 34
21 / 21
46 / 42
22 / 22
50 / 46
24 / 24
64 / 58
16 / 16
77 / 70
16 / 16
Power loss
300 % IM (40 C)
1)
2)

3)
for automatic mode. Factors for permissible switching frequency in other
mounting position, direct mounting, side-by-side mounting, and implementation of optional auxiliary fan. See the Manual in Chapter "Configuration":
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/21
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Type
3RW4055
3RW4056
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
Power electronics
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
A
A
A
134
117
100
162
145
125
230
205
180
280
248
215
356
315
280
432
385
335

59
87
80
130
131
207
60
75
75
90
125
165
1043
1355
2448
3257
3277
3600

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
134 / 117
20 / 20
162 / 145
8/8
230 / 205
14 / 14
280 / 248
20 / 20
356 / 315
16 / 16
432 / 385
17 / 17

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
134 / 117
7/7
162 / 145
1.4 / 1.4
230 / 205
3/3
280 / 248
8/8
356 / 315
5/5
432 / 385
5/5

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
134 / 117
11 / 11
152 / 140
8/8
210 / 200
11 / 11
250 / 220
13 / 13
341 / 315
11 / 11
402 / 385
12 / 12

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
134 / 117
1.2 / 1.2
152 / 140
1.7 / 1.7
210 / 200
1/1
250 / 220
6/6
341 / 315
2/2
402 / 385
2/2

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
124 / 112
12 /12
142 / 132
9/9
200 / 185
10 / 10
230 / 205
10 / 10
311 / 280
10 / 10
372 / 340
10 / 10

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
124 / 112
2/2
142 / 132
2/2
200 / 185
1/1
230 / 205
5/5
311 / 280
1/1
372 /340
1/1
Power loss
350 %2) IM (40 C)
1)
2)

3)
for automatic mode.
6/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
ToC

requirements. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor starter protector and soft starter) is sufficient.
If type of coordination "2" is to be fulfilled, then semiconductor

fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder.
ToC

further use (protection of persons and system guaranteed).
Fuseless version
Q1
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Nominal
current
Q11
Type
NSB0_01902
Q11
400 V + 10 %
400 V + 10 %
Rated current
575 V + 10 %
Rated current
Q1
Q1
Iq max
Q1
Iq max
Type
Type
kA
Type
kA
3RV2321-4AC/
3RV2311-4AC
(in size S00)
3RV2321-4DC
3RV2321-4EC
3RV2321-4FC
55
16
--
--
--
55
55
55
25
32
40
----
----
----

3RW4024
12.5
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
25
32
38
3RV2021-4AA/
3RV2011-4AA
(in size S00)
3RV2021-4DA
3RV2021-4EA
3RV2021-4FA
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
45
63
72
3RV1031-4GA10
3RV1041-4JA10
3RV1041-4KA10
3RV1331-4GC10
3RV1341-4JC10
3RV1341-4KC10
20
20
20
45
63
75
----
----
----
3RW4046
3RW4047
80
106
3RV1041-4LA10
3RV1041-4MA10
3RV1341-4LC10
3RV1341-4MC10
11
11
90
100
---
---
---
3RW4055
3RW4056
134
162
3VL3720-2DC36
3VL3720-2DC36
---
35
35
200
200
3VL3720-1DC36
3VL3720-1DC36
12
12
200
200
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
230
280
356
432
3VL4731-2DC36
3VL4731-2DC36
3VL4740-2DC36
3VL5750-2DC36
-----
65
65
65
65
315
315
400
500
3VL5731-3DC36
3VL5731-3DC36
3VL5740-3DC36
3VL5750-3DC36
35
35
35
35
315
315
400
500
1)
3RV13/3RV23 motor starter protectors are designed for starter combinations (without motor protection). Motor protection is provided in this case
by the 3RW40 soft starter.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/23
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Fused version (line protection only)
F1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type

Nominal
current
F1
Type
Type of coordination
"1"1):
Line contactors
Rated current Size
(optional)
Q21
Type
Iq = 65 kA at 600 V + 5 %
3RW4024
12.5
3NA3 820-6
50
00
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
25
32
38
3NA3822-6
3NA3824-6
3NA3824-6
63
80
80
00
00
00
3RT2025/
3RT2018
(in size S00)
3RT20 26
3RT20 27
3RT2028
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
45
63
72
3NA3130-6
3NA3132-6
3NA3132-6
100
125
125
1
1
1
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RW4046
3RW4047
80
106
3NA3136-6
3NA3136-6
160
160
1
1
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RW4055
3RW4056
134
162
3NA3244-6
3NA3244-6
250
250
2
2
3RT1055-6A.36
3RT1056-6A.36
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
230
280
356
432
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 355
2 x 355
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3
3
3RT1065-6A.36
3RT1066-6A.36
3RT1075-6A.36
3RT1076-6A.36
1)
stipulated protective device (motor starter protector/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder.
Fused version with 3NE1 SITOR fuses (semiconductor and line protection)
F1
Q21
Q11
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
NSB0_01905
NSB0_01904
Q11
All-range fuses
Nominal
current
A
F1
Type
Line contactors
Rated current Size
(optional)
Q21
Type

3RW4024
12.5
3NE1814-0
20
000
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
25
32
38
3NE1803-0
3NE1020-2
3NE1020-2
35
80
80
000
00
00
3RT2025/
3RT2018
(in size S00)
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
45
63
72
3NE1020-2
3NE1820-0
3NE1820-0
80
80
80
00
000
000
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RW4046
3RW4047
80
106
3NE1021-0
3NE1022-0
100
125
00
00
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RW4055
3RW4056
134
162
3NE1227-2
3NE1227-2
250
250
1
1
3RT1055-6A.36
3RT1056-6A.36
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
230
280
356
432
3NE1331-2
3NE1333-2
3NE1334-2
3NE1435-2
350
450
500
560
2
2
2
3
3RT1065-6A.36
3RT1066-6A.36
3RT1075-6A.36
3RT1076-6A.36
1)
The type of coordination "2" refers to soft starters in combination with the stipulated protective device
(motor starter protector/fuse), not to any additional components in the feeder.
6/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Fused version with 3NE3 SITOR fuses (semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protector;
alternatively, installation with contactor and overload relay possible)
F1
F3
Q21
Q1
F3
Q11
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
M
3~

Nom. curr.
A
Rated current
F3
Type
NSB0_01906
M
3~
NSB0_01903
Q11

Size
Rated current
F3
Type

Size
Rated current
F3
Type
Size
3RW4024
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
12.5
25
32
38
-----
-----
-----
-3NE3221
3NE3224
3NE3224
-100
160
160
-1
1
1
3NE4101
3NE4102
3NE4118
3NE4118
32
40
63
63
0
0
0
0
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
45
63
72
--3NE3221
--100
--1
3NE3224
3NE3225
3NE3227
160
200
250
1
1
1
3NE4120
3NE4121
--
80
100
--
0
0
--
3RW4046
3RW4047
80
106
3NE3222
3NE3224
125
160
1
1
3NE3225
3NE3231
200
350
1
1
---
---
---
3RW4055
3RW4056
134
162
3NE3227
3NE3227
250
250
1
1
3NE3335
3NE3335
560
560
2
2
---
---
---
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
230
280
356
432
3NE3232-0B
3NE3233
3NE3335
3NE3337-8
400
450
560
710
1
1
2
2
3NE3333
3NE3336
3NE3336
3NE3340-8
450
630
630
900
2
2
2
2
-----
-----
-----
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type

Nom. curr.
A
Semiconductor fuses min.
Rated current Size

F3
Type
F3
Type
Rated current Size

A
Cylindrical fuses
Rated current Size

F3
Type
F3
Type
Rated
current
A
Type of coordination "2"1): Iq = 65 kA at 600 V + 5 % (1) see previous page)

3RW4024
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
12.5
25
32
38
3NE4117
3NE4117
3NE4118
3NE4118
50
50
63
63
0
0
0
0
3NE8015-1
3NE8017-1
3NE8018-1
3NE8020-1
25
50
63
80
00
00
00
00
3NE8017-1
3NE8021-1
3NE8022-1
3NE8024-1
50
100
125
160
00
00
00
00
3NC2240
3NC2263
3NC2280
3NC2280
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
45
63
72
3NE4120
3NE4121
--
80
100
--
0
0
--
3NE8020-1
3NE8021-1
3NE8022-1
80
100
125
00
00
00
3NE8024-1
3NE8024-1
3NE8024-1
160
160
160
00
00
00
3NC2280 80
-----
3RW4046
3RW4047
80
106
---
---
---
3NE8022-1
3NE8024-1
125
160
00
00
3NE8024-1
3NE8024-1
160
160
00
00
---
---
3RW4055
3RW4056
134
162
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
230
280
356
432
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
Line contactors
Nom. curr.
(optional)
400 V + 10 %
Q21
Type
Q1
Type
Rated current 575 V + 10 %

A
40
63
80
80
Q1
Type
Rated current
Rated current Size
F1
Type

3RW4024
12.5
3RV2021-4AA/
3RV2011-4AA
(in size S00)
3RV2021-4DA
3RV2021-4EA
3RV2021-4FA
16
--
--
3NA3820-6
50
00
25
32
38
3RT2025/
3RT2018
(in size S00)
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
3RW4026
3RW4027
3RW4028
25
32
40
----
----
3NA3822-6
3NA3824-6
3NA3824-6
63
80
80
00
00
00
3RW4036
3RW4037
3RW4038
45
63
72
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RV1031-4GA10
3RV1041-4JA10
3RV1041-4KA10
45
63
75
----
----
3NA3130-6
3NA3132-6
3NA3132-6
100
125
125
1
1
1
3RW4046
3RW4047
80
106
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RV1041-4LA10
3RV1041-4MA10
90
100
---
---
3NA3136-6
3NA3136-6
160
160
1
1
3RW4055
3RW4056
134
162
3RT1055-6A.36
3RT1056-6A.36
3VL3720
3VL3720
200
200
3VL3720
3VL3720
200
200
3NA3244-6
3NA3244-6
250
250
2
2
3RW4073
3RW4074
3RW4075
3RW4076
230
280
356
432
3RT1065-6A.36
3RT1066-6A.36
3RT1075-6A.36
3RT1076-6A.36
3VL4731
3VL4731
3VL4740
3VL5750
315
315
400
500
3VL5731
3VL5731
3VL5740
3VL5750
315
315
400
500
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 355
2 x 355
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3
3
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/25
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40

SIRIUS 3RW40 for normal starting (CLASS 10)
3RW402.
3RW403.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 230 V
400 V
500 V
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
kW
kW
kW
hp
3RW404.
Size
hp
hp
hp
DT
1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU

12.5
25
32
38
3
5.5
7.5
11
5.5
11
15
18.5
-----
11
23
29
34
3
5
7.5
10
3
5
7.5
10
7.5
15
20
25
-----
S0
S0
S0
S0
A
A
A
A
3RW4024-@BB@4
3RW4026-@BB@4
3RW4027-@BB@4
3RW4028-@BB@4
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
42G
45
63
72
11
18.5
22
22
30
37
----
42
58
62
10
15
20
15
20
20
30
40
40
----
S2
S2
S2
A
A
A
3RW4036-@BB@4
3RW4037-@BB@4
3RW4038-@BB@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
80
106
22
30
45
55
---
73
98
20
30
25
30
50
75
---
S3
S3
A
A
3RW4046-@BB@4
3RW4047-@BB@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G

12.5
25
32
38
-----
5.5
11
15
18.5
7.5
15
18.5
22
11
23
29
34
-----
-----
7.5
15
20
25
10
20
25
30
S0
S0
S0
S0
B
B
B
B
3RW4024-@BB@5
3RW4026-@BB@5
3RW4027-@BB@5
3RW4028-@BB@5
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
42G
45
63
72
----
22
30
37
30
37
45
42
58
62
----
----
30
40
40
40
50
60
S2
S2
S2
B
B
B
3RW4036-@BB@5
3RW4037-@BB@5
3RW4038-@BB@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
80
106
---
45
55
55
75
73
98
---
---
50
75
60
75
S3
S3
B
B
3RW4046-@BB@5
3RW4047-@BB@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G

1
2

24 V AC/DC
110 ... 230 V AC/DC
0
1

1)
Soft starter Ue 200 ... 480 V with screw terminals:

delivery time class } (preferred type).
2) Main circuit connection: screw terminals.
Note:
The 3RW40 soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the
following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page 6/6):
Stand-alone installation without auxiliary fan
(Side-by-side see manual,
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38752095,
Increase of switching frequency possible with an auxiliary fan)
6/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
3RW402.
3RW403.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 230 V
400 V
500 V
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
kW
kW
kW
hp
3RW404.
Size
hp
hp
hp
DT
1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
12.5
25
32
38
3
5.5
7.5
11
5.5
11
15
18.5
-----
11
23
29
34
3
5
7.5
10
3
5
7.5
10
7.5
15
20
25
-----
S0
S0
S0
S0
B
B
B
B
3RW4024-@TB04
3RW4026-@TB04
3RW4027-@TB04
3RW4028-@TB04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
42G
45
63
72
11
18.5
22
22
30
37
----
42
58
62
10
15
20
15
20
20
30
40
40
----
S2
S2
S2
B
B
B
3RW4036-@TB04
3RW4037-@TB04
3RW4038-@TB04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
80
106
22
30
45
55
---
73
98
20
30
25
30
50
75
---
S3
S3
B
B
3RW4046-@TB04
3RW4047-@TB04
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
Rated operational voltage Ue 400 ... 600 V,

with thermistor motor protection,
rated control supply voltage Us 24 V AC/DC
12.5
25
32
38
-----
5.5
11
15
18.5
7.5
15
18.5
22
11
23
29
34
-----
-----
7.5
15
20
25
10
20
25
30
S0
S0
S0
S0
B
B
B
B
3RW4024-@TB05
3RW4026-@TB05
3RW4027-@TB05
3RW4028-@TB05
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
42G
45
63
72
----
22
30
37
30
37
45
42
58
62
----
----
30
40
40
40
50
60
S2
S2
S2
B
B
B
3RW4036-@TB05
3RW4037-@TB05
3RW4038-@TB05
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
42G
80
106
---
45
55
55
75
73
98
---
---
50
75
60
75
S3
S3
B
B
3RW4046-@TB05
3RW4047-@TB05
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G

1
2

1)
2)

Note:

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/27

Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
3RW405.
3RW407.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 230 V
400 V
500 V
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
kW
kW
kW
hp
Size
hp
hp
hp
DT1) Normal starting (CLASS 10)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU

134
162
37
45
75
90
---
117
145
30
40
40
50
75
100
---
S6
B
B
3RW4055-@BB@4
3RW4056-@BB@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
230
280
75
90
132
160
---
205
248
60
75
75
100
150
200
---
S12
B
B
3RW4073-@BB@4
3RW4074-@BB@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
356
432
110
132
200
250
---
315
385
100
125
125
150
250
300
---
B
B
3RW4075-@BB@4
3RW4076-@BB@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G

134
162
---
75
90
90
110
117
145
---
---
75
100
100
150
S6
B
B
3RW4055-@BB@5
3RW4056-@BB@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
230
280
---
132
160
160
200
205
248
---
---
150
200
200
250
S12
B
B
3RW4073-@BB@5
3RW4074-@BB@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
356
432
---
200
250
250
315
315
385
---
---
250
300
300
400
B
B
3RW4075-@BB@5
3RW4076-@BB@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
Article No. supplement for connection type2)

2
6
Article No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us3)

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

Soft starter Ue 400 ... 600 V with screw terminals: delivery time class A.
2) Main circuit connection: busbar connection.
3)
Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control via PLC
possible.
Note:
Stand-alone installation (side-by-side see manual,
which is tailored exactly to the application see manual.
6/28
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
SIRIUS 3RW40 for heavy starting (CLASS 20)
3RW402.
3RW403.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 230 V
400 V
500 V
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
kW
kW
kW
hp
Size
hp
hp
hp
3RW404.
DT
1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
5.5
--
11
7.5
--
S0
3RW4026-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
25
5.5
11
--
23
15
--
S0
3RW4027-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
32
7.5
15
--
29
7.5
7.5
20
--
S2
3RW4036-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
38
11
18.5
--
34
10
10
25
--
S2
3RW4037-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
45
11
22
--
42
10
15
30
--
S2
3RW4037-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
63
18.5
30
--
58
15
20
40
--
S3
3RW4047-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
72
22
37
--
62
20
20
40
--
S3
3RW4047-@BB@4
1 unit
42G

12.5
--
5.5
7.5
11
--
--
7.5
10
S0
3RW4026-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
25
--
11
15
23
--
--
15
20
S0
3RW4027-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
32
--
15
18.5
29
--
--
20
25
S2
3RW4036-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
38
--
18.5
22
34
--
--
25
30
S2
3RW4037-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
45
--
22
30
42
--
--
30
40
S2
3RW4037-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
63
--
30
37
58
--
--
40
50
S3
3RW4047-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
72
--
37
45
62
--
--
40
60
S3
3RW4047-@BB@5
1 unit
42G

1
2

24 V AC/DC
110 ... 230 V AC/DC
0
1

1)
2)

Note:

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/29

12.5
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
3RW402.
3RW403.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 230 V
400 V
500 V
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
kW
kW
kW
hp
Size
hp
hp
hp
3RW404.
DT
1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU

12.5
5.5
--
11
7.5
--
S0
3RW4026-@TB04
1 unit
42G
25
5.5
11
--
23
15
--
S0
3RW4027-@TB04
1 unit
42G
32
7.5
15
--
29
7.5
7.5
20
--
S2
3RW4036-@TB04
1 unit
42G
38
11
18.5
--
34
10
10
25
--
S2
3RW4037-@TB04
1 unit
42G
45
11
22
--
42
10
15
30
--
S2
3RW4037-@TB04
1 unit
42G
63
18.5
30
--
58
15
20
40
--
S3
3RW4047-@TB04
1 unit
42G
72
22
37
--
62
20
20
40
--
S3
3RW4047-@TB04
1 unit
42G

12.5
--
5.5
7.5
11
--
--
7.5
10
S0
3RW4026-@TB05
1 unit
42G
25
--
11
15
23
--
--
15
20
S0
3RW4027-@TB05
1 unit
42G
32
--
15
18.5
29
--
--
20
25
S2
3RW4036-@TB05
1 unit
42G
38
--
18.5
22
34
--
--
25
30
S2
3RW4037-@TB05
1 unit
42G
45
--
22
30
42
--
--
30
40
S2
3RW4037-@TB05
1 unit
42G
63
--
30
37
58
--
--
40
50
S3
3RW4047-@TB05
1 unit
42G
72
--
37
45
62
--
--
40
60
S3
3RW4047-@TB05
1 unit
42G

1
2

1)
2)

Note:
6/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
)
3RW405.
3RW407.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V
400 V
500 V
kW
kW
kW
Size
DT1) Heavy starting (CLASS 20)
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
hp
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU
22
45
--
73
20
25
50
--
S6
3RW4055-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
106
30
55
--
98
25
30
60
--
S6
3RW4055-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
134
37
75
--
117
30
40
75
--
S6
3RW4056-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
162
45
90
--
145
40
50
100
--
S12
3RW4073-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
230
75
132
--
205
60
75
150
--
S12
3RW4074-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
280
90
160
--
248
75
100
200
--
S12
3RW4075-@BB@4
1 unit
42G
356
110
200
--
315
100
125
250
--
S12
3RW4076-@BB@4
1 unit
42G

80
--
45
55
73
--
--
50
60
S6
3RW4055-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
106
--
55
75
98
--
--
60
75
S6
3RW4055-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
134
--
75
90
117
--
--
75
100
S6
3RW4056-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
162
--
90
110
145
--
--
100
150
S12
3RW4073-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
230
--
132
160
205
--
--
150
200
S12
3RW4074-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
280
--
160
200
248
--
--
200
250
S12
3RW4075-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
356
--
200
250
315
--
--
250
300
S12
3RW4076-@BB@5
1 unit
42G
Article No. supplement for connection type2)

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

Soft starter Ue 400 ... 600 V with screw terminals: delivery time class A.
2) Main circuit connection: busbar connection.
3)
possible.
Note:
(side-by-side see manual,


Siemens IC 10 2014
6/31

80
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Accessories
Tighten- For
DT
ing
soft starters
torque
size
Solid or
stranded
Finely
stranded
with end
sleeve
AWG
cables,
solid or
stranded
mm
mm
AWG
Nm
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 4
3 ... 4
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41E
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

2.5 ... 25
3RV2925-5AB
DT
Article No.
}
}
3RT1955-4G
3RT1956-4G
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Auxiliary conductor connection B

for box terminals
3TX7500-0A
1 unit
41B
Up to 240 mm2
(with auxiliary conductor
connection)
3RT1966-4G
1 unit
41B
3RT1946-4F
1 unit
41B
S0
(3RW402.)
3RV2925-5AB
For soft starters

Type
Version
Size
Price
per PU
Box terminal blocks for soft starters
For round and ribbon cables

(2 units required for each device)
3RW405.
3RW407.
S6
S12
Up to 70 mm2
Up to 120 mm2
Auxiliary terminals
3RW404.
S3

3RW403.
3RW404.
S2
S3
B
}
3RT1936-4EA2
3RT1946-4EA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3RW405.
3RW407.
S6
S12
}
}
3RT1956-4EA2
3RT1966-4EA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3RT1946-4EA1
1 unit
41B
}
}
3RT1956-4EA1
3RT1966-4EA1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S0,
S2,
S3
3RW4900-0PB10
1 unit
42G
3RW405. and S6,

3RW407.
S12
3RW4900-0PB00
1 unit
42G
Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections

3RW404.
S3
3RW405.
3RW407.
S6
S12
For complying with the voltage

clearances and as touch protection if box terminal is removed
(2 units required per device)
Also fits in case of S6 and S12 on mounted box terminals

Sealing covers
3RW402. to
3RW404.
6/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
For soft starters
Type
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
A
A
A
3RU1900-2AB71
3RU1900-2AF71
3RU1900-2AM71
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
3RU1900-1A
1 unit
41F
3SB3000-0EA11
1 unit
41J
3SX1335
1 unit
41J
}
}
3RU1900-1B
3RU1900-1C
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
Price
per PU
Modules for RESET1)

Modules for remote RESET, electrical
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,
power consumption AC 80 VA, DC 70 W,
ON period 0.2 ... 4 s,
switching frequency 60/h
3RW405. and S6,
3RW407.
S12
24 ... 30 V AC/DC
110 ... 127 V AC/DC
220 ... 250 V AC/DC
Mechanical RESET comprising

3RW405. and S6,
3RW407.
S12
Resetting plungers, holders and }

formers
Matching pushbutton IP65,
B
22 mm, 12 mm stroke
Extension plungers
A
Cable releases with holder for RESET
3RW405. and S6,

3RW407.
S12
1)
Length 400 mm
Length 600 mm
For 6.5 mm holes in the control panel;

max. control panel thickness 8 mm
Remote RESET already integrated in the 3RW402. to 3RW404. soft starters.
For soft starters

Type
Size
Price
per PU
Fans (to increase switching frequency and for device mounting

in positions other than the standard position)
3RW402.
S0
3RW4928-8VB00
1 unit
42G
3RW403.,
3RW404.
S2,
S3
3RW4947-8VB00
1 unit
42G
Manual 3RW30/3RW401)
1)
The relevant operating instructions for 3RW402./3./4.

(3ZX1012-0RW40-2DA1) or 3RW405./7. (3ZX1012-0RW40-1AA1)
are included in the scope of supply of the soft starter or are available
like the Manual for download from the Service&Support portal
in PDF format:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support "Switching Devices"
"Soft Starters and Solid-State Switching Devices" "SIRIUS 3RW Soft
Starters".

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/33
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
For soft starters
Type
Size
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules to motor starter protectors1)

3RW402.
S0
S00/S0
3RA2921-1BA00
1 unit
41B
3RW4036.
S2
S2
3RA1931-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3RW4046.,
3RW4047.
S3
S3
3RA1941-1AA00
1 unit
41B
3RA2921-2GA00
1 unit
41B
DT
Article No.
Price PU (UNIT,
per PU SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
3RA2921-1BA00
S0
S0
3RA2921-2GA00
1)
Can be used in size S0 up to maximum 32 A.

Can be used in size S0 only for 3RV2 motor starter protectors.
Version
Tool for opening spring-type terminals

in sizes S00 and S0
A
3RA29 08-1A
3RT2900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
DT
Article No.
Screwdrivers
length approx. 200 mm, 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
3RA2908-1A
Blank labels
IC01_00181

For SIRIUS devices
3RT2900-1SB20
NSB0_01429b
3RW402.
3RT1900-1SB20
1)
PC labeling systems for individual inscription

of unit labeling plates are available from:
Spare parts
For soft starters
Type
Version
Size

voltage Us
3RW405.-.BB3.
3RW405.-.BB4.
S6
S6
115 V AC
230 V AC
}
}
3RW407.-.BB3.
3RW407.-.BB4.
S12
S12
115 V AC
230 V AC
}
}
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RW4936-8VX30
3RW4936-8VX40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
3RW4947-8VX30
3RW4947-8VX40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
Fans
Fans
6/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
More information
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used.
Conveyor belts
Small fans1)
Pumps
Hydraulic pumps
%
s
70
10
5 x IM
60
10
5 x IM
50
10
4 x IM
40
10
4 x IM
40
10
4 x IM
40
10
4 x IM
10
Application
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage
- Starting time
- Current limit value
Ramp-down time
1)
Application examples for heavy starting (CLASS 20)

Heavy starting CLASS 20 (up to 40 s with 350% In motor, one start per hour)
The soft starter has to be selected at least one performance class higher than the motor used.
Application
Stirrers
Centrifuges
40
20
4 x IM
40
20
4 x IM

limiting
- Starting voltage
- Starting time
Stopping time
%
s
Starting parameters
Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/35
Siemens AG 2013

3RW40
Status graphs
Where long starting times are involved, the integrated solid-state

overload relay for heavy starting should not be disconnected.
PTC sensors are recommended. This also applies for the soft
ramp-down because during the ramp-down time an additional
current loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
In the case of high switching frequencies in S4 mode, Siemens
recommends the use of PTC sensors. For relevant device versions with integrated thermistor motor protection or separate
thermistor evaluation devices, see Chapter 10 "Monitoring and
Control Devices".
soft starter.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls)
should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload relays
must be ordered separately. Please observe the maximum
switching frequencies specified in the technical specifications.
Note:
the soft starter.
Schematic circuit diagram of power electronics
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
NSB0_001485a
The 3RW solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting
conditions. In the event of deviating conditions or increased
switching frequency, it may be necessary to choose a larger device.
A bypass contact system and solid-state overload relay are already integrated in the 3RW40 soft starter and therefore do not have to be ordered
separately.
6/36
Siemens IC 10 2014
U
UN
US
tR on
tR off
tR on
tR off
ON 13/14
RUN 13/14
BYPASSED 23/24
e
NSB0_01486
Configuration
tR on
Manual for SIRIUS 3RW30/40

Besides containing all important information on configuring,
commissioning and servicing, the manual also contains example circuits and the technical specifications for all devices.
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44 for High-Feature Applications
3RW44
Overview
play and operator module can be connected by means of a connection cable to the soft starter, thus enabling active indications
and the like to be read directly from the control cabinet door.
3RW44 soft starter with PROFINET communication module
Wiring outlay for installing an additional motor overload relay is

no longer needed as the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters perform
this function too. In addition they offer adjustable trip classes
and a thermistor motor protection function. As an option the
thyristors can also be protected by SITOR semiconductor fuses
from short-circuiting so that the soft starter is still functional after
a short circuit (type of coordination "2"). And even inrush current
peaks are reliably avoided thanks to adjustable current limiting.
In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state

SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for
higher-level requirements. They cover a performance range up
to 710 kW (at 400 V) in the inline circuit and up to 1200 kW
(at 400 V) in the inside-delta circuit.
Optionally, SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be upgraded with a

PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET module. Thanks to their communication capability and their programmable control inputs and
relay outputs the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be very easily
and quickly integrated in higher-level controllers.
The 3RW44 soft starters are characterized by a compact design

for space-saving and clearly arranged control cabinet layouts.
For optimized motor starting and stopping the innovative
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an attractive alternative with considerable savings potential compared to applications with a frequency converter. The new torque control and adjustable current limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be used in
nearly every conceivable task. They guarantee the reliable
avoidance of sudden torque applications and current peaks during motor starting and stopping. This creates savings potential
when calculating the size of the switchgear and when servicing
the machinery installed. Be it for inline circuits or inside-delta circuits the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter offers savings especially in
terms of size and equipment costs.
In addition a creep speed function is available for positioning

and setting jobs. With this function the motor can be controlled
in both directions of rotation with reduced torque and an adjustable, low speed.
The bypass contacts already integrated in the soft starter bypass the thyristors after a motor ramp-up is detected. This results in a further great reduction in the heat loss occurring during
operation of the soft starter at rated value.
Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down
possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the applicationspecific requirements. Operation and commissioning can be
performed with the menu-controlled keypad and a menuprompted, multi-line graphic display with background lighting.
The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down can be effected
quickly, easily and reliably by means of just a few settings with a
previously selected language. Four-key operation and plain-text
displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every moment of the parameterization and operation.
Applicable standards
IEC 60947-4-2
UL/CSA
Functionality
Equipped with modern, ergonomic user prompting the 3RW44
soft starters can be commissioned quickly and easily using a
keypad and a menu-prompted, multi-line graphic display with
background lighting. The optimized motor ramp-up and rampdown can be effected quickly, easily and reliably by means of
just a few settings with a selectable language. Four-key operation and plain-text displays for each menu point guarantee full
clarity at every moment of the parameterization and operation.
During operation and when control voltage is applied, the display field continuously presents measured values and operating
values as well as warnings and fault messages. An external dis-
On the other hand the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters offer a new,
combined DC braking function for the fast stopping of driving
loads.
Highlights
Soft starting with breakaway pulse, torque control or voltage
ramp, adjustable torque or current limiting as well as any combination of these, depending on load type
Integrated bypass contact system to minimize power loss
Various setting options for the starting parameters such as
starting torque, starting voltage, ramp-up and ramp-down
time, and much more in three separate parameter sets
Start-up detection
Inside-delta circuit for savings in terms of size and equipment
costs
Various ramp-down modes selectable: free ramp-down,
torque-controlled pump ramp-down, combined DC braking
Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection
Keypad with a menu-prompted, multi-line graphic display with
background lighting
Interface for communication with the PC for more accurate
setting of the parameters as well as for control and monitoring
Simple integration to the motor feeder
Simple mounting and commissioning
Display of operating states and fault messages
Connection to PROFIBUS and PROFINET with optional
PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET module
Mains voltages from 200 to 690 V, 50 to 60 Hz
Can be used up to 60 C (derating from 40 C)
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/37
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with optimum

functionality. An integral bypass contact system reduces the
power loss of the soft starter during operation.
This reliably prevents heating of the switchgear environment.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters have internal intrinsic device
protection. This prevents thermal overloading of the power section's thyristors, e.g. due to unacceptably high closing operations.
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Soft Starter ES parameterization software1)
SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter block library for SIMATIC PCS 71)
Soft Starter ES software is used for the parameterization, monitoring and service diagnostics of SIRIUS 3RW44 High-Feature
soft starters.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter PCS 7 block library can be used
for simple and easy integration of SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
1)
See Chapter 14 "Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization with

SIRIUS".
Application
The solid-state SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are suitable for the
torque-controlled soft starting and ramp-down as well as braking
of three-phase asynchronous motors.
Application areas
See "Selection aid for soft starters" on page 6/6.
Type
3RW442.
3RW443.
3RW444.
3RW445.
3RW446.

Mounting dimensions (WxHxD)
Screw terminals
170 x 184 x 270 170 x 198 x 270 210 x 230 x 298 510 x 638.5 x 290 576 x 667 x 290
170 x 184 x 270 170 x 198 x 270 210 x 230 x 298 510 x 638.5 x 290 576 x 667 x 290

Operation
Storage
C
C
0 ... +60; (derating from +40)

-25 ... +80
Weight
kg
6.5
11.5
90
90
Stand-alone
installation
Installation type

78
PPLQ
PPLQ
PPLQ

50
NSB0_00649a
7.9
22,5 22,5
mm
mm
5 000 (derating from 1000, see Characteristic Curves page 6/7); higher on request
IP00
Type
3RW44. .-.BC3.
3RW44. .-.BC4.
V
%
115 AC
-15/+10
230 AC
-15/+10
Hz
%
50 ... 60
10
50 ... 60
10
Terminal
Control electronics
Rated values
Tolerance
A1/A2/PE
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Type
3RW44. .-.BC.4
3RW44. .-.BC.5
3RW44. .-.BC.6
Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for inline circuit
Tolerance
V AC
%
200 ... 460

-15/+10
400 ... 600

-15/+10
400 ... 690

-15/+10
Maximum blocking voltage (thyristor)
V AC
1 400
1 800
1 800
Rated operational voltage for inside-delta circuit

Tolerance
V AC
%
200 ... 460

-15/+10
400 ... 600

-15/+10
400 ... 600

-15/+10
Rated frequency
Tolerance
Hz
%
50 ... 60
10
115
Minimum load (% of set motor current IM)
5001)
1)
At the project configuration stage, it is important to make allowance for the

voltage drop on the motor cable up to the motor connection. If necessary,
higher values for the rated operational voltage or current must be calculated accordingly for the soft starter.
6/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Type
3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
29
36
47
57
77
93
Power electronics
- At 40 / 50 / 60 C
29 / 26 / 23
36 / 32 / 29
47 / 42 / 37
57 / 51 / 45
77 / 68 / 59
93 / 82 / 72
11
15
18
W
W
8 / 7.5 / 7
10 / 9 / 8.5 32 / 31 / 29 36 / 34 / 31 45 / 41 / 37 55 / 51 / 47
400/345/290 470/410/355 600/515/440 725/630/525 940/790/660 1160/980/830
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
41
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
34
41
57 / 51 / 45
41
77 / 68 / 59
41
93 / 82 / 72
41

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
20
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
15
20
57 / 51 / 45
20
77 / 68 / 59
20
93 / 82 / 72
20

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
20
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
15
20
57 / 51 / 45
20
77 / 68 / 59
20
93 / 82 / 72
20

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
10
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
6
10
57 / 51 / 45
10
77 / 68 / 59
8
93 / 82 / 72
8

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
13
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
9
13
57 / 51 / 45
13
77 / 68 / 59
13
93 / 82 / 72
13

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
6
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
4
6
57 / 51 / 45
6
77 / 68 / 59
6
93 / 82 / 72
6

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
10
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
6
10
57 / 51 / 45
10
77 / 68 / 59
10
88 / 80 / 72
10

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
4
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
2
4
57 / 51 / 45
5
77 / 68 / 59
1.8
88 / 80 / 72
0.8
For very heavy starting (CLASS 30)

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
6
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
4
6
57 / 51 / 45
6
65 / 60 / 54
6
77 / 70 / 63
6

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
29 / 26 / 23
1.8
36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37
0.8
3.3
57 / 51 / 45
1.5
65 / 60 / 54
2
77 / 70 / 63
1

Power loss
operational current (40 / 50 / 60C) approx.
During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 C)

- Starts per hour3)
1)
2)
Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM,

ON period = 70 %. Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM,
dependent on CLASS setting.
3)
For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 / 50 / 60 C, standalone installation vertical The quoted switching frequencies do not apply
for automatic mode.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/39
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour at

40 C / 50 C / 60 C
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Type
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
113
134
162
Power electronics
- At 40 / 50 / 60 C
113 / 100 / 88
134 / 117 / 100
162 /145 / 125
22
26
32
W
W
64 / 58 / 53
1350 / 1140 / 970
76 / 67 / 58
1700 / 1400 / 1140
95 / 83 / 71
2460 / 1980 / 1620
A
1/h
113 / 100 / 88
41
134 / 117 / 100

39
162 / 145 / 125

41

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
113 / 100 / 88
20
134 / 117 / 100

15
162 / 145 / 125

20

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
113 / 100 / 88
20
134 / 117 / 100

15
162 / 145 / 125

20

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
113 / 100 / 88
9
134 / 117 / 100

6
162 / 145 / 125

7

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
113 / 100 / 88
13
134 / 117 / 100

9
162 / 145 / 125

12

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
113 / 100 / 883

6
134 / 117 / 100

6
162 / 145 / 125

1

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
106 / 97 / 88
9
125 / 113 / 100

9
147 / 134 / 122

10

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
106 / 97 / 88
1.5
125 / 113 / 100

2
147 / 134 / 122

1

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
91 / 84 / 76
6
110 / 100 / 90
6
120 / 110 / 100

6

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
91 / 84 / 76
2
110 / 100 / 90
2
120 / 110 / 100

2

Power loss
During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 C)
40 C / 50 C / 60 C

- Starts per hour3)
1)
2)

3)
for automatic mode.
6/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Type
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
3RW4446
3RW4447
203
250
313
356
432
203 / 180 / 156
250 / 215 / 185
313 / 280 / 250
356 / 315 / 280
432 / 385 / 335
40
50
62
71
86
Power electronics
- At 40 / 50 / 60 C
A
Power loss
W
During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 C) W
89 / 81 / 73
110 / 94 / 83
145 / 126 / 110 174 /147 / 126 232 / 194 / 159
3350/2600/2150 4000/2900/2350 4470/4000/3400 5350/4050/3500 5860/5020/4200

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
203 / 180 / 156

41
250 / 215 / 185

41
313 / 280 / 250

41
356 / 315 / 280

41
432 / 385 / 335

39

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
203 / 180 / 156

20
250 / 215 / 185

20
313 / 280 / 250

19
356 / 315 / 280

17
432 / 385 / 335

16

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
203 / 180 / 156

20
250 / 215 / 185

20
313 / 280 / 250

19
356 / 315 / 280

17
432 / 385 / 335

16

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
203 / 180 / 156

9
250 / 215 / 185

10
313 / 280 / 250

6
356 / 315 / 280

4
432 / 385 / 335

5

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
203 / 180 / 156

13
240 / 215 / 185

13
313 / 280 / 250

10
325 / 295 / 265

13
402 / 385 / 335

11

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
203 / 180 / 156

3
240 / 215 / 185

6
313 / 280 / 250

1
325 / 295 / 265

2
402 / 385 / 335

1

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
195 / 175 / 155

10
215 / 195 / 180

10
275 / 243 / 221

10
285 / 263 / 240

10
356 / 326 / 295

10

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
195 / 175 / 155

1
215 / 195 / 180

5
275 / 243 / 221

1
285 / 263 / 240

3
356 / 326 / 295

1

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
162 / 148 / 134

6
180 / 165 / 150

6
220 / 201 / 182

6
240 / 223 / 202

6
285 / 260 /235

6

- Starts per hour3)
A
1/h
162 / 148 / 134

3
180 / 165 / 150

3
220 / 201 / 182

3
240 / 223 / 202

2
285 / 260 /235

1
1)
2)

3)
for automatic mode.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/41

40 C / 50 C / 60 C
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Type
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
3RW4465
3RW4466
551
615
693
780
880
970
1076
1214
Power electronics
Load rating with rated operational
current Ie
According to IEC and UL/CSA1),
for individual mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 / 50 / 60 C
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM A

Power loss
In operation after completed starting with
uninterrupted rated operational current
(40 / 50 / 60C) approx.
350 % IM
- At 40 C
- At 50 C
- At 60 C
551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693 970/850/760 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970

110
123
138
156
176
194
215
242
W 159/135/113 186/156/130 220/181/152 214/176/146 250/204/168 270/215/179 510/420/360 630/510/420
W 7 020
W 6 111
W 5 263
8 100
7 020
5 996
9 500
8 100
7 020
11 100
9 500
8 100
13 100
11 000
8 100
15 000
12 500
10 700
15 000
13 000
11 500
17 500
15 000
13 000
Permissible rated motor current and starts

per hour at 40 C / 50 C / 60 C
- Rated motor current IM2),
starting time 5 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 10 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 10 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 20 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 15 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 30 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 20 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 40 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 30 s
- Starts per hour3)
starting time 60 s
- Starts per hour3)
551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693 970/850/760 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
1/h 41
A
1/h 20
A
20
20
13
10
1/h 2
2)

3)
for automatic mode.
Siemens IC 10 2014
13
10
16
13
11
0.3
0.3
0.5
11
0.4
0.5
0.4
500/480/438 525/489/455 551/520/480 575/540/490 600/550/500 630/580/530 880/810/740 920/850/780
1)
6/42
16
500/480/438 525/489/455 551/520/480 575/540/490 600/550/500 630/580/530 880/810/740 920/850/780
1/h 6
A
20
551/494/438 591/551/489 633/615/551 670/634/576 710/650/590 740/685/630 970/880/810 1030/940/860
1/h 4
A
30
551/494/438 591/551/489 633/615/551 670/634/576 710/650/590 740/685/630 970/880/810 1030/940/860
1/h 10
A
17
551/494/438 615/551/489 666/615/551 723/693/615 780/710/650 821/755/693 1020/950/850 1090/1000/920
1/h 6
A
22
551/494/438 615/551/489 666/615/551 723/693/615 780/710/650 821/755/693 1020/950/850 1090/1000/920
1/h 13
A
33
551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693 970/850/760 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
1/h 10
A
37
551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693 970/850/760 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
1/h 20
A
41
551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693 970/850/760 1076/970/880 1214/1076/970
1.5
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
requirements. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor starter protector/circuit breaker and soft starter) is sufficient.
If type of coordination "2" is to be fulfilled, semiconductor fuses
must be fitted in the motor feeder.
ToC
ToC

further use (protection of persons and system
guaranteed).
Inline circuit fuseless version
Q1
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
NSB0_01016b
Q11
Nominal current
A
440 V +10 %
Q1
Type
Rated current
A
Type of coordination "1": 3RW4422 ... 3RW4427: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW4434 and 3RW4435: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW4436 ... 3RW4466: Iq = 65 kA
3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
29
36
47
3RV1042-4HA10
3RV1042-4JA10
3RV1042-4KA10
50
63
75
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
57
77
93
3RV1042-4LA10
3RV1042-4MA10
3RV1042-4MA10
90
100
100
3RW4434
3RW4435
113
134
3VL1716-2DD36
3VL1716-2DD36
160
160
3RW4436
162
3VL3725-2DC36
250
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
203
250
313
3VL4731-3DC36
3VL4731-3DC36
3VL4740-3DC36
315
315
400
3RW4446
3RW4447
356
432
3VL4740-3DC36
3VL5750-3DC36
400
500
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
551
615
693
3VL6780-3SB36
3VL6780-3SB36
3VL6780-3SB36
800
800
800
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
780
880
970
3VL7710-3SB36
3VL7710-3SB36
3VL7712-3SB36
1 000
1 000
1 250
3RW4465
3RW4466
1 076
1 214
3VL7712-3SB36
3VL7712-3SB36
1 250
1 250
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/43
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Inline circuit fused version (line protection only)
F1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
NSB0_01477b
Q11

Nominal current
690 V +5 %
Rated current
F1
Type
Size
Line contactor
up to 400 V
Braking contactors1)2)
(optional)
(example circuit see manual 3RW444))
Q21
Type
Q91
Type
Q92
Type
Type of coordination 13): Iq = 65 kA

3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
29
36
47
3NA3820-6
3NA3822-6
3NA3824-6
50
63
80
00
00
00
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT2526
3RT2526
3RT1535
----
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
57
77
93
3NA3830-6
3NA3132-6
3NA3136-6
100
125
160
00
1
1
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1535
3RT2024
3RT2025
-3RT1035
3RT1036
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
113
134
162
3NA3244-6
3NA3244-6
3NA3365-6
250
250
500
2
2
3
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1034
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1045
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
203
250
313
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 355
2 x 355
2 x 500
3
3
3
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1075
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1054
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RW4446
3RW4447
356
432
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1064
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
551
615
693
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3
3TF68
3TF68
3TF69
3RT1064
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
780
880
970
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3TF69
3RT1065
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1076
3RW4465
3RW4466
1 076
1 214
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3RT1075
3RT1076
3TF68
3TF68
1)
If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected,

no braking contactor is required.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must be used in addition (see table for type).
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor)
we recommend the function "DC braking".
2)
Additional auxiliary relay K4:

LZS:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
LZS:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
3)
4)
6/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE1 SITOR all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection)
F1
Q21
M
3~
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
NSB0_01478c
Q11
All-range fuses
Nominal
current
A
F1
Type
Rated current
Voltage
Size
Line contactor
up to 400 V
(optional)
(example circuit see

manual 3RW444))
Q21
Type
Q91
Type
Q92
Type
3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
29
36
47
3NE1020-2
3NE1020-2
3NE1021-2
80
80
100
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
00
00
00
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT2526
3RT2526
3RT1535
----
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
57
77
93
3NE1022-2
3NE1022-2
3NE1224-2
125
125
160
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
00
00
1
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1535
3RT2024
3RT2025
-3RT1035
3RT1036
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
113
134
162
3NE1225-2
3NE1227-2
3NE1227-2
200
250
250
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
1
1
1
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1034
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1045
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
203
250
313
3NE1230-2
3NE1331-2
3NE1333-2
315
350
450
600 +10 %
460 +10 %
690 +5 %
1
2
2
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1075
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1054
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RW4446
3RW4447
356
432
3NE1334-2
3NE1435-2
500
560
690 +5 %
690 +5 %
2
3
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1064
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
551
615
693
2 x 3NE1334-2
2 x 3NE1334-2
2 x 3NE1334-2
500
500
500
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
2
2
2
3TF68
3TF68
3TF69
3RT1064
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
780
880
970
2 x 3NE1435-2
2 x 3NE1435-2
2 x 3NE1435-2
560
560
560
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
3
3
3
3TF69
3RT1065
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1076
3RW4465
3RW4466
1 076
1 214
3 x 3NE1334-2
3 x 3NE1435-2
500
560
690 +10 %
690 +10 %
2
3
3RT1075
3RT1076
3TF68
3TF68
1)
If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected,

no braking contactor is required.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must be used in addition (see table for type).
2)
Additional auxiliary relay K4:

LZS:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
LZS:RT4A4S15
3)
4)
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/45
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR semiconductor fuse
(semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protecto )
F1
Q1
Q21
Q11
F3
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
Q11
M
3~

Nom. curr.
A
690 V +10 %
F3
Type

Catalog LV 10 "Switch Disconnectors"
and Catalog LV 10 "Fuse Systems"
NSB0_01479b
M
3~
NSB0_01019b
F3
Rated current

Size
690 V +10 %
F3
Type
Rated current
Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)

Size
Rated current
F3
Type
3NC2280
3NC2200
3NC2200
80
100
100
Size

3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
29
36
47
3NE4120
3NE4121
3NE4121
80
100
100
0
0
0
3NE4121
3NE4121
3NE4122
100
100
125
0
0
0
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
57
77
93
3NE4122
3NE4124
3NE3224
125
160
160
0
0
1
3NE4124
3NE4124
3NE3332-0B
160
160
400
0
0
2
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
113
134
162
3NE3225
3NE3225
3NE3227
200
200
250
1
1
1
3NE3335
3NE3335
3NE3333
560
560
450
2
2
2
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
203
250
313
3NE3230-0B
3NE3230-0B
3NE3233
315
315
450
1
1
1
3NE3333
3NE3333
3NE3336
450
450
630
2
2
2
3RW4446
3RW4447
356
432
3NE3333
3NE3335
450
560
2
2
3NE3336
3NE3338-8
630
800
2
2
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
551
615
693
2 x 3NE3335
2 x 3NE3335
2 x 3NE3335
560
560
560
2
2
2
3 x 3NE3334-0B 500
3 x 3NE3334-0B 500
3 x 3NE3334-0B 500
2
2
2
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
780
880
970
2 x 3NE3336
2 x 3NE3336
2 x 3NE3336
630
630
630
2
2
2
2 x 3NE3340-8
2 x 3NE3340-8
2 x 3NE3340-8
900
900
900
2
2
2
3RW4465
3RW4466
1 076
1 214
2 x 3NE3340-8
2 x 3NE3340-8
900
900
2
2
3 x 3NE3338-8
3 x 3NE3338-8
800
800
2
2
Nom. curr.
Line contactor
up to 400 V
(optional)
(example circuit see manual 3RW444)) 440 V +10 %
Rated current 690 V +5 %
Q21
Type
Q91
Type
Q92
Type
Q1
Type
F1
Type
3RT2526
3RT2526
3RT1535
----
3RV1041-4HA10
3RV1041-4JA10
3RV1041-4KA10
50
63
75
3NA3820-6
3NA3822-6
3NA3824-6
50
63
80
00
00
00
Soft starters
ToC
Q11
Type
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58

Rated current Size
3)
Type of coordination 2 : Iq = 65 kA
3RW4422
29
3RT1034
3RW4423
36
3RT1035
3RW4424
47
3RT1036
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
57
77
93
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1535
3RT2024
3RT2025
-3RT1035
3RT1036
3RV1041-4LA10 90
3RV1041-4MA10 100
3RV1041-4MA10 100
3NA3830-6
3NA3132-6
3NA3136-6
100
125
160
00
1
1
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
113
134
162
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1034
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1045
3VL1716
3VL1716
3VL3725
160
160
250
3NA3244-6
3NA3244-6
3NA3365-6
250
250
500
2
2
3
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
203
250
313
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1075
3RT1044
3RT1044
3RT1054
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3VL4731
3VL4731
3VL4740
315
315
400
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3354-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 355
2 x 355
2 x 500
3
3
3
3RW4446
3RW4447
356
432
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1064
3VL4740
3VL5750
400
500
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
551
615
693
3TF68
3TF68
3TF69
3RT1064
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1075
3VL6780
3VL6780
3VL6780
800
800
800
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
2 x 500
3
3
3
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
780
880
970
3TF69
3RT1065
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1076
3VL7710
3VL7710
3VL7712
1 000
1 000
1 250
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3RW4465
1 076
3RT1075
3TF68
3RW4466
1 214
3RT1076
3TF68
1)
If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking
contactor is required. If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected,
a braking contactor must be used in addition (see table for type).
2) Additional auxiliary relay K4: LZS:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter
with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC), LZS:RT4A4S15
6/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
3VL7712
1 250
3 x 3NA3365-6 3 x 500
3
3VL7712
1 250
3 x 3NA3365-6 3 x 500
3
3)
4)
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Inside-delta circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR fuses
(semiconductor protection by fuse, line and overload protection by motor starter protector)
Q1
Q21
F3
F3
Q11
Type
M
3~

Nominal
current
A
Type of coordination 2
690 V +10 %
Rated current
F3
Type

Size
690 V +10 %
Rated current
F3
Type
Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)

Size
50
62
81
3NE4120
3NE4121
3NE4121
80
100
100
0
0
0
3NE4121
3NE4121
3NE4122
100
100
125
0
0
0
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
99
133
161
3NE4122
3NE4124
3NE3224
125
160
160
0
0
1
3NE4124
3NE4124
3NE3332-0B
160
160
400
0
0
2
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
196
232
281
3NE3225
3NE3225
3NE3227
200
200
250
1
1
1
3NE3335
3NE3335
3NE3333
560
560
450
2
2
2
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
352
433
542
3NE3230-0B
3NE3230-0B
3NE3233
315
315
450
1
1
1
3NE3333
3NE3333
3NE3336
450
450
630
2
2
2
3RW4446
3RW4447
617
748
3NE3333
3NE3335
450
560
2
2
3NE3336
3NE3338-8
630
800
2
2
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
954
1 065
1 200
2 x 3NE3335
2 x 3NE3335
2 x 3NE3335
560
560
560
2
2
2
3 x 3NE3334-0B 500
3 x 3NE3334-0B 500
3 x 3NE3334-0B 500
2
2
2
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
1 351
1 524
1 680
2 x 3NE3336
2 x 3NE3336
2 x 3NE3336
630
630
630
2
2
2
2 x 3NE3340-8
3 x 3NE3340-8
3 x 3NE3340-8
900
900
900
2
2
2
3RW4465
3RW4466
1 864
2 103
2 x 3NE3340-8
2 x 3NE3340-8
900
900
2
2
3 x 3NE3338-8
3 x 3NE3338-8
800
800
2
2
Soft starters
2
Q11
Type
F3
Type
3NC2280
3NC2200
3NC2200
80
100
100
Size
1)
3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
ToC
Rated current
Nominal
current
A
22 x 58
22 x 58
22 x 58
ToC
Q11
NSB0_01597b
M
3~
NSB0_01596b
Q11
Soft starters

Catalog LV 10 "Switch Disconnectors"
and Catalog LV 10 "Fuse Systems"
F1
Line contactor
up to 400 V
(optional)
440 V +10 %
Rated current
690 V +5 %
Rated current
Q21
Type
Q1
Type
F1
Type
Size
Type of coordination 21)

3RW4422
3RW4423
3RW4424
50
62
81
3RT1036-1AP04
3RT1044-1AP04
3RT1046-1AP04
3RV1042-4KA10
3RV1042-4LA10
3RV1042-4MA10
75
90
100
3NA3824-6
3NA3830-6
3NA3132-6
80
100
125
00
00
1
3RW4425
3RW4426
3RW4427
99
133
161
3RT1054-1AP36
3RT1055-6AP36
3RT1056-6AP36
3VL2716
3VL2716
3VL3720
160
160
200
3NA3136-6
3NA3240-6
3NA3244-6
160
200
250
1
2
2
3RW4434
3RW4435
3RW4436
196
232
281
3RT1064-6AP36
3RT1065-6AP36
3RT1066-6AP36
3VL3725
3VL4731
3VL4740
250
315
400
3NA3360-6
3NA3360-6
2 x 3NA3360-6
400
400
2 x 400
3
3
3
3RW4443
3RW4444
3RW4445
352
433
542
3RT1075-6AP36
3RT1076-6AP36
3TF6844-0CM7
3VL4740
3VL5750
3VL5763
400
500
630
2 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
2 x 500
2 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3RW4446
3RW4447
617
748
3TF6844-0CM7
3TF69
3VL6780
3VL6780
800
800
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3RW4453
3RW4454
3RW4455
954
1 065
1 200
3VL7710
3VL7712
3VL8716
1 000
1 250
1 600
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 3NA3365-6
3 x 500
3 x 500
3 x 500
3
3
3
3RW4456
3RW4457
3RW4458
1 351
1 524
1 680
3VL8716
3VL8716
3WL1220
1 600
1 600
2 000
3 x 3NA3372
3 x 3NA3372
2 x 3NA3480
3 x 630
3 x 630
2 x 1000
3
3
4
3RW4465
3RW4466
1 864
2 103
3WL1225
3WL1225
2 500
2 500
2 x 3NA3482
2 x 3NA3482
2 x 1250
2 x 1250
4
4
1)
If the F3 semiconductor fuse is not used, the type of coordination "2" is
reduced to type of coordination "1" for soft starters in combination with the
stipulated protective device.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/47
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44

SIRIUS 3RW44 for normal starting (CLASS 10) in inline circuit
3RW442.
3RW443.
3RW444.
3RW445.
Rated values of three-phase motors
Rated values of three-phase motors
Operat. Rating at
current Ie operational voltage Ue
Operat. Rating at
230 V
400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
hp
3RW446.

in inline circuit
hp
hp
hp
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 200 ... 460 V

29
36
47
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
----
----
----
26
32
42
7.5
10
10
7.5
10
15
15
20
25
----
B
B
B
3RW4422-@BC@4
3RW4423-@BC@4
3RW4424-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
57
77
93
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
----
----
----
51
68
82
15
20
25
15
20
25
30
50
60
----
B
B
B
3RW4425-@BC@4
3RW4426-@BC@4
3RW4427-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H

1
3
113
134
162
30
37
45
55
75
90
----
----
----
100
117
145
30
30
40
30
40
50
75
75
100
----
B
B
B
3RW4434-@BC@4
3RW4435-@BC@4
3RW4436-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
203
250
313
55
75
90
110
132
160
----
----
----
180
215
280
50
60
75
60
75
100
125
150
200
----
B
B
B
3RW4443-@BC@4
3RW4444-@BC@4
3RW4445-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
356
432
110
132
200
250
---
---
---
315
385
100
125
125
150
250
300
---
B
B
3RW4446-@BC@4
3RW4447-@BC@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
551
615
693
160
200
200
315
355
400
----
----
----
494
551
615
150
150
200
200
200
250
400
450
500
----
C
C
C
3RW4453-@BC@4
3RW4454-@BC@4
3RW4455-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
780
880
970
250
250
315
450
500
560
----
----
----
693
780
850
200
250
300
250
300
350
600
700
750
----
C
C
C
3RW4456-@BC@4
3RW4457-@BC@4
3RW4458-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1 076
1 214
355
400
630
710
---
---
---
970
1 076
350
350
400
450
850
950
---
C
C
3RW4465-@BC@4
3RW4466-@BC@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)
3RW442. to ... 3RW444. soft starters with screw terminals:

2)
possible.
Note:
The solid-state SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are designed for
notes on page 6/6):
6/48
Siemens IC 10 2014

which is tailored exactly to the application, see manual

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
in inline circuit
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V
500 V 690 V 1000 V
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp
hp
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
36
47
----
15
18.5
22
18.5
22
30
----
----
26
32
42
----
----
15
20
25
20
25
30
B
B
B
3RW4422-@BC@5
3RW4423-@BC@5
3RW4424-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
57
77
93
----
30
37
45
37
45
55
----
----
51
68
82
----
----
30
50
60
40
50
75
B
B
B
3RW4425-@BC@5
3RW4426-@BC@5
3RW4427-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H

113
134
162
----
55
75
90
75
90
110
----
----
100
117
145
----
----
75
75
100
75
100
125
B
B
B
3RW4434-@BC@5
3RW4435-@BC@5
3RW4436-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
203
250
313
----
110
132
160
132
160
200
----
----
180
215
280
----
----
125
150
200
150
200
250
B
B
B
3RW4443-@BC@5
3RW4444-@BC@5
3RW4445-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
356
432
---
200
250
250
315
---
---
315
385
---
---
250
300
300
400
B
B
3RW4446-@BC@5
3RW4447-@BC@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
551
615
693
----
315
355
400
355
400
500
----
----
494
551
615
----
----
400
450
500
500
600
700
C
C
C
3RW4453-@BC@5
3RW4454-@BC@5
3RW4455-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
780
880
970
----
450
500
560
560
630
710
----
----
693
780
850
----
----
600
700
750
750
850
900
C
C
C
3RW4456-@BC@5
3RW4457-@BC@5
3RW4458-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1076
1 214
---
630
710
800
900
---
---
970
1 076
---
---
850
950
1 100
1 200
C
C
3RW4465-@BC@5
3RW4466-@BC@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H

Article No. supplement for rated control supply voltage
2
6
Us2)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)
Soft starter with screw terminals:

3RW442. ... 3RW444. Delivery time class A,
3RW445. ... 3RW446. Delivery time class B.
2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):


Siemens IC 10 2014
6/49
1
3
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT
hp
hp
hp
hp
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A

in inline circuit
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
36
47
----
15
18.5
22
18.5
22
30
30
37
45
----
26
32
42
----
----
15
20
25
20
25
30
B
B
B
3RW4422-@BC@6
3RW4423-@BC@6
3RW4424-@BC@6
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
57
77
93
----
30
37
45
37
45
55
55
75
90
----
51
68
82
----
----
30
50
60
40
50
75
B
B
B
3RW4425-@BC@6
3RW4426-@BC@6
3RW4427-@BC@6
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H

1
3
113
134
162
----
55
75
90
75
90
110
110
132
160
----
100
117
145
----
----
75
75
100
75
100
125
B
B
B
3RW4434-@BC@6
3RW4435-@BC@6
3RW4436-@BC@6
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
203
250
313
----
110
132
160
132
160
200
200
250
315
----
180
215
280
----
----
125
150
200
150
200
250
B
B
B
3RW4443-@BC@6
3RW4444-@BC@6
3RW4445-@BC@6
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
356
432
---
200
250
250
315
355
400
---
315
385
---
---
250
300
300
400
B
B
3RW4446-@BC@6
3RW4447-@BC@6
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
551
615
693
----
315
355
400
355
400
500
560
630
710
----
494
551
615
----
----
400
450
500
500
600
700
C
C
C
3RW4453-@BC@6
3RW4454-@BC@6
3RW4455-@BC@6
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
780
880
970
----
450
500
560
560
630
710
800
900
1 000
----
693
780
850
----
----
600
700
750
750
850
900
C
C
C
3RW4456-@BC@6
3RW4457-@BC@6
3RW4458-@BC@6
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1 076
1 214
---
630
710
800
900
1 100
1 200
---
970
1 076
---
---
850
950
1 100
1 200
C
C
3RW4465-@BC@6
3RW4466-@BC@6
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):
6/50
Siemens IC 10 2014


Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
SIRIUS 3RW44 for heavy starting (CLASS 20) in inline circuit
3RW443.
3RW444.
3RW445.
1)
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Operat. Rating at
Operat. Rating at
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT
hp

in inline circuit
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
3RW4466.
hp
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
5.5
15
--
--
--
26
7.5
7.5
15
--
3RW4422-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
36
7.5
18.5
--
--
--
32
10
10
20
--
3RW4423-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
47
11
22
--
--
--
42
10
15
25
--
3RW4424-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
57
15
30
--
--
--
51
15
15
30
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
77
18.5
37
--
--
--
68
20
20
50
--
3RW4427-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

1
3
93
22
45
--
--
82
25
25
60
--
3RW4434-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
113
30
55
--
--
--
100
30
30
75
--
3RW4435-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
134
37
75
--
--
--
117
30
40
75
--
3RW4436-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
162
45
90
--
--
--
145
40
50
100
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
203
55
110
--
--
--
180
50
60
125
--
3RW4445-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
250
75
132
--
--
--
215
60
75
150
--
3RW4446-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
313
90
160
--
--
--
280
75
100
200
--
3RW4447-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
356
110
200
--
--
--
315
100
125
250
--
3RW4447-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
432
132
250
--
--
--
385
125
150
300
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
551
160
315
--
--
--
494
150
200
400
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
615
200
355
--
--
--
551
150
200
450
--
3RW4455-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
693
200
400
--
--
--
615
200
250
500
--
3RW4457-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
780
250
450
--
--
--
693
200
250
600
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
880
250
500
--
--
--
780
250
300
700
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
970
315
560
--
--
--
850
300
350
750
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)
3RW442. to 3RW444. soft starters with screw terminals:

2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/51
3RW442.
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
in inline circuit
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp
hp
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
--
15
18.5
--
--
26
--
--
15
20
3RW4422-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
36
--
18.5
22
--
--
32
--
--
20
25
3RW4423-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
47
--
22
30
--
--
42
--
--
25
30
3RW4424-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
57
--
30
37
--
--
51
--
--
30
40
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
77
--
37
45
--
--
68
--
--
50
50
3RW4427-@BC@5
1 unit
42H

1
3
93
--
45
55
--
--
82
--
--
60
75
3RW4434-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
113
--
55
75
--
--
100
--
--
75
75
3RW4435-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
134
--
75
90
--
--
117
--
--
75
100
3RW4436-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
162
--
90
110
--
--
145
--
--
100
125
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
203
--
110
132
--
--
180
--
--
125
150
3RW4445-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
250
--
132
160
--
--
215
--
--
150
200
3RW4446-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
313
--
160
200
--
--
280
--
--
200
250
3RW4447-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
356
--
200
250
--
--
315
--
--
250
300
3RW4447-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
432
--
250
315
--
--
385
--
--
300
400
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
551
--
315
355
--
--
494
--
--
400
500
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
615
--
355
400
--
--
551
--
--
450
600
3RW4454-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
693
--
400
500
--
--
615
--
--
500
700
3RW4457-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
780
--
450
560
--
--
693
--
--
600
750
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
880
--
500
630
--
--
780
--
--
700
850
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
970
--
560
710
--
--
850
--
--
750
900
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H

2
6
Us2)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

3RW442. to 3RW444. Delivery time class A,
3RW445. to 3RW446. Delivery time class B.
2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):
6/52
Siemens IC 10 2014


Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT
hp
hp
hp
hp
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A

in inline circuit
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
--
15
18.5
30
--
--
15
20
3RW4422-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
--
18.5
22
37
---
26
36
32
--
--
20
25
3RW4423-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
47
--
22
30
45
--
42
--
--
25
30
3RW4424-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
57
--
30
37
55
51
--
--
30
40
3RW4425-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
77
--
37
45
75
---
68
--
--
50
50
3RW4427-@BC@6
1 unit
42H

93
--
45
55
90
--
82
--
--
60
75
3RW4434-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
113
--
55
75
110
--
100
--
--
75
75
3RW4435-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
134
--
75
90
132
--
117
--
--
75
100
3RW4436-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
162
--
90
110
160
--
145
--
--
100
125
3RW4443-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
203
--
110
132
200
--
180
--
--
125
150
3RW4445-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
250
--
132
160
250
--
215
--
--
150
200
3RW4446-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
313
--
160
200
315
--
280
--
--
200
250
3RW4447-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
356
--
200
250
355
--
315
--
--
250
300
3RW4447-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
432
--
250
315
400
--
385
--
--
300
400
3RW4453-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
551
--
315
355
560
--
494
--
--
400
500
3RW4453-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
615
--
355
400
630
--
551
--
--
450
600
3RW4455-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
693
--
400
500
710
--
615
--
--
500
700
3RW4457-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
780
--
450
560
800
--
693
--
--
600
750
3RW4465-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
880
--
500
630
900
--
780
--
--
700
850
3RW4465-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
970
--
560
710
1 000
--
850
--
--
750
900
3RW4465-@BC@6
1 unit
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):


Siemens IC 10 2014
6/53
1
3
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
SIRIUS 3RW44 for very heavy starting (CLASS 30) in inline circuit
3RW442.
3RW443.
3RW444.
1)
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Operat. Rating at
Operat. Rating at
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
3RW445.
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT
hp

in inline circuit
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
3RW446.
hp
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
5.5
15
--
--
--
26
7.5
7.5
15
--
3RW4422-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
36
7.5
18.5
--
--
--
32
10
10
20
--
3RW4424-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
47
11
22
--
--
--
42
10
15
25
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
57
15
30
--
--
--
51
15
15
30
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

1
3
77
18.5
37
--
--
--
68
20
20
50
--
3RW4434-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
93
22
45
--
--
--
82
25
25
60
--
3RW4435-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
113
30
55
--
--
--
100
30
30
75
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
134
37
75
--
--
--
117
30
40
75
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
162
45
90
--
--
--
145
40
50
100
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
203
55
110
--
--
--
180
50
60
125
--
3RW4446-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
250
75
132
--
--
--
215
60
75
150
--
3RW4447-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
313
90
160
--
--
--
280
75
100
200
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
356
110
200
--
--
--
315
100
125
250
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
432
132
250
--
--
--
385
125
150
300
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
551
160
315
--
--
--
494
150
200
400
--
3RW4455-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
615
200
355
--
--
--
551
150
200
450
--
3RW4458-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
693
200
400
--
--
--
615
200
250
500
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
780
250
450
--
--
--
693
200
250
600
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
880
250
500
--
--
--
780
250
300
700
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
970
315
560
--
--
--
850
300
350
750
--
3RW4466-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):
6/54
Siemens IC 10 2014

choose a larger device. In some cases, however, the safety
margins taken into account in the selection also permit the listed

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
DT1) Very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
in inline circuit
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp
hp
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
--
15
18.5
--
--
26
--
--
15
20
3RW4422-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
36
--
18.5
22
--
--
32
--
--
20
25
3RW4424-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
47
--
22
30
--
--
42
--
--
25
30
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
57
--
30
37
--
--
51
--
--
30
40
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H

77
--
37
45
--
--
68
--
--
50
50
3RW4434-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
93
--
45
55
--
--
82
--
--
60
75
3RW4435-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
113
--
55
75
--
--
100
--
--
75
75
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
134
--
75
90
--
--
117
--
--
75
100
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
162
--
90
110
--
--
145
--
--
100
125
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
203
--
110
132
--
--
180
--
--
125
150
3RW4446-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
250
--
132
160
--
--
215
--
--
150
200
3RW4447-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
313
--
160
200
--
--
280
--
--
200
250
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
356
--
200
250
--
--
315
--
--
250
300
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
432
--
250
315
--
--
385
--
--
300
400
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
551
--
315
355
--
--
494
--
--
400
500
3RW4455-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
615
--
355
400
--
--
551
--
--
450
600
3RW4458-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
693
--
400
500
--
--
615
--
--
500
700
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
780
--
450
560
--
--
693
--
--
600
750
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
880
--
500
630
--
--
780
--
--
700
850
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
--
--
--
--
--
--
850
--
--
750
900
3RW4466-@BC@5
1 unit
42H

2
6
Us2)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):


Siemens IC 10 2014
6/55
1
3
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT
hp
hp
hp
hp
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A

in inline circuit
Article No.
Price
per PU

29
--
15
18.5
30
--
26
--
--
15
20
3RW4422-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
36
--
18.5
22
37
--
32
--
--
20
25
3RW4424-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
47
--
22
30
45
--
42
--
--
25
30
3RW4425-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
57
--
30
37
55
--
51
--
--
30
40
3RW4425-@BC@6
1 unit
42H

1
3
77
--
37
45
68
--
--
50
50
3RW4434-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
--
45
55
75
90
--
93
--
82
--
--
60
75
3RW4435-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
113
--
55
75
110
--
100
--
--
75
75
3RW4443-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
134
--
75
90
132
--
117
--
--
75
100
3RW4443-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
162
--
90
110
160
--
145
--
--
100
125
3RW4443-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
203
--
110
132
200
--
180
--
--
125
150
3RW4446-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
250
--
132
160
250
--
215
--
--
150
200
3RW4447-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
313
--
160
200
315
--
280
--
--
200
250
3RW4453-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
356
--
200
250
355
--
315
--
--
250
300
3RW4453-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
432
--
250
315
400
--
385
--
--
300
400
3RW4453-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
551
--
315
355
560
--
494
--
--
400
500
3RW4455-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
615
--
355
400
630
--
551
--
--
450
600
3RW4458-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
693
--
400
500
710
--
615
--
--
500
700
3RW4465-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
780
--
450
560
800
--
693
--
--
600
750
3RW4465-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
880
--
500
630
900
--
780
--
--
700
850
3RW4465-@BC@6
1 unit
42H
--
--
--
--
--
--
850
--
--
750
900
3RW4466-@BC@6
1 unit
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):
6/56
Siemens IC 10 2014


Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
SIRIUS 3RW44 for normal starting (CLASS 10) in inside-delta circuit
3RW442.
3RW443.
3RW444.
3RW445.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp

in inside-delta circuit
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
3RW446.
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
DT
1)
Inside-delta circuit, rated operational voltage 200 ... 460 V

50
62
81
15
18.5
22
22
30
45
----
----
----
45
55
73
10
15
20
15
20
25
30
40
50
----
B
B
B
3RW4422-@BC@4
3RW4423-@BC@4
3RW4424-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
99
133
161
30
37
45
55
75
90
----
----
----
88
118
142
25
30
40
30
40
50
60
75
100
----
B
B
B
3RW4425-@BC@4
3RW4426-@BC@4
3RW4427-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H

1
3
196
232
281
55
75
90
110
132
160
----
----
----
173
203
251
50
60
75
60
75
100
125
150
200
----
B
B
B
3RW4434-@BC@4
3RW4435-@BC@4
3RW4436-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
352
433
542
110
132
160
200
250
315
----
----
----
312
372
485
100
125
150
125
150
200
250
300
400
----
B
B
B
3RW4443-@BC@4
3RW4444-@BC@4
3RW4445-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
617
748
200
250
355
400
---
---
---
546
667
150
200
200
250
450
600
---
B
B
3RW4446-@BC@4
3RW4447-@BC@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
954
1 065
1 200
315
355
400
560
630
710
----
----
----
856
954
1 065
300
350
350
350
400
450
750
850
950
----
C
C
C
3RW4453-@BC@4
3RW4454-@BC@4
3RW4455-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1 351
1 524
1 680
450
500
560
800
-900
-1 000 --
----
----
1 200
1 351
1 472
450
450
550
500
600
650
1 050 -1 200 -1 300 --
C
C
C
3RW4456-@BC@4
3RW4457-@BC@4
3RW4458-@BC@4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1 864
2 103
630
710
1 100 -1 200 --
---
---
1 680
1 864
650
700
750
850
1 500 -1 700 --
C
C
3RW4465-@BC@4
3RW4466-@BC@4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
1)

3
4
2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):

In the selection table, the unit rated current Ie refers to the threephase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit. The actual current of the device is approx. 58 % of this
value.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/57
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU

50
62
81
----
22
30
45
30
37
45
----
----
45
55
73
----
----
30
40
50
40
50
60
B
B
B
3RW4422-@BC@5
3RW4423-@BC@5
3RW4424-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
99
133
161
----
55
75
90
55
90
110
----
----
88
118
142
----
----
60
75
100
75
100
125
B
B
B
3RW4425-@BC@5
3RW4426-@BC@5
3RW4427-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H

1
3
196
232
281
----
110
132
160
132
160
200
----
----
173
203
251
----
----
125
150
200
150
200
250
B
B
B
3RW4434-@BC@5
3RW4435-@BC@5
3RW4436-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
352
433
542
----
200
250
315
250
315
355
----
----
312
372
485
----
----
250
300
400
300
350
500
B
B
B
3RW4443-@BC@5
3RW4444-@BC@5
3RW4445-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
617
748
---
355
400
450
500
---
---
546
667
---
---
450
600
600
750
B
B
3RW4446-@BC@5
3RW4447-@BC@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
954
1 065
1 200
----
560
630
710
630
710
800
----
----
856
954
1 065
----
----
750
850
950
950
1 050
1 200
C
C
C
3RW4453-@BC@5
3RW4454-@BC@5
3RW4455-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1 351
1 524
1 680
----
800
900
-900
1 000 -1 000 1 200 --
----
1 200
1 351
1 472
----
----
1 050
1 200
1 300
1 350
1 500
1 650
C
C
C
3RW4456-@BC@5
3RW4457-@BC@5
3RW4458-@BC@5
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
42H
1 864
2 103
---
1 100 1 350 -1 200 1 500 --
---
1 680
1 864
---
---
1 500
1 700
1 900
2 100
C
C
3RW4465-@BC@5
3RW4466-@BC@5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H

2
6
Us2)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):

In the selection table, the unit rated current Ie refers to the threephase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit. The actual current of the device is approx. 58 % of this
value.
6/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
SIRIUS 3RW44 for heavy starting (CLASS 20) in inside-delta circuit
3RW443.
3RW444.
3RW445.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Operat. Rating at
Operat. Rating at
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
DT
hp
hp
3RW446.

PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
1)
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU

50
15
22
--
--
--
45
10
15
30
--
3RW4423-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
62
18.5
30
--
--
--
55
15
20
40
--
3RW4424-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
81
22
45
--
--
--
73
20
25
50
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
99
30
55
--
--
--
88
25
30
60
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
133
37
75
--
--
--
118
30
40
75
--
3RW4427-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

1
3
161
45
90
--
--
--
142
40
50
100
--
3RW4434-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
196
55
110
--
--
--
173
50
60
125
--
3RW4435-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
232
75
132
--
--
--
203
60
75
150
--
3RW4436-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
281
90
160
--
--
--
251
75
100
200
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
352
110
200
--
--
--
312
100
125
250
--
3RW4444-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
433
132
250
--
--
--
372
125
150
300
--
3RW4445-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
542
160
315
--
--
--
485
150
200
400
--
3RW4447-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
617
200
355
--
--
--
546
150
200
450
--
3RW4447-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
748
250
400
--
--
--
667
200
250
600
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
954
315
560
--
--
--
856
300
350
750
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 065
355
630
--
--
--
954
350
400
850
--
3RW4455-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 200
400
710
--
--
--
1 065
350
450
950
--
3RW4457-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 351
450
800
--
--
--
1 200
450
500
1 050 --
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 524
500
900
--
--
--
1 351
450
600
1 200 --
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 680
560
1 000 --
--
--
1 472
550
650
1 300 --
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
--
--
--
--
--
1 680
650
750
1 500 --
3RW4466-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
--

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
1)

Note:
notes on page 6/6):
3
4
2)
possible.
In the selection table, the unit rated current Ie refers to the

three-phase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta
circuit. The actual current of the device is approx. 58 % of this
value.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/59
3RW442.
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU

50
--
22
30
--
--
45
--
--
30
40
3RW4423-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
62
--
30
37
--
--
55
--
--
40
50
3RW4424-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
81
--
45
45
--
--
73
--
--
50
60
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
99
--
55
55
--
--
88
--
--
60
75
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
133
--
75
90
--
--
118
--
--
75
100
3RW4427-@BC@5
1 unit
42H

1
3
161
--
90
110
--
--
142
--
--
100
125
3RW4434-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
196
--
110
132
--
--
173
--
--
125
150
3RW4435-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
232
--
132
160
--
--
203
--
--
150
200
3RW4436-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
281
--
160
200
--
--
251
--
--
200
250
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
352
--
200
250
--
--
312
--
--
250
300
3RW4444-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
433
--
250
315
--
--
372
--
--
300
350
3RW4445-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
542
--
315
355
--
--
485
--
--
400
500
3RW4447-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
617
--
355
450
--
--
546
--
--
450
600
3RW4447-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
748
--
400
500
--
--
667
--
--
600
750
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
954
--
560
630
--
--
856
--
--
750
950
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 065
--
630
710
--
--
954
--
--
850
1 050
3RW4455-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 200
--
710
800
--
--
1 065
--
--
950
1 200
3RW4457-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 351
--
800
900
--
--
1 200
--
--
1 050
1 350
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 524
--
900
1 000 --
--
1 351
--
--
1 200
1 500
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 680
--
1 000 1 200 --
--
1 472
--
--
1 300
1 650
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
--
--
--
--
1 680
--
--
1 500
1 900
3RW4466-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
--
--

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):


value.
6/60
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
SIRIUS 3RW44 for very heavy starting (CLASS 30) in inside-delta circuit
3RW442.
3RW443.
3RW444.
3RW445.
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp

PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
3RW446.
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
DT
1)

50
15
22
--
--
--
45
10
15
30
--
3RW4423-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
62
18.5
30
--
--
--
55
15
20
40
--
3RW4424-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
81
22
45
--
--
--
73
20
25
50
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
99
30
55
--
--
--
88
25
30
60
--
3RW4425-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
133
37
75
--
--
--
118
30
40
75
--
3RW4427-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

1
3
161
45
90
--
--
--
142
40
50
100
--
3RW4435-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
196
55
110
--
--
--
173
50
60
125
--
3RW4436-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
232
75
132
--
--
--
203
60
75
150
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
281
90
160
--
--
--
251
75
100
200
--
3RW4443-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
352
110
200
--
--
--
312
100
125
250
--
3RW4445-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
433
132
250
--
--
--
372
125
150
300
--
3RW4447-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
542
160
315
--
--
--
485
150
200
400
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
617
200
355
--
--
--
546
150
200
450
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
748
250
400
--
--
--
667
200
250
600
--
3RW4453-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
954
315
560
--
--
--
856
300
350
750
--
3RW4455-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 065
355
630
--
--
--
954
350
400
850
--
3RW4458-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 200
400
710
--
--
--
1 065
350
450
950
--
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 351
450
800
--
--
--
1 200
450
500
1 050 --
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
1 524
500
900
--
--
--
1 351
450
600
1 200 --
3RW4465-@BC@4
1 unit
42H
--
--
--
--
--
--
1 472
550
650
1 300 --
3RW4466-@BC@4
1 unit
42H

2
6

115 V AC
230 V AC
1)

Note:
notes on page 6/6):
3
4
2)
possible.

value.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/61
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
DT1) Very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
Rated values of
three-phase motors
Rated values of
three-phase motors
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
OperaRating at
tional
current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V

A
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
hp
hp
PS*
PG
Configurator
200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V

A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
hp
hp
Article No.
Price
per PU

50
--
22
30
--
--
45
--
--
30
40
3RW4423-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
62
--
30
37
--
--
55
--
--
40
50
3RW4424-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
81
--
45
45
--
--
73
--
--
50
60
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
99
--
55
55
--
--
88
--
--
60
75
3RW4425-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
133
--
75
90
--
--
118
--
--
75
100
3RW4427-@BC@5
1 unit
42H

1
3
161
--
90
110
--
--
142
--
--
100
125
3RW4435-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
196
--
110
132
--
--
173
--
--
125
150
3RW4436-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
232
--
132
160
--
--
203
--
--
150
200
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
281
--
160
200
--
--
251
--
--
200
250
3RW4443-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
352
--
200
250
--
--
312
--
--
250
300
3RW4445-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
433
--
250
315
--
--
372
--
--
300
350
3RW4447-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
542
--
315
355
--
--
485
--
--
400
500
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
617
--
355
450
--
--
546
--
--
450
600
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
748
--
400
500
--
--
667
--
--
600
750
3RW4453-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
954
--
560
630
--
--
856
--
--
750
950
3RW4455-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 065
--
630
710
--
--
954
--
--
850
1 050
3RW4458-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 200
--
710
800
--
--
1 065
--
--
950
1 200
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 351
--
800
900
--
--
1 200
--
--
1 050
1 350
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
1 524
--
900
1 000 --
--
1 351
--
--
1 200
1 500
3RW4465-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
--
--
--
--
--
1 472
--
--
1 300
1 650
3RW4466-@BC@5
1 unit
42H
--

2
6
Us2)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3
4

1)

2)
possible.
Note:
notes on page 6/6):


value.
6/62
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1313-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42H
Engineering software
for one engineering station (single license) including
runtime software for execution of the
AS module in an automation system
(single license), German/English/French,
Type of delivery:
on CD incl. electronic documentation
in German/English/Portuguese
3ZS1633-1XX00-0YA0
1 unit
42H
Runtime software
for execution of the AS module in an
automation system (single license),
Type of delivery:
License without software and documentation
3ZS1633-2XX00-0YB0
1 unit
42H
Soft Starter ES 2007 PC communication program1)

Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic
Floating license for one user
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
3 languages (German/English/French),
communication through system interface
License key on USB stick, Class A, including CD
Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard
Soft Starter ES 2007 Premium

communication through system interface or
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter block library for SIMATIC PCS 71)
Scope of supply:
AS modules and faceplates for integrating
SIRIUS 3RW44 into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7, version V 6.1/V 7.0
3ZS1633-1XX00-0YA0
1)
Detailed information about the Soft Starter ES software program and the
SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter block Library for SIMATIC PCS 7
see Chapter 14 "Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization
with SIRIUS".

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/63
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Version
DT
Article No.
For PC/PG communication

with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3RW4900-0KC00
1 unit
42H
3RW4900-0NC00
1 unit
42H
3RW4900-0AC00
1 unit
42H
}
}
}
}
3UF7932-0AA00-0
3UF7932-0BA00-0
3UF7937-0BA00-0
3UF7933-0BA00-0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
42J
42J
PC cables
Through the system interface, for connecting to

the serial interface of the PC/PG
3UF7940-0AA00-0
USB PC cables
For PC/PG communication
with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
Through the system interface, for connecting to
the USB interface of the PC/PG
3UF7941-0AA00-0
USB/serial adapters
For connecting the PC cable to the USB interface

of a PC
We recommend, in conjunction with 3RW44 soft starter,
using SIMOCODE pro 3UF7, 3RK3 Modular Safety
System, ET 200S/ECOFAST/ET 200pro motor starters,
AS-i safety monitor, AS-i analyzer
Communication modules
Optional PROFIBUS communication modules
For 3RW44 soft starter integration in the PROFIBUS
network with DPV1 slave functionality.
With firmware version E04 and higher (or date of manufacture 01.05.2009 and later) of the module, DPV1 operation of the soft starter on a Y-link is also possible
(< only DPV0 operation possible with E04).
3RW4900-0KC00
Optional PROFINET communication modules
For 3RW44 soft starter integration in the
PROFINET network, suitable for devices
with firmware version E12 or higher
3RW4900-0NC00

For indicating and operating the functions provided by
the soft starter using an externally mounted display and
operator module in degree of protection IP54
(e.g. in the control cabinet door)
Connection cable
3RW4900-0AC00
6/64
From the device interface (serial) of the 3RW44 soft

starter to the external display and operator module
Length 0.5 m, flat
Length 0.5 m, round
Length 1.0 m, round
Length 2.5 m, round
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
For
soft starters
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Type
Box terminal blocks for soft starters

Box terminal block
(2 units are required for each device)
3RT19
3RW442.
Included in the scope of supply
3RW443.
Up to 70 mm2
Up to 120 mm2
}
}
3RT1955-4G
3RT1956-4G
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Auxiliary conductor connection

for box terminals
3TX7500-0A
1 unit
41B
Up to 240 mm2
(with auxiliary conductor connection)
3RT1966-4G
1 unit
41B
3RW442. and
3RW443.
3RT1956-4EA2
1 unit
41B
3RW444.
3RT1966-4EA2
1 unit
41B
3RT1956-4EA1
1 unit
41B
3RT1966-4EA1
1 unit
41B
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RW442. and 115 V AC

3RW443.
230 V AC
}
}
3RW49 36-8VX30
3RW49 36-8VX40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
3RW444.
115 V AC
230 V AC
}
}
3RW49 47-8VX30
3RW49 47-8VX40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42G
42G
3RW445. and 115 V AC

3RW446. 1)
230 V AC
}
}
3RW49 57-8VX30
3RW49 57-8VX40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
3RW446. 2)
}
}
3RW49 66-8VX30
3RW49 66-8VX40
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42H
42H
3RW444.

Terminal covers for cable lugs

and busbar connections
3RW442. and For complying with the voltage
3RW443.
clearances and as touch protection
3RW444.
Also fits on mounted box terminals.
3RT19.6-4EA1
Manual 3RW441)
1)
The operating instructions for 3RW44 (3ZX1012-0RW44-0AA0) are

included in the scope of supply of the soft starter, or are available like the
manual as PDF downloads from the Service&Support portal at
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support "Switching Devices"
"Soft Starters and Solid-State Switching Devices" "SIRIUS 3RW Soft
Starters".
Spare parts
For
soft starters
Version
Price
per PU
Type
Fans
Fans
3RW49
1)
2)
115 V AC
230 V AC
3RW446. mounting on output side.

For mounting on front side.

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/65

Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
More information
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used
Conveyor belts
Small fans1)
Pumps
Hydraulic pumps
70
10
deactivated
60
10
deactivated
50
10
4 x IM
30
10
4 x IM
30
10
deactivated
30
10
deactivated
Torque ramp
- Start torque
- Final torque
- Starting time
60
150
10
50
150
10
40
150
10
20
150
10
10
150
10
10
150
10
Breakaway pulse
Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode
Smooth
ramp-down
Application
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage
- Starting time
%
s
Smooth
ramp-down
Free ramp-down
Free ramp-down
Pump ramp-down Free ramp-down
Application examples for heavy starting (CLASS 20)

Heavy starting CLASS 20 (up to 40 s with 350% In motor, one start per hour)
The soft starter has to be selected one performance class higher than the motor used
Application
Stirrers
Centrifuges
Milling machines
30
30
4 x IM
30
30
4 x IM
30
30
4 x IM
Torque ramp
- Start torque
- Final torque
- Starting time
30
150
30
30
150
30
30
150
30
Breakaway pulse
deactivated (0 ms)
deactivated (0 ms)
deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode
Free ramp-down
Free ramp-down
Free ramp-down or DC braking
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage
- Starting time
%
s
Application examples for very heavy starting (CLASS 30)

Very heavy starting CLASS 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor, one start per hour)
The soft starter has to be selected two performance classes higher than the motor used
Large fans2)
Mills
Breakers
Circular saws/bandsaws
30
60
4 x IM
50
60
4 x IM
50
60
4 x IM
30
60
4 x IM
Torque ramp
- Start torque
- Final torque
- Starting time
20
150
60
50
150
60
50
150
60
20
150
60
Breakaway pulse
deactivated (0 ms)
80 %, 300 ms
80 %, 300 ms
deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode
Free ramp-down
Free ramp-down
Free ramp-down
Free ramp-down
Application
Starting parameters
limiting
- Starting voltage
- Starting time
%
s
1)
2)
The mass inertia of the fan is 10 times the mass inertia of the motor.
Note:
6/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

3RW44
Circuit concept
Configuration
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be operated in two different

types of circuit:
Inline circuit
The controls for isolating and protecting the motor are simply
connected in series with the soft starter. The motor is connected to the soft starter with three cables.
The wiring is similar to that of wye-delta starters. The phases
of the soft starter are connected in series with the individual
motor windings. The soft starter then only has to carry the
phase current, amounting to about 58 % of the rated motor
current (conductor current).
The solid-state 3RW44 soft starters are designed for normal

starting. In case of heavy starting or increased starting frequency, a larger device must be selected.
Comparison of the types of circuit:

NSB0_00424
L1
L2
For long starting times it is recommended to have a PTC sensor

in the motor. This also applies for the stopping modes smooth
ramp-down, pump ramp-down and DC braking, because during
the ramp-down time in these modes, an additional current
loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
soft starter.
L3
PE
A bypass contact system and solid-state overload relay are already integrated in the 3RW44 soft starter and therefore do not
have to be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load for starting currents must be
taken into consideration for the selection of motor starter protectors (selection of release).
Note:
Inline circuit:
Rated current Ie corresponds to the rated motor current In,
3 cables to the motor
NSB0_00425
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
U2
Device interface, PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET communication

module, Soft Starter ES parameterizing and operating
software
L2
U1
T1
T2
V1
L1
V2
W2
W1
T3

the soft starter.
L3
Inside-delta circuit:
Rated current Ie corresponds to approx. 58 % of the rated motor
current In, 6 cables to the motor (as with wye-delta starters)
Which circuit?
Using the inline circuit involves the lowest wiring outlay. If the soft
starter to motor connections are long, this circuit is preferable.
The wiring complexity is twice as high when using the insidedelta circuit, but a smaller device can be used with the same
rating.
Thanks to the choice of operating mode between the inline circuit and inside-delta circuit, it is always possible to select the
most favorable solution.
The braking function is possible only in the inline circuit.
The solid-state 3RW44 soft starters have a PC interface for

communicating with the Soft Starter ES software or for
connecting the external display and operator module.
If the optional PROFIBUS/PROFINET communication module
is used, the 3RW44 soft starter can be integrated in the
PROFIBUS/PROFINET network and communicate using the
GSD file or Soft Starter ES Premium software.
SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter block library for SIMATIC PCS 7
into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The SIRIUS
3RW44 Soft Starter PCS 7 block library contains the diagnostics
and driver blocks corresponding with the SIMATIC PCS 7 diagnostics and driver concept as well as the elements (symbols and
faceplates) required for operator control and process monitoring.
Manual for SIRIUS 3RW44
In addition to relevant configuration, commissioning, and service
information, the manual also contains example circuits and technical specifications for all devices:
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/67
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls)

should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, controls and overload relays
Siemens AG 2013
Solid-State Switching Devices for Resistive Loads

General data
Overview
Type
Solid-state relays
Solid-state contactors Function modules
Single-phase
Threephase
Singlephase
Threephase
22.5 mm
45 mm
45 mm
Simple use of exist-

ing solid-state relays
Complete unit
"Ready to use"
Space-saving
--
Can be extended
with modular function modules
--
1)
Frequent switching -and monitoring of

loads and solid-state
relays/solid-state
contactors
--
Monitoring of up to
6 partial loads
--
Monitoring of more
than 6 partial loads
Converters Load monitoring

Basic
Extended
Heating
Power
current
controllers
monitoring
Power
regulators
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Control of the heating power through

an analog input
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Power control
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Easy setting of
-setpoint values with
"Teach" button
--
--
--
--
--
--
"Remote Teach"
input for setting
setpoints
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Can be snapped
-directly onto a solidstate relay or contactor
--
--
--
--
For use with
"Coolplate" heat sink
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Connection of load
circuit as for controlgear
--
--
Connection of load
circuit from above
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Usage
Startup
Mounting
Mounting onto
mounting rails or
mounting plates
Cable routing
--
Function available
Function possible
-- Function not possible
1)
The converter can also be used with three-phase devices.
6/68
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
SIRIUS solid-state switching device generation
Design
Type current
Connection type
Switching function
Single-phase or number of controlled phases

Example
3RF
3RF
Note:
Benefits
Characteristics
Considerable space savings thanks to a width of only 22.5 mm
Variety of connection methods: Screw terminal, spring-type
connection or ring terminal lug, there is no problem they are
all finger-safe
Flexible for all applications with function modules for retrofitting
Possibility of fuseless short-circuit proof design
Benefits
Saves time and costs with fast mounting and commissioning,
short start-up times and easy wiring
Extremely long life, low maintenance, rugged and reliable
Space-saving and safe thanks to side-by-side mounting up to
an ambient temperature of +60 C
Modular design: Standardized function modules and heat
sinks can be used in conjunction with solid-state relays to
satisfy individual requirements
Safety due to lifelong, vibration-resistant and shock-resistant
spring-type terminal connection method even under tough
conditions
Application

article numbers.
Applications
Example: Plastics processing industry
Thanks to their high switching endurance SIRIUS 3SF2 solidstate switching devices are ideal for controlling electrical heat.
This is because the more precise the temperature regulation
process has to be, the higher the switching frequency. The accurate regulation of electrical heat is used for example in many
processes in the plastics processing industry:
Band heaters heat the extrudate to the correct temperature in
plastic extruders
Heat emitters heat plastic blanks to the correct temperature
Heat drums dry plastic granules
Heating channels keep molds at the correct temperature in
order to manufacture different plastic parts without defects
The powerful SIRIUS 3SF2 solid-state relays and contactors can
be used for the simultaneous control of several heating loads. By
using a load monitoring module the individual partial loads can
easily be monitored, and in the event of a failure a signal is generated to be sent to the controller.
See also Chapter 15, "Products for Specific Requirements"
"Heating Control Systems" "SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller".
Use in fuseless load feeders
Compared with the fused configuration of load feeders, short circuit and line protection using miniature circuit breakers is easy
to achieve with SIRIUS 3SF2 solid-state relays and contactors.
A special version of the solid-state contactors can be protected
against damage in the case of a short circuit with a miniature circuit breaker with type B tripping characteristic. This allows the
low-cost and simple design of fuseless load feeders with full protection of the switchgear.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/69
Siemens AG 2013

General data

Inscription labels for 3RF2 series
Designation
Labeling area
(W x H)
Color
DT Article No.
10 x 7
Pastel
turquoise
20 x 7
Pastel
turquoise
19 x 6
19 x 6
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RT19 00-1SB10
100
816 units
41B
3RT19 00-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
Pastel
turquoise
3RT19 00-1SB60
100
3060 units
41B
Zinc yellow
3RT19 00-1SD60
100
3060 units
41B
mm x mm
Blank labels
NSB0_01429b

for "SIRIUS"1)
Labels for sticking

for SIRIUS
3RT19 00-1SB20
(1 frame = 20 units)
1)
PC labeling systems for individual inscription

of unit labeling plates are available from:
More information
Notes on integration in the load feeders
The SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are very easy to integrate into the load feeders thanks to their industrial connection
method and design.
The solid-state switching devices are suitable for interferencefree operation in industrial networks without further measures. If
they are used in public networks, it may be necessary for conducted interference to be reduced by means of filters.
Particular attention must however be paid to the circumstances

of the installation and ambient conditions, as the performance of
the solid-state switching devices is largely dependent on these.
Depending on the version, certain restrictions must be observed. Detailed information in relation to solid-state contactors,
e.g. on minimum spacing, and in relation to solid-state relays on
the choice of heat sink can be found in the technical specifications and the product data sheets (see Service & Support).
Short-circuit and overload protection
Despite the rugged power semiconductors that are used, solidstate switching devices respond more sensitively to short circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precautions have
to be taken against destruction, depending on the type of design.
Siemens generally recommends using SITOR semiconductor
protection fuses. These fuses also provide protection against
destruction in the event of a short circuit even when the solidstate contactors and solid-state relays are fully utilized.
This does not include the solid-state contactors for resistive

loads of the special type 3RF23 ..-.CA.. "Low Noise". These comply with the class B limit values up to a rated current of 16 A. If
other versions are used, and at currents of over 16 A, standard
filters can be used in order to comply with the limit values. The
decisive factors when it comes to selecting the filters are essentially the current loading and the other parameters (operational
voltage, design type, etc.) in the load feeder.
Suitable filters can be ordered from EPCOS AG.
For more information see www.epcos.com.
Product information and technical specifications
For product data sheets with detailed technical specifications,
dimensional drawings and characteristic curves, see
www.siemens.com/sirius/support/
For additional information, please enter the article number of the
required device under the tab "Product List".
Alternatively, if there is lower loading, protection can also be provided by standard fuses or miniature circuit breakers. This protection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state switching devices accordingly. The technical specifications and the
product data sheets contain details both about the solid-state
fuse protection itself and about use of the devices with conventional protection equipment.
6/70
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
General data
Solid-state relays (without heat sink)
Three-phase solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm
SIRIUS solid-state relays are suitable for surface mounting on

existing cooling surfaces. Mounting is quick and easy, involving
just two screws. The special technology of the power semiconductor ensures there is excellent thermal contact with the heat
sink. Depending on the nature of the heat sink, the capacity
reaches up to 88 A on resistive loads.
With its compact design and a width of just 45 m, which stays the
same even at currents of up to 55 A, the 3RF22 solid-state relay
offers an ultra small footprint. The logical connection method,
with the power infeed from above and load connection from below, ensures tidy installation in the control cabinet.
The solid-state relays are available in three different versions:

3RF21 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 22.5 mm
3RF20 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
The three-phase solid-state relays are available with

two-phase control (suitable in particular for circuits without
connection to the neutral conductor) and
three-phase control (suitable for star circuits with connection to
the neutral conductor or for applications in which the system
requires all phases to be switched)
The 3RF21 and 3RF22 solid-state relays can be expanded with

various function modules to adapt them to individual applications.
Selection notes
Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching"

This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
on and off.
Version for inductive loads, "instantaneous switching"
In this version the solid-state relay is specifically matched to inductive loads. Whether it is a matter of frequent actuation of the
valves in a filling plant or starting and stopping small operating
mechanisms in packet distribution systems, operation is carried
out safely and noiselessly.
Special "Low noise" version
Thanks to a special control circuit, this special version can be
used in public networks up to 16 A without any additional measures such as interference suppressor filters. As a result, in
terms of emitted interference, it conforms to limit value curve
class B according to IEC 60947-4-3.
When selecting solid-state relays, in addition to information

about the network, the load and the ambient conditions it is also
necessary to know details of the planned design. The solid-state
relays can only conform to their specific technical specifications
if they are mounted with appropriate care on an adequately
dimensioned heat sink.
The following procedure is recommended:
Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
Select the relay design and choose a solid-state relay with
higher rated current than the load
Determine the thermal resistance of the proposed heat sink
Check the correct relay size with the aid of the diagrams
www.siemens.com/solid-state-switching-devices
Single-phase solid-state relays with a width of 22.5 mm

With its compact design and a width of just 22.5 mm, which stays
the same even at currents of up to 88 A, the 3RF21 solid-state
relay offers an ultra small footprint. The logical connection
method, with the power infeed from above and load connection
from below, ensures tidy installation in the control cabinet.
Single-phase solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm
The solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm provide for connection of the power supply lead and the load from above. This
makes it easy to replace existing solid-state relays in existing
arrangements. The connection of the control cable is as spacesaving as the 22.5 mm design, as it is simply plugged on.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/71
Overview
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
Overview
With its compact design and a width of just 22.5 mm, which stays
the same even at currents of up to 88 A, the 3RF21 solid-state
relay offers an ultra small footprint. The logical connection
method, with the power infeed from above and load connection
from below, ensures tidy installation in the control cabinet.
Type
3RF21..-1....
3RF21..-2....
3RF21..-3....
mm
22.5 x 85 x 48
22.5 x 85 x 48
22.5 x 85 x 48
During operation, derating from 40 C
-25 ... + 60
During storage
-55 ... + 80
Installation altitude
0 ... 1000; derating from 1000
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
g/ms
15/11
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
General data
Ambient temperature
IP20
- Conducted interference voltage
- Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage
- Electrostatic discharge
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
- Induced RF fields
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5
Mounting
Screws1)
Tightening torque
Class A for industrial applications

Class B for residential, business and commercial applications
kV
Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
MHz
0.15 ... 80; 140 dBV; behavior criterion 1
kV
kV
2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 2

Conductor - ground 2; conductor - conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Nm
2 x M4
1.5
Connection type
Screw terminals
Ring terminal lug

connections
Connection, main contacts

- Solid
- Finely stranded with end sleeve
- Finely stranded without end sleeve
- Solid or stranded, AWG cables
mm2
mm2
mm2
Terminal screws
Tightening torque
Cable lugs
- According to DIN 46234
- According to JIS C 2805
- Width, maximum
Nm
lb.in
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)2), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)

2 x (1 ... 2.5)2), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2),
1 x 10
-2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
---
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (AWG 18 ... 14)
---
M4
--
M5
2 ... 2.5
7 ... 10.3
---
2.5 ... 2
10.3 ... 7
--
-5-2.5, 5-6, 5-10, 5-16, 5-25

R 2-5, R 5.5-5, R 8-5, R 14-5
12
mm
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts

mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5

20 ... 12
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

20 ... 12
Stripped length
mm
10
M3
--
M3
0.5 ... 0.6

4.5 ... 5.3
---
0.5 ... 0.6

4.5 ... 5.3
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
Nm
lb.in
1)
Not included in the scope of supply.
2)

6/72
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
Type
Imax 1)
Ie according to UL/CSA Power loss

at Imax
at Rthha/Tu = 50 C
Minimum
load current
Off-state current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 C
Ie according to
IEC 60947-4-3
at Rthha/Tu = 40 C
K/W
K/W
K/W
mA
3RF2120-.....
20
2.0
20
1.7
20
1.3
28.6
0.1
10
3RF2130-1....
30
1.1
30
0.79
30
0.56
44.2
0.5
10
3RF2150-1....
3RF2150-2....
3RF2150-3....
50
50
50
0.68
0.68
0.68
50
20
50
0.48
2.6
0.48
50
20
50
0.33
2.9
0.33
66
66
66
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
10
3RF2170-1....
70
0.40
50
0.77
50
0.6
94
0.5
10
3RF2190-1....
3RF2190-2....
3RF2190-3....
88
88
88
0.33
0.33
0.33
50
20
88
0.94
2.8
0.22
50
20
83
0.85
3.5
0.19
118
118
118
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
10
Main circuit
Note:
The current Imax provides information about the performance of the

solid-state relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
smaller depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
The required heat sinks for the corresponding load currents can
be determined from the characteristic curves (see page 6/70,
"More Information"). The minimum thickness values for the
mounting surface must be observed.
Rated peak withstand current Itsm
I2t value
A2s
3RF2120-.....
200
200
3RF2130-..A.2
3RF2130-..A.4
3RF2130-..A.5
3RF2130-..A.6
300
300
300
400
450
450
450
800
3RF2150-.....
600
1800
3RF2170-..A.2
3RF2170-..A.4
3RF2170-..A.5
3RF2170-..A.6
1200
1200
1200
1150
7200
7200
7200
6600
3RF2190-.....
1150
6600
Type
1)
Main circuit
Type
3RF21..-....2
3RF21..-....4
3RF21..-....5
3RF21..-....6
Main circuit
V AC
24 ... 230
48 ... 460
48 ... 600
48 ... 600
Operating range
V AC
20 ... 253
40 ... 506
40 ... 660
40 ... 660
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
600
Blocking voltage
800
Rate of voltage rise
V/s
1000
Type
1200
3RF21..-...0.
3RF21..-...1.
1600
3RF21..-...2.
3RF21..-...4.
Control circuit
DC operation
AC/DC operation
AC operation
DC operation
24
24 AC
24 DC
110 ... 230
4 ... 30
Rated frequency
of the control supply voltage
Hz
--
50/60
10 %
--
50/60 10 %
--
Control supply voltage, max.
30
26.5 AC
30 DC
253
30
Typical actuating current
mA
20/Low Power: 6.51)
20
20
15
20
Response voltage
15
14 AC
15 DC
90
Drop-out voltage
5 AC
5 DC
40
ON-delay
ms
1 + max. one
half-wave2)
10 + max. one
half-wave2)
40 + max. one
half-wave2)
1 + max. one
half-wave2)
OFF-delay
ms
1 + max. one
half-wave
15 + max. one
half-wave
40 + max. one
half-wave
1 + max. one
half-wave
Method of operation
Operating times
1)
2)
Applies to the version "Low Power" 3RF21 ..-.AA..-0KN0

Only for zero-point switching devices.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/73
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
Circuit diagrams
DC control supply voltage
1
AC control supply voltage

1
A1 +
A1
A2 -
NSB0_01463
NSB0_01462
A2

Type current1)
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Screw terminals2)

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 24 ... 230 V AC
3RF2120-1AA02
20
30
50
70
90
24 DC
A
A
A
A
B
3RF2120-1AA02
3RF2130-1AA02
3RF2150-1AA02
3RF2170-1AA02
3RF2190-1AA02
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
50
70
90
110 ... 230 AC
A
A
B
B
B
3RF2120-1AA22
3RF2130-1AA22
3RF2150-1AA22
3RF2170-1AA22
3RF2190-1AA22
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
4 ... 30 DC
B
A
3RF2120-1AA42
3RF2130-1AA42
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
24 DC
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2120-1AA04
3RF2130-1AA04
3RF2150-1AA04
3RF2170-1AA04
3RF2190-1AA04
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
24 AC/DC
3RF2150-1AA14
1 unit
41C
20
30
50
70
90
110 ... 230 AC
A
A
B
A
B
3RF2120-1AA24
3RF2130-1AA24
3RF2150-1AA24
3RF2170-1AA24
3RF2190-1AA24
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
50
70
90
70
24 DC Low Power
3RF2170-1AA05-0KN0
1 unit
41C
20
30
50
70
90
4 ... 30 DC
B
B
B
A
B
3RF2120-1AA45
3RF2130-1AA45
3RF2150-1AA45
3RF2170-1AA45
3RF2190-1AA45
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
Zero-point switching Blocking voltage 1 600 V,

30
50
70
90
24 DC
A
A
B
B
3RF2130-1AA06
3RF2150-1AA06
3RF2170-1AA06
3RF2190-1AA06
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
30
50
70
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
3RF2130-1AA26
3RF2150-1AA26
3RF2170-1AA26
3RF2190-1AA26
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C

1)
The type current provides information about the performance capacity of

the solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
2)
Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to
approx. 50 A and a conductor cross-section of 10 mm2.
6/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
Other rated control supply voltages on request.

Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
Type current1)

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Instantaneous switching
50
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2150-1BA22
1 unit
41C
24 DC
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2120-1BA04
3RF2130-1BA04
3RF2150-1BA04
3RF2170-1BA04
3RF2190-1BA04
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
3RF2150-1BA06
1 unit
41C
3RF2170-1CA04
1 unit
41C
20
30
50
70
90
Instantaneous switching Blocking voltage 1 600 V,

50
24 DC
70
1)
24 DC
2)

the solid-state relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can
be smaller depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
3)
See page 6/71.
Type current1)
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Spring-type terminals2)

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
20
50
90
24 DC
A
B
B
3RF2120-2AA02
3RF2150-2AA02
3RF2190-2AA02
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
20
50
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
3RF2120-2AA22
3RF2150-2AA22
3RF2190-2AA22
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
20
4 ... 30 DC
3RF2120-2AA42
1 unit
41C
24 DC
A
B
B
3RF2120-2AA04
3RF2150-2AA04
3RF2190-2AA04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
50
24 AC/DC
3RF2150-2AA14
1 unit
41C
20
50
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
3RF2120-2AA24
3RF2150-2AA24
3RF2190-2AA24
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
4 ... 30 DC
3RF2120-2AA45
1 unit
41C
3RF2120-2AA02
20
50
90
20

50
90
24 DC
B
B
3RF2150-2AA06
3RF2190-2AA06
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
50
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2150-2AA26
3RF2190-2AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C

1)

2)
Please note that the version with spring-type terminals can only be used
for a rated current of up to approx. 20 A and a conductor cross-section of
2.5 mm2. Higher currents can be achieved by connecting two conductors
per terminal.

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/75
Low noise3) Zero-point switching

Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
Type current1)
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Ring terminal lug

connection
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
20
50
90
24 DC
B
B
B
3RF2120-3AA02
3RF2150-3AA02
3RF2190-3AA02
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
20
50
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
3RF2120-3AA22
3RF2150-3AA22
3RF2190-3AA22
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
20
50
90
24 DC
B
B
B
3RF2120-3AA04
3RF2150-3AA04
3RF2190-3AA04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
20
50
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
3RF2120-3AA24
3RF2150-3AA24
3RF2190-3AA24
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
90
4 ... 30 DC
3RF2190-3AA44
1 unit
41C
3RF2120-3AA02

50
90
24 DC
B
B
3RF2150-3AA06
3RF2190-3AA06
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
50
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2150-3AA26
3RF2190-3AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
1 10 units
41C

1)

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Optional accessories
Screwdrivers
3RA2908-1A
Length approx. 200 mm, size 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,

3RA2908-1A
Ring terminal lug
connection
Terminal covers for 3RF21 solid-state relays and 3RF23
solid-state contactors with ring terminal lug connection
3RF2900-3PA88
(After simple adaptation, this terminal cover can also be

used for screw terminals).
3RF2900-3PA88
6/76
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
single-phase, 45 mm
Overview
The solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm provide for connection of the power supply lead and the load from above. This
makes it easy to replace existing solid-state relays in existing
arrangements. The connection of the control cable also saves
space in much the same way as the 22.5 mm design, as it is
simply plugged on.
Type
3RF20..-1....
3RF20..-4....
mm
45 x 58 x 48
45 x 58 x 48
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
0 ... 1 000; derating from 1 000
g/ms
15 /11
General data
Ambient temperature
IP20
- Induced RF fields
Mounting
Screws1)
Tightening torque

kV
MHz
kV
kV

Nm
2 x M4
1.5
Connection type
Screw terminals

- Solid
mm2
mm2
Terminal screw
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)2), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)

2 x (1 ... 2.5)2), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2), 1 x 10
2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
----
M4
--
Nm
lb.in
2 ... 2.5
7 ... 10.3
---
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0),

AWG 20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5,

AWG 20 ... 12
Stripped length
mm
10
M3
--
0.5 ... 0.6

4.5 ... 5.3
---
Tightening torque
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
Nm
lb.in
1)
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/77
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
single-phase, 45 mm
Imax1)
Type

at Imax
at Rthha/Tu = 50 C
Minimum load
current
Off-state current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 C
Ie according to
IEC 60947-4-3
at Rthha/Tu = 40 C
K/W
K/W
K/W
mA
3RF2020-1.A..
20
2.0
20
1.7
20
1.3
28.6
0.1
10
3RF2030-1.A..
30
1.1
30
0.79
30
0.56
44.2
0.5
10
3RF2050-1.A..
50
0.68
50
0.48
50
0.33
66
0.5
10
3RF2070-1.A..
70
0.40
50
0.77
50
0.6
94
0.5
10
3RF2090-1.A..
88
0.33
50
0.94
50
0.85
118
0.5
10
Main circuit
1)
The current Imax provides information about the performance of the solidstate relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
Note:
I2t value
As
3RF2020-1.A..
200
200
3RF2030-1.A.2
3RF2030-1.A.4
3RF2030-1.A.6
300
300
400
450
450
800
3RF2050-1.A..
600
1 800
3RF2070-1.A.2
3RF2070-1.A.4
3RF2070-1.A.5
3RF2070-1.A.6
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
6
3RF2090-1.A..
1 150
Type
200
200
200
150
200
200
200
600
6 600
Type
3RF20.0-1.A.2
3RF20.0-1.A.4
3RF20.0-1.A.5
3RF20.0-1.A.6
Main circuit
V AC
24 ... 230
48 ... 460
48 ... 600
48 ... 600
Operating range
V AC
20 ... 253
40 ... 506
40 ... 660
40 ... 660
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
600
Blocking voltage
800
V/s
1 000
Type
1 200
1 600
3RF20.0-1.A0.
3RF20.0-1.A2.
3RF20.0-1.A4.
DC operation
AC operation
DC operation
24
110 230
4 30
--
50/60 10 %
--
Control circuit
Method of operation
Rated control supply voltage US
Rated frequ. of the control supply voltage Hz

30
253
30
mA
20
15
20
Response voltage
15
90
Drop-out voltage
40
ON-delay
ms
1 + max. one half-wave1)
OFF-delay
ms
1 + max. one half-wave
Operating times
1)
Circuit diagrams
L

1
A1 +
A2 -
6/78
A1
A2
Siemens IC 10 2014
NSB0_01463
NSB0_01462
Main circuit
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
single-phase, 45 mm

Type current1)

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RF2020-1AA02
20
30
50
70
90
24 DC
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2020-1AA02
3RF2030-1AA02
3RF2050-1AA02
3RF2070-1AA02
3RF2090-1AA02
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
50
70
90
110 ... 230 AC
A
A
B
B
B
3RF2020-1AA22
3RF2030-1AA22
3RF2050-1AA22
3RF2070-1AA22
3RF2090-1AA22
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
4 ... 30 DC
B
B
3RF2020-1AA42
3RF2030-1AA42
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
20
30
50
70
90
24 DC
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2020-1AA04
3RF2030-1AA04
3RF2050-1AA04
3RF2070-1AA04
3RF2090-1AA04
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
50
70
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2020-1AA24
3RF2030-1AA24
3RF2050-1AA24
3RF2070-1AA24
3RF2090-1AA24
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
50
4 ... 30 DC
3RF2050-1AA44
1 unit
41C
4 ... 30 DC
B
B
A
B
3RF2020-1AA45
3RF2050-1AA45
3RF2070-1AA45
3RF2090-1AA45
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
50
70
90

rated operational voltage Ue 48 ... 600 V AC
30
50
70
90
24 DC
B
B
B
B
3RF2030-1AA06
3RF2050-1AA06
3RF2070-1AA06
3RF2090-1AA06
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
30
50
70
90
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
3RF2030-1AA26
3RF2050-1AA26
3RF2070-1AA26
3RF2090-1AA26
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
24 DC
3RF2030-1BA04
1 unit
41C
30

1)

2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/79
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
single-phase, 45 mm
Type current1)
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Screw terminals +

(control current side)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41C
Configurator
Article No.
A
Price
per PU
50
24 DC
3RF2050-4AA02
3RF2050-4AA02
1)
6/80
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
three-phase, 45 mm
Overview
With its compact design and a width of just 45 m, which stays the
same even at currents of up to 55 A, the 3RF22 solid-state relay
offers an ultra small footprint. The logical connection method,
with the power infeed from above and load connection from
below, ensures tidy installation in the control cabinet.
Important features:
LED display
Variety of connection methods
Plug-in control connection
Two- or three-phase controlled
Type
3RF22..-1....
3RF22..-2....
3RF22..-3....
mm
45 x 95 x 47
45 x 95 x 47
45 x 95 x 47
-25 ... + 60
During storage
-55 ... + 80
0 ... 1 000; > 1 000 ask Technical Assistance
g/ms
15/11
General data
IP20
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz
(main/control circuit to floor)
Ambient temperature
V rms
4000

- Induced RF fields
Mounting
Screws2)
Tightening torque
Class A for industrial applications1)
kV
MHz
kV
kV

Nm
2 x M4
1.5
Connection type
Screw terminals
Ring terminal lug

connections

- Solid
Stripped length
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque,
5 ... 6 mm, PZ 2
Cable lugs
- Width, maximum
mm2
mm2
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)3), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)3)

2 x (1 ... 2.5)3), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)3),
1 x 10
-2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
---
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (AWG 18 ... 14)
---
mm
10
10
--
Nm
lb.in
M4
2 ... 2.5
18 ... 22
--
--
mm2
M5
2.5 ... 2
18 ... 22
5-2.5 ... 5-25
R 2-5 ... R 14-5
12
mm

Conductor cross-sections,
with or without end sleeve
mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5

20 ... 12
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

20 ... 12
Stripped length
mm
10
--
Nm
lb.in
M3
0.5 ... 0.6
4.5 ... 5.3
M3
0.5 ... 0.6
4.5 ... 5.3
Terminal screw
3.5, PZ 1
1)
These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in
residential areas could result in lead in radio interference. In this case
these may be required to introduce additional interference suppression
measures.
2)

3)
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/81
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
three-phase, 45 mm
Imax1)
Type

at Imax
at Rthha/Tu = 50 C
Minimum load
current
Max. off-state
current
at Rthha/Tu = 40 C
Ie according to
IEC 60947-4-3
at Rthha/Tu = 40 C
K/W
K/W
K/W
mA
3RF2230-. AB..
30
0.57
30
0.57
30
0.44
81
0.5
10
3RF2255-1AB..
3RF2255-2AB..
3RF2255-3AB..
55
0.18
50
20
50
0.27
1.83
0.27
50
20
50
0.19
1.58
0.19
151
0.5
10
3RF2230-. AC..
30
0.33
30
0.33
30
0.25
122
0.5
10
3RF2255-1AC..
3RF2255-2AC..
3RF2255-3AC..
55
0.09
50
20
50
0.15
1.19
0.15
50
20
50
0.1
1.02
0.1
226
0.5
10
Main circuit
1)
The current Imax provides information about the performance of the solidstate relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
I2t value
A2s
Main circuit
3RF2230-....5
300
450
3RF2255-....5
600
1800
Type
3RF22..-.AB.5
3RF22..-.AC.5
Main circuit
2-phase
3-phase
V AC
48 ... 600
48 ... 600
Operating range
V AC
40 ... 660
40 ... 660
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
50/60 10 %
600
600
kV
Blocking voltage
1 200
1 200
V/s
1 000
1 000
3RF22..-.A.3.
3RF22..-.A.4.
Controlled phases
Type
Control circuit
AC operation
DC operation
110
4 ... 30
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
--
121
30
mA
15
30
Response voltage
90
Drop-out voltage
< 40
ON-delay
ms
OFF-delay
ms
Method of operation
Operating times
Circuit diagrams
1 L1
2 T1
6/82
L2
T2
Three-phase controlled,
1 L1
5 L3
Siemens IC 10 2014
T3
3 L2
5 L3
A1 +
A1 +
A2 -
A2 -
2 T1
4 T2
T3
NSB0_01696
Two-phase controlled,
NSB0_01694
Type
Note:
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Relays
three-phase, 45 mm

Type current1)

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Two-phase controlled
30
110 AC
55
30
4 ... 30 DC
55
3RF2230-1AB35
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-1AB35
1 unit
41C
3RF2230-1AB45
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-1AB45
1 unit
41C
3RF2230-1AC35
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-1AC35
1 unit
41C
3RF2230-1AC45
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-1AC45
1 unit
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
30
3RF2230-1AB45
110 AC
55
30
4 ... 30 DC
55
Type current1)
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Spring-type terminals3)

Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
30
4 ... 30 DC
55
3RF2230-2AB45
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-2AB45
1 unit
41C
3RF2230-2AC45
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-2AC45
1 unit
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Three-phase controlled
30
4 ... 30 DC
55
3RF2230-2AB45
Type current1)

connection
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
30
4 ... 30 DC
55
3RF2230-3AB45
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-3AB45
1 unit
41C
3RF2230-3AC45
1 unit
41C
3RF2255-3AC45
1 unit
41C
30
4 ... 30 DC
55
3RF2230-3AB45
1)

2)
Please note that the version with an M4 screw connection can only be used
10 mm2.
3)
Please note that the version with spring-type terminals can only be used
2.5 mm2. Higher currents can be achieved by connecting two conductors
per terminal.

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/83
Siemens AG 2013

Solid-State Contactors
General data
Overview
Solid-state contactors (with heat sink)
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depending on the version, current intensities of up to 88 A are achieved.
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their particular advantages is their compact and space-saving design.
With their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped
onto a standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on support plates with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be
used in circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) in building management systems. For
other applications, such as for extended personal safety, the
heat sink can be grounded through a screw terminal.
The solid-state contactors are available in 2 different versions:
3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors
3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors
The following miniature circuit breakers with a B characteristic

and 10 kA or 6 kA breaking capacity protect the 3RF23 ..-.DA..
solid-state contactors in the event of short circuits on the load
and the specified conductor cross-sections and lengths:
Rated current of the Example of
miniature circuit
type1)
breaker
Max. conductor Minimum cable

cross-section
length from
contactor to
load
6A
5SY4 106-6
1 mm2
5m
10 A
5SY4 110-6
1.5 mm2
8m
16 A
5SY4 116-6
1.5 mm2
12 m
16 A
5SY4 116-6
2.5 mm2
20 m
20 A
5SY4 120-6
2.5 mm2
20 m
25 A
5SY4 125-6
2.5 mm2
26 m
1)
The miniature circuit breakers can be used up to a maximum rated voltage

of 480 V!
3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
L1
3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
L1
The 3RF23 solid-state contactors can be expanded with various

function modules to adapt them to individual applications.
L2
L2
L3
L3
Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching"
Special "Low noise" version

Thanks to a special control circuit, this special version can be
used in public networks up to 16 A without any additional measures such as interference suppressor filters. As a result, in
terms of emitted interference, it conforms to limit value curve
class B according to IEC 60947-4-3.
Special "Short-circuit proof" version
Skillful matching of the power semiconductor with the performance capacity of the solid-state contactor means that "shortcircuit strength" can be achieved with a standard miniature circuit breaker. In combination with a B-type MCB or a conventional
line protection fuse, the result is a short-circuit proof feeder.
In order to achieve problem-free short-circuit protection by
means of miniature circuit breakers, however, certain boundary
conditions must be observed. As the magnitude and duration of
the short-circuit current are determined not only by the short-circuit breaking response of the miniature circuit breaker but also
the properties of the wiring system, such as the internal resistance of the input to the network and damping by controls and
cables, particular attention must also be paid to these parameters. The necessary cable lengths are therefore shown for the
main factor, the line resistance, in the table below.
6/84
Siemens IC 10 2014
K1
I,A
K1
1
T
I,A
line
In this version the solid-state contactor is specifically matched to

inductive loads. Whether it is a matter of frequent actuation of the
valves in a filling plant or starting and stopping small operating
mechanisms in packet distribution systems, operation is carried
out safely and noiselessly.
F2
F1
line
Version for inductive loads, "instantaneous switching"
F1
NSB0_01473b
This standard version is often used for switching space heaters

on and off.
line
Single-phase versions
R1
R1
Solid-state contactor protection
The setup and installation above can also be used for the solidstate relays with a I2t value of at least 6 600 A2s.
Three-phase versions
The three-phase solid-state contactors for resistive loads up to
50 A are available with
two-phase control (suitable in particular for circuits without
connection to the neutral conductor) and
three-phase control (suitable for star circuits with connection to
the neutral conductor or for applications in which the system
requires all phases to be switched)
The converter function module can be snapped onto both
versions for the simple power control of AC loads by means of
analog signals.
Check the correct contactor size with the aid of the rated
current diagram, taking account of the installation conditions
Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type
3RF23..-.A...
See page 6/86
3RF23..-.B...
3RF23..-.C...
3RF23..-.D...
General data
Ambient temperature
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
0 ... 1000; derating from 1 000
Shock resistance
acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
g/ms
15/11
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
2
IP20
Emitted interference according to
IEC 60947-4-3
Class A for industrial

Class A for industrial
applications;
applications
Class B for residential,
business and commercial
applications up to 16 A,
AC-51 Low Noise
- Emitted, high-frequency interference

voltage
- Induced RF fields
kV
MHz
kV
kV

Type
3RF23..-1....
3RF23..-2....
3RF23..-3....
General data
Connection type
Screw terminals
Ring terminal lug

connections

- Solid
mm2
mm2
mm2
Terminal screws
Tightening torque
Cable lugs
- Width, maximum
Nm
lb.in
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)1), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)

2 x (1 ... 2.5)1), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1),
1 x 10
-2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
---
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (AWG 18 ... 14)
---
M4
--
M5
2 ... 2.5
7 ... 10.3
---
2 ... 2.5
7 ... 10.3
--
-5-2.5, 5-6, 5-10, 5-16, 5-25

R 2-5, R 5.5-5, R 8-5, R 14-5
12
mm

mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)1), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

AWG 20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5

AWG 20 ... 12
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

AWG 20 ... 12
Stripped length
mm
10
M3
--
M3
0.5 ... 0.6

4.5 ... 5.3
---
0.5 ... 0.6

4.5 ... 5.3
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
Grounding
Nm
lb.in
screw2)
Size (standard screw)

M4
10
10
NSB0_01701
1)

2)
The screw is not included in the scope of supply.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/85
Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type
3RF23..-....2
3RF23..-....4
3RF23..-....5
3RF23..-....6
Main circuit
V AC
24 ... 230
48 ... 460
48 ... 600
48 ... 600
Operating range
V AC
20 ... 253
40 ... 506
40 ... 660
40 ... 660
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
600
Blocking voltage
800
V/s
1000
Type
1200
3RF23..-...0.
3RF23..-...1.
1600
3RF23..-...2
3RF23..-...4.
Control circuit
DC operation
AC/DC operation
AC operation
DC operation
24 DC
24 AC
24 DC
110 ... 230 AC
4 ... 30 DC
Rated frequency
Hz
--
50/60
10 %
--
50/60 10 %
--
Actuating voltage, max.
30
26.5 AC
30 DC
253
30
mA
20/Low Power: <101)
20
20
15
20
Response voltage
15
14 AC
15 DC
90
Drop-out voltage
5 AC
55 DC
40
ON-delay
ms
1 + max. one
half-wave2)
10 + max. one
half-wave2)
40 + max. one
half-wave2)
1 + max. one
half-wave2)
OFF-delay
ms
1 + max. one
half-wave
15 + max. one
half-wave
40 + max. one
half-wave
1 + max. one
half-wave
Operating times
1)
2)
Applies to the version "Low Power" 3RF23 ..-.AA..-0KN0

Type
Type current1)
IAC-51
(including heat sink)
mm
Method of operation
Main circuit
3RF2310-.AA..
10.5
22.5 x 100 x 89
3RF2320-.AA..
3RF2320-.CA..
3RF2320-.DA..
20
22.5 x 100 x 135.5
3RF2330-.AA..
3RF2330-.CA..
30
30 x 100 x 151
3RF2330-.DA..
30
22.5 x 100 x 135.5
3RF2340-.AA..
40
67 x 100 x 151
3RF2350-.AA..
50
67 x 100 x 151
3RF2370-.AA..
70
135 x 100 x 157.5
3RF2390-.AA..
88
180 x 200 x 157.5
1)
The type current provides information about the performance of the solidstate contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
smaller depending on the connection method and start-up conditions.
6/86
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type
Type current AC-511)

For Imax
Power loss
at Imax
Minimum
load current
Off-state
current
Rated peak
withstand
current Itsm
I2t value
at 40 C
Acc. to
IEC 60947-4-3
at 40 C
Acc. to
UL/CSA
at 50 C
mA
As
3RF2310-.AA.2
3RF2310-.AA.4
3RF2310-.AA.5
3RF2310-.AA.6
10.5
7.5
9.6
11
0.1
10
200
200
200
400
200
200
200
800
3RF2320-.AA.2
3RF2320-.AA.4
3RF2320-.AA.5
3RF2320-.AA.6
3RF2320-.CA.2
3RF2320-.CA.4
3RF2320-.DA.2
3RF2320-.DA.4
20
13.2
17.6
20
0.5
10
10
10
10
25
25
10
10
600
600
600
600
600
600
1150
1150
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
6600
6600
3RF2330-.AA.2
3RF2330-.AA.4
3RF2330-.AA.5
3RF2330-.AA.6
3RF2330-.CA.2
3RF2330-.DA.4
30
22
27
33
0.5
10
10
10
10
25
10
600
600
600
600
600
1150
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
6600
3RF2340-.AA.2
3RF2340-.AA.4
3RF2340-.AA.5
3RF2340-.AA.6
40
33
36
44
0.5
10
1200
1200
1200
1150
7200
7200
7200
6600
3RF2350-.AA.2
3RF2350-.AA.4
3RF2350-.AA.5
3RF2350-.AA.6
50
36
45
54
0.5
10
1150
6600
3RF2370-.AA.2
3RF2370-.AA.4
3RF2370-.AA.5
3RF2370-.AA.6
70
70
62
83
0.5
10
1150
6600
3RF2390-.AA.2
3RF2390-.AA.4
3RF2390-.AA.5
3RF2390-.AA.6
88
88
80
117
0.5
10
1150
6600
1)
Main circuit
Power loss Minimum
Off-state
at Imax
load current current
Rated peak
withstand
current Itsm
I2t value
9.6
13.2
17.6
30
22
3RF2340-.BA.2
3RF2340-.BA.4
3RF2340-.BA.6
40
3RF2350-.BA.2
3RF2350-.BA.4
3RF2350-.BA.6
Type
Type current AC-511)

For Imax
Type current AC-15
at 40 C
Acc. to IEC
60947-4-3
for 40 C
Acc. to.
UL/CSA
at 50 C
10 x Ie
for
60 ms
3RF2310-.BA.2
3RF2310-.BA.4
3RF2310-.BA.6
10.5
7.5
3RF2320-.BA.2
3RF2320-.BA.4
3RF2320-.BA.6
20
3RF2330-.BA.2
3RF2330-.BA.4
3RF2330-.BA.6
Parameters
mA
As
1200 1/h
11
50 % ON period
0.1
10
200
200
400
200
200
800
12
1200 1/h
20
50 % ON period
0.5
10
600
1800
27
15
1200 1/h
33
50 % ON period
0.5
10
600
1800
33
36
20
1200 1/h
44
50 % ON period
0.5
10
1200
1200
1150
7200
7200
6600
50
36
45
25
1200 1/h
54
50 % ON period
0.5
10
1150
6600
3RF2370-.BA.2
3RF2370-.BA.4
3RF2370-.BA.6
70
70
62
27.5
1200 1/h
83
50 % ON period
0.5
10
1150
6600
3RF2390-.BA.2
3RF2390-.BA.4
3RF2390-.BA.6
88
88
80
30
1200 1/h
117
50 % ON period
0.5
10
1150
6600
Main circuit
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/87
Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Circuit diagrams
1
A1 +
PE
A1
A2
NSB0_01464
A2 -
NSB0_01465
PE

Selection notes
The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details
of the network, the load and the ambient conditions. As the
solid-state contactors are already equipped with an optimally
matched heat sink, the selection process is considerably
simpler than that for solid-state relays.
Type current1)
Imax

Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated
current than the load
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Screw terminals

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RF2310-1
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2310-1AA02
3RF2320-1AA02
3RF2330-1AA02
3RF2340-1AA02
3RF2350-1AA02
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
24 DC Low Power
3RF2320-1AA02-0KN0
1 unit
41C
24 AC/DC
3RF2310-1AA12
1 unit
41C
110 ... 230 AC
A
A
A
B
A
3RF2310-1AA22
3RF2320-1AA22
3RF2330-1AA22
3RF2340-1AA22
3RF2350-1AA22
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
24 DC
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2310-1AA04
3RF2320-1AA04
3RF2330-1AA04
3RF2340-1AA04
3RF2350-1AA04
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
24 DC Low Power
3RF2310-1AA04-0KN0
1 unit
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
24 AC/DC
A
B
A
B
B
3RF2310-1AA14
3RF2320-1AA14
3RF2330-1AA14
3RF2340-1AA14
3RF2350-1AA14
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
110 ... 230 AC
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2310-1AA24
3RF2320-1AA24
3RF2330-1AA24
3RF2340-1AA24
3RF2350-1AA24
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
4 ... 30 DC
A
A
A
3RF2310-1AA44
3RF2320-1AA44
3RF2330-1AA44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
24 DC
20
10.5
10.5
20
30
40
50
3RF2320-1

1)
For derating characteristic curves see page 6/70, "More Information".
6/88
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type current1)
Imax

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
30
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2330-1AA25
1 unit
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
4 ... 30 DC
B
A
A
A
A
3RF2310-1AA45
3RF2320-1AA45
3RF2330-1AA45
3RF2340-1AA45
3RF2350-1AA45
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
24 DC
B
A
A
B
B
3RF2310-1AA06
3RF2320-1AA06
3RF2330-1AA06
3RF2340-1AA06
3RF2350-1AA06
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1AA26
3RF2320-1AA26
3RF2330-1AA26
3RF2340-1AA26
3RF2350-1AA26
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
24 DC
B
B
3RF2320-1CA02
3RF2330-1CA02
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-1CA22
1 unit
41C
3RF2340-1

3RF2320-1

20
24 DC
3RF2320-1CA04
1 unit
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-1CA24
1 unit
41C
20
4 ... 30 DC
3RF2320-1CA44
1 unit
41C
Short-circuit proof with B-type MCB Zero-point switching

20
24 DC
3RF2320-1DA02
1 unit
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-1DA22
1 unit
41C

20
24 DC
3RF2320-1DA04
1 unit
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-1DA24
1 unit
41C
20
30
4 ... 30 DC
A
A
3RF2320-1DA44
3RF2330-1DA44
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
3RF2320-1
1)
2)
See page 6/84.

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/89

Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type
current1)
Imax
Operational
current
Ie/AC-152)

voltage Us
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RF2310-1
10.5
20
30
40
50
50
50
6
12
15
20
25
27.5
30
24 DC
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1BA02
3RF2320-1BA02
3RF2330-1BA02
3RF2340-1BA02
3RF2350-1BA02
3RF2370-1BA02
3RF2390-1BA02
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
50
50
6
12
15
20
25
27.5
30
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1BA22
3RF2320-1BA22
3RF2330-1BA22
3RF2340-1BA22
3RF2350-1BA22
3RF2370-1BA22
3RF2390-1BA22
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
3RF2320-1
10.5
20
30
40
50
50
50
6
12
15
20
25
27.5
30
24 DC
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1BA04
3RF2320-1BA04
3RF2330-1BA04
3RF2340-1BA04
3RF2350-1BA04
3RF2370-1BA04
3RF2390-1BA04
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
50
50
6
12
15
20
25
27.5
30
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1BA24
3RF2320-1BA24
3RF2330-1BA24
3RF2340-1BA24
3RF2350-1BA24
3RF2370-1BA24
3RF2390-1BA24
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
50
12
15
25
4 ... 30 DC
B
B
B
3RF2320-1BA44
3RF2330-1BA44
3RF2350-1BA44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C

3RF2340-1
10.5
20
30
40
50
50
50
6
12
15
20
25
27.5
30
24 DC
B
A
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1BA06
3RF2320-1BA06
3RF2330-1BA06
3RF2340-1BA06
3RF2350-1BA06
3RF2370-1BA06
3RF2390-1BA06
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
50
50
6
12
15
20
25
27.5
30
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-1BA26
3RF2320-1BA26
3RF2330-1BA26
3RF2340-1BA26
3RF2350-1BA26
3RF2370-1BA26
3RF2390-1BA26
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C

1)
2)
Utilization category AC-15:

Electromagnetic loads, e.g. valves according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Parameters: max. 1200 1/h, 50 % ON period, 10-times inrush current for
60 ms.
6/90
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type current1)
Imax
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Spring-type terminals

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
10.5
20
24 DC
B
A
3RF2310-2AA02
3RF2320-2AA02
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
10.5
20
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2310-2AA22
3RF2320-2AA22
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
10.5
20
24 DC
A
A
3RF2310-2AA04
3RF2320-2AA04
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
10.5
20
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2310-2AA24
3RF2320-2AA24
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
3RF2320-2

10.5
20
24 DC
B
A
3RF2310-2AA06
3RF2320-2AA06
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
10.5
20
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2310-2AA26
3RF2320-2AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C

20
24 DC
3RF2320-2CA02
1 unit
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-2CA22
1 unit
41C
Low Noise2) Zero-point switching

20
24 DC
3RF2320-2CA04
1 unit
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-2CA24
1 unit
41C
3RF2320-2DA22
1 unit
41C

20
110 ... 230 AC

20
24 DC
3RF2320-2DA04
1 unit
41C
20
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-2DA24
1 unit
41C

1)
2)
See page 6/84.

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/91
Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type current1)
Imax

connection
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RF2350-3
10.5
20
30
40
50
70
88
24 DC
B
B
B
B
B
A
B
3RF2310-3AA02
3RF2320-3AA02
3RF2330-3AA02
3RF2340-3AA02
3RF2350-3AA02
3RF2370-3AA02
3RF2390-3AA02
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
70
88
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-3AA22
3RF2320-3AA22
3RF2330-3AA22
3RF2340-3AA22
3RF2350-3AA22
3RF2370-3AA22
3RF2390-3AA22
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
70
88
24 DC
B
B
A
B
A
A
A
3RF2310-3AA04
3RF2320-3AA04
3RF2330-3AA04
3RF2340-3AA04
3RF2350-3AA04
3RF2370-3AA04
3RF2390-3AA04
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
70
88
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-3AA24
3RF2320-3AA24
3RF2330-3AA24
3RF2340-3AA24
3RF2350-3AA24
3RF2370-3AA24
3RF2390-3AA24
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
20
30
50
4 ... 30 DC
B
B
B
3RF2320-3AA44
3RF2330-3AA44
3RF2350-3AA44
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
4 ... 30 DC
B
A
B
3RF2340-3AA45
3RF2370-3AA45
3RF2390-3AA45
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
3RF2330-3,
covers optional
40
70
88

10.5
20
30
40
50
70
88
24 DC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-3AA06
3RF2320-3AA06
3RF2330-3AA06
3RF2340-3AA06
3RF2350-3AA06
3RF2370-3AA06
3RF2390-3AA06
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
70
88
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2310-3AA26
3RF2320-3AA26
3RF2330-3AA26
3RF2340-3AA26
3RF2350-3AA26
3RF2370-3AA26
3RF2390-3AA26
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C

1)
6/92
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

single-phase
Type
current1)
Imax
Operational
current
Ie/AC-152)
Rated control
supply voltage Us
DT Ring terminal lug

connection
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
70
88
27.5
30
24 DC
B
B
3RF2370-3BA02
3RF2390-3BA02
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
70
88
27.5
30
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2370-3BA22
3RF2390-3BA22
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
70
88
27.5
30
24 DC
B
B
3RF2370-3BA04
3RF2390-3BA04
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
70
88
27.5
30
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2370-3BA24
3RF2390-3BA24
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
70
88
27.5
30
24 DC
B
B
3RF2370-3BA06
3RF2390-3BA06
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
70
88
27.5
30
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
3RF2370-3BA26
3RF2390-3BA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C

20
--
24 DC
3RF2320-3DA02
1 unit
41C
20
--
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-3DA22
1 unit
41C

20
--
24 DC
3RF2320-3DA04
1 unit
41C
20
--
110 ... 230 AC
3RF2320-3DA24
1 unit
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
1 10 units
41C

1)
2)
Utilization category AC-15:

Electromagnetic loads, e.g. valves according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Parameters: max. 1 200 1/h, 50 % ON period, 10-times inrush current for
60 ms.
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Screwdrivers
3RA2908-1A

3RA2908-1A
Ring terminal lug
connection
Terminal covers for 3RF21 solid-state relays and 3RF23
solid-state contactors in ring terminal lug connection
3RF2900-3PA88
(After simple adaptation, this terminal cover can also be

used for screw terminals).
3RF2900-3PA88

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/93

Siemens AG 2013

three-phase
Type
3RF24..-1....
See page 6/95
3RF24..-2....
3RF24..-3....
General data
Ambient temperature
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
0 ... 1000; derating from 1 000
g/ms
15/11
2
IP20
V rms
4000
Emitted interference according to

IEC 60947-4-3
- Induced RF fields

kV
MHz
kV
kV

Connection type
Screw terminals
Ring terminal lug

connection

- Solid
Stripped length
Terminal screws
- Tightening torque
Cable lugs
- Width, maximum
mm2
mm2
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)2), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)

2 x (1 ... 2.5)2), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2),
1 x 10
-2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
---
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (AWG 18 ... 14)
---
mm
10
10
--
--
Nm
lb.in
M4
2 ... 2.5
18 ... 22
M5
2 ... 2.5
18 ... 22
--
--
mm2
5-2.5 ... 5-25

R 2-5 ... R 14-5
12
mm

mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

AWG 20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5

AWG 20 ... 12
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

AWG 20 ... 12
Stripped length
mm
10
--
Nm
lb.in
M3
0.5 ... 0.6
4.5 ... 5.3
M3
0.5 ... 0.6
4.5 ... 5.3
Terminal screw
3.5, PZ 1
Grounding screws3)
Size (standard screw)
M4
10
10
NSB0_01703
1)
measures. The versions 3RF24 ..-1AC55 comply with Class B for residential, business and commercial applications.
2)
3) The screw is not included in the scope of supply.
6/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

three-phase
Type
Power loss
at IAC-51
Minimum
load current
Max. off-state
current
Rated peak
withstand
current Itsm
I2t value
mA
As
7
15
22
30
38
7
15
22
30
38
23
44
61
80
107
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
10
10
10
200
600
1200
1150
1150
200
1800
7200
6600
6600
7
15
22
30
38
7
15
22
30
38
31
66
91
121
160
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
10
10
10
300
600
1200
1150
1150
450
1800
7200
6600
6600
Type current
IAC-51
at 40 C
Acc. to
IEC 60947-4-3
at 40 C
Acc. to.
UL/CSA
at 50 C
3RF2410-.AB.5
3RF2420-.AB.5
3RF2430-.AB.5
3RF2440-.AB.5
3RF2450-.AB.5
10.5
22
30
40
50
3RF2410-.AC.5
3RF2420-.AC.5
3RF2430-.AC.5
3RF2440-.AC.5
3RF2450-.AC.5
10.5
22
30
40
50
Main circuit
1)
Type current
IAC-51
mm
Type
Type current
IAC-51
mm
Main circuit
3RF2410-.AB..
Type
Main circuit
10.5
45 x 100 x 105
3RF2410-.AC..
3RF2430-.AC..
30
3RF2440-.AB..
40
3RF2420-.AB..
22
67 x 100 x 112.5
3RF2440-.AC..
40
3RF2420-.AC..
22
89.5 x 100 x 112.5
3RF2450-.AB..
50
3RF2430-.AB..
30
3RF2450-.AC..
50
Type
113.5 x 100 x 121

157.5 x 100 x 121
157.5 x 180 x 121
3RF24..-.AB.5
3RF24..-.AC.5
Main circuit
2-phase
3-phase
V AC
48 ... 600
48 ... 600
Operating range
V AC
40 ... 660
40 ... 660
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
50/60 10 %
600
600
kV
Blocking voltage
1200
1200
V/s
1000
1000
Controlled phases
Type
3RF24..-...3.
3RF24..-...4.
3RF24..-...5.
Control circuit
AC operation
DC operation
AC operation
110
4 ... 30
190 ... 230
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60 10 %
--
50/60 10 %
121
30
253
mA
15
30
15
Response voltage
90
180
Drop-out voltage
< 40
<1
< 40
ON-delay
ms
OFF-delay
ms
Method of operation
Operating times
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/95
Siemens AG 2013

three-phase
Circuit diagrams
L2
5 L3
1 L1
A1 +
3 L2
5 L3
A1 +
PE
A2 -
T2
NSB0_01685
2 T1
A2 -
T3
2 T1
1 L1
4 T2
T3
L2
1 L1
5 L3
A1
PE
3 L2
5 L3
A1
PE
T2
T3
A2
NSB0_01686
A2
2 T1
NSB0_01687
PE
2 T1
T2
NSB0_01688
1 L1
T3

Type current1)
Imax

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RF2420-1AB45
10.5
20
30
40
50
4 ... 30 DC
A
A
A
B
A
3RF2410-1AB45
3RF2420-1AB45
3RF2430-1AB45
3RF2440-1AB45
3RF2450-1AB45
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
110 AC
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2410-1AB35
3RF2420-1AB35
3RF2430-1AB35
3RF2440-1AB35
3RF2450-1AB35
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
230 AC
B
B
A
B
B
3RF2410-1AB55
3RF2420-1AB55
3RF2430-1AB55
3RF2440-1AB55
3RF2450-1AB55
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
3RF2410-1AC45
10.5
20
30
40
50
4 ... 30 DC
A
A
A
A
A
3RF2410-1AC45
3RF2420-1AC45
3RF2430-1AC45
3RF2440-1AC45
3RF2450-1AC45
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
110 AC
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2410-1AC35
3RF2420-1AC35
3RF2430-1AC35
3RF2440-1AC35
3RF2450-1AC35
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C
10.5
20
30
40
50
230 AC
B
B
B
B
B
3RF2410-1AC55
3RF2420-1AC55
3RF2430-1AC55
3RF2440-1AC55
3RF2450-1AC55
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
41C

1)
6/96
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

three-phase
Type current1)
Imax
Rated control supply voltage Us DT Spring-type terminals

Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
10
20
4 ... 30 DC
B 3RF2410-2AB45
B 3RF2420-2AB45
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
10
20
230 AC
B 3RF2410-2AB55
B 3RF2420-2AB55
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
4 ... 30 DC
B 3RF2410-2AC45
B 3RF2420-2AC45
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
10
20
230 AC
B 3RF2410-2AC55
B 3RF2420-2AC55
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
Type current1)
Imax

connection
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
A
3RF2410-2AB45
10
20
Price
per PU
50
4 ... 30 DC
B 3RF2450-3AB45
1 unit
41C
50
230 AC
B 3RF2450-3AB55
1 unit
41C
50
4 ... 30 DC
B 3RF2450-3AC45
1 unit
41C
50
230 AC
B 3RF2450-3AC55
1 unit
41C

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/97
Siemens AG 2013

3RF29 Function Modules
General data
Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS 3RF2 solid-state switching devices
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of
functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can
be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by clicking them into place; straight away the necessary connections
are made with the solid-state relay or contactor.
The plug-in connection to control the solid-state switching devices can simply remain in use. The external connections have
screw terminals.
The following function modules are available:

Converters
Load monitoring
Power controllers
Power regulators
With the exception of the converter, the function modules can be
used only with single-phase solid-state switching devices.
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relays
Type
Accessories
Converters
Power regulators1)
Extended1)
Heating current
monitoring1)
Power controllers1)
Basic
Load monitoring
Type current = 20 A
3RF2120-1A.02
3RF2120-1A.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2120-1A.22
3RF2120-1A.24
---
---
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
---
---
---
3RF2120-1A.42
3RF2120-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2120-1B.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2120-2A.02
3RF2120-2A.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
---
---
---
---
3RF2120-2A.22
3RF2120-2A.24
---
---
---
---
---
---
3RF2120-2A.42
3RF2120-2A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
---
---
---
---
3RF2120-3A.02
3RF2120-3A.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2120-3A.22
3RF2120-3A.24
---
---
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
---
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
Type current = 30 A
3RF2130-1A.02
3RF2130-1A.04
3RF2130-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2130-1A.22
3RF2130-1A.24
3RF2130-1A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2130-1A.42
3RF2130-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2130-1B.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
Type current = 50 A
3RF2150-1A.02
3RF2150-1A.04
3RF2150-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2150-1A.22
3RF2150-1A.24
3RF2150-1A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2150-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2150-1B.04
3RF2150-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2150-1B.22
--
--
3RF2950-0GA33
--
--
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2150-2A.02
3RF2150-2A.04
3RF2150-2A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2150-2A.14
3RF2900-0EA18
--
--
--
--
--
3RF2150-2A.22
3RF2150-2A.24
3RF2150-2A.26
----
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2150-3A.02
3RF2150-3A.04
3RF2150-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2150-3A.22
3RF2150-3A.24
3RF2150-3A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
1)
For line voltages in the range from 110 to 230 V, the versions of the
3RF29 ..-0.A13 function modules can also be combined with more voltageresistant versions of the solid-state relays (3RF21 ..-....4 , -....5 or -....6).
6/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Accessories
Converters
Power regulators1)
Extended1)
Heating current
monitoring1)
Power controllers1)
Basic
Load monitoring
Type current = 70 A
3RF2170-1A.02
3RF2170-1A.04
3RF2170-1A.05
3RF2170-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2170-1A.22
3RF2170-1A.24
3RF2170-1A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2170-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2170-1B.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2170-1C.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2190-1A.02
3RF2190-1A.04
3RF2190-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2190-1A.22
3RF2190-1A.24
3RF2190-1A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2190-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2190-1B.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2190-2A.02
3RF2190-2A.04
3RF2190-2A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2190-2A.22
3RF2190-2A.24
3RF2190-2A.26
----
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2190-3A.02
3RF2190-3A.04
3RF2190-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2990-0GA13
3RF2990-0GA16
3RF2990-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2990-0KA13
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA13
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2190-3A.22
3RF2190-3A.24
3RF2190-3A.26
----
----
3RF2990-0GA33
3RF2990-0GA36
3RF2990-0GA36
----
----
3RF2990-0HA33
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2190-3A.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2990-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA16
1)
3RF29 ..-0.A13 function modules can also be combined with more voltageresistant versions of the solid-state relays (3RF21 ..-....4 , -....5 or -....6).
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF22 three-phase solid-state relays
Type
Accessories
Converters
Load monitoring
Power regulators
Extended
Heating current
monitoring
Power controllers
Basic
Type current up to 55 A
3RF22..-1AA..
3RF2900-0EA18
--
--
--
--
--
3RF22..-2AA..
3RF2900-0EA18
--
--
--
--
--
3RF22..-3AA..
3RF2900-0EA18
--
--
--
--
--
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors
Type
Accessories
Converters
Power regulators1)
Extended1)
Heating current
monitoring1)
Power controllers1)
Basic
Load monitoring
Type current Ie = 10.5 A

3RF2310-1A.02
3RF2310-1A.04
3RF2310-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2916-0JA13
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2310-1A.12
3RF2310-1A.14
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2916-0JA13
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2310-1A.22
3RF2310-1A.24
3RF2310-1A.26
----
----
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
3RF2920-0GA36
----
----
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2310-1A.44
3RF2310-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
1)
3RF29 ..-0.A13 function modules can also be combined with more
voltage-resistant versions of the solid-state contactors
(3RF23 ..-....4 , -....5 or -....6).
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/99
Type current = 90 A
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Accessories
Converters
Power regulators1)
Extended1)
Heating current
monitoring1)
Power controllers1)
Basic
Load monitoring
Type current Ie = 10.5 A

3RF2310-1B.02
3RF2310-1B.04
3RF2310-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2916-0JA13
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2310-1B.22
3RF2310-1B.24
3RF2310-1B.26
----
----
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
3RF2920-0GA36
----
----
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2310-2A.02
3RF2310-2A.04
3RF2310-2A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2310-2A.22
3RF2310-2A.24
3RF2310-2A.26
----
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2310-3A.02
3RF2310-3A.04
3RF2310-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2916-0JA13
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2310-3A.22
3RF2310-3A.24
3RF2310-3A.26
----
----
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
3RF2920-0GA36
----
----
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2920-0HA36
Type current Ie = 20 A
3RF2320-1A.02
3RF2320-1A.04
3RF2320-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1A.14
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2920-0GA16
--
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1A.22
3RF2320-1A.24
3RF2320-1A.26
----
----
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
3RF2920-0GA36
----
----
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2320-1A.44
3RF2320-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1B.02
3RF2320-1B.04
3RF2320-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1B.22
3RF2320-1B.24
3RF2320-1B.26
----
----
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
3RF2920-0GA36
----
----
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2320-1B.44
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1C.02
3RF2320-1C.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1C.22
3RF2320-1C.24
---
---
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
---
---
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2320-1C.44
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1D.02
3RF2320-1D.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-1D.22
3RF2320-1D.24
---
---
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
---
---
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2320-1D.44
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-2A.02
3RF2320-2A.04
3RF2320-2A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2320-2A.22
3RF2320-2A.24
3RF2320-2A.26
----
----
----
----
----
----
3RF2320-2C.02
3RF2320-2C.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
---
---
---
---
3RF2320-2C.22
3RF2320-2C.24
---
---
---
---
---
---
3RF2320-2D.22
3RF2320-2D.24
---
---
---
---
---
---
3RF2320-3A.02
3RF2320-3A.04
3RF2320-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-3A.22
3RF2320-3A.24
3RF2320-3A.26
----
----
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
3RF2920-0GA36
----
----
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2320-3A.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2920-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA16
1)
(3RF23 ..-....4 , -....5 or -....6).
6/100
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Accessories
Converters
Power regulators2)
Extended2)
Heating current
monitoring2)
Power controllers2)
Basic1)
Load monitoring
3RF2320-3D.02
3RF2320-3D.04
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2920-0KA13
3RF2920-0KA16
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
3RF2320-3D.22
3RF2320-3D.24
---
---
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
---
---
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-1A.14
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-1A.22
3RF2330-1A.24
3RF2330-1A.25
3RF2330-1A.26
-----
-----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
-----
-----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2330-1A.44
3RF2330-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
---
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-1B.02
3RF2330-1B.04
3RF2330-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-1B.22
3RF2330-1B.24
3RF2330-1B.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2330-1B.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-1C.02
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA13
--
--
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2330-1D.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-3A.02
3RF2330-3A.04
3RF2330-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
-3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2330-3A.22
3RF2330-3A.24
3RF2330-3A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2330-3A.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2340-1A.02
3RF2340-1A.04
3RF2340-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2340-1A.14
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2340-1A.22
3RF2340-1A.24
3RF2340-1A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2340-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2340-1B.02
3RF2340-1B.04
3RF2340-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA13
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2340-1B.22
3RF2340-1B.24
3RF2340-1B.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2340-3A.02
3RF2340-3A.04
3RF2340-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2340-3A.22
3RF2340-3A.24
3RF2340-3A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2340-3A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2350-1A.02
3RF2350-1A.04
3RF2350-1A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2350-1A.14
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2350-1A.22
3RF2350-1A.24
3RF2350-1A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2350-1A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
1)
The technical specifications must be taken into account when selecting the
function modules. More combinations may be possible if the solid-state
relays and contactors are not fully loaded, e.g. a load monitor for 20 A can
also be operated with a solid-state contactor for 30 A if the load current
during operation does not exceed 20 A.
2)
(3RF23 ..-....4 , -....5 or -....6).
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/101
3RF2330-1A.02
3RF2330-1A.04
3RF2330-1A.06
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Accessories
Converters
Power regulators1)
Extended1)
Heating current
monitoring1)
Power controllers1)
Basic
Load monitoring
3RF2350-1B.02
3RF2350-1B.04
3RF2350-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2350-1B.22
3RF2350-1B.24
3RF2350-1B.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2350-1B.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2350-3A.02
3RF2350-3A.04
3RF2350-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2350-3A.22
3RF2350-3A.24
3RF2350-3A.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2350-3A.44
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2950-0GA16
--
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2370-1B.02
3RF2370-1B.04
3RF2370-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2370-1B.22
3RF2370-1B.24
3RF2370-1B.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2370-3A.02
3RF2370-3A.04
3RF2370-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2990-0GA13
3RF2990-0GA16
3RF2990-0GA16
----
3RF2990-0KA13
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA13
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2370-3A.22
3RF2370-3A.24
3RF2370-3A.26
----
----
3RF2990-0GA33
3RF2990-0GA36
3RF2990-0GA36
----
----
3RF2990-0HA33
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2370-3A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2990-0GA16
--
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2370-3B.02
3RF2370-3B.04
3RF2370-3B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2990-0GA13
3RF2990-0GA16
3RF2990-0GA16
----
3RF2990-0KA13
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA13
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2370-3B.22
3RF2370-3B.24
3RF2370-3B.26
----
----
3RF2990-0GA33
3RF2990-0GA36
3RF2990-0GA36
----
----
3RF2990-0HA33
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2390-1B.02
3RF2390-1B.04
3RF2390-1B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
3RF2950-0GA16
----
3RF2950-0KA13
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0KA16
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2950-0HA16
3RF2390-1B.22
3RF2390-1B.24
3RF2390-1B.26
----
----
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
3RF2950-0GA36
----
----
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2950-0HA36
3RF2390-3A.02
3RF2390-3A.04
3RF2390-3A.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2990-0GA13
3RF2990-0GA16
3RF2990-0GA16
----
3RF2990-0KA13
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA13
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2390-3A.22
3RF2390-3A.24
3RF2390-3A.26
----
----
3RF2990-0GA33
3RF2990-0GA36
3RF2990-0GA36
----
----
3RF2990-0HA33
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2390-3A.45
3RF2900-0EA18
--
3RF2990-0GA16
--
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2390-3B.02
3RF2390-3B.04
3RF2390-3B.06
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18
----
3RF2990-0GA13
3RF2990-0GA16
3RF2990-0GA16
----
3RF2990-0KA13
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0KA16
3RF2990-0HA13
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2990-0HA16
3RF2390-3B.22
3RF2390-3B.24
3RF2390-3B.26
----
----
3RF2990-0GA33
3RF2990-0GA36
3RF2990-0GA36
----
----
3RF2990-0HA33
3RF2990-0HA36
3RF2990-0HA36
1)
(3RF23 ..-....4 , -....5 or -....6).
Recommended assignment of the function modules to the 3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors
Type
Accessories
Converters
Load monitoring
Power regulators
Extended
Heating current
monitoring
Power controllers
Basic
Type current up to 50 A
3RF24..-1..4.
3RF2900-0EA18
--
--
--
--
--
3RF24..-2..4.
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RF24..-3..4.
3RF2900-0EA18
--
--
--
--
--
3RF24..- ...5.
--
--
--
--
--
--
6/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3RF29..-0EA..
3RF29..-0FA..
mm
22.5 x 84 x 38
22.5 x 102 x 39 45 x 112 x 44
-25 ... +60
During storage
-55 ... +80
0 ... 1000; derating from 1000
g/ms
15/11
3RF29..-0GA..
3RF29..-0HA..
3RF29..-0JA..
3RF29..-0KA..
45 x 112 x 44
45 x 112 x 44
45 x 112 x 44
General data
Ambient temperature
IP20
- Emitted, high-frequency interference

voltage according to IEC 60947-4-3
kV
- Induced RF fields
MHz

2 kV/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 2

kV
Connection type
Auxiliary/control contacts
Screw terminals
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0), 1 x (AWG 20 ... 12)
Stripped length
mm
Terminal screw
Tightening torque
M3
Nm
lb.in
0.5 ... 0.6

4.5 ... 5.3
Connection type
Converters
Diameter
1)
Straight-through transformers
mm
--
17
Note limitations for power controller function modules. These modules

were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in residential areas
could result in lead in radio interference. In this case these may be
required to introduce additional interference suppression measures.
Type
3RF29..-0EA18
3RF29..-0FA08
3RF29..-0GA.3
3RF29..-0GA.6
400 ... 600
340 ... 660
Main circuit
Operating range
Rated frequency
V AC -- 1)
V AC -Hz
--
110 ... 230

93.5 ... 253
50/60
--
600
Voltage measuring
Measuring range
--
93.5 ... 253
--
20
Mains voltage, fluctuation

compensation
1)
340 ... 660
Versions are independent of the main circuit.
Type
3RF29..-0HA.3
3RF29..-0KA.3
3RF29..-0HA.6
3RF29..-0KA.6
3RF29..-0JA.3
3RF29..-0JA.6
400 ... 600

340 ... 660
110 ... 230

93.5 ... 253
400 ... 600

340 ... 660
340 ... 660
93.5 ... 253
340 ... 660
Main circuit
Operating range
Rated frequency
V AC 110 ... 230

V AC 93.5 ... 253
Hz
50/60
600
Voltage measuring
Measuring range
93.5 ... 253
20
Mains voltage, fluctuation

compensation
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/103
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3RF29..-...0.
3RF29..-...1.
3RF29..-...3.
DC operation
AC/DC operation
AC operation
24
15
24
15
110
15
Control circuit
Method of operation
V
mA

Rated control current
--
50/60
50/60
30
30
121
Rated control current

At maximum voltage
mA
15
15
15
Response voltage
For operating current
V
mA
15
2
15
2
90
2
Drop-out voltage
15
Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz
Type
3RF2906-0FA08
3RF2920-0FA08
3RF2920-0GA..
3RF2950-0GA..
3RF2990-0GA..
Current measurement
A
20
20
50
90
Current measurement
Teach range
Measuring range
Minimum partial load current
A
A
A
0.25 ... 6
0 ... 6.6
0.25
0.65 ... 20
0 ... 22
0.65
0.56 ... 20
0 22
0.65
1.62 ... 50
0 55
1.6
2.93 ... 90
0 99
2.9
Number of partial loads
1 ... 6
1 ... 6
1 ... 12
Type
3RF2920-0HA..
3RF2950-0HA..
3RF2990-0HA..
3RF2916-0JA..
3RF2932-0JA..
Current measurement
20
50
90
16
32
Current measurement
Teach range
Measuring range
A
A
A
4 ... 20
0 ... 22
--
10 ... 50
0 ... 55
18 ... 90
4 ... 99
0.42 ... 16
0 ... 16
0.42
0.8 ... 32
0 ... 32
0.8
--
1 ... 6
Type
3RF2904-0KA..
3RF2920-0KA..
3RF2950-0KA..
3RF2990-0KA..
Current measurement
20
50
90
Current measurement
Teach range
Measuring range
A
A
A
0.15 ... 4
0 ... 4
--
0.65 ... 20
0 ... 22
0.65
1.6 ... 50
0 ... 55
1.6
2.9 ... 90
0 ... 99
2.9
--
1 ... 6
Circuit diagrams
Extended load monitoring
Power controller and regulator
0V10 V +
NSB0_01466
A2 -
A2
A2
A2
IN
A1+
IN/0
14
IN2/Ref
10 V +
<
<
comp.
Basic load monitoring
12
3
2
L/N
comp.
11
NC
12
L/N
11
NC
12
<
comp.
3
2
L/N
A1 +
IN
2
OUT
NSB0_01467
A2 -
1 Internal connection
2 Straight-through
transformer
6/104
IN1/ON
11
A1+
A1+
NSB0_01529
A1 +
NSB0_01468a
NSB0_01469a
Converters
Siemens IC 10 2014
2 Straight-through transformer
3 Voltage detection not
electrically isolated
(3 M per path)
(3 M per path)
(3 M per path)
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS converters for 3RF2
Overview
Application
Converters for 3RF2 solid-state switching devices

These modules are used to convert analog control signals, such
as those output from many temperature controllers for example,
into a pulse-width-modulated digital signal. The connected
solid-state contactors and relays can therefore regulate the output of a load as a percentage.
This function module is used for conversions from an analog input signal to an on/off ratio with time basis 1 s. The module can
only be used in conjunction with 3RF21 and 3RF23 single-phase
solid-state switching devices or 3RF22 and 3RF24 three-phase
devices. It can be used on versions with 24 V DC and
24 V AC/DC control supply voltage.
Note:
The use of single-pole solid-state switching devices with converters, power controllers or power regulators on AC loads in
full-wave control mode is not recommended. As mutual synchronization of the function modules is not possible, fluctuations in
the heating power are possible; there is no optimum settling in
particular with setpoint values < 50 %.

Rated operational
current Ie
DT Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41C
Article No.
A
Configurator
Price
per PU
Converters
Rated control supply voltage 24 V AC/DC
--
--
3RF2900-0EA18
3RF2900-0EA18

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/105
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS load monitoring for 3RF2
Overview
Application
Load monitoring for 3RF2 single-phase solid-state switching

devices
Many faults can be quickly detected by monitoring a load circuit
connected to the solid-state switching device, as made possible
with this module. Examples include the failure of load elements
(up to 6 in the basic version or up to 12 in the extended version),
alloyed power semiconductors, a lack of voltage or a break in a
load circuit. A fault is indicated by one or more LEDs and reported to the controller by way of a PLC-compatible output.
The device is used for monitoring one or more loads (partial

loads). The function module can only be used in conjunction with
a 3RF21 solid-state relay or a 3RF23 solid-state contactor. The
devices with spring-type connections in the load circuit are not
suitable.
The principle of operation is based on permanent monitoring of

the current intensity. This figure is continuously compared with
the reference value stored once during start-up by the simple
press of a button. In order to detect the failure of one of several
loads, the current difference must be 1/6 (in the basic version) or
1/12 (in the extended version) of the reference value. In the event
of a fault, an output is actuated and one or more LEDs indicate
the fault.
Rated operational
current Ie
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Basic load monitoring

Rated control supply voltage 24 V DC
6
--
3RF2906-0FA08
1 unit
41C
20
--
3RF2920-0FA08
1 unit
41C
With mounted 3RF2900-0RA88 cover

6
--
3RF2906-0FA08-0KH0
1 unit
41C
20
--
3RF2920-0FA08-0KH0
1 unit
41C
3RF29
Extended load monitoring

20
20
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2920-0GA13
3RF2920-0GA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
50
50
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2950-0GA13
3RF2950-0GA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
90
90
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2990-0GA13
3RF2990-0GA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
Rated control supply voltage 110 V AC

3RF29
20
20
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2920-0GA33
3RF2920-0GA36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
50
50
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2950-0GA33
3RF2950-0GA36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
90
90
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2990-0GA33
3RF2990-0GA36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 10 units
41C

Version
DT Article No.
Sealable covers
for function modules (not for converters)
Price
per PU
3RF2900-0RA88
3RF2900-0RA88
6/106
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS heating current monitoring for 3RF2
Special versions:
deviations from the standard version
Overview
Heating current monitoring for 3RF2 single-phase
solid-state switching devices
Many faults can be quickly detected by monitoring a load circuit
connected to the solid-state switching device, as made possible
with this module. Examples include the failure of up to six load
elements, alloyed power semiconductors, a lack of voltage, or a
break in the load circuit. A fault is indicated by LEDs and reported to the controller via relay output (NC).
The principle of operation is based on permanent monitoring of
the current intensity. This figure is continuously compared with
the reference value stored once during start-up. In order to detect the failure of one of several loads, the current difference
must be 1/6 of the reference value. In the event of a fault, an
output is actuated and the LEDs indicate the fault.
3RF29..-0JA1.-1KK0
If the current is below 50 % of the lower teach current during
the teach routine, the device will go into "Standby" mode; the
LOAD LED will flicker. The device thus detects a non-connected
load, e.g. channels not required for tool heaters, and does not
signal a fault. This mode can be reset by re-teaching.
Application
The device is used for monitoring one or more loads (partial
loads). The function module can only be used in conjunction with
a 3RF21 solid-state relay or a 3RF23 solid-state contactor. The
devices with spring-type connections in the load circuit are not
suitable.
The heating current monitoring has a teach input and therefore

differs from the load monitoring. This remote teaching function
enables simple adjustment to changing loads without manual intervention.
Rated operational
current Ie

DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Heating current monitoring1)

16
16
16
110 230
110 230
400 600
A
A
A
3RF2916-0JA13
3RF2916-0JA13-1KK0
3RF2916-0JA16-1KK0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
32
32
32
110 230
400 600
400 600
A
A
A
3RF2932-0JA13-1KK0
3RF2932-0JA16
3RF2932-0JA16-1KK0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 10 units
41C
3RF29
1)
Supplied without control connector. The control connector can be

purchased from Phoenix Contact by quoting Article No. 1982 790
(2.5 HC/6-ST-5.08).
Version
DT Article No.
Sealable covers
Price
per PU
3RF2900-0RA88
3RF2900-0RA88

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/107
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS power controllers for 3RF2
Overview
Application
Power controllers for 3RF2 single-phase solid-state

switching devices
The power controller is a function module for the autonomous
power control of complex heating systems and inductive loads.
The following functions have been integrated:
Power controller for adjusting the power of the connected load.
The setpoint value is selected via a rotary knob on the module
as a percentage of the 100% power value stored.
Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable voltage
ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase control.
This is useful above all with loads such as lamps or infrared
lamps which have an inrush transient current.
Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, partial load
faults, alloyed power semiconductors, lack of voltage or a
break in the load circuit.
Power control
The power controller adjusts the power in the connected load by
means of a solid-state switching device depending on the setpoint selection. It does not compensate for changes in the mains
voltage or load resistance. The setpoint value can be predefined
externally as a 0 to 10 V signal or internally by means of a potentiometer. Depending on the setting of the potentiometer (tR),
the control is carried out according to the principle of full-wave
control or generalized phase control.
Note:
Note:
The power controller can be used for:

Complex heating systems
Inductive loads
Loads with temperature-dependent resistor
Loads with ageing after long-time service
Simple indirect control of temperature
With the phase control operating mode, a partial load fault is

detected by cyclic "scanning" of the load; the exact mode of
operation is described in the data sheets!
In the case of ohmic loads, the power is set linear to the setpoint
value. During operation of inductive loads, the power control is
no longer proportional and linear due to the phase shift between
current and voltage.
Special versions:
deviations from the standard version
Full-wave control
3RF29 04-0KA13-0KC0
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required setpoint value by changing the on-to-off period. The period duration
is predefined at one second.
During the teach routine, the connected solid-state relay or contactor is not activated; i.e. no current will flow. No current reference value is stored. No part-load monitoring!
See note about AC loads on page 6/105.

Generalized phase control
3RF29 ..-0KA1.-0KT0
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required setpoint value by changing the current flow angle. In order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for
industrial networks, the load circuit must include a reactor with a
rating of at least 200 H.
No part-load monitoring!

Rated operational
current Ie
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Power controllers
4
110 230
A 3RF2904-0KA13-0KC0
1 unit
41C
A 3RF2904-0KA13-0KT0
1 unit
41C
20
A 3RF2920-0KA13
1 unit
41C
50
A 3RF2950-0KA13
1 unit
41C
90
A 3RF2990-0KA13
1 unit
41C
A 3RF2920-0KA16
1 unit
41C
50
A 3RF2950-0KA16
1 unit
41C
50
A 3RF2950-0KA16-0KT0
1 unit
41C
90
A 3RF2990-0KA16
1 unit
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 10 units
41C
20
3RF29
400 600

Version
DT Article No.
Sealable covers
Price
per PU
3RF2900-0RA88
3RF2900-0RA88
6/108
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS power regulators for 3RF2
Power control
Overview
Power regulators for 3RF2 single-phase solid-state
switching devices
The power regulator is a function module for the autonomous
power control of complex heating systems.
The following functions have been integrated:
Power controller with proportional-action control for adjusting
the power of the connected load. The setpoint value is selected
via a rotary knob on the module as a percentage of the 100%
power value stored. Changes in the mains voltage or in the
load resistance are compensated in this case.
Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable voltage
ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase control.
This is useful above all with loads such as lamps which have
an inrush transient current.
Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, alloyed
power semiconductors, lack of voltage or a break in the load
circuit. Part-load monitoring is not possible. Load fluctuations
are compensated.
The power regulator adjusts the power in the connected load by

means of a solid-state switching device depending on the taught
power and the selected setpoint. Changes in the mains voltage
or in the load resistance are thus compensated by the power
regulator. The setpoint value can be predefined externally as a
0 to 10 V signal or internally by means of a potentiometer.
Depending on the setting of the potentiometer (tR), the adjustment is carried out according to the principle of full-wave control
or generalized phase control.
Note:
In the case of ohmic loads, the power is set linear to the setpoint
value. During operation of inductive loads, the power control is
no longer proportional and linear due to the phase shift between
current and voltage.
Full-wave control
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required setpoint value by changing the on-to-off period. The period duration
is predefined at one second.
See note about AC loads on page 6/105.

Generalized phase control
Application
The power regulator can be used for:
Complex heating systems
Heating elements with temperature-dependent resistor
Heating elements with ageing after long-time service
Simple indirect control of temperature
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required setpoint value by changing the current flow angle. In order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for
industrial networks, the load circuit must include a reactor with a
rating of at least 200 H.

Rated operational
current Ie
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Power regulators
20
20
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2920-0HA13
3RF2920-0HA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
50
50
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2950-0HA13
3RF2950-0HA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
90
90
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2990-0HA13
3RF2990-0HA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
Rated control supply voltage 110 V AC

3RF29
20
20
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2920-0HA33
3RF2920-0HA36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
50
50
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2950-0HA33
3RF2950-0HA36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
90
90
110 230
400 600
A
A
3RF2990-0HA33
3RF2990-0HA36
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 10 units
41C

Version
DT Article No.
Sealable covers
Price
per PU
3RF2900-0RA88
3RF2900-0RA88

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/109
Siemens AG 2013
Solid-State Switching Devices for Switching Motors

General data
Overview
Solid-state contactors for switching motors
Motor feeders
The devices can use a link module to directly connect to a circuit
breaker. Also possible is the mounting of a 3RB30/3RB31 solidstate overload relay (see Chapter 7 "Protection Equipment") or a
3RR2 current monitoring relay (see Chapter 10 "Monitoring and
Control Devices") using a link adapter. The simultaneous
mounting of a motor starter protector and an overload or current
monitoring relay is not recommend for space and heat development reasons.
Rapid-switching fuseless and fuse motor feeders can thereby be
implemented in a time-saving manner.
Selecting solid-state contactors
The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details of

the network, the load and the ambient conditions.
Solid-state contactor for direct-on-line starting
The solid-state contactors for switching motors are intended for

frequently switching on and off three-phase current operating
mechanisms up to 7.5 kW and reversing up to 3.0 kW.
The devices are constructed with complete insulation and can
be mounted directly on SIRIUS motor starter protectors, overload relays and current monitoring relays, resulting in a very
simple integration into motor feeders.
These three-phase solid-state contactors are equipped with a
two-phase control which is particularly suitable for typical motor
current circuits without connecting to the neutral conductor.
Important features:
Insulated enclosure with integrated heat sink
Integrated mounting foot to snap on a standard mounting rail
or for assembly onto a support plate
Variety of connection methods
Plug-in control connection
Display via LEDs
Wide voltage range for AC control supply voltage
Switching functions
The solid-state contactors for switching motors are "instantaneous switching" because this method is particularly suited for
inductive loads. By distributing the ON point over the entire sine
curve of the mains voltage, disturbances are reduced to a minimum.

Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated
current than the load
Testing of the maximum permissible switching frequency
based on the characteristic curves (see "More Information"
"Product Information"). To do this, the starting current, the starting time and the motor loaded in in the operating phase must
be known.
If the permissible switching frequency is under the desired frequency, it is possible to achieve an increase only by overdimensioning the motor and the solid-state contactor!
Alternatively, the tool for "Selection of solid-state contactors for
switching motors" can be used. The correct device size can be
determined by entering the network and motor data along with
the application and ambient conditions.
See www.siemens.com/solid-state-switching-devices.
Despite the rugged power semiconductors that are used, solidstate switching devices respond more sensitively to short circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precautions have
to be taken against destruction, depending on the type of design.
Siemens generally recommends using SITOR semiconductor
fuses. These fuses also provide protection against destruction in
the event of a short circuit even when the solid-state contactors
and solid-state relays are fully utilized.
Alternatively, if there is lower loading, protection can also be provided by standard fuses or miniature circuit breakers. This protection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state switching devices accordingly.
Connection methods
More information
You can choose between the following connection methods for

the solid-state contactors for switching motors:
For additional information, see system manual

"SIRIUS Innovations - System Overview" and manual
"SIRIUS Innovations - 3RF34 Solid-State Switching Devices":
Screw connection
The screw connection system is the standard among industrial
controls. Open terminals and a plus-minus screw are just two
features of this technology. Two conductors of up to 6 mm can
be connected in just one terminal.
This innovative technology manages without any screw connection. This means that very high vibration resistance is achieved.
Two conductors of up to 2.5 mm can be connected to each terminal.
6/110
Siemens IC 10 2014
Product information and technical specifications

For product data sheets with detailed technical specifications,
dimensional drawings and characteristic curves, see
www.siemens.com/sirius/support/
For additional information, please enter the article number of the
required device under the tab "Product List".
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
SIRIUS solid-state switching device generation
Design
Connection type
Switching function
Number of controlled phases

Example
3RF
3RF
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
Units with integrated heat sink, "ready to use"
Reversing contactors with integrated interlocking
Application
Use in load feeders
There is no typical design of a load feeder with solid-state relays
or solid-state contactors; instead, the great variety of connection
methods and control voltages offers universal application opportunities. SIRIUS solid-state relays and solid-state contactors can
be installed in fuseless or fused feeders, as required.
See the Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations
Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders",
Standards and approvals
IEC 60947-4-2
UL 508, CSA for North America1)
CE marking for Europe
C-Tick approval for Australia
CCC approval for China
1)
Please note: Use overvoltage protection device;

max. cut-off-voltage 6000 V;
min. energy handling capability 100 J.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/111
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3RF3405-1BB..
3RF3403-1BD..,
3RF3405-1BD..
3RF3410-1BB..,
3RF3412-1BB..,
3RF3416-1BB..
3RF3405-2BB..
3RF3410-2BB..,
3RF3412-2BB..,
3RF3416-2BB..
45 x 95 x 96.5
--
90 x 95 x 96.5
--
3RF3410-1BD..
3RF34..-1BB..
3RF34..-1BD..
45 x 95 x 96.5
45 x 95 x 108.5
Ambient temperature
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +60

-55 ... +80
0 ... 1 000; derating over 1 000 m on request
g/ms
15/11
mm
mm
90 x 95 x 96.5
90 x 95 x 108.5
IP20

Emitted interference according to IEC 60947-4-2
- Induced RF fields
- Surge according to IEC 61000-4-52)
V rms

kV
Contact discharge: 4; Air discharge: 8;

Behavior criterion 2
MHz
0.15 ... 80;

140 dBV; behavior criterion 1
2; at 5 kHz; behavior criterion 2
Conductor - Ground: 2; Conductor - Conductor: 1; Behavior criterion 2
kV
kV
Connection type
Screw terminals
Conductor cross-sections, auxiliary/control contacts

With/without end sleeve
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
mm2
mm2
mm2
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5)3), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)3)

2 x (1 ... 2.5)3), 2 x (2.5 ... 6)3), 1 x 10
-2 x (AWG 14 ... 10)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (AWG 18 ... 14)
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)

AWG 20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5

AWG 20 ... 12
10
10
NSB0_01703
1)
measures.
2)
The following applies for reversing contactors: To maintain the values, a

3TX7462-3L surge suppressor (see "3TB Contactors", Chapter 3) should
be used between phases L1 and L3 as close as possible to the reversing
contactor.
3)

6/112
Siemens IC 10 2014
Standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2
Operating devices
Conductor cross-sections, main contacts
Solid
4000
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state contactors, three-phase
Overview
These two-phase controlled, instantaneous switching solid-state
contactors in the insulating enclosure are offered in width 45 mm
up to 5.2 A and in width 90 mm up to 16 A. They allow the
operation of motors up to 7.5 kW.
Type
3RF3405-.BB..
3RF3410-.BB..
3RF3412-.BB..
3RF3416-.BB..
Rated operational current IAC-531)

At 40 C
UL/CSA, at 50 C
At 60 C
A
A
A
5.2 (4.5)
4.6 (4.0)
4.2 (3.5)
9.2
8.4
7.6
12.5
11.5
10.5
16
14
12.5
Power loss at IAC-53

At 40 C
10 (8)
16
22
28
Short-circuit protection with

type of coordination "1"
at an operational voltage of Ue to 440 V
Motor starter protector, type
Current Iq
kA
3RV2011-1GA10
50
3RV2011-1JA10
5
3RV2011-1KA10
5
3RV2011-4AA10
3
1)
The reduced values in brackets apply to a directly mounted circuit breaker

and simultaneous side-by-side mounting.
Type
3RF3405-.BB.4 3RF3405-.BB.6 3RF3410-.BB.. 3RF3412-.BB.4 3RF3412-.BB.6 3RF3416-.BB..
Fused design with directly connected

3RB3 overload relay
Rated operational current IAC-53
At 40 C
UL/CSA, at 50 C
At 60 C
A
A
A
4
3.6
3.2

At 40 C
0.1
Max. off-state current
mA
10
200
I2t value
A 2s
200
Type
7.8
7
6.2
9.5
8.5
7.6
11
10
9
13
16
18
600
600
1 200
1 150
1 150
1 800
1 800
7 200
6 600
6 600
0.5
3RF34..-.BB.4
3RF34..-.BB.6
2-phase
2-phase
Main circuit
Controlled phases
Operating range
Rated frequency
V AC 48 ... 480
V AC 40 ... 506
Hz
50/60 10 %
48 ... 600
40 ... 660
50/60 10 %
600
600
kV
Blocking voltage
1 200
1 600
V/s
1 000
1 000
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/113
Fuseless design
with 3RV2 motor starter protector, CLASS 10
Siemens AG 2013

Type
3RF34..-.BB0.
3RF34..-.BB2.
Control circuit
DC operation
AC operation
24
110 ... 230
Rated frequency
Hz
--
50/60 10 %
30
253
mA
20
15
Response voltage
15
90
Drop-out voltage
< 40
Operating times
ON-delay
OFF-delay
ms
ms
1
5
Method of operation
Circuit diagrams
L2
2 T1
6/114
4 T2
1 L1
5 L3
Siemens IC 10 2014
T3
L2
5 L3
A1 +
A1 ~
A2 -
A2 ~
NSB0_01794
1 L1
2 T1
T2
T3
NSB0_01795
Siemens AG 2013


Motor contactors Instantaneous switching Two-phase controlled
Rated power
at Ie and Ue

voltage Us
Configurator
400 V
kW
Article No.
V
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

48 ... 480 V AC
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
24 DC
A
B
B
B
3RF3405-1BB04
3RF3410-1BB04
3RF3412-1BB04
3RF3416-1BB04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-1BB24
3RF3410-1BB24
3RF3412-1BB24
3RF3416-1BB24
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
3RF3405-1BB
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
24 DC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-1BB06
3RF3410-1BB06
3RF3412-1BB06
3RF3416-1BB06
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-1BB26
3RF3410-1BB26
3RF3412-1BB26
3RF3416-1BB26
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
Rated power
at Ie and Ue
Rated control supply DT Spring-type terminals

voltage Us
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RF3410-1BB
Configurator
400 V
kW
Article No.
V
Price
per PU

48 ... 480 V AC
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
242 DC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-2BB04
3RF3410-2BB04
3RF3412-2BB04
3RF3416-2BB04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-2BB24
3RF3410-2BB24
3RF3412-2BB24
3RF3416-2BB24
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
3RF3405-2BB

48 ... 600 V AC, blocking voltage 1600 V
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
24 DC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-2BB06
3RF3410-2BB06
3RF3412-2BB06
3RF3416-2BB06
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
5.2
9.2
12.5
16
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
B
3RF3405-2BB26
3RF3410-2BB26
3RF3412-2BB26
3RF3416-2BB26
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
41C
3RF3410-2BB

Siemens IC 10 2014
6/115

48 ... 600 V AC, blocking voltage 1600 V
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules between solid-state contactor and motor starter protector

Link module
between solid-state contactor and motor starter protector
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors size S00/S0
Screw terminals
3RA2921-1BA00
1 unit
41B
3RF3900-0QA88
1 unit
41C
3RA2921-1BA00
Link adapters between solid-state contactor and overload relay
The adapter is snapped onto the enclosure of the

3RF34 contactor and accommodates the fixing hooks of
the 3RB3 overload relays or the 3RR2 current monitoring
relays for direct mounting.

3RT2916-4JA02
Insulation stop strip

Can be inserted in cable entry of the spring-type terminal B

(no more than 2 strips per contactor required;
removable in pairs)
for terminals with a conductor cross-section up to 2.5 mm2
3RT2916-4JA02
20 units
41B
3RA2908-1A
1 unit
41B
3RT2900-1SB10
100
816 units
41B
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
3RT2900-1SB60
100
3060 units
41B

Screwdrivers
3RA2908-1A
Blank labels
IC01_00181
3RF3900-0QA88
Link adapters
for direct mounting of 3RB3 overload relays or
3RR2 current monitoring relays to the solid-state contactor
3SB2900-1SB20
1)
Adhesive labels
for SIRIUS devices
PC labeling system for the individual inscription

6/116
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RF34 solid-state reversing contactors,
three-phase
Overview
The integration of four conducting paths to a reverse switch,
combined in one enclosure makes this device a particularly
compact solution. Compared to conventional systems, for which
two contactors are required, it is possible to save up to 50%
width with the three-phase reversing contactors. Devices with

45 mm width cover motors up to 2.2 kW and those with 90 mm
width up to 3 kW.
Type
3RF3403-.BD.4
3RF3405-.BD.4
3RF3410-.BD.4
Rated operational current IAC-531)

At 40 C
UL/CSA, at 50 C
At 60 C
A
A
A
3.8 (3.4)
3.5 (3.1)
3.2 (2.8)
5.4 (4.8)
5 (4.3)
4.6 (3.8)
7.4
6.8
6.2

At 40 C
7 (6)
9 (8)
13
with type of coordination "1"
at an operational voltage of Ue to 440 V
Motor starter protector, type
Current Iq
kA
3RV2011-1FA10
50
3RV2011-1GA10
50
3RV2011-1JA10
10
3RF3403-.BD.4
3RF3405-.BD.4
3RF3410-.BD.4
1)
Fuseless design
with 3RV2 motor starter protector, CLASS 10
The reduced values in brackets apply to a directly mounted circuit breaker

and simultaneous side-by-side mounting.
Type
Fused design
with directly connected 3RB3 overload relay
Rated operational current IAC-53
At 40 C
UL/CSA, at 50 C
At 60 C
A
A
A
3.8
3.5
3.2
5.4
5
4.6
7.4
6.8
6.2

At 40 C
16
0.5
Max. off-state current
mA
10
200
600
I2t value
A 2s
200
1 800
Type
3RF34..-.BD.4
Main circuit
2-phase
Controlled phases
Rated operational voltage Ue1)
Operating range
Rated frequency
V AC
V AC
Hz
48 ... 480
40 ... 506
50/60 10 %
600
kV
Blocking voltage
1 200
V/s
1 000
1)
To reduce the risk of a phase short circuit due to overvoltage, we recommend implementing a varistor type 3TX7462-3L between the phases L1
and L3 as close as possible to the switchgear.
We recommend a design with semiconductor protection as short-circuit
protection.
Siemens IC 10 2014
6/117
Siemens AG 2013

three-phase
Type
3RF34..-.BD0.
3RF34..-.BD2.
Control circuit
DC operation
AC operation
24
110 ... 230
Rated frequency
Hz
--
50/60 10 %
Control supply voltage, maximum
30
253
mA
15
10
Response voltage
15
90
Drop-out voltage
< 40
Operating times1)
ON-delay
OFF-delay
Interlocking time
ms
ms
ms
5
60 ... 100
20
50 ... 100
Method of operation
1)
Caution! Risk of phase short circuit in automatic mode.

The control inputs must not be actuated until after a delay time of 40 ms
after the main voltage is applied.
Circuit diagrams

3
L2
1 L1
L3
L2
L3
A1+
6/118
T1
T2
Siemens IC 10 2014
T3
A2-
A2~
A3+
A3~
NSB0_01776
A1~
T1
T2
T3
NSB0_01777
1 L1
Siemens AG 2013

three-phase

Reversing contactors Instantaneous switching Two-phase controlled
Rated power
at Ie and Ue

voltage Us
Configurator
400 V
kW
Article No.
V
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

3.8
5.4
7.4
1.5
2.2
3.0
24 DC
A
B
B
3RF3403-1BD04
3RF3405-1BD04
3RF3410-1BD04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
3.8
5.4
7.4
1.5
2.2
3.0
110 ... 230 AC
B
B
B
3RF3403-1BD24
3RF3405-1BD24
3RF3410-1BD24
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41C
41C
41C
3RF3403-1BD
3RF3410-1BD
Accessories
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules between solid-state contactor and motor starter protector

Link module
between solid-state reversing contactor and motor starter
protector with screw terminals
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors, size S00/S0
Screw terminals
3RA2921-1BA00
1 unit
41B
The adapter is snapped onto the enclosure of the 3RF34 con- A

tactor and accommodates the fixing hooks of the 3RB3 overload relays or the 3RR2 current monitoring relays for direct
mounting.
3RF3900-0QA88
1 unit
41C
3RA2921-1BA00
Link adapters between solid-state contactor and overload relay
3RF3900-0QA88
Link adapters
for direct mounting of 3RB3 overload relays or 3RR2 current
monitoring relays to the solid-state contactor with screw
terminals
Blank labels
IC01_00181

3SB2900-1SB20
1)
3RT2900-1SB10
100
816 units
41B
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
3RT2900-1SB60
100
3060 units
41B
Adhesive labels
for SIRIUS devices
PC labeling system for the individual inscription


Siemens IC 10 2014
6/119
Siemens AG 2013

Notes
6/120
Siemens IC 10 2014
Protection Equipment
7/2
7/7
7/19
7/21
7/22
7/23
7/24
7/25
7/26
7/29
7/32
7/33
7/37
7/40
7/44
7/55
7/56
7/57
7/58
7/59
7/60
7/61
7/62
7/65
7/67
7/69
7/71
7/73
7/78
7/79
7/80
7/81
Price groups
PG 14O, 41B, 41E, 41F, 41G, 41H, 41J,
42F, 42J, 4N1
7/82
Introduction
7/89
Motor starter protectors/

circuit breakers
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors/
circuit breakers up to 40 A
General data
For motor protection
with overload relay function
For starter combinations
For transformer protection
For system protection according to
UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5
For transformer protection according to
UL 489/CSA C22.2 No.5
Accessories
- Mountable accessories
- Busbar accessories
- Rotary operating mechanisms
- Mounting accessories
- Enclosures and front plates
3RV29 infeed system
SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors/
circuit breakers up to 100 A
General data
with overload relay function
For fuse monitoring
For system protection according to
UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5
For distance protection
Accessories
- Busbar accessories
- Rotary operating mechanisms
- Mounting accessories
- Enclosures and front plates
SIRIUS 3RV1 molded case motor starter
protectors up to 800 A
General data
Accessories
- Rotary operating mechanisms,
mounting accessories
7/97
7/100
7/108
7/110
7/118
7/120
7/129
7/131
7/139
7/145
7/149
Overload relays
General data
SIRIUS 3RU2 thermal overload relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
Accessories
3RU11 up to 100 A
Accessories
SIRIUS 3RB3 solid-state overload relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
Accessories
SIRIUS 3RB2 solid-state overload relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Accessories for 3RB20, 3RB21
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
3RB24 for IO-Link, up to 630 A
Current measuring modules for
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Accessories for 3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Notes:
The 3RV1, 3RU1 and 3RB2 devices
(sizes S00/S0 to S12) can be found
IC 10 AO 2014
IC 10 AO 2014
Center
Conversion tool, e.g. from
- 3RV1 to 3RV2
- 3RU11 to 3RU21
- 3RB20/3RB21 to 3RB30/3RB31
see
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Siemens AG 2013
Siemens AG 2013
Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers
Introduction
Overview
Type
3RV20
3RV21
3RV23
3RV24
3RV27
3RV28
SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers up to 40 A

Applications
System protection
1)
1)
--
--
Motor protection
--
--
--
--
--
Motor protection with

overload relay function
--
--
--
--
--
Starter combinations
--
--
--
--
--
Transformer protection
--
--
--
Size
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
Rated current In
Size S00
Up to 16
Up to 16
Up to 16
Up to 16
Up to 15
Up to 15
Size S0
Up to 40
Up to 32
Up to 40
Up to 25
Up to 22
Up to 22
Rated operational voltage V

Ue according to IEC
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
690 AC
690 AC
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
Trip class
CLASS 10
CLASS 10
--
CLASS 10
--
--
Thermal overload releases A

A
0.11 ... 0.16 up to

34 ... 40
0.11 ... 0.16 up to

27 ... 32
Without3)
0.11 ... 0.16 up to

20 ... 25
0.16 ... 22
non-adjustable
0.16 ... 22
non-adjustable
Electronic release
A multiple of the rated
current
13 times
13 times
13 times
20 times
13 times
20 times
20/55/100
55/100
20/55/100
55/100
4)
4)
7/19, 7/20
7/21
7/22
7/23
7/24
7/25
For sizes
S00
S0
S00
S0
S00
S0
S00
S0
S00
S0
S00
Auxiliary switches
Signaling switches
--
--
--
--
Rated frequency
Short-circuit breaking
capacity Icu at 400 V AC
Hz
kA
Pages
Accessories
S0
Undervoltage releases
--
--
Shunt releases
--
--
Isolator modules
--
--
--
--
Insulated three-phase
busbar system
--
--
--
--
--
--
Busbar adapters
--
--
--
--
Door-coupling rotary operating

mechanisms
Link modules
--
--
--
--
Enclosures for surface

mounting
--
--
--
--
Enclosures for flush mounting
--
--
--
--
Front plates
--
--
--
--
Infeed system
--
--
--
--
--
--
Terminal covers for ring

terminal lug connections
5)
5)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Sealable scale covers for

setting knobs
--
--
--
--
--
--
Pages
7/26 ... 7/43
Has this function or can use this accessory

-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory
1)
For symmetrical loading of the three phases.
2)
With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V AC. For DC applications see

"Technical Specifications" "DC Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity",
page 7/15.
7/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
3)
For overload protection of the motors, appropriate overload relays must be

used.
4)
According to UL 489 at 480 Y/277 V AC: 65 kA or 50 kA.
5)
Terminal covers are available for 3RV20 motor starter protectors with ring
terminal lug connection to ensure finger-safety.
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Type
3RV10
3RV11
3RV13
3RV14
3RV16
3RV16
3RV17
SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers up to 100 A

System protection
1)
1)
--
--
--
--
Motor protection
--
--
--
--
--
--
Motor protection with

overload relay function
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Transformer protection
--
--
--
--
--
Fuse monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
Voltage transformer circuit

breakers for distance
protection
--
--
--
--
--
--
Size
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2
S00
S00
S3
Applications
Rated current In
Size S00
--
--
--
--
0.2
Up to 3
--
Size S2
Up to 50
Up to 50
Up to 50
Up to 40
--
--
--
Size S3

Ue according to IEC
Up to 100
Up to 100
Up to 100
--
--
Up to 70
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
690 AC2)
400 AC
690 AC
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
162/3 ... 60
50/60
Trip class
CLASS 10, 20
CLASS 10
--
CLASS 10
--
--
--

A
11 ... 16 up to
80 ... 100
11 ... 16 up to
80 ... 100
Without3)
11 ... 16 up to
28 ... 40
0.2
1.4 ... 3
10 ... 70
non-adjustable
Electronic release
current
13 times
13 times
13 times
20 times
6 times
4 ... 7 times
13 times
50/100
50/100
50/100
100
50
4)
7/56
7/57
7/58
7/59
7/61
7/60
Rated frequency
capacity Icu at 400 V AC
Pages
Hz 50/60
kA 50/100
7/55
Accessories
For sizes
S2 S3
S2 S3
S2 S3
S2
S00
S00
S3
Auxiliary switches
5)
Signaling switches
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Shunt releases
--
--
--
--
Isolator modules
--
--
--
--
--
--
Insulated three-phase
busbar system
--
--
--
--
--
--
Busbar adapters
--
--
--
Door-coupling rotary operating

mechanisms
--
--
Remote motorized operating

mechanisms
--
--
--
Link modules
--
--
--
Enclosures for surface

mounting
--
--
--
--
--
--
Front plates
--
--
--
Pages
7/62 ... 7/72

1)
For symmetrical loading of the three phases.
2)
With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V AC. For DC applications see

"Technical Specifications" "DC Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity",
page 7/50.
3)

used.
4)
Acc. to UL 489
- At 480 Y/277 V AC: 65 kA;
- At 480 V AC: 65 kA (10 A to 30 A).
5)
Only lateral auxiliary switches can be fitted.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/3
Siemens AG 2013
Introduction
Type
3RV10
3RV13
SIRIUS 3RV1 molded case motor starter protectors up to 800 A

Applications
Motor protection
--
--
Switching capacity
Standard switching capacity
Standard switching capacity
3RV1063
3RV1073
3RV1083
3RV1353
3RV1363
3RV1373
3RV1383
3RV1364
3RV1374
100 ... 200
400
630
1 ... 32
100 ... 250
400, 630
630, 800
100 ... 250
400
120
100
200
200
3RV1383
3RV1364
3RV1374
Size
Rated current In

Ue according to IEC
Rated frequency
690 AC
Increased switching
capacity
690 AC
Hz 50/60
50/60
Trip class
CLASS 10A, 10, 20, 30
--1)

A
40 ... 100 up to
252 ... 630
Without1)
Electronic release
current
Adjustable, 6 ... 13 times
Nonadjustable
1 ... 12.5 A:
13 times;
1 ... 10 times
Adjustable
20 A, 32 A:
6 ... 12 times
capacityIcu at 400 V AC
kA 120
120
100
85
120
TU 3
Trip unit (release)
TU 4
TU 1:
1 ... 12.5 A;
TU 2:
20 A, 32 A
Pages
7/78
7/79
Accessories
For molded case motor
starter protectors
3RV1063
3RV1073
3RV1083
3RV1353
3RV1363
3RV1373
Auxiliary switches
Shunt releases
Rotary operating mechanisms
--
--
Connection methods
Extended terminals on the
front
Cable terminals on the
front
Rear terminals
Pages
7/80, 7/81

7/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
1)

used.
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Introduction
((
Type
))
3RU21
3RB30
3RB31
1)
1)
1)
SIRIUS overload relays up to 40 A

Applications
System protection
Motor protection
Alternating current, three-phase
Alternating current, single-phase
--
--
Direct current
--
--
Size contactor
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
Size S00
Up to 16
Up to 16
Up to 16
Size S0
Up to 40
Up to 40
Up to 40
690 AC
690 AC
690 AC
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
CLASS 10
CLASS 10, 20
CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30 adjustable
Trip class
Thermal overload releases
A
A
0.11 ... 0.16 up to

34 ... 40
--
--
Electronic overload releases
A
A
--
0.1 ... 0.4 up to

10 ... 40
0.1 ... 0.4 up to

10 ... 40
Rating for three-phase motor at

400 V AC
kW 0.04 ... 18.5
0.04 ... 18.5
0.04 ... 18.5
7/95, 7/96
7/115, 7/116
7/117
S00
Pages
Accessories
S0
S00
S0
S00
Terminal supports for stand-alone installation
For sizes
Mechanical RESET
S0
Cable releases for RESET
Electrical remote RESET
--
--
Integrated in the unit
Terminal covers for ring terminal lug

connections
2)
2)
--
--
--
--
Sealable covers
for setting knobs
Pages
7/97 ... 7/99
7/118, 7/119
7/118, 7/119
1)
The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the
assigned electrical loads (e.g. motors), feeder cable, and other switching
and protection devices in the respective load feeder.
2)
Terminal covers for ensuring finger-safe touch protection are available for
3RU21 overload relays with ring terminal lug connections for mounting
onto contactors.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/5
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Introduction
Type
3RU11
3RB20
3RB21
3RB22, 3RB23
3RB24
System protection
1)
1)
1)
1)
Motor protection
Alternating current, three-phase
Alternating current, single-phase
--
--
Direct current
--
--
--
Size contactor
S2, S3
S2 ... S12
S2 ... S12
S00 ... S12
--
--
--
Up to 25 and 45 mm width
with current measuring modules
3RB2906-2BG1/3RB2906-2DG1
with current measuring module
3RB2906-2JG1
SIRIUS overload relays up to 630 A

Applications
Sizes S00 and S0
Size S2
Up to 50
Up to 50
Up to 50
Size S3
Up to 100
Up to 100
Up to 100
Size S6
--
Up to 200
Up to 200

with current measuring modules
3RB2956-2TH2/3RB2956-2TG2
Size S10/S12
--
Up to 630
Up to 630

3RB2966-2WH2
Size 14 (3TF68/3TF69)
--
--
--
Up to 820
3RB2906-2BG1 and
transformer 3UF1868-3GA00
690/1 000 AC2)
690/1 000 AC3)
690/1 000 AC3)
690/1 000 AC4)
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
CLASS 10
CLASS 10, 20
CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30

adjustable
CLASS 5, 10, 20, 30

adjustable
Trip class
Thermal overload releases
A
A
5.5 ... 8 up to
80 ... 100
--
--
--
Electronic overload releases
A
A
--
6 ... 25 up to
160 ... 630
6 ... 25 up to
160 ... 630
0.3 ... 3 up to
63 ... 630
Rating for three-phase motor at

400 V AC
kW 3 to
kW 45
3 ... 11 up to
90 ... 450
3 ... 11 up to
90 ... 450
0.09 ... 1.1 up to

37 ... 450
7/105 ... 7/107
7/126, 7/127
7/128
7/137, 7/138, 7/147 7/144, 7/147
S2
Pages
Accessories
S3
S2
S3
S6
S10/S12
S2
S3
S6
S10/S12 S00 S0
S2
S3
S6
S10/S12
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
Mechanical RESET
--
--
--
--
--
--
Cable releases for RESET
--
--
--
--
--
--
Electrical remote RESET
--
--
--
--
Terminal covers
--
--
--
--
--
Sealable covers
for setting knobs
Operator panel for

3RB24 evaluation module
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Pages
7/108, 7/109
For sizes
--
7/129, 7/130
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/148 ... 7/150
1)
The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the
assigned electrical loads (e.g. motors), feeder cable, and other switching
and protection devices in the respective load feeder.
2)
Size S3 up to 1 000 V AC.
3)
Size S2 (only with straight-through transformer), S3, S6, S10, S12

up to 1 000 V AC.
4)
With reference to the 3RB29.6 current measuring modules.
5)
Stand-alone installation without accessories is possible.
7/6
7/129, 7/130
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 40 A
General data
Overview
The following illustration shows our 3RV2 motor starter protector/
circuit breaker with the accessories which can be mounted for
the sizes S00 and S0, see also "Introduction" "Overview",
page 7/2.
Accessories see page 7/26 onwards.
Mountable accessories
7
1 Transverse auxiliary switch

2 Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
4 Shunt release (can not be used with 3RV21

motor starter protectors)
5 Undervoltage release without/with
leading contacts (can not be used with
3RV21 motor starter protectors)
6 Signaling switch (can not be used with
3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers)
7 Isolator module (can not be used with

3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers)
8 Terminal block type E
NSB0_02076
Mountable accessories for SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
The new SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers

are compact, current limiting motor starter protectors/circuit
breakers which are optimized for load feeders. The motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers are used for switching and protecting
three-phase motors of up to 18.5 kW at 400 V AC and for other
loads with rated currents of up to 40 A.
For 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers in sizes S2
and S3 up to 100 A see page 7/55 onwards.
SIRIUS motor starter protector with spring-type terminals, size S0 (left)

and SIRIUS motor starter protector with screw terminals, size S00 (right)
The new 3RV2 motor starter protectors are usually approved

according to IEC and UL/CSA. 3RV2 motor starter protectors/
circuit breakers in sizes S00 and S0 are approved according to
UL 508 as:
"Manual Motor Controllers"
"Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations"
"Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tab Conductor
Protection in Group Installations"
"Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"
Please note that for this approval the 3RV20 motor starter protectors must be equipped with additional infeed terminals. For
more information see "Accessories", page 7/33.
Corresponding short-circuit values see pages 7/10 to 7/14.
The 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor circuit breakers are approved as
circuit breakers according to UL 489; they are a special version
of the 3RV2 motor starter protectors.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/7
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type of construction
Connection methods
The 3RV2 motor starter protectors are available in two sizes:

Size S00 - width 45 mm,
max. rated current 16 A,
at 400 V AC suitable for three-phase motors up to 7.5 kW
The 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can be

supplied with screw terminals, spring-type terminals and ring
cable lug connections.
Screw terminals
For sizes S2 and S3 of the 3RV1 motor starter protectors up to

100 A see page 7/55 onwards.

The 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers are available in two sizes:
Size S00 width 45 mm,
max. rated current 15 A, for 480 Y/277 V AC
For size S0 width 45 mm,
max. rated current 22 A, at 480 Y/277 V AC

3RV20 motor starter protectors are suitable for overload
protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety"
type of protection EEx e.
For size S3 of the 3RV1742 circuit breakers up to 70 A

see page 7/60.
EC type test certificate for Category (2) G/D has been submitted.
More details on request.
Article No. scheme

Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
3RV
SIRIUS 2nd generation
2
@
Type of motor starter protector/circuit breaker
Size
Breaking capacity
Setting range for overload release
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods
With or without auxiliary switch

Special versions
Example
3RV
Note:
article numbers.
7/8
13th 14th 15th 16th
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
We offer you a unique portfolio for industrial energy management, using an energy management system that helps to
optimally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial
energy management into three phases identify, evaluate and
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers contribute to

energy efficiency throughout the plant as follows:
Minimization of energy losses through optimization of the
bimetal trip units
Reduction of inherent power loss
Less heating of the control cabinet
Smaller control cabinet air conditioners can be used
Operating conditions
Possible uses
3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are suitable for

use in any climate. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms
in which no severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic
vapors, hazardous gases) prevail. When installed in dusty and
damp areas, suitable enclosures must be provided.
The 3RV2 motor starter protectors can be used:

For short-circuit protection
For motor protection (also with overload relay function)
For system protection
For short-circuit protection for starter combinations
As main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches
For operation in IT systems (IT networks)
For switching of DC currents
In areas subject to explosion hazard (ATEX)
Approved as circuit breakers according to UL 489
(3RV27 and 3RV28)
3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can optionally be

fed from the top or from below.
The permissible ambient temperatures, the maximum switching
capacities, the tripping currents and other boundary conditions
can be found in the technical specifications and tripping characteristics, see the manual "SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RV2
Motor Starter Protectors",
operation in IT systems (IT networks). In this case, the different
short-circuit breaking capacity in the IT system must be taken
into account, see page 7/11.
Since operational currents, starting currents and current peaks
are different even for motors with identical power ratings due to
the inrush current, the motor ratings in the selection tables are
only guide values. The specific rated and start-up data of the
motor to be protected is always paramount to the choice of the
most suitable motor starter protector/circuit breaker. This also
applies to motor starter protectors for transformer protection.
Application

Manual "SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter
Protectors",
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/9
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics according to IEC 60947-2
This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking
capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking
capacity Ics of the 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
with different operating voltages dependent on the rated
current In of the motor starter protectors/circuit breakers.
The maximum rated current of this back-up fuse is indicated in

the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
then applies as specified on the fuse.
Power can be supplied to the motor starter protectors/circuit

breakers via the terminals at the top or at the bottom without
restricting the rated data. If the short-circuit current at the place
of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity
of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker as specified in the
table, a back-up fuse is required. It is also possible to install an
upstream motor starter protector/circuit breaker with a limiter
function.
Motor starter protector/contactor assemblies for short-circuit

currents up to 150 kA can be ordered as fuseless load feeders,
see Chapter 8 "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the
Control Cabinet".
Motor starter
protectors/
circuit breakers
Rated
current In
Type
Up to 240 V AC1)
Up to 400 V AC1)/
415 V AC2)
Fuseless design
Up to 440 V AC1)/
460 V AC2)
Up to 500 V AC1)/
525 V AC2)
Up to 690 V AC1)
Icu
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)3)
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)3)
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)3)
Ics
Max. fuse
(gG)3)4)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.16 ... 1.6

2; 2.5
3.2
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
10
10
100
10
10
25
32
4; 5
6.3
8
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
100
100
50
63
100
100
42
100
100
42
63
6
6
6
4
4
4
32
50
50
10
12.5
16
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
55
100
100
30
100
50
50
50
50
50
10
80
80
80
42
42
10
42
42
5
63
80
80
6
6
4
4
4
4
50
63
63
0.16 ... 1.6

2; 2.5
3.2
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
10
10
100
10
10
25
32
4; 5
6.3
8
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
100
100
50
63
100
100
42
100
100
42
63
6
6
6
4
4
4
32
50
50
10
12.5
16
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
55
100
100
25
100
50
50
50
50
50
10
80
80
80
42
42
10
42
42
5
63
80
80
6
6
4
4
4
2
50
63
63
20
22; 25
28; 32
36; 40
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
55
55
55
20
25
25
25
10
125
125
125
125
50
50
30
12
10
10
10
8
80
100
125
125
10
10
10
6
5
5
5
3
80
80
100
100
4
4
4
3
2
2
2
2
63
63
100
100
Size S00
3RV2.11
Size S0
3RV2.21
No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA

1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the place of

installation > Icu.
4)
Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
7/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system (IT network) according to IEC 60947-2
use in IT systems. The values of Icu and Ics apply for the threepole short circuit. In case of a double ground fault in different
phases at the input and output side of a motor starter protector,
the special short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT applies. The
specifications in the table below apply to 3RV2 motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers.
If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the

motor starter protector/circuit breaker's specified rated shortcircuit breaking capacity, you will need to use a back-up fuse.
the tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies
as specified on the fuse.
Motor starter
protectors/
circuit breakers
Rated
current In
Up to 240 V AC1)
IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)
Up to 400 V AC1)/415 V AC2) Up to 500 V AC1)/525 V AC2) Up to 690 V AC1)5)

IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)4)
IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)
IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)
Type
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.16 ... 0.4

0.5
0.63; 0.8
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0.5
0.5
4
6
1
1.25
1.6
2; 2.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
8
25
8
8
8
8
10
16
20
25
2
2
2
2
10
16
16
20
3.2
4; 5
6.3; 8
100
100
100
8
4
4
32
32
50
8
2
2
32
32
40
2
2
1.5
25
25
35
10
12.5
16
100
100
55
80
4
4
4
50
63
63
2
2
2
40
50
50
1.5
1.5
1.5
40
40
40
0.16 ... 0.4

0.5
0.63; 0.8
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0.5
0.5
4
6
1
1.25
1.6
100
100
100
100
100
100
8
8
8
10
16
20
2
2
2
10
16
16
2; 2.5
3.2
4; 5
100
100
100
8
8
4
25
32
32
8
8
2
25
32
32
2
2
2
20
25
25
6.3; 8
10
12.5
100
100
100
4
4
4
50
50
63
2
2
2
40
40
50
1.5
1.5
1.5
35
40
40
16
20 ... 25
28; 32
36; 40
55
55
55
20
80
80
80
80
4
4
2
2
63
63
63
63
2
2
2
2
50
50
63
63
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
40
50
63
63
Size S00
3RV2.11
Size S0
3RV2.21

1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required if short-circuit current at the place of installation

> IcuIT.
4)
5)
Overvoltage category II applies for applications in IT systems > 600 V.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/11
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Limiter function with standard devices for 500 V AC and 690 V AC according to IEC 60947-2
The table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking
capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking
capacity Ics with an upstream standard motor starter protector/
circuit breaker that fulfills the limiter function at voltages
500 V AC and 690 V AC.
The short-circuit breaking capacity can be increased significantly with an upstream standard motor starter protector/circuit
breaker with limiter function. The motor starter protector/circuit
breaker which is connected downstream must be set to the rated
current of the load.
Standard motor starter protectors/circuit breakers Rated current In
With limiter
rated current In
Type
With motor starter protector/circuit breaker assemblies, note the

clearance to grounded parts and between the motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers. Short-circuit proof wiring between
the motor starter protectors/circuit breakers must be ensured.
The motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can be mounted
side by side in a modular arrangement.
Up to 500 V AC1)/525 V AC2)
Up to 690 V AC1)
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Type
kA
kA
kA
kA
Size S0:
In = 32 A
2 ... 6.3
8
10 ... 16
-100
100
-50
50
50
20
203)
25
10
103)
Size S2:
3RV1331-4HC10
10 ... 16
--
--
50
25
Size S0:
In = 32 A
16 ... 32
100
50
203)
103)
Size S2:
3RV1331-4HC10
16 ... 32
--
--
50
20
Size S00
3RV2.11
In = 50 A
Size S0
3RV2.21
In = 50 A
-- No limiter required
1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Infeed to the limiter is always on the side 1L1/3L2/5L3.
7/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA)
Motor starter protectors of the 3RV2 series are approved for
UL/CSA, and according to UL508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14, they
can be used on their own or as load feeders in combination with
a contactor.
These motor starter protectors can be used as "Manual Motor

Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).
3RV2 motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers"

If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor starter protector
is always operated in combination with an upstream short-circuit
protection device. Approved fuses or circuit breakers according
to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5 can be used. These devices must be
dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or
Canadian Electrical Code (CSA).
Type
hp rating1) for FLA2)

max.
Singlephase
3-phase
Rated
current In
The file numbers for the approval of the 3RV2 as a Manual Motor
Controller are as follows:
UL File No. 47705, CCN: NLRV
CSA Master Contract 165071, Product Class: 3211 05
240 V AC
480 V AC
600 V AC
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.16 ... 12.5

16
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
30
--
30
--
0.16 ... 12.5

16 ... 25
28, 32
36, 40
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
50
12
65
65
50
12
30
--/(30)4)
---
30
--/(30)4)
---
Size S00
3RV2011, 3RV2111, 3RV2311, 3RV2411
FLA max.
16 A, 480 V;
12.5 A, 600 V
115
200
230
460
575/600
1
2
2
---
2
3
5
10
10
Size S0
3RV2021, 3RV2121, 3RV2321, 3RV2421
FLA2) max.
40 A, 480 V
115
200
230
460
575/600
3
5
7 1/2
---
5
10
10
30
--
-- No approval
3)
Corresponds to "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
1)
hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).
4)
The values in brackets only apply to 3RV2.23 motor starter protectors.
2)
FLA = Full Load Amps/motor full load current.
3RV20 motor starter protectors (up to 32 A) as "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available
for UL.
CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor starter
protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always be
combined with upstream short-circuit protection. Approved
fuses or a circuit breaker according to UL 489 can be used.
Type

max.
Singlephase
3-phase
Rated
current In
These devices must be dimensioned according to the National

Electrical Code.
The 3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual
Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group
Installations" under the following file number:
240 V AC
Up to 480 Y/277 V AC
UL
UL
UL
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
kA
kA
kA
0.16 ... 12.5

16
65
65
65
65
30
--
0.16 ... 12.5

16 ... 25
28; 32
65
65
50
65
65
50
30
---
Size S00
3RV2011
2)
FLA max.
16 A, 480 V;
12.5 A, 600 V
115
200
230
460
575/600
1
2
2
---
2
3
5
10
10
115
200
230
460
575/600
2
3
5
---
5
7 1/2
10
20
--
Size S0
3RV2021
FLA2) max.
32 A, 480 V
-- No approval
2)
1)
3)
Corresponds to "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/13
2)
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RV20 motor starter protectors (up to 32 A) as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller (Type E)"
UL 508 approval demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch
creepage distance at line side for "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller Type E".
Therefore, 3RV20 motor starter protectors of size S00 and S0 are
approved according to UL 508 in combination with the terminal
blocks listed below.
CSA does not require these extended clearances and creepage
distances. According to CSA, these terminal blocks can be
max.
Motor starter
protectors
Type
Singlephase
3-phase
1
2
2
---
2
3
5
10
10
Rated
current In
omitted when the device is used as a "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller".

The 3RV20 motor starter protectors are approved as
"Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" under the
following file numbers:
UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH
Up to 240 V AC
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.16 ... 12.5

16
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
30
--
30
--
0.16 ... 12.5

16 ... 25
28; 32
65
65
50
65
65
50
65
65
50
65
65
50
30
---
30
---
Size S00
3RV2011 + 3RV2928-1H4)5)
FLA2) max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
16 A, 480 V;
12.5 A, 600 V
Size S0
3RV2021 + 3RV2928-1H4)5)
FLA2)
max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
32 A, 480 V
2
3
5
---
5
7 1/2
10
20
--
-- No approval
3)
1)
4)
Not required for CSA.
2)
5)
Alternatively, the 3RV2928-1K can also be used.
3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter protectors as "circuit breakers"

These motor starter protectors are approved as circuit breakers
according to UL 489 and CSA 22.2 No. 5. They can be used
therefore as upstream short-circuit protective devices for
"Manual Motor Controllers" and "Manual Motor Controllers
Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations".
Circuit breakers
480 Y/277 V AC
600 Y/347 V AC
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
3RV2711
0.16 ... 12.5

15
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
10
--
10
--
3RV2811
0.16 ... 12.5

15
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
10
--
10
--
3RV2721
20; 22
50
50
50
50
--
--
3RV2821
20; 22
50
50
50
50
--
--
Type
Rated current In
3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter protectors are approved as

"circuit breakers" under the following file numbers:
UL File No. E235044, CCN: DIVQ
240 V AC
Size S00
Size S0
-- No approval
1)
7/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
General data
3RV2.1.
3RV27, 3RV28
3RV2.2.
Size
S00
S00, S0
S0
45 x 97 x 91
45 x 109 x 91
45 x 144 x 92
--
45 x 97 x 91
45 x 119 x 91
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--
--Yes
Yes
Yes
--
22
40
mm
mm
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14
UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5
Number of poles
Max. rated current In max
(= max. rated operational current Ie)
Storage/transport
Operation
In: 0.16 ... 32 A

In: 36 ... 40 A
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet

+60 C
+70 C
16
C
C
C
50 ... +80
20 ... +70 (current reduction above +60 C)
20 ... +40 (the devices must not be mounted side-by-side and they must
not be assembled with link modules with contactors. A lateral clearance of
9 mm is required)
%
%
100
87
Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure

(applies for motor starter protector/circuit breaker inside enclosure 32 A)
+35 C
%
+60 C
%
100
87

Acc. to IEC
Acc. to UL/CSA
V AC
V AC
690 (with molded-plastic enclosure 500 V)

600
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
690
kV
IEC 60947-2 (motor starter protector/circuit breaker)
IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter)
Trip class CLASS
Screw terminals
Type
A
AC-3
10
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)

1 conducting path 150 V DC
2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC
--
10
kA
kA
kA
10
10
10
In: 0.16 ... 0.63 A

In: 0.8 ... 6.3 A
In: 8 ... 16 A
W
W
W
5
6
7
In: 16 A
--
P
R per conducting path = ------------- 2 3
In: 20 ... 25 A
In: 28 ... 32 A
In: 36 ... 40 A
W
W
W
----
8
11
14
Shock resistance
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
g/ms
25/11 (square and sine pulse)
Touch protection
Acc. to IEC 60529

Acc. to EN 50274
Power loss Pv for each motor starter

protector/circuit breaker
Dependent on
the rated current In
(upper setting range)
Temperature compensation
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
Phase failure sensitivity
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
IP20
Finger-safe for vertical contact from the front
C
20 ... +60
Yes
No
Yes
Explosion protection Safe operation of motors with "increased

safety" type of protection
Yes, only for 3RV20 motor starter protectors
EC type test certificate number according to

directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
On request
Acc. to IEC 60947-2
Acc. to EN 60204-1
Yes
Yes
Protective separation between

Acc. to IEC 60947-1
main and auxiliary circuits,
required for PELV applications
Up to 400 V + 10 %
Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request)
Yes
Yes
Any, acc. to IEC 60447 start command "I" right-hand side or top
Isolating function
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch
characteristics
(with corresponding accessories)
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts)
1/h
15
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/15
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches
Lateral auxiliary Signaling
switch with
switches
1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO, 2 NC,
2 NO + 2 NC
Transverse
auxiliary switch with
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO
Max. rated voltage

Acc. to NEMA (UL)
V AC
600
Acc. to NEMA (CSA)
V AC
600
10
10
2.5
1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO, 2 NC:
A600, Q300;
2 NO + 2 NC:
A300, Q300
A600, Q300
B600, R300
C300, R300
Switching capacity
250
250
Front transverse auxiliary switches

Switching capacity for different voltages
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO

At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V
- 230 V
A
A
4
3
2
0.5
At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage

- 24 V
- 230 V
A
A
10
10
2.5
2.5
At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200 ms

- 24 V
- 48 V
- 60 V
- 110 V
- 220 V
A
A
A
A
A
1
--0.22
0.1
1
0.3
0.15
---
V
mA
17
1
Minimum load capacity
Front transverse electronic compatible auxiliary switches

1 CO
Alternating voltage
125
at Ue = 125 V
0.1
Direct voltage L/R 200 ms
60
at Ue = 60 V
0.3
V
mA
5
1
Lateral auxiliary switches with signaling switch

Switching capacity for different voltages:
Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC
Signaling switch
- 24 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 690 V
A
A
A
A
6
4
3
1

- 24 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 690 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
10

- 24 V
- 110 V
- 220 V
- 440 V
A
A
A
A
2
0.5
0.25
0.1
V
mA
17
1
7/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Auxiliary releases
Shunt releases
Power consumption
During pick-up
- AC voltages
- DC voltages
VA/W
W
20.2/13
20
20.2/13
13 ... 80
During uninterrupted duty

- AC voltages
- DC voltages
VA/W
W
7.2/2.4
2.1
---
Tripping
0.35 ... 0.7 x Us
0.7 ... 1.1 x Us
Pick-up
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
--
Opening time maximum
ms
20
Melting fuses operational class gG
10
Miniature circuit breakers C characteristic
6 (prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA)
Response voltage
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits
Conductor cross-sections of main circuit

Type
3RV2.11
3RV2.21
3RV27, 3RV28
Size
S00
S0
S00, S0
Connection type
Screw terminals
M4, Pozidriv size 2
M4, Pozidriv size 2
mm
5 ... 6
5 ... 6
5 ... 6
Prescribed tightening torque
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
2 ... 2.5
2.5 ... 3
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1),

2x4
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (2.5 ... 10)1)
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices
Terminal screw
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),

1 or 2 conductors can be connected
Solid
1)
2.5)1),
1)
1 ... 10,
max. 2 x 10
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) ,

2x4
2 x (1 ...
2 x (2.5 ... 10)
1.5 ... 25,

max. 10 + 25
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (2.5 ... 6)1),
1 x 10
1 ... 16,
max. 6 + 16
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1),

2 x (18 ... 12)1)
2 x (16 ... 12)1),

2 x (14 ... 8)1)
2 x (14 ... 10)
Stranded
mm

Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (1 ... 10)
--
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (1 ... 6)
--
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (1 ... 6)
--
AWG
2 x (20 ... 12)
2 x (18 ... 8)
--
Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation
mm
3.6
3.6
--
Operating devices
Connection type
M3, Pozidriv size 2
M4, Pozidriv size 2
--
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
5 ... 6
--
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
2 ... 2.5
--
mm
d2 = min. 3.2,
d3 = max. 7.5
d2 = min. 4.3,
d3 = max. 12.2
--
Terminal screw

DIN 46234 without insulation sleeve
d3
d2

DIN 46237 with insulation sleeve
JIS C2805 Type RAV with insulation sleeve
JIS C2805 Type RAP with insulation sleeve
1)
I201_12740
JIS C2805 Type R without insulation sleeve

point, both cross-sections must be in the range specified.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/17
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits
Type
3RV2.11
3RV2.21
3RV27, 3RV28
Size
S00
S0
S00, S0
Screw terminals
Connection type
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2

Solid or stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)1), 2 x (20 ... 16)1)
Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 14)
mm
3.6
Operating devices

M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Tightening torque
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
mm
d2 = min. 3.2, d3 = max. 7.5

d3
d2

1)
I201_12740

Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)

according to UL 508"
Type
3RV2928-1H
Nm
2.5 ... 3

- Solid
- Stranded
- AWG cables, solid or stranded
- Terminal screw
mm
mm
mm
AWG
1 ... 10
1 ... 16
2.5 ... 25
14 ... 3
M4

- Solid
- Stranded
- Terminal screw
mm
mm
mm
AWG
1 ... 10
1 ... 16
1.5 ... 25
14 ... 6
M4
- Front clamping point:

Solid
Stranded
Terminal screw
mm
mm
mm
AWG
1 ... 10
1 ... 101), 1 ... 61)
2.5 ... 10
14 ... 6
M4
- Rear clamping point:

Solid
Stranded
Terminal screw
mm
mm
mm
AWG
1 ... 10
1 ... 101), 1 ... 161)
2.5 ... 10
16 ... 3
M4
NSB0_00480
NSB0_00479

NSB0_00481
Connection type
1)
The following can be connected when both clamping points are

connected:
- Front 1 ... 10 mm and rear 1 ... 10 mm
- Front 1 ... 6 mm and rear 1 ... 16 mm
7/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors up to 40 A

CLASS 10, without auxiliary switches1)
PU (UNIT, SET, M) =1
PS*
=1 unit
PG
=41E
3RV2011-0AA10
Rated
current
Suitable for
Setting range for
three-phase
thermal overload
2)
motors with P release
3RV2011-0EA20
3RV2021-4AA10
Instantaneous Short-circuit
DT
overcurrent
breaking capacity
release
at 400 V AC
Icu
In
A
3RV2021-4AA20
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
kW
kA
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.11 ... 0.16

0.14 ... 0.2
0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
2.1
2.6
3.3
4.2
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0AA10
3RV2011-0BA10
3RV2011-0CA10
3RV2011-0DA10
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0AA20
3RV2011-0BA20
3RV2011-0CA20
3RV2011-0DA20
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.18
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
5.2
6.5
8.2
10
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0EA10
3RV2011-0FA10
3RV2011-0GA10
3RV2011-0HA10
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0EA20
3RV2011-0FA20
3RV2011-0GA20
3RV2011-0HA20
1
1.25
1.6
2
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
13
16
21
26
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0JA10
3RV2011-0KA10
3RV2011-1AA10
3RV2011-1BA10
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0JA20
3RV2011-0KA20
3RV2011-1AA20
3RV2011-1BA20
2.5
3.2
4
5
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
33
42
52
65
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1CA10
3RV2011-1DA10
3RV2011-1EA10
3RV2011-1FA10
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1CA20
3RV2011-1DA20
3RV2011-1EA20
3RV2011-1FA20
6.3
8
10
12.5
16
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
82
104
130
163
208
100
100
100
100
55
}
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1GA10
3RV2011-1HA10
3RV2011-1JA10
3RV2011-1KA10
3RV2011-4AA10
}
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1GA20
3RV2011-1HA20
3RV2011-1JA20
3RV2011-1KA20
3RV2011-4AA20
0.63
0.8
0.18
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63

0.55 ... 0.8
8.2
10
100
100
B
B
3RV2021-0GA10
3RV2021-0HA10
B
B
3RV2021-0GA20
3RV2021-0HA20
1
1.25
1.6
2
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
13
16
21
26
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2021-0JA10
3RV2021-0KA10
3RV2021-1AA10
3RV2021-1BA10
B
B
B
B
3RV2021-0JA20
3RV2021-0KA20
3RV2021-1AA20
3RV2021-1BA20
2.5
3.2
4
5
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
33
42
52
65
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2021-1CA10
3RV2021-1DA10
3RV2021-1EA10
3RV2021-1FA10
B
B
B
B
3RV2021-1CA20
3RV2021-1DA20
3RV2021-1EA20
3RV2021-1FA20
6.3
8
10
12.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
82
104
130
163
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2021-1GA10
3RV2021-1HA10
3RV2021-1JA10
3RV2021-1KA10
B
B
B
B
3RV2021-1GA20
3RV2021-1HA20
3RV2021-1JA20
3RV2021-1KA20
16
20
22
25
7.5
7.5
11
11
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
208
260
286
325
55
55
55
55
}
}
}
}
3RV2021-4AA10
3RV2021-4BA10
3RV2021-4CA10
3RV2021-4DA10
}
}
}
}
3RV2021-4AA20
3RV2021-4BA20
3RV2021-4CA20
3RV2021-4DA20
28
32
15
15
23 ... 28
27 ... 32
364
400
55
55
}
}
3RV2021-4NA10
3RV2021-4EA10
}
}
3RV2021-4NA20
3RV2021-4EA20
363)
403)
18.5
18.5
30 ... 36
34 ... 40
432
480
20
20
}
}
3RV2021-4PA10
3RV2021-4FA10
Price
per PU
Size S00
Size S0
---
1)
The 3RV20.1-..A.0 motor starter protectors up to 32 A are also available

with ring terminal lug connection. The Article No. must be changed in the
11th digit to "4": e.g. 3RV2011-0AA40.
3)
2)
starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered
Auxiliary switches and other accessories can be ordered

separately (see "Accessories" on page 7/27 onwards).

The devices must not be mounted side-by-side and they must not be
assembled with link modules with contactors. A lateral clearance of 9 mm
is required.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/19
Siemens AG 2013

CLASS 10, with transverse auxiliary switch (1 NO + 1 NC)
PS*
=1 unit
PG
=41E
3RV2011-4AA15
with integrated transverse
auxiliary switch
Rated
current
3RV2011-0EA25
auxiliary switch
3RV2021-4AA15
auxiliary switch
3RV2021-4AA25
auxiliary switch
Suitable for
Setting range for
three-phase
thermal overload
motors1) with P release
Instantaneous Short-circuit
DT
overcurrent
breaking capacity
release
at 400 V AC
kW
kA
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.11 ... 0.16

0.14 ... 0.2
0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
2.1
2.6
3.3
4.2
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0AA15
3RV2011-0BA15
3RV2011-0CA15
3RV2011-0DA15
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0AA25
3RV2011-0BA25
3RV2011-0CA25
3RV2011-0DA25
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.18
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
5.2
6.5
8.2
10
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0EA15
3RV2011-0FA15
3RV2011-0GA15
3RV2011-0HA15
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0EA25
3RV2011-0FA25
3RV2011-0GA25
3RV2011-0HA25
1
1.25
1.6
2
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
13
16
21
26
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0JA15
3RV2011-0KA15
3RV2011-1AA15
3RV2011-1BA15
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-0JA25
3RV2011-0KA25
3RV2011-1AA25
3RV2011-1BA25
2.5
3.2
4
5
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
33
42
52
65
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1CA15
3RV2011-1DA15
3RV2011-1EA15
3RV2011-1FA15
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1CA25
3RV2011-1DA25
3RV2011-1EA25
3RV2011-1FA25
6.3
8
10
12.5
16
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
82
104
130
163
208
100
100
100
100
55
}
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1GA15
3RV2011-1HA15
3RV2011-1JA15
3RV2011-1KA15
3RV2011-4AA15
}
}
}
}
}
3RV2011-1GA25
3RV2011-1HA25
3RV2011-1JA25
3RV2011-1KA25
3RV2011-4AA25
16
20
22
25
7.5
7.5
11
11
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
208
260
286
325
55
55
55
55
}
}
}
}
3RV2021-4AA15
3RV2021-4BA15
3RV2021-4CA15
3RV2021-4DA15
}
}
}
}
3RV2021-4AA25
3RV2021-4BA25
3RV2021-4CA25
3RV2021-4DA25
28
32
15
15
23 ... 28
27 ... 32
364
400
55
55
}
}
3RV2021-4NA15
3RV2021-4EA15
}
}
3RV2021-4NA25
3RV2021-4EA25
362)
402)
18.5
18.5
30 ... 36
34 ... 40
432
480
20
20
}
}
3RV2021-4PA15
3RV2021-4FA15
Icu
In
A
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S00
Size S0
1)
2)
is required.
---

7/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For motor protection with overload relay function

CLASS 10, with overload relay function (automatic RESET), without auxiliary switches
3RV2111-0FA10
Rated
current
Suitable for
three-phase
motors1)
with P
Setting range for

thermal overload
release
3RV2121-4BA10
Instantaneous
overcurrent
release
In
A
kW
Short-circuit
DT
breaking capacity
at 400 V AC
Screw terminals
Icu
Article No.
kA
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.11 ... 0.16

0.14 ... 0.2
0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
2.1
2.6
3.3
4.2
100
100
100
100
A
A
A
A
3RV2111-0AA10
3RV2111-0BA10
3RV2111-0CA10
3RV2111-0DA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.18
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
5.2
6.5
8.2
10
100
100
100
100
A
A
A
A
3RV2111-0EA10
3RV2111-0FA10
3RV2111-0GA10
3RV2111-0HA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
1
1.25
1.6
2
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
13
16
21
26
100
100
100
100
A
A
A
A
3RV2111-0JA10
3RV2111-0KA10
3RV2111-1AA10
3RV2111-1BA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
2.5
3.2
4
5
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
33
42
52
65
100
100
100
100
A
A
A
A
3RV2111-1CA10
3RV2111-1DA10
3RV2111-1EA10
3RV2111-1FA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
6.3
8
10
12.5
16
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
82
104
130
163
208
100
100
100
100
55
A
A
A
A
A
3RV2111-1GA10
3RV2111-1HA10
3RV2111-1JA10
3RV2111-1KA10
3RV2111-4AA10
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
Size S02)
16
20
22
25
7.5
7.5
11
11
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
208
260
286
325
55
55
55
55
A
A
A
A
3RV2121-4AA10
3RV2121-4BA10
3RV2121-4CA10
3RV2121-4DA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
28
32
15
15
23 ... 28
27 ... 32
364
400
55
55
A
A
3RV2121-4NA10
3RV2121-4EA10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
1)
2)
Accessories for mounting on the right and 3RV2915 three-phase busbars

cannot be used.


Siemens IC 10 2014
7/21
Size S002)
Siemens AG 2013


Without auxiliary switches
PS*
=1 unit
PG
=41E
3RV2311-4AC10
Rated
current
3RV2311-0JC20
Suitable for
Thermal overload Instantaneous Short-circuit
DT
three-phase
release2)
overcurrent
breaking capacity
1)
motors with P
release
at 400 V AC
In
kW
kA
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Icu
3RV2321-4AC20
3RV2321-4AC10
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S00
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.09
Without
Without
Without
Without
2.1
2.6
3.3
4.2
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV23 11-0AC10
3RV2311-0BC10
3RV2311-0CC10
3RV2311-0DC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-0AC20
3RV2311-0BC20
3RV2311-0CC20
3RV2311-0DC20
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.18
Without
Without
Without
Without
5.2
6.5
8.2
10
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-0EC10
3RV2311-0FC10
3RV2311-0GC10
3RV2311-0HC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-0EC20
3RV2311-0FC20
3RV2311-0GC20
3RV2311-0HC20
1
1.25
1.6
2
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
Without
Without
Without
Without
13
16
21
26
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-0JC10
3RV2311-0KC10
3RV2311-1AC10
3RV2311-1BC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-0JC20
3RV2311-0KC20
3RV2311-1AC20
3RV2311-1BC20
2.5
3.2
4
5
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
Without
Without
Without
Without
33
42
52
65
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-1CC10
3RV2311-1DC10
3RV2311-1EC10
3RV2311-1FC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-1CC20
3RV2311-1DC20
3RV2311-1EC20
3RV2311-1FC20
6.3
8
10
12.5
16
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
Without
Without
Without
Without
Without
82
104
130
163
208
100
100
100
100
55
B
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-1GC10
3RV2311-1HC10
3RV2311-1JC10
3RV2311-1KC10
3RV2311-4AC10
B
B
B
B
B
3RV2311-1GC20
3RV2311-1HC20
3RV2311-1JC20
3RV2311-1KC20
3RV2311-4AC20
1.6
2
0.55
0.75
Without
Without
21
26
100
100
B
B
3RV2321-1AC10
3RV2321-1BC10
B
B
3RV2321-1AC20
3RV2321-1BC20
2.5
3.2
4
5
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
Without
Without
Without
Without
33
42
52
65
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2321-1CC10
3RV2321-1DC10
3RV2321-1EC10
3RV2321-1FC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2321-1CC20
3RV2321-1DC20
3RV2321-1EC20
3RV2321-1FC20
6.3
8
10
12.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
Without
Without
Without
Without
82
104
130
163
100
100
100
100
B
B
B
B
3RV2321-1GC10
3RV2321-1HC10
3RV2321-1JC10
3RV2321-1KC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2321-1GC20
3RV2321-1HC20
3RV2321-1JC20
3RV2321-1KC20
16
20
22
25
7.5
7.5
11
11
Without
Without
Without
Without
208
260
286
325
55
55
55
55
B
B
B
B
3RV2321-4AC10
3RV2321-4BC10
3RV2321-4CC10
3RV2321-4DC10
B
B
B
B
3RV2321-4AC20
3RV2321-4BC20
3RV2321-4CC20
3RV2321-4DC20
28
32
15
15
Without
Without
364
400
55
55
B
B
3RV2321-4NC10
3RV2321-4EC10
B
B
3RV2321-4NC20
3RV2321-4EC20
363)
403)
18.5
18.5
Without
Without
432
480
20
20
B
B
3RV2321-4PC10
3RV2321-4FC10
Size S0
---
1)
3)
2)

used.

7/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
is required.

Siemens AG 2013


CLASS 10, without auxiliary switches
Motor starter protectors for the protection of transformers with high inrush current
PS*
=1 unit
PG
=41E
3RV2411-0AA20
3RV2411-0AA10
Rated
current
Setting range for

thermal overload
release
Instantaneous
overcurrent
release
In
A
Short-circuit
breaking capacity
at 400 V AC
3RV2421-4AA10
DT
Article No.
Icu
3RV2421-4AA20
DT
Screw terminals
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
kA
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.11 ... 0.16

0.14 ... 0.2
0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
3.3
4.2
5.2
6.5
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2411-0AA10
3RV2411-0BA10
3RV2411-0CA10
3RV2411-0DA10
A
A
A
A
3RV2411-0AA20
3RV2411-0BA20
3RV2411-0CA20
3RV2411-0DA20
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
8.2
10
13
16
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2411-0EA10
3RV2411-0FA10
3RV2411-0GA10
3RV2411-0HA10
A
A
A
A
3RV2411-0EA20
3RV2411-0FA20
3RV2411-0GA20
3RV2411-0HA20
1
1.25
1.6
2
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
21
26
33
42
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2411-0JA10
3RV2411-0KA10
3RV2411-1AA10
3RV2411-1BA10
A
A
A
A
3RV2411-0JA20
3RV2411-0KA20
3RV2411-1AA20
3RV2411-1BA20
2.5
3.2
4
5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
52
65
82
104
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV2411-1CA10
3RV2411-1DA10
3RV2411-1EA10
3RV2411-1FA10
A
A
A
A
3RV2411-1CA20
3RV2411-1DA20
3RV2411-1EA20
3RV2411-1FA20
6.3
8
10
12.5
16
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
130
163
208
260
286
100
100
100
100
55
}
}
}
}
}
3RV2411-1GA10
3RV2411-1HA10
3RV2411-1JA10
3RV2411-1KA10
3RV2411-4AA10
A
A
A
A
A
3RV2411-1GA20
3RV2411-1HA20
3RV2411-1JA20
3RV2411-1KA20
3RV2411-4AA20
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
286
325
364
400
55
55
55
55
}
}
}
}
3RV2421-4AA10
3RV2421-4BA10
3RV2421-4CA10
3RV2421-4DA10
A
A
A
A
3RV2421-4AA20
3RV2421-4BA20
3RV2421-4CA20
3RV2421-4DA20
Price
per PU
Size S00
Size S0
16
20
22
25


Siemens IC 10 2014
7/23
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RV2 Circuit Breakers up to 40 A
according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5

for system protection and non-motor loads according to UL/CSA
3RV2711-0AD10
Rated
current1)
Thermal overload
releases
(non-adjustable)
Instantaneous
overcurrent
release
In1)
A
capacity
at 480 Y/277 V AC2)
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Ibc
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kA
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
2.1
2.6
3.3
4.2
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2711-0AD10
3RV2711-0BD10
3RV2711-0CD10
3RV2711-0DD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
5.2
6.5
8.2
10
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2711-0ED10
3RV2711-0FD10
3RV2711-0GD10
3RV2711-0HD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
1
1.25
1.6
2
1
1.25
1.6
2
13
16
21
26
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2711-0JD10
3RV2711-0KD10
3RV2711-1AD10
3RV2711-1BD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
2.5
3.2
4
5
2.5
3.2
4
5
33
42
52
65
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2711-1CD10
3RV2711-1DD10
3RV2711-1ED10
3RV2711-1FD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
6.3
8
10
12.5
15
6.3
8
10
12.5
15
82
104
130
163
208
65
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
C
3RV2711-1GD10
3RV2711-1HD10
3RV2711-1JD10
3RV2711-1KD10
3RV2711-4AD10
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
20
22
260
286
50
50
C
C
3RV2721-4BD10
3RV2721-4CD10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Size S00
Size S0
20
22
1)
Rated value 100 % according to UL 489 and IEC 60947-2

("100 % rated breaker").
2)
For values for 600 Y/347 V AC see page 7/14.
7/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Lateral and transverse auxiliary switches can be ordered


Siemens AG 2013


Circuit breakers for system and transformer protection according to UL/CSA,
specially designed for transformers with high inrush current
3RV2811-0AD10
Thermal overload
releases
(non-adjustable)
Instantaneous
overcurrent release
In1)
A
capacity
at 480 Y/277 V AC2)
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Ibc
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kA
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
3.3
4.2
5.2
6.5
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2811-0AD10
3RV2811-0BD10
3RV2811-0CD10
3RV2811-0DD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
8.2
10
13
16
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2811-0ED10
3RV2811-0FD10
3RV2811-0GD10
3RV2811-0HD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
1
1.25
1.6
2
1
1.25
1.6
2
21
26
33
42
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2811-0JD10
3RV2811-0KD10
3RV2811-1AD10
3RV2811-1BD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
2.5
3.2
4
5
2.5
3.2
4
5
52
65
82
104
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
3RV2811-1CD10
3RV2811-1DD10
3RV2811-1ED10
3RV2811-1FD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
6.3
8
10
12.5
15
6.3
8
10
12.5
15
130
163
208
260
286
65
65
65
65
65
C
C
C
C
C
3RV2811-1GD10
3RV2811-1HD10
3RV2811-1JD10
3RV2811-1KD10
3RV2811-4AD10
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
20
22
325
364
50
50
C
C
3RV2821-4BD10
3RV2821-4CD10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Size S00
Size S0
20
22
1)

2)

Lateral and transverse auxiliary switches can be ordered

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/25
Rated
current1)
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Mounting location and function
The 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers have three
main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility,
auxiliary switches, signaling switches, auxiliary releases and isolator modules can be supplied separately.
These components are easily fitted to the switches without the

use of any tools according to requirements.
Front side
Transverse auxiliary switches,

electronic compatible
transverse auxiliary switches
An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front.

The overall width of the motor starter protectors/circuit breakers remains
unchanged.

(2 contacts)
One of the three lateral auxiliary switches can be mounted on the left side
per motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary
switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor starter
protector/circuit breaker.
Note:
A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with

auxiliary switches can be mounted on each 1 NO + 1 NC
or
motor starter protector/circuit breaker.
2 NO
or
1 CO
Left-hand side
Notes:
A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with 1 NO + 1 NC

auxiliary switches can be mounted on each or
2 NO
or
Lateral auxiliary switches (two contacts)
2 NC
and signaling switches can be mounted
separately or together.
(4 contacts)
The signaling switch cannot be used for the
2 NO + 2 NC
3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
Overview graphic see page 7/7.
The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with two contacts is 9 mm.
One lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts can be mounted on the left
side per motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary
The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts is 18 mm.
Signaling switches
Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC
Short circuit 1 NO + 1 NC
One signaling switch can be mounted on the left side of each motor starter
protector.
The signaling switch has two contact systems.
One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was
caused by a short circuit, an overload or an auxiliary release. The other contact system only switches in the event of a short circuit. There is no signaling
as a result of switching off with the handle.
In order to be able to switch on the motor starter protector again after a short
circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error cause has
been eliminated.
The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm.
Right-hand side
Auxiliary releases
Notes:
Shunt releases
One auxiliary release can be mounted

per motor starter protector/circuit breaker.
Accessories cannot be mounted at the
right-hand side of the 3RV21 motor starter
protectors for motor protection with
overload relay function.
For remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker.

The release coil should only be energized for short periods
(see circuit diagrams).
or
Trips the motor starter protector/circuit breaker when the voltage is

interrupted and prevents the motor from being restarted accidentally when
the voltage is restored. Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor
starter protector/circuit breaker.
Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons according to DIN EN 60204-1.
or
Undervoltage releases with
leading auxiliary contacts 2 NO
Function and use as for the undervoltage release without leading auxiliary
contacts, but with the following additional function: the auxiliary contacts will
open in switch position OFF to deenergize the coil of the undervoltage
release, thus interrupting energy consumption. In the "tripped" position,
these auxiliary contacts are not guaranteed to open. The leading contacts
permit the motor starter protector/circuit breaker to reclose.
The overall width of the auxiliary release is 18 mm.
Notes:
Isolator modules can be mounted to the upper connection side of the motor
starter protectors.
The isolator module cannot be used for the

3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.
The supply cable is connected to the motor starter protector through the
isolator module.
The isolator module covers the terminal

screws of the transverse auxiliary switch.
If the isolator module is used, we therefore
recommend that either the lateral auxiliary
switches be fitted or that the isolator module
not be mounted until the auxiliary switch
has been wired.
The plug can only be unplugged when the motor starter protector is open
and isolates all 3 poles of the motor starter protector from the network. The
shock-protected isolation point is clearly visible and secured with a padlock
to prevent reinsertion of the plug.
Isolator modules
Top
For a complete overview of which accessories can be used for

the various motor starter protectors/circuit breakers, see
page 7/2.
7/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

PS*
=1 unit
PG
=41E
Version
For motor starter DT

protectors/
circuit breakers
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Size
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Auxiliary switches1)
Transverse auxiliary switches
for front mounting
3RV2901-1E
3RV2901-2E
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC2)
2 NO
S00, S0
}
}
}
3RV2901-1D
3RV2901-1E
3RV2901-1F
}
}
-3RV2901-2E
3RV2901-2F
Electronic compatible transverse

auxiliary switches
mountable on the front,
for operation in dusty atmosphere and
in electronic circuits with low operating
currents
1 CO
S00, S0
3RV2901-1G
--
Covers for transverse auxiliary

switches
S00, S0
3RV2901-0H
--
S00, S0
}
}
}
A
3RV2901-1A
3RV2901-1B
3RV2901-1C
3RV2901-1J
}
}
}
3RV2901-2A
3RV2901-2B
3RV2901-2C
--
S00, S0
3RV2921-1M
3RV2921-2M
S00, S0
3RV2928-1A
3RV2901-1G
3RV2901-0H
mountable on the left
1 NO + 1 NC2)
2 NO
2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
3RV2901- 3RV29011A
2A
Signaling switches3)
One signaling switch can be mounted
on the left per motor starter protector.
Separate tripped and short-circuit
alarms, 1 NO + 1 NC each
3RV2921- 3RV29211M
2M
Isolator modules3)
Isolator modules
--
Visible isolating distance for isolating

individual motor starter protectors from
the network, lockable in disconnected
position
3RV2928-1A
with padlock
1)
Each motor starter protector/circuit breaker can be fitted with one

transverse and one lateral auxiliary switch. The lateral auxiliary switch with
2 NO + 2 NC is used without a transverse auxiliary switch.
2)
The 3RV29 auxiliary and signaling switches with 1 NO + 1 NC are also

available with ring terminal lug connection. The Article No. must be
changed in the 8th digit to "4": e.g. 3RV2901-4E.
3)
This accessory cannot be used for the 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/27
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
PS*
=1 unit
PG
=41E
3RV2902-1AV0
3RV2902-2AV0
3RV2922-1CP0
For motor
starter
protectors/
circuit
breakers
AC
50 Hz
AC
60 Hz
AC
50/60 Hz
AC/DC
50/60 Hz,
DC
1)
100 % ON period 5 s ON period2)
DC
Size
DT
3RV2902-2DB0
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Auxiliary releases3)
-24
110
--
--120
208
-----
-----
24
----
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
230
400
415
500
240
440
480
600
-----
-----
-----
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
----
----
----
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
20 ... 24
90 ... 110
210 ... 240
350 ... 415
500
20 ... 70
70 ... 190
190 ... 330
330 ... 500
500
------
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
4)
4)
A
A
A
A
3RV2902-1AB4
3RV2902-1AB0
3RV2902-1AF0
3RV2902-1AM1
}
}
A
A
3RV2902-1AP0
3RV2902-1AV0
3RV2902-1AV1
3RV2902-1AS0
}
}
3RV2902-2AP0
3RV2902-2AV0
---
A
A
A
3RV2922-1CP0
3RV2922-1CV0
3RV2922-1CV1
A
A
A
3RV2922-2CP0
3RV2922-2CV0
3RV2922-2CV1
}
A
}
A
A
3RV2902-1DB0
3RV2902-1DF0
3RV2902-1DP0
3RV2902-1DV0
3RV2902-1DS0
}
A
}
3RV2902-2DB0
3RV2902-2DF0
3RV2902-2DP0
---
-----
Undervoltage releases with leading

auxiliary contacts 2 NO
230
400
415
240
440
480
4)
Shunt releases
------
------
1)
The voltage range is valid for 100 % (infinite) ON period. The response
voltage lies at 0.9 of the lower limit of the voltage range.
2)
The voltage range is valid for 5 s ON period at AC 50/60Hz and DC.

The response voltage lies at 0.85 of the lower limit of the voltage range.
3)
One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right per motor starter
protector/circuit breaker (does not apply to 3RV21 motor starter protectors
with overload relay function).
4)
The 3RV29 auxiliary releases are also available with ring terminal lug
connection. The Article No. must be changed in the 8th digit to "4":
e.g. 3RV2902-4AP0.
7/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
4)
4)

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar accessories
Overview
Insulated three-phase busbar system
8US busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
Three-phase busbar systems provide an easy, time-saving and

clearly arranged means of feeding 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with screw terminals. They can be used for
the different types of motor starter protector up to 32 A. The
3RV1915 three-phase busbar systems are generally unsuitable
for the 3RV21 motor starter protectors for motor protection with
overload relay function and 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers
according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5.
The motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are mounted

directly with the aid of busbar adapters on busbar systems with
60 mm center-to-center clearance in order to save space and to
reduce infeed times and costs.
The busbars are suitable for between two and five motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers. However, any kind of extension is
possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar (rotated
by 180) underneath the terminals of the respective last motor
starter protector/circuit breaker.
The motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are snapped onto

the adapter and connected on the line side. This prepared unit
is then plugged directly onto the busbar system, and is thus
connected both mechanically and electrically at the same time.
A combination of motor starter protectors/circuit breakers of

different sizes is possible. The motor starter protectors/circuit
breakers are supplied by appropriate infeed terminals.
The busbar adapters for busbar systems with 60 mm center-tocenter clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of
12 mm to 30 mm. The busbars can be 5 mm or 10 mm thick.
For further busbar adapters for snap-mounting direct-on-line

starters and reversing starters as well as additional accessories
such as line terminals and outgoing terminals, flat copper profile,
etc., see Catalog LV 10 "Low-Voltage Power Distribution and
Electrical Installation Technology".
3RV2925-5AB
3RV1915-1CB
NSB0_02080
NSB0_02079b
3RV2915-5B
3RV1915-6AB
SIRIUS three-phase busbar system size S00/S0
SIRIUS load feeders with busbar adapters snapped onto busbars
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe. They are

designed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the
output side of connected motor starter protectors/circuit
breakers.
The three-phase busbar systems can also be used to construct
"Type E Starters" according to UL/CSA. Special infeed terminals
must be used for this purpose, however (see "Selection and
Ordering Data", page 7/30).
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/29
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar accessories

Modular Number of motor starter
Rated
For motor DT
spacing protectors that can be connected current In starter
at 690 V protectors
Without With lateral With
lateral
auxiliary
accesso- switch
ries
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
auxiliary
release
mm
Size
Three-phase busbars1)2)
For feeding several motor starter protectors with screw terminals,
mounted side by side on standard mounting rails, insulated,
with touch protection
3RV1915-1AB
453)
2
3
4
5
--
--
63
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
}
}
}
}
3RV1915-1AB
3RV1915-1BB
3RV1915-1CB
3RV1915-1DB
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
3RV1915-1BB
554)
--
2
3
4
5
--
63
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
S00, S0
}
}
}
}
3RV1915-2AB
3RV1915-2BB
3RV1915-2CB
3RV1915-2DB
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
635)
--
--
2
4
63
S00, S0
S00, S0
}
}
3RV1915-3AB
3RV1915-3CB
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
3RV1915-1CB
3RV1915-1DB
1)
Not suitable for 3RV21 motor starter protectors for motor protection with
overload relay function and for 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers
according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5.
2)
Approved for motor starter protectors with In 32 A.
3)
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors without accessories mounted on the

side.
Solid or
stranded
Finely
stranded
with end
sleeve
mm
mm
4)
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors with auxiliary switches with 1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO and 2 NC mounted on the left (9 mm wide).
5)
For 3RV2 motor starter protectors with mounted accessories (18 mm wide).
Auxiliary switches with 2 NO + 2 NC or signaling switch (mounted on the
left) or with auxiliary release (mounted on the right).
Tightening
AWG cables, torque
solid or
stranded
For motor DT
starter
protectors/
circuit
breakers
AWG
Nm
Size
10 ... 4
3 ... 4
S00, S0
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Connection from top
2.5 ... 25
3RV2925-5AB
2.5 ... 16
3RV2925-5AB
1 unit
41E
S00, S0
3RV2915-5B
1 unit
41E
S00, S0
3RV2925-5EB
1 unit
41E
PS*
PG
1 10 units
41E

This terminal is connected in place of a switch, please take the
space requirement into account.
2.5 ... 25
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 4
Input: 4,
Output:
2 ... 2.5
3RV2915-5B
Three-phase infeed terminals for constructing "Type E Starters"

Connection from top
2.5 ... 25
2.5 ... 16
10 ... 4
3 ... 4
3RV2925-5EB
Version
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
DT
Article No.
3RV1915-6AB
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Size
Covers for connection tags

Touch protection for empty positions
S00, S0
3RV1915-6AB
7/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar accessories
Busbar adapters
8US1251-5DS10
8US1251-5DT11
8US1250-5AS10
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
Rated current Connecting Adapter

cable
length
Adapter
width
Rated voltage
Size
mm
AWG
mm
8US1250-5AT10
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems

For flat copper profiles according to DIN 46433
Width: 12 mm and 30 mm
Thickness: 5 mm and 10 mm
also for T and double-T special profiles
For motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with screw terminals
Screw terminals
S00/S0
25
12
200
45
690
8US1251-5DS10
1 unit
14O
S0
32
10
260
45
690
8US1251-5NT10
1 unit
14O
For motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with spring-type terminals

S00/S0
25
12
200
45
690
8US1251-5DS11
1 unit
14O
S00/S0
25
12
260
45
690
8US1251-5DT11
1 unit
14O
S0
32
10
260
45
690
8US1251-5NT11
1 unit
14O
Device holders
-For lateral mounting to -busbar adapters
--
200
45
--
8US1250-5AS10
1 unit
14O
--
260
45
--
8US1250-5AT10
1 unit
14O
Side modules
For widening of
busbar adapters
--
--
200
--
8US1998-2BJ10
1 10 units
14O
Spacers
For fixing the load
feeder onto the
busbar adapter
--
--
--
--
--
8US1998-1BA10
1 10 units
14O
Vibration and shock -kits

For high vibration and
shock loads
--
--
--
--
8US1998-1CA10
14O
Accessories
2 units
For additional busbar adapters see Catalog LV 10 "Low-Voltage

Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology".

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/31
Spring-type
terminals
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
NSB0_01079a
Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with a rotary operating

mechanism can be mounted in a control cabinet and operated
externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. When the cabinet door with motor starter protector/circuit
breaker is closed, the operating mechanism is coupled. When
the motor starter protector/circuit breaker closes, the coupling is
locked which prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the maintenance personnel. In the OPEN position, the rotary operating mechanism can
be secured against reclosing with up to three padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in this case either.
NSB0_01078
SIRIUS 3RV2926-2B door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for

arduous conditions
SIRIUS 3RV2926-0K door-coupling rotary operating mechanism

Version
Color of
handle
Version of
extension shaft
For MSPs/
circuit
breakers
mm
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and a 130/330 mm long extension shaft
(6 mm x 6 mm).
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP64. The door locking device prevents
accidental opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The OFF position
can be locked with up to three padlocks.
3RV2926-0B
130
330
S00, S0
S00, S0
}
}
3RV2926-0B
3RV2926-0K
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
EMERGENCY- Red/yellow 130

STOP
330
door-coupling
rotary
operating
mechanisms
S00, S0
S00, S0
}
}
3RV2926-0C
3RV2926-0L
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Door-coupling Black
rotary
operating
mechanisms
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions

The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver, an extension shaft of 300 mm in length
(8 mmx8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, into which the motor starter protector/circuit breaker is inserted.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door interlocking reliably
prevents opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The OFF position can
be locked with up to three padlocks.
Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and two-pole auxiliary switches can be used.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms thus meet the requirements for isolating functions according to IEC 60947-2.
3RV2926-2B
7/32
300
S00, S0
3RV2926-2B
1 unit
41E
EMERGENCY Red/yellow 300

STOP
door-coupling
rotary
operating
mechanisms
S00, S0
3RV2926-2C
1 unit
41E
Door-coupling Gray
rotary
operating
mechanisms
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Mounting accessories
Overview
Accessories for "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controllers (Type E)" according to UL 508
The 3RV20 motor starter protectors with screw terminals are
approved according to UL 508 as "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controllers (Type E)".
This requires increased clearance and creepage distances
(1 inch and 2 inches respectively) at the input side of the device,
which are achieved by mounting terminal blocks.
The 3RV2928-1H terminal block is simply screwed onto the
basic unit.
Link modules
Feeders can be easily assembled from single devices with the
help of the link modules. The following table shows the different
combination options for devices with screw or spring-type
terminals.
Combination
devices
3RV2 motor
starter
protectors/
circuit
breakers
3RT2 contactors;
3RW30, 3RW40
soft starters;
3RF34 solid-state
contactors
Size
Size
Link modules
Screw
terminals
Springtype
terminals
SIRIUS 3RV2928-1H terminal block
Another way to obtain the increased clearance and creepage

distances for Type E is to mount the 3RV2928-1K phase barriers.
Special three-phase infeed terminals are required for
constructing "Type E Starters" with an insulated three-phase
busbar system (see "Busbar Accessories", page 7/30).
The 3RV29 infeed system also enables the assembly of "Type E
Starters", see page 7/40 onwards.
Note:
According to CSA, these terminal blocks and the phase barriers
can be omitted when the device is used as a "Self-Protected
Combination Motor Controller" (Type E).
3RT2
contactors
with AC or
DC coil
S00
S00
S0
S00
3RT2
contactors
with AC coil
S0
S0
S00
S0
3RT2
contactors
with DC coil
S0
S0
S00
S0
3RW30 soft
starters
S00
S00
S0
S00
3RW30/3RW40 S0
soft starters
3RF34
solid-state
contactors
S0
S00
S0
S00/S0
S00
3RA19211DA00
3RA29112AA00
--
3RA29211AA00
3RA29212AA00
--
3RA29211BA00
3RA29212AA00
--
3RA29211BA00
3RA29112GA00
--
3RA29211BA00
3RA29212GA00
--
3RA29211BA00
--
Hybrid link modules for connecting contactors with spring-type

terminals to 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with screw
terminals1)2)
3RT2
S00
contactors
with AC or DC
S0
coil
S00
3RA29112FA00
--
S0
3RA29212FA00
--
Note:
Link modules and hybrid link modules up to max. 32 A can be
used.
1)
The link modules and the hybrid link modules cannot be used for
3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter
2)
The motor starter protector/circuit breaker to contactor hybrid link modules

are only suitable for constructing direct-on-line starters.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/33
NSB0_01379b
Link modules for connecting switching devices to 3RV2 motor starter

protectors/circuit breakers1)
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Accessories
Version
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
DT
Article No.
3RV2908-0P
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
100 10 units
41E
Size
Covers
Scale covers
Sealable,
for covering the set current scale
3RV20, 3RV21,
3RV24:
S00, S0
3RV2908-0P
Ring terminal lug
connections
Covers for devices with ring terminal lug connection

(ensure finger-safety)
Main current level
3RV2928-4AA00
For transverse auxiliary switches
3RV20:
S00, S0
3RV2928-4AA00
1 unit
41E
3RV2908-4AA10
1 unit
41E
S00, S0
3RV2928-0B
100 10 units
41E
3RV2908-4AA10
Fixing accessories
Push-in lugs
For screwing the motor starter protector/
circuit breaker onto mounting plates
3RV2928-0B
For each motor starter protector/circuit

breaker, two units are required.

Screwdrivers
3RA2908-1A
Length approx. 200 mm,

3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
titanium gray/black,
partially insulated
S00, S0
A
3RA2908-1A
1 unit
41B
Terminal blocks and phase barriers for "Self-Protected

Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)" according to UL 508
Note:
UL 508 demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch creepage distance at line side for "Combination Motor Controller Type E". The following
terminal blocks or phase barriers must be used in 3RV20 motor starter protectors.
The terminal block or phase barriers cannot be used in combination with the 3RV19.5 three-phase busbars.
For construction with three-phase busbars see "Busbar Accessories" page 7/29 onwards.
3RV2928-1H
3RV2928-1K
7/34
Terminal blocks type E

For extended clearance and creepage
distances
(1 and 2 inch)
S00, S0
3RV2928-1H
1 unit
41E
Phase barriers
For extended clearance and creepage
distances
(1 and 2 inch)
S00, S0
3RV2928-1K
1 unit
41E
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Link modules
Actuating voltage of
contactor
Size
DT
3RT2
contactors
Article No.
3RV2 motor starter

protectors
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules for motor starter protector to contactor1)

For mechanical and electrical connection between motor
starter protector and contactor with screw terminals
Screw terminals
Single-unit packaging
AC/DC
AC
DC
3RA2921-1AA00
S00
S0
S0
S00/S0
S00/S0
S00/S0
}
A
A
3RA1921-1DA00
3RA2921-1AA00
3RA2921-1BA00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S00
S0
S0
S00/S0
S00/S0
S00/S0
}
A
A
3RA1921-1D
3RA2921-1A
3RA2921-1B
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
41B
Multi-unit packaging
AC/DC
AC
DC

starter protector and contactor with spring-type terminals
AC/DC
AC2)
DC
S00
S0
S0
}
}
}
3RA2911-2AA00
3RA2921-2AA00
3RA2921-2AA00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S00
S0
S0
S00
S0
S0
}
}
}
3RA2911-2A
3RA2921-2A
3RA2921-2A
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
41B
A
A
3RA2911-1CA00
3RA2911-1C
1
1
41B
41B
AC/DC
AC2)
DC
Spacers2)
For compensating the height on AC contactors
S0
S0
S0
S0
1 unit
5 units
3RA2911-1CA00
Note:
1)
The link modules for motor starter protector to contactor cannot be used
for the 3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter
2)
A spacer for height compensation on AC contactors size S0 is optionally

available.
Link modules up to max. 32 A can be used.
Size
3RW30, 3RW40 soft starters;
3RF34 solid-state contactors
DT
Article No.
3RV2 motor starter

protectors
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules for motor starter protector to soft starter1) and motor starter
protector to solid-state contactor
Connection between motor starter protector and soft starter /
solid-state contactor with screw terminals
Screw terminals
S00
S0
3RA2921-1BA00
S00/S0
S00/S0
A
A
3RA2921-1BA00
3RA2921-1BA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S00/S0
S00/S0
A
A
3RA2921-1B
3RA2921-1B
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
S00
S0
Connection between motor starter protector and soft starter

S00
S0
S00
S0
}
}
3RA2911-2GA00
3RA2921-2GA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S00
S0
}
}
3RA2911-2G
3RA2921-2G
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
3RA2921-2GA00
S00
S0
Note:

1)
The link modules for motor starter protector to soft starter and motor starter
protector to solid-state contactor cannot be used for the 3RV2.21-4PA1.,
3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter protectors/circuit
breakers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/35
3RA2911-2AA00
S00
S0
S0
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
contactor
Size
3RT2
contactors
DT
Article No.
3RV2
motor starter
protectors
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Hybrid link modules from motor starter protector to contactor1)2)

Mechanical and electrical connection between motor starter
protector with screw terminals and contactor with spring-type
terminals
AC/DC
AC2)/DC
3RA2911-2FA00
S00
S0
S00
S0
}
}
3RA2911-2FA00
3RA2921-2FA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S00
S0
S00
S0
}
}
3RA2911-2F
3RA2921-2F
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
A
A
3RA2911-1CA00
3RA2911-1C
1
1
41B
41B
AC/DC
AC2)/DC
3RA2921-2FA00
Spacers3)
For compensating the height on AC contactors
S0
S0
S0
S0
1 unit
5 units
3RA2911-1CA00
Note:
1)
The hybrid link modules for motor starter protector to contactor cannot be
used for the 3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor
starter protectors/circuit breakers.
2)
The motor starter protector to contactor hybrid link modules are only
suitable for constructing direct-on-line starters.
3)
A spacer for height compensation on AC contactors size S0 is optionally

available.
7/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Enclosures and front plates
Overview
Enclosures
For stand-alone installation of 3RV20 to 3RV24 motor starter
protectors size S00 (In max = 16 A) and S0 (In max = 32 A), cast
aluminum enclosures for surface mounting and molded-plastic
enclosures for flush mounting are available in various
dimensions.
When installed in a molded-plastic enclosure the motor starter
protectors have a rated operational voltage Ue of 500 V.
The enclosures for surface mounting have the degree of protection IP55; the enclosures for flush mounting also comply with the
degree of protection IP55 at the front (the flush-mounted section
complies with IP20).
All enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. There are

two knock-out cable entries for cable glands at the top and two
at the bottom; also on the rear corresponding cable entries are
scored. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indicator lights that are available as accessories.
The narrow enclosure can accommodate a motor starter protector without accessories, with transverse auxiliary switch and with
lateral auxiliary switch. There is no provision for installing a motor
starter protector with a signaling switch.
With the motor starter protectors size S00 and S0, the moldedplastic enclosures are equipped with a rotary operating mechanism.
The enclosures can be supplied with either a black rotary
operating mechanism or with an EMERGENCY-STOP rotary
operating mechanism with a red/yellow knob.
In the OFF setting, all rotary operating mechanisms can be
locked with up to three padlocks.
Front plates
A holder for the motor starter protectors size S00 and S0, into
which the motor starter protectors can be snapped, is available
for the front plates.
NSB0_02081
Enclosures for surface mounting
NSB0_02083
NSB0_02082
Front plate (including holder) for sizes S00 and S0
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/37
Motor starter protectors are frequently required to be actuated in

any enclosure. Front plates equipped with a rotary operating
mechanism for 3RV20 to 3RV24 motor starter protectors size
S00 and S0 are available for this purpose.
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
Degree Integrated Width

of pro- terminals
tection
mm
For 3RV20 to DT
3RV24 motor
starter
protectors
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
Molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting1)

With rotary
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
IP55
3RV1923-1FA00
With
IP55
EMERGENCYSTOP rotary
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
S00, S0
3RV1923-1CA00
1 unit
41E
72
S00, S0
(for switch +
lateral auxiliary
switch2) +
auxiliary release)
3RV1923-1DA00
1 unit
41E
S00, S0
3RV1923-1FA00
1 unit
41E
72
S00, S0
(for switch +
lateral auxiliary
switch2) +
auxiliary release)
3RV1923-1GA00
1 unit
41E
N and
54
PE/ground (for switch +
lateral auxiliary
switch)
N and
54
lateral auxiliary
switch)
Cast aluminum enclosures for surface mounting1)

IP65
PE3)
72
S00, S0
(for switch +
lateral auxiliary
switch2) +
auxiliary release)
3RV1923-1DA01
1 unit
41E
With
IP65
EMERGENCYSTOP rotary
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
PE3)
72
S00, S0
(for switch +
lateral auxiliary
switch2) +
auxiliary release)
3RV1923-1GA01
1 unit
41E
IP55
(front
side)
S00, S0
N and
72
lateral auxiliary
switch2) +
auxiliary release)
3RV1923-2DA00
1 unit
41E
With
IP55
EMERGENCY- (front
STOP rotary
side)
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
S00, S0
N and
72
lateral auxiliary
switch2) +
auxiliary release)
3RV1923-2GA00
1 unit
41E
With rotary
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
3RV1923-1DA01
Molded-plastic enclosures for flush mounting4)

With rotary
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
3RV1923-2DA00
1)
The rear cable glands cannot be used on 3RV2.11-...2. and 3RV2.21-...2.

devices with spring-type terminals.
2)
Only valid for lateral auxiliary switches with two auxiliary contacts.
3)
If required, an additional N terminal can be mounted

(e.g. 8WA1011-1BG11).
4)
Not suitable for 3RV2.11-...2. and 3RV2.21-...2. devices with spring-type

terminals.
7/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
Degree of
protection
For 3RV20
to 3RV24
motor
starter
protectors
DT
Article No.
IP55
S00, S0
(front side)
--
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1923-4B
1 unit
41E
3RV1923-4E
1 unit
41E
S00, S0
3RV1923-4G
1 unit
41E
Rated control
supply voltage
Us
For 3RV20
to 3RV24
motor
starter
protectors
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
110 ... 120

220 ... 240
380 ... 415
480 ... 500
S00, S0
C
C
C
C
3RV1903-5B
3RV1903-5C
3RV1903-5E
3RV1903-5G
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
Size
Front plates
Molded-plastic front plates with rotary IP55
S00, S0
operating mechanism, lockable in
(front side)
0 position
For actuation of 3RV2 motor starter
protectors in any enclosure
3RV1923-4B +
3RV1923-4G
Molded-plastic front plates with

EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operating
mechanism, red/yellow,
lockable in 0 position
EMERGENCY-STOP actuation of
3RV2 motor starter protectors in any
enclosure
Holders for front plates
Holder is mounted on front plate, motor
starter protector with and without
accessories is snapped in.
Price
per PU
Version
Indicator lights
Indicator lights
For all enclosures and front plates
With LED lamp for versions
110 ... 120 V,
with glow lamp for versions
220 ... 500 V
3RV1903-5B
With colored lenses red, green,

yellow, orange and clear

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/39
Siemens AG 2013

3RV29 infeed system
Overview
The system is mounted extremely quickly and easily thanks to
the simple plug-in technique. Thanks to the lateral infeed, the
system also saves space in the control cabinet. The additional
overall height required for the infeed unit is only 30 mm. The alternative infeed possibilities on each side offer a high degree of
flexibility for configuring the control cabinet: Infeed on left-hand
or right-hand side as well as infeed on one side and outfeed on
the other side to supply further loads are all possible. A terminal
block with spring-type connections in combination with a standard mounting rail enables the integration of not only SIRIUS
motor starter protectors but also single-phase, 2-phase and
3-phase components such as 5SY miniature circuit breakers or
SIRIUS relay components.
The 3RV29 infeed system is a convenient means of energy

supply and distribution for a group of several motor starter
protectors or complete load feeders with a screw or spring-type
connection in sizes S00 and S0 (exception: this system cannot
be used for the 3RV21, 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers).
The system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral
incoming unit (three-phase busbar with infeed). This infeed with
spring-type terminals is mounted on the right or left depending
on the version and can be supplied with a maximum conductor
cross-section of 25 mm2 (with end sleeve). A basic module has
two sockets onto each of which a motor starter protector can be
snapped.
The 3RV29 infeed system is approved in accordance with IEC to

500 V. It is also UL-approved and authorized for "Self-Protected
Combination Motor Controller" (Type E starter) as well as for
Type F starter (Type E starter + contactor).
Expansion modules are available for extending the system

(three-phase busbars for system expansion). The individual
modules are connected through an expansion plug.
The electrical connection between the three-phase busbars and
the motor starter protectors is implemented through plug-in
connectors. The complete system can be mounted on a TH 35
standard mounting rail to IEC 60715 and can be expanded as
required up to a maximum current carrying capacity of 63 A.
3b
5
3a
5
1
NSB0_02078
3-phase busbar with infeed

3-phase busbar for system expansion
3a Expansion plug
3b Extra-wide expansion plug
1
SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed systems
7/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
6
7
End cover
Plug-in connector
Contactor base
Terminal block
Siemens AG 2013

3RV29 infeed system
$ Three-phase busbars with infeed
* Contactor base
A three-phase busbar with infeed unit is required for connecting

the incoming supply. These modules comprise one infeed
module and two sockets which each accept one motor starter
protector. A choice of two versions with infeed on the left or right
is available. The infeed is connected to spring-type terminals.
They permit an infeed with conductor cross-sections of up to
25 mm2 with end sleeves. An end cover is supplied with each
module.
Load feeders can be assembled in the system using the S00

and S0 contactor base. The contactor bases are suitable for
contactors sizes S00 and S0 with spring-type and screw terminals and are simply snapped onto the three-phase busbars.
Direct-on-line starters and reversing starters are possible. One
contactor base is required for direct-on-line starters and two are
required for reversing starters.
The three-phase busbars for system expansion support expansion of the system. There is a choice of modules with two or three
sockets. The system can be expanded as required up to a
maximum current carrying capacity of 63 A. An expansion plug
is supplied with each module.
&a Expansion plug

The expansion plug is used for electrical connection of adjacent
three-phase busbars. The current carrying capacity of this plug
equals 63 A. One expansion plug is supplied with each threephase busbar for system expansion. Additional expansion plugs
are therefore only required as spare parts.
&b Extra-wide expansion plug

The wide expansion plug makes the electrical connection
between two three-phase busbars, thus performing the same
function as the 3RV2917-5BA00 expansion plug; the electrical
characteristics (e.g. a current carrying capacity of 63 A) are
identical.
The 3RV2917-5E expansion plug is 10 mm wider than the
3RV2917-5BA00 expansion plug, hence in the plugged state
there is a distance of 10 mm between the connected threephase busbars. This distance can be used to lay the auxiliary
current and control current wiring ("wiring duct"). The motor
starter protector and contactor can be wired from underneath,
which means that the complete cable duct above the system
can be omitted.
( End cover
The end cover is used to cover the three-phase busbar at the
open end of the system. This cover is therefore only required
once for each system. An end cover is supplied with each
three-phase busbar system with infeed. Further end covers are
therefore only required as spare parts.
To assemble load feeders for reversing starters, the contactor

bases can be arranged alongside each other (90 mm overall
width). In this case the mechanical interlocking of the contactors
is possible. The S0 contactor bases are also suitable for soft
starters size S00 and S0 with screw terminal.
The infeed system is designed for mounting onto a TH 35 standard mounting rail with 7.5 mm overall depth. This standard
mounting rail gives the contactor base a stable mounting
surface to sit on. If standard mounting rails with a depth of
15 mm are used, the spacer connected to the bottom of the
contactor base must be knocked out and plugged into the
mating piece that is also on the underside. Then the contactor
base also has a stable mounting surface. When standard
mounting rails with a depth of 7.5 mm are used, the spacer has
no function and can be removed.
The link modules are used for direct start load feeders, in which
case the use of a contactor base is not absolutely necessary.
Motor starter protector and contactor assemblies can then be
directly snapped onto the sockets of the three-phase busbars.
For feeders of sizes S00 and S0, the corresponding
3RA1921-1...., 3RA2911-2...., 3RA2921-1.... or 3RA2921-2....
link modules should generally be used.
+ Terminal block
The 3RV2917-5D terminal block enables the integration of not
only SIRIUS motor starter protectors but also single-phase,
2-phase and 3-phase components. The three phases can be fed
out of the system using the terminal block; which means that single-phase loads can also be integrated in the system. The terminal block is plugged into the slot of the expansion plug and thus
enables outfeeding from the middle or end of the infeed system.
The terminal block can be rotated through 180 and be locked
to the support modules of the infeed system. In addition, the
45 mm wide TH 35 3RV1917-7B standard mounting rail option
for screwing onto the support plate facilitates plugging the
single-phase, two-phase and three-phase components onto the
infeed system.
) Plug-in connector
The plug-in connector is used for the electrical connection
between the three-phase busbar and the 3RV2 motor starter
protector. These plug-in connectors are available for screw or
spring-type terminals.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/41
% Three-phase busbars for system expansion
Siemens AG 2013

3RV29 infeed system

Type
Version
For 3RV20, DT
3RV23,
3RV24
motor
starter
protectors
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
Three-phase busbars with infeed

Three-phase busbars
with infeed
incl. 3RV2917-6A
end cover
For 2 motor starter

protectors with screw or
With infeed on the left
S00, S0
3RV2917-1A
1 unit
41E
With infeed on the right
S00, S0
3RV2917-1E
1 unit
41E
For 2 motor starter

protectors
S00, S0
3RV2917-4A
1 unit
41E
For 3 motor starter

protectors
S00, S0
3RV2917-4B
1 unit
41E
3RV2917-1A
Three-phase busbars for system expansion
Three-phase busbars For motor starter

incl. 3RV2917-5BA00 protectors with screw or
expansion plug
3RV2917-4A
Plug-in connectors
Plug-in connectors
to make contact with
the motor starter
protectors
For spring-type
terminals
Spring-type
terminals
- Single-unit packaging S001)

S02)
A
A
3RV2917-5AA00
3RV2927-5AA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
S001)
2)
A
A
3RV2917-5A
3RV2927-5A
1 10 units
1 10 units
41E
41E
- Multi-unit packaging
S0
3RV2917-5AA00
For screw terminals
Screw terminals
- Single-unit packaging S001)

S02)
A
A
3RV2917-5CA00
3RV1927-5AA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
S001)
S02)
A
A
3RV2917-5C
3RV1927-5A
1 10 units
1 10 units
41E
41E
- Multi-unit packaging
3RV2917-5CA00
1)
2)
I > 14 A, please note derating; see Manual "SIRIUS Innovations

SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors",
Type
Version
I > 16 A, please note derating; see Manual "SIRIUS Innovations

SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors",
For
contactors
DT
Article No.
S00
S0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV2917-7AA00
1 unit
41E
3RV2927-7AA00
1 unit
41E
Size
Contactor bases
Contactor bases
for mounting
direct-on-line or
reversing starters
3RV2927-7AA00
7/42
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RV29 infeed system
Type
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV2917-5D
1 unit
41E
3RV1917-7B
1 unit
41E
Terminal blocks
Terminal blocks
For integration of single-phase,
two-phase and three-phase
components
3RV2917-5D
TH 35 standard mounting rails, width 45 mm

TH 35 standard mounting
rails
acc. to IEC 60715, width 45 mm
For mounting onto three-phase
busbars
3RV1917-7B
Extra-wide expansion plugs

3RV2917-5E
1 unit
41E
Expansion plugs1)
As spare part
3RV2917-5BA00
1 unit
41E
End covers2)
As spare part
3RV2917-6A
100 10 units
41E
Extra-wide expansion plugs

As accessory
3RV2917-5E
Expansion plugs
3RV2917-5BA00
End covers
3RV2917-6A
1)
The expansion plug is included in the scope of supply of the 3RV2917-4.

three-phase busbars for system expansion.
2)
The end cover is included in the scope of supply of the 3RV2917-1.

three-phase busbars with infeed system.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/43
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
The following illustration shows our 3RV1 motor starter protector/
circuit breaker with the accessories which can be mounted for
the sizes S2 and S3, see also "Introduction" "Overview",
page 7/3.
"Accessories" see page 7/62 onwards.
Note:
The 3RV1 devices (sizes S00/S0 to S3) can be found
in the Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014 in the DVD box IC 01
in the Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014 at the Information and
Download Center
in the interactive catalog CA 01
in the Industry Mall
Mountable accessories for sizes S2 or S3
8
2
4
1
6
NSB0_02184a
1 Transverse auxiliary switch (can not be used with

3RV1742 circuit breakers)
4 Shunt release (can not be used with
5 Undervoltage release (can not be used with
6 Undervoltage release with
leading auxiliary contacts (can not be used with
7 Alarm switch (can not be used with 3RV1742 circuit
breakers)
8 Isolator module for size S2 (can not be used with
3RV1742 circuit breakers)
SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protector/circuit breaker sizes S2 and S3 with mountable accessories
3RV1 motor starter protectors in sizes S2 and S3 are approved

according to UL 508 as:
"Manual Motor Controllers"
"Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations"
"Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tab Conductor
Protection in Group Installations"
"Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"
Please note that for this approval the 3RV10 motor starter
protectors in size S3 must be equipped with additional infeed
terminals.
The 3RV1742 are approved as circuit breakers according to
UL 489; they are a special variant of the 3RV1 motor starter
protectors.
Corresponding short-circuit values see pages 7/46 to 7/49.
SIRIUS motor starter protector size S2
3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are compact, current limiting motor starter protectors/circuit breakers which are
optimized for load feeders. The motor starter protectors/circuit
breakers are used according to IEC 60947-2 for switching and
protecting three-phase motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC and
for other loads with rated currents of up to 100 A.
3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers sizes S00 and S0
up to 40 A see page 7/19 onwards.
3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are generally
approved according to IEC and UL/CSA.
The 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are available

in four sizes:
at 400 V AC suitable for three-phase motors up to 11 kW
Sizes S00 and S0 of the 3RV2 motor starter protectors/circuit
breakers up to 40 A see page 7/19 onwards.
7/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Connection methods
The 3RV1742 circuit breakers are available in size S3

(width 70 mm):
Maximum rated current 70 A at 480 Y/277 V AC
Maximum rated current 10 A to 30 A at 480 V AC
The SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can

be supplied with screw terminals and spring-type terminals.
Screw terminals
For sizes S00 and S0 of the 3RV27 and 3RV28 circuit breakers
up to 22 A see pages 7/24 and 7/25.
3RV10 motor starter protectors are suitable for the overload
protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety"
type of protection EEx e.
Article No. scheme
Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
3RV
SIRIUS 1st generation
1
@
Type of motor starter protector/circuit breaker
Size
Breaking capacity
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods

Special versions
Example
13th 14th 15th 16th
3RV
Note:
article numbers.
Application
Possible uses

use in any climate. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms
in which no severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic
vapors, hazardous gases) prevail. When installed in dusty and
damp areas, suitable enclosures must be provided.
The 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can be used:

For short-circuit protection
For motor protection (also with overload relay function)
For short-circuit protection for starter combinations
As main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches
For fuse monitoring
For operation in IT systems (IT networks)
For switching of DC currents
As voltage transformer circuit breakers
In areas subject to explosion hazard (ATEX)
Approved as circuit breakers according to UL 489 (3RV1742)
3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can optionally be

fed from the top or from below.
The permissible ambient temperatures, the maximum switching
capacities, the tripping currents and other boundary conditions
can be found in the technical specifications and tripping characteristics, see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers",
operation in IT systems (IT networks). In this case, the different
short-circuit breaking capacity in the IT system must be taken
into account, see page 7/47.
most suitable motor starter protector/circuit breaker. This also
applies to motor starter protectors for transformer protection.
For more details see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment

Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers"
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/45
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics according to IEC 60947-2
This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics of
the 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with different
operating voltages dependent of the rated current In of the motor

the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
then applies as specified on the fuse.
Power can be supplied to the motor starter protectors/circuit

breakers via the terminals at the top or at the bottom without
restricting the rated data. If the short-circuit current at the place
of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity
of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker as specified in the
table, a back-up fuse is required. It is also possible to install an
upstream motor starter protector/circuit breaker with a limiter
function.
Motor starter protector/contactor assemblies for short-circuit

currents up to 100 kA can be ordered as fuseless load feeders,
see Chapter 8 "Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the
Control Cabinet".
Motor starter
protectors/
circuit breakers
Type
Rated
current In
Up to 240 V AC1)
Up to 400 V AC1)/
415 V AC2)
Fuseless design
Up to 440 V AC1)/
460 V AC2)
Up to 500 V AC1)/
525 V AC2)
Up to 690 V AC1)
(these values do not apply 3RV1742 circuit breakers)

Icu
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)3)
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)3)
Ics
Max. fuse Icu

(gG)3)
Ics
Max.
fuse
(gG)3)4)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.2
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
16
20
25
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
15
100
100
100
12
12
12
6
6
6
63
80
80
5
5
5
3
3
3
63
63
63
32
40; 45
50
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
125
160
160
50
50
50
15
15
15
125
125
125
10
10
10
5
5
5
100
100
100
4
4
4
2
2
2
63
63
80
40
50
63
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
125
125
160
50
50
50
20
20
20
125
125
160
12
12
12
6
6
6
100
100
100
6
6
6
3
3
3
63
80
80
75
90; 100
100
100
100
100
50
50
25
25
160
160
50
50
20
20
160
160
8
8
4
4
125
125
5
5
3
3
100
125
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
100
100
100
50
50
50
30
30
30
15
15
15
80
80
80
12
12
12
7
7
7
63
63
63
32 / 25
40 / 30
50 / 35 ... 40
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
100
100
100
50
50
50
22
18
15
11
9
7.5
100
160
160
12
12
10
7
6
5
63
80
100
63 / 45 ... 50
75 / 60
90 / 70
100 / --
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
70
70
70
70
50
50
50
50
200
200
200
200
15
10
10
10
7.5
5
5
5
160
160
160
160
7.5
6
6
6
4
3
3
3
100
125
160
160
Size S00
3RV1611-0BD10
Size S2
3RV1.31
Size S3
3RV1.41
Size S3, with increased

switching capacity
3RV1.42/ 3RV17425) 16 / 10
20 / 15
25 / 20

1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the

place of installation > Icu.
4)
5)
The values for the 3RV1742 circuit breakers have been tested only up to
400 V/415 V AC; values > 440 V AC on request.
7/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Short-circuit breaking capacity IcuIT in the IT system (IT network) according to IEC 60947-2
operation in IT systems. The values of Icu and Ics apply for the
three-pole short circuit. In case of a double ground fault in different phases at the input and output side of a motor starter protector/circuit breaker, the special short-circuit breaking capacity
IcuIT applies. The specifications in the table apply to 3RV1 motor
If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the

motor starter protector/circuit breaker's specified rated short-circuit breaking capacity, you will need to use a back-up fuse. The
maximum rated current of this back-up fuse is indicated in the
tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as
specified on the fuse.
Motor starter
protectors/
circuit breakers
Rated
current In
Up to 240 V AC1)
IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)
Up to 400 V AC1)/415 V AC2) Up to 500 V AC1)/525 V AC2) Up to 690 V AC1)5)

IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)4)
IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)
IcuIT
Max. fuse
(gG)3)
Type
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.2
100
100
100
100
16
20; 25
32
40 ... 50
50
50
50
50
100
125
125
160
8
8
6
6
100
100
125
125
6
6
4
4
80
80
100
100
5
5
3
3
63
63
80
80
40
50
63
50
50
50
125
125
160
10
8
6
63
80
80
5
3
3
50
63
63
5
3
3
50
63
63
75
90; 100
50
50
160
160
5
5
100
125
2
2
80
100
2
2
80
100
16 ... 32
40
50
100
100
100
12
12
10
63
80
100
6
6
4
50
63
80
6
6
4
50
63
80
63
75
90; 100
100
100
100
7.5
6
6
100
125
160
4
3
3
80
100
125
4
3
3
80
100
125
Size S00
3RV1611-0BD10
Size S2
3RV1.31
Size S3
3RV1.41
3RV1.42
Size S3, with increased

switching capacity

1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required if short-circuit current at the place of installation

> IcuIT.
4)
5)
Overvoltage category II applies for applications in IT systems > 600 V.
Limiter function with standard devices for 500 V AC and 690 V AC according to IEC 60947-2
The table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
with an upstream standard motor starter protector that fulfills the
limiter function at voltages 500 V AC and 690 V AC.
The short-circuit breaking capacity can be increased significantly with an upstream standard motor starter protector with
limiter function. The motor starter protector which is connected
downstream must be set to the rated current of the load.
Standard motor starter protectors
Rated current In
With limiter
rated current In
Type
With motor starter protector assemblies, note the clearance to

grounded parts and between the motor starter protectors. Shortcircuit proof wiring between the motor starter protectors must be
ensured. The motor starter protectors can be mounted side by
side in a modular arrangement.
Up to 500 V AC1)/525 V AC2)
Up to 690 V AC1)
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Type
kA
kA
kA
kA
3RV1331-4HC10
16 ... 50
100
50
50
25
32 ... 50
100
50
50
25
50 ... 100
100
50
50
25
Size S2
3RV1031
In = 50 A
Size S3
3RV1041/3RV10 42
3RV1341-4HC10
In = 50 A
3RV1341-4MC10
In = 100 A
1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/47
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Permissible rated data of approved devices for North America (UL/CSA)
Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers of the 3RV1 series are
approved for UL/CSA, and according to UL 508 and CSAC 22.2
No. 14, they can be used on their own or as load feeders in combination with a contactor.
These motor starter protectors/circuit breakers can be used as

"Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual
Installations" and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).
3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers as "Manual Motor Controllers"

If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor starter protector/circuit breaker is always operated in combination with an
upstream short-circuit protection device. Approved fuses or a
circuit breaker according to UL 489/CSA C22.2 No. 5 can be
used. These devices must be dimensioned according to the
National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code
(CSA).
Type

max.
Singlephase
Rated
current In
Three-phase
The file numbers for the approval of the 3RV1 as a Manual Motor
Controller are as follows:
240 V AC
480 V AC
600 V AC
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
0.2
65
65
65
65
10
10
16 ... 50
65
65
65
65
25
25
16 ... 75
90; 100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
30
10
30
10
Size S00
3RV1611-0BD10
Size S2
3RV1031, 3RV1131, 3RV1331
FLA2)
max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
50 A, 600 V
NEMA size 2
3
7 1/2
10
---
-15
20
40
50
Size S3
3RV1041/3RV1042, 3RV1142, 3RV1341/3RV1342
2)
FLA max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
99 A, 600 V
NEMA size 3
7 1/2
20
20
---
-30
40
75
100
1)
2)
3)
3RV10 motor starter protectors as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available for UL.
CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor starter
protector is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable for Tap
Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always be
combined with upstream short-circuit protection. Approved
fuses or a circuit breaker according to UL 489 can be used.
Type

max.
Singlephase
Threephase
These devices must be dimensioned according to the National

Electrical Code.
The 3RV10 motor starter protectors are approved as "Manual
Installations" under the following file number:
Rated current In
240 V AC
Up to 480 Y/277 V AC Up to 600 Y/347 V AC
UL
UL
UL
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
kA
kA
kA
16 ... 50
65
65
25
16 ... 75
90; 100
65
65
65
65
30
--
Size S2
3RV1031
2)
FLA max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
50 A, 600 V
NEMA size 2
3
7 1/2
10
---
-15
20
40
50
Size S3
3RV104.
2)
FLA max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
100 A, 480 V
75 A, 600 V
NEMA size 3
7 1/2
20
20
---
-30
40
75
75
-- No approval
2)
1)
3)
7/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RV10 motor starter protectors as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"
UL 508 approval demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch
creepage distance at line side for "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller Type E".
Therefore, 3RV10 motor starter protectors of size S3 are
approved according to UL 508 in combination with the
3RT1946-4GA07 terminal block listed below.
The basic units of the 3RV10 motor starter protectors size S2
comply with the required clearance and creepage distances.
Type

max.
Singlephase
Rated
current In
Threephase
CSA does not require these extended clearances and creepage

distances. According to CSA, these terminal blocks can be omitted when the device is used as a "Self-Protected Combination
Motor Controller".
The 3RV10 motor starter protectors are approved as
"Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" under the
following file numbers:
UL File No. E156943, CCN: NKJH
Up to 240 V AC
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
Ibc3)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
16 ... 50
65
65
65
65
25
25
16 ... 75
90; 100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
30
--
30
--
Size S2
3RV1031
2)
FLA max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
50 A, 600 V
NEMA size 2
3
7 1/2
10
---
-15
20
40
50
Size S3
3RV1041 + 3RT1946-4GA074)
FLA max.
115
200
230
460
575/600
100 A, 480 V
75 A, 600 V
NEMA size 3
10
20
20
---
-30
40
75
75
2)
-- No approval
3)
1)
4)
Not required for CSA.
2)
3RV1742 motor starter protectors as "Circuit Breakers"

These motor starter protectors are approved as circuit breakers
according to UL 489 and CSA 22.2 No. 5. They can be used
therefore as upstream short-circuit protective devices for
"Manual Motor Controllers" and "Manual Motor Controllers
Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations".
Circuit breakers
Type
Rated current In
240 V AC
The 3RV1742 motor starter protectors are approved as "Circuit

Breakers" under the following file numbers:
UL File No. E235044, CCN: DIVQ
480 Y/277 V AC
480 V AC
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
UL
CSA
600 Y/347 V AC
UL
CSA
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
Ibc1)
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
10 ... 30
35 ... 60
70
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
---
65
---
20
20
10
20
20
10
Size S3
3RV1742
-- No approval
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/49
Siemens AG 2013

General data
General data
3RV161.1)
3RV1.3.
3RV1.4.
3RV1742
Size
S00
S2
S3
S3
45 x 90 x 70
55 x 140 x 144
70 x 165 x 169
70 x 168 x 169
Type
mm
W
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14
UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3
Number of poles
A
12

Storage/transport
Operation
C
C
50 ... +80
20 ... +70 (current reduction above +60 C)
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet

+60 C
+70 C
%
%
100
87
Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure

(applies for motor starter protector inside enclosure)
+35 C
+60 C
%
%
100
87

Acc. to IEC
Acc. to UL/CSA
V AC
V AC
690 (with molded-plastic enclosure 500 V)

600
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
690
kV

No
No
Yes
IEC 60947-2 (motor starter protector/circuit breaker)
IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter)
DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)
1 conducting path 150 V DC
10
kA
kA
kA
10
10
10
In: 16 ... 25 A
In: 32 A
In: 40 ... 50 A
W
W
W
----
In: 16 ... 63 A
In: 75 and 90 A
In: 100 A
W
W
W
----
In: 10 A
In: 15 ... 35 A
In: 40 ... 70 A
W
W
W
----
g/ms
Shock resistance
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Touch protection
Acc. to IEC 60529

Acc. to EN 50274
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
70
-10/20
Power loss Pv for each motor starter

Dependent on
the rated current In
P
R per conducting path =
2
3
-------
100
A
AC-3
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
Trip class CLASS
50
12
15
20
--
---20
30
38
8
12
21
IP20 (IP00 terminal compartment)

C
Explosion protection Safe operation of motors with

"increased safety" type of protection
20 ... +60
Yes
No
Yes, for 3RV10 (CLASS 10)
No
DMT 02 ATEX F 001

II (2) GD,
DMT 02 ATEX F 001 N1
II (2) GD
Acc. to IEC 60947-2

Acc. to EN 60204-1
Yes
Yes
Protective separation between main and Acc. to IEC 60947-1

auxiliary circuits,
required for PELV applications
Up to 400 V + 10 %
Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request)
Yes
Yes
Any, acc. to IEC 60447 start command "I" right-hand side or top
Isolating function
characteristics (with corresponding
accessories)
50 000
25 000

1)
1/h
"Technical Specifications" for 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit breakers

see page 7/52.
7/50
Siemens IC 10 2014
15
For short-circuit breaking capacity Icu, Ics see Reference Manual

"Protection Equipment Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit
Breakers"
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3RV16114)
Type
Connection type
3RV1.3.
Screw
terminals
3RV1.4./
3RV1742
Screw terminals
with box terminal
Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
4 mm Allen screw
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
3 ... 4.5
4 ... 6
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)5),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)5)
2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2 x (2.5 ... 16)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)5),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)5)
2 x (0.75 ... 16),

1 x (0.75 ... 25)
2 x (2.5 ... 35),

1 x (2.5 ... 50)
Stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)5),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)5)
2 x (0.75 ... 25),

1 x (0.75 ... 35)
2 x (10 ... 50),

1 x (10 ... 70)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)
2 x (18 ... 2),

1 x (18 ... 2)
2 x (10 ... 1/0),

1 x (10 ... 2/0)
Ribbon cable conductors (Number x Width x Thickness)
mm
--
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)

Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
Removable box terminals1)

With copper bars2)
--
With cable lugs3)
--
18 x 10
up to 2 x 70
1)
Cable lug and busbar connection possible after removing the box
terminals.
4)
"Technical Specifications" for 3RV16 voltage transformer circuit breakers

see page 7/52.
2)
If bars larger than 12 mm x 10 mm are connected, a 3RT1946-4EA1 cover

is needed to comply with the phase clearance.
5)

When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm ,

the 3RT1946-4EA1 cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
3)
Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches

Type 3RV19
Lateral
auxiliary switch
with
1 NO + 1 NC,
2 NO, 2 NC,
2 NO + 2 NC;
Transverse
auxiliary switches with
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO
Signaling
switches
Max. Rated voltage
Acc. to NEMA (UL)
V AC
600
Acc. to NEMA (CSA)
V AC
600
10
2.5
A600
Q300
B600
R300
C300
R300
Switching capacity
250
250
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/51
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Voltage transformer circuit breakers
General data
3RV1611-1AG14
3RV1611-1CG14
3RV1611-1DG14
Size
S00
S00
S00
mm
45 x 90 x 70
45 x 90 x 70
45 x 90 x 70
1.4
2.5
During storage/transport
50 ... +80
During operation
20 ... +60 (up to +70C is possible with current reduction)
400
Rated frequency
Hz
16.66 ... 60
690
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu at 400 V AC
kA
50
Set value of the thermal overload release
1.4
2.5
Response value of the instantaneous overcurrent release
6 20 %
10.5 20 %
20 20 %
Tripping time of the instantaneous overcurrent release
ms
Approx. 6 at 12 A
Approx. 6 at 20 A
Approx. 6 at 40 A
In cold state
> 0.25 6.5 %
In heated state
> 0.30 6.5 %
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 68 Part 2-27
15
Type
Rated current In
Ambient temperature
Internal resistance
IP20
Endurance
Mechanical
Electrical
Any
Type
3RV1611-1AG14
3RV1611-1CG14
Conductor cross-sections, main circuit, 1 or 2 conductors

Connection type
Screw terminals
Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1), max. 4
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
Stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1), max. 4
Auxiliary switches for blocking the distance protection

1 CO (for use as 1 NO or 1 NC)
With defined lateral assignment for blocking distance protection

Alternating voltage
250
At Ue = 250 V
0.5
At Ue = 125 V
250
At Ue = 250 V
0.27
At Ue = 125 V
0.44
10
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary circuit
Auxiliary switches for other signaling purposes

For technical specifications see the next page.
1)

7/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RV1611-1DG14
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Front transverse auxiliary switches
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO

- 24 V
- 230 V
A
A
4
3
2
0.5

- 24 V
- 230 V
A
A
10
10
2.5
2.5

- 24 V
- 48 V
- 60 V
- 110 V
- 220 V
A
A
A
A
A
1
--0.22
0.1
1
0.3
0.15
---
V
mA
17
1
Front transverse electronic compatible auxiliary switches

Alternating voltage
125
At Ue = 125 V
0.1
60
At Ue = 60 V
0.3
V
mA
5
1
1 CO
Lateral auxiliary switches with signaling switch

Switching capacity for different voltages:
Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO, 2 NC, 2 NO + 2 NC
Signaling switch
- 24 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 690 V
A
A
A
A
6
4
3
1

- 24 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 690 V
A
A
A
A
10
10
10
10
At DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms

- 24 V
- 110 V
- 220 V
- 440 V
A
A
A
A
2
0.5
0.25
0.1
V
mA
17
1
Auxiliary releases
Shunt releases
Power consumption
During pick-up
- AC voltages
- DC voltages
VA/W
W
20.2/13
20
20.2/13
13 ... 80
During uninterrupted duty

- AC voltages
- DC voltages
VA/W
W
7.2/2.4
2.1
---
Tripping
0.35 ... 0.7 x Us
0.7 ... 1.1 x Us
Pick-up
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
--
Opening time maximum
ms
20
Response voltage
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/53
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits
10
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits

Connection type
Screw terminals
Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1)/ 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1)/ 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
Stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1)/ 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
AWG cables
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)

Spring-type terminals2)3)
Connection type
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
AWG
2 x (24 ... 14)
mm

1)
7/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
3.6
2)
With conductor cross-sections 1 mm2, an "insulation stop" must be used;

see Chapter 3 "Controls Contactors and Contactor Assemblies".
"Accessories".
3)
Corresponding opening tool 3RA2908-1A see "Accessories", page 7/70.
Siemens AG 2013


Rated
current
Suitable for Setting range for Instantaneous

three-phase thermal overload overcurrent
motors1)
release
releases
with P
In
Short-circuit DT
breaking
capacity at
400 V AC
Screw terminals
Icu
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kW
kA
16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
208
260
325
416
50
50
50
50
}
}
}
}
3RV1031-4AA10
3RV1031-4BA10
3RV1031-4DA10
3RV1031-4EA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
45
50
18.5
22
22
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
520
585
650
50
50
50
}
}
}
3RV1031-4FA10
3RV1031-4GA10
3RV1031-4HA10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
40
50
63
18.5
22
30
28 ... 40
36 ... 50
45 ... 63
520
650
819
50
50
50
}
}
}
3RV1041-4FA10
3RV1041-4HA10
3RV1041-4JA10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
75
90
100
37
45
45
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
975
1 170
1 235
50
50
50
}
}
}
3RV1041-4KA10
3RV1041-4LA10
3RV1041-4MA10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
Size S2
3RV1031-4HA10
3RV1041-4LA10
Size S3, with increased switching capacity

16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
208
260
325
416
100
100
100
100
}
}
}
}
3RV1042-4AA10
3RV1042-4BA10
3RV1042-4DA10
3RV1042-4EA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
50
63
18.5
22
30
28 ... 40
36 ... 50
45 ... 63
520
650
819
100
100
100
}
}
}
3RV1042-4FA10
3RV1042-4HA10
3RV1042-4JA10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
75
90
100
37
45
45
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
975
1 170
1 235
100
100
100
}
}
}
3RV1042-4KA10
3RV1042-4LA10
3RV1042-4MA10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
3RV1042-4JA10

Size S2
16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
208
260
325
416
50
50
50
50
A
A
A
A
3RV1031-4AB10
3RV1031-4BB10
3RV1031-4DB10
3RV1031-4EB10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
45
50
18.5
22
22
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
520
585
650
50
50
50
A
A
A
3RV1031-4FB10
3RV1031-4GB10
3RV1031-4HB10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
3RV1031-4AB10

40
50
63
18.5
22
30
28 ... 40
36 ... 50
45 ... 63
520
650
819
100
100
100
A
A
A
3RV1042-4FB10
3RV1042-4HB10
3RV1042-4JB10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
75
90
100
37
45
45
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
975
1 170
1 235
100
100
100
A
A
A
3RV1042-4KB10
3RV1042-4LB10
3RV1042-4MB10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
3RV1042-4KB10
1)

Multi-unit/reusable packaging available on request.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/55
Size S3
Siemens AG 2013

For motor protection with overload relay function

CLASS 10, with overload relay function (automatic RESET), without auxiliary switches
Rated Suitable for Setting range for Instantaneous
current three-phase thermal overload overcurrent
motors1)
release
release
with P
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity at
400 V AC
In
Icu
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kW
kA
16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
208
260
325
416
50
50
50
50
A
A
A
A
3RV1131-4AA10
3RV1131-4BA10
3RV1131-4DA10
3RV1131-4EA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
45
50
18.5
22
22
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
520
585
650
50
50
50
A
A
A
3RV1131-4FA10
3RV1131-4GA10
3RV1131-4HA10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
Size S22)
3RV1131-4EA10
Size S3, with increased switching capacity2)
3RV1142-4AA10
16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
208
260
325
416
100
100
100
100
A
A
A
A
3RV1142-4AA10
3RV1142-4BA10
3RV1142-4DA10
3RV1142-4EA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
50
63
18.5
22
30
28 ... 40
36 ... 50
45 ... 63
520
650
819
100
100
100
A
A
A
3RV1142-4FA10
3RV1142-4HA10
3RV1142-4JA10
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
75
90
100
37
45
45
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
975
1 170
1 235
100
100
100
A
A
A
3RV1142-4KA10
3RV1142-4LA10
3RV1142-4MA10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
1)
2)
Accessories (auxiliary releases) for mounting on the right cannot be used.
7/56
Siemens IC 10 2014
1
1


Siemens AG 2013


Rated Suitable for Thermal overload Instantaneous Short-circuit
current three-phase release2)
overcurrent
breaking
motors1)
releases
capacity at
with P
400 V AC
In
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Icu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kW
kA
16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
Without
Without
Without
Without
208
260
325
416
50
50
50
50
A
A
A
A
3RV1331-4AC10
3RV1331-4BC10
3RV1331-4DC10
3RV1331-4EC10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
45
50
18.5
22
22
Without
Without
Without
520
585
650
50
50
50
A
A
A
3RV1331-4FC10
3RV1331-4GC10
3RV1331-4HC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
40
50
63
18.5
22
30
Without
Without
Without
520
650
819
50
50
50
A
A
A
3RV1341-4FC10
3RV1341-4HC10
3RV1341-4JC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
75
90
100
37
45
45
Without
Without
Without
975
1 170
1 235
50
50
50
A
A
A
3RV1341-4KC10
3RV1341-4LC10
3RV1341-4MC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
Size S2
3RV1331-4AC10
3RV1341-4JC10

16
20
25
32
7.5
7.5
11
15
Without
Without
Without
Without
208
260
325
416
100
100
100
100
A
A
A
A
3RV1342-4AC10
3RV1342-4BC10
3RV1342-4DC10
3RV1342-4EC10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
50
63
18.5
22
30
Without
Without
Without
520
650
819
100
100
100
A
A
A
3RV1342-4FC10
3RV1342-4HC10
3RV1342-4JC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
75
90
100
37
45
45
Without
Without
Without
975
1 170
1 235
100
100
100
A
A
A
3RV1342-4KC10
3RV1342-4LC10
3RV1342-4MC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
3RV1342-4JC10
1)

2)

used.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/57
Size S3
Siemens AG 2013


Motor starter protectors for the protection of transformers with high inrush current
Rated current
Setting range for

thermal overload
release
Instantaneous
overcurrent
release
In
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity at
400 V AC
DT
Article No.
Icu
kA
16
20
25
32
40
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
325
416
520
660
836
50
50
50
50
50
Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
Price
per PU
Size S2
}
}
}
}
}
3RV1431-4AA10
3RV1431-4BA10
3RV1431-4DA10
3RV1431-4EA10
3RV1431-4FA10
3RV1431-4DA10

7/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For fuse monitoring

Rated current
Thermal
overload
releases
Instantaneous
overcurrent
release
In
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity at
400 V AC
DT
Article No.
Icu
kA
0.2
0.2
1.2
100
Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41E
Price
per PU
Size S00
}
3RV1611-0BD10
3RV1611-0BD10
Note:
The auxiliary switch required for signaling must be ordered

separately.
Accessories
Version
Contacts
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Mountable auxiliary switches (essential accessories)

With screw terminals, mountable on front
1 NO + 1 NC
3RV1901-1E
1 unit
41E

With screw terminals, mountable on the left
1 NO + 1 NC
3RV1901-1A
1 unit
41E
3RV1901-1E
3RV1901-1A
Additional auxiliary switches and other accessories

see "Accessories" on page 7/63 onwards.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/59
Siemens AG 2013


Circuit breakers for system protection and non-motor loads according to UL/CSA
Rated
Thermal
Instantaneous Short-circuit breaking
DT
current1) overload
overcurrent
capacity at
releases
release
(non-adjustable)
480 Y/277 V AC2) 480 V AC
Screw terminals
In1)
Article No.
Ibc
Ibc
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kA
kA
10
15
10
15
150
225
65
65
65
65
B
B
3RV1742-5AD10
3RV1742-5BD10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
20
25
30
35
20
25
30
35
260
325
390
455
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
--
B
B
B
B
3RV1742-5CD10
3RV1742-5DD10
3RV1742-5ED10
3RV1742-5FD10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
40
45
50
40
45
50
520
585
650
65
65
65
----
B
B
B
3RV1742-5GD10
3RV1742-5HD10
3RV1742-5JD10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
60
70
60
70
780
910
65
65
---
B
B
3RV1742-5LD10
3RV1742-5QD10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Size S3
3RV1742-5FD10
1)

2)
7/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
Transverse auxiliary switches must not be mounted,

lateral auxiliary switches can be ordered separately
(see "Accessories" on page 7/63 onwards).

Siemens AG 2013

For distance protection

Voltage transformer motor starter protectors with transverse auxiliary switches (1 CO)
Rated
current
Thermal
overload
releases
Instantaneous Auxiliary
overcurrent
switch
release
integrated in
the motor
starter
protector,
transverse
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity at
400 V AC
DT Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1611-1AG14
3RV1611-1CG14
3RV1611-1DG14
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
DT Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41E
Article No.
Icu
In
1.4
2.5
3
1.4
2.5
3
6
10.5
20
Price
per PU
kA
Size S00
1 CO
1 CO
1 CO
50
50
50
B
}
}
3RV1611-1.G14
Accessories
Version
Contacts
Article No.
Price
per PU
Mountable auxiliary switches for other signaling purposes

With screw terminals, mountable on the left
1 NO + 1 NC
3RV1901-1A
3RV1901-1A
Additional auxiliary switches and other accessories

see "Accessories" on page 7/63 onwards.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/61
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Mounting location and function
The 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers have three
main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility,
auxiliary switches, signaling switches, auxiliary releases and isolator modules can be supplied separately.
These components are easily fitted to the switches without the

use of any tools according to requirements.
Front side
Transverse auxiliary switches,

electronic compatible
An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front.

The overall width of the motor starter protectors remains unchanged.

(2 contacts)
One of the three lateral auxiliary switches can be mounted on the left side
per motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary
Notes:
Overview graphic see page 7/44.
A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with

auxiliary switches can be mounted on each 1 NO + 1 NC
or
motor starter protector.
2 NO
Transverse auxiliary switches must not be or
used for the 3RV1742 circuit breakers.
1 CO
Left-hand side
Notes:
A maximum of four auxiliary contacts with 1 NO + 1 NC

auxiliary switches can be mounted on each or
2 NO
or
Lateral auxiliary switches (two contacts)
2 NC
and signaling switches can be mounted
separately or together.
(4 contacts)
The signaling switch cannot be used for the
2 NO + 2 NC
3RV1742 circuit breakers.
The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with two contacts is 9 mm.
One lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts can be mounted on the left
side per motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary
The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts is 18 mm.
Signaling switches for sizes S2 One signaling switch can be mounted on the left side of each motor starter
and S3
protector.
Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC
Short circuit 1 NO + 1 NC
The signaling switch has two contact systems.

One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was
caused by a short circuit, an overload or an auxiliary release. The other contact system only switches in the event of a short circuit. There is no signaling
as a result of switching off with the handle.
In order to be able to switch on the motor starter protector again after a short
circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error cause has
been eliminated.
The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm.
Right-hand side
Auxiliary releases
Notes:
Shunt releases
One auxiliary release can be mounted per

Accessories cannot be mounted at the
right-hand side of the 3RV11 motor starter
protectors for motor protection with
For remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker.

The release coil should only be energized for short periods
(see circuit diagrams).
or
Trips the motor starter protector/circuit breaker when the voltage is interrupted and prevents the motor from being restarted accidentally when the
voltage is restored. Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor starter
Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons according to DIN EN 60204-1.
or
Undervoltage releases with
leading auxiliary contacts 2 NO
Function and use as for the undervoltage release without leading auxiliary
contacts, but with the following additional function: the auxiliary contacts will
open in switch position OFF to deenergize the coil of the undervoltage
release, thus interrupting energy consumption. In the "tripped" position,
these auxiliary contacts are not guaranteed to open. The leading contacts
permit the motor starter protector/circuit breaker to reclose.
The overall width of the auxiliary release is 18 mm.
Notes:
Isolator modules can be mounted to the upper terminal end of the size S2
motor starter protectors.
The isolator module cannot be used for the

3RV1742 circuit breakers.
The supply cable is connected to the motor starter protector through the
isolator module.
The isolator module covers the terminal

screws of the transverse auxiliary switch.
If the isolator module is used, we therefore
recommend that either the lateral auxiliary
switches be fitted or that the isolator
module not be mounted until the auxiliary
switch has been wired.
The plug can only be unplugged when the motor starter protector is open
and isolates all 3 poles of the motor starter protector from the network. The
shock-protected isolation point is clearly visible and secured with a padlock
to prevent reinsertion of the plug.
Isolator modules for size S2
Top
For a complete overview of which accessories can be used for

the various motor starter protectors, see page 7/3.
7/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
Contacts
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Size
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3RV1901-1E
3RV1901-1G

With screw terminals,
mountable on front
1 CO
S00, S0, S2, S3
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
}
}
}
3RV1901-1D
3RV1901-1E
3RV1901-1F
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
Electronic compatible
front mountable,
for operation in dusty atmosphere
and in solid-state circuits with low
operating currents
1 CO
S00, S0, S2, S3
3RV1901-1G
1 unit
41E
Covers for transverse auxiliary

switches
--
S00, S0, S2, S3
3RV1901-0H
1 10 units
41E

1 NO + 1 NC S00, S0, S2, S3

2 NO
2 NC
2 NO + 2 NC
}
}
}
A
3RV1901-1A
3RV1901-1B
3RV1901-1C
3RV1901-1J
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
DT
Spring-type
terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1901-0H
3RV1901-1A
3RV1901-1J
1)
Each motor starter protector can be fitted with one transverse and one
lateral auxiliary switch. The lateral auxiliary switch with 2 NO + 2 NC is
used without a transverse auxiliary switch. Transverse auxiliary switches
must not be used for the 3RV1742 circuit breakers.
Version
Contacts
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
Article No.
Size
Price
per PU
3RV1901-2E
With spring-type terminals,

mountable on the front
With spring-type terminals,
1 NO + 1 NC S00, S0, S2, S3

2 NO
}
}
3RV1901-2E
3RV1901-2F
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
1 NO + 1 NC S00, S0, S2, S3

2 NO
2 NC
}
}
}
3RV1901-2A
3RV1901-2B
3RV1901-2C
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
3RV1901-2A
1)
lateral auxiliary switch. Transverse auxiliary switches must not be used for
the 3RV1742 circuit breakers.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/63
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
For motor starter

protectors
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Size
Separate tripped and
One signaling switch short-circuit alarms,
1 NO + 1 NC each
can be mounted on
the left per motor
starter protector.
S2, S3
Signaling switches
3RV1921-1M
1 unit
41E
3RV1938-1A
1 unit
41E
DT
Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1921-1M
Isolator modules1)
Isolator module
Visible isolating distance for S2

isolating individual motor
starter protectors from the
network, lockable in
disconnected position
3RV1938-1A
with padlock
1)
This accessory cannot be used for the 3RV1742 circuit breakers.

AC
50 Hz
AC
60 Hz
DC
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
100 %
ON period1)
AC/DC
50/60 Hz,
DC
5s
ON period2)
Size
AC
50/60 Hz
Article No.
V
Price
per PU
Auxiliary releases3)
3RV1902-1DP0
-24
110
--
--120
208
-----
-----
24
----
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
A
A
A
A
3RV1902-1AB4
3RV1902-1AB0
3RV1902-1AF0
3RV1902-1AM1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
230
400
415
500
240
440
480
600
-----
-----
-----
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
}
}
A
A
3RV1902-1AP0
3RV1902-1AV0
3RV1902-1AV1
3RV1902-1AS0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
Undervoltage releases with leading

auxiliary contacts 2 NO
230
400
415
240
440
480
----
----
----
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
A
A
A
3RV1922-1CP0
3RV1922-1CV0
3RV1922-1CV1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
20 ... 24
90 ... 110
210 ... 240
350 ... 415
500
20 ... 70
70 ... 190
190 ... 330
330 ... 500
500
------
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
S2, S3
}
A
}
A
A
3RV1902-1DB0
3RV1902-1DF0
3RV1902-1DP0
3RV1902-1DV0
3RV1902-1DS0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
Shunt releases
------
------
1)
The voltage range is valid for 100 % (infinite) ON period. The response
voltage lies at 0.9 of the lower limit of the voltage range.
2)
The voltage range is valid for 5 s ON period at AC 50/60Hz and DC.

3)
One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right per motor starter
protector (does not apply to 3RV11 motor starter protectors with overload
relay function).
7/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar accessories
Overview
8US busbar adapters for 40 mm and 60 mm systems

clearly arranged means of feeding 3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with screw terminals. Different versions are
available for size S2 and can be used for the various different
types of motor starter protectors/circuit breakers. The 3RV1915
three-phase busbars are not suitable for 3RV11 motor starter
protectors for motor protection with overload relay function.
The motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are mounted

directly with the aid of busbar adapters on busbar systems with
40 mm and 60 mm center-to-center clearance in order to save
space and to reduce infeed times and costs. Busbar adapters
for busbar systems with 40 mm center-to-center clearance are
suitable for copper busbars with a width of 12 mm to 15 mm,
while those with 60 mm center-to-center clearance are suitable
for copper busbars with a width of 12 mm to 30 mm. The busbars
can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm thick.
The busbars are suitable for between two and four circuit
breakers/motor starter protectors. However, any kind of
extension is possible by clamping the tags of an additional
busbar (rotated by 180) underneath the terminals of the
respective last motor starter protector/circuit breaker.
For further busbar adapters for snap-mounting direct-on-line

starters and reversing starters as well as additional accessories
such as line terminals and outgoing terminals, flat copper profile,
etc., see Catalog LV 10 "Low-Voltage Power Distribution and
Electrical Installation Technology".
3RV1935-1C
3RV1935-5A
The motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are snapped onto

the adapter and connected on the line side. This prepared unit
is then plugged directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both mechanically and electrically at the same time.
NSB0_01074c
3RV1935-1A
3RV1935-6A
SIRIUS three-phase busbar system size S2
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe. They are designed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output
side of connected motor starter protectors/circuit breakers.
"Type E Starters" size S2 according to UL/CSA. Special infeed
terminals must be used for this purpose however
(see page 7/66).

Modular
spacing
Number of motor starter

Rated
protectors that can be connected current
In at
Without
With lateral With
lateral
auxiliary
auxiliary 690 V
accesso- switch
ries
For motor DT
starter
protectors
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
release
mm
Size
Three-phase busbars
For feeding several motor starter protectors with screw terminals,
mounted side by side on standard mounting rails, insulated, with
touch protection
551)
2
3
4
--
--
108
S2
S2
S2
}
}
}
3RV1935-1A
3RV1935-1B
3RV1935-1C
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
752)
--
2
3
4
2
3
4
108
S2
S2
S2
}
}
}
3RV1935-3A
3RV1935-3B
3RV1935-3C
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
1)
Not suitable for 3RV11 motor starter protectors for motor protection with
2)
For 3RV1 motor starter protectors with accessories mounted on the side.
Auxiliary releases and lateral auxiliary/signaling switches cannot be used
in combination.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/65
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar accessories
Solid or
Finely
stranded stranded
with end
sleeve
mm
mm
Tightening
torque
AWG cables,
solid or stranded
For motor DT
starter
protectors
AWG
Nm
Size
14 ... 0
S2
S2
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1935-5A
1 unit
41E
3RV1935-5E
1 unit
41E
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1935-6A
5 units
41E
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Connection from top
2.5 ... 50
1.5 ... 35
Three-phase infeed terminals for constructing "Type E Starters"

Connection from top
10 ... 50
--
8 ... 0
Version
4.5 ... 6
For motor starter

protectors
Price
per PU
Size
Covers for connection tags

Touch protection for empty positions
S2
8US busbar adapters
8US1061-5FK08
8US1111-4SM00
8US1261-5FM08
8US1211-4TR00
For motor starter

protectors/
circuit breakers
Rated current Connecting

cable
Adapter
length
Adapter
width
Rated voltage
Size
mm
mm
139
182
182
55
70
72
182
182
182
215
55
70
72
72
AWG
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
690
4001)
415 ... 6902)
}
}
}
8US1061-5FK08
8US1111-4SM00
8US1011-4TM00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
14O
14O
14O
690
4001)
415 ... 6902)
6004)
}
}
A
A
8US1261-5FM08
8US1111-4SM00
8US1211-4TM00
8US1211-4TR00
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
14O
14O
14O
14O

S2
S3
S3
56
100
100
8
4
4

S2
S3
S3
S33)
56
100
100
704)
8
4
4
4
1)
At rated voltage
400 V: short-circuit breaking capacity 50 kA,
> 400 to 460 V: short-circuit breaking capacity 25 kA.
2)
Short-circuit breaking capacity 415/500/525 V AC:

- up to In = 25 A: max. 30 kA
Short-circuit breaking capacity 690 V AC:
- max. 12 kA.
3)
This busbar adapter is approved specially for 3RV1742 circuit breakers for
applications according to UL/CSA.
4)
Values according to UL/CSA

- Rated current: 70 A at 600 V AC;
- Short-circuit breaking capacity:
480 V AC: 65 kA, up to In = 30 A;
480 Y/277 V AC: 65 kA,
600 Y/347 V AC: 20 kA.
7/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
For additional busbar adapters see Catalog LV 10 "Low-Voltage


Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Remote motorized operating mechanisms
Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers with a rotary operating

mechanism can be mounted in a control cabinet and operated
externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. When the cabinet door with motor starter protector/circuit
breaker is closed, the operating mechanism is coupled. When
the motor starter protector/circuit breaker closes, the coupling is
locked which prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the maintenance personnel. In the OPEN position, the rotary operating mechanism can
be secured against reclosing with up to three padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in this case either.
3RV1 motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are manually

operated controls. They automatically trip in case of an overload
or short circuit. Intentional remote-controlled tripping is possible
by means of a shunt release or an undervoltage release. Reclosing is only possible directly at the motor starter protector/circuit
breaker.
The remote motorized operating mechanism allows the motor
starter protectors/circuit breakers to be opened and closed by
electrical commands. This enables a load or an installation to be
isolated from the network or reconnected to it from an operator
panel.
If the motor starter protector/circuit breaker is tripped as a result
of overload or short circuit, it will be in tripped position. For reclosing, the remote motorized operating mechanism must first
be set manually or electrically to the 0 position (electrically by
means of the Open command). Then it can be reclosed.
SIRIUS 3RV1926-0K door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
In the "MANUAL" position, the motor starter protector/circuit

breaker in the remote motorized operating mechanism can
continue to be switched manually on site. In the "AUTOMATIC"
position, the motor starter protector/circuit breaker is switched
by means of electrical commands. The switching command
must be applied for a minimum of 100 ms. The remote motorized
operating mechanism closes the motor starter protector/circuit
breaker after a maximum of 1 s. On voltage failure during the
switching operation it is ensured that the motor starter protector/circuit breaker remains in the "OPEN" or "CLOSED" position.
In the "MANUAL" and "OFF" position, the remote motorized operating mechanism can be locked with a padlock.
NSB0_00007a
NSB0_01079a
RESET function
The RESET button on the motorized operating mechanism
serves to reset any 3RV1921-1M signaling switch that might be
installed.
SIRIUS 3RV2936-2B door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for

arduous conditions
SIRIUS 3RV19.6-3A.. remote motorized operating mechanism
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/67
NSB0_01078
The remote motorized operating mechanism is available for

motor starter protectors/circuit breakers of size S2
(In max = 50 A) and S3 (In max = 100 A) that are designed for
control voltages of 230 V AC and 24 V DC. The motor starter
protector/circuit breaker is fitted into the remote motorized
operating mechanism as shown in the drawing.
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Type
3RV1936, 3RV1946
Max. power consumption

At Us = 24 V DC
At Us = 230 V AC
W
VA
48
170
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Operating range
Minimum command duration at Us
0.1
Unlimited (uninterrupted operation)
Max. command duration

Max. total break time, remote-controlled
Ready to reclose after approx.
2.5
Switching frequency
1/h
25
Internal back-up fuse

230 V AC
24 V DC
A
A
0.8
1.6
Plug-in connectors with screw terminals
Connection type of control cables

g/ms

Version
Color of
handle
Version of
extension shaft protectors/
circuit breakers
mm
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and a 130/330 mm long extension shaft
(6 mm x 6 mm).
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP64. The door locking device prevents
accidental opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The OFF position can
be locked with up to 3 padlocks.
3RV2926-0B
130
330
S2, S3
S2, S3
}
}
3RV2926-0B
3RV2926-0K
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E

STOP door330
coupling rotary
operating
mechanisms
S2, S3
S2, S3
}
}
3RV2926-0C
3RV2926-0L
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Door-coupling Black
rotary
operating
mechanisms
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions

The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver, an extension shaft of 300 mm in length
(8 mm x 8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, into which the motor starter protector/circuit breaker is inserted.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door interlocking reliably prevents
opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker. The OFF position can be locked
with up to three padlocks.
Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and two-pole auxiliary switches can be used.
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms thus meet the requirements for isolating functions according to IEC 60947-2.
300
S2
S3
}
}
3RV2936-2B
3RV2946-2B
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E

STOP doorcoupling rotary
operating
mechanisms
S2
S3
}
}
3RV2936-2C
3RV2946-2C
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Version

protectors/
circuit breakers
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Door-coupling Gray
rotary
operating
mechanisms
3RV2936-2B

voltage Us
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size

Remote
motorized
operating
mechanisms
AC 50/60 Hz, 230 V

24 V DC
S2
S2
X
X
3RV1936-3AP0
3RV1936-3AB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
AC 50/60 Hz, 230 V

24 V DC
S3
S3
X
X
3RV1946-3AP0
3RV1946-3AB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
3RV19.6-3A..
7/68
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Terminal blocks for "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controllers (Type E)" according to UL 508
NSB0_01380b
The 3RV10 motor starter protector/circuit breaker sizes S2 and

S3 are approved according to UL 508 as "Self-Protected
Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)".
This requires increased clearance and creepage distances
(1 inch and 2 inches respectively) at the input side of the device,
which are achieved by mounting terminal blocks.
Size S2: The basic unit is already compliant with the increased
clearance and creepage distance requirements.
Size S3: The standard box terminal must be replaced by the
3RT1946-4GA07 terminal block.
Terminal block (Type E) SIRIUS 3RT1946-4GA07
According to CSA, the terminal blocks can be omitted when the

device is used as a "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller" (Type E).
Three-phase infeed terminals are required for constructing
"Type E Starters" with an insulated busbar system (see "Busbar
Accessories", page 7/66).

Accessories
For motor DT
starter
protectors/
circuit
breakers
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Version
Size
Covers
3RV1 (size S3) with

3RT1946-4EA1 (left)
3RV1908-0P (right)

terminals (2 units mountable per device)
S2
S3
B
}
3RT1936-4EA2
3RT1946-4EA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Terminal covers
For cable lug and busbar connection for
maintaining the required voltage clearances and
as touch protection if box terminal is removed
(2 units can be mounted per motor starter
protector/circuit breaker)
S3
3RT1946-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Scale covers
Sealable,
for covering the set current scale
S2, S3
3RV1908-0P
100 10 units
41E
Push-in lugs
For screwing the motor starter protector onto
mounting plates
S00
3RB1900-0B
100 10 units
41F
Fixing accessories
3RB1900-0B
For each motor starter protector, two units are

required.
Terminal blocks for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"

according to UL 508
Note:
3RT1946-4GA07
UL 508 demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch creepage

distance at line side for "Combination Motor Controller Type E".
The following terminal blocks must be used therefore in 3RV10
motor starter protector size S3.
The 3RV10 motor starter protector in size S2 conforms with the
required clearance and creepage distances without a terminal
block. The terminal blocks are not required for use according
to CSA.
With size S3, these terminal blocks cannot be used in
combination with a transverse auxiliary switch.
For construction with three-phase busbars see
"Busbar Accessories" page 7/65 onwards.
Terminal block type E
for extended clearance and creepage distances
(1 and 2 inch)
S3
3RT1946-4GA07
1 unit
41B
S3
3RT1946-4F
1 unit
41B

For connection of auxiliary and control cables to
the main conductor connections (for one side)
3RT1946-4F

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/69
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Link modules
contactor
Size
DT
Contactors
Screw terminals
Motor starter
protectors/
circuit breakers
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Link modules from motor starter protector/circuit breaker to contactor

starter protector/circuit breaker and contactor with screw
terminals
AC
S2
S3
S2
S3
}
}
3RA1931-1AA00
3RA1941-1AA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
DC
S2
S3
S2
S3
}
}
3RA1931-1BA00
3RA1941-1BA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
AC
S2
S3
S2
S3
}
}
3RA1931-1A
3RA1941-1A
1
1
5 units
5 units
41B
41B
DC
S2
S3
S2
S3
}
}
3RA1931-1B
3RA1941-1B
1
1
5 units
5 units
41B
41B
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
3RA1931-1AA00
3RA1941-1AA00
Size
Color
Version
For motor DT
starter
protectors/
circuit
breakers
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Size
Price
per PU

Screwdrivers
Length approx.
For all SIRIUS
200 mm,
devices with spring- 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm
type terminals
Titanium
gray/
black,
partially
insulated
S2, S3
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
7/70
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Enclosures
Front plates
For stand-alone installation of motor starter protector size S2

(In max = 50 A), molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting
are available.
Motor starter protectors are frequently required to be actuated in

any enclosure. Front plates equipped with a rotary operating
mechanism for motor starter protector/circuit breaker sizes S2
and S3 are available for this purpose.
When installed in a molded-plastic enclosure the motor starter

protectors have a rated operational voltage Ue of 500 V.
NSB0_02193
NSB0_02194
The molded-plastic enclosures are designed to degree of

protection IP55.
Front plate for size S2
All enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. There are

two knock-out cable entries for cable glands at the top and two
at the bottom; also on the rear corresponding cable entries are
scored. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indicator lights that are available as accessories.
In the enclosure for motor starter protector size S2 there is also
room for the laterally mounted auxiliary release. There is no
provision for installing a motor starter protector with a signaling
switch.
The molded-plastic enclosures of the size S2 motor starter
protectors are fitted with a rotary operating mechanism.
The enclosures can be supplied with either a black rotary
operating mechanism or with an EMERGENCY-STOP rotary
operating mechanism with a red/yellow knob.
The rotary operating mechanisms can be locked in the Open
position with up to 3 padlocks.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/71
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
Degree Integrated Width

of pro- terminals
tection
mm
For motor DT
starter
protectors
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
Molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting

With rotary
operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
IP55
N and
82
S2
lateral auxiliary
switch +
auxiliary release)
3RV1933-1DA00
1 unit
41E
With EMERGENCY-STOP
rotary operating
mechanism,
lockable in
0 position
IP55
N and
82
S2
lateral auxiliary
switch +
auxiliary release)
3RV1933-1GA00
1 unit
41E
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV1933-1DA00
3RV1933-1GA00
Version
Degree of
protection
For motor DT
starter
protectors
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size
Front plates
IP55
(front side)
S2, S3
3RV1923-4B
1 unit
41E

IP55
EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operating (front side)
mechanism,
red/yellow, lockable in 0 position
S2, S3
3RV1923-4E
1 unit
41E
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E

rotary operating mechanism,
lockable in 0 position
For actuation of 3RV1 motor starter
protectors in any enclosure
3RV1923-4B
EMERGENCY-STOP actuation of
3RV1 motor starter protectors in any
enclosure
Version
Rated control
supply voltage
Us
For motor DT
starter
protectors
Size
110 ... 120

220 ... 240
380 ... 415
480 ... 500
S2
Article No.
Price
per PU
Indicator lights
Indicator lights
For all enclosures and front plates
With LED lamp for
versions 110 ... 120 V,
with glow lamp for
versions 220 ... 500 V
3RV1903-5B
7/72
C
C
C
C
3RV1903-5B
3RV1903-5C
3RV1903-5E
3RV1903-5G
With colored lenses red, green, yellow,

orange and clear
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RV1 Molded Case Motor Starter Protectors up to 800 A
General data
Overview
The molded case motor starter protectors are available in
4 widths:
3RV1353 width 90 mm,
3RV1.6. width 105 mm,
3RV1.7. width 140 mm,
3RV1.83 width 210 mm,
The 3RV1 molded case motor starter protectors for up to 800 A
can be mounted in horizontal, vertical or lying arrangement directly on a mounting plate or mounting rail. Their rated data are
not affected as the result.
SIRIUS 3RV1063-7AL10 molded case motor starter protector
The 3RV10 and 3RV13 molded case motor starter protectors for
up to 800 A are compact, current-limiting motor starter protectors which can be used above all in motor feeders for special
voltages of 440 V, 480 V, 550 V and 690 V. They are used for
switching and protecting three-phase motors and other loads
with rated currents up to 800 A.
Note:
The motor starter protectors can be supplied through top and

bottom terminals without impairing their function, enabling them
to be installed in any type of switchgear without any further
steps.
Connection methods
SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors are available with screw
terminals.
For motor feeders above 100 A and at 400 V and 500 V, the
3VL molded case circuit breakers must be used, see Catalog
LV 10 "Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation
Technology".
The 3RV1 molded case motor starter protectors for up

to 800 A are suitable solely for screw connection. This
is indicated indicated in the corresponding tables by
the symbols shown on orange backgrounds.
Article No. scheme

1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
13th 14th 15th 16th
Molded case motor starter protectors 3 R V

1
@
Type of motor starter protector
Size
Breaking capacity
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods

Special versions
Example
3RV
Note:
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/73
The phase barriers for better insulation between the phases are
included in the scope of supply, and it is essential to use them.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
High short-circuit breaking capacity in the feeder
Optimum usability in motor feeders for the special voltages
440 V, 480 V, 550 V and 690 V
Compact design
The releases are available both in purely magnetic

(up to 32 A) and in solid-state versions (100 A to 800 A).
Available for motor or starter protection
(short-circuit protection alone)
Application
Standards and specifications

can be operated at ambient temperatures between -25 C and
+70 C. They can be used according to IEC 60721-2-1 in the
most difficult environmental conditions with a hot and damp
climate.
The electronic releases for motor protection comply with

IEC 60947-4-1. Isolating features are also compliant with
IEC 60947-2.

most suitable molded case motor starter protectors.
The 3RV1 molded case motor starter protectors up to 800 A

have not been tested for use with frequency converters. The
possibility of premature tripping in such applications cannot
therefore be ruled out.
Possible uses
are suitable as switching and protection devices for motors. The
following versions are available:
For motor protection;
the overload and short-circuit releases are designed for
optimized protection and direct-on-line starting of induction
squirrel-cage motors. The motor starter protectors have an
electronic release which not only provides short-circuit and
overload protection but is also sensitive to phase failure and
phase unbalance and offers protection in the event of rotor
blockage.
For starter combinations;
these molded case motor starter protectors are used for
short-circuit protection in combinations of circuit breaker,
motor contactor and overload relay. They are equipped with a
purely magnetic release (up to 32 A) or a solid-state release
(100 A to 800 A).
7/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
The 3RV1 molded case motor starter protectors comply in

addition with IEC 60068-2-6 (shock and vibration strength) and
are certified for the specifications of the most important marine
classification societies:
RINA
Det Norske Veritas
Bureau Veritas
Lloyds Register of Shipping
Germanischer Lloyd
American Bureau of Shipping
Siemens AG 2013

General data
General data
Type
3RV1063 3RV1073 3RV1083
3RV1353
3RV1363
3RV1364
3RV1373
3RV1374
3RV1383
105
205
139
90
130
102
105
205
139
105
205
139
140
205
139
140
205
139
210
268
159
W
H
D
Dimensions
mm
mm
mm
140
205
139
210
268
159
Standard
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
Motor protection
--
Rated current In
160
-
400
630
160
250
400, 630
630, 800
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue 50 ... 60 Hz AC V
690
1 000
800
1 000
Test voltage at industrial frequency

for 1 min
3 500
3 000
3 500
At 220/230 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
kA
200
120
200
At 380/415 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
kA
120
100
85
120
200
120
200
100
At 440 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
kA
100
80
75
100
180
100
180
80
At 500 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
kA
85
65
50
85
150
85
150
65
At 550 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
kA
--
35
--
At 690 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
kA
70
30
10
70
80
70
80
30
At 220/230 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
100
75
100
At 380/415 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
100
75
100
At 440 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
100
75
100
At 500 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
100
75
100
1001)/
752)
100
75
At 690 V AC, 50 ... 60 Hz
100
75
100
1001)/
502)
100
75
Rated short-circuit making capacity (415 V) kA
264
264
440
220
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking

capacity Icu
Rated service short-circuit breaking

capacity Ics (% of Icu)
ms
220
187
264
B (400 A), B
A (630 A)
Category (IEC 60947-2)
Isolating features
Trip class CLASS
10A, 10, 20, 30
--
Magnetic type
--
Electronic (motor protection)
--3)
Electronic (starter combinations)
--
Break time (415 V at Icu)
75
75
75
440
B (400 A),
A (630 A)
Releases
-

Operation
-25 ... +704)
Storage
-40 ... +70
Operating cycles
20 000
Operating cycles per hour
240
120
25 000
Operating cycles
8 000
7 000
Operating cycles per hour (415 V AC)
120
60
20 000
240
120
8 000
7 000
120
60
5 000
5 000
Has this function
1)
Value applies for 3RV1373-7JN10 molded case motor starter protectors.
-- Does not have this function
2)
Value applies for 3RV1373-7JN10 molded case motor starter protectors.
3)

used.
4)
From 50 C, please note derating, see "Reference Manual "Protection

Equipment Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers",
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/75
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Main circuit terminals
Type
3RV1353
3RV1.6.
3RV1.7.
3RV1083-7JL10, 3RV1383-7KN10
3RV1383-7JN10
NSB0_01980
Terminal dimensions
Front-accessible standard terminals

Busbars/cable lug
Number
Unit(s) 11
Dimensions
W
D
H
Lock hasp diameter
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
5
7.5
6.5
25
8
9.5
8.5
35
10
11
10.5
40
5
12
7
50
40
5
50
5
14
40
50
14
Front-extended terminals
Busbars
Number
Unit(s) 1
Dimensions
W
D
Lock hasp diameter
mm
mm
mm
20
4
8.5
10
10
30
7
11
Cable lug
Number
Unit(s) 1
Dimensions
W
Lock hasp diameter
mm
mm
20
8.5
10
30
11
Front-extended cable terminals

for copper cable
Busbars, flexible
Number
Unit(s) 1
--
Dimensions W x D x N
W
D
N (= number of laminations)
mm
mm
mm
13
0.5
10
15.5
0.8
24
1
----
Cable lug, flexible

Number
Unit(s) 1 or 2
--
Dimensions
mm2
mm2
For 1 unit
For 2 units
1 ... 70
1 ... 50
2.5 ... 120

2.5 ... 95
16 ... 240
16 ... 150
---
1 or 2
--
16 ... 300
120 ... 240
---
Cable lug, rigid

Number
Unit(s) 1
Dimensions
For 1 unit
For 2 units (for outside mounting)
mm2
mm2
1 ... 95
--
2.5 ... 185
Rear terminals
Busbars
Number
Unit(s) 1
Dimensions
W
D
Lock hasp diameter
7/76
Siemens IC 10 2014
mm
mm
mm
20
4
8.5
10
30
7
11
40
5
14
50
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Auxiliary switches
Type
3RV1991-1.A0

At 250 V AC/DC
- At AC-14 (utilization category according to IEC 60947-5-1)
Control supply voltage 125 V
A
A
6
5
- At DC-13 (utilization category according to IEC 60947-5-1)

A
A
0.3
0.15
- Control supply voltage 24 V
mA
0.75
- Control supply voltage 5 V
mA
At 24 V DC
Auxiliary releases
Power consumption during pick-up
Molded case motor starter protectors
3RV1353
Version
AC
3RV1952-1A.0
24 ... 30 V AC/DC
110 ... 127 V AC/110 ... 125 V DC
220 ... 240 V AC/220 ... 250 V DC
1.5 VA
2 VA
2.5 VA
1.5 W
2W
2.5 W
6 VA
6 VA
6 VA
150 W
150 W
150 W
15
15
25
15
ms
AC
DC
3RV1982-1A.0
Shunt releases
3RV1952-1E.0
24 ... 30 V AC/DC
110 ... 127 V AC/110 ... 125 V DC
220 ... 240 V AC/220 ... 250 V DC
50 VA
50 VA
50 VA
50 W
50 W
50 W
150 VA
150 VA
150 VA
150 W
150 W
150 W
15
15
15
15
Opening times
ms
3RV1982-1E.0
Siemens IC 10 2014
Opening times
3RV1.6., 3RV1.7., 3RV1.83

DC
7/77
Siemens AG 2013


CLASS 10A, 10, 20, 30; without auxiliary switch
Rated
current
Current setting of the

inverse-time delayed
overload releases
"L"
IR
Operating current of
the instantaneous
short-circuit releases
"I"
Ii
DT
Icu
In
A
Short-circuit
breaking
capacity at
400 V AC
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kA
With electronic releases

Standard switching capacity, adjustable short-circuit and overload release, TU 4
100
160
200
40 ... 100
64 ... 160
80 ... 200
600 ... 1 300

960 ... 2 080
1 200 ... 2 600
120
120
120
D
D
D
3RV1063-7AL10
3RV1063-7CL10
3RV1063-7DL10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
400
160 ... 400
2 400 ... 5 200
120
3RV1073-7GL10
1 unit
41E
630
252 ... 630
3 780 ... 8 190
100
3RV1083-7JL10
1 unit
41E
3RV10.3-7.L10
TU= trip unit (release)
Further accessories can be ordered separately

7/78
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Rated
current
Inverse-time
delayed overload
release "L"
IR
Operating current of Short-circuit

DT
the instantaneous
breaking capacity
short-circuit releases at 400 V AC
"I"
Ii
Icu
In
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
kA
With magnetic releases

Standard switching capacity, non-adjustable short-circuit release, TU 1
3RV1353-6.P10
1
1.6
2
3.2
Without
Without
Without
Without
13
21
26
42
85
85
85
85
D
D
D
D
3RV1353-6AP10
3RV1353-6BP10
3RV1353-6CP10
3RV1353-6DP10
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
4
5
6.5
8.5
12.5
Without
Without
Without
Without
Without
52
65
85
111
163
85
85
85
85
85
D
D
D
D
D
3RV1353-6EP10
3RV1353-6FP10
3RV1353-6GP10
3RV1353-6HP10
3RV1353-6JP10
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
20
32
Without
Without
120 ... 240

192 ... 384
85
85
D
D
3RV1353-6LM10
3RV1353-6MM10
With electronic releases

Standard switching capacity, adjustable short-circuit release, TU 3
3RV13..-7.N10
100
160
250
Without
Without
Without
100 ... 1 000

160 ... 1 600
250 ... 2 500
120
120
120
D
D
D
3RV1363-7AN10
3RV1363-7CN10
3RV1363-7EN10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
400
630
Without
Without
400 ... 4 000

630 ... 6 300
120
120
D
D
3RV1373-7GN10
3RV1373-7JN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
630
800
Without
Without
630 ... 6 300

800 ... 8 000
100
100
D
D
3RV1383-7JN10
3RV1383-7KN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
Increased switching capacity, adjustable short-circuit release, TU 3

100
160
250
Without
Without
Without
100 ... 1 000

160 ... 1 600
250 ... 2 500
200
200
200
D
D
D
3RV1364-7AN10
3RV1364-7CN10
3RV1364-7EN10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
400
Without
400 ... 4 000
200
3RV1374-7GN10
1 unit
41E
TU= trip unit (release)
Further accessories can be ordered separately

More information
Configuration manual "Configuring SIRIUS"
For more information see "Configuration Manual "Configuring
SIRIUS Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders",

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/79
Standard switching capacity, adjustable short-circuit release, TU 2
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Type
Version
For molded DT
case motor
starter
protectors
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Auxiliary switches
Auxiliary switches
for front mounting
1 signaling switch Off-On

+ 1 tripped signal
(250 V AC/DC)
3 signaling switches Off-On
+ 1 tripped signal
(250 V AC/DC)
3RV1353,
3RV1.6.
...
3RV1.83
3 signaling switches Off-On

+ 1 tripped signal
(24 V DC)
3RV1991-1AA0
Connection cables
for auxiliary
switches
Length 2 m, 6-pole
3RV1353,
3RV1.6.
...
3RV1.83
Type
Rated control supply voltage For molded

Us
case motor
starter
AC
DC
protectors
50/60 Hz
3RV1991-1AA0
1 unit
41E
3RV1991-1BA0
1 unit
41E
3RV1991-1CA0
1 unit
41E
3RV1991-1FA0
1 unit
41E
DT
Screw terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Article No.
Price
per PU
24 ... 30
110 ... 127
220 ... 240
24 ... 30
110 ... 125
220 ... 250
3RV1353
D
D
D
3RV1952-1AA0
3RV1952-1AD0
3RV1952-1AE0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
24 ... 30
110 ... 127
220 ... 240
24 ... 30
110 ... 125
220 ... 250
3RV1.6.
...
3RV1.83
D
D
D
3RV1982-1AA0
3RV1982-1AD0
3RV1982-1AF0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
24 ... 30
110 ... 127
220 ... 240
24 ... 30
110 ... 125
220 ... 250
3RV1353
D
D
D
3RV1952-1EA0
3RV1952-1ED0
3RV1952-1EF0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
24 ... 30
110 ... 127
220 ... 240
24 ... 30
110 ... 125
220 ... 250
3RV1.6.
...
3RV1.83
D
D
D
3RV1982-1EA0
3RV1982-1ED0
3RV1982-1EF0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
3RV1353,
3RV1.6.
...
3RV1.83
3RV1992-1FA0
1 unit
41E
Auxiliary releases
Undervoltage
releases
for front mounting
3RV1952-1AA0
Shunt releases
for front mounting
3RV1952-1EA0
Connection cables
for undervoltage
and shunt releases
7/80
Siemens IC 10 2014
Length 2 m,
6-pole

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories: Rotary operating mechanisms,
mounting accessories

Version
For molded case DT

motor starter
protectors
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With adjustable distance,
3RV1353
D
with lock/door interlocking
3RV1.6., 3RV1.7. D
(padlocks are not included in
3RV1.83
D
scope of supply)
3RV1956-0BA0
1 unit
41E
3RV1976-0BA0
1 unit
41E
3RV1986-0BA0
1 unit
41E
Motorized
operating
mechanisms
With stored energy

mechanism,
220 ... 250 V AC/DC
Connections
NSB0_01962
Lever-type
rotary
operating
mechanisms
3RV19.6-0BA0
3RV1976-3AP3
1 unit
41E
3RV1986-3AP3
1 unit
41E
Front-extended
(1 set = 6 units)
3RV1353
3RV1.6.
3RV1.7.
3RV1.83-7J.10
3RV1.83-7KN10
D
D
D
D
D
3RV1955-1AA0
3RV1965-1BA0
3RV1975-1CA0
3RV1985-1DA0
3RV1985-1EA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
41E
Rear
(1 set = 3 units)
3RV1353
3RV1.6.
3RV1.7.
3RV1.83
D
D
D
D
3RV1955-3AA0
3RV1965-3AA0
3RV1975-3AA0
3RV1985-3AA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
Front-extended
(1 set = 6 units)
3RV1353
3RV1.6.
3RV1.7.-7G.10
3RV1.73-7JN10
D
D
D
D
3RV1955-2AA0
3RV1965-2BA0
3RV1975-2CA0
3RV1975-2DA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
uziWWYW[^
3RV1.6., 3RV1.7. D
3RV1.83
3RV19.6-3AP3
3RV1975-1CA0
3RV1955-3AA0
Cable
terminals
3RV1975-2AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/81
Connections
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Overview
Features
3RU21
3RU11
3RB30/3RB31 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23 3RB24
Benefits
General data
S00, S0
Sizes
S2, S3
S00, S0
S2 ... S12
S00 ... S12
S00 ... S12
Are coordinated with the dimensions,

connections and technical characteristics
of the other devices in the SIRIUS modular
system (contactors, etc., ...)
Permit the mounting of slim and compact
load feeders in widths of 45 mm (S00),
45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3),
120 mm (S6) and 145 mm (S10/S12); this
does not include the current measuring
modules for the 3RB22 to 3RB24
evaluation modules sizes S00 to S3
Simplify configuration
Seamless
current range
0.11 ... 40 A
5.5 ... 100 A
0.1 ... 40 A
6 ... 630 A
0.3 ... 630 A Allows easy and consistent configuration

0.3 ... 630 A
(up to 820 A)1) (up to 820 A)1) with one series of overload relays (for
small to large loads)
Protection functions
Tripping
due to overload
Provides optimum inverse-time delayed

protection of loads against excessive
temperature rises due to overload
Tripping
due to phase
unbalance
Provides optimum inverse-time delayed

protection of loads against excessive
temperature rises due to phase
unbalance
Tripping
due to phase
failure
Minimizes heating of three-phase motors

during phase failure
Protection of
single-phase
loads
--
--
Enables the protection of single-phase

loads
--2)
--2)
--2)
--2)
Provides optimum temperature-dependent protection of loads against excessive

temperature rises e.g. for stator-critical
motors or in the event of insufficient
coolant flow, contamination of the motor
surface or for long starting or braking
operations
Tripping in the
event of
overheating
by
integrated
thermistor
motor
protection
function
Eliminates the need for additional special

equipment
Saves space in the control cabinet
Reduces wiring outlay and costs
Tripping
in the event of
a ground fault
--
--
(only 3RB31)
(only 3RB21)
by
Provides optimum protection of loads

against high-resistance short circuits or
ground faults due to moisture, condensed
water, damage to the insulation material,
etc.
Eliminates the need for additional special
equipment
internal groundfault detection

(activatable)

Available
1)
Motor currents up to 820 A can be recorded and evaluated by a current

measuring module, e.g. 3RB2906-2BG1 (0.3 to 3 A) , in combination with a
3UF1868-3GA00 (820 A/1 A) series transformer.
3UF18 transformers see Chapter 10, "Monitoring and Control Devices"
"SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices".
2)
The SIRIUS 3RN thermistor motor protection devices can be used to

provide additional temperature-dependent protection.
-- Not available
7/82
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Features
3RU21
3RU11
3RB30/3RB31 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23 3RB24
Benefits
Features
RESET function
Remote RESET
function
(by means of
separate
module)
(by means of
separate
module)
(only with
3RB31
and external
auxiliary
voltage
24 V DC)
(only with
3RB21
and external
auxiliary
voltage
24 V DC)
TEST function
for auxiliary
contacts
Allows easy checking of the function and

wiring
TEST function
for electronics
--
--
Allows checking of the electronics
Status display
Displays the current operating state
Large current
adjustment
button
Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to

the correct current value
Integrated
auxiliary
contacts
(1 NO + 1 NC)
--
Allows the load to be switched off if

necessary
Integrated
auxiliary
contacts
(1 CO and 1 NO
in series)
--
--
--
--
--
Enables the controlling of contactors

directly from the higher-level control
system through IO-Link
IO-Link
connection
--
--
--
--
--
Reduction of wiring in the control cabinet
Connection of
optional handheld device
--
--
--
--
--
Enables local operation
Allows manual or automatic resetting of

the device
(2 )
Can be used to output signals
Enables communication
Communication capability through IO-Link

Full starter
functionality
through IO-Link
--
--
--
--
--
Enables in combination with the

SIRIUS 3RT contactors the assembly of
communication-capable motor starters
(direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta
starting)
Reading out of
diagnostics
functions
--
--
--
--
--
Enables the reading out of diagnostics

information such as overload, open
circuit, ground fault, etc.
Reading out of
current values
--
--
--
--
--
Enables the reading out of current values

and their direct processing in the higherlevel control system
Reading out all

set parameters
--
--
--
--
--
Enables the reading out of all set

parameters, e.g. for plant documentation
Available
-- Not available
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/83
Allows the remote resetting of the device

(electrically via (electrically
external
with button or
button)
via IO-Link)
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Features
3RU21
3RU11
3RB30/3RB31 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23 3RB24
Benefits
Design of load feeders

Short-circuit
strength up to
100 kA
at 690 V
(in conjunction
with the corresponding fuses
or the corresponding motor
starter protector)
Electrical and
mechanical
matching to 3RT
contactors
1)
1)
Straightthrough
transformers for
main circuit2)
(in this case the
cables are
routed through
the feed-through
openings of the
overload relay
and connected
directly to the
box terminals of
the contactor)
--
Spring-type
connection
system for main
circuit2)
Spring-type
connection
system for
auxiliary
circuits2)
Ring terminal
lug connection
method for main
and auxiliary
circuits2)
Full starter
functionality
through IO-Link
--
--
--
--
--
Enables in combination with the

SIRIUS 3RT contactors the assembly of
communication-capable motor starters
(direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta
starting)
Starter function
--
--
--
--
--
Integration of feeders via IO-Link in the

control system up to 630 A or 820 A
Provides optimum protection of the loads

and operating personnel in the event of
short circuits due to insulation faults or
faulty switching operations
Simplifies configuration
Enables stand-alone installation as well as
space-saving direct mounting
--
--
(S2 ... S6)
(S00 ... S6)
(S00 ... S6)
Reduces the contact resistance

(only one point of contact)
Saves wiring costs
(easy, no need for tools, and fast)
Saves material costs
Reduces installation costs
--
--
--
--
Enables fast connections

Permits vibration-resistant connections
Enables maintenance-free connections

--
--
--
--
--

Available
1)
Exception: up to size S3, only stand-alone installation is possible.
-- Not available
2)
Alternatively available for screw terminals.
7/84
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Features
3RU21
3RU11
3RB30/3RB31 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23 3RB24
Benefits
Other features
Temperature
compensation
Allows the use of the relays at high

temperatures without derating
Prevents premature tripping
Allows compact installation of the control
cabinet without distance between the
devices/load feeders
Enables space to be saved in the control
cabinet
Very high longterm stability
Provides safe protection for the loads

even after years of use
in severe operating conditions
Wide setting
ranges
--
--
(1:4)
(1:4)
(1:10)
(1:10)
Minimize the configuration outlay and

costs
Fixed trip class
CLASS 10
CLASS 10
Trip classes
adjustable on
the device
CLASS 5, 10, 20,
30
--
--
3RB30: CLASS 3RB20: CLASS

10 or
10 or
CLASS 20
CLASS 20
3RB31:
3RB21:
--
--
Optimum motor protection for standard

starts
Enables solutions for very fast starting

motors requiring special protection
(e.g. Ex motors)
Enables heavy starting solutions
Reduces the number of variants
Minimizes the configuring outlay and
costs
Minimizes storage overhead, storage
costs, and tied-up capital
Low power loss
--
--
Reduces energy consumption and energy

costs (up 98 % less energy is used than
for thermal overload relays).
Minimizes temperature rises of the
contactor and control cabinet in some
cases this may eliminate the need for
controlgear cabinet cooling.
Direct mounting to contactor saves space,
even for high motor currents (i.e. no heat
decoupling is required).
Internal power
supply
Supplied from
an external
voltage through
IO-Link
Available
-- Not available
--1)
--1)
--
--
Eliminates the need for configuration and

connecting an additional control circuit
--
--
--
--
--
Eliminates the need for configuration and

connecting an additional control circuit
1)
SIRIUS 3RU11 and 3RU21 thermal overload relays use a bimetal contactor
and therefore do not require a control supply voltage.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/85
Minimize storage overheads, storage

costs, tied-up capital
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Features
3RU21
3RU11
3RB30/3RB31 3RB20/3RB21 3RB22/3RB23 3RB24
Benefits
Further characteristics (continued)

--
Overload
warning
--
--
--
Indicates imminent tripping of the relay

directly on the device due to overload,
phase unbalance or phase failure through
flickering of the LEDs or in the case of the
3RB24 as a signal through IO-Link
Allows the imminent tripping of the relay to
be signaled
Allows measures to be taken in time in the
event of inverse-time delayed overloading
of the load for an extended period over the
current limit
Eliminates the need for an additional
device
--
Analog output
--
--
--
Allows the output of an analog output

signal for actuating moving-coil
instruments, feeding programmable logic
controllers or transfer to bus systems
Eliminates the need for an additional
measuring transducer and signal
converter
Available
-- Not available
7/86
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Overview of overload relays matching contactors
Overload
relays
Type
Current
Current
measure- range
ment
A
Contactors (type, size, rating in kW)

3RT201.
3RT202.
3RT103.
3RT104.
3RT105.
3RT106.
3RT107.
S00
S0
S2
S3
S6
S10
S12
3TF68/3TF69
Size 14
3/4/5.5/7.5 5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5 15/18.5/22 30/37/45 55/75/90 110/132/160 200/250
375/450

3RU211
Integrated 0.11 16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RU212
Integrated 1.8 40
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RU21

3RU113
Integrated 5.5 50
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RU114
Integrated 18 100
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RU11
SIRIUS 3RB30 solid-state overload relays1)

Integrated 0.1 16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB302
Integrated 0.1 40
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB301
3RB30

3RB311
Integrated 0.1 16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB312
Integrated 0.1 40
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB31
3RB20
3RB203
Integrated 6 50
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB204
Integrated 12.5 100
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB205
Integrated 50 200
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB206
Integrated 55 630
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB201 + Integrated 630 820

3UF18
3RB21
Can be used
-- Cannot be used
3RB213
Integrated 6 50
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB214
Integrated 12.5 100
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB215
Integrated 50 200
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB216
Integrated 55 630
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB211 + Integrated 630 820

3UF18
1)
"Technical specifications" for the use of overload relays with trip

class CLASS 20 can be found in "Short-circuit protection with fuses for
motor feeders", see Configuration Manuals
- "SIRIUS Configuration Selection data for Fuseless Load Feeders",
- "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection data for Fuseless and
Fused Load Feeders",
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/87
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General data
Overview of overload relays matching contactors (continued)
Overload
relays
Current
measurement
Current
range
Type
Type
Contactors (type, size, rating in kW)

3RT201.
3RT202.
3RT103.
3RT104.
S00
S0
S2
S3
3/4/5.5/7.5 5.5/7.5/11 15/18.5/22 30/37/45
3RT105.
3RT106.
3RT107.
S6
S10
S12
55/75/90
110/132/160 200/250
3TF68/3TF69
Size 14
375/450
SIRIUS 3RB22 to 3RB24 solid-state overload relays1)

3RB2283/
3RB2383/
3RB2483+
3RB290
0.3 25
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB290
10 100
--
--
--
--
3RB295
20 200
--
--
--
--
3RB296
63 630
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3RB290 + 630 820

3UF18
3RB22, 3RB23
3RB24
Can be used
-- Cannot be used
1)
"Technical Specifications" for the use of overload relays with trip

class CLASS 20 can be found in "Short-circuit protection with fuses for
motor feeders",
see Configuration Manuals
- "SIRIUS Configuration Selection data for Fuseless Load Feeders",
- "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection data for Fuseless and
Connection methods
Depending on the device version of the 3RU2 and 3RB3
overload relays, the terminals for screw terminals, spring-type
terminals or ring terminal lug connection are configured for both
the main and auxiliary circuit.
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays come with screw terminals.
The solid-state overload relays 3RB20 and 3RB21 are available
with screw terminals (box terminals) or spring-type terminals on
the auxiliary current side; the same applies for the evaluation
modules of the 3RB22 to 3RB24 solid-state overload relays for
High-Feature applications.
The 3RB29 current measuring modules are designed as
straight-through modules. From size S6 upwards they are also
available with an optional busbar connection.
Screw terminals
Busbar connections
The various terminals and straight-through transformers are indicated in the corresponding tables by
the symbols shown on orange backgrounds.
7/88
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
SIRIUS 3RU2 Thermal Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
Overview
The 3RU21 thermal overload relays up to 40 A have been
designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with
normal starting (for "Function" see manual "SIRIUS Innovations
SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays",
against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase
failure.
An overload or phase failure results in an increase of the motor

current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up the bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping mechanism. The auxiliary contacts
then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time
depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current
setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping
characteristic (see "Characteristic Curves"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/34291410/134300).
3
2
4
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position

indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or automatically
after a recovery time has elapsed (for "Function" see manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays",
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60298164).
1 Connection for mounting onto contactors:

Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the
contactors. The overload relay can be connected directly to the
contactor using these pins. Stand-alone installation is possible as
an alternative (in conjunction with a terminal bracket for stand-alone
installation).
The 3RU2 thermal overload relays are suitable for operation with
frequency converters. Please follow the instructions in the manual "SIRIUS Innovations 3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays", see
2 Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button:

With this switch you can choose between manual and automatic
RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by
pressing the RESET button. A remote RESET is possible using the
RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size.
The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable
materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards
and approvals.
3 Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring:

Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test.
3RU11 overload relays in sizes S2 and S3 see page 7/105

onwards.
4 Motor current setting:

Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large
rotary knob.

5 STOP button:
If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This
switches off the contactor downstream. The NC contact is closed
again when the button is released.
The 3RU21 thermal overload relays are suitable for the overload
protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type
of protection EEx e.
6 Connecting terminals:
Depending on the device version, the connecting terminals for
screw, spring-type or ring terminal lug connection are configured for
the main and auxiliary circuit.
The relays meet the requirements of IEC 60079-7 (Electrical

apparatus for areas subject to explosion hazards Increased
safety "e").
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted

(accessory). It secures the motor current setting against
adjustment.
EC type test certificate for Category (2) G/D exists. It has the
number DMT 98 ATEX G001.
SIRIUS 3RU2126-4FB0 thermal overload relay
Article No. scheme

Thermal overload relays
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th
2
@
Device series
Size, rated operational current and power
Setting range of the overload release
Connection methods
Installation type
Example
3RU
3RU
Note:
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/89
NSB0_02075a
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
Benefits
The most important features and benefits of the 3RU21 thermal
overload relays are listed in the overview table (see "General
Data", page 7/82 onwards).
Application
Industries
Ambient conditions
The 3RU21 thermal overload relays are suitable for customers

from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time
delayed protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under
normal starting conditions (CLASS 10).
The 3RU21 thermal overload relays have temperature compensation according to IEC 60947-4-1 for the temperature range of
-40 to +60 C. For temperatures from +60 to +70 C, the upper
set value of the setting range must be reduced by the factor
listed in the table below.
Application
The 3RU21 thermal overload relays have been designed for the
protection of three-phase and single-phase AC and DC motors.
If single-phase AC or DC loads are to be protected by the 3RU21
thermal overload relays, all three bimetal strips must be heated.
For this purpose, all main current paths of the relay must be
connected in series.
Ambient
temperature
C
Derating factor for the upper set value

Current ranges
0.11 ... 20 A
17 ... 40 A
+60
1.0
1.0
+65
0.94
0.97
+70
0.87
0.94
Type
3RU2116
3RU2126
Size
S00
S0
45 x 89 x 80
45 x 102 x 79
45 x 97 x 95
45 x 114 x 95
(overload relay with stand-alone installation
support)
Screw terminals
mm
mm
General data
Overload and phase failure
Trips in the event of

Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
CLASS 10
Yes
Overload warning
No
Reset and recovery

Reset options after tripping
Recovery time
- For automatic RESET
- For manual RESET
- For remote RESET
Manual, Automatic and Remote RESET

(Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories)
min
min
min
Features
Display of operating state on device
TEST function
RESET button
STOP button
Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide

Yes
Yes
Yes
Safe operation of motors with "increased safety"

type of protection
Ambient temperature
Storage/transport
Operation
Permissible rated current at
- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C
Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic

DMT 98 ATEX G 001
II (2) GD, DMT 98 ATEX G 001 N1
C
C
C
-55 ... +80

-40 ... +70
Up to 60
%
%
100 (over +60 C current reduction is not required)

87
Repeat terminals
Auxiliary contact repeat terminal
Yes
Yes
IP20
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140
Screw terminals and spring-type terminals: Finger-safe for vertical contact

from the front;
ring terminal lug connection: Finger-safe only with optional terminal covers
Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
7/90
Siemens IC 10 2014
g/ms
Not required
Not required
15/11 (auxiliary contacts 95/96 and 97/98: 8 g/11 ms)
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
3RU2116
3RU2126
Size
S00
S0
mm
mm
45 x 89 x 80
45 x 102 x 79
45 x 97 x 95
45 x 114 x 95
kV
EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays.
kV
kV
V/m
support)
Screw terminals
Type
General data (continued)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) emitted interference

Resistance to extreme climates air humidity
Installation altitude above sea level

Mounting position
90
"Dimensional drawings" see manual "SIRIUS Innovations
Dimensions
Up to 2 000; above this on request

The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for mounting onto
contactors and stand-alone installation. For mounting position in the hatched
area, a setting correction of 10 % must be implemented.
Stand-alone installation:
0
e
135
45
90
90
135
Type of mounting
x 1,1
NSB0_01364
x 1,1
Contactor + overload relay:

0
0
22,5
135
e
45
x 1,1
135
e
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity

Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2
Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3
22,5
NSB0_01363a
x 1,1
Mounting onto contactor/stand-alone installation with terminal support

(For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail.
Technical specifications of the terminal supports see manual
SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays",
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60298164.)
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/91
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
Type
3RU2116
3RU2126
Size
S00
S0
Main circuit
690
kV
690
Type of current
Direct current
Yes
Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Alternating current
0.11 ... 0.16

up to
11 ... 16
1.8 ... 2.5

up to
34 ... 40
4.1 ... 6.3
6.2 ... 7.5
Current setting
Power loss per unit (max.)

With fuse without contactor
See "Selection and Ordering Data" on pages 7/95 and 7/96
With fuse and contactor
"Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses/Motor Starter Protectors for Motor Feeders"

see Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection Data for
Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders"
Protective separation between main and auxiliary current

paths
acc. to IEC 60947-1
Screw terminals or ring terminal lug connections
440
690: Setting ranges 25 A
440
440: Setting ranges 25 A
Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
M4, Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
2 ... 2.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1)

, 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
, max. 2 x 4
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (2.5 ... 10)1)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (2.5 ... 6)1);
max. 1 x 10
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1),

2 x (18 ... 14)1),
2 x 12
2 x (16 ... 12)1),

2 x (14 ... 8)1)
Terminal screw

Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 4)
1 x (1 ... 10)
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (1 ... 6)
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (1 ... 6)
AWG
1 x (20 ... 12)
1 x (18 ... 8)
Operating devices
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)
Connection type

M3, Pozidriv size 2
M4, Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
2 ... 2.5
mm
d2 = min. 3.2,
d3 = max. 7.5
d2 = min. 4.3,
d3 = max. 12.2
Terminal screw

d3
d2

1)
I201_12740

7/92
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
Type
3RU2116
3RU2126
Size
S00
S0
Auxiliary circuit
Number of NO contacts
Number of NC contacts
Auxiliary contacts assignment
1 NO for the signal "tripped";

1 NC for disconnecting the contactor

690
kV
NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,

rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 600 V
- 690 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4
4
4
3
2
0.75
0.75
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,

- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 600 V
- 690 V
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
3
3
3
2
1
0.75
0.75
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13,

- 24 V
- 60 V
- 110 V
- 125 V
- 220 V
A
A
A
A
A
1
On request
0.22
0.22
0.11
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts
Yes
Contact reliability
(suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA)
With fuse
- Operational class gG
- Quick
A
A
6
10
With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic)
61)
Protective separation between auxiliary current paths

acc. to IEC 60947-1
440
CSA, UL, UR rated data

Auxiliary circuit switching capacity
1)
B600, R300
Up to Ik 0.5 kA; U 260 V.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/93
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
Type
3RU2116
3RU2126
Size
S00
S0
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary circuit

Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2

Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
mm
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1), 2 x (18 ... 14)1)
Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve (DIN 46228-1)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 x (20 ... 14)
Operating devices
Connection type

M3, Pozidriv size 2
mm
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
mm
d2 = min. 3.2,
d3 = max. 7.5

d3
d2

1)
I201_12740
Terminal screw
Operating devices

7/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A

3RU21 thermal overload relays for mounting onto contactor1), CLASS 10
3RU2116-4AB0
Size
Rating for
contactor3) three-phase
motor,
rated value4)
3RU2116-4AC0
TEST function
STOP button
Sealable covers (optional accessory)
Terminal covers for devices with ring terminal lug connection
(optional accessory)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41F
3RU2126-4FB0
3RU2126-4AC0
Current setting value

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
with fuse,
type of coordination "2",
operational class gG5)
DT
DT
kW
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.11 ... 0.16

0.14 ... 0.2
0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
0.5
1
1
1.6
}
}
}
}
3RU2116-0AB0
3RU2116-0BB0
3RU2116-0CB0
3RU2116-0DB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0AC0
3RU2116-0BC0
3RU2116-0CC0
3RU2116-0DC0
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.18
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
2
2
2
4
}
}
}
}
3RU2116-0EB0
3RU2116-0FB0
3RU2116-0GB0
3RU2116-0HB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0EC0
3RU2116-0FC0
3RU2116-0GC0
3RU2116-0HC0
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
4
4
6
6
}
}
}
}
3RU2116-0JB0
3RU2116-0KB0
3RU2116-1AB0
3RU2116-1BB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0JC0
3RU2116-0KC0
3RU2116-1AC0
3RU2116-1BC0
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
10
10
16
20
}
}
}
}
3RU2116-1CB0
3RU2116-1DB0
3RU2116-1EB0
3RU2116-1FB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-1CC0
3RU2116-1DC0
3RU2116-1EC0
3RU2116-1FC0
2.2
3
4
5.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
20
25
35
35
}
}
}
}
3RU2116-1GB0
3RU2116-1HB0
3RU2116-1JB0
3RU2116-1KB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-1GC0
3RU2116-1HC0
3RU2116-1JC0
3RU2116-1KC0
7.5
11 ... 16
40
3RU2116-4AB0
3RU2116-4AC0
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
10
10
16
20
}
}
}
}
3RU2126-1CB0
3RU2126-1DB0
3RU2126-1EB0
3RU2126-1FB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2126-1CC0
3RU2126-1DC0
3RU2126-1EC0
3RU2126-1FC0
2.2
3
4
5.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
20
25
35
35
}
}
}
}
3RU2126-1GB0
3RU2126-1HB0
3RU2126-1JB0
3RU2126-1KB0
B
B
B
B
3RU2126-1GC0
3RU2126-1HC0
3RU2126-1JC0
3RU2126-1KC0
7.5
7.5
11
11
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
40
50
63
63
}
}
}
}
3RU2126-4AB0
3RU2126-4BB0
3RU2126-4CB0
3RU2126-4DB0
}
}
}
}
3RU2126-4AC0
3RU2126-4BC0
3RU2126-4CC0
3RU2126-4DC0
15
15
18.5
18.5
23 ... 28
27 ... 32
30 ... 36
34 ... 40
63
80
80
80
}
}
}
}
3RU2126-4NB0
3RU2126-4EB0
3RU2126-4PB0
3RU2126-4FB0
}
}
}
}
3RU2126-4NC0
3RU2126-4EC0
3RU2126-4PC0
3RU2126-4FC0
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S00
S00
Size S0
S0
1)
With the suitable terminal supports (see "Accessories", page 7/97), the
3RU2 overload relays for mounting on contactors can also be installed as
stand-alone units.
4)
2)
The 3RU21 overload relays are also available with ring terminal lug
connection. The Article No. must be changed in the 10th digit to "J":
e.g. 3RU2116-0AJ0.
5)
3)
Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices.
Maximum protection by fuse only for overload relay, type of

coordination "2". Fuse values in connection with contactors
see Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/95
Features and technical specifications:

Screw terminals, spring-type terminals or ring terminal lug
connections2)
Overload and phase failure protection
Auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC
Manual and automatic RESET
Switch position indicator
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU2 up to 40 A
3RU21 thermal overload relays for stand-alone installation1), CLASS 10
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41F

Screw or spring-type terminals
TEST function
STOP button
3RU2116-4AC1
Size
Rating for
contactor2) three-phase motor,
rated value3)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
with fuse, type of
coordination "2",
kW
0.04
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.11 ... 0.16

0.14 ... 0.2
0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
0.5
1
1
1.6
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0AB1
3RU2116-0BB1
3RU2116-0CB1
3RU2116-0DB1
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0AC1
3RU2116-0BC1
3RU2116-0CC1
3RU2116-0DC1
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.18
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
2
2
2
4
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0EB1
3RU2116-0FB1
3RU2116-0GB1
3RU2116-0HB1
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0EC1
3RU2116-0FC1
3RU2116-0GC1
3RU2116-0HC1
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.1 ... 1.6
1.4 ... 2
4
4
6
6
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0JB1
3RU2116-0KB1
3RU2116-1AB1
3RU2116-1BB1
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-0JC1
3RU2116-0KC1
3RU2116-1AC1
3RU2116-1BC1
0.75
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.8 ... 2.5

2.2 ... 3.2
2.8 ... 4
3.5 ... 5
10
10
16
20
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-1CB1
3RU2116-1DB1
3RU2116-1EB1
3RU2116-1FB1
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-1CC1
3RU2116-1DC1
3RU2116-1EC1
3RU2116-1FC1
2.2
3
4
5.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
20
25
35
35
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-1GB1
3RU2116-1HB1
3RU2116-1JB1
3RU2116-1KB1
B
B
B
B
3RU2116-1GC1
3RU2116-1HC1
3RU2116-1JC1
3RU2116-1KC1
7.5
11 ... 16
40
3RU2116-4AB1
3RU2116-4AC1
7.5
11
11
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
50
63
63
B
B
B
3RU2126-4BB1
3RU2126-4CB1
3RU2126-4DB1
B
B
B
3RU2126-4BC1
3RU2126-4CC1
3RU2126-4DC1
15
15
18.5
18.5
23 ... 28
27 ... 32
30 ... 36
34 ... 40
63
80
80
80
B
B
B
B
3RU2126-4NB1
3RU2126-4EB1
3RU2126-4PB1
3RU2126-4FB1
B
B
B
B
3RU2126-4NC1
3RU2126-4EC1
3RU2126-4PC1
3RU2126-4FC1
3RU2116-4AB1
3RU2126-4FB1
DT
3RU2126-4FC1
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S00
S00
Size S0
S0
1)
Screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail.
2)
3)
4)

coordination "2". Fuse values in connection with contactors
see Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations
7/96
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
Overview
Overload relays for standard applications
The following optional accessories are available for the
3RU21 thermal overload relays:
Terminal support for stand-alone installation with screw or
spring-type terminals for every size
Mechanical RESET (for all sizes)
Cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to

access (for all sizes)
Electrical remote RESET module in three voltage variants
(for all sizes)
Sealable cover (for all sizes)
Terminal covers for devices with ring terminal lug connection

Version
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F

Screw terminals
Terminal supports for overload relays with screw

terminals
For separate mounting of the overload relays;
screw and snap-on mounting onto
S00
S0
}
}
3RU2916-3AA01
3RU2926-3AA01
3RU2916-3AA01
3RU2926-3AA01
Terminal supports for overload relays with
spring-type terminal
Spring-type
terminals

S00
S0
B
B
3RU2916-3AC01
3RU2926-3AC01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
Resetting plungers, holders and formers
S00, S0
3RU2900-1A
1 unit
41F
Pushbuttons with extended stroke

(12 mm), IP65, 22 mm
S00, S0
3SB3000-0EA11
1 unit
41J
Extension plungers
For compensation of the distance between the
pushbutton and the unlatching button of the relay
S00, S0
3SX1335
1 unit
41J
Length 400 mm
S00, S0
3RU2900-1B
1 unit
41F
Length 600 mm
S00, S0
3RU2900-1C
1 unit
41F
3RU2916-3AC01
3RU2926-3AC01
Mechanical RESET
3RU2900-1A
with pushbutton and
extension plunger

3RU2900-1.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/97
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
Version
Size
DT
Article No.
24 ... 30 V AC/DC
S00, S0
110 ... 127 V AC/DC
S00, S0
220 ... 250 V AC/DC
S00, S0
For covering the setting knobs
S00, S0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RU1900-2AB71
1 unit
41F
3RU1900-2AF71
1 unit
41F
3RU1900-2AM71
1 unit
41F
3RV2908-0P
100 10 units
41E

Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 Us,
3RU1900-2A.71
Sealable covers
3RV2908-0P
Terminal covers
Ring terminal lug
connection
Covers for devices with ring terminal lug connection

(ensure finger-safety)
Main current level
3RU2916-3BJ21
3RU2926-3BJ21
- Cover between contactor and overload relay

for direct mounting of the overload relay
S00
S0
C
C
3RU2916-3BJ21
3RU2926-3BJ21
1 10 units
1 10 units
41F
41F
- Cover for overload relay on load side
S00
S0
C
B
3RU2916-3BJ20
3RV2928-4AA00
1 10 units
1
1 unit
41F
41E
S00, S0
3RT2916-4EA13
1 10 units
41B
Auxiliary current level
3RU2916-3BJ20
3RV2928-4AA00
3RT2916-4EA13
7/98
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
General accessories
Version
Size
Color
For
overload
relays
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B

3RA2908-1A
Screwdrivers
Length approx.
For all SIRIUS devices 200 mm,
with spring-type
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm
terminals
Titanium
gray/
black,
partially
insulated
Main and
A
auxiliary
circuit
connection:
3RU2
3RA2908-1A
Unit labeling plates1) 20 mm x 7 mm

for SIRIUS devices
Pastel
turquoise
3RU2
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
Titanium
gray
3RU2
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
NSB0_01429b
Blank labels
3RT1900-1SB20
IC01_00181
20 mm x 7 mm
3RT2900-1SB20
1)


Siemens IC 10 2014
7/99
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
Overview
Note:
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays up to 100 A have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal
starting ("Function" see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays,
against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase
failure.
7
6
NSB0_02189a
The 3RU11 devices (sizes S00/S0 to S3) can be found

in the Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014 at the Information
and Download Center
An overload or phase failure results in an increase of the motor

current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating
elements, this current rise heats up the bimetal strips inside the
device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary
contacts by means of a tripping mechanism. The auxiliary
contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The
break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current
and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term
stable tripping characteristic (see "Characteristic Curves"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20356133/134300) .
5
2

after a recovery time has elapsed ("Function" see Reference
Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays
"http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35681830).
4
3

The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for operation

with frequency converters. Please follow the instructions in the
Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2
Overload Relays", see

rotary knob.
3 Transparent, sealable cover:
Secures the motor current setting and the TEST function against
adjustment.
materials.
4 Connecting terminals:
The generously sized terminals permit connection of two
conductors with different cross-sections for main and auxiliary
circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw terminals
and alternatively with spring-type terminals.
They comply with all important worldwide standards and

approvals.
3RU21 overload relays in sizes S00 and S0 see page 7/95
onwards.
5 STOP button:
If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This
switches off the contactor downstream. The NC contact is closed
again when the button is released.

The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for the overload
protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type
of protection EEx e.
6 Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button:

RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by
pressing the RESET button. A remote RESET is possible using the
RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size.

safety "e").

contactors. These connecting pins can be used for direct mounting
of the overload relay to the contactor. Stand-alone installation is
possible as an alternative (partly in conjunction with a terminal
support for stand-alone installation).
EC type test certificate for Category (2) G/D exists. It has the
number DMT 98 ATEX G 001.
SIRIUS 3RU1136-1HB0 thermal overload relay
Article No. scheme

Thermal overload relays
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th
1
@
Device series
Connection methods
Installation type
3RU
Example
Note:
article numbers.
7/100
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RU
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
Benefits
The most important features and benefits of the 3RU11 thermal
overload relays are listed in the overview table (see "General
Data", page 7/82 onwards).
Application
Industries
Ambient conditions
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for customers

delayed protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under
normal starting conditions (CLASS 10).
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays have temperature compensation in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1 for the temperature
range of -20 to +60 C. For temperatures from +60 to +70 C, the
upper set value of the setting range must be reduced by the
factor listed in the table below.
Application
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays have been designed for the
protection of three-phase and single-phase AC and DC motors.
Ambient temperature
C
Derating factor for

the upper set value
If single-phase AC or DC loads are to be protected by the 3RU11

thermal overload relays, all three bimetal strips must be heated.
For this purpose, all main current paths of the relay must be
connected in series.
+60
1.0
+65
0.94
+70
0.87
3RU1136
3RU1146
Size
S2
S3
55 x 105 x 118
70 x 120 x 140
mm
W
support)
Type
General data
Overload and phase failure

CLASS 10
Yes
Overload warning
No
Reset and recovery

Recovery time
- For manual RESET
- For remote RESET
Manual, Automatic and Remote RESET

(Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories)
min
min
min

Features
Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide
TEST function
Yes
RESET button
Yes
STOP button
Yes
Safe operation of motors with "increased safety"

type of protection
DMT 98 ATEX G 001
II (2) GD, DMT 98 ATEX G 001 N1
Ambient temperature
Storage/transport
-55 ... +80
Operation
-20 ... +70
up to 60

%
%
100 (over +60 C current reduction is not required)

87
Repeat terminals
Not required
Not required
IP20 (terminal compartment: IP00 degree of protection)


g/ms
8/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/101
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
3RU1136
3RU1146
Size
S2
S3
mm
55 x 105 x 118
70 x 120 x 140
kV
kV


kV

V/m
support)
Type
General data (continued)

- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 (corresponds to degree of severity 3)

100
"Dimensional drawings" see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays"
Dimensions

Mounting position
Up to 2 000; above this on request

The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for mounting onto
contactors and stand-alone installation. For mounting position in the hatched
area, a setting correction of 10 % must be implemented.
Stand-alone installation:
0
135
45
90
135
Type of mounting
7/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
x 1,1
NSB0_01364
x 1,1
Contactor + overload relay:

0
0
22,5
135
e
45
90
135
e
x 1,1
22,5
NSB0_01363a
x 1,1
Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal support

(For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail;
size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting rail. For technical specifications of
the terminal supports see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays",
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35681830.)
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
Type
3RU1136
3RU1146
Size
S2
S3
Main circuit
690
1 000
kV
690
1 000
Type of current
Direct current
Yes
Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Alternating current
Current setting
5.5 ... 8
up to
40 ... 50
18 ... 25
up to
80 ... 100
6 ... 9
10 ... 16.5
See "Selection and ordering data" on pages 7/105 to 7/107
See Reference Manual "Protection Equipment

"Technical Specifications" "Short-circuit protection with
fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders".
Protective separation between main and auxiliary current paths

acc. to IEC 60947-1
500
690
Conductor cross-section of the main circuit

Connection type
Screw terminals with box terminal

M8, 4 mm Allen screw
mm
5 ... 6
4 mm Allen screw
Nm
3 ... 4.5
4 ... 6
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2 x (2.5 ... 16)
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 16), 1 x (0.75 ... 25)
2 x (2.5 ... 35), 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
Stranded
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 25), 1 x (0.75 ... 35)
2 x (10 ... 50), 1 x (10 ... 70)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 3), 1 x (18 ... 1)
2 x (10 ... 1/0), 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
mm
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Terminal screw
M6, Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors can be connected
Busbar connection1)
Connection type
--
M6 x 20
Nm
--
4 ... 6
mm2
--
2 x 70
mm2
--
3 x 70
AWG cables, solid or stranded, with cable lug
AWG
--
2/0
With connecting bars (max. width)
mm
--
12
Terminal screw
1)
The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are
possible if the box terminal is removed.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/103
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
Type
3RU1136
3RU1146
Size
S2
S3
Auxiliary circuit

690
kV
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts

NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 600 V
0.6
- 690 V
0.5
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue:

- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 230 V
- 400 V
- 600 V
0.6
- 690 V
0.5
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V
- 60 V
On request
- 110 V
0.22
- 125 V
0.22
- 220 V
0.11

Contact reliability (suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA)
Yes
With fuse
- Operational class gG
- Quick
10
With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic)
61)

acc. to IEC 60947-1
440

B600, R300
Conductor cross-sections of the auxiliary circuit

Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
mm2
--
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
Stranded
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 14)
Up to Ik 0.5 kA; 260 V.

2)
1)
7/104
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A

3RU11 thermal overload relays with screw terminals on the auxiliary current side for mounting onto contactor1), CLASS 10
TEST function
STOP button
Integrated sealable cover
Size
Rating for
contactor2) three-phase
motor,
rated value3)
Current setting
value of the
inverse-time
delayed overload
release
Short-circuit
protection with
fuse, type of
coordination "2",
operational
class gG4)
DT
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
kW
3
4
5.5
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
25
35
35
}
}
}
3RU1136-1HB0
3RU1136-1JB0
3RU1136-1KB0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
7.5
7.5
11
15
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
40
50
63
80
}
}
}
}
3RU1136-4AB0
3RU1136-4BB0
3RU1136-4DB0
3RU1136-4EB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
18.5
22
22
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
80
100
100
}
}
}
3RU1136-4FB0
3RU1136-4GB0
3RU1136-4HB0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
11
15
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
63
80
}
}
3RU1146-4DB0
3RU1146-4EB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
18.5
22
30
37
28 ... 40
36 ... 50
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
80
125
125
160
}
}
}
}
3RU1146-4FB0
3RU1146-4HB0
3RU1146-4JB0
3RU1146-4KB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
45
45
70 ... 90
80 ... 1005)
160
200
}
}
3RU1146-4LB0
3RU1146-4MB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
Screw terminals
(on auxiliary current
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
S2
3RU1136-..B0
Size S3
S3
3RU1146-..B0
1)
With the appropriate terminal supports (see "Accessories", page 7/108),

the 3RU11 overload relays for mounting onto contactors can also be
installed as stand-alone units.
2)
3)

4)

coordination "2". Fuse values in connection with contactors,
see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload
Relays", http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35681830
"Technical Specifications" "Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses/
Motor Starter Protectors for Motor Feeders".
5)
For overload relays > 100 A, see 3RB2 solid-state overload relays
on page 7/126 onwards.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/105
Size S2
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
3RU11 thermal overload relays with screw terminals on the auxiliary current side for stand-alone installation1), CLASS 10
TEST function
STOP button
Size
contactor
Rating for
three-phase
motor,
rated value3)
Current setting
value of the
inverse-time
delayed overload
release
Short-circuit
protection with
fuse, type of
coordination "2",
operational
class gG4)
kW
S2
15
18.5
22
22
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
80
80
100
100
}
}
}
}
S3
30
37
45
45
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 1005)
125
160
160
200
}
}
}
}
2)
DT
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RU1136-4EB1
3RU1136-4FB1
3RU1136-4GB1
3RU1136-4HB1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
3RU1146-4JB1
3RU1146-4KB1
3RU1146-4LB1
3RU1146-4MB1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
Screw terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S2
3RU1136-4EB1
Size S3
3RU1146-4JB1
1)
Sizes S2 and S3 for screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard

mounting rails, size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting rails.
2)
3)
7/106
Siemens IC 10 2014
4)
Maximum protection by fuse only for overload relay, type of coordination

"2". Fuse values in connection with contactors,
"Technical Specifications" "Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses/
Motor Starter Protectors for Motor Feeders".
5)
For overload relays > 100 A, see 3RB2 solid-state overload relays
on page 7/126 onwards.

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RU11 up to 100 A
3RU11 thermal overload relays with spring-type terminals for mounting onto contactor1), CLASS 10
TEST function
STOP button
Size
contactor
2)
Rating for
three-phase
motor,
rated value3)
Current setting
value of the
inverse-time
delayed overload
release
Short-circuit
DT
protection with fuse,
type of
coordination "2",
operational
class gG4)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
kW
3
4
5.5
7.5
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
25
35
35
40
B
B
B
B
3RU1136-1HD0
3RU1136-1JD0
3RU1136-1KD0
3RU1136-4AD0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
7.5
11
15
14 ... 20
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
50
63
80
B
B
}
3RU1136-4BD0
3RU1136-4DD0
3RU1136-4ED0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
18.5
22
22
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
80
100
100
}
}
}
3RU1136-4FD0
3RU1136-4GD0
3RU1136-4HD0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
11
15
18.5
22
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 50
63
80
80
125
B
B
B
B
3RU1146-4DD0
3RU1146-4ED0
3RU1146-4FD0
3RU1146-4HD0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
30
37
45
45
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
125
160
160
200
}
}
}
}
3RU1146-4JD0
3RU1146-4KD0
3RU1146-4LD0
3RU1146-4MD0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
41F
41F
Spring-type
terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
S2
3RU1136-..D0
Size S31)5)
S3
3RU1146-..D0
1)

the 3RU11 overload relays for mounting onto contactors can also be
installed as stand-alone units.
2)
3)

4)

coordination "2". Fuse values in connection with contactors,
"Technical Specifications" "Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses/Motor
Starter Protectors for Motor Feeders".
5)
Auxiliary conductor connections with spring-type terminals and main

conductor connections with screw terminals.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/107
Size S21)5)
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
Overview
Electrical remote RESET module in three voltage variants
(for all sizes)
Terminal covers

3RU11 thermal overload relays:
Terminal support for stand-alone installation of overload relays
sizes S2 and S3
Type
3RU1936-3AA01
3RU1946-3AA01
For overload relays
3RU1136
3RU1146
Mounting type
For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard

mounting rails, size S2 also for TH 75 standard mounting rails
Connection for main circuit

Connection type

M6, Pozidriv size 2
4 mm Allen screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
4 mm Allen screw
Nm
3 ... 4.5
4 ... 6
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2 x (2.5 ... 16)
mm2
--
--
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 16),

1 x (0.75 ... 25)
2 x (2.5 ... 35),

1 x (2.5 ... 50)
Stranded
mm2
2 x (0.75 ... 25),

1 x (0.75 ... 35)
2 x (10 ... 50),

1 x (10 ... 70)
AWG
2 x (18 ... 3),

1 x (18 ... 1)
2 x (10 ... 1/0),

1 x (10 ... 2/0)
mm
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Terminal screw

Version
Size
DT
Article No.
S2
S3
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RU1936-3AA01
1 unit
41F
3RU1946-3AA01
1 unit
41F

For separate mounting of overload relays;
TH 35 standard mounting rail; size S3 also for
3RU19.6-3AA01
Mechanical RESET
S2, S3
3RU1900-1A
1 unit
41F

(12 mm), IP65, 22 mm
S2, S3
3SB3000-0EA11
1 unit
41J
Extension plungers
For compensation of the distance between the
S2, S3
3SX1335
1 unit
41J
3RU1900-1A
with pushbutton and
extension plunger
7/108
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
Version
Size
DT
Article No.
Length 400 mm
S2, S3
Length 600 mm
S2, S3
24 ... 30 V AC/DC
S2, S3
110 ... 127 V AC/DC
S2, S3
220 ... 250 V AC/DC
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RU1900-1B
1 unit
41F
3RU1900-1C
1 unit
41F
3RU1900-2AB71
1 unit
41F
3RU1900-2AF71
1 unit
41F
S2, S3
3RU1900-2AM71
1 unit
41F
S3
3RT1946-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Length 20.6 mm
S2
3RT1936-4EA2
1 unit
41B
Length 20.8 mm
S3
3RT1946-4EA2
1 unit
41B

3RU1900-1.

Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 Us,
3RU1900-2A.71
Terminal covers
Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections
Length 55 mm
Covers for box terminals
General accessories
Version
Size
Color
For
overload
relays
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B

Spring-type
terminals
3RA2908-1A
Screwdrivers
Length approx.
with spring-type
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm
terminals
Titanium
gray/
black,
partially
insulated
Main and
A
auxiliary
circuit
connection:
3RU1
3RA2908-1A

for SIRIUS devices
Pastel
turquoise
3RU1
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
Titanium
gray
3RU1
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
Pastel
turquoise
3RU1
3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
Zinc
yellow
3RU1
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
Blank labels
NSB0_01429b
20 mm x 7 mm
IC01_00181
3RT1900-1SB20
Adhesive inscription 19 mm x 6 mm
labels1)
for SIRIUS devices
19 mm x 6 mm
3RT2900-1SB20
1)


Siemens IC 10 2014
7/109
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
SIRIUS 3RB3 Solid-State Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
NSB0_02077b
Overview
7
1
6
5
2
3
4

2 Trip class setting/internal ground-fault detection (only 3RB31):

Using the rotary switch you can set the required trip class and
activate the internal ground-fault detection dependent on the
start-up conditions.
3 Solid-state test (device test):
Enables a test of all important device components and functions.
4 Connecting terminals (removable joint block for auxiliary circuits):
Depending on the device version, the terminals for screw and
spring-type connection are configured for the main and auxiliary
circuit.
5 Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET:
With the slide switch you can choose between manual and automatic
RESET.
rotary knob.
7 A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the
RESET button. On 3RB31 overload relays an electrical remote
RESET is integrated.
contactors 3RT2. The overload relay can be connected directly
using these connection pins. Stand-alone installation is possible as
an alternative (in conjunction with a terminal support for
stand-alone installation).
A sealable transparent cover can be optionally mounted
(accessory). It secures the motor current setting against adjustment.
SIRIUS 3RB3123-4VE00 solid-state overload relays
The 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays up to 40 A with

internal power supply have been designed for inverse-time
delayed protection of loads with normal and heavy starting
(for "Function" see the manual "SIRIUS Innovations
against excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase
unbalance or phase failure. An overload, phase unbalance or
phase failure result in an increase of the motor current beyond
the set rated motor current. This current rise is detected by the
current transformers integrated into the devices and evaluated
by corresponding solid-state circuits which then output a pulse
to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch off
the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the
ratio between the tripping current and current setting Ie and is
stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic
(see "Characteristic Curves"
In addition to inverse-time delayed protection of loads against
excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance
and phase failure, the 3RB31 solid-state overload relays also
allow internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction
with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting). This provides
protection of loads against high-resistance short circuits due to
damage to the insulation material, moisture, condensed water
etc.
after the recovery time has elapsed ("Function" see manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays",
The 3RB3 solid-state overload relays are suitable for operation
manual "SIRIUS Innovations 3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays", see
and approvals.
3RB20 and 3RB21 overload relays in sizes S2 to S10/S12 see
page 7/126 onwards.
The 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are suitable for the
overload protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased
safety" type of protection EEx e.
safety "e").
EC type test certificate for Group II, Category (2) G/D exists.
It has the number PTB 09 ATEX 3001.
7/110
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
Article No. scheme
Solid-state overload relays
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th
3RB
SIRIUS 3rd generation
3
@
Device series
Version of the automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods
Installation type
Example
3RB
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays contribute to energy
efficiency throughout the plant as follows:
Reduced inherent power loss
Application
Industries
The 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays are suitable for
customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum
inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads
(e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions
(CLASS 5 to 30), minimize project completion times, inventories
and energy consumption, and optimize plant availability and
maintenance management.
Application
The 3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays have been
designed for the protection of three-phase motors in sinusoidal
50/60 Hz voltage networks. The relays are not suitable for the
protection of single-phase AC or DC loads.
The 3RU21 thermal overload relay or the 3RB22/3RB23 solidstate overload relay can be used for single-phase AC loads. For
DC loads we recommend the 3RU21 thermal overload relay.
Ambient conditions
The devices are insensitive to external influences such as
shocks, corrosive ambient conditions, ageing and temperature
fluctuations.
For the temperature range from 25 C to +60 C, the
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays compensate the
temperature in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/111
The most important features and benefits of the 3RB30/3RB31

solid-state overload relays are listed in the overview table
(see "General Data" on page 7/82).
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
3RB301., 3RB311.
3RB302., 3RB312.
Size
S00
S0
45 x 89 x 80
45 x 102 x 80
45 x 97 x 94
45 x 116 x 95
(overload relay with stand-alone installation support)
Screw terminals
Type
mm
mm
General data
Overload, phase failure, and phase unbalance
+ ground fault (for 3RB31 only)

CLASS 3RB30: 10, 20;

3RB31: 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Yes
Overload warning
No
Reset and recovery

Manual, automatic and remote RESET (depending on the version)
Recovery time
Approx. 3 min
- For manual RESET
Immediately
- For remote RESET
Immediately
Features
Yes, by means of switch position indicator slide
TEST function
Yes, test of electronics by pressing the TEST button /

test of auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by actuating
the switch position indicator slide/
self-monitoring
RESET button
Yes
STOP button
No

"increased safety" type of protection
EC type test certificate number according to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
PTB 09 ATEX 3001
II (2) GD
Ambient temperatures
Storage/transport
-40 ... +80
Operation
-25 ... +60
+60
100
On request

1001)
Repeat terminals
Yes
Not required
Yes
Not required
IP20

g/ms
15/12 (signaling contact 97/98 in position "tripped": 4/11g/ms)
kV
2 (power ports), 1 (signal ports)
kV
2 (line to earth), 1 (line to line)

kV
8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge)
Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3

V/m
10

Degree of severity B according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11)

and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)

95
"Dimensional drawings" see manual "SIRIUS Innovations
Dimensions
Up to 2 000
Mounting position
Any
Type of mounting
Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal support
1)
Permissible rated current in case of heavy starting

Size S0 at 10 A up to 40 A:
- CLASS 20, Ie max = 32 A,
- CLASS 30, Ie max = 25 A.
7/112
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
Type
3RB301., 3RB311.
3RB302., 3RB312.
Size
S00
S0
Main circuit
690
kV
690
Type of current
Direct current
No
Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 %
Alternating current
Current setting
0.1 ... 0.4

up to
4 ... 16
0.05 ... 0.2
0.1 ... 0.4

up to
10 ... 40
See "Selection and Ordering Data" on pages 7/115 to 7/117
"Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses/Motor Starter Protectors for Motor

Feeders" see Configuration Manual for "Configuring SIRIUS
Innovations Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders",

acc. to IEC 60947-1 (pollution degree 2)
For systems with grounded neutral point
690
For systems with ungrounded neutral point
600

Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
M4, Pozidriv size 2
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
2 ... 2.5
Solid
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (0.5 ... 4)1)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (2.5 ... 10)1)
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1),
2 x (2.5 ... 6)1),
max. 1 x 10
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1),

2 x (18 ... 14)1),
2 x 12
2 x (16 ... 12)1),

2 x (14 ... 8)1)
Terminal screw
Connection type

Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 4)
1 x (1 ... 10)
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (1 ... 6)
mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (1 ... 6)
AWG
1 x (20 ... 12)
1 x (18 ... 8)
Operating devices
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/113
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
Type
3RB301., 3RB311.
3RB302., 3RB312.
Size
S00
S0
Auxiliary circuit

300
kV
NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,

- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
A
4
4
4
3
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,

- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
A
4
4
4
3
A
A
A
A
A
A
2
0.55
0.3
0.3
0.11
5
Yes
Auxiliary contacts contact rating
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13,

- 24 V
- 60 V
- 110 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
With fuse, operational class gG
Ground-fault protection (only 3RB31)
The information refers to sinusoidal residual currents at 50/60 Hz.
Tripping value I
Operating range I
Response time ttrip (in steady-state condition)
> 0.75 Imotor

Lower current setting value < Imotor < 3.5 upper current setting value
<1
Integrated electrical remote RESET (only 3RB31)

Connecting terminals A3, A4
acc. to IEC 60947-1
24 V DC, max. 200 mA for approx. 20 ms, then < 10 mA

V
300

3RB30: B600, R300; 3RB31: B300, R300
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary circuit

Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2

Solid
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 (20 ... 14)
Connection type
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5

Solid
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 (24 ... 16)
7/114
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A

3RB30 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactors1), CLASS 10
3RB3016-1TB0
3RB3016-1TE0
Size
Rating for
contactor2) three-phase motor, of the inverse-time
rated value3)
delayed overload
release
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB3026-1VB0
with fuse,
DT
3RB3026-1VE0
Article No.
kW
DT
Screw terminals
Price
per PU

Screw terminals and spring-type terminals
Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance
protection
Internal power supply
TEST function and self-monitoring
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S001)
S00
0.04 0.09
0.1 0.4
3RB3016-1RB0
3RB3016-1RE0
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
3RB3016-1NB0
3RB3016-1NE0
0.55 1.5
14
20
3RB3016-1PB0
3RB3016-1PE0
1.1 5.5
3 12
25
3RB3016-1SB0
3RB3016-1SE0
2.2 7.5
4 ... 16
25
3RB3016-1TB0
3RB3016-1TE0
Size S01)
S0
0.04 0.09
0.1 0.4
3RB3026-1RB0
3RB3026-1RE0
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
3RB3026-1NB0
3RB3026-1NE0
0.55 1.5
14
20
3RB3026-1PB0
3RB3026-1PE0
1.1 5.5
3 12
25
3RB3026-1SB0
3RB3026-1SE0
3 11
6 25
50
3RB3026-1QB0
3RB3026-1QE0
5.5 18.5
10 ... 40
50
3RB3026-1VB0
3RB3026-1VE0
1)

these overload relays can also be installed as stand-alone units.
2)
3)
4)

coordination "2". Fuse values in connection with contactors see
Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection Data for

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/115
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
3RB30 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactors1), CLASS 20
protection
3RB3016-2TB0
3RB3016-2TE0
Size
contactor
Rating for
three-phase motor,
rated value3)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
with fuse,
kW
2)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB3026-2VB0
DT
3RB3026-2VE0
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S001)
S00
0.04 0.09
0.1 0.4
3RB3016-2RB0
3RB3016-2RE0
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
3RB3016-2NB0
3RB3016-2NE0
0.55 1.5
14
20
3RB3016-2PB0
3RB3016-2PE0
1.1 5.5
3 12
25
3RB3016-2SB0
3RB3016-2SE0
2.2 7.5
4 ... 16
25
3RB3016-2TB0
3RB3016-2TE0
Size S01)
S0
0.04 0.09
0.1 0.4
3RB3026-2RB0
3RB3026-2RE0
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
3RB3026-2NB0
3RB3026-2NE0
0.55 1.5
14
20
3RB3026-2PB0
3RB3026-2PE0
1.1 5.5
3 12
25
3RB3026-2SB0
3RB3026-2SE0
3 11
6 25
50
3RB3026-2QB0
3RB3026-2QE0
5.5 18.5
10 ... 40
50
3RB3026-2VB0
3RB3026-2VE0
1)

2)
3)
4)

7/116
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB30, 3RB31 up to 40 A
3RB31 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactors1), CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
3RB3113-4TB0
3RB3113-4TE0
Size
Rating for
contactor2) three-phase motor,
rated value3)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
with fuse,
kW
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB3123-4VB0
DT
3RB3123-4VE0
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU

protection
Internal ground-fault detection (activatable)
Electrical remote RESET integrated
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S001)
S00
0.04 0.09
0.1 0.4
3RB3113-4RB0
3RB3113-4RE0
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
3RB3113-4NB0
3RB3113-4NE0
0.55 1.5
14
20
3RB3113-4PB0
3RB3113-4PE0
1.1 5.5
3 12
25
3RB3113-4SB0
3RB3113-4SE0
2.2 7.5
4 ... 16
25
3RB3113-4TB0
3RB3113-4TE0
Size S01)
S0
0.04 0.09
0.1 0.4
3RB3123-4RB0
3RB3123-4RE0
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
3RB3123-4NB0
3RB3123-4NE0
0.55 1.5
14
20
3RB3123-4PB0
3RB3123-4PE0
1.1 5.5
3 12
25
3RB3123-4SB0
3RB3123-4SE0
3 11
6 25
50
3RB3123-4QB0
3RB3123-4QE0
5.5 18.5
10 ... 40
50
3RB3123-4VB0
3RB3123-4VE0
1)

2)
3)
4)


Siemens IC 10 2014
7/117
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
Overview
3RB30/3RB31 solid-state overload relays:
Terminal supports for stand-alone installation with screw or
spring-type terminals for every size


Version
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F

Screw terminals
Terminal supports for overload relays with

screw terminals
S00
S0
}
}
3RU2916-3AA01
3RU2926-3AA01
3RU2916-3AA01
3RU2926-3AA01
Terminal supports for overload relays
with spring-type terminal
Spring-type
terminals

S00
S0
B
B
3RU2916-3AC01
3RU2926-3AC01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
S00, S0
3RB3980-0A
1 unit
41F

(12 mm), IP65, 22 mm
S00, S0
3SB3000-0EA11
1 unit
41J
Extension plungers
S00, S0
For compensation of the distance between a
3SX1335
1 unit
41J
3RU2916-3AC01
3RU2926-3AC01
Mechanical RESET
3RB3980-0A
with pushbutton and
extension plunger

Length 400 mm
S00, S0
3RB3980-0B
1 unit
41F
Length 600 mm
S00, S0
3RB3980-0C
1 unit
41F
S00, S0
3RB3984-0
1 unit
41F
3RB3980-0.
Sealable covers
3RB3984-0
7/118
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Accessories
General accessories
Version
Size
Color
For
overload
relays
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B

3RA2908-1A
Screwdrivers
Length approx.
with spring-type
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm
terminals
Titanium
gray/
black,
partially
insulated
Main and
A
auxiliary
circuit
connection:
3RB3
3RA2908-1A

for SIRIUS devices
Pastel
turquoise
3RB3
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
Titanium
gray
3RB3
3RT2900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
NSB0_01429b
Blank labels
3RT1900-1SB20
IC01_00181
20 mm x 7 mm
3RT2900-1SB20
1)


Siemens IC 10 2014
7/119
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Overview
Note:
8
7
NSB0_02188a
The 3RB20 and 3RB21 devices (sizes S00/S0 to S12) can be

found
in the Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014 at the Information
and Download Center
6
2
5
3
4

2 Trip class setting/internal ground-fault detection (only 3RB21):
Using the rotary switch you can set the required trip class and
activate the internal ground-fault detection dependent on the
start-up conditions.
3 Solid-state test (device test):
Enables a test of all important device components and functions.
4 Connecting terminals (removable terminal block for auxiliary circuits):
conductors with different cross-sections for the main and auxiliary
circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw terminals
and alternatively with spring-type terminals.
5 Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET:
With the slide switch you can choose between manual and
automatic RESET.
rotary knob.
7 A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the
RESET button. On the 3RB21 overload relay a solid-state remote
RESET is integrated.
_ Connection for mounting onto contactors:
contactors 3RT1. These connecting pins can be used for direct
mounting of the overload relay to the contactor. Stand-alone
installation is possible as an alternative (partly in conjunction with a
terminal bracket for stand-alone installation).
SIRIUS 3RB2133-4UB0 solid-state overload relay
The 3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays up to 630 A

with internal power supply have been designed for inverse-time
delayed protection of loads with normal and heavy starting
("Function" see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
unbalance or phase failure.
An overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an
increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current.
This current rise is detected by the current transformers integrated into the devices and evaluated by corresponding solidstate circuits which then output a pulse to the auxiliary contacts.
The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a
contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the
tripping current and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of
a long-term stable tripping characteristic
(see "Characteristic Curves"
In addition to inverse-time delayed protection of loads against
excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance
and phase failure, the 3RB21 solid-state overload relays also
allow internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction
with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting). This provides
protection of loads against high-resistance short circuits due to
damage to the insulation material, moisture, condensed water
etc.
after the recovery time has elapsed ("Function" see Reference
Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays",
Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1 and 3RB2
and approvals.
For 3RB30 and 3RB31 overload relay sizes S00 and S0
see page 7/115 onwards.
The 3RB20/3RB21 solid-state overload relays are suitable for the
overload protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased
safety" type of protection EExe.
safety "e").
7/120
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th
2
@
Device series
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods
Installation type
Example
3RB
3RB
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
The most important features and benefits of the 3RB20/3RB21
solid-state overload relays are listed in the overview table
(see "General Data", page 7/82 onwards).
Application
Industries
Ambient conditions
The 3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays are suitable

for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum
inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads
(e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions
(CLASS 5 to 30), minimize project completion times, inventories
and energy consumption, and optimize plant availability and
maintenance management.

fluctuations.
Application
The 3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays have been
designed for the protection of three-phase motors in sinusoidal
50/60 Hz voltage networks. The relays are not suitable for the
protection of single-phase AC or DC loads.
For the temperature range from 25 C to +60 C, the 3RB20 and

3RB21 solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature
in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1.
For the 3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays with the
sizes S6, S10 and S12, the upper set value of the setting range
must be reduced for ambient temperatures > 50 C by a certain
factor.
Type
Setting range Stand-alone installation

Derating factor for the upper set
value
The 3RU11 thermal overload relays or the 3RB22 to 3RB24 solidstate overload relays can be used for single-phase AC loads.
For DC loads we recommend the 3RU11 thermal overload relay.
at ambient temperature
+50 C
+60 C
3RB2056, 3RB2156
50 ... 200 A
100 %
100 %
3RB2066, 3RB2166
55 ... 250 A
100 %
100 %
3RB2066, 3RB2166
160 ... 630 A
100 %
90 %
Type
Setting range Mounting onto contactor

Derating factor for the upper set
value
at ambient temperature
+50 C
+60 C
3RB2056, 3RB2156
50 ... 200 A
100 %
70 %
3RB2066, 3RB2166
55 ... 250 A
100 %
70 %
3RB2066, 3RB2166
160 ... 630 A
100 %
70 %
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/121
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Size
(overload relay with stand-alone installation support)
Type
mm
3RB2036,
3RB2133
3RB2046,
3RB2143
3RB2056,
3RB2153
3RB2066,
3RB2163
S2
S3
S6
S10/S12
55 x 74 x 109
70 x 86 x 124
120 x 119 x 155 145 x 147 x 156
General data
Overload, phase failure, and phase unbalance
+ ground fault (for 3RB21 only)

CLASS 3RB20: 10 or 20;

3RB21: 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Yes
Overload warning
No
Reset and recovery

3RB20: Manual and automatic RESET;

3RB21: Manual, automatic and remote RESET
Recovery time
Approx. 3 min
- For manual RESET
Immediately
- For remote RESET
Immediately
Features
Yes, by means of switch position indicator slide
TEST function
Yes, test of electronics by pressing the TEST button /

test of auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by actuating the
switch position indicator slide/self-monitoring
RESET button
Yes
STOP button
No
Explosion protection Safe operation of motors with "increased safety"

type of protection
EC type test certificate number according to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
PTB 06 ATEX 3001
II (2) GD
Storage/transport
-40 ... +80
Operation
-25 ... +60
+60
100
100
100
100 or 901)
- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C, mounted on contactor
100
100
70
70
On request

- Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C, stand-alone installation
Repeat terminals
Yes
Not required
Yes
Not required
IP20
IP20
(terminal compartment: IP00
degree of protection)
Finger-safe for vertical contact

from the front
Finger-safe;
Finger-safe
for busbar
with cover
connection with
cover
g/ms
15/11 (signaling contact 97/98 in position "tripped": 4/11g/ms)
kV
kV

kV

V/m
10

Degree of severity B according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11)

and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)

100
For "Dimensional drawings" see Reference Manual "Protection
Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays",
Dimensions
Up to 2 000
Mounting position
Any
Type of mounting
Direct mounting/stand-alone
installation with terminal support
1)
90 % for relay with current setting range 160 A to 630 A.
7/122
Siemens IC 10 2014
Direct mounting/stand-alone
installation
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Type
3RB2036, 3RB2133
3RB2046, 3RB2143
Size
S2
S3
Main circuit
690/1 0001)
1 000
kV
6/82)
690/1 0001)
1 000
Type of current
Direct current
No
Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 %
Alternating current
Current setting
6 ... 25,
12.5 ... 50
0.05
12.5 ... 50,

25 ... 100

"Technical Specifications" "Short-circuit protection with Fuses for
Motor Feeders"

690
600
Conductor cross-sections of the main circuit

M6, Pozidriv size 2
M8, 4 mm Allen screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
4 mm Allen screw
Nm
3 ... 4.5
4 ... 6
Solid
mm2
2 (1 ... 16)
2 (2.5 ... 16)
mm2
--
--
mm2
2 (1 ... 16),
1 ( 1 ... 25)
2 (2.5 ... 35),

1 (2.5 ... 50)
Stranded
mm2
2 (max. 25),
1 (1 ... 35)
2 (10 ... 50),

1 (10 ... 70)
AWG 2 (max. 4),

1 (18 ... 2)
Ribbon cables
mm
Terminal screw
Connection type
2 (6 9 0.8)
2 (10 ... 1/0),

1 (10 ... 2/0)
2 (6 9 0.8)
Busbar connections
Connection type
--
M6 20
Nm
--
4 ... 6
mm2
--
2 70
mm2
--
3 70
AWG --
mm
Terminal screw
--
Connection type
Diameter of opening
1)
For version with straight-through transformer up to 1 000 V AC.
2)
For version with straight-through transformer up to 8 kV.
2/0
12
mm
15
18
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/123
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Type
3RB2056, 3RB2153
3RB2066, 3RB2163
Size
S6
S10/S12
Main circuit
1 000
kV
1 000
Type of current
Direct current
Alternating current
No
Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 %
Current setting
50 ... 200
0.05
55 ... 250,
160 ... 630

"Technical Specifications" "Short-circuit protection with Fuses for Motor
Feeders"

V
V
690
600
Connection type
Terminal screw
mm
4 mm Allen screw
5 mm Allen screw
Operating devices
mm
4 mm Allen screw
5 mm Allen screw
Nm
1 ... 12
20 ... 22
-With 3RT1955-4G box terminal:

2 (1 max. 50, 1 max. 70),
1 (10 ... 70);
With 3RT1956-4G box terminal:
2 (1 max. 95, 1 max. 120),
1 (10 ... 120)
2 (1 max. 50, 1 max. 70),
1 (10 ... 70);
2 (1 max. 95, 1 max. 120),
1 (10 ... 120)
With 3RT1955 -4G box terminal:
2 (max. 70),
1 (16 ... 70);
2 (max. 120),
1 (16 ... 120)
2 (max. 1/0),
1 (6 ... 2/0);
2 (max. 3/0),
1 (6 ... 250 kcmil)
2 (6 15.5 0.8),
1 (3 9 0.8 ... 6 15.5 0.8);
2 (10 15,5 0.8),
1 (3 9 0,8 ... 10 15,5 0.8)
-2 (50 ... 185),

rear clamping point only:
1 (70 ... 240);
1 (120 ... 185)

Solid
mm2
mm2
mm2
Stranded
mm2
AWG
Ribbon cables (Number x Width x Thickness)
mm
Connection type
2 (70 ... 240),

Rear clamping point only:
1 (95 ... 300);
1 (120 ... 240)
2 (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),
1 (3/0 ... 600 kcmil);
1 (250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
2 (20 24 0.5),
1 (6 9 0.8 ... 20 24 0.5)
Busbar connections
M8 25
M10 30
Nm
10 ... 14
14 ... 24
mm2
mm2
AWG
mm
16 ... 951)
25 ... 1201)
4 ... 250 kcmil
15
50 ... 2402)
70 ... 2402)
2/0 ... 500 kcmil
25
Terminal screw
2 (50 ... 185),

Rear clamping point only:
1 (70 ... 240);
1 (120 ... 185)
Conductor cross-section (min./max.)

Connection type
Diameter of opening
1)
When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235 with conductor

cross-sections of 95 mm2 and more, the 3RT1956-4EA1 terminal cover
must be used to ensure phase clearance.
7/124
Siemens IC 10 2014
24.5
mm
2)
--

cross-sections of 240 mm2 and more as well as to DIN 46235 with
conductor cross-sections of 185 mm2 and more, the 3RT1956-4EA1
terminal cover must be used to ensure the phase clearance.
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
Type
3RB2036,
3RB2133
3RB2046,
3RB2143
3RB2056,
3RB2153
3RB2066,
3RB2163
Size
S2
S3
S6
S10/S12
Auxiliary circuit

300
kV

NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue:

- 24 V
- 120 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
- 24 V
- 60 V
0.55
- 110 V
0.3
- 125 V
0.3
- 250 V
0.11
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, rated operational current Ie at Ue:
Yes

Ground-fault protection (only 3RB21)
Tripping value I
> 0.75 Imotor
Operating range I
Response time ttrip (in steady-state condition)
Lower current setting value < Imotor < 3.5 upper current setting value
s
<1
Integrated electrical remote RESET (only 3RB21)

Connecting terminals A3, A4
24 V DC, 100 mA, 2.4 W short-term
Protective separation between auxiliary current paths acc. to IEC 60947-1 V
300

B300, R300

Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
Solid
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
--
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Stranded
mm2
--
AWG 2 (20 ... 14)
Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
--
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
Stranded
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
AWG 2 (24 ... 16)
Operating devices
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/125
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A

3RB20 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor1)2) and stand-alone installation2)3), CLASS 10
protection
3RB2036-1UB0
3RB2046-1ED0
3RB2056-1FW2
3RB2066-1MF2
Rating for
three-phase motor,
rated value5)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
Short-circuit
DT
type of coordination "2", operational
class gG6)
kW
3 11
6 25
63
Size
contactor4)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
DT
Screw terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S21)3)7)
S2
7.5 22
12.5 50
80
3RB2036-1QB0
3RB2036-1QD0
3RB2036-1QW1
3RB2036-1QX1
3RB2036-1UB0
3RB2036-1UD0
3RB2036-1UW1
3RB2036-1UX1
Size S31)3)7)
S3
7.5 22
12.5 50
160
3RB2046-1UB0
3RB2046-1UD0
11 45
25 100
315
3RB2046-1EB0
3RB2046-1ED0
3RB2046-1EW1
3RB2046-1EX1
3RB2056-1FC2
3RB2056-1FF2
3RB2056-1FW2
3RB2056-1FX2
Size S62)7)
S6 with busbar 22 90
connection
50 200
315
For mounting
onto S6
contactors with
box terminals
Size S10/S122)
S10/S12
22 110
and size 14
90 450
(3TF68/ 3TF69)
55 250
400
3RB2066-1GC2
3RB2066-1GF2
160 630
800
3RB2066-1MC2
3RB2066-1MF2
1)
The relays with an Article No. ending with "0" are designed for mounting
onto contactor.
2)
onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For 3TF68/3TF69 contactors,
direct mounting is not possible.
3)
The relays with an Article No. ending with "1" are designed for stand-alone
installation.
4)
7/126
Siemens IC 10 2014
5)
6)

"2". For fuse values in connection with contactors, see the
Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1, 3RB2 Overload Relays",
"Technical Specifications" "Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor
Feeders".
7)
The relays with an Article No. with "W" or "X" in penultimate position are
equipped with a straight-through transformer.

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
3RB20 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor1)2) and stand-alone installation2)3), CLASS 20
3RB2036-2UB0
Size
contactor4)
3RB2046-2ED0
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB2056-2FW2
Rating for
three-phase motor,
rated value5)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
Short-circuit
DT
class gG6)
kW
3 11
6 25
63
3RB2066-2MF2
DT
Screw terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S21)3)7)
S2
7.5 22
12.5 50
80
3RB2036-2QB0
3RB2036-2QD0
3RB2036-2QW1
3RB2036-2QX1
3RB2036-2UB0
3RB2036-2UD0
3RB2036-2UW1
3RB2036-2UX1
Size S31)3)7)
S3
7.5 22
12.5 50
160
3RB2046-2UB0
3RB2046-2UD0
11 45
25 100
315
3RB2046-2EB0
3RB2046-2ED0
3RB2046-2EW1
3RB2046-2EX1
3RB2056-2FC2
3RB2056-2FF2
3RB2056-2FW2
3RB2056-2FX2
Size S62)7)
S6 with
busbar
connections
22 90
50 200
315
For mounting
onto S6
contactors with
box terminals
Size S10/S122)
S10/S12
22 110
and
90 450
size 14
(3TF68/ 3TF69)
55 250
400
3RB2066-2GC2
3RB2066-2GF2
160 630
800
3RB2066-2MC2
3RB2066-2MF2
1)
onto contactor.
2)
3)
installation.
4)

5)
6)

Feeders".
7)
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/127

protection
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB20, 3RB21 up to 630 A
3RB21 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor1)2) and stand-alone installation2)3), CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30
adjustable
protection
Internal ground-fault detection (activatable)
3RB2133-4UB0
Size
contactor4)
3RB2143-4ED0
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB2153-4FX2
Rating for
three-phase motor,
rated value5)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release
Short-circuit
DT
class gG6)
kW
3 11
6 25
63
3RB2163-4MC2
DT
Screw terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
side)
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size S21)3)7)
S2
7.5 22
12.5 50
80
3RB2133-4QB0
3RB2133-4QD0
3RB2133-4QW1
3RB2133-4QX1
3RB2133-4UB0
3RB2133-4UD0
3RB2133-4UW1
3RB2133-4UX1
Size S31)3)7)
S3
7.5 22
12.5 50
160
3RB2143-4UB0
3RB2143-4UD0
11 45
25 100
315
3RB2143-4EB0
3RB2143-4ED0
3RB2143-4EW1
3RB2143-4EX1
3RB2153-4FC2
3RB2153-4FF2
3RB2153-4FW2
3RB2153-4FX2
Size S62)7)
S6 with busbar 22 90
connection
50 200
315
For mounting
onto S6
contactors with
box terminals
Size S10/S122)
S10/S12
22 110
and size 14
90 450
(3TF68/ 3TF69)
55 250
400
3RB2163-4GC2
3RB2163-4GF2
160 630
800
3RB2163-4MC2
3RB2163-4MF2
1)
onto contactor.
2)
3)
installation.
4)
7/128
Siemens IC 10 2014
5)
6)

Feeders".
7)

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Overview
Terminal covers for sizes S2 to S10/S12
Box terminal blocks for sizes S6 and S10/S12

3RB20 and 3RB21 solid-state overload relays:

Version
Size
DT
Article No.
S2 ...
S10/S12

(12 mm), IP65, 22 mm
S2 ...
S10/S12
Extension plungers
For compensation of the distance between a
S2 ...
S10/S12
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RU1900-1A
1 unit
41F
3SB3000-0EA11
1 unit
41J
3SX1335
1 unit
41J
Length 400 mm
3RU1900-1B
1 unit
41F
Length 600 mm
3RU1900-1C
1 unit
41F
S2 ...
S10/S12
3RB2984-0
1 10 units
41F
Length 55 mm
S3
3RT1946-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Length 100 mm
S6
3RT1956-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Length 120 mm
S10/S12
3RT1966-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Length 20.6 mm
S2
3RT1936-4EA2
1 unit
41B
Length 20.8 mm
S3
3RT1946-4EA2
1 unit
41B
Length 25 mm
S6
3RT1956-4EA2
1 unit
41B
Length 30 mm
S10/S12
3RT1966-4EA2
1 unit
41B
Covers for screw terminals

between contactor and overload relay, without box
terminals (1 unit required per combination)
S6
3RT1956-4EA3
1 unit
41B
S10/S12
3RT1966-4EA3
1 unit
41B
Mechanical RESET
3RU1900-1A
with pushbutton and
extension plunger

S2 ...
S10/S12
For 6.5 mm holes

in the control panel;
3RU1900-1.
Sealable covers
3RB2984-0
Terminal covers
3RT1946-4EA1
3RT1936-4EA2
Box terminal blocks

3RT195.-4G
1)
Up to 70 mm2
S61)
3RT1955-4G
1 unit
41B
Up to 120 mm2
S6
3RT1956-4G
1 unit
41B
Up to 240 mm2
S10/S12
3RT1966-4G
1 unit
41B
For technical specifications for conductor cross-sections see

Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
In the scope of supply for 3RT1054-1 contactors (55 kW).

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/129
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General accessories
Version
Size
Color
For
overload
relays
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B

Spring-type
terminals
Screwdrivers
Length approx.
with spring-type
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm
terminals
Titanium
gray/
black,
partially
insulated
Main and
A
auxiliary
circuit
connection:
3RB2
3RA2908-1A

For SIRIUS devices
Pastel
turquoise
3RB2
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
Titanium
gray
3RB2
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B
Pastel
turquoise
3RB2
3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
Zinc
yellow
3RB2
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RA2908-1A
Blank labels
NSB0_01429b
20 mm x 7 mm
IC01_00181
3RT1900-1SB20
Adhesive inscription 19 mm x 6 mm
labels 1)
For SIRIUS devices
19 mm x 6 mm
3RT2900-1SB20
1)

7/130
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
Overview
Z
\
[
]
^
\
_
X Green LED "READY":

A continuous green light signals that the device is working correctly.
Y Red LED "GND FAULT":
A continuous red light signals a ground-fault tripping.
Z Red LED "THERMISTOR":
A continuous red light signals an active thermistor trip.
[ Red LED "OVERLOAD":
A continuous red light signals an active overload trip; a flickering
red light signals an imminent trip (overload warning).
\ Motor current and trip class setting:
Setting the device to the motor current and to the required trip
class dependent on the start-up conditions is easy with the two
rotary switches.
] Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET:
RESET.
^ Test/RESET button:
Enables testing of all important device components and functions,
plus resetting of the device after a trip when manual RESET is
selected.
_ Connecting terminals (removable joint block):
conductors with different cross-sections for the auxiliary, control
and sensor circuits. Connection is possible with screw connection
and alternatively with spring-type connection.
` 3RB2985 function expansion module:
Enables more functions to be added, e. g. internal ground-fault
detection and/or an analog output with corresponding signals.
SIRIUS 3RB22 and 3RB23 evaluation modules
The 3RB22 and 3RB23 solid-state overload relays up to 630 A

(up to 820 A possible in combination with a series transformer)
are from a modular system and comprise an evaluation unit, a
current measuring module and a connecting cable. The 3RB22
overload relays (with monostable auxiliary contacts) and the
3RB23 overload relays (with bistable auxiliary contacts) are
supplied from an external voltage.
These units have been designed for inverse-time delayed
protection of loads with normal and heavy starting
unbalance or phase failure. An overload, phase unbalance or
phase failure result in an increase of the motor current beyond
the set rated motor current.
This current rise is detected by means of a current measuring
module (see page 7/147) and electronically evaluated by the
evaluation module which is connected to it. The evaluation electronics sends a signal to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary
contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor.
The LED indicates imminent tripping of the relay due to overload,

phase unbalance or phase failure by flickering when the limit
current has been violated. In the case of the 3RB22 and 3RB23
overload relays this warning can also be issued through auxiliary
contacts.
In addition to the described inverse-time delayed protection of
loads against excessive temperature rises, the 3RB22 and
3RB23 solid-state overload relays also allow direct temperature
monitoring of the motor windings (full motor protection) by connection with broken-wire interlock of a PTC sensor circuit. With
this temperature-dependent protection, the loads can be protected against overheating caused indirectly by reduced coolant flow, for example, which cannot be detected by means of the
current alone. In the event of overheating, the devices switch off
the contactor, and thus the load, by means of the auxiliary contacts. The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuously
illuminated "THERMISTOR" LED.
To protect the loads against high-resistance short circuits due to
damage to the insulation, humidity, condensed water, etc., the
3RB22 and 3RB23 solid-state overload relays offer the possibility of internal ground-fault detection in conjunction with a function expansion module (for details see "Selection and Ordering
Data" page 7/137, not possible in conjunction with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting). In the event of a ground fault the
3RB22 and 3RB23 relays trip instantaneously.
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuous red
"Ground Fault" LED. Signaling through auxiliary contacts is also
possible.
After tripping due to overload, phase unbalance, phase failure,
thermistor or ground-fault tripping, the relay is reset manually or
automatically after the recovery time has elapsed
In conjunction with a function expansion module, the motor
current measured by the microprocessor can be output in the
form of an analog signal 4 mA to 20 mA DC for operating rotary
coil instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable logic controllers.
With an additional AS-Interface analog module the current values can also be transferred over the AS-i bus system.
Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1 and 3RB2
and approvals.
Type of protection "increased safety EEx e and explosionproof enclosure EEx d" according to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
The 3RB22 solid-state overload relays (monostable) provide
quick and reliable protection for motors with types of protection
EEx e and EEx d in hazardous areas.
They comply with the requirements of IEC 60079-7 (Electrical
devices for areas subject to explosion hazards - Increased
safety "e" as well as for flameproof enclosure "d").
The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping

current and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a longterm stable tripping characteristic (see "Characteristic Curves"
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/131
NSB0_01621b
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuous red

"OVERLOAD" LED.
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th
3RB
2
@
Device series
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods
Installation type
Example
3RB
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
The most important features and benefits of the 3RB22 and
3RB23 solid-state overload relays are listed in the overview table
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
3RB22 and 3RB23 solid-state overload relays contribute to
Application
Industries
Ambient conditions
The 3RB22 and 3RB23 solid-state overload relays are suitable

for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum
inverse-time delayed and temperature-dependent protection of
their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions (CLASS 5 to 30), minimize project completion
times, inventories and energy consumption, and optimize plant
availability and maintenance management.

fluctuations.
Application
The 3RB22 and 3RB23 devices have been designed for the
protection of three-phase asynchronous and single-phase
AC motors.
If single-phase AC motors are to be protected by the 3RB22 and
3RB23 solid-state overload relays, the main current paths of the
current measuring modules must be series-connected ("Circuit
Diagrams" see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
7/132
Siemens IC 10 2014
For the temperature range from 25 C to +60 C, the 3RB22 and

3RB23 solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature
in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1.
Configuration notes for use of the devices below 25 C or
above +60 C on request.
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
Type Overload relay: Evaluation modules
3RB2283-4A.1, 3RB2383-4A.1
Size contactor
S00 ... S10/S12
General data
Overload, phase failure and phase unbalance (> 40 % according to NEMA),
+ ground fault (with corresponding function expansion module) and activation of the
thermistor motor protection (with closed PTC sensor circuit)
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Yes
Overload warning
Yes, from 1.125 x Ie for symmetrical loads and from 0.85 x Ie for unsymmetrical loads
Reset and recovery

Recovery time
Manual, automatic and remote RESET

min
- For manual RESET
min
- For remote RESET
min
Features
- for tripping due to overcurrent: 3 (stored permanently),

- for tripping by thermistor: time until the motor temperature has fallen 5 K below the
response temperature
- for tripping due to a ground fault: no automatic RESET
- for tripping due to a ground fault: Immediately
Yes, with 4 LEDs
- Green LED "Ready"
- Red LED "Ground Fault"
- Red LED "Thermistor"
- Red "Overload" LED
Yes, test of LEDs, electronics, auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by
pressing the button TEST/RESET / self-monitoring
Yes, with the TEST/RESET button
No
TEST function
RESET button
STOP button
Explosion protection Safe operation of motors
with "increased safety" type of protection
Storage/transport
Operation
Permissible rated current
3RB22: PTB 05 ATEX 3022

3RB23: -C
C
C
-40 ... +80

-25 ... +60
+60
%
%
100
On request
Repeat terminals
II (2) GD
Not required
Not required
IP20: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar connection in
conjunction with cover.
Finger-safe: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar

connection in conjunction with cover.
g/ms

kV
kV
kV
V/m
%

10
100
Up to 2 000
Any
Mounting position
Type of mounting
Evaluation modules
Current measuring module
For "Dimensional drawings" see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment 3RU1,

3RB2 Overload Relays", http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35681297.
Dimensions
Degree of severity A according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)

15/11
Size
S00 to S3: Stand-alone installation,
S6 and S10/S12: stand-alone installation or mounting onto contactors
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/133
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
3RB2283-4A.1, 3RB2383-4A.1
Size contactor
S00 ... S10/S12

H
mm
W
45 x 111 x 95
Dimensions of evaluation modules (W x H x D)
Auxiliary circuit
Number of CO contacts
--
Alternative 1
- 1 NO for the signal "tripped by overload and/or thermistor"
- 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
- 1 NO for the signal "tripped by ground fault"
or1)
Alternative 2
- 1 NO for the signal "tripped by overload and/or thermistor and/or
ground fault"
- 1 NO for overload warning
300
kV

NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V
A
- 120 V
A
- 125 V
A
- 250 V
A
6
6
6
3
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue

- 24 V
A
- 120 V
A
- 125 V
A
- 250 V
A
6
6
6
3
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, rated operational current Ie at Ue

- 24 V
A
- 60 V
A
- 110 V
A
- 125 V
A
- 250 V
A
A
2
0.55
0.3
0.3
0.2
5
Yes
With miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic
A
A
6
1.6
Protective separation between auxiliary current paths acc. to IEC 60947-1
300

B300, R300

Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2

Solid
Stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)

-1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
-2 (20 ... 14)
Connection type
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5

Solid
Stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 (24 ... 16)
1)
The assignment of auxiliary contacts may be influenced by function

expansion modules.
7/134
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
3RB2283-4A.1, 3RB2383-4A.1
Size contactor
S00 ... S10/S12
Control and sensor circuit as well as the analog output

(pollution degree 3)1)
300
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp1)
kV

50/60 Hz AC
DC
V
V
24 ... 240
24 ... 240
Operating range1)
50/60 Hz AC
DC
0.85 Us min Us 1.1 Us max

Rated power1)
50/60 Hz AC
DC
W
W
0.5
0.5
Mains buffering time1)
ms
200
Thermistor motor protection (PTC thermistor detector)2)

Summation cold resistance
Response value
Return value
k
k
k
1.5
3.4 ... 3.8
1.5 ... 1.65
ms
Analog output3)4)
Output signal
Measuring range
mA
Load, max.
> 0.3 Ie
> 0.15 Imotor
500 ... 1 000
4 ... 20
0 ... 1.25 Ie
4 mA corresponds to 0 Ie
16.8 mA corresponds to 1.0 Ie
20 mA corresponds to 1.25 Ie
100
Tripping value I3)
- For 0.3 Ie < Imotor < 2.0 Ie
Response time ttrip
Conductor cross-sections for the control and sensor circuit

as well as the analog output
Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2

Solid
mm2
mm2
mm2
Stranded
mm2
AWG
Connection type
Operating devices
mm

Solid
mm2
mm2
mm2
Stranded
mm2
AWG
1)
Control circuit.
2)
Sensor circuit.
3)
For the 3RB22 and 3RB23 overload relays in combination with a

corresponding function expansion module.
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)

-1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
-2 (20 ... 14)
4)
3.0 x 0.5
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
-2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 (24 ... 16)
Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for 4-wire
measuring transducers. In this case the analog input module must not
supply current to the analog output of the 3RB22 and 3RB23 relay.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/135
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A

Functions of the 3RB22 and 3RB23 evaluation modules in combination with the 3RB2985 function expansion modules
Evaluation modules With function
expansion module
Basic functions
A1/A2
T1/T2
Y1/Y2
3RB2283-4AA1
--
Inverse-time delayed protection,

temperature-dependent protection,
electrical remote RESET,
overload warning
Power supply
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Connection for
PTC sensor
Electrical
remote RESET
3RB2985-2CA1

internal ground-fault detection,
overload warning
Power supply
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Connection for
PTC sensor
Electrical
remote RESET
3RB2985-2CB1

ground-fault signal
Power supply
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Connection for
PTC sensor
Electrical
remote RESET
3RB2985-2AA0

overload warning, analog output
Power supply
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Connection for
PTC sensor
Electrical
remote RESET
3RB2985-2AA1

overload warning, analog output
Power supply
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Connection for
PTC sensor
Electrical
remote RESET
3RB2985-2AB1

ground-fault signal, analog output
Power supply
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Connection for
PTC sensor
Electrical
remote RESET
3RB2283-4AC1
3RB2383-4AA1
3RB2383-4AC1
Evaluation modules With function

expansion module
3RB2283-4AA1
Outputs
I () / I (+)
95/96 NC
97/98 NO
05/06 NC
07/08 NO
--
No
Disconnection of the
contactor (inverse-time
delayed/temperaturedependent protection)
Signal "tripped"
Overload warning
Overload warning
3RB2985-2CA1
No
delayed/temperaturedependent protection +
ground fault)
Signal "tripped"
Overload warning
Overload warning
3RB2985-2CB1
No
Signal "tripped"
Disconnection
of the contactor
(ground fault)
Signal "ground-fault
tripping"
3RB2985-2AA0
Analog signal
Signal "tripped"
Overload warning
Overload warning
3RB2985-2AA1
Analog signal
delayed/temperaturedependent protection +
ground fault)
Signal "tripped"
Overload warning
Overload warning
3RB2985-2AB1
Analog signal
Signal "tripped"
Disconnection
of the contactor
(ground fault)
Signal "ground-fault
tripping"
3RB2283-4AC1
3RB2383-4AA1
3RB2383-4AC1
7/136
Inputs
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
3RB22 and 3RB23 solid-state overload relays (evaluation modules) for full motor protection, stand-alone installation,
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30, adjustable
Type
3RB2283-4A.1, 3RB2383-4A.1
Features and technical specifications
Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Supplied from an external voltage
2 NO + 2 NC
Auxiliary contacts

Four LEDs for operating and status displays
(with function expansion module)
Internal ground-fault detection
Screw or spring-type terminals for auxiliary, control and sensor circuits
Input for PTC sensor circuit
(with function expansion module)
Analog output
Available
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB2283-4AA1,
3RB2383-4AA1
Size
contactor
3RB2283-4AC1,
3RB2383-4AC1
Version
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Evaluation modules
S00 ... S12
Monostable
3RB2283-4AA1
3RB2283-4AC1
Bistable
3RB2383-4AA1
3RB2383-4AC1
Note:
see page 7/88.

Current measuring modules and related connecting cables see

page 7/148, general accessories see page 7/150 onwards.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/137
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23 up to 630 A
Function expansion modules for 3RB22 and 3RB23 overload relays (evaluation modules)
Size
contactor
Version
For
overload
relays
DT
Article No.
3RB22,
3RB23
Analog Basic 1 GF modules1)2)

3RB22,
Analog output DC 4 ... 20 mA,
3RB23
with internal ground-fault detection and
overload warning
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RB2985-2AA0
1 unit
41F
3RB2985-2AA1
1 unit
41F
Analog Basic 2 GF modules1)2)

3RB22,
3RB23
with internal ground-fault detection and
overload ground-fault signaling
3RB2985-2AB1
1 unit
41F
Basic 1 GF modules2)
3RB22,
with internal ground-fault detection and 3RB23
overload warning
3RB2985-2CA1
1 unit
41F
Basic 2 GF modules2)
3RB22,
with internal ground-fault detection and 3RB23
ground-fault signaling
3RB2985-2CB1
1 unit
41F
Sizes S00 to S12

For plugging into evaluation module
(1 unit)
S00 ... S12 Analog Basic 1 modules1)
with overload warning
3RB2985-2..1
Note:
Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for
4-wire measuring transducers. In this case the analog input
module must not supply current to the analog output of the
3RB22/3RB23 relay.
7/138
Siemens IC 10 2014
1)
The analog signal DC 4 mA up to 20 mA can be used for operating rotary

coil instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable logic
controllers.
2)
The following information on ground-fault protection refers to sinusoidal

residual currents at 50/60 Hz:
- With a motor current of between 0.3 and 2 times the current setting Ie,
the unit will trip at a ground-fault current equal to 30 % of the current
setting.
- With a motor current of between 2 and 8 times the current setting Ie, the
unit will trip at a ground-fault current equal to 15 % of the set current.
- The response delay amounts to between 0.5 s and 1 s.

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Z
\
[
]
^
\
_
X Green LED "DEVICE/IO-Link:

A continuous green light signals that the device is working
correctly, a green flickering light signals the communication
through IO-Link.
Y Red LED "GND FAULT":
A continuous red light signals an active ground-fault trip.
Z Red LED "THERMISTOR":
A continuous red light signals an active thermistor trip.
[ Red LED "OVERLOAD":
A continuous red light signals an active overload trip; a flickering
red light signals an imminent trip (overload warning).
\ Motor current and trip class setting:
Setting the device to the motor current and to the required trip
class dependent on the start-up conditions is easy with the two
rotary switches.
] Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET:
RESET.
^ Test/RESET button:
Enables testing of all important device components and functions,
plus resetting of the device after a trip when manual RESET is
selected.
_ Connecting terminals (removable terminal block):
conductors with different cross-sections for the auxiliary, control
and sensor circuits. Connection is possible with screw connection
and alternatively with spring-type connection.
` Plug-in point for operator panel:
enables connection of the 3RA6935-0A operator panel.
SIRIUS 3RB24 evaluation module
The modular 3RB24 solid-state overload relay, which is powered

via IO-Link (with monostable auxiliary contacts) up to 630 A
(up to 820 A possible with a series transformer) have been
designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with
normal and heavy starting ("Function" see Manual
"SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relay for IO-Link",
unbalance or phase failure. It comprises an evaluation unit,
a current measuring module and a connecting cable.
The evaluation module 3RB24 also offers an engine starter function: The contactors, which are connected via the auxiliary contacts, can also be actuated for operation via IO-Link. In this way,
direct, reversing and wye-delta starters up to 630 A (or 830 A)
can be connected to the controller wirelessly via the IO-Link
controller.
An overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current.
The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term
stable tripping characteristic (see "Characteristic Curves"
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuously illuminated red "OVERLOAD" LED and also reported as a group fault
via IO-Link.
The LED indicates imminent tripping of the relay due to overload,
phase unbalance or phase failure by flickering when the limit
current has been violated. This warning can also be reported to
the higher-level PLC via IO-Link at the 3RB24 overload relay.
In addition to the described inverse-time delayed protection of
loads against excessive temperature rises, the 3RB24 solidstate overload relays also allow direct temperature monitoring of
the motor windings (full motor protection) by connection with
broken-wire interlock of a PTC sensor circuit. With this temperature-dependent protection, the loads can be protected against
overheating caused indirectly by reduced coolant flow,
for example, which cannot be detected by means of the current
alone. In the event of overheating, the devices switch off the
contactor, and thus the load, by means of the auxiliary contacts.
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a continuously
illuminated "THERMISTOR" LED and also reported as a group fault
via IO-Link.
To protect the loads against incomplete ground faults due to
damage to the insulation, humidity, condensed water, etc., the
3RB24 solid-state overload relays offer the possibility of internal
ground-fault detection (for details, see Manual
not possible in conjunction with contactor assemblies for wyedelta starting). In the event of a ground fault, the 3RB24 relays
trip instantaneously.
The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a flashing red LED
"Ground Fault" and reported at the overload relay 3RB24 as a
group fault via IO-Link.
The reset after overload, phase unbalance, phase failure, thermistor or ground-fault tripping is performed manually by key on
site, via IO-Link or by electrical remote RESET or automatically
after the cooling time (motor model) or for thermistor protection
after sufficient cooling. Power cuts in devices due to function
monitors (broken wire or short-circuit on the thermistor) can only
be reset on-site ("Function" see Manual
"SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid-Statec Overload Relay for IO-Link",
In conjunction with a function expansion module, the motor current measured by the microprocessor can be output in the form
of an analog signal DC 4 to 20 mA for operating rotary coil instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable logic
controllers.
The current values can be transmitted to the higher-level controller via IO-Link.
The 3RB24 solid-state overload relay for IO-Link is suitable for
operation with frequency converters. Please follow the instructions in the manual "SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relay
for IO-Link", see
and approvals.
This current rise is detected by means of the current measuring

module (see page 7/147) and electronically evaluated by the
evaluation module which is connected to it. The evaluation electronics sends a signal to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary
contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/139
NSB0_02180b
Overview
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
They comply with the requirements of IEC 60079-7 (Electrical
devices for areas subject to explosion hazards - Increased
safety "e" as well as for flameproof enclosure "d").
Type of protection "increased safety EEx e and explosionproof enclosure EEx d" according to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
The electronic overload relay 3RB24 (monostable) are suitable
for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors of types of
protection EEx e and EEx d.
EC type test certificate for Group II, Category (2) G/D has been
submitted. On request.
Article No. scheme

1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th
2
@
Device series
Trip class (CLASS)
Connection methods
Installation type
3RB
Example
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
The most important features and benefits of the 3RB24 solidstate overload relays for IO-Link are listed in the overview table
0 24
IC0
1_ 0
3RB
3RB24 solid-state overload relays for IO-Link contribute to

Transmission of current values
Application
Industries
device lamps and also, for example, to return current values

directly via IO-Link.
The 3RB24 solid-state overload relays are suitable for customers

delayed and temperature-dependent protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions (CLASS 5 to 30), minimize project completion times, inventories and energy consumption, and optimize plant availability
and maintenance management.
If single-phase AC motors are to be protected by the 3RB24

solid-state overload relays, the main current paths of the current
measuring modules must be series-connected
("Circuit Diagrams" see Manual
Application
Ambient conditions
The 3RB24 solid-state overload relays have been designed for

the protection of three-phase asynchronous and single-phase
AC motors.

fluctuations.
In addition to protection function, these devices can be used together with contactors as direct or reversing starters (star-delta
(wye-delta) start also possible), which are controlled via IO-Link.
This makes it possible to directly control drives via IO-Link from
a higher-level controller or on site via the optional hand-held
For the temperature range from 25 C to +60 C, the 3RB24

solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature in
accordance with IEC 60947-4-1.
7/140
Siemens IC 10 2014
Configuration notes for use of the devices below 25 C or

above +60 C on request.
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB2483-4A.1
Size contactor
S00 ... S10/S12
General data
Overload, phase failure and phase unbalance (> 40 % according to NEMA),
+ ground fault (connectable and disconnectable) and activation of the thermistor
motor protection (with closed PTC sensor circuit)
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30 adjustable
Yes
Overload warning
Yes, from 1.125 x Ie for symmetrical loads and from 0.85 x Ie for unsymmetrical loads
Reset and recovery

Recovery time
Manual and automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET or through IO-Link

min
- For manual RESET
min
- For remote RESET
min
Features

- for tripping due to a ground fault: no automatic RESET
Yes, with 4 LEDs
- Green "DEVICE/IO-Link" LED
- Red LED "Ground Fault"
- Red LED "Thermistor"
- Red "Overload" LED
Yes, test of LEDs, electronics, auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by
pressing the button TEST/RESET / self-monitoring
Yes, with the TEST/RESET button
No
TEST function
RESET button
STOP button
"increased safety EEX e and explosion-proof
enclosure EEx d" type of protection
Storage/transport
Operation
Permissible rated current
On request
C
C
C
-40 ... +80

-25 ... +60
+60
%
%
100
On request
Repeat terminals
Not required
Not required
IP20: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar connection in
conjunction with the cover
Finger-safe: Current measuring modules in sizes S6 and S10/S12 with busbar

connection in conjunction with the cover
g/ms

kV
kV
kV
V/m
%

10
100
Up to 2 000
Any
Mounting position
Type of mounting
Evaluation modules
"Dimensional drawings" see manual "SIRIUS 3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relay for
IO-Link", http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/46165627.
Dimensions
Degree of severity A according to EN 55011 (CISPR 11) and EN 55022 (CISPR 22)

15/11
Size
S00 to S3: Stand-alone installation,
S6 and S10/S12: stand-alone installation or mounting onto contactors
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/141
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB2483-4A.1
Size contactor
S00 ... S10/S12

H
mm
W
45 x 111 x 95
Dimensions of evaluation modules (W x H x D)
Auxiliary circuit
Number of auxiliary switches
1 CO contact, 1 NO contact connected in series internally
1 CO contact for selecting the contactor (for reversing starter

function), actuated by the control system
1 NO contact for normal switching duty, actuated by the control
system (opens automatically when tripping occurs)
300
kV

NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue
- 24 V
A
- 120 V
A
- 125 V
A
- 250 V
A
6
6
6
3
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15, rated operational current Ie at Ue

- 24 V
A
- 120 V
A
- 125 V
A
- 250 V
A
6
6
6
3
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13, rated operational current Ie at Ue

- 24 V
A
- 60 V
A
- 110 V
A
- 125 V
A
- 250 V
A
2
0.55
0.3
0.3
0.2
Yes
With miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic
1.6
Protective separation between auxiliary current paths acc. to IEC 60947-1
300

B300, R300

Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
Solid
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
--
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Stranded
mm2
--
AWG
2 (20 ... 14)
Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
Stranded
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
AWG
2 (24 ... 16)
Operating devices
7/142
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB2483-4A.1
Size contactor
S00 ... S10/S12
Control and sensor circuit as well as the analog output

(pollution degree 3)1)
300
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp1)
kV
24 through IO-Link

DC
Operating range1)
DC
Rated power1)
DC
0.5
Mains buffering time1)
ms
200
1.5
Response value
3.4 ... 3.8
Return value
1.5 ... 1.65
Thermistor motor protection (PTC thermistor detector)2)
Tripping value I
> 0.3 Ie
> 0.15 Imotor
Response time ttrip
ms
500 ... 1 000
mA
4 ... 20
Analog output3)
0 ... 1.25 Ie
4 mA corresponds to 0 Ie
16.8 mA corresponds to 1.0 Ie
20 mA corresponds to 1.25 Ie
Measuring range
Load, max.
Output signal
100
Conductor cross-sections for the control and sensor circuit

as well as the analog output
Connection type
Screw terminals
M3, Pozidriv size 2
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
Solid
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
--
mm2
1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
Stranded
mm2
--
AWG
2 (20 ... 14)
Connection type
mm
3.0 x 0.5
Solid
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
--
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
Stranded
mm2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
AWG
Operating devices
1)
Control circuit.
2)
Sensor circuit.
3)
2 (24 ... 16)

Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for 4-wire
measuring transducers. The analog input module may not supply current
to the analog output of the 3RB24 overload relay.
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/143
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays

3RB24 solid-state overload relays (evaluation module) for full motor protection, stand-alone installation,
CLASS 5, 10, 20 and 30, adjustable
Type
3RB2483-4A.1
Features and technical specifications
Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection
24 V DC through IO-Link
Supplied from an external voltage
Direct-on-line or reversing starters (wye-delta starting also possible) controllable through IO-Link
1 CO and 1 NO in series
Auxiliary contacts
(electrically or via IO-Link)
Remote RESET
Four LEDs for operating and status displays
Screw or spring-type terminals for auxiliary, control and sensor circuits
Input for PTC sensor circuit
Analog output
IO-Link-specific functions
Connection of direct-on-line, reversing and star-delta starters to the controller via IO-Link
On-site controlling of the starter using the hand-held device
Accessing process data (e.g. current values in all three phases) via IO-Link
Accessing parameterization and diagnostics data (e.g. tripped signals) via IO-Link
Available
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41G
3RB2483-4AA1
Size
contactor
3RB2483-4AC1
Version
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Evaluation modules
S00 ... S12
Monostable
Notes:
see page 7/88.
Analog input modules, e.g. SM 331, must be configured for
4-wire measuring transducers. The analog input module may
not supply current to the analog output of the 3RB24 relay.
7/144
Siemens IC 10 2014
3RB2483-4AA1
3RB2483-4AC1
For current measuring modules and related connecting cables

see page 7/147, "Accessories" see page 7/149 onwards.

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Overview
The current measuring modules are designed as system components for connecting to evaluation units 3RB22 to 3RB24.
Using these evaluation units the motor current is measured and
the measured value sent to the evaluation unit for evaluation.
The current measuring modules in sizes S00 to S3 up to 55 mm
wide are equipped with straight-through transformers and can
be snap-fitted under the evaluation units. The larger evaluation
units are installed directly on the contactor or as stand-alone
units.
SIRIUS 3RB2906 current measuring module
Size contactor
3RB2906
H
Type Overload relays:

Current measuring modules
S00/S0
S2/S3
3RB2956
3RB2966
S6
S10/S12
45 x 84 x 45 55 x 94 x 72 120 x 119 x 145

1 000
kV
1 000
mm
Dimensions of current measuring modules

(W x H x D)
145 x 147 x 148
Main circuit
Type of current
Direct current
No
Alternating current
Yes, 50/60 Hz 5 %
Current setting
0.3 ... 3;
2.4 ... 25
0.5
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
63 ... 630
See "Selection and ordering data" on page 7/147
See configuration manuals

"Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection Data for Fuseless and
"SIRIUS Configuration Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders",

690
600
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/145
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Dimensions of current measuring modules

(W x H x D)
S00/S0
W
Size contactor
3RB2906
H
Type Overload relays:

mm
S2/S3
3RB2956
3RB2966
S6
S10/S12
45 x 84 x 45 55 x 94 x 72 120 x 119 x 145
145 x 147 x 148

Connection type
Terminal screw
mm
--
4 mm Allen screw
5 mm Allen screw
Operating devices
mm
--
4 mm Allen screw
5 mm Allen screw
Nm
--
10 ... 12
20 ... 22

Solid
mm2
--
--
--
mm2
--
With 3RT1955-4G
box terminal:
2 (1 max. 50,
1 max. 70),
1 (10 ... 70)
2 (50 ... 185),

rear clamping point
only:
1 (70 ... 240)
With 3RT1956-4G
box terminal:
2 (1 max. 95,
1 max. 120),
1 (10 ... 120)
Rear clamping point

only:
1 (120 ... 185)
With 3RT1955-4G
box terminal:
2 (1 max. 50,
1 max. 70),
1 (10 ... 70)
2 (50 ... 185),

Rear clamping point
only:
1 (70 ... 240)
With 3RT1956-4G
box terminal:
2 (1 max. 95,
1 max. 120),
1 (10 ... 120)
Rear clamping point

only:
1 (120 ... 185)
With 3RT1955-4G
box terminal:
2 (max. 70),
1 (16 ... 70)
2 (70 ... 240),

Rear clamping point
only:
1 (95 ... 300)
With 3RT1956-4G
box terminal:
2 (max. 120),
1 (16 ... 120)
Rear clamping point

only:
1 (120 ... 240)
With 3RT1955-4G
box terminal:
2 (max. 1/0),
1 (6 ... 2/0)
2 (2/0 ... 500 kcmil),

rear clamping point
only:
1 (3/0 ... 600 kcmil)
With 3RT1956-4G
box terminal:
2 (max. 3/0),
1 (6 ... 250 kcmil)
Rear clamping point

only:
1
(250 kcmil ... 500 kcmil)
With 3RT1955-4G
box terminal:
2 (6 15.5 0.8),
1 (3 9 0.8 ...
6 15.5 0.8)
2 (20 24 0.5),
1 (6 9 0.8 ...
20 24 0.5)
mm2
--
mm2
Stranded
Ribbon cables (Number x Width x Thickness)
AWG
mm
--
--
--
With 3RT1956-4G
box terminal:
2 (10 15.5 0.8),
1 (3 9 0.8 ...
10 15.5 0.8)
Busbar connections
Connection type
Terminal screw
Nm
--
M8 25
M10 x 30
--
10 ... 14
14 ... 24
--
16 ... 951)
50 ... 2402)

Solid with cable lug
mm2
mm2
--
25 ...
AWG
--
4 ... 250 kcmil
2/0 ... 500 kcmil
mm
--
17
25
Connection type
Diameter of opening
1)

cross-sections of 95 mm2 and more, the 3RT1956-4EA1 terminal cover
must be used to ensure phase clearance.
7/146
Siemens IC 10 2014
1201)
70 ... 2402)
mm
7.5
2)
14
25
--

cross-sections of 240 mm2 and more as well as to DIN 46235 with conductor cross-sections of 185 mm2 and more, the 3RT1956-4EA1 terminal cover
must be used to ensure the phase clearance.
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24

Current measuring modules for mounting onto contactor1) and stand-alone installation1)2) (essential accessories)
3RB2906-2JG1
Size contactor3)
3RB2906-2JG1
3RB2956-2TG2
3RB2966-2WH2
Rating for
three-phase
motor, rated
value4)
Current setting
value of the
inverse-time
delayed
overload
release
Short-circuit protection For

with fuse,
overload
type of coordination "2", relays
DT
Article No.
kW
A
3RB22 to
3RB24
}
}
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RB2956-2TH2
1 unit
41G
3RB2956-2TG2
1 unit
41G
Sizes S00/S02)6)
S00/S0
0.09 1.1
0.3 3
20
1.1 11
2.4 25
63
5.5 45
10 100
315
3RB22 to
3RB24
3RB2906-2JG1
1 unit
41G
S6 with
busbar connection
11 90
20 200
315
3RB22 to
3RB24
3RB2956-2TH2
1 unit
41G
For mounting
onto S6 contactors with box
terminals
11 90
20 200
315
3RB22 to
3RB24
3RB2956-2TG2
1 unit
41G
63 630
800
3RB22 to
3RB24
3RB2966-2WH2
1 unit
41G
Sizes S2/S32)6)
S2/S3
Size S61)6)
Sizes S10/S121)
S10/S12 and
size 14
(3TF68/ 3TF69)
37 450
Note:
The connecting cable between the current measuring module
and the evaluation module is not included in the scope of
supply; please order separately (see page 7/148).

1)
The current measuring modules with an Article No. ending with "2" are
designed for mounting onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For
3TF68/3TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible.
2)
The current measuring modules with an Article No. ending with "1" are
designed for stand-alone installation.
3)
4)
5)

coordination "2". For fuse values in connection with contactors"
see Configuration Manuals
- "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations Selection Data for Fuseless and
- "SIRIUS Configuration Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders",
6)
The modules with an Article No. with "G" in penultimate position are
Siemens IC 10 2014
7/147
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
3RB22, 3RB23, 3RB24
Accessories
Size
contactor
Version
For
overload
relays
DT
Article No.
3RB24,
3RB29
3RB24,
3RB29
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RB2987-2B
1 unit
41F
3RB2987-2D
1 unit
41F
Connecting cables (necessary accessories)

For connection between evaluation module
and current measuring module
S00 ... S3
3RB2987-2.
Length 0.1 m
(only for mounting of the evaluation
module directly onto the current
measuring module)
S00 ... S12 Length 0.5 m
Additional general accessories see page 7/150.
7/148
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
Overview
Overload relays for High-Feature applications
The following optional accessories are available for the 3RB22 to
3RB24 solid-state overload relays:
Operator panel for the evaluation modules 3RB24
Manual for the evaluation modules 3RB24
Sealable cover for the evaluation modules 3RB22 to 3RB24
Terminal covers for the 3RB29 current measuring modules

size S6 and S10/S12
Box terminal blocks for the 3RB29 current measuring modules
size S6 and S10/S12
Push-in lugs for screw fixing for 3RB22 to 3RB24 evaluation
modules and 3RB2906 current measuring modules

Accessories for 3RB24 overload relays
Version
For over- DT
load relays
Article No.
3RB24
Connecting cable
Length 2.5 m (round),
for connecting the evaluation module to the
operator panel
3RB24

Interface covers
Manual "Solid-State Overload Relay
for IO-Link"
3RB24
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA6935-0A
1 unit
42F
3UF7933-0BA00-0
1 unit
42J
3RB24
3RA6936-0A
1 unit
42F
3RB24
3RA6936-0B
5 units
42F
Operator panels for evaluation modules

Operator panels (set)
3RA6935-0A
One set comprises:

1 x operator panel
1 x 3RA6936-0A enabling module
1 x 3RA6936-0B interface cover
1 x fixing terminal
Note:
The connecting cable between the evaluation

module and the operator panel is not included
in the scope of supply; please order
separately.
Manuals
The manual can be downloaded free of charge, see

Manual "Solid-State
Overload Relay
for IO-Link"
Additional general accessories see next page.

Siemens IC 10 2014
7/149
Siemens AG 2013
Overload Relays
General accessories
Version
Size
For overload DT
relays
--
3RB22 to
3RB24
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RB2984-2
1 10 units
41F
Sealable covers for evaluation modules

3RB2984-2
Terminal covers for current measuring modules

Length 100 mm
S6
3RB2956
3RT1956-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Length 120 mm
S10/S12
3RB2966
3RT1966-4EA1
1 unit
41B
Length 25 mm
S6
3RB2956
3RT1956-4EA2
1 unit
41B
Length 30 mm
S10/S12
3RB2966
3RT1966-4EA2
1 unit
41B

S6
between contactor and overload relay, S10/S12
without box terminals
(1 unit required per combination)
3RB2956
3RT1956-4EA3
1 unit
41B
3RB2966
3RT1966-4EA3
1 unit
41B
Box terminal blocks for current measuring modules

Up to 70 mm2
S61)
3RB2956
3RT1955-4G
1 unit
41B
S6
3RB2956
3RT1956-4G
1 unit
41B
S10/S12
3RB2966
3RT1966-4G
1 unit
41B
3RB22 to
3RB24
3RP1903
1 10 units
41H
For screw fixing the current measuring S00 ... S3 3RB2906

modules (2 units per module)
3RB1900-0B
100 10 units
41F
Up to 120 mm
Up to 240 mm2
For technical specifications for conductor cross-sections

see Reference Manual "Protection Equipment
3RT195.-4G
Push-in lugs for evaluation modules and current measuring modules

For screw fixing the evaluation
modules
--
3RP1903
3RB1900-0B
1)
In the scope of supply for 3RT1054-1 contactors (55 kW).

Version
Size
Color
For overload DT
relays
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B

Spring-type
terminals
Screwdrivers
For all SIRIUS
devices with
spring-type
terminals
3RA2908-1A
Length approx.
Titanium
200 mm,
gray/
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm black,
partially
insulated
Main and
auxiliary
circuit
connection:
3RB2
3RA2908-1A
Pastel
3RB2
turquoise
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
Titanium
gray
3RT2900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
Blank labels
3RB2
NSB0_01429b
20 mm x 7 mm
Unit labeling
plates1)
For SIRIUS devices 20 mm x 7 mm
IC01_00181
3RT1900-1SB20
3RT2900-1SB20
1)

7/150
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Load Feeders and

Motor Starters for
Use in the Control Cabinet
8/2
8/4
8/16
8/20
8/24
8/28
8/32
8/40
8/41
8/46
8/47
8/48
8/49
8/50
8/54
Introduction
SIRIUS 3RA2 load feeders
General data
For snapping onto standard mounting
rails or for screw fixing
For 60 mm busbars
For 60 mm busbars
Accessories
3RV29 infeed system for
load feeders
General data
For busbar systems
For busbar systems
Accessories
Busbar accessories
8/66
8/67
8/68
8/74
8/76

General data
3RA61, 3RA62 compact starters
3RA64, 3RA65 compact starters for
IO-Link
Accessories
Add-on modules for AS-Interface
8/83
8/89
8/90
8/91
8/92
8/93
SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters

General data
3RM10 direct-on-line starters
3RM12 reversing starters
3RM11 Failsafe direct-on-line starters
3RM13 Failsafe reversing starters
Accessories
8/55
8/64
8/65
8/98
8/105
8/106
8/108
8/110
8/111
8/112
8/113
8/115
8/116
8/125
8/127
8/132
8/140
8/150
8/154
8/155
ET 200S motor starters and

safety motor starters
General data
Standard motor starters
Standard terminal modules
High-Feature motor starters
High-Feature terminal modules
Power modules
Power module terminal modules
ET 200S Failsafe motor starters
Failsafe terminal modules
Safety modules local and PROFIsafe
terminal modules
Accessories
ET 200S interface modules
ET 200S I/O modules
ET 200S fail-safe I/O modules
ET 200S IO-Link master modules
ET 200S software
Notes:
The 3RA1 load feeders
(sizes S00/S0 to S3) can be found
IC 10 AO 2014
in the DVD box IC01
IC 10 AO 2014
Center
Conversion tool see
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Price groups
PG 12W, 14O, 230, 241, 250, 260,
41B, 41D, 41E, 41L, 42C, 42D, 42F,
471, 4N1, 5K1, 5K2, 5N2, 764, 815,
816
Siemens AG 2013
Load Feeders and Motor Starters

For Use in the Control Cabinet
Introduction
Overview
3RA21 10
3RA22 10
3RA11 30
Article No.
Page
The 3RA2 fuseless load feeders consist of the 3RV2 motor starter protector and
the 3RT2 contactor.
The motor starter protector and contactor are prewired and mechanically and
electrically connected in pre-assembled assembly kits (link modules, wiring kits
and standard mounting rail or busbar adapters).
2 sizes (S00, S0)
Can be supplied for direct-on-line start or reversing duty as
- complete unit or
- single devices for self-assembly
Can be supplied with screw or spring-type terminals
for snapping onto standard mounting rails or
for screw fixing
Rated control supply voltage 50/60 Hz 230 V AC and 24 V DC
3RA21
8/16

for 60 mm busbars
3RA21
8/20

for screw fixing
3RA22
8/24

for 60 mm busbars
3RA22
8/28
8/32
Accessories for 3RA2 direct-on-line and

reversing starters

The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders consist of the 3RV1 motor starter protector and
the 3RT1 contactor.
The motor starter protector and contactor are prewired and mechanically and
electrically connected in pre-assembled assembly kits (link modules, wiring kits
2 sizes (S2, S3)
Can be supplied for direct-on-line start or reversing duty as
- complete unit or
- single devices for self-assembly
Can be supplied with screw terminals
for screw fixing
Rated control supply voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz and 24 V DC for 35 mm standard

mounting rail or for screw fixing
3RA1130
8/46

for busbar systems
Rated control supply voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz and 24 V DC for 40 and 60 mm

busbar systems
Only for
self-assembly
8/47

for screw fixing
Rated control supply voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz and 24 V DC for 35 mm standard

Only for
self-assembly
8/48

for busbar systems
Rated control supply voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz and 24 V DC for 40 and 60 mm

busbar systems
Only for
self-assembly
8/49

reversing starters
8/50
Central and compact starter solutions

Our range offers you many different possibilities for simple and
practical starter solutions in the control cabinet. Features common to all our load feeders, compact starters and motor starters:
Like all SIRIUS devices they are optimally coordinated with each
other, have a very compact design and are particularly easy and
quick to install and wire up.
8/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
In addition there is a seamless range of SIRIUS 3RW soft starters

available for soft starting in the control cabinet (see Chapter 6
"Soft Starters and Solid-State Switching Devices"
"SIRIUS 3RW Soft Starters").
Siemens AG 2013
Load Feeders and Motor Starters

Introduction
3RA61
3RA62
3RA64
3RA65
3RA68
3RM12
3RM13
3RK1301
Article No.
Page

Integrated functionality of a motor starter protector, contactor and solid-state
overload relay and various functions of optional mountable accessories
Can be used for direct starting of standard three-phase motors up to 32 A
Up to 15 kW/400 V, weld-free, wide setting range, removable terminals
3RA61
8/64
3RA62
8/65
3RA64 direct-on-line starters for IO-Link
3RA64
8/66
3RA65 reversing starters for IO-Link
3RA65
8/67
3RA69
8/68

reversing starters
Modular expandability, up to 100 A, terminals up to 70 mm2
3RA69
8/74
3RA68
8/76
For switching three-phase motors up to 3 kW (at 400 V) and resistive loads

up to 10 A at AC voltages up to 500 V under normal operating conditions
Space-saving design (22.5 mm wide)
Direct-on-line starting with solid-state overload protection
3RM10
8/89
Reversing functionality with solid-state overload protection
3RM12
8/90
As 3RM10 plus safety-related shutdown
3RM11
8/91
As 3RM12 plus safety-related shutdown
3RM13
8/92
Accessories for 3RM1 motor starters
3RM19 3-phase infeed system

Device connectors, push-in lugs for wall mounting, spare terminals for main
and control circuits
3RM19
3ZY1
8/93
ET 200S motor starters and safety motor starters

ET 200S motor starters
Completely factory-wired motor starters for switching and protecting any

AC loads, optionally as direct-on-line, reversing or soft starters

8/98
3RK1301
3RK1301
8/105
8/108
Power modules for ET 200S motor starters
For infeed and monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor starters
3RK19030BA00
8/111
High-Feature direct-on-line and reversing starters
3RK1301
8/113
Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters Mechanical modules in which the motor starter and expansion modules are
inserted
Safety modules local and PROFIsafe terminal modules
3RK1903
8/106
8/110
8/115
8/112
8/125
Safety modules local
For safety category SIL 3/PL e according to IEC 62061 or ISO 13849-1
3RK1903
8/116
Safety modules PROFIsafe
Sensor and actuator assignment are freely configurable

(distributed safety concept)
3RK1903
8/116
Interface modules
- With CPU
- With fail-safe CPU
- Without CPU
6ES7
6AG1
8/132
ET 200S I/O modules
Power modules, reserve modules, potential distributor modules, digital/analog

electronic modules
6ES7
6AG1
7MH4
8/140
8/127
Accessories
Technology modules: SSI modules, 2PULSE pulse generators, 1STEP step

modules, positioning modules, counter modules, 1 SI interface modules,
SIWAREX CS, SIMAREX CF, terminal modules for power and electronic
modules
F power and F electronic modules, F terminal modules
6ES7
6AG1
8/150
IO-Link 4SI and SIRIUS 4SI electronic modules
6ES7
3RK1
8/154
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/3
SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RA2 Load Feeders
General data
Overview
Behavior in the event of short circuit
3RA2 load feeders
EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) and IEC 60947-4-1 make a

distinction between two different types of coordination (types "1"
and "2"). Any short circuits that occur are cleared safely by both
types of coordination. The only differences concern the extent of
the damage caused to the device by a short circuit.
ToC
ToC
3RA22 reversing starters for snapping onto standard mounting rails or for
screw fixing with screw terminals
The 3RA2 fuseless load feeders consist of the 3RV2 motor

starter protector and the 3RT2 electromechanical contactor. The
devices are electrically and mechanically connected using preassembled assembly kits (link modules, wiring kits and standard
mounting rail or busbar adapters).
Around 500 preassembled 3RA2 combinations of these innovative 3RT2 controls and 3RV2 protection equipment can be
ordered for direct-on-line and reversing starting of standard
three-phase motors up to 32 A (approx.15 kW/400 V).
In the 3RA2 load feeder, the 3RV2 motor starter protector is
responsible for overload and short-circuit protection. Back-up
protective devices, such as melting fuses or limiters, are superfluous here, as the motor starter protector is short-circuit proof
up to 150 kA at 400 V.
The 3RT2 contactor is particularly suitable for extremely
complex switching tasks requiring the greatest endurance.
The 3RA2 load feeders are available with setting ranges from
0.14 to 32 A in sizes S00 and S0:
Size
The types of coordination are indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbols shown on orange
backgrounds.
Tripping times
All 3RA2 load feeders described here are designed for normal
starting, in other words for overload tripping times of less than
10 s (CLASS 10). At rated-load operating temperature the tripping times are shorter, depending on the particular equipment
and the setting range. The exact values can be derived from the
tripping characteristics of the motor starter protectors.
Connection methods
For all 3RA2 feeders up to 32 A, spring-type connection is available as well as screw terminals. To connect two devices with
spring-type terminals, there are plug-in connection modules for
sizes S00 and S0 which enable very quick mounting of the
feeders and a vibration-resistant assembly.
To connect a motor starter protector with screw terminals to a
contactor with spring-type terminals there are special hybrid
connection modules for the sizes S00 and S0.
Max. rated current For threeIn max

phase motors
up to
Screw terminals
mm
kW
45/90
16
7.5
S0
45/90
32
15
The terminals are indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbols shown on orange backgrounds.
The size of the 3RA2 load feeders is based on the size of the
contactor:
Size 3RA2
S00
S0
Size of 3RV2 motor starter protector
S00
S001), S0
Size of 3RT2 contactor
S00
S0
The combination of an S00 motor starter protector with an S0 contactor is

possible only for screw connection versions.
3RA2 load feeders are climate-proof. They are intended for use
in enclosed rooms in which no severe operating conditions
(such as dust, caustic vapors, hazardous gases) prevail.
Suitable covers must be provided for installation in dusty and
damp locations.
8/4

There must be no damage to the overload release or
to any other component after a short circuit has been
cleared. The load feeder can resume operation without needing to be renewed. At most, welding of the
contactor contacts is permissible if they can be disconnected easily without any significant deformation.
Width
Direct-on-line starters/
reversing starters
S00
1)

The load feeder may be non-operational after a short
circuit has been cleared. Damage to the contactor or
to the overload release is permissible.
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
The 3RA2 fuseless load feeders can be ordered as preassembled complete units for direct-on-line starting (3RA21) or for
reversing duty (3RA22) with screw or spring-type connection.
There are control supply voltages available of 50/60 Hz 230 V AC
and 24 V DC.
A distinction is also drawn between whether the feeder is
mounted onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, on a flat surface
using screws, or on a 60 mm busbar system.
3RA21 load feeders in the size S0 must be configured on standard mounting rail adapters if high vibration and shock loads
(railways, power generation,...) are involved.
A vibration and shock kit is available for mounting on busbar
adapters.
Accessories
As the 3RA2 fuseless load feeders are constructed from 3RV2
motor starter protectors and 3RT2 contactors, the same accessories such as auxiliary switches, undervoltage releases or
door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms can be used for
the 3RA2 fuseless load feeders as for these motor starter protectors and contactors.
In particular, certain accessories have been optimized for the
fuseless load feeders. They include the top-connected, transverse auxiliary switch on the motor starter protector, which is
available with 1 CO contact or 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact.
Special auxiliary switch blocks that can be snapped on from
below are available for the contactor. These two accessories
enable the fuseless load feeders to be wired simply without
having to route cables through the device.
Incoming energy supply
On the whole four different energy supply possibilities are
available (see "3RV29 Infeed System for Load Feeders" on 8/40).
Customer assembly of fuseless load feeders
While the preassembled 3RA2 load feeders can be ordered up
to 32 A, combinations up to 40 A (approx. 18.5 kW/400 V) are
possible for customer assembly without link modules.
The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders can be used for fuseless load
feeders between 32 A and 100 A.
The SENTRON 3VL circuit breakers and the SIRIUS 3RT
contactors are available for rated currents >100 A.
Special equipment for customer assembly can be ordered if
other rated control supply voltages are required. Assembly kits
can be used to facilitate assembly.
Customers can also assemble tested combinations of motor
starter protectors with solid-state controls (soft starters, solidstate contactors) and load feeders with additional monitoring
and control devices (3RR monitoring relays, SIMOCODE 3UF).
For the electrical and mechanical connection of protection
equipment and controls there are preassembled assembly kits
(link modules, wiring kits and standard mounting rail or busbar
adapters).
The following types of configuration are possible:
Direct-on-line/reversing starting
(see preassembled 3RA2 combinations)
Wye-delta starting (only customer assembly with link module)
Solid-state/soft starting (only customer assembly with link
module)
For more information and assignment tables for combinations of
the 3RA2 generation for self-assembly see the configuration
manual :
Self-assembly of fused load feeders
The flexible, modular system of SIRIUS also enables the
configuration of fused load feeders up to 40 A
(approx. 18.5 kW/400 V). Up to 32 A is also available for
45 mm installation widths.
3RA2 complete units
Compact 3NW7...-1 cylindrical fuse holders for IEC fuses

size 10 x 38 mm, or 3NW7...-1HG holders for Class CC UL fuses,
can be used for this purpose.
For more information about fuse systems, see Catalog LV 10
"Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation
Technology" "SENTRON Safety, Switching, Measuring and
Monitoring Devices".
The standard devices can be combined optimally in terms of

both technical specifications and dimensions, thanks to the
modular system of the SIRIUS series.
The fuseless load feeders can thus be assembled easily by the
customer. It is simply necessary to assemble the standard 3RV2
motor starter protector, the 3RT2 contactor and the appropriate
assembly kit.
For single devices and assembly kits see the "Selection and
ordering data" for 3RA21 direct-on-line starters and 3RA22
reversing starters.
For assembly kits for direct-on-line starting or reversing duty for
mounting onto standard mounting rails or busbars see "Selection
and ordering data" at "Accessories".
For reversing starters size S0 it is imperative to use a standard
mounting rail adapter in order to ensure the necessary mechanical strength. A standard mounting rail adapter is not necessary
if a busbar adapter is used.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/5
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Communications integration using IO-Link
Load feeders can also be assembled with IO-Link for connection
to the higher-level control system. For each feeder this requires
a communication-capable contactor onto which a 3RA2711
function module is plugged (various versions for direct-on-line,
reversing and wye-delta starters). The design of the SIRIUS load
feeders permits a group of up to 4 SIRIUS controls to be conveniently connected through the standardized open IO-Link system to a control system, thus reducing wiring work considerably
compared to the conventional parallel wiring method. The electrical connection is made using only three standard cables.
The function modules perform not only the communication
(contactor operation and feedback, ready signal) but also the
electrical interlocking (for reversing and wye-delta starters) and
the timing relay function (wye-delta reversing time).
Communication information and control supply voltages are
passed on through ribbon cables so that the complete control
current wiring on the feeder is no longer needed.
The monitoring and maintenance of a plant is made considerably easier by transmitting diverse diagnostics data from the
function modules (e.g. missing main and auxiliary voltage, local
disconnection) through IO-Link to the higher-level control
system. Also, feeders equipped for IO-Link can be conveniently
controlled from the control cabinet door using the optional
operator panel.
More information:
IO-Link see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication"
3RA27 function modules see Chapter 3 "Switching Devices
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies" "Function Modules".
Communications integration through AS-Interface
Connection of the load feeders to the higher-level control system
is possible not only through IO-Link but also through AS-Interface. The AS-Interface connection is recommended wherever
load feeders are used in distributed applications. This solution
also requires a communication-capable contactor and a corresponding 3RA2712 function module (various versions for directon-line, reversing and wye-delta starters). The devices are implemented in A/B technology, making it easy to connect up to
62 feeders to an AS-i master (regardless of whether they are
direct-on-line, reversing or wye-delta starters). This results in a
significant reduction of wiring compared to the conventional
parallel wiring method. The electrical connection is made using
standard cables.
8/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
The function modules perform not only the communication

(contactor operation and feedback, ready signal) but also the
electrical interlocking (for reversing and wye-delta starters) and
the timing relay function (wye-delta reversing time).
Communication information and control supply voltages are
passed on through ribbon cables so that the complete control
current wiring on the starter is no longer needed.
More information:
AS-Interface see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication"
3RA27 function modules see Chapter 3 "Switching Devices
Contactors and Contactor Assemblies" "Function Modules".
Contactors with communication interface
Contactors with a communication interface are required for
configuring load feeders with a communication interface
(AS-i/IO-Link). These contactors are not included as standard in
the preassembled 3RA2 load feeders. A load feeder with
communication interface must be assembled therefore from
single devices.
Complete integration in the automation landscape
As the result of the communication connection through IO-Link
or AS-i, the SIRIUS load feeders are fully integrated in the automation landscape and can draw on all the advantages of TIA
(e.g. integration in the TIA Maintenance Station).
Mounting
3RA2 fuseless load feeders can be supplied:
For assembly on TH 35 standard mounting rails according to
EN 60715 (depth 15 mm)
For assembly on busbar adapters (busbar center-to-center
clearance 60 mm, busbar thickness 5 to 10 mm with beveled
edges)
The fuseless load feeders are also suitable for screw fixing using
two 3RV2928-0B push-in lugs.
The 3RA2 fuseless load feeders can also be configured with the
3RV29 infeed system (see Chapter 7 "Protection Equipment"
"Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers"
"SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers
up to 40 A" "Accessories" "3RV29 Infeed System").
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Direct-on-line starting For standard rail mounting or screw fixing Sizes S00 and S0
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B
(only for screw
mounting)
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B
(only for screw
mounting)
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B
(only for screw
mounting)

Size S00/S0
Screw terminals

Size S00/S0

Size S00/S0
Screw terminals
Link module
3RA1921-1DA00
(for S00)
3RA2921-1AA00
(for S0, AC contactor)
3RA2921-1BA00
(for S0, DC contactor)
Link module
3RA2911-2AA00 for S00
3RA2921-2AA00 for S0
Link module
3RA2911-2FA00 for S00
3RA2921-2FA00 for S0
Contactor
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals
Contactor
Size S00/S0
Contactor
Size S00/S0
NSB0_02089a
Left:
3RA21 load feeder with screw terminals
Center: 3RA21 load feeder with spring-type terminals
Right: Motor starter protector combination with screw terminals, with contactor with spring-type terminals
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B
(only for screw mounting)
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B

Size S00/S0
Screw terminals

Size S00/S0
Screw terminals/
Link module
3RA2921-1BA00 for S00/S0 and screw terminals
3RA2911-2GA00 for S00 and spring-type terminals
3RA2921-2GA00 for S0 and spring-type terminals
Link module
3RA2921-1BA00
Solid-state
switching device
Soft starter
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals/
NSB0_02090a
Left:
Right:
Motor starter protector combination with solid-state switching device with screw terminals
Motor starter protector combination with soft starter with spring-type terminals
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/7
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Direct-on-line starting For 60 mm busbar systems Sizes S00 and S0
60 mm busbar adapter
for screw terminals
8US1251-5DS10 for S00
8US1251-5NT10 for S0
for spring-type terminals
8US1251-5DT11 for S00

Size S00/S0
Screw terminals
Size S00/S0
Link module
3RA1921-1DA00 for S00
3RA2921-1AA00 for S0, AC contactor
3RA2921-1BA00 for S0, DC contactor
Link module
3RA2911-2AA00 for S00
1)
Contactor
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals
Contactor
Size S00/S0
NSB0_02091b
1) Additional 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer
for height compensation on AC contactors

size S0 with spring-type terminals.
Left:
Right:
8/8
3RA21 load feeder for direct-on-line starting with busbar adapter with screw terminals
3RA21 load feeder for direct-on-line starting with busbar adapter with spring-type terminals
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Reversing duty For standard rail mounting or screw fixing Size S00
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B
2 push-in lugs
3RV2928-0B

Size S00
Screw terminals

Size S00
Link module
3RA1921-1DA00 for S00
Link module
3RA2911-2AA00 for S00
3
2 contactors
Size S00
Screw terminals
NSB0_02092b
2
Wiring kit
3RA2913-2AA1
1 Upper wiring module
2 Lower wiring module
3 2 connecting clips
(can be removed if necessary)
Left:
Right:
2 contactors
Size S00
Wiring kit
3RA2913-2AA2
3RA22 load feeder with screw terminals with push-in lugs with 2 contactors for reversing duty and
3RA2913-2AA1 wiring kit for connection of the contactors (incl. mechanical interlocking and connecting clips)
3RA22 load feeder with spring-type terminals with push-in lugs with 2 contactors for reversing duty and wiring kit
3RA2913-2AA2 (incl. mechanical interlocking and connecting clips)
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/9
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Reversing duty For standard rail mounting Size S0
RH assembly kit for reversing duty and
standard rail mounting in size S0
For screw terminals:
3RA2923-1BB1
For spring-type terminals:
3RA2923-1BB21)
Comprising:
1 wiring kit
2 standard mounting rail adapters
2 connecting wedges
1)
Also includes 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer for

height compensation on AC contactors size S0
with spring-type terminals.

Size S0
Screw terminals/
2 standard mounting
rail adapters
3RA2922-1AA00
with 2 connecting wedges
8US1998-1AA00
Link module
3RA2921-1AA00 (AC)
3RA2921-1BA00 (DC)
3RA2921-2AA00 2)
NSB0_02093c
3
2 contactors
Size S0
Screw terminals/
2)
Additional 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer

size S0 with spring-type terminals
3RA22 load feeder for reversing duty and standard rail mounting in size S0
(the version with screw terminals is shown in the picture)
8/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Wiring kit
3RA2923-2AA1
3RA2923-2AA2
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Reversing duty For 60 mm busbar systems Sizes S00 and S0
RS assembly kit for reversing duty and

busbar mounting
Screw connection:
3RA2913-1DB1 for S00
3RA2923-1DB1 for S0
For spring-type connection:
3RA2913-1DB2 for S00
3RA2923-1DB2 for S0 1)
Comprising:
1 wiring kit
1 busbar adapter
1 device holder
2 connecting wedges
1)
8US1251-5DS10 for S00
8US1251-5DT11 for S00
Also includes 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer


Size S00/S0
Screw terminals/
2 connecting wedges
8US1998-1AA00
Link module
3RA1921-1DA00 for S00
3RA2921-1AA00 for S0, AC contactor
3RA2921-1BA00 for S0, DC contactor
3RA2911-2AA00 for S00
2)
60 mm device holder
8US1251-5AS10
NSB0_02094c
3
2 contactors
Size S00/S0
Screw terminals/
2)
Additional 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer

Wiring kit
Screw connection:
3RA2923-2AA1 for S0
Spring-type connection:
3RA2923-2AA2 for S0
3RA22 load feeder for reversing duty and 60 mm busbar in size S00/S0
(the version with screw terminals is shown in the picture)
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/11
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Article No. scheme
SIRIUS feeders
1st - 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
@@@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
13th 14th 15th 16th
2
@
Type of feeder
(direct-on-line starter = 1, reversing starter = 2)
Size (S00 = 1, S0 = 2)
Design type and connection method

Rated power at 400 V AC
Integrated auxiliary switches of the contactor
Operating range/solenoid coil circuit (contactor)

Rated control supply voltage (contactor)
3RA
Example
3RA
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
The 3RA2 fuseless load feeders offer a number of benefits:
Minimum planning and assembly work and far less wiring with
the preassembled complete units (only one article number
3RA2)
Plug-in connectors from the motor starter protector to all types
of SIRIUS controls, for quicker and error-free assembly of
feeders with screw and spring-type connection
High planning reliability through consistent combination tests
for fuseless (400 V according to IEC) and fused configuration
(400 V, 500 V and 690 V according to IEC)
Comprehensive approvals for use world-wide on request, see
Chapter 16 "Appendix" "Standards and Approvals".
8/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
High operational reliability through short-circuit breaking

capacity of 150 kA with type of coordination "1" and "2"
Uniform accessories for the two sizes S00 and S0
Spring-type connection possible throughout:
Enhanced operational reliability (vibration-resistant wiring)
and less wiring work thanks to plug-in connections
Power loss 5 to 10 % smaller than for comparable devices,
hence lower energy consumption
Connection of feeders to the control system through
standardized system connection (IO-Link and AS-i),
for fast integration in TIA and less wiring work
Siemens AG 2013

General data
reversing starters
Size
Connection methods Mounting
Control voltage
Width W
Height H
Depth D
mm
mm
mm
Mounting dimensions
S00
3RA21.
3RA211.
Screw terminals
Standard mounting rails
AC/DC
45
167
97
Busbar adapters
AC/DC
45
200
155
AC/DC
45
198
97
Busbar adapters
AC/DC
45
260
155
AC
45
193
97
DC
45
193
107
AC
45
260
155
DC
45
260
165
AC/DC
45
243
107
Busbar adapters
AC/DC
45
260
165
AC/DC
90
170
97
Busbar adapters
AC/DC
90
200
155
AC/DC
90
204
97
Busbar adapters
AC/DC
90
260
155
Standard mounting rail

adapters
AC
90
265
120.3
DC
90
265
130
Busbar adapters
AC
90
260
155
DC
90
260
165
AC/DC
90
270
131
AC/DC
90
260
165
Spring-type terminals Standard mounting rails

S0
Screw terminals
Busbar adapters
3RA212.

Reversing starters
S00
3RA22.
3RA221.
Screw terminals

S0
Screw terminals
3RA222.
Spring-type terminals Standard mounting rail

adapters
Busbar adapters
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA2.1
S00
3
3RA2.2
S0
3
Direct-on-line starters

During operation
During storage and transport
C
C
-20 ... +60

-55 ... +80
Weight
kg
0.6 ... 1.5
0.8 ... 2.3
90
Shock resistance
Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Acc. to IEC 60947-1
90
NSB0_00369
22,5 22,5
Important: Acc. to DIN 43602 start command "I" at the right or top
g/ms 6/11 (sine pulse)
IP20
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/13
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA2.1
S00
3
3RA2.2
S0
3
Electrical specifications
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)

IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)

16
690
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
690
kV
Trip class (CLASS)
10
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1,

EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Rated short-circuit current Iq at 50/60 Hz 400 V AC

kA
according to IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
150
Types of coordination according to IEC 60947-4-1,

EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
See "Selection and ordering data"
Power loss Pv max of all main

current paths
Dependent on the rated current
In (upper setting range)
32
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
2
2.3
3.5
4.3
----
--
Up to 4 kW
5.5 ... 7.5 kW
Up to 5.5 kW
7.5 ... 15 kW
P.f.
VA
VA
VA
VA
27
37
--0.8
--65
77
0.82
Up to 4 kW
5.5 ... 7.5 kW
Up to 5.5 kW
7.5 ... 15 kW
P.f.
VA
VA
VA
VA
4.2
5.7
--0.25
--8.5
9.8
0.25
Closing =
Closed
5.9
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us

0.8 x Us
0.85 x Us
---
Up to 1.25 A
1.6 ... 6.3 A
8 ... 12 A
16 A
5 ... 6.3 A
8 ... 12 A
16 ... 32 A
---2.3
3.5
4.3
Power consumption of the solenoid coils for contactors

as a function of the standard output P of the motor
(when coil is cold and Us 50 Hz)
AC operation
- Closing
- Closed
DC operation
Magnetic coil operating range for contactors

Low limit at 55 C
At 60 C
Endurance of the motor starter protector
Operating cycles
Operating cycles
100 000
100 000
1/h
15
Endurance of contactor
Operating cycles
30 million
Operating cycles
See endurance characteristic curves of the contactors

Chapter 3 "Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor Assemblies"
10 million
Touch protection
Acc. to EN 50274
Finger-safe

of the motor starter protector
Acc. to IEC 60947-1,

EN 60947-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Yes
Isolating features

EN 60947-2
(VDE 0660 Part 101)
Yes
Main control and EMERGENCY-STOP switch characteristics of the motor starter

protector and accessories

EN 60204-1
(VDE 0113 Part 1)
Yes
(with overvoltage releases of category 1 under conditions of proper use)
Protective separation between Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N V

main and auxiliary circuits
Up to 400
Mirror contacts for contactors
Yes
8/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Yes, from main contact to

auxiliary NC contact
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Connection type
Screw terminals
Conductor cross-sections for main conductors

Size S00
Terminal screw
Motor starter protectors, contactors
M3, Pozidriv size 2
--
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
--
mm2
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.5 1.5)1) only for contactors,

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1),
max. 2 x 4
2 x (0.5 ... 4)
mm2
--
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeves (DIN 46 228 T1)
mm2
mm2
2x
2x
AWG
AWG
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1) only for contactors,

2 x (18 ... 14)1),
2 x 12
2 x (20 ... 12)
--
3.6
M4, Pozidriv size 2
--

Solid and stranded
Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation mm
(0.5 ... 1.5)1).

(0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
Conductor cross-sections for main conductors

Size S0
Terminal screw
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Nm
2.0 ... 2.5
--
Solid and stranded
mm2
mm2
2 x (1.0 ... 2.5)1),

2 x (2.5 ... 10)1)
2 x (1.0 ... 10)
mm2
--
2 x (1.0 ... 6.0)
Finely stranded with end sleeves (DIN 46 228 T1) mm2

mm2
mm2
2 x (1.0 ... 2.5)1),

2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
max. 1 x 10
2 x (1.0 ... 6.0)
2 x (16 ... 12)1),

2 x (14 ... 8)1)
2 x (18 ... 8)
--
3.6
Contactors (basic unit),

motor starter protectors (accessories),
contactors (mountable accessories),
overload relays
Contactors S00
AWG
AWG

Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary

conductors Size S00/S0
Contactors S0,
motor starter protectors
(accessories),
contactors
(accessories),
overload relays
M3, Pozidriv size 2
--
Operating devices
mm
5 ... 6
3.0 x 0.5 and 3.5 x 0.5
Nm
0.8 ... 1.2
--
Solid and stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1),
Max. 2 x 4 only for contactors S00
2 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
mm2
--
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
mm2
mm2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)1),

2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)1)
2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
AWG
AWG
AWG
2 x (20 ... 16)1),

2 x (18 ... 14)1),
2 x 12 only for contactors S00
2 x (20 ... 12)
2 x (20 ... 14)
--
3.6
3.6
Terminal screw


1)

point, both cross-sections must be in the range specified. If identical
cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/15
Siemens AG 2013

3RA21 direct-on-line starters for snapping onto
standard mounting rails or for screw fixing

Direct-on-line start
3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P
Screw fixing with 2 push-in lugs each per load feeder is

possible1)
The motor starter protector and contactor are mechanically and electrically connected by means of the link
module
Auxiliary switches2) on the motor starter protector and
the contactor can be easily fitted due to the modular
system.
Integrated auxiliary switches:
Contactor size S00: 1 NO,
contactor size S0: 1 NO + 1 NC
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
Consisting of the following
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)

50/60 Hz 230 V AC for S00, 50 Hz 230 V AC for S0
Motor starter + Contactor

protector
DT
+ Link
module
Fuseless load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU
Type of coordination "2" at Iq = 150 kA at 400 V

(compatible with type of coordination "1")
S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1AP01
19 21-1DA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-0BA15-1AP0
3RA2110-0CA15-1AP0
3RA2110-0DA15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0EA15-1AP0
3RA2110-0FA15-1AP0
3RA2110-0GA15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HA15-1AP0
3RA2110-0JA15-1AP0
3RA2110-0KA15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AA15-1AP0
3RA2110-1BA15-1AP0
3RA2110-1CA15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2110-1DA15-1AP0
3RA2110-1EA15-1AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1AP00
29 21-1AA00 A
A
A
A
A
3RA2120-1FA24-0AP0
3RA2120-1GA24-0AP0
3RA2120-1HA24-0AP0
3RA2120-1JA24-0AP0
3RA2120-1KA24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1AP00
A
B
3RA2120-4AA26-0AP0
3RA2120-4BA27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1AP00
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CA27-0AP0
3RA2120-4DA27-0AP0
3RA2120-4EA27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

(the motor starter protector is compatible with type of coordination "2")
S00
For load feeders for lower outputs, see this table at type of coordination "2".
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1AP01
19 21-1DA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-1FA15-1AP0
3RA2110-1GA15-1AP0
3RA2110-1HA15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1AP01
17-1AP01
18-1AP01
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JA16-1AP0
3RA2110-1KA17-1AP0
3RA2110-4AA18-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
Push-in lugs see "Accessories" on page 8/37.
2)
Auxiliary switches see "Accessories" on page 8/32.
3)
The actual starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be
considered when selecting the units.
8/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
module
system.
Contactor size S0: 1 NO + 1 NC
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)

With spring-type connection

protector
DT
+ Link
module
Fuseless load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA
15-2AP01
29 11-2AA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-0BE15-1AP0
3RA2110-0CE15-1AP0
3RA2110-0DE15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0EE15-1AP0
3RA2110-0FE15-1AP0
3RA2110-0GE15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HE15-1AP0
3RA2110-0JE15-1AP0
3RA2110-0KE15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AE15-1AP0
3RA2110-1BE15-1AP0
3RA2110-1CE15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2110-1DE15-1AP0
3RA2110-1EE15-1AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2AP00
29 21-2AA00 C
C
C
C
C
3RA2120-1FE24-0AP0
3RA2120-1GE24-0AP0
3RA2120-1HE24-0AP0
3RA2120-1JE24-0AP0
3RA2120-1KE24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
26-2AP00
A
B
3RA2120-4AE26-0AP0
3RA2120-4BE27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA20
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2AP00
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CE27-0AP0
3RA2120-4DE27-0AP0
3RA2120-4EE27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2AP01
29 11-2AA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-1FE15-1AP0
3RA2110-1GE15-1AP0
3RA2110-1HE15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2AP01
17-2AP01
18-2AP01
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JE16-1AP0
3RA2110-1KE17-1AP0
3RA2110-4AE18-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/17
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
module
system.
contactor size S0: 1 NO + 1 NC
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


protector
DT
+ Link
module
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1BB41
19 21-1DA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-0BA15-1BB4
3RA2110-0CA15-1BB4
3RA2110-0DA15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0EA15-1BB4
3RA2110-0FA15-1BB4
3RA2110-0GA15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HA15-1BB4
3RA2110-0JA15-1BB4
3RA2110-0KA15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AA15-1BB4
3RA2110-1BA15-1BB4
3RA2110-1CA15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2110-1DA15-1BB4
3RA2110-1EA15-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1BB40
29 21-1BA00 A
A
A
A
A
3RA2120-1FA24-0BB4
3RA2120-1GA24-0BB4
3RA2120-1HA24-0BB4
3RA2120-1JA24-0BB4
3RA2120-1KA24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1BB40
A
B
3RA2120-4AA26-0BB4
3RA2120-4BA27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1BB40
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CA27-0BB4
3RA2120-4DA27-0BB4
3RA2120-4EA27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1BB41
19 21-1DA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-1FA15-1BB4
3RA2110-1GA15-1BB4
3RA2110-1HA15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1BB41
17-1BB41
18-1BB41
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JA16-1BB4
3RA2110-1KA17-1BB4
3RA2110-4AA18-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
8/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
module
system.
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


protector
DT
+ Link
module
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA
15-2BB41
29 11-2AA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-0BE15-1BB4
3RA2110-0CE15-1BB4
3RA2110-0DE15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0EE15-1BB4
3RA2110-0FE15-1BB4
3RA2110-0GE15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HE15-1BB4
3RA2110-0JE15-1BB4
3RA2110-0KE15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AE15-1BB4
3RA2110-1BE15-1BB4
3RA2110-1CE15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2110-1DE15-1BB4
3RA2110-1EE15-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2BB40
29 21-2AA00 C
C
C
C
C
3RA2120-1FE24-0BB4
3RA2120-1GE24-0BB4
3RA2120-1HE24-0BB4
3RA2120-1JE24-0BB4
3RA2120-1KE24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
26-2BB40
A
B
3RA2120-4AE26-0BB4
3RA2120-4BE27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA20
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2BB40
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CE27-0BB4
3RA2120-4DE27-0BB4
3RA2120-4EE27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2BB41
29 11-2AA00 A
A
A
3RA2110-1FE15-1BB4
3RA2110-1GE15-1BB4
3RA2110-1HE15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2BB41
17-2BB41
18-2BB40
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JE16-1BB4
3RA2110-1KE17-1BB4
3RA2110-4AE18-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/19
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P
With busbar adapter

module
system.
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


protector
DT
+ Link
module
+ Busbar
adapter
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1AP01
19 21-1DA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DS10
A
3RA2110-0BD15-1AP0
3RA2110-0CD15-1AP0
3RA2110-0DD15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0ED15-1AP0
3RA2110-0FD15-1AP0
3RA2110-0GD15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HD15-1AP0
3RA2110-0JD15-1AP0
3RA2110-0KD15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AD15-1AP0
3RA2110-1BD15-1AP0
3RA2110-1CD15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2110-1DD15-1AP0
3RA2110-1ED15-1AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1AP00
29 21-1AA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DT10
A
A
A
3RA2120-1FD24-0AP0
3RA2120-1GD24-0AP0
3RA2120-1HD24-0AP0
3RA2120-1JD24-0AP0
3RA2120-1KD24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1AP00
3RA2120-4AD26-0AP0
3RA2120-4BD27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1AP00
29 21-1AA00 A
+ 8US12 51- B
5NT10
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CD27-0AP0
3RA2120-4DD27-0AP0
3RA2120-4ED27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1AP01
19 21-1DA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DS10
A
3RA2110-1FD15-1AP0
3RA2110-1GD15-1AP0
3RA2110-1HD15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1AP01
17-1AP01
18-1AP01
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JD16-1AP0
3RA2110-1KD17-1AP0
3RA2110-4AD18-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
8/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P
With busbar adapter

module
system.
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


protector
DT
+ Link
module
+ Busbar
adapter
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA
15-2AP01
29 11-2AA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DT11
A
3RA2110-0BH15-1AP0
3RA2110-0CH15-1AP0
3RA2110-0DH15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0EH15-1AP0
3RA2110-0FH15-1AP0
3RA2110-0GH15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HH15-1AP0
3RA2110-0JH15-1AP0
3RA2110-0KH15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AH15-1AP0
3RA2110-1BH15-1AP0
3RA2110-1CH15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2110-1DH15-1AP0
3RA2110-1EH15-1AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2AP00
29 21-2AA00 C
+ 8US12 51- C
5NT113)
C
C
C
3RA2120-1FH24-0AP0
3RA2120-1GH24-0AP0
3RA2120-1HH24-0AP0
3RA2120-1JH24-0AP0
3RA2120-1KH24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
26-2AP00
A
B
3RA2120-4AH26-0AP0
3RA2120-4BH27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA20
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2AP00
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CH27-0AP0
3RA2120-4DH27-0AP0
3RA2120-4EH27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2AP01
29 11-2AA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DT11
A
3RA2110-1FH15-1AP0
3RA2110-1GH15-1AP0
3RA2110-1HH15-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2AP01
17-2AP01
18-2AP01
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JH16-1AP0
3RA2110-1KH17-1AP0
3RA2110-4AH18-1AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
A 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer for height compensation on AC contactors size

S0 with spring-type terminals is included in the scope of supply.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/21
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P
With busbar adapter

module
system.
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


protector
DT
+ Link
module
+ Busbar
adapter
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1BB41
19 21-1DA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DS10
A
3RA2110-0BD15-1BB4
3RA2110-0CD15-1BB4
3RA2110-0DD15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0ED15-1BB4
3RA2110-0FD15-1BB4
3RA2110-0GD15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HD15-1BB4
3RA2110-0JD15-1BB4
3RA2110-0KD15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AD15-1BB4
3RA2110-1BD15-1BB4
3RA2110-1CD15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2110-1DD15-1BB4
3RA2110-1ED15-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1BB40
29 21-1BA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DT10
A
A
A
3RA2120-1FD24-0BB4
3RA2120-1GD24-0BB4
3RA2120-1HD24-0BB4
3RA2120-1JD24-0BB4
3RA2120-1KD24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1BB40
3RA2120-4AD26-0BB4
3RA2120-4BD27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1BB40
29 21-1BA00 A
+ 8US12 51- B
5NT10
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CD27-0BB4
3RA2120-4DD27-0BB4
3RA2120-4ED27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1BB41
19 21-1DA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DS10
A
3RA2110-1FD15-1BB4
3RA2110-1GD15-1BB4
3RA2110-1HD15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1BB41
17-1BB41
18-1BB41
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JD16-1BB4
3RA2110-1KD17-1BB4
3RA2110-4AD18-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
8/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
3RA2110
Size
Standard
output
P
With busbar adapter

module
system.
3RA2120
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Setting range
for thermal
single devices
overload release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


protector
DT
+ Link
module
+ Busbar
adapter
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA
15-2BB41
29 11-2AA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DT11
A
3RA2110-0BH15-1BB4
3RA2110-0CH15-1BB4
3RA2110-0DH15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
ToC
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0EH15-1BB4
3RA2110-0FH15-1BB4
3RA2110-0GH15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-0HH15-1BB4
3RA2110-0JH15-1BB4
3RA2110-0KH15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2110-1AH15-1BB4
3RA2110-1BH15-1BB4
3RA2110-1CH15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2110-1DH15-1BB4
3RA2110-1EH15-1BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2BB40
29 21-2AA00 C
+ 8US12 51- C
5NT11
C
C
C
3RA2120-1FH24-0BB4
3RA2120-1GH24-0BB4
3RA2120-1HH24-0BB4
3RA2120-1JH24-0BB4
3RA2120-1KH24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
26-2BB40
A
B
3RA2120-4AH26-0BB4
3RA2120-4BH27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA20
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2BB40
A
A
A
3RA2120-4CH27-0BB4
3RA2120-4DH27-0BB4
3RA2120-4EH27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

S00
ToC
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2BB41
29 11-2AA00 A
+ 8US12 51- A
5DT11
A
3RA2110-1FH15-1BB4
3RA2110-1GH15-1BB4
3RA2110-1HH15-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2BB41
17-2BB41
18-2BB40
A
A
A
3RA2110-1JH16-1BB4
3RA2110-1KH17-1BB4
3RA2110-4AH18-1BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/23
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

3RA22 reversing starters for snapping onto

Reversing duty
3RA2210
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
Without standard mounting rail adapter for size S00
With 2 standard mounting rail adapters for size S0 for
mechanical reinforcement (included in the scope of
supply)
module
system.
With the contactor S0, an integrated NO contact is still
available for free use.
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


single devices
Motor
starter
protectors
DT
+ 2 contac- + Link module

tors
+ Assembly kit
RH4)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1AP02
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-2AA1
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BA15-2AP0
3RA2210-0CA15-2AP0
3RA2210-0DA15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0EA15-2AP0
3RA2210-0FA15-2AP0
3RA2210-0GA15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HA15-2AP0
3RA2210-0JA15-2AP0
3RA2210-0KA15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AA15-2AP0
3RA2210-1BA15-2AP0
3RA2210-1CA15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2210-1DA15-2AP0
3RA2210-1EA15-2AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1AP00
A
A
A
A
A
3RA2220-1FB24-0AP0
3RA2220-1GB24-0AP0
3RA2220-1HB24-0AP0
3RA2220-1JB24-0AP0
3RA2220-1KB24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1AP00
A
B
3RA2220-4AB26-0AP0
3RA2220-4BB27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1AP00
A
A
A
3RA2220-4CB27-0AP0
3RA2220-4DB27-0AP0
3RA2220-4EB27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
29 21-1AA00
+ 29 23-1BB1

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1AP02
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1AP02
17-1AP02
18-1AP02
ToC
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-2AA1
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FA15-2AP0
3RA2210-1GA15-2AP0
3RA2210-1HA15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JA16-2AP0
3RA2210-1KA17-2AP0
3RA2210-4AA18-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
4)
RH = assembly kit for reversing duty and standard rail mounting in size S0.
8/24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Reversing duty
3RA2210
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
supply)
module
system.
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


single devices
Motor
starter
protector
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RH4)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA
15-2AP02
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-2AA2
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BE15-2AP0
3RA2210-0CE15-2AP0
3RA2210-0DE15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0EE15-2AP0
3RA2210-0FE15-2AP0
3RA2210-0GE15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HE15-2AP0
3RA2210-0JE15-2AP0
3RA2210-0KE15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AE15-2AP0
3RA2210-1BE15-2AP0
3RA2210-1CE15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2210-1DE15-2AP0
3RA2210-1EE15-2AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2AP00
C
C
C
C
C
3RA2220-1FF24-0AP0
3RA2220-1GF24-0AP0
3RA2220-1HF24-0AP0
3RA2220-1JF24-0AP0
3RA2220-1KF24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
11
15.5
15.5
22
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
21-4CA20
26-2AP00
A
B
A
3RA2220-4AF26-0AP0
3RA2220-4BF27-0AP0
3RA2220-4CF27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11
15
22
29
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2AP00
A
A
3RA2220-4DF27-0AP0
3RA2220-4EF27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
29 21-2AA00
+ 29 23-1BB25)

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2AP02
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2AP02
17-2AP02
18-2AP02
ToC
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-2AA2
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FE15-2AP0
3RA2210-1GE15-2AP0
3RA2210-1HE15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JE16-2AP0
3RA2210-1KE17-2AP0
3RA2210-4AE18-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
The RH assembly kit also includes the 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer for height
compensation on AC contactors size S0 with spring-type terminals.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/25
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

Reversing duty
3RA2210
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
supply)
module
system.
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


single devices
Motor
starter
protector
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RH4)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1BB42
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-2AA1
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BA15-2BB4
3RA2210-0CA15-2BB4
3RA2210-0DA15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0EA15-2BB4
3RA2210-0FA15-2BB4
3RA2210-0GA15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HA15-2BB4
3RA2210-0JA15-2BB4
3RA2210-0KA15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AA15-2BB4
3RA2210-1BA15-2BB4
3RA2210-1CA15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2210-1DA15-2BB4
3RA2210-1EA15-2BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1BB40
A
A
A
A
A
3RA2220-1FB24-0BB4
3RA2220-1GB24-0BB4
3RA2220-1HB24-0BB4
3RA2220-1JB24-0BB4
3RA2220-1KB24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1BB40
A
B
3RA2220-4AB26-0BB4
3RA2220-4BB27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1BB40
A
A
A
3RA2220-4CB27-0BB4
3RA2220-4DB27-0BB4
3RA2220-4EB27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
29 21-1BA00
+ 29 23-1BB1

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1BB42
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1BB42
17-1BB42
18-1BB42
ToC
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-2AA1
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FA15-2BB4
3RA2210-1GA15-2BB4
3RA2210-1HA15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JA16-2BB4
3RA2210-1KA17-2BB4
3RA2210-4AA18-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
4)
8/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Reversing duty
3RA2210
Size
Standard
output
P

possible1)
supply)
module
system.
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


single devices
Motor
starter
protector
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RH4)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA29
15-2BB42
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-2AA2
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BE15-2BB4
3RA2210-0CE15-2BB4
3RA2210-0DE15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0EE15-2BB4
3RA2210-0FE15-2BB4
3RA2210-0GE15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HE15-2BB4
3RA2210-0JE15-2BB4
3RA2210-0KE15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AE15-2BB4
3RA2210-1BE15-2BB4
3RA2210-1CE15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2210-1DE15-2BB4
3RA2210-1EE15-2BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2BB40
C
C
C
C
C
3RA2220-1FF24-0BB4
3RA2220-1GF24-0BB4
3RA2220-1HF24-0BB4
3RA2220-1JF24-0BB4
3RA2220-1KF24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
26-2BB40
A
B
3RA2220-4AF26-0BB4
3RA2220-4BF27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA20
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2BB40
A
A
A
3RA2220-4CF27-0BB4
3RA2220-4DF27-0BB4
3RA2220-4EF27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
29 21-2AA00
+ 29 23-1BB2

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2BB42
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2BB42
17-2BB42
18-2BB42
ToC
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-2AA2
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FE15-2BB4
3RA2210-1GE15-2BB4
3RA2210-1HE15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JE16-2BB4
3RA2210-1KE17-2BB4
3RA2210-4AE18-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
4)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/27
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
Reversing duty
3RA2210
Size
Standard
output
P
With busbar adapter and device holder (included in the

scope of supply)
module
system.
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


single devices
Motor
starter
protector
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RS3)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1AP02
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-1DB1
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BD15-2AP0
3RA2210-0CD15-2AP0
3RA2210-0DD15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0ED15-2AP0
3RA2210-0FD15-2AP0
3RA2210-0GD15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HD15-2AP0
3RA2210-0JD15-2AP0
3RA2210-0KD15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AD15-2AP0
3RA2210-1BD15-2AP0
3RA2210-1CD15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2210-1DD15-2AP0
3RA2210-1ED15-2AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1AP00
A
A
A
A
A
3RA2220-1FD24-0AP0
3RA2220-1GD24-0AP0
3RA2220-1HD24-0AP0
3RA2220-1JD24-0AP0
3RA2220-1KD24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1AP00
A
B
3RA2220-4AD26-0AP0
3RA2220-4BD27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1AP00
A
A
A
3RA2220-4CD27-0AP0
3RA2220-4DD27-0AP0
3RA2220-4ED27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
29 21-1AA00
+ 29 23-1DB1

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1AP02
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1AP02
17-1AP02
18-1AP02
ToC
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-1DB1
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FD15-2AP0
3RA2210-1GD15-2AP0
3RA2210-1HD15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JD16-2AP0
3RA2210-1KD17-2AP0
3RA2210-4AD18-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
RS = assembly kit for reversing duty and busbar mounting
8/28
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
Reversing duty
3RA2210
Size
Standard
output
P

scope of supply)
module
system.
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)


single devices
Motor
starter
protectors
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RS3)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA
15-2AP02
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-1DB2
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BH15-2AP0
3RA2210-0CH15-2AP0
3RA2210-0DH15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0EH15-2AP0
3RA2210-0FH15-2AP0
3RA2210-0GH15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HH15-2AP0
3RA2210-0JH15-2AP0
3RA2210-0KH15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AH15-2AP0
3RA2210-1BH15-2AP0
3RA2210-1CH15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2210-1DH15-2AP0
3RA2210-1EH15-2AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2AP00
C
C
C
C
C
3RA2220-1FH24-0AP0
3RA2220-1GH24-0AP0
3RA2220-1HH24-0AP0
3RA2220-1JH24-0AP0
3RA2220-1KH24-0AP0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
11
15.5
15.5
22
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
17 ... 22
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
21-4CA20
26-2AP00
A
B
A
3RA2220-4AH26-0AP0
3RA2220-4BH27-0AP0
3RA2220-4CH27-0AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11
15
22
29
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2AP00
A
A
3RA2220-4DH27-0AP0
3RA2220-4EH27-0AP0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
29 21-2AA00
+ 29 23-1DB24)

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2AP02
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2AP02
17-2AP02
18-2AP02
ToC
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-1DB2
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FH15-2AP0
3RA2210-1GH15-2AP0
3RA2210-1HH15-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JH16-2AP0
3RA2210-1KH17-2AP0
3RA2210-4AH18-2AP0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
4)
The RS assembly kit also includes the 3RA2911-1CA00 spacer for height
compensation on AC contactors size S0 with spring-type terminals.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/29
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
Reversing duty


scope of supply)
module
system.
3RA2210
Size
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Standard
output
P
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)

single devices
Motor
starter
protectors
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RS3)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S00
S0
3RV20
3RT20
3RA
15-1BB42
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-1DB1
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA10
11-0CA10
11-0DA10
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BD15-2BB4
3RA2210-0CD15-2BB4
3RA2210-0DD15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA10
11-0FA10
11-0GA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0ED15-2BB4
3RA2210-0FD15-2BB4
3RA2210-0GD15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA10
11-0JA10
11-0KA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HD15-2BB4
3RA2210-0JD15-2BB4
3RA2210-0KD15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA10
11-1BA10
11-1CA10
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AD15-2BB4
3RA2210-1BD15-2BB4
3RA2210-1CD15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA10
11-1EA10
A
A
3RA2210-1DD15-2BB4
3RA2210-1ED15-2BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
24-1BB40
A
A
A
A
A
3RA2220-1FD24-0BB4
3RA2220-1GD24-0BB4
3RA2220-1HD24-0BB4
3RA2220-1JD24-0BB4
3RA2220-1KD24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA10
21-4BA10
26-1BB40
A
B
3RA2220-4AD26-0BB4
3RA2220-4BD27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA10
21-4DA10
21-4EA10
27-1BB40
A
A
A
3RA2220-4CD27-0BB4
3RA2220-4DD27-0BB4
3RA2220-4ED27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
29 21-1BA00
+ 29 23-1DB1

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA10
11-1GA10
11-1HA10
15-1BB42
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA10
11-1KA10
11-4AA10
16-1BB42
17-1BB42
18-1BB42
ToC
19 21-1DA00
+ 29 13-1DB1
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FD15-2BB4
3RA2210-1GD15-2BB4
3RA2210-1HD15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JD16-2BB4
3RA2210-1KD17-2BB4
3RA2210-4AD18-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)
8/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for 60 mm busbars
Reversing duty


scope of supply)
module
system.
3RA2210
Size
3RA2220
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Standard
output
P
Setting range
for thermal
overload
release
Motor
current
I (guide
value)

single devices
Motor
starter
protectors
DT

tors
+ Assembly kit
RS3)/Wiring kit
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
kW
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Basic
price
per PU

S0
3RT20
3RA29
15-2BB42
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-1DB2
0.06
0.06
0.09
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.14 ... 0.2

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
11-0BA20
11-0CA20
11-0DA20
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.28 ... 0.4

0.35 ... 0.5
0.45 ... 0.63
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.6
0.85
1.1
0.55
0.75
0.75
ToC
A
A
A
3RA2210-0BH15-2BB4
3RA2210-0CH15-2BB4
3RA2210-0DH15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
11-0EA20
11-0FA20
11-0GA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0EH15-2BB4
3RA2210-0FH15-2BB4
3RA2210-0GH15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
0.55 ... 0.8

0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
11-0HA20
11-0JA20
11-0KA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-0HH15-2BB4
3RA2210-0JH15-2BB4
3RA2210-0KH15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.5
1.9
1.9
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2
1.8 ... 2.5
11-1AA20
11-1BA20
11-1CA20
A
A
A
3RA2210-1AH15-2BB4
3RA2210-1BH15-2BB4
3RA2210-1CH15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
1.1
1.5
2.7
3.6
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4
11-1DA20
11-1EA20
A
A
3RA2210-1DH15-2BB4
3RA2210-1EH15-2BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
3.6
4.9
6.5
8.5
11.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
21-1FA20
21-1GA20
21-1HA20
21-1JA20
21-1KA20
24-2BB40
C
C
C
C
C
3RA2220-1FH24-0BB4
3RA2220-1GH24-0BB4
3RA2220-1HH24-0BB4
3RA2220-1JH24-0BB4
3RA2220-1KH24-0BB4
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
7.5
7.5
15.5
15.5
11 ... 16
14 ... 20
21-4AA20
21-4BA20
26-2BB40
A
B
3RA2220-4AH26-0BB4
3RA2220-4BH27-0BB4
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
11
11
15
22
22
29
17 ... 22
20 ... 25
27 ... 32
21-4CA20
21-4DA20
21-4EA20
27-2BB40
A
A
A
3RA2220-4CH27-0BB4
3RA2220-4DH27-0BB4
3RA2220-4EH27-0BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
29 21-2AA00
+ 29 23-1DB2

S00
S00
1.5
2.2
3
3.6
4.9
6.5
3.5 ... 5
4.5 ... 6.3
5.5 ... 8
11-1FA20
11-1GA20
11-1HA20
15-2BB42
4
5.5
7.5
8.5
11.5
15.5
7 ... 10
9 ... 12.5
11 ... 16
11-1JA20
11-1KA20
11-4AA20
16-2BB42
17-2BB42
18-2BB42
ToC
29 11-2AA00
+ 29 13-1DB2
A
A
A
3RA2210-1FH15-2BB4
3RA2210-1GH15-2BB4
3RA2210-1HH15-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
A
A
A
3RA2210-1JH16-2BB4
3RA2210-1KH17-2BB4
3RA2210-4AH18-2BB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D

1)
2)
3)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/31
S00
3RV20
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
The accessories listed here are parts and add-ons for the
3RA2 direct-on-line and reversing starters as well as components for the customer assembly of fuseless load feeders.

Accessories for motor starter protectors
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41E
3RV2901-1E
3RV2901-2E
Version
3RV2901-1A
For motor starter protectors
3RV2901-2A
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size
Auxiliary switches
for front mounting
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC
S00/S0
}
}
3RV2901-1D
3RV2901-1E
-3RV2901-2E
3RV2901-1A
3RV2901-2A

1 NO + 1 NC
1)
S00/S0
lateral auxiliary switch. The lateral auxiliary switch with 2 NO + 2 NC is
used without a transverse auxiliary switch.
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41E
3RV2902-1A..
3RV2902-2A..

AC
50 Hz
AC
60 Hz
AC
50/60 Hz
100 %
ON period1)
For motor starter protectors
DT
AC/DC
50/60 Hz,
DC
5s
ON period2)
V
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Size
Auxiliary releases for motor starter protectors3)

230
240
Shunt releases
---
--
--
S00/S0
3RV2902-1AP0
3RV2902-2AP0
210 ... 240
190 ... 330
S00/S0
3RV2902-1DP0
3RV2902-2DP0
1)
The voltage range is valid for 100 % (infinite) ON period.

2)
The voltage range is valid for 5 s ON period at AC 50/60 Hz and DC. The
response voltage lies at 0.85 of the lower limit of the voltage range.
3)
One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right per motor starter protector (does not apply to 3RV21 motor starter protectors with overload relay
function).
8/32
Siemens IC 10 2014
Complete range of accessories for the motor starter protectors

see Chapter 7 "Protection Equipment" "Motor Starter
Protectors/Circuit Breakers" "SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter
Protectors/Circuit Breakers up to 40 A" "Accessories".

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For contactors
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
Auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front of contactors

Screw terminals
Cable entry from below
S00/S0
1-pole
- 1 NO
- 1 NC
3RH2911-1BA..
S00/S0
}
}
3RH2911-1BA10
3RH2911-1BA01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
}
}
3RH2911-1MA11
3RH2911-1MA20
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
2-pole
- 1 NO + 1 NC
- 2 NO
3RH2911-1MA..
Auxiliary switch blocks for contactors, for lateral mounting

Screw terminals
2 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
A
A
A
3RH2911-1DA02
3RH2911-1DA11
3RH2911-1DA20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S0
S0
S0
2 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
A
A
A
3RH2921-1DA02
3RH2921-1DA11
3RH2921-1DA20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
Spring-type
terminals
S00
S00
S00
2 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
A
A
A
3RH2911-2DA02
3RH2911-2DA11
3RH2911-2DA20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
S0
S0
S0
2 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
A
A
A
3RH2921-2DA02
3RH2921-2DA11
3RH2921-2DA20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
3RH2911-2DA..

(can be used only for direct-on-line starters)
Screw terminals
Adapters for contactors
Ambient temperature Tu max = 60 C
3RT1926-4RD01
S00

at AC-3/400 V: 20 A
3RT1916-4RD01
1 unit
41B
S0

at AC-3/400 V: 25 A
3RT1926-4RD01
1 unit
41B
3RT1900-4RE01
1 unit
41B
Plugs for contactors

S00, S0
--
3RT1900-4RE01
Complete range of accessories for the contactors see

Chapter 3 "Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor
Assemblies" "Accessories and Spare Parts".

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/33
3RH2911-1DA..
S00
S00
S00
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For
contactors
Version
Type
Rated control supply DT

voltage Us1)
Article No.2)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Surge suppressors without LED for contactors

Size S00
For plugging onto the front side of the contactors with and
without auxiliary switch blocks
3RT2.
3RT2.
Varistors
RC elements
3RT2916-1B.00
24 ... 48 AC,
24 ... 70 DC
3RT2916-1BB00
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 AC,

150 ... 250 DC
3RT2916-1BD00
1 unit
41B
24 ... 48 AC,
24 ... 70 DC
3RT2916-1CB00
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 AC,

150 ... 250 DC
3RT2916-1CD00
1 unit
41B
3RT2.
Noise suppression
diodes
12 ... 250 DC
3RT2916-1DG00
1 unit
41B
3RT2.
Diode assemblies
(diode and Zener
diode)
for DC operation and
short break times
12 ... 250 DC
3RT2916-1EH00
1 unit
41B
24 ... 48 AC,
24 ... 70 DC
3RT2926-1BB00
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 AC,

150 ... 250 DC
3RT2926-1BD00
1 unit
41B
24 ... 48 AC,
24 ... 70 DC
3RT2926-1CB00
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 AC,

150 ... 250 DC
3RT2926-1CD00
1 unit
41B
24 DC
3RT2926-1ER00
1 unit
41B
30 ... 250 DC
3RT2926-1ES00
1 unit
41B
Size S0
3RT202
3RT202
Varistors
RC elements
3RT2926-1E.00
3RT202
Diode assemblies
for DC operation and
short break times
1)
voltages.
2)
Article No.
8/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Accessories for the customer assembly of fuseless load feeders
For
motor starter
protectors
For
contactors
Size
Size
contactor
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules from motor starter protector to contactor2)

Electrical and mechanical link between
motor starter protector and contactor
Screw terminals
S00/S0
S00/S0
S00/S0
S00
S0
S0
AC and DC
AC
DC
}
A
A
3RA1921-1DA00
3RA2921-1AA00
3RA2921-1BA00
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
AC and DC
AC
DC
}
A
A
3RA1921-1D
3RA2921-1A
3RA2921-1B
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
41B
3RA2921-1AA00
S00/S0
S00/S0
S00/S0
S00
S0
S0
3RA2921-1BA00
Electrical and mechanical link between
motor starter protector and contactor
Spring-type
terminals
S00
S0
S00
S0
AC and DC
AC1) and DC
3RA2911-2AA00
3RA2921-2AA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
AC and DC
AC1) and DC
}
}
3RA2911-2A
3RA2921-2A
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
AC and DC
AC1) and DC
}
}
3RA2911-2FA00
3RA2921-2FA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
AC and DC
AC1) and DC
}
}
3RA2911-2F
3RA2921-2F
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
3RA2911-2AA00
S00
S0
S00
S0
Hybrid link modules from motor starter protector to contactor2)3)
Electrical and mechanical link between motor starter

protector with screw terminals and contactor with spring-type
terminals
S00
S0
S00
S0
3RA2911-2FA00
S00
S0
S00
S0
3RA2921-2FA00
Note:
1)
Link modules and hybrid link modules up to max. 32 A can be

used.
A spacer for height compensation on AC contactors with spring-type

terminals, size S0, is optionally available, see page 8/39.
2)
The link modules from motor starter protector to contactor and the hybrid
link modules from motor starter protector to contactor cannot be used for
the 3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter
3)
The motor starter protector to contactor hybrid link modules are only
suitable for constructing direct-on-line starters.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/35
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For
motor starter protectors
For
soft starters
Size
Size
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Link modules from motor starter protector to soft starter1)

protector and soft starter
Screw terminals
S00/S0
S00/S0
3RA2921-1BA00
1 unit
41B
S00/S0
3RA2921-1B
1 10 units
41B
S00/S0
3RA2921-1BA00
protector and soft starter
Spring-type
terminals
S00
S0
S00
S0
}
}
3RA2911-2GA00
3RA2921-2GA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
S00
}
}
3RA2911-2G
3RA2921-2G
1 10 units
1 10 units
41B
41B
3RA2921-2GA00
S00
S0
1)
Note:
The link modules for motor starter protector to soft starter cannot be used
for the 3RV2.21-4PA1., 3RV2.21-4FA1., 3RV27 and 3RV28 motor starter
For
Version
contactors
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Size
Wiring kits for contactors
Screw terminals
S00
S0
Reversing duty
Electrical and mechanical link for reversing
contactors, optionally with integrated
electrical and mechanical interlock
}
}
3RA2913-2AA1
3RA2923-2AA1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Wye-delta starting
Electrical and mechanical link for three
contactors of same size
}
}
3RA2913-2BB1
3RA2923-2BB1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
3RA2923-2AA1
S00
S0
3RA2923-2BB1
Spring-type
terminals
S00
S0
3RA2923-2AA2
S00
S0
Reversing duty
Electrical and mechanical link for reversing
contactors, optionally with integrated
electrical and mechanical interlock
}
}
3RA2913-2AA2
3RA2923-2AA2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Wye-delta starting
Electrical and mechanical link for three
contactors of same size
}
}
3RA2913-2BB2
3RA2923-2BB2
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Safety main current connectors for 2 contactors

Switches 2 contactors in series
S00
S0
Screw terminals
A
A
3RA2916-1A
3RA2926-1A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
8US1998-7CB45
1 10 units
14O
3RA2916-1A
Mounting rails for mounting contactors for the customer assembly

of 3RA21 load feeders with busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
For the discrete configuration of direct-on-line starters a
further mounting rail is needed for the contactor in addition to the mounting rail existing on the busbar adapter.
S0
For pushing onto the busbar adapter,

including fixing screws
8US1998-7CB45
8/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For
motor
starter
protectors
For
Version
contactors
Size
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Standard mounting rail adapters

For mechanical fixing of motor
starter protector and contactor; for
snapping onto standard mounting
rail or for screw fixing
S00, S0
S00, S0
3RA2922-1AA00
1 unit
41B
S00, S0
S00, S0
3RA2922-1A
5 units
41B
For standard mounting rail

}
adapters
10 mm wide,
96 mm long,
for widening standard mounting
rail adapters when using lateral
auxiliary switches, 2 units required
3RA1902-1B
1 10 units
41B
1 unit
41B
1 unit
41B
100 10 units
41E
3RA2922-1AA00
Side modules for standard mounting rail adapters

S00/S0
S00/S0
3RA1902-1B
RH assembly kits for reversing duty and standard rail mounting in size S0
RH assembly kits for screw terminals
S0
Comprising:
Wiring kit
2 standard mounting rail
adapters
2 connecting wedges
3RA2923-1BB1
S0
Screw terminals
Link modules must be ordered

separately.
RH assembly kits for spring-type terminals
Spring-type
terminals
3RA2923-1BB1
S0
S0
Comprising:
Wiring kit
2 standard mounting rail
adapters
2 connecting wedges
Spacers
3RA2923-1BB2

separately.
Push-in lugs for screw fixing

S00, S0
--
For screwing the motor starter

A
protector (of the load feeder) onto
mounting plates; 2 units are
required for each motor starter
protector
3RV2928-0B
3RV2928-0B

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/37
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar adapters
8US1251-5DS10
8US1251-5DT11
8US1250-5AS10
8US1250-5AT10
For load feeders
Rated
current
Connecting
cable
Adapter
length
Adapter
width
Rated voltage DT
Size
AWG
mm
mm
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

For load feeders with screw terminals
Screw terminals
S00/S0
25
12
200
45
690
8US1251-5DS10
1 unit
14O
S00 (motor starter

protector)/S0 (contactor)
25
12
260
45
690
8US1251-5DT10
1 unit
14O
S0
32
10
260
45
690
8US1251-5NT10
1 unit
14O
For load feeders with spring-type terminals
S00
25
12
200
45
690
8US1251-5DS11
1 unit
14O
S00/S0
25
12
260
45
690
8US1251-5DT11
1 unit
14O
S0
32
10
260
45
690
8US1251-5NT11
1 unit
14O
Device holders
for lateral attachment to
busbar adapters
--
--
200
45
--
8US1250-5AS10
1 unit
14O
--
--
260
45
--
8US1250-5AT10
1 unit
14O
Side modules
for widening
busbar adapters
--
--
200
--
8US1998-2BJ10
1 10 units
14O
Spacers
For fixing the load feeder
onto the busbar adapter
--
--
--
--
--
8US1998-1BA10
1 10 units
14O
Vibration and shock kits

For high vibration and
shock loads
--
--
--
--
--
8US1998-1CA10
2 unit
14O
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Accessories1)
1)
Additional mounting rails for busbar adapter see page 8/36.

For motor
starter
protectors
For
Version
contactors
Size
Size
Price
per PU
RS assembly kits for reversing duty for 60 mm busbar systems

RS assembly kits for screw terminals
S00, S0
S0
S00
S00
S0
S0
Comprising:
Wiring kit
Busbar adapters
Device holders
2 connecting wedges
Screw terminals
A
A
A
3RA2913-1DB1
3RA2923-1DB1
3RA2923-1EB1

separately.
RS assembly kits for spring-type terminals

S00
S0
S00
S0
Comprising:
Wiring kit
Busbar adapters
Device holders
2 connecting wedges
Spacers
A
A
3RA2913-1DB2
3RA2923-1DB2

separately.
8/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For motor
starter
protectors
For
Version
contactors
Size
Size
DT
Article No.
8US1998-1AA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
100 100 units
14O
Connecting wedges
For mechanical linking of busbar adapters and
device holders or of standard mounting rail adapters
(2 units per combination required)
8US1998-1AA00
Spacers
For height compensation on AC contactors size S0 with
S0
S0
3RA2911-1CA00
1 unit
41B
S0
S0
3RA2911-1C
5 units
41B
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
100 340 units
41B
3RA2911-1CA00
Version
Price
per PU

Screwdrivers
A
3RA2908-1A

for SIRIUS devices
20 mm x 7 mm,
titanium gray
3RT2900-1SB20
3RA2908-1A

3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
partially insulated
IC01_00181
Blank labels
3RT2900-1SB20
Documentation
Configuration manuals for new combinations of load
feeders2)
Information and assignment tables for combinations for
self-assembly
1)

www.murrplastik.de
2)
See http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/39
Siemens AG 2013

3RV29 infeed system for load feeders
Overview
Types of infeed for 3RA2 fuseless load feeders
8US busbar adapters for 60 mm systems
On the whole four different power infeed possibilities are

available:
Parallel wiring
Use of three-phase busbars (combination with SIRIUS motor
starter protectors and contactors possible)
8US busbar adapters
The load feeders are mounted directly with the aid of busbar
adapters on busbar systems with 60 mm center-to-center clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times and
costs.
Insulated three-phase busbar systems

clearly arranged means of feeding 3RA2 load feeders with
screw terminals. Different versions are available for sizes S00
and S0 and can also be used for the various different types of
motor starter protectors.
The busbar adapters for busbar systems with 60 mm center-tocenter clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of
12 to 30 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm thick.
The feeders are snapped onto the adapter and connected on
the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged directly onto the
busbar system, and is thus connected both mechanically and
electrically at the same time.
"Selection and ordering data" see page 8/38.
The busbars are suitable for between 2 and 5 feeders. However,

any kind of extension is possible by clamping the tags of an
additional busbar (rotated by 180) underneath the terminals of
the respective last motor starter protector.
A combination of feeders of different sizes is possible with sizes
S00 and S0. Connecting pieces are available for this purpose.
The motor starter protectors/circuit breakers are supplied by
appropriate infeed terminals.
3RV2925-5AB
NSB0_02080
3RV1915-1CB
NSB0_02079b
3RV2915-5B
3RV1915-6AB
SIRIUS three-phase busbar system size S00/S0
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe. They are

designed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the
output side of connected motor starter protectors.
"Type E Starters" of size S0 or S2 according to UL/CSA. Special
infeed terminals must be used for this purpose, see Chapter 7
"Protection Equipment" "Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
Breakers" "SIRIUS 3RV2 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
Breakers up to 40 A" "Accessories" "Busbar Accessories".
8/40
Siemens IC 10 2014

The 3RV29 infeed system is a convenient means of energy supply and distribution for a group of several motor starter protectors or complete load feeders with a screw or spring-type connection up to size S0.
The system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral
incoming unit (three-phase busbar with infeed) which has two
slots.
Expansion modules are available for extending the system
(three-phase busbars for system expansion).
3RV29 infeed system see Chapter 7 "Protection Equipment"
"Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers"
up to 40 A" "Accessories".
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Note:
The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders, including sizes S00 and S0,
can be found
in the Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014 at the Information and
Download Center
The 3RA1 fuseless load feeders consist of the 3RV1 motor
starter protector and the 3RT1 contactor. Motor starter protectors
and contactors are electrically and mechanically connected
using pre-assembled assembly kits (link modules, wiring kits
As the 3RA1 fuseless load feeders are constructed from
3RV1 motor starter protectors and 3RT1 contactors, the same
accessories can be used for the 3RA1 fuseless load feeders as
for these motor starter protectors and contactors.
Pre-assembled link modules are available as accessories for the
power spectrum up to 45 kW. The desired fuseless load feeder
can thus be assembled quickly and economically by the
customer. A time saving is also achieved in connection with
switchgear acceptances, as unlike with conventional wiring
systems there is no need to rectify possible wiring errors.
The 3RV1 motor starter protector is responsible for overload and
short-circuit protection in the fuseless load feeder. Back-up
protective devices, such as melting fuses or limiters, are superfluous here, as the circuit breaker is capable of withstanding
short circuits of up to 50 or 100 kA at 400 V.
The 3RT1 contactor is particularly suitable for extremely
complex switching tasks requiring the greatest endurance.
The permissible ambient temperature is 60 C with buttmounting and without derating (70 C possible subject to certain
restrictions).
3RA1 fuseless load feeders are available for motors up to 45 kW
at AC-3 and 400 V (grounded network) and setting ranges from
0.14 A to 100 A.
More information and assignment tables for self-assembly

combinations for 400 V, 440 V, 480 V, 500 V, 550 V and 690 V see
the configuration manual "Configuring SIRIUS Selection Data
for Fuseless Load Feeders", page 8/53 or
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241/0.
3RA1 load feeders are climate-proof. They are intended for use
in enclosed rooms in which no severe operating conditions
(such as dust, caustic vapors, hazardous gases) prevail.
Suitable covers must be provided for installation in dusty and
damp locations.
Overload tripping times
All 3RA1 fuseless load feeders described here are designed for
normal starting, in other words for overload tripping times of less
than 10 s (CLASS 10). At rated-load operating temperature the
tripping times are shorter, depending on the particular equipment and the setting range. The exact values can be derived
from the tripping characteristics of the motor starter protectors.
Types of coordination
distinction between two different types of coordination (types "1"
and "2"). Any short circuits that occur are cleared safely by both
types of coordination. The only differences concern the extent of
the damage caused to the device by a short circuit.
ToC
ToC

The load feeder may be non-operational after a short
circuit has been cleared. Damage to the contactor or
to the overload release is permissible.
There must be no damage to the overload release or
to any other components after a short circuit has
been cleared. The load feeder can resume operation
without needing to be renewed. At most, welding of
the contactor contacts is permissible if they can be
disconnected easily without any significant deformation.
The types of coordination are indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbols shown on orange
backgrounds.
Only sizes S2 and S3 of the 3RA1 fuseless load feeders are

covered in IC 10. 3RA2 fuseless load feeders are available for
sizes S00 and S0 (see page 8/4).
Connection methods
Size
3RA1 load feeders are offered with screw terminals.
Width of
direct-on-line
starter
Max. rated current

In max
For threephase motors

up to
mm
kW
S2
55
50
22
S3
70
100
45
Screw terminals
The terminals are indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbol shown on an orange background.
3RA1 load feeder sizes S2 and S3 can be ordered preassembled only as direct-on-line starters in size S2. The direct-on-line
starter size S3 and the reversing starter sizes S2 and S3 are
available only for self-assembly.
The SENTRON 3VL circuit breakers and the SIRIUS 3RT contactors can be used for fuseless load feeders >100 A. The corresponding distances from grounded or live parts, as detailed in
the technical specifications, must be observed.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/41
3RA1 fuseless load feeders
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Direct-on-line start For standard rail mounting Size S2 and S3
2
2
1
1
3
3
1 Motor starter protector size S3
3RA1932-1AA00
adapter for rail mounting
Link module
for AC: 3RA1931-1AA00
for DC: 3RA1931-1BA00
Contactor size S2
Direct-on-line starting For 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems Size S2
NSB0_00378b

4
2 Busbar adapter
40 mm: 8US1061-5FP08
60 mm: 8US1261-5FP08
3 Link module
4
Contactor size S2
These graphical overviews are shown without small mounting parts (screws etc.).
8/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
2 3RA1942-1AA00
adapter for rail mounting
4
NSB0_00374b
Motor starter protector size S2
NSB0_00373b
3 Link module
4 Contactor size S3
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Reversing duty For standard rail mounting Size S2
5
6
3RA1933-1B
assembly kit (RH)
for reversing duty
for mounting onto
standard rails
comprising:
1 wiring kit
2 adapters for rail mounting
2 side modules
2 link wedges
7
7
a
7

2 2 contactors size S2
3 3RA1924-2B
4 Link module
NSB0_00382b
5 3RA1932-1AA00
adapters for rail mounting
6 3RA1902-1B side modules
for adapter for rail mounting
3RA1923-2A
wiring kit
a Upper wiring module
b Lower wiring module
7 8US1998-1AA00
link wedges
Reversing duty for standard rail mounting size S3

5
6
3RA1943-1B
assembly kit (RH)
for reversing duty
for mounting onto
standard rails
comprising:
1 wiring kit
2 adapters for rail mounting
2 side modules
2 link wedges
4
7
2 2 contactors size S3
6
3 3RA1924-2B
4 Link module
NSB0_00383b
5 3RA1942-1AA00
adapters for rail mounting
6 3RA1902-1B side modules
for adapter for rail mounting
3RA1943-2A
wiring kit
7 8US1998-1AA00
link wedges
This graphical overview is shown without small mounting parts (screws etc.).
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/43
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Reversing duty for 60 mm busbar systems size S2
4
Assembly kit (RS)

for reversing duty
for busbar mounting
60 mm: 3RA1933-1D
consisting of:
1 wiring kit
1 busbar adapter
1 switching device holder
1 side module
2 link wedges
5
3
size S2
1
a
2 contactors
size S2
Link module
3RA1924-2B
8US1998-1AA00
link wedges
Switching device holder

60 mm: 8US1260-5AP00
with 8US1998-2BM00
side module
for busbar adapter
Busbar adapter
60 mm: 8US1261-5FP08
NSB0_00296c
3RA1923-2A
wiring kit
These graphical overviews are shown without small mounting parts (screws etc.).
reversing starters
Size
Connection methods Mounting
Control voltage
Width W
Height H
Depth D
mm
mm
mm
Mounting dimensions
3RA11. direct-on-line starters S2
Screw terminals
3RA113.
Screw terminals
S2
Screw terminals
AC/DC
55
295
168
AC/DC
55
276
176
AC/DC
70
330
192
S3

Busbar adapters
3RA12. reversing starters
S3
Screw terminals
AC/DC
120
295
168
Busbar adapters
AC/DC
120
276
176
AC/DC
150
330
192
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA1. 3
S2
3
3RA1. 4
S3
3

During operation
C
C
-20 ... +70 (up to +60 C without restriction)

-55 ... +80
Weight of the 3RA1130. direct-on-line starters
kg
2.1 at 230 V AC
2.7 at 24 V DC
Shock resistance (sine-wave pulse)
Acc. to IEC 60086 Part 2-27
Acc. to IEC 60947-1
Siemens IC 10 2014
90
NSB0_00369
22,5 22,5
90
8/44
--
Important: Acc. to DIN 43602 start command "I" at the right or top
up to 8
up to 6
IP20
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA1. 3
S2
3
3RA1. 4
S3
3
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)

IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)

50
690
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
690
kV
6
10
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1

(VDE 0660 Part 102)
Rated short-circuit current Iq at 50/60 Hz 400 V AC

according to IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
kA
Types of coordination according to IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Power loss Pv max of all main current paths
Dependent on the rated current In (upper setting range)
25 ... 32 A
40 A
45 ... 50 A
63 A
75 ... 90 A
100 A
Power consumption of the solenoid coils in the case of contactors
(for cold coil and Us' 50 Hz)
AC operation
Closing
P.f.
Closed
P.f.
DC operation
Closing = Closed
Endurance of the motor starter protector

Operating cycles
Operating cycles
50
W
W
W
W
W
W
19
28
35
VA
127
0.82
13.5
0.34
270
0.68
22
0.27
11.5
15
1/h
50 000
50 000
15
VA
29
45
60
Operating cycles
Operating cycles
10 million
See endurance characteristic curves of the contactors
Chapter 3 "Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor
Assemblies"
Touch protection
Acc. to EN 50274
Finger-safe


EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Yes
Isolating features

EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
Yes
Yes, (with overvoltage releases of category 1 under
conditions of proper use)
Main control and EMERGENCY-STOP

switch characteristics of the motor starter EN 60204-1 (VDE 0113 Part 1)
protector and accessories
Protective separation between main and
auxiliary circuits
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Trip class (CLASS)
100
Up to 400
Yes, from main contact to auxiliary NC contact
Positively-driven operation at contactors

Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100)

IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101)
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
Connection type
Box terminals
Box terminals
Terminal screw
Pozidriv size 2
Allen screw
mm
mm
0.75 ... 25
2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2.5 ... 50
2 x (2.5 ... 35)
mm
mm
0.7 ... 35
2 x (0.75 ... 16)
2.5 ... 16
2 x (2.5 ... 16)
mm
mm
0.7 ... 35
2 x (0.75 ... 25)
2.5 ... 70
2 x (2.5 ... 50)
Yes
Yes
Yes
-2 x (10 ... 1/0)
Conductor cross-sections (min. ... max.)

- 1 conductor
- 2 conductors
Solid
- 1 conductor
- 2 conductors
Stranded
- 1 conductor
- 2 conductors
Connection, main contacts, ribbon cable conductors
Busbar connections
Solid or stranded
Stranded
AWG 2 x (30 ... 2)

AWG --
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/45
Siemens AG 2013


Rated control supply voltage 50 Hz 230 V AC or 24 V DC for

35 mm standard mounting rail or for screw mounting
module
As from size S2 with standard mounting rail adapter1) for
mechanical reinforcement
system.
3RA1130
Size
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Standard
output
P
Motor
current
I (guide
value)
kW
Setting
range for
thermal
overload
release
DT

single devices

protectors
+ Link module
+ Standard
mounting rail
adapter
Fuseless
load feeders
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41D
41D
41D
41D
41D
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
Type of coordination "2" at Iq = 50 kA/100 kA4) at 400 V

(also compatible with type of coordination "1")
3RV10
3RT10
3RA19
ToC
Rated control supply voltage 50 Hz 230 V AC
S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10
34-1AP00
35-1AP00
36-1AP00
31-1AA00
+
32-1AA00
44-1AP00
45-1AP00
46-1AP00
41-1AA00
+
42-1AA00
34-1BB40
31-1BA00
+
32-1AA00
A
A
A
A
A
3RA1130-4DB34-0AP0
3RA1130-4EB34-0AP0
3RA1130-4FB35-0AP0
3RA1130-4GB36-0AP0
3RA1130-4HB36-0AP0
Size S3 is only available for self-assembly.

S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10
35-1BB40
36-1BB40
44-1BB40
45-1BB40
46-1BB40
41-1BA00
+
42-1AA00
A
A
A
A
A
3RA1130-4DB34-0BB4
3RA1130-4EB34-0BB4
3RA1130-4FB35-0BB4
3RA1130-4GB36-0BB4
3RA1130-4HB36-0BB4
For online configurator see www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators

1)
Standard mounting rail adapter is also suitable for screw fixing.
2)
Auxiliary switches see "Accessories" for direct-on-line and reversing

starters on page 8/50.
3)
4)
For size S2 100 kA, for size S3 50 kA.
8/46
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for busbar systems


40 and 60 mm busbar systems
module
system.
Size
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Standard
output
P
Motor
current
I (guide
value)
kW
Setting
range for
thermal
overload
release
DT

single devices

protectors
+ Link module
+ Busbar adapter
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Fuseless
load feeders
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.3)
Price
per PU

3RV10
3RT10
ToC
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10
34-1AP00
3RA1931-1AA00
+
40 mm
8US1061-5FP08
or 60 mm
8US1261-5FP08
44-1AP00
45-1AP00
46-1AP00
3RA1941-1AA00
34-1BB40
35-1BB40
36-1BB40
3RA1931-1BA00
+
40 mm
8US1061-5FP08
or 60 mm
8US1261-5FP08
44-1BB40
45-1BB40
46-1BB40
3RA1941-1BA00
+
not available
35-1AP00
36-1AP00
For size S3, a busbar adapter is not necessary.
S2

S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10

1)

2)
3)
For article numbers see single devices:

SIRIUS 3RV10 motor starter protectors see Chapter 7 "Protection
Equipment" "Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit Breakers"
"SIRIUS 3RV1 Motor Starter Protectors up to 100 A".
SIRIUS 3RT10 contactors see Chapter 3 "Switching Devices Contactors
and Contactor Assemblies" "Power Contactors for Switching Motors"
"SIRIUS 3RT10 Contactors, 3-pole, 15 ... 250 kW".

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/47
Siemens AG 2013


Reversing duty

35 mm standard mounting rail or for screw mounting
module
With standard mounting rail adapter1) for mechanical
reinforcement
system.
Complete unit always with electrical and mechanical
interlock
Size
Standard threephase motor

4-pole at
400 V AC3)
Standard
output
P
Motor
current
I (guide
value)
kW
Setting
range for
thermal
overload
release
DT

single devices
Motor starter + 2 contacprotectors

tors
+ Link module
+ Assembly kit
RH1)4)
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.6)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Fuseless
load feeders
Price
per PU
Type of coordination "2" at Iq = 50 kA/100 kA7) at 400 V

(also compatible with type of coordination "1")
3RV10
3RT10
3RA19
ToC
S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10
34-1AP00
31-1AA00
+
33-1B5)
44-1AP00
45-1AP00
46-1AP00
41-1AA00
+
43-1B5)
34-1BB40
31-1BA00
+
33-1B5)
41-1BA00
+
43-1B5)
35-1AP00
36-1AP00

S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10
35-1BB40
36-1BB40
44-1BB40
45-1BB40
46-1BB40

1)
Assembly kit for standard mounting rail adapter also suitable for screw
fixing.
2)

3)
4)
RH = Reversing duty for standard rail mounting.
5)
Mechanical locking device must be ordered separately, see "Accessories"

for direct-on-line and reversing starters on page 8/51.
6)
For article numbers see single devices:

7)
For size S2 100 kA, for size S3 50 kA.
8/48
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for busbar systems

Reversing duty

40 and 60 mm busbar systems
module
system.
Complete unit always with electrical and mechanical
interlock
Size
Standard
three-phase
motor
4-pole at
400 V AC2)
Standard
output
P
Motor
current
I (guide
value)
kW
Setting
range
for thermal
overload
release
DT

single devices
Motor starter + 2 contacprotectors

tors
+ Link module
+ Assembly kit
RS3)
PS*
PG
Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.4)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Fuseless
load feeders
Price
per PU

3RV10
3RT10
3RA19
ToC
S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10
31-1AA00
+
40 mm
33-1C4)
or 60 mm
33-1D4)
35-1AP00
36-1AP00
34-1AP00
44-1AP00
45-1AP00
46-1AP00
41-1AA00
+
not available
34-1BB40
35-1BB40
36-1BB40
31-1BA00
+
40 mm
33-1C4)
or 60 mm
33-1D4)
44-1BB40
45-1BB40
46-1BB40
41-1BA00
+
not available

S2
S3
11
15
18.5
22
22
22
29
35
41
41
18 ... 25
22 ... 32
28 ... 40
36 ... 45
40 ... 50
31-4DA10
31-4EA10
31-4FA10
31-4GA10
31-4HA10
30
37
45
45
55
66
80
80
45 ... 63
57 ... 75
70 ... 90
80 ... 100
41-4JA10
41-4KA10
41-4LA10
41-4MA10

1)

2)
3)
RS = Reversing duty for busbar systems.
4)
For article numbers see single devices.


Siemens IC 10 2014
8/49
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

For motor
starter
protectors
For
Version
contactors
Size
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Auxiliary switches
3RV1901-1E
S2 ... S3
--
Transverse
1 CO
1 NO + 1 NC
}
}
3RV1901-1D
3RV1901-1E
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
S2 ... S3
--
Laterally mountable 1 NO + 1 NC
3RV1901-1A
1 unit
41E
S2 ... S3
--
50 Hz 230 V AC
3RV1902-1AP0
1 unit
41E
S2 ... S3
--
Shunt releases
50 Hz 230 V AC
3RV1902-1DP0
1 unit
41E
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NO
}
}
3RH1921-1MA11
3RH1921-1MA20
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
2 NC
3RH1921-1MA02
1 unit
41B
3RV1901-1A
3RV1902-1...
Contactors2)
--
S2 ... S3
2-pole
Connection from 2 sides

--
S2 ... S3
1-pole
1 NO
1 NC
}
}
3RH1921-1CA10
3RH1921-1CA01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
--
S2 ... S3
4-pole
2 NO + 2 NC
3RH1921-1FA22
1 unit
41B
DT
Article No.2)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
24 ... 48 V AC
24 ... 70 V DC
3RT1926-1BB00
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 V AC

150 ... 250 V DC
3RT1926-1BD00
1 unit
41B
24 ... 48 V AC
24 ... 70 V DC
3RT1936-1CB00
1 unit
41B
127 ... 240 V AC

150 ... 250 V DC
3RT1936-1CD00
1 unit
41B
24 V DC
3RT1936-1TR00
1 unit
41B
30 ... 250 V DC
3RT1936-1TS00
1 unit
41B
1)
See also Chapter 7 "Protection Equipment" "Motor Starter Protectors/

Circuit Breakers" "SIRIUS 3RV1 Motor Starter Protectors up to 100 A".
2)
See also Chapter 3 "Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor

Assemblies".
For
Version
contactors

voltage Us1)
Price
per PU
Type

Sizes S2 and S3
For fitting onto the coil terminals at top or bottom
3RT103,
3RT104
3RT103,
3RT104
Varistors
RC elements
3RT1936-1C.00
3RT103,
3RT104
Diode assemblies
Can be plugged in at
bottom
1)
voltages.
2)
Article No.
8/50
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For motor
starter
protectors
For
Version
contactors
Size
Size
DT
Article No.
}
}
}
}
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA1931-1AA00
3RA1941-1AA00
3RA1931-1BA00
3RA1941-1BA00
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
}
}
}
}
3RA1931-1A
3RA1941-1A
3RA1931-1B
3RA1941-1B
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
41B
41B
41B
41B
}
}
3RA1933-2A
3RA1943-2A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
}
}
3RA1933-2B
3RA1943-2B
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
Link modules
Electrical and mechanical link
between motor starter protector
and contactor.
Actuating voltage of contactor
S2
S3
S2
S3
S2
S3
S2
S3
AC
DC
3RA1931-1AA00
Actuating voltage of contactor
S2
S2
AC
S3
S2
S3
S3
S2
S3
DC
--
S2
S3
--
S2
S3
--
S2, S3
For reversing contactors,

laterally mountable
with 1 auxiliary contact (1 NC)
each per contactor.
3RA1924-2B
1 unit
41B
--
S2, S3
For A1 and A2 of the reversing

B
contactors
(one set contains 10 x A1 and 5 x A2)
3RA1923-3B
1 unit
41B
Wiring kit
Reversing duty
Electrical and mechanical link for
reversing contactors.
Can be combined with link
module.
For sizes S2 and S3:
mechanical locking device must
be ordered separately.
Wye-delta starting
Electrical and mechanical link for
three contactors of same size
3RA1924-2B
3RA1923-3B

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/51
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For motor
starter
protectors
For
Version
contactors
DT
Article No.
Size
Size

starter protector and contactor;
for snapping onto standard
}
}
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA1932-1AA00
3RA1942-1AA00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B

S2
S3
S2
S3
S2
S3
S2
S3

starter protector and contactor;
for snapping onto standard
}
}
3RA1932-1A
3RA1942-1A
1
1
5 units
5 units
41B
41B
S2 ... S3
S2 ... S3
For standard mounting rail

adapter
10 mm wide,
96 mm long,
for widening standard mounting
rail adapters.
For size S2:
2 units required.
For size S3:
3 units required.
3RA1902-1B
1 10 units
41B
3RA1933-1B
1 unit
41B
3RA1943-1B
1 unit
41B
3RA1932 3RA1922
Side modules
3RA1902
Assembly kits (RH) for reversing duty for standard mounting rails
S2
S3
S3
S2
Also suitable for screw fixing.

comprising:
Wiring kit, standard mounting
rail adapters, side modules.
Link modules to be ordered
separately.
Mechanical locking device also
to be ordered separately.
3RA1933-1B
8/52
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For motor For
Version
starter
contactors
protectors
Busbar
DT
center-tocenter
clearance
Size
Size
mm
S2
S2
55 mm wide,
40
242 mm long
60
including screw and spacer
}
}
S2
S2
55 mm wide,
60
242 mm long
including screw and spacer
S2
--
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
8US1061-5FP08
8US1261-5FP08
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
14O
14O
8US1260-5AP00
1 unit
14O
Consisting of
60
wiring kit, busbar adapter,
device holder, and side
module. Link modules and
mechanical locking devices
to be ordered separately.
3RA1933-1D
1 unit
41B
For mechanical linking of busbar

adapters and device holders or of
standard mounting rail adapters
(2 units per combination required)
(1 pack = 100 units)
8US1998-1AA00
100 100 units
14O
DT
Article No.
Busbar adapters
Device holders
Assembly kits (RS) for reversing duty

for 40 mm and 60 mm busbar systems
S2
Connecting wedges
-8US1998-1AA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Version
Documentation
Configuration Manual1)
"SIRIUS Configuration: Selection Data for Load Feeders in
Fuseless Designs"
More information and assignment tables for self-assembly
combinations for 400 V, 440 V, 480 V, 500 V, 550 V and 690 V
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/53
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Busbar accessories
Overview
Insulated three-phase busbar systems
Busbar adapters for 40 mm and 60 mm systems

clearly arranged means of feeding 3RA1 load feeders with
screw terminals. Different versions are available for size S2 and
can also be used for the various different types of motor starter
protectors.
The load feeders are mounted directly with the aid of busbar
adapters on busbar systems with 40 mm and 60 mm center-tocenter clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed
times and costs.
The busbars are suitable for between 2 and 5 feeders. However,

any kind of extension is possible by clamping the tags of an
additional busbar (rotated by 180) underneath the terminals of
the respective last motor starter protector.
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe. They are designed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output
side of connected motor starter protectors.
The feeders are snapped onto the adapter and connected on

the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged directly onto the
busbar system, and is thus connected both mechanically and
electrically at the same time.
"Selection and ordering data" see Chapter 7 "Protection
up to 100 A" "Accessories" "Busbar Accessories".

"Type E Starters" size S2 according to UL/CSA. Special infeed
terminals must be used for this purpose, see Chapter 7
"Protection Equipment" "Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
Breakers" "SIRIUS 3RV1 Motor Starter Protectors/Circuit
Breakers up to 100 A" "Accessories" "Busbar Accessories".
Busbar adapters for busbar systems with 40 mm center-tocenter clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of
12 mm to 15 mm, while those with 60 mm center-to-center
clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of 12 mm
to 30 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm thick.
SIRIUS motor starter protectors and load feeders with busbar adapters
snapped onto busbars
8/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starters
General data
Overview
3RA6 fuseless compact starters and infeed system for 3RA6
Very high operational reliability

The high short-circuit breaking capacity and defined shut-down
when the end of service life is reached means that the SIRIUS
compact starter achieves a very high level of operational
reliability that would otherwise have only been possible with
considerable additional outlay. This sets it apart from devices
with similar functionality.
Safe disconnection
The auxiliary switches (NC contacts) of the 3RA6 compact
starters are designed as mirror contacts. This enables their use
for safe disconnection - e.g. EMERGENCY STOP up to SIL 1
(IEC 62061) or PL c (ISO 13849-1) or, if used in conjunction with
an additional infeed contactor, up to SIL 3 (IEC 62061) or PL e
(ISO 13849-1).
Communications integration through AS-Interface
To enable communications integration through AS-Interface
there is an AS-i add-on module available in several versions for
mounting instead of the control circuit terminals on the SIRIUS
compact starter.
Integrated functionality
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are a generation of innovative load feeders with the integrated functionality of a motor
starter protector, contactor and solid-state overload relay.
In addition, various functions of optional mountable accessories
(e.g. auxiliary switches, surge suppressors) are already
integrated in the SIRIUS compact starter.
The design of the AS-i add-on module permits a group of up to

62 feeders with a total of four cables to be connected to the
control system. This reduces wiring work considerably
compared to the parallel wiring method.
Communications integration using IO-Link
Up to 4 compact starters in IO-Link version (reversing and
direct-on-line starters) can be connected together and conveniently linked to the IO-Link master through a standardized
IO-Link connection. The SIRIUS 4SI electronic modules are used
e.g. as IO-Link masters for connection to the SIMATIC ET 200S
distributed I/O system.
The IO-Link connection enables a high density of information in
the local range.
Details of the communications integration using IO-Link see
Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication" "IO-Link".
The diagnostics data of the process collected by the 3RA6 compact starter, e.g. short circuit, end of service life, limit position
etc., are not only indicated on the compact starter itself but also
transmitted to the higher-level control system through IO-Link.
Thanks to the optionally available operator panel, which can be
installed in the control cabinet door, it is easy to control the 3RA6
compact starters with IO-Link from the control cabinet door.
Permanent wiring/easy replacement
Using the SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 (see page 8/76) it is
possible to carry out the wiring in advance without a compact
starter needing to be connected.
3RA6 compact starters with the integrated functionality of a motor starter

protector, contactor and solid-state overload relay.
Applications
The SIRIUS compact starters can be used wherever standard
three-phase motors up to 32 A (approx. 15 kW/400 V) are directly
started.
A compact starter is very easily replaced simply by pulling it out

of the device without disconnecting the wiring.
Even with screw connections or mounting on a standard
mounting rail there is no need to disconnect any wiring
(on account of the removable main and control circuit terminals)
in order to replace a compact starter.
Consistent solution from the infeed to the motor feeder
Approvals according to IEC, UL, CSA and CCC standards have

been issued for the compact starters.
The SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 with integrated PE bar is

offered as a user-friendly possibility of feeding in summation
currents up to 100 A with a maximum conductor cross-section of
70 mm and connecting the motor cable directly without additional intermediate terminals.
Low variance of devices
Screw and spring-type terminals
Thanks to wide setting ranges for the rated current and wide
voltage ranges, the equipment variance is greatly reduced
compared to conventional load feeders.
The SIRIUS compact starters and the infeed system for 3RA6 are
available with screw and spring-type terminals.
The compact starters are not suitable for the protection of

DC loads.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/55
3RA62 reversing starter
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Screw terminals
Current
setting
range
At 400 V AC for Rated control supply voltage for

three-phase
3RA61, 3RA62
3RA64, 3RA65
motors
compact starters
compact starters
Standard
for IO-Link
output P
kW
V AC/DC
V DC
0.1 ... 0.4
0.09
24
24
0.32 ... 1.25 0.37
System configurator for engineering
1 ... 4
1.5
A free system configurator is available to reduce further the

amount of engineering work for selecting the required compact
starters and matching infeed.
3 ... 12
5.5
8 ... 32
15
Types of infeed for the 3RA6 fuseless compact starters
Note:
On the whole four different infeed possibilities are available:

Parallel wiring
Use of three-phase busbars (combination with SIRIUS motor
starter protectors and SIRIUS contactors possible)
8US busbar adapters
SIRIUS infeed system for 3RA6 (see page 8/76)
The 3RA1 load feeders can be used for fuseless load feeders
> 32 A up to 100 A.
To comply with the clearance and creepage distances

demanded according to UL 508 there are the following infeed
possibilities:
110 ... 240
Type of infeed
Infeed terminal
(acc. to UL 508, type E)
Type
Parallel wiring
Terminal block for

"Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller
(Type E)"
3RV2928-1H
Three-phase busbars
3RA6813-8AB
(screw terminals),
3RA6813-8AC
(spring-type terminals)

The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are universal motor feeders
according to IEC 60947-6-2. As control and protective switching
devices (CPS) they can connect, convey and disconnect the
thermal, dynamic and electrical loads from short-circuit currents
up to Iq = 53 kA, i.e. they are practically weld-free. They
combine the functions of a motor starter protector, a contactor
and a solid-state overload relay in one enclosure. Direct-on-line
starters with 45 mm width and reversing starters with 90 mm
width are available as variants.
The reversing starter version comes with not only an internal
electrical interlock but also with a mechanical interlock to prevent
simultaneous actuation of both directions of rotation.
The compact starters have isolating features in accordance with
IEC 60947.2 and can be used as disconnector units (main
control switch according to DIN EN 60204 or DIN VDE 0113).
Isolation is effected by moving the handle into the "OFF" position;
disconnection by means of the control contacts is not enough.
3RA6 fuseless compact starters are supplied for 5 different
current setting ranges. The 3RA61 and 3RA62 have 2 control
voltage ranges (AC/DC), the 3RA64 and 3RA65 have one control
voltage range (DC):
8/56
Siemens IC 10 2014
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters are suitable for use in any
climate. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms in which no
severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic vapors,
hazardous gases) prevail. Suitable covers must be provided for
installation in dusty and damp locations.
The SIRIUS compact starters are generally designed to degree
of protection IP20. The permissible ambient temperature during
operation is -20 to +60 C.
The rated short-circuit current ICS according to IEC 60947-6-2 is
53 kA at 400 V.
Three-phase infeed
3RV2925-5EB
terminal for constructing
"Type E Starters", UL 508
Infeed systems for 3RA6 Infeed on left,

50/70 mm2, screw
terminal with 3 sockets,
outgoing terminal
with screw/spring-type
connections,
including PE bar
The SENTRON 3VL circuit breakers and the SIRIUS 3RT

contactors can be used for fuseless load feeders >100 A.
Note:
The maximum permissible short-circuit currents of the device
versions for the various forms of power supply and voltages are
available on request from Technical Assistance:
Tel.: +49 (9 11) 8 95-59 00
E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
Overload tripping times
The tripping time in the event of overload can be set on the
device to normal starting conditions (CLASS 10) and to heavy
starting conditions (CLASS 20). As the breaker mechanism still
remains closed after an overload, resetting is possible by either
local manual reset or auto reset after 3 minutes cooling time.
With autoreset there is no need to open the control cabinet.
Diagnostics options
The compact starter provides the following diagnostics options:
With LEDs
- Connection to the control voltage
- Position of the main contacts
With mechanical display
- Tripping due to overload
- Tripping due to short circuit
- Tripping due to malfunction (end of service life reached
because of worn switching contacts or a worn switching
mechanism or faults in the control electronics)
These states can also be evaluated in the higher-level control
system:
With parallel wiring using the integrated auxiliary and
signaling switches of the compact starter
With AS-Interface or IO-Link in even greater detail using the
respective communication interface
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Four complement versions for 3RA61 and 3RA62 compact
starters
For standard mounting rail or screw fixing:
basic version including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and
1 pair of control circuit terminals
For standard mounting rail or screw fixing when using the
AS-i add-on module:
without control circuit terminals because the AS-i add-on
module is plugged on instead
For use with the infeed system for 3RA6:
without main circuit terminals because they are supplied with
the infeed system and the expansion modules
For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and
the AS-i add-on module: without terminal complement (also
for reordering when replacing the compact starter)
The control circuit terminals are always required by the compact
starters for IO-Link; the main circuit terminals depend on the use
of the infeed system.
More components of the 3RA6

Apart from the control supply voltage, "Overload" (1 CO) and
"Short circuit / Function fault" (1 NO) signaling contacts are
already integrated into the 3RA61/3RA62 and lockable via two
6-pole removable control circuit terminals. The 3RA61 has two
auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC) for displaying the position of the
main contacts. Unlike the 3RA61 direct-on-line starter, the
3RA62 reversing starter has one auxiliary contact (1 NO) per
direction of rotation per main contact.
Available for the 3RA61 and 3RA64 direct-on-line starters is a
slot for an optional auxiliary switch block (optionally 2 NO, 2 NC
or 1 NO + 1 NC) and for the 3RA62 and 3RA65 reversing starters
there are two slots (for auxiliary switch blocks see "Accessories"
on page 8/69).
Positively-driven operation of the auxiliary contacts
Positively-driven operation between individual auxiliary circuits
exists for the compact starter in the version as a direct-on-line
starter for parallel wiring (3RA61) between the auxiliary circuits
of the NC contacts (NC 21-22) and the NO contacts (NO 13-14)
in the basic unit.
In addition, the optional auxiliary switch block offers positively
driven contacts in the 3RA6913-1A version, each with one
normally closed contact and one normally open contact.
Article No. scheme

1st - 4th 5th 6th 7th

@@@@
3RA6
@
Version
(direct-on-line starter = 1, reversing starter = 2,
direct-on-line starter for IO-Link = 4, reversing starter for IO-Link = 5,
infeed system = 8, accessories = 9)
Details of accessories
Connection method
(0 = without terminals, 1 = screw terminals,
2 = spring-type terminals)
Setting range
Terminals complement variant

Special versions
Example
3RA6
Note:
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/57
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
With the 3RA6 compact starters, control cabinets heat up less
because power losses have been minimized by operation:
Lower intrinsic power loss (than comparable motor feeders
with thermal overload trips) thanks to electronic current
analysis
Lower power losses (than conventional load feeders) because
there is only one switching point for short circuit and operational switching
Lower control circuit power losses (compared with conventional switching devices) as a result of electronic control of
switching points
Thanks to the above advantages, additional energy savings
are possible because less cooling is required (and a more
compact design is possible)
8/58
Siemens IC 10 2014
Product advantages
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters offer a number of benefits:
Compact design saves space in the control cabinet
Little planning and assembly work and far less wiring thanks
to a single complete unit with one article number
Little variance through wide voltage range and 5 wide setting
ranges for the rated current mean low stock levels
High plant availability through integrated functionalities such
as prevention of main contact welding and disconnection at
end of service life
Greater productivity through automatic device reset in case of
overload and differentiated detection of overload and short
circuit
Easy checking of the wiring and testing of the motor direction
prior to start-up thanks to optional "control kits"
Speedy replacement of devices thanks to removable terminals with spring-type and screw connections in the main and
control circuit
Efficient power distribution through the related SIRIUS infeed
system for 3RA6
Direct connection of the motor feeder cable to the SIRIUS
infeed system for 3RA6 thanks to integrated PE bar
Connecting and looping through incoming feeders up to a
cross-section of 70 mm
When using the infeed system for 3RA6, possibility of directly
connecting the motor cable without intermediate terminals
Integration in Totally Integrated Automation thanks to the
optional connection to AS-Interface or IO-Link
The SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters create the basis for highavailability and future-proof machine concepts.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA61
S0
3
3RA62
3RA64
3RA65
Depth from standard mounting rail
45 x 170 x 165 90 x 170 x 165 45 x 170 x 165 90 x 170 x 165

45 x 191 x 165 90 x 191 x 165 45 x 191 x 165 90 x 191 x 165
mm
160
-20 ... +60, with restriction up to +70
C
C
-55 ... +80

-55 ... +80
22,5 22,5
90
NSB0_00649a

For operation
(permissible operational current see the following
section "Electrical Specifications")
During storage
During transport
90
mm
mm
D
Screw terminals

Shock resistance (sine-wave pulse)
a = 60 m/s = 6 g with 10 ms; for every 3 shocks in all axes
Vibratory load
f = 4 ... 5.8 Hz; d =15 mm; f = 5.8 ... 500 Hz; a = 20 m/s2;10 cycles
Acc. to IEC 60947-1
IP20
Up to 2 000 above sea level without restriction
Relative air humidity
10 ... 90
3
Pollution degree
V
V
690
400 at 3RA6250-.E... and 3RA6500-.E...
(reversing starter 32 A versions)
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60

690
kV
A
A
A
A
A
0.4
1.25
4
12
32
%
%
100
80

Rated current Ie
and setting range for overload release
0.1 ... 0.4 A

0.32 ...1.25 A
1 ... 4 A
3 ... 12 A
8 ... 32 A
Permissible operational current of the compact starter

when several compact starters are mounted
side-by-side on a vertical standard mounting rail or
in the infeed system for 3RA6
For a control cabinet inside temperature of
+40 C
For a control cabinet inside temperature of
+60 C
Trip class (CLASS)
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1,

EN 60947-4-1
(VDE 0660 Part 102)
IEC 60947-6-2
Device standard
Maximum rated operational voltage Ue
10/20
Overload function
Ratio of lower to upper current mark
1:4
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity

ICS at 50/60 Hz 400 V AC
kA
53
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity

ICSIT at 50/60 Hz 400/690 V AC
in IT systems
kA
1.5
Power loss Pv max of all main current paths

dependent on the rated current In
0.4 A
1.25 A
4A
12 A
32 A
mW
mW
W
W
W
10
100
1
1.8
5.4
Max. switching frequency
AC-41
AC-43
AC-44
1/h
1/h
1/h
750
250
15
1/h
3 600
3 600, depending on the IO-Link

communication time
Touch protection
Acc. to DIN VDE 0106, Part 100
Finger-safe
Isolating features of the compact starter
Acc. to IEC 60947-3
Yes: Isolation is assured only by moving the handle into the

"OFF" position.

characteristics of the compact starter and
accessories
Acc. to IEC 60204
Yes
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/59
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA61
S0
3
3RA62
3RA64
3RA65
Electrical specifications (continued)

Acc. to IEC 60947-2
Control circuit to auxiliary circuit

Horizontal standard mounting rail
Other mounting position
V
V
Up to 400
Up to 250
Auxiliary circuit to auxiliary circuit

Horizontal standard mounting rail
Other mounting position
V
V
Up to 400
Up to 250
Up to 400
Main circuit to auxiliary circuit

Any mounting position
Acc. to IEC 60947-1
Conductored interference
In the main circuit
In the auxiliary circuit
BURST acc. to IEC 61000-4-4
Conductored interference
In the main circuit
- Conductor - Ground
- Conductor - Conductor
In the auxiliary circuit
- Conductor - Ground
- Conductor - Conductor
SURGE acc. to IEC 61000-4-5
Corresponds to degree of severity 3

kV
kV
4
3
4
2
kV
kV
4
2
2
1
kV
kV
2
1
0.51)
0.51)
1 NO + 1 NC 2 NO
1 CO/1 NO
1 NO + 1 NC
Auxiliary switches
Integrated
- Overload/short circuit and malfunction
signal
Expandable
2 NO
2 NO, 2 NC, 1 NO, 1 NC

Integrated (Varistor)
Surge suppressors
Electromagnetic operating mechanisms
Control voltage
At AC
Frequency
V
V
24 AC/DC
110 ... 240 AC/DC
Hz
50/60 (5 %)
0.7 ... 1.25 Us
Operating range
Line protection
At 10 kA
At 50 kA
Shock resistance
Breaker mechanism OFF
Breaker mechanism ON
1/h
3 600
mm
mm
2.5
4
g
g
25
15
24 DC
-0.85 ... 1.2 Us
Normal switching duty

12 x In
Making capacity
10 x In
Breaking capacity
Switching capacity dependent on
rated current
Up to 12 A
Up to 32 A
Endurance in operating cycles

At Ie = 0.9 x In and 400 V
1)
To maintain maximum interference immunity in a harsh electromagnetic

environment, additional overvoltage protection should be provided in the
control circuit. A suitable answer is for example the Dehn Blitzductor
BVT AD 24 V, Art. No. 918 402 or an equivalent protection element.
Manufacturer:
DEHN+SHNE GmbH+Co. KG
Hans-Dehn-Strae 1
Postfach 1640
D-92306 Neumarkt.
8/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
kW
kW
5.5
15
3 ...
10 000 000
2 x 3 ...
10 000 000
3 000 000
2 x 1 500 000
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3RA6120-.@B3., 3RA6250-.@B3.
3RA6120-.EB3., 3RA6250-.EB3.
@ = A, B, C or D
Rated operational current 12 A
24 AC
24 DC
24 AC
24 DC
Inrush peak current
0.59
0.47
0.59
0.47
Hold current
0.13
0.12
0.17
0.14
Closed
2.8
2.9
3.5
3.1
Operating times, typical

On
Off
ms
ms
<160
<35
<140
<35
<160
<30
<140
<30
Type
3RA6 20-.@P3., 3RA6250-.@P3.
3RA6120-.EP3., 3RA6250-.EP3.
@ = A, B, C or D
110 AC
240 AC
110 DC
240 DC
110 AC
240 AC
110 DC
240 DC
Inrush peak current
0.24
0.40
0.17
0.29
0.24
0.40
0.17
0.29
Hold current
0.06
0.08
0.03
0.02
0.06
0.07
0.04
0.03
Closed
3.8
3.1
5.1
3.7
5.2
3.4
5.8
Operating times, typical

On
Off
ms
ms
<160
<50
<140
<80
<150
<50
<140
<70
<160
<40
<140
<60
<150
<40
<140
<60
Type
3RA6400-.@B4., 3RA6500-.@B4.
3RA6400-.EB4., 3RA6500-.EB4.
@ = A, B, C or D
24 DC
24 DC
Inrush peak current
0.39
0.53
Hold current
0.13
0.15
Closed
2.9
3.4
Operating times, typical1)

On
Off
ms
ms
<140
<35
<140
<30
1)

Plus IO-Link communication
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/61
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA61
S0
3
3RA62
3RA64
Control circuit
External auxiliary switch block
Internal auxiliary switch
Short-circuit signaling switch
Overload signaling switch
Switching capacity
External auxiliary switch block
Internal auxiliary switch
Signaling switches
AC-15
Up to Ue = 230 V
Up to Ue = 400 V
Up to Ue = 289/500 V
Up to Ue = 400/690 V
DC-13
Up to Ue = 24 V
Up to Ue = 60 V
Up to Ue = 125 V
Up to Ue = 250 V
AC-15
Up to Ue = 230 V
Up to Ue = 400 V
Up to Ue = 289/500 V
Up to Ue = 400/690 V
DC-13
Up to Ue = 24 V
Up to Ue = 60 V
Up to Ue = 125 V
Up to Ue = 250 V
Up to Ue = 480 V
AC-15
Up to Ue = 230 V
Up to Ue = 400 V
DC-13
Up to Ue = 24 V
Up to Ue = 250 V
V
V
V
V
400/690
400/690
400
400
A
A
A
A
6
3
2
1
A
A
A
A
6
0.9
0.55
0.27
A
A
A
A
6
3
2
1
A
A
A
A
A
10
2
1
0.27
0.1
A
A
3
1
A
A
2
0.11
External auxiliary switch blocks, internal auxiliary switches

Contact reliability
Short-circuit current IK 1.1 kA
Short-circuit current IK < 400 A
8/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
10 000 000
AC-15, 230 V
Up to 6 A
Up to 3 A
Up to 1 A
Up to 0.3 A
DC-13, 24 V
Up to 6 A
Up to 3 A
Up to 0.5 A
Up to 0.2 A
DC-13, 110 V
Up to 1 A
Up to 0.55 A
Up to 0.3 A
Up to 0.1 A
Up to 0.04 A
DC-13, 220 V
Up to 0.3 A
Up to 0.1 A
Up to 0.05 A
Up to 0.018 A
3 000 000
200 000
500 000
2 000 000
10 000 000
30 000
100 000
2 000 000
10 000 000
40 000
100 000
300 000
2 000 000
10 000 000
110 000
650 000
2 000 000
10 000 000
At 17 V and 5 mA
Oper- 1 incorrect switching operation per 100 000 000

ating
cycles
Fuse links,
- NEOZED Type 5SE
- DIAZED Type 5SB
- LV HRC Type 3NA
Miniature circuit breaker up to
230 V with C characteristic
10
10
3RA65
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Size
Number of poles
3RA61
S0
3
3RA62
3RA64
3RA65
Signaling switches
Electrical endurance AC-15
At 230 V and 3 A
Contact reliability
At 17 V and 5 mA
Oper- 1 incorrect switching operation per 100 000 000

ating
cycles
Fuse links,
- NEOZED Type 5SE
- DIAZED Type 5SB
- LV HRC Type 3NA
Miniature circuit breaker up to
230 V with C characteristic
Fuse links,
- NEOZED Type 5SE
- DIAZED Type 5SB
- LV HRC Type 3NA
Short-circuit current IK 1.1 kA
Short-circuit current IK < 400 A

Overload (short-circuit current IK 1.1 kA)
20 000
6 050
More information
Notes on safety
System networking requires suitable protective measures
(including network segmentation for IT security) in order to
ensure safe plant operation.
More information about the subject of Industrial Security see

www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/63
Siemens AG 2013


Width 45 mm
Rated short-circuit current ICS = 53 kA at 400 V

A set of 3A6940-0A adapters is required for screw fixing.
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 42F
NSB0_01946
3RA6120-1CB32
3RA6120-2EB32
Standard three-phase
motor
4-pole at 400 V AC1)
Setting range
for solid-state
overload release
Instantaneous
overcurrent release
DT2) Article No.
Price DT2) Article No.

per PU
Price
per PU
Standard output P
kW
Configurator
Configurator
For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and with
the AS-i add-on module or as a replacement device,
without main and control circuit terminals
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6120-0A@30
--
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6120-0B@30
--
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6120-0C@30
--
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6120-0D@30
--
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6120-0E@30
--
Screw terminals
0.09
0.37
For standard mounting rail or screw fixing,

including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and
0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6120-1A@32
3RA6120-2A@32
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6120-1B@32
3RA6120-2B@32
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6120-1C@32
3RA6120-2C@32
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6120-1D@32
3RA6120-2D@32
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6120-1E@32
3RA6120-2E@32
For use in the infeed system for 3RA6,

without main circuit terminals with 1 pair of control circuit terminals
0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6120-1A@33
3RA6120-2A@33
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6120-1B@33
3RA6120-2B@33
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6120-1C@33
3RA6120-2C@33
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6120-1D@33
3RA6120-2D@33
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6120-1E@33
3RA6120-2E@33
Article No. supplements for rated control supply voltage

24 V AC/DC
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
For standard mounting rail or screw fixing when using

the AS-i add-on module
with 1 pair of main circuit terminals without control circuit terminals
0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6120-1AB34
3RA6120-2AB34
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6120-1BB34
3RA6120-2BB34
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6120-1CB34
3RA6120-2CB34
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6120-1DB34
3RA6120-2DB34
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6120-1EB34
3RA6120-2EB34

1)
2)
The delivery time classes apply for a rated control supply voltage of
24 V AC/DC. For the other rated control supply voltages, longer delivery
times are possible.
8/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Width 90 mm
Reversing duty

Two sets of 3RA6940-0A adapters are required for screw
fixing.
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 42F
NSB0_01947
3RA6250-1CP32
3RA6250-2DP32
motor
Setting range for

electronic overload
release
Instantaneous
overcurrent release
DT2) Article No.
Price DT2) Article No.

per PU
Price
per PU
Standard output P
kW
Configurator
Configurator
For use with the infeed system for 3RA6 and with
the AS-i add-on module or as a replacement device,
without main and control circuit terminals
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6250-0A@30
--
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6250-0B@30
--
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6250-0C@30
--
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6250-0D@30
--
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6250-0E@30
--
Screw terminals
0.09
0.37

0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6250-1A@32
3RA6250-2A@32
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6250-1B@32
3RA6250-2B@32
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6250-1C@32
3RA6250-2C@32
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6250-1D@32
3RA6250-2D@32
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6250-1E@32
3RA6250-2E@32

0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6250-1A@33
3RA6250-2A@33
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6250-1B@33
3RA6250-2B@33
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6250-1C@33
3RA6250-2C@33
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6250-1D@33
3RA6250-2D@33
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6250-1E@33
3RA6250-2E@33
Article No. supplements for rated control supply voltage

24 V AC/DC
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
For standard mounting rail or screw fixing when using

the AS-i add-on module
with 1 pair of main circuit terminals without control circuit terminals
0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6250-1AB34
3RA6250-2AB34
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6250-1BB34
3RA6250-2BB34
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6250-1CB34
3RA6250-2CB34
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6250-1DB34
3RA6250-2DB34
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6250-1EB34
3RA6250-2EB34

1)
2)
The delivery time classes apply for a rated control supply voltage of
24 V AC/DC. For the other rated control supply voltages, longer delivery
times are possible.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/65
Siemens AG 2013



Width 45 mm
A set of 3A6940-0A adapters is required for screw fixing.
NSB0_01946
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 42F
3RA64 with 3RA6911-1A

motor
Setting range for

electronic overload
release
Instantaneous
overcurrent release
DT
Article No.
Price DT
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Standard output P
kW
Configurator
Configurator
Screw terminals

0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6400-1AB42
3RA6400-2AB42
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6400-1BB42
3RA6400-2BB42
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6400-1CB42
3RA6400-2CB42
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6400-1DB42
3RA6400-2DB42
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6400-1EB42
3RA6400-2EB42

0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6400-1AB43
3RA6400-2AB43
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6400-1BB43
3RA6400-2BB43
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6400-1CB43
3RA6400-2CB43
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6400-1DB43
3RA6400-2DB43
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6400-1EB43
3RA6400-2EB43

1)
8/66
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Reversing duty

Width 90 mm
Two sets of 3RA6940-0A adapters are required for screw
fixing.
NSB0_01947
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 42F
3RA65 with 3RA6911-1A

auxiliary switch blocks
motor
Setting range for

electronic overload
release
Instantaneous
overcurrent release
DT
Article No.
Price DT
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Standard output P
kW
Configurator
Configurator
Screw terminals

0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6500-1AB42
3RA6500-2AB42
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6500-1BB42
3RA6500-2BB42
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6500-1CB42
3RA6500-2CB42
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6500-1DB42
3RA6500-2DB42
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6500-1EB42
3RA6500-2EB42
0.09
0.1 ... 0.4
56
3RA6500-1AB43
3RA6500-2AB43
0.37
0.32 ... 1.25
56
3RA6500-1BB43
3RA6500-2BB43
1.5
1 ... 4
56
3RA6500-1CB43
3RA6500-2CB43
5.5
3 ... 12
168
3RA6500-1DB43
3RA6500-2DB43
15
8 ... 32
448
3RA6500-1EB43
3RA6500-2EB43


1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/67
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Accessories for SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters
The following accessories are available specially for the 3RA6

compact starters:
Infeed system for 3RA6: see page 8/76 onwards.
AS-i add-on module: see page 8/74 onwards "AS-Interface
add-on modules"
External auxiliary switch blocks: Snap-on auxiliary switch as
versions 2 NO, 2 NC and 1 NO 1 NC with screw or spring-type
terminals; the contacts of the auxiliary switch block open and
close jointly with the main contacts of the compact starter. The
NC contacts are designed as mirror contacts.
Control kit: Aid for manually closing the main contacts in order
to check the wiring and motor direction under conditions of
short-circuit protection
Adapter for screw fixing the compact starter,
including push-in lugs
Main circuit terminals: Available with screw and spring-type
terminals
Main circuit terminals mixed connection method:
With the main circuit terminals mixed connection method it is
also possible in the main circuit to switch from screw terminals
on the line side to spring-type terminals on the outgoing side.
This enables for example the side-by-side mounting of several
compact starters and their cost-efficient connection using
three-phase busbars on the infeed side. The motors are then
connected directly by the quick and reliably contacting
spring-type connection method.
The compact starters are mounted directly with the aid of busbar
adapters on busbar systems with 60 mm center-to-center clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times and
costs. These feeders are suitable for copper busbars with a
width from 12 to 30 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm
thick.
Accessories for UL applications

The terminal block for "Self-Protected Combination Motor
Controller", type E is available for complying with the clearance
and creepage distances demanded according to UL 508.
Accessories for infeed using three-phase busbar systems
The three-phase busbars can be used as an easy, time-saving
and clearly arranged means of feeding SIRIUS 3RA6 compact
starters with screw connection. Motor starter protector sizes S00
and S0 can also be integrated.
The busbars are suitable for between 2 and 5 devices. However,
any kind of extension up to a maximum summation current of
63 A is possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar
(rotated by 180) underneath the terminals of the respective last
motor starter protector.
A connecting piece is required for the combination with 3RV1
motor starter protector size S00. Motor starter protectors S00
and S0 of the 3RV2 series can be combined in any way (without
a special connecting piece). The motor starter protectors are
supplied by appropriate infeed terminals. Special infeed terminals are required for constructing "Type E Starters" according to
UL/CSA.
The three-phase busbar systems are finger-safe but empty
connection tags must be fitted with covers. They are designed
for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output side of
connected SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters or motor starter
protectors.
8/68
Siemens IC 10 2014
The 8US busbar system can be loaded with a maximum summation current of 630 A.
The "reversing starter" version requires a device holder along
side the busbar adapter for lateral mounting.
The compact starters are snapped onto the adapter and
connected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged
directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both
mechanically and electrically at the same time.
For more accessories such as incoming and outgoing terminals,
flat copper profiles etc., see Catalog LV 10.
Accessories for operation with closed control cabinet doors
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for standard and
emergency-stop applications are available for operating the
compact starter with closed control cabinet doors.
Accessories for SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starters
in IO-Link version
The following accessories are available specially for the 3RA64,
3RA65 compact starters:
The 4SI SIRIUS electronic module as IO-Link master allows for
the simple and economical connection of SIRIUS controls with
IO-Link (e.g. up to four groups of 4 compact starters) to the
multifunctional SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O system.
Additional connection cables for side-by-side mounting of up
to 4 compact starters
Operator panel for on-site control and diagnostics of up to
4 compact starters coupled to each other
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA6950-0A
1 unit
42F
3RA6940-0A
1 unit
42F
Accessories specially for 3RA6 compact starters

Control kit
For mechanical actuation of the
compact starter
3RA6950-0A
Adapters for screw fixing the
compact starter
(set including push-in lugs)
Direct-on-line starters require one set,
reversing starters two sets.
3RA6940-0A
Screw terminals
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact starters
A
3RA6911-1A
1 unit
42F
2 NC
3RA6912-1A
1 unit
42F
1 NO +1 NC
(these auxiliary contacts are positively driven)
3RA6913-1A
1 unit
42F

(incoming and outgoing side)
3RA6920-1A
1 unit
42F
For 3RA61
3RA6920-1B
1 unit
42F
For 3RA62
3RA6920-1C
1 unit
42F
3RA6911-1A
2 NO
3RA6920-1A
Control circuit terminals
3RA6920-1B
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact starters
3RA6911-2A
2 NO
3RA6911-2A
1 unit
42F
2 NC
3RA6912-2A
1 unit
42F
1 NO +1 NC
(these auxiliary contacts are positively driven)
3RA6913-2A
1 unit
42F

(incoming and outgoing side)
3RA6920-2A
1 unit
42F
For 3RA61
3RA6920-2B
1 unit
42F
For 3RA62
3RA6920-2C
1 unit
42F
3RA6920-2A
3RA6920-2B

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/69
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
3RA6920-3A
DT
Article No.
Additional connection cables (flat) for side-by-side

mounting of up to 4 compact starters
10-pole
- 8 mm 1)
- 200 mm 1)
A
A
14-pole
- 8 mm 2)
- 200 mm
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42F
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA6932-0A
3RA6933-0B
1
1
5 units
5 units
42F
42F
A
A
3RA6931-0A
3RA6933-0C
1
1
5 units
5 units
42F
42F
3RA6935-0A
1 unit
42F
3RA6936-0A
1 unit
42F
Interface covers (replacement)
3RA6936-0B
5 units
42F
Connection cable (round) for connecting the

operator panel
10-pole, 2 000 mm
3RA6933-0A
1 unit
42F
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RV2928-1H
1 unit
41E
Accessories specially for 3RA6 compact starters (continued)

Main circuit terminals mixed connection method
1 set comprises:
1 joint block on the line side with screw terminals
1 joint block on the outgoing side with spring-type
terminals
3RA6920-3A
Version
Price
per PU
Accessories especially for 3RA64, 3RA65 compact starters for IO-Link
3RA6931-0A
Operator panels (set)

1 operator panel
1 enabling module
1 interface cover
1 fixing terminal
3RA6935-0A
1)
10-pole connection cables are required for EMERGENCY-STOP group

concepts.
2)
Is included in the scope of supply of the SIRIUS 3RA6 compact starter in

IO-Link version.
Matching IO-Link masters see Chapter 2

"Industrial Communication" "IO-Link" "Masters".
Version
Price
per PU
Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers (Type E)"

acc. to UL 508 for infeed through parallel wiring with compact starters
Note:
3RV2928-1H
UL 508 demands 1-inch clearance and 2-inch creepage

distance at line side for "Combination Motor Controller
Type E". Terminal blocks are not required for use according to CSA. These terminal blocks cannot be used in
combination with 3RV19.5 three-phase busbars.
Terminal blocks type E
For extended clearance and creepage distances
(1 and 2 inch)
8/70
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Number of compact
Modular
starters and motor starter spacing
protectors that can be
connected
Without lateral
accessories
mm
Rated
For
current In motor
at 690 V starter
protectors
A
DT
Article No.
}
}
}
}
3RV1915-1AB
3RV1915-1BB
3RV1915-1CB
3RV1915-1DB
DT
Article No.
3RV1915-6AB
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41E
41E
41E
41E
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 10 units
41E
Size
Three-phase busbars for infeed with 3RA6

For feeding several compact starters and/or motor starter
protectors with screw terminals, mounted side-by-side on
standard mounting rails, insulated, with touch protection.
3RV1915-1AB
3RV1915-1BB
2
3
4
5
45
45
45
45
S00, S01)
S00, S01)
S00, S01)
S00, S01)
63
63
63
63
3RV1915-1CB
3RV1915-1DB
Not suitable for 3RV11/3RV21 motor starter protectors for motor protection
with overload relay function and for 3RV17/3RV27 and 3RV18/3RV28 circuit
breakers according to UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No.5-02.
Joint clamping of 3RV1 motor starter protector sizes S00 and S0 is not possible on account of the different modular spacings and the different height
of the terminals. The 3RV1915-5DB connecting piece is available for connecting the compact starters to the 3RV1 motor starter protector size S00.
Motor starter protectors S00/S0 of the 3RV2 series can be jointly clamped;
no connecting piece has to be used.
Version
Modular
spacing
For
motor
starter
protectors
mm
Size
Price
per PU
1)
Covers for connection tags of the three-phase busbars

Touch protection for empty
positions
--
S00, S0
3RV1915-6AB
Tightening torque
Solid or Finely
AWG
stranded stranded cables, solid
with end or stranded
sleeve
For
compact
starters
and motor
starter
protectors
mm
Size
mm
AWG
Nm
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Three-phase infeed terminals for three-phase busbars1)

Connection from top
2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4
3 ... 4
S00, S0
3RV1925-5AB
1 unit
41E
Input: 4;
Output:
2 ... 2.5
S00, S0
3RV2915-5B
1 unit
41E
3RV2925-5EB
1 unit
41E
3RV1925-5AB
Connection from below2)
2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4
3RV2915-5B
Three-phase infeed terminals for constructing "Type E Starters" according

to UL 508 for three-phase busbars
Connection from top
2.5 ... 25 2.5 ... 16 10 ... 4
3 ... 4
S0
3RV2925-5EB
1)
The 3RV2925-5AB three-phase infeed terminals cannot be used with the

3RA6.
2)
This terminal is connected in place of a compact starter, please take the

space requirement (45 mm) into account.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/71
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
8US1211-1NS10
1 unit
14O
8US1250-1AA10
1 unit
14O
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Width: 12 ... 30 mm
Thickness: 4 ... 5 mm or 10 mm
8US1211-1NS10
Device holders for lateral mounting along side the busbar adapter for
60 mm systems
Required in addition to the busbar adapter for
mounting a reversing starter
8US1250-1AA10
Version
Color of
handle
Version of
DT
extension shaft
Article No.
Price
per PU
mm
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for operating the compact

starter with closed control cabinet doors
The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist
of a knob, a coupling driver and a 130/330 mm long
extension shaft (6 mm x 6 mm). The door-coupling rotary
operating mechanisms are designed to degree of
protection IP65. The door interlocking prevents accidental opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position
of the motor starter protector. The OFF position can be
locked with up to 3 padlocks.
3RV2926-0B
8/72
Door-coupling
rotary operating
mechanisms
Black
130
3RV2926-0B
1 unit
41E
EMERGENCY-STOP
door-coupling
rotary operating
mechanisms
Red/yellow
130
3RV2926-0C
1 unit
41E
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41B
100 340 units
41B

Screwdrivers
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
3RT2900-1SB20

3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
partially insulated
Blank labels
IC01_00181

for SIRIUS devices
20 mm x 7 mm,
titanium gray
3RT2900-1SB20
Documentation
System Manual2)
SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Starter,
SIRIUS Infeed System for 3RA6
www.murrplastik.de
2)
This manual is available in all language versions at:

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/73
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Various AS-i add-on modules are available for communication of
the 3RA6 compact starter with the control system using
AS-Interface:
Standard version
With two local inputs
With two free external inputs
With one free external input and one free external output
With two free external outputs
For local control
D0
AS-i
3RA6120-..B3.
D1
AS-i
Y4
The AS-i add-on modules can be combined only in connection

with compact starters with a rated control supply voltage of
24 V AC/DC.
Y2
AUX PWR -
AS-i add-on module for local controller
S2
3RA6970-3F
Shown in "0" position
Switch with 3 switch positions

Automatic
Manual
S0
Closed
Open
Open
S1
Closed
Open
Open
S2
Open
Open
Closed
Circuit diagram example for controlling a 3RA6120 direct-on-line starter

using an AS-i add-on module for local control
AS-i
D0
3RA6250-..B3.
D1
AS-i
Resetting to "Automatic" mode
Switch with 2
switch positions
Simultaneous application of a "1" signal at the local inputs. The

availability bit DI 0 is switched to a "1" signal.
If AS-i communication is reset, the motor is first switched off and
then on again when requested by the control system.
LEFT - RIGHT
S4
Y4
S0
AUX PWR +
Y2
AUX PWR -
S1
S3
S2
3RA6970-3F
Automatic- 0 - Manual
Shown in "0" and "Right" position

Switch
Automatic
Manual
S0
Closed
Open
Open
S1
Closed
Open
Open
S2
Open
Open
Closed

Switch
Left
Right
S3
Open
Closed
S4
Closed
Open
NSB0_02097a
Switch
NSB0_02096a
NC contacts can be connected to the inputs Y2 and Y4 through

the local terminals on the AS-i add-on module. If the "+" connections are connected simultaneously to both local inputs, the
AS-i add-on module will be in "Automatic" mode, i.e. it will communicate with the control system through AS-Interface.
"LED AUX Power" must light up green, the 24 V DC supply must

be ensured and the AS-i control supply voltage must no longer
be applied.
Automatic- 0 - Manual
"Automatic" mode
Opening the two inputs Y2 and Y4 will result in the direct disconnection of the compact starter. Operation through AS-i communication is finished and the compact starter can now be
switched on and off directly using NO contacts (one NO contact
per direction of rotation on the reversing starter).
S1
With this new module it is also possible for the connected

compact starter to be operated directly using simple switches,
i.e. without recourse to AS-i communication, if required.
Local control
S0
AUX PWR +
Circuit diagram example for controlling a 3RA6250 reversing starter

using an AS-i add-on module for local control
8/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
Standard version
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA6970-3A
1 unit
42F
3RA6970-3B
1 unit
42F
3RA6970-3C
1 unit
42F
3RA6970-3D
1 unit
42F
3RA6970-3E
1 unit
42F
3RA6970-3F
1 unit
42F
Flat, yellow, extender
3RK1901-0NA00
5 units
42C
Flat, black, extender
3RK1901-0PA00
5 units
42C

}
For AS-Interface modules and sensors and actuators
with integrated AS-Interface in accordance with AS-i
Specification V3.0
For setting the AS-i address of standard slaves, and
slaves with extended addressing mode (A/B slaves)
With input/output test function and many other
commissioning functions
Battery operation with 4 batteries type AA (IEC LR6,
NEDA 15)
Scope of supply:
3RK1904-2AB02
1 unit
42C
AS-i add-on modules

For communication of the compact starter with the control
system using AS-Interface
With two local inputs
3RA6970-3A
For safe disconnection through local safety relays,

e.g. cable-operated switches
With two free external inputs
Replaces the digital standard inputs
"Motor On" and "Group warning"
With one free external input and one free external
output
3RA6970-3B to -3F
Replaces the digital standard input

"Group warning"
With two free external outputs
Only for direct-on-line starters,
replaces the digital standard output
"Motor left"
For local control
Control of the compact starter optionally using
AS-Interface or local switches
Spare parts for AS-i add-on modules
Accessories for AS-i add-on modules
3RK1904-2AB02
Matching AS-Interface masters, routers and power supply units

see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication" "AS-Interface".

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/75
Connectors for data and auxiliary supply cable

with 2 insulation displacement terminations for standard
litz wires 2 x 0.5 ... 0.75 mm2
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
In addition, the integrated PE bar means it is optionally possible
to connect the motor cable directly to the infeed system without
additional intermediate terminals. The infeed system for 3RA6
compact starters is designed for summation currents up to
100 A with a maximum conductor cross-section of up to 70 mm
on the infeed terminal block.
The infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters enables far less
wiring in the main circuit and, thanks to the easy exchangeability
of the compact starters, reduces the usual downtimes for maintenance work during the plant's operating phase.
The infeed system provides the possibility of completely prewiring the main circuit without a compact starter needing to be connected at the same time. As the result of the removable terminals
in the main circuit, compact starters can be integrated in an
infeed system in easy manner (without the use of tools).
The infeed system can be mounted on a standard mounting rail

or flat surfaces.
11
8
NSB0_01878
12
10
Feeder terminal
PE pick-off
Three-socket expansion module
Connecting wedges
Two-socket expansion module
End cover
Expansion plug
10 45 mm adapter for SIRIUS motor starter protector size S0
PE infeed
11 3RA61 direct-on-line starter
PE expansion plug
12 3RA62 reversing starter
Infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters
8/76
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

$ Infeed
- End covers
The 3-phase infeed is available with screw connection

(25/35 mm2 up to 63 A or 50/70 mm2 up to 100 A) and
spring-type connection (25/35 mm2 up to 63 A).
On the last expansion module of a row, the socket provided for

the expansion plug can be covered by inserting the end cover.
The infeed with spring-type terminal can be fitted on the left as

well on as the right to an expansion module.
The infeed with screw terminal is supplied only with a 3-socket
expansion module and permanently fitted on the left side.
The infeeds with screw connection enable connection of the
main conductors (L1, L2, L3) either from above or from below.
The infeed with screw connection is supplied complete with
1 end cover, the infeed with spring-type connection complete
with 2 end covers.
% Three-socket expansion modules

The expansion module with 3 sockets for compact starters is
available with screw connection and with spring-type
connection.
Expansion modules enable the infeed system to be expanded
and can be fitted to each other in any number.
Two expansion modules are held together with the help of 2 connecting wedges and 1 expansion plug. These assembly parts
are included in the scope of supply of the respective expansion
module.
. 45 mm adapters for SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors

SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors size S0 with screw connection can be fitted to the adapter, enabling them to be plugged
into the infeed system.
IP20 terminal covers for increasing finger-safety
Universally configured terminal covers are available for the
3-phase infeeds with screw connection 25/35 mm2 and
50/70 mm2:
3RA6880-2AB terminal covers for infeeds with screw
connection 25/35 mm2 (3RA6812-8AB/AC)
3RA6880-3AB terminal covers for infeeds with screw
connection 50/70 mm2 (3RA6813-8AB/AC)
The terminal covers can be used in two ways on the infeed
terminals of the infeeds with screw connection 25/35 mm and
50/70 mm (see illustration):
If the terminals are connected, the cables are also covered:
- by approx. 14 mm with the 3RA6880-2AB
- by approx. 18 mm with the 3RA6880-3AB
On clamping points without connected cables, the covers can
be turned once and then pushed over the clamping points for
finger-safe covering of the metal parts.
When the infeed system for 3RA6 is used, the compact starters
(plug-in modules) are easily assembled and disassembled even
when live.
Optional possibilities:
PE connection on motor outgoing side
Outfeed for external auxiliary devices
Connection to 3RV29 infeed system
Integration of SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors size S0
(using 3RA6890-0BA adapter)
& Two-socket expansion modules

If only 2 instead of 3 additional sockets are required, then the
2-socket expansion module is the right choice. It has the same
functionality as the 3-socket expansion module.
( Expansion plug
Two expansion modules can be connected together using the
expansion plug. Flexible expansion of the infeed system is thus
possible.
) PE infeeds
This module enables a PE cable to be connected.
The PE infeed can be ordered with screw connection and
spring-type connection (35 mm2) and can be fitted on the right
or left to the expansion block.
* PE expansion plug
The PE expansion plug is inserted from below and enables two
PE bars to be connected.
+ PE pick-off
Use of the 3RA6880-2AB terminal cover on the infeed with screw

connection 25/35 mm (3RA6812-8AB/AC). The upper cover increases
the finger-safety for the connected conductors. The identical lower cover
is turned for use and prevents touching of the voltage-carrying metal
parts of the infeed terminal. For better recognition, the covers are shown
as transparent in this illustration and not in their original color.
Terminal blocks
Using the terminal block the 3 phases can be fed out of the
system; this means that single-phase, two-phase and threephase components can also be integrated in the system.
After the end cover is pulled out, the terminal block can be
plugged onto an expansion module.
The PE pick-off is available with screw connection and springtype connection (6/10 mm2). It is snapped into the infeed system
from below.
, Connecting wedges
Two connecting wedges are used to hold together 2 expansion
modules.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/77
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion plugs for SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed systems
Proposal for upstream short-circuit protection devices
After the end cover is pulled out, the expansion plug for the
SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed system can be plugged onto an expansion
module. It connects the infeed system for 3RA6 compact
starters with the SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed system.
The following short-circuit data apply for the components of the

infeed system for 3RA6 compact starters.
Maximum rated operational current

The following maximum rated operational currents apply for the
components of the infeed system for 3RA6:
Component
Maximum rated
operational current
Conductor
crosssection
Inscriptions
mm
Short-circuit protection for
infeed block (25/35 mm)
with screw connection
2.5 ... 35
Id, max = 19 kA, It = 440 kAs
Infeed with screw connection 50/70 mm
100
Short-circuit protection for

infeed block (50/70 mm)
with screw connection
Infeed with screw connection 25/35 mm
63
2.5 ... 70
Infeed with spring-type connection 25/35 mm 63

Expansion plug
63
With side-by-side mounting of several expansion modules, the

maximum rated operational current from the second expansion
module to the end of the row is 63 A.
Proposal for
upstream short-circuit
protection device
Id, max = approx. 22 kA
3RV1041-4JA10
3RV1041-4MA10
Short-circuit protection for infeed block

with spring-type connection
4
Id, max = 9.5 kA, It = 85 kAs
3RV1021-4DA10
Id, max = 12.5 kA, It = 140 kAs
3RV1031-4EA10
10
3RV1031-4HA10
16/25
3RV1041-4JA10
Short-circuit protection for terminal block

1.5
Id, max = 7.5 kA
5SY...
2.5
Id, max = 9.5 kA
1)
Id, max = 9.5 kA
1)
8/78
Siemens IC 10 2014
Id, max = 12.5 kA

To prevent the possibility of short circuits, the cables on the terminal block
must be installed so that they are short-circuit proof according to
EN 60439-1 Section 7.5.5.1.2.
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Three-phase infeeds and expansion modules

Infeeds with screw connection 25/35 mm2 left
Infeeds with screw connection at line side with
a permanently fitted 3-socket expansion module
with screw or spring-type terminals on the
outgoing side and integrated PE bar
Screw terminals
Expansion module with 3 sockets for

3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line starter
and 1 reversing starter
Screw terminals on the outgoing side
3RA6812-8AB
1 unit
42F
Spring-type terminals on the outgoing side
3RA6812-8AC
1 unit
42F
3RA6812-8AB
3RA6812-8AC
Infeeds with screw connection 50/70 mm2 left

Infeeds with screw connection at line side with
a permanently fitted 3-socket expansion module
with screw or spring-type terminals on the
outgoing side and integrated PE bar
3RA6813-8AB
Screw terminals
Expansion module with 3 sockets for

3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line starter
and 1 reversing starter,
suitable for UL operation according to UL 508
Type E
Screw terminals on the outgoing side
3RA6813-8AB
1 unit
42F
Spring-type terminals on the outgoing side
3RA6813-8AC
1 unit
42F
1 unit
42F
3RA6813-8AC
Infeeds with spring-type connection

25/35 mm2 left or right
Up to 63 A
3RA6830-5AC
3RA6830-5AC

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/79
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42F
1 unit
42F
1 unit
42F
1 unit
42F
Configurator
Expansion modules
Two-socket expansion modules
with screw or spring-type connection
and integrated PE bar
with 2 sockets for 2 direct-on-line starters or
1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting wedges
are included in the scope of supply.
Screw terminals
3RA6822-0AB
Screw terminals
3RA6822-0AB
3RA6822-0AC
3RA6822-0AC
Three-socket expansion modules

with screw or spring-type connection
and integrated PE bar
with 3 sockets for 3 direct-on-line starters or 1 direct-on-line
starter and 1 reversing starter
Expansion plug and 2 connecting wedges

are included in the scope of supply.
Screw terminals
3RA6823-0AB
Screw terminals
3RA6823-0AB
3RA6823-0AC
3RA6823-0AC
8/80
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Z
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42F
1 unit
42F
1 unit
42F
Accessories for infeed systems for 3RA6

PE infeeds 25/35 mm2
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
3RA6860-6AB
3RA6860-6AB
3RA6860-5AC
3RA6860-5AC
PE pick-offs 6/10 mm2

Screw terminals
A
3RA6870-4AB
Screw terminals
3RA6870-4AB
3RA6870-3AC
1 unit
42F
PE expansion plugs
3RA6890-0EA
1 unit
42F
Expansion plugs
between 2 expansion modules
3RA6890-1AB
1 unit
42F
3RA6890-1AA
1 unit
42F
3RA6870-3AC
Expansion plug
3RA6890-0EA
Is included in the scope of supply of the expansion

modules.
3RA6890-1AB
Expansion plugs for SIRIUS 3RV29 infeed system
Connects infeed system for 3RA6 to
3RV29 infeed system
3RA6890-1AA

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/81
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RA6890-0BA
1 unit
42F
3RA6880-2AB
1 unit
42F
3RA6880-3AB
1 unit
42F
1 unit
41E
1 unit
41B
Accessories for infeed systems for 3RA6 (Continued)

45 mm adapters
For SIRIUS 3RV1 motor starter protectors size S0
Screw terminals
(conductor cross-section AWG 10)
Screw terminals
A
3RA6890-0BA
Terminal covers for infeeds with screw connection

IP 20 terminal covers for infeeds with screw
connection 25/35 mm (3RA6812-8AB/AC)
(2 units per pack)
3RA6880-2AB
IP 20 terminal covers for infeeds with screw
connection 50/70 mm (3RA6813-8AB/AC)
(2 units per pack)
3RA6880-3AB
Terminal blocks
For integration of single-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase
external components
A
3RV2917-5D
3RV2917-5D

Screwdrivers
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
partially insulated
3RA2908-1A
A
3RA2908-1A
Documentation
See page 8/73
8/82
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RM1 Motor Starters
General data
Overview
Functional density/space requirement
The 3RM1 motor starters combine the functions of direct-online/reversing starting, electronic overload protection and safetyrelated shutdown in a single device, without changing in size.
For simple applications (such as starting and reversing threephase loads with overload protection), motor starter combinations of power contactors and a solid-state overload relay,
for example, can be replaced by a 3RM1 device. The more functions are required, the more devices can be replaced. The surface area required for each motor starter in the control cabinet is
reduced by values of 20 to 80 %.
In the case of assemblies and grouped feeder units there are
further advantages.
Wiring outlay
SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters are compact devices 22.5 mm

wide, combining a large number of functions in a single enclosure. They consist of combinations of relay contacts, power
semiconductors (hybrid technology), and a solid-state overload
relay for operational switching of three-phase motors up to 3 kW
(at 400 V) and resistive loads up to 10 A at AC voltages up to 500 V.
Characteristic
Value
Rated current
(wide setting range of
the electronic overload release)
0.1 ... 0.5 A

0.4 ... 2.0 A
1.6 ... 7.0 A (10 A)
48 ... 500 V
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
24 V DC, 110 V DC, 110 ... 230 V AC
Trip class
CLASS 10A
These savings reduce the time required for the wiring itself, while
at the same time reducing both the risk of wiring errors and the
amount of testing required after control cabinets have been
completed.
Configuration and stock keeping
The 3RM1 motor starters with overload protection with wide

setting range are offered as direct-on-line starters and reversing
starters and as versions with safety-related shutdown.
The wide setting range of the electronic overload release

(up to 1:5) reduces the cost of keeping stocks and the considerations involved in configuration where the actual motor current to
be expected is concerned. Compared with protection equipment with thermal overload protection, only 3 versions are now
required, instead of 17, to cover a current range of 0.1 to 7 A
when using the 3RM1.
The 3RM1 motor starters are available in four versions:
Connection methods
Characteristic
3RM10 3RM11 3RM12 3RM13
--
--
Reversing starters
--
--
Overload protection with wide setting

range
ATEX certification overload protection
--
--
Safety-related shutdown up to SIL 3/PL e --
--
The 3RM1 is available with screw terminals and spring-type terminals or mixed connection method (screw terminals for the
main circuit and push-in terminals for the control circuit).
Function available
-- Function not available
Hybrid technology
The 3RM1s combine the benefits of semiconductor technology
and relay technology. This combination is also known as hybrid
technology. The hybrid technology in the motor starter is characterized by the following features:
The inrush current is is conducted briefly via the semiconductors.
Advantage: protection of relay contacts, long service life due
to low wear
The uninterrupted current is conducted via relay contacts.
Advantage: lower heat losses compared with the semiconductor.
Shutdown is implemented again via the semiconductor.
Advantage: the contacts are only slightly exposed to arcs, and
this results in a longer service life.
Screw terminal for removable terminal (3-pole) for 3RM1 motor starters
and 3SK1 safety relays
Spring-type terminal as push-in connection for removable terminal

(3-pole) for 3RM1 motor starters and 3SK1 safety relays
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/83
3RM13 motor starter with reversing functionality, electronic overload

protection and safety-related shutdown
By combining various functions in a single device, wiring outlay

is reduced. The greater the scope of functions, the greater the
saving in wiring. Savings can be made in:
mains supply line and motor feeder, and device connections
in the main circuit
wiring of the reversing contactor assembly in the main circuit,
if required
contact locking if there is a reversing contactor assembly in
the control circuit
control cables for coil terminals in the control circuit
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Push-in connection method
& Sealable cover
Push-in connections are a form of spring-type connection allowing fast wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors
equipped with end sleeves.
To protect against unauthorized access, a sealable cover can be

attached.
Finely-stranded or stranded conductors with no end sleeve are

wired using a screwdriver (with a 3.0 x 0.5 mm blade).
As with other spring-type terminals, a screwdriver is also
required to release the conductor. The same tool as above can
be used for this purpose.
The advantages of the push-in terminals are found, as with all
spring-type terminals, in speed of assembly and disassembly
and vibration-proof connection. There is no need for the checking and tightening required with screw terminals.
Screw terminals
( LED status display

You can see at a glance from the LED status display whether
operation is normal or whether faults exist. This allows fast,
selective commissioning. Faults can be quickly traced and even
more quickly corrected.
) Rotary coding switch
The current of the motor to be monitored can be set using the
rotary coding switch. When a motor is replaced, it can be
adapted within the respective wide setting range. This means
that in most cases the motor starter does not have to be replaced.
* TEST/RESET button
Innovative enclosure concept
Acknowledgment in the event of a fault:

1. Resetting in the event of overload
2. Performance of the test function
3. Switching from manual to auto reset
+ 2D matrix code
The 2D matrix code enables simple and fast scanning in of
article numbers and serial numbers.
$ Terminals
The terminals are easy to replace, optionally with screw or
spring-type connections:
1,2,3: 3-pole terminals for the control circuit
4,5,6: 2-pole terminals for the main circuit
, Width
The width of only 22.5 mm saves space in the control cabinet,
and is thus cost-effective, especially in plants with a large
number of small motors up to 3 kW.
To access the top and bottom terminals, the covers must be

opened. To facilitate orientation, there is a laser inscription on the
inside of the caps for the connections.
5
3
6
IC01_00238
% Labeled cover caps
8
1
2
3
4
Connecting terminals
Labeled cover caps
Sealable cover
LED status display
5
6
7
8
Rotary coding switch

TEST/RESET button
2D matrix code
Width
Innovative enclosure concept for the SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters
8/84
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Safety-related shutdown/safety integration
Feedback to the control system
Thanks to the redundant design of the main circuit and internal

monitoring, safety-related shutdown in accordance with
SIL 3/PL e is possible by shutting down the control supply
voltage with 3RM11 Failsafe and 3RM13 Failsafe motor starters.
Additional safety relays are not required in the main circuit.
The electronic output in the 24 V DC control voltage version of

the 3RM10 and 3RM12 motor starters allows the status of the
connected motor to be reported to the higher-level control
system. If the motor starter is controlled via inputs IN1 to 2, once
the motor has been switched on and has started up correctly the
output "OUT" is set.
3RM1 motor starter
Infeed system for the main circuit

The 3RM19 infeed system available as an accessory for the
main circuit with three-phase busbars allows fast, virtually errorfree wiring of motor starters on the mains connection side and
may reduce the number of short-circuit protective devices.
IC01_00178
3SK1 safety relay
Motor
Combination of four SIRIUS 3RM1 Failsafe motor starters with

SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay to allow safety-related collective disconnection
of connected motors
3RM1 motor starters are ideal for combining with the 3SK1 safety
relay (see "Safety Technology" "SIRIUS 3SK1 Safety Relays").
They can be combined by means of:
conventional wiring
a special device connector
This makes it very simple to shut down connected motors collectively. The wiring, and ultimately the shutting down of the control
supply voltage in Emergency-Stop situations, is performed via
the device connector. There is no further need for complex looping of the connecting cables.
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd
4h
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
11th
3RM
Generation (1)
Function (direct-on-line starter = 0,

Failsafe direct-on-line starter = 1; reversing starter = 2;
Failsafe reversing starter = 3; accessories = 9)
Setting range rated motor current (0.1 ... 0.5 A = 01,

0.4 ... 2.0 A = 02, 1.6 ... 7.0 A = 07)
Connection type (screw terminal = 1, push-in spring-type terminal = 2,

mixed connection method1) = 3)
Reserved (A)
Width (22.5 mm = A)
Rated control supply voltage (24 V DC = 0; 110 V DC, 110 V ... 230 V AC = 1)
Rated operational voltage (48 ... 500 V = 4)

Example
1)
12th
3RM
Mixed connection method: Control circuit realized as push-in spring-type

terminal and main circuit as screw terminal
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/85
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
With 3RM1 motor starters, control cabinets warm up less
because power losses have been reduced by operation:
Lower intrinsic power loss (than comparable motor feeders
with thermal overload trips) thanks to electronic current
analysis
Lower control circuit power losses (compared with conventional switching devices) as a result of electronic control of
switching points
Thanks to the above advantages, additional energy savings
are possible because less cooling is required (and a more
compact design is possible)
Application
3RM1 motor starters are designed for applications in which
small motors have to be connected in the most confined spaces.
Main areas of use
Conveyor systems
Logistics systems
Production machines
Machine tools
Small elevators
The motor starter complies with the following standards:
IEC/EN 60947-4-2
UL 508
ATEX (available soon)
IEC 61508-1: SIL3 (available soon)
ISO 13849: PLe (available soon)
8/86
Siemens IC 10 2014
Product advantages
The SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters offer a number of benefits:
Greater endurance and reduced heat losses thanks to hybrid
technology
Less space required in the control cabinet (20 to 80 %) as a
result of greater functional density
Less wiring and testing required as a result of integrating
several functions into a single device
Lower costs for stock keeping and configuration as a result of
the wide setting range of the electronic overload release
(up to 1:5)
Fast wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors
equipped with end sleeves thanks to push-in spring-type
connections
Safety-related shutdown in accordance with SIL3/Ple by
shutting down the control supply voltage without additional
devices in the main circuit
Motor status feedback to the higher-level control system in the
case of 3RM10 and 3RM12 motor starters in the 24 V DC version
Virtually error-free wiring on the mains connection side and
reduction in short-circuit protective devices by means of
3RM19 infeed system
ATEX certification: "Increased safety" type of protection EEx e
according to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC (3RM1 motor starters in
the Failsafe version are suitable for overload protection of
explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type of
protection EEx e)
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3RM1
Width
Height
Depth

mm
mm
mm
22.5
100
136.5 (from the standard mounting rail)
141.6 (entire enclosure depth)
C
C
C
-25 +60
-40 +70
-40 +70
4 000
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
Installation altitude at height above sea level,
maximum
Shock resistance
6g / 11 ms
1 ... 6 Hz, 15 mm; 20 m/s, 500 Hz

IP20
IP degree of protection
Mounting position
10
10
NSB0_01703

Conducted RF interference emission according to CISPR11
Class B for residential, business and commercial

applications
Class B for residential, business and commercial
applications
Non-conducted RF interference emission according to CISPR11

Conducted interference as high frequency interference according to IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted interference BURST according to IEC 61000-4-4
Conducted interference - phase-to-ground SURGE according to IEC 61000-4-5
Conducted interference - phase-to-phase SURGE according to IEC 61000-4-5
4 kV contact discharge / 8 kV air discharge

10 V
2 kV / 5 kHz
2 kV
1 kV
Article No.
3RM1 .01
3RM1 .02
3RM1 .07
Main circuit
Operational voltage rated value maximum
500
Operating frequency
1 rated value
2 rated value
Hz
Hz
50
60
Insulation voltage rated value
600
Impulse withstand voltage rated value
kV
Operational current at 400 V at AC rated value
0.5
Active power loss typical
0.02
0.3
3.4
Minimum load in % of I_M
20
Adjustable response value current

of the inverse-time delayed overload release
0.1 0.5
0.4 2
1.6 7
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/87
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Article No.
3RM1 ...-.AA0.
3RM1 ...-.AA1.
DC
AC/DC
Control circuit
Type of voltage of the control supply voltage
Control supply voltage 1
At DC
At 50/60 Hz
- At AC
24
110
--
110 230
Frequency of the control supply voltage

1 rated value
2 rated value
Hz
Hz
---
50
60
0.8 1.25
0.85 1.1
--
0.85 1.1
Operating range factor of the control supply voltage, rated value

At DC
At 50 Hz/60 Hz
- At AC
Control current
0.08
0.05
Input voltage at the digital input

At DC
At AC
- Rated value
V
V
24
--
110
110 230
Input voltage at the digital input with signal <1>

At DC
At AC
V
V
19.2 30
--
93 ... 121
93 253
Input current at the digital input with signal <1>, typical
0.01
0.002
Screw terminals
Article No.
Connection methods for 3RM1

Connectable conductor cross-section for main contacts
Solid
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
- Without end sleeves
Connectable conductor cross-section for auxiliary contacts
Solid
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
AWG number as coded connectable conductor cross-section
For main contacts
For auxiliary contacts
Note:
All the above technical specifications are relevant for selecting
the motor starters. Details about installation conditions and the
use of the motor starters, and particularly about the derating of
the rated current, can be found in the manual (see Accessories)
and the data sheets.
8/88
Siemens IC 10 2014
mm
0.5 4
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
--
0.5 4
mm
0.5 2.5
0.5 1.5
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
--
0.5 1
0.5 1.5
20 12
20 14
20 16
Siemens AG 2013

3RM100.-1AA.4
Rating
for three-phase motor
at 400 V at 50/60 Hz
with 3-phase AC1)
Adjustable
current response value
of the inverse-time delayed
overload release
kW
3RM100.-2AA.4, 3RM100.-3AA.4
DT
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1001-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1002-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1007-@AA04
1 unit
41D

Us = 110 ... 230 V AC 50/60 Hz; 110 V DC
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1001-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1002-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1007-@AA14
1 unit
41D
Article No. supplements for connection types

With screw terminals for main and control circuit
With spring-type terminals for main and control circuit
With screw terminals for main circuit and spring-type terminals for control circuit

1)
The actual startup characteristics of the motor as well as its rated data are
important factors here.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/89
3RM10 motor starter for direct-on-line start,

with electronic overload protection
Us = 24 V DC
Siemens AG 2013

3RM120.-1AA.4
Rating
at 400 V at 50/60 Hz
with 3-phase AC1)
Adjustable
overload release
kW
3RM120.-2AA.4, 3RM120.-3AA.4
DT
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
3RM12 motor starter with reversing functionality and

electronic overload protection
Us = 24 V DC
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1201-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1202-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1207-@AA04
1 unit
41D

Us = 110 ... 230 V AC 50/60 Hz; 110 V DC
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1201-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1202-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1207-@AA14
1 unit
41D


1)
8/90
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

3RM110.-1AA.4
Rating
at 400 V at 50/60 Hz
with 3-phase AC1)
Adjustable
overload release
kW
3RM110.-2AA.4, 3RM110.-3AA.4
DT
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1101-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1102-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1107-@AA04
1 unit
41D

Us = 110 ... 230 V AC 50/60 Hz; 110 V DC
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1101-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1102-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1107-@AA14
1 unit
41D


1)
2)
Start of delivery on request.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/91
3RM11 motor starter for direct-on-line start, with electronic overload

protection and safety-related shutdown2)
Us = 24 V DC
Siemens AG 2013

3RM130.-1AA.4
Rating
at 400 V at 50/60 Hz
with 3-phase AC1)
Adjustable
overload release
kW
3RM130.-2AA.4, 3RM130.-3AA.4
DT
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
3RM13 motor starter with reversing functionality,

electronic overload protection and
safety-related shutdown2)
Us = 24 V DC
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1301-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1302-@AA04
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1307-@AA04
1 unit
41D

Us = 110 ... 230 V AC 50/60 Hz; 110 V DC
0 0.12
0.1 0.5
3RM1301-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.09 0.75
0.4 2
3RM1302-@AA14
1 unit
41D
0.55 3
1.6 7
3RM1307-@AA14
1 unit
41D


1)
2)
Start of delivery on request.
8/92
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Accessories for 3RM1 motor starters
The following accessories are available for the 3RM1 motor
starter:
3-phase infeed system for the main circuit
Device connectors for the control circuit
Spare terminals for main and control circuits
- With screw terminals
- With push-in spring-type terminals
Push-in lugs for wall mounting the motor starters
Sealable cover as protection against unauthorized access
Three-phase infeed system
(3RM19 three-phase busbar system)
These busbars are available in three lengths, thus allowing

2, 3 or 5 motor starters (arranged side-by-side) to be connected
at the same time. More than 5 devices can be connected by
clamping the connection tags of an additional busbar rotated by
180 (e.g. 6 devices using one 5-pole busbar and one 2-pole
busbar).
A single motor starter can be removed from the assembly without loosening the terminal screws of neighboring motor starters.
The maximum summation current must not exceed 25 A. Primary
infeed is connected via a three-phase infeed terminal.
The three-phase busbars are finger-safe but empty connection
tags must be fitted with covers.
Special three-phase busbar systems can be used to provide an

easy, time-saving and safe means of feeding two or more
3RM1 motor starters with screw terminals.
IC01_00169a
180
2
3
4
4 3RM1 motor starters on standard mounting rail with one

free slot
3RM1920-1AA three-phase feeder terminal
2 3RM1910-1DA three-phase busbars rotated through 180
for the connection of up to 9 motor starters
5 covers for 3 3RM1910-6AA connection tags respectively
for unused slots
3RM19 infeed system with three-phase infeed terminal: In the above example, two three-phase busbars (5-pole busbars) rotated through 180 allow
up to 9 3RM1 motor starters to be connected. Contact with the unused connection tags in unoccupied positions is prevented safely by the covers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/93
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Device connectors for the control circuit
The outlay for cabling between the devices is reduced using
device connectors snapped onto a mounting rail, or screwed
onto a level mounting panel (one device connector per motor
starter).
By using device connectors, several motor starters can be jointly

supplied with a control supply voltage of 24 V DC. This requires
the control supply voltage to be applied to the A1 and A2 terminals of only one motor starter.
Up to ten motor starters can be connected with device connectors. The 24 V DC control supply voltage must be within the
operating range of 0.9 to 1.1 for this purpose. If the full operating
range of 0.8 to 1.25 is to be used, no more than five motor starters can be used.
IC01_00218
Using the device connectors only for feeding in the control

supply voltage
If the motor starters are not to be interconnected side-by-side,

device daisy chain connectors must be used for the gaps.
When removing a motor starter, the corresponding device connector must be replaced by a device daisy chain connector if the
control voltage is not to be interrupted for motor starters on the
right.
The last motor starter in a row can be placed on a device termination connector. Flush termination of the configuration is thus
possible.
Device connectors snapped onto a standard mounting rail to allow the

joint connection of the control supply voltage for 3RM1 motor starters or
connection to the 3SK1 safety relays
Using device connectors in conjunction with 3SK1 safety relays
Usage restrictions for accessories

The 3RM19 3-phase infeed system for the main circuit can
only be used with 3RM1 motor starters with screw terminals.
The device connectors are only suitable for 3RM1 motor
starters with a control supply voltage of 24 V DC.
Interconnection of several Standard or Failsafe version motor

starters into a group can also be used for joint disconnection by
a 3SK1 safety relay.
Disconnection of the motor starters occurs through the removal
of the control supply voltage by means of the 3SK1 relay. For this
reason, the voltage must not also be applied to the motor starters.
The motors can then also be shut down safely according to
SIL 3/PL e with the motor starters.
Up to five motor starters can be operated on one safety relay
with device connectors. If the motor starters are not to be interconnected side-by-side, device daisy chain connectors must be
used for the gaps.
The last motor starter in a row must be placed on a device termination connector. This closes the circuits that were built up with
the connectors.
For 3SK1 safety relays and associated device connectors see
Chapter 11 "Safety Technology" "SIRIUS 3SK1 Safety Relays"
8/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Product designation
DT
Article No.
For 2 motor starters
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RM1920-1AA
1 unit
41D
3RM1910-1AA
1 unit
41D
3RM1910-1BA
1 unit
41D
3RM1910-1DA
1 unit
41D
Covers
for 3 connection tags of the
three-phase busbars
3RM1910-6AA
1 10 units
41D
Device connectors
for 3RM1 motor starters 24 V DC, 22.5 mm
3ZY1212-2EA00
1 unit
41L
Device daisy chain connectors

for gaps without motor starters in assemblies.
3ZY1212-2AB00
1 unit
41L
Device termination connectors

3ZY1212-2FA00
1 unit
41L
3RM19 three-phase infeed system for 3RM1 with screw terminals

3RM1920-1AA
Three-phase busbars
3RM1910-1AA
3RM1910-1BA
3RM1910-6AA
Device connectors for the electrical connection of

SIRIUS devices in the industrial standard mounting rail enclosure1)
3ZY1212-2EA00
3ZY1212-2AB00
3ZY1212-2FA00
1) Device connectors are only suitable for 3RM1 motor starters with a control supply
voltage of 24 V DC.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/95
3RM1910-1DA
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6 units
41L
6 units
41L
6 units
41L
6 units
41L
Removable terminals for SIRIUS devices in the industrial standard

mounting rail enclosure for use in the main circuit
Terminals, 2-pole
Screw terminals
Screw terminals,
1x4 mm
3ZY1122-1BA00
3ZY1122-1BA00
Spring-type terminals as push-in terminals, 1x4 mm A
3ZY1122-2BA00
3ZY1122-2BA00
Removable terminals for SIRIUS devices in the industrial standard

mounting rail enclosure for use in the control circuit
Terminals, 3-pole
Screw terminals
Screw terminals,
1x2.5 mm
3ZY1131-1BA00
3ZY1131-1BA00
Spring-type terminals as push-in terminals,
1x2.5 mm
3ZY1131-2BA00
3ZY1131-2BA00
8/96
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Product designation
DT
Article No.
Push-in lugs for wall mounting

(2 lugs per motor starter are required,
i.e. 1 PS is sufficient for 5 motor starters)
Sealable covers, 22.5 mm

(Simple protection against unauthorized access)
Coding pins for removable terminals of SIRIUS

devices in the industrial standard mounting rail
enclosure
For mechanical coding of removable terminals
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZY1311-0AA00
1 10 units
41L
3ZY1321-2AA00
5 units
41L
3ZY1440-1AA00
1 12 units
41L
Further accessories
3ZY1311-0AA00
3ZY1321-2AA00
3ZY1440-1AA00
Documentation
Manual1)
1)
Available as a PDF (also in other languages) see


Siemens IC 10 2014
8/97
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S Motor Starters and Safety Motor Starters
General data
Overview
Device replacement is easy and quick thanks to permanent
wiring and automatic re-parameterization.
ET 200S motor starters in the ET 200S I/O system

The SIMATIC ET 200S is the multifunctional and bit-modular
I/O system in degree of protection IP20 for exact adaptation to
the automation task.
Hot swapping, i. e. the disconnection and connection of

modules without prior isolation, guarantees high availability of
the automation system along with extensive diagnostics
information.
Interface modules (IM) are used for connecting the ET 200S to

PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET. If interface modules with integrated S7-CPU are used, the ET 200S can act as a miniature
controller.
The ET 200S is designed for combining with a large range of
digital and analog input or output modules, technology modules,
IO-Link master modules, pneumatic connections, or motor
starters and frequency converters for the control of drives.
In addition to the standard versions, SIPLUS versions are available both for interface modules and I/O modules. They can be
used for an extended temperature range and increased medial
loads.
Interface module
IM 151
Solid-state modules
For detailed information about SIMATIC ET 200S see

Catalog ST 70 2013.
With the ET 200S motor starters, any AC loads can be protected
and switched. The communication interface makes them ideal
for operation in distributed control cabinets or control enclosures.
Standard direct-on-line starter

DS1-x
Power
module
PM-D
Brake control
module xB4
High-Feature soft starter

DSS1e-x HF
High-Feature
High-Feature
direct-on-line starter direct-on-line starter
DS1e-x HF
DS1e-x HF
Power
module
PM-E
The ET 200S motor starters are connected to the control system

and parameterized through the fieldbus using either PROFIBUS
or PROFINET via IM modules available in both standard and
safety-related versions.
NSA0_00459
Terminal module
for PM-D TM-P15
Terminal module for standard

direct-on-line starter with infeed
TM-DS45-S32
PE/N terminal block
M45-PEN-F
Terminal module for standard

direct-on-line starter
without infeed
TM-DS45-S31
PE/N terminal
block
M45-PEN-S
Infeed module
M65-PEN-F
Terminal module for

High-Feature direct-on-line
starter/soft starter with infeed
TM-DS65-S32
Interaction of ET 200S motor starter components in the ET 200S I/O system
8/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
Connection module
M65-PEN-S
Terminal module for

brake control module
TM-xB215-S24-01
Terminal module for High-Feature

direct-on-line starter/soft starter
without infeed
TM-DS65-S31
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Motor starter versions
Parameterization and configuration
The ET 200S motor starters are available as direct-on-line,

reversing or soft starter versions:
Standard motor starters up to 5.5 kW
(direct-on-line and reversing starters)
High-Feature motor starters up to 7.5 kW
(direct-on-line, reversing and direct-on-line soft starters)
Failsafe motor starters up to 7.5 kW
(direct-on-line and reversing starters)
- Properties of the High-Feature motor starter
- Failsafe functionality
Configuration is made easier by the bit-modular structure.
Innovation of the ET 200S High-Feature motor starters
The motor starter protector signaling is freely programmable

with regard to group fault signals (group fault at motor starter
protector "Off"/group fault signal at motor starter protector "Off"
only in case of "On" command from the motor starter).
Basic functionality of the ET 200S motor starters

All versions of the ET 200S motor starters have the following
functionality. Any additional specific functionality is described
for the respective versions.
Fully pre-wired motor starters for switching and protecting any
AC loads up to 7.5 kW at 400 V AC and 500 V AC
With self-assembling 40/50 A power bus, i. e. the load voltage
is only fed in once for a group of motor starters
All control supply voltages connected only once, i.e. when
modules are added they are automatically connected to the
next module
Hot swapping is permissible
Inputs and outputs for activating and signaling the status are
already integrated
Control of the motor starter from the control system and of the
diagnostics status via the cyclic process image
Diagnostics capability for active monitoring of the switching
and protection functions
The signal states in the process image of the motor starter
provide information about protective devices (short circuit or
overload), the switching states of contactor(s) or soft starters,
and system faults.
Interface for controlling an expansion module, e. g. brake
control module xB1 ... xB4 for controlling mechanical brakes
in three-phase motors for 24 V DC and 500 V DC.
Brake control module xB5 and xB6 for 400 V AC
Can be combined with safety technology for use in safetyrelated system components (IEC 62061 and ISO 13849-1).
Mounting
As the motor starters are fully pre-wired, up to 80 % of the wiring
outlay can be saved. The control cabinets can be assembled far
more quickly and compactly.
Expansions are easily possible through the subsequent adding
of terminal modules. With their terminal block design (10 mm),
the latter also do away with the distribution wiring otherwise
required. Through the permanent wiring and the "hot swapping"
function (disconnection and connection during operation) a
motor starter can be replaced within seconds if necessary.
The motor starters are therefore recommendable in particular for
applications with special demands on availability.
All ET 200S motor starters are set up without fuses. Contactors

and soft starters are activated through the integrated outputs.
The inputs of the motor starters evaluate the signal states of the
protective devices (short circuit or overload), the switching
states of contactor(s) or soft starters, and system faults.
Brake control modules and optional digital inputs and

outputs
With one of the optional brake control modules (xB1-xB6), which
is butt-mounted to the right of a motor starter, it is possible to
control a mechanical holding brake on a three-phase motor from
the process image of the motor starter.
Motors with 24 V DC brakes (xB1, xB3) as well as motors with
500 V DC brakes (xB2, xB4) can be controlled using the brake
control modules xB1-xB4.
The modules xB5 (without digital input) and xB6 (with two digital
inputs) have been added to the range in order to control a
mechanical holding brake with a rated operational voltage of
400 V AC. A further motor brake voltage commonly found on the
market is thus supported.
The 24 V DC brakes have an external supply and can be
released independently of the switching state of the motor
starter. By contrast the 500 V DC brakes and the 400 V AC
brakes usually have a direct supply from the terminal board of
the motor through a rectifier module and therefore cannot be
released when the motor starter is switched off. These brakes
cannot be used in combination with the DSS1e-x motor starter
(soft starter).
The outputs of the brake control modules can be used alternatively for other purposes, e.g. for controlling DC valves.
With two digital inputs available on the brake control modules
(xB3, xB4, xB6) and another two digital inputs available on the
optional control module it is possible to realize autonomous
special functions which work independently of the bus and the
higher-level control system, e.g. as a quick stop on gate valve
controls. The signals of these digital inputs are in the process
image and are reported to the control system.
Power supply through terminal modules
Power is supplied through the terminal modules for motor
starters:
The auxiliary voltages are fed in only once via the PM-D or
PM-DFx power module which must be connected to the left of
the first motor starter.
The load voltage is fed in at the first (left) TM-xxxxS32 terminal
module of a motor starter. The other TM-xxxxS31 terminal
modules are automatically supplied with power through the
integrated power bus when they are mounted side by side.
If the power bus is utilized to its full capacity of 40 A for
Standard motor starters or 50 A for High-Feature motor
starters, a new supply must be fed in through an additional
TM-xxxxS32 terminal module.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/99
The ET 200S High-Feature motor starters have undergone

radical innovation and now support the acyclic services on
PROFIBUS and PROFINET as well as PROFIenergy on
PROFINET. They are now:
Even more flexible flexible assignment of parameters
Even better integrated in TIA (Totally Integrated Automation)
Even more transparent through comprehensive diagnostic
data records
Even more anticipatory through maintenance functions
Energy-efficient through PROFIenergy
When using the ET 200S motor starters, the list of parts per load
feeder is reduced to two main items: The passive terminal
module and the motor starter. This makes the ET 200S ideal for
modular machine concepts as well.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
TM-DS and TM-RS terminal modules for motor starters
Mechanical modules in which the motor starter and expansion
modules are inserted
For constructing the permanent wiring and self-assembling
voltage bus
For connecting the motor connection cables
Positive-locking connection to ensure enhanced vibration
resistance
Terminal modules are purely mechanical components for
accommodating the ET 200S I/O modules. The self-assembling
voltage buses integrated into the terminal modules reduce wiring outlay to the single infeed (both of auxiliary and load voltage). All modules following on the right are automatically supplied upon plugging the terminal modules together. The rugged
design and keyed connection technology enables use in harsh
industrial conditions.
The TM-DS and TM-RS terminal modules are available in various

versions for the Standard motor starters and the High-Feature
motor starters.
Terminal modules with the suffix "-S32"
The terminal modules with the suffix "-S32" have connection
terminals for feeding into the integrated 40A/50A power bus
and connection terminals for the motor connection cable.
They are mounted at the beginning (left) of a power bus
segment.
To configure a new load group, another "-S32" terminal module
is plugged in.
The "-S32" terminal modules are supplied with three caps for
closing the power bus contacts on the final terminal module of
a segment.
Optionally expandable with PE/N modules
Terminal modules with the suffix "-S31"
The terminal modules with the suffix "-S31" only have connection terminals for the motor connection cable. These terminal
modules follow on the right after a "-S32" terminal module.
Optionally expandable with PE/N modules
All connection terminals of the terminal modules for motor
starters are equipped with powerful 10 mm screw terminals.
Power modules (page 8/111)
PM-D power modules are used for monitoring the two 24 V DC
auxiliary voltages for the group of motor starters following on the
right or for supplying power to the group of frequency converters
following on the right.
TM-P terminal modules for PM-D power modules
(page 8/112)
Connection using screw terminals
Light colored enclosure for visual distinction
Always before the first TM-DS/TM-RS
8/100
Siemens IC 10 2014
ET 200S Safety motor starters with integrated safety

technology
The safety-related, communication-capable ET 200S motor
starters offer the right solution for every safety application. The
range extends from the simple local safety solution through to
the user-friendly version with PROFIsafe, which can be used in
conjunction with a safe control system (see "Safety Modules
local and PROFIsafe", page 8/116).
The safety technology is an integral part and is therefore
pre-wired at the factory.
The ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions comprise:
Safety modules (page 8/117)
Standard motor starters (page 8/105)
High-Feature motor starters (page 8/108)
Failsafe motor starters (page 8/113)
System configuration with ET 200S motor starters
When constructing an ET 200S station with motor starters a
distinction can be made between the following configurations:
Conventional ET 200S motor starter solution consisting of:
- PM-D module
- Standard motor starter or High-Feature motor starter
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution local (see page 8/116)
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe
(see page 8/120)
SIRIUS motor starter block library for SIMATIC PCS 7
With the SIRIUS motor starter PCS 7 block library, SIRIUS
ET 200S motor starters (direct and reversing starters,
direct-on-line soft starters) can be easily and simply integrated
motor starter PCS 7 block library contains the diagnostics and
driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 corresponding diagnostics
and driver blocks as well as the elements required for operation
and monitoring (symbols and faceplates), see Chapter
"Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS".
Configuration tool for ET 200S station
The "SIMATIC Selection Tool" enables the fast and accurate
selection of SIMATIC hardware. It is available as a configurator
in the Siemens Industry Mall free of charge. Combine your stations (e.g. S7-1200, S7-300, S7-400, S7-400H) and select the
desired distributed I/O (e.g. ET 200S, ET 200pro). You can transfer the parts list you receive to the Industry Mall shopping cart
and place your order quickly, conveniently and with no problems.
You can find detailed information about the ET 200S system at:
www.siemens.com/ET200S
Here you will find a link to the SIMATIC Selection Tool.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
SIMATIC ET 200S
SIMATIC ET 200S
High-Feature motor starters1)
Device functions (firmware features)

Slave on the bus
Fieldbus
Dependent on interface module
Parameterization
PROFIBUS/PROFINET data records
--
Parameterization using data record start-up
--
Acyclic through data records
--
Diagnostic interrupt support
Diagnostics using PROFIBUS/PROFINET
--
See manual2)
Process image
3I/3O
16I/7O
Address area required per module
4 bits
2 bytes
Manual mode local interface
--
Through module
Motor Starter ES via local interface
--
Starting end of 2011
Motor Starter ES via bus
--
Starting end of 2011
Parameterization
--
Support for PROFIenergy profile
--
Measuring the motor current and disconnection

in idle times
Diagnostics
Process image
Data channels
Data records (acyclic)
Diagnostics
--
Measured values
--
Statistics
--
Commands
--
Slave pointer
--
Logbook
--
Device identification
--
I&M data
--
Number
Maximum 2, via xB3, xB4, xB6
Maximum 4, 2 via xB3, xB4, xB6 and

2 via module 2DI 24 V DC COM
Inputs
Of which in the process image
--
Input action
End position on left, right
Parameterizable: flexible
Quick stop
--
Parameterizable
Outputs
Number
Internal, for controlling the brake module
Output action
Brake
Brake output with additional module

Motor brake voltage: brake module
24 V DC: xB1/xB3, 500 V DC: xB2/xB4, 400 V AC: xB5/xB6
Motor protection
Overload protection
Thermal, range 1:1.3
Overload warning
-- Only tripping
Solid-state, wide range 1:10
--
Motor protection response in case of overload

Thermal motor model response
--
Parameterizable: disconnection without restart,

disconnection with restart, warning
Automatic reset
--
Temperature sensor
--
Emergency start function
-- ( with control unit 3RK1903-0CG00)
Function available
1)
The specified device functions apply in full only to the new .-.AB4 starters.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/101
Siemens AG 2013

General data
SIMATIC ET 200S
SIMATIC ET 200S
Repair switch
Rocker switch
Motor starter protector signaling
Parameterizable
Lower current limit monitoring
--
Parameterizable,
increment 3.125 %, 18.75 ... 100 %
Upper current limit monitoring
--
Parameterizable,
increment 3.125 %, 50 ... 400 %
Zero current detection
--

Device functions
Parameterizable: warning, disconnection

Parameterizable
Stall protection/disconnecting the blocking current -Unbalance
Parameterizable: warning, disconnection
Load type
--
Parameterizable: 1 and 3-phase
Tripping class
Protection against voltage failure
Parameterizable
for DS1e-x, RS1e-x: CLASS 5 (10a), 10, 15, 20
for DSS1e-x:
CLASS 5 (10a), 10 (only at 0.3 ... 3 A)
CLASS 10
Parameterizable: Activated/deactivated
Local diagnostics functions using LEDs

Red/green/yellow LEDs
"C-STAT" switching status

"SF" group fault
Red LEDs
"DEVICE" device status
--
Auxiliary switches for enabling circuit of the

ET 200S safety technology already integrated
(for use up to SIL 3 (IEC 61508) or PL e
(EN ISO 13849-1) in combination with
infeed contactor)
-- Failsafe kit needed
Red/green/yellow LEDs
Except DSS1e-x (max. SIL 1 or PL b can be
achieved)
Function available
ET 200S Standard motor starters ET 200S High-Feature motor starters

DS1-x, RS1-x
DS1e-x, RS1e-x
DSS1e-x

Soft starter control function
Soft start function
--
Bypass function
--
Starting time
--
Locally adjustable, not through bus

0 ... 20 s
Ramp-down time
--

0 ... 20 s
Ramp-down mode
--
Start voltage
--

30 ... 100 % of Ue
Stopping voltage
--
Trace
--
Function available
8/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
We offer you a unique portfolio for industrial energy management, using an energy management system that helps to optimally define your energy needs. We split up our industrial energy management into three phases identify, evaluate, and
SIMATIC ET 200S motor starters contribute to energy efficiency

as follows:
Energy management
Provision of energy data (current) by bus to higher-level
systems using PROFIenergy (see "High-Feature Motor
Starters", page 8/108)
Elimination of energy consumption in dead times through
disconnection using PROFIenergy (see "High-Feature Motor
Current management
Avoidance of current peaks, thus reducing the load on the grid
and the mechanical system
Reduced heating of the control cabinet
drive systems, enabling also lower cooling costs (and a more
compact design)
Application
Application areas
The SIMATIC ET 200S motor starters are suitable for numerous
sectors of industry, e. g. machinery and plant engineering or
conveying applications.
The ET 200S High-Feature motor starters are an excellent choice
for the operation of ventilation systems, pump drives or winches.
DS1-x, RS1-x
DS1e-x, RS1e-x
42
17
DSS1e-x

Motor starters for connection to ET 200S, max.1)
mm
45 x (265 + 45) x (120 + 27);

65 x (290 + 45) x (150 + 23);
(45: PE/N block;
(45: PE/N block; 23: control module)
27: auxiliary switch contactor from
F-Kit)
Reversing starters
mm
90 x (265 + 45) x (120 + 27);

130 x (290 + 45) x (150 + 23);
(45: PE/N block;
(45: PE/N block; 23: control module)
27: auxiliary switch contactor from
F-Kit)
During operation
0 ... +60, from +40 with derating
0 ... +60, for horizontal mounting up to +40
During storage
-40 ... +70
-40 ... +70
Vertical, horizontal with derating
Vertical, horizontal
kg
1.0/1.6
1.6/2.2
1.1/1.8
1.7/2.3
1.1
Weight
Direct-on-line/reversing starters incl. terminal
module
Direct-on-line/reversing starters incl. terminal
block PE/N
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068, parts 2-6 g
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068, parts 2-27
g/ms
Square 5/11
Solid
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (1 ... 2.5)2); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2), according to IEC 60947: max. 1 x 10

2 x (1 ... 2.5)2); 2 x (2.5 ... 6)2)
2 x (14 ... 10)
Contactors
Contactors with safety function (F-Kit)
IP20, finger-safe (also applies to terminal modules on a dismounted motor starter)

Oper- 100 000
ating 30 million
cycles 10 million
10 million
--
---
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/103
The SIMATIC ET 200S motor starters are ideal for the use of
several spatially concentrated distributed drive solutions in
which several motors, digital or analog sensors and actuators
are addressed by a distributed control cabinet or control box.
They are perfectly suited for protecting and switching any
AC loads.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
DS1-x, RS1-x
DS1e-x, RS1e-x
DSS1e-x
mA
mA
Approx. 20
Approx. 100
Approx. 40
Approx. 1 700 (80 ms long),
approx. 350 (after 80 ms)
Approx. 30
Rated operational current for terminal modules

TM-D Ie
40
50
Power consumption
From auxiliary circuit L+/M (U1)
From auxiliary circuit A1/A2 (U2)
400
Approval DIN VDE 0106, part 101
Yes, up to 500
Yes, up to 480
CSA and UL approval
Yes, up to 600
Yes, up to 480
A
A
12
9
16
11
3 / 8 / 16
--
AC-4 at 60 C
- At 400 V
4.1
--
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
kA
50 at 400 V
Power of three-phase motors at 500 V
kW
5.5
Rated operational current Ie for motor starters

AC-1/2/3 at 60 C
- At 400 V
- At 500 V
Protective separation between main and

auxiliary circuits
7.5
AC-1, AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
Utilization categories
V
400, according to DIN VDE 0106, part 101
Positively-driven operation of contactor relay

(NC)
Yes
Trip class
CLASS 10
Parameterizable
CLASS 5 (10 A), 10, 15, 20
0.3 ... 3 A: CLASS 10/10A,

parameterizable;
2.4 ... 8 A: CLASS 10A
2.4 ... 16 A: CLASS 10A
Up to 1.6 A: 2
Up to 12 A: 1
Up to 16 A: 2
Up to 16 A: 1
Contactors
Permissible switching frequency
with starting time
tA = 0.1 s and relative ON period tED = 50%
100 000
See manual3)
1/h
< 80
Induction protection
Additional limits: process image, max. design width 2 m.
2)

More information
Notes on safety
Siemens IC 10 2014
-See manual3)
Already installed
1)
8/104
--
3)
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Functionality of the Standard motor starters
For basic functionality see "General data" "Overview",
page 8/99
Direct-on-line and reversing starters up to 5.5 kW
Power bus up to 40 A
With motor starter protector and contactor assembly
Integrated isolating function via motor starter protector
Can be combined with local safety technology for use in
safety-related system components with F-Kit and PM-D F
modules (see "Accessories" "Overview", page 8/127)

See "General data" "Overview", page 8/101
See "General data" "Technical specifications", page 8/103

Motor rating three-phase
motor 4-pole at 400 V AC,
standard output P
Setting range of
the overcurrent release
kW
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
DS1-x
< 0.06
0.06
0.09
0.14 ... 0.20

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
A
A
A
3RK1301-0BB00-0AA2
3RK1301-0CB00-0AA2
3RK1301-0DB00-0AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
0.10
0.12
0.18
0.28 ... 0.40

0.35 ... 0.50
0.45 ... 0.63
A
A
A
3RK1301-0EB00-0AA2
3RK1301-0FB00-0AA2
3RK1301-0GB00-0AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
0.21
0.25
0.37
0.55 ... 0.80

0.70 ... 1.00
0.90 ... 1.25
A
A
A
3RK1301-0HB00-0AA2
3RK1301-0JB00-0AA2
3RK1301-0KB00-0AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
0.55
0.75
0.90
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2.0
1.8 ... 2.5
A
A
A
3RK1301-1AB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1BB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1CB00-0AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
1.1
1.5
1.9
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4.0
3.5 ... 5.0
A
A
A
3RK1301-1DB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1EB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1FB00-0AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8.0
7 ... 10
9 ... 12
A
A
A
A
3RK1301-1GB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1HB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1JB00-0AA2
3RK1301-1KB00-0AA2
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
42D
< 0.06
0.06
0.09
0.14 ... 0.20

0.18 ... 0.25
0.22 ... 0.32
A
C
A
3RK1301-0BB00-1AA2
3RK1301-0CB00-1AA2
3RK1301-0DB00-1AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
0.10
0.12
0.18
0.28 ... 0.40

0.35 ... 0.50
0.45 ... 0.63
A
A
A
3RK1301-0EB00-1AA2
3RK1301-0FB00-1AA2
3RK1301-0GB00-1AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
0.21
0.25
0.37
0.55 ... 0.80

0.70 ... 1.00
0.90 ... 1.25
A
A
A
3RK1301-0HB00-1AA2
3RK1301-0JB00-1AA2
3RK1301-0KB00-1AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
0.55
0.75
0.90
1.1 ... 1.6

1.4 ... 2.0
1.8 ... 2.5
A
A
A
3RK1301-1AB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1BB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1CB00-1AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
1.1
1.5
1.9
2.2 ... 3.2

2.8 ... 4.0
3.5 ... 5.0
A
A
A
3RK1301-1DB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1EB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1FB00-1AA2
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
4.5 ... 6.3

5.5 ... 8.0
7 ... 10
9 ... 12
A
A
A
A
3RK1301-1GB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1HB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1JB00-1AA2
3RK1301-1KB00-1AA2
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
42D
Reversing starter RS1-x
RS1-x

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/105
Standard motor starters,

with diagnostics, electromechanical, fuseless,
expandable with Brake Control Module
Direct starter DS1-x
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Terminal modules TM-DS, TM-RS
More information see also "General data" "Overview" from
the section "Power supply through terminal modules", page 8/99.
"S32" version with supply terminals: 2 x 3 x 10 mm screw

terminals for power bus and motor feeder
"S31" version without supply terminals: 1 x 3 x 10 mm screw
terminals for motor feeder
Optionally expandable with PE/N modules (see "Accessories",
page 8/130)
Applies only to Standard motor starters: For applications with
high motor currents (> 6.3 A) or high ambient temperatures
(> 40 C), it is recommended to use the DM-V15 distance
module between two DS1-x motor starters (see "Accessories",
page 8/128).
TM-DS45 and TM-DS65/TM-FDS65 terminal modules
TM-DS45
TM-DS65/TM-FDS65
Dimensions
mm
45 x 264 x 100
65 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N terminal block
mm
306
332
Depth with motor starter
mm
127
150
Depth with motor starter and F-Kit (safety technology)
mm
152
--
Depth with motor starter and 2DI control module
mm
--
173
690
V AC 500
kV
40
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Solid
mm2
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1) or
2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
mm2
1 x 10 or
2 x (1 ... 2.5 )1) or
2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
With additional three-phase infeed terminal if required

- Solid or stranded
mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25

mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25
AWG 1 x 12 ... 4
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
50
Wiring
Required tool
Tightening torque
1)

Nm
2.0 ... 2.5

TM-RS90 and TM-RS130/TM-FRS130 terminal modules

TM-RS90
TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Dimensions
mm
90 x 264 x 100
130 x 290 x 100
Height with PE/N
mm
306
332
Depth with motor starter
mm
127
150
Depth with motor starter and F-Kit (safety technology)
mm
152
--
Depth with motor starter and 2DI control module
mm
--
173
690
V AC 500
kV
40
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Rated voltages, currents and frequencies for the power bus
8/106
Siemens IC 10 2014
50
Siemens AG 2013

TM-RS90
TM-RS130/TM-FRS130
Solid
mm2
2 x (1 ... 2.5)1) or 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
mm2
1 x 10 or
2 x (1 ... 2.5 )1) or 2 x (2.5 ... 6)1)
AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
With additional three-phase infeed terminal if required

- Solid or stranded
mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25

mm2 1 x 2.5 ... 25
AWG 1 x 12 ... 4
Wiring
Required tool
Tightening torque
1)
Nm
2.0 ... 2.5


Version
DT
Article No.
TM-DS45-S32
for DS1-x direct-on-line starters
with incoming power bus connection
including three caps for terminating the power bus
TM-DS45-S31
without incoming power bus connection
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-0AB00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-0AB10
1 unit
42D
TM-RS90-S32
for RS1-x reversing starters
with incoming power bus connection
including three caps for terminating the power bus
3RK1903-0AC00
1 unit
42D
TM-RS90-S31
for RS1-x reversing starters
3RK1903-0AC10
1 unit
42D
Terminal modules for Standard motor starters
3RK1 903-0AB00
3RK1 903-0AB10
3RK1 903-0AC00

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/107
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Functionality of the High-Feature motor starters
For basic functionality see "General data" "Overview",
page 8/99.
Direct-on-line, reversing or soft starter up to 7.5 kW
With wide range in 3 setting ranges, with 0.3 to 3 A,
2.4 up to 8 A, 2.4 to 16 A available
With combination of starter circuit breaker, electronic overload
protection (parameterizable), and contactor or soft starter
Power bus up to 50 A
Upper and lower current limits for plant and process
monitoring
Motor stall protection, zero current detection and asymmetry
detection integrated
The actual motor current is measured and transmitted for
diagnostics in the cycle process image
Control of the motor starter from the control system and
extensive diagnostics status via the cyclic process image
Optional digital inputs available in the cyclic process image
and flexibly assignable with functions for adaptation to all
applications
Integrated isolating function using starter circuit breakers
Detection of the switching state of the starter circuit breaker
via auxiliary switches and of the contactor via current
evaluation
Local safety engineering possible (without F-kit in the case of
the HF starter, because the function of the failsafe kit is already
integrated)
Front-mounting 2DI LC COM control module for another
2 parameterizable digital inputs
Optional "Motor Starter ES" software for easy commissioning
and diagnostics (see Chapter "Parameterization,
Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS")
PROFIenergy capable
Supplying the motor current in PROFIenergy format and
shutting down in dead times
Support of all DPV1 acyclic services on PROFIBUS and
PROFINET
- Changing of parameters during operation, e.g. the rated
operational current
- Reading and writing acyclic data for exact diagnostics of the
unit or process and for analysis of the plant status
Current value transmission via bus monitoring of the

application
Current limit monitoring
Trip class can be parameterized overload tripping can be
adapted to the application
Type of coordination "2" still functional after short circuit with
magnitude of 50 kA
Very high contact endurance
ET 200S High-Feature motor starters: DS1e-x direct-on-line starter
Selective protection concept for

ET 200S High-Feature motor starters
As the result of the selective protection concept (separate
tripping of short circuit and overload) with electronic overload
evaluation, additional advantages are realized on the HighFeature motor starters advantages which soon make themselves positively felt particularly in manufacturing processes
with high plant stoppage costs:
Only two versions up to 7.5 kW hence little order variance
and stock keeping
All settings can be parameterized by bus hence full TIA capability
Separate signaling of overload and short circuit enables
selective diagnostics
Overload can be acknowledged by remote reset ideal for
highly automated plants
Current asymmetry monitoring complete monitoring of the
motor
Stall protection complete monitoring of the motor
Emergency start function in case of overload operation is
possible in an emergency
ET 200S High-Feature motor starters: DSS1e-x direct-on-line soft starter
ET 200S High-Feature motor starters: RS1e-x reversing starter
8/108
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

PROFIenergy for ET 200S High-Feature motor starters
Increasing energy prices, far-reaching ecological problems

worldwide and the threat of climate change make it necessary
for you to be more conscious about your use of energy.
Active and effective energy management is possible with
PROFIenergy.
PROFIenergy is a manufacturer-independent profile on
PROFINET, which can be used by all manufacturers, has been
standardized by PNO1) and supports shutting down electrical
devices during dead times and reading out measured values.
The ET 200S HF motor starter supplies the motor current in
PROFIenergy format and switches off during dead times.
Support of all acyclic services on PROFIBUS and PROFINET
Thanks to the acyclic services, the ET 200S HF motor starters
now offer plenty of diagnostics data via data records. There are
new extensive options for reading out data from the motor starter
for monitoring devices, systems or processes. The motor starter
is equipped internally with three logbooks for device faults,
motor starter trips and events, which are issued with a time
stamp. These logbooks can be read out of the motor starter on
demand at any time and provide the plant operator with plenty
of information about the state of his plant and process which he
can use to carry out improvements.
With the slave pointer and statistical data functions it is possible
to read out, for example, the maximum internal current values or
the number of motor starter connection operations. This allows
deviations in the process to be monitored, but also optimum
initial commissioning to take place.
Statistical data or measured values make plant monitoring easy
for the user.
The device diagnostics data record contains details of all the
states of the motor starter, the device configuration and the communication status as a basis for central device and plant monitoring.
The Installation and Maintenance functions (I&M) store, firstly,

information (I&M) about the modules used in the motor starter
and, secondly, data (I&M) that can be defined during configuration, e.g. location designations. I&M functions are used for for
troubleshooting faults and localizing changes in hardware at a
plant or checking the system configuration.
Supported data records:
DS 0 S7-V1 system diagnostics (S7 diagnostics alarm)
DS 72, 73, 75 logbooks, device faults, trips, events
DS 92 device diagnostics
DS 93 command
DS 94 measured values
DS 95 statistics
DS 96 slave pointer
DS 100 device identification
DS 131 device parameters
DS 134 maintenance
DS 165 comment
DS 226 PROFIenergy technology function
DS 231 I&M 0 (= device identification)
DS 232 I&M 1 (= equipment identifier)
DS 233 I&M 2 (= installation)
DS 234 I&M 3 (= description)
See "General data" "Overview", page 8/101
1)
In the PNO (PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V. - PROFIBUS User

Organization), manufacturers and users have come together to agree on
the standardized communication technologies PROFIBUS and PROFINET.
See "General data" "Technical specifications", page 8/103

High-Feature motor starters in fully innovated design (".-.AB4 starters") 1)
Setting range of
DT
Article No.
A
A
A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1301-0AB10-0AB4
3RK1301-0BB10-0AB4
3RK1301-0CB10-0AB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
A
A
A
3RK1301-0AB10-1AB4
3RK1301-0BB10-1AB4
3RK1301-0CB10-1AB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
A
A
A
3RK1301-0AB20-0AB4
3RK1301-0BB20-0AB4
3RK1301-0CB20-0AB4
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
High-Feature motor starters,

with diagnostics, electronic overload protection,
fuseless, expandable with brake control module
DS1e-x direct-on-line starters
0.3 ... 3
2.4 ... 8
2.4 ... 16
RS1e-x reversing starters

0.3 ... 3
2.4 ... 8
2.4 ... 16
DSS1e-x direct-on-line soft starters

DS1e-x
1)
0.3 ... 3
2.4 ... 8
2.4 ... 16
When a device is replaced, the innovated motor starter will behave like the
not yet innovated motor starter (".-.AA4 starter"), i.e. it will run in DPV0
mode.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/109
1)
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Terminal modules TM-DS, TM-RS
More information see also "General data" "Overview" from
the section "Power supply through terminal modules", page 8/99.
"S32" version with incoming connection: 2 x 3 x 10 mm screw
terminals for power bus and motor feeder
"-S31" version without incoming connection: 1 x 3 x 10 mm

screw terminals for motor feeder
Optionally expandable with PE/N modules (see "Accessories",
page 8/130)
See "Standard terminal modules" "Technical specifications",
page 8/106.

Version
DT
Article No.
TM-DS65-S32
for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x direct-on-line starters
with incoming power bus connection including three
caps for terminating the power bus
TM-DS65-S31
for DS1e-x and DSS1e-x direct-on-line starters
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-0AK00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-0AK10
1 unit
42D
TM-RS130-S32
for RS1e-x reversing starters
with incoming power bus connection including three
caps for terminating the power bus
3RK1903-0AL00
1 unit
42D
TM-RS130-S31
for RS1e-x reversing starters
Without incoming power bus connection
3RK1903-0AL10
1 unit
42D
Terminal modules for High-Feature motor starters
3RK1 903-0AK00
8/110
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Power modules
Overview
Disconnection of a complete group of motor starters is
possible without any additional outlay (PL b according to
ISO 13849-1 or SIL 1 according to IEC 62061)
PM-D power modules are plugged onto the TM-P15 terminal
modules. (A PM-D power module must be followed by at least
one motor starter or one frequency converter.)
A voltage failure is signaled through PROFIBUS diagnostics to

the higher-level master. Additional LEDs inform locally about the
status of the auxiliary voltages.
The separation of auxiliary voltages for signal checkback and
power unit actuation enables the entire group to be shut down
while maintaining the diagnostics capability.
PM-D power modules are used for monitoring the two 24 V DC

auxiliary voltages for the group of motor starters following on the
right or for supplying power to the group of frequency converters
following on the right. The voltage is fed in through TM-D terminal modules to the self-assembling potential bars.
PM-D power module
3RK1903-0BA00
V
20.4 ... 28
Recommended short-circuit
protection
10
Melting fuse
10
Miniature circuit breaker
10, tripping characteristic B
Power consumption from backplane

bus
mA
10

up to 60 C
Yes
Frequency converters
Yes
Motor starters for safety technology
No
Electronic modules
No
Ex(i) modules
No
Alarms
None
Diagnostics functions
Yes
System fault/device fault
Red "SF" LED
Monitoring of the electronics power

supply U1
Green "PWR" LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage for

contactors U2
Green "CON" LED
Diagnostics information can be read

out
Yes
Supply of
Motor starters
Flexible with end sleeve
mm2
1.5
Rigid
mm2
2.5
mm
15 x 195.5 x 117.5

Version
DT
Article No.
PM-D power modules

for 24 V DC with diagnostics
3RK1903-0BA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42D
Power modules
3RK1903-0BA00

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/111
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Terminal module for power module
For supplying load and sensor voltage to the self-assembling
potential bars of the Standard motor starters, High-Feature motor starters and frequency converters. Power modules for voltage monitoring are plugged onto TM-P modules.
TM-P modules can be used any number of times within the

ET 200S. A power module must always be plugged upstream
from the first motor starter/frequency converter.

Version
DT
Article No.
3RK1903-0AA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42D
Terminal module for power module

TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module
for PM-D power module
3RK1 903-0AA00
8/112
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Use
The Failsafe motor starter is predestined for use in combination
with PROFIsafe (see connection diagram "ET 200S Safety Motor
Starter Solution PROFIsafe with Failsafe motor starters",
page 8/121). Another field of application is in combination with
ASIsafe or safety relays (see example 2, page 8/119).
High degree of flexibility with safety technology
PROFIsafe solution with PM-D F PROFIsafe
In EMERGENCY-STOP applications, the Failsafe motor starters
are selectively switched off through the upstream PM-D F
PROFIsafe safety module. For each safety module, six switch-off
groups can be formed. In the first delivery stage, the fail-safe
freely-programmable logic of the SIMATIC controller is used to
interface with the relevant fail-safe sensor technology. The interface between PROFIsafe and installations that use conventional
safety technologies is implemented through the F-CM Failsafe
contact multiplier with four floating contacts.
ET 200S Failsafe motor starters F-DS1e-x direct-on-line starters
Solution local with PM-D FX1
The Failsafe motor starter has been developed on the basis of

the High-Feature motor starter (.-.AA4 starter). It differs in that, in
addition to a motor starter protector and contactor assembly, a
safe electronic evaluation circuit is installed for fault detection
purposes which makes the motor starter failsafe.
Failsafe motor starters with safety relay (version 1) or ASIsafe

(version 2, see example 2, page 8/119):
Signals with relevance for safety can be input to ET 200S through
a PM-D F X1 infeed terminal module through the enabling
circuits of the AS-i safety monitor or the safety relay to control the
Failsafe motor starters which then selectively switch off the
downstream motors.
Benefits
All functions of the High-Feature starter are already

integrated
If the contactor to be switched fails in an EMERGENCY-STOP

case, the evaluation electronics detects a fault and opens the
motor starter protector in the motor starter through a shunt release in a safety-related manner. The second redundant shutdown component is therefore no longer a main contactor, as is
generally the case, but the motor starter protector installed in the
motor.
Advantages over conventional safety technology

Significant savings in components (less hardware)
Less mounting and installation work
Motor starters are fail-safe and offer high availability
The new Failsafe motor starters are characterized by easy,

space-saving assembly as well as minimal wiring outlay. Like the
High-Feature starters, the Failsafe motor starters have a
switching capacity of up to 7.5 kW (16 A) which is achieved with
just two motor starter versions. Another important feature is the
high availability due to the high short-circuit strength (type of
coordination "2").
F-DS1e-x direct-on-line starters/F-RS1e-x reversing starters
F-DS1e-x direct-on-line starters
F-RS1e-x reversing starters
mm
65 x 290 x 150
(incl. terminal module)
130 x 290 x 150

(incl. terminal module)
Height with PE/N module
mm
332
Depth with 2DI control module (not safe)
mm
173
Dimensions
Module-specific specifications
Type 2 up to Ie 16 A at 400 V
U1 (from PM-D F / PM-D X1)
Maximum achievable safety class

According to IEC 62061
SIL 3
According to DIN VDE 0801
Tripping class 6 (AK6)
According to ISO 13849-1
PL e
Safety characteristics
Low demand
PFDAVG (10a)
3.5 x 10-5
Test interval 3 months
8.0 x 10-5

High demand/continuous mode
PFH
1/h
8.1 x 10-10
1/h
1.8 x 10-9
Proof-test interval
Years
10
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/113
Siemens AG 2013

Voltages, currents, potentials

Switching capacity
A
A
A
Up to 7.5 kW at 400 V AC in three setting ranges

0.3 ... 3
2.4 ... 8
2.4 ... 16
Status, alarms, diagnostics

SF, DEVICE and C-STAT, SG1 ... SG6
Status display
Group fault display
Red LED (SF)
Diagnostics information can be read out
Available
Control circuit
Rated operational voltage for electronics U1
V DC
Rated operational voltage for contactor U2
24 (20.4 ... 28.8)
24 (21.6 ... 26.4)
Yes
Reverse polarity protection for electronics U1

V DC
24 (20.4 ... 28.8)

Yes
Reverse polarity protection for contactor U2

Power consumption
From electronics supply U1
mA
Approx. 40
Approx. 100
From contactor supply U2

- Pickup
- Hold
A
mA
1.7 (for 80 ms)

Max. 350
---
From SG1 to 6
- Pickup
- Hold
mA
mA
250 (for 200 ms)

Max. 55
Test function of the shunt release/starter circuit breaker (50 ms)

from U1
Approx. 1.5
From the backplane bus
mA
Approx. 20
Acc. to DIN VDE 0106, part 1014, IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
V AC
500
Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits
400
UL, CSA
V AC
600
V AC
500
kV
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Main circuit

Setting range of
DT
Article No.
0.3 ... 3
2.4 ... 8
2.4 ... 16
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1301-0AB13-0AA4
1 unit
42D
3RK1301-0BB13-0AA4
1 unit
42D
3RK1301-0CB13-0AA4
1 unit
42D
0.3 ... 3
3RK1301-0AB13-1AA4
1 unit
42D
2.4 ... 8
3RK1301-0BB13-1AA4
1 unit
42D
2.4 ... 16
3RK1301-0CB13-1AA4
1 unit
42D

Failsafe direct-on-line starters up to 7.5 kW at 400 V AC
Mechanically switching
Electronic overload protection
F-DS1e-x
direct-on-line starters
8/114

Failsafe reversing starters up to 7.5 kW at 400 V AC
Mechanically switching
Electronic overload protection, fuseless
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
With incoming power bus connection

(TM-FDS65-S32-01)

(TM-FDS65-S31-01)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-3AC00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-3AC10
1 unit
42D
With incoming power bus connection

(TM-FRS130-S32-01)
3RK1903-3AD00
1 unit
42D

(TM-FRS130-S31-01)
3RK1903-3AD10
1 unit
42D
Terminal modules for Failsafe motor starters

TM-FDS65-S32-01/S31-01 terminal modules
for F-DS1e-x direct-on-line starters
with coding
TM-FRS130-S32-01/S31-01 terminal modules

for F-RS1e-x reversing starter
with coding
3RK1903-3AC00

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/115
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
With the ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution local there is no
complicated and hence cost-intensive configuring and wiring
compared to conventional safety systems. The ET 200S Safety
Motor Starter Solutions local are designed for Pl e according to
ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 IEC 62061.
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions local/PROFIsafe

The ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions are preferred in all
production and process automation fields in which the enhancement of plant availability and flexibility play a key role.
ET 200S Safety Motor Starters Solutions local are preferred
from the safety technology point of view for locally restricted
safety applications. These motor starters are not dependent
on a safe control system.
ET 200S Safety Motor Starters Solutions PROFIsafe, on the
other hand, are often found in safety applications of the more
complex type that are interlinked. In this case a safe control
system is used with the PROFINET or PROFIBUS bus systems
with the PROFIsafe profile.
They enable the use of safety-related direct-on-line starters or

reversing starters in the SIMATIC ET 200S distributed peripherals system on PROFINET or PROFIBUS. The bit-modular architecture of the system permits optimum imaging of machine or
plant applications.
Within an ET 200S station the Safety Motor Starter Solutions local
can also be combined with Standard motor starters or
High-Feature motor starters without safety functions up to
max. 4 kW up to Pl d according to ISO 13849-1 or SIL 2
according to IEC 62061.

Safety modules (page 8/117)
Standard motor starters (page 8/105)
High-Feature motor starters (page 8/108)
Failsafe motor starters (page 8/113)
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution local
Safety module
PM-X
Safety module
PM-D F2
High-Feature
direct-on-line
starter DS1e-x
Safety module
PM-X
Safety module
PM-D F1
Standard
direct-on-line
starter DS1-x
Terminal module
for safety module PM-X
NSA0_00434a
Interface module
IM 151
Terminal module
for safety module
PM-D F1/2
Auxiliary switch of
the failsafe equipment for
direct-on-line starter
F-Kit 1
Terminal module for direct-on-line

starter with supply connection
TM-DS45-S32
PE/N terminal block

with supply connection
M65-PEN-F
Terminal module
for direct-on-line starter
without supply connection
TM-DS65-S31
Terminal module
for safety module
PM-D F1/2
Terminal module
TM-DS45-S31
Interaction of ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions local components
8/116
Siemens IC 10 2014
PE/N terminal block

M65-PEN-S
Terminal module
for safety module PM-X
Terminal module
with TM-DS65-S32
supply connection
Siemens AG 2013

Components for ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution local
The ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions local comprise:
Version 1 (see example 1, page 8/119):
Safety modules PMD F1 ... 5
PM-X module
Standard motor starter or High-Feature motor starter
Version 2 (see example 2, page 8/119):
PM-D FX1 safety module
Failsafe motor starter
Functionality of the ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution local
For using Standard, High-Feature or Failsafe motor starters in
systems with safety category SIL 1 (according to IEC 62061)
or PL c to Pl e (according to ISO 13849-1)
Can also be used in combination with external safety relays
Can also be used to activate external safety systems
No complex wiring for conventional safety technology
Safety module available for function-monitored and automatic
starting
Safety module available for Stop category 0 and 1
Safety module for monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor
starters
Safety modules can be plugged into the TM-PF30 terminal
modules
PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4/F5 safety modules

PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4 safety modules monitor auxiliary voltages
and contain the complete functionality of a safety relay:
- PM-D F1: For evaluation of EMERGENCY-STOP circuits with
the function "Monitored start"
- PM-D F2: For monitoring of protective doors with the function
"Automatic start"
- PM-D F3: Expansion to PM-D F1/F2 for time-delayed
disconnection
- PM-D F4: For expanding safety circuits with other ET 200S
motor starters, e. g. in a different tier
- PM-D F5: Transmits the status from PM-D F1 ... 4 via four
floating enabling circuits to external safety devices (contact
multipliers)
The PM-D F1 and PM-D F2 modules can be combined with
the PM-D F3 or PM-D F4 modules.
A PM-D F5 can be positioned at any point between a
PM-D F1 ... 4 and a PM-X1).
Safety modules monitor the U1 and U2 auxiliary voltages.
A voltage failure is relayed as a diagnostic signal over the bus.
- No additional PM-D safety module is required when the
safety modules are used.
- Each safety circuit, beginning with a PM-D F1 ... 4, must be
terminated with one PM-X each1).
1)
See "Accessories for Safety modules local", page 8/131.
With Safety Motor Starter Solutions local the highest safety category can be achieved according to ISO 13849-1 and IEC 62061.
They can thus be used for evaluation of EMERGENCY-STOP
circuits or for monitoring protective doors and also for timedelayed disconnections. With the contact multiplier the safetyrelevant signals can also be made available to external systems.
All standard safety applications can be covered through combination of different TM-PF30 terminal modules. Needless to say,
ET 200S motor starters can also be used in conjunction with
external safety relays or with ASIsafe.
With the Safety Motor Starter Solutions local, up to 80 % of wiring
is saved compared to conventional safety systems with local
safety applications.
With the Safety Motor Starter Solutions local it is easy to configure several safety circuits. The safety sensors are connected
directly and locally to the safety modules. These safety modules
perform the work of the otherwise obligatory safety relays and
safely shut down the downstream motor starters in accordance
with the function selected. The crosslinks required for this are
already integrated in the system and need no additional wiring.
All signals from the safety modules are automatically relayed as
diagnostic signals, e.g. in the event of cross-circuit in the
EMERGENCY-STOP circuit.
The safety module evaluates the signal state of the connected
safety sensors and, using the integrated safety relays, shuts
down the group(s) of downstream motor starters. The shutdown
function is monitored by the module, and the auxiliary voltages
likewise.
Safety-relevant system signals, e.g. due to an actuated
EMERGENCY-STOP switch or a missing auxiliary voltage, are
automatically generated and notified to the interface module.
The latter assigns an unambiguous ID to the fault. Using the
PROFIBUS DP diagnostics block, faults of this type can be identified and localized without a great deal of programming work.
PM-D F1 safety module
PM-D FX1 safety module

The PM-D FX1 safety module is used for feeding in 1 to 6 switchoff groups. The infeed voltage can be switched using 1 to
6 external safety shutdown devices (either ASIsafe monitors or
3TK28 safety relays). This safety module is used in applications
with external safety shutdown devices where there is a need for
the fully selective safety shutdown of Failsafe motor starters/frequency converters (see example 2, page 8/119).
Terminal modules for (TM-PF30) safety module
For feeding load and sensor voltage to the potential bars of the
motor starters, and for connection of the 2-channel sensor circuit
(e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton) and a RESET button.
Different terminal modules are available for the configuring of
separate safety circuits or for the cascading of safety circuits,
and for applications with time-delayed disconnection
(see page 8/125).
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/117
Siemens AG 2013

F-Kit 1 supplements the DS1-x direct-on-line starter, F-Kit 2 the
RS1-x reversing starter.
Terminal module (TM-X)

For connection of an external infeed contactor (2nd shutdown
possibility), with terminals for contactor coil and feedback contact, is always required to terminate a group of safety-related
motor starters.
The F-Kits are comprised of:

Contact supports for the terminal modules
One or two auxiliary switch blocks for the contactor/contactors
of the motor starter
Connecting cables
Failsafe Kit
The Failsafe Kit (F-Kit) must be added to each Standard motor
starter in a safety segment in order to monitor the switching
function.
High-Feature motor starters and their terminal modules come as

standard with the functionality of the F-Kits integrated.
Components needed for applications with safety requirement

Components needed
Maximum achievable safety integrity according to ISO 13849-1 or IEC 62061

ISO 13849-1
PL b/c
PL c
PL d1)
PL d / PL e1)
IEC 62061
SIL 1
SIL 1
SIL 2
SIL 3
PM-D
--
--
--
PM-D F1/-F2/-F4
--
PM-D F3
--
--
Fail-safe kit 1/fail-safe kit 2
--
2)
2)
2)
PM-X
--
PM-D FX1
--
Required
-- Not required
1)
An external infeed contactor is required in the main circuit (2-channel

capability).
2)
F-Kit is only required for the Standard motor starter; it is already integrated
in the High-Feature motor starter.
Possible combinations of safety and terminal modules

Terminal modules
PM-D F1
PM-D F2
PM-D F3
PM-D F4
PM-D F5
PM-X
PM-DFX1
FCM
TM-PF30 S47-B0
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-PF30 S47-B1
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-PF30 S47-C0
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-PF30 S47-C1
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-PF30 S47-D0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-X15 S27-01
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-PFX30 S47-G0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-PFX30 S47-G1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TM-FCM30 S47
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Available
-- Not available
8/118
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Examples
The diverse possible uses of the Safety Motor Starter Solutions
local are presented in the manual SIMATIC ET 200S Motor
Starters in the context of typical sample applications.
More information can be found on the Internet at:

www.siemens.com/ET200S-motorstarter
Safety functional examples for easy, quick and low-cost

implementations of applications with Safety Motor Starter
Solutions local are available on the Internet:
Example 1:
Example 2:
PLC
PM-D F1
PM-D FX1
PM-D F2
PROFINET
PM-X
PM-X
NSA0_00433a
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS
ET 200S
Standard PLC
ET 200S
Motor 1
Safety relay,
e. g. 3TK28
Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3
Motor 2
ASIsafe
Motor 4 Motor 5
Position switch
with sep. actuator
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions local with 2 safety circuits

(= switch-off groups), Standard motor starters and High-Feature motor
starters.
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions local with 2 external safety

combinations (= safety relays or ASIsafe monitors) and with Failsafe
motor starters (PM-DFX1 application). 2 of the 6 available safe switch-off
groups are used.
Signals with relevance for safety can be input to ET 200S through a
PM-DFX1 infeed terminal module through the enabling circuits of the
ASIsafe monitor or the safety relay to control the Failsafe motor starters
which then selectively switch off the downstream motors.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/119
AS-i
EMERGENCY-STOP
NSA0_00431a
AS-i
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution PROFIsafe
Safety module
PM-D F PROFIsafe
NSA0_00435
Interface module
IM 151
Terminal module
for PM-D F PROFIsafe
TM-PF30 S47-F0
Failsafe reversing starter
F-RS1e-x
Failsafe direct-on-line
starter F-DS1e-x
Terminal module
for F-RS1e-x
TM-FRS130-S31-01
Terminal module
for F-DS1e-x
TM-FDS65-S32
Terminal module
for F-DS1e-x
TM-FDS65-S31
PE/N terminal block
M65-PEN-F
PE/N terminal block

M65-PEN-S
Interaction of ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution PROFIsafe components
Components for Safety Motor Starter ET 200S Solution PROFIsafe

The ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe consist of
(see example, page 8/121):
PMD F PROFIsafe safety modules
Failsafe motor starters
Safe control system is used with the PROFINET or PROFIBUS
bus systems with the PROFIsafe profile
Functionality of the ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution
PROFIsafe
For the use of Failsafe motor starters in plants with PL c to PL e
according to ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2 and 3 according to
IEC 62061. The use of Standard or High-Feature motor starters
is also possible with certain assemblies.
High flexibility (any assignment of sensors to motor starters
using the PLC)
Full selectivity of disconnection of the Failsafe motor starters
No complex wiring for conventional safety systems,
e.g. no infeed contactors even in the highest safety category
Can also be used to activate external safety systems through
F-CM contact multiplier
Safety module available for any safety function
Safety module available for Stop category 0 and 1
8/120
Siemens IC 10 2014
Safety module for monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor

starters
Safety modules can be plugged into the TM-PF30 terminal
modules
Sensor and actuator assignment are freely configurable within
the framework of the distributed safety concept:
The logic of the safety functions is implemented by software.
Safety-related PROFIsafe communication and the use of a
safety-related control system are required. Integration of the
safety technology in the standard automation is realized through
a single bus system (see Advantages of PROFIsafe), using
PROFIBUS as well as PROFINET.
High degree of flexibility with safety technology
Failsafe motor starters for PROFIsafe:
In EMERGENCY-STOP applications, the Failsafe motor starters
are selectively switched off through the upstream PM-D F
PROFIsafe safety module. For each safety module, six switch-off
groups can be formed. In the first delivery stage, the fail-safe
freely-programmable logic of the SIMATIC controller is used to
interface with the relevant fail-safe sensor technology.
F-CM contact multipliers
The interface between PROFIsafe and installations that use
conventional safety technology is implemented through the
F-CM Failsafe contact multiplier with four floating contacts.
Siemens AG 2013

PM-D F PROFIsafe safety modules
Example:
The PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module receives the shutdown

signal from the interface module of the ET 200S and safely
switches off 1 to 6 switch-off groups. This safety module is used
in PROFIsafe applications where there is a need for the selective
safety shutdown of Failsafe motor starters/frequency converters.
The diverse possible uses of the Safety Motor Starter Solutions

PROFIsafe are presented in the manual SIMATIC ET 200S Motor
Starters in the context of typical sample applications.
Safety functional examples for easy, quick and low-cost implementations of applications with Safety Motor Starter Solution
PROFIsafe are available on the Internet:
More information can be found on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/ET200S
PM-D F
PROFIsafe
F-PLC
ET 200S
NSA0_00432a
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
PM-D F PROFIsafe with TM-PF30 S47-F0 terminal module
Terminal modules
EMERGENCYMotor 1
STOP
The terminal module contains three coding elements which fully

cover the three coding openings in the terminal module. The labeled coding element contains (in the chamber marked with the
dash) the busbar tap; the non-labeled coding elements are used
only to cover the coding openings. Switch-off group 1 (AG1 or
SG1) is coded in the as-delivered state. The coding can be
changed to switch-off group 2 by releasing the coding element
and turning it through 180. Changing the coding to switch-off
group 3 is possible by exchanging the labeled and blank coding
elements. In this case, the dash on the labeled coding element
must correlate with the dash of the required switch-off group
(symbolized busbar).
E 01
SIEMENS
8 7
1
3 4
SG1
SG2
SG3
SG4
3 4
6
5
3 4
NSA0_00334
SG5
SG6
8 7
61
52
Within an ET 200S station the Failsafe motor starters are

assigned to one of 6 safety segments. For plants with distributed
configuration the shutdown signals of these safety segments are
preferably issued by a higher-level, safety-related control system through PROFIsafe. This permits the greatest flexibility for
assigning the motor starters to different safety circuits.
Thanks to the PROFIsafe profile, the safety functions are available in the complete network, which means that the Safety Motor
Starter Solutions PROFIsafe enable the selective disconnection
of a Failsafe motor starters or the disconnection of a group of
Standard and High-Feature motor starters regardless of where
and on which peripheral station the safe control devices were
connected. As such, this solution provides an unprecedented
level of flexibility and reduction of wiring for applications in widespread plants or with a sporadic demand for changes in the assignment of safety segments.
Codification
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solution PROFIsafe with Failsafe motor

starters and fully selective disconnection (PM-DF PROFIsafe application)
If a safety-related SIMATIC CPU is used, the ET 200S is available

as a safety-related I/O. Nevertheless, in such a station it is possible to configure conventional motor starters and input/output
modules mixed with modules with safety functions.
6
5
3 4
8 7
Cable-operated
switch
Alternatively, an ET 200S F-CPU can also be used for control

purposes.
8 7
61
52
EMERGENCY- Position
STOP
switch
Motor 2
The terminal assignment of the terminal modules for safe motor

starters corresponds to the terminal assignment of the 45 mm
and 65 mm terminal modules. The terminal modules for safe
motor starters have a coding module in addition. This enables
the safe motor starter to be assigned to one of the six switch-off
groups.
The Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe are ideally suited

for safety concepts with Cat. 2 to 4 according to ISO 13849-1 and
up to SIL 3 according to IEC 62061.
Each safety module switches up to 6 switch-off groups for
Failsafe motor starters/frequency converters.
The Failsafe motor starters are assigned to one of the six possible
switch-off groups.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/121
Siemens AG 2013

Safety modules PM-D F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5
Operat- 10 x 106
ing
cycles
Operat- 200 000 at Ie

ing
cycles
DC-13
Control times
Minimum command duration
Recovery time
OFF-delay
Control circuit U1
Operating range DC up to 60 C
Power consumption
Recommended short-circuit protection
Output OUT+/OUT- for control of expansion modules
Switched auxiliary circuit U2
Operating range DC up to 60 C
Rated operational current Ie (13 ... 24 V DC)
Uninterrupted thermal current Ith
ms
s
ms
200
<1
30
V DC
24
0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
2.4
gG 2 A
24 V DC/< 50 mA (PTC fuse)
V DC
A
A
Fuse links:
LV HRC type 3NA,
DIAZED type 5SB,
NEOZED type 5SE
Operating class gG 6 A
Recommended short-circuit protection for enabling and signaling circuits
Supply of
Motor starters
Electronic modules
Ex(i) modules
BG certification
UL, CSA certification
24
0.85 ... 1.2 x Us
4
5
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Cable length for EMERGENCY-STOP and ON buttons
max. 1 000
mm
30 x 196.5 x 117.5 (incl. terminal module)

4 (floating)
Enabling circuits with PM-D F5
PM-D FX1 safety module (infeed terminal module)

Dimensions
mm
0 ... +60
Ambient temperature
IP20
Maximum achievable safety classes

IEC 62061
DIN V 19250
ISO 13849-1
SIL 3
Tripping class 5 and 6
PL e
Proof-test interval
10 years

V DC
21.6 ... 26.4 to 60 C
6
Internal fuse protection 7 A (quick-response)
Recommended upstream short-circuit protection
Melting fuse gG 6.3
Supply of
Failsafe motor starters
Failsafe frequency converters
Electronic modules
Ex[i] modules
Power consumption
From the backplane bus
From U1
From SGx
Yes
Yes
No
No
mA
mA
mA
10
35
15

Alarms
None
Group fault/device fault
Monitoring of the electronics power supply U1 (PWR)
Monitoring of six switch-off groups
Red LED SF
Green LED PWR
Green LED SG1 ... SG6
Yes
Standards, approvals
TV
UL, CSA certification
Yes
Yes
8/122
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Dimensions
mm
Number of relay outputs
4 (4 x 1-channel or 2 x 2-channel safe coupling/

contact multiplication)
Internal power supply for busbar
U1 (from PM-D F / PM-D FX1)

SIL3
AK 6
Cat. 4

Switching capacity of relay outputs
Utilization category DC-13 (Ie/Ue): 1.5 A/24 V
Between outputs and backplane bus
Between outputs and power supply
Between outputs
Between outputs/power supply and shield
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Status display
PWR and STAT
Alarms: Diagnostic interrupt
None
Group fault display
Monitoring of the electronics power supply U1 (PWR)
Monitoring of the switching status of the enabling circuit
Yes
Red LED (SF)
Available
Green PWR LED
Red/green LED STAT

Dimensions
mm
Number of outputs, switching to P potential
6 switch-off groups (safety group 1 ... 6)
Internal power supply for busbar
U1
Assigned address range

in the PII
in the PIQ
Byte
Byte

5
5
SIL3
AK 6
Cat. 4

Supply voltage
24 DC
Between outputs and backplane bus

Between outputs and power supply
Between outputs
Between outputs/power supply and shield
Yes
No
No
Yes

Status display
Green LED per SG

Green LED for electronics supply
Green LED for load voltage
Alarms: Diagnostic interrupt
"ON"
Group fault display
Red LED (SF)

Available
Settings
Module address
Diverse:
1. Using a safety-related parameter in the
parameterization message frame via the backplane bus
2. Using the 10-pole DIL switch (binary-coded) on the
left side of the module
The received address is then compared with the DIL switch
setting.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/123
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
PM-D F1
With diagnostics
Safety module for EMERGENCY-STOP application
Monitored start
PM-D F2
With diagnostics
Safety module for protective door monitoring
Automatic start
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-1BA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-1BB00
1 unit
42D
PM-D F3
With diagnostics
Safety module for expanding
PM-D F1/2 for another voltage group
Time-delayed 0 to 15 s
3RK1903-1BD00
1 unit
42D
PM-D F4
With diagnostics
PM-D F1/2 for another voltage group
3RK1903-1BC00
1 unit
42D
PM-D F5
With diagnostics
PM-D F1...4 with four floating enabling circuits
Contact multipliers
3RK1903-1BE00
1 unit
42D
PM-D FX1
With diagnostics
Infeed terminal module for supply of
1 to 6 switch-off groups
3RK1903-3DA00
1 unit
42D
FC-M contact multipliers

With 4 safe floating contacts
3RK1903-3CA00
1 unit
42D

For PROFIBUS and PROFINET
For Failsafe motor starters
For Failsafe contact multipliers
With six switch-off groups (SG1 to SG6)
3RK1903-3BA02
1 unit
42D

With 4 safe floating contacts
3RK1903-3CA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1 903-3DA00
8/124
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

and PROFIsafe terminal modules
Overview
Terminal modules for PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4/F5 safety modules
TM-PF30 S47-C0
For supplying load and sensor voltage to the self-assembling

potential bars of the Standard motor starters, High-Feature motor starters and frequency converters. Safety modules for voltage monitoring are plugged onto TM-P modules. TM-P modules
can be used any number of times within the ET 200S. A safety
module must always be plugged upstream from the first motor
starter.
The terminal module is used to cascade lower level safety

segments and accommodates the PM-D F3 safety module for
time-delayed shutdown or the PM-D F4 safety module. Only the
U2 control supply voltage for the contactors must be connected
to this terminal module. The U1 supply comes from the preceding safety module (sub-potential group) over the potential bars
of the terminal modules. No safety sensors can be connected to
this terminal module.
TM-PF30 S47-B1
The terminal module is always positioned at the beginning of a
safety segment and accommodates the PM-DF1 safety module
for EMERGENCY-STOP applications or the PM-DF2 safety
module for protective door monitoring. The 24 V control supply
voltages for the electronics (U1) and those for supplying the
contactors (U2) of the motor starters must be connected along
with the 2-channel connection of the safety sensors
(e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons) to this terminal module.
Connections for the ON button (enabling) and safe output of the
safety module are available in addition.
TM-PF30 S47-B0
The terminal module is used to cascade lower level safety segments and accommodates the PM-DF1 safety module for
EMERGENCY-STOP applications or the PM-DF2 safety module
for protective door monitoring. No other auxiliary voltage has to
be connected to this terminal module. The supply comes from
the preceding PM-DF1 or PM-DF2 module over the potential
bars of the terminal modules. Once the potential of the
preceding safety module is disconnected, this sub-potential
also has no voltage.
TM-PF30 S47-D0
The terminal module is used to accommodate the PM-D F5
safety module. On this terminal module, safe signals can be
relayed to external systems through four groups, each with two
safety relay contacts configured with redundancy. The terminal
module must always be positioned between one of the above
mentioned terminal modules and a terminal module for the
TM-X connection module. No safety sensors can be connected
to this terminal module.
Terminal module for PM-X safety module (TM-X)
TM-X15 S27-01
For connection of an external infeed contactor (second shutdown option) for SIL 2 and SIL 3 or PL d and PL e. The PM-X
safety module (connection module) is plugged on the right next
to the last motor starter of a safety segment. On the TM-X terminal module there are the terminals for connecting the positively
driven NC contact of the contactors as well as the terminals for
connecting the contactor coil. If no contactor with redundant
switching is required, e.g. for PL c (ISO 13849-1), the feedback
circuit has to be closed at these terminals with a jumper. In applications with external safety relays it is also used instead of the
safety module as interface to the external safety relay.
TM-PF30 S47-C1
The terminal module is always positioned at the beginning of a
safety segment expansion in a new station, e.g. at an interlace
point. It accommodates the PM-D F3 safety module for timedelayed shutdown or the PM-D F4 safety module for direct shutdown in separately located ET 200S stations. The 24 V control
supply voltages for the electronics (U1) and those for supplying
the contactors (U2) are fed in anew.
The shutdown command from an upstream ET 200S station is
received through a safe input. Separate terminals are available
to connect the feedback circuit to the upstream ET 200S station.
No safety sensors can be connected to this terminal module.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/125
Different safety circuits can be functionally separated or else

cascaded using different terminal modules. Each group in such
a case must be terminated with a PM-X safety module
(connection module).
Siemens AG 2013

and PROFIsafe terminal modules
TM-PFX30 S47/TM-PF30 S47 terminal modules
Dimensions
mm
30 x 196.5 x 102
Depth with power module
mm
117.5
Insulation voltage
500
V DC
24
10
Solid
mm2
1 x (0.14 ... 2.5), according to IEC 60947

1 x 2.5
mm2
1 x (0.14 ... 1.5), according to IEC 60947
AWG
1 x (18 ... 22)
Insulation voltages and rated currents
Wiring
Required tool
Standard screwdriver size 1
Tightening torque
Nm
0.4 ... 0.7

Version
DT
Article No.
TM-PF30 S47-B1 terminal modules

For PM-D F1/2 safety modules
With infeed U1/U2 and sensor connection
TM-PF30 S47-B0 terminal modules

With sensor connection
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-1AA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-1AA10
1 unit
42D
TM-PF30 S47-C1 terminal modules

With infeed U1/U2
and control input IN+/IN-
3RK1903-1AC00
1 unit
42D
TM-PF30 S47-C0 terminal modules

With infeed U2
3RK1903-1AC10
1 unit
42D
TM-PF30 S47-D0 terminal module

For PM-D F5 safety modules
3RK1903-1AD10
1 unit
42D
TM-X15 S27-01 terminal module

For PM-X safety module
3RK1903-1AB00
1 unit
42D
TM-P15-S27-01 terminal modules

For PM-D power module
3RK1903-0AA00
1 unit
42D
Infeed left (TM-PFX30 S47-G0)
3RK1903-3AE10
1 unit
42D
Infeed center (TM-PFX30 S47-G1)
3RK1903-3AE00
1 unit
42D
TM-FCM30 S47-F01 terminal module

For F-CM contact multipliers
3RK1903-3AB10
1 unit
42D
TM-PF30 S47-F0 terminal modules

For PM-D F PROFIsafe safety modules
3RK1903-3AA00
1 unit
42D
TM-FCM30 S47-F01 terminal module

For F-CM contact multipliers
3RK1903-3AB10
1 unit
42D
Terminal modules for Safety modules local
3RK1 903-1AA00
TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal modules

For PM-D FX1 safety modules (infeed terminal modules)
Terminal modules for Safety modules PROFIsafe
8/126
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Accessories for Standard motor starters
Accessories for Standard and High-Feature motor starters
Control kit
PE/N bridge modules
The control kit for the Standard motor starter provides the possibility of testing the motor during start-up or service by actuating
the motor starter protector. Using the control kit with the motor
starter protector tripped, the contactor is mechanically locked in
ON position.
PE/N bridge modules are used to bridge gaps of the PE/N bus
which are caused, for example, by using brake control modules,
PM-D(F) power modules or PM-X connection modules. If a
bridge module is used, the supply must not be fed in anew. They
are available in 15 mm and in 30 mm widths.
Control unit
L123 bridge modules
With the control unit the contactor coils of the Standard motor
starter can be directly controlled using 24 V DC. The motor
starter can thus be started as normal using a local control station
without PLC or bus.
The L123 bridge modules are used to bridge gaps of the power
bus (see above). They are available in 15 mm and in 30 mm
widths.
Note:
For motors with mechanical brake (see "General Data"

"Overview", page 8/99)
DM-V15 distance module

Passive module without bus connection and terminals
Does not need a separate terminal module
Follows a TM-DS45 or TM-RS90 or TM-xB if required
Does not need to be taken into account when configuring the
GSD file
The distance module is available for applications with high motor
currents or high ambient temperatures involving Standard motor
starters. It can be used to the right and left of a DS1-x direct-online starter or to the right of an xB1...4 brake module in order to
improve heat dissipation to the side. The distance module is a
completely passive module and does not need to be taken into
account with regard to the control system during configuration.
Details of the distance module can be found in the manual
"SIMATIC ET 200S". If you have any queries concerning the use
of the distance module, contact Technical Support for Siemens
Industrial Controls (Fax: +49(0)911/895-5907).
Accessories for High-Feature motor starters
2DI LC COM control module
The 2DI LC COM control module is plugged into the interface on
the front of the motor starter. The module provides two inputs
which can receive signals from the process and be assigned
directly to the starter.
The functionality can be selected from a list of various control
functions as part of the PROFIBUS parameterization. Local
control point, emergency start and quick stop, for example, are
available as functions. The signal levels can also be parameterized (NO/NC). For more extensive control functions the two
inputs of an xB3 or xB4 brake control module, which is plugged
in alongside on the right, can be integrated in addition. The signal states of all inputs are transmitted in parallel with the internal
use to the higher-level control system.
When a motor starter is replaced, the parameterization is automatically transmitted by download to the new starter. The inputs
on the motor starter ensure autonomous operation, e.g. in the
event of PLC failure, on the one hand and short response times
through direct processing in the starter on the other hand.
Another advantage results from the direct assignment of
functions to modular machine concepts.
Terminal modules for brake control modules

The TM-xB terminal modules are used to accommodate the xB1,
xB2, xB3 and xB4 brake control modules. The TM-xB terminal
module must always follow directly after a terminal module for
Standard motor starters, High-Feature motor starters or
frequency converters as control of the solid-state braking switch
is provided through an output of the motor starter/frequency
converter. The xB215 terminal modules for the brake control
modules have not only the terminals for connecting the cable for
the motor brake but also the terminals of the two local acting
inputs. These local inputs are not evaluated by a frequency
converter, which is why the xB215 terminal module can only be
switched downstream of a motor starter.
Accessories for Standard, High-Feature and Failsafe motor
starters
PE/N terminal blocks
The PE/N terminal block is required for direct connection of the
protective conductor in the motor cable without intermediate terminals. It is plugged together with the terminal module for motor
starters or frequency converters before the latter is mounted on
the standard mounting rail. With two PE terminals and one N terminal the "-F" version is connected to the "-S32" terminal modules
for motor starters or frequency converters. The "-S" version is
combined with the "-S31" terminal module. The "F" terminal
bocks are delivered with two caps for closing the PE/N bus
contacts on the final terminal block of a segment. The modules
for the Standard motor starters have a width of 45 mm and the
modules for the High-Feature motor starters and frequency
converters have a width of 65 mm.
There is no electrical connection between the terminals of the
PE/N terminal block and the integrated shielding of the
frequency converter. The PE/N terminal block must therefore not
be used for the shielding of the motor cable.
Accessories for Safety modules local
The Fail-safe Kit (F-Kit) is required for Standard motor starters in
a safety segment (see page 8/118).
The 2DI LC COM control module has in addition a PC interface

for connecting the Switch ES Motorstarter parameterization and
diagnostics software (Version 2.0 and higher). The module
works solely on High-Feature motor starters with
Motor Starter ES interface. The Logo! PC cable is used as
connecting cable between the 2DI LC COM control module and
the High-Feature motor starter.
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/127
The control unit cannot be used in combination with the safety

system or a brake control module.
Brake control module
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Brake control modules Xb1, Xb2, Xb3, Xb4, Xb5, Xb6
xB1
xB3
xB2
xB4
xB5
mm
15 x 196.5 x 125.5 including terminal module on 7.5 mm standard mounting rail
24 DC
Power supply
A

Reverse polarity protection
Overload/short-circuit protection
Conductor cross-section of terminal
module for brake control module
500 DC (at least 100)
xB6
400 AC
Externally through terminal module From brake rectifier through

terminal module
Externally through terminal module
0.5
0.7
No, in the event of polarity reversal the brake is released and the
overload/short-circuit protection is ineffective
Not relevant
Electronic
1 A melting fuse
mm2 1 x 2.5 without end sleeve

1 x 1.5 with end sleeve
Number of outputs
1 (used
internally)
1 (used internally)
1 (used internally)
Number of inputs
With summary
2 bits
2 bits
2 bits
Without summary
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
Green LED
Address area required per module
Group fault "SF"
Red LED
Switching status for brake "STAT"
Yellow LED
Inputs 1 and 5
--
Green LED
--
Green LED
--
--
Disable/
Enable
--
Disable
/Enable
--
--
0 / 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 /
15
--
0 / 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 /
15
--
Parameters (default value underlined)

Brake overload diagnostics
Input delay
ms
0 / 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 /
15

Version
DT
Article No.
Control kits
for manually operating the contactor contacts during
start-up and servicing
(one set contains five control kits)
Control units
for direct contactor control
(manual control)
24 V DC
DM-V15 distance modules

with high temperatures or high current loading
15 mm wide
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-0CA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-0CG00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-0CD00
1 unit
42D
Accessories for Standard motor starters
3RK1903-0CA00
3RK1903-0CG00
3RK1903-0CD00
8/128
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
PE/N M45-PEN-F terminal blocks

45 mm wide
including two caps
in combination with TM-DS45-S32/
TM-RS90-S32
PE/N M45-PEN-S terminal blocks

45 mm wide
in combination with TM-DS45-S31/TM-RS90-S31
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-2AA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-2AA10
1 unit
42D
2DI LC COM control modules

A
Digital input module with 2 inputs (cable length up to
100 m) for local motor starter functions for mounting onto
the front of motor starters, operational voltage 24 V DC
(supplied from U1), short-circuit proof, floating contact
with serial interface for connecting Motor Starter ES,
connected using LOGO! PC cable
3RK1903-0CH20
1 unit
42D
Hand-held devices
B
For ET 200S High-Feature motor starters
(or for ET 200pro and M200D motor starters)
for local operation.
The motor starter-specific serial interface cables must be
ordered separately.
The LOGO! PC cable is used for the MS ET 200S HF.
3RK1922-3BA00
1 unit
42D
LOGO! PC cables
A
For connecting the ET 200S High-Feature motor starters
to the RS 232 interface of a PG/PC/laptop (with the Motor
Starter ES software) or the hand-held device
3RK1922-3BA00.
6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
Accessories for Standard motor starters (continued)
3RK1903-2AA00
3RK1903-2AA10
Accessories for High-Feature motor starters
3RK1903-0CH20
3RK1922-3BA00
6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
M65-PEN-F terminal blocks
65 mm wide, including two caps, in combination with
TM-DS65-S32/TM-RS130-S32
3RK1903-2AC00
1 unit
42D
M65-PEN-S terminal blocks

65 mm wide, in combination with
TM-DS65-S31/TM-RS130-S31
3RK1903-2AC10
1 unit
42D

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/129
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
M15-PE/N bridge modules

15 mm wide
for bridging a 15 mm module
M30-PE/N bridge modules

30 mm wide
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-0AH00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-0AJ00
1 unit
42D
M15-L123 bridge modules

15 mm wide
3RK1903-0AE00
1 unit
42D
M30-L123 bridge modules

30 mm wide
3RK1903-0AF00
1 unit
42D
Sealing caps
for L123 and PE/N bridge modules
(bag containing 20 units)
3RK1903-0AF20
1 unit
42D
xB1 for motor starters

24 V DC/4 A
3RK1903-0CB00
1 unit
42D

500 V DC/0.7 A
3RK1903-0CC00
1 unit
42D

24 V DC/4 A/2 DI 24 V DC local control
with diagnostics, with two inputs
3RK1903-0CE00
1 unit
42D

500 V DC/0.7 A/2 DI 24 V DC local control
with diagnostics, with two inputs
3RK1903-0CF00
1 unit
42D

400 V AC
without digital input
3RK1903-0CJ00
1 unit
42D

400 V AC
with two digital inputs
3RK1903-0CK00
1 unit
42D
TM-xB15 S24-01
for xB1, xB2 or xB5
3RK1903-0AG00
1 unit
42D
TM-xB215 S24-01
for xB3, xB4 or xB6
3RK1903-0AG01
1 unit
42D
Accessories for Standard/High-Feature motor starters
3RK1903-0AH00
3RK1903-0AJ00
3RK1903-0AE00
3RK1903-0AF00
3RK1903-0AF20
Brake control modules
for motors with mechanical brake
3RK1903-0CB00
Terminal modules for brake control modules
8/130
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
M65-PEN-F terminal blocks

With incoming connection, with caps
M65-PEN-S terminal blocks

Without incoming connection
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1903-2AC00
1 unit
42D
3RK1903-2AC10
1 unit
42D
PM-X safety modules (connection modules)

A
With diagnostics, for plugging onto TM-X15 S27-01
Module for connecting a safety group and for connecting
an external infeed contactor or for connecting to an
external safety circuit
3RK1903-1CB00
1 unit
42D
F-Kit 1
Failsafe equipment for
DS1-x Standard motor starters1)
3RK1903-1CA00
1 unit
42D
F-Kit 2
Failsafe equipment for
RS1-x Standard motor starters1)
3RK1903-1CA01
1 unit
42D
Accessories for Failsafe motor starters
Accessories for Safety modules local
3RK1903-1CA00
3RK1903-1CA01
Documentation
1)
The function of the Failsafe Kit is already integrated into High-Feature

motor starters.
2)

Manual2)
SIMATIC ET 200S Motor Starters, Failsafe Motor Starters,
Safety-Integrated Systems
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/131
Siemens AG 2013

with CPU

Version
DT
Article No.
IM 151-7 CPU FO (48 K) interface modules

Including termination module
IM 151-7 CPU (128 K) V3.3 interface modules

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7151-7AB00-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0
1 unit
250
MMC 64 Kbyte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 128 kbyte1)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 512 Kbyte1)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 Mbyte1)
For program backups and/or the firmware update
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4 Mbyte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 8 Mbyte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LP20-0AA0
1 unit
230
External prommers
For e.g. MMC with USB interface
6ES7792-0AA00-0XA0
1 unit
260
IM 151-7 CPU interface modules

For communication between ET 200S and higher-level masters over PROFIBUS DP
Accessories
PG
with integrated MMC interface
On req.
Inscription sheets in A4 format (10 units)

Each sheet contains 60 labeling strips for I/O modules and 20 labeling strips for
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0
10 units
250
C
A
A
A
6ES5710-8MA11
6ES5710-8MA21
6ES5710-8MA31
6ES5710-8MA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BA52-0XA0
6ES7972-0BA52-0XB0
1
1 unit
1 100 units
250
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BB52-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB52-0XB0
1
1 unit
1 100 units
250
250
6XV1830-0EH10
1M
5K1
Manuals for ET 200S distributed I/O system

Can be downloaded as a PDF file from the Internet:
www.siemens.com/simatic-docu
Termination modules
As spare part for ET 200S
Power supply plugs
Spare parts, for connection to supply voltage 24 V DC
With push-in terminals

SIMATIC S5, 35 mm standard mounting rails
483 mm long for 19" cabinets

530 mm long for 600 mm cabinets
2 m long
PROFIBUS DP interface RS485 bus connectors
With 90 cable feeder, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s
Without PG interface
With PG interface
With 90 cable feeder for FastConnect connections, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s
1 unit
100 units
With PG interface
1 unit
100 units
Standard type with special design for fast installation, 2-core, shielded, sold by the
meter; delivery unit max. 1000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m
See catalogs IK PI, CA 01
PROFIBUS bus components

For setting up MPI/PROFIBUS communication
SIPLUS IM 151-7 CPU interface modules

(extended temperature range and medial loading)
SIPLUS IM 151-7 CPU (96 K) interface modules
(-25 ... +60 C)
6AG1151-7AA21-2AB0
1 unit
473
SIPLUS ET 200S termination module
6AG1193-4JA00-2AA0
1 unit
473
Accessories
1)
See IM 151-7 CPU interface modules
For operation of the CPU, an MMC is essential.
8/132
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

with CPU
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7151-8AB01-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 128
For program backups
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 512 kByte1)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 Mbyte
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4 Mbyte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 8 Mbyte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LP20-0AA0
1 unit
230
External prommers
6ES7792-0AA00-0XA0
1 unit
260
IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules

IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules (192 K)
with PROFINET and PROFIBUS interfaces, including termination module
Accessories
MMC 64 kByte1)
For program backups
kbyte1)
1)
PG
with integrated MMC interface
On req.
Petrol
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0
10 units
250

2 m long
C
A
A
A
6ES5710-8MA11
6ES5710-8MA21
6ES5710-8MA31
6ES5710-8MA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 90

RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet, with robust metal enclosure and
integrated insulation displacement contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC
installation cables; with 90 cable feeder
1 unit
10 units
50 units
A
A
A
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AE0
1
1
1
1 unit
10 units
50 units
5K1
5K1
5K1
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect installation cables

FastConnect standard cables
FastConnect trailing cables
FastConnect marine cables
A
A
A
6XV1840-2AH10
6XV1840-3AH10
6XV1840-4AH10
1
1
1
1M
1M
1M
5K1
5K1
5K1
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect stripping tool
6GK1901-1GA00
1 unit
5K2
6AG1151-8AB01-7AB0
1 unit
473
Red
Yellow
Light beige
Termination modules
Power supply plugs

SIPLUS IM 151-8 PN/DP interface modules

SIPLUS IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules (-40 ... +70 C)
Accessories
1)
See IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/133

interface modules.
Siemens AG 2013

with CPU
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4HA00-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BA52-0XA0
6ES7972-0BA52-0XB0
1
1 unit
1 100 units
250
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BB52-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB52-0XB0
1
1 unit
1 100 units
250
250
6XV1830-0EH10
1M
5K1
Master interface modules for IM 151-7(8) CPU/

IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules
Master interface modules for IM 151-7 CPU / IM 151-7 F-CPU /
IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU / IM 151-8 F PN/DP CPU interface modules
Accessories
With 90 cable feeder, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s
With PG interface
1 unit
100 units
With PG interface
1 unit
100 units
meter; delivery unit max. 1000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m
See catalogs IK PI, CA 01
PROFIBUS bus components

For setting up MPI/PROFIBUS communication
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6AG1138-4HA00-7AB0
1 unit
473

SIPLUS IM 151 CPU master interface modules

Master interface modules for SIPLUS IM 151-7 CPU/
IM 151-7 F-CPU/IM 151-8 PN/DP CPU/IM 151-8 F PN/DP CPU interface modules
(-40 ... +70 C)
Accessories
8/134
Siemens IC 10 2014
See master interface modules for IM 151 CPU

Siemens AG 2013

with fail-safe CPU
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7151-7FA21-0AB0
1 unit
241
A
A
6ES7833-1FC02-0YA5
6ES7833-1FC02-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
6ES7833-1FC02-0YE5
1 unit
241
6ES7833-1FA12-0YA5
6ES7833-1FA12-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
216
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YE5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YK5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YF5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YY5
1 unit
216
MMC 64 Kbyte2)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 128 kbyte2)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 512 kByte2)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 Mbyte2)
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4 Mbyte2)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
External prommers
For MMC with USB interface
6ES7792-0AA00-0XA0
1 unit
260
Termination modules
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
C
A
A
A
6ES5710-8MA11
6ES5710-8MA21
6ES5710-8MA31
6ES5710-8MA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
6AG1151-7FA21-2AB0
1 unit
473

For constructing a fail-safe automation system with combined DP/MPI interface,
192 kbyte
Accessories
S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool
Task: Configuration software for configuring fail-safe user programs for
SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, WinAC RTX F, ET 200S, ET 200M, ET 200iSP, ET 200pro,
ET 200eco
Requirements: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher
Floating license
Floating license for 1 user, license key download without software and
documentation1); email address required for delivery
Distributed Safety upgrade
From V5.x to V5.4; floating license for 1 user
STEP 7 Safety Advanced Upgrade

Upgrade STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11 to STEP 7 Advanced Safety V12;
floating license for 1 user
floating license for 1 user; license key download without software and
Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 and STEP 7 Safety Advanced V12 for parallel use;
incl. software on CD; combo license for 1 user
incl. software on CD; combo license for 1 user, license key download without software
and documentation1); email address required for delivery

2 m long
STEP 7 Safety Advanced V12

Task: Engineering tool for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-1500F,
S7-300F, S7-400F, WinAC RTX F, ET 200SP, ET 200S, ET 200M, ET 200iSP, ET 200pro,
ET 200eco
Requirements: STEP 7 Professional V12 SP1
Floating license for 1 user
B
A
1)
documentation ; email address required for delivery
SIPLUS IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules

SIPLUS IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules (-25 ... +60 C)
See IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules
Accessories
IM 151-8F PN/DP CPU interface modules
IM 151-8F PN/DP CPU interface modules (256 K)
6ES7151-8FB01-0AB0
1 unit
241
A
A
6ES7833-1FC02-0YA5
6ES7833-1FC02-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
6ES7833-1FC02-0YE5
1 unit
241
Including termination module; with PROFINET and PROFIBUS interfaces
Accessories
ET 200eco
Floating license
1)
Up-to-date information and availability for download see under:

http://www.siemens.com/tia-online-software-delivery
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/135
Siemens AG 2013

with fail-safe CPU
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7833-1FA12-0YA5
6ES7833-1FA12-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
216
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YE5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YK5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YF5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YY5
1 unit
216
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 128 kbyte

For program backups
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 512 kByte2)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 Mbyte2)
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4 Mbyte2)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 8 Mbyte2)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LP20-0AA0
1 unit
230
External prommers
6ES7792-0AA00-0XA0
1 unit
260
IM 151-8F PN/DP CPU interface modules (continued)

ET 200eco
B
A
Upgrade STEP 7 Safety Advanced V11 according to STEP 7 Advanced Safety V12;
MMC 64 Kbyte2)
For program backups
2)
PG
With integrated MMC interface
On req.

interface modules.
Petrol
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0
10 units
250

2 m long
C
A
A
A
6ES5710-8MA11
6ES5710-8MA21
6ES5710-8MA31
6ES5710-8MA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250

1 unit
10 units
50 units
A
A
A
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AE0
1
1
1
1 unit
10 units
50 units
5K1
5K1
5K1

A
A
A
6XV1840-2AH10
6XV1840-3AH10
6XV1840-4AH10
1
1
1
1M
1M
1M
5K1
5K1
5K1
6GK1901-1GA00
1 unit
5K2
6AG1151-8FB01-2AB0
1 unit
473
Red
Yellow
Light beige
Can be downloaded as a PDF file from the Internet: www.siemens.com/simatic-docu
Termination modules
Power supply plugs

SIPLUS IM 151-8F PN/DP CPU interface modules

SIPLUS IM 151-8F PN/DP CPU interface modules (-25 ... +60 C)
Accessories
1)

2)
8/136
Siemens IC 10 2014
See IM 151-8F PN/DP CPU interface modules

Siemens AG 2013

interface modules without CPU
Version
DT
Article No.
IM 151-1 BASIC interface modules

For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s;
up to 12 power, solid-state and motor starter modules can be connected;
connection to bus through 9-pole Sub-D including termination module
IM 151-1 COMPACT 32 DI 24 V DC interface modules

32 digital inputs, up to 12 power, solid-state and motor starter modules can be
connected; connection to bus through 9-pole Sub-D including termination module
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7151-1CA00-1BL0
1 unit
250
IM 151-1 COMPACT 16 DI 24 V DC / 16 DO 24 V/0.5 A interface modules

16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs,
6ES7151-1CA00-3BL0
1 unit
250
IM 151-1 STANDARD interface modules

for ET 200S; transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s;
data volume of 244 bytes each for inputs and outputs;
6ES7151-1AA05-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD interface modules

connection to bus using integrated fiber-optic cable including termination module
6ES7151-1AB05-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-1 HIGH-FEATURE interface modules

A
data volume of 244 bytes each for inputs and outputs; up to 63 modules can be
connected; connection of PROFIsafe modules, isochronous mode (clocked operation);
6ES7151-1BA02-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-1 interface modules

For connecting the ET 200S to PROFIBUS DP
TM-C120S terminal modules

Terminal module for ET 200S COMPACT, screw terminals
6ES7193-4DL10-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-C120C terminal modules

Terminal module for ET 200S COMPACT, spring-type terminals
6ES7193-4DL00-0AA0
1 unit
250
TE-U120S4x10 additional terminals

A
Additional terminal for TM-C120x terminal modules of ET 200S COMPACT;
screw terminals for 3-conductor connection;
please order two for 4-conductor connection.
Can also be plugged into TM-E/TM-P if the same height of the terminal modules exists
over a width of at least 120 mm.
6ES7193-4FL10-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7193-4FL00-0AA0
1 unit
250
SIMATIC Manual Collection

Electronic manuals on DVD, several languages:
S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools,
Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine
Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230
SIMATIC Manual Collection Update service for 1 year

Scope of supply: The current DVD S7 Manual Collection as well as the 3 subsequent
updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
A
A
6ES7972-0BA52-0XA0
6ES7972-0BA52-0XB0
1
1 unit
1 100 units
250
250
A
A
6ES7972-0BB52-0XA0
6ES7972-0BB52-0XB0
1
1 unit
1 100 units
250
250
100 Simplex connectors

For plastic fiber-optic cable including 5 polishing sets
6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0
1 set
5K2
50 plug-in adapters
Each for 2 Simplex connectors
6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0
50 units
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
TE-U120C4x10 additional terminals

Additional terminal for TM-C120x terminal modules of ET 200S COMPACT;
spring-type terminals for 3-conductor connection;
please order two for 4-conductor connection
Can also be plugged into TM-E/TM-P if the same height of the terminal modules exists
over a width of at least 120 mm.

1 unit
100 units
With PG interface
1 unit
100 units

interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/137
Accessories
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
A
A
A
A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7193-4BA10-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB10-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD10-0AA0
6ES7193-4BH10-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Power supply plugs

A
A
6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4JB50-0AA0
1
1
10 units
10 units
250
250

2 m long
C
A
A
A
6ES5710-8MA11
6ES5710-8MA21
6ES5710-8MA31
6ES5710-8MA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
SIPLUS IM 151-1 STANDARD interface modules (-25 ... +70 C)

6AG1151-1AA05-7AB0
1 unit
473
SIPLUS IM 151-1 HIGH-FEATURE interface modules (-25 ... +60 C)

up to 63 modules can be connected; connection of PROFIsafe modules,
isochronous mode (clocked operation);
6AG1151-1BA02-2AB0
1 unit
473
IM 151-1 interface modules (continued)

Can be used for ET 200S COMPACT; each sheet contains 10 labeling strips
Beige
Yellow
Red
Petrol
Termination modules
SIPLUS IM 151-1 interface modules

See IM 151-1 interface modules
Accessories
IM 151-3 PN interface modules
For connecting the ET 200S to PROFINET
A
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; data volume dependent on number
of modules mounted, up to 63 modules can be connected, connection to bus through
RJ45
6ES7151-3AA23-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-3 PN PROFINET High-Feature interface modules

A
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; up to 63 modules with max. width of
2 m can be connected, connection to bus through RJ45, including termination module
6ES7151-3BA23-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7151-3BB23-0AB0
1 unit
250

1 unit
10 units
50 units
A
A
A
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AE0
1
1
1
1 unit
10 units
50 units
5K1
5K1
5K1

A
A
A
6XV1840-2AH10
6XV1840-3AH10
6XV1840-4AH10
1
1
1
1M
1M
1M
5K1
5K1
5K1
6GK1900-0ML00-0AA0
1 unit
5K2
6GK1900-0MB00-0AC0
20 units
5K2
6GK1900-0MN00-0AA0
5 units
5K2
6GK1900-0NL00-0AA0
1 unit
5K2
6GK1900-0NB00-0AC0
10 units
5K2
6GK1901-1GA00
1 unit
5K2
IM 151-3 FO interface modules

For ET 200S; with 2 PROFINET fiber-optic interfaces and integrated 2-port switch,
up to 63 modules up to 2 m wide can be connected, including termination module
Accessories
Termination kits
SC RJ POF Plug
Termination kit for local mounting of SC RJ connectors,
comprising insulation stripping tool, kevlar shears, microscope, abrasive paper and
support
IE SC RJ POF Plug
Threaded connectors for local mounting on POF fiber-optic cables
(1 pack = 20 units)
IE SC RJ Refill Set POF
Refill set for SC RJ POF Plug termination kit,
comprising abrasive paper and disk (set of 5)
SC RJ PCF Plug
Termination kit for local mounting of SC RJ connectors,
comprising insulation stripping tool, buffer insulation stripping tool, kevlar shears, fiber cleaver, microscope
Industrial Ethernet SC RJ PCF Plug
Threaded connectors for local mounting on PCF fiber-optic cables
(1 pack = 10 units)
8/138
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
MMC 64 kByte1)
For storing the unit's name
MMC 128 kbyte1)

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 512 kByte1)

6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 Mbyte1)
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4 Mbyte1)
For storing the unit's name and/or the firmware update
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
6ES7953-8LP20-0AA0
1 unit
230

6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230

Scope of supply: The current DVD S7 Manual Collection as well as the three
subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
Termination modules as spare part for ET 200S
6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Power supply plugs

A
A
6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4JB50-0AA0
1
1
10 units
10 units
250
250
35 mm standard mounting rails

2 m long
C
A
A
A
6ES5710-8MA11
6ES5710-8MA21
6ES5710-8MA31
6ES5710-8MA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
6GK5202-2BH00-2BA3
1 unit
5N2
6GK5201-3BH00-2BA3
1 unit
5N2
6GK5200-4AH00-2BA3
1 unit
5N2
SIPLUS IM 151-3 PN interface modules (-25 ... +60 C)

D
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; data volume dependent on number
of modules mounted, up to 63 modules can be connected, connection to bus through
RJ45
6AG1151-3AA23-2AB0
1 unit
473
SIPLUS IM 151-3 PROFINET High-Feature interface modules (-25 ... +70 C)

D
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; up to 63 modules with max. width of
2 m can be connected, connection to bus through RJ45, including termination module
6AG1151-3BA23-7AB0
1 unit
473
Accessories
See IM 151-3 PN interface modules
IM 151-3 PN interface modules (continued)
Mbyte1)
MMC 8
For storing the unit's name and/or the firmware update
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
Industrial Ethernet switches

Managed Industrial Ethernet switches; isochronous real-time, LED diagnostics,
error signaling contacts with SET button, redundant power supply
SCALANCE X202-2P IRT
2 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports, 2 x 100 Mbit/s POF/PCF SC RJ
1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports, 3 x 100 Mbit/s POF/PCF SC RJ
4 x 100 Mbit/s POF/PCF SC RJ
SIPLUS IM 151-3 PN interface modules

1)
For operation of the IM 151-3, an MMC is essential.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/139

interface modules.
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules

Version
DT
Article No.
A
A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
6ES7138-4CA01-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
6ES7138-4CA60-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
6ES7138-4CA50-0AB0
6ES7138-4CA50-1AB0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
6ES7138-4CB11-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
PM-E power modules 24 V DC1) (-40 ... +70 C)

For electronic modules, with diagnostics
6AG1138-4CA01-2AA0
1 unit
473
PM-E power modules 24 to 48 V DC (-25 ... +60 C)

For electronic modules, with diagnostics, with status bit "Load voltage available"
6AG1138-4CA50-2AB0
1 unit
473
PM-E power modules 24 to 48 V DC, 24 to 230 V AC (-25 ... +60 C)

For electronic modules, with diagnostics and fuse
6AG1138-4CB11-2AB0
1 unit
473
PM-E power modules for electronic modules

Standard PM-E power modules 24 V DC1)
1 unit
5 units
High-Feature PM-E power modules 24 V DC1)
PM-E power modules 24 to 48 V DC
For electronic modules, with diagnostics, with status bit "Load voltage available"
1 unit
5 units
PM-E power modules 24 to 48 V DC, 42 to 230 V AC
For electronic modules, with diagnostics and fuse
Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
SIPLUS PM-E power modules for electronic modules

SIPLUS PM-E power modules
See PM-E power modules for electronic modules
Accessories
Reserve modules
Reserve modules for ET 200S
For reserving space in unused slots
15 mm width (5 units)
30 mm width (1 unit)
A
A
6ES7138-4AA01-0AA0
6ES7138-4AA11-0AA0
1
1
5 units
1 unit
250
250
6ES7138-4FD00-0AA0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
Potential distributor modules

Potential distributor modules for ET 200S
For supplying the load voltage to additional terminals,
15 mm wide, 1 unit
Accessories for inscription

interface modules.
1)
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
For all solid-state and technology modules except
2 DI 120 V AC/2 DI 230 V AC/2 DO 120/230 V AC.
8/140
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Digital electronic modules

Digital input modules
Order unit 5 units
2 DI 24 V DC Standard
2 DI 24 V DC High-Feature
4 DI 24 V DC High-Feature
A
A
A
A
6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0
6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0
6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
250
250
250
250
2 DI 120 V AC
2 DI 230 V AC
4 DI 24 ... 48 V UC
4 DI 24 V DC SOURCE INPUT
A
A
A
A
6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0
6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0
6ES7131-4CD02-0AB0
6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
250
250
250
250
Order unit 1 unit

4 DI 24 V DC NAMUR
8 DI 24 V DC Standard SOURCE INPUT
A
A
A
6ES7131-4RD02-0AB0
6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0
6ES7131-4BF50-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Order unit 100 units

6ES7131-4BF00-4AA0
1 100 units
250
Digital output modules
2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard
2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A High-Feature
2 DO 24 V DC/2 A Standard
2 DO 24 V DC/2 A High-Feature
A
A
A
A
6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0
6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0
6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
250
250
250
250
4 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard SOURCE OUTPUT
A
A
A
A
6ES7132-4BD02-0AA0
6ES7132-4BD50-0AA0
6ES7132-4BD00-0AB0
6ES7132-4BF00-0AB0
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
1 unit
250
250
250
250
4 DO 24 V DC/2 A Standard
4 DO 24 V DC/2 A High-Feature
2 DO 24 ... 230 V AC/2 A
A
A
A
6ES7132-4BD32-0AA0
6ES7132-4BD30-0AB0
6ES7132-4FB01-0AB0
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
250
250
250
2 DO 24 V DC to 230 V AC/5 A relay, NO contact

2 DO 24 ... 48 V DC/5 A, 24 ... 230 V AC/5 A relay, CO contact
A
A
6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0
6ES7132-4HB12-0AB0
1
1
5 units
5 units
250
250
Order unit 1 unit

2 DO 24 ... 48 V DC/5 A, 24 ... 230 V AC/5 A relay, CO contact, with manual operation A
A
8 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard SINK OUTPUT
A
6ES7132-4HB50-0AB0
6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0
6ES7132-4BF50-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Order unit 100 units

6ES7132-4BF00-4AA0
1 100 units
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
Order unit 5 units

4 DI 24 V DC Standard (-25 ... +60 C)
4 DI 24 V DC High-Feature (-25 ... +70 C)
8 DI 24 V DC Standard (-25 ... +70 C)
D
D
D
6AG1131-4BD01-2AA0
6AG1131-4BD01-7AB0
6AG1131-4BF00-7AA0
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
1 unit
473
473
473
Order unit 1 unit

8 DI 24 V DC Source Input (-40 ... +70 C)
6AG1131-4BF50-7AA0
1 unit
473
Order unit 5 units

2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A High-Feature (-25 ... +60 C)
2 DO 24 V DC/2 A High-Feature (-25 ... +70 C)
4 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard (-25 ... +70 C)
4 DO 24 V DC/2 A Standard (-25 ... +60 C)
2 DO 24 V DC to 230 V AC/5 A relay, NO contact (-25 ... +70 C)
2 DO 24 ... 48 V DC/5 A, 24 ... 230 V AC/5 A relay, CO contact (-25 ... +60 C)
D
D
D
D
D
D
6AG1132-4BB01-2AB0
6AG1132-4BB31-7AB0
6AG1132-4BD02-7AA0
6AG1132-4BD32-2AA0
6AG1132-4HB01-2AB0
6AG1132-4HB12-2AB0
1
1
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
5 units
473
473
473
473
473
473
Order unit 1 unit

8 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard (-25 ... +70 C)
8 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard SOURCE OUTPUT (-25 ... +70 C)
D
D
6AG1132-4BF00-7AA0
6AG1132-4BF50-7AA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
473
473
Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
SIPLUS digital electronic modules

SIPLUS digital input modules
SIPLUS digital output modules
Accessories

See digital electronic modules
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/141
Order unit 5 units
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Analog electronic modules

Analog input modules
Order unit 1 unit
2 AI U Standard
2 AI U High Speed
2 AI U High-Feature
2 AI I Standard 2-wire
2 AI I High Speed 2-wire
A
A
A
A
A
6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0
6ES7134-4FB52-0AB0
6ES7134-4LB02-0AB0
6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0
6ES7134-4GB52-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
250
2 AI I Standard 4-wire
2 AI High Speed 4 wire
2 AI I High-Feature 2/4-wire (15 bits + sign)
2 AI RTD Standard
2 AI TC Standard
A
A
A
A
A
6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0
6ES7134-4GB62-0AB0
6ES7134-4MB02-0AB0
6ES7134-4JB51-0AB0
6ES7134-4JB01-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
250
2 AI RTD High-Feature
2 AI TC High-Feature
4 AI Standard 2-wire
4 AI TC Standard
A
A
A
A
6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0
6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0
6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0
6ES7134-4JD00-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
A
A
A
A
A
A
6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0
6ES7135-4FB52-0AB0
6ES7135-4LB02-0AB0
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0
6ES7135-4GB52-0AB0
6ES7135-4MB02-0AB0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
250
250
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
Shield attachments
Order unit 5 units
For plugging into TM-E and TM-P
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
5 units
250
Shield terminals
Order unit 5 units
For busbars 3 10 mm
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
5 units
250
Ground connection terminals

For conductor cross-sections up to 25 mm2
8WA2868
50 units
12W
Busbars 3 x 10 mm
Order unit 1 unit
8WA2842
1 unit
12W
D
D
D
6AG1134-4FB01-2AB0
6AG1134-4GB01-2AB0
6AG1134-4GB11-2AB0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
473
473
473
D
D
D
6AG1134-4MB02-2AB0
6AG1134-4GB52-2AB0
6AG1134-4GD00-2AB0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
473
473
473
D
D
D
6AG1134-4JB51-7AB0
6AG1134-4NB51-2AB0
6AG1134-4NB01-7AB0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
473
473
473
D
D
D
6AG1135-4FB01-2AB0
6AG1135-4LB02-7AB0
6AG1135-4GB01-2AB0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
473
473
473
Analog output modules

Order unit 1 unit
2 AO U Standard
2 AO U High Speed
2 AO U High-Feature
2 AO I Standard
2 AO I High Speed
2 AO I High-Feature
Accessories for inscription

interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
Accessories for system-integrated shield connections
SIPLUS analog electronic modules

SIPLUS analog input modules
2 AI U Standard (-25 ... +60 C)

2 AI I Standard 2-wire (-25 ... +60 C)
2 AI I Standard 4-wire (-25 ... +60 C)
2 AI I High-Feature 2-/4-wire (15 Bit + sign) (-25 ... +70 C)
2 AI High Speed 2-wire (-25 ... +60 C)
4 AI Standard 2-wire (-25 ... +60 C)
2 AI RTD Standard (-25 ... +70 C)
2 AI RTD High-Feature (-25 ... +60 C)
2 AI TC High-Feature (0 ... +70 C)
SIPLUS analog output modules
2 AO U Standard (-25 ... +60 C)

2 AO U High-Feature (-25 ... +60 C)
2 AO I Standard (-25 ... +70 C)
Accessories
8/142
Siemens IC 10 2014
See analog electronic modules

Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules
Technology modules
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4DB03-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6FX5002-2CC12-....
1 unit
764
6ES7138-4DD01-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
6ES7138-4DC01-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
1 unit
250
SSI modules
SSI modules
For the connection of absolute encoders with SSI interface
Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
Signal cables
Assembled for SSI absolute encoders 6FX2001-5, without Sub-D connector,
UL/DESINA
2PULSE pulse generators

2PULSE pulse generators and timer modules
For ET 200S
Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
1STEP step modules

1STEP step modules
For simple positioning tasks with stepper motor axes
Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
SIMOSTEP stepper motors
See Catalog ST 70
Power units for stepper motors FM STEPDRIVE
See Catalog ST 70
1POS U positioning modules

1POS U positioning modules
Single-channel positioning module for ET 200S for positioning of adjusting and
operating axes

6ES7138-4DL00-0AB0
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/143
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules
Technology modules
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4DA04-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
Shield attachments
For TM-P and TM-E terminal modules, as support for busbar 3 x 10 mm, 5 units
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
5 units
250
Shield terminals
For connection of braided shields to busbars, 5 units
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
5 units
250
1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter modules

For universal counting and measuring tasks with ET 200S
Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
SIMODRIVE sensor incremental encoders

Mountable sensor, optically incremental with HTL level,
operational voltage 10 ... 30 V
Signal cables
Assembled, for HTL and TTL sensors, without Sub-D connector, UL/DESINA
6FX2001-4....
See Catalog ST 70
6FX5002-2CA12-....
1 unit
764
6AG1138-4DA04-2AB0
1 unit
473
SIPLUS 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter modules

SIPLUS 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter modules (-25 ... +60 C)
See 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter modules
Accessories
A
6ES7138-4DE02-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
250
250
250
250
Shield attachments
For TM-P and TM-E terminal modules,
as support for busbar 3 x 10 mm, 5 units
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
5 units
250
Shield terminals
For connection of braided shields to busbars, 5 units
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
5 units
250

Accessories
interface modules.
Petrol
Red
Yellow
Light beige
SIMODRIVE incremental encoders

With RS 422 (TTL), operational voltage 10 ... 30 V
Signal cables
Assembled, for HTL and TTL sensors, without Sub-D connector, UL/DESINA
6FX2001-2....
See Catalog ST 70
B
6FX5002-2CA12-....
1 unit
764
A
A
6ES7138-4DF01-0AB0
6ES7138-4DF11-0AB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
TM-E15S 26-A1 terminal modules

Order unit 5 units
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15C26-A1 terminal modules

Order unit 5 units
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules

Order unit 5 units
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15S24-01 terminal modules

Order unit 5 units
6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15C24-01 terminal modules

Order unit 5 units
6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules

Order unit 5 units
6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0
5 units
250
D
D
6AG1138-4DF11-7AB0
6AG1138-4DF01-7AB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
473
473
1 SI interface modules
ASCII and 3964(R) protocol
Modbus and USS protocol
Accessories
SIPLUS 1 SI interface modules

ASCII and 3964(R) protocols (-25 ... +70 C)
MODBUS and USS protocols (-25 ... +70 C)
Accessories
8/144
Siemens IC 10 2014
See 1 SI interface modules

Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules
Technology modules
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
7MH4910-0AA01
1 unit
816
7MH4910-0AK02
1 unit
816
7MH4607-8CA
1 unit
815
Terminal modules
TM-E 30 mm wide (required for each SIWAREX module)
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0
or compatible
1 unit
250
Shield attachments
Contents 5 units, sufficient for 5 cables
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
5 units
250
Shield connection terminals

Contents: 5 units, sufficient for 5 cables
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
5 units
250
N busbars, galvanized
3 x 10 mm, 1 m long
8WA2842
1 unit
12W
Infeed terminals for N busbar
8WA2868
50 units
12W
SIWAREX CS
SIWAREX CS
Weighing electronics for weighers in SIMATIC ET 200S
SIWAREX CS manuals
In various languages
Free download from:
www.siemens.com/weighingtechnology
SIWAREX CS "Getting started"
Sample software for a simple introduction to programming weighers in STEP 7.
Free download from:
SIWAREX CS configuration package on CD-ROM for SIMATIC and TIA Portal
SIWATOOL CS software for weigher calibration
(in various languages)
Manuals on CD (in various languages)
SIWAREX CD "Getting started"
SIWATOOL connection cables
From SIWAREX U/CS with serial PC interface,
for 9-pole PC interfaces (RS 232), length 3 m
Installation materials (essential)
Note:
One shield connection terminal is required for

Weigher connection and
The TTY interface or
RS 232 interface
Remote displays (optional)

The digital remote displays can be connected directly through the TTY interface to the
SIWAREX CS.
Usable remote display:
S102
Obtainable from the company

Siebert,
see Chapter 16 "Appendix"
"External Partners"
Accessories
SIWAREX JB junction box, aluminum housing
For parallel switching of up to 4 weigh-cells and for connecting several connection
boxes
7MH4710-1BA
1 unit
815
SIWAREX JB junction box, stainless steel housing

For parallel switching of up to 4 weigh-cells
7MH4710-1EA
1 unit
815
C
C
7MH4710-5BA
7MH4710-5CA
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
815
815
Cables Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) CY, sheath color orange

For connecting SIWAREX U, CS, MS, FTA, FTC, M and CF to the connection and
distribution box (JB), extension box (EB) or
Ex-Interface (Ex-I) and between two JBs, for local laying, occasional bending is
possible, 10.8 mm external diameter,
for ambient temperature -40 ... +80 C
7MH4702-8AG
1M
815
Cables Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) CY, sheath color blue

Connecting of connection and distribution box (JB) or extension box (EB)
in hazardous areas and Ex-Interface (Ex-I),
for local laying, occasional bending is possible,
blue PVC insulating covering, approx. 10.8 mm external diameter,
7MH4702-8AF
1M
815
Ex-Interface, type SIWAREX IS

With ATEX approval, but without UL and FM approval
For the inherently safe connection of weigh-cells, including manual,
suitable for the SIWAREX U, CS, MS, FTA, FTC, M and CF weigher modules.
Use in the EU is possible.
With short-circuit current < DC 199 mA
Cables (optional)

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/145
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules
Technology modules
Version
DT
Article No.
Terminal modules
TM-E 30 mm wide (required for each SIWAREX module)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
7MH4920-0AA01
1 unit
816
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0
or compatible
1 unit
250
Shield attachments
Contents 5 units, sufficient for 5 cables
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
5 units
250
Shield connection terminals

Contents: 5 units, sufficient for 5 cables
One shield connection terminal is required for each sensor cable
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
5 units
250
N busbars, galvanized
3 x 10 mm, 1.5 m long
8WA2842
1 unit
12W
Infeed terminals for N busbar
8WA2868
50 units
12W
7MH4710-2AA
1 unit
815
C
C
7MH4710-5BA
7MH4710-5CA
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
815
815
7MH4702-8AG
1M
815
SIWAREX CF
SIWAREX CF
Force measuring module for DMS sensors in SIMATIC ET 200S
(SIWAREX CF configuration package not required)
SIWAREX CF manuals
German, English
Free download from:
SIWAREX CF "Getting started"
Sample software for a simple introduction to programming in STEP 7.
Free download from:
Installation materials (essential)
Accessories
SIWAREX EB extension boxes

For extending sensor cables
Ex-Interface, type SIWAREX IS
With ATEX approval, but without UL and FM approval
For the inherently safe connection of weigh-cells, including manual,
suitable for the SIWAREX U, CS, MS, FTA, FTC, M and CF weigher modules.
Use in the EU is possible.
Cables (optional)
Cables Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) CY, sheath color orange
For connecting SIWAREX U, CS, MS, FTA, FTC, M and CF to the connection and
distribution box (JB), extension box (EB) or
Ex-Interface (Ex-I) and between two JBs, for local laying, occasional bending is
possible, 10.8 mm external diameter,
8/146
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S I/O modules: Terminal modules for
power modules and electronic modules
Version
DT
Article No.
TM-P15S23-A1
2 3 terminals, termination onto AUX1 rail,
AUX1 connected through to the left, screw terminals
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
TM-P15C23-A1
AUX1 connected through to the left, spring-type terminals
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CC20-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
A
A
6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0
6ES7193-4CC30-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-P15S23-A0
AUX1 disconnected through to the left, screw terminals
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CD20-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15C23-A0
AUX1 disconnected through to the left, spring-type terminals
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0
6ES7193-4CD30-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-P15S22-01
2 2 terminals, no termination onto AUX1 rail,
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0
6ES7193-4CE00-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15C22-01
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0
6ES7193-4CE10-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15N22-01, order unit 1 unit

AUX1 connected through to the left, FastConnect
6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-P30S44-A0, order unit 1 unit

AUX1 disconnected through to the left, screw terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0
1 unit
241
TM-P30C44-A0, order unit 1 unit

AUX1 disconnected through to the left, spring-type terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe
6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0
1 unit
241
TM-E15S24-A1, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15C24-A1, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15S24-01, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15C24-01, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15S23-01, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15C23-01, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15N23-01, order unit 5 units

6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-P15N23-A1, order unit 1 unit

TM-P15N23-A0
Order unit: 1 unit
AUX1 disconnected through to the left, FastConnect
TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules1)
1)
Note for selecting suitable TM-E and TM-P configuration aids.

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/147
Terminal modules for power modules and electronic modules

TM-P terminal modules for PM-E power modules
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Terminal modules for power modules and electronic modules (continued)

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules1) (continued)
TM-E15N24-01
Order unit: 5 units
6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15S26-A1
Order unit: 5 units
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15C26-A1
Order unit: 5 units
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15N24-A1
Order unit: 5 units
6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E15N26-A1
Order unit: 5 units
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
5 units
250
TM-E30S44-01
Order unit: 1 unit
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E30C44-01
Order unit: 1 unit
6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E30S46-A1
Order unit: 1 unit
6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E30C46-A1
Order unit: 1 unit
6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E15S24-AT
Order unit: 1 unit
for internal temperature compensation for 2 AI TC High-Feature,
screw terminals
6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E15C24-AT
Order unit: 1 unit
for internal temperature compensation for 2 AI TC High-Feature,
6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0
1 unit
250
Shield attachments
Order unit: 5 units, for plugging into TM-E and TM-P
6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
5 units
250
Shield terminals
Order unit: 5 units, for busbars 3 10 mm
6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
5 units
250

8WA2868
50 units
12W
Busbars 3 x 10 mm
Order unit 1 unit
8WA2842
1 unit
12W
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4LA20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LB20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LC20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LD20-0AA0
1
1
1
1
200 units
200 units
200 units
200 units
250
250
250
250
Blue
Brown
Turquoise
A
A
A
6ES7193-4LF20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LG20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LH20-0AA0
1 200 units
1 200 units
1 200 units
250
250
250
Inscription labels, with inscription

Order unit: 1 set
200 units for slot numbering (1 ... 20) 10
200 units for slot numbering (1 ... 64) 1 , (1 ... 68) 2
C
C
C
8WA8861-0AB
8WA8861-0AC
8WA8861-0DA
100 200 units

100 200 units
100 200 units
12W
12W
12W
Inscription labels, blank

200 units for slot numbering
8WA8848-2AY
100 100 units
12W
Accessories for shield connection
Accessories for coding

Color coding plates
Order unit: 200 units for TM-P, TM-E
1)
White
Yellow
Yellow and green
Red
Note for selecting suitable TM-E and TM-P configuration aids.
8/148
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-P15S23-A0 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit: 1 unit
2 x 3 terminals, termination onto AUX1 rail, AUX1 disconnected through to the left,
screw terminals
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-P15C23-A0 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit: 1 unit
2 x 3 terminals, termination onto AUX1 rail, AUX1 disconnected through to the left,
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-P15C22-01 (-40 ... +70 C)
Order unit 1 unit
2 x 2 terminals, no termination onto AUX1 rail, AUX1 connected through to the left,
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6AG1193-4CD20-2AA0
1 unit
473
6AG1193-4CD30-2AA0
1 unit
473
6AG1193-4CE10-2AA0
1 unit
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E15C23-01 (0 ... +70 C)

Order unit 5 units
6AG1193-4CB10-7AA0
5 units
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E15N24-01 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit 5 units
FastConnect
6AG1193-4CB70-7AA0
5 units
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E15C24-A1 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit 5 units
2 x 4 terminals, termination onto AUX1 rail, AUX1 connected through to the left,
6AG1193-4CA30-2AA0
5 units
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E15C24-01 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit 5 units
6AG1193-4CB30-2AA0
5 units
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E15S26-A1 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit: 5 unit
screw terminals
6AG1193-4CA40-2AA0
5 units
473

Order unit 5 units
6AG1193-4CA50-2AA0
5 units
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E30C44-01 (-40 ... +70 C)

Order unit: 1 unit
6AG1193-4CG30-2AA0
1 unit
473

Order unit 1 unit
6AG1193-4CF50-7AA0
1 unit
473
SIPLUS ET 200S TM-E15C24-AT (0 ... +70 C)

D
Order unit: 1 unit
for internal temperature compensation for 2 AI TC High-Feature, spring-type terminals
6AG1193-4CL30-7AA0
1 unit
473
Accessories for shield connection
See terminal modules for power modules and electronic modules
SIPLUS terminal modules for power modules and electronic modules

TM-P terminal modules for PM-E power modules

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/149
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
PM-E F pm PROFIsafe 24 V DC power modules

For the safe disconnection of digital output modules
PM-E F pp PROFIsafe 24 V DC power modules

For the safe disconnection of digital output modules
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4CF03-0AB0
1 unit
241
6ES7138-4CF42-0AB0
1 unit
241
IM 151-1 HIGH-FEATURE interface modules

A
data volume of 244 bytes each for inputs and outputs; up to 63 modules can be
connected; connection of PROFIsafe modules, isochronous mode (clocked operation);
6ES7151-1BA02-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-3 PN HF interface modules

A
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; up to 63 I/O modules up to 2 m width
can be connected; 2 x connection to bus with RJ45 plug, including termination module
6ES7151-3BA23-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-3 PN FO interface modules

A
For ET 200S; 2 PROFINET fiber-optic interfaces, integrated 2-port switch,
up to 63 I/O modules up to 2 m wide can be connected, including termination module
6ES7151-3BB23-0AB0
1 unit
250
PM-E F PROFIsafe F power modules
Accessories
Terminal modules for power modules

TM-P30S44-A0
Order unit: 1 unit
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0
1 unit
241
TM-P30C44-A0
Order unit: 1 unit
6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0
1 unit
241
A
A
6ES7833-1FC02-0YA5
6ES7833-1FC02-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
6ES7833-1FC02-0YE5
1 unit
241
6ES7833-1FA12-0YA5
6ES7833-1FA12-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
216
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YE5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YK5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YF5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YY5
1 unit
216

Electronic manuals on DVD, five languages: S7-200/300/400, C7, LOGO!,
SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7, Engineering Software, Runtime Software, PCS 7,
SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230
SIMATIC Manual Collection update service for 1 year

subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
4/8 F-DI PROFIsafe 24 V DC electronic modules

30 mm width, up to Category 4 (EN 954-1)
6ES7138-4FA04-0AB0
1 unit
241
4 F-DO PROFIsafe 24 V DC/2 A electronic modules

6ES7138-4FB03-0AB0
1 unit
241
4 F-DI / 3 F-DO PROFIsafe 24 V DC/2 A electronic modules

30 mm width, up to Category 3 (EN 954-1) / SIL 2 (IEC 62061)
6ES7138-4FC01-0AB0
1 unit
241

ET 200eco
Floating license
S7 Distributed Safety upgrade

ET 200eco
B
A
F electronic modules
1)

8/150
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
F electronic modules (continued)

Accessories
See F terminal modules
IM151-1 High-Feature interface modules

A
For ET200S; transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; up to 63 modules can be connected,
with isochronous mode, connection to bus through 9-pole Sub-D, including termination
module
6ES7151-1BA02-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7151-3BA23-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM151-3 PN FO interface modules

A
6ES7151-3BB23-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
6ES7833-1FC02-0YA5
6ES7833-1FC02-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
6ES7833-1FC02-0YE5
1 unit
241
6ES7833-1FA12-0YA5
6ES7833-1FA12-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
216
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YE5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YK5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YF5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YY5
1 unit
216

6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230

subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
4/8 F-DI PROFIsafe electronic modules 24 V DC (-25 ... +60 C)

6AG1138-4FA04-2AB0
1 unit
473
4 F-DO PROFIsafe electronic modules 24 V DC/2 A (-25 ... +60 C)

6AG1138-4FB03-2AB0
1 unit
473
IM151-3 PN HF interface modules

up to 63 I/O modules up to 2 m width can be connected;
2 x connection to bus with RJ45 plug, including termination module
Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool

ET 200eco
Floating license

ET 200eco
B
A
documentation1);
email address required for delivery
Terminal modules for electronic modules
SIPLUS F electronic modules

Accessories
1)
See F electronic modules


Siemens IC 10 2014
8/151
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6ES7138-4FR00-0AA0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
241
RELAY F electronic modules

1 F-RO electronic module 24 V DC/5 A 24 ... 230 V AC/5A
Accessories
Terminal modules for electronic modules
See F terminal modules
IM 151-1 High-Feature interface modules

A
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; up to 63 modules can be connected,
with isochronous mode, connection to bus through 9-pole Sub-D, including termination
module
6ES7151-1BA02-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-3 PN HF interface modules

A
For ET 200S; transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; up to 63 I/O modules up to 2 m width
can be connected; 2 x connection to bus with RJ45 plug, including termination module
6ES7151-3BA23-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 151-3 PN FO interface modules

A
6ES7151-3BB23-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
6ES7833-1FC02-0YA5
6ES7833-1FC02-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
6ES7833-1FC02-0YE5
1 unit
241
6ES7833-1FA12-0YA5
6ES7833-1FA12-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
216
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YE5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YK5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YF5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YY5
1 unit
216

6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230

subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230

ET 200eco
Floating license


ET 200eco
B
A
1)
1)

8/152
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
TM-P15S23-A1
2 x 3 terminals, termination onto AUX1 rail,
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
TM-P15C23-A1
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CC20-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
A
A
6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0
6ES7193-4CC30-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15S23-A0
AUX1 disconnected through to the left, screw terminals
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0
6ES7193-4CD20-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15C23-A0
AUX1 disconnected through to the left, spring-type terminals
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0
6ES7193-4CD30-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15S22-01
2 x 2 terminals, no termination onto AUX1 rail,
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0
6ES7193-4CE00-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P15C22-01
2 x 2 terminals, no termination onto AUX1 rail,
Order unit 1 unit
Order unit 5 units
A
A
6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0
6ES7193-4CE10-1AA0
1
1
1 unit
5 units
250
250
TM-P30S44-A0
Order unit: 1 unit 7 x 2 terminals, termination onto AUX1 rail,
6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0
1 unit
241
TM-P30C44-A0
6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0
1 unit
241
TM-E30S44-01
Order unit: 1 unit 4 x 4 terminals, no termination onto AUX1 rail,
6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E30C44-01
Order unit: 1 unit 4 x 4 terminals, no termination onto AUX1 rail,
6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E30S46-A1
6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0
1 unit
250
TM-E30C46-A1
6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
A
6ES7193-4LA20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LB20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LC20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LD20-0AA0
1
1
1
1
200 units
200 units
200 units
200 units
250
250
250
250
Blue
Brown
Turquoise
A
A
A
6ES7193-4LF20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LG20-0AA0
6ES7193-4LH20-0AA0
1 200 units
1 200 units
1 200 units
250
250
250

8WA2868
50 units
12W
Busbars 3 x 10 mm Order unit 1 unit
8WA2842
1 unit
12W

200 units for slot numbering (1 ... 64) 1 , (1 ... 68) 2
C
C
C
8WA8861-0AB
8WA8861-0AC
8WA8861-0DA
100 200 units

100 200 units
100 200 units
12W
12W
12W
Inscription labels, blank

200 units for slot numbering
8WA8848-2AY
100 100 units
12W
F terminal modules for electronic modules
Accessories
Color coding plates Order unit: 200 units for TM-P, TM-E
White
Yellow
Yellow and green
Red
Inscription labels, with inscription Order unit: 1 set

Siemens IC 10 2014
8/153
F terminal modules
F terminal modules for power modules
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7138-4GA50-0AB0
1 unit
250
A
A
A
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
250
250
250
3RK1005-0LB00-0AA0
1 unit
42F
TM-E15S26-A1 with screw terminals

TM-E15C26-A1 with spring-type terminals
TM-E15N26-A1 with FastConnect
A
A
A
6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0
6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0
6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
250
250
250
Product manual1) "ET 200S for 4SI SIRIUS Electronic Module"

German
3ZX1012-0LB00-0AA0
1 unit
4N1
IO-Link 4SI electronic module

IO-Link masters
For integrating sensors and actuators from different manufacturers into the
ET 200S I/O system; 4 ports
Connection method: Screw terminals, spring-type terminals or FastConnect
Accessories
TM-E15S26-A1 with screw terminals
TM-E15C26-A1 with spring-type terminals
TM-E15N26-A1 with FastConnect

IO-Link masters
For connecting SIRIUS controls with IO-Link to ET 200S; 4 ports
Connection method: Screw terminals, spring-type terminals or FastConnect
Accessories
This product manual is also available at:

1)
8/154
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

ET 200S software
Motor Starter ES, block library for PCS 7
Overview
Motor Starter ES
Motor Starter ES for parameterization, monitoring, diagnostics and

testing of motor starters
Faceplate of the motor block
Detailed information on the Motor Starter ES software see

with SIRIUS".

ET 200S and ET 200pro motor starters can be easily and simply
integrated into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
The SIRIUS motor starter PCS 7 block library contains the diagnostics and driver blocks corresponding to the SIMATIC PCS 7
diagnostics and driver concept as well as the elements (symbols
and faceplates) required for operator control and process
monitoring.
Detailed information about the SIRIUS motor starter block library
for SIMATIC PCS 7 see Chapter 14 "Parameterization,
Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS".
Siemens IC 10 2014
8/155
Motor Starter ES is used for start-up, parameterization, diagnostics, documentation and the preventative maintenance of the
motor starters in the SIMATIC ET 200S, SIMATIC ET 200pro and
SIRIUS M200D product families.
Siemens AG 2013

Notes
8/156
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Motor Starters
for Use in the Field,
High Degree of Protection
Price groups
PG 230, 241, 250, 266, 2AP, 337, 343,
346, 41B, 42C, 42D, 42E, 572, 5K1,
5K2, 5N2, 5W1, 753
9/3
9/7
9/8
9/9
9/10
9/10
9/13
9/14
9/19
9/30
9/34
9/35
9/36
9/37
9/39
9/43
9/44
9/45
9/51
9/51
9/51
9/52
9/53
9/55
9/56
9/57
9/58
9/60
9/61
9/70
9/71
9/72
Motor starters for AS-Interface,

24 V DC
General data
9/75
Hybrid fieldbus connections

General data
9/65
Introduction
ET 200pro motor starters
General data
ET 200pro isolator modules
ET 200pro safety motor starters
Solutions local/PROFIsafe
- Safety local isolator modules
- 400 V disconnecting modules
- F-Switch PROFIsafe
Accessories for ET 200pro motor
starters
ET 200pro interface modules
ET 200pro I/O modules
ET 200pro PS
ET 200pro FC frequency converters
ET 200pro software
9/66
9/67
9/68
Note:
Conversion tool see
SIRIUS M200D motor starters

General data
M200D motor starters for AS-Interface
M200D Basic motor starters
M200D Standard motor starters
M200D motor starters for
PROFIBUS/PROFINET neu
M200D communication modules for
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
M200D motor starter modules
Software
Accessories
For all M200D motor starters
- Incoming power supply
- Motor cables
- Power bus
- Motor control with IO communication
For M200D motor starters for
AS-Interface
For M200D motor starters for PROFIBUS
For M200D motor starters for PROFINET
9/2
SIRIUS MCU motor starters

General data
MCU motor starters, locally controlled
Plastic enclosures, electromechanical
switching
MCU motor starters, I/O controlled
switching
MCU motor starters for AS-Interface
switching
Metal enclosures, electromechanical
switching
Metal enclosures, electronic switching
Accessories
9/62
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Siemens AG 2013
Motor Starters for Use in the Field, High Degree of Protection

Introduction
Overview
3RK1304
3RK1315
3RK4353
3RK4320
Article No.
Page
3RK1304
9/7
3RK1304
9/8

With switch disconnector function for safe disconnection
3RK1304
9/9
Isolator module, 400 V disconnecting module
3RK1304
9/10
F-Switch PROFIsafe
6ES7148
9/13
Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters
Incoming power supply, power loop-through connection on the field device,

motor cable, power bus with power terminal connectors
3RK19
9/14
For communication with PROFIBUS, PROFINET and IWLAN
6ES71
9/19
Digital/analog expansion modules, fail-safe expansion modules,

power modules, ET 200pro pneumatic interfaces
6ES71
9/30
ET 200pro PS
Stabilized power supplies
6ES7148
9/34
6SL32
9/35
M200D AS-i Basic motor starters
3RK1315
9/43
M200D AS-i Standard motor starters
3RK1325
9/44

PROFIBUS
3RK1305
9/51

PROFINET
3RK1335
9/51
SIRIUS M200D motor starters
Distributed motor starters up to 5.5 kW
3RK1395
9/51
Incoming power supply, motor cable, power bus with power terminal connectors 3RK1911
9/55
Motor control with IO communication
3RK1902
9/57
Motor control with AS-i communication
3RK1902
9/58
Motor control with PROFIBUS
3RK1902
9/60
Motor control with PROFINET
3RK1902
9/61
For autonomously controlled motors such as pumps, fans, etc.
3RK4353
9/65
Economical solution for controlling three-phase motors distributed in the field
3RK4340
9/66
Controlling and scanning through the AS-i bus

- Plastic enclosures, electromechanical
3RK4320
9/67
- Metal enclosures, electromechanical
3RK4320
9/68
- Metal enclosures, electronic
3RK4320
9/70
Single direct-on-line starters, double direct-on-line starters, reversing starters
3RK1400-1
9/72
Passive and active
3RK1911
9/75

Accessories
Motor starters for AS-Interface, 24 V DC

For the low-end performance range up to 70 W
Quick and easy connection of 24 V DC motors and related
sensors directly on-site to AS-Interface
3 versions
Flexible and cost-efficient distributed starter solutions

Be it their high degree of protection, compact design or integrated multifunctionality our motor starters and soft starters for
use in the field are ideal for realizing distributed drive solutions.
The modular concepts, distributed power distribution and integrated safety technology of our portfolio for a high degree of protection consistently supports current trends in drive technology.
9/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200pro Motor Starters
General data
Overview
ET 200pro motor starters in the ET 200pro I/O system
SIMATIC ET 200pro is a modular I/O system in the degree of
protection IP65/66/67 for near-machine, cabinet-free use.
ET 200pro motor starters in the high degree of protection IP65
are an integral part of ET 200pro.
it is possible to achieve safety level SIL 3 (according to

IEC 62061) and PL e (according to ISO 13849-1) with
an appropriate connection.
Safety Solution PROFIsafe (see page 9/13)
With the Safety PROFIsafe modules
F-Switch and
400 V disconnecting module
it is likewise possible to achieve safety level SIL 3 (according to
IEC 62061) and PL e (according to ISO 13849-1).
Functionality
With the ET 200pro motor starters, any AC loads can be
protected and switched.
The ET 200pro motor starters are available both with mechanical
as well as electronic contacts.
The ET 200pro electromechanical starters are offered as directon-line (DSe) and reversing starters (RSe) in the versions
Standard and High-Feature. There are device versions with or
without control for externally fed brakes with 400 V AC.

Only two versions up to 5.5 kW
All settings can be parameterized by bus
Comprehensive diagnostic signals
Support for PROFIenergy
Overload can be acknowledged by remote reset
Current unbalance monitoring
Stall protection
Emergency start function in the event of overload
Current value transmission by bus
Current limit monitoring
Full support of acyclic services
Direct-on-line or reversing starters
Power bus connection can be plugged in using Han Q4/2
plug-in connectors
Motor feeder with Han Q8/0 connector
Conductor cross-sections up to 6 x 4 mm
25 A per segment (power looped through using jumper plug)
In the Standard and High-Feature versions (with 4 DI onBoard)
Electromechanical switching and electronic switching
Electronic starter for direct activation or with integrated soft
starter function
Supplied with 400 V AC brake contact as an option
Provision of the motor current in PROFIenergy format to
higher-level systems, motor current shutdown in dead times
using PROFIenergy
ET 200pro isolator modules (see page 9/9)
The isolator module with switch disconnector function is used for
safe disconnection of the 400 V operational voltage during repair work in the plant and provides an integrated group fusing
function (i.e. additional group short-circuit protection for all
downstream supplied motor starters).
Depending on the power distribution concept, all stations can be
equipped with an isolator module as an option.
Safety applications
Safety Solution local (see page 9/10)
With the Safety local modules
Safety local isolator module and
Compared to the Standard motor starter, the High-Feature

mechanical motor starter also has:
4 digital inputs
Advanced parameterization options
The ET 200pro electronic starters are offered as direct-on-line
starters (sDSSte/sDSte) and reversing starters (sRSSte/sRSte) in
the High-Feature version.
Compared to the High-Feature mechanical motor starter, the
High-Feature electronic motor starter also has:
Soft starting and smooth ramp-down function
Deactivated soft start function as an electronic starter for
applications with a high switching frequency
Advanced parameterization options
As a result of the protection concept with electronic overload
evaluation and the use of SIRIUS controls, size S00, additional
advantages are realized on the Standard and High-Feature
motor starters advantages which soon make themselves positively felt particularly in manufacturing processes with high plant
downtime costs:
Configuration is made easier by the fine modular structure
with ET200pro. When using the ET 200pro motor starters, the
parts list per load feeder is reduced to 2 main items: the bus
module and the motor starter. This makes the ET 200pro ideal
for modular machine concepts or solutions for conveyor systems and in machine-tool construction.
Expansions are easily possible through the subsequent adding of modules. The innovative plug-in technology also does
away with the wiring needed up to now. Through the hot swapping function (disconnection and connection during operation) a motor starter can be replaced within seconds if necessary, without having to shut down the ET 200pro station and
with it the process in the plant. The motor starters are therefore
recommendable in particular for applications with special demands on availability. Storage costs are optimized in addition
by the low level of variance (2 units up to 5.5 kW).
The ordering option for motor starters with a 400 V AC brake output provides the possibility of controlling motors with 400 V AC
brakes. With four locally acting inputs available on the High-Feature motor starter it is possible to realize autonomous special
functions which work independently of the bus and the higherlevel control system, e.g. as a quick stop on gate valve controls
or limit position disconnectors. In parallel with this, the states of
these inputs are signaled to the control system.
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/3
ET 200pro motor starter: Isolator module, Standard starter and

High-Feature starter mounted on a wide module rack
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Technology designation1)
DSe, RSe
DSe, RSe
sDSSte, sDSte,
sRSSte, sRSte

Parameterizable rated operational current
Integrated short-circuit protection
Parameterizable current limit values
--
, 2 limit values
Parameterizable response in case of current limit violation
--
Zero current monitoring
Parameterizable response in case of zero current violation

Parameterizable current unbalance limit
, 30 ... 60 x Ie
--
Parameterizable blocking current limit
--
, 150 ... 1 000 x Ie
Parameterizable blocking time limit
--
, 1 ... 5
Motor blocking monitoring
Current value transmission
Group warning diagnostics
--
Group diagnostics
, parameterizable
Emergency start
Digital inputs
Parameterizable input signal
Parameterizable input level
Parameterizable input signal delay
Parameterizable input signal extension
Parameterizable input control actions
-------
ms
ms
, parameterizable
, 4 inputs
, latching/non-latching
, NC/NO
, 10 ... 80
, 0 ... 200
, 12 different actions
, order option
Brake output (400 V AC)
--, fixed limit value (30 x Ie)
Parameterizable response in case of unbalance limit violation
Parameterizable brake enabling delay
, -2.5 ... 2.5
Parameterizable holding time of the brake during stopping
, 0 ... 25
Parameterizable start-up type
--
Parameterizable ramp-down time
--
Parameterizable starting voltage
--
Parameterizable stopping voltage
--
Local device interface
Firmware update
, by specialists
Thermal motor model
Parameterizable trip class
--, CLASS 10 fixed
, CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20
Parameterizable response in case of overload

of thermal motor model
--
, 3 possible states
Advance warning limit for motor heating
--
, parameterizable 0 ... 95
Advance warning limit time-related trip reserve
--
, parameterizable 0 ... 500
Parameterizable recovery time
min
--
, 1 ... 30
Parameterizable protection against voltage failure
--, permanently integrated
Reversing start function
, order option
Parameterizable interlock time for reversing starters
--, 150 ms fixed
Integrated logbook functions
, 3 device logbooks
Integrated statistics data memory
Parameterizable response in case of CPU / master stop
PROFIenergy profile support

Disconnection of the motor current during idle times
Measured motor current values
Device indications
Group fault
Switching state
Device status
Digital inputs
SF LED (red)
STATE LED (red, yellow, green)
DEVICE LED (red, yellow, green)
-IN 1 ... IN 4, LED
Function available
1)
DS .... direct-on-line starter

RS .... reversing starter
DSS .. direct soft starter
RSS .. reversing soft starter
e ....... electronic motor protection
te ...... full motor protection (thermal + electronic)
s ....... electronic switching with semiconductor.
9/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
, 0 ... 60 s
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
SIMATIC ET 200pro motor starters contribute to energy
efficiency as follows:
Energy management
systems using PROFIenergy
disconnection using PROFIenergy
Current management
With solid-state soft starters, avoidance of current peaks and
therefore reduction of the load on the grid and the mechanical
system
drive systems
Solid-state modules equipped with soft start technology with
bypass contactor, resulting in lower power losses than with
conventional soft starters after start-up
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
ET 200pro motor starters provide the following advantages:

High flexibility thanks to a modular and compact design
Little variance among all motor starter versions
(2 units up to 5.5 kW)
Extensive parameterization using STEP 7 HW Config
Increase of plant availability through fast replacement of units
(easy mounting and plug-in technology)
Extensive diagnostics and information for preventive
maintenance
Parameterizable inputs for local control functions
(High-Feature)
Cabinet-free design thanks to high degree of protection IP65
Product advantages
Type
Standard motor starters High-Feature motor starters

Mechanically switching Mechanically switching Mechanically switching
without inputs
with inputs
with inputs and soft
starter function
DSe, RSe
DSe, RSe
sDSSte, sDSte, sRSSte,

sRSte

max. 8
Motor starters or modules that can be connected to ET 200pro

With width of 110 mm
Direct-on-line starters and reversing starters
mm
110 x 230 x 150

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55, from +40 with derating

-40 ... +70
Vertical, horizontal

Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068, Part 2-6
g/ms
Half-sine 15/11
IP65
Pollution degree
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
1)
110 x 230 x 160

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/5
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Standard motor starters High-Feature motor starters

Mechanically switching Mechanically switching Mechanically switching
without inputs
with inputs
with inputs and soft
starter function
DSe, RSe
DSe, RSe
sDSSte, sDSte, sRSSte,

sRSte
Power consumption at 24 V DC
mA
mA
Approx. 40
Approx. 200
Rated operational current for power bus Ie
25

Approval according to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Approval according to CSA and UL
V AC
V AC
V AC
400 (50/60 Hz)

Up to 400 (50/60 Hz)
Up to 600 (50/60 Hz)
Up to 400 (50/60 Hz)

Up to 480 (50/60 Hz)
Approval
DIN VDE 0106, Part 101
CSA and UL approval
V
V
Up to 400
Up to 600
Up to 480
Up to 480
Incoming power supply
mm2
Max. 6 x 4
Finger-safe
Touch protection
kV
400
A
A
0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 12.0

0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 9.0
AC-4 at 40 C
- At 400 V
0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 4.0
kA
100 at 400 V
Rated operational current for starters Ie

AC-1/2/3 at 40 C
- At 400 V
- At 500 V
Type of coordination acc. to IEC 60947-4-1

Power of three-phase motors at 400 V
kW

Mechanical
Electrical
1)
ms
ms
More information
Notes on safety
Siemens IC 10 2014
Max. 5.5/43)
AC-1, AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
AC-53a4) (max. 9 A with

deactivated soft start
function up to CLASS 10)
400,
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
---
Depending on the current load, motor starting time, and relative ON period
(see manual5))

9/6
Max. 5.5
Operat- 30 million
ing
cycles
Operat- Up to 10 million; depending on the current loading
(see manual5))
ing
cycles

Operating times for 0.85 ... 1.1 x Ue
Closing delay
Opening delay
0.15 ... 2.0/1.5 ... 12.02)
11 ... 50
5 ... 45
---
2)
Note:
If the soft starter control function is deactivated, the permissible rated
operational current is reduced to 9 A up to CLASS 10.
3)
With parameterization as electronic starter max. 4 kW.
4)
8-hour operation.
5)
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The functionality, device functions, and technical specifications
of the Standard motor starter are described in "ET 200pro Motor
Starters, General Data" (see from page 9/3).

Version
DT2) Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Standard motor starters, mechanical

Motor protection: thermal model
DSe direct-on-line starters1)
Without brake output
With brake output 400 V AC
A
A
3RK1304-5@S40-4AA0
3RK1304-5@S40-4AA3
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
A
A
3RK1304-5@S40-5AA0
3RK1304-5@S40-5AA3
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
RSe reversing starters1)

Without brake output
With brake output 400 V AC
Setting range
DSe Standard
0.15 ... 2.0 A

1.5 ... 12.0 A
Additional
price
K
L
None
= Additional price
Only functions when used together with the backplane bus module and the
wide module rack. The backplane bus module and the wide module rack
must be ordered separately (see "Accessories for ET 200pro Motor
Starters" on page 9/18).
2)
Delivery time class A for setting range of rated operational current

0.15 ... 2.0 A
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/7
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The functionality, device functions, and technical specifications
of the High-Feature motor starter are described in "ET 200pro
motor starters, General data" (see from page 9/3).
The High-Feature motor starter differs from the Standard motor

starter in having more parameters and four integrated,
freely-parameterizable digital inputs.

Version
DT
Article No.
A
C
A
A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1304-5@S40-2AA0
3RK1304-5@S40-2AA3
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
3RK1304-5@S40-3AA0
3RK1304-5@S40-3AA3
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
High-Feature motor starters, mechanical

Motor protection: thermal model
DSe direct-on-line starters1)
Without brake output and with 4 inputs
With brake output 400 V AC and 4 inputs
RSe reversing starters1)
Setting range
RSe High-Feature
Additional
price
0.15 ... 2.0 A

1.5 ... 12.0 A
None
K
L
High-Feature motor starters2), electronic

Full motor protection, comprising thermal motor protection and
thermistor motor protection
sDSSte/sDSte direct-on-line starters1)2)
A
C
3RK1304-5@S70-2AA0
3RK1304-5@S70-2AA3
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
A
A
3RK1304-5@S70-3AA0
3RK1304-5@S70-3AA3
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
sRSSte/sRSte reversing starters1)2)

Setting range
sRSSte High-Feature
0.15 ... 2.0 A

1.5 ... 12.0 A
Additional
price
K
L
None
= Additional price
1)
Only functions when used together with the backplane bus module and the
wide module rack. The backplane bus module and the wide module rack
must be ordered separately (see "Accessories for ET 200pro Motor
Starters" on page 9/18).
2)
The solid-state motor starters can be used not only as solid-state motors
starters with a high level of switching frequency but also as fully fledged
soft starters for soft starting and stopping. The changeover from motor
starter to soft starter takes place through reparameterization in HW Config.
Depending on the setting, this results in the following current ranges:
- Parameterization as solid-state motor starter: 0.15 to 2 A and
1.5 to 9 A (4 kW)
- Parameterization as soft starter: 0.15 to 2 A and 1.5 to 12 A (5.5 kW).
9/8
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The isolator module with integrated group fusing function (i.e.
additional group short-circuit protection for all subsequently
supplied motor starters) and switch disconnector function is
used for safe disconnection of the 400 V operational voltage in
the plant.
The following properties apply to the isolator module:

Increase of plant availability through fast replacement of units
(easy mounting and plug-in technology)
Cabinet-free design thanks to high degree of protection IP65
Depending on the power distribution concept, all stations can be

equipped with an isolator module as an option.
The isolator module is available in addition in a safety version

(see page 9/10 "Safety local Isolator Modules").
Type
Isolator modules
General data
IP65
Direct-on-line starters and reversing mm
starters
Touch protection
Finger-safe
Type
Isolator modules
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +70
Any
Vibration resistance acc. to

IEC 60068 Part 2-6
Shock resistance acc. to

IEC 60068 Part 2-27
g/ms Half-sine 15/11
Power consumption
Rated impulse withstand voltage

Uimp
kV
400
A
A
25
25
kA
50 at 400 V
Rated operational current Ie for

starters
AC-1/2/3 at 40 C
- At 400 V
- At 500 V
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacity
mA
Approx. 20
--
Rated operational current Ie for

power bus
25
400
Approvals according to
DIN VDE 0106, Part 101
CSA and UL
V
V
Up to 500
Up to 600
mm2
Max. 6 x 4
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Pollution degree
Type of coordination acc. to

IEC 60947-4-1
Protective separation between
main and auxiliary circuits
400,
acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
Device functions
Group diagnostics
Yes, parameterizable
Device indications
Group fault
SF LED (red)

During operation
During storage
110 x 230 x 170

Version
DT
Article No.
3RK1304-0HS00-6AA0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42D
ET 200pro isolator modules, mechanical

Isolator modules1)
3RK1304-0HS00-6AA0
1)
Only functions when used together with the related 110 mm backplane bus
module and the wide module rack. The backplane bus module and the
wide module rack must be ordered separately (see page 9/18,
"Accessories for ET 200pro Motor Starters").

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/9
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200pro safety motor starters Solutions local/
PROFIsafe Safety modules local
Overview
Safety Solution local
Functionality
With the Safety local modules

Safety local isolator module and
IEC 62061) and PL e (according to ISO 13849-1) with an
appropriate connection.
Safety local isolator module

The Safety local isolator module features the same functions as
a standard isolator module with an additional local safety
function.
The Safety local isolator module contains a 3TK2841 module
and is equipped with M12 terminals for the connection of
external safety components.
Terminals 1 and 2 can be used to connect either 1-channel or
2-channel EMERGENCY-STOP circuits or protective door circuits (IN 1, IN 2).
For monitored starts, an external START switch can be
connected to terminal 3.
The required safety functions can be set using 2 slide switches
located under the left M12 opening.
In the event of an EMERGENCY-STOP, the Safety local isolator
module trips the downstream 400 V disconnecting module. This
safely separates the 400 V circuit up to SIL 3/PL e.
In combination with the 400 V disconnecting module, the Safety
local isolator module can be used for safety applications up to
SIL 3/PL e.
ET 200pro motor starters (Safety Solution local): Safety local isolator

module, disconnecting module, Standard starter and High-Feature
starter mounted on a wide module rack
The 400V disconnecting module can be used together with the

Safety local isolator module for local safety applications and together with the F-Switch for PROFIsafe safety applications.
It contains two contactors connected in series for safety-related

disconnection of the main circuit.
The Safety local isolator module is a repair switch with integrated

safety evaluation functions that can be parameterized using
DIP switches.
It is used for:
Connection of a 1- or 2-channel EMERGENCY-STOP circuit up
to SIL 3/PL e (protective door or EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons) and parameterizable start behavior
For controlling the 400 V disconnecting module by means of a
safety rail signal
The 400 V disconnecting module enables the safe disconnection of an operational voltage of 400 V up to SIL 3/PL e. For
operation in a Safety Solution local application, it functions only
in combination with the Safety local isolator module.
For operation in a Safety PROFIsafe application it functions only
in combination with the F-Switch.
9/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
The auxiliary circuit supply of the device is over a safety power

rail in the backplane bus module.
The 400 V disconnecting module can be used in conjunction
with the Safety local isolator module or with the F-Switch for
safety applications up to SIL 3/PL e.
Siemens AG 2013

Type
110 x 230 x 150
General data
Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
Direct-on-line starters and reversing starters
mm
110 x 230 x 170

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +70
Any
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068, Part 2-6
2g
Half-wave 15 g/11 ms
Power consumption
mA
Approx. 20
--
Rated operational current for power bus Ie
25
400 (50/60 Hz)
Approval to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
Up to 500
CSA and UL approval
mm
Up to 600
2
Max. 6 x 4
IP65
Touch protection
Finger-safe
3, IEC 60664 (IEC 61131)
Pollution degree
kV
400
AC-1/2/3 at 40 C
- At 400 V
- At 500 V
A
A
16
16
kA
50 at 400 V

25
25
400,
acc. to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101
Operating times for 0.85 ... 1.1 x Ue

Closing delay
Opening delay
ms
ms
---
Device functions
Group diagnostics
Yes, parameterizable
Device indications
Group fault
SF LED (red)
25 ... 100
7 ... 10
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/11
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1304-0HS00-7AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1304-0HS00-8AA0
1 unit
42D

Safety local isolator modules1)2)
3RK1304-0HS00-7AA0
400 V disconnecting modules3)4)
3RK1304-0HS00-8AA0
1)
The Safety local isolator module only functions when used together with
the 400 V disconnecting module.
2)
Only in combination with the special backplane bus module for the Safety
local isolator module (see page 9/18, "Accessories for ET 200pro Motor
Starters").
3)
The 400 V disconnecting module functions only when used together with
the Safety local isolator module or with the F-Switch.
4)
the backplane bus module and the wide module rack. The backplane bus
module and the wide module rack must be ordered separately
(see page 9/18, "Accessories for ET 200pro Motor Starters").
9/12
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

ET 200pro Safety motor starters Solutions local/
PROFIsafe Safety modules PROFIsafe
Overview
Safety Solution PROFIsafe
With the Safety PROFIsafe modules

F-Switch and
IEC 62061) and PL e (according to ISO 13849-1) with an
appropriate connection.
See "Safety modules local", Overview page 9/10 and Technical

specifications page 9/11.
F-Switch PROFIsafe
Fail-safe digital inputs/outputs in degrees of protection IP65 to
IP67 for near-machine, cabinet-free use.
Functionality
The PROFIsafe F-Switch is a fail-safe electronic module for
PROFIsafe safety applications. It has two fail-safe inputs and
outputs for safe switching of the 24 V supply over backplane
busbars. In combination with the 400 V disconnecting module,
the fail-safe disconnection of ET 200pro motor starters is
possible in PROFIsafe applications up to SIL 3/PL e.
Fail-safe digital inputs

For the fail-safe reading in of sensor information (1-/2-channel)
Including integrated discrepancy evaluation for 2v2 signals
Internal sensor supplies (incl. testing) available
Fail-safe digital outputs
3 fail-safe PP-switching outputs for safe switching of the
backplane busbars
The F-Switch is certified up to SIL 3 / PL e and has detailed
diagnostics.
It supports PROFIsafe in PROFIBUS configurations as well as in
PROFINET configurations.
Note:
Safety characteristics see Chapter 16, "Appendix"

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1304-0HS00-8AA0
1 unit
42D
6ES7148-4FS00-0AB0
1 unit
241
6ES7194-4DA00-0AA0
1 unit
241
Version
ET 200pro safety modules

400 V disconnecting modules1)2)
3RK1304-0HS00-8AA0
F-Switch PROFIsafe
24 V DC, including bus module
Connection module must be ordered separately
6ES7148-1FS00-0AB0
Connection modules for F-Switch
24 V DC
1)
the Safety local isolator module or with the F-Switch.
2)
the backplane bus module and the wide module rack. The backplane bus
module and the wide module rack must be ordered separately
(see page 9/18, "Accessories for ET 200pro Motor Starters").

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/13
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Infeed on
isolator module
1
RSM
RSM
MS
MS
MS
NSA0_00467a
NSA0_00465a
MS
5 / 6
M
9 Power connection cable for isolator module
Infeed on the RSM isolator module
1 Power feeder plug

3 Power jumper plug
Legend:
4 Motor connection plug
$ Power feeder plug (see page 9/16)
5 Motor plug
% Power connection plug (see page 9/16)
6 Motor plug with EMC suppressor circuit
& Power jumper plug (see page 9/16)

( Motor connection plug (see page 9/16)
7 Power loop-through plug
) Motor plug (see page 9/16)
Basic design of an ET 200pro version with (from the left) connection

module for IM, interface module for communication (IM), RSM isolator
module, two ET 200pro motor starters (MS), and connections for energy
* Motor plug with EMC suppressor circuit (see page 9/16)

+ Power loop-through plug (see page 9/16)
, Power connection cable (see page 9/16)
- Power connection cable for isolator modules (see page 9/16)
. Motor cable (see page 9/17)
Infeed on
ET 200pro motor starter
MS
MS
NSA0_00466a
2 Power connection plug
10
8
Power connection cable
10 Motor cable
Infeed on the ET 200pro motor starter
9/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Power bus
Interruption-free thanks to power terminal connectors
The power supply to the field devices (ET 200pro motor starters,
M200D motor starters) is provided via the power bus, in which
the power T terminal connectors or power double-T terminal
connectors are connected by power bus cables.
In finger-safe connection technology the power T terminal connectors and power double-T terminal connectors connect the
components of a feeder to the power bus. They ensure interruption-free operation, i. e. when the components are plugged in,
the power bus is not interrupted.
Feeders
From the terminal connectors, spur lines with Han Q4/2 plugs
lead to the field devices, from which the motors are supplied with
power via motor connection cables.
11
12
13
14
Power bus line (sold by the meter)

Power T terminal connector
Power double-T terminal connector
Prefabricated power cable
12
14
11
13
13
ET200pro
M200D
IC01_00230
M200D
Motors
Power supply to the motors via the power bus with power T and double-T terminal connectors linked by power bus cables, spur lines to the field devices
(motor starters), and power loop-through connections to the motors via motor connection cables
Motor control via PROFIBUS
Motor control via PROFINET
The interface modules (IM) for PROFIBUS can be combined

with three different connection modules for connecting
PROFIBUS DP and the power supply:
Direct connection with cable glands
ECOFAST connection with hybrid fieldbus cables (with two
copper cores for data transmission with PROFIBUS DP, and
four copper cores for the power supply), and ECOFAST
connectors (HanBrid)1)
M12, 7/8" connection
- with M12 connecting cable and M12 plugs for data
transmission with PROFIBUS DP
- with 7/8" connecting cable and 7/8" plugs for the power
supply2)
The connection modules with the relevant accessories can be

found among the accessories for the ET 200pro interface
module IM 154-4 PN (see page 9/21).
Motor control via Industrial Wireless LAN
As well as wired solutions, communication can also be made via
Industrial Wireless LAN (see interface module
IM 154-6 PN IWLAN, page 9/23).
The connection modules with the relevant accessories can be

found among the accessories for the ET 200pro interface
modules IM 154-1 and IM 154-2 (see page 9/19).
1)
Hybrid fieldbus connections with HanBrid sockets designed as cabinet

bushings transmit data and energy from the control cabinet (IP20) to the
field (IP65). They are the interface for jointly routing PROFIBUS DP and the
auxiliary voltages into the hybrid fieldbus cable (see page 9/75).
2)
On the control cabinet bushings with two M12 sockets for the PROFIBUS
M12 connecting cables, (see page 9/75) the 24 V supply of the motor
starters is implemented via separate 7/8" connecting cables.
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/15
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
B
B
B
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1911-2BS60
3RK1911-2BS20
3RK1911-2BS40
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
B
B
B
3RK1911-2BE50
3RK1911-2BE10
3RK1911-2BE30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
B
B
3RK1911-0DB13
3RK1911-0DB33
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
C
C
3RK1911-0DF13
3RK1911-0DF33
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
3RK1922-2BQ00
1 unit
42D
B
B
3RK1911-2BF50
3RK1911-2BF10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
B
B
3RK1902-0CE00
3RK1902-0CC00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
C
C
3RK1911-2BM21
3RK1911-2BM22
1
1
1 set
1 set
42D
42D
C
C
3RK1911-2BL21
3RK1911-2BL22
1
1
1 set
1 set
42D
42D

$ Power feeder plugs
Connector set for energy supply, e.g. for connecting to
T terminal connectors, comprising a coupling enclosure,
straight outgoing feeder (with bracket), pin insert for
HAN Q4/2, incl. gland
5 male contacts 2.5 mm2
5 male contacts 4 mm2
% Power connection plugs
Connector set for energy supply for connection to
ET 200pro motor starters/ET 200pro isolator modules,
comprising a cable-end connector hood, angular
outgoing feeder, female insert for HAN Q4/2, incl. gland
5 female contacts 2.5 mm2
5 female contacts 4 mm2
5 female contacts 6 mm2
, Power connection cables, assembled at one end
Power connection cable for ET 200pro motor starters,
open at one end, for HAN Q4/2, anglular, insert turned at
isolator module end, 4 x 4 mm2
Length 1.5 m
Length 5.0 m
- Power connection cables for isolator module,
assembled at one end
Power connection cable for ET 200pro isolator modules,
open at one end, for HAN Q4/2, angular, insert turned at
isolator module end, 4 x 4 mm2
Length 1.5 m
Length 5.0 m
Power loop-through on the field device

& Power jumper plugs
+ Power loop-through plugs

Connector set for power loop-through for connection to
ET 200pro motor starters/ET 200pro isolator modules,
comprising a cable-end connector hood, angular
outgoing feeder, pin insert for HAN Q4/2, incl. gland
Motor cables
( Motor connection plugs
Connector set for motor cable for connection to
ET 200pro motor starters, comprising a cable-end
connector hood, angular outgoing feeder, pin insert for
) Motor plugs
Connector set for motor cable for connection to motors,
comprising a cable-end connector hood, straight
outgoing feeder, female insert for HAN 10e, incl. star
jumper, incl. gland
* Motor plugs with EMC suppressor circuit
comprising a cable-end connector hood, straight
outgoing feeder, female insert for HAN 10e with EMC
suppressor circuit, incl. star jumper, incl. gland
9/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Motor cable for motor without brake, for ET 200pro,

4 x 1.5 mm2
Motor cable for motor with brake for ET 200pro,

6 x 1.5 mm2
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1911-0EB31
1 unit
42D
3RK1911-0ED31
1 unit
42D
B
B
3RK1911-2BF01
3RK1911-2BF02
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
3RK1911-2BG02
1 unit
42D
B
B
B
B
B
3RK1911-5BA00
3RK1911-5BA10
3RK1911-5BA20
3RK1911-5BA30
3RK1911-5BA50
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
42D
42D
3RK1902-0CW00
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-0AB00
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-0AJ00
1 unit
42D
B
B
3RK1902-0CK00
3RK1902-0CJ00
1
1 unit
1 10 units
42D
42D
Motor cables (continued)

. Motor cables, assembled at one end
Open at one end, HAN Q8, angular,
length 5 m
Power bus
0 Power T terminal connectors
For 400 V AC, for connection of feeders (e.g. motor
starters) by means of standard round cable at any point
of the power bus, by insulation displacement connection,
used with preassembled bus segments
2.5 mm/4 mm
4 mm/6 mm
1 Power double-T terminal connectors
of the power bus, by insulation displacement connection,
used with preassembled bus segments, connection of
two motor starters possible
4 mm/6 mm
Sealing set (comprising 2 seals)
For power T/power double-T terminal connectors
For power cables with 10 ... 13 mm

Blanking plugs
Further accessories for energy connections
Crimping tools for pins/sockets 4 mm2 and 6 mm2
3RK1902-0CW00
Dismantling tools
For male and female contacts for 9-pole
HAN Q4/2 inserts
HAN Q8 inserts
Sealing caps
For power socket connectors
1 unit per pack
10 units per pack
More connection technology products

can be found at our "Siemens Solution Partners Automation"
under "Distributed Field Installation System" technology:
www.siemens.com/automation/partnerfinder

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/17
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Module racks, wide1)

Length 500 mm
Length 1 000 mm
Length 2 000 mm
A
A
A
Module racks, wide, compact1)

Length 500 mm
Length 1 000 mm
Length 2 000 mm
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7194-4GB00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GD00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD10-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Backplane bus modules 110 mm2)
3RK1922-2BA00
1 unit
42D
Backplane bus modules for Safety local

isolator modules
3RK1922-2BA01
1 unit
42D
Handheld devices
B
For ET 200pro motor starters
(or for ET 200S High-Feature and M200D motor starters)
for local operation. The motor starter-specific serial
interface cables must be ordered separately.
The RS 232 interface cable 3RK1922-2BP00 is used for
the MS ET 200pro.
3RK1922-3BA00
1 unit
42D
RS 232 interface cable

B
Serial data connection between ET 200pro (or M200D)
motor starters and the RS232 interface of a PC/PG/laptop
(with the Motor Starter ES software) or the handheld
device 3RK1922-3BA00.
3RK1922-2BP00
1 unit
42D
1 unit
346
100 10 units
42C
Further accessories
3RK1922-3BA00
USB interface cable, 2.5 m

Serial data connection between ET 200pro (or M200D)
motor starters and the USB interface of a PC/PG/laptop
(with the Motor Starter ES software).
6SL3555-0PA00-2AA0
M12 sealing caps

For sealing unused M12 input
or output sockets
(one set contains ten sealing caps)
3RK1901-1KA00
3RK1901-1KA00
See page 9/19

See page 9/21
Motor control via Industrial Wireless LAN

See page 9/23
Documentation
Manual3)
SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters
1)
The wide module rack can accommodate all ET 200pro motor starters and
any optional modules (isolator module, Safety local isolator module and
400 V disconnecting module).
2)
The backplane bus module is a prerequisite for operation of the ET 200pro

motor starter and the optional module.
3)
9/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
IM 154-1 interface modules

For ET 200pro; for communication between ET 200pro and higher-level masters over
PROFIBUS DP
IM 154-2 High-Feature interface modules

For ET 200pro; for communication between ET 200pro and higher-level masters over
PROFIBUS DP; support of PROFIsafe
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7154-1AA01-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7154-2AA01-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7194-4AA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IM DP Direct connection modules

A
For direct connection of PROFIBUS DP and 24 V power supply to PROFIBUS interface
modules, up to six M20 screwed cable glands
6ES7194-4AC00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7194-4AD00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Length 1.5 m
Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-7BH15
6XV1830-7BH30
6XV1830-7BH50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Length 20 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-7BN10
6XV1830-7BN15
6XV1830-7BN20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 25 m
Length 30 m
Length 35 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-7BN25
6XV1830-7BN30
6XV1830-7BN35
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 40 m
Length 45 m
Length 50 m
A
D
D
6XV1830-7BN40
6XV1830-7BN45
6XV1830-7BN50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 1.5 m
Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
A
A
D
6XV1860-3PH15
6XV1860-3PH30
6XV1860-3PH50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Length 20 m
A
A
A
6XV1860-3PN10
6XV1860-3PN15
6XV1860-3PN20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 25 m
Length 30 m
Length 35 m
A
A
A
6XV1860-3PN25
6XV1860-3PN30
6XV1860-3PN35
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 40 m
Length 45 m
Length 50 m
A
A
A
6XV1860-3PN40
6XV1860-3PN45
6XV1860-3PN50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
A
A
6XV1830-7AN50
6XV1830-7AT10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
B
A
6XV1860-4PN50
6XV1860-4PT10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
A
A
6GK1905-0CA00
6GK1905-0CB00
1
1
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
A
A
6GK1905-0CC00
6GK1905-0CD00
1
1
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
IM 154-1 and IM 154-2 interface modules
Accessories
CM IM DP ECOFAST connection modules
For connection of PROFIBUS DP and 24 V power supply to PROFIBUS interface
modules, two ECOFAST Cu connections
CM IM DP M12 7/8" connection module

for connection of PROFIBUS DP and 24 V power supply to PROFIBUS interface
modules, 2 x M12 and 2 x 7/8"
Accessories for CM IM DP ECOFAST
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cables, assembled

With 2 ECOFAST connectors, trailing cable
With 2 x Cu 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cables GP, assembled

With 2 ECOFAST connectors, trailing cable
With 2 x Cu 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cables, non-assembled

Trailing cable with 2 x Cu 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2
Length 50 m
Length 100 m
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cables GP, non-assembled
Trailing cable with 2 x Cu 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2
Length 50 m
Length 100 m
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid connectors 180
ECOFAST Cu, 2 x Cu, 4 x 1.5 mm2, HANBRID connectors
With pin insert, pack of 5
With female insert, pack of 5
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid connectors, angular
ECOFAST Cu, 2 x Cu, 4 x 1.5 mm2, HANBRID connectors

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/19
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
PROFIBUS trailing cables

Max. acceleration 4 m/s2, at least 3 000 000 bending cycles,
bending radius at least 60 mm, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter,
minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1 000 m
PROFIBUS FC Food bus cables

With PE outer sheath for operation in the food and beverage
industry, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter,
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1830-3EH10
1m
5K2
6XV1830-0GH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC Robust bus cables

With PUR outer sheath for operation in environments exposed to
chemicals and mechanical loads, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter,
6XV1830-0JH10
1m
5K2
Power cables
5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing, sold by the meter,
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-3DH15
6XV1830-3DH20
6XV1830-3DH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-3DH50
6XV1830-3DN10
6XV1830-3DN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH15
6XV1822-5BH20
6XV1822-5BH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH50
6XV1822-5BN10
6XV1822-5BN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1

A
A
6GK1905-0EA00
6GK1905-0EB00
1
1
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
PROFIBUS M12 bus termination plugs

With pin insert
6GK1905-0EC00
5 units
5K2

A
A
6GK1905-0FA00
6GK1905-0FB00
1
1
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
M12 sealing caps

For protection of unused M12 terminals on ET 200pro
3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
7/8" sealing caps

For protection of unused 7/8" terminals on ET 200pro;
pack of 10 units per packing unit
6ES7194-3JA00-0AA0
10 units
250
Narrow, for interface, solid-state and power modules

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
- 2 000 mm, can be cut to size
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GA00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GA60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GA20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Compact, for interface, solid-state and power modules

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GC70-0AA0
6ES7194-4GC60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GC20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Wide, for interface, solid-state, power modules and motor starters

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GB00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Wide, for I/O modules and motor starters

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
- 2 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GD00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD10-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Spare fuses
12.5 A quick, for interface and power modules, pack of 10
6ES7194-4HB00-0AA0
10 units
250

meter; delivery unit max. 1 000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m
6XV1830-0EH10
1m
5K1
IM 154-1 and IM 154-2 interface modules (continued)

Accessories for CM IM DP Direct
Accessories for CM IM DP M12 7/8"

PROFIBUS M12 connecting cables
Preassembled with two M12 plugs, 5-pole
7/8" connecting cables for power supply

5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing, preassembled
with two 7/8" plugs, 5-pole
M12 connectors
For ET 200eco, with axial cable feeder
7/8" connectors
General accessories
ET 200pro module racks
9/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
PROFIBUS hybrid standard cables GP

Standard PROFIBUS hybrid cable with 2 power cores (1.5 mm2) for supplying data
and power to the ET 200pro
Technical product specifications

For CAX applications, one off license
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1860-2R
1m
5K2
6ES7991-0CD01-0YX0
1 unit
2AP

6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230

subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
IM 154-4 PN High-Feature interface modules

A
For communication between ET 200pro and higher-level controller over PROFINET IO;
support of PROFIsafe
6ES7154-4AB10-0AB0
1 unit
250
IM 154-1 and IM 154-2 interface modules (continued)

General accessories (continued)
Accessories
CM IM PN M12 connection modules, 7/8"
For connection of PROFIBUS PN and 24 V power supply to PROFINET interface
modules, 2 x M12 and 2 x 7/8"
6ES7194-4AJ00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IM PN 2xRJ45 connection modules

For connection of PROFINET PN and 24 V power supply to PROFINET interface
modules,
2 x RJ45 and 2 x push-pull power connector
6ES7194-4AF00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IM PN 2xSCRJ FO connection modules

For connection of PROFINET PN and 24 V power supply to PROFINET interface
modules,
2 x SCRJ FO and 2 x push-pull power connector
6ES7194-4AG00-0AA0
1 unit
250
M12 sealing caps

3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
Length 0.3 m
Length 0.5 m
Length 1.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AE30
6XV1870-8AE50
6XV1870-8AH10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AH15
6XV1870-8AH20
6XV1870-8AH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AH50
6XV1870-8AN10
6XV1870-8AN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH15
6XV1822-5BH20
6XV1822-5BH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH50
6XV1822-5BN10
6XV1822-5BN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
7/8" sealing caps

1 pack = 10 units
6ES7194-3JA00-0AA0
10 units
250
Power cables
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
A
A
6GK1905-0FA00
6GK1905-0FB00
1
1
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
More special lengths with 90 or 180 cable feeder
see http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26999294

with two 7/8" plugs, 5-pole, up to max. 50 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
7/8" connectors

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/21
IE M12 connecting cables

Preassembled with two M12 plugs, up to max. 85 m
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
IE FC TP standard cables GP 2 x 2;
sold by the meter, delivery unit max. 1 000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m
IE FC TP trailing cables 2 x 2;
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1840-2AH10
1m
5K1
6XV1840-3AH10
1m
5K1
IE FC TP trailing cables GP 2 x 2;
6XV1870-2D
1m
5K2
IE TP torsion cables GP 2 x 2;
6XV1870-2F
1m
5K2
IE FC TP marine cables 2 x 2;
6XV1840-4AH10
1m
5K1
IE RJ45 Plug PRO

A
RJ45 plug-in connector for field assembly in degree of protection IP65/IP67,
plastic enclosure, insulation displacement method, for SCALANCE X-200IRT PRO and
ET 200pro:
1 pack = 1 unit
6GK1901-1BB10-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
IE SC RJ POF Plug PRO

SC RJ plug-in connector for field assembly for POF fibers in degree of protection
IP65/IP67, plastic enclosure, for SCALANCE X-200IRT PRO and ET 200pro
1 pack = 1 unit
6GK1900-0MB00-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
IE SC RJ PCF Plug PRO

SC RJ plug-in connector for field assembly for PCF fibers in degree of protection
IP65/IP67, plastic enclosure, for SCALANCE X-200IRT PRO
1 pack = 1 unit
6GK1900-0NB00-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
Power Plug PRO

A
5-pole power plug-in connector for field assembly for 2 x 24 V power supply in degree
of protection IP65/IP67, plastic enclosure,
for SCALANCE X-200IRT PRO and ET 200 pro
1 pack = 1 unit
6GK1907-0AB10-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
IE Panel Feedthrough
A
Control cabinet bushing for transition from M12 connection method (D-coded, IP65) to
RJ45 connection method (IP20)
1 pack = 5 units
6GK1901-0DM20-2AA5
5 units
5K2
Push-pull connectors
For 1L+/ 2L+, non-assembled
6GK1907-0AB10-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
Covers for RJ45 push-pull sockets

5 units per pack
6ES7194-4JD50-0AA0
5 units
250

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GA00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GA60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GA20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GC70-0AA0
6ES7194-4GC60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GC20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GB00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
- 2 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GD00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD10-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Spare fuses
12.5 A quick, for interface and power modules,
pack of 10
6ES7194-4HB00-0AA0
10 units
250

6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230

subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
IM 154-4 PN interface modules (continued)
General accessories
9/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
IM 154-6 PN IWLAN interface modules

IM 154-6 PN HF IWLAN interface modules
For communication between ET 200pro and higher-level controllers through industrial
wireless LAN (IWLAN) networks; support of PROFIsafe
With diverse country approvals; see current approvals list
A
With USA country approval
A
6ES7154-6AB00-0AB0
6ES7154-6AB50-0AB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
Antennas with omnidirectional characteristic

Mounting directly on IM 154-6 PN HF IWLAN
ANT IM 154-6 IWLAN; 2 units
6ES7194-4MA00-0AA0
2 units
250
For wall or mast mounting

ANT 792-6MN; N-Connect Female 2.4 GHz bar antenna; 1 unit
ANT 793-6MN; N-Connect Female 5 GHz bar antenna; 1 unit
A
A
6GK5792-6MN00-0AA6
6GK5793-6MN00-0AA6
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5W1
5W1
For operation with the RCoax antenna system

ANT 792-4DN; RCoax N-Connect Female 2.4 GHz; 1 unit
ANT 793-4MN; RCoax N-Connect Female 5 GHz; 1 unit
A
A
6GK5792-4DN00-0AA6
6GK5793-4MN00-0AA6
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5W1
5W1
IWLAN Rcoax antenna cables; N-Connect / R-SMA

Length 1 m
Length 2 m
Length 5 m
Length 10 m
IWLAN terminating resistor, 50, for second R-SMA antenna socket, 3 units
A
A
A
A
A
6XV1875-5CH10
6XV1875-5CH20
6XV1875-5CH50
6XV1875-5CN10
6GK5795-1TR10-0AA6
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
3 unit
5W1
5W1
5W1
5W1
5W1
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH15
6XV1822-5BH20
6XV1822-5BH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH50
6XV1822-5BN10
6XV1822-5BN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Power cables
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
7/8" connectors
For ET 200eco, with axial cable feeder; with female insert, pack of 5
6GK1905-0FB00
5 units
5K2
Length 0.5 m
Length 1 m
Length 2 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-3QE50
6XV1870-3QH10
6XV1870-3QH20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 6 m
Length 10 m
A
A
6XV1870-3QH60
6XV1870-3QN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
Length 0.5 m
Length 1 m
Length 2 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-3RE50
6XV1870-3RH10
6XV1870-3RH20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 6 m
Length 10 m
A
A
6XV1870-3RH60
6XV1870-3RN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
IE FC RJ45 Plug 180

180 cable feeder; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet
interface
1 pack = 1 unit
1 pack = 10 units
A
A
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
1
1
1 unit
10 units
5K1
5K1
IE FC RJ45 Plug 90
90 cable feeder; e.g. for ET 200S
1 pack = 1 unit
1 pack = 10 units
A
A
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
1
1
1 unit
10 units
5K1
5K1
Accessories
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Twisted pair connecting cables 4x2 with RJ45 connectors
Crossed twisted pair connecting cables 4x2 with RJ45 connectors

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/23

5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing, preassembled with two 7/8" plugs,
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7194-4GA00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GA60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GA20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GC70-0AA0
6ES7194-4GC60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GC20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GB00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB60-0AA0
6ES7194-4GB20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250

- 500 mm
- 1 000 mm
- 2 000 mm
A
A
A
6ES7194-4GD00-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD10-0AA0
6ES7194-4GD20-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
250
250
250
Spare fuses, 12.5 A quick

For interface and power modules (pack of 10)
6ES7194-4HB00-0AA0
10 units
250
Labels
20 x 7, pastel turquoise, pack of 340
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
A
A
A
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
230
230
230

6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
1 unit
230

subsequent updates
6ES7998-8XC01-8YE2
1 unit
230
6ES7154-8AB01-0AB0
1 unit
250
MMC 64 Kbyte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 128 Kbyte1)

For program backups
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 512kByte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 MByte1)
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4
For program backups
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 8 MByte1)
For program backups
6ES7953-8LP20-0AA0
1 unit
230
Connection modules
For CPU IM 154-8 PN/DP, with 4 x M12 and 2 x 7/8",
for connection of PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP
6ES7194-4AN00-0AA0
1 unit
250
SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches

With integrated SNMP access, web diagnostics, copper cable diagnostics and
PROFINET diagnostics, SCALANCE X208PRO for configuring line, star and ring
structures, in degree of protection IP65, with eight 10/100 Mbit/s M12 ports,
including eleven M12 dust covers
6GK5208-0HA00-2AA6
1 unit
5N2
A
A
A
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
1
1
1
1 unit
10 units
50 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
IM 154-6 PN IWLAN interface modules (continued)

General accessories
SIMATIC micro memory cards

64 Kbyte
128 Kbyte
512 Kbyte
IM 154-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules

IM 154-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules, V3.2
PROFINET IO controller for operating distributed I/Os on PROFINET, with integrated
PLC functionality
Accessories
MByte1)

RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet, with robust metal enclosure and integrated cutting and clamping contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180 cable feeder
1 unit
10 units
50 units
1)
9/24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.

IE FC TP trailing cables GP 2 x 2; sold by the meter, delivery unit max. 1 000 m;
minimum order quantity 20 m
IE TP torsion cables GP 2 x 2; sold by the meter, delivery unit max. 1 000 m;
A
A
A
A
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect

Stripping tools
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1840-2AH10
6XV1840-3AH10
6XV1840-4AH10
6XV1870-2D
1
1
1
1
1m
1m
1m
1m
5K1
5K1
5K1
5K2
6XV1870-2F
1m
5K2
6GK1901-1GA00
1 unit
5K2
Length 0.3 m
Length 0.5 m
Length 1.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AE30
6XV1870-8AE50
6XV1870-8AH10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AH15
6XV1870-8AH20
6XV1870-8AH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AH50
6XV1870-8AN10
6XV1870-8AN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
PROFINET M12 connecting cables, trailing, preassembled at both ends with M12
plugs, angular (pin)
Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
C
C
C
3RK1902-2NB30
3RK1902-2NB50
3RK1902-2NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
PROFINET M12 connecting cables, trailing, preassembled at one end with M12 plugs,
angular (one end with pin, one end open)
Length 3.0 m
C
Length 5.0 m
C
Length 10 m
C
3RK1902-2HB30
3RK1902-2HB50
3RK1902-2HC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
IM 154-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules (continued)

IE connecting cables M12-180/M12-180

Factory-fitted IE FC TP trailing cables GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) with two
4-pole M12 plugs (4-pole, D-coded), degree of protection IP65/IP67
1 unit
8 units
A
A
6GK1901-0DB20-6AA0
6GK1901-0DB20-6AA8
1
1
1 unit
8 units
5K1
5K1
PROFINET M12 connectors, D-coded, angular
3RK1902-2DA00
1 unit
42D
6GK1901-0DM20-2AA5
5 units
5K2
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH15
6XV1822-5BH20
6XV1822-5BH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH50
6XV1822-5BN10
6XV1822-5BN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
C
C
C
3RK1902-3NB30
3RK1902-3NB50
3RK1902-3NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
Trailing power cables, 5 x 1.5 mm2, preassembled at one end with 7/8" connector with
female insert, angular (one end with socket, one end open)
Length 3.0 m
C
Length 5.0 m
C
Length 10 m
C
3RK1902-3GB30
3RK1902-3GB50
3RK1902-3GC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
Control cabinet bushing for transition from M12 connection method (D-coded,
IP65/IP67) to RJ45 connection method (IP20), 1 pack = 5 units
5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing, preassembled with two 7/8" plugs (axial outgoing feeder),
5-pole, up to max. 50 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Trailing power cables, 5 x 1.5 mm2, preassembled at both ends with 7/8" connectors,
angular (one end with socket, one end with pin)
Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Power cables

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/25
IE FC M12 Plug PRO

PROFINET M12 plug-in connectors, D-coded with quick-connect technology,
axial outgoing feeder
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
7/8" connectors for ET 200eco, with axial cable feeder

Angular, with female insert, 1 unit
Angular with pin insert, 1 unit
7/8" covers, pack of 10
A
A
B
B
A
Twisted pair connecting cables 4 x 2 with RJ45 connectors

Length 0.5 m
Length 1 m
Length 2 m
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6GK1905-0FA00
6GK1905-0FB00
3RK1902-3DA00
3RK1902-3BA00
6ES7194-3JA00-0AA0
1
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
1 unit
1 unit
10 units
5K2
5K2
42D
42D
250
A
A
A
6XV1870-3QE50
6XV1870-3QH10
6XV1870-3QH20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 6 m
Length 10 m
A
A
6XV1870-3QH60
6XV1870-3QN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
Crossed twisted pair connecting cables 4 x 2 with RJ45 connectors

Length 0.5 m
Length 1 m
Length 2 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-3RE50
6XV1870-3RH10
6XV1870-3RH20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 6 m
Length 10 m
A
A
6XV1870-3RH60
6XV1870-3RN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
M12 sealing caps

3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
M12 sealing caps with female thread (5 units)
6ES7194-4JD60-0AA0
5 units
250

Preassembled with two 5-pole M12 plugs/sockets, up to max. 100 m
Length 1.5 m
Length 2 m
Length 3 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-3DH15
6XV1830-3DH20
6XV1830-3DH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
PROFIBUS M12 bus termination plugs, female inserts
PROFIBUS M12 bus termination plugs, pin inserts
M12 plug-in connectors, axial outgoing feeder, with pin insert
A
A
A
6XV1830-3DH50
6XV1830-3DN10
6XV1830-3DN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6GK1905-0ED00
6GK1905-0EC00
6GK1905-0EA00
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
5K2

Standard type with special design for fast installation, 2-core, shielded
Sold by the meter: Delivery unit max. 1 000 m, minimum order quantity 20 m
6XV1830-0EH10
1m
5K1
PROFIBUS FC trailing cables 2-core, shielded

6XV1830-3EH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC food cables 2-core, shielded

6XV1830-0GH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC robust cables 2-core, shielded

6XV1830-0JH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS M12 connectors

5-pole, B-coded, metal enclosure, female insert, 1 pack = 5 units
6GK1905-0EB00
5 units
5K2
IM 154-8 PN/DP CPU interface modules (continued)
9/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
A
A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7154-8FB01-0AB0
6ES7154-8FX00-0AB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
A
A
6ES7833-1FC02-0YA5
6ES7833-1FC02-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
241
241
6ES7833-1FC02-0YE5
1 unit
241
6ES7833-1FA12-0YA5
6ES7833-1FA12-0YH5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
216
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YE5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YK5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YF5
1 unit
216
6ES7833-1FA12-0YY5
1 unit
216
MMC 64 Kbyte2) For program backups
6ES7953-8LF20-0AA0
1 unit
230
6ES7953-8LG20-0AA0
1 unit
230
6ES7953-8LJ30-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 2 Mbyte2) For program backups and/or the firmware update
6ES7953-8LL31-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 4 Mbyte2) For program backups
6ES7953-8LM20-0AA0
1 unit
230
MMC 8 Mbyte2) For program backups
6ES7953-8LP20-0AA0
1 unit
230
Connection modules
For CPU IM 154-8 PN/DP, with 4 x M12 and 2 x 7/8",
for connection of PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP
6ES7194-4AN00-0AA0
1 unit
250
SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches

With integrated SNMP access, web diagnostics, copper cable diagnostics and
PROFINET diagnostics, SCALANCE X208PRO for configuring line, star and
ring structures, in degree of protection IP65, with eight 10/100 Mbit/s M12 ports,
including eleven M12 dust covers
6GK5208-0HA00-2AA6
1 unit
5N2
A
A
6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
1
1
1 unit
10 units
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
1
1
1
1 unit
10 units
50 units
5K1
5K1
5K1
IM 154-8 F PN/DP CPU interface modules

IM 154-8 F PN/DP CPU interface modules, V3.2
Fail-safe PROFINET IO Controller for operating distributed I/Os on PROFINET, with
integrated PLC functionality
512 Kbyte RAM
1.5 Mbyte RAM
ET 200eco
Floating license

ET 200eco
B
A
1)
Distributed Safety V5.4 SP5 und STEP 7 Safety Advanced V12 for parallel use;

integrated cutting and clamping contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC
1 unit
10 units
integrated cutting and clamping contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC
1 unit
10 units
50 units
1)

2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/27
Accessories
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.

IE FC TP trailing cables GP 2 x 2; sold by the meter, delivery unit max. 1 000 m;
IE TP torsion cables GP 2 x 2; sold by the meter, delivery unit max. 1 000 m;
A
A
A
A
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect

Stripping tools
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1840-2AH10
6XV1840-3AH10
6XV1840-4AH10
6XV1870-2D
1
1
1
1
1m
1m
1m
1m
5K1
5K1
5K1
5K2
6XV1870-2F
1m
5K2
6GK1901-1GA00
1 unit
5K2
Length 0.3 m
Length 0.5 m
Length 1.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AE30
6XV1870-8AE50
6XV1870-8AH10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AH15
6XV1870-8AH20
6XV1870-8AH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-8AH50
6XV1870-8AN10
6XV1870-8AN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
PROFINET M12 connecting cables, trailing, preassembled at both ends with M12
plugs, angular (pin)
Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
C
C
C
3RK1902-2NB30
3RK1902-2NB50
3RK1902-2NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
PROFINET M12 connecting cables, trailing, preassembled at one end with M12 plugs,
angular (one end with pin, one end open)
Length 3.0 m
C
Length 5.0 m
C
Length 10 m
C
3RK1902-2HB30
3RK1902-2HB50
3RK1902-2HC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
IM 154-8 F PN/DP CPU interface modules (continued)

IE connecting cables M12-180/M12-180

Factory-fitted IE FC TP trailing cables GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) with two
4-pole M12 plugs (4-pole, D-coded), degree of protection IP65/IP67
IE FC M12 Plug PRO

PROFINET M12 plug-in connectors, D-coded with quick-connect technology,
axial outgoing feeder
1 unit
8 units
A
A
6GK1901-0DB20-6AA0
6GK1901-0DB20-6AA8
1
1
1 unit
8 units
5K1
5K1
PROFINET M12 connectors, D-coded, angular
3RK1902-2DA00
1 unit
42D
6GK1901-0DM20-2AA5
5 units
5K2
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH15
6XV1822-5BH20
6XV1822-5BH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH50
6XV1822-5BN10
6XV1822-5BN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
C
C
C
3RK1902-3NB30
3RK1902-3NB50
3RK1902-3NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
Trailing power cables, 5 x 1.5 mm2, preassembled at one end with 7/8" connector with
female insert, angular (one end with socket, one end open)
Length 3.0 m
C
Length 5.0 m
C
Length 10 m
C
3RK1902-3GB30
3RK1902-3GB50
3RK1902-3GC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
7/8" connectors
Angular, with female insert, 1 unit
Angular with pin insert, 1 unit
A
A
B
B
6GK1905-0FA00
6GK1905-0FB00
3RK1902-3DA00
3RK1902-3BA00
1
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
42D
42D
7/8" covers, pack of 10
6ES7194-3JA00-0AA0
10 units
250
Control cabinet bushing for transition from M12 connection method (D-coded,
IP65/IP67) to RJ45 connection method (IP20), 1 pack = 5 units
5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing, preassembled with two 7/8" plugs (axial outgoing feeder),
5-pole, up to max. 50 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Trailing power cables, 5 x 1.5 mm2, preassembled at both ends with 7/8" connectors,
angular (one end with socket, one end with pin)
Length 3.0 m
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Power cables
9/28
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Length 0.5 m
Length 1 m
Length 2 m
A
A
A
Length 6 m
Length 10 m
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1870-3QE50
6XV1870-3QH10
6XV1870-3QH20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
6XV1870-3QH60
6XV1870-3QN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
Length 0.5 m
Length 1 m
Length 2 m
A
A
A
6XV1870-3RE50
6XV1870-3RH10
6XV1870-3RH20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 6 m
Length 10 m
A
A
6XV1870-3RH60
6XV1870-3RN10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
M12 sealing caps

3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
M12 sealing caps with female thread

5 units
6ES7194-4JD60-0AA0
5 units
250
A
A
A
6XV1830-3DH15
6XV1830-3DH20
6XV1830-3DH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
PROFIBUS M12 bus termination plugs, female inserts
PROFIBUS M12 bus termination plugs, pin inserts
M12 plug-in connectors, axial outgoing feeder, with pin insert
A
A
A
6XV1830-3DH50
6XV1830-3DN10
6XV1830-3DN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
A
A
A
6GK1905-0ED00
6GK1905-0EC00
6GK1905-0EA00
1
1
1
5 units
5 units
5 units
5K2
5K2
5K2

Standard type with special design for fast installation, 2-core, shielded
6XV1830-0EH10
1m
5K1
PROFIBUS FC trailing cables 2-core, shielded

6XV1830-3EH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC food cables 2-core, shielded

6XV1830-0GH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC robust cables 2-core, shielded

6XV1830-0JH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS M12 connectors

5-pole, B-coded, metal enclosure, female insert
1 pack = 5 units
6GK1905-0EB00
5 units
5K2
IM 154-8 F PN/DP CPU interface modules (continued)

Twisted pair connecting cables 4 x 2 with RJ45 connectors

Preassembled with two 5-pole M12 plugs/sockets, up to max. 100 m
Length 1.5 m
Length 2 m
Length 3 m

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/29
Crossed twisted pair connecting cables 4 x 2 with RJ45 connectors
Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
8 DI digital input modules

24 V DC, with module diagnostics, including bus module.
Connection module must be ordered separately.
8 DI High-Feature digital input modules

24 V DC, with channel diagnostics, including bus module
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7141-4BF00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7141-4BF00-0AB0
1 unit
250
16 DI digital input modules

24 V DC, with module diagnostics, including bus module.
6ES7194-4CB50-0AA0 connection modules must be ordered separately.
6ES7141-4BH00-0AA0
1 unit
250
4 DO digital output modules

24 V DC, 2 A, with module diagnostics, including bus module.
6ES7142-4BD00-0AA0
1 unit
250
4 DO High-Feature digital output modules

24 V DC, 2 A, with channel diagnostics, including bus module.
6ES7142-4BD00-0AB0
1 unit
250
8 DO digital output modules

24 V DC, 0.5 A, with module diagnostics, including bus module.
6ES7142-4BF00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Digital input and output modules 4 DI/4 DO

6ES7143-4BF50-0AA0
1 unit
250
Digital input and output modules 4 DI/4 DO

6ES7143-4BF00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7194-4CA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IO 4 x M12 Invers connection modules

A
4 M12 sockets for connection of digital actuators to ET 200pro
(4 DO and 4 DO HF); 2 x M12 with single assignment, 2 x M12 with double assignment
6ES7194-4CA50-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IO 4 x M12 P connection modules

4 M12 sockets for connection of digital sensors or actuators to ET 200pro;
plastic version
6ES7194-4CA10-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IO 8 x M12 connection modules

8 M12 sockets for connection of digital sensors or actuators to ET 200pro
6ES7194-4CB00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IO 8 x M12 P connection modules

8 M12 sockets for connection of digital sensors or actuators to ET 200pro;
plastic version
6ES7194-4CB10-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM IO 8 x M12D connection modules

6ES7194-4CB50-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7194-4EB00-0AA0
1 unit
250

2 M12 8-pole sockets; to be used with: EM 8 DI 24 V DC and 8 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A
6ES7194-4FB00-0AA0
1 unit
250

1 M23 socket, to be used with: EM 8 DI 24 V DC and
8 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A
6ES7194-4FA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Module labeling plates

For color coding of CM IOs in the colors white, red, blue and green; pack of 100
6ES7194-4HA00-0AA0
400 unit
250
M12 sealing caps

3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
Labels
20 x 7, pastel turquoise, pack of 340
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B

For double connection of sensors with a single cable, 5-pole;
cannot be used for F-DI4/8
6ES7194-1KA01-0XA0
1 unit
250
M12 Y-cables
For double connection of I/Os with a single cable to ET 200, 5-pole
6ES7194-6KA00-0XA0
1 unit
250
M8 sealing caps
For IP67 modules
3RK1901-1PN00
100
10 units
42C
4AI U analog input modules

High-Feature, 10 V; 5 V; 0 ... 10 V; 1 ... 5 V, channel diagnostics, including bus
module. Connection module must be ordered separately.
6ES7144-4FF00-0AB0
1 unit
250
4AI I analog input modules

High-Feature, 20 mA; 0 ... 20 mA; 4 ... 20 mA, channel diagnostics, including bus
6ES7144-4GF00-0AB0
1 unit
250
Digital expansion modules
Accessories

4 M12 sockets for connection of digital or analog sensors of actuators to ET 200pro
Analog expansion modules
9/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
4AI RTD analog input modules

High-Feature; resistors: 150, 300, 600 and 3 000 ; resistance thermometers: Pt100,
Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500 and Ni1000; channel diagnostics,
including bus module. Connection module must be ordered separately.
4AI TC analog input modules

High-Feature; thermocouples: Type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T; voltage measurement:
80 mV ; channel diagnostics, including bus module. Connection module must be
ordered separately.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7144-4JF00-0AB0
1 unit
250
6ES7144-4PF00-0AB0
1 unit
250
4AO U analog output modules

High-Feature, 10 V; 0 ... 10 V; 1 ... 5 V, channel diagnostics, including bus module.
6ES7145-4FF00-0AB0
1 unit
250
4AO I analog output modules

High-Feature, 20 mA; 0 ... 20 mA; 4 ... 20 mA, channel diagnostics, including bus
6ES7145-4GF00-0AB0
1 unit
250

4 M12 sockets for connection of digital or analog sensors of actuators to ET 200pro
6ES7194-4CA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
M12 compensation plugs

With integrated Pt100 for reference point compensation when connection
thermocouples
6ES7194-4AB00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Module labeling plates

For color coding of CM IOs in the colors white, red, blue and green; pack of 100
6ES7194-4HA00-0AA0
1 400 units
250
M12 sealing caps

3RX9802-0AA00
8/16 F-DI PROFIsafe fail-safe digital input modules

24 V DC, including bus module. Connection module must be ordered separately.
4/8 F-DI, 4 F-DO 2 A fail-safe digital input/output modules

24 V DC, including bus module. Connection module must be ordered separately.
F-Switch PROFIsafe fail-safe solid-state modules
Three fail-safe PP-switching outputs for safe switching of the backplane busbars
(2L+, F0, F1); two fail-safe digital inputs, 45 mm; usable up to Cat. 4 (EN 954)/SIL3
(IEC 61508)
Analog expansion modules (continued)
Accessories
100
10 units
42C
6ES7148-4FA00-0AB0
1 unit
241
6ES7148-4FC00-0AB0
1 unit
241
6ES7148-4FS00-0AB0
1 unit
241
Connection modules
For F-Switch PROFIsafe fail-safe solid-state modules
6ES7194-4DA00-0AA0
1 unit
241
Connection modules
For the 4/8 F-DI/4 -DO, 24 V DC/2 A fail-safe solid-state module
6ES7194-4DC00-0AA0
1 unit
241
Connection modules
For the 8/16 F-DI, 24 V DC/2 A fail-safe solid-state module
6ES7194-4DD00-0AA0
1 unit
241
PROFIBUS DP IM 154-2 interface modules

6ES7154-2AA01-0AB0
1 unit
250
PROFINET IM 154-4 PN interface modules

6ES7154-4AB10-0AB0
1 unit
250
M12 sealing caps

3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
6ES7148-4CA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Accessories
PM-E power modules

PM-E power modules 24 V DC
A
For resupply and group formation of the 24 V DC load voltage for solid-state modules
within an ET 200pro station.
Accessories
CM PM-E ECOFAST connection modules
For resupply of 24 V load voltage,
one ECOFAST Cu terminal
6ES7194-4BA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM PM-E Direct connection modules

For resupply of 24 V load voltage,
up to two M20 screwed cable glands
6ES7194-4BC00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM PM-E 7/8" connection modules

For resupply of 24 V load voltage, 1 x 7/8"
6ES7194-4BD00-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM PM-E PP connection modules

For resupply of 24 V load voltage, 2 x push-pull, with spare fuse
6ES7194-4BE00-0AA0
1 unit
250
Spare fuses
12.5 A quick, for interface and power modules,
pack of 10
6ES7194-4HB00-0AA0
10 units
250

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/31
Fail-safe digital expansion modules
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
A
A
Length 1.5 m
Length 3 m
Length 5 m
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1830-7AN50
6XV1830-7AT10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
A
A
A
6XV1830-7BH15
6XV1830-7BH30
6XV1830-7BH50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Length 20 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-7BN10
6XV1830-7BN15
6XV1830-7BN20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 25 m
Length 30 m
Length 35 m
A
A
A
6XV1830-7BN25
6XV1830-7BN30
6XV1830-7BN35
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 40 m
Length 45 m
Length 50 m
A
D
D
6XV1830-7BN40
6XV1830-7BN45
6XV1830-7BN50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
B
A
6XV1860-4PN50
6XV1860-4PT10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
Length 1.5 m
Length 3 m
Length 5 m
A
A
D
6XV1860-3PH15
6XV1860-3PH30
6XV1860-3PH50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
Length 20 m
A
A
A
6XV1860-3PN10
6XV1860-3PN15
6XV1860-3PN20
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 25 m
Length 30 m
Length 35 m
A
A
A
6XV1860-3PN25
6XV1860-3PN30
6XV1860-3PN35
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
Length 40 m
Length 45 m
Length 50 m
A
A
A
6XV1860-3PN40
6XV1860-3PN45
6XV1860-3PN50
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K2
5K2
5K2
ECOFAST plug connectors, can be preassembled

Sockets; Order unit 5 units
6GK1905-0CB00
5 units
5K2
PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid plugs, angular

With 2 x Cu shielded and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2;
5 units; with mounting instructions; female insert
6GK1905-0CD00
5 units
5K2
6GK1907-0AB10-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
Covers for push-pull sockets

5 units
6ES7194-4JA50-0AA0
5 units
250
PM-E power modules (continued)

PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cables copper
Trailing cables (PUR sheath) with two copper conductors, shielded, for PROFIBUS DP
and four copper cores with 1.5 mm2
Non-assembled
Length 50 m
Length 100 m
Assembled
With ECOFAST plug and socket
PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable GP

Trailing cable with 4 x Cu and 2 x Cu, shielded with UL approval
Non-assembled
Length 50 m
Length 100 m
Assembled
With ECOFAST plug and socket
9/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Length 1.5 m
Length 2.0 m
Length 3.0 m
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH15
6XV1822-5BH20
6XV1822-5BH30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
Length 5.0 m
Length 10 m
Length 15 m
A
A
A
6XV1822-5BH50
6XV1822-5BN10
6XV1822-5BN15
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
7/8" connectors
with axial cable feeder
6GK1905-0FB00
5 units
5K2
6ES7148-4CA60-0AA0
1 unit
250
CM PM-O PP connection modules

For tapping 24 V load voltage and solid-state/sensor supply voltage, 2 x push-pull
plug-in connectors
6ES7194-4BH00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6GK1907-0AB10-6AA0
1 unit
5K2
Covers for push-pull sockets

5 units
6ES7194-4JA50-0AA0
5 units
250
6ES7148-4EA00-0AA0
1 unit
250
6ES7148-4EB00-0AA0
1 unit
250
PM-E power modules (continued)

Accessories for CM PM-E Direct
Power cables
Accessories for CM PM-E 7/8"

with two 7/8" plugs, 5-pole
PM-O power module outputs

PM-O power modules 2 x 24 V DC
For tapping the 24 V load voltage 2L+ and the solid-state/sensor supply voltage 1L+
within an ET 200pro station.
Accessories
Available from the company Festo,

"External Partners"
SIMATIC RF170C
A
6GT2002-0HD00
1 unit
572
6GT2002-1HD00
1 unit
572
A
A
6GT2091-4FH20
6GT2091-4FH50
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
572
572
6GT2691-4FH20
1 unit
572
A
A
A
A
A
A
6GT2891-4FH20
6GT2091-4FH50
6GT2891-4FN10
6GT2891-4FN20
6GT2891-4FN50
6GT2891-4JH20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
572
572
572
572
572
572
M12 sealing caps for unused reader connections

Minimum order quantity 10 units, price per 100 units
3RX9802-0AA00
100
10 units
42C
DVD "RFID Systems Software & Documentation"
6GT2080-2AA20
1 unit
572
SIMATIC RF170C communication modules

For connection of SIMATIC Ident systems to ET 200pro. The readers (SLGs) of all
RFID systems and the MV400 code reading systems can be operated on
SIMATIC RF170C.
Accessories
Connection blocks for SIMATIC RF170C
For connecting 2 readers through M12 plug-in connectors
Reader cables for MOBY U
Material PUR, CMG approval, trailing
Length 2 m
Length 5 m
Reader cables for MOBY D
Material PUR, CMG approval, trailing, 2 m
Reader cables for SIMATIC RF200/RF300/RF600/MV400
or MOBY U/D extension cable and SIMATIC RF200/RF300/RF600/MV400,
material PUR, CMG approval, trailing, straight connector
Length 2 m
Length 5 m
Length 10m
Length 20 m
Length 50 m
Length 2 m, plug angular at the reader

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/33
ET 200pro pneumatic interfaces

EM 148-P pneumatic interfaces
DO 16 x P/CPV 10 for direct connection of the FESTO valve terminals
CPV 10 16 DO x P
DO 16 x P/CPV 14 for direct connection of the FESTO valve terminals
CPV 14 16 DO x P
FESTO valve terminals CPV 10
FESTO valve terminals CPV 14
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200pro PS

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ES7148-4PC00-0HA0
1 unit
589
B
B
3RK1911-2BE30
3RK1911-2BF10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
3RK1902-0CK00
1 unit
42D

SIMATIC ET 200pro PS
Stabilized power supply in the construction and design of the distributed I/O system,
with the option of looping the power to other modules; with degree of protection IP67
Input: 3 AC 400-480 V
Output: 24 V DC/8 A
Accessories
Power connection plugs
For connection to the distributed I/O system
For X1 (6 mm2)
For X2 (6 mm2)
Sealing caps
For 9-pole power socket connectors
X2 (pack of 10)
9/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
DT
Article No.
ET 200pro FC standard frequency converters
ET 200pro FC frequency converters with integrated safety functions
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6SL3235-0TE21-1RB0
1 unit
337
6SL3235-0TE21-1SB0
1 unit
337
6SL3260-2TA00-0AA0
1 unit
337
B
B
B
3RK1911-2BE50
3RK1911-2BE10
3RK1911-2BE30
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D

3 AC 380 ... 480 V, +10 %/-10 %
47 ... 63 Hz
Overload:
150 %, 60 s,
200 %, 3 s
Rating:
1.1 kW (0 ... 55 C)
1.5 kW (0 ... 45 C)
Accessories for ET 200pro FC frequency converters

Backplane bus modules for accommodating the frequency converter
Connector set for energy supply, HAN Q4/2
2.5 mm
4.0 mm
6.0 mm
Motor cables preassembled at one end
for motors with brake and temperature sensor with HAN Q8 connector, shielded
Cross-section 1 mm
Length 1.5 m
Length 3 m
Length 5 m
Length 10 m
ZKT: 70018601000150
ZKT: 70018601000300
ZKT: 70018601000500
ZKT: 70018601001000
ZKT: Available from the company
KnorrTec
"External Partners"
Cross-section 1.5 mm
Length 1.5 m
Length 3 m
Length 5 m
Length 10 m
HTG: 61 88 201 0288

HTG: 61 88 201 0289
HTG: 61 88 201 0290
HTG: 61 88 201 0299
HTG: Available from the company

Harting
"External Partners"
More connection technology products can be found at our

"Siemens Solution Partners Automation" under
"Distributed Field Installation System" technology:
Frequency converter plugs
For motor cable, shielded, HAN Q8
6ES7194-1AB01-0XA0
1 unit
2AP
Power jumper plugs

For 400 V power loop-through connection to the following 400 V modules
3RK1922-2BQ00
1 unit
42D
USB interface cable

For communication with a PC (length 2.5 m)
6SL3555-0PA00-2AA0
1 unit
346
3RK1922-2BP00
1 unit
42D
6SL3255-0AA00-4HA0
1 unit
343
Memory card (MMC)

B
For the ET 200pro FC parameter settings.
If required there is space on the memory card (MMC) for the complete parameterization of the frequency converter. For service purposes the system is immediately ready
for use after replacement of the frequency converter and acceptance of the memory
card.
6SL3054-4AG00-0AA0
1 unit
753
RS232 interface cable

B
For parameterization of the converter with the STARTER tool via a direct point-to-point
connection
IOP Handheld
For use with SINAMICS G120, SINAMICS G120C, SINAMICS G110D,
SINAMICS G120D or SIMATIC ET 200pro FC
IOP
Handheld enclosure
Batteries (4 AA)
Charger (international)
RS 232 connection cable (length 3 m, for SINAMICS G120 only)
USB cable (length 1 m)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/35
Siemens AG 2013

ET 200pro software
Motor Starter ES, block library for PCS 7
Overview
Motor Starter ES

motor starters in the SIMATIC ET 200pro, SIMATIC ET 200S and
SIRIUS M200D product families.
with SIRIUS".

ET 200S and ET 200pro motor starters can be easily and simply
integrated into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
The SIRIUS motor starter PCS 7 block library contains the diagnostics and driver blocks corresponding to the SIMATIC PCS 7
diagnostics and driver concept as well as the elements (symbols
and faceplates) required for operator control and process
monitoring.
Detailed information about the SIRIUS Motor Starter block library

for SIMATIC PCS 7 see Chapter 14 "Parameterization,
Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS".
9/36
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS M200D Motor Starters
General data
Overview
Basic functionality
SIRIUS M200D AS-i Basic motor starters with manual local operation
The intelligent, highly flexible SIRIUS M200D motor starters for

distributed configurations are designed to start, monitor and
protect motors and loads up to 5.5 kW.
The M200D motor starters are available in four versions:
M200D
M200D
M200D
M200D
AS-i Basic
AS-i Standard
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Motor control with

AS-i communication
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Mechanical or electronic switching
Electronic switching with soft starter functionality

-
All M200D motor starter versions have the following functions:

Available as direct-on-line and reversing starters in a rugged
design
Electromechanical or electronic switching version
Little variance only 2 device versions up to 5.5 kW thanks to
wide range setting
All versions have the same enclosure dimensions
Quick and fail-safe wiring of system and motor cables using
ISO 23570 plug-in connector technology (Q4/2 and Q8/0)
Robust and widely used M12 connection method for digital
inputs and outputs
Integrated feeder connector monitoring
Full motor protection through overload protection and a
temperature sensor (PTC, TC)
Short-circuit and overload protection integrated
Integrated repair switch lockable with 3 locks
(multi-level service)
Uniform wiring to the G110D/G120D frequency inverters and
to the ET200pro distributed peripherals system
Extensive diagnostics concept using LEDs
Optional integrated manual local control with key-operated
switch (ordering option)
Optionally available brake actuation with voltages from
180 V DC (no rectifier needed in motor) or 230/400 V AC
(order versions)
Function available
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
M200D motor starters contribute to energy efficiency as follows:
Energy management
systems using PROFIenergy (see "PROFINET M200D Motor
disconnection using PROFIenergy (see "PROFINET M200D
Motor Starters", page 9/46)
Current management
With solid-state soft starters, avoidance of current peaks and
therefore reduction of the load on the grid and the mechanical
system
drive systems
Solid-state modules equipped with soft start technology with
bypass contactor, resulting in lower power losses than with
conventional soft starters after start-up
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/37
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Product advantages
M200D motor starters provide the following advantages for
customers:
High plant availability through plug-in capability of the main
circuit, communication and IOs relevant for installing and
replacing devices
Cabinet-free construction and near-motor installation thanks
to the high degree of protection IP65
The motor starters record the actual current flow for the parameterizable electronic motor overload protection. Reliable
messages concerning the overshooting or undershooting of
setpoint values for comprehensive motor protection. All motor
protection functions can be defined by simple parameterization
Low stock levels and low order costs through a wide setting
range for the current or a wide setting range for the electronic
motor protection of 1:10 (only 2 device versions up to 5.5 kW)
The integrated wide range for the current enables a single
device to cover numerous standard motors of different sizes
Comprehensive offering of accessories, including readyassembled cables

The M200D motor starters can be installed with a few manual
steps. The integrated plug-in technology enables far lower
wiring outlay:
preassembled cables can be plugged directly onto the motor
starter module
Easy and user-friendly installation because all versions have
the same enclosure dimensions
Fast and user-friendly commissioning using optional manual
local operation
Increase of process speed through integrated functions such
as "Quick Stop" and "Disable Quick Stop", e.g. at points and
crossings
Optional manual local control with momentary-contact and
latching operation for easier start-up and easier servicing
Application
The high degree of protection IP65 makes the M200D motor
starters suitable in particular for use on extensive conveying systems such as are found in mail sorting centers, airports, automotive factories and the packing industry.
For simple operating mechanism tasks, particularly in conveyor

applications, the new SINAMICS G110D frequency inverter
series with a performance range from 0.75 kW to 7.5 kW and
degree of protection IP65 is the ideal partner for the M200D
motor starters.
9/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
The SINAMICS G110D frequency inverters permit continuous

speed control of three-phase asynchronous motors and meet
the requirements of conveyor applications with frequency
control (for more information see Catalog D 31).
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
SIRIUS M200D AS-i Basic

Functionality
Easy and fast on-site start-up through parameterization of local setting knobs (DIP switches) and rotary coding switches
for adjusting the rated operational current. The rotary coding
switch has an OFF position for deactivating the overload protection with the help of the thermal motor model when using a
temperature sensor.
Communications
AS-i communication with A/B addressing according to
Spec V2.1
The AS-i bus is connected cost-effectively using an M12 connection on the device. Of the 4 digital inputs, 2 are contained
in the process image and can therefore be used in the PLC
program. The other 2 inputs are locally effective and permanently assigned with functions.
The LEDs can provide comprehensive diagnostics of the
device on the spot. In addition to diagnostics using the PAE
process image, the device can create up to 15 different diagnostic signals per slave. The message with the highest priority
can be read out through the AS-i communication. This is yet
another new development which distinguishes the M200D
AS-i Basic motor starter from the rest of the market and adds
innovative technology, maximum availability and transparency
to the system.
SIRIUS M200D AS-i Standard
The intelligent, highly flexible M200D AS-i Standard motor
starters in A/B technology are designed to start and protect motors and loads up to 5.5 kW. They are available in direct-on-line
or reversing starter versions, in a mechanical version and also
an electronic version (the latter with soft start function).
The M200D AS-i Standard motor starter is the most functional
member of the SIRIUS motor starter family in the high degree of
protection IP65 for AS-i communication. Consistency with other
products of the SIRIUS M200D motor starter range and with the
frequency converter and ET200pro I/O system is assured.
Functionality
AS-i communication with A/B addressing according to
Spec 3.0
Electronic version also with soft start function
AS-i slave profile 7AE/7A5 with process image 6E/4A
Full TIA integration: All digital inputs and outputs exist in the
cyclic process image and are visible through AS-i, providing
maximum flexibility and best adaptability to the application.
Additionally expanded diagnostics using data record through
AS-i bus
Complete plant monitoring using statistics data record and
current value monitoring by means of data records
Parameterization through AS-i bus with the help of data records or an expanded process image from the user program
Control of the motor starter using a command data record from
the user program
Flexible assignment of the digital inputs and outputs with all
available assignable input actions
Parameterization using Motor Starter ES at the local interface
(ordering option for start-up software)
Diagnostics with the help of Motor Starter ES (ordering option
for start-up software)
Mounting and installation

The M200D motor starters can be installed with a few manual
steps. The integrated plug-in technology enables far lower wiring outlay. Connecting cables can be plugged directly onto the
motor starter module. Swapping of the connecting wires and
malfunctions within the plant are prevented by preassembled
cables. The AS-i bus is connected cost-effectively using an M12
connection on the device. All versions have identical enclosure
dimensions for easier system design and conversion.
The particularly robust M200D AS-i Standard motor starter is
characterized by numerous functions which can be flexibly
parameterized. It enables highly flexible parameterization
through the AS-i bus using data records from the user program
as well as user-friendly local parameterization using the
Motor Starter ES start-up software through the local
point-to-point interface.
Functions can be flexibly assigned to the digital inputs and outputs, adapting them to all possible conveyor applications. All
motor protection functions, limit values and reactions can be defined by parameterization. The AS-i Standard is unique. In its
6E/4A process image the motor starter sends all 4 digital inputs
and the digital output via the process image to the PLC in cyclic
mode. System configuration and system documentation are facilitated not least by a number of CAX data.
Operation
The new motor starter generation is characterized by high functionality, maximum flexibility and the highest level of automation.
All digital inputs and outputs exist in the cyclic process image.
All limit values for monitoring functions and their reactions are
parameterizable and therefore adaptable to the application. The
motor starters record the actual current flow. Evaluating the current of the parameterizable solid-state overload protection increases the availability of the drives, as do reliable messages
concerning the overshooting or undershooting of setpoint values.
Diagnostics and maintenance
The M200D sets new standards for diagnostics. In addition to
diagnostics using the PAE process image and diagnostics by
"parameter echo" (up to 15 different diagnostic signals per slave
can be read out via AS-i communication), the possibility of
reading out diagnostic data records is unique on the market.
The AS-i Standard is recommended in particular for expansive
and highly automated system components because the possibility of monitoring devices and systems with data records (statistical data, measured values and device diagnostics) provides
an in-depth view of the plant from the control room, guaranteeing
the monitoring process and increasing plant availability.
The integrated maintenance timer can be used to implement
preventative maintenance and avoid plant downtimes through
look-ahead servicing.
Local control of a drive is possible using the ordering option with
integrated manual operation. This is yet another new development which distinguishes the M200D AS-i Standard motor starter
from the rest of the market and adds innovative technology,
maximum availability and transparency to the plant.
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/39
For motor control using AS-Interface there are the following

M200D motor starter versions: SIRIUS M200D AS-i Basic and
SIRIUS M200D AS-i Standard (basic functionality see page 9/37
"SIRIUS M200D Motor Starters" "General Data"
"Overview").
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS M200D
SIRIUS M200D
AS-i Basic
AS-i Standard

Slave on the bus
Fieldbus
AS-i
Slave type
A/B acc. to Spec 2.1
Profile
7.A.E
7.A.E & 7.A.5
Number of assigned AS-i addresses on the bus
Number of stations per AS-i master
Max. 62 devices
Max. 31 devices
AS-i master profile
M3 and higher
M4 and higher
Parameterization
DIP switches
--
Potentiometer for rated operational current
--
Motor Starter ES
--
Data records through AS-i
--
Diagnostics
Diagnostics through parameter channel
--
Expanded process image PAE 4 bytes
--
4E/3A
6E/4A
Process image
Process image
Data channels
Local optical interface (manual local)
AS-i bus
Motor Starter ES through local interface
--
Motor Starter ES through bus
--
Data records1) (acyclic)

Parameterization
--
Diagnostics
--
Measured values
--
Statistics
--
Commands
--
Inputs
4
Number
Of these in the process image
2 through AS-i
4 through AS-i
Input action
Permanently assigned functions, see manual2)
Parameterizable: flexible
Quick Stop
Permanent function: latching, edge-triggered
Parameterizable function: latching (edgetriggered), non-latching (level-triggered)
Outputs
Number
Output action
Permanent function: assigned with group fault
Parameterizable: function, see manual3)
Brake output
180 V DC / 230/400 V AC / none
Motor protection
Overload protection
Electronic, wide range 1:10
Temperature sensor
Parameterizable using DIP switches:

PTC or Thermoclick or deactivated
Function available
1)
The data records are a reduced selection compared with

PROFIBUS/PROFINET.
3) http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38722160
2)
9/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
Parameterizable using Motor Starter ES, data

record: PTC or Thermoclick or deactivated
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS M200D
SIRIUS M200D
AS-i Basic
AS-i Standard

Device functions
Repair switch
Current limit monitoring bottom
--
Current limit monitoring top
--
Parameterizable
Permanent function: disconnection, less than

18.75 % of the rated operational current Ie
Parameterizable
Blocking current
Permanent function: starting up of the motor:

Parameterizable
tripping limit up to 800 % of the rated operational
current Ie for 10 s
Parameterizable
Active operation: threshold for tripping "blocking

current" up to 400 % of the rated operational
current Ie
Unbalance
Permanent function: up to 30 % of the rated

operational current Ie (only mechanical MS)
Parameterizable
Parameterizable: 1- and 3-phase
Load type
Permanent function: 3-phase
Shutdown class
Parameterizable using DIP switches:

CLASS 10/deactivated
Parameterizable: activated/deactivated
Soft start function
--
Only solid-state version
Bypass function
--
Parameterizable using Motor Starter ES, data

record: CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20
Function available
Application
The M200D AS-i standard is particularly suitable for highly automated applications in conveyor systems, which require that devices and systems be monitored to prevent or limit plant downtime. The option of planning the functions of the motor starter or
its interfaces also makes fine-adjustment to the function of the
motor starter in the application possible and hence provides for
extreme flexibility.
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/41
Siemens AG 2013

Type
M200D motor starters
AS-i Basic
electromechanical
switching
AS-i Basic
electronic
switching
AS-i Standard
electromechanical
switching
AS-i Standard
electronic
switching
DSte / RSte
sDSte / sRSte
DSte / RSte
sDSSte / sRSSte
3 220 / 3 420
2 880 / 3 130
3 220 / 3 420
15 (direct-on-line)/
175 (reversing)
75 (reversing)
155
175 (reversing)
75 (reversing)
5.5
5.5
480 (50/60 Hz)

--
600 (50/60 Hz)

0.15 ... 2 / 1.5 ... 12
0.15 ... 2 /1.5 ... 9
--
480 (50/60 Hz)

-0.15 ... 2 / 1.5 ... 12
0.15 ... 2 /1.5 ... 9

mm
294 x 215 x 159

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +70
Weight
2 880 / 3 130
Vertical, horizontal, lying

Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-6
Shock resistance
Without influencing the contact position
g/ms
g/ms
12/11 half-sine
9.8/5 or 5.9/10
Degree of protection according to IEC 529
IP65
Up to 1 000 m
Up to 2 000 m
No derating
1 % per 100 m
Cooling
Convection
Protection class IEC 536 (VDE 0106-1)
Control circuit
Operational voltage UAs-i
V DC
26.5 ... 31.6
Control supply voltage Uaux
V DC
20.4 ... 28.8
Power consumption from AS-i (incl. 200 mA sensor supply) mA
< 300
Power consumption from Uaux (without digital output)

Max.
mA
155
Typ.
mA
75
Maximum power of three-phase motors at 400 V AC
kW
5.5

Approval acc. to EN 60947-1
Approval acc. to UL and CSA
Rated operational current range
Rated operational current range for soft start
Rated operational current range for direct start
V AC
V AC
A
A
A
400 (50/60 Hz)

600 (50/60 Hz)
0.15 ... 2 / 1.5 ... 12
---
Rated operational current for starters Ie at 400 V AC

400 V at AC-1 / 2 / 3
500 V at AC-1 / 2 / 3
400 V at AC-4
400 V at AC-53a
A
A
A
A
12
9
4
--
---9
12
9
4
--
---12 for soft starting

9 for direct-on-line
starting
Oper- 30 million
ating
cycles
--
30 million
--
75
Main circuit
Mechanical endurance of contactor
Trip class
CLASS 10
1 (2 for device
version 2A)
See manual3)4)
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Iq

At 400 V AC
At 500 V AC
kA
kA
At Iemax = 2 A
At Iemax = 9 /12 A
CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20
50
502)
1 (2 for device
version 2A)
202)
50
202)
Integrated, 2 x13 Ie = 26 A
Brake actuation (option)

Operational voltage
230/400 AC or 180 DC
< 0.5 at 230/400 V AC, < 0.8 at 180 V DC
1)

2)
Only systems with grounded neutral point permitted.
3)
9/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
Yes, 1 A melting fuse

4)
Siemens AG 2013

M200D Basic motor starters
M200D AS-i Basic without manual local operation

Version
M200D AS-i Basic with manual local operation

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RK1315-6@S41-@AA@
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42D
1 unit
42D
Electromechanical starters (with integrated contactor)

Setting range for rated operational current / A
Additional price
0.15 ... 2
None
1.5 ... 12
Direct-on-line starters/reversing starters

Reversing starters
None
Direct-on-line starters with manual local operation
Reversing starters with manual local operation
Brake actuation
Without brake actuation
None
Brake actuation (230/400 V AC)
Brake actuation (180 V DC)
Electronic starters (with thyristors)

3RK1315-6@S71-@AA@
Additional price
0.15 ... 2
None
1.5 ... 9
C

Reversing starters
None
Brake actuation
None
= Additional price

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/43
Siemens AG 2013

M200D Standard motor starters
M200D AS-i Standard without manual local operation

Version
M200D AS-i Standard with manual local operation

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RK1325-6@S41-@AA@
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42D
1 unit
42D

Additional price
0.15 ... 2
None
1.5 ... 12

None
Reversing starters
Brake actuation
None
Electronic starters (with thyristors)

C
3RK1325-6@S71-@AA@
Additional price
0.15 ... 2
None
1.5 ... 12

Reversing starters
None
Brake actuation
None
= Additional price
9/44
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

M200D motor starters for PROFIBUS/PROFINET
Overview
The intelligent, highly flexible M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET
motor starters are the most functional motor starters of the
SIRIUS motor starter family in the high degree of protection IP65
for PROFIBUS/PROFINET communication.
They start and protect motors and loads up to 5.5 kW. Direct-online and reversing starter versions are available, in a mechanical
version and also an electronic version (the latter with soft start
function).
The particularly robust M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET
motor starters are characterized by numerous functions which
can be flexibly parameterized. Their modular design comprises
a motor starter module and a communication module.
The M200D PROFINET motor starters enable TIA-integrated
parameterization through PROFINET from STEP 7 in familiar,
user-friendly manner with the same look-and-feel as PROFIBUS.
Only with PROFINET:

Just one bus system from the MES level to the devices - no
routers
More stations on the bus and possible configuration of flexible
bus structures
Automatic re-parameterization in case of device replacement
thanks to proximity detection
Wireless integration of plant segments in difficult environments using WLAN
Easier expansion of the system thanks to a higher number of
stations on the bus and elimination of terminating resistors
M200D motor starter modules for PROFIBUS/PROFINET

(without communication module)
Functionality
Basic functionality see page 9/37 "M200D Motor Starters"
"General Data" "Overview"
Electronic version also with soft start function
Robust and widely used M12 connection method for the digital inputs and outputs and the PROFIBUS/PROFINET bus connection
All four digital inputs and two digital outputs exist in the cyclic
process image. This provides complete transparency of the
process on the control level
Full TIA integration: All digital inputs and outputs exist in the
cyclic process image and are visible through the bus,
providing maximum flexibility and excellent adaptability to the
application
Flexible assignment of the digital inputs and outputs with all
available assignable input actions
Extensive diagnostics concept using LEDs and through the
bus with the TIA-compatible mechanisms
Expanded diagnostics using data records
Complete plant monitoring using statistics data record and
current value monitoring by means of data records
Parameterization through PROFIBUS/PROFINET bus with the
help of data records from the user program
Control of the motor starter using a command data record from
the user program
Removable modular control unit quicker device replacement
and therefore lower costs when device outages occur since
existing wiring is on the control unit and only one device needs
to be replaced
Parameterization in STEP 7 HW Config using Motor Starter ES
Start-up and diagnostics with the help of Motor Starter ES
Trace function through Motor Starter ES for optimized start-up
and tracking of process and device values
M200D communication modules for PROFIBUS
M200D communication modules for PROFINET
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/45
Siemens AG 2013

Mounting and installation
The M200D PROFIBUS / PROFINET motor starter is comprised
of a communication module and a motor starter module. Only
the motor starter module has to be replaced therefore when replacing devices. This saves time and money. The communication module remains as an active station on the bus and all other
system components continue running. This prevents downtimes.
The integrated plug-in technology enables far lower wiring outlay: Connecting cables can be plugged directly onto the motor
starter module. The PROFINET bus is connected cost-effectively
using an M12 connection on the device. All versions have identical enclosure dimensions for easier system design and conversion.
All motor protection functions, limit values and reactions can be
defined by parameterization.
The user has several user-friendly options for the parameterization. In addition to parameterization directly from STEP 7, which
also permits automatic re-parameterization in case of device replacement, it is possible to use the user-friendly Motor Starter ES
start-up software. By connecting a programming device directly
to PROFIBUS/PROFINET and the Motor Starter ES start-up software, the devices can also be conveniently programmed from a
central point through the bus. Also, parameters can be changed
during operation from the user program using the data record
mechanism so that the function of the motor starter is adapted to
the process when required. With the help of a PC and the Motor
Starter ES software it is also possible to perform the parameterization through the local point-to-point interface on-site.
Functions can be flexibly assigned to the digital inputs and
outputs, adapting them to all possible conveyor applications.
All digital inputs and outputs exist in the cyclic process image.
All limit values for monitoring functions and their reactions are
parameterizable and therefore adaptable to the application.
Consistency with other products of the SIRIUS M200D motor
starter range and with the frequency converter and ET 200pro
I/O system is assured.
Only with the M200D PROFINET motor starter
Thanks to the integrated proximity detection, the device name
does not need to be issued manually when a device is replaced.
The name is issued automatically by the neighboring devices
which note the "names" of the devices in their proximity. No additional start-up measures are required therefore when replacing
a device.
The new motor starter generation is characterized by high functionality, maximum flexibility and the highest level of automation.
The PROFINET is recommended in particular for expansive and
highly automated system components because the possibility of
monitoring devices and systems with data records (statistical
data, measured values and device diagnostics) guarantees an
in-depth view of the plant from the control room and therefore increases plant availability.
Operation
The motor starter is equipped internally with 3 logbooks for device faults, motor starter trips and events, which are issued with
a time stamp. These logbooks can be read out of the motor
starter at any time in the form of data records and provide the
plant operator with plenty of information about the state of his
plant and process which he can use to carry out improvements.
With the slave pointer and statistical data functions it is possible
to read out, for example, the maximum internal current values or
the number of motor starter connection operations for plant monitoring purposes. This enables process deviations to be monitored or commissioning to be optimized. The user can draw conclusions about the actual load conditions of the devices in his
process and on this basis can optimize his plant maintenance intervals.
The device diagnostics data record contains details of all the
states of the motor starter, the device configuration and the communication as a basis for central device and plant monitoring.
With installation and maintenance functions (I&M), information
(I&M) on modules employed is stored in the motor starter on the
one hand, and on the other, data (I&M), which can be specified
by the user during configuration, such as location designations.
I&M functions serve for troubleshooting faults and localizing
changes in hardware at a plant or checking the system configuration. Reordering a device is particularly easy as the result.
The integrated maintenance timer can be used to implement
preventative maintenance and avoid plant downtimes through
look-ahead servicing.
Another new feature is the integrated TRACE function with the
Motor Starter ES software. It can be used to record measured
values as a function of time following a trigger event. This enables process flows to be recorded and their timing optimized.
Local control of a drive is possible using the ordering option with
integrated manual operation. This is yet another new development which distinguishes the M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET
motor starter from the rest of the market and adds innovative
technology, maximum availability and transparency to the
system.
M200D PROFINET motor starters with PROFIenergy
Increasing energy prices, far-reaching ecological problems
worldwide and the threat of climate change make it necessary
for you to be more conscious about your use of energy.
Active and effective energy management is possible with
PROFIenergy.
PROFIenergy is a manufacturer-independent profile on
PROFINET, which can be used by all manufacturers, has been
standardized by PNO1) and supports the switching off of electrical devices during dead time and the measurement of energy
flow.
1)
The motor starters record the actual current flow. Evaluating the
current of the parameterizable solid-state overload protection increases the availability of the drives, as do reliable signals concerning the overshooting or undershooting of setpoint values.
Diagnostics and maintenance
Diagnostics is provided through numerous mechanisms - and
can be used as the customer prefers.
The motor starter is TIA-diagnostics compatible, which means
that when a fault is identified, a diagnostics alarm is distributed,
which invokes the diagnostics-OB with a SIMATIC control. The
fault can be evaluated as usual in the user program.
9/46
The M200D motor starter offers a large variety of diagnostics

data through data records. Its functionality is without equal on
the market. There are extensive options for reading out data from
the motor starter for monitoring devices, systems or processes.
Siemens IC 10 2014
In the PNO (PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V. - PROFIBUS User Organization), manufacturers and users have come together to agree on the standardized communication technologies PROFIBUS and PROFINET.
Switching off during dead times

PROFIenergy supports the targeted switching-off of loads
during dead time.
These can be planned short breaks of a few minutes (such as
lunch breaks), longer periods of dead time (such as nights) or
unplanned dead time. Energy is always saved when no power is
required.
Siemens AG 2013

Measuring and visualizing the energy flow as a basis of energy
management
The objective of energy management is to optimize the use of
energy in a company from the purchasing of energy through to
the consumption of energy economically and ecologically.
Analyses of energy consumption over time can be used to control energy flows, avoid energy peaks, improve ratings and thus
save costs.
PROFIenergy enables consumption data to be read off from the
devices in a unified form. This is recorded during operation and
can be displayed on a control panel, for example, or on overlying
energy management software packages. This ensures that the

measured variables are in a uniform manufacturer-independent
form and structure that is available to the user for further processing. These PROFIenergy functions thus provide the basis
for active load and energy management during operation.
PROFIenergy in the M200D PROFINET motor starter
The M200D PROFINET motor starter supports "switching during
dead time" and "current measurement values" of the motor current using PROFIenergy. These are called commands, because
they trigger a reaction in the M200D motor starter.
SIRIUS M200D
SIRIUS M200D
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
Fieldbus
PROFIBUS to M12
PROFINET to M12
Adjustable number of stations
1 ... 125
1 ... 128 with CPU 315, CPU 317

1 ... 1256 with CPU 319
DIP switches
For address setting and terminating resistor
--
Motor Starter ES
Through bus, optical interface

Slave on the bus
Parameterization
PROFIBUS/PROFINET data records
From STEP 7 / HW Config
Support of diagnostics alarm
Diagnostics
Process image
Process image
2Byte PAE/ 2Byte PAA
Data channels
Local optical interface (manual local)
Through Motor Starter ES local interface
Using Motor Starter ES through bus
Data records (acyclic)

Parameterization
Using DS 131 (DS = data record)
Diagnostics
Device-specific DS 92
Measured values
Measured values DS 94
Statistics
Statistical data DS 95
Commands
Using DS 93
Slave pointer
Slave pointer DS 96
Logbook
Using Motor Starter ES and data records: Device faults DS 72, tripping operation DS 73, events DS 75
Using DS 100
I&M data
Using DS 231 ... 234
Using data records 0xAFF0 ... 0xAFF3
Inputs
Number
Input action
Parameterizable: flexibly assignable action, see manual1)
Quick Stop
Parameterizable: latching, non-latching
Function available
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/47
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS M200D
SIRIUS M200D
PROFIBUS
PROFINET

Outputs
Number
Output action
Parameterizable: flexibly assignable action, see manual1)
Brake output
180 V DC / 230/400 V AC / none
Motor protection
Overload protection
Electronic, wide range 1:10
Temperature sensor
Parameterizable using Motor Starter ES, data record: PTC or Thermoclick or deactivated
Device functions
Repair switch
Current limit monitoring bottom
Parameterizable
Current limit monitoring top
Parameterizable
Parameterizable: tripping, warning
Blocking current
Parameterizable
Unbalance
Parameterizable
Load type
Parameterizable: 1- and 3-phase
Shutdown class
Parameterizable using Motor Starter ES, data record: CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20
Parameterizable: activated/deactivated
Support for PROFIenergy profile

Switching during dead times
--
Measured motor current values
--

Soft start function
Bypass function
Function available
1)
Benefits
M200D PROFINET motor starters with PROFIenergy
Both standards and laws are making environmental protection
and energy management increasingly important, as is the desire
to cut energy costs in production facilities and thus ensure a sustainable competitive advantage.
It is thus an objective within the industry to save energy and

actively reduce CO2 emissions. By the careful use of valuable
resources, the manufacturer-independent PROFIenergy profile
on PROFINET can make an active contribution to environmental
protection.
Application
The M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET motor starters are particularly suitable for fully TIA-integrated, highly automated conveyor
applications which meet all needs with regard to the monitoring
of devices and systems and preventative maintenance.
9/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
Adaptability of the motor starter functions and maximum flexibility of the device enable a broad range of application without any
limits. The PROFINET-specific expansions are the best assurance of a future-proof investment.
Siemens AG 2013

Type
Electromechanical switching
Electronic switching
DSte / RSte
sDSSte / sRSSte

Without communication module
With communication module
mm
mm
294 x 215 x 159

295 x 215 x 163

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +70
Weight
2 820 / 3 080
3 160 / 3 360

Shock resistance
g/ms
g/ms
12/11 half-sine
9.8/5 or 5.9/10
IP65
Up to 1 000 m
Up to 2 000 m
No derating
1 % per 100 m
Cooling
Convection
Main circuit
kW
5.5

Approval acc. to EN 60947-1
Approval acc. to UL and CSA
Rated operational current range
Rated operational current range for soft start
Rated operational current range for direct start
V AC
V AC
A
A
A
400 (50/60 Hz)

600 (50/60 Hz)
0.15 ... 2 / 1.5 ... 12
---
Rated operational current for starters Ie at 400 V AC

400 V at AC-1 / 2 / 3
500 V at AC-1 / 2 / 3
400 V at AC-4
400 V at AC-53a
A
A
A
A
12
9
4
--
Mechanical endurance of contactor
Trip class
CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20
See manual3)
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Iq

At 400 V AC
At 500 V AC
kA
kA
At Iemax = 2 A
At Iemax = 9 /12 A
50
50
480 (50/60 Hz)

-0.15 ... 2 / 1.5 ... 12
0.15 ... 2 /1.5 ... 9
---12 for soft starting, 9 for direct-on-line
starting
--
202)
Brake actuation (option)

Operational voltage
230/400 AC or 180 DC
< 0.5 at 230/400 V AC< 0.8 at 180 V DC
Yes, 1 A melting fuse
1)

2)
Only systems with grounded neutral point permitted.
3) http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38823402
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/49
Maximum power of three-phase motors at 400 V AC
Siemens AG 2013

Type
M200D communication modules

For PROFIBUS

mm
174 x 139 x 40

During operation
During storage
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +70
Weight
300

Shock resistance
g/ms
g/ms
12/11 half-sine
9.8/5 or 5.9/10
IP65
Up to 1 000 m
Up to 2 000 m
No derating
1 % per 100 m
Cooling
Convection
Control circuit
V DC
V DC
20.4 ... 28.8

20.4 ... 28.8
Power consumption from

UDC24V-NS
UDC24V-S
mA
mA
< 300
< 100
Operational voltage
UDC24V-NS
UDC24V-S
9/50
Siemens IC 10 2014
For PROFINET
Siemens AG 2013

Communication modules, motor starter modules

PROFIBUS/PROFINET
(without communication module)
M200D PROFIBUS
motor starters
Version
M200D PROFINET
motor starters
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1305-0AS01-0AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1335-0AS01-0AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1395-6@S41-@AD@
1 unit
42D
1 unit
42D
M200D communication modules for PROFIBUS

Communication modules for PROFIBUS
M12 connection for communication, 7/8" for 24 V power supply
M200D communication modules for PROFINET

Communication modules for PROFINET
M12 connection for communication, 7/8" for 24 V power supply

Additional price
0.15 ... 2
None
1.5 ... 12

0
Reversing starters
None
Brake actuation
None
Solid-state starters (with thyristors)

C
3RK1395-6@S71-@AD@
Additional price
0.15 ... 2
None
1.5 ... 12

Reversing starters
None
Brake actuation
None
= Additional price
More information
Notes on safety
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/51
Siemens AG 2013

Software
Motor Starter ES
Overview
Motor Starter ES

motor starters in the SIMATIC ET 200pro, SIMATIC ET 200S and
SIRIUS M200D product families (for versions M200D AS-i
Standard, M200D PROFIBUS and M200D PROFINET).

with SIRIUS".
9/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
NSA0_00484
NSA0_00485a
10
5
3
Power feeder plug
Connection for motor control with AS-i communication
Power connection plug
AS-Interface M12 feeder
Incoming energy supply cable
Connection for digital input
Motor connection plug
Motor plug
Motor cable
(IO communication, 5-pole)

10 Connection for digital output
(IO communication, 4 or 5-pole)
Communication connection using AS-Interface and digital inputs and

outputs
Power and motor connection on the M200D motor starter

(in this example: M200D for AS-i)
13
14
12
14
15
15
NSA0_00487a
NSA0_00488a
11
13
10
9
9


(IO communication, 4- or 5-pole)


(IO communication, 4- or 5-pole)
13 Connection for 24 V supply (infeed)
11 PROFIBUS connection (input)
14 Connection for 24 V supply (loop)
12 PROFIBUS connection (loop)
15 Connection with PROFINET
13 Connection for 24 V supply (infeed)
10
(input on the left, loop on the right)
14 Connection for 24 V supply (loop)
Communication connection using PROFIBUS and digital inputs and

outputs
Communication connection using PROFINET and digital inputs and

outputs
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/53
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
16
17
18
19
Power bus line (sold by the meter)

Power T terminal connector
Power double-T terminal connector
Prefabricated power cable
17
19
16
18
18
ET200pro
M200D
IC01_00231
M200D
Motors
Power supply to the motors via the power bus with power T and double-T terminal connectors linked by power bus cables, spur lines to the field devices
(motor starters), and power loop-through connections to the motors via motor connection cables
Power bus
Interruption-free thanks to power terminal connectors
The power supply to the field devices (ET 200pro motor starters,
M200D motor starters) is provided via the power bus, in which
the power T terminal connectors or power double-T terminal
connectors are connected by power bus cables.
In finger-safe connection technology the power T terminal connectors and power double-T terminal connectors connect the
components of a feeder to the power bus. They ensure interruption-free operation, i. e. when the components are plugged in,
the power bus is not interrupted.
Feeders
From the terminal connectors, spur lines with Han Q4/2 plugs
lead to the field devices, from which the motors are supplied with
power via motor connection cables.
9/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

The accessories listed below represent a basic selection
sorted by:
Accessories for all M200D motor starters
Accessories for M200D motor starters for AS-interface
Accessories for M200D motor starters for PROFIBUS
Accessories for M200D motor starters for PROFINET
Version
DT
Article No.
M200D protective brackets
$ Power feeder plugs

Connector set for energy supply, e.g.for connecting to
T terminal connectors, comprising a coupling enclosure,
straight outgoing feeder (with bracket), pin insert for
B
B
2
5 male contacts 6 mm
B
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1911-3BA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1911-2BS60
3RK1911-2BS20
3RK1911-2BS40
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
3RK1911-2BE50
1 unit
42D
3RK1911-2BE10
1 unit
42D
3RK1911-2BE30
1 unit
42D
% Power connection plugs

Connector set for energy supply for connection to
M200D motor starters, comprising a cable-end connector
hood, angular outgoing feeder, female insert for
B
2
B
5 female contacts 4 mm
2
B
5 female contacts 6 mm
% + & Power connection cable

Assembled at one end with "N" and jumper pin 11 and 12
for plug monitoring, with HAN Q4/2, angular; open at one
end; 5 x 4 mm2
Length 1.5 m
3RK1911-0DC13
1 unit
42D
Length 5.0 m
3RK1911-0DC33
1 unit
42D
( Motor connection plugs

Connector set for motor cable for connection to M200D
motor starters, comprising a cable-end connector hood,
angular outgoing feeder, pin insert for HAN Q8/0, incl.
gland
B
B
3RK1902-0CE00
3RK1902-0CC00
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
) Motor plugs
comprising a cable-end connector hood, straight outgoing feeder, female insert for HAN 10e, incl. star jumper,
incl. gland
C
C
3RK1911-2BM21
3RK1911-2BM22
1
1
1 set
1 set
42D
42D
( + * Motor cables, assembled at one end

For connection to M200D motor starter, HAN Q8/0,
angular, length 5 m
Motor cables for motor without brake, 4 x 1.5 mm2
Motor cables
3RK1911-0EB31
1 unit
42D
Motor cables for motor without brake with thermistor,

6 x 1.5 mm2
3RK1911-0EF31
1 unit
42D
Motor cable for motor with brake actuation,

braking voltage 400 V AC or 180 V DC, 6 x 1.5 mm2
3RK1911-0ED31
1 unit
42D

braking voltage 400 V AC or 180 V DC and thermistor,
8 x 1.5 mm2
3RK1911-0EG31
1 unit
42D

braking voltage 230 V AC, 6 x 1.5 mm2
3RK1911-0EH31
1 unit
42D

braking voltage 230 V AC and thermistor, 8 x 1.5 mm2
3RK1911-0EE31
1 unit
42D

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/55
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
B
B
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1911-2BF01
3RK1911-2BF02
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
3RK1911-2BG02
1 unit
42D
B
B
B
B
B
3RK1911-5BA00
3RK1911-5BA10
3RK1911-5BA20
3RK1911-5BA30
3RK1911-5BA50
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
42D
42D
3RK1902-0CW00
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-0AB00
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-0AJ00
1 unit
42D
B
B
3RK1902-0CK00
3RK1902-0CJ00
1
1 unit
1 10 units
42D
42D
Power bus
5 Power T terminal connectors
of the power bus, by insulation displacement
connection, used with preassembled bus segments
2.5 mm/4 mm
4 mm/6 mm
6 Power double-T terminal connector
of the power bus, by insulation displacement
connection, used with preassembled bus segments,
connection of two motor starters possible
4 mm/6 mm
Sealing set (comprising 2 seals)
For power T/power double-T terminal connectors

Blanking plugs
Further accessories for energy connections

Crimping tools for pins/sockets 4 mm2 and 6 mm2
3RK1902-0CW00
Dismantling tools
HAN Q4/2 inserts
HAN Q8 inserts
Sealing caps
For power socket connectors
1 unit per pack
10 units per pack
More connection technology products and accessories

(e.g. crimping tools) can be found at our
"Siemens Solution Partners Automation"
9/56
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
M12 plugs, straight

Screw fixing, 5-pole screw terminals, max. 0.75 mm2,
A-coded, max. 4 A
. M12 plugs, angular

A-coded, max. 4 A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-4DA00-5AA0
1 unit
42D
-, . Control cables, assembled at one end

M12 plugs, angular, screw fixing, 5-pole, 5 x 0.34 mm2,
Cable length 1.5 m
Cable length 5 m
Cable length 10 m
C
C
C
3RK1902-4HB15-5AA0
3RK1902-4HB50-5AA0
3RK1902-4HC01-5AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
Control cables, assembled at both ends

Straight M12 plug, straight M12 socket, screw fixing,
3-pole, 3 x 0.34 mm2,
Cable length 1.5 m
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 unit
42D
Handheld devices
B
For M200D motor starters (or for ET 200pro and ET 200S
High-Feature motor starters) for local operation.
The motor starter-specific serial interface cables must be
ordered separately.
The RS 232 interface cable 3RK1922-2BP00 is used for
the MS M200D.
3RK1922-3BA00
1 unit
42D

B
Serial data connection between M200D (or ET 200pro)
motor starters and the RS232 interface of a PC/PG/laptop
(with the Motor Starter ES software) or the handheld
device 3RK1922-3BA00.
3RK1922-2BP00
1 unit
42D
1 unit
346
100 10 units
42C
Motor control with IO communication
3RK1902-4BA00-5AA0
3RK1902-4DA00-5AA0
3RK1902-4H...-5AA0
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
3RK1922-3BA00
3RK1901-1KA00
Further accessories
USB interface cable, 2.5 m

Serial data connection between M200D (or ET 200pro)
motor starters and the USB interface of a PC/PG/laptop
(with the Motor Starter ES software).
6SL3555-0PA00-2AA0
M12 sealing caps

For sealing unused M12 input and
output sockets not for M12 AS-i communications
interface for motor control +
(one set contains 10 sealing caps)
3RK1901-1KA00

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/57
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For M200D motor starters for AS-Interface
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1902-4GB50-4AA0
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
1 unit
42D
Motor control with AS-i communication

+ Control cables, assembled at one end
M12 socket, angular, screw fixing, 4-pole, 4 x 0.34 mm2,
Cable length 5 m
C
3RK1902-4GB50-4AA0
+ M12 socket, angular
Screw fixing, 4-pole screw terminal, max. 0.75 mm2,
A-coded, max. 4 A
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
, AS-Interface M12 feeder
For
flat cable
For

feeder
AS-i / Uaux
M12 socket
--
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR20
1 unit
42C
AS-i / Uaux
M12
cable box
1m
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR21
1 unit
42C
AS-i / Uaux
M12
cable box
2m
Not available A
3RK1901-1NR22
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-1MN00
1 10 units
42C
DT
Article No.
3RK1901-1NR21
For sealing of open cable ends
(shaped AS-Interface cable) in IP67
3RK1901-1MN00
Version
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Motor control with AS-i communication (continued)

AS-Interface shaped cables1)
Material
Color
Quantity
Rubber
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100 m roll
3RX9010-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
1 km drum
3RX9012-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100 m roll
3RX9020-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
1 km drum
3RX9022-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100 m roll
3RX9013-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
1 km drum
3RX9014-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100 m roll
3RX9023-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
1 km drum
3RX9024-0AA00
1 unit
42C
TPE special version according to

UL Class 2
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100 m roll
3RX9017-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100 m roll
3RX9027-0AA00
1 unit
42C
PUR
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
100 m roll
3RX9015-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Yellow
(AS-Interface)
1 km drum
3RX9016-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
100 m roll
3RX9025-0AA00
1 unit
42C
Black (24 V DC)
1 km drum
3RX9026-0AA00
1 unit
42C
3RX90..-0AA00
TPE
1)
See also Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication" "Transmission media"

"AS-Interface shaped cables".
9/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For M200D motor starters for AS-Interface
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1904-2AB02
1 unit
42C
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
1 unit
42D
Further accessories
}
For AS-Interface modules and sensors and actuators
with integrated AS-Interface in accordance with
AS-i Specification V3.0
For setting the AS-i address of standard slaves, and
slaves with extended addressing mode (A/B slaves)
With input/output test function and many other
commissioning functions
Battery operation with 4 batteries type AA
(IEC LR6, NEDA 15)
Scope of supply:
3RK1904-2AB02
M12 addressing cables to M12
3RK1902-4PB15-3AA0
Standard M12 cable for addressing slaves with M12

connection, e.g. K60R modules
When using the current version of the 3RK1904-2AB01
addressing unit
1.5 m
Documentation
Manual1)
SIRIUS M200D Motor Starter AS-Interface Basic
Manual2)
SIRIUS M200D Motor Starter AS-Interface Standard
1)
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/59
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For M200D motor starters for PROFIBUS
Version
DT
Article No.
/ 5 female contacts
0 5 male contacts
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1902-1DA00
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-1BA00
1 unit
42D
/ 5 female contacts, 3 m
3RK1902-1GB30
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-1GB50
1 unit
42D
3RK1902-1GC10
1 unit
42D
/ 0 Control cables, assembled at both ends

M12, screw fixing, angular, pin/socket
5-pole, B-coded, no terminating resistor
3.0 m
5.0 m
10.0 m
C
C
C
3RK1902-1NB30
3RK1902-1NB50
3RK1902-1NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
PROFIBUS trailing cables

A
Max. acceleration 4 m/s2, at least 3 000 000 bending
cycles, bending radius at least 60 mm, 2-core, shielded,
sold by the meter,
minimum order quantity 20 m,
maximum order quantity 1 000 m
6XV1830-3EH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC Food bus cables

With PE outer sheath for operation in the food and
beverage industry, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter,
6XV1830-0GH10
1m
5K2
PROFIBUS FC Robust bus cables

With PUR outer sheath for operation in environments
exposed to chemicals and mechanical loads, 2-core,
shielded, sold by the meter,
6XV1830-0JH10
1m
5K2
Power cables
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2

M12 plugs, angular
B-coded, no terminating resistor
3RK1902-1DA00
3RK1902-1BA00
M12, screw fixing, angular, B-coded, no terminating
resistor
3RK1902-1G.
3RK1902-1N.
Further accessories
Connection for 24 V power supply of the M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET

See page 9/61
Documentation
Manual1)
SIRIUS Motor Starter M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET
1)
9/60
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
For M200D motor starters for PROFINET
Version
DT
Article No.
3 M12 plugs, angular

angular, D-coded
4 male contacts
3 Control cables, assembled at one end

M12 for screw fixing, angular, 4-pole, D-coded,
4 male contacts, 3 m
3 Control cables, assembled at both ends
M12 for screw fixing, angular at both ends,
4-pole, D-coded, male contacts at both ends
3m
5m
10 m
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1902-2DA00
1 unit
42D
C
C
C
3RK1902-2HB30
3RK1902-2HB50
3RK1902-2HC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
C
C
C
3RK1902-2NB30
3RK1902-2NB50
3RK1902-2NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
PROFINET IE FC TP standard cable GP 2 x 2

sold by the meter
6XV1840-2AH10
1m
5K1
PROFINET IE FC TP trailing cable 2 x 2

sold by the meter
6XV1840-3AH10
1m
5K1
PROFINET IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2

sold by the meter
6XV1870-2D
1m
5K2
PROFINET IE FC TP torsion cable 2 x 2

sold by the meter
6XV1870-2F
1m
5K2
PROFINET IE FC TP marine cable, 4-core

sold by the meter
6XV1840-4AH10
1m
5K1
Power cables
6XV1830-8AH10
1m
5K2
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 5 female contacts
3RK1902-3DA00
1 unit
42D
2 5 male contacts
3RK1902-3BA00
1 unit
42D
1 Supply lines, assembled at one end

7/8" for screw fixing, angular, 1.5 mm2
5 female contacts, 3 m
C
C
C
3RK1902-3GB30
3RK1902-3GB50
3RK1902-3GC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
1 2 Supply lines, assembled

at both ends
7/8" for screw fixing, angular at both ends,
5-pole pin/socket, 1.5 mm2
3m
5m
10 m
C
C
C
3RK1902-3NB30
3RK1902-3NB50
3RK1902-3NC10
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42D
42D
42D
6ES7194-3JA00-0AA0
1 10 units
250
3RK1902-2H.
3RK1902-2N.
Price
per PU
Further accessories
Connection for 24 V power supply of the M200D PROFIBUS/PROFINET

Plugs
On M200D, 7/8" for screw fixing, angular, screw terminal,
1.5 mm2
3RK1902-3DA00
3RK1902-3BA00
3RK1902-3G.
3RK1902-3N.
7/8" sealing caps

1 pack = 10 units
6ES7194-3JA00-0AA0
Documentation
See page 9/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/61
Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS MCU Motor Starters
General data
Overview
3RK4353-3.R58-0BA0
3RK4340-3.R51-.BA0
3RK4320-3.R51-.BA0
Portfolio of the SIRIUS 3RK43 MCU motor starter family

The SIRIUS MCU motor starter family (MCU = Motor Control
Unit) rounds off the bottom end of the SIRIUS motor starter
range.
This series of motor starters in a high degree of protection is a
system solution for the cabinet-free controlling of AC loads in the
field.
The MCU product range extends from I/O controlled motor
starters addressing a central sub-distribution board via
I/O stations in a plastic enclosure for simple applications to
motor starters with AS-i communication in a rugged metal
enclosure for demanding tasks.
The MCU motor starters are completely pre-wired inside, have a

high degree of protection and are designed for switching and
protecting any AC loads. They are mostly used on standard
three-phase motors in direct or reversing duty up to 5.5 kW at
400/500 V AC (electromechanical switching) and 400/460 V AC
(electronic switching).
The motor and short-circuit protection integrated in the MCUs
consists either of an electromechanical controlgear assembly or
solid-state overload protection and a motor starter protector unit
for short-circuit protection.
3RK4320-3.Q54-.BA.
3RK4320-5.Q64-.BA.
The motor is protected against short circuits (50 kA) and overloads (thermal overload release) by the integrated motor starter
protector. No further measures are required for this function either (such as back-up fuses).
These motor starters have a key-operated switch "MAN-0-AUTO"
for selecting Manual, 0 or Automatic mode and preventing unauthorized changes of operating mode.
In automatic mode the motor can be controlled automatically by
connected sensors (level, temperature or pressure switches).
The reversing starter is designed in addition with connections for
2 sensors so a reversal of direction is possible in accordance
with these sensors. On the reversing starter the controls with
interlock are pre-wired.
In manual mode a selector button is used by the operator for
switching on, switching off and changing the direction of rotation.
I/O controlled MCU motor starters in a plastic enclosure
These motor starters offer an economical solution for controlling
three-phase motors distributed in the field.
The internal controls (contactors) are operated by external control with 24 V DC.
MCUs with metal enclosure are designed for the switching of

three-phase motors. Integrated control of the electrically operated motor brake with a braking voltage of 230 V AC or 400 V AC
is a standard feature. The braking voltage is routed to the motor
over the motor cable.
On the reversing starter, the controls with interlock are pre-wired.
SIRIUS MCU motor starters have the following main features:

Direct-on-line or reversing starters
Up to 5.5 kW
Plastic or metal enclosure
Electromechanical or electronic switching
With brake control 230 V AC or 400 V AC
Integrated lockable repair switch
Short-circuit protection with SIRIUS 3RV motor starter
Overload protection with thermal release (bimetal) or solidstate overload relay with wide range setting
Power and load connection by means of an M screw
Main power loop possible (daisy chain; max. 2 x 6 mm2)
Robust and widely used M12 connection method for the
AS-i bus connection and the digital inputs and outputs
(on the MCU with metal enclosure)
The LEDs (for AS-i bus connection) can provide comprehensive diagnostics of the device on the spot.
MCU motor starters with AS-i bus connection in a plastic

enclosure
Locally controlled MCU motor starters in a plastic enclosure

These motor starters are designed for the autonomous operation
of any AC loads preferably three-phase motors.
Only the infeed needs to be connected (no bus connection or
any other connection to a controller).
9/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
The status of the circuit breaker can be queried through its floating changeover contact. The status can adopt the following positions: activated the contact is closed and deactivated or
tripped the contact is open (I/O control).
This motor starter version offers an economical solution for controlling and monitoring conveyor belts, pumps, fans or compressors.
On this MCU the control commands and the status queries are
sent over the AS-i bus. The yellow cable (bus) and the black
AS-i cable for 24 V DC AUX are connected through a M12 plug.
The transparent enclosure top permits monitoring of the status
LEDs. These MCUs come completely pre-wired inside.
MCU motor starters with AS-i bus connection in a metal
enclosure for electromechanical or electronic switching
These MCUs with their rugged metal enclosure in degree of protection IP54 are ideal in particular for controlling and monitoring
three-phase motors in harsh ambient conditions such as are
often found in conveyor systems.
A special feature of this version is the manual local operation of
the motor starter.
The key-operated switch "MAN-0-AUTO" for selecting Manual,
0 or Automatic mode prevents unauthorized changes of operating mode. In automatic mode the MCU is controlled through the
AS-i bus.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
In manual mode a selector button is used for switching on,
switching off and changing the direction of rotation.
The status/diagnostics LEDs fitted to the cover indicate the
current operating state of the motor starter.
3RK4353-3.R58-0BA0
Type
3RK4340-3.R51-.BA0
Unlike the electromechanical starter, the solid-state motor starter

has wear-free solid-state switching devices which guarantee a
high switching frequency.
Another highlight of the electronic switching version is the solidstate overload relay for motor protection, which has a wide setting range for the motor current.
3RK4320-3.R51-.BA0
3RK4320-3.Q54-.BA.
3RK4320-5.Q64-.BA.

Locally controlled
I/O controlled
For AS-Interface
For AS-Interface
For AS-Interface
Plastic enclosure
Plastic enclosure
Plastic enclosure
Metal enclosure
Metal enclosure
Electromechanical
switching
Electromechanical
switching
Electromechanical
switching
Electromechanical
switching
Electronic
switching
Device functions (software features)

Slave on the bus
Fieldbus
--
AS-i
Bus connection
--
M12
Slave type
--
AS-i Spec 2.0
AS-i Slave Profile IO.ID.ID2
--
3.0.F
7.A.E
Number of assigned
AS-i addresses on the bus
--
Number of stations
--
Max. 31 devices
--
--
2I/2O
Max. 62 devices
Diagnostics
LEDs
Process image
Process image
4I/3O
Manual local operation
--
1 on the direct-online starter

2 on the reversing
starter
--
Data channels
Inputs
Number
DI1
DI2 / DI3
Connection
Screw terminal,
internal
--
Screw terminal,
internal
M12 - A coded
Input signal
NO contacts
--
Switching contact or Switching contact or

2-wire Bero
2/3-wire Bero
Input level
230 V AC
--
AS-i +
Of these in the process image --
Outputs
1 on the direct-online starter
0 on the reversing
starter
Of these in the process image --
DO1
DO2
Connection
--
Screw terminal,
internal
M12 - A coded
Output level
--
Relay contact,
floating
AUX-PWR+ (24 V DC)
Number
--
Motor protection
Overload protection
Thermal
overload release
Auto-RESET
--
Temperature sensor
--
Electronic
overload releases
Wide range
TC (Thermoclick)
Device functions
Response when
repair switch is tripped
Floating contact
Plug monitoring
--
Function available
Signal through AS-i

Possible (with plug option)
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/63
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
High degree of protection, namely IP55 on MCU motor starters
in a plastic enclosure and IP54 on motor starters in a metal enclosure, enables distributed configurations in the field and
saves space in the control cabinet
Comprehensive motor protection thanks to integrated overload and short-circuit protection with SIRIUS 3RV motor starter
protectors/circuit breakers or integrated solid-state overload
relays (solid-state starters)
Wide range version (motor current) through solid-state
overload relay
Controlled stopping through brake control for motor brake
Cable connection by means of economical M screw
(optionally with plug-in connection)
Simple mounting for AS-i and external auxiliary voltage

(24 V DC) over an M12 connection
Status/diagnostics displays with built-in LEDs
Manual operation: An integrated key-operated switch
"MAN-0-AUTO" and a selector button for switching on,
switching off and changing the direction of rotation for control
purposes during commissioning or maintenance
Easy and user-friendly control and monitoring through
AS-Interface bus communication
Robust and widely used M12 connection method for digital
inputs and outputs to connect I/O stations and the AS-i bus
connection increase flexibility and prevent errors in the system
configuration.
Application
Main areas of use
Locally controlled
Industrial, commercial and agricultural applications
(for autonomously controlled motors such as pumps, fans,
etc.)
Controlled by I/Os and AS-i bus:

Airports
Automotive industry
Intralogistics
Type

Locally controlled
I/O controlled
For AS-Interface
For AS-Interface
For AS-Interface
Plastic enclosure
Plastic enclosure
Plastic enclosure
Metal enclosure
Metal enclosure
Electromechanical Electromechanical Electromechanical Electromechanical Electronic

switching
switching
switching
switching
switching

mm
182 x 220 x 145
245 x 215 x 205

During operation
-25 ... +35
-25 ... +50

max. +65 with reduction
Weight
1 300
On the wall 360,

inclination 30
Degree of protection according to

IEC 529
IP54
Cooling
Convection
1 200
1 500 / 1 800
5 800
On the wall 360,
inclination 20
IP55
IP54
Control circuit
Operational voltage UAs-i
V DC
--
26.5 ... 31.6
Control supply voltage Uaux
V DC
--
20.4 ... 26.4
230 AC, from inside 20.4 ... 26.4 DC
--
Power consumption from AS-i

(incl. 200 mA sensor supply)
mA
--
250
20.4 ... 28.8

270
Main circuit
Rating for three-phase motor at 400 V,

50 Hz, AC-3
V AC
400 (tolerance: -15%, +10%)
V AC
600
M screw
Motor feeder
M screw

at 400 V AC
Trip class
CLASS 10
Type of coordination acc. to

IEC 60947-4-1
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu

at 400 V AC
kA
50
V AC
Brake version
--
400 or 230
--
Max. 5 % of Ie
--
Integrated
Operational voltage
9/64
Siemens IC 10 2014
6 400
Siemens AG 2013

Plastic enclosure, electromechanical switching
Overview
nsb0_02046
MCU, locally controlled, plastic enclosure

For manual and automatic mode
Direct-on-line or reversing starters up to 12 A at 400 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
Main control switch (red/yellow)
Lockable with padlocks (max. 3 units)
Integrated overload and short-circuit protection with SIRIUS
3RV motor starter protectors/circuit breakers Class 10 with
short-circuit breaking capacity Icu = 50 kA at 400 V AC
Plastic enclosure
Cable connections by means of M screws
Key-operated switch for manual/automatic mode
(MAN-0-AUTO)
In manual mode the user can operate the motor with the knoboperated control switch using the ON function (0-ON) on the
direct-on-line starter or the Forwards/Reverse function
(Rev-0-For) on the reversing starter.
Automatic mode: Through connection of one sensor on the
direct-on-line starter or 2 sensors on the reversing starter for
e.g. temperature, pressure, level etc., the motor can be
controlled in automatic mode by the connected sensors.
4 x M20 glands enclosed
5
6
1 Main switch
2 Key-operated switch manual/automatic mode
3 Knob-operated switch manual mode
4 External sensor
5 Main energy supply by means of M screws (max. 6 mm2)
6 Power loop-through connection possible (daisy chain)
7 Load outgoing feeder by means of M screws
(Feeder positions only examples - feeders can be laid in all directions)
MCU, locally controlled, plastic enclosure, for manual and automatic

mode

Setting range
Thermal
overload release
DT
Article No.
kW
0.25
1.25
0.37
0.7 ... 1
0.9 ... 1.25
1.6
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
0.75
3.2
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK4353-3CR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3RK4353-3DR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3RK4353-3ER58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.4 ... 2
3RK4353-3FR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4353-3HR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4353-3JR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4353-3LR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4353-3MR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4353-3NR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4353-3PR58-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.25
0.7 ... 1
3RK4353-3CR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.25
0.37
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4353-3DR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.6
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4353-3ER58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4353-3FR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4353-3HR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4353-3JR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4353-3LR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4353-3MR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4353-3NR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4353-3PR58-1BA0
1 unit
42E
Rated current Ie Suitable for

three-phase
motors1) with P
Reversing starters
Reversing duty
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/65
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
MCU, I/O controlled, plastic enclosure
(50/60 Hz)
Repair switches (black/gray)
lockable with padlocks (max. 3 units)
Plastic enclosure
Control circuit: I/O-wiring; control inputs 24 V DC
2
3
4
nsb0_02038
1 Main control switch / repair switch

2 Control inputs (24 V DC)
3 Load outgoing feeder through M screw
4 Main incoming power supply through M screw (max. 6 mm2)
5 Main power loop possible (daisy chain)
(position of outgoing units as example outgoing units are
possible on all sides)
MCU, I/O controlled, plastic enclosure

three-phase
motors1) with P
Setting range
Thermal
overload release
DT
Article No.
kW
0.63
0.18
0.8
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
0.25
0.7 ... 1
1.25
0.37
1.6
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK4340-3AR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3RK4340-3BR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3RK4340-3CR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4340-3DR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4340-3ER51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4340-3FR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
2.5
0.75
1.8 ... 2.5
3RK4340-3GR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4340-3HR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4340-3JR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
3.5 ... 5
3RK4340-3KR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4340-3LR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4340-3MR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4340-3NR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4340-3PR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.63
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63
3RK4340-3AR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.8
0.18
0.55 ... 0.8
3RK4340-3BR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.25
0.7 ... 1
3RK4340-3CR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.25
0.37
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4340-3DR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.6
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4340-3ER51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4340-3FR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
2.5
0.75
1.8 ... 2.5
3RK4340-3GR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4340-3HR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4340-3JR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
3.5 ... 5
3RK4340-3KR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4340-3LR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4340-3MR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4340-3NR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4340-3PR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
Reversing starters
Reversing duty
1)
9/66
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
MCU for AS-i, plastic enclosure
(50/60 Hz)
Transparent plastic enclosure with LED status displays for
monitoring the AS-i status
AS-Interface through M12 plug-in terminal
Communication: AS-Interface 2I/2O (standard slaves)
1
NSB0_02039
4
5

3 Main incoming power supply through M screw (max. 6 mm2)
4 Main power loop possible (daisy chain)
5 AS-i communication / Uaux (24 V DC) through M12 plug
(position of outgoing units as example outgoing units
are possible on all sides)
MCU for AS-i, plastic enclosure

Rated current
Ie
Suitable for
three-phase
motors1) with P
Setting range
Thermal
overload release
DT
Article No.
kW
0.63
0.18
0.8
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
0.25
0.7 ... 1
1.25
0.37
1.6
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK4320-3AR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3RK4320-3BR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3RK4320-3CR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4320-3DR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4320-3ER51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4320-3FR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
2.5
0.75
1.8 ... 2.5
3RK4320-3GR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4320-3HR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4320-3JR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
3.5 ... 5
3RK4320-3KR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4320-3LR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4320-3MR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4320-3NR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4320-3PR51-0BA0
1 unit
42E
0.63
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63
3RK4320-3AR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.8
0.18
0.55 ... 0.8
3RK4320-3BR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.25
0.7 ... 1
3RK4320-3CR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.25
0.37
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4320-3DR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.6
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4320-3ER51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4320-3FR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
2.5
0.75
1.8 ... 2.5
3RK4320-3GR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4320-3HR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4320-3JR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
1.50
3.5 ... 5
3RK4320-3KR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4320-3LR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4320-3MR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4320-3NR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4320-3PR51-1BA0
1 unit
42E
Reversing starters
Reversing duty
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/67
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosure, electromechanical switching
Overview
9
9/68
Siemens IC 10 2014
1
5
6
3
2
nsb0_02040
MCU for AS-i, metal enclosure, electromechanical

Direct-on-line or reversing starters up to 12 A
protectors/circuit breakers CLASS 10 with short-circuit
breaking capacity Icu = 50 kA at AC 400 V
Manual operation and key-operated switch for operating
mode selection
LED status display of the operating states
Metal enclosure
Switched brake control 400 V or 230 V
2 x M25 glands
1 x M12 plug for AS-i/auxiliary voltage (24 V DC)
2 M12 socket for connection of 2 sensors
1 M12 socket for connection of one actuator
Communication: AS-Interface 4I/3O (slaves in A/B technology
can be addressed)

2 Main incoming power supply (400 V AC) through M screw
4 2 sensor inputs (M12 socket), 1 actuator output (M12 socket)
5 LED status displays of the operating states
6 Key-operated switch: Manual-0-Auto
7 Manual operation: ON/OFF or Left-0-Right (selector button)
MCU for AS-i, metal enclosure, electromechanical switching
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosure, electromechanical switching

three-phase
motors1) with P
Setting range
Thermal
overload release
DT
Article No.
kW
0.63
0.18
0.8
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63
0.55 ... 0.8
0.25
0.7 ... 1
1.25
0.37
1.6
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK4320-3AQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
3RK4320-3BQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
3RK4320-3CQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4320-3DQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4320-3EQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4320-3FQ54- 0BA@
1 unit
42E
2.5
0.75
1.8 ... 2.5
3RK4320-3GQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4320-3HQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4320-3JQ54- 0BA@
1 unit
42E
1.50
3.5 ... 5
3RK4320-3KQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4320-3LQ54- 0BA@
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4320-3MQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4320-3NQ54-0BA@
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4320-3PQ54- 0BA@
1 unit
42E
Brake control / V
Additional price
230
None
400
None
Reversing duty
0.63
0.18
0.45 ... 0.63
3RK4320-3AQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
0.8
0.18
0.55 ... 0.8
3RK4320-3BQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
0.25
0.7 ... 1
3RK4320-3CQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
1.25
0.37
0.9 ... 1.25
3RK4320-3DQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
1.6
0.55
1.1 ... 1.6
3RK4320-3EQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
0.75
1.4 ... 2
3RK4320-3FQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
2.5
0.75
1.8 ... 2.5
3RK4320-3GQ54-1BA@
1 unit
42E
3.2
1.10
2.2 ... 3.2
3RK4320-3HQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
1.50
2.8 ... 4
3RK4320-3JQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
1.50
3.5 ... 5
3RK4320-3KQ54-1BA@
1 unit
42E
6.3
2.20
4.5 ... 6.3
3RK4320-3LQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
3.00
5.5 ... 8
3RK4320-3MQ54-1BA@
1 unit
42E
10
4.00
7 ... 10
3RK4320-3NQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
12.5
5.50
9 ... 12.5
3RK4320-3PQ54- 1BA@
1 unit
42E
Brake control / V
1)
Additional price
230
None
400
None

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/69
Reversing starters
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosure, electronic switching
Overview
MCU for AS-i, metal enclosure, electronic
Direct-on-line or reversing starters up to 12 A
Switching frequency up to 3 600/h
protectors/circuit breakers
Overload protection with solid-state overload relay
Manual operation and key-operated switch for operating
mode selection
LED status display of the operating states
Metal enclosure
Switched brake control 400 V or 230 V
2 x M25 glands
1 x M12 plug for AS-i/auxiliary voltage (24 V DC)
2 M12 plugs for connection of 2 sensors
1 M12 socket for connection of one actuator
Communication: AS-Interface 4I/3O
(slaves in A/B technology can be addressed)
9
1
5
6
nsb0_02041

2 Main incoming power supply (400 V AC) through M screw
4 2 sensor inputs (M12 socket), 1 actuator output (M12 socket)
5 LED status displays of the operating states
6 Key-operated switch: Manual-0-Auto
7 Manual operation: ON/OFF or Left-0-Right (selector button)
9 Heat sink
MCU for AS-i, metal enclosure, electronic switching

Rating for threephase motor
Rated value1)

of the inverse-time
delayed overload
release Ie
Brake
control
DT
Article No.
kW
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
0.55 1.5
14
230
230
1.1 5.5
3 12
230
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
0.55 1.5
1.1 5.5
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK4320-5DQ64-0BA2
1 unit
42E
3RK4320-5JQ64-0BA2
1 unit
42E
3RK4320-5PQ64-0BA2
1 unit
42E
400
3RK4320-5DQ64-0BA3
1 unit
42E
14
400
3RK4320-5JQ64-0BA3
1 unit
42E
3 12
400
3RK4320-5PQ64-0BA3
1 unit
42E
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
230
3RK4320-5DQ64-1BA2
1 unit
42E
0.55 1.5
14
230
3RK4320-5JQ64-1BA2
1 unit
42E
1.1 5.5
3 12
230
3RK4320-5PQ64-1BA2
1 unit
42E
0.12 0.37
0.32 1.25
400
3RK4320-5DQ64-1BA3
1 unit
42E
0.55 1.5
14
400
3RK4320-5JQ64-1BA3
1 unit
42E
1.1 5.5
3 12
400
3RK4320-5PQ64-1BA3
1 unit
42E
Reversing starters
Reversing duty
1)
9/70
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
The MCU motor starters are equipped with standardized
interfaces for data and energy (option).
Connection technology products coordinated with the
SIRIUS MCU motor starters can be found at
"Siemens Solution Partners Automation"

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Documentation
Manual1)
SIRIUS MCU Motor Starter
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
9/71
Siemens AG 2013

Motor Starters for AS-Interface, 24 V DC
General data
Overview
Quick stop function
All AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters feature a quick-stop
function which can be switched on and off as required using a
switch integrated into the module. The quick-stop function allows a connected motor to be disconnected immediately using
an applied sensor signal (High). The switch for the quick-stop
function is located alongside the input sockets and is protected
by an M12 sealing cap.
Brake
The double direct-on-line starter and the single reversing starter
versions feature an integrated permanently set brake function,
i.e. as soon as the output signal is set to "0", the motor is braked.
Start-up using integrated buttons
Buttons integrated into the module (below the output sockets)
can be used to set the motor used. The buttons are protected by
an M12 sealing cap.
AS-Interface 3RK1400-1MQ01-0AA4 double direct-on-line starter
24 V DC
With the K60 AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters for the low-end

performance range up to 70 W, it is now possible to connect
24 V DC motors and the associated sensors directly to the
AS-Interface quickly and easily.
Note concerning double and reversing starters:

If an input with the quick-stop function receives a "High" signal,
the corresponding output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 > output 1) is
switched off within the device (the motor is braked). The manual
key function (Key 1/2) for local operation is only permitted to be
used during "CPU Stop" in the higher-level PLC.
Note concerning single direct-on-line starters:
If an input with the quick-stop function receives a "High" signal,

the corresponding output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 > output 1) is
switched off within the device (the motor runs down without
being braked). The manual key function (Key 1) for local operation is only permitted to be used and defined during "CPU Stop"
in the higher-level PLC.
Connection of an actuator roller with integrated DC motor to an

AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starter
Three different versions are available:

Single direct-on-line starters
(without brake and reversible quick-stop function)
Double direct-on-line starters
(with brake and reversible quick-stop function)
Reversing starters
(with brake and reversible quick-stop function)
DC motors are connected to the module using M12 plug-in connections. The sensors and the module electronics can be supplied from the yellow AS-Interface cable. An auxiliary voltage
(24 V DC) is only required for supplying the outputs, which can
be provided via the black AS-Interface cable.
9/72
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Applications
Single direct-on-line starter without brake (with adjustable quick-stop function)
1st possibility: Connection to a maximum of four
sensors without pollution indication
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
4
Input 1
off
on
Quick-stop for
output on/off
Output
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Sensor 4
Input 2
2
Sensor 1
2nd possibility: Connection to a maximum of two

sensors with pollution indication
Sensor signal
Pollution signal
Sensor signal
Pollution signal
off
4
2
on
Quick-stop for
Input 1
output on/off
Sensor 2
Input 2
2
Brake
(with ramp-down)
Sensor 1
Output
Brake
(with ramp-down)
Motor
Button
(manual
operation)
Motor
Button
(manual
operation)
Address
Address
Double direct-on-line starter with brake (with adjustable quick-stop function)

1st possibility: Connection to a maximum of
four sensors without pollution indication
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Pollution signal
Sensor signal
Sensor 1
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Pollution signal
Sensor 2
off
off
4
2
4
2
on Quick-stop for
on Quick-stop for
Input 1
Sensor 3
Input 1
output 1 on/off
output 1 on/off
4
4
off
off
Sensor
4
Quick-stop
for
on
on Quick-stop for
Input 2
Input 2
output 2 on/off
output 2 on/off
2
2
Short-circuit brake
Plug brake
Output 2
Output 1
Output 2
Output 1
Motor 2
Button 2
(manual operation)
Motor 1
Button 1
(manual
operation)
Sensor 2
Motor 2
Button 2
(manual operation)
Button 1
(manual
operation)
Sensor 1
Motor 1
Address
Address
Single reversing starter with brake (with adjustable quick-stop function)
1st possibility: Connection to a maximum of four sensors
without pollution indication
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Sensor signal
Sensor 1
Sensor signal
Sensor 2
off
4
2
on
Quick-stop
for
Sensor 3
Input 1
output 1 on/off
4
off
Sensor 4
on Quick-stop for
Input 2
output 1 on/off
2
Plug brake
Motor
Output
Clockwise rotation
Button 1
Counter-clockwise
Button 2
(manual
(manual operation rotation
operation for
for clockwise rotation)
clockwise
Address
rotation)

Sensor signal
Pollution signal
Sensor signal
Pollution signal
off
4
2
on Quick-stop for
Input 1
output 1 on/off
4
off
on Quick-stop for
Input 2
output 1 on/off
2
Plug brake
Output
Button 1
(manual
operation for
clockwise
rotation)
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Motor
Clockwise rotation
Counter-clockwise
rotation
Button 2
(manual operation
for clockwise rotation)
Address
Siemens IC 10 2014
IC01_00046
9/73
Siemens AG 2013

General data

Version
Inputs/
outputs
Current
carrying
capacity
of outputs
Slave type
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Motor starters (width 60 mm)

Single
direct-on-line
starters1)
4 inputs /
1 output
Standard
3RK1400-1NQ01-0AA4
1 unit
42C
Double
direct-on-line
starters1)
4 inputs /
2 outputs
1 x 3 or
2x2
Standard
3RK1400-1MQ01-0AA4
1 unit
42C
Single
reversing
starters1)
4 inputs /
1 output
2.5
Standard
3RK1400-1MQ03-0AA4
1 unit
42C
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Wall mounting
3RK1901-0CA00
1 unit
42C
3RK1901-0CB01
1 unit
42C
AS-Interface sealing caps M12

3RK1901-1KA00
100 10 units
42C
AS-Interface sealing caps M12,

tamper-proof
3RK1901-1KA01
100 10 units
42C
Sealing sets
Set contains one straight and one shaped seal
3RK1902-0AR00
100
42D
3RK1400-1MQ01-0AA4
1)
Modules supplied without mounting plate.
Version
Price
per PU
Accessories
K60 mounting plates
3RK1901-0CA00
3RK1901-1KA00
3RK1901-1KA01
3RK1902-0AR00
9/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
5 units

Siemens AG 2013

Hybrid Fieldbus Connections
General data
Overview
Auxiliary power infeed
The HanBrid plug-in design offers the possibility of infeeding or
looping through not only the Profibus signal but also 2 separate
auxiliary voltages of 24 V DC (switched/unswitched) into the
field. The terminal block with spring-type terminals at the rear
(cabinet side) of the hybrid fieldbus connection provides a variety of interconnecting operations for these auxiliary voltages.
Hybrid fieldbus connection with two HanBrid sockets
Passive hybrid fieldbus connections

Gland from the control cabinet (IP20) into the field (IP65)
HanBrid plug-in design socket/socket or pin/socket
Direct connection or FastConnect connection for PROFIBUS at
the rear
Terminal block with spring-type terminals (0.25 2.5 mm2) for
infeeding or looping through the auxiliary voltages
IP20
IP65
Control cabinet bushing with two M12 sockets
On the cabinet bushings with two M12 sockets for the

PROFIBUS M12 connecting cables, the 24 V supply of the motor
starters is implemented via separate 7/8" connecting cables.
Passive and active hybrid fieldbus connections
The hybrid fieldbus connections are available in two versions
which differ in their functionality. They are:
The passive version
The active version with signal refresher function to considerably increase the maximum PROFIBUS cable length
Connection methods
Pin or socket
Socket
Hybrid fieldbus connection as passive cabinet bushing
Active hybrid fieldbus connections with refresher function

Gland from the control cabinet (IP20) into the field (IP65)
3 independent, electrically separated PROFIBUS segments
Signal refresher function from and to all segments
Automatic continuous baud rate detection
Status/diagnostics displays with LEDs
Cascading depth of a maximum 9 hybrid fieldbus connections
HanBrid plug-in design socket/socket and pin/socket
M12 plug-in design socket/socket
9-pole Sub D socket connection for PROFIBUS at the rear
Terminal block with spring-type terminals (0.25 2.5 mm2) for
infeeding or looping through the auxiliary voltages
The field side is connected using HanBrid or M12 plug-in

connectors.
IP20
In the case of HanBrid, the following versions are available:

Socket/socket for infeeding into the field
Pin/socket for looping in the field
The M12 version is generally configured with socket/socket.
Refresher
Following connections are available at the rear (cabinet side) in

the case of the passive glands:
Direct connection
FastConnect connection
IP65
The active gland with refresher function has 9-pole Sub-D

sockets for the rear connection.
Pin or socket
Socket
Hybrid fieldbus connection as active control cabinet bushing with

refresher function
Siemens IC 10 2014
9/75
Hybrid fieldbus connections with HanBrid sockets designed as

cabinet bushings transmit data and energy from the control
cabinet (IP20) to the field (IP65). They are the interface for jointly
routing PROFIBUS DP and the auxiliary voltages into the hybrid
fieldbus cable.
Siemens AG 2013

Hybrid Fieldbus Connections
General data
Type
Passive hybrid fieldbus connections
Active hybrid fieldbus connections

mm
93 x 103 x 65
Cutout (W x H)
mm
80 x 90
Temperature range
-25 ... +60

IP20 internal / IP65 on field side
mm
Plastic (black PC), flame retardant

24 V DC not switched (NS)
24 V DC switched (S)
V DC
V DC
24, 25 %
24, 25 %
Max. rated current
10
Material/enclosure
--
From 24 V DC not switched (NS)
Max. power consumption
mA
--
130
Mains buffering
ms
--
> 20
Baud rate detection
--
Automatic
Maximum cascading depth
--
9 hybrid fieldbus connections
Power supply
Baud rates
kbit/s
9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500/1 500 / 3 000 / 6 000 /12 000
V DC
500
Hybrid fieldbus connection on the field side:

With socket/socket (HanBrid)
Link type / function
With pin/socket (HanBrid)
With socket/socket (M12)
Connection IP65
Connection IP20
(PROFIBUS)
DT
Article No.
Cu/Cu, for feeding into the field
Socket/socket
(2 x HanBrid)
Direct connection
Cu/Cu, for looping through in the

field
Pin/socket
(2 x HanBrid)
Direct connection
Socket/socket
(2 x HanBrid)

field
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RK1911-1AA22
1 unit
42D
3RK1911-1AA32
1 unit
42D
bus connector
3RK1911-1AF22
1 unit
42D
Pin/socket
(2 x HanBrid)
bus connector
3RK1911-1AF32
1 unit
42D
Socket/socket
(2 x HanBrid)
9-pole Sub D socket
3RK1911-1AJ22
1 unit
42D

field
Pin/socket
(2 x HanBrid)
9-pole Sub D socket
3RK1911-1AJ32
1 unit
42D
Socket/socket
(2 x M12)
9-pole Sub D socket
3RK1911-1AK22
1 unit
42D
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Sealing caps for HanBrid

Protective cover for bus and power supply connection
(pack of 10)
6ES7194-1JB10-0XA0
1 10 units
250

Passive
Active (refresher)
Price
per PU
Accessories
6ES7194-1JB10-0XA0
9/76
Siemens IC 10 2014

Monitoring and
Control Devices
Price groups
PG 200, 2SP, 401, 470, 41B, 41F, 41H,
41L, 42C, 42J, 4N1, 5K1, 5P1
10/2
10/5
10/14
10/16
10/18
10/19
10/28
ST 70
10/29
10/30
10/31
10/32
10/33
10/34
10/35
10/36
10/37
10/38
10/39
Ch.15
10/40
10/41
10/42
10/51
10/57
10/60
Notes:
Ch. 3
3RT191. function modules can be found

- in the catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014
Ch. 3
- in the catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014

at the Information and Download Center 10/64
Conversion tool
e.g. from 3UG3 to 3UG4 see
1)
See Catalog ST 70 "Products for

Totally Integrated Automation".
Ch. 3
10/67
10/68
10/71
Introduction
SIMOCODE 3UF motor management
and control devices
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Basic units
Expansion modules
Fail-safe expansion modules
Accessories
3UF18 current transformers for overload
protection
LOGO! logic modules1)
General data
LOGO! Modular basic versions
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular
basic versions
LOGO! Modular pure versions
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular pure versions
LOGO! Modular expansion modules
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular expansion
modules
LOGO! CM EIB/KNX communication
modules
LOGO! CSM unmanaged
Accessories
LOGO!Power
LOGO!Contact
LOGO! Software
Relays
Timing relays
General data
SIRIUS 3RP15 timing relays
in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm
SIRIUS 3RP20 timing relays, 45 mm
7PV15 timing relays in enclosure,
17.5 mm
for mounting on 3RT2 and 3RH21
contactors
SIRIUS 3RA28 time-delayed auxiliary
switches for mounting onto
3RT2 contactors
SIRIUS 3RT19 timing relays for
mounting onto 3RT1 contactors
SIRIUS 3RT19 time-delayed auxiliary
switches for mounting onto
3RT1 contactors
Accessories
SIRIUS 3RR21, 3RR22 monitoring relays
for mounting onto 3RT2 contactors
General data
Current and active current monitoring
10/76
10/79
10/84
10/87
10/92
10/95
10/98
10/101
10/104
10/105
10/107
10/110
10/115
10/118
10/119
10/122
10/123
10/127
10/130
10/133
10/136
10/140
10/143
10/146
10/147
10/151
10/154
10/157
10/159
10/160
10/166
10/169
10/171
10/172
Ch. 5
Ch. 4
10/181
SIRIUS 3RR24 monitoring relays

for mounting onto 3RT2 contactors for
IO-Link
General data
SIRIUS 3UG45, 3UG46 monitoring
relays for stand-alone installation
General data
Line monitoring
Voltage monitoring
Current monitoring
Power factor and active current
monitoring
Residual current monitoring
- Residual-current monitoring relays
- 3UL23 residual-current transformers
Insulation monitoring
- General data
- For ungrounded AC networks
- For ungrounded DC and AC networks
Level monitoring
- Level monitoring relays
- Level monitoring sensors
Speed monitoring
Accessories
SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relays for
stand-alone installation for IO-Link
General data
Line monitoring
Voltage monitoring
Current monitoring
monitoring
- Residual-current monitoring relays
Speed monitoring
Accessories
SIRIUS 3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21
temperature monitoring relays
General data
Relays, analogically adjustable
for 1 sensor
Relays, digitally adjustable for 1 sensor
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to
3 sensors
Accessories
SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15 temperature
monitoring relays for IO-Link
General data
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to
3 sensors
Accessories
SIRIUS 3RN1 thermistor motor
protection
For PTC sensors
Coupling relays & interface converters
Coupling relays
Power relays/miniature contactors
SIRIUS 3RS17 interface converters
Siemens IC 10
Siemens
2014 IC 10 2014
10
10
Siemens AG 2013
Siemens AG 2013
Monitoring and Control Devices

Introduction
Overview
Type
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro S
SIMOCODE pro V/
Page
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET
SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices

Basic units
10/14
10/15
Current/voltage measuring modules
--
--
10/15
Decoupling modules
--
--
10/15
Operator panels
10/15
Operator panels with display
--
--
10/15
Expansion modules
--
10/16
--
--
10/18
Current transformers
10/28
Available soon
10/22
SIMOCODE ES 2007
10/24

for SIMATIC PCS 7
Available soon
10/26
Basic units
Expansion modules
Software
Page
10/30
Available
-- Not available
Type
10
LOGO! logic modules

--
--
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular basic versions1)
--
--
10/31
--
--
10/32
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular pure versions1)
--
--
10/33
--
--
10/34
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular expansion

modules1)
--
--
10/35
LOGO! CM EIB/KNX communication

modules
--
--
10/36
LOGO! CSM unmanaged
--
--
10/37
--
--
10/38
LOGO!Contact
--
--
10/40
LOGO! Software
--
--
10/41
Corresponds to
-- Does not correspond to
1)
Devices with extended temperature range and medial loading.
10/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Type
Page
3RP15
10/51
3RP20
10/57
7PV15
10/60
3RT19
10/64
--
--
--
Timing relays
Enclosure:
17.5 mm industry and household
equipment installation
22.5 mm industry
--
--
--
45 mm industry
--
--
--
For contactor sizes S0 to S12
--
--
--
Monofunction
Multifunction
--
Monovoltage
--
--
--
Combination voltage
--
Wide voltage range
--
Application:
--
--
--
--
Control systems and mechanical

engineering
Infrastructure
--
--
--
Mounting onto contactors
--
--
--
Corresponds to or possible
-- Does not correspond to or not possible
Type
3UG463.
3RR21,
3RR22,
3UG4621,
3UG4622
3UG4641
3UG4625
3UG458.
with 3UL23
3UG4501
3UG4651
Page
Line monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/87
Voltage monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/92
Current monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/71, 10/95
10
3UG451.,
3UG461.
Monitoring relays
Active current monitoring
--
--
3RR22:
--
--
--
--
10/71, 10/98
Power factor monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/98
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/101
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/107, 10/110
Level monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/115
Speed monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/119
Available
-- Not available
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/3
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Type
3UG481.
3UG4832
3RR24
3UG4822
3UG4841
3UG4825
with 3UL23
3UG4851
Page
Line monitoring
Voltage monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/127
--
--
--
--
--
Current monitoring
10/130
--
--
--
--
--
10/79, 10/133

monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
10/79, 10/136
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/140
Speed monitoring
--
--
--
--
--
--
10/143
Monitoring relays for IO-Link
Available
-- Not available
Type
3RS10, 3RS11,
3RS20, 3RS21
3RS14, 3RS15
3RN1
3RS17
Page
--
--
--
10/151, 10/154,
10/157
--
--
--
10/166, 10/169
--
--
--
10/172
--
--
--
10/181
Temperature monitoring relays

Temperature monitoring
Temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link

Temperature monitoring for IO-Link

10
Interface converters
Available
-- Not available
Connection methods
The monitoring and control devices are available with screw or
spring-type terminals.
Screw terminals
"Increased safety" type of protection EEx e/d according to

The communication-capable, modularly designed SIMOCODE
pro motor management system (SIRIUS Motor Management and
Control Devices) protects motors of types of protection EEx e
and EEx d in potentially explosive areas.
ATEX approval for operation in areas subject to explosion

hazard
The terminals are indicated in the corresponding tables

by the symbols shown on orange backgrounds.
The SIRIUS 3RN1 thermistor motor protection relay for PTC sensors is certified according to ATEX Ex II (2) G and D for environments with explosive gas or dust loads.
The SIRIUS SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor management system is
certified for the protection of motors in areas subject to explosion
hazard according to
ATEX Ex I (M2); equipment group I, category M2 (mining)
ATEX Ex II (2) GD; equipment group II, category 2 in area GD.
10/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Overview
Expansion
possibilities
SIMOCODE
pro C
pro S
pro V3)
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS1) PROFINET
Operator panels
Operator panels
with display
--
--
Current measuring
modules
Current/voltage
measuring
modules
--
--
Decoupling
modules
--
--
Digital modules
--
--
Fail-safe digital
modules2)
--
--
Analog modules
--
--
Ground-fault
modules
--
--
Temperature
modules
--
--
Multifunction
modules
--
--
--
Expansion
modules:
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management

system for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage performance range. It optimizes the connection between I&C and
motor feeder, increases plant availability and allows significant
savings to be made for installation, commissioning, operation
and maintenance of a system.
When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchboard, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level
automation system and the motor feeder and includes the
following:
Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection that is
independent of the automation system
Integrated control functions instead of hardware for the motor
control
Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data
Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET and
OPC UA
Safety relay function for the fail-safe disconnection of motors
up to SIL 3 (IEC 61508, IEC 62061) or PL e with Category 4
(EN ISO 13849-1)
SIMOCODE ES is the software package for SIMOCODE pro
parameterization, start-up and diagnostics.
Device series
SIMOCODE pro is structured into several functionally tiered
series:
SIMOCODE pro C, as a compact system for direct-on-line
starters and reversing starters or for controlling a motor starter
protector
SIMOCODE pro S, the smart system for direct-on-line,
reversing, and wye-delta starters or for controlling a motor
starter protector or soft starter. Its expandability with a multifunction module provides comprehensive input/output project
data volume, precise ground-fault detection via the 3UL23
residual-current transformers and temperature measurement.
SIMOCODE pro V, as a variable system with all control functions and with the possibility of expanding the inputs, outputs
and functions of the system at will using expansion modules
Available
-- Not available
1)
When an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module are

used, more restrictions on the number of expansion modules connectable
per basic unit must be observed, see page 10/13.
2)
The fail-safe digital module can be used instead of one of the two digital
modules.
3)
Maximum of 5 expansion modules.
Per feeder each system always comprises one basic unit and
one separate current measuring module. The two modules are
connected together electrically through the system interface
with a connection cable and can be mounted mechanically connected as a unit (one behind the other) or separately (side by
side). The motor current to be monitored is decisive only for the
choice of the current measuring module.
An operator panel for mounting in the control cabinet door is
optionally connectable through a second system interface on
the basic unit. Both the current measuring module and the
operator panel are electrically supplied by the basic unit through
the connection cable. More inputs, outputs and functions can be
added to the SIMOCODE pro V and SIMOCODE pro S by
means of optional expansion modules, thus supplementing the
inputs and outputs already existing on the basic unit. With the
DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules it is
also possible to integrate the fail-safe disconnection of motors in
the SIMOCODE pro V motor management system.
All modules are connected by connection cables. The connection cables are available in various lengths. The maximum distance between the modules (e.g. between the basic unit and the
current measuring module) must not exceed 2.5 m. The total
length of all the connection cables per system interface of the
basic unit may be up to 3 m.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/5
10
SIMOCODE pro S for efficient entry into motor management and

SIMOCODE pro V for maximum functionality
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Article No. scheme
SIMOCODE pro motor management system
1st - 4th
5th 6th 7th
@@@@
13th
3UF7
@
Type of unit/module
Functional version of the unit/module
Connection type of the current transformer
Voltage version
Color (0 = lightgray, 1 = titan gray)

Example
3UF7
Note:
article numbers.
10
Benefits
General customer benefits
Integrating the whole motor feeder into the process control by
means of PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET or OPC UA significantly
reduces the wiring outlay between the motor feeder and PLC
Decentralization of the automated processes by means of
configurable control and monitoring functions in the feeder
saves resources in the automation system and ensures full
functionality and protection of the feeder even if the I&C or bus
system fails
The acquisition and monitoring of operating, service and
diagnostics data in the feeder and process control system
increases plant availability as well as maintenance and
service-friendliness
The high degree of modularity allows users to perfectly implement their plant-specific requirements for each motor feeder
The SIMOCODE pro system offers functionally graded and
space-saving solutions for each customer application
The replacement of the control circuit hardware with integrated control functions decreases the number of hardware
components and wiring required and in this way limits stock
keeping costs and potential wiring errors
The use of solid-state full motor protection permits better utilization of the motors and ensures long-term stability of the tripping characteristic and reliable tripping even after years of
service
Multifunctional, electronic full motor protection
for rated motor currents up to 820 A
SIMOCODE pro offers comprehensive protection of the motor
feeder by means of a combination of different, multi-step and delayable protection and monitoring functions:
Inverse-time delayed solid-state overload protection
(CLASS 5 to 40)
Phase failure/unbalance protection
Stall protection
Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current
Voltage and power monitoring
Monitoring of the power factor (motor idling/load shedding)
Ground-fault monitoring
Temperature monitoring, e.g. over PT100/PT1000
Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number of starts
etc.
10/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Recording of measuring curves

SIMOCODE pro can record measuring curves and therefore is
able, for example, to present the progression of motor current
during motor start-up.
Flexible motor control implemented with integrated control
functions (instead of comprehensive hardware interlocks)
Many predefined motor control functions have already been
integrated into SIMOCODE pro, including all necessary logic
operations and interlocks:
Overload relays
Direct-on-line and reversing starters
Wye/delta starters (also with direction reversal)
Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing
starter); also with direction reversal
Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings
(also with direction reversal)
Positioner actuation
Solenoid valve actuation
Actuation of a motor starter protector
Soft starter actuation (also with direction reversal)
These control functions are predefined in SIMOCODE pro and
can be freely assigned to the inputs and outputs of the device
(including PROFIBUS/PROFINET).
These predefined control functions can also be flexibly adapted
to each customized configuration of a motor feeder by means of
freely configurable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers,
edge evaluation, etc.) and with the help of standard functions
(power failure monitoring, emergency start, external faults, etc.),
without additional auxiliary relays being necessary in the control
circuit.
SIMOCODE pro makes a lot of additional hardware and wiring in
the control circuit unnecessary which results in a high level of
standardization of the motor feeder in terms of its design and
circuit diagrams.
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data
Communications
SIMOCODE pro makes different operating, service and diagnostics data available and helps to detect potential faults in time and
to prevent them by means of preventative measures. In the event
of a malfunction, a fault can be diagnosed, localized and rectified very quickly there are no or very short downtimes.
SIMOCODE pro has either an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D or terminal connection) or a PROFINET interface
(2 x RJ45).
Service data
Motor operating hours
Motor stop times
Number of motor starts
Number of overload trips
Interval for compulsory testing of the enabling circuits
Energy consumed
Internal comments stored in the device etc.
Diagnostics data
Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages
Internal device fault logging with time stamp
Time stamping of freely selectable status, alarm or
fault messages etc.
Easy operation and diagnostics
Operator panel
The operator panel is used to control the motor feeder and can
replace all conventional pushbuttons and indicator lights to save
space. It makes SIMOCODE pro or the feeder directly operable
in the control cabinet. It features all the status LEDs available on
the basic unit and externalizes the system interface for simple
parameterization or diagnosis on a PC/PG.
Operator panel with display
As an alternative to the 3UF720 standard operator panel for
SIMOCODE pro V, there is also an operator panel with display:
the 3UF721 is thus able in addition to indicate current measured
values, operational and diagnostics data or status information of
the motor feeder at the control cabinet. The pushbuttons of the
operator panel can be used to control the motor. Also, when
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET is used it is possible to set parameters such as rated motor current, limit values, etc. directly via
the operator panel with display.
SIMOCODE pro for PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro for PROFIBUS supports for example:
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
Extensive diagnostics and hardware interrupts
Time stamp with high timing precision (SIMATIC S7) for
SIMOCODE pro V
DPV1 communication after the Y-Link
SIMOCODE pro for PROFINET
SIMOCODE pro for PROFINET supports for example:
Line and ring bus topology thanks to an integrated switch
Media redundancy via MRP protocol
Operating, service and diagnostics data via standard web
browser
OPC UA server for open communication with visualization and
control system
NTP-synchronized time
Interval function and measured values for power management
via PROFIenergy
Module exchange without PC memory module through
proximity detection
Extensive diagnostics and maintenance alarms
Notes on safety
For connection of an internal system to an external system,
suitable protective measures must be taken to ensure safe
operation of the plant (including IT security, e. g. network
segmentation).
More information see www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
For SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices
with communication function see page 10/14 onwards.
More information see Chapter 14 "Parameterization,
Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS" or Industry Mall.
Autonomous operation
An essential feature of SIMOCODE pro is the autonomous execution of all protection and control functions, even when communication to the I&C system is interrupted. This means that even
in the event of bus system or automation system failure, full functionality of the feeder is ensured or a specific behavior can be
parametrized in case of such a fault, e.g. targeted shutdown of
the feeder or execution of particular parametrized control mechanisms (such as reversal of the direction of rotation).
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/7
10
Operating data
Motor switching state derived from the current flow in the main
circuit
All phase currents
All phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages
Active power, apparent power and power factor
Phase unbalance and phase sequence
Ground-fault current
Time to trip
Motor temperature
Remaining cooling time etc.
Fail-safe disconnection through PROFIBUS or PROFINET with

the PROFIsafe profile is also possible in conjunction with a failsafe controller (F-CPU) and the DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital
module.
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Control circuit
Main circuit
L1
L2
L3
Standard
Automation level
Failsafe
L
N
<
>
Remote
PROFINET/PROFIsafe
Inputs
Current
measuring
module
Inputs
DM-F
PROFIsafe
Basic unit
SIMOCODE
pro V
PROFINET
Operator panel
with display
Connection
cable
Feedback circuit
SIMOCODE pro
-Q1
-Q3
-Q2
Q2
-Q2
Q3
-Q3
IC01_00163
Q1
10
-Q1
M
3~
Protecting + Monitoring
Controlling + Failsafe Disconnecting
(overload, thermistor, ground fault ...)
(including monitoring + locking)
Communication
(operating, service, diagnostics data +
control commands + failsafe disconnection)
SIMOCODE pro combines all essential functions, including safety functions, through PROFINET/PROFIsafe for the motor feeder
10/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
The innovative SIRIUS industrial controls products can also

make a major contribution to the energy efficiency of a plant
(www.siemens.com/sirius/energysaving).
The SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 motor management system makes
the following contribution to the energy efficiency of the plant as
a whole:
Energy consumption:
Clear display of the energy consumption of a motor feeder or
process element by means of the acquisition and transmission
of all operating and consumption date, such as current,
voltage, active and reactive power, energy consumption,
motor temperature etc.
Energy management:
Evaluation of energy measured values (e. g. limit value monitoring) with exporting of local or central actions (= forwarding
to higher-level)
PROFIenergy:
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET supports the PROFIenergy functions. Reduced energy consumption thanks to automatic disconnection in the intervals and forwarding of the measured
values for higher-level energy management systems.
Application
SIMOCODE pro is often used for automated processes where
plant downtimes are very expensive (e.g. steel or cement industry) and where it is important to prevent plant downtimes through
detailed operating, service and diagnostics data or to localize
the fault very quickly in the event of a fault.
Safety technology for SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro is modular and space-saving and suited especially for operation in motor control centers (MCCs) in the process industry and for power plant technology.
With the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe expansion

modules it is easy to integrate functions for fail-safe disconnection into the SIMOCODE pro V motor management system while
retaining service-proven concepts. The strict separation of
safety functions and operational functions proves particularly
advantageous for planning, configuring and construction.
Seamless integration in the motor management system leads to
greater transparency for diagnostics and during operation of the
system.
Protection and control of motors in hazardous areas for types of

protection EEx e/d according to ATEX guideline 94/9/EC
With heavy starting (paper, cement, metal and water
industries)
In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, raw material processing industries, power plants)
Suitable components for this purpose are the DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe expansion modules, depending on the
requirements:
the DM-F Local fail-safe digital module for when direct assignment between a fail-safe hardware shutdown signal and a
motor feeder is required, or
the DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module for when a
fail-safe controller (F-CPU) creates the signal for the
disconnection and transmits it in a fail-safe manner through
PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe or PROFINET/PROFIsafe to the motor
management system
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/9
10
Applications
The safe disconnection of motors in the process industry is becoming increasingly important as the result of new and revised
standards and requirements in the safety technology field.
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
General data
Type
3UF7

During operation
C
C
Degree of protection (to IEC 60529)

Measurement modules with busbar connection
Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover
Other components
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
IP00
IP54
IP20
g/ms
EMC interference immunity (according to IEC 60947-1)

Conducted interference, burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4
Conducted interference, high frequency acc. to
IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted interference, surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5
Electrostatic discharge, ESD acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
15/11
Any
Mounting position
Frequency
-25 ... +60 ; 3UF7 21: 0 ... +60

-40 ... +80 ; 3UF7 21: -20 ... +70
Hz
50/60 5 %
kV
kV
V

2 (power ports)
1 (signal ports)
10
kV
kV
kV
kV
V/m
2 (line to ground); 3UF7320-1AB, 3UF7330-1AB: 1 (line to ground)

1 (line to line); 3UF7320-1AB, 3UF7330-1AB: 0.5 (line to line)
8 (air discharge); 3UF7020: Only operate front side during operation
6 (contact discharge); 3UF721: 4 (contact discharge)
10
EMC emitted interference (according to IEC 60947-1)

Conducted and radiated interference emission
EN 55011/EN 55022 (CISPR 11/CISPR 22)

(corresponds to degree of severity A)
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely separated from each other
according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. they are designed with doubled creepage
paths and clearances. In this context, compliance with the instructions in the
test report "Safe Isolation" No.2668 is required.
Protective separation (acc. to IEC 60947-1)
Basic units
Type
3UF7000-1AU00-0
3UF7010-1AU00-0
3UF7011-1AU00-0
3UF7020-1AU01-0
3UF7000-1AB00-0
3UF7010-1AB00-0
3UF7011-1AB00-0
3UF7020-1AB01-0
Rated control supply voltage Us (according to IEC 61131-2)
110 ... 240 AC/DC; 50/60 Hz
24 V DC
Operating range
SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000) and SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010)
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.80 ... 1.2 Us
SIMOCODE pro V PN (3UF7011) and SIMOCODE pro S (3UF7020)

- Operation
- Start-up
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.80 ... 1.2 Us

0.85 ... 1.2 Us
7 VA/5 W
10 VA/7 W
5W
7W
11 VA/8 W
8W
10
Control circuit
Power consumption
SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000) and SIMOCODE pro S (3UF7020)
SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010)
incl. two connected expansion modules
SIMOCODE pro V PN (3UF7011)
incl. two connected expansion modules
300 (at pollution degree 3)
kV
Relay outputs
Number
- SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V, SIMOCODE pro V PN
- SIMOCODE pro S
Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts
(relay outputs)
- Fuse links
- Miniature circuit breaker
Rated uninterrupted current
Rated switching capacity
- AC-15
- DC-13
3 monostable relay outputs

2 monostable relay outputs
6 A/24 V AC
2 A/24 V DC
10/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
6 A/120 V AC
0.55 A/60 V DC
3 A/230 V AC
0.25 A/125 V DC
4 inputs supplied internally by the device electronics (with 24 V DC) and

connected to a common potential
Inputs (binary)
Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC)
Response value
Return value
6 A operational class gG; 10 A quick-response (IEC 60947-5-1)

1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1); 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
6
k
k
k
1.5
3.4 ... 3.8
1.5 ... 1.65
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules
Type
3UF71.0
3UF71.1
3UF71.2
3UF71.3
3UF71.4
2.4 ... 25
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
63 ... 630
Main circuit
Current setting Ie
0.3 ... 3
690; 3UF7103 and 3UF7104: 1 000 (at pollution degree 3)
690
kV
6; 3UF7103 and 3UF7104: 8
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
Three-phase current
Type of current
Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit
Short circuit
Accuracy of current measurement (in the range of 1 x minimum
current setting Iu to 8 x max. current setting Io)
Typical voltage measuring range
Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line voltage (e.g. UL1 L2)
Phase voltage (e.g. UL1 N)
Accuracy
Voltage measurement
(phase voltage UL in the range 230 ... 400 V)
Power factor measurement (in the rated load range p.f.= 0.4...0.8)
Apparent power measurement (in the rated load range)
V
V
110 ... 690

65 ... 400
3 (typical)
%
%
5 (typical)
5 (typical)
Notes on voltage measurement

In insulated, high-resistance or asymmetrically grounded forms
of power supply system and for single-phase systems
Supply lines for voltage measurement
In these networks the current/voltage measuring module can be used only

with an upstream decoupling module on the system interface.
In the supply lines from the main circuit for voltage measurement of
SIMOCODE pro it may be necessary to provide additional line protection!
Digital modules or multifunction module

Type
3UF7300, 3UF7310, 3UF7600
Control circuit
300 (at pollution degree 3)
kV
4
2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the version)
6 A operational class gG; 10 A quick-response (IEC 60947-5-1)

1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1); 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
6
6 A/24 V AC
2 A/24 V DC
6 A/120 V AC
0.55 A/60 V DC
3 A/230 V AC
0.25 A/125 V DC
4 inputs, electrically isolated, supplied externally with 24 V DC or

110 ... 240 V AC/DC depending on the version, connected to a common
potential
Inputs (binary)
Ground-fault modules or multifunction modules

Type
3UF7510, 3UF7600
Control circuit
Connectable residual-current transformers
3UL23
Type of current for monitoring
Type A (AC and pulsating DC residual currents)
Adjustable response value
30 mA ... 40 A
Relative measurement error
7.5 %
Temperature modules or multifunction modules

Type
3UF7600, 3UF7700
Sensor circuit
Number of temperature sensors
3UF7700
3UF7600
Typical sensor circuits
PT100
PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC
3 temperature sensors
1 temperature sensor
mA
mA
1 (typical)
0.2 (typical)
Open-circuit/short-circuit detection
Sensor type
- Open circuit
- Short circuit
- Measuring range
PT100/PT1000
-50 ... +500
Measuring accuracy at 20 C ambient temperature (T20)
<2
Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range)
0.05 per K deviation from T20
Conversion time
ms
500
Connection type
KTY83-110
-50 ... +175
KTY84
-40 ... +300
NTC
-
80 ... 160
Two- or three-wire connection
Detection possible
-- Detection not possible
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/11
10
Relay outputs
Number
Specified short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts
(relay outputs)
- Fuse links
- Miniature circuit breaker
- AC-15
- DC-13
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
Analog modules
Type
3UF74
Control circuit
Inputs
Channels
Parameterizable measuring ranges
Shielding
Max. input current (destruction limit)
Accuracy
Input resistance
Conversion time
Resolution
Open-circuit detection
Outputs
Channels
Parameterizable output range
Shielding
Max. voltage at output
Accuracy
Max. output load
Conversion time
Resolution
Short-circuit proof
mA
mA
%
ms
bit
mA
V DC
%
ms
bit
2 (passive)
0/4 ... 20
Up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required
40
1
50
150
12
With measuring range 4 ... 20 mA
1
0/4 ... 20
Up to 30 m shield recommended, from 30 m shield required
30
1
500
25
12
Yes
Connection type
Two-wire connection
Electrical separation of inputs/output

to the device electronics
No
Fail-safe digital modules

Type
3UF7320-1AB00-0 3UF7320-1AU00-0 3UF7330-1AB00-0 3UF7330-1AU00-0
Control circuit
Power consumption
110 ... 240 AC/DC; 24 DC

50/60 Hz
110 ... 240 AC/DC;

50/60 Hz
3W
9.5 VA/4.5 W
11 VA/5.5 W
300
kV
Relay outputs
Number
10
24 DC
4W
2 relay enabling circuits, 2 relay outputs
Version of the fuse link

For short-circuit protection of the relay enabling circuit
4, operational class gG

AC-15
DC-13
3 A/24 V AC
4 A/24 V DC
Inputs (binary)
5 (with internal power supply from the device electronics)
Cable length
Between sensor/start signal and evaluation electronics
For further digital signals
m
m
3 A/120 V AC
0.55 A/60 V DC
1.5 A/230 V AC
0.22 A/125 V DC
1 500
300
Safety data1)
SIL level max. according to IEC 61508
Performance level PL according to EN ISO 13849-1
Category according to EN ISO 13849-1
Stop category according to EN 60204-1
Probability of a dangerous failure

(at 40 C) for SIL 3 applications
Per hour (PFHd) at a high demand rate
On demand (PFDavg) at a low demand rate
T1 value for proof-test interval or
service life according to IEC 61508
1)
More safety data see system manual

"SIMOCODE pro Safety Fail-Safe Digital Modules",
10/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
1/h
4.5 x 10 -9
4.6 x 10 -9
4.4 x 10 -9
4.4 x 10 -9
5.4 x 10 -6
5.5 x 10 -6
5.1 x 10 -6
5.2 x 10 -6
20
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
General data
More information
If you want to use an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module in the SIMOCODE pro V system with PROFIBUS,
then the following configuration instructions concerning the type
and number of connectable expansion modules must be
observed.
The following tables show the maximum possible configuration
of the expansion modules for the various combinations.
The DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe expansion
modules behave in this connection like digital modules for
standard applications.
Use of an operator panel with display
Digital
modules
Digital
modules
Analog
modules
Temperature Ground-fault
modules
modules
Only operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V

(24 V DC or 110 ... 240 V AC/DC)
Max. 4 expansion modules can be used
Operator panel with display and current/voltage measurement

with SIMOCODE pro V (110 ... 240 V AC/DC)
Max. 3 expansion modules can be used or:
--
--
--
Available
-- Not available
Use of a decoupling module

(voltage measurement in insulated networks)
Digital
modules
Digital
modules
Analog
modules
modules
modules
SIMOCODE pro V (24 V DC)

1)
1)
SIMOCODE pro V (110 ... 240 V AC/DC)
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely isolated from each other
in accordance with IEC 60947-1. That is, they are designed with
double creepages and clearances. In the event of a fault, therefore, no parasitic voltages can be formed in neighboring circuits.
The instructions of Test log No. 2668 must be complied with.
Types of protection EEx e and EEx d
The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection
of the SIMOCODE pro system comply with the requirements for
overload protection of explosion-proof motors to the type of
protection:
EEx d "flameproof enclosure" e.g. according to IEC 60079-1
EEx e "increased safety" e.g. according to IEC 60079-7
When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control
voltage, electrical separation must be ensured using a battery or
a safety transformer according to IEC 61558-2-6.
EC type test certificate: BVS 06 ATEX F 001
Test log: BVS PP 05.2029 EG.
Selection data for type-tested assemblies/load feeders
For configuration tables according to
type of coordination "1" or "2", see
Manual "Configuring SIRIUS",
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0RA21-0AB0,
Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations",
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0RA21-1AB0,
SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS System Manual,
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0UF70-3AA1,
SIMOCODE pro PROFINET System Manual,
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AB1,
--
System manual
1)
1)
--
--
--
--
--
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes the motor

management system and its functions in detail. It provides
information on configuration, start-up, servicing and maintenance. A typical example of a reversing starter application is
used to teach the user quickly and practically how to use the
system. In addition to help on how to identify and rectify faults in
the event of a malfunction, the manual also contains special
information for servicing and maintenance. For selection of
equipment and for configuration, it is recommended to consult
the system manual.
Available
-- Not available
1)
No bistable relay outputs and no more than 5 of 7 relay outputs active

simultaneously (> 3 s).
Use of a decoupling module

(voltage measurement in insulated networks)
in combination with an operator panel with display
Digital
modules
Digital
modules
Analog
modules
modules
modules
SIMOCODE pro V (24 V DC)
--
--
A detailed description of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

fail-safe expansion modules is provided in the system manual
"SIMOCODE pro Safety Fail-Safe Digital Modules", which can be
downloaded from the Internet.
Internet
More information see www.siemens.com/simocode.
SIMOCODE pro V (110 ... 240 V AC/DC)

2)
--
--
--
--
1)
1)
3)
--
--
--
--
Available
-- Not available
1)

2)

3)
Analog module output is not used.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/13
10
Configuration instructions when using an operator panel

with display and/or a decoupling module with
SIMOCODE pro V with PROFIBUS
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Basic units

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro C
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485
4 I/3 O freely assignable, input for thermistor connection,
monostable relay outputs
Rated control supply voltage Us:
24 V DC
3UF7000-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7000-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
24 V DC
3UF7020-1AB01-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7020-1AU01-0
1 unit
42J
24 V DC
3UF7010-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7010-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
24 V DC
3UF7011-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7011-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7000-1A.00-0
SIMOCODE pro S
PROFIBUS DP interface, 1.5 Mbit/s, RS 485
monostable relay outputs, can be expanded by a
multifunction module
3UF7020-1A.01-0
SIMOCODE pro V
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485
monostable relay outputs, can be expanded by
expansion modules
3UF7010-1A.00-0
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET1)
10
ETHERNET/PROFINET IO,
OPC UA server and web server, 100 Mbit/s,
2 x connection to bus through RJ45, 4 I/3 O freely
assignable, input for thermistor connection, monostable
relay outputs, can be expanded by expansion modules
3UF7011-1A.00-0
1)
When using an operator panel with display, the product version must be
E07 or higher (from 08/2012).
10/14
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Basic units
Version
Current setting Width
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
0.3 ... 3
45
3UF7100-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
2.4 ... 25
45
1 unit
42J
55
120
}
}
3UF7101-1AA00-0
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
3UF7102-1AA00-0
3UF7103-1AA00-0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
20 ... 200
63 ... 630
120
145
3UF7103-1BA00-0
3UF7104-1BA00-0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
SIMOCODE pro (continued)

Straight-through
transformers
Busbar connections
3UF7100-1AA00-0
}
}

for SIMOCODE pro V
Voltage measuring up to 690 V
If required in connection with a decoupling module
Straight-through
transformers
3UF7110-1AA00-0
Busbar connections
0.3 ... 3
45
3UF7110-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
2.4 ... 25
45
1 unit
42J
55
120
}
}
3UF7111-1AA00-0
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
3UF7112-1AA00-0
3UF7113-1AA00-0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
20 ... 200
63 ... 630
120
145
3UF7113-1BA00-0
3UF7114-1BA00-0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
3UF7150-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
}
}
}
Decoupling modules
For connecting upstream from a current/voltage measuring A
module on the system interface when using voltage
detection in insulated, high-resistance or asymmetrically
grounded systems and in single-phase systems
3UF7150-1AA00-0
Operator panels
3UF7200-1AA00-0
Light gray
3UF7200-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
Titanium gray
3UF7200-1AA01-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7210-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7200-1AA10-0
Operator panel with display
for SIMOCODE pro V
3UF7210-1AA00-0
Installation in control cabinet door or front plate,

for plugging into SIMOCODE pro V and
SIMOCODE pro V PN,
7 LEDs for status indication and user-assignable buttons
for controlling the motor, multilingual display,
e.g. for indication of measured values, status information
or fault messages
Notes:
System manual "SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS" see
System manual "SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET" see
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit in a hardened version via
SIPLUS extreme upon request.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/15
10
Installation in control cabinet door or front plate,

for plugging into all SIMOCODE pro basic units,
10 LEDs for status indication and user-assignable
buttons for controlling the motor
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Expansion modules

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V

With SIMOCODE pro V, it is possible to expand the type
and number of inputs and outputs in steps. Each expansion
module has two system interfaces on the front. Through the
one system interface the expansion module is connected to
the system interface of the SIMOCODE pro V using a
connection cable; through the second system interface,
further expansion modules or the operator panel can be
connected. The power supply for the expansion modules is
provided by the connection cable through the basic unit.
Note:
Please order connection cable separately, see page 10/19.
Digital modules
Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional
binary inputs and relay outputs to the basic unit. The input
circuits of the digital modules are supplied from an external
power supply.
4 binary inputs and 2 relay outputs,
up to 2 digital modules can be connected
Relay outputs
Input voltage
Monostable
24 V DC
3UF7300-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7300-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
24 V DC
3UF7310-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7310-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7400-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7510-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7700-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7300-1AU00-0
Bistable
Analog modules
Basic unit can be optionally expanded with analog inputs
and outputs (0/4 ... 20 mA) by means of the analog
module.
10
2 inputs (passive) for input and 1 output for output of

0/4 ... 20 mA signals, max. 1 analog module can be
connected per pro V basic unit and max. 2 analog
modules per pro V PN basic unit
3UF7400-1AA00-0
Ground-fault modules1)
Ground-fault monitoring using 3UL23 residual-current
transformers and ground-fault modules is used in cases
where precise detection of the ground-fault current is
required or power systems with high impedance are
grounded.
With the ground-fault module, it is possible to determine
the precise fault current as a measured value, and to
define freely selectable warning and trip limits in a wide
range from 30 mA ... 40 A.
3UF7510-1AA00-0
1 input for connecting a 3UL23 residual-current transformer, up to 1 ground-fault module can be connected
Note:
For corresponding residual-current transformers,
see page 10/104.
Temperature modules
Independently of the thermistor motor protection of the
basic units, up to 3 analog temperature sensors can be
evaluated using a temperature module.
Sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 analog temperature
sensors, up to 1 temperature module can be connected
per pro V basic unit and max. 2 temperature modules per
pro V PN basic unit
3UF7700-1AA00-0
1)
Possible with pro V basic unit from product version E10 or pro V PN basic
unit from product version E04.
10/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Expansion modules

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro S

With SIMOCODE pro S, it is possible to expand the type
and number of inputs and outputs. The expansion module
has two system interfaces on the front. Through the one
system interface the expansion module is connected to the
system interface of the SIMOCODE pro S using a
connection cable; through the second system interface,
the operator panel can be connected. The power supply for
the expansion module is provided by the connection cable
through the basic unit.
Note:
Multifunction modules
The multifunction module is the expansion module of the
SIMOCODE pro S device series with the following
functions:
3UF7600-1AU01-0
Digital module function with four digital inputs and

two monostable relay outputs
Ground-fault module function with an input for the
connection of a 3UL23 residual-current transformer with
freely selectable warning and trip limits in a wide zone of
30 mA ... 40 A
Temperature module function with an input for connecting
an analog temperature sensor PT100, PT1000, KTY83,
KTY84, or NTC
max. 1 multifunction module can be connected per
pro S basic unit
Input voltage of the digital inputs:
}
3UF7600-1AB01-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7600-1AU01-0
1 unit
42J
10
24 V DC

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/17
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Fail-safe expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V

Thanks to the fail-safe expansion modules,
SIMOCODE pro V can be expanded with the function of a
safety relay for the fail-safe disconnection of motors.
A maximum of 1 fail-safe digital module can be connected;
it can be used instead of a digital module.
The fail-safe expansion modules are equipped likewise with
two system interfaces at the front for making the connection
to other system components. Unlike other expansion
modules, power is supplied to the modules through a
separate terminal connection.
Note:
DM-F Local fail-safe digital modules 1)
For fail-safe disconnection using a hardware signal
2 relay enabling circuits, joint switching; 2 relay outputs,
common potential disconnected fail-safe; inputs for sensor
circuit, start signal, cascading and feedback circuit, safety
function adjustable using DIP switches
24 V DC
3UF7320-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7320-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
24 V DC
3UF7330-1AB00-0
1 unit
42J
110 ... 240 V AC/DC
3UF7330-1AU00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7320-1AB00-0
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules1)
For fail-safe disconnection using PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe or
PROFINET/PROFIsafe
2 relay enabling circuits, joint switching; 2 relay outputs,
common potential disconnected fail-safe;
1 input for feedback circuit; 3 binary standard inputs
3UF7330-1AB00-0
10
1)
Only possible with SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, product version E07 and
higher (from 05/2011) or SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.
Note:
System manual "SIMOCODE pro Safety Fail-Safe Digital
Modules" see
10/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Connection cables (essential accessory)

Connection cables
In different lengths for connecting basic unit, current
measuring module, current/voltage measuring module,
operator panel or expansion modules or decoupling
module
3UF7932-0AA00-0
Version
Length
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flat
0.025 m
0.1 m
0.3 m
0.5 m
}
}
}
}
3UF7930-0AA00-0
3UF7931-0AA00-0
3UF7935-0AA00-0
3UF7932-0AA00-0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
42J
42J
Round
Round
Round
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.5 m
}
}
}
3UF7932-0BA00-0
3UF7937-0BA00-0
3UF7933-0BA00-0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
42J
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7900-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7901-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
Light gray
3UF7950-0AA00-0
5 units
42J
Titanium gray
3RA6936-0B
5 units
42F
Addressing plugs
3UF7910-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
PC cables and adapters

RS 232 PC cables
For connecting to the serial interface of a PC/PG,
for communication with SIMOCODE pro through the
system interface
USB PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0
For connecting to the USB interface of a PC/PG,

for communication with SIMOCODE pro through the
system interface
USB/serial adapters
3UF7941-0AA00-0
To connect an RS 232 PC cable to to the USB interface of

a PC, recommended for use in conjunction with
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Memory modules
Memory module for SIMOCODE pro C,

SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V
For saving the complete parameterization of a
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V
system
3UF7900-0AA00-0
Memory module for SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET
For saving the complete parameterization of a
SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET system
Interface covers
Interface covers
For system interface
3UF7950-0AA00-0
Addressing plugs
For assigning the PROFIBUS address without using a
PC/PG to SIMOCODE pro through the system interface
3UF7910-0AA00-0

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/19
10
This enables transmission to a new system,

e.g. when a device is replaced, without the need for
additional aids or detailed knowledge of the device.
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3UF7902-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
Accessories for motor control center

With the draw-out technology often used in motor control
centers it is possible to integrate a SIMOCODE pro initialization module in the switchboard on a permanent basis.
Feeder-related parameter and address data can then be
permanently assigned to this feeder.
Initialization module1)
For automatic parameterization of SIMOCODE pro S,
SIMOCODE pro V and SIMOCODE pro V PROFINET,
for fixed-mounted installation in switchboards
Y connection cable1)
3UF7902-0AA00-0
For use in conjunction with the initialization module;

connects the basic unit, current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring module, and initialization module
System interface length
Open cable end
0.1 m
1.0 m
3UF7931-0CA00-0
1 unit
42J
0.5 m
1.0 m
3UF7932-0CA00-0
1 unit
42J
1.0 m
1.0 m
3UF7937-0CA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7960-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7920-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7922-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
For pushbuttons of the 3UF720 operator panel
3UF7925-0AA00-0
100
400 units
42J
For pushbuttons of the 3UF721 operator panel

with display
3UF7925-0AA01-0
100
600 units
42J
For LEDs of the 3UF720 operator panel
3UF7925-0AA02-0
100 1 200 units
42J
3RV2928-0B
Bus connection terminals

Bus connection terminal
For shield support and strain relief of the PROFIBUS cable
on a SIMOCODE pro S
3UF7960-0AA00-0
Door adapters
Door adapters
For external connection of the system interface,
e.g. outside a control cabinet
10
3UF7920-0AA00-0
Adapters for operator panel

Adapters for operator panel
The adapter enables the smaller 3UF7200 operator panel
from SIMOCODE pro to be used in a front panel cutout in
which previously, e.g. after a change of system, a larger
3UF52 operator panel from SIMOCODE-DP had been used,
3UF7922-0AA00-0
Labeling strips
Labeling strips
3UF7925-0AA02-0
Push-in lugs
e.g. on mounting plate, 2 units required per device
Can be used for 3UF71.0, 3UF71.1 and 3UF71.2
3RB2928-0B
1)
100
10 units
41E
Can be used for 3UF700, 3UF701, 3UF73, 3UF74, 3UF75 B

and 3UF77
3RP1903
10 units
41H
Can be used for 3UF7020, 3UF7600
3ZY1311-0AA00
10 units
41L
Possible with pro V basic unit, product version E09 (11/2012) and higher,
pro S basic unit or pro V PN basic unit.
10/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Length 100 mm, can be used for 3UF71.3-1BA00-0

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3RT1956-4EA1
1 unit
41B
3RT1966-4EA1
1 unit
41B
3RT1956-4EA2
1 unit
41B
3RT1966-4EA2
1 unit
41B
3RT1956-4EA3
1 unit
41B
3RT1966-4EA3
1 unit
41B
Up to 70 mm2, can be used for 3UF71.3-1BA00-0
3RT1955-4G
1 unit
41B
3RT1956-4G
1 unit
41B
3RT1966-4G
1 unit
41B
115/230 V AC
3UF1900-1KA00
1 unit
42J
24 V DC
3UF1900-1KB00
1 unit
42J
Terminal covers
3RT1956-4EA1

Between contactor and current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring module for direct mounting
3RT1956-4EA2
Can be used for 3UF71.3-1BA00-0

Can be used for 3UF71.4-1BA00-0
Box terminal blocks

Box terminal blocks
3RT195.-4G
Bus termination modules

Bus termination modules
With separate control supply voltage for bus termination
following the last unit on the bus line
10
Supply voltage:
3UF1900-1KA00

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/21
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Parameterization and service software for SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Delivered without PC cable
Version
DT
Article No.
License key on USB stick, Class A
License key download, Class A

Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES 2007
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1322-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) V12 Basic

Floating License for one user
Engineering software,
software and documentation on DVD,
6 languages (German/English/French/Italian/
Spanish/Chinese),
for all SIMOCODE pro with PROFIBUS,
online functions through system interface)
3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) V12 Standard

Spanish/Chinese),
online functions through system interface
parameterizing with integrated graphics editor
(CFC-based)
Floating license for one user,

engineering software,
license key on USB stick, Class A,
Spanish/Chinese),
combo license for parallel use of
SIMOCODE ES 2007 and SIMOCODE ES V12,
online functions through the system interface,
(CFC-based)
10
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES V12 Basic

Spanish/Chinese),
(CFC-based)
Software Update Service
For 1 year with automatic extension,
assuming the current software version is in use,
(CFC-based)
Notes:
Please order PC cable separately, see page 10/19.
10/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) V12 Premium

Spanish/Chinese),
online functions through system interface and PROFIBUS,
(CFC-based)

Spanish/Chinese),
combo license for parallel use of
SIMOCODE ES 2007 and SIMOCODE ES V12,
online functions through the system interface and
PROFIBUS,
(CFC-based)
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES V12 Standard
Spanish/Chinese),
(CFC-based)
10

PROFIBUS,
(CFC-based)
Notes:

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/23
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.

Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES 2004 and later
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic

software and documentation on CD,
3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard

communication through system interface,
integrated graphics editor

Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
10

Notes:
10/24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium

communication through PROFIBUS/PROFINET or system
interface, integrated graphics editor,
STEP7 Object Manager

communication through PROFIBUS/PROFINET or
system interface, integrated graphics editor,
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
Notes:

10

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/25
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1632-1XX02-0YA0
1 unit
42J
3ZS1632-2XX02-0YB0
1 unit
42J
3ZS1632-1XX02-0YE0
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7 Version V8

with Advanced Process Library (APL)
Engineering software V8
For one engineering station (single license)
including runtime software for execution of the
AS modules in an automation system
(single license), German/English
Scope of supply:
SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system,
with Advanced Process Library,
for PCS 7 version V8.0
3ZS1632-1XX02-0YA0
Type of delivery:
Software and documentation on CD,
one license for one engineering station,
one license for one automation system
Runtime license V8
For execution of the AS modules in an
automation system (single license)
Required for using the AS modules of the engineering
software V8 within a plant
Type of delivery:
One license for one automation system,
without software and documentation
Upgrade for PCS 7 block library
SIMOCODE pro, V6.0 or V7
to version SIMOCODE pro V8
Scope of supply:
10
Type of delivery:
Notes:
10/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3UF7982-0AA10-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7982-0AA11-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7982-0AA13-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7982-0AA20-0
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7 Version 7

including runtime software for execution of the AS modules
in an automation system (single license),
German/English/French
Scope of supply:
for PCS7 version V7.0/V7.1
3UF7982-0AA00-0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V7
For execution of the AS modules in an automation system
(single license)
software V7 or the engineering software migration V7-V8 on
an additional automation system within a plant
Type of delivery:
SIMOCODE pro, V6.0 or V6.1
to version SIMOCODE pro V7.0/V7.1
Scope of supply:
AS modules and faceplates for integrating SIMOCODE pro
into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS7 version V7.0 or V7.1
Type of delivery:
Engineering software migration V7-V8
10
For upgrading (migrating) an existing engineering software

V7 of the SIMOCODE pro block library for PCS 7
Conditions of use:
Availability of the engineering software V7 (license) of the
SIMOCODE pro block library for PCS 7 for the
PCS 7 version V7.0 or V7.1
The engineering software migration V7-V8 can be installed
directly onto a system with PCS 7 version V8.0; installation
of the previous version is unnecessary.
Scope of supply:
Type of delivery:
license for upgrading an existing license
for one engineering station and a plant's assigned
runtime licenses
Notes:
Programming and Operating Manual SIMOCODE pro Library for
PCS 7 see

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/27
Siemens AG 2013

3UF18 current transformers
for overload protection
Overview
The 3UF18 current transformers are protection transformers and
are used for actuating overload relays. Protection transformers
are designed to ensure proportional current transfer up to a multiple of the primary rated current. The 3UF18 current transformers convert the maximum current of the corresponding operating
range into the standard value of 1 A secondary.

Mounting type
Operating range
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
For stand-alone installation

Screw fixing and snap-on
mounting onto TH 35 standard
mounting rail according to
IEC 60715
0.25 2.51)
1.25 12.51)
2.5 251)
12.5 50
16 65
25 100
C
C
C
C
C
C
3UF1843-1BA00
3UF1843-2AA00
3UF1843-2BA00
3UF1845-2CA00
3UF1847-2DA00
3UF1848-2EA00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
42J
42J
42J
42J
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
3UF1850-3AA00
3UF1852-3BA00
3UF1854-3CA00
3UF1856-3DA00
3UF1857-3EA00
3UF1868-3FA00
3UF1868-3GA00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
42J
42J
42J
42J
42J
42J
42J
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
D
D
B
B
B
B
3TX7446-0A
3TX7466-0A
3TX7506-0A
3TX7536-0A
3TX7686-0A
3TX7696-0A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
2 units
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
D
D
D
C
C
3TX7466-0B
3TX7506-0B
3TX7536-0B
3TX7686-0B
3TX7696-0B
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41B
41B
41B
41B
41B
3UF1843
For mounting onto contactors and stand-alone installation

Screw fixing
3UF1868
1)
32 130
50 200
63 250
100 400
125 500
160 630
205 820
The following setting ranges for the protection of EEx e motors are
applicable:
3UF1843-1BA00, 0.25 ... 1.25 A;
3UF1843-2AA00, 1.25 ... 6.3 A;
3UF1843-2BA00, 2.5 ... 12.5 A.
10
Accessories
For contactor type
Price
per PU
Terminal covers
For transformer/contactor combinations and stand-alone
installation for transformer (cover required per connection
side)
3UF1845
3UF1848
3UF1850, 3UF1852
3UF1854 to 3UF1857
3UF1868-3FA00
3UF1868-3GA00
3TX7466-0A
For covering the screw terminal for direct mounting on

contactor (cover required per contactor/transformer
combination)
3UF1848
3UF1850, 3UF1852
3UF1854 to 3UF1857
3UF1868-3FA00
3UF1868-3GA00
10/28
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

General data
Overview
SIPLUS LOGO!
The control system for use in the toughest ambient conditions
With extended temperature range from -40/-25 C to +70 C
Use under medial loading (corrosive gas atmosphere)
Condensation permissible
With the service-proven PLC technology from LOGO!
User-friendly handling, programming, maintenance and
service
Ideal for use in vehicle manufacturing, environmental
engineering, mining, chemical plants, conveyor systems, the
food industry, etc.
LOGO! logic modules
LOGO! logic modules

The compact, user-friendly, and low-cost solution for simple
control tasks
Compact, user-friendly, can be used universally without
accessories
All in one: The display and operator panel are integrated
36 different functions can be linked at a press of a button or
with PC software; up to 130 times in total
Functions can be changed simply with the press of a button.
no complicated rewiring
Accessories:
With the front panel assembly kit, mounting the logic modules
is easy and safe also in front panels, with degree of protection
IP65 possible.
To ensure safe operation at a combustion engine battery it may
be necessary to install a SIPLUS upmiter voltage reducer
between the battery and SIPLUS LOGO!.
Information on LOGO! can be found in Catalog ST 70:
www.siemens.com/simatic/printmaterial
or at
www.siemens.com/siplus-extreme
Brochures to assist in the selection of SIMATIC products can be
found at
www.siemens.com/simatic/printmaterial
Application
LOGO! is universally applicable, e.g.:
Building installation and wiring (lighting, shutters, awnings,
doors, access control, barriers, ventilation systems, etc.)
Control cabinet installation
Machine and device construction (pumps, small presses,
compressors, hydraulic lifts, conveyors, etc.)
Special controls for conservatories and greenhouses
Signal preprocessing for other controllers
Marine approvals
American Bureau of Shipping, Bureau Veritas,
Det Norske Veritas, Germanischer Lloyd, Lloyds Register of
Shipping; Polski Rejestr Statkw etc.
10
The LOGO! logic module is the user-friendly, low-cost solution

for simple control tasks.
The LOGO! Modular logic modules can be expanded easily for

each application.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/29
Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

Overview
The space-saving basic versions
Interface for connecting expansion modules,
max. 24 digital inputs, 16 digital outputs, 8 analog inputs and
2 analog outputs can be addressed
With connection option for LOGO! TD text display
(can be connected to all LOGO! -0BA6 basic versions)
LOGO! -0BA7 versions
Ethernet interface for communication with SIMATIC controller,
SIMATIC panel and PC
Networking of up to 8 LOGO! units
Use of standard SD card or SIMATIC memory card

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
LOGO! Modular basic versions (-0BA6)

LOGO! logic modules 24C
6ED1052-1CC01-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-1MD00-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-1HB00-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-1FB00-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-1MD00-0BA7
1 unit
200
6ED1052-1FB00-0BA7
1 unit
200
Control supply voltage 24 V DC,

8 digital inputs 24 V DC, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs (0 to 10 V),
4 digital outputs 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
with integrated time switch;
200 function blocks can be combined,
modular expandability
10
LOGO! logic modules 12/24RC

Control supply voltage 12/24 V DC,
8 digital inputs 12/24 V DC, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs (0 ... 10 V),
4 relay outputs 10 A,
integrated time switch,
LOGO! logic modules 24RC
Control supply voltage 24 V AC/DC,
8 digital inputs 24 V AC/DC,
LOGO! logic modules 230RC
Control supply voltage 115/230 V AC/DC,
8 digital inputs 115/230 V AC/DC,
LOGO! Modular basic versions (-0BA7)

LOGO! logic modules 12/24RCE
Ethernet interface,
LOGO! logic modules 230RCE
Ethernet interface,
10/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

SIPLUS LOGO! Modular basic versions
Overview
The space-saving basic versions
SIPLUS LOGO! -2BA7 versions
Ethernet interface for communication with SIMATIC controller,
SIMATIC panel and PC
Networking of up to 8 LOGO! units
Use of standard SD card or SIMATIC memory card
Note:
SIPLUS extreme products are based upon Siemens Industry
standard products. The content listed here was taken over from
the relevant standard products. Information specific to
SIPLUS extreme has been added.
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular basic versions

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular basic versions (-2BA6)

extended temperature range and medial loading
D
6AG1052-1CC01-2BA6
1 unit
470
6AG1052-1MD00-2BA6
1 unit
470
6AG1052-1HB00-2BA6
1 unit
470
6AG1052-1FB00-2BA6
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! 12/24RCE
6AG1052-1MD00-2BA7
1 unit
470

8 digital inputs 12/24 V DC, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs (0 to 10 V),
integrated time switch;
Ethernet interface,
SIPLUS LOGO! 230RCE
6AG1052-1FB00-2BA7
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! 24
8 digital inputs 24 V DC, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs (0 to 10 V),
with integrated time switch;
SIPLUS LOGO! 12/24RC
SIPLUS LOGO! 24RC
10

SIPLUS LOGO! 230RC
SIPLUS LOGO! Modular basic versions (-2BA7)


8 digital inputs 115/230 V AC/DC, 4 relay outputs 10 A,
integrated time switch;
Ethernet interface,

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/31
Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

Overview
The cost-optimized basic versions

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

LOGO! logic modules 24Co
6ED1052-2CC01-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-2MD00-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-2HB00-0BA6
1 unit
200
6ED1052-2FB00-0BA6
1 unit
200

8 digital inputs 24 V DC,
of which 4 can be used as analog inputs (0 ... 10 V),
4 digital outputs 24 V DC, 0.3 A;
without display and keyboard,
10
LOGO! logic modules 12/24RCo

8 digital inputs 12/24 V DC,
LOGO! logic modules 24RCo
LOGO! logic modules 230RCo
10/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

Overview
The cost-optimized basic versions
Note:

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

SIPLUS LOGO! 24o
6AG1052-2CC01-2BA6
1 unit
470
6AG1052-2MD00-2BA6
1 unit
470
6AG1052-2HB00-2BA6
1 unit
470
6AG1052-2FB00-2BA6
1 unit
470

4 digital outputs 24 V DC, 0.3 A;
SIPLUS LOGO! 12/24RCo
SIPLUS LOGO! 24RCo
10

SIPLUS LOGO! 230RCo

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/33
Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

Overview
Expansion modules for connection to LOGO! Modular
With digital inputs and outputs, analog inputs or analog outputs

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

LOGO! DM8 24
6ED1055-1CB00-0BA0
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1CB10-0BA0
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1MB00-0BA1
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1HB00-0BA0
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1NB10-0BA0
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1FB00-0BA1
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1FB10-0BA0
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1MA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1MD00-0BA1
1 unit
200
6ED1055-1MM00-0BA1
1 unit
200

4 digital outputs 24 V DC, 0.3 A
LOGO! DM16 24
8 digital outputs 24 V DC, 0.3 A
10
LOGO! DM8 12/24R

4 relay outputs 5 A
LOGO! DM8 24R
4 relay outputs 5 A
LOGO! DM16 24R
8 relay outputs 5 A
LOGO! DM8 230R
4 relay outputs 5 A
LOGO! DM16 230R
8 relay outputs 5 A
LOGO! AM2
2 analog inputs 0 ... 10 V or 0 ... 20 mA,
10 bit resolution
LOGO! AM2 PT 100
2 analog inputs PT100,
temperature range -50 C ... 200 C
LOGO! AM2 AQ
2 analog outputs 0 ... 10 V,
0/4 ... 20 mA
10/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

SIPLUS LOGO! Modular expansion modules
Overview
Expansion modules for connection to LOGO! Modular
With digital inputs and outputs, analog inputs or analog outputs
Note:

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

D
6AG1055-1CB00-2BY0
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! DM8 12/24

4 digital inputs 12/24 V DC
Temperature range -40 ... +70 C
6AG1055-1PB00-2BY0
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! DM8 24R

6AG1055-1HB00-2BY0
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! DM8 12/24R

temperature range -40 ... +70 C
6AG1055-1MB00-2BY1
1 unit
470

6AG1055-1FB00-2BY1
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! AM2

2 analog inputs 0 ... 10 V or 0 ... 20 mA,
10 bit resolution,
6AG1055-1MA00-2BY0
1 unit
470
SIPLUS LOGO! AM2 AQ

2 analog inputs 0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA,
10 bit resolution,
6AG1055-1MM00-2BY1
1 unit
470

8 digital outputs 24 V DC,
6AG1055-1NB10-2BA0
1 unit
470
10
SIPLUS LOGO! DM8 24


Siemens IC 10 2014
10/35
Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

LOGO! CM EIB/KNX communication modules
Overview
Expansion module for the LOGO! basic versions
For communication between the LOGO! master and external
EIB components via EIB
LOGO! CM EIB/KNX communication module
Application
The CM EIB/KNX communication module allows communication
between the LOGO! master and external EIB units via EIB. This
module can be used to integrate LOGO! in an EIB system.

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
470
LOGO! CM EIB KNX communication module

For connection to EIB, control supply voltage 24 V DC
6BK1700-0BA00-0AA2
10
10/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

LOGO! CSM unmanaged
Overview
Key features of the LOGO! CSM are:
Unmanaged 4-port switch, of which one port on the front side
is for simple diagnostics access
Two versions for the voltage ranges 12/24 V DC or
230 V AC/DC
It is easy to connect via four RJ45 standard plug-in
connections
Space-saving, optimized for connection to LOGO!
Economical solution for creating small, local Ethernet networks
Stand-alone use for networking any number of Ethernet
devices
To assist in selecting the right Industrial Ethernet switches as
well as in the configuration of modular variants, the SIMATIC NET
Selection Tool is available at:
Online version:
www.siemens.com/snst
LOGO! CSM unmanaged
The module is used for the connection of a LOGO! and up to

three additional nodes to an Industrial Ethernet network with
10/100 Mbit/s in an electrical line, tree or star structure.
Offline version:
www.siemens.com/snst-download

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
LOGO! CSM compact switch module

Unmanaged switch for connection to a LOGO! (-0BA7) and
up to three additional nodes in the Industrial Ethernet
with 10/100 Mbit/s; 4 x RJ45 ports; LED diagnostics, LOGO! module
LOGO! CSM 12/24
External 12 V DC or 24 V DC power supply
6GK7177-1MA10-0AA0
1 unit
5P1
LOGO! CSM 230

External 115 ... 240 V AC power supply
6GK7177-1FA10-0AA0
1 unit
5P1
10

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/37
Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

Overview
Every LOGO! can now be connected to the AS-Interface system
Using the AS-Interface connection for LOGO!, an intelligent
slave can be integrated in the AS-Interface system. With the
modular interface it becomes possible to integrate the different
basic units in the system according to their functionality.
Similarly, functionalities can be quickly and easily adapted to
new requirements by exchanging the basic unit.
The interface module provides four inputs and four outputs on
the system. These I/Os do not actually exist in hardware terms,
however, but are only virtually present through the interface on
the bus.
AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
42C

Four virtual digital inputs,
four virtual digital outputs
3RK1400-0CE10-0AA2
10
10/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

Accessories

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ED1055-4MH00-0BA0
1 unit
200
6AG1055-4MH00-2BA0
1 unit
470
6AG1053-1AA00-2AA0
1 unit
470
B
X
C
C
C
C
6ED1050-1AA00-0AE8
6ED1050-1AA00-0BE8
6ED1050-1AA00-0CE8
6ED1050-1AA00-0DE8
6ED1050-1AA00-0EE8
6ED1050-1AA00-0KE8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
200
200
200
200
200
200
LOGO! memory cards

Program module for copying, with know-how protection
6ED1056-1DA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
LOGO! battery cards

Battery modules for buffering the integrated real-time clock (not LOGO! 24)
6ED1056-6XA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
LOGO! memory/battery cards

Combined program and battery modules, with know-how protection and buffering of
the integrated real-time clock (not LOGO! 24)
6ED1056-7DA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
LOGO! PROM
D
Programming units for simultaneous duplication of program module contents on up to
8 program modules
6AG1057-1AA01-0BA6
1 unit
470
LOGO! TD text displays

LOGO! TD text displays
4-line text display, for connection to all LOGO! -0BA6 basic and pure versions,
incl. connection cable
SIPLUS LOGO! TD text displays

SIPLUS LOGO! TD text displays
(extended temperature range -10 ... +60 C and medial loading)
4-line text display, for connection to all LOGO! basic and pure versions
-0BA6 and higher, incl. connection cable
SIPLUS voltage reducers

SIPLUS Upmiter voltage reducers
For safe operation at combustion engine batteries
LOGO! manuals
LOGO! Manual
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Chinese
LOGO! Cards (only -0BA6)
6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
LOGO! USB PC cables

For transferring programs between LOGO! and the PC, incl. drivers on CD-ROM
6ED1057-1AA01-0BA0
1 unit
200
LOGO! modem cables

Adapter cable for analog modem communication
6ED1057-1CA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
C
D
C
D
6AG1057-1AA00-0AA0
6AG1057-1AA00-0AA3
6AG1057-1AA00-0AA1
6AG1057-1AA00-0AA2
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
470
470
470
470
LOGO! starter kits 12/24 V

Language-neutral with LOGO! 12/24RC (-0BA6)
6ED1057-3BA00-0AA6
1 unit
2SP
LOGO! starter kits 230 V

Language-neutral with LOGO! 230RC (-0BA6)
6ED1057-3BA02-0AA6
1 unit
2SP
LOGO! TD starter kits

Language-neutral with LOGO! 12/24RCo (-0BA6) and LOGO! TD
6ED1057-3BA10-0AA6
1 unit
2SP
LOGO! starter kits 12/24 V

Language-neutral with LOGO! 12/24RCE (-0BA7) + LOGO! Power 24 V, 1.3 A
6ED1057-3BA00-0AA7
1 unit
2SP
LOGO! starter kits 230 V

Language-neutral with LOGO! 230RCE (-0BA7)
6ED1057-3BA02-0AA7
1 unit
2SP
A
A
A
A
A
6XV1870-3QE50
6XV1870-3QH10
6XV1870-3QH20
6XV1870-3QH60
6XV1870-3QN10
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5K1
5K1
5K1
5K1
5K1
6GK1901-1FC00 0AA0
1 unit
5K1
Front panel assembly kits

Front panel assembly kits
Width: 4 MW
Width: 4 MW, with pushbuttons
Width: 8 MW
Width: 8 MW, with pushbuttons
LOGO! starter kits (-0BA6)

In TANOS box, with USB cable, LOGO!, LOGO!Soft Comfort V6
LOGO! starter kits (-0BA7)

In TANOS box, with Ethernet cable, LOGO!, LOGO!Soft Comfort V7, WinCC Basic V11
SIMATIC NET cables

IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ45 connectors
0.5 m
1m
2m
6m
10 m
IE FC Outlet RJ45
For connection of industrial Ethernet FC cables and TP cords;
scaled pricing from 10 and 50 units

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/39
10
LOGO! cables
LOGO! PC cables
For transferring programs between LOGO! and PC
Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

LOGO!Contact
Overview
Switching module for switching resistive loads and motors
directly
LOGO!Contact
Application
LOGO!Contact is a switching module for direct switching of
resistive loads (up to 20 A) and motors (up to 4 kW).
LOGO!Contact operates hum-free without noise pollution.
LOGO!Contact is universally applicable:

Buildings/electrical installations.
Industry and commerce.

Version
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
LOGO!Contact
Switching module for direct switching of resistive loads up to 20 A
and motors up to 4 kW
10
Switching voltage:
24 V
6ED1057-4CA00-0AA0
1 unit
200
230 V
6ED1057-4EA00-0AA0
1 unit
200
10/40
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
LOGO! Logic Modules

LOGO! Software
Overview
The connection between LOGO! and the PC is made with the
LOGO! PC cable (serial interface) or the LOGO! USB PC cable
(USB interface).
With LOGO! -0BA7 the connection is made via the integrated
Ethernet interface.
Minimum system requirements
Windows 98 SE, NT4.0, ME, 2000, XP (32 bit),
Vista or 7 (32/64 bit)
Pentium PC.
90 Mbyte free on hard disk.
64 Mbyte RAM.
SVGA graphics card with minimum resolution 800x600
(256 colors).
LOGO!Soft Comfort
The user-friendly software for switching program generation on

the PC
Switching program generation for function diagrams (FBD) or
contact diagrams (LAD)
Additional testing, simulation, online testing and archiving of
the switching programs
Professional documentation with the help of various comment
and print functions
Mac OS X
Mac OS X 10.4 with J2SE 1.5.0
Mac OS X 10.5 with J2SE 1.6.0
PowerMac G3, G4, G4 Cube, iMac, PowerBook G3, G4 or
iBook.
Linux
Tested with SUSE Linux 10 SP2, Kernel 2.6.16
Runs on all Linux releases on which Java 2 SDK Version 1.3.1
runs.
Please consult your Linux release for hardware requirements.
Application
LOGO!Soft Comfort is the multilingual software for switching
program generation with LOGO! on the PC. LOGO!Soft Comfort
can be used to program all devices of the LOGO! family.

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6ED1058-0BA02-0YA1
1 unit
200
6ED1058-0CA02-0YE1
1 unit
200
10
Version
LOGO!Soft Comfort
LOGO!Soft Comfort V7.0
For programming on the PC in LAD/FBD;
runs on Windows 7 (32/64 bit), VISTA, XP, NT 4.0, 2000, 98SE,
Linux and Mac OSX;
on CD-ROM
LOGO!Soft Comfort V 7.0 Upgrade
Upgrade from V1.0 to V7.0

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/41
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
Overview
Application
Timing relays with ON-delay
Interference pulse suppression (gating of interference pulses)
Gradual start-up of motors so as not to overload the power
supply
Timing relays with OFF-delay
Generation of overtravel functions following removal of voltage
Gradual, delayed shutdown, e.g. of motors or fans, to allow a
plant to be shut down selectively
Wye-delta timing relay
Switchover of motors from wye to delta with a dead interval of
50 ms to prevent phase-to-phase short circuits
Multifunctional timing relays
Maximum flexibility, with a device for every application
7PV15, SIRIUS 3RP15 and SIRIUS 3RP20 timing relays
Solid-state timing relays are used in control, starting, and protective circuits for all switching operations involving time delays.
Their fully developed concept and space-saving, compact
design make the SIRIUS 3RP timing relays ideal modules for
control cabinet, switchgear and control manufacturers in the
industry.
With their narrow design, the 7PV15 timing relays are ideal in
particular for use in heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
systems and in compressors. All 7PV15 timing relays in this
enclosure version are suitable for snap-on mounting onto
TH 35 standard mounting rails according to IEC 60175.
The enclosure complies with DIN 43880.
10
Benefits
Clear-cut basic range with five basic units in the case of the
7PV15 timing relays, and seven basic units in the case of the
3RP timing relays
Logistic advantages provided by versions with wide voltage
range and wire setting range
No tools required for assembly or disassembly on standard
mounting rails
Cadmium-free relay contacts
Recyclable, halogen-free enclosure
Optimum price/performance ratio
Versions with logical separation
Low variance: One design for distribution boards and for
control cabinets
Compliance with EMC requirements for buildings
Environmentally friendly laser inscription instead of printing
containing solvents
Hard gold-plated relay contacts for optimum interplay with
electronic controls
Timing relays suitable for the 3RT miniature contactors allow
smaller tier spacing
Positively driven relay contacts
Versions with screw terminals or alternatively with spring-type
terminals
10/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
3RP15 and 3RP20 function table
3RP157.
3RP1555
3RP1540
Contact open
3RP153.
Contact closed
3RP1527
3RP1525
B1)
3RP1505-.A
3RP2025
3RP2005-.A
NSB0_00858
NSB0_00859
3RP151.
3RP20 timing relay 3RP15 timing relay

and
and 3RP1901 label set
3RP1901 label set
Identification
letter
Function chart
3RP1901-0A
Function
1 CO contact
ON-delay
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
>35 ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay
Observe minimum ON period for correct

operation. For 3RP1540-..W31
Us 24 to 40 V AC/DC: 400 ms and
Us > 40 to 240 V AC/DC: 200 ms.
A1/A2
ON-delay and
OFF-delay
with control signal
(t = ton = toff)
A1/A2
NSB0_00860a
200 ms
15/18
15/16
NSB0_00861
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB0_00862
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
15/18
15/16
10
NSB0_00863
A1/A2
Interval
Pulse period
NSB0_00864
Passing make contact
C1)
Clock-pulse,
starting with interval
(dead time, pulse period, and time setting
ranges each separately adjustable)
Flashing,
(pulse/interval 1:1)
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
F1)
G1)
H1)
t
A1/A2
> 35 ms
NSB0_00865
Passing break contact

with control signal
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
Pulse-forming
with control signal
(pulse generation at the output does not
depend on duration of energizing)
A1/A2
Additive ON-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
NSB0_00867
> 35 ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t1
t3
t2
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB0_00868
ON-delay
The two-wire timing relay is connected in
series with the load. Timing begins after
application of the exciting voltage.
The semiconductor output then becomes
conducting, and the load is under power.
A1/A2
t
Function available
1)
Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B,
NSB0_00869a
1 NO contact (semiconductor)
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero. This
does not apply to G and H, which are not retriggerable.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/43
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
2 CO contacts
ON-delay
A1/A2
NSB0_00871
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
ON-delay
and instantaneous contact
A1/A2
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay
with control signal
A!
NSB0_00872
15/18
15/16
A1/A2
B1)
> 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB0_00873
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
OFF-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
B1/A2
NSB0_00874
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
OFF-delay
200 ms
A1/A2
NSB0_00875a
15/18
15/16
10
B!1)
> 35ms
25/28
25/26
t
A1/A2
25/28
25/26
t
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
Function available
after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero
(retriggerable). This does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not
retriggerable.
10/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
C1)
A1/A2
21/24
21/22
1)
NSB0_00876
15/18
15/16
ON-delay and OFF-delay

with control signal and
instantaneous contact
(t = ton = toff)
B1/A2
NSB0_00877

with control signal (t = ton = toff)
C!1)
3RP157.
3RP1560
3RP1555
3RP1540
3RP153.
3RP1527
3RP1525
3RP151.
Identification
letter
3RP1901-0A
Contact open
3RP1505-.R
Contact closed
3RP1901-0B
3RP15 timing relay

3RP1505-.B
3RP20 timing
relay
and 3RP1901
label set
3RP2025
Function chart
3RP2005-.B
Function
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
3RP157.
3RP1560
3RP1555
3RP1540
3RP153.
3RP1527
3RP1525
3RP151.
Identification
letter
3RP1901-0A
Contact open
3RP1505-.R
Contact closed
3RP1901-0B
3RP15 timing relay

3RP1505-.B
3RP20 timing
relay
and 3RP1901
label set
3RP2025
Function chart
3RP2005-.B
Function
2 CO contacts (continued)
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
A1/A2
D!
NSB0_00879
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
Flashing,
and instantaneous contacts
NSB0_00878
Flashing,
A1/A2
NSB0_00880
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22

with control signal
E!
NSB0_00881

A1/A2
F1)
> 35ms
B1/A2
NSB0_00882
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
A1/A2
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
A1/A2
G1)
> 35ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB0_00884
Pulse-forming
with control signal
(pulse generation at the output
does not depend on duration of
energizing)
F!1)
>35ms
NSB0_00883

with control signal
10
25/28
25/26
t
Function available
1)
Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B, after
the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero (retriggerable). This does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/45
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
3RP157.
3RP1560
3RP1555
3RP1540
3RP153.
3RP1527
3RP1525
3RP151.
Identification
letter
Contact open
3RP1901-0A
Contact closed
3RP1505-.R
3RP2005-.B
3RP15 timing relay

3RP1901-0B
3RP20 timing
relay
and 3RP1901
label set
3RP1505-.B
Function chart
3RP2025
Function
2 CO contacts (continued)
A1/A2
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
21/24
21/22
Additive ON-delay
with control signal
G!1)
>35ms
NSB0_00885
Pulse-forming
with control signal
and instantaneous contact)
(pulse generation at the output
does not depend on duration of
energizing)
A1/A2
t1
t2
H1)
t3
B1/A2
NSB0_00886
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
A./A2
t1
t3
t2
H!1)
B./A2
15/18
15/16
21/24
21/22
A1/A2
NSB0_00888
Wye-delta function
NSB0_01381a
Additive ON-delay
17/18
27/28
t
50ms
2 NO contacts
A1/A2
10
17/18
t
NSB0_00889
Wye-delta function *
50 ms
3 NO contacts
A1/A2
B1/A2
17/18
50ms
17/28
17/16
NSB0_00890
Wye-delta function
with overtravel function2)
(idling)
t
Idling
Function available
1)
Note on function with start contact: A new control signal at terminal B, after
the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero (retriggerable). This does not apply to G, G! and H, H!, which are not retriggerable.
2)
Function charts showing the various possibilities of operation of the

3RP1560-1S.30, see page 10/50.
10/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
7PV15 function table
B1)
7PV1578
Contact open
7PV1558
7PV1511
7PV1512
7PV1513
7PV1518
Contact closed
7PV1540
Identification
letter
7PV1538
7PV1508-1A
7PV15 timing relays
NSB0_00858
Function chart
NSB0_00859
Function
1 CO contact
ON-delay
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
>35 ms
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
OFF-delay
NSB0_00860a
200 ms
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
Flashing,
NSB0_00862
t
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
A1/A2
NSB0_00863
A1/A2
Clock-pulse,
(dead time, pulse period, and time
setting ranges each separately
adjustable)
15/18
15/16
Interval
NSB0_00864
Pulse period
15/18
15/16
E1)
F1)
G1)
A1/A2
> 35 ms
NSB0_00865

with control signal
10
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
t
A1/A2
> 35 ms
NSB0_00867
Pulse-forming
with control signal
(pulse generation at the output does
not depend on duration of
energizing)
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
Additive ON-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
t1
t3
t2
B1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB0_00868
2 NO contacts
NSB_02044
Wye-delta function2)
A1/A2
15/18
25/28
t
0,05...1s
Function available
1)

after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero
(retriggerable). This does not apply to E, F and G, which are not
retriggerable.
2)
With 7PV1578 the contacts 16 and 26 are not needed for the wye-delta
function.
Note:
With the 7PV1508-1A multifunction relay the identification letters
A to G are printed on the front alongside the rotary selector
switch of the unit. The related function can be found in the form
of a bar graph on the side of the device.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/47
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
7PV15 timing relays

Contact closed
Contact open
Identification
letter
Function chart
7PV1508-1B
Function
B1)
H1)
F1)
2 CO contacts
ON-delay
A1/A2
NSB0_00871
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
OFF-delay
with control signal
A1/A2
> 35 ms
B1/A2
NSB0_00873
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
A1/A2
15/18
15/16
NSB0_00878
Flashing,
25/28
25/26
t
A1/A2
NSB0_00880
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t

with control signal
A1/A2
B1/A2
NSB0_00876
15/18
15/16
Pulse-forming with control signal

(pulse generation at the output does
not depend on duration of
energizing)
A1/A2
> 35ms
B1/A2
NSB0_00884
15/18
15/16
25/28
25/26
t
Fixed pulse
after ON-delay
A1/A2
NSB0_00888
10
25/28
25/26
17/18
27/28
t
50ms
Function available
1)

after the operating time has started, resets the operating time to zero.
This does not apply to F, which is not retriggerable.
Note:
With the 7PV1508-1B multifunction relay the identification letters
A to D, F, H and I are printed on the front alongside the rotary
selector switch of the unit. The related function can be found in
the form of a bar graph on the side of the device.
10/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
3RT1926 function table
Contact open
Contactor coil energized
3RT1926-2G
Contact closed
3RT1926-2F
3RT1926-2E
3RT1926 timing relay

3RT1926-2D
Function chart
3RT1926-2C
Function
1 NO contact + 1 NC contact
A1/A2
NSB0_00936
ON-delay
-7/-8
-5/-6
t
>200 ms
A1/A2
NSB0_00937
OFF-delay
-7/-8
-5/-6
t
2 NO contacts
A1/A2
NSB0_00938
Wye-delta function
1 NO delayed,
1 NO instantaneous,
dead time 50 ms
Y -7/-8
-7/-8
t
50 ms
1 NO contact (semiconductor)
A1/A2
Timing relay
NSB0_0939a
ON-delay
Two-wire design
t
A1/A2
Contactor
A1/A2
Timing relay
B1/A2
> 35 ms
A1/A2
Contactor
NSB0_0940a
OFF-delay
with control signal
10
Function available
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/49
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
General data
3RP15 function table
Possibilities of operation of the 3RP1560-1S.30 timing relay
Operation 1:
Start contact B./A2 is open when control supply voltage
A./A2 is applied.

Contact closed
Contact open
tY
= Star time
1 ... 20 s
tIdling
= Idling time (coasting time)
30 ... 600 s
The control supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and there is no control

signal on B./A2. This starts the * timing. The idling time
(coasting time) is started by applying a control signal to B./A2.
When the set time tIdling (30 ... 600 s) has elapsed, the output relays
(17/16 and 17/28) are reset. If the control signal on B./A2 is switched off
(minimum OFF period 270 ms), a new timing is started.
Operation 1
A./A2
Remarks:
Observe response time (dead time) of 400 ms on energizing control
supply voltage until contacts 17/18 and 17/16 close.
B./A2
17/18
Y
Operation 2:
Start contact B./A2 is closed when control supply voltage
A./A2 is applied.
NSB0_00891b
17/28
17/16
tY
50
ms
t Idling
tY
50
ms
300
ms
t Idling
If the control signal B./A2 is already present when the control supply
voltage A./A2 is applied, no timing is started. The timing is only started
when the control signal B./A2 is switched off.
Operation 3:
Start contact B./A2 closes while star time is running.
If the control signal B./A2 is applied again during the star time,
the idling time starts and the timing is terminated normally.
Operation 2
A./A2
Operation 4:
Start contact B./A2 opens while delta time is running and is applied
again.
B./A2
If the control signal on B./A2 is applied and switched off again during
the delta time, although the idling time has not yet elapsed, the idling
time (coasting time) is reset to zero. If the control signal is re-applied to
B./A2, the idling time is restarted.
17/18
Y
NSB0_00892b
17/28
17/16
tY
50
ms
Frequent starting of compressors strains the network, the machine, and

the increased costs for the operator. The new timing relay prevents
frequent starting at times when there is high demand for compressed
air. A special control circuit prevents the compressor from being
switched off immediately when the required air pressure in the tank has
been reached. Instead, the valve in the intake tube is closed and the
compressor runs in "Idling" mode, i.e. in no-load operation for a specific
time which can be set from 30 ... 600 s.
t Idling
Operation 3
A./A2
B./A2
If the pressure falls within this time, the motor does not have to be
restarted again, but can return to nominal load operation from no-load
operation.
17/18
Y
If the pressure does not fall within this idling time, the motor is switched
off.
The pressure switch controls the timing via B./A2.
NSB0_00893b
17/28
17/16
tY
50
ms
t Idling
Operation 4
A./A2
B./A2
17/18
Y
17/28
17/16
tY
50
ms
<t Idling
<t Idling
t Idling
Note:
The following applies to all operations: The pressure switch controls the timing
via B./A2.
10/50
Siemens IC 10 2014
The control supply voltage is applied to A./A2 and the start contact
B./A2 is open, i.e. there is no control signal on B./A2 when the control
supply voltage is applied. The pressure switch signals "too little
pressure in system" and starts the timing by way of terminal B./A2. The
compressor is started, enters * operation, and fills the pressure tank.
When the pressure switch signals "sufficient pressure", the control signal
B./A2 is applied, the idling time (coasting time) is started, and the
compressor enters no-load operation for the set period of time
from 30 ... 600 s. The compressor is then switched off. The compressor
is only restarted if the pressure switch responds again (low pressure).
NSB0_00894c
10
Application example based on standard operation

(operation 1): For example, use of 3RP1560 for compressor control
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Overview
Accessories
LED for indicating

"Timing relay on voltage"
Operating time
adjustment
LED for indicating

"Relay switched"
Time setting range
selector switch
Inspection window
for set time range
Function switch
Inspection window
for set function
Device labeling plate
NSB0_01423b
Standards
The timing relays comply with:
IEC 60721-3-3 "Ambient conditions"
IEC 61812-1 "Specified time relays for industrial use"
IEC 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic
compatibility"
IEC 60947-5-1 "Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
Electromechanical control circuit devices"
L1
L1
K1
B1
A1
K2
A2
K1
S1
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
B1
Note:
K1
The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not

permissible when using AC control voltage (see diagrams).
N
NSB0_02045
NSB0_00895a
Diagrams
Article No. scheme

1st - 5th
@@@@@
6th 7th
@
Timing relays in industrial enclosure, 22.5 mm 3 R P 1 5

Functions/time setting ranges
Connection type
Contacts
Example
3RP15
Note:
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/51
10
S1
A1
K2
A2
Sealable covers
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Application
Timing relays are used in control, starting, and protective circuits
for all switching operations involving time delays. They guarantee a high level of functionality and a high repeat accuracy of
timer settings.
Enclosure version
All timing relays are suitable for snap-on mounting onto
TH 35 standard mounting rails according to IEC 60715 or for
screw fixing.
3RP1505, 3RP151.,
3RP1525, 3RP153.,
3RP154., 3RP155.,
3RP156., 3RP157.
mm
mm
22.5 x 83 x 90
22.5 x 84 x 90
mm
mm
22.5 x 102 x 110

22.5 x 103 x 110
V AC
300;
500 at 3RP1505-1BT20, 3RP157.-.NM20
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80

Pollution degree 3, overvoltage category III
During operation
During storage
Operating range at excitation1)
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us at V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz

0.8 ... 1.25 x Us 24 V DC

Load current
AC-15 at 24 ... 400 V, 50 Hz
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
-32)
0.01 0.6
--
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
----
--
Operating cycles
30 x 106
100 x 106
Operating cycles at Ie
1 x 105
100 x 106
Connection type
10
3RP1527
For 2 terminal blocks
- Screw terminals
- Spring-type terminals
- Screw terminals
Type
Terminal screw
Solid
Tightening torque
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
Connection type
Solid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228
Finely stranded
1)
If nothing else is stated.
2)
For 3RP1505-.R: NC contact Ie = 1 A.
10/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
M3 (for standard screwdriver, size 2 and Pozidriv 2)

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 1.2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
3RP15 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation according to DIN 46199-5)
15
A2
16 18
Load
A2
3RP1527
3RP1540-.A
24 ... 66 V AC/DC, 90 ... 240 V AC/DC OFF-delay
ON-delay,
two-wire design
24 V AC/DC
A2
16 18
26 28
3RP1505-.B, 3RP1525-1B
ON-delay, 3RP1525-1B
also for 42 ... 48/60 V AC/DC
(see page 10/54, 3RP1525-1BR30)
A2
16 18
25
26 28
3RP1505-.B
16 18
26 28
3RP1505-.B
A1 B1 A3 B3
A2
A2
16 18
25
26 28
15
25
16 18 26 28
3RP1505-.B
with control signal
16 18
3RP1505-.B
Pulse-forming
with control signal
15
A2
25
16 18
26 28
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
15
25
16 18
26 28
A1 B1 A3 B3
A2
A1 A3
3RP1505-.B
Flashing
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00914a
25
NSB0_00913a
15
A1 A3
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A2
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
3RP1505-.B
with control signal
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
15
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
NSB0_00910a
25
NSB0_00909a
15
A1 B1
3RP1505-.AW30
Multifunction relay
(same functions as 3RP1505-1A)
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A1 A3
16 18
3RP1555
Clock-pulse relay
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
15
A1 A3
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
10
A1
16 18
3RP1505-.A
Additive ON-delay
with control signal
24 V AC/DC
42 ... 48 V AC/DC
60 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00906b
NSB0_00905a
A1+
A2
3RP1505-.A
Pulse-forming
with control signal
24 V AC/DC
100 ... 127 V AC/DC
200 ... 240 V AC/DC
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
24 ... 66 V AC/DC
90 ... 240 V AC/DC
NSB0_00908a
3RP1505-.A
with control signal
16 18
NSB0_00904a
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB0_00912a
3RP1505-.A
16 18
15
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
A2
21
16 18 22 24
NSB0_00916a
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3
16 18
15
NSB0_00902a
A2
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A1 B1 A3 B3
NSB0_00901a
15
3RP1505-.A
Flashing
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A1 A3
3RP1505-.A
with control signal
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
16 18
A2
3RP1505-.A, 3RP153.-.A
OFF-delay
with control signal
16 18
15
NSB0_00900a
A2
NSB0_00903a
3RP1505-.A, 3RP151., 3RP1525-.A

ON-delay
16 18
A1 A3
NSB0_00899a
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB0_00911a
16 18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00915a
A2
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00898a
15
NSB0_00897a
A1 A3
A2
24V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00907a
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
3RP1505-.B
Additive ON-delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/53
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
3RP15 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation according to DIN 46199-5) continued
24 V AC/DC
3RP1505-.B
ON-delay
22 24
3RP1505-.B
OFF-delay
with control signal
22 24
3RP1505-.B
22 24
A2
16 18
21
22 24
3RP1505-.B
with control signal
A2
21
15
A1 B1 A3 B3
16 18
22 24
Y18 28
16
3RP1560-. S
with overtravel function (idling)
10/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
A1 A3
17
A2
NSB0_00929b
26 28
16 18
Y18 d28
3RP157.-.M20
A1
15
27
A1 A3
17
Y18 d28
3RP1574, 3RP1576
25
16 18 26 28
3RP1540-.B
OFF-delay
24 V AC/DC
A2
17
Y18 d28
A2
A2
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
380/440 V AC
17
A2
25
3RP1525-. BW30
ON-delay
NSB0_01623a
A2
26 28
200/240 V AC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A1 B1 A3 B3
16 18
3RP1525-. BR30
ON-delay
NSB0_00930b
10
3RP1505-.BW30/-1BT20/-.RW30
Multifunction relay
(functions see function table)
A2
15
NSB0_00925a
16 18 22/26 24/28
25
NSB0_00928a
NSB0_00927b
A2
A1
15
A1 A3
24 V AC/DC
100 ... 127 V AC/DC
200 ... 240 V AC/DC
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
60 V AC/DC
A1 A3
22 24
3RP1505-.B
Wye-delta function
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
A1 B1
16 18
24 V AC/DC
42 ... 48 V AC/DC
21/25/27
21
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
3RP1505-.B
Pulse-forming
with control signal
24 ... 240 V AC/DC

400/440 V AC
15/17
A2
24 V AC/DC
15
A1 B1 A3 B3
15
3RP1505-.B
Flashing
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00922a
16 18
21
NSB0_00921a
15
16 18
3RP1505-.B
with control signal
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A1 A3
A2
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A2
16 18
A1 A3
NSB0_00920a
A2
21
NSB0_00924a
22 24
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB0_00926b
16 18
21
NSB0_00919a
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00923a
21
NSB0_00918a
15
NSB0_00917a
A1 A3
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays

Solid-state timing relays for general use in control systems and
mechanical engineering with:
1 or 2 CO contacts
Single or selectable time setting ranges
Switch position indication and voltage indication by LED
3RP1505-1BP30
Version
3RP1511-1AP30
3RP1525-1BW30
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3RP1527-1EM30
Time setting range Rated control supply voltage Us

t adjustable by
rotary switch to
50/60 Hz AC
DC
3RP1505-2BP30
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
V
3RP1511-2AP30
DT
Price
per PU
3RP1525-2BW30
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RP1505 timing relays, multifunction, 15 time setting ranges

The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches. Insert labels can be used to adjust different functions of the 3RP1505 timing relay clearly and
unmistakably. The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory. The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B. For functions see
3RP1901 label set, page 10/67.
With LED and:
1 CO contact,
8 functions
0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
2 CO contacts,
5 ... 100 s
16 functions
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
2 CO contacts,
0.05 ... 1 h
positively driven and 5 ... 100 min
hard gold-plated.
0.15 ... 3 h
8 functions3)4)
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
1)
-24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24 ... 2405)
12
24
24
24 ... 2402)
A
}
}
}
3RP1505-1AA40
3RP1505-1AQ30
3RP1505-1AP30
3RP1505-1AW30
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24 ... 2405)
400 ... 440
24
24
24 ... 2402)
--
}
}
}
A
3RP1505-1BQ30
3RP1505-1BP30
3RP1505-1BW30
3RP1505-1BT20
A
A
A
3RP1505-2BQ30
3RP1505-2BP30
3RP1505-2BW30
--
24 ... 240
24 ... 240
3RP1505-1RW30
3RP1505-2RW30
C
A
A
-3RP1505-2AQ30
3RP1505-2AP30
3RP1505-2AW30
0.5 ... 10 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
3RP1511-1AQ30
3RP1511-1AP30
C
A
3RP1511-2AQ30
3RP1511-2AP30
1.5 ... 30 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
3RP1512-1AQ30
3RP1512-1AP30
C
A
3RP1512-2AQ30
3RP1512-2AP30
5 ... 100 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
3RP1513-1AQ30
3RP1513-1AP30
C
A
3RP1513-2AQ30
3RP1513-2AP30
10
3RP151. timing relays, ON-delay, 1 time setting range

With LED and
1 CO contact
3RP1525 timing relays, ON-delay, 15 time setting ranges

With LED and:
1 CO contact
2 CO contacts
0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
1)
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
3RP1525-1AQ30
3RP1525-1AP30
B
A
3RP1525-2AQ30
3RP1525-2AP30
42 ... 48/60
24/100 ... 127
24/200 ... 240
24 ... 2405)
42 ... 48/605)
24
24
24 ... 2402)
A
}
}
}
3RP1525-1BR30
3RP1525-1BQ30
3RP1525-1BP30
3RP1525-1BW30
C
A
A
-3RP1525-2BQ30
3RP1525-2BP30
3RP1525-2BW30
3RP1527-1EC30
3RP1527-1EM30
C
C
3RP1527-2EC30
3RP1527-2EM30
3RP1527 timing relays, ON-delay, two-wire design, 4 time setting ranges

1 NO contact
(semiconductor)
0.05 ... 1 s
0.2 ... 4 s
1.5 ... 30 s
12 ... 240 s
24 ... 66
90 ... 240
24 ... 665)
90 ... 2405)
A
}
1)
With switch position no timing. For test purposes (ON/OFF function) on

site. Relay is constantly on when activated, or relay remains constantly off
when activated. Depending on which function is set.
3)
Positively driven: NO and NC contacts are never closed simultaneously;

contact gap 0.5 mm is ensured, minimum make-break capacity 12 V,
3 mA.
2)
Operating range 0.7 to 1.1 x Us.
4)
The changeover contacts are actuated simultaneously, as a result of which

only 8 functions are selectable (no wye-delta, no instantaneous contact).
5)

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/55
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
PU (UNIT, SET, M) = 1, PS* = 1 unit, PG = 41H
3RP1533-1AP30
3RP1540-1BB31
Version
Time setting range Rated control supply voltage Us

t adjustable by
rotary switch to
50/60 Hz AC
DC
3RP1560-1SP30
3RP1555-1AP30
DT
3RP1576-2NP30
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
V
3RP1533-2AP30
Price
per PU
3RP1540-2BB31
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RP153. timing relays, OFF-delay, with control signal,

1 time setting range
With LED and
1 CO contact
The same potential
must be applied to
terminals A and B
0.5 ... 10 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
A
}
3RP1531-1AQ30
3RP1531-1AP30
B
B
3RP1531-2AQ30
3RP1531-2AP30
1.5 ... 30 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
A
}
3RP1532-1AQ30
3RP1532-1AP30
C
A
3RP1532-2AQ30
3RP1532-2AP30
5 ... 100 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
A
}
3RP1533-1AQ30
3RP1533-1AP30
B
B
3RP1533-2AQ30
3RP1533-2AP30
3RP1540 timing relays, OFF-delay, without control signal,

9 time setting ranges1)
With LED and:
1 CO contact
2 CO contacts
0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3 s
0.3 ... 6 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
3 ... 60 s
5 ... 100 s
15 ... 300 s
30 ... 600 s
24
100 ... 127
200 ... 240
24 ... 240
242)
100 ... 127
200 ... 240
24 ... 240
}
}
}
}
3RP1540-1AB31
3RP1540-1AJ31
3RP1540-1AN31
3RP1540-1AW31
A
A
A
C
3RP1540-2AB31
3RP1540-2AJ31
3RP1540-2AN31
3RP1540-2AW31
24
100 ... 127
200 ... 240
24 ... 240
242)
100 ... 127
200 ... 240
24 ... 40
}
A
}
}
3RP1540-1BB31
3RP1540-1BJ31
3RP1540-1BN31
3RP1540-1BW31
A
C
B
A
3RP1540-2BB31
3RP1540-2BJ31
3RP1540-2BN31
3RP1540-2BW31
C
}
}
3RP1555-1AR30
3RP1555-1AQ30
3RP1555-1AP30
C
C
A
3RP1555-2AR30
3RP1555-2AQ30
3RP1555-2AP30
24
24
A
}
3RP1560-1SQ30
3RP1560-1SP30
3RP1560-2SP30
3RP1555 timing relays, clock-pulse relay, 15 time setting ranges

0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
3)
10
With LED and

1 CO contact
42 ... 48/60
24/100 ... 127
24/200 ... 240
42...48/604)
24
24
3RP1560 timing relays, wye-delta function,

dead interval 50 ms and coasting time, 1 time setting range
3 NO contacts
(common contact
root connecting
terminal 17)
Wyedelta
1 ... 20 s ,
coasting time
(idling)
30 ... 600 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
--
3RP157. timing relays, wye-delta function5),

dead interval 50 ms, 1 time setting range
1 NO contact
instantaneous and
1 NO contact
delayed
(common contact
root connecting
terminal 17)
1 ... 20 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
200 ... 240/
380 ... 440
24
24
--
}
}
B
3RP1574-1NQ30
3RP1574-1NP30
3RP1574-1NM20
C
A
C
3RP1574-2NQ30
3RP1574-2NP30
3RP1574-2NM20
3 ... 60 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
200 ... 240/
380 ... 440
24
24
--
}
}
C
3RP1576-1NQ30
3RP1576-1NP30
3RP1576-1NM20
A
A
C
3RP1576-2NQ30
3RP1576-2NP30
3RP1576-2NM20

1)

Application of the control voltage once results in contact changeover to the
correct setting.
2)
3)

site. For dead time "infinite", the relay is always off. For pulse time "infinite",
the relay is always on.
10/56
Siemens IC 10 2014
4)
5)
Example circuits see

Reference Manual for "Monitoring and Control Devices",

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Overview
Note:
LED for indicating
"Timing relay excited"
(left)

LED for indicating

"Relay switched"
(right)
Function
switch
Time setting
range selector
switch
Time setting
range adjuster,
analog
Device labeling
plate
L1
L1
S1
K1
S1
NSB0_01424c
A1
K2
A2
B1
A1
K2
A2
K1
B1
K1
N
NSB0_02045
NSB0_00895a
Standards
Diagrams

IEC 60721-3-3 "Ambient conditions"
IEC 61812-1 "Specified time relays for industrial use"
compatibility"
IEC 61140 "Electrical protective separation"
Accessories
Label set for marking the multifunction relay
Article No. scheme

1st - 5th
@@@@@
SIRIUS timing relays, enclosure 45 mm
6th 7th
@
3RP20
Connection type
Contacts
Example
10
3RP20
Note:
article numbers.
Application
Timing relays are used in control, starting, and protective circuits
for all switching operations involving time delays. They guarantee a high level of functionality and a high repeat accuracy of
timer settings.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/57
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Type
3RP2005,
3RP2025
mm
45 x 57 x 73
V AC
300
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80

Pollution degree 3
During operation
During storage
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us at AC; 0.8 ... 1.25 x Us at DC;

Operating cycles
30 x 106
1 x 105
Connection type
Screw terminals
Terminal screw
Solid
Stranded
AWG cables
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
AWG
AWG
Nm

2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)2), 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)2)
2 x (18 ... 14)
0.8 1.2
Connection type
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
mm
Solid
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
2 x (24 ... 14)
3.6
1)
2)

3RP20 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation according to DIN 46199-5)
3RP2005, 3RP2025
ON-delay
3RP2005
10/58
Siemens IC 10 2014
A1 B1 A3 B3
A2
3RP2005
with control signal
15
16 18
A1 B1 A3 B3
A2
3RP2005
Pulse-forming
with control signal
15
16 18
15
A2
16 18
NSB0_00900a
A1 A3
3RP2005
Flashing
24 V AC/DC
NSB0_00902a
16 18
16 18
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
15
A2
3RP2005
with control signal
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
A2
16 18
3RP2005
OFF-delay
with control signal
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
A1 A3
A2
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB0_00899a
16 18
A1 B1 A3 B3 15
NSB0_00903a
A2
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00898a
15
NSB0_00897a
A1 A3
24 V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
NSB0_00901a
10
24 V AC/DC
100/127 V AC
200/240 V AC
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays

Multifunction
The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches.
Insert labels can be used to adjust different functions of the
3RP2005 timing relay clearly and unmistakably.
The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory.
The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B.
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
For functions see 3RP1901 label set, page10/67.
3RP2005-1BW30
Version
3RP2025-1AP30
Time setting
range t
3RP2005-2BW30

50/60 Hz AC
DC
3RP2025-2AP30
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RP2005 timing relays, multifunction, 15 time setting ranges

With LED and
1 CO contact,
8 functions
With LED and
2 CO contacts,
16 functions1)
0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
2)
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
3RP2005-1AQ30
3RP2005-1AP30
A
}
3RP2005-2AQ30
3RP2005-2AP30
24 ... 2403)
24 ... 2404)
3RP2005-1BW30
3RP2005-2BW30
}
}
3RP2025-1AQ30
3RP2025-1AP30
}
}
3RP2025-2AQ30
3RP2025-2AP30
0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
0.05 ... 1 min
5 ... 100 s
0.15 ... 3 min
0.5 ... 10 min
1.5 ... 30 min
0.05 ... 1 h
5 ... 100 min
0.15 ... 3 h
0.5 ... 10 h
1.5 ... 30 h
5 ... 100 h
2)
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
10
3RP2025. timing relays, ON-delay, 15 time setting ranges

With LED and
1 CO contact1)

1)
Units with electrical protective separation.
2)

site. Relay is constantly on when activated, or relay remains constantly off
when activated. Depending on which function is set.
3)
4)

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/59
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
7PV15 timing relays in enclosure, 17.5 mm
Overview
Enclosure version
All timing relays are suitable for snap-on mounting onto
TH 35 standard mounting rails according to IEC 60715.
The enclosure complies with DIN 43880, 1 MW.
67
45
67,5
90,5
17,5
NSB0_02042a
7PV15 timing relay
43
Dimensions
Standards
Note:

IEC 60721-3-3 "Classification of environmental conditions"
IEC 61812-1 "Time relays for industrial and residential use"
compatibility"
DIN 43880 "Built-in equipment for electrical installations;
overall dimensions and related mounting dimensions"

L1
L1
S1
A1
K2
A2
K1
B1
A1
K2
A2
K1
S1
B1
K1
N
NSB0_00895a
10
25
NSB0_02045
Diagrams
Article No. scheme

1st - 5th
@@@@@
6th 7th
@
Timing relays in industrial enclosure, 17.5 mm 7 P V 1 5

Connection type
Contacts
Example
7PV15
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
Wide voltage range 12 to 240 V AC/DC

High switching capacity, e.g. AC-15 at 230 V, 3 A
Combination voltage, e.g. 24 V AC/DC and 200 to 240 V AC
Changes to the time setting range during operation
Changes to the function in the de-energized state
Application
Timing relays are used in control, starting and protective circuits
for all switching operations involving time delays, e.g. in
non-residential buildings, airports, industrial buildings etc.
10/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
High level of functionality and a high repeat accuracy of timer

settings
Integrated surge suppressor
Function charts printed on the side of the device for reliable
device adjustment
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Type
7PV15

Pollution degree 2, overvoltage category III
During operation
During storage
V AC
300
C
C
-25 ... +55

-40 ... +70
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us at V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz

0.8 ... 1.25 x Us 24 V DC

AC-15 at 24 ... 240 V, 50 Hz
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
A
A
1
0.2
Operating cycles
1 x 106
1 x 105
Connection type
1)
Screw terminals
Terminal screw
Solid
Tightening torque
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm

1 x (0.2 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)
1 x (24 ... 14)
0.4 0.5
7PV15 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation according to DIN 46199-5)
16 18
7PV1508-1AW30
with control signal
B1 A1
15
A2
16 18
7PV1508-1AW30
Pulse-forming
with control signal
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
A2
16 18 26 28
A1
15
A2
16 18 26 28
7PV1508-1BW30
Flashing,
25
B1 A1
15
A2
16 18
IC01_00058
18
A1
15
25
A2
16 18 26 28
7PV1508-1BW30
ON-delay
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
A1
15
A2
16 18 26 28
7PV1508-1BW30
16
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
IC01_00061
25
IC01_00063
15
A2
7PV1508-1AW30
7PV1508-1AW30
Additive ON-delay,
with control signal
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
B1 A1
18
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
IC01_00059
A2
IC01_00055
15
16
7PV1508-1AW30
Flashing, starting with interval
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
B1 A1
A2
15
10
7PV1508-1AW30
OFF-delay
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
7PV1508-1BW30
OFF-delay
with control signal
16 18
A1
IC01_00060
7PV1508-1AW30
ON-delay
A2
15
IC01_00054
18
A1
IC01_00056
16
15
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
25
B1 A1 15
IC01_00064
A2
B1 A1
IC01_00057
15
IC01_00053
A1
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
A3
25
16 18 26 28
IC01_00062
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
7PV1508-1BW30
Pulse-forming
with control signal
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/61
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
7PV15 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation according to DIN 46199-5) continued
7PV1508-1BW30
ON and OFF-delay
7PV1508-1BW30
Fixed pulse
after ON-delay
15
A2
16
18
IC01_00069
A1
7PV1518-1AW30
ON-delay
B1 A1
15
A2
16
7PV1538-1AW30
OFF-delay
with control signal
A1
15
25
A2
18
28
IC01_00073
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
10
7PV1578-1BW30
Wye-delta
Siemens IC 10 2014
A2
16
18
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
18
A1
15
A2
16
7PV1540-1AW30
OFF-delay
18
B1 A1
15
A2
16
18
IC01_00068
15
7PV151.-1AQ30, 7PV151.-1AP30
ON-delay
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
10/62
16 18 26 28
A1 A3
7PV1518-1AJ30, 7PV1518-1AN30
ON-delay
12 ... 240 V AC/DC

A1
15
A2
16
7PV1558-1AW30
Clock-pulse relay
18
IC01_00072
A2
25
IC01_00067
16 18 26 28
15
IC01_00066
A1
25
90 ... 240 V AC/DC

180 ... 240 V AC/DC
100 ... 127 V AC

200 ... 240 V AC
IC01_00070
A2
15
IC01_00065
B1 A1
24 V AC/DC
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
IC01_00071
12 ... 240 V AC/DC
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Solid-state timing relays for general use and in control systems,

mechanical engineering and infrastructure with:
1 or 2 CO contacts
7PV1508-1AW30
Version
7PV1512-1AP30
7PV1518-1AW30
Time setting range t

adjustable by rotary
switch to
Multifunction or monofunction
Wide voltage range or combination voltage
Single or selectable time setting ranges
Switch position indication and voltage indication by LED
7PV1538-1AW30

Us
50/60 Hz AC
V
7PV1540-1AW30
DT
DC
V
7PV1578-1BW30
7PV1558-1AW30
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
7PV1508 timing relays, multifunction, 7 time setting ranges

The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches. The same potential must be applied to terminals A. and B.
With LED and
1 CO contact,
7 functions
With LED and
2 CO contacts,
7 functions
0.05 ... 1 s
0.5 ... 10 s
5 ... 100 s
30 s ... 10 min
3 min ... 1 h
30 min ... 10 h
5 ... 100 h
12 ... 240
12 ... 240
7PV1508-1AW30
1 unit
41H
12 ... 240
12 ... 240
7PV1508-1BW30
1 unit
41H
7PV151. timing relays, ON-delay, 1 time setting range

With LED and
1 CO contact
0.05 ... 1 s
24/200 ... 240
24
7PV1511-1AP30
1 unit
41H
0.5 ... 10 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
7PV1512-1AQ30
7PV1512-1AP30
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
5 ... 100 s
24/100 ... 127

24/200 ... 240
24
24
}
}
7PV1513-1AQ30
7PV1513-1AP30
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
12 ... 240
12 ... 240
7PV1518-1AW30
1 unit
41H
90 ... 127
90 ... 127
7PV1518-1AJ30
1 unit
41H
180 ... 240
180 ... 240
7PV1518-1AN30
1 unit
41H
7PV1538-1AW30
1 unit
41H
0.05 ... 1 s
0.5 ... 10 s
5 ... 100 s
30 s ... 10 min
3 min ... 1 h
30 min ... 10 h
5 ... 100 h
10
7PV1518 timing relays, ON-delay, 7 time setting ranges

With LED and
1 CO contact
7PV1538 timing relays, OFF-delay, with control signal, 7 time setting ranges
With LED and
1 CO contact
0.05 ... 1 s
0.5 ... 10 s
5 ... 100 s
30 s ... 10 min
3 min ... 1 h
30 min ... 10 h
5 ... 100 h
12 ... 240
12 ... 240
7PV1540 timing relays, OFF-delay, without control signal, 7 time setting ranges
With LED and
1 CO contact
0.05 ... 1 s
0.15 ... 3s
0.3 ... 6 s
0.5 ... 10 s
1.5 ... 30 s
3 ... 60 s
5 ... 100 s
12 ... 240
12 ... 240
7PV1540-1AW30
1 unit
41H
12 ... 240
7PV1558-1AW30
1 unit
41H
7PV1578-1BW30
1 unit
41H
7PV1558 timing relays, clock-pulse relay, 7 time setting ranges

With LED and
1 CO contact
0.05 ... 1 s
0.5 ... 10 s
5 ... 100 s
30 s ... 10 min
3 min ... 1 h
30 min ... 10 h
5 ... 100 h
12 ... 240
7PV1578 timing relays, wye-delta function, 7 time setting ranges

With LED and
2 NO contacts,
dead interval
0.05 ... 1 s adjustable
0.05 ... 1 s
0.5 ... 10 s
5 ... 100 s
30 s ... 10 min
3 min ... 1 h
30 min ... 10 h
5 ... 100 h

12 ... 240
12 ... 240
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/63
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
SIRIUS 3RT19 timing relays
Overview
Simply by being plugged in place, the SIRIUS 3RT19 timing
relays enable different functionalities required for the assembly
of starters to be realized in the feeder. At the same time the
timing relays for mounting onto contactors reduce the wiring
work required within the feeder and save space in the control
cabinet.
The solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output uses two
plug-in contacts to actuate the contactor underneath by means
of a semiconductor after the set time has elapsed.
The time-delay auxiliary switch is supplied with power directly by
two plug-in contacts through the coil terminals of the contactor,
in parallel with A1/A2.
The switching state feedback is performed by a mechanical
switching state indicator (plunger).
SIRIUS 3RT19 timing relay
Article No. scheme

1st - 5th
@@@@@
Time module and contactor control units
6th 7th
@
3RT19
Size
Type of accessories and spare parts
Version
Time setting ranges
Connection type
3RT19
Example
Note:
10

article numbers.
According to IEC 61812-1/DIN VDE 0435-2021
Type

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0110
During operation
During storage

with semiconductor output
Solid-state time-delay
auxiliary switch blocks
3RT19.6-2C
3RT19.6-2D
3RT19.6-2E
3RT19.6-2F
3RT19.6-2G
V AC
300
C
C
-25 ... +60

-40 ... +80
0.8 ... 1.1 x Us,
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us,

0.3 for 3RT1916; 0.5 for 3RT1926

-----
-3
1
0.2
0.1
Operating cycles
100 x 106
10 x 106
Operating cycles
106

Load current
AC-15, 24 ... 400 V, 50 Hz
DC-13, 24 V
DC-13, 125 V
DC-13, 250 V
A
A
A
A
A
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
Tightening torque
10/64
Siemens IC 10 2014
100 x
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 1.2
1 x 105
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
3RT19 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation according to DIN 46199-5)
For 3RT10 contactors in sizes S0 to S3 and
A2
1
A1
A2
A1
A2
NSB0_00944a
A1
S1
A1 B1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
NSB0_00945b
L1/L+
L1/L+
2
N/L
N/L

2 Contactor
Can be connected
Do not connect!

2 Contactor
Can be connected
3RT1926-2C
ON-delay
3RT1926-2D
With OFF-delay
(with control signal)
$
A1
A2
27
35
$
28
36
$
NSB0_01873
3RT1926-2E
ON-delay
6
6
$
A1
A2
27
35
$
28
36
$
A1
37
28
38
NSB0_01875
NSB0_01874a
3RT1926-2F
OFF-delay
(without control signal)
A2
27
3RT1926-2G
Wye-delta function
10
6
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/65
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays

For
contactors
Version
Time setting
range t
Rated control
supply voltage Us
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Type
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
For sizes S0 to S121)

3RT102,
3RT103,
3RT104
Terminal designations acc. to EN 46199-5

ON-delay
1 NO + 1 NC
3RT1926-2...
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
24 AC/DC
C
}
A
3RT1926-2EJ11
3RT1926-2EJ21
3RT1926-2EJ31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
100 ... 127 AC
C
}
C
3RT1926-2EC11
3RT1926-2EC21
3RT1926-2EC31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
200 ... 240 AC
B
}
B
3RT1926-2ED11
3RT1926-2ED21
3RT1926-2ED31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
24 AC/DC
}
}
}
3RT1926-2FJ11
3RT1926-2FJ21
3RT1926-2FJ31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
100 ... 127 AC
B
}
B
3RT1926-2FK11
3RT1926-2FK21
3RT1926-2FK31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
200 ... 240 AC
B
A
A
3RT1926-2FL11
3RT1926-2FL21
3RT1926-2FL31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
}
}
}
3RT1926-2GJ51
3RT1926-2GC51
3RT1926-2GD51
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
OFF-delay without control signal2)

1 NO + 1 NC
Wye-delta function (varistor integrated)

1 NO delayed +
1 NO instantaneous,
dead time 50 ms
1.5 ... 30
24 AC/DC
100 ... 127 AC
200 ... 240 AC
For sizes S0 to S3, with semiconductor output

3RT102,
3RT103,
3RT1042)
For mounting onto coil terminals on top of the

contactors
The electrical connection between the relay block and
the corresponding contactor is established by screwing
the two connecting pins of the timing relay block to coil
terminals A1/A2 on top of the contactor.
10
ON-delay, two-wire design (varistor integrated)
3RT1926-2C...
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
24 ... 66 AC/DC
B
B
B
3RT1926-2CG11
3RT1926-2CG21
3RT1926-2CG31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
90 240 AC/DC
}
}
}
3RT1926-2CH11
3RT1926-2CH21
3RT1926-2CH31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
OFF-delay with control signal (varistor integrated)
3RT1926-2D...
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
5 ... 100
24 ... 66 AC/DC
C
B
D
3RT1926-2DG11
3RT1926-2DG21
3RT1926-2DG31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
0.05 ... 1
0.5 ... 10
90 240 AC/DC
B
B
3RT1926-2DH11
3RT1926-2DH21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
3RT1926-2DH31
1 unit
41H
5 ... 100
1)
The terminals A1 and A2 for the rated control supply voltage of the solidstate time-delay auxiliary switch block must be connected to the corresponding contactor by connecting cables.
2)
Not for 3RT104 contactor with 24 to 42 V rated control supply voltage.
10/66
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Timing Relays
Accessories

Accessories for 3RP15 and 3RP20
Version
Function
Identifi- Use
cation
letter
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Label sets for 3RP15 and 3RP20

Accessory for 3RP1505 and 3RP20 (not included in the scope of
supply). The label set offers the possibility of labeling timing relays
with the set function in English and German.
1 label set ON-delay
(1 unit)
with 8
functions ON-delay and OFF-delay with
control signal
3RP1901-0A
For devices C
with 1 CO
contact and
3RP1505.RW30
3RP1901-0A
5 units
41H
For devices C
with 2 CO
contacts
3RP1901-0B
5 units
41H
For 3RP15,
3RP20
3RT1900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing,
2 units are required for each device
For 3RP15
with
1 or 2 CO
contacts
3RP1903
10 units
41H
Sealable covers
For securing against unauthorized adjustment of
setting knobs
For 3RP15
with
1 or 2 CO
contacts
3RP1902
5 units
41H
B
C

with control signal
Pulse-forming with control signal G

Additive ON-delay with control
signal
1 label set ON-delay
(1 unit)
with 16
functions ON-delay and OFF-delay with
control signal
H
A
B
C
Passing break contact with

control signal

H
ON-delay and instantaneous

contact

ON-delay and OFF-delay with

C
control signal and instantaneous
contact
Flashing, starting with interval,
Passing make contact and

10
3RP1901-0B
Additive ON-delay with control

signal and instantaneous
contact
Passing break contact with

F
control signal and instantaneous
contact
Wye-delta function
Blank labels for 3RP15 and 3RP20

Blank labels,
20 mm x 7 mm, pastel turquoise1)
Covers and push-in lugs for 3RP15
3RP1903
3RP1902
1)

see Chapter 16, "Appendix" "External Partners".

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/67
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3RR21, 3RR22 Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto 3RT2 Contactors
General data
Overview
Features
3RR21
3RR22
Benefits
S00, S0
S00, S0
Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections and

technical characteristics of the other devices in the
SIRIUS modular system (contactors, soft starters, etc.)
S00: 45 x 79 x 80,
S0: 45 x 87 x 91
S00: 45 x 90 x 80,
S0: 45 x 109 x 92
S00: 45 x 79 x 80,
S0: 45 x 87 x 91
S00: 45 x 90 x 80,
S0: 45 x 109 x 92
Permit the mounting of slim and compact load feeders

in widths of 45 mm (S00 and S0)
S00: 1.6 ... 16 A

S0: 4 ... 40 A
S00: 1.6 ... 16 A

S0: 4 ... 40 A
Is adapted to the other devices in the SIRIUS modular

system
General data
Current range
Dimensions in mm
(W x H x D)
Screw terminals
Sizes
Just a single version per size with a wide setting range

enables easy configuration
During operation
-25 ... +60 C
-25 ... +60 C
Suitable for applications in the control cabinet,

worldwide
(Two-phase)
(Three-phase)
Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of

loads against excessive temperature rises due to
overload
Monitoring functions
Current overshoot
Enables detection of filter blockages or pumping

against closed gate valves
Enables drawing conclusions about wear, poor
lubrication or other maintenance-relevant phenomena
Current undershoot
(Two-phase)
(Three-phase)
Enables detection of overload due to a slipping or torn

belt
Guarantees protection of pumps against dry running
10
Facilitates monitoring of the functions of resistive loads

such as heaters
Permits energy savings through monitoring of no-load
operation
Apparent current monitoring
(Selectable)
Precision current monitoring especially in a motor's

rated and upper torque range
--
(Selectable)
Optimum current monitoring over a motor's entire

torque range through the patented combination of
power factor and apparent current monitoring
Range monitoring
(Two-phase)
(Three-phase)
Simultaneous monitoring of current overshoot and

undershoot with a singe device
Phase failure, open circuit
(Two-phase)
(Three-phase)
Minimizes heating of three-phase motors during phase

failure through immediate disconnection
Prevents operation of hoisting equipment with reduced
load carrying capacity
Phase sequence monitoring
--
(Selectable)
Prevents starting of motors, pumps or compressors in

the wrong direction of rotation

(residual current monitoring)
--
(Selectable)
Provides optimum protection of loads against

high-resistance short circuits or ground faults due to
moisture, condensed water, damage to the insulation
material, etc.
Eliminates the need for additional special equipment
Reduces wiring overhead and costs
Blocking current monitoring
--
(Selectable)
Minimizes heating of three-phase motors when blocked

during operation through immediate disconnection
Minimizes mechanical loading of the system by acting
as an electronic shear pin
Available
-- Not available
10/68
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Features
3RR21
3RR22
Benefits
Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay
Features
RESET function
Resetting directly on the device or by switching the

control supply voltage off and on (remote RESET)
ON-delay time
0 ... 60 s
0 ... 99 s
Enables motor starting without evaluation of the starting

current
Tripping delay time
0 ... 30 s
0 ... 30 s
Permits brief threshold value violations during operation
Can be used for monitoring motors with lengthy start-up

Prevents frequent warnings and disconnections with
currents near the threshold values
Operating and indicating elements
LEDs and
rotary potentiometers
Displays and buttons
For setting the threshold values and delay times

For selectable functions
For quick and selective diagnostics
Displays for permanent display of measured values
Integrated contacts
1 CO contact
1 CO,
1 semiconductor output
Enable disconnection of the system or process when

there is an irregularity

Short-circuit strength up to 100 kA
at 690 V
(in conjunction with the corresponding fuses
or the corresponding motor starter protector)
Provides optimum protection of the loads and operating

personnel in the event of short circuits due to insulation
faults or faulty switching operations
Electrical and mechanical

matching to 3RT2 contactors
Enables stand-alone installation as well as
space-saving direct mounting
(optional)
(optional)

Other features
Suitable for single- and three-phase loads
Enables the monitoring of single-phase systems

through parallel infeed at the contactor or looping the
current through the three phase connections
Wide setting ranges
Reduce the number of variants

Minimize the configuration outlay and costs
Minimize storage overheads, storage costs, tied-up
capital
Wide voltage supply range
(optional)
(optional)
Reduces the number of versions

Minimizes the configuring overhead and costs
Minimizes storage overhead, storage costs, tied-up
capital
Available
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/69
10
Spring-type terminals for main circuit and

auxiliary circuits
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Possible combinations of 3RR21/3RR22 monitoring relays with 3RT2 contactors
Monitoring relays
Current range
Contactors
(type, size, rating)
3RT201
3RT202
S00
S0
Type
3/4/5.5/7.5 kW
5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5 kW
3RR2141
1.6 ... 16
With stand-alone installation support
3RR2241
1.6 ... 16
3RR2142
4 ... 40
3RR2242
4 ... 40
Available
Article No. scheme

@@@
Monitoring relays
3RR
2
@
Type of setting
Type of monitoring relay
Size
Connection methods
Number and type of outputs

Signal type of the control supply voltage
3RR
Example
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
10
IC0
1_ 0
0 24

The 3RR2 monitoring relays contribute to the energy efficiency
throughout the plant as follows:
Shutdown in the event of no-load operation
(e.g. pump no-load operation)
Load shedding of predefined loads in the event of current
overshoots
More information
Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations
Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders" see
System Manual "Industrial Controls SIRIUS Innovations" see
10/70
Siemens IC 10 2014
Manual "3UG45/3UG46 and 3RR21/3RR22 Monitoring Relays",

see
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3RR2242 and 3RR2142 current monitoring relays
The SIRIUS 3RR2 current monitoring relays are suitable for the
load monitoring of motors or other loads. In two or three phases
they monitor the rms value of AC currents for overshooting or
undershooting of set threshold values.
Whereas apparent current monitoring is used above all in connection with the rated torque or in case of overload, the active
current monitoring option can be used to observe and evaluate
the load factor over a motor's entire torque range.
The 3RR2 current monitoring relays can be integrated directly in
the feeder by mounting onto the 3RT2 contactor; separate wiring
of the main circuit is therefore superfluous. No separate transformers are required.
For a line-oriented configuration or simultaneous use of an overload relay, terminal supports for stand-alone installation are
available for separate standard rail mounting.
Versions
Basic versions
Benefits
Can be mounted directly on 3RT2 contactors and
3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies, in other words, there
is no need for additional wiring in the main circuit
Optimally coordinated with the technical characteristics of the
3RT2 contactors
No separate current transformer required
Versions with wide voltage supply range
Variably adjustable to overshoot, undershoot or range
monitoring
Freely configurable delay times and RESET response
Display of ACTUAL value and status messages
All versions with removable control current terminals
All versions with screw terminals or spring-type terminals
Simple determination of the threshold values through direct
reference to actually measured values for setpoint loading
Range monitoring and selectable active current measurement
mean that only one device for monitoring a motor is required
along the entire torque curve
In addition to current monitoring it is also possible to monitor
for broken cables, phase failure, phase sequence, residual
current and motor blocking.
Application
Monitoring of current overshoot and undershoot
Monitoring of broken conductors
Monitoring of no-load operation and load shedding, e.g. in the
event of a torn V-belt or no-load operation of a pump
Monitoring of overload, e.g. on conveyor belts or cranes due
to an excessive load
Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads such as heaters
Monitoring of wrong phase sequence on mobile equipment
such as compressors or cranes
Monitoring of high-impedance faults to ground, e.g. caused
by damaged insulation or moisture
10
Overview
The basic versions with two-phase apparent current monitoring,

a CO contact output and analog adjustability provide a high
level of monitoring reliability especially in the rated and overload
range.
Standard versions
The standard versions monitor the current in three phases with
selectable active current monitoring. They have additional diagnostics options such as residual current monitoring and phase
sequence monitoring, and they are also suitable for monitoring
motors below the rated torque. These devices have an additional independent semiconductor output, an actual value indicator, and are digitally adjustable.
Both versions are available optionally with screw or spring-type
terminals, in each case for sizes S00 and S0.
Note:
In addition to the features of the standard versions,
3RR24 monitoring relays for mounting onto 3RT2 contactors for
IO-Link also offer the possibility of transmitting the measured values and diagnostics data to a controller via an IO-Link. Furthermore, the devices can be parameterized on the devices themselves or via IO-Link.
For more information, see page 10/76.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/71
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Function charts of 3RR214.-.A.30 basic variants, analogically adjustable
Closed-circuit principle upon application of the control supply voltage
Current overshoot
Range monitoring
B1-B2
B1-B2
1~ = 0
>
<
>
Hysteresis 6,25 %
1~ = 0
Hysteresis 6,25 %
Hyst. 6,25 %
2~ = 0
31/34
31/32
FAULT
LED
OFF FLASH OFF FLASH OFF FLASH

slow
slow
slow
onDel
onDel
ON
OFF
B1-B2
1~ = 0
Hysteresis 6,25 %
2~ = 0
NSB0_02049
10
<
31/34
31/32
O F F FLASH O N FLASH O F F FLASH

slow
slow
slow
onDel
10/72
onDel
Del
Siemens IC 10 2014
O F F FLASH O N FLASH O F F FLASH

slow
slow
slow
onDel
Del
Current undershoot
FAULT
LED
31/34
31/32
FAULT
LED
FLASH OFF
fast
NSB0_02050
NSB0_02048
2~ = 0
ON
OFF
FLASH O F F
fast
onDel
Del
ON
OFF
FLASH
slow
Del
ON
O F F FLASH O F F
fast
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Function charts of 3RR224.-.F.30 standard versions, digitally adjustable
With the closed-circuit principle selected upon application of the control supply voltage
Current overshoot
Range monitoring
B1-B2
>
B1-B2
>n x
>
<
1,2 ~ = 0
nx
, !
, !
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hyst.
, !
3~ = 0
3~ = 0
NSB0_02051
Q on
Q off
onDel onDel
Del
RsDel
NSB0_02053
31/34
31/32
31/34
31/32
Q on
Q off
onDel onDel
Del
RsDel
Del
RsDel
RsDel
Current undershoot with residual current monitoring
B1-B2
>
B1-B2
1+ 2+ 3
Hysteresis
, !
31/34
31/32
31/34
31/32
Q on
Q off
onDel
onDel
Del
NSB0_02054
3~ = 0
NSB0_02052
3~ = 0
10
L3- L 2- L1
Q on
Q off
RsDel
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/73
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit diagrams
B1 / AC/DC
2T1 4T2 6T3
B2
B1 / AC/DC
31
2T1 4T2 6T3
32 34 14/22 A2
B2
32 34
IC01_00201
IC01_00199
3RR2141-1A.30
31
3RR2141-2A.30, 3RR2142-.A.30
B1 / AC/DC
2T1 4T2 6T3
Q B2
31
B1 / AC/DC
32 34 14/22 A2
2T1 4T2 6T3
Q B2
31
32 34
IC01_00202
IC01_00200
3RR2241-1F.30
3RR2241-2F.30, 3RR2242-.F.30
Note:
It is not necessary to protect the measuring circuit for device
protection. The protective device for line protection depends
on the cross-section used.

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
10
SIRIUS 3RR21/3RR22 current monitoring relays

For load monitoring of motors or other loads
Multi-phase monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent
Starting and tripping delay can be adjusted separately
Tripping delay 0 to 30 s
Auto or Manual RESET
3RR2141-1AW30
Size
3RR2142-1AW30
3RR2241-1FW30
Measuring range
Hysteresis
Control supply voltage Us
3RR2242-1FW30
DT
3RR2141-2AA30
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
3RR2241-2FA30
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Basic versions
Analogically adjustable, closed-circuit principle, 1 CO, 2-phase current monitoring,
apparent current monitoring, start-up delay 0 ... 60 s
S00
1.6 ... 16
6.25 % of
threshold value
24 AC/DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RR2141-1AA30
3RR2141-1AW30
A
A
3RR2141-2AA30
3RR2141-2AW30
S0
4 ... 40
6.25 % of
threshold value
24 AC/DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RR2142-1AA30
3RR2142-1AW30
A
A
3RR2142-2AA30
3RR2142-2AW30
Standard versions
Digitally adjustable, LCD, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, 1 CO,
1 semiconductor output, 3-phase current monitoring, active current or apparent current
monitoring, phase sequence monitoring, residual current monitoring, blocking current
monitoring, reclosing delay time 0 ... 300 min, start-up delay 0 ... 99 s, separate settings
for warning and alarm thresholds
S00
1.6 ... 16
0.1 ... 3
24 AC/DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RR2241-1FA30
3RR2241-1FW30
A
A
3RR2241-2FA30
3RR2241-2FW30
S0
4 ... 40
0.1 ... 8
24 AC/DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RR2242-1FA30
3RR2242-1FW30
A
A
3RR2242-2FA30
3RR2242-2FW30
10/74
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Accessories
Use
Version
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
100 340 units
41B
Terminal supports for stand-alone installation1)

For 3RR21, For separate mounting of the overload relays
3RR22
or monitoring relays; screw and snap-on mounting
onto TH 35 standard mounting rail according to
IEC 60715
Screw connection
Screw terminals
}
}
S00
S0
3RU2916-3AA01
3RU2926-3AA01
3RU2916-3AA01
Spring-type connection
S00
S0
B
B
3RU2916-3AC01
3RU2926-3AC01
3RT2900-1SB20
3RU2926-3AC01
Blank labels
For 3RR21, Unit labeling plates2)
For SIRIUS devices
3RR22
IC01_00181
3RT2900-1SB20
For 3RR21, Sealable covers

A
3RR22
For securing against unintentional or unauthorized
adjustment of settings
}
For 3RR21 Sealing foil

For securing against unauthorized
adjustment of setting knobs
3RR2940
5 units
41H
3TK2820-0AA00
1 unit
41L
1 unit
41B
3RR2940

For auxiliary circuit
connections
Screwdrivers
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm, length approx. 200 mm,
A
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
1)
The accessories are identical to those of the 3RU21 thermal overload

relays and the 3RB3 solid-state overload relays see Chapter 7 "Protection
Equipment".

2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/75
10
Sealable covers
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3RR24 Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto 3RT2 Contactors for IO-Link
General data
Overview
Features
3RR24
Benefits
S00, S0
Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections and technical

characteristics of the other devices in the SIRIUS modular system
(contactors, soft starters, etc.)
S00: 45 x 79 x 80,
S0: 45 x 87 x 91
Permit the mounting of slim and compact load feeders in widths of 45 mm

(S00 and S0)
S00: 45 x 90 x 80,
S0: 45 x 109 x 92
S00: 1.6 ... 16 A

S0: 4 ... 40 A
Is adapted to the other devices in the SIRIUS modular system
-25 ... +60 C
Suitable for applications in the control cabinet, worldwide
(Three-phase)
Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of loads against

excessive temperature rises due to overload
General data
Current range
Dimensions in mm
(W x H x D)
Screw terminals
Sizes
Just a single version per size with a wide setting range enables easy
configuration

During operation
Current overshoot
Enables detection of filter blockages or pumping against closed gate

valves
Enables drawing conclusions about wear, poor lubrication or other
maintenance-relevant phenomena
Current undershoot
(Three-phase)
Enables detection of overload due to a slipping or torn belt

Guarantees protection of pumps against dry running
Facilitates monitoring of the functions of resistive loads such as heaters
10
Permits energy savings through monitoring of no-load operation

Apparent current monitoring
(Selectable)
Precision current monitoring especially in a motor's rated and upper torque

range
(Selectable)
Optimum current monitoring over a motor's entire torque range through the
patented combination of power factor and apparent current monitoring
Range monitoring
(Three-phase)
Simultaneous monitoring of current overshoot and undershoot with a singe

device
Phase failure, open circuit
(Three-phase)
Minimizes heating of three-phase motors during phase failure through

immediate disconnection
Prevents operation of hoisting equipment with reduced load carrying
capacity
(Selectable)
Prevents starting of motors, pumps or compressors in the wrong direction

of rotation

(residual current monitoring)
(Selectable)
Provides optimum protection of loads against high-resistance short circuits

or ground faults due to moisture, condensed water, damage to the
insulation material, etc.
Eliminates the need for additional special equipment
Reduces wiring overhead and costs
Blocking current monitoring
(Selectable)
Minimizes heating of three-phase motors when blocked during operation

through immediate disconnection
Minimizes mechanical loading of the system by acting as an electronic
shear pin
Operating hours counter
gives the time during which there was a measurable current in at least
2 current paths
as an indicator for upcoming maintenance or replacement of machine and
system components
Operating cycles counter
is incremented by one each time a breaking operation is detected, in other

words a transition from three-phase current flow to no measurable current
flow
as an indicator for upcoming maintenance or replacement of contact
blocks
Available
10/76
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Features
3RR24
Benefits
Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay
Features
RESET function
Resetting directly on the device, by switching the control supply voltage off
and on or via IO-Link (remote RESET)
ON-delay time
0 ... 999.9 s
Tripping delay time
0 999.9 s
Enables motor starting without evaluation of the starting current

Can be used for monitoring motors with lengthy start-up
Permits brief threshold value violations during operation
Prevents frequent warnings and disconnections with currents near the
threshold values
Operating and indicating elements
Displays and buttons
For setting the threshold values and delay times

For selectable functions
For quick and selective diagnostics
Displays for permanent display of measured values
1 CO contact,
1 semiconductor output
(in SIO mode)
Enable disconnection of the system or process when there is an irregularity
Short-circuit strength up to 100 kA

at 690 V
(in conjunction with the corresponding fuses or the
corresponding motor starter protector)
Provides optimum protection of the loads and operating personnel in the

event of short circuits due to insulation faults or faulty switching operations
Electrical and mechanical

matching to 3RT2 contactors
Integrated contacts

Enables stand-alone installation as well as space-saving direct mounting
Spring-type terminals for main circuit and auxiliary

circuits
(Optional)

Suitable for single- and three-phase loads
Enables the monitoring of single-phase systems through parallel infeed at

the contactor or looping the current through the three phase connections
Wide setting ranges
Reduce the number of variants

Minimize the configuration outlay and costs
Minimize storage overheads, storage costs, tied-up capital
Power supply
24 V DC
Direct via IO-Link master or via an external auxiliary voltage independent

of the IO-Link
Minimizes the configuring overhead and costs
Available
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/77
10
Other features
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Possible combinations of 3RR24 monitoring relays with 3RT2 contactors for IO-Link
Monitoring relays
Current range
Contactors
(type, size, rating)
3RT201
3RT202
S00
S0
Type
3/4/5.5/7.5 kW
5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5 kW
3RR2441
1.6 ... 16
3RR2442
4 ... 40
Available
Article No. scheme

@@@
Monitoring relays
3RR
2
@
Type of setting
Type of monitoring relay
Size
Connection methods

3RR
Example
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
10

The 3RR2 monitoring relays contribute to the energy efficiency
overshoots
More information
Configuration Manual "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations
Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders" see
System Manual "Industrial Controls SIRIUS Innovations" see
Manual "3UG48/3RR24 Monitoring Relays for IO-Link" see
10/78
Siemens IC 10 2014
Notes on safety
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Overview
Rapid parameterization of the same devices by duplication of
the parameterization in the controller
Parameter transmission by upload to a controller by IO-Link
call or by parameter server (if IO-Link master from IO-Link
Specification V 1.1 and higher is used)
Consistent central data storage in the event of parameter
change locally or via a controller
Automatic reparameterizing when devices are exchanged
Blocking of local parameterization via IO-Link possible
Faults are saved in parameterizable and non-volatile fashion
to prevent an automatic start-up after voltage failure and to
make sure diagnostics data is not lost
By integration into the automation level the option exists of
parameterizing the monitoring relay at any time via a display
unit or displaying the measured values in a control room or
locally at the machine/control cabinet.
The SIRIUS 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link are

suitable for the load monitoring of motors or other loads. In three
phases they monitor the rms value of AC currents for
overshooting or undershooting of set threshold values.
Whereas apparent current monitoring is used above all in connection with the rated torque or in case of overload, the active
current monitoring option, which is also selectable, can be used
to observe and evaluate the load factor over a motor's entire
torque range.
The 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link can be integrated directly in the feeder by mounting onto the 3RT2 contactor; separate wiring of the main circuit is therefore superfluous.
No separate transformers are required.
For a line-oriented configuration or simultaneous use of an
overload relay, terminal supports for stand-alone installation are
available for separate standard rail mounting.
The SIRIUS 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link also
offer many other options based upon the monitoring functions of
the conventional SIRIUS 3RR2 monitoring relays:
Measured value transmission to a controller, including
resolution and unit, may be parameterizable as to which value
is cyclically transmitted
Transmission of alarm flags to a controller
Full diagnosis capability by inquiry as to the cause of the fault
in the diagnosis data record
Remote parameterization is also possible, in addition to or
instead of local parameterization
Even without communication via IO-Link the devices continue to

function fully autonomously:
Parameterization can take place locally at the device,
independently of a controller.
In the event of failure or before the controller becomes available the monitoring relays work as long as the control supply
voltage (24 V DC) is present.
If the monitoring relays are operated without the controller, the
3RR24 monitoring relays for IO-Link have, thanks to the integrated SIO mode, an additional semiconductor output, which
switches when the adjustable warning threshold is exceeded.
Thanks to the combination of autonomous monitoring relay function and integrated IO-Link communication, redundant sensors
and/or analog signal converters which previously took over the
transmission of measured values to a controller, leading to considerable extra cost and wiring outlay are no longer needed.
Because the output relays are still present, the monitoring relays
increase the functional reliability of the system, since only the
controller can fulfill the control tasks if the current measured
values are available, whereas the output relays can also be used
for the disconnection of the system if limit values that cannot be
reached during operation are exceeded.
For further information on the IO-Link communication system see
Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication".
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/79
10
SIRIUS 3RR2441 and 3RR2442 current monitoring relay
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
10
Benefits
Application
Can be mounted directly on 3RT2 contactors and

3RA23 reversing contactor assemblies, in other words, there
is no need for additional wiring in the main circuit
Optimally coordinated with the technical characteristics of the
3RT2 contactors
No separate current transformer required
monitoring
All versions with removable control current terminals
All versions with screw or spring-type terminals
Simple determination of the threshold values through direct
reference to actually measured values for setpoint loading
Range monitoring and selectable active current measurement
mean that only one device for monitoring a motor is required
along the entire torque curve
In addition to current monitoring it is also possible to monitor
for current unbalance, broken cables, phase failure, phase
sequence, residual current and motor blocking.
Integrated counter for operating cycles and operating hours to
support requirements-based maintenance of the monitored
machine or application
Simple cyclical transmission of the current measured values,
relay switching states and events to a controller
Remote parameterization
Simple duplication of identical or similar parameterizations
Cost saving and space saving in control cabinet due to the
elimination of AI and IO modules as well as analog signal
converters and duplicated sensors
10/80
Siemens IC 10 2014
Monitoring of current overshoot and undershoot

Monitoring of no-load operation and load shedding, e.g. in the
event of a torn V-belt or no-load operation of a pump
Monitoring of overload, e.g. on pumps due to a dirty filter
system
Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads such as heaters
Monitoring of wrong phase sequence on mobile equipment
such as compressors or cranes
Monitoring of high-impedance faults to ground, e.g. caused
by damaged insulation or moisture
The use of SIRIUS monitoring relays for IO-Link is particularly
recommended for machines and plant in which these relays, in
addition to their monitoring function, are to be connected to the
automation level for the rapid, simple and fault-free provision of
the current measured values and/or for remote parameterization.
The monitoring relays can either relieve the controller of monitoring tasks or, as a second monitoring entity in parallel to and independent of the controller, increase the reliability in the process
or in the system. In addition, the elimination of AI and IO modules
allows the width of the controller to be reduced despite significantly expanded functionality.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Function charts of 3RR24 for IO-Link, digitally adjustable
With the closed-circuit principle selected upon application of the control supply voltage
Current overshoot
Range monitoring
L+/L>
L+/L-
>n x
>
<
1,2 ~ = 0
nx
, !
, !
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hyst.
, !
3~ = 0
3~ = 0
IC01_00185
Q on
Q off
onDel
onDel Del
RsDel
IC01_00186
31/34
31/32
31/34
31/32
Q on
Q off
onDel onDel Del
RsDel Del
RsDel
RsDel
Current undershoot with residual current monitoring
L+/L>
L+/L-
1+ 2+ 3
Hysteresis
, !
31/34
31/32
31/34
31/32
Q on
Q off
onDel
onDel
Del
RsDel
L+ C/Q L-
31
IC01_00188
3~ = 0
IC01_00187
3~ = 0
10
L3-L2-L1
Q on
Q off
Circuit diagrams
L+ C/Q LIO-Link
IO-Link
2T1 4T2 6T3
31
32 34 14/22 A2
2T1 4T2 6T3
3RR2441-1AA40
32 34
IC01_00190
IC01_00189
3RR2441-2AA40, 3RR2442-.AA40
Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/81
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

SIRIUS 3RR24 current monitoring relays for IO-Link
For load monitoring of motors or other loads
Multi-phase monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent
Starting and tripping delay can be adjusted separately
Tripping delay 0 to 999.9 s
3RR2441-1AA40
3RR2442-1AA40
Size
Measuring range
Hysteresis
Control supply voltage Us
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3RR2441-2AA40
3RR2442-2AA40
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Digitally adjustable, LCD, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, 1 CO,

1 semiconductor output (in SIO mode), 3-phase current monitoring, active current
or apparent current monitoring, current unbalance monitoring, phase sequence
monitoring, residual current monitoring, blocking current monitoring, operating
hours counter, operating cycles counter, reclosing delay time 0 ... 999.9 min,
start-up delay 0 ... 999.9 s, separate settings for warning and alarm thresholds
S00
1.6 ... 16
0.1 ... 3
24 DC
3RR2441-1AA40
3RR2441-2AA40
S0
4 ... 40
0.1 ... 8
24 DC
3RR2442-1AA40
3RR2442-2AA40
10
Notes:
Devices required for the communication via IO-Link:
Any controller that supports the IO-Link (e.g. ET 200S with
CPU or S7-300 plus ET 200S distributed I/O),
see Catalog ST 70 "SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated
Automation"
IO-Link master (IO-Link master 4SI IO-Link or 4SI SIRIUS
interface module, which can connect all SIRIUS IO-Link
devices to a controller,
see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication")
Each monitoring relay requires an IO-Link channel.
10/82
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Accessories
Use
Version
Size
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41F
41F
100 340 units
41B
Terminal supports for stand-alone installation1)

For 3RR24
For separate mounting of the overload relays

or monitoring relays; screw and snap-on mounting
onto TH 35 standard mounting rail according to
IEC 60715
Screw connection
S00
S0
Screw terminals
}
}
3RU2916-3AA01
3RU2926-3AA01
3RU2916-3AA01
Spring-type connection
S00
S0
B
B
3RU2916-3AC01
3RU2926-3AC01
3RT2900-1SB20
3RU2926-3AC01
Blank labels
For 3RR24

For SIRIUS devices
IC01_00181
3RT2900-1SB20
Sealable covers
Sealable covers
A
For securing against unintentional or unauthorized
adjustment of settings
3RR2940
5 units
41H
1 unit
41B
10
For 3RR24
3RR2940

For auxiliary Screwdrivers
circuit
connections 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm, length approx. 200 mm,
A
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
1)
The accessories are identical to those of the 3RU21 thermal overload

relays and the 3RB3 solid-state overload relays see Chapter 7 "Protection
Equipment".
2)


Siemens IC 10 2014
10/83
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3UG45, 3UG46 Monitoring Relays for Stand-Alone Installation
General data
Overview
The individual 3UG4 monitoring relays offer the following
functions in various combinations:
Undershooting and/or overshooting of liquid levels
Phase sequence
Phase failure, neutral conductor failure
Phase asymmetry
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for voltage
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for current
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for power
factor
Monitoring of the active current or the apparent current
Monitoring of the residual current
Monitoring of the insulation resistance
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for speed
The field-proven SIRIUS monitoring relays for electrical and

mechanical variables enable constant monitoring of all important characteristic quantities that provide information about the
functional capability of a plant. Both sudden disturbances and
gradual changes, which may indicate the need for maintenance,
are detected. Thanks to their relay outputs, the monitoring relays
permit direct disconnection of the affected system components
as well as alerting (e.g. by switching a warning lamp). Thanks to
adjustable delay times the monitoring relays can respond very
flexibly to brief faults such as voltage dips or load changes.
This avoids unnecessary alarms and disconnections while
enhancing plant availability.
Article No. scheme

@@@
Monitoring relays
@
@
Type of setting
Functions
Connection methods
Contacts
Supply voltage
Special version
Example
3UG
Notes:
article numbers.
10/84
3UG
Generation
10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Benefits
0 24
IC0
1_ 0
Customary screw and spring-type terminals for quick and

reliable wiring
Fast commissioning thanks to menu-guided parameterization
and actual value display for limit value determination
Reduced space requirement in the control cabinet thanks to a
consistent width of 22.5 mm
Parameterizable monitoring functions, delay times, reset
response, etc.
Reduced stockkeeping thanks to minimized variance and
large measuring ranges
Wide-voltage power supply units for global applicability
Device replacement without renewed wiring thanks to
removable terminals
Reliable system diagnostics thanks to actual value display
and connectable fault memory
Rapid diagnostics thanks to unambiguous error messages on
the display
The 3UG4 monitoring relays contribute to energy efficiency
Reactive-power compensation by means of power factor
monitoring
overshoots
The SIRIUS 3UG4 monitoring relays monitor the most diverse

electrical and mechanical quantities in the feeder, and provide
reliable protection against damage in the plant. For this purpose,
they offer freely parameterizable limit values and diverse options
for adapting to the respective task, and in the event of a fault,
they provide clear diagnostics information.
The digitally adjustable products also display the current measured values direct on the device. This not only facilitates the
display of valuable plant status information during operation, it
also enables adjustment of the monitored limit values in accordance with the actual conditions.
The 3UG4 monitoring relays are available for the following

applications:
Line and single-phase voltage monitoring
Single-phase current monitoring or power factor and
active current monitoring
Level monitoring
Speed monitoring
The positive result: More selective avoidance of production

faults sustained increases in availability and productivity.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/85
10
Application
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Type
3UG
General data
- Screw terminals
22.5 x 83 x 91
22.5 x 84 x 91
mm
mm
22.5 x 92 x 91
22.5 x 94 x 91

- Screw terminals
mm
mm
22.5 x 103 x 91
22.5 x 103 x 91

During operation
-25 ... +60

- Screw terminals
mm
mm
W
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Connection type
Solid
Finely stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
More information
10
Manual "3UG45/3UG46 and 3RR21/3RR22 Monitoring Relays"

see
10/86
Siemens IC 10 2014

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
Overview
Benefits
Can be used without auxiliary voltage in any network from
160 to 630 V AC worldwide thanks to wide voltage range
monitoring
Width 22.5 mm
Permanent display of ACTUAL value and network fault type
on the digital versions
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation by distinguishing between power system faults and wrong phase sequence
All versions with removable terminals
Application
Solid-state line monitoring relays provide maximum protection

for mobile machines and plants or for unstable networks.
Network and voltage faults can thus be detected early and
rectified before far greater damage ensues.
Depending on the version, the relays monitor phase sequence,
phase failure with and without N conductor monitoring, phase
asymmetry, undervoltage or overvoltage.
Phase asymmetry is evaluated as the difference between the
greatest and the smallest phase voltage relative to the greatest
phase voltage. Undervoltage or overvoltage exists when at least
one phase voltage deviates by 20 % from the set rated system
voltage or the directly set limit values are overshot or undershot.
The rms value of the voltage is measured.
With the 3UG4617 or 3UG4618 relay, a wrong direction of
rotation can also be corrected automatically.
The relays are used above all for mobile equipment,

e.g. air conditioning compressors, refrigerating containers,
building site compressors and cranes.
Function
Application
Phase sequence
Direction of rotation of the drive
Phase failure
A fuse has tripped

Failure of the control supply voltage
Broken cable
Phase asymmetry
Overheating of the motor due to asymmetrical

voltage
Detection of asymmetrically loaded networks
Undervoltage
Increased current on a motor with

corresponding overheating
Unintentional resetting of a device
Network collapse, particularly with battery power
Overvoltage
Protection of a plant against destruction due to

overvoltage
L1-L2-L3
11/14
ON 11/12
Note:
21/24
When one phase fails, connected loads (motor windings, lamps,

transformers, coils, etc.) create a feedback voltage at the terminal of the failed phase due to the network coupling. Because the
3UG4511 relays are not resistant to voltage feedback, such a
phase failure is not detected. Should this be required, then the
3UG4512 monitoring relay must be used.
21/22
NSB0_01565a
The 3UG4511 phase sequenced relay monitors the phase

sequence in a three-phase network. No adjustments are
required for operation. The device has an internal power supply
and works using the closed-circuit principle. If the phase
sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay
picks up after the delay time has elapsed and the LED is lit.
If the phase sequence is wrong, the output relay remains in its
rest position.
Correct phase sequence
Wrong phase sequence
L3-L2-L1
11/14
OFF 11/12
21/24
21/22
NSB0_01566a
3UG4511 monitoring relays
10
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/87
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
The 3UG4512 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase

networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure and
phase unbalance of 10 %. Thanks to a special measuring
method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide
voltage range from 160 to 690 V and feedback through the load
of up to 90 %. The device has an internal power supply and
works using the closed-circuit principle. No adjustments are
required. When the mains voltage is switched on, the green LED
is lit. If the phase sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct,
the output relay picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the
red LED flashes and the output relay remains in its rest position.
If a phase fails, the red LED is permanently lit and the output
relay drops.
The 3UG4513 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase

networks with regard to phase sequence, phase failure, phase
asymmetry and undervoltage of 20 %. The device has an internal power supply and works using the closed-circuit principle.
The hysteresis is 5 %. The integrated response delay time is
adjustable from 0 to 20 s and responds to undervoltage. If the
direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately.
Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably
detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V
and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. When the mains
voltage is switched on, the green LED is lit. If the phase sequence at the terminals L1-L2-L3 is correct, the output relay
picks up. If the phase sequence is wrong, the red LED flashes
and the output relay remains in its rest position. If a phase fails,
the red LED is permanently lit and the output relay drops.
Note:
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the
current relay status. The 3UG4512 monitoring relay is suitable for
line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.
Phase failure
Note:
The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the
current relay status. The 3UG4513 monitoring relay is suitable for
line frequencies of 50/60 Hz.
Phase failure and undervoltage
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
-20 %
3~ n
11/14
Hysteresis
5%
L1-L2-L3
11/12
NSB0_01567a
11/14
21/24
21/22
LED rd
11/12
21/24
21/22
OFF
ON
Phase failure
LED rd
OFF
NSB0_01569b
OFF
ON
Phase failure
OFF
Delay
ON
OFF

11/14
L3-L2-L1
11/12
NSB0_01568a
11/14
21/24
21/22
LED rd
OFF FLASH
OFF
Phase sequence
11/12
NSB0_01570a
10
L3-L2-L1
21/24
21/22
LED rd
OFF FLASH
OFF
Phase sequence
10/88
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
3UG4615/3UG4616 monitoring relays
The 3UG4614 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage range

input and an internal power supply. The device is equipped with
a display and is parameterized using three buttons. The unit
monitors three-phase networks with regard to phase asymmetry
from 5 to 20 %, phase failure, undervoltage and phase
sequence. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition
the device has a response delay and ON-delay from 0 to 20 s in
each case. The integrated response delay time responds to
phase asymmetry and undervoltage. If the direction is incorrect,
the device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special
measuring method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite
of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V and feedback
through the load of up to 80 %.
The 3UG4615/3UG4616 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage

range input and an internal power supply. The device is
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three buttons. The 3UG4615 device monitors three-phase networks with
regard to phase failure, undervoltage, overvoltage and phase
sequence. The 3UG4616 monitoring relay monitors the neutral
conductor as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In
addition the device has two separately adjustable delay times
for overvoltage and undervoltage from 0 to 20 s in each case. If
the direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately.
Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably
detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V
and feedback through the load of up to 80 %.
The 3UG4614 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of

either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with
manual or Auto RESET.
The 3UG4615/3UG4616 monitoring relay can be operated on

the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and
with manual or Auto RESET.
With the closed-circuit principle selected

L3-L2-L1
11/14
11/14
11/12
11/12
NSB0_01571a
L3-L2-L1
21/24
21/22
NSB0_01571a
21/24
21/22
Phase failure
Phase failure
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3
11/14
11/14
11/12
21/24
21/22
Undervoltage
Undervoltage
<
Hysteresis
x-y
x-y
11/14
Hysteresis
<
11/14
11/12
21/24
21/22
onDelay
NSB0_01573a
NSB0_01577a
11/12
21/24
21/22
Delay
Delay
Overvoltage
Unbalance
> Asy
0%
Hysteresis
2%
11/14
11/12
11/12
NSB0_01578a
11/14
21/24
21/22
onDelay
Hysteresis
<
x-y
Delay
NSB0_01574a
10
21/22
NSB0_01572a
11/12
NSB0_01576a
21/24
21/24
21/22
Delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/89
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
Undervoltage
Hysteresis
<
x-y
11/14
11/12
50 ms
NSB0_01588a
The 3UG4617/3UG4618 line monitoring relay has an internal

power supply and can automatically correct a wrong direction of
rotation. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure
is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from
160 to 690 V AC and feedback through the load of up to 80 %.
The device is equipped with a display and is parameterized
using three buttons. The 3UG4617 line monitoring relay unit
monitors three-phase networks with regard to phase sequence,
phase failure, phase unbalance, undervoltage and overvoltage.
The 3UG4618 monitoring relay monitors the neutral conductor
as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V. In addition
the device has delay times from 0 to 20 s in each case for
overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure and phase unbalance.
The 3UG4617/3UG4618 monitoring relay can be operated on
the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and
with manual or Auto RESET. The one changeover contact is used
for warning or disconnection in the event of power system faults
(voltage, unbalance), the other responds only to a wrong phase
sequence. In conjunction with a contactor reversing assembly it
is thus possible to change the direction automatically.
21/24
21/22
Delay
Overvoltage
>
Hysteresis
x-y
11/14
11/12
50 ms
NSB0_01589a
21/24
21/22
Phase failure
Delay
Unbalance
L1-L2-L3
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N L1-L2-L3 L1-L2-L3-N
> Asy
Hysteresis
2%
0%
11/14
11/12
NSB0_01587a
11/14
11/12
50 ms
NSB0_01590a
50 ms
21/24
21/22
21/24
21/22
Delay
Type
3UG4511 ... 3UG4513, 3UG4614 ... 3UG4618
10
General data
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
690
kV
Load capacity of the output relay

Rated operational current Ie at

AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/125 V
DC-13/250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Control circuit
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC

Million operating cycles
0.1
10
Circuit diagrams
L1 L2 L3
11
NSB0_01537a
L1 L2 L3
11
21
3UG4
3UG4
12 14
3UG4511-.A,
3UG4512-.A
10/90
L1
L2
L3
N
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
NSB0_01536a
11
21
3UG4
12 14 22 24
3UG4511-.B, 3UG4512-.B,
3UG4513, 3UG4614,
3UG4615, 3UG4617
Siemens IC 10 2014
N L1 L2 L3
NSB0_01538a
3UG4616,
3UG4618
12 14 22 24
Note:
It is not necessary to protect
the measuring circuit for
device protection.
The protective device for line
protection depends on the
cross-section used.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3UG4511-1AP20
Adjustable Underhysteresis voltage
detection
3UG4615-1CR20
Overvoltage
detection
3UG4617-1CR20
3UG4616-1CR20
DT
3UG4618-1CR20
3UG4511-2BP20
DT
3UG4512-2BR20
Stabilization time
adjustable
stDEL
Tripping
delay time
adjustable
Del
Version of Measurable
auxiliary mains voltage1)
contacts
CO contact
--
1
2
160 260 AC
A
A
3UG4511-1AN20
3UG4511-1BN20
A
A
3UG4511-2AN20
3UG4511-2BN20
1
2
320 500 AC
A
A
3UG4511-1AP20
3UG4511-1BP20
A
A
3UG4511-2AP20
3UG4511-2BP20
1
2
420 690 AC
A
A
3UG4511-1AQ20
3UG4511-1BQ20
A
A
3UG4511-2AQ20
3UG4511-2BQ20
A
A
3UG4512-1AR20
3UG4512-1BR20
A
A
3UG4512-2AR20
3UG4512-2BR20
3UG4513-1BR20
3UG4513-2BR20
3UG4614-1BR20
3UG4614-2BR20
3UG4615-1CR20
3UG4615-2CR20
3UG4616-1CR20
3UG4616-2CR20
3UG4617-1CR20
3UG4617-2CR20
3UG4618-1CR20
3UG4618-2CR20
Screw
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Monitoring of phase sequence

Auto RESET
--
--
--
--
Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure and phase unbalance

Auto RESET, closed-circuit principle, unbalance threshold permanently 10 %
--
--
--
--
--
1
2
160 690 AC
Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure, unbalance and undervoltage

Analogically adjustable, Auto RESET, closed-circuit principle, unbalance and undervoltage
threshold permanently 20 %
5 % of
set value
--
--
0.1 20
160 690 AC
Digitally adjustable, Auto or Manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle,

unbalance threshold 0 or 5 ... 20 %
--
0.1 ... 20
0.1 20
160 690 AC
10
Adjustable
1 ... 20 V
Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure, overvoltage

and undervoltage
Digitally adjustable, Auto RESET or Manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle
Adjustable
1 ... 20 V
--
0.1 202)
22)
160 690 AC
Monitoring of phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure,

overvoltage and undervoltage
Digitally adjustable, Auto RESET or Manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle
Adjustable
1 ... 20 V
--
0.1 202)
22)
90 400 AC
against N
Automatic direction correction in case of wrong phase sequence,

phase failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage
Adjustable
1 ... 20 V
--
0.1 20
23)
160 690 AC
Automatic correction of the direction of rotation in case of wrong phase

sequence, phase and N conductor failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage
and undervoltage
Adjustable
1 ... 20 V
--
0.1 20
23)
90 400 AC
against N
Function available

1)
Absolute limit values.
2)
1 CO contact each and 1 tripping delay time each for Umin and Umax.
3)
1 CO contact each for power system fault and phase sequence correction.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/91
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Voltage monitoring
Overview
Benefits
monitoring
Width 22.5 mm
Application
Protection of a plant against destruction due to overvoltage
Switch-on of a plant at a defined voltage and higher
Protection from undervoltage due to overloaded control
supply voltages, particularly with battery power
Threshold switch for analog signals from 0.1 to 10 V
The relays monitor single-phase AC voltages (rms value) and

DC voltages against the set threshold value for overshoot and
undershoot. The devices differ with regard to their power supply
(internal or external).
Undervoltage
The measuring range extends from 0.1 to 60 V or

10 to 600 V AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or
undershoot can be freely configured within this range.
If one of these threshold values is reached, the output relay
responds according to the set principle of operation as soon as
the delay time has elapsed. This delay time UDel can be set from
0.1 to 20 s. The hysteresis can be set from 0.1 to 30 V or
0.1 to 300 V. The device can be operated on the basis of either
the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or
Auto RESET. One output changeover contact is available as
signaling contact.
A1-A2
<
Hysteresis
=0
11/14
11/12
Delay
Range monitoring
A1-A2

Overvoltage
>
<
A1-A2
Hysteresis
>
Hysteresis
11/14
11/14
11/12
Delay
10/92
Siemens IC 10 2014
NSB0_01583b
Hysteresis
=0
NSB0_01581a
10
The 3UG4631/3UG4632 voltage monitoring relay is supplied

with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC
and performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of the
voltage depending on parameterization. The device is equipped
with a display and is parameterized using three buttons.
NSB0_01582a
11/12
Delay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Voltage monitoring
Undervoltage
The 3UG4633 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power

supply and performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring
of the voltage depending on parameterization. The device is
equipped with a display and is parameterized using three
buttons.
A1-A2 =
Hysteresis
The operating and measuring range extends from

17 to 275 V AC/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or
undershoot can be freely configured within this range.
If one of these threshold values is reached, the output relay
the tripping delay time has elapsed. This delay time UDel can be
set from 0.1 to 20 s like the ON-delay time onDel.
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 150 V. The device can be
operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit
principle and with manual or auto RESET. One output changeover contact is available as signaling contact.
<
=0
NSB0_01585a
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Range monitoring

A1-A2 =
Overvoltage
>
<
Hysteresis
A1-A2 =
Hysteresis
>
11/14
Hysteresis
11/12
NSB0_01584a
=0
11/14
11/12
onDelay
NSB0_01586a
=0
onDelay
Delay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Delay
Type
3UG4631
3UG4632
3UG4633

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III according to VDE 0110
690
kV
Permissible measuring range single-phase AC/DC voltage
0.1 68
10 650
17 275
Setting range single-phase voltage
0.1 ... 60
10 ... 600
17 ... 275
Measuring frequency
Hz
40 ... 500


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/125 V
DC-13/250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
10
General data
Measuring circuit
Control circuit
Circuit diagrams
AC/DC
ULoad
A1(+) IN(+)
AC/DC
11
AC/DC
ULoad
A1(+) IN(+)
A1(+)
11
<U
<U>
12 14
A2() M()
NSB0_01532b
3UG4631-.AA30,
3UG4632-.AA30
11
12 14
<U
12 14
A2() M()
NSB0_01614a
3UG4631-.AW30,
3UG4632-.AW30
A2()
Note:
It is not necessary to protect
the measuring circuit for
device protection. The protective device for line protection
depends on the cross-section
used.
NSB0_01533b
3UG4633
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/93
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Voltage monitoring
Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LCD

Open or closed-circuit principle
1 CO contact
3UG4631-1AA30
3UG4633-2AL30
Measuring range
Adjustable
hysteresis

Us
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Internal power supply without auxiliary voltage,

ON-delay and tripping delay times can be adjusted separately 0.1 ... 20 s
17 275 AC/DC
0.1 ... 150
17 275 AC/DC1)
3UG4633-1AL30
3UG4633-2AL30
Supplied from an external auxiliary voltage,

tripping delay time adjustable 0.1 ... 20 s
0.1 60 AC/DC
10 600 AC/DC
0.1 ... 30
0.1 ... 300
24 AC/DC
A
A
3UG4631-1AA30
3UG4632-1AA30
A
A
3UG4631-2AA30
3UG4632-2AA30
0.1 60 AC/DC
10 600 AC/DC
0.1 ... 30
0.1 ... 300
24 240 AC/DC
A
A
3UG4631-1AW30
3UG4632-1AW30
A
A
3UG4631-2AW30
3UG4632-2AW30
1)
10
10/94
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Current monitoring
Overview
Benefits
monitoring
Width 22.5 mm
Application
Overcurrent and undercurrent monitoring

Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads
Open-circuit monitoring
Threshold switch for analog signals from 4 to 20 mA
The relays monitor single-phase AC currents (rms value) and

DC currents against the set threshold value for overshoot and
undershoot. They differ with regard to their measuring ranges
and control supply voltage types.
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 250 mA or 0.01 to 5 A.

The device can be operated with manual or Auto RESET and on
the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle.
Following options are available: Response of the output relay
when the control supply voltage Us = ON is applied or not until
the lower measuring range limit of the measuring current
(I > 3 mA/50 mA) is reached. One output changeover contact is
available as signaling contact.
upon application of the control supply voltage
A1-A2
<
Hysteresis
=0
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Range monitoring
A1-A2
Current overshoot
<
>
A1-A2
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
>
Hysteresis
NSB0_01626a
=0
11/14
11/12
=0
NSB0_01579a
onDelay
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Delay
Delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/95
10
The measuring range extends from 3 to 500 mA or 0.05 to 10 A.

The rms value of the current is measured. The threshold values
for overshoot or undershoot can be freely configured within this
range. If one of these threshold values is reached, the output relay responds according to the set principle of operation as soon
as the tripping delay time IDel has elapsed. This time and the
ON-delay time onDel are adjustable from 0.1 to 20 s.
Current undershoot
NSB0_01580a
The 3UG4621 or 3UG4622 current monitoring relay is supplied

with an auxiliary voltage of 24 V AC/DC or 24 to 240 V AC/DC
and performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of the
current depending on parameterization. The device is equipped
with a display and is parameterized using three buttons.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Current monitoring
Type
3UG4621-.AA
3UG4621-.AW
3UG4622-.AA
3UG4622-.AW
General data
Pollution degree 3; overvoltage category III according to VDE 0110
690
kV
Measuring circuit
Measuring range single-phase AC/DC current
0.003 0.6
Setting range for single-phase current
0.003 ... 0.5
Load supply voltage
24


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/125 V
DC-13/250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
0.05 15
0.05 ... 10
Max. 3001)
Max. 5002)
Max. 3001)
Max. 5002)
24
Control circuit
1)
With protective separation.
2)
With simple separation.
Circuit diagrams
Connection diagram for 24 V AC/DC (only 3UG462.-.AA30)

ULoad
24 V AC/DC
11
A1
NSB0_01708
Load
IN
Load
< >
11
< >
14
12
optional A2
24 V AC/DC
MLoad
3UG4621-.AA30,
3UG4622-.AA30
Operation with joint
control circuit and load circuit
A1
IN
A1
A1
IN
12
14
A2
12
Load
o.k.
14
Load
3UG4621-.AW30,
3UG4622-.AW30
Three-phase operation
A2
MLoad
11
MLoad
3UG4621-.AW30,
3UG4622-.AW30
Single-phase operation
o.k.
24 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
< >
< >
A2
11
IN
< >
L2 L3
L1
A1
< >
NSB0_01197e
ULoad
Load
NSB0_01707
AC/DC
AC/DC
L1 L2 L3
24 V AC/DC
ULoad
Load
IN
A2
NSB0_01535b
10
3UG4621-.AA30,
3UG4622-.AA30
Operation with separate
control circuit and load circuit
o.k.
o.k.
14
NSB0_01200e
12
A2
IN
A1
Load
IN
< >
A2
NSB0_01198e
A1
From the following circuit diagrams it is clear that loads in

measuring circuits have to be in the current flow upstream from
the monitoring relay. Otherwise, the monitoring relay could be
destroyed and the short-circuit current could cause damage to
the plant.
NSB0_01199e
NSB0_01534b
24 V AC/DC
A1
L1
L2 L3
IN
< >
A2
M
Load
Configuring note:
A2 and M are electrically connected internally.
For applications in which the load to be monitored and the
monitoring relay are supplied from the same power supply, there
is no need for connection A2.
The load current must always flow through M or the monitoring
relay may be destroyed.
10/96
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Current monitoring
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H

1 CO contact
3UG4621-1AA30
3UG4622-2AW30
Measuring range
Adjustable
hysteresis

voltage Us
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent, start-up delay and

tripping delay times can be adjusted separately 0.1 ... 20 s
3 500 mA AC/DC
0.05 10 A AC/DC
0.1 ... 250 mA

0.01 ... 5 A
24 AC/DC1)
A
A
3UG4621-1AA30
3UG4622-1AA30
A
A
3UG4621-2AA30
3UG4622-2AA30
3 500 mA AC/DC
0.05 10 A AC/DC
0.1 ... 250 mA

0.01 ... 5 A
24 240 AC/DC2)
A
A
3UG4621-1AW30
3UG4622-1AW30
A
A
3UG4621-2AW30
3UG4622-2AW30
1)
No electrical separation. Load supply voltage 24 V.
2)
Electrical separation between control circuit and measuring circuit.

Load supply voltage for protective separation max. 300 V,
for simple isolation max. 500 V.
10
With AC currents I > 10 A it is possible to use 4NC current

transformers as an accessory, see Catalog LV 10 "Low-Voltage

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/97
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Power factor and active current monitoring
Overview
Benefits
Can be used worldwide thanks to wide voltage range from
90 to 690 V (absolute limit values)
Monitoring of even small single-phase motors with a no-load
supply current below 0.5 A
Simple determination of threshold values by the direct
collection of measured variables on motor loading
Range monitoring and active current measurement enable
detection of cable breaks between control cabinets and
motors, as well as phase failures
Power factor or Ires (active current) can be selected as
measurement principle
Width 22.5 mm
Application
The 3UG4641 power factor and active current monitoring device

enables the load monitoring of motors.
Whereas power factor monitoring is used above all for
monitoring no-load operation, the active current monitoring
option can be used to observe and evaluate the load factor over
the entire torque range.
No-load monitoring and load shedding, such as in the event of

a V-belt tear
Underload monitoring in the low performance range,
e.g. in the event of pump no-load operation
Monitoring of overload, e.g. due to a dirty filter system
Simple power factor monitoring in power systems for control of
compensation equipment
Broken cable between control cabinet and motor
Response in the event of undershooting the measuring range
limit
With activated monitoring of Ires
Lx-Ly/N
I < 0,2 A
I = 0,2 A
I=0
Ires
11/14
11/12
21/24
21/22
onDelay
Lx-Ly/N
< 0,2 A
= 0,2 A
=0
res
= off
11/14
11/12
21/24
21/22
onDelay
10/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
onDelay
With deactivated monitoring of active current undershooting
The relay operates either according to the open-circuit or

closed-circuit principle. If the device is set to Auto RESET
(Memory = No), depending on the set principle of operation, the
switching relay returns to its initial state and the flashing ends
when the hysteresis threshold is reached.
If Manual RESET is selected in the menu (Memory = Yes), the
switching relay remains in its current switching state and the
current measured value and the symbol for undershooting and
overshooting continues to flash, even when the measured
variable reaches a permissible value again. This stored fault
status can be reset by pressing the UP or DOWN key
simultaneously for 2 seconds, or by switching the supply voltage
off and back on again.
NSB0_01658b
The 3UG4641 monitoring relay is self-powered and serves the

single-phase monitoring of the p.f. or performs overshoot,
undershoot or range monitoring of the active current depending
on how it is parameterized. The load to be monitored is
connected upstream of the IN terminal. The load current flows
through the terminals IN and Ly/N. The setting range for the
power factor is 0.1 to 0.99 and for the active current Ires
0.2 to 10 A. If the control supply voltage is switched on and no
load current flows, the display will show I < 0.2 and a symbol for
overrange, underrange or range monitoring. If the motor is now
switched on and the current exceeds 0.2 A, the set ON-delay
time begins. During this time, if the set limit values are undershot
or exceeded, this does not lead to a relay reaction of the
changeover contact. If the operational flowing active current
and/or the p.f. value falls below or exceeds the respective set
threshold value, the spike delay begins. When this time has
expired, the relay changes its switch position. The relevant
measured variables for overshooting and undershooting in the
display flash. If the monitoring of active current undershooting is
deactivated (Ires= OFF) and the load current drops below the
lower measuring range threshold (0.2 A), then the CO contacts
remain unchanged. If a threshold value is set for the monitoring
of active current undershooting, then undershooting of the
measuring range threshold (0.2 A) will result in a response of the
CO contacts.
NSB0_01917b
10
onDelay
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Overshooting of active current
Overshooting of power factor
>
> cos
res
cos
res
Hysteresis
=0
p.f.
Hysteresis 0,10
cos = 0
11/14
11/14
21/24
NSB0_01659a
21/24
21/22
onDelay
NSB0_01662b
11/12
11/12
21/22
onDelay
Delay
Undershooting of active current
Delay
Undershooting of power factor
<
< cos
res
Hysteresis 0,10
Hysteresis
res
=0
cos = 0
11/14
11/14
NSB0_01660a
21/22
21/24
21/22
onDelay
Delay
onDelay
Range monitoring of active current
>
res
Delay
10
21/24
NSB0_01663b
11/12
11/12
Range monitoring of power factor
<
> cos
res
res
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
res
=0
cos
cos
p.f.
< cos
Hysteresis
0,10
cos = 0
11/14
11/14
NSB0_01661a
21/24
21/22
Delay
Delay
NSB0_01664b
11/12
11/12
onDelay
cos
p.f.
21/24
21/22
onDelay
Delay
Delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/99
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Type
3UG4641
General data
Pollution degree 3
690
kV
Control circuit
2
Number of CO contacts for auxiliary contacts


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/125 V
DC-13/250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Circuit diagrams
L/N
Ln
Ln
Ln
n = 1,2,3
Ln
Ln
Ln
n = 1,2,3
M
3~
M
3~
M
1~
Lx
IN
3UG4641
Ly/N
Lx
3UG4641
12
11 cos /
14
22
21cos /
24
IN
12
11cos /
Lx
3UG4641
IN
12
11cos /
14
22
21cos /
24
14
22
21cos /
24
Ly/N
NSB0_01654c
NSB0_01655c
Ly/N
N/L
Three-phase motors
Three-phase motors with transformers

for currents > 10 A
10
Single-phase motors
NSB0_01656c

For monitoring the power factor and the active current Ires
(p.f. x I)
Suitable for single- and three-phase currents
Overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring adjustable
Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately
Permanent display of actual value and tripping state
1 changeover contact each for undershoot/overshoot
Measuring range
For power
factor
Adjustable
hysteresis
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
ON-delay
time
adjustFor active For
For active able
onDel
current
power current
Ires
factor Ires
Tripping
delay time
adjustable
IDel/
IDel,
Del/
Del
Rated control DT
supply
voltage Us1)
P.f.
0.10 ... 0.99 0.2 ... 10.0 0.1

1)
0.1 ... 2.0 0 ... 99
Spring-type
terminals
50/60 Hz AC
Article No.
P.f.
DT
Screw terminals
0.1 ... 20.0 90 ... 690
3UG4641-1CS20
Price
per PU
Article No.
A
Price
per PU
3UG4641-2CS20

With AC active currents Ires > 10 A it is possible to use 4NC
current transformers as an accessory, see Catalog LV 10
"Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation
Technology".
10/100
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Residual current monitoring:
Residual-current monitoring relays
Overview
Benefits
Worldwide use thanks to wide voltage range from
24 to 240 V AC/DC
High measuring accuracy 7.5%
Permanent self-monitoring
Variable threshold values for warning and disconnection
Permanent display of the actual value and fault diagnostics via
the display
High level of flexibility and space saving through installation of
the transformer inside or outside the control cabinet
Width 22.5 mm
Application
The 3UG4625 residual-current monitoring relays are used in

conjunction with the 3UL23 residual-current transformers for
monitoring plants in which higher residual currents are increasingly expected due to ambient conditions. Monitoring encompasses pure AC residual currents or AC residual currents with a
pulsating DC fault current component (transformer type A in
accordance with DIN VDE 0100-530/IEC TR 60755).
Monitoring of plants in which residual currents can occur,

e.g. due to dust deposits or moisture, porous cables and leads,
or capacitive residual currents
The main conductor, and any neutral conductor to which a load

is connected, are routed through the opening of the annular ring
core of a residual-current transformer. A secondary winding is
placed around this annular strip-wound core to which the monitoring relay is connected.
Residual current monitoring with Auto RESET (Memory = no)
If the measured residual current exceeds the set warning value,

the associated changeover contact instantly changes the
switching state and an indication appears on the display.
If the measured residual current exceeds the set tripping value,
the set delay time begins and the associated relay symbol
flashes. On expiry of this time, the associated changeover
contact changes the switching state.
ON-delay time for motor start
To be able to start a drive when a residual current is detected,
the output relays switch to the OK state for an adjustable
ON-delay time depending on the selected open-circuit principle
or closed-circuit principle.
>
Hysteresis
10
However, if an insulation fault occurs downstream of the residual

current operated circuit breaker, the sum of the inflowing currents is greater than that of the outward currents. The differential
current - the residual current - induces a secondary current in
the secondary winding of the transformer. This current is evaluated in the monitoring relay and is used on the one hand to
display the actual residual current and on the other, to switch the
relay if the set warning or tripping threshold is overshot.
> !
Hysteresis = 5 %
= 0,02 A
=0
11/14
11/12
IC01_00225
If operation of a plant is fault-free, the sum of the inflowing and

outward currents equals zero. No current is then induced in the
secondary winding of the residual-current transformer.
A1-A2
21/24
21/22
Init
Delay
onDelay
onDelay
If the device is set to Auto RESET, the relay switches back to the
OK state for the tripping value once the value falls below the set
hysteresis threshold and the display stops flashing.
The associated relay changes its switching state if the value falls
below the fixed hysteresis value of 5 % of the set warning value.
Any overshoots are therefore not stored.
The changeover contacts do not react if the set threshold values

are overshot during this period.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/101
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Residual current monitoring with Manual RESET (Memory = yes)
A1-A2
Reset
t > 2,5 s
> !
>
Hysteresis
Note:
Hysteresis = 5 %
The neutral conductor must not be grounded downstream of the

residual-current transformer as this may impair the function of
the residual current monitoring device.
= 0,02 A
=0
11/14
If Manual RESET is selected in the menu, the output relays

remain in their current switching state and the current measured
value and the symbol for overshooting continues to flash, even
when the measured residual current returns to a permissible
value. This stored fault status can be reset by pressing the UP
or DOWN key simultaneously for > 2 seconds, or by switching
the supply voltage off and back on again.
11/12
IC01_00226
21/24
21/22
Init
Delay
onDelay onDelay
onDelay
Type
3UG4625-1CW30,
3UG4625-2CW30
General data
Insulation voltage for overvoltage category III to IEC 60664
for pollution degree 3 rated value
300
Impulse withstand voltage rated value Uimp
kV
Control circuit
2

Thermal current of the non-solid-state contact blocks maximum
Current carrying capacity of the output relay

At AC-15 at 250 V at 50/60 Hz
At DC-13
- At 24 V
- At 125 V
- At 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Operational current at 17 V minimum
mA
10
Circuit diagram
A1
+
A2
C1 C2
IC01_00224
3UG4625
10/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
11
21
12 14
22 24
Note:
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

For monitoring residual currents from 0.03 to 40 A,
from 16 to 400 Hz
For 3UL23 residual-current transformers with feed-through
opening from 35 to 210 mm
Certified in accordance with IEC 60947, functionality
corresponds to IEC 62020
Separately adjustable limit value and warning threshold
1 changeover contact each for warning threshold and tripping
threshold
3UG4625-1CW30
3UG4625-2CW30
Measurable
current
Adjustable Switching Adjustable Control supply voltage

response hysteresis ON-delay
value
time
At 50 Hz At 60 Hz At DC
current
at AC
at AC
rated
rated
rated
value
value
value
0.01 ... 43 0.03 ... 40
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
DT
0 to 50
0 ... 20
24 ... 240 24 ... 240 24 ... 240 A
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
V
3UG4625-1CW30
3UG4625-2CW30
10
3UL23 residual-current transformers see page 10/104.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/103
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Residual-current transformers
Overview
Dimension drawing
b
e
d
IC01_00229a
6,2
SIRIUS 3UL23 residual-current transformer
The 3UL23 residual-current transformers detect residual

currents in machines and plants. They are suitable for pure
AC residual currents or AC residual currents with a pulsating
DC fault current component (transformer type A in accordance
with DIN VDE 0100-530/IEC TR 60755).
Together with the 3UG4625, 3UG4825 residual-current monitoring relays for IO-Link or the SIMOCODE 3UF motor management
and control device they enable residual-current and ground-fault
monitoring.
The 3UL2302-1A and 3UL2303-1A residual-current transformers
with a feed-through opening from 35 to 55 mm can be mounted
in conjunction with the 3UL2900 accessories on a TH 35 standard mounting rail according to IEC 60715.
Type
3UL2302-1A
3UL2303-1A
3UL2304-1A
3UL2305-1A
3UL2306-1A
3UL2307-1A
35
55
80
110
140
210
70
92
124,5
163
201
300
75,5
98
130
169
207,5
286
50
50
50
50
50
46
64
64
64
64
64
62
-38
60
84,5
110
161
10

Diameter of the bushing opening
Connectable cross-section
of the connecting terminal
mm
mm2
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Residual-current transformer
(essential accessory for 3UG4625, 3UG4825 or SIMOCODE 3UF)
35
55
80
2.5
2.5
2.5
B
B
B
3UL2302-1A
3UL2303-1A
3UL2304-1A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
110
140
210
2.5
2.5
4
B
B
B
3UL2305-1A
3UL2306-1A
3UL2307-1A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41H
41H
41H
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Adapters
3UL2900
2 units
41H
Accessories
Price
per PU
Adapters
For mounting onto standard rail
for 3UL23 to diameter 55 mm
3UL2900
10/104
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Insulation monitoring:
General data
Overview
Benefits
Devices for AC and DC systems
All devices have a wide control supply voltage range
Direct connection to networks with mains voltages of up to
690 V AC and 1 000 V DC by means of a voltage reducer
module
For AC supply systems: Frequency range 15 to 400 Hz
Monitoring of setting errors
Safety in use thanks to integrated system test after start-up
Option of resetting and testing (by means of button on front or
using control contact)
New predictive measurement principle allows very fast
response times
Application
Insulation monitoring relays are used for monitoring the
insulation resistance between ungrounded single or three-phase
AC supplies and a protective conductor.
Ungrounded, i.e. isolated networks (IT networks) are always
used where high demands are placed on the reliability of the
power supply, e.g. emergency lighting systems. IT systems are
supplied via an isolating transformer or by power supply sources
such as batteries or a generator. While an initial insulation fault
between a phase conductor and the ground effectively grounds
the conductor, as a result no circuit has been closed, so it is possible to continue work in safety (single-fault safety). However, the
fault must be rectified as quickly as possible before a second
insulation fault occurs (e.g. according to DIN VDE 0100-410).
For this purpose insulation monitoring relays are used, which
constantly measure the resistance to ground of the phase
conductor and the neutral conductor, reporting a fault immediately if insulation resistance falls below the set value so that
either a controlled shutdown can be performed or the fault can
be rectified without interrupting the power supply.
IT networks are used for example:

In emergency power supplies
In safety lighting systems
In industrial production facilities with high availability requirements (chemical industry, automobile manufacturing, printing
plants)
In shipping and railways
For mobile generators (aircraft)
For renewable energies, such as wind energy and
photovoltaic power plants
In the mining industry
10
SIRIUS 3UG458. insulation monitor
Two series
3UG4581 insulation monitoring relays for ungrounded
AC networks
3UG4582 and 3UG4583 insulation monitoring relays for
ungrounded DC and AC networks
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/105
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Insulation monitoring:
General data
Type
3UG4581-1AW30
3UG4582-1AW30
3UG4583-1CW30
Setting range for the setpoint response values

1 ... 100 k
2 ... 200 k
--
--
Rated voltage of the network being monitored

0 ... 250 V AC
0 ... 440 V AC
0 ... 690 V AC
0 300 V DC
0 600 V DC
0 ... 1 000 V DC
-
-----
--
---
-
1)
-
1)
Max. leakage capacitance of the system

10F
20F
--
--
Output contacts
1 CO
2 CO or 1 CO + 1 CO, adjustable
--
--
Number of limit values

1
1 or 2, adjustable
--
--
Principle of operation
Closed-circuit principle
Open-circuit/closed-circuit principle, adjustable

24 ... 240 V AC/DC
Rated frequency
15 ... 400 Hz
50/60 Hz
--
--
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Remote RESET
Via control input
Via control input
Via control input
Non-volatile error memory
--
--
Adjustable
Broken wire detection
--
--
Adjustable
General data
10
Replacement for
voltage Us
Voltage range of the

network being monitored
3UG3081-1AK20
110 ... 130/220 ... 240 V AC/DC
3 x 230/400 V AC
--
--
3UG3081-1AW30
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
3 x 230/400 V AC
--
--
3UG3082-1AW30
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
24 ... 240 V DC
--
--
Available
-- Not available
1)
With voltage reducer module.
10/106
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
for ungrounded AC networks
Overview
The 3UG4581 insulation monitoring relays are used to monitor
insulation resistance according to IEC 61557-8 in ungrounded
AC networks with rated voltages of up to 400 V.
These devices can monitor control circuits (single-phase) and
main circuits (three-phase).
They measure insulation resistances between system cables
and system ground. If the value falls below the threshold value,
the output relays are switched to fault status.
In the case of 3UG4581 a higher-level DC measuring signal is
used. The higher-level DC measuring signal and the resulting
current are used to determine the value of the insulation resistance of the network which is to be measured.
SIRIUS 3UG4581 insulation monitor
Insulation resistance monitoring with fault storage and
Manual RESET
A1+/A2-
A1+/A2-
Y1-Y3
Y1-Y3
Y2-Y3
Measured value
Hysteresis
Threshold value
Y2-Y3
Measured value
Hysteresis
Threshold value
11-14
11-12
ts
: green LED
: red LED
: yellow LED
IC01_00074
: green LED
F
ts
IC01_00075
11-14
11-12
10
Insulation resistance monitoring without fault storage,

with Auto RESET
: red LED
: yellow LED
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/107
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Type
3UG4581
mm
22.5 x 100 x 100
Screw terminals
Connection type
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to IEC 60664
400 supply circuit/measuring circuit

300 supply circuit/output circuit
kV
24 ... 240 AC/DC
Rated frequency
Hz
15 ... 400
Rated mains voltage of the network being monitored
0 ... 400
Rated frequency of the network being monitored
Hz
50 ... 60
Setting range for insulation resistance
1 ... 100


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
A
A
3
2
mA
10
Solid
General data
Measuring circuit
Control circuit
Circuit diagram
Note:
L
A1

11
A2
10
12
IC01_00141
3UG4581
10/108
Siemens IC 10 2014
14
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Connection diagrams for networks up to 400 V AC
A1+
Y1
11
Y2
Y3
L
14
12
A2-
2-wire
L
N
PE
3-wire
L1
L2
L3
PE
4-wire
IC01_00076
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

1 CO contact
Fault memory adjustable using control input (Y2-Y3)
Reset by means of button on front or using control input
(Y2-Y3)
Test by means of button on front or using control input
(Y1-Y3)
Rated
Measuring Rated control
System
mains
range Ue
supply voltage Us leakage
voltage Un
capacitance
V AC
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41H
Price
per PU
Insulation monitors for ungrounded AC networks

0 ... 400
1 ... 100
24 ... 240 AC/DC
max. 10
3UG4581-1AW30
3UG4581-1AW30

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/109
10
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
for ungrounded DC and AC networks
Overview
They measure insulation resistances between system cables
and system ground. If the value falls below the threshold value,
the output relays are switched to fault status. With these devices,
which are suitable for both AC and DC networks, a pulsed test
signal is fed into the network to be monitored and the isolation
resistance is determined.
The pulsed test signal changes its form according to insulation
resistance and network loss capacitance. The changed form is
used to predict the changed insulation resistance.
If the predicted insulation resistance matches the insulation resistance calculated in the next measurement cycle, and is lower
than the threshold value, the output relays are activated or deactivated, depending on the device configuration. This measurement principle is also suitable for identifying symmetrical insulation faults.
3UG4983 voltage reducer module
SIRIUS 3UG4582 and 3UG4583 insulation monitors
The 3UG4582 and 3UG4583 insulation monitoring relays are

used to monitor insulation resistance in ungrounded IT AC or DC
networks according to IEC 61557-8.
The 3UG4983 passive voltage reducer module can be used to

allow the 3UG4583 insulation monitoring relay to be used for
insulation monitoring of IT networks with rated voltages of up to
690 V AC and 1 000 V DC.
Manual RESET
A1+/A2-
A1+/A2-
Y1-Y3
Y1-Y3
Y2-Y3
Measured value
Hysteresis
Threshold value
Y2-Y3
Measured value
Hysteresis
Threshold value
11-14
11-12
ts
: green LED
: green LED
F
: red LED
: yellow LED
10/110
Siemens IC 10 2014
ts
: red LED
: yellow LED
IC01_00075
11-14
11-12
IC01_00074
10

with Auto RESET
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
with Auto RESET

Manual RESET
A1+/A2-
A1+/A2-
Y1-Y3
Y1-Y3
Y2-Y3
Measured Value
Hysteresis
Prewarning
Hysteresis
Final switch-off
Open-circuit
principle open
11-14
11-12
Y2-Y3
Measured Value
Hysteresis
Prewarning
Hysteresis
Final switch-off
Open-circuit
principle open
11-14
11-12
ts
21-24
21-22
21-24
21-22
LED
LED
LED F
LED F
LED
ts
LED
closed
11-14
11-12
11-14
11-12
21-24
21-24
21-24
21-24
LED
LED
LED F
LED
Type
mm
LED F
LED
3UG4582
3UG4583
22.5 x 100 x 100
45 x 100 x 100
10
IC01_00084
Closed-circuit
principle
closed
IC01_00083
Closed-circuit
principle
ts
Screw terminals
Connection type
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.5 ... 4)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)

Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to IEC 60664
400 supply circuit/measuring

400 supply circuit/measuring circuit
circuit, 300 supply circuit/output 300 supply circuit/output circuit,
circuit
300 output circuit 1/output circuit 2
Solid
General data
kV
V AC/DC
24 ... 240
Rated frequency
Hz
15 ... 400
V
V
0 ... 250 AC,

0 ... 300 DC
Rated frequency of the network being monitored
Hz
DC or 15 ... 400
Setting range for insulation resistance
1 ... 100
1 ... 100
2 ... 200 for 2nd limit value
(disconnectable)
2 or 1 + 1, adjustable
Measuring circuit
Rated mains voltage of the network being monitored
0 ... 300 AC, 0 ... 690 AC with 3UG4983

0 ... 600 DC, 0 ... 1 000 DC with 3UG4983
Control circuit

AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
A
A
3
2
mA
10
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/111
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit diagrams
L+
L-
L+
KE
A1
KE
A1
11
L-
11
21
A2
A2
12
12
14
14
22
24
IC01_00140
IC01_00142
3UG4582
3UG4583
Note:
L+
L-
VS
VE

IC01_00139
VL+ VL-
V1+ V1-
3UG4983
Connection diagrams
3UG4582
AC network, 2-wire, 3-wire or 4-wire
A1+
Y1
L+
14
DC network, 2-wire or 3-wire

11
Y2
L12
KE
Y3
11
Y2
KE
Y3
L+
14
L12
A2
A2
2-wire
L
2-wire
L+
PWM
PE
10
A1+
Y1
DC
LPE
3-wire
L1
L2
3-wire
PE
L+
PWM
DC
PWM
4-wire
LL+
L+
L-
L-
M
L1
L3
N
PE
IC01_00077
L2
DC
PE
IC01_00078
L3
Note:
L+ and L- can be connected to any wire, but each to a different
wire. Un 250 V AC or 300 V DC.
10/112
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
3UG4583
A1+ 11 21 Y1 Y2 Y3
A1+ 11 21 Y1 Y2 Y3
12 14 L+ VS V1+ V122 24 L- KE
A2-
2-wire
12 14 L+ VS V1+ V122 24 L- KE
A2-
2-wire
L+
PWM
PE
DC
LPE
3-wire
L1
L2
3-wire
PE
L+
PWM
DC
LL+
PWM
4-wire
IC01_00080
L3
L+
M
DC
L-
IC01_00079
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
LPE
Note:
Use a voltage reducer module to monitor systems with higher
voltages.
3UG4983 voltage reducer module
VL-
A1+ 11 21 Y1 Y2 Y3
VL+
L+ V1+
L- V1VS VE V
VL-
A1+ 11 21 Y1 Y2 Y3
L- V1VS VE V
12 14 L+ VS V1+ V122 24 L- KE
A2-
10
VL+
12 14 L+ VS V1+ V122 24 L- KE
A2-
2-wire
L+ V1+
2-wire
L+
PWM
PE
DC
LPE
3-wire
L1
L2
3-wire
PE
L+
PWM
DC
PWM
4-wire
LL+
L+
L-
L-
IC01_00082
L3
M
L1
L3
N
PE
DC
IC01_00081
L2
PE
Note:
Use a voltage reducer module to monitor systems with higher
voltages.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/113
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

Rated control supply voltage Us 24...240 V AC/DC
3UG4582: Closed-circuit principle
3UG4583: Open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, adjustable
1 or 2 CO contacts
Fault memory adjustable using control input (Y2-Y3)
Reset by means of button on front or using control input
(Y2-Y3)
Test by means of button on front or using control input
(Y1-Y3)
3UG4583: Non-volatile fault storage can be configured
3UG4583: 2 separate limit values (e.g. for warning and
disconnection) or 2 CO contacts for one limit value (e.g. for a
local alarm and signaling to the PLC via separate circuits) can
be configured
Rated system
voltage Un
System
leakage
capacitance
Output
relays
Note:
With the 3UG4983-1A coupling unit, connection to networks with
a voltage of up to 690 V AC and 1 000 V DC is possible,
see below.
Measuring Broken wire DT

range Ue
detection
in the
measuring
range
Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
3UG4582 insulation monitors

0 ... 250 AC,
0 ... 300 DC
max. 10
1 CO
1 ... 100
3UG4582-1AW30
1 unit
41H
max. 20
2 CO or
1 CO +
1 CO,
adjustable
1 ... 100,
B
2 ... 200 for Adjustable
2nd limit
value,
adjustable
3UG4583-1CW30
1 unit
41H
3UG4983-1A
1 unit
41H
3UG4582-1AW30
3UG4583 insulation monitors
10
0 ... 400 AC,

0 ... 600 DC 1)
3UG4583-1CW30
Voltage reducer module for 3UG4583
For extending the mains voltage range to
max. 690 V AC and 1 000 V DC
3UG4983-1A
Available
1)
With 3UG4983-1A voltage reducer module suitable also for the insulation
monitoring of IT networks up to 690 V AC and 1 000 V DC.
10/114
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Level monitoring:
Level monitoring relays
Overview
Benefits
Individually shortenable 2 and 3-pole wire electrodes for easy
mounting from above/below
Bow electrodes for installation from the side, for larger filling
levels and minimum space requirements
Can be flexibly adapted to different conductive liquids through
analog setting of the sensitivity from 2 to 200 k
Compensation for wave movements through tripping delay
times from 0.1 to 10 s
Upstream or downstream function selectable
Application
The 3UG4501 level monitoring relay is used in combination with

2- or 3-pole sensors to monitor the levels of conductive liquids.
Single-point and two-point level monitoring

Overflow protection
Dry run protection
Leak monitoring
The principle of operation of the 3UG4501 level monitoring relay
is based on measuring the electrical resistance of the liquid
between two immersion sensors and a reference terminal. If the
measured value is lower than the sensitivity set at the front, the
output relay changes its switching state. In order to exclude
electrolytic phenomena in the liquid, the sensors are supplied
with alternating current.
UNDER, two-point control
RESET
A1/A2
> 0,5 s + t
Two-point control
Max
11/14
OVER, two-point control
11/12
t = Delay 0,5 - 10 s
RESET
A1/A2
Note:
> 0,5 s + t
It is also possible to connect other resistance sensors to the Min

and Max terminals in the range 2 to 200 kW, e.g. photoresistors,
temperature sensors, encoders based on resistance, etc. The
monitoring relay can therefore also be used for other applications as well as for monitoring the levels of liquids.
Max
t
NSB0_01799b
Min
11/14
11/12
t = Delay 0,5 - 10 s
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/115
10
Min
NSB0_01800b
The output relay changes its switching state as soon as the liquid
level reaches the maximum sensor, while the minimum sensor is
submerged. The relay returns to its original switching state as
soon as the minimum sensor no longer has contact with the
liquid.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Level monitoring:
UNDER, single-point control
If only one level is being controlled, the terminals for Min and
Max on the monitoring relay are bridged. The output relay
changes its switching state as soon as the liquid level is reached
and returns to its original switching state once the sensor no
longer has contact with the liquid.
RESET
A1/A2
> 0,5 s + t
In order to prevent premature tripping of the switching function

caused by wave motion or frothing, even though the set level has
not been reached, it is possible to delay this function by
0.5 ... 10 s.
Max Min
t
For safe resetting, the control supply voltage must be interrupted

for at least the set delay time of +0.5 s.
11/14
OVER, single-point control
11/12
t = Delay 0,5 - 10 s
RESET
A1/A2
> 0,5 s + t
Max Min
t
t
NSB0_01801b
11/14
11/12
t = Delay 0,5 - 10 s
Type
3UG4501
10
General data
Pollution degree 3,
300
kV
Electrode current, max. (typ. 70 Hz)
mA
Electrode voltage, max. (typ. 70 Hz)
15
Sensor feeder cable
Max. 100
Conductor capacity of sensor cable1)
nF
Max. 10


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/125 V
DC-13/250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Measuring circuit
Control circuit
1)
The sensor cable does not necessarily have to be shielded, but we do not
recommend installing this cable parallel to the power supply lines. It is also
possible to use a shielded cable, whereby the shield has to be connected
to the M terminal.
10/116
Siemens IC 10 2014
t
NSB0_01802c
Single-point control
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Level monitoring:
Circuit diagrams
AC/+U
AC/+U
K1
A1 (+)
Max
Min
A1 (+)
3UG4501
Max Min
11
12 14
3UG4501
11
K1
12
14
NSB0_01796b
A2 ()
A2 ()
AC/0V
AC/0V
Schematic circuit diagram
NSB0_01797b
Circuit example of two-point control with outlet monitoring
AC/+U
A1 (+)
Max Min
11
K1
12 14
3UG4501
K1
A2 ()
NSB0_01798b
AC/0V
Circuit example of single-point control with inlet monitoring
For level monitoring of electrically conductive liquids

Control principle: inlet or sequence control adjustable per
rotary switch
Single-point and two-point control possible
Analogically adjustable sensitivity
(specific resistance of the liquid)
Analogically adjustable tripping delay time
1 yellow LED for displaying the relay state
1 green LED for displaying the applied control supply voltage
1 CO contact
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
Sensitivity
Tripping delay time
V
AC/DC
2 ... 200
0.5 ... 10
241)
3UG4501-1AA30
3UG4501-2AA30
24 ... 240
3UG4501-1AW30
3UG4501-2AW30
1)

voltage Us
10
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
The rated control supply voltage and the measuring circuit are not
electrically separated.

For level monitoring sensors see page 10/118.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/117
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Level monitoring:
Level monitoring sensors
Type
3UG3207-3A
three-pole
3UG3207-2B
two-pole
500
mm
Length
3UG3207-2A
two-pole
3UG3207-1B
single-pole
3UG3207-1C
single-pole
--
Yes
--
Insulation Teflon insulation (PTFE)
Yes
Installation
Vertical
Lateral
22
Screw-in gland width A/F

Thread
inch
R 3/8
Connecting cable
mm2
3 x 0.5, 2 m long
Operating temperature
90
Operating pressure
bar
10
Cable/electrode assignment
Cable brown
Center electrode
Cable white
Not assignable
Cable green
Not assignable
Not assignable
Gland
--
Not assignable
Electrode
--
NSB0_00993a
15 15
71
NSB0_00994
0,5
15 15
500
PTFE
insulation
15 15
71
61
NSB0_00995
500
3UG3207-2A
61
40
50
15 15
15 15
5
3UG3207-3A
SW 22
SW 22
SW 22
SW 22
SW 22
0,5
5
NSB0_00991a
NSB0_00992
Dimensional drawings
3UG3207-1C
3UG3207-2B
3UG3207-1B

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Level monitoring sensors (essential accessory)
10
The wire electrodes can be cut or bent to the required length

before or after installation. The Teflon insulation must be removed
over a length of approx. 5 mm.
Three-pole wire electrodes, 500 mm long
3UG3207-3A
1 unit
41H
3UG3207-2A
1 unit
41H
3UG3207-2B
1 unit
41H
3UG3207-1B
1 unit
41H
3UG3207-1C
1 unit
41H
For 2-point liquid level control in an insulating tank.

One electrode each for the min. and max. value and a common
reference electrode.
3UG3207-3A
Two-pole wire electrodes, 500 mm long
For alarm indication in the event of overflow or low level and for
2-point liquid level control, when the conductive tank is used as the
reference electrode.
3UG3207-2A
Two-pole bow electrodes
Thanks to the small space requirements due to lateral fitting, ideal
for use in small containers and pipes, as a leak monitor and level
monitor or for warning of water entering an enclosure.
3UG3207-2B
Single-pole bow electrodes for lateral fitting
As a max. value electrode for lateral fitting or for alarm indication in
conductive tanks or pipes.
3UG3207-1B
Single-pole rod electrodes for lateral fitting
For high flow velocities or for intensively sparkling fluids.
3UG3207-1C
10/118
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Speed monitoring
Overview
Benefits
monitoring
Permanent display of actual value and fault type
Use of up to 10 sensors per revolution on motors rotating
extremely slowly
2- or 3-wire sensors and sensors with a mechanical switching
output or solid-state-output can be connected
Auxiliary voltage for sensor integrated
Application
The 3UG4651 monitoring relay is used in combination with a

sensor to monitor motor drives for overspeed and/or underspeed.
Slip or tear of a belt drive

Overload monitoring
Transport monitoring for completeness
Furthermore, the monitoring relay is ideal for all functions where

a continuous pulse signal needs to be monitored (e.g. belt travel
monitoring, completeness monitoring, passing monitoring,
clock-time monitoring).
In the monitoring relay, the time between two successive rising

edges of the pulse encoder is measured and compared to the
minimum and/or maximum permissible period duration calculated from the set limit values for the speed.
Thus, the period duration measurement recognizes any deviation in speed after just two pulses, even at very low speeds or in
the case of extended pulse gaps.
By using up to ten pulse encoders evenly distributed around the
circumference, it is possible to shorten the period duration, and
in turn the response time. By taking into account the number of
sensors in the monitoring relay, the speed continues to be indicated in rpm.
Speed monitoring with Auto RESET (Memory = no)

If the device is set to Auto RESET, the output relay switches to
the GO state, once the adjustable hysteresis threshold is
reached in the range of 0.1 ... 99.9 rpm and the flashing stops.
Any overshoots or undershoots are therefore not stored.
Speed monitoring with Manual RESET (Memory = yes)
If Manual RESET is selected in the menu, the output relay remains in its current switching state and the current measured
value and the symbol for overshooting/undershooting continue
to flash, even when the speed returns to a permissible value.
This stored fault status can be reset by pressing the UP and
DOWN buttons simultaneously for > 2 s, by connecting the
RESET device terminal to 24 V DC or by switching the control
supply voltage off and back on again.

To be able to start a motor drive, and depending on whether the
open-circuit or closed-circuit principle is selected, the output relay switches to the GO state during the ON-delay time, even if
the speed is still below the set value.
The ON-delay time is started by either switching on the auxiliary
voltage or, if the auxiliary voltage is already applied, by actuating
the respective NC contact (e.g. auxiliary contact).
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/119
10
The speed monitoring relay operates according to the principle

of period duration measurement.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Speed monitoring
Range monitoring without enable input
Range monitoring with enable input

A1/A2
A1/A2
EN
> RPM
< RPM
rpm
> RPM
Hysteresis
< RPM
rpm
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
RPM = 0
NSB0_01803b
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Hysteresis
rpm
RPM = 0
Delay
NSB0_01804a
rpm
11/14
11/12
Delay
onDelay
Type
Delay
3UG4651
General data
Pollution degree 3,
300
kV
Sensor supply
For three-wire sensor (24 V/0 V)
For 2-wire NAMUR sensor (8V2)
mA
mA
Max. 50
Max. 8.2
Signal input
IN1
IN2
k
k
16, three-wire sensor, pnp operation

1, floating contact, 2-wire NAMUR sensor
Voltage level
For level 1 at IN1
For level 0 at IN1
V
V
4.5 ... 30
0 ... 1
Current level
For level 1 at IN2
For level 0 at IN2
mA
mA
> 2.1
< 1.2
Minimum pulse duration of signal
ms
Minimum interval between 2 pulses
ms
10
Measuring circuit
Control circuit
1


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13/24 V
DC-13/125 V
DC-13/250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
10/120
Siemens IC 10 2014
Delay
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Speed monitoring
Circuit diagrams
+
AC/+U
AC/DC
A1 (+)
A1 (+) EN RES 24V
3UG4651
3UG4651
IN1 0V
NSB0_01805b
11
12
IN2
A2 ()
Enable
RESET
EN RES
S1
pnp
K1
14
A2 ()
IN2
S1
24 V
IN1
0V
8V2
11
K1
12 14
NO
24 V DC/
max. 50 mA
K2
8V2
AC/0 V
NSB0_01807b
AC/DC
NAMUR
+
Schematic circuit diagram
Circuit example with enable input
AC/+U
RESET
S1
A1 (+)
3UG4651
24 V
12
BN
IN1
K1
NO
K2
NAMUR
IN2
14
BU
0V
A2 ()
11
K1
EN RES
8V2
AC/0 V
NSB0_01806b
Circuit example without enable input
Measuring
range
Hysteresis
ON-delay Tripping
time
delay time
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
Pulses
Rated control
DT
per
supply voltage
revolution Us
10
For speed monitoring in revolutions per minute (rpm)

Two- or three-wire sensor with mechanical or electronic
switching output can be connected
Two-wire NAMUR sensor can be connected
Sensor supply 24 V DC/50 mA integrated
Input frequency 0.1 to 2 200 pulses rpm
(0.0017 to 36.7 Hz)
With or without enable signal for the drive to be monitored
Number of pulses per revolution can be adjusted
Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately
Auto, manual or remote RESET options after tripping
1 CO contact
DT
Screw terminals
Spring-type
terminals
AC/DC
Article No.
rpm
0.1 ... 2 200
1)
rpm
OFF
0.1 ... 99.9
s
0 ... 900
Price
per PU
Article No.
0.1 ... 99.9
241)
3UG4651-1AA30
3UG4651-2AA30
24 ... 240
3UG4651-1AW30
3UG4651-2AW30
1 ... 10
Price
per PU
The rated control supply voltage and the measuring circuit are not
electrically separated.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/121
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Accessories

Use
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
For 3UG4

For SIRIUS devices
D
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B

19 mm x 6 mm, zinc yellow
3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
For 3UG4
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing,
3RP1903
10 units
41H
For 3UG4
Sealable covers
3RP1902
5 units
41H
For 3UG45
Sealing foil
3TK2820-0AA00
1 unit
41L
For 3UG4581
and 3UG4582
3UG4981-0C
1 unit
41H
For 3UG4583
3UG4983-0C
1 unit
41H
1 unit
41B
Blank labels

NSB0_01429b
For 3UG4
Adhesive labels
For SIRIUS devices
3RT1900-1SB20
Push-in lugs and covers
3RP1903
3RP1902
Covers for insulation monitoring relays

Sealable, transparent covers
10
3UG4981-0C
3UG4983-0C

For auxiliary
circuit
connections
Screwdrivers
For all SIRIUS devices with spring-type
terminals 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
length approx. 200 mm,
A
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
1)

Notes:
Products for mechanical monitoring of bearings See Chapter 15
"Products for Specific Requirements" "Condition Monitoring
Systems"
For more information see www.siemens.com/siplus-cms.
10/122
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3UG48 Monitoring Relays for Stand-Alone Installation for IO-Link
General data
Overview
Even without communication via IO-Link the devices continue to
function fully autonomously:
Parameterization can take place locally at the device,
independently of a controller.
In the event of failure or before the controller becomes
available the monitoring relays work as long as the control
supply voltage (24 V DC) is present.
If the monitoring relays are operated without the controller, the
3UG48 monitoring relays have, thanks to the integrated
SIO mode, an additional semiconductor output, which
switches when the adjustable warning threshold is exceeded.
Thanks to the combination of autonomous monitoring relay function and integrated IO-Link communication, redundant sensors
and/or analog signal converters which previously took over the
transmission of measured values to a controller, leading to considerable extra cost and wiring outlay are no longer needed.
The SIRIUS 3UG4 monitoring relays for electronic and mechanical variables monitor all important characteristics that allow
conclusions to be drawn about the functionality of a plant. Both
sudden disturbances and gradual changes, which may indicate
the need for maintenance, are detected.
Thanks to their relay outputs, the monitoring relays permit direct
disconnection of the affected system components as well as
alerting e.g. by triggering a warning light. Thanks to adjustable
delay times the 3UG4 monitoring relays can respond very
flexibly to brief faults such as voltage dips or load changes and
can thus avoid unnecessary alarms and disconnections and
increase system availability.
3UG48 monitoring relays for IO-Link
The SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relays for IO-Link also offer many
other options based upon the monitoring functions of the triedand-tested SIRIUS 3UG4 monitoring relays:
Measured value transmission to a controller, including resolution and unit, may be parameterizable as to which value is
cyclically transmitted
Transmission of alarm flags to a controller
Full diagnosis capability by inquiry as to the cause of the fault
in the diagnosis data record
Remote parameterization is also possible, in addition to or
instead of local parameterization
Rapid parameterization of the same devices by duplication of
the parameterization in the controller
Parameter transmission by upload to a controller by IO-Link
call or by parameter server (if IO-Link master from IO-Link
Specification V 1.1 and higher is used)
Consistent central data storage in the event of parameter
change locally or via a controller
Blocking of local parameterization via IO-Link possible
Faults are saved in parameterizable and non-volatile fashion
to prevent an automatic start-up after voltage failure and to
make sure diagnostics data is not lost
Integration into the automation level provides the option of
parameterizing the monitoring relays at any time via a display
unit, or displaying the measured values in a control room or
locally at the machine/control cabinet.
Because the output relays are still present, the monitoring relays
increase the functional reliability of the system, since only the
controller can fulfill the control tasks if the current measured
values are available, whereas the output relays can also be used
for the disconnection of the system if limit values that cannot be
reached during operation are exceeded.
The individual 3UG48 monitoring relays for IO-Link offer the
following functions in different combinations:
Phase sequence
Phase failure, neutral conductor failure
Phase asymmetry
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for voltage
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for current
Undershooting and/or overshooting of power factor limit
values
Monitoring of the active current or the apparent current
Monitoring of the residual current
Undershooting and/or overshooting of limit values for speed
Note:
Further information on the IO-Link bus systems see Chapter 2
Notes on safety
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/123
10
SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relays
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
1
3
3UG46
monitoring
relay
3UG48
monitoring
relay
Feeder
Feeder
IO-Link
master
PLC
1
Analog
signal
converter
3UG46
monitoring
relay
PLC
3UG46
monitoring
relay
IO-Link
2
3UG48
monitoring
relay
3UG48
monitoring
relay
Current
transformers
IC01_00004
IC01_00003
Motor
Motor
transmission to PLC

transmission to PLC
3 Signaling of limit value violation to PLC
Use of conventional monitoring relays
Monitoring relays for IO-Link
10
Notes:
IO-Link master (IO-Link master 4SI IO-Link or 4SI SIRIUS interface module, which can connect all SIRIUS IO-Link devices to
a controller, see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication")

Any controller that supports the IO-Link (e.g. ET 200S
with CPU or S7-300 plus ET 200S distributed I/O, see Catalog
ST 70 "SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation")
Article No. scheme


@@@
Monitoring relays
Generation
Type of setting
Functions
Connection methods
Contacts
Supply voltage
Special version
3UG
Example
Note:
article numbers.
10/124
3UG
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Benefits
0 24
IC0
1_ 0
Simple cyclical transmission of the current measured values,

relay switching states and events to a controller
Remote parameterization
Simple duplication of identical or similar parameterizations
Cost saving and space saving in control cabinet due to the
elimination of AI and IO modules as well as analog signal converters and duplicated sensors
The 3UG48 monitoring relays for IO-Link contribute to the energy
Reactive-power compensation by means of power factor
monitoring
overshoots
The use of SIRIUS monitoring relays for IO-Link is particularly

recommended for machines and plant in which these relays, in
addition to their monitoring function, are to be connected to the
automation level for the rapid, simple and fault-free provision of
the current measured values and/or for remote parameterization.
The monitoring relays can either relieve the controller of monitoring tasks or, as a second monitoring entity in parallel to and independent of the controller, increase the reliability in the process
or in the system. In addition, the elimination of AI and IO modules
allows the width of the controller to be reduced despite significantly expanded functionality.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/125
10
Application
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Type
3UG48

- Screw terminals
mm
mm
22.5 x 92 x 91
22.5 x 94 x 91
mm
mm
22.5 x 103 x 91
22.5 x 103 x 91
-25 ... +60

- Screw terminals

During operation
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
Tightening torque
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
Connection type
Solid
Finely stranded

1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 1.2
mm2
mm2
2
mm
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
More information
Manual "3UG48/3RR24 Monitoring Relays for IO-Link" see
Notes on safety
10

10/126
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
Overview
Benefits
Can be used in any network from 160 to 630 V AC worldwide
thanks to wide voltage range
monitoring
Width 22.5 mm
Display and transmission of actual value and network fault
type to controller
Application
The relays are used above all for mobile equipment, e.g. air
conditioning compressors, refrigerating containers, building site
compressors and cranes.
Solid-state line monitoring relays provide maximum protection

for mobile machines, plants and hoisting equipment or for unstable networks. Network and voltage faults can thus be detected
early and rectified before far greater damage ensues.
The line monitoring relays with IO-Link monitor phase sequence,
phase failure (with or without N conductor monitoring), phase
asymmetry and undervoltage and/or overvoltage.
Phase asymmetry is evaluated as the difference between the
greatest and the smallest phase voltage relative to the greatest
phase voltage. Undervoltage or overvoltage exist if the set limit
values for at least one phase voltage are overshot or undershot.
The rms value of the voltage is measured.
Function
Application
Phase sequence
Direction of rotation of the drive
Phase failure
A fuse has tripped

Failure of the control supply voltage
Broken cable
Phase asymmetry
Overheating of the motor due to asymmetrical

voltage
Detection of asymmetrically loaded networks
Undervoltage
Increased current on a motor with corresponding overheating

Unintentional resetting of a device
Network collapse, particularly with battery power
Overvoltage
Protection of a plant against destruction due to

overvoltage
10
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/127
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
The 3UG4815 and 3UG4816 line monitoring relays have a wide

voltage range input and are supplied with power through IO-Link
or from an external 24 V DC source.
Phase failure
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N
L1-L2-L3
L1-L2-L3-N
11/14
11/12
Undervoltage

overshooting continues to flash, even when the measured variable reaches a permissible value again. This stored fault status
can be reset by simultaneously pressing the UP or DOWN
key for 2.5 s.
With Manual RESET through IO-Link it is possible in addition to
set whether error signals are to be deleted when the control supply voltage is switched off and on (as remote RESET) or whether
the signals are to be permanently saved even in a voltage failure,
with confirmation possible only through local RESET or via
IO-Link.
L2-L3
L1-L2-L3
IC01_00006
The device has two separately adjustable delay times for overvoltage and undervoltage and for line stabilization. If the direction of rotation is incorrect or a phase fails, the device switches
off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase
failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from
and potentially high feedback through the load.
The 3UG4815 and 3UG4816 monitoring relays can be operated
on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle
and with Manual or Auto RESET.
IC01_00005
L3-L2-L1
11/14
11/12
L+/LUx-y
Hysteresis
<U
11/14
11/12
IC01_00007
The device is equipped with a display and is parameterized

using three buttons. The 3UG4815 monitoring relay monitors
three-phase networks with regard to phase sequence, phase
failure, phase asymmetry, undervoltage and overvoltage. The
3UG4816 monitoring relay monitors the neutral conductor as
well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 20 V.
Q on
Q off
stDelay
Delay
Overvoltage
L+/L-
10
Ux-y
>U
Hysteresis
Q on
Q off
stDelay
Type
3UG4815, 3UG4816

Pollution degree 2
690
kV


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Control circuit

0.1
10
10/128
Siemens IC 10 2014
IC01_00008
11/14
11/12
Delay
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Line monitoring
Circuit diagrams
L1 L2 L3
L+
C/Q
L-
N L1 L2 L3
11
L+
C/Q
L-
IO-Link
11
IO-Link
IC01_00010
IC01_00009
12 14
12 14
3UG4815
Note:
It is not necessary to protect the
measuring circuit for device protection.
The protective device for line protection
depends on the cross-section used.
3UG4816

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
Adjustable via IO-Link and locally, with illuminated LCD

Power supply with 24 V DC via IO-Link or
external auxiliary voltage
1 CO contact, 1 semiconductor output (in SIO mode)
3UG4815-1AA40
3UG4815-2AA40
3UG4816-1AA40
AdjustUnderOverStabilization Tripping
able
voltage
voltage
time
delay time
hysteresis detection detection adjustable adjustable
stDEL
Del
Version of
auxiliary
contacts
3UG4816-2AA40
Measurable DT
mains
voltage1)
Article No.
V
DT
Screw terminals
V AC
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure, phase asymmetry,

overvoltage and undervoltage
1 ... 20
0.1 999.9 0.1 999.9 1 CO + 1 Q 2) 160 690
3UG4815-1AA40
3UG4815-2AA40
3UG4816-1AA40
3UG4816-2AA40
1 ... 20
0.1 999.9 0.1 999.9 1 CO + 1 Q 2) 90 400

against N
10
Monitoring of phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure,

phase asymmetry, overvoltage and undervoltage
Function available
1)
2)
In SIO mode.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/129
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Voltage monitoring
Overview
Benefits
monitoring
Width 22.5 mm
Display and transmission of actual value and status messages
to controller
Application
Protection of a plant against destruction due to overvoltage
Switch-on of a plant at a defined voltage and higher
Protection from undervoltage due to overloaded control
supply voltages, particularly with battery power
The relays monitor single-phase AC voltages (rms value) and

DC voltages against the set limit value for overshoot and
undershoot.
3UG4832 monitoring relay
The 3UG4832 voltage monitoring relays are supplied with power

through IO-Link or with an external auxiliary voltage of 24 V DC
and perform overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of the
voltage depending on parameterization. The devices are
equipped with a display and are parameterized by means of
three buttons or through IO-Link.
Overvoltage
The device can be operated on the basis of either the opencircuit or closed-circuit principle and with Manual or Auto RESET.
One output changeover contact is available as a signaling
contact, and a semiconductor output is available in addition in
SIO mode.
key for 2.5 s.
set whether error signals are to be deleted when the control
supply voltage is switched off and on (as remote RESET) or
whether the signals are to be permanently saved even in a
voltage failure, with confirmation possible only through local
RESET or via IO-Link.
<U
!
Hysteresis
=0
11/14
11/12
IC01_00011
The measuring range extends from 10 to 600 V AC/DC. The limit

values for overshoot or undershoot can be freely configured
within this range. If one of these limit values is reached, the output relay responds according to the set principle of operation as
soon as the delay time has elapsed. This tripping delay time
UDel/UDel can be set from 0 to 999.9 s like the ON-delay
time. The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 300 V.
L+/L-
Q on
Q off
Delay
Undervoltage
L+/L<U
Hysteresis
11/14
11/12
IC01_00012
10
Q on
Q off
Delay
10/130
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Voltage monitoring
Range monitoring
L+/L<U
,
<U
!
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
U=0
IC01_00013
11/14
11/12
Q on
Q off
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Delay
Type
3UG4832

Pollution degree 2
690
kV
Permissible measuring range single-phase AC/DC voltage
10 690
Setting range single-phase voltage
10 ... 600
Measuring frequency
Hz
40 ... 500


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Measuring circuit
10
Control circuit
Circuit diagrams
IN (+)
L+
C/Q L-
11
Note:
<U>
IO-Link
M (-)
,&B
12 14
3UG4832
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/131
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Voltage monitoring

Power supply with 24 V DC via IO-Link or external auxiliary
voltage
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3UG4832-2AA40
3UG4832-1AA40
Measuring range
Adjustable
hysteresis
ON-delay time
adjustable
onDel
Tripping delay time DT

separately
adjustable
UDel/UDel
V AC/DC
DT
Screw
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Monitoring of voltage for overshoot and undershoot

10 600
0.1 ... 300
0 999.9
0 999.9
3UG4832-1AA40
3UG4832-2AA40
10
10/132
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Current monitoring
Overview
Benefits
monitoring
Width 22.5 mm
to controller
Application
Overcurrent and undercurrent monitoring
Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads
Monitoring for broken conductors
The relays monitor single-phase AC (rms value) and DC currents

against the set limit value for overshoot and undershoot.
The rms value of the current is measured. The limit values for
overshoot or undershoot can be freely configured within this
range. If one of these limit values is reached, the output relay
the tripping delay time IDel/IDel has elapsed. This time and
the ON-delay time onDel are adjustable from 0 to 999.9 s.
The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.01 to 5 A. The device can be
operated with Manual or Auto RESET and on the basis of either
the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle. Following options are
available: Response of the output relay when the control supply
voltage Us = ON is applied or not until the lower measuring
range limit of the measuring current (I > 50 mA) is reached. One
output changeover contact is available as a signaling contact,
and a semiconductor output is available in addition in SIO mode.
switching relay remains in its current switching state and the current measured value and the symbol for undershooting and
key for 2.5 s.
L+/L>
,
!
=0
Hysteresis
11/14
11/12
Q on
Q off
onDelay
10
The measuring range extends from 0.05 to 10 A. For larger

AC currents the measuring range can be extended by using
commercially available current transformers. Using the
adjustable transformer factor, the display of the measured
primary currents up to 750 A instead of the secondary currents
(max. 1 A or 5 A) is possible.
Current overshoot
IC01_00016
The 3UG4822 current monitoring relays are supplied with power

through IO-Link or with an external voltage of 24 V DC and perform overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of the current
depending on the parameterization. The devices are equipped
with a display and are parameterized using three buttons.

Delay
Current undershoot
L+/L<
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
!
=0
11/14
11/12
IC01_00017
Q on
Q off
onDelay
Delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/133
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Current monitoring
Range monitoring
L+/L>
,
<
!
Hysteresis
!
=0
IC01_00018
11/14
11/12
Q on
Q off
onDelay
Delay
Delay =
Delay
Delay
Type
3UG4822

Pollution degree 2
690
kV
Measuring range single-phase AC/DC current
0.05 15
Setting range for single-phase current
0.05 ... 10
Load supply voltage
Max. 300 (with protective separation)

Max. 500 (with simple separation)


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
A
3
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Measuring circuit
10
Control circuit
Circuit diagrams
IN
L+
C/Q L-
11

< >
IO-Link
M
,&B
3UG4822
10/134
Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
12 14
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Current monitoring

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H

voltage
Adjustable converter factor to display the measured primary
current when an external current transformer is used
3UG4822-2AA40
3UG4822-1AA40
Measuring range
Adjustable
hysteresis
ON-delay time
adjustable
onDel
Tripping delay time DT

separately
adjustable
IDel/IDel
AC/DC A
DT
Screw
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Monitoring of current for overshooting and undershooting

0.05 10
0.01 ... 5
0.1 999.9
0.1 999.9
3UG4822-1AA40
3UG4822-2AA40
10
For AC currents I > 10 A it is possible to use commercially

available current transformers, e.g. the Siemens 4NC current
transformer, as accessories, see Catalog LV 10, "Low-Voltage

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/135
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Overview
Benefits
Monitoring of even small single-phase motors with a no-load
supply current below 0.5 A
Simple determination of threshold values by the direct collection of measured variables on motor loading
Range monitoring and active current measurement enable detection of cable breaks between control cabinets and motors,
as well as phase failures
Power factor and/or Ires (active current) can be selected as
the measurement principle
Width 22.5 mm
to controller
Application
The 3UG4841 power factor and active current monitoring

devices enable the load monitoring of motors.
Whereas power factor monitoring is used above all for monitoring no-load operation, the active current monitoring option can
be used to observe and evaluate the load factor over the entire
torque range.
No-load monitoring and load shedding, such as in the event of

a V-belt tear
Underload monitoring in the low performance range,
e.g. in the event of pump no-load operation
Monitoring of overload, e.g. due to a dirty filter system
Power factor monitoring in networks for control of compensation equipment
Broken cable between control cabinet and motor
10

The 3UG4841 monitoring relays are supplied with power through
IO-Link or with an external auxiliary voltage of 24 V DC and are
used for performing overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring
of the power factor and/or the resulting active current, depending on parameterization. The load to be monitored is connected
upstream of the IN terminal. The load current flows through the
terminals IN and Ly/N. The setting range for the power factor is
0 to 0.99 and for the active current Ires 0.2 to 10 A. If the control
supply voltage is switched on and no load current flows, the display will show I < 0.2 and a symbol for overrange, underrange
or range monitoring. If the motor is now switched on and the current exceeds 0.2 A, the set ON-delay time onDel begins. During
this time, if the set limit values are undershot or exceeded, this
does not lead to a relay reaction of the changeover contact. If the
operational flowing active current and/or the p.f. value falls below or exceeds the respective set threshold value, the tripping
delay time begins. When this time has expired, the relay
changes its switch position. The relevant measured variables for
overshooting and undershooting in the display flash. If the
monitoring of active current undershooting is deactivated
(Ires= OFF) and the load current drops below the lower
measuring range threshold (0.2 A), then the CO contacts remain
unchanged. If a threshold value is set for the monitoring of active
current undershooting, then undershooting of the measuring
range threshold (0.2 A) will result in a response of the
CO contacts.
10/136
Siemens IC 10 2014
The relay operates either according to the open-circuit or

closed-circuit principle.
If the device is set to Auto RESET (Memory = No), depending on
the set principle of operation, the switching relay returns to its
initial state and the flashing ends when the hysteresis threshold
is reached.
key for 2.5 s.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Response in the event of undershooting the measuring range
limit
With activated monitoring of Ires
Overshooting of active current
> res
L+/L-
r , r!
=0
< 0,2 A
Hysteresis
= 0,2 A
=0
21/24
21/22
IC01_00020
11/14
11/12
21/24
21/22
Q on
Q off
onDelay
onDelay
Delay
G
G
IC01_00022
11/14
11/12
onDelay
With deactivated monitoring of active current undershooting
Undershooting of active current
< res
L+/L-
Hysteresis
< 0,2 A
r , r!
=0
= 0,2 A
11/14
11/12
onDelay
Q on
Q off
onDelay
onDelay
Delay
Range monitoring of active current
> res
10
21/24
21/22
21/24
21/22
IC01_00023
IC01_00021
11/14
11/12
< res
r , r!
Hysteresis
r , r!
=0
11/14
11/12
21/24
21/22
IC01_00024
=0
Q on
Q off
onDelay
Delay
Delay
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/137
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Overshooting of power factor
Range monitoring of power factor
> cos
> cos
!
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
p.f. = 0
< cos
11/14
11/12
p.f. = 0
11/14
11/12
IC01_00025
21/24
21/22
Q on
Q off
onDelay
21/24
21/22
IC01_00027
Q on
Q off
Delay
Undershooting of power factor
onDelay
Delay
Delay
< cos
Hysteresis
p.f. = 0
11/14
11/12
IC01_00026
21/24
21/22
Q on
Q off
onDelay
Delay
Type
3UG4841
10

Pollution degree 2
690
kV
Control circuit
2


AC-15/24 ... 400 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Circuit diagrams
Lx
Ly
Note:
IN

<cos phi>
12
11
14
L+
C/Q
22
IO-Link
21
L-
24
,&B
3UG4841
10/138
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

For monitoring the power factor and the active current Ires
(p.f. x I)
Suitable for single- and three-phase currents
Upper and lower limit values can be adjusted separately
1 CO contact each for undershoot and overshoot,
1 semiconductor output (in SIO mode)
3UG4841-1CA40
3UG4841-2CA40
Measuring range
Voltage
Hysteresis
range of the
measuring
voltage1)
For power
factor
For
active
current
Ires
50/60 Hz AC Adjustable for

power
factor
Adjustable for
active
current
Ires
P.f.
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
ON-delay
time
adjustable
onDel
Tripping
DT
delay time
separately
adjustable
UDel/
UDel,
Del/
Del
Article No.
P.f.
DT
Screw terminals
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Monitoring of power factor and active current for overshooting and

undershooting
0.1 ... 0.99 0.2 ... 10 90 ... 690
0.1 ... 3
0 ... 999.9
0 ... 999.9 A
3UG4841-1CA40
3UG4841-2CA40
10
1)
0.1 ... 0.2

For AC active currents Ires> 10 A it is possible to use commercially available current transformers, e.g. Siemens 4NC current
converter, as accessories, see Catalog LV 10 "Low-voltage
power distribution and electrical installation technology".

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/139
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Overview
Benefits
High measuring accuracy 7.5 %

Parameterization of the devices locally or via IO-Link possible
Variable threshold values for warning and disconnection
to controller
High level of flexibility and space saving through installation of
the transformer inside or outside the control cabinet
Width 22.5 m
Application
Monitoring of plants in which residual currents can occur,

e.g. due to dust deposits or moisture, porous cables and leads,
or capacitive residual currents
The 3UG4825 residual-current monitoring relays are used in

conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current transformers for
monitoring plants in which higher residual currents are increasingly expected due to ambient conditions. Monitoring encompasses pure AC residual currents or AC residual currents with a
pulsating DC fault current component (transformer type A in
accordance with DIN VDE 0100-530/IEC TR 60755).
The main conductor, and any neutral conductor to which a load

is connected, are routed through the opening of the annular ring
core of a residual-current transformer. A secondary winding is
placed around this annular strip-wound core to which the monitoring relay is connected.
Residual current monitoring with Auto RESET (Memory = no)
If operation of a plant is fault-free, the sum of the inflowing and

outward currents equals zero. No current is then induced in the
secondary winding of the residual-current transformer.
However, if an insulation fault occurs downstream of the residual
current operated circuit breaker, the sum of the inflowing currents is greater than that of the outward currents. The differential
current - the residual current - induces a secondary current in
the secondary winding of the transformer. This current is evaluated in the monitoring relay and is used on the one hand to display the actual residual current and on the other, to switch the relay if the set warning or tripping threshold is overshot.
If the measured residual current exceeds the set warning value,
the associated changeover contact instantly changes the
switching state and an indication appears on the display.
If the measured residual current exceeds the set tripping value,
the set delay time begins and the associated relay symbol
flashes. On expiry of this time, the associated changeover
contact changes the switching state.
To be able to start a drive when a residual current is detected,
the output relays switch to the OK state for an adjustable
ON-delay time depending on the selected open-circuit principle
or closed-circuit principle.
The changeover contacts do not react if the set threshold values
are overshot during this period.
10/140
Siemens IC 10 2014
L+/L> !
>
Hysteresis
Hysteresis = 5 %
= 0,02 A
=0
11/14
11/12
Q on 21/24
IC01_00227
10
Q off 21/22
Init
Delay
onDelay
onDelay
If the device is set to Auto RESET, the relay switches back to the
OK state for the tripping value once the value falls below the set
hysteresis threshold and the display stops flashing.
The associated relay changes its switching state if the value falls
below the fixed hysteresis value of 5 % of the warning value.
Any overshoots are therefore not stored.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Residual current monitoring with Manual RESET (Memory = yes)
L+/LReset
t > 2,5 s
> !
>
Hysteresis
Note:
Hysteresis = 5 %
The neutral conductor must not be grounded downstream of the

summation current transformer as this may impair the function of
the residual current monitoring device.
= 0,02 A
=0
If Manual RESET is selected in the menu, the output relays remain in their current switching state and the current measured
value and the symbol for overshooting continues to flash, even
when the measured residual current returns to a permissible
value. This stored fault status can be reset by pressing the UP
or DOWN key simultaneously for > 2 seconds, or by switching
the supply voltage off and back on again.
11/14
IC01_00228a
11/12
Q on 21/24
Q off 21/22
Init
Delay
onDelay onDelay
onDelay
Type
3UG4825-1CA40,
3UG4825-2CA40
General data
Insulation voltage for overvoltage category III to IEC 60664
for pollution degree 3 rated value
300
Impulse withstand voltage rated value Uimp
kV
Control circuit
2

Thermal current of the non-solid-state contact blocks maximum
Current carrying capacity of the output relay

At AC-15 at 250 V at 50/60 Hz
At DC-13
- At 24 V
- At 125 V
- At 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Operational current at 17 V minimum
mA
L+ C/Q L- C1 C2
IO-Link
11
21
12 14
22 24
Note:
IC01_00223
3UG4825
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/141
10
Circuit diagram
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

For monitoring residual currents from 0.03 to 40 A,
from 16 to 400 Hz
For 3UL23 residual-current transformers with feed-through
opening from 35 to 210 mm
Certified in accordance with IEC 60947, functionality
corresponds to IEC 62020
Separately adjustable limit value and warning threshold
1 changeover contact each for warning threshold and tripping
threshold
3UG4825-1CA40
Measurable
current
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3UG4825-2CA40
Adjustable
Switching
response value hysteresis
current
Adjustable
ON-delay time
Control supply DT
voltage
Screw terminals
At DC rated
value
Article No.
0.01 ... 43
0.03 ... 40
0 ... 50
0 ... 999.9
24
3UG4825-1CA40
DT
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
3UG4825-2CA40
10
3UL23 residual-current transformers and accessories for 3UL23

see page 10/104.
10/142
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Speed monitoring
Overview
Benefits
monitoring
Display and transmission of actual value and fault type to
controller
Use of up to 10 sensors per rotation for extremely slowly
rotating motors
2- or 3-wire sensors and sensors with a mechanical switching
output or solid-state-output can be connected
Auxiliary voltage for sensor integrated
Application
Slip or tear of a belt drive

Overload monitoring
Transport monitoring for completeness
3UG4851 monitoring relays are used in combination with a

sensor to monitor drives for overspeed and/or underspeed.
Furthermore, the monitoring relays are ideal for all functions
where a continuous pulse signal needs to be monitored (e.g. belt
travel monitoring, completeness monitoring, passing monitoring,
clock-time monitoring).
Speed monitoring with Auto RESET (Memory = no)
The speed monitoring relay operates according to the principle

of period duration measurement.
If the device is set to Auto RESET, the output relay switches to

the GO state, once the adjustable hysteresis threshold is
reached in the range of 1 ... 99.9 rpm and the flashing stops. Any
overshoots or undershoots are therefore not stored.
Thus, the period duration measurement recognizes any deviation in speed after just two pulses, even at very low speeds or in
the case of extended pulse gaps.
By using up to ten pulse encoders evenly distributed around the
circumference, it is possible to shorten the period duration, and
in turn the response time. By taking into account the number of
sensors in the monitoring relay, the speed continues to be indicated in rpm.
To be able to start a motor drive, and depending on whether the
open-circuit or closed-circuit principle is selected, the output
relay switches to the GO state during the ON-delay time, even if
the speed is still below the set value.
Speed monitoring with Manual RESET (Memory = yes)

If Manual RESET is selected in the menu, the output relay remains in its current switching state and the current measured
value and the symbol for overshooting/undershooting continue
to flash, even when the speed returns to a permissible value.
This stored fault status can be reset by simultaneously pressing
the UP or DOWN key for > 2.5 s or by connecting the RESET
device terminal to 24 V DC.
The ON-delay time is started by either switching on the auxiliary

voltage or, if the auxiliary voltage is already applied, by actuating
the respective NC contact (e.g. auxiliary contact).
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/143
10
In the monitoring relay, the time between two successive rising

edges of the pulse encoder is measured and compared to the
minimum and/or maximum permissible period duration calculated from the set limit values for the speed.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Speed monitoring
Range monitoring without enable input
Range monitoring with enable input

L+/L-
L+/L-
EN
> RPM
rpm !
rpm
< RPM
< RPM
> RPM
Hysteresis
rpm
rpm !
rpm
rpm !
rpm !
Hysteresis
RPM = 0
11/14
11/12
RPM = 0
11/14
11/12
IC01_00030
Q on
Q off
onDelay
Delay
IC01_00031
rpm
Q on
Q off
Delay
onDelay
Type
Delay
Delay
3UG4851

Pollution degree 2
300
kV
Sensor supply
For three-wire sensor (24 V/0 V)
For 2-wire NAMUR sensor (8V2)
mA
mA
Max. 50
Max. 8.2
Signal input
IN1
IN2
k
k
16, three-wire sensor, pnp operation

1, floating contact, 2-wire NAMUR sensor
Voltage level
For level 1 at IN1
For level 0 at IN1
V
V
4.5 ... 30
0 ... 1
Current level
For level 1 at IN2
For level 0 at IN2
mA
mA
> 2.1
< 1.2
Minimum pulse duration of signal
ms
Minimum interval between 2 pulses
ms
10
Measuring circuit
Control circuit
1


AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
mA
Circuit diagrams
EN
24V IN1 0V
L+
C/Q L-
11

RPM
IO-Link
IC01_00029
IN2 8V2
3UG4851
10/144
Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
12 14
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Speed monitoring

For speed monitoring in revolutions per minute (rpm)
Two- or three-wire sensor with mechanical or electronic
switching output can be connected
Two-wire NAMUR sensor can be connected
Sensor supply 24 V DC/50 mA integrated
Input frequency 0.1 to 2 200 pulses per minute
(0.0017 to 36.7 Hz)
With or without enable signal for the drive to be monitored
voltage
Number of pulses per revolution can be adjusted
Upper and lower limit values can be adjusted separately
Auto, manual or remote RESET options after tripping
3UG4851-1AA40
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3UG4851-2AA40
Measuring range Adjustable

hysteresis
ON-delay
time
adjustable
onDel
Tripping delay Pulses per

time separately revolution
adjustable
rpmDel/
rpmDel
rpm
DT
Article No.
rpm
DT
Screw terminals
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Speed monitoring for overshooting and undershooting

0.1 ... 2 200
OFF
1 ... 99.9
0 ... 999.9
0 ... 999.9
1 ... 10
3UG4851-1AA40
3UG4851-2AA40

10
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/145
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Accessories

Use
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
For 3UG48

For SIRIUS devices
D
3RT29 00-1SB20
100
340 units
41B

3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
For 3UG48
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing,
3RP1903
10 units
41H
For 3UG48
Sealable covers
3RP1902
5 units
41H
1 unit
41B
Blank labels
20 mm x 7 mm, titanium gray1)

IC01_00181
For 3UG48
Adhesive labels
For SIRIUS devices
3RT29 00-1SB20
3RP1903
3RP1902

For auxiliary
circuit
connections
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,

partially insulated
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A

10
1)
Screwdrivers
terminals
10/146
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21 Temperature Monitoring Relays
General data
Overview
Temperature
setting
The 3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20 and 3RS21 temperature monitoring

relays can be used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid
and gas media. The temperatures are acquired by means of
sensors in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored
for overshoot, undershoot or location within a specified range
(window function).
LED for display
LED "Device
on voltage"
"Up and Down"

keys
LED "Relay
switched"
The range comprises adjustable analog units with one or two

threshold values, digital units for 1 sensor, which are also a good
alternative to temperature controllers for the low-end range, and
digital units for up to 3 sensors which have been optimized for
monitoring large motors.
Rotary switch
for parameter
selection
Hysteresis
switch
NSB0_01421b
SIRIUS 3RS temperature monitoring relay
Article No. scheme

@@@
3RS
Device type
Version and type of sensor
Connection methods
Measuring range
Special versions
3RS
Example
Note:
article numbers.
IC0
1_ 0
0 24

relays make the following contribution to the energy efficiency of
the plant as a whole:
Demand-based control of heating and ventilation in the
process and in the control cabinet
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/147
10
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Connection of resistance-type thermometers
Connection of thermoelements
Two-wire measurement
Based on the thermo-electrical effect, a differential temperature

measurement will be performed between the measuring point
and the signal evaluation unit.
When two-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of

the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error
must be taken into account when the signal evaluation unit is
calibrated. A jumper must be clamped between terminals T2
and T3 for this purpose.
I
T3
T2
This principle assumes that the signal evaluation unit knows the
temperature at the clamping point (T2). For this reason, the
3RS11 temperature monitoring relay has an integral compensator that determines this comparison temperature and builds it
into the result of the measurement. The thermal sensors and cables must be insulated therefore.
The absolute temperature is therefore calculated from the ambient temperature of the signal evaluation unit and the temperature
difference measured by the thermoelement.
PT100
Temperature detection is therefore possible (T1) without needing

to know the precise ambient temperature of the clamping point
at the signal evaluation unit (T2).
T1
NSB0_01323b
Wiring errors
The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise approximately 2.5 Kelvin/. If the resistance of the cable is not known
and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be estimated using the following table.
The connecting cable is only permitted to be extended using

connecting leads that are made from the same material as the
thermoelement. If a different type of conductor is used, an error
will result in the measurement.
NiCr
Temperature drift dependent on the length and cross-section

of the cable with PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of
20 C, in K:
Ni
Cable length Cross-section

in m
mm
0.5
Measuring
point
0.75
1.5
Temperature drift in K:
10
T2
T1
NSB0_01325a
Internal
reference point compensation
www.feldgeraete.de/76/produkte/fuw.html
10
1.8
1.2
0.9
0.6
www.ephy-mess.de
25
4.5
3.0
2.3
1.5
50
9.0
6.0
4.5
3.0
75
13.6
9.0
6.8
4.5
100
18.1
12.1
9.0
6.0
200
36.3
24.2
18.1
12.1
500
91.6
60.8
45.5
30.2
Example: On a PT100 sensor with a cable length of 10 m and a

conductor cross-section of 1 mm2 the temperature drift equals
0.9 K.
Three-wire measurement
To minimize the effects of the line resistances, a three-wire circuit
is often used. Using the additional cable, two measuring circuits
can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal
evaluation unit can then automatically calculate the line resistance and take it into account.
T3
T2
PT100
T1
NSB0_01324b
10/148
Siemens IC 10 2014
or from
EPHY-MESS GmbH, see Chapter 16 "Appendix"
"External Partners"
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold value 1,
the output relay K1 changes its switching state as soon as the
set time t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to 2).
The delay time can only be adjusted with digital units (on analog
units t = 0).
The relays return to their original state as soon as the temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.
Principle of operation with memory function (3RS1042,

3RS1142) based on the example of temperature overshoot
Once the temperature has reached the set threshold value 1,
the output relay K1 changes its switching state as soon as the
set time t has elapsed (K2 responds in the same manner to 2).
The relays only return to the original state when the temperature
falls below the set hysteresis value and when terminals Y3 and
Y4 have been briefly jumpered.
Temperature overshoot
NSB0_01332f
1
2
NSB0_01327e
Us
Y3-Y4
Us
K1
t
t
Characteristic curves
Temperature undershoot
For resistance sensors
Resistance in
NSB0_01329d
1
2
5000
NTC
4000
3000
KTY83 KTY84 PT1000
Us
2000
K1
t
t
1000
PT100
0
-100
100
Range monitoring (digital units only)

Once the temperature has reached the upper threshold value
1, the output relay K1 changes its switching state as soon as
the set time t has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state
as soon as the temperature reaches the set hysteresis value.
K2 responds in the same manner to the lower threshold value
of 2.
NSB0_1331e
2
Us
K1
K2
300
400
500
Temperature in C
The short-circuit and open-circuit detection as well as the

measuring range is limited, depending on the sensor type.
Measuring ranges in C for resistance sensors
Sensor
type
Short
circuit
Open
circuit
200
3RS1040/
3RS1041
Measuring
range
in C
3RS1042
Measuring
range
in C
PT100
50 ... +500
50 ... +750
PT1000
50 ... +500
50 ... +500
KTY83-110
50 ... +175
50 ... +175
KTY84
40 ... +300
40 ... +300
NTC1)
--
80 ... 160
80 ... 160
Detection possible

t
1)
NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/149
10
K2
NSB0_01322a
K2
K1
K2
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
For thermoelements
Type "E"
70
Sensor
type
Short
circuit
Open
circuit
3RS1140
Measuring
range
in C
3RS1142
Measuring
range
in C
Type "K"
--
-99 ... +999
-99 ... +1200
Type "N"
--
-99 ... +999
-99 ... +1350
--
-99 ... +400
-99 ... +400
--
-99 ... +999
-99 ... +999
--
-99 ... +999
-99 ... +999
--
--
--
--
0 ... 1 750
--
--
400 ... 1 800
Type "J"
60
50
40
NSB0_01321a
Voltage in mV
Measuring range in C for thermoelements

80
30
Type "T"
20
10
0
0
200
400
500
800
1000 1200 1400 1600

Temperature in C
Detection possible
9ROWDJHLQ
Type "R"
20000
Type "S"
IC01_00044
Characteristic curves for sensor types J, K, T, E, N
25000
0 ... 1 750
15000
Type "B"
10000
5000
0
400
600
800
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

Temperature in C
Type
3RS10, 3RS11
analog
3RS10, 3RS11, 3RS20, 3RS21

digital

Screw terminals
mm
22.5 x 102 x 91
45 x 106 x 91
mm
22.5 x 103 x 91
45 x 108 x 91
-25 ... +60
10
Characteristic curves for sensor types S, R and B

During operation
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Connection type
Solid
Finely stranded
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
More information
For "3RS1/3RS2 Temperature Monitoring Relays" manual, see
10/150
Siemens IC 10 2014

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Relays, analogically adjustable for 1 sensor
Overview
Benefits
All devices except for 24 V AC/DC feature electrical
separation
Extremely easy operation using a rotary potentiometer
Adjustable hysteresis
Adjustable working principle for devices with 2 threshold
values
All versions with screw terminals, many versions alternatively
with spring-type terminals
Application
The analogically adjustable SIRIUS 3RS10, 3RS11 temperature
monitoring relays can be used in almost any application in which
temperature overshoot or undershoot is not permitted, e.g. in the
monitoring of set temperature limits and the output of alarm
messages for:
Motor and system protection
Control cabinet temperature monitoring
Freeze monitoring
Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging
industry or electroplating
Controlling equipment and machines such as heating, climate
and ventilation systems, solar collectors, heat pumps or warm
water supplies
Motor, bearing and gear oil monitoring
Monitoring of coolants
SIRIUS 3RS analog temperature monitoring relays for 1 sensor
The 3RS10, 3RS11 analog temperature monitoring relays can be

used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.
The temperature is detected by the sensors in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot.
When the threshold values are reached, the output relay
switches on or off depending on the parameterization.
Type
3RS1000,
3RS1010
3RS1100,
3RS1101
3RS1020,
3RS1030
3RS1120,
3RS1121
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Typically < 5 % from upper limit of scale
Measuring accuracy
at 20 C ambient temperature (T20)
Reference point accuracy
Deviations due to ambient temperature

In % of the measuring range
Hysteresis settings
for temperature 1
for temperature 2
10
Auxiliary circuit
AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 240 V
--
<5
--
<5
<2
<3
<2
<3
--
Typically 1
--
--
Yes
--
%
%
2 ... 20 from upper limit of scale

5 from upper limit of scale
mA
Typically 1
Sensor circuit
PT100
No
Short-circuit detection
No
Three-wire conductor connection1)
Yes
Enclosure
1)
300
Two-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper

between T2 and T3.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/151
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit examples
3RS1000, 3RS1010
Legend
A1 = 24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC, 24 to 240 V AC/DC
A1 A3
11
13
K1
A3 = 110 V AC
A2= M
K1, K2 = output relays
T1
= LED: "Device connected to voltage"
T2
14
12
T3
1 = LED: "Relay 1 tripped"

T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermoelements
A2
NSB0_01333b
When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used,

T2 and T3 must be jumpered.
3RS1020, 3RS1030
A1
K1
11
T1
1
T2
K2
T3
14
12
23
2
24
A2
NSB0_01335b
3RS1100, 3RS1101
A1 A3
10
K1
T-
11
13
14
12
T+
A2
NSB0_01334b
3RS1120, 3RS1121
A1
11
K1
1
T-
K2
T+
14
12
23
2
24
A2
NSB0_01336b
10/152
. Important!
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

For temperature monitoring with resistance sensors or thermoelements
Temperature range -55 C to +1 000 C, depending on the
sensor type
Wide voltage range versions are electrically separated
Analogically adjustable, setting accuracy 5 %
Versions with 2 separately adjustable threshold values and
adjustable open/closed-circuit principle
Hysteresis for threshold value 1 is adjustable (2 to 20 %),
hysteresis for threshold 2 is non-adjustable (5 %)
1 NC + 1 NO for versions with one threshold value
1 CO for threshold value 1 and 1 NO for threshold value 2
Sensors
Function
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
Measuring
range

voltage Us
50/60 Hz AC
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Analogically adjustable, 1 threshold value, width 22.5 mm;

closed-circuit principle; without memory; 1 NO + 1 NC
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
A
3RS1000-1CD00
3RS1000-1CK00
C
C
3RS1000-2CD00
3RS1000-2CK00
0 + 100
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
A
3RS1000-1CD10
3RS1000-1CK10
C
C
3RS1000-2CD10
3RS1000-2CK10
0 + 200
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
A
3RS1000-1CD20
3RS1000-1CK20
C
C
3RS1000-2CD20
3RS1000-2CK20
- 50 + 50
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
A
3RS1010-1CD00
3RS1010-1CK00
---
0 + 100
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
C
3RS1010-1CD10
3RS1010-1CK10
---
0 + 200
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
C
3RS1010-1CD20
3RS1010-1CK20
---
Type J
(thermoelement)
Overshoot 0 + 200
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
A
C
3RS1100-1CD20
3RS1100-1CK20
0 + 600
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
C
3RS1100-1CD30
3RS1100-1CK30
---
Type K
(thermoelement)
Overshoot 0 + 200
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
C
3RS1101-1CD20
3RS1101-1CK20
---
0 + 600
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
C
3RS1101-1CD30
3RS1101-1CK30
---
+ 500
+ 1 000
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
C
C
3RS1101-1CD40
3RS1101-1CK40
---
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1020-1DD00
3RS1020-1DW00
---
0 + 100
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1020-1DD10
3RS1020-1DW10
---
0 + 200
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
A
3RS1020-1DD20
3RS1020-1DW20
-50 + 50
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1030-1DD00
3RS1030-1DW00
---
0 + 100
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1030-1DD10
3RS1030-1DW10
---
0 + 200
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1030-1DD20
3RS1030-1DW20
3RS1030-2DD20
--
Type J
(thermoelement)
Overshoot 0 + 200
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1120-1DD20
3RS1120-1DW20
3RS1120-2DD20
--
0 + 600
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS1120-1DD30
3RS1120-1DW30
---
Type K
(thermoelement)
Overshoot 0 ... + 200
24 240 AC/DC
3RS1121-1DW20
--
0 ... + 600
24 240 AC/DC
3RS1121-1DW30
--
+ 500 +
1 000
24 AC/DC
3RS1121-1DD40
--
Overshoot - 50 + 50
Undershoot
3RS1000-1CD10
3RS1000-2CD10
3RS1100-2CD20
--
10
PT100
(resistance
sensor)
Analogically adjustable for warning and disconnection

(2 threshold values), 22.5 mm width, open/closed-circuit principle
switchable; without memory; 1 NO + 1 CO
PT100
(resistance
sensor)
Overshoot - 50 + 50
Undershoot
3RS1020-1DD00
3RS1120-2DD20
-3RS1020-2DW20

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/153
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable, for 1 sensor
Overview
Benefits
Very simple operation without complicated menu selections

Two- or three-point control can be parameterized quickly
Application
SIRIUS 3RS digital temperature monitoring relays for 1 sensor

relays can be used for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid
and gas media. The temperatures are acquired by means of
sensors in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored
for overshoot, undershoot or location within a specified range
(window function). The 3RS10 and 3RS11 unit indicate the
measured temperature in C, the 3RS20 and 3RS21 unit in F.
The temperature monitoring relays can be used in almost any

application in which temperature overshoot or undershoot is not
permitted, e.g. in the monitoring of set temperature limits and the
output of alarm messages for:
Plant and environment protection
Temperature limits for district heating plants
Exhaust temperature monitoring
water supplies
The units are also an excellent alternative to temperature

controllers in the low-end performance range (two-or three-point
control).
Type
3RS1040,
3RS1042,
3RS2040
3RS1140,
3RS2140
3RS1142
< 7 K, 1 digit
10
Auxiliary circuit
AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at:
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 240 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Evaluation unit
< 2 K, 1 digit
< 5 K, 1 digit
--
<5K

In % of measuring range
0.05 C per K deviation from T20
Measuring cycle
ms
500
Hysteresis settings for temperature
1 ... 99, for both values
Adjustable delay time
0 ... 999
mA
mA
Typically 1
Typically 0.2
Sensor circuit
PT100
1)
---
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Three-wire conductor connection
Yes2)
--
--
Enclosure
1)
Not for NTC type B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
2)

between T2 and T3.
10/154
Siemens IC 10 2014
V AC
300
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit examples
3RS1040, 3RS1042, 3RS2040
Legend
A1, A2, A3 = terminals for rated control supply voltage
K1, K2, K3 = output relays
A1
Memory/
RESET
T1
T2
T3
15
K2
18
16
25
T+/T- = Sensor connection for thermoelements
K3
28
26
33
34
Y3/Y4 = RESET input for 3RS1042, 3RS1142
Ready

Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor
Y1/Y2 = Connection for memory jumper for 3RS1040, 3RS1140, 3RS2040,
3RS2140
. Important!
A2
NSB0_01337d
3RS1140, 3RS1142, 3RS2140

Y1/ Y2/
Y3 Y4
K1

A1
Memory/
RESET
K1
1
K2
TT+
2
K3
Ready
15
18
16
25
28
26
33
34
A2
NSB0_01339c
10
Y1/ Y2/
Y3 Y4
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/155
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

For temperature monitoring with resistance sensors or
thermoelements
Temperature range dependent on sensor type
- for 3RS10, 3RS11: -99 to +1 800 C
- for 3RS20, 3RS21: -99 to +1 830 F
Non-volatile
Short-circuit and open-circuit detection in sensor circuit
Exact sensor type can be set
2 separately adjustable threshold values
1 hysteresis applies to both thresholds (0 to 99 K)
1 delay time applies to both thresholds (0 to 999 s)
Adjustable open/closed-circuit principle
Adjustable manual/remote RESET
Permanent display of actual value in C or F and tripping
state
1 CO contact each per threshold value
1 NO for sensor monitoring
Sensors
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
DT
Measuring range Rated control
(measuring range supply voltage Us
limit depends on 50/60 Hz AC
the sensor)
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
V
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Temperature monitoring relay, digitally adjustable, 2 threshold values,

width 45 mm, 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO, memory function possible with
external jumper, device parameters are non-volatile
- 50 + 500 C
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RS1040-1GD50
3RS1040-1GW50
A
A
3RS1040-2GD50
3RS1040-2GW50
- 58 + 932 F
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS2040-1GD50
3RS2040-1GW50
C
C
3RS2040-2GD50
3RS2040-2GW50
TYPE J, K, T, E, N - 99 + 999 C
(thermoelement)
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RS1140-1GD60
3RS1140-1GW60
C
C
3RS1140-2GD60
3RS1140-2GW60
- 99 + 1 830 F 24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
C
3RS2140-1GD60
3RS2140-1GW60
C
C
3RS2140-2GD60
3RS2140-2GW60
PT100/1000;
KTY83/84; NTC
(resistance
sensors)1)
10
3RS1040-1GD50
3RS1040-2GW50
Temperature monitoring relay, digitally adjustable,

2 threshold values, width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO,
tripping state and device parameters are non-volatile
1)
PT100/1000;
KTY83/84; NTC
(resistance
sensors)1)
- 50 + 750 C
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
A
A
3RS1042-1GD70
3RS1042-1GW70
C
C
3RS1042-2GD70
3RS1042-2GW70
TYPE J, K, T, E,
N, R, S, B
(thermoelement)
- 99 +1 800 C 24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
C
A
3RS1142-1GD80
3RS1142-1GW80
C
C
3RS1142-2GD80
3RS1142-2GW80
NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
10/156
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors
Overview
Benefits

Space-saving with 45 mm width
Application
The 3RS10, 3RS20 temperature monitoring relays can be used
in almost any application in which several temperatures have to
be monitored simultaneously for overshoot or undershoot or
within a range.
SIRIUS 3RS digital temperature monitoring relay for up to 3 sensors
The 3RS10, 3RS20 temperature monitoring relays can be used

for measuring temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The
temperature is detected by the sensor in the medium, evaluated
by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for
staying within an operating range (window function). The 3RS10
units indicate the measured temperature in C, the 3RS20 units
in F. The evaluation unit can evaluate up to 3 resistance sensors
at the same time and is specially designed for monitoring motor
windings and bearings.
Monitoring of set temperature limits and output of alarm

messages for:
water supplies
Type
3RS1041,
3RS2041
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
DIAZED fuse protection

10
Auxiliary circuit
AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 240 V
Evaluation unit
<2 K, 1 digit
Measuring accuracy at 20 C ambient temperature

(T20)
Measuring cycle
ms
500
1 ... 99 K, for both values
Hysteresis settings for temperature 1

0 ... 999
mA
mA
Typically 1
Typically 0.2
Sensor circuit
PT100
Yes1)
Yes
Yes2)
Enclosure
1)
2)

between T2 and T3.
V AC
300
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/157
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit example
3RS1041, 3RS2041
Legend
A1, A2, A3 = Terminals for rated control supply voltage
Y1 Y2
K1, K2, K3 = Output relays
A1
Memory
1T1
1T2
1T3
2T1
2T2
2T3
3T1
3T2
3T3
K1
15
K2
18
16
25
K3
28
26
33
Ready

Ready = LED: "Device is ready for operation"
1T1 to 1T3 = Sensor connection for resistance sensor 1
Y1/Y2 = Connection for memory jumper
34
. Important!
A2

NSB0_01338c

For temperature monitoring of solids, liquids, and gases
For two- and three-conductor resistance sensors or
thermoelements
Temperature range independent of sensor type
- for 3RS10: -50 to +500 C
- for 3RS20: -58 to +932 F
Non-volatile
Exact sensor type and number of sensors can be set
2 separately adjustable threshold values
1 hysteresis; applies to both thresholds (0 to 99 K)
1 delay time; applies to both thresholds (0 to 999 s)
With connectable and disconnectable error memory
Permanent display of actual value in C or F and tripping
state
1 CO contact each per threshold value
1 NO for sensor monitoring
10
Sensors
Number of
sensors
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
Measuring
range (limit of voltage Us
measuring
range dependent on sensor)
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
V
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Motor monitoring relays, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors,

width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO
PT100/1000;
KTY83/84;
NTC
(resistance
sensors)1)
1 ... 3
sensors
-50 ... +500 C 24 ...240 AC/DC
3RS1041-1GW50
3RS1041-2GW50
-58 ... +932 F
3RS2041-1GW50
3RS2041-2GW50
24 ...240 AC/DC
3RS1041-1GW50
1)
NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
10/158
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Accessories

Use
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B

3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
For 3RS10,
Push-in lugs
3RS11, 3RS20, For screw fixing,
3RS21
3RP1903
10 units
41H
For 22.5 mm
Sealable covers
wide 3RS10,
3RS11, 3RS20, adjustment of setting knobs
3RS21
3RP1902
5 units
41H
For 3RS10,
Sealing foil
3RS11, 3RS20, For securing against unauthorized
3RS21
3TK2820-0AA00
1 unit
41L
1 unit
41B
Blank labels
For 3RS10,
3RS11, 3RS20, For SIRIUS devices
3RS21
NSB0_01429b

For 3RS10,
Adhesive labels
3RS11, 3RS20, For SIRIUS devices
3RS21
3RT1900-1SB20
3RP1903
3RP1902

For auxiliary
circuit
connections
Screwdrivers
length approx. 200 mm, titanium
gray/black, partially insulated
A
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
1)

10
Matching sensors see www.siemens.com/temperature.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/159
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15 Temperature Monitoring Relays for IO-Link
General data
Overview
In addition to warnings and disconnection in case of temperature deviations, the devices can also be used as a temperature
controller (one-point, two-point or three-point control).
The devices differ from one another in terms of the type and
number of connectable temperature sensors.
3RS14: Connection for resistance sensor
3RS15: Connection for thermoelements
Function

3RS1440
3RS1441
3RS1540
Connectable sensor type

Number of sensors monitored
Resistance sensor
--
Thermoelements
--
--
Temperature monitoring overshoot
SIRIUS 3RS14, 3RS15 temperature monitoring relay
Temperature monitoring undershoot
The temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link are used to

measure temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media.
Number of adjustable limit

values
The temperature is calculated using a sensor in the medium,

evaluated by the device and monitored up to two limit values for
overshooting or undershooting a working range (window
function).
Function supported
-- Function not supported
Feeder
Feeder
PLC
10
IO-Link
master
PLC
1
3RS10/11
temperature
monitoring
relay
IO-Link
Analog
signal
converter
3RS10/11
temperature
monitoring
relay
IC01_00039
IC01_00040
Motor
transmission to PLC
3RS14/15
temperature
monitoring
relay
3RS14/15
temperature
monitoring
relay
Motor

transmission to PLC
Conventional temperature monitoring relays
Temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link
Notes:
Notes on safety

Any controller that supports the IO-Link (e.g. ET 200S
with CPU or S7-300 plus ET 200S distributed I/O, see Catalog
ST 70 "SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation")
IO-Link master (IO-Link master 4SI IO-Link or 4SI SIRIUS interface module, which can connect all SIRIUS IO-Link devices to
a controller, see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication")

10/160
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Article No. scheme
@@@
3RS
Device type
Version and type of sensor
Connection methods
Measuring range
Special versions
3RS
Example
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
The 3RS14 and 3RS15 monitoring relays for IO-Link make the
following contribution to the energy efficiency of the plant as a
whole:
Demand-based control of heating and ventilation in the
process and in the control cabinet
10
Connection for resistance sensors
Wiring errors
Two-wire measurement
The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise approximately 2.5 Kelvin/. If the resistance of the cable is not known
and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be estimated using the following table.
When two-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of

the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error
must be taken into account when the signal evaluation unit is calibrated. A jumper must be clamped between terminals T2 and
T3 for this purpose.
I
T3
T2
Temperature drift dependent on the length and cross-section

of the cable with PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of
20 C, in K:
Cable length Cross-section
in m
mm
0.5
PT100
0.75
1.5
Temperature drift in K:
T1
10
1.8
1.2
0.9
0.6
25
4.5
3.0
2.3
1.5
50
9.0
6.0
4.5
3.0
75
13.6
9.0
6.8
4.5
100
18.1
12.1
9.0
6.0
200
36.3
24.2
18.1
12.1
500
91.6
60.8
45.5
30.2
NSB0_01323b
Example: On a PT100 sensor with a cable length of 10 m and a

conductor cross-section of 1 mm2 the temperature drift equals
0.9 K.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/161
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Three-wire measurement
To minimize the effects of the line resistances, a three-wire circuit

is often used. Using the additional cable, two measuring circuits
can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal
evaluation unit can then automatically calculate the line resistance and take it into account.
When the temperature has reached the set upper limit value 1,
the K1 output relay changes its switching state after the configured time t has expired. The delay time can be adjusted. The K2
output relay responds in the same manner to the lower limit value
of 2.
The output relays return immediately to their original state
(the RESET response is configured at Auto RESET) once the
temperature reaches the respective hysteresis value.
T3
T2
PT100
T1
NSB0_01324b
Both limit values 1 and 2 can be parameterized for overshooting or undershooting. This makes it possible to use a limit value
for issuing an alarm signal to announce that a limit value is about
to be overshot or undershot. The other limit value can be used
for disconnection or to implement two-point or three-point
control.
Note:
Based on the thermo-electrical effect, a differential temperature

measurement will be performed between the measuring point
and the signal evaluation unit.
This principle assumes that the signal evaluation unit knows the
temperature at the clamping point (T2). For this reason, the
3RS15 temperature monitoring relay has an integral compensator that determines this comparison temperature and builds it
into the result of the measurement. The thermal sensors and cables must be insulated therefore.
The absolute temperature is therefore calculated from the ambient temperature of the signal evaluation unit and the temperature
difference measured by the thermoelement.
Temperature detection is therefore possible (T1) without needing
to know the precise ambient temperature of the clamping point
at the signal evaluation unit (T2).
The connecting cable is only permitted to be extended using
connecting leads that are made from the same material as the
thermoelement. If a different type of conductor is used, an error
will result in the measurement.
The "Temperature monitoring mode" parameter can be used to

set the desired type of monitoring (monitoring for overshooting
or undershooting or range monitoring).
Temperature overshoot
1 >
1
Hysteresis
2
Hyst
15/18
15/16
LED 1
Delay
IC01_00032
Connection of thermoelements
25/28
25/26
LED 2
Delay
10
NiCr
Temperature undershoot
T2
1 >
Ni
Measuring
point
NSB0_01325a
Internal
reference point compensation

www.feldgeraete.de/76/produkte/fuw.html
www.ephy-mess.de
Hysteresis
1
Hysteresis
2
15/18
15/16
LED 1
or from
EPHY-MESS GmbH, see Chapter 16 "Appendix"
"External Partners".
Siemens IC 10 2014
Delay
25/28
25/26
LED 2
10/162
IC01_00033
T1
Delay
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data

Range monitoring
1 >
1 >
1
Hysteresis
1
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
2
Hysteresis
2
Auto-RESET
15/18
15/16
Y3
Delay
IC01_00034
LED 1
25/28
25/26
LED 2
Y4
15/18
15/16
LED 1
Delay
Delay
25/28
25/26
LED 2
The digitally adjustable temperature monitoring relays for

IO-Link have a memory function. The memory function is illustrated below by the example of a temperature overshoot.
The temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link respond as

described below:
With temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link the memory
function is activated as standard (RESET). The output relays
only return to the original state when the temperature falls below the set hysteresis value and when one of the following
steps is performed:
- Brief jumpering of the Y3/Y4 terminals
- Set the rotary knob to "RUN" position and press the
right-hand arrow key
- Perform a RESET through IO-Link
If the Y3/Y4 terminals are permanently jumpered, the memory
function is deactivated (Auto RESET). The output relays return
immediately to their original state once a previously occurred
fault has been rectified and the temperature falls below the
respective hysteresis value.
RESET
Y3
Y4
15/18
15/16
LED 1
Delay
25/28
25/26
LED 2
Delay
10
When the temperature has reached the 1 limit value, the K1

output relay changes its switching state after the configured
time t has expired (output relay K2 reacts similarly at 2).
Delay
IC01_00035
Storage function
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/163
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
5000
NSB0_01322a
Resistance in
For resistance sensor
NTC
4000
3000
KTY83 KTY84 PT1000
2000
1000
PT100
0
-100
100
200
300
Measuring ranges for resistance sensors

Sensor type Short
circuit
Open
circuit
3RS1440, 3RS1441
Measuring range
in C
Measuring range
in F
PT100
50 ... +750
58 ... +1 382
PT1000
50 ... +500
58 ... +932
KTY83-110
50 ... +175
58 ... +347
KTY84
40 ... +300
40 ... +572
NTC1)
--
+80 ... +160
+176 ... +320
Detection possible
400
500
Temperature in C
1)
NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
The short-circuit and open-circuit detection as well as the

measuring range is limited, depending on the sensor type.
Measuring ranges for thermoelements
80
Type "E"
70
Sensor type Short

circuit
Open
circuit
3RS1540
Measuring range
in C
Measuring range
in F
Type "K"
--
-99 ... +1 350
-146.2 ... +2 462
Type "N"
--
-99 ... +1 300
-146.2 ... +2 372
--
-99 ... +1 200
-146.2 ... +2 192
--
-99 ... +999
-146.2 ... +1 830.2
--
-99 ... +400
-146.2 ... +752
--
0 ... 1 750
32 ... 3 182
--
0 ... 1 750
32 ... 3 182
--
400 ... 1 800
752 ... 3 272
Type "J"
60
50
40
NSB0_01321a
Voltage in mV
For thermoelements
30
Type "T"
20
10
0
0
200
400
500
800
1000 1200 1400 1600

Temperature in C
Detection possible
9ROWDJHLQ
25000
Type "R"
20000
Type "S"
15000
Type "B"
10000
5000
0
400
600
800
1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

Temperature in C
Characteristic curves for sensor types S, R and B
10/164
Siemens IC 10 2014
IC01_00044
10
Characteristic curves for sensor types K, N, J, E and T
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
General data
Type
3RS14,
3RS15

mm
45 x 106 x 91
mm
45 x 108 x 91
-25 ... +60
Screw terminals

During operation
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
Tightening torque
Screw terminals
mm2
mm2
AWG
Nm
Connection type
Solid
Finely stranded

1 x (0.5 ... 4), 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
0.8 1.2
mm2
mm2
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
2 x (24 ... 16)
More information
Notes on safety
10
For the manual "3RS14/3RS15 Temperature Monitoring Relays

for IO-Link", see
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/165
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Monitoring
Overview
When the temperature has reached the 1 limit value, the K1

time t has expired (output relay K2 reacts accordingly at 2).
The delay time can be adjusted.
The output relays return immediately to their original state once
the temperature reaches the respective hysteresis value.
When the temperature has reached the top 1 limit value, the K1
time t has expired. The output relay returns immediately to its
original state once the temperature reaches the respective
hysteresis value.
The K2 output relay reacts in the same way at the 2 lower
threshold. Both limit values 1 and 2 can be parameterized for
overshooting or undershooting the thresholds. This makes it
possible to use a limit value for issuing an alarm signal to
announce that a limit value is about to be overshot or undershot.
Note:
SIRIUS 3RS1440 digital monitoring relay for 1 sensor
The 3RS14 and 3RS15 temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link

are used to measure temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The temperature is calculated using a sensor in the medium,
evaluated by the device and monitored for overshooting or undershooting a working range (window function). The digital temperature monitoring relays have two separately adjustable limit
values, are non-volatile and can be operated as desired using
the open- or closed-circuit principle.
The devices differ in terms of the number of temperature sensors
which can be evaluated. The 3RS1440 and 3RS1540 for IO-Link
temperature monitoring relays can be digitally adjusted for one
sensor and represent an alternative to temperature controllers in
the low-end range (two-point or three-point control).
10
The devices with two-point control can, for example, be used as

a thermostat. The devices with three-point control can,
for example, independently switch between heating and
cooling.
The 3RS1441 temperature monitoring relays for IO-Link can be
digitally adjusted to evaluate up to three resistance sensors at
one time. The devices were designed specifically for monitoring
motor windings and positions.
The temperature monitoring relays are powered through the
control supply voltages IO-Link (L+) and ground (L-) or via an
external 24 V DC power supply.
10/166
Siemens IC 10 2014
The "Temperature monitoring mode" parameter can be used to

set the desired type of monitoring (monitoring for overshooting
or undershooting or range monitoring).
Benefits

Application
The temperature monitoring relays can be used in almost any
application in which temperature overshoot or undershoot is not
permitted, e.g. in the monitoring of set temperature limits and the
output of alarm messages for:
Temperature limits for district heating plants
Exhaust temperature monitoring
water supplies
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Type
3RS1440
3RS1540
Auxiliary circuit
AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
Evaluation unit
< 2 K, 1 digit
< 5 K, 1 digit
--
< 5 K

0.05 C per K deviation from T20
Measuring cycle
ms
500
Hysteresis settings for temperature
0 ... 999.9
mA
mA
Typically 1
Typically 0.2
---
1)
--
2)
--
Sensor circuit
PT100
Enclosure
V AC

pollution degree 2
300
Available
1)
-- Not available
2)

between T2 and T3.
Circuit examples
3RS1440
Legend
L+ = IO-Link control supply voltage
C = Communication signal
Y4
RESET
K1
18
16
1
T1
T2
T3
K2
K3
35
38
36
Ready
IC01_00037
25
28
26
L-
15
L- = IO-Link ground
K1 = Output relay for temperature limit value1
K3 = Output relay for "device is ready for operation"
10
Y3
1 = LED: "Relay K1 tripped"

T1 to T3 = Sensor connection for 3RS14 resistance sensor
T+/T- = Sensor connection for 3RS15 thermoelements
Y3/Y4 = RESET input
. Important!
L+
3RS1540
Y3
Y4
RESET
K1
18
16
1
T
T+
K2
K3
Ready
C
25
28
26
L-
15
IC01_00036
35
38
36
L+
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/167
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

To monitor temperatures with a resistance sensor or
thermoelement
-99 to +1 800 C or -146.2 to +3 272 F
voltage
Exact sensor type can be set
2 limit values, can be adjusted separately
Can be adjusted by hand or remote RESET
(via an external contact)
Actual value, tripping state for control displayed and
conveyed, adjustable in C or F
1 CO contact per limit value
1 CO contact for monitoring sensors and devices
3RS1440-1HB50
Sensors
3RS1540-1HB80
Measuring range
(limit of measuring
range dependent on
sensor)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3RS1540-2HB80
3RS1440-2HB50
Hysteresis can be
adjusted
for
1 and 2
Tripping
delay time
can be
adjusted
for
1 and 2
DELAY
Control
supply
voltage
Us
V DC
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
10
Temperature monitoring relay, digitally adjustable for a sensor,

non-volatile fault storage can be selected
0 ... 99
0 ... + 999.9
24
3RS1440-1HB50
3RS1440-2HB50
Type
- 99 + 1 800 C or 0 ... 99
B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T - 146.2 + 3 272 F
(thermoelements)
0 ... + 999.9
24
3RS1540-1HB80
3RS1540-2HB80
PT100/PT1000,
KTY83/KTY84,
NTC
(resistance
sensor)1)
1)
-50 +750 C or
-58 +1 382 F
NTC type B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
10/168
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Overview
Benefits

Space-saving with 45 mm width
Application
The 3RS1441 temperature monitoring relays can be used almost
anywhere where several temperatures must be monitored at one
time for overshooting, undershooting or staying within a certain
range.
SIRIUS 3RS1441 digital temperature monitoring relays for up to 3 sensors
The 3RS14 temperature monitoring relays can be used to measure temperatures in solid, liquid and gas media. The temperature is calculated using a sensor in the medium, evaluated by the
device and monitored for overshooting or undershooting a working range (window function). The devices can be parameterized
to indicate the measured temperature in C or F. The 3RS1441
evaluation unit can evaluate up to 3 resistance sensors at the
same time.
Monitoring of set temperature limits and output of alarm

messages for:
water supplies
Type
3RS1441

AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 250 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1

10
Auxiliary circuit
Evaluation unit
<2 K, 1 digit

Measuring cycle
ms
500
Hysteresis settings for temperature 1
0 ... 999.9
mA
mA
Typically 1
Typically 0.2
Sensor circuit
PT100
1)
2)
Enclosure
pollution degree 2
V AC
300
Available
1)
2)

between T2 and T3.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/169
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit example
3RS1441
Legend
L+ = IO-Link control supply voltage
Y3
C = Communication signal
Y4
RESET
K3 = Output relay for "device is ready for operation"

28
26
Ready
Y3/Y4 = RESET input for 3RS14, 3RS15

35
K3
25
K2
L-
18
16
1T1
1T2
1T3
2T1
2T2
2T3
3T1
3T2
3T3
L- = IO-Link ground
15
K1
38
36
IC01_00038
Y3/Y4 = RESET input for 3RS14
L+
. Important!

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
10
For temperature monitoring with up to 3 resistance sensors

-50 to +750 C or -58 to +1 382 F
Exact sensor type and number of sensors can be set
2 limit values, can be adjusted separately
Can be adjusted by hand or remote RESET
(via an external contact)
Actual value, tripping state for control displayed and
conveyed, adjustable in C or F
1 CO contact per limit value
1 CO contact for monitoring sensors and devices
3RS1441-2HB50
3RS1441-1HB50
Sensors
Number
of
sensors
that can
be set
Measuring range
(limit of
measuring range
dependent on
sensor)
Hysteresis
can be
adjusted
for
1 and
2
Tripping
delay time
can be
adjusted
for
1 and 2
DELAY
Control DT
supply
voltage
Us
V DC
DT
Screw
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Temperature monitoring relay, digitally adjustable for up to 3 sensors,

non-volatile fault storage can be selected
PT100/PT1000,
1 ... 3
- 50 ... +750 C
KTY83/KTY84,
sensors or
NTC
-58 ... +1 382 F
(resistance sensor)1)
1)
0 ... 99
0 ... + 999.9 24
3RS1441-1HB50
3RS1441-2HB50
NTC type: B57227-K333-A1 (100 C: 1.8 k; 25 C: 32.762 k).
10/170
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Accessories

Use
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT2900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B

3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
For 3RS14 and Push-in lugs

3RS15
For screw fixing,
3RP1903
10 units
41H
For 3RS14 and Sealing foil

3RS15
3TK2820-0AA00
1 unit
41L
1 unit
41B
Blank labels
For 3RS14 and Unit labeling plates
3RS15
For SIRIUS devices
IC01_00181

For 3RS14 and Adhesive labels
3RS15
For SIRIUS devices
3RT2900-1SB20
3RP1903

For auxiliary
circuit
connections
3RA2908-1A
1)
Screwdrivers
terminals
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
partially insulated
3RA2908-1A

10
Matching sensors see www.siemens.com/temperature.

Siemens IC 10 2014
10/171
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
SIRIUS 3RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection
For PTC sensors
Overview
Thermistor motor protection devices are used for direct monitoring of the motor winding temperature. For this purpose, the motors are equipped with temperature-dependent resistors (PTC)
that are directly installed in the motor winding and abruptly
change their resistance at their temperature limit.
SIRIUS 3RN1 thermistor motor protection
Article No. scheme

1st - 5th
@@@@@
6th 7th
@
Number and version of the sensor circuits
RESET response
Connection type
Type and number of outputs
Behavior in the event of voltage failure

3RN10
Example
3RN10
10
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
Thanks to direct motor protection, overdimensioning of the
motors is not necessary
No settings on the device are necessary
Solid-state compatible output thanks to versions with hard
gold-plated contacts
Rapid error diagnosis thanks to versions that indicate open

and short circuits in the sensor circuit
All versions with screw terminals or spring-type terminals
Application
Direct motor protection through temperature monitoring of the
motor winding offers 100 % motor protection even under the
most difficult ambient conditions, without the need to make adjustments on the device. Versions with hard gold-plated contacts
ensure, in addition, a high switching reliability that is even higher
than an electronic control.
Direct motor protection
At increased ambient temperatures
When switching frequency is too high
When start-up and braking procedures are too long
Used together with frequency converters (low speeds)
10/172
Siemens IC 10 2014
ATEX approval for operation in areas subject to explosion

hazard
The SIRIUS 3RN1 thermistor motor protection relay for
PTC sensors is certified according to ATEX Ex II (2) G and D for
environments with explosive gas or dust loads.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
Motor protection using current- and temperature-dependent
protective devices
Application
Motor protection
Only currentdependent,
e.g. with
overload relay
Only temperaCurrent- and

ture-dependent, temperaturee.g. with
dependent
thermistor motor
protection relay
Overloading in
uninterrupted duty
Long start-up and braking

operations
Irregular intermittent duty
Excessively high switching

frequency
Single-phase operation and

current unbalance
Voltage and frequency

fluctuations
Stalling of the rotor
EN 60204 and IEC 60204 stipulate that motors must be

protected from overheating at a rating of 0.5 kW and higher.
The protection can take the form of overload protection,
overtemperature protection or current limiting.
For motors with frequent starting and braking and in environments where cooling may be impaired (e. g. by dust), it is
recommended to use the overtemperature protection option in
the form of a protective device coordinated with this mode of
operation. A good choice in this case is the use of
3RN1 thermistor motor protection devices.
On rotor-critical motors, overtemperature detection in the stator
windings can lead to delayed and hence inadequate protection.
In this case the standards stipulate additional protection,
e. g. by means of an overload relay.
This combination of thermistor motor protection and an overload
relay is recommended for full motor protection in case of
frequent starting and braking of motors, irregular intermittent
duty or excessive switching frequency. To prevent premature
tripping of the overload relay in such operating conditions, a
higher setting than that normally required for the operational
current is chosen. The overload relay then performs the stall
protection, and the 3RN1 thermistor motor protection device
monitors the temperature of the motor windings.
Motor protection in case of
Switching on a stalled rotor

of a stator-critical motor
Switching on a stalled rotor

of a rotor-critical motor
Elevated ambient
temperature
--
Impeded cooling
--
Full protection
Conditional protection
-- No protection
The 3RN1 evaluation units are suitable for use in any climate and
4000
R
1330
550
10
They comply with:

IEC 60947-8. Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 8:
"Control units for built-in thermal protection (PTC) for rotating
electrical machines"
IEC 61000-6-2 and IEC 61000-6-4 "Electromagnetic compatibility of I&C equipment in industrial process engineering"
250
The terminals of the auxiliary contacts are designated in

accordance with EN 60947-1.
The 3RN1 evaluation units are suitable for snap-on mounting
onto TH 35 standard mounting rails according to IEC 60715 or
for screw fixing using an adapter (Accessories).
Any mounting position is possible.
For devices with the "Manual RESET" function, the test function
can be activated and a trip simulated by pressing the blue
Test/RESET button for > 2 seconds.
If a Type A temperature sensor is connected to a Type A
evaluation unit, compliance with the operating temperatures is
assured (on pick-up and reset) according to IEC 60947-8.
20
-20C 0
NSB0_00320a
TNF-20 TNF TNF+15 T

TNF-5 TNF+5
Characteristic curve of the 3RN1 evaluation unit
The characteristic curves of the Type A temperature sensors are

described in IEC 60947-8, DIN 44081 and EN 44082 standards.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/173
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for gases
Notes:
All devices are approved for Equipment Group II, Category (2)
in Area "G" (areas that contain explosive gases, vapor, spray and
air mixtures).
Tripping of the thermistor motor protection relay even in combination with a converter must directly result in disconnection. This
must be implemented with circuitry.
With PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G, compliance with directive

94/9 EC Appendix II is confirmed. The safety devices must be
selected with suitable settings for the safe operation of motors of
the "Increased safety" (EEx e) and "Flameproof enclosure"
(EEx d) types of protection and are used outside the area
subject to explosion hazard.
Mounting and installation must only be performed by qualified

personnel who observe the applicable regulations!
For mounting, use the mounting instructions
Article No.: 3ZX1012-0RN10-1AA1.
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) G

The increased danger in areas subject to explosion hazard demands careful analysis of the operating manual, the safety and
commissioning instructions and the standard (EN 60079-14/
VDE 0165) for electronic equipment in areas subject to gas
explosion hazards.
A risk analysis must be performed for the complete plant or machine. If this risk analysis results in a minimal potential for danger
(Safety Category 1), all 3RN1 TMS evaluation units can be implemented taking into account the safety notes. In the case of
plants or machines with a high potential risk, device versions
with integrated short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit are
necessary.
Use in areas subject to explosion hazard for dust
PTB 01 ATEX 3218 ex II (2) GD
3RN1011-.B/-.G, 3RN1012-.B/-.G and 3RN1013-...0 evaluation
units can be used as protective devices for motors in areas subject to gas explosion hazard for protection against impermissible
overheating due to overload. If the ATEX identification has the
extension "D:=Dust", these units can also be used as protective
devices for motors in areas subject to dust explosion hazard
(IEC 61241-14).
10
Additional information is provided in the EC type test certificate

which can be obtained from the Internet. The units comply with
the requirements of the following classes:
Device
Class
3RN1000, 3RN1010, 3RN1011-.C,

3RN1012-.C, 3RN1022, 3RN1062
EN ISO 13849-1: Category 1
3RN1011-.B, 3RN1011-.G,
EN ISO 13849-1: Category 2
3RN1012-.B, 3RN1012-.G, 3RN1013
The measuring circuit leads must be routed as separate control

cables. It is not permitted to use cores from the supply line of the
motor or any other main supply cables. If extreme inductive or
capacitive interference is expected as a result of power lines
routed in parallel, shielded control cables must be used.
Cable routing
Maximum cable length for sensor circuit cables
Cable cross- Cable length for evaluation units
section
Without short-circuit detection With short-circuit detection 1)
3RN1011-.B/-.G,
3RN1000, 3RN1010,
3RN1012-.B/-.G,
3RN1011-.C, 3RN1012-.C,
3RN1013
3RN1022, 3RN1062
mm2
2.5
2 x 2 800
2 x 250
1.5
2 x 1 500
2 x 150
0.5
2 x 500
2 x 50
1)
A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum

cable length.
10/174
Siemens IC 10 2014
The 3RN10 is not intended for installation in hazardous areas.

For installation in areas subject to explosion hazards, the 3RN10
must be enclosed in a flameproof casing.
For evaluation units with a 24 V AC/DC control voltage, electrical
separation must be secured with a battery network or a safety
transformer.
When evaluation units with Auto RESET function are used,
resetting is performed automatically after the cooling time has
expired. It must be ensured by means of an external interlock
(latching with a separate ON and OFF button) that the machine
to be monitored does not start up again spontaneously.
Units with the "Auto RESET" function must not be used in
applications in which the unexpected restart can lead to
personal injury or property damage.
In the case of evaluation units without short-circuit detection,
during commissioning or after modifications or maintenance
work (assembly, disassembly) on the equipment, the sensor
resistance must be measured using a suitable measuring
device. For resistances of < 50 W the sensor circuit must be
checked for a short circuit.
If 3RN1000 units are used to protect EEx e motors, separate
monitoring of the control voltage is recommended because there
is no Ready LED to indicate connection to the supply voltage.
If 3RN1013-.BW01 unit are used to protect EEx e motors,
separate monitoring of the control voltage is recommended
because the switching state of the auxiliary contacts does not
change if the control voltage fails (use of a bistable relay is
recommended).
Before commissioning, the effectiveness of the protection
function must be checked.
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
3RN1062 multiple motor protection evaluation units
The 3RN1 evaluation units operate in accordance with the

closed-circuit principle and therefore monitor themselves for
open circuit (except: warning output in the case of 3RN1022).
A momentary voltage failure of less than 50 ms does not change
the status of the auxiliary contacts. The 3RN1011, 3RN1012 and
3RN1013 units with 2 changeover contacts are also equipped
with short-circuit detection in the sensor circuit. The unit will trip
in the event of a short circuit in the sensor circuit (resistance in
sensor circuit < 20).
Up to 6 sensor circuits can be connected to the 3RN1062

evaluation unit, all of which act on one output relay. The simultaneous protection of several motors (up to 6) is an advantage for
multi-motor drives (e.g. if one motor is overloaded, all the other
motors of the drive will be shut down). Apart from the red LED
"TRIPPED", which signals the switching state of the evaluation
unit, an LED is assigned to each sensor circuit which indicates
the sensor circuit that has responded during tripping. Unused
sensor circuits must be short-circuited.
All evaluation units (except for 24 V AC/DC) feature electrical

separation between the control circuit and the sensor circuit.
3RN1000 compact evaluation unit
The reset response of the 3RN1062 evaluation units can be

changed from Manual RESET to Auto RESET by linking terminals
Y1 and Y2. Remote RESET is implemented by connecting an
external pushbutton with a normally-open function.
The compact unit is equipped with a red LED (TRIPPED) for the
tripped indicator and a changeover contact.
Response of the evaluation units in the event of control

voltage failure
This unit is particularly suitable in circuits in which the control

circuit and signaling circuit have the same potential, e.g. in local
control cabinets.
3RN1010, 3RN1011, 3RN1012, 3RN1013 standard evaluation
units
Behavior
Monostable
3RN1000,
3RN1010,
3RN1011
In case of failure
of the control
voltage
Device trips
Non-volatile,
monostable
3RN1012,
3RN1013-....0,
3RN1022,
3RN1062
Bistable
Device trips
No change in
switching state of
the auxiliary
contacts
3RN1013-...01
The standard units are equipped with two LEDs (READY and
TRIPPED) for an operating and tripped display and are available
with either 1 NO + 1 NC or with 2 CO contacts. They are available
depending on the version with Auto RESET (3RN1010),
Manual/Remote RESET (3RN1011) or Manual/Auto and
Remote RESET (3RN1012 and 3RN1013). Remote RESET can
be achieved by connecting an external pushbutton with a
normally-open function to terminals Y1 and Y2. If terminals Y1
and Y2 are bridged, tripping will be followed by an Auto RESET.
In case of return Device resets

of the control
voltage without a
preceding
tripping operation
Device resets
No change in
switching state of
the auxiliary
contacts
In case of return Device resets

of the control
voltage after a
preceding
tripping operation
The device
remains tripped
No change in
switching state of
the auxiliary contacts
The 3RN1011, 3RN1012 and 3RN1013 units with 2 CO contacts

also have short-circuit monitoring in the sensor circuit.
The 3RN1012 and the 3RN1013 are non-volatile. This means that
even if the control supply voltage fails, a trip preceding it will be
saved.
In the case of the 3RN1013 evaluation unit, tripping due to a
short circuit in the sensor circuit will be indicated by a flashing
red LED. The monostable version also indicates open circuit in
the sensor circuit by flashing of the red LED.
All circuits (outputs, control circuits, sensors and RESET circuits)

of the multifunction evaluation units 3RN1013-1BW10 and
3RN1013-1GW10 (wide voltage range, monostable output relay
and screw connection) are safely isolated from each other up to
a rated voltage of 300 V according to IEC 60947-1.
3RN1022 "Warning and disconnection" evaluation units

Two sensor circuits can be connected to one 3RN1022 evaluation unit that acts on one output relay with 1 NO contact for
warning and 1 CO contact for disconnection. Temperature
sensors with different rated response temperatures TNF are
used to implement the "Warning" and "Disconnection" functions.
When the "Warning" sensor circuit responds, a yellow LED is lit
and when the "Disconnection" circuit responds, a red LED is lit.
The sensor circuits have a different reset response and
operating behavior:
"Warning" (terminals 2T1, T2) only features Auto RESET and
uses the open-circuit principle.
"Disconnection" (terminals 1T1, T2) can be changed from
Manual RESET to Auto RESET by linking terminals Y1 and Y2.
Remote RESET is implemented by connecting an external
pushbutton with a normally-open function.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/175
10
After the unit has tripped, it is automatically reset once the

thermistors have cooled down. The root of the changeover
contact is connected to the control voltage (95 is connected to
terminal A1).
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
Function diagrams
3RN1013-.BW01
3RN1000, 3RN1010 (Auto RESET)
NSB0_00316c
NSB0_00314c
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
K
LED Tripped
LED Tripped
3RN1011
1)
3RN1013-...00
NSB0_00315d
NSB0_00318c
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
(Y1/Y2)
K
LED Tripped
LED Tripped
3RN1012/3RN1022/3RN10621)
3RN1022 only
NSB0_00317b
A1/A2
3800
1500
T1/T2
RESET
(Y1/Y2)
3800
1500
2T1/T2
NSB0_00319c
K1
K, K2
LED alarm
LED Tripped
For versions with 2 CO contacts and short-circuit detection in the sensor

circuit see function diagram 3RN1013.
Type
Compact
units
Standard devices
3RN1000
3RN1010
3RN1011
3RN1012
Multifunction units
Warning + Multiple motor

disconnec- protection
tion
3RN1013
3RN1022
3RN1062
General data
mm
mm
22.5 x 83 x 91
22.5 x 84 x 91
45 x 83 x 91
45 x 84 x 91
mm
mm
22.5 x 92 x 91
22.5 x 94 x 91
---
mm
mm
22.5 x 102 x 91
22.5 x 103 x 91
45 x 106 x 91
45 x 108 x 91
- Screw terminals
- Screw terminals
- Screw terminals
10
1)
Number of connectable sensor circuits
Response in the event of control voltage failure
See page 10/175
Manual RESET
--
Auto RESET
--
Remote RESET
--
1)
TEST button
--
Short-circuit detection for sensor circuit
--
(for 2-CO units)
Short-circuit and open-circuit display
--
Warning and disconnection in one unit
--

During operation
Function available

1)
Remote RESET possible by disconnecting control voltage.
2)
Open circuits are only indicated by monostable versions

(3RN1013-....0).
10/176
Siemens IC 10 2014
-25 ... +60
--
2)
--
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
Type
Compact
units
Standard devices
3RN1000
3RN1010
3RN1011
3RN1012
Multifunction units
Warning + Multiple motor

disconnec- protection
tion
3RN1013
3RN1022
3RN1062
Evaluation unit
300
kV
4
Screw terminals
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
mm2
mm2
AWG

1 x (0.5 ... 4)/2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)/2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2 x (20 ... 14)
Connection type
mm2
2
mm
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
mm2
AWG
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (24 ... 16)
Measuring circuit load at RF 1.5 m
mW
Voltage in sensor circuit at RF 1.5 m
Response temperature (depends on sensor)
60 ... 180
Coupling time (depends on sensor)
About 5
Summation PTC resistance RF (per sensor loop)
1.5; response value 3.4 ... 3.8; return value 1.5 ... 1.65
Response tolerance
Solid
Finely stranded, with end sleeves
acc. to DIN 46228
Finely stranded
Sensor circuit
Control circuit
see page 10/179 and 10/180
Operating range
110/230 V AC
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
0.85 ... 1.2 x Us for DC operation, 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us for AC operation
Rated power AC/DC
<2

AC-15/24 ... 250 V
DC-13 at
- 24 V
- 125 V
- 240 V
A
A
A
1
0.2
0.1
61)
V
V
300
300
10
Auxiliary circuit
CSA and UL rated data, control circuit

Rated control voltage 50/60 Hz
AC
DC
Switching capacity
R 300/B 300
Protective separation up to 300 V

acc. to IEC 60947-1
--
3RN10131BW10,
3RN10131GW10
--
Function available

1)
In > 1 kA weld-free according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/177
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
Circuit diagrams
Illustrated with
control voltage
applied
Illustrated with Illustrated with

control voltage control voltage
not applied applied
A1/95
A1(11)
N H2 K
A2
T1 T2
96 98
(14) (12)
NSB0_00322b
3RN1000, 1 CO
A1
95 97
(13) (21)
A1
H1
H2 K
N
T1 T2
A2
N
96 98
(14) (22)
NSB0_00323b
T/R
3RN1010, 1 NO + 1 NC
T1 T2
A1
N
95 97
96 98 06 08
A1
H2 K
A2
N
96 98
(14) (22)
T1 T2
NSB0_00323b
T/R
95
05
96 98 06 08
T/R
95 97
(13) (21)
96 98
(14) (22)
Y1 Y2 A1
H1
H2 K
A2
N
T1 T2
NSB0_00325a
T/R
1 NO + 1 NC
Y1 Y2 A1
H1
H2 K
A2
3RN1011, 2 CO
Y1 Y2 A1(A3)
H1
95
05
H2 K
A2
96 98 06 08
Legend for 3RN1022

(14) (12) (24) (22) H1
LED "READY"
NSB0_01398
H2
LED "TRIPPED"
H3
LED "ALARM"
K1
Output relay
for warning threshold
(LED "ALARM")
(11)
(21)
K2
Output relay
for disconnect
(LED "TRIPPED")
1T1 and T2 Terminals of the
(14) (12) (24) (22) 2T1 and T2 sensor loop
NSB0_01399a
T/R
. Important!
Close unconnected sensor circuits.
3RN1012, 2 CO
95
05
(11)
Legend for 3RN1062
(21)
H1 to H6
H2 K
10
A2
(13) (21)
3RN10111), 1 NO + 1 NC
T1 T2
H2 K
H1
T1 T2
3RN10121),
05
3RN1010, 2 CO
H1
T1 T2
95
H1
Illustrated with General legend

control voltage
not applied A1, A2 , A3 Terminals of the control
voltage
N
Amplifier
T/R
TEST/RESET button
Y1, Y2
Terminals for
Remote RESET
(jumpered =
Auto RESET)
The double arrow

indicates an operating
state of the contact
according to
(11)
(21)
EN 60617-7 which
deviates from the norm
(here: Position of the
contacts when control
voltage is applied to
(14) (12) (24) (22)
NSB0_01397
terminals A1 and A2)
H1
LED "READY"
H2
LED "TRIPPED"
K
Output relay
T1, T2
Connections of the
(11)
(21)
sensor loop
A2
96 98 06 08
H7
H8
K
1T1, 1T2
to
6T1, 6T2
(14) (12) (24) (22)

NSB0_01400
T/R
3RN1013-...0 (monostable)
Y1 Y2 A1
H1
05
(11)
(21)
. Important!
Close unconnected sensor circuits.
H2 K
N
T1 T2
95
A2
96 98 06 08
(14) (12) (24) (22)

NSB0_00327
T/R
3RN1013-...1 (bistable)
07(23)
H3
Y1 Y2 A1
H2
N
K1
08(24) 2T1 1T1 T2
95
(11)
H1 K2
A2
96 98
(14) (12)
NSB0_00328c
T/R
3RN1022
Y1 Y2
A1
H1 2 3
H4 5 6
H7H8
A2
1T1 1T2 2T1 2T2 3T1 3T2 4T1 4T2 5T1 5T2 6T1 6T2
95 97
(13) (21)
K
96 98
(14) (12)
NSB0_00329a
T/R
3RN1062
1)
For units with combination voltages 230/110 V AC (3RN1011-.CK00 and

3RN1012-.CK00) A1 and A2 apply: 230 V AC, A3 and A2: 110 V AC.
10/178
LED of the tripped

sensor loop
LED "READY"
LED "TRIPPED"
Output relay
Terminals of the
1st sensor loop
Terminals of the
6th sensor loop
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors

For monitoring the motor winding temperature using temperature-dependent resistors (PTCs, type A) that are directly
installed in the motor winding by the manufacturer
Monostable versions with closed-circuit principle, i.e. relays
respond in the event of control supply voltage failure
3RN1013-.BW01: Bistable version, does not trigger in the
event of control supply voltage failure
All devices have PTB01 ATEX approval for dust or gas
All devices except for 24 V AC/DC feature electrical
separation
Versions with safe isolation up to 300 V according to
IEC 60947-1
Non-volatile versions
RESET
Contacts

voltage Us 50/60 Hz
Versions with short-circuit and open-circuit detection in sensor

circuit
Versions with solid-state compatible, hard gold-plated
contacts
Versions for up to 6 sensor circuits
Versions with Manual RESET, Remote RESET, Auto RESET and
test button
Terminal labeling according to EN 60947-1
All terminals are removable
Width 22.5 mm (45 mm on version for several sensor circuits)
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Compact signal evaluation units, width 22.5 mm, 1 LED

Terminal A1 is jumpered with the root of the changeover
contact
Auto
1 CO
24 AC/DC
110 AC
230 AC
}
A
}
3RN1000-1AB00
3RN1000-1AG00
3RN1000-1AM00
A
A
A
3RN1000-2AB00
3RN1000-2AG00
3RN1000-2AM00
1 NO + 1 NC
24 AC/DC
110 AC
230 AC
24 240 AC/DC
}
}
}
}
3RN1010-1CB00
3RN1010-1CG00
3RN1010-1CM00
3RN1010-1CW00
}
A
A
A
3RN1010-2CB00
3RN1010-2CG00
3RN1010-2CM00
3RN1010-2CW00
2 CO
24 AC/DC
110 AC
230 AC
A
A
A
3RN1010-1BB00
3RN1010-1BG00
3RN1010-1BM00
A
C
A
3RN1010-2BB00
3RN1010-2BG00
3RN1010-2BM00
2 CO,
hard gold-plated
24 AC/DC
3RN1010-1GB00
3RN1010-2GB00
1 NO + 1 NC
24 AC/DC
110/230 AC
}
}
3RN1011-1CB00
3RN1011-1CK00
A
A
3RN1011-2CB00
3RN1011-2CK00
A
A
A
3RN1011-1BB00
3RN1011-1BG00
3RN1011-1BM00
A
C
A
3RN1011-2BB00
3RN1011-2BG00
3RN1011-2BM00
3RN1011-1GB00
3RN1011-2GB00
}
}
3RN1012-1CB00
3RN1012-1CK00
A
A
3RN1012-2CB00
3RN1012-2CK00
A
A
A
3RN1012-1BB00
3RN1012-1BG00
3RN1012-1BM00
C
C
C
3RN1012-2BB00
3RN1012-2BG00
3RN1012-2BM00
3RN1012-1GB00
3RN1012-2GB00
}
}
3RN1013-1BB00
3RN1013-1BW10
A
A
3RN1013-2BB00
3RN1013-2BW00
3RN1013-1GW10
3RN1013-2GW00
3RN1014-1BM00
Test/RESET button, non-volatile2), short-circuit and open-circuit

detection and display in sensor circuit
Manual/
2 CO
24 240 AC/DC
}
Auto/
Remote
3RN1013-1BW01
Auto
3RN1011-1BB00
Manual/
Remote1)
Short-circuit detection for sensor circuit

Manual/
2 CO
24 AC/DC
Remote1)
110 AC
230 AC
2 CO,
hard gold-plated
24 AC/DC
Non-volatile2)
Manual/
1 NO + 1 NC
24 AC/DC
Auto/
110/230 AC
3RN1012-2CK00 Remote
Non-volatile2), short-circuit detection in sensor circuit
Manual/
2 CO
24 AC/DC
Auto/
110 AC
Remote
230 AC
2 CO,
hard gold-plated
3RN1013-1BB00
24 AC/DC
Non-volatile2), short-circuit and open-circuit detection and

display in sensor circuit; wide voltage range versions with
screw terminal with safe isolation
Manual/
2 CO
24 AC/DC
Auto/
24 240 AC/DC
Remote
2 CO,
24 240 AC/DC
10
Standard evaluation units, width 22.5 mm, 2 LEDs
hard gold-plated
For bimetal sensors, without short-circuit detection
Manual/
Remote
2 CO
230 V AC
--
Bistable evaluation units, width 22.5 mm
1)
The unit can be reset with the RESET button or by disconnecting the
control supply voltage.
2)
Protection against voltage failure or non-volatile fault storage means that

previous tripping due to a fault remains stored even if the control supply
voltage fails. The monitoring device is not reset if the voltage fails. With an
active fault, meaning a fault which has not been manually confirmed, an
automatic restart of the plant upon recovery of the power is prevented
therefore and plant safety increased as the result.

3RN1013-2BW01
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/179
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
For PTC sensors
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
RESET
Contacts

voltage Us 50/60 Hz
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Evaluation units for 2 sensor circuits, warning and disconnection,

width 22.5 mm, 3 LEDs
Test/RESET button, non-volatile1)
Manual/
1 NO + 1 CO
Auto/
Remote
24 240 AC/DC
3RN1022-1DW00
3RN1022-2DW00
3RN1062-1CW00
3RN1062-2CW00
Evaluation units for 6 sensor circuits, multiple motor protection,

width 45 mm, 8 LEDs
Test/RESET button, non-volatile1)
Manual/
1 NO + 1 NC
Auto/
Remote
24 240 AC/DC
3RN1062-1CW00
1)
Protection against voltage failure or non-volatile fault storage means that

previous tripping due to a fault remains stored even if the control supply
voltage fails. The monitoring device is not reset if the voltage fails. With an
active fault, meaning a fault which has not been manually confirmed, an
automatic restart of the plant upon recovery of the power is prevented
therefore and plant safety increased as the result.
Accessories
Use
Version
DT
Article No.
For 3RN1

For SIRIUS devices
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B

3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing,
3RP1903
Blank labels
10

NSB0_01429b
For 3RN1
Adhesive labels
For SIRIUS devices
3RT1900-1SB20
Push-in lugs
For 3RN1
10 units
41H
1 unit
41B
3RP1903

For auxiliary
circuit
connections
Screwdrivers
Spring-type
terminals
A
3RA2908-1A
3RA2908-1A
1)

10/180
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Coupling Relays & Interface Converters
Overview
Interface converters perform the coupling function for analog
signals on both the input side and the output side. They are indispensable when processing analog values with electronic
controls. Under harsh industrial conditions in particular, it is often
necessary to transmit analog signals over long distances. Electrical separation is then needed as a result of the different power
supplies. The resistance of the wiring causes potential differences and losses which must be prevented.
Electromagnetic disturbance and overvoltages can affect the
signals on the input side in particular or even destroy the analog
modules. All terminals of the 3RS17 interface converters are safe
up to a voltage of DC 30 V and protected against switching
poles. Short-circuit protection is an especially important function
for the outputs.
The devices are EMC-tested according to
IEC 61000-6-4 (basic standard for emitted interference)
IEC 61000-6-2 (basic standard for interference immunity)
The analog signals comply with
IEC 60381-1/2
Article No. scheme

1st - 5th
@@@@@
6th 7th
@
3RS17
Type of input signal
Connection methods
Type of output signal
Current type and type of isolation
Measuring range
Example
3RS17
Note:
article numbers.
Converters are used in analog signal processing for

Conversion of normalized and non-normalized signals
Amplification and impedance adaptation
Conversion to a frequency for processing by a digital input
Overvoltage and EMC protection
Short-circuit protection of the outputs
Potential duplication
10
Application
3RS1725 manual/automatic converter
For special applications in which analog signals have to be
simulated, or during plant commissioning when the actual
process value is not yet available, the 3RS1725 devices feature
an adjustable potentiometer for manual setpoint selection and a
manual/automatic switch.
The adjustable potentiometer for the 3RS1725 devices is used to
simulate analog output signals when the selector switch is set to
"manual mode" and the control supply voltage is applied, without
the need for an analog input signal; and the scale ranges from
0 to 100 %.
Example: When it is set for an output of 4 to 20 mA, the 0 % scale
value on the potentiometer represents an output current of 4 mA
and the 100 % scale value represents an output current of
20 mA. In the "Auto" switch position, the output signal follows the
input signal proportionally regardless of the potentiometer
setting.
Sensor/analog
value generator
0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA
3RS17 converter
0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 10 kHz
Electronic control
Input
Output
3RS17 converter
0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA
Actuator with
analog input
0 ... 10 V
0/4 ... 20 mA
NSB0_01311c
Application example: Interface converter in analog signal evaluation
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/181
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Active interface converters
Load rating of the outputs
Active interface converters provide maximum flexibility for the

application by the use of an external control supply voltage.
Configuration with active interface converters is extremely easy
because input and output resistances and voltage drops are
compensated by the auxiliary supply. They support electrical
separation as well as conversion from one signal type to another
or reinforcement. The load of the measured value transmitter is
negligible.
A maximum output load is specified for current signals. This

resistance value specifies how large the input resistance of the
next device connected in series can be as a result of the power
of the converter.
Passive interface converters
In the case of 2-way separation, the input is electrically separated from the output. The "zero potential" of the control supply
voltage is the same as the reference potential for the analog
output signal.
Passive interface converters do not require an external control

supply voltage. This advantage can only be used by current
signals that are converted 1:1. Reinforcement or conversion is
not possible. The converters are used for complete electrical
separation of current signals and to protect the inputs and outputs. Passive separators do not operate reaction-free, i.e. any
load on the output produces an equal load on the input signal.
When the passive converter is to be used, the output power of
the sensor and the input resistance of the analog input must be
analyzed. This technique is being increasingly implemented in
the case of pure current signals.
For voltage signals, the maximum current that can be drawn

from the output is the decisive factor.
2-way separation
NSB0_01314b
IN
OUT
Vcc
Calculation guide for passive converters

Important: Please note the following when using passive
separators:
The current-driving voltage of the measuring transducer UE must
be sufficient to drive the maximum current of 20 mA over the
passive separators with a voltage loss of UV = 2.8 V and
the load RB.
2-way separation
3-way separation
For the 3-way separation, each circuit is electrically separated
from the other circuits, i. e. input, output, and control supply
voltage do not have equipotential bonding.
This means that:

UB UE = 2.8 V + 20 mA RB
NSB0_01343a
IN
UB
UV = 2,8 V
Vcc
10
UE
RB
3-way separation
NSB0_01312b
Distribution of the voltages in the case of passive separators
The following figure shows the input voltage UE as a function of

the load RB taking into account the voltage loss UV. If the load is
known, the y-axis shows the minimum voltage that has to be
supplied by the current source in order to drive the maximum
current of 20 mA over the passive separator and load.
UE/ V
NSB0_01313b
22,8
20
15
10
5
2,8
0
0
100
2
200
4
300
6
400
8
600
12
Input voltage depending on the load at Ia = 20 mA
10/182
Siemens IC 10 2014
OUT
800 RB/ 1000

16 UA/ V 20
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Type 3RS17
24 V AC/DC
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
General data
mm
6.2 x 80 x 84
mm
mm
6.2 x 90 x 92.5
17.5 x 80 x 84
mm
12.5 x 80 x 84
3RS1700, 3RS1702, 3RS1703,
3RS1705-.FD, 3RS1705-.FE,
3RS1705-.KD, 3RS1720
3RS170.-..E00
3RS1705-.FW, 3RS1705-.KW,
3RS1706, 3RS1725
3RS1721, 3RS1722
Active disconnector:
1500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min;
Passive disconnector:
500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
4000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
50
300
-25 ... +60
Electrical separation of input/output

Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0100
During operation
Screw terminals
Connection type
Terminal screw
Solid
mm2
mm2
M3
0.5 ... 2.5 (AWG 20 ... 14)
0.5 ... 2.5 (AWG 20 ... 14); at 3RS170.-1.E00: 0.5 ... 1.5 (AWG 20 ... 16)
Connection type
Solid
Finely stranded,
with end sleeves
acc. to DIN 46228
Finely stranded
Enclosures IEC 529

Terminals IEC 529
mm2
2
mm
0.5 ... 2.5 (AWG 20 ... 14)

0.5 ... 2.5 (AWG 20 ... 14)
mm2
0.5 ... 1.5 (AWG 20 ... 16)
Inputs
Impedance
Voltage inputs
Current inputs, active
330
100
Input voltage max.
Voltage inputs
Current inputs, active
V
V
30 AC/DC
30 AC/DC
Operating currents
Current inputs, passive
100/250 (6.2 mm width)
Voltage drop
Current inputs, passive
2.7 at 20 mA
Internal resistance
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V
55
Output load
Current 0/4 ... 20 mA active, max.

Current 0 ... 20 mA passive, max.
Frequency, min.
400
1 000 at 20 mA
2 400
Output voltage
Frequency
20.9
Output current
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V, max.

Frequency, max.
mA
mA
21; note the terminating resistor (> 500 )!

10
Short-circuit current
Voltage output, 0 ... 10 V

Current output, 0 ... 20 mA, passive
Frequency
mA
mA
mA
40
Corresponds to the input current
15
Short-circuit proof
Protection of the outputs

Max. overvoltage at output
10
Outputs
30
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/183
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
Circuit diagrams
NSB0_02227
IN+
OUT
IN+ 3
4 OUT+
IN- 2
0V
5 +/~
24 V AC/DC
IN-
-1
NSB0_01315a
OUT-
24 V AC/DC
3RS1700-..D.. , 3RS1702-..D.. ,
3RS1703-..D.. , 3RS1705-..D..
3RS1700-..E00, 3RS1702-..E00,
3RS1703-..E00, 3RS1705-..E00
NSB0_01319a
NSB0_01346
IN+ 1
6 OUT+
IN+
IN- 2
IN- 2
OUT-
8
7
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
+/~
3RS170.-..W00
6 OUT
5 0V
7
8
0V
24 V AC/DC
3RS1706- . FD00
NSB0_01318a
IN+
OUT+
IN+
IN-
IN-
OUT-
OUT+
OUT-
NSB0_01344
+/~
8
7
24 V AC/DC
3RS1706-.FE00
3RS1720-.ET00
IN+
IN-
OUT-
10
NSB0_01317a
OUT+
4 (1)
OUT7
OUT+
(2)
8
OUT-
NSB0_01316a
3RS1721-.ET00
3RS1722-.ET00
NSB0_01345
NSB0_01347
IN+
IN-
+/~
OUT
IN+
0V
IN-
8 0V
3RS1725-.FD00
Siemens IC 10 2014
5
8
+/~ 7
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
24 V AC/DC
10/184
1
IN+
(1) 2
IN5
IN+
(2)
6
IN-
OUT+
3RS1725-.FW00
OUT+
OUT-
Siemens AG 2013
Relays

All transformers except the passive single interface converters
have a yellow LED for displaying "Power on".
3RS1706-1FD00
Inputs
3RS1720-1ET00
Outputs
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
3RS1705-2FD00
Width

voltage Us
mm
Electrical
separation
3RS1705-2FE00
DT
3RS1725-2FD00
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Single interface converters, active

0 ... 10 V
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
2 paths
3RS1700-1AD00
3RS1700-2AD00
3 paths
3RS1700-1AE00
3RS1700-2AE00
2 paths
3RS1700-1CD00
3RS1700-2CD00
3 paths
3RS1700-1CE00
3RS1700-2CE00
2 paths
3RS1700-1DD00
3RS1700-2DD00
3 paths
3RS1700-1DE00
3RS1700-2DE00
2 paths
3RS1702-1AD00
3RS1702-2AD00
3 paths
3RS1702-1AE00
3RS1702-2AE00
2 paths
3RS1702-1CD00
3RS1702-2CD00
3 paths
3RS1702-1CE00
3RS1702-2CE00
2 paths
3RS1702-1DD00
3RS1702-2DD00
3 paths
3RS1702-1DE00
3RS1702-2DE00
2 paths
3RS1703-1AD00
3RS1703-2AD00
3 paths
3RS1703-1AE00
3RS1703-2AE00
2 paths
3RS1703-1CD00
3RS1703-2CD00
3 paths
3RS1703-1CE00
3RS1703-2CE00
2 paths
3RS1703-1DD00
3RS1703-2DD00
3 paths
3RS1703-1DE00
3RS1703-2DE00
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
selectable
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
selectable
6.2
17.5
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
selectable
0 ... 50 Hz,
0 ... 100 Hz,
0 ... 1 kHz,
0 ... 10 kHz,
selectable
24 AC/DC
2 paths
3RS1705-1FD00
3RS1705-2FD00
3 paths
3RS1705-1FE00
3RS1705-2FE00
24 240 AC/DC
3 paths
3RS1705-1FW00
3RS1705-2FW00
6.2
24 AC/DC
2 paths
3RS1705-1KD00
3RS1705-2KD00
17.5
24 240 AC/DC
3 paths
3RS1705-1KW00
3RS1705-2KW00
2 paths
3RS1706-1FD00
3RS1706-2FD00
3 paths
3RS1706-1FE00
3RS1706-2FE00
3 paths
3RS1706-1FW00
3RS1706-2FW00
10
Switchable multi-range converters, active
Switchable universal converters, active,

with 16 input ranges and 3 output ranges
0 ... 60 mV,
0 ... 100 mV,
0 ... 300 mV,
0 ... 500 mV,
0 ... 1 V,
0 ... 2 V,
0 ... 5 V,
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 V,
2 ... 10 V,
0 ... 5 mA,
0 ... 10 mA,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
+/-5 mA,
+/-20 mA,
selectable
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
selectable
17.5
24 AC/DC
24 240 AC/DC
Switchable multi-range converters, active, with manual/automatic

switch and single potentiometer as manual analog signal transmitter
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
selectable
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA,
4 ... 20 mA,
selectable
17.5

24 AC/DC
2 paths
3RS1725-1FD00
3RS1725-2FD00
24 240 AC/DC
3 paths
3RS1725-1FW00
3RS1725-2FW00
Siemens IC 10 2014
10/185
Siemens AG 2013
Relays
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41H
Inputs
Outputs
Width
Number of
channels
Electrical
separation
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
mm
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Single interface converters, passive

0/4 ... 20 mA
0/4 ... 20 mA
6.2
2 paths
3RS1720-1ET00
3RS1720-2ET00
12.5
2 paths
3RS1721-1ET00
3RS1721-2ET00
2 paths
3RS1722-1ET00
3RS1722-2ET00
Accessories
Use
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

For auxiliary
circuit
connections
3RA2908-1A
Spring-type
terminals
Screwdrivers
terminals; 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm,
3RA2908-1A
1 unit
41B
3TX7014-7AA00
5 units
41H
3TX7014-7CE00
1 10 units
41H
Connecting combs, blue

For 3RS17..-..E00 Connecting combs
For linking the same potentials, 16 terminals,
current carrying capacity for infeed max. 6 A
3TX7014-7AA00
Galvanic isolation plates
10
For 3RS17..-..E00 Galvanic isolation plates
3TX7014-7CE00
10/186
Siemens IC 10 2014

11
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Price groups
PG 41B, 41H, 41L, 42B, 42C, 42J, 4N1
Introduction to safety technology
11/18
11/19
11/20
SIRIUS 3SK1
safety relays
General data
Basic units
- Standard basic units
- Advanced basic units
Expansion units
- Output expansions
- Input expansions
Accessories
11/22
11/25
11/28
11/30
SIRIUS 3TK28
safety relays
With relay enabling circuits
With electronic enabling circuits
With special functions
Accessories
11/10
11/16
11/17
11/31
11/39
11/40
11/40
11/40
11/41
SIRIUS 3RK3
General data
3RK31 central units
3RK32, 3RK33 expansion modules
3RK35 interface modules
3RK36 operating and
monitoring modules
Accessories
Notes:
More 3TK28 safety relays can be found
- in the Catalog
Add-On IC 10 AO 2014
- in the Catalog
Add-On IC 10 AO 2014
Center
Conversion tool
e.g. from 3TK28 to 3SK1 see
Siemens IC 10 2014
11
11/2
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Overview
Functional safety of machines and plants Basic safety
requirements in the manufacturing industry
In order to protect people and the environment in many industrial
applications in the manufacturing and process industries, machines and plants must meet the fundamental safety requirements of the EU Directives, particularly the Machinery Directive.
In addition to design solutions, automation systems and components are also expected to perform safety-related tasks. This
means that the life and health of people and the physical integrity of capital goods and the environment depend on the proper
operation of these systems and components, on "functional
safety".
With the introduction of the uniform European Single Market,
national standards and regulations affecting the technical realization of machines were consistently harmonized. This involved
defining basic safety requirements which address, on the one
hand, machine manufacturers in terms of the free movement of
goods (Article 95) and, on the other hand, machine operators in
terms of industrial safety (Article 137).
The EU directives:
define requirements which must be met by plants and their
operating companies in order to protect the health of people
and the quality of the environment
include standards for health & safety at work
(minimum requirements)
define product requirements (e. g. for machines) to protect the
health and safety of consumers
differentiate between the requirements which must be met by
the implementation of products in order to ensure the free
movement of goods and the requirements which must be met
for the use of products
Objective of the standards

It is the objective of safety technology to minimize as far as possible the hazards from technical facilities for people and the environment while restricting no more than absolutely necessary
the scope of industrial production, the use of machines or the
production of chemical products.
Production automation is governed in particular by the following
standards:
IEC 61508 or IEC 62061 and
EN ISO 13849-1
The IEC 62061 standard
The IEC 62061 standard "Safety of machines - Functional safety
of electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control
systems" defines comprehensive requirements. It includes recommendations for the development, integration and validation of
safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems (SRECS) for machines. With the implementation of EN 62061, for the first time, one standard covers the
entire safety chain, from the sensor to the actuator. The Safety
Integrity Level, or SIL for short, is defined as the application
parameter for this standard.
Requirements placed on the capacity of non-electrical e. g.
hydraulic, pneumatic, or electromechanical safety-related control elements for machines are not specified by the standard.
Safety requirements
11
Article 95 EC Treaty
(free movement of goods)
e.g. machines
Low-voltage
directive
Machinery
directive
(2006/95/EC)
(2006/42/EC)
Harmonized European standards
Manufacturer
Article 137 EC Treaty

(industrial safety)
"Industrial safety" framework

directive
(89/391/EC)
Separate
directive
"Use of
operating
equipment"
(89/655/EC)
National laws
User
Safety requirements imposed on machines and plants
Siemens IC 10 2014
Standard EN ISO 13849-1

EN ISO 13849-1 "Safety of machines - Safety-related components of controls - Part 1: General principles" replaced EN 954-1
at the end of 2011. It considers the complete range of safety
functions with all the devices which are involved in their performance. EN ISO 13849-1 also makes a quantitative analysis of
the safety functions. The standard describes how to determine
the performance level (PL) for safety-relevant parts of control
systems on the basis of architectures specified for the intended
service life.
IC01_00050
11/2
Safety of machines
When several safety-relevant parts are combined to form a single complete system, the standard explains how to determine
the resulting PL. It can be applied to safety-related parts of control systems (SRP/CS) and all types of machines, regardless of
the technology and energy used, e.g. electrical, hydraulic,
pneumatic or mechanical.
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Safety Integrated integrated safety technology
from a single source
Our offering
As a partner for all safety requirements, we not only support you
with the respective safety-related products and systems, but
also consistently provide you with the most current know-how on
international standards and regulations. Machine manufacturers
and plant managers are offered a comprehensive training portfolio as well as services for the entire lifecycle of safety-related
systems and machines.
A uniform, certified product range
Courses on CE marking, risk assessment and standards see
www.siemens.com/sitrain-safetyintegrated
Worldwide service and support see
http://support.automation.siemens.com
More information see
www.siemens.com/safety-integrated
Safety Evaluation Tool
Safety Integrated
The following applies equally for machine manufacturers and the

companies which operate their machines: Maximum possible
safety for personnel and machines. The solution: our Safety
Integrated concept based on Totally Integrated Automation.
Whether for simple safety functions or highly complex tasks
our product range offers you maximum safety.
Safety Integrated is a unique, complete and consistent range of
safety products covering all safety-related tasks from detecting
and evaluating to reacting, from switches and control systems to
operating mechanisms (see graphic on page 11/4). Our
products meet the safety requirements in force in industry,
including IEC, ISO, NFPA and UL, and are certified in accordance with the latest safety standards.
Design of a safety function

A safety chain normally comprises the following functions:
identify, evaluate and realize. In detail this means:
Identify = the detection of a safety requirement, e.g. when an
EMERGENCY-STOP is actuated or someone enters a hazardous area which is protected by sensors such as light arrays or
laser scanners.
Evaluate = the detection of a safety requirement and the
reliable initiation of a reaction, e.g. shutting down the enabling
circuits.
Realize = responding to a hazard, e. g. shutting down a power
supply via the downstream contactors.
Identify
(Sensors)
Evaluate
(Safety relay)
Realize
(Actuators)
NSC0_00719b
Safety Evaluation Tool
The Safety Evaluation Tool for the standards IEC 62061 and
EN ISO 13849-1 guides you quickly and safely through all the
calculation steps in implementing safety functions on a machine,
from definition of the safety system structure through to selection
of the components. all the way to determination of the achieved
safety integrity level (SIL/PL). You receive the results as a standards-compliant report that can be integrated in the documentation as proof of safety.
Benefits of the Safety Evaluation Tool to you:
Less time needed to evaluate the safety functions
Calculation in accordance with current standards
User-friendly archiving: Projects can be saved and called up
again as required
Fast and easy handling: comprehensive, predefined libraries
of examples
Fast access to product data
Selection aids for determining variables and specifying the
system design
Helpful documents which can be downloaded as PDFs
The online tool can be used free of charge you pay only the
usual costs for accessing the Internet
www.siemens.com/safety-evaluation-tool.
Design of a safety function
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/3
11
All Safety Integrated products or systems can be seamlessly

integrated in the standard automation environment. They are
therefore particularly flexible and economical, reduce engineering time, increase plant availability and enable practice-related
machine operation.
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Identify
Evaluate
Highly flexible machine with variable

volume of project data
SIMATIC
S7-300F
Realize
SIMATIC
IPC427C-RTX F
PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe
PROFINET / PROFIsafe
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
SIMOCODE pro
Safety
SINAMICS
S120
Integrated safety solutions
SIMATIC ET 200S
with motor starter
SIRIUS
EMERGENCY-STOP
SIRIUS
safety
switch
Mobile
panel
SINAMICS
G120
ASIsafe
SIRIUS
EMERGENCYSTOP
ASIsafe
modules
SIMATIC ET 200pro
with motor starter
SlimLine
module
SIRIUS
safety
switch
SINAMICS
G120D
SIMATIC
S7-300
PROFIBUS
Machine with flexible autonomous safety solution
SIRIUS
modular
safety system
Independent safety solutions
SIRIUS
non-contact
safety switch
SINAMICS
SINAMICS
Machine with distributed sensors and actuators

SIMATIC
S7-1200
SIRIUS
MSS ASIsafe
ASIsafe
SIRIUS
ASIsafe safe
output
SIRIUS
contactors
SIRIUS
EMERGENCYSTOP
SIRIUS
safety
switch
ASIsafe
modules
SIRIUS
contactors
SIRIUS
signalling
column
Compact machine with locally limited safety

technology
SIRIUS
EMERGENCY-STOP
SIRIUS
safety switch
Safety Integrated
11/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
SIRIUS
3SK1
safety relays
SIRIUS
compact feeder
SIRIUS
contactor
SIRIUS 3RM1
motor starter
NSB0_01822d
11
SIRIUS
contactors
SIRIUS
EMERGENCY- SIRIUS
STOP
cable-operated
switch
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Our SIRIUS Safety Integrated controls are a central element of
the Siemens Safety Integrated concept. Whether for fail-safe
identifying, commanding and signaling, monitoring and
evaluating or starting and reliable shutting down - our SIRIUS
Safety Integrated controls are experts at performing safety tasks
in your plant.
nt
if
3SK1 safety relay
Ide
ate
3SE5
position
switch
alu
3SE6 RFID
safety switch
3RK1
AS-Interface
SIMOCODE
pro 3UF7
Ev
3SE6
EMERGENCYSTOP
SIRIUS Safety Integrated uses fail-safe communication using

standard fieldbus systems, e.g. ASIsafe via AS-Interface and
PROFIsafe via PROFIBUS and PROFINET, to solve even networked safety tasks of greater complexity. This opens the door
for flexible safety solutions for compact machines or large-scale
plants.
3RK3 MSS central module

Advanced/ASIsafe/Basic
08
5b
3SB3 two-hand
operation console
Realize
3RT2 3RK3
contactor motor
starter
IC
3RM1
motor
starter ET 200S/pro
motor starter
_
01
00
3RA6 compact
starter
11
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/5
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3SK111
11/16
3SK112
11/17
3SK121,
3SK122,
3SK123
11/18,
11/19
Safety relays with relay enabling circuits
3TK2826
11/22
Different voltages can be switched through the floating contacts
IC 10 AO
Inductive currents up to 5 A can be switched with relay contacts
3TK2827,
3TK2828,
3TK283
Safety relays with electronic enabling circuits
3TK2845
11/25
Wear-free
3TK2840,
3TK2841,
3TK2842
IC 10 AO
3TK285
IC 10 AO
3TK2810
11/28

3SK1 safety relays
Key modules of a consistent and cost-effective safety chain
Can be used for all safety applications thanks to compliance with the highest safety
requirements (PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508)
Suitable for use all over the world through compliance with all globally established
certifications
Standard basic units
3SK111.
Simple, compact devices for all important requirements for monitoring safety sensors and
actuators
Advanced basic units
Multi-functional series of safety relays with relay enabling circuits, semiconductor outputs,
or time-delayed outputs for:
- EMERGENCY-STOP monitoring
- Protective door monitoring
- Monitoring of non-floating sensors such as light arrays, laser scanners, etc.
3SK112.
- Monitoring of two-hand operation consoles

- Monitoring of equivalent (NC/NC) and antivalent (NO/NC) sensors
Setting by means of DIP switch
Expansion units
The 3RO and 4RO output expansions can be used for Standard and Advanced basic units
Input expansion for Advanced basic units
Power supply for Advanced basic units
3SK121.
Integration of 3RM1 motor starters possible and simple integration of a main circuit component
in a system configuration of the safety relays.
There is no need for complex wiring between the safety evaluation unit and the actuator.
Expansion of the Standard device series by means of wiring
Expansion of the Advanced device series by means of wiring or without wiring outlay by means
of 3ZY12 device connectors
3TK28 safety relays
Key modules of a consistent and cost-effective safety chain
Can be used for all safety applications thanks to compliance with the highest safety
requirements (PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508)
Suitable for use all over the world through compliance with all globally established
certifications
3TK2826-2BB40
11
Suitable for operation in fast switching applications

Insensitive to vibrations and dirt
3TK2845-1HB40
Good electrical endurance

Safety relays with contactor relay enabling circuits
Different voltages can be switched through the floating contacts
Inductive currents up to 10 A can be switched with contactor relay enabling circuits
High mechanical and electrical endurance
Safety relays with special functions
Safe standstill monitoring with 3TK2810-0
Monitoring without external sensors
3TK2810-1BA41
Universal use in applications possible

Safe speed monitoring with 3TK2810-1
Monitoring of speed with encoders and proximity switches possible
Easy diagnostics options via display
Integrated monitoring of a spring-type interlocking protective door
11/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RK3
11/31
3RK3
Ch. 2
3RK1
Ch. 2
3RM1
Ch. 8
SIRIUS Safety Integrated (continued)

3RK3 Modular Safety System (MSS)
Freely configurable modular safety relays
Safety-related applications up to PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 3 according to IEC 62061 can be implemented
High flexibility and planning reliability thanks to a modular design
More space in the control cabinet and lower costs thanks to highly modular project data
3RK3
More functionality and time savings thanks to a software-configurable system

Comprehensive diagnostics on-site with the MSS ES software
Improved plant diagnostics and higher plant availability thanks to exchange of data using
PROFIBUS
Automatic creation of plant documentation with regard to MSS and software parameterization
Up to 9 expansion modules can be plugged in for standard I/Os and fail-safe I/Os optionally
electronic or relay-based fail-safe outputs
Graphic parameterization of the logic, online diagnostics, and automatic creation of
documentation using MSS ES
Consistent further development of the safety monitors with the Advanced and ASIsafe central
units of the SIRIUS 3RK3 Modular Safety System (MSS)
Additionally with AS-Interface (ASIsafe):
Modularly expandable and freely configurable safety monitor
With MSS Advanced/ASIsafe up to 50 two-channel, fail-safe outputs (38 central outputs and
12 outputs via AS-i)
Safety-related and standard communication between multiple MSS devices and/or safety
monitors
Distributed detection of sensors and disconnection of actuators through AS-Interface
Much more space is available without wiring outlay using AS-Interface
3RK3 MSS ASIsafe
Ready-to-use function blocks (e.g. muting or protective door with tumbler) can also be used
on AS-i
AS-i F-Link
Monitoring the inputs of safety-related digital AS-i slaves (ASIsafe slaves) and forwarding of
data through PROFIsafe
Supports all AS-Interface master functions according to the AS-Interface Specification V3.0
Local diagnostics using LEDs and display with control keys
Programming with Distributed Safety Version V5.4 SP1 or higher for SIMATIC S7-300F/416F
ASi F-Link
Programming with SAFETY INTEGRATED "SI-Basic" or "SI-COMFORT NCU"

for SINUMERIK 840D pl/sl
Complete portfolio of ASIsafe modules
Up to four safe inputs per module
Up to one safe output per module
Advantage: Easy integration of safe signals in the control cabinet or in the field up to
Category 4, Pl e, SIL 3
3RM1 motor starters
Motor starters for safety-related shutdown as 3RM11 direct-on-line starters or 3RM13 reversing
starters
Compact devices with 22.5 mm width comprising combinations of relay contacts and power
semiconductors (hybrid technology) and a electronic overload relay
For switching three-phase motors up to 3 kW (at 400 V) and resistive loads up to max. 10 A at
AC voltages up to 500 V under normal operating conditions
3RM1
Safety-related shutdown according to PL e or SIL 3 by shutting down the control supply

voltage possible without additional devices in the main circuit
Combination with 3SK1 safety relay through conventional wiring or 3ZY12 device connectors
Simple wiring and collective shutdown with device connectors in assemblies; there is no
further need for complex looping of the connecting cables.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/7
11
K45F
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3RK1
Ch. 8
3RK1
Ch. 9
3UF7
Ch. 10
3SE63
Ch. 12

ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions
Safety modules
High Feature motor starters
Fail-safe motor starters
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions Local
ET 200S Safety
Safety Motor Starter Solutions Local are preferred from the safety technology point of view for
locally restricted safety applications. These motor starters are not dependent on a safe control
system.
ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe
Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe are often found by contrast in safety applications of
the more complex type that are interlinked. In this case a safe control system is used with the
PROFINET or PROFIBUS bus systems with the PROFIsafe profile.
ET 200pro Safety Motor Starter Solutions
The ET 200pro Safety Motor Starter Solutions comprise:
PROFIsafe modules
Safety repair switch modules
Disconnecting modules
ET 200pro Safety

High Feature motor starters
ET 200pro Safety Motor Starter Solutions Local
Safety Motor Starter Solutions Local are preferred from the safety technology point of view for
locally restricted safety applications. These motor starters are not dependent on a safe control
system.
ET 200pro Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe
Safety Motor Starter Solutions PROFIsafe are often found by contrast in safety applications of
the more complex type that are interlinked. In this case a safe control system is used with the
PROFINET or PROFIBUS bus systems with the PROFIsafe profile.
SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices
Flexible, modular motor management system for motors with constant speeds in the
low-voltage range
Provides an intelligent interface between the higher-level automation system and the motor
feeder
3UF7
Multi-functional, electronic full motor protection which is independent of the

automation system
Integrated control functions for the motor control
Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data
Open communication through PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET
Safety relay function for the fail-safe disconnection of motors up to SIL 3
(IEC 61508/IEC 62061) or PL e with Category 4 (EN ISO 13849-1)
11
Fail-safe digital modules

DM-F Local for direct assignment between a fail-safe hardware shutdown signal and a motor
feeder
DM-F PROFIsafe for when a fail-safe controller (F-CPU) creates the fail-safe signal for the
disconnection
Non-contact RFID safety switches
Long service life due to non-contact switching
Only one switch required for the maximum safety level PL e or SIL 3 according to
EN ISO 13849-1 and IEC 61508
3SE63
Safety circuits connected in series, with up to 31 devices

Tamper protection better than with mechanical safety switches thanks to switches and
actuators with individual coding
Version with optional 18 N magnetic catch
LED status indication including threshold indication for door displacement
Degree of protection up to IP69 K and resistance to cleaning products
Larger switching displacement than mechanical switches; offers better mounting tolerance
and sagging tolerance of the protective door
No time-consuming mechanical installation needed, resulting in shorter installation and
adjustment times and reduced maintenance
11/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Safety Technology
Introduction
Article No.
Page
3SE51,
3SE52
Ch. 12
3SE51,
3SE52,
3SE53
Ch.12

Mechanical position switches
Easy assembly thanks to modular design
Solid, rugged design
Special versions are easily generated and quickly available, also in combination with standard
modules
With a 3SE51/3SE52 position switch it is possible to achieve Category 2 according to
EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 1 according to IEC 61508
Categories 3 and 4 can be achieved by using a second 3SE5 1/3SE5 3 position switch
3SE51
Mechanical safety switches
With separate actuator, hinge switch, or separate actuator and tumbler
With a position switch it is possible to achieve Category 3 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 2 according to IEC 61508
Category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 61508
can be achieved by using a second 3SE51 or 3SE52 position switch
Version in various sizes made of metal or plastic
Integrated ASIsafe electronics for all enclosure designs
3SE53
Command devices
3SB3/3SF5
Using a special F adapter, EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to ISO 13850 can be di- 3SF5
rectly connected through the standard AS-Interface with safety-related communication. This
F adapter is snapped from the rear onto the EMERGENCY-STOP device, enabling maximum
performance level "e" according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 62061 to be
achieved.
Ch. 13
EMERGENCY-STOP devices for disconnecting plants in an emergency situation
3SB3
Ch. 13
3SE7
Ch. 13
With positive latching function according to EN ISO 13850 and performance level "e"
according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 62061
Various mushroom diameters, with lock, in plastic/metal, as individual or complete units and in
combination with 3SB3 enclosure or two-hand operation console
3SB3
Cable-operated switches
Control functions and EMERGENCY-STOP always within reach
More safety over long distances of up to 2 x 75 m length
Easy release
Fail-safe applications with SIRIUS Safety Integrated
Status display directly on the switch
Signal display for long distances in innovative LED technology with visibility over 50 m
3SE7
Cable-operated switches with latching according to ISO 13850 (EN 418) and full
EMERGENCY-STOP function with positive-opening contacts
Quick and safe mounting using uniform mounting accessories
11
Versions with 1 NO/2 NC with yellow lid
Connection methods
The safety relays and the Modular Safety System are available
with screw or spring-type terminals.
Screw terminals
Spring-type terminals (push-in)
The terminals are indicated in the corresponding tables
by the symbols shown on orange backgrounds.

Push-in connections are a form of spring-type terminals allowing
fast wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors
As with other spring-type terminals, a screwdriver (with
3.0 x 0.5 mm blade) is required to disconnect the conductor.
The same tool can also be used to wire fine-stranded or
stranded conductors with no end finishing.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/9
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3SK1 Safety Relays

General data
Overview
However, the 3SK1 Advanced basic units also offer the
following:
Universal application possibilities thanks to multifunctionality
Time-delayed outputs
Expansion of inputs and outputs
In the case of Advanced basic units, the 3ZY1 device connector
allows safety functions involving several sensors and actuators
to be constructed very quickly.
The 3SK1 Standard and Advanced series are a high-quality
replacement for the 3TK28 safety relays. In their narrower
design, and equipped with greater functionality, they can
replace every 3TK28 device. The only exceptions are devices
with special functions, such as 3TK2826, 3TK2845 and the
3TK2810 devices.
Note:
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays are the key elements of a consistent,

cost-effective safety chain. Whether you need EMERGENCYSTOP disconnection, protective door monitoring, light arrays,
laser scanners or the protection of presses or punches with
SIRIUS safety relays of width 22.5 mm every safety application
can be implemented to optimum effect in terms of engineering
and price.
The following safety-related functions are available:
Monitoring the safety functions of sensors
Monitoring the sensor leads
Monitoring the correct device function of the safety relay
Monitoring the actuators in the shutdown circuit
Safety-related disconnection when dangers arise
11
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays are permitted for applications up to

SIL 3 (IEC 61508/IEC 62061) or PL e (EN ISO 13849-1).
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays stand out on account of their flexibility
in both parameterization and system configurations with several
evaluation units. Optimized solutions when selecting components are facilitated by a clearly structured component range:
Output expansions
Input expansions
Accessories
The 3SK1 Standard basic units are characterized by the
following features:
Compact design
Simple operation
Relay and semiconductor outputs
Economical solution
11/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Conversion table from 3TK28 to 3SK1 see page 11/12 or

conversion tool e.g. from 3TK28 to 3SK1 see
Overview of functions of the 3SK1 series
Type
Relay
enabling
circuits
Electronic
enabling
circuits
Relay
enabling
circuits
Electronic
enabling
circuits
2)
---
-
by means of
cascading
by means of
wiring
by means of
wiring
---
--
-
by means of
wiring
--
-
by means of
wiring
--
--
1)
1)
Sensors
Mechanical
Single-ended
Antivalent
Expandable
Parameters
Start
(auto/monitored)
Sensor connection
2 x 1-channel/
1 x 2-channel
Cross-circuit
detection
Start test ON/OFF
Monitoring of twohand operation
consoles
Enabling circuits
Instantaneous
Time-delayed
Expandable with relay enabling circuits
Device connectors

24 V DC
115 ... 240 V AC/DC
3)
Available
-- Not available
1)
Possible using 3SK1230 power supply via device connector.
2)
24 V basic units only.
3)
24 V AC/DC
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3SK112 and 3SK1112 safety relays
with DIP switches
Can be expanded by adding the 3RM1 motor starter
The 3SK112 and 3SK1112 safety relays are configurable safety

relays. They are used as evaluation units for typical safety chains
(identify, evaluate, realize). A number of functions can be set
using the DIP switches on the front. 3SK112 and 3SK1112 are
therefore universally applicable.
Schematic
Sensor input
Autostart
ON
Without crossover
monitoring
With start test
2
3
IC01_00196
2 x 1-channel
sensor connection
Safety relays
DIP switch
No.
ON
Sensor input
Monitored start
With crossover
monitoring
1 x 2-channel
sensor connection
Without start test
Motor
starters
Number of safe outputs

Type and number of enabling circuits Signaling
Relays
Electronic
circuits
Instanta- TimeInstanta- Timeneous
delayed neous
delayed
Rear
panel
connection
--
--
--
--
3SK1112-.BB40 --
--
--
--
3SK1111-.A..0
IC01_00177
3SK1 Standard basic units
3SK1 Advanced basic units
Motor
--
--
--
3SK1121-.AB40 3
--
--
--
--
--
--
3SK1122-.AB40 --
--
--
3SK1122-.CB4.
--
--
--
--
--
12)
1)
--
--
--
12)
1)
3SK1121-.CB4.
--
3SK1 output expansions

4RO
3SK1211
3RO
3SK1213
Available
-- Not available
1)
For 24 V DC.
2)
Feedback circuit
Traditional system design
With the integration of the SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starter into the
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relay system family, this wiring has been
minimized for the first time.
Motors up to 3 kW can be easily integrated into the safety relay
system using SIRIUS 3ZY1 device connectors, without having to
run a cable between the evaluation unit and the motor starter.
3SK1 safety relay
3RM1 motor starter
IC01_00178
3SK1120-.AB40 --
11
OFF
With previous safety relay and motor starter designs, a huge

amount of wiring was required to monitor the motor starters in
Motor
System design using 3SK1 and 3RM1
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/11
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Code conversion table
The table below lists the existing 3TK28 article numbers with the corresponding 3SK1 article numbers.
Article number
3TK28
basic units
Article number
3SK1 Standard
basic units
Article number
3SK1 Advanced
basic units
3TK2820-1AJ20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2820-1AL20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2820-1CB30
3TK2820-2AJ20
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AW20
3TK2820-2AL20
3SK1111-2AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40
3TK2820
Article number
3SK1 Advanced
basic units
3TK2828-1AB20
3TK2828-1AB21
3TK2828-1AJ20
----
3TK2828-1AJ21
--
3TK2828-1AL20
--
3TK2828-1AL21
-------
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AB30
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40
3TK2828-1BB40
3TK2828-1BB41
3TK2828-2AB20
3TK2828-2AB21
3TK2828-2AJ20
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AB30
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40
3TK2828-2AJ21
--
3TK2828-2AL20
--
3TK2828-2AL21
--
3TK2828-2BB40
--
--3SK1121-1CB42 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB41 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB42 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB41 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB42
3SK1121-1CB41
--3SK1121-2CB42 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB41 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB42 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB41 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB42
3SK1211-1BW20
3SK1211-1BW20
3SK1211-1BB40
3SK1211-2BW20
3SK1211-2BW20
3SK1211-2BB40
3SK1211-1BB40
3SK1211-1BB40
3SK1211-1BB40
3SK1211-2BB40
3SK1211-2BB40
3SK1211-2BB40
3TK2834-1AB20
3TK2834-1AJ20
---
3TK2834-1AL20
--
3TK2834-1BB40
3TK2834-2AB20
3TK2834-2AJ20
----
3TK2834-2AL20
--
3TK2834-2BB40
--
-3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40
-3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40
3SK1112-1BB40
3SK1112-2BB40
3SK1122-1AB40
3SK1122-2AB40
3SK1112-1BB40
3SK1112-2BB40
3SK1122-1AB40
3SK1122-2AB40
-------
3SK1122-1CB41
3SK1122-1CB42
3SK1122-1CB44
3SK1122-2CB41
3SK1122-2CB42
3SK1122-2CB44
3SK1111-1AW20 +
3SK1213-1AJ20
3SK1111-1AW20 +
3SK1213-1AL20
3SK1111-1AB30 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1111-2AW20 +
3SK1213-2AJ20
3SK1111-2AW20 +
3SK1213-2AL20
3SK1111-2AB30 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1220-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1111-2AB30
3TK2821
3TK2821-1CB30
3TK2821-2CB30
3TK2822
3TK2822-1CB30
3TK2822-2CB30
3TK2823
3TK2823-1CB30
3TK2823-2CB30
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AB30
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40
3TK2824-1AJ20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2824-1AL20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2824-1BB40
3TK2824-1CB30
3TK2824-2AJ20
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AW20
3TK2824-2AL20
3SK1111-2AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40
3SK1121-2AB40
3TK2824
3TK2824-2BB40
3TK2824-2CB30
3SK1111-2AB30
3SK1111-2AB30
3TK2825
11
Article number
3SK1 Standard
basic units
3TK2828
3TK2820-2CB30
3TK2825-1AB20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2825-1AJ20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2825-1AL20
3SK1111-1AW20
3TK2825-1BB40
3TK2825-2AB20
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AW20
3TK2825-2AJ20
3SK1111-2AW20
3TK2825-2AL20
3SK1111-2AW20
3TK2825-2BB40
3SK1111-2AB30
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2AB40
3TK2827
3TK2827-1AB20
3TK2827-1AB21
3TK2827-1AJ20
----
3TK2827-1AJ21
--
3TK2827-1AL20
--
3TK2827-1AL21
--
3TK2827-1BB40
3TK2827-1BB41
3TK2827-2AB20
3TK2827-2AB21
3TK2827-2AJ20
------
3TK2827-2AJ21
--
3TK2827-2AL20
--
3TK2827-2AL21
--
3TK2827-2BB40
3TK2827-2BB41
---
11/12
Article number
3TK28
basic units
Siemens IC 10 2014
--3SK1121-1CB42 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB41 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB42 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB41 +
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1121-1CB42
3SK1121-1CB41
--3SK1121-2CB42 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB41 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB42 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB41 +
3SK1230-2AW20
3SK1121-2CB42
3SK1121-2CB41
3TK2830
3TK2830-1AJ20
3TK2830-1AL20
3TK2830-1CB30
3TK2830-2AJ20
3TK2830-2AL20
3TK2830-2CB30
3TK2834
3TK2840
3TK2840-1BB40
3TK2840-2BB40
3TK2841
3TK2841-1BB40
3TK2841-2BB40
3TK2842
3TK2842-1BB41
3TK2842-1BB42
3TK2842-1BB44
3TK2842-2BB41
3TK2842-2BB42
3TK2842-2BB44
3TK2850
3TK2850-1AJ20
3TK2850-1AL20
3TK2850-1BB40
3TK2850-2AJ20
3TK2850-2AL20
3TK2850-2BB40
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Article number
3TK28
basic units
Article number
3SK1 Standard
basic units
Article number
3SK1 Advanced
basic units
Article number
3TK28
basic units
3SK1111-1AW20 +
3SK1213-1AJ20
3SK1111-1AW20 +
3SK1213-1AL20
3SK1111-1AB30 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1111-2AW20 +
3SK1213-2AJ20
3SK1111-2AW20 +
3SK1213-2AL20
3SK1111-2AB30 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3TK2853-1BB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3TK2851
3TK2851-1AJ20
3TK2851-1AL20
3TK2851-1BB40
3TK2851-2AJ20
3TK2851-2AL20
3TK2851-2BB40
3TK2852-1BB40
3TK2852-2AL20
3TK2852-2BB40
Article number
3SK1 Advanced
basic units
3SK1111-1AB30 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1111-2AB30 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1120-1AB40 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1120-2AB40 +
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1213-2AB40
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1213-2AB40
3TK2857-1BB41
--
3TK2857-1BB42
--
3TK2857-1BB44
--
3SK1213-1AB40 (delay
as for basic unit)
as for basic unit)
as for basic unit)
3TK2857-2BB41
--
3TK2857-2BB42
--
3TK2857-2BB44
--
3TK2853
3TK2853-2BB40
3TK2856
3TK2856-1BB40
3TK2856-2BB40
3TK2857
3TK2852
3TK2852-1AL20
Article number
3SK1 Standard
basic units
3SK1111-1AW20 +
3SK1213-1AL20
3SK1111-1AB30 +
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1111-2AW20 +
3SK1213-2AL20
3SK1111-2AB30 +
3SK1213-2AB40
as for basic unit)
as for basic unit)
as for basic unit)
Note:
Conversion tool e.g. 3TK28 to 3SK1 see
Article No. scheme

Safety relays
1st - 3rd 4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
A
10th 11th 12th
3SK
Generation
Device version
Device series
Type of outputs
Connection type
Type of rated control supply voltage
Time delay
Example
3SK
11
Note:
The article No. scheme is presented here merely for information
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/13
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
General
Approved for all safety applications because of its compliance
with the highest safety requirements (SIL 3 and PL e)
Universally usable thanks to adjustable parameters
Usable worldwide thanks to globally valid certificates
Compact SIRIUS design
Device connectors with standard rail mounting for flexible
connectability and expandability
Removable terminals for greater plant availability
Yellow terminal covers clearly identify the device as a safety
component
Sensor cable length up to 2 000 m allows it to be used in
large-scale plants
Relay outputs
Different voltages can be switched through the floating
contacts
Higher currents can be switched with relay contacts
Electronic outputs
Wear-free
Suitable for operation in fast switching applications
Good electrical endurance
Power outputs (3SK1213 output expansion)
Different voltages can be switched through the floating
contacts
The power relay contacts allow currents of up to 10 A
AC-15/DC-13 to be connected.
High mechanical and electrical endurance
Protective separation between enabling circuits and between
enabling circuits and electronics
Can be expanded by adding the 3RM1 motor starter
11
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays are ideal for combining with the
3RM1 motor starters.
Combinations are made by means of
SIRIUS device connectors (3SK1 Advanced) or
conventional wiring (3SK1 Standard and Advanced).
This makes collective shutdown very easy in assemblies. The
wiring, and ultimately the shutting down of the control supply
voltage for the expansion components in EMERGENCY-STOP
situations, is performed via the device connector. There is no further need for complex looping of the connecting cables between
the safety relay and the motor starters.
The 3RM1 motor starter combines the benefits of semiconductor

technology and relay technology. This combination is also
known as hybrid technology.
The hybrid technology in the motor starter is characterized by
the following features:
The inrush current in the case of motorized loads is conducted
briefly via the semiconductors. Advantages include protection
of the relay contacts and a long service life due to low wear.
The uninterrupted current is conducted via relay contacts.
Advantages include lower heat losses compared with the
semiconductor.
Shutdown is implemented again via the semiconductor.
The contacts are only slightly exposed to arcs, and this results
in a longer service life.
Integrated overload protection
Note:
SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starters, see Chapter 8 "Load Feeders and
Motor Starters for Use in the Control Cabinet" "SIRIUS 3RM1
motor starters".
3ZY1 device connectors
Using 3ZY1 device connectors to combine devices reduces the
time required to configure and wire the components. At the same
time errors are avoided during wiring, and this considerably reduces the testing required for the fully-assembled application.
Microprocessor systems
Flexible use thanks to many different integrated functions
Easy parameterization using DIP switches on the front
High functional reliability based on extensive monitoring
functions
Operated by the machine control system
Also connection of non-contact sensors
(light arrays, light barriers etc.)
Configuration and stock keeping
Variable setting options by means of DIP switches, a wide
voltage range and a special power supply unit reduce the cost
of keeping stocks and the considerations involved in
configuration where the evaluation units to be selected are
concerned.
Spring-type terminal with push-in functionality
Push-in connections are a form of spring-type terminals allowing
fast wiring without tools for rigid conductors or conductors
As with other spring-type terminals, a screwdriver (with
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm blade) is required to disconnect the conductor. The same tool can also be used to wire fine-stranded or
stranded conductors with no end finishing.
Application
SIRIUS 3SK1 safety relays are used mainly in autonomous safety
applications which are not connected to a safety-related bus
system. Their function here is to evaluate the sensors and the
safety-related shutdown of hazards. Also they check and monitor the sensors, actuators and safety-related functions of the
safety relay.
11/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3SK1111,
3SK1211
3SK1112
3SK1120
3SK1121
3SK1122
3SK1213
3SK1220
mm
mm
mm
22.5
100
121.6
22.5
100
91.6
17.5
100
121.6
22.5
100
121.6
22.5
100
121.6
90
100
121.6
17.5
100
121.6
C
C
-25 +60
-40 +80
at height above sea level
maximum
2 000
Air pressure
According to
SN 31205
hPa
900 1 060
5 g/10 ms
10 g/11 ms
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Type
General data
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
Shock resistance
10 g/11 ms
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
5 ... 500 Hz: 0.75 mm
IP degree of protection of the

enclosure
IP20
Touch protection against

electric shock
Finger-safe
Insulation voltage rated value
300
50
300
50
300
50
Rated impulse withstand voltage
4 000
500
4 000
500
4 000
800
Safety integrity level (SIL)

SIL 3
Performance level(PL)
e
a
(EMC)
EMC emitted interference
20
IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-1,

class B
class A
Certificate of suitability
UL certification
TV approval
IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-1,

class B
class A
Yes
Yes
Type
3SK1111,
3SK1121.AB40,
3SK1211
3SK1112,
3SK1122
3SK1120
3SK1121.CB4.
3SK1213
3
3
6
10
11
T1 value for proof test interval or

service duration
Switching capacity
Switching capacity current of the
NO contacts of the relay outputs
At DC-13 at 24 V
At AC-15 at 230 V
A
A
5
5
---

semiconductor outputs
At DC-13 at 24 V
--
0.5
--
Notes:
3SK1230 technical specifications see
manual "3SK1 safety relays",
PFHd value of all 3SK1 devices < 4 x 10-9.

PFD value of all 3SK1 devices < 7 x 10-6.
To view the exact values, see manual "3SK1 safety relays",
More information
Manual "3SK1 safety relays" see
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/15
Siemens AG 2013

Basic Units
Overview
The 3SK111 Standard basic units are characterized by simple,
variable functionality. These devices are recommended for
safety functions requiring only a few sensors and a small number
of outputs on the safety relay.
Note:
Overview of the number of enabling and signaling circuits see
table "Number of safe outputs" page 11/11.
3SK111 Standard basic units

PS*
= 1 UNIT
PG
= 41L
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1112-1BB40
DT
At 50 Hz
At AC
At DC
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
(push-in)
Article No.
Price
per PU
11

with 3 relay enabling circuits
24
24
3SK1111-1AB30
3SK1111-2AB30
110 240
110 240
3SK1111-1AW20
3SK1111-2AW20
3SK1112-1BB40
3SK1112-2BB40
Standard basic units with

2 safety-related semiconductor outputs
--
11/16
24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Ilustrations are approximate
Siemens AG 2013

Basic Units
Overview
The 3SK112 Advanced basic units form an innovative system
landscape which allows even complex safety functions with
large numbers of sensors and outputs to be configured using
the device connectors. It is possible to increase both the number
of inputs for sensors and the number of enabling circuits of the
basic unit without the need for wiring between the devices.
Note:

PS*
= 1 UNIT
PG
= 41L
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1122-1AB40
Rated control Adjustable

Number of outputs
supply
OFF-delay time as contacting contact
voltage Us
blocks
at DC
instantaneous
switching
Number of outputs
as contactless
semiconductor contact
block
delayed instantaswitching neous

switching
DT
delayed
switching
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
(push-in)
Article No.
Price
per PU
11
3SK1122-1CB41
Advanced basic units with relay outputs

24
--
--
--
--
3SK1121-1AB40
3SK1121-2AB40
24
0.05 3
--
--
3SK1121-1CB41
3SK1121-2CB41
24
0.5 30
--
--
3SK1121-1CB42
3SK1121-2CB42
24
5 300
--
--
3SK1121-1CB44
3SK1121-2CB44
Advanced basic units with semiconductor outputs

24
--
--
--
--
3SK1120-1AB40
3SK1120-2AB40
24
--
--
--
--
3SK1122-1AB40
3SK1122-2AB40
24
0.05 3
--
--
3SK1122-1CB41
3SK1122-2CB41
24
0.5 30
--
--
3SK1122-1CB42
3SK1122-2CB42
24
5 300
--
--
3SK1122-1CB44
3SK1122-2CB44

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/17
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion Units
Output expansions
Overview
3SK1211 output expansion
The 3SK1211 output expansion is used to expand the enabling
circuits of a basic unit by adding another four enabling circuits.
These enabling circuits have a switching capacity of AC-15 5 A
at a switching voltage of 230 V. The devices can be connected
to any 3SK1 basic unit by means of wiring. In addition, the
devices with a 24 V DC control supply voltage can also be
connected to 3SK1 Advanced basic units by means of the
3ZY12 device connector.
The 3SK1213 output expansion is used to expand the enabling
circuits of a basic unit by adding three enabling circuits with high
switching capacity. These enabling circuits have a switching capacity of AC-15 10 A at a switching voltage of 230 V. The devices
can be connected to any 3SK1 basic unit by means of wiring. As
with 3SK1211, it is also possible to use the version with a control
supply voltage of 24 V DC on the 3ZY12 device connector.
Notes:
The 3SK121 output expansions can be used for Standard and

Advanced basic units.
It is only possible to expand the Standard basic units by means

of wiring. Advanced basic units can be expanded using the
3ZY12 device connector.
Benefits
Perfect adaptation of the number of inputs
Simple expansion of instantaneous and time-delayed outputs
of Advanced basic units by means of a device connector and
slide switch on an expansion module
Expansion with power contacts for high AC-15/DC-13 currents
in the control circuit
No enabling circuit required in the evaluation unit to control the

expansion modules
No wiring of the feedback circuit to the expansion units
Shorter installation times
Less configuring and testing required
11
PS*
= 1 UNIT
PG
= 41L
3SK1211-1BB00
3SK1213-1AB40
Number of outputs,
switching instantaneously
At 50 Hz
At AC
At DC
Suitability for use

3ZY12 device
connector
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
(push-in)
Article No.
Price
per PU
4RO output expansions

24
--
--
3SK1211-1BB00
3SK1211-2BB00
--
24
3SK1211-1BB40
3SK1211-2BB40
110 ... 240
110 ... 240
--
3SK1211-1BW20
3SK1211-2BW20
3RO output expansions

--
24
3SK1213-1AB40
3SK1213-2AB40
115
--
--
3SK1213-1AJ20
3SK1213-2AJ20
230
--
--
3SK1213-1AL20
3SK1213-2AL20
Available
-- Not available
11/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Expansion Units
Input expansions
Overview
3SK1220 input expansion
The 3SK1220 input expansion allows additional sensors to be
integrated easily and flexibly. The device monitors two singlechannel sensors or one 2-channel sensor, whatever their output
technology (floating/single-ended).
Note:
The 3SK1220 sensor expansion can only be connected to the
Advanced basic units by means of the 3ZY12 device connector.
3SK1230 power supply
The 3SK1230 power supply makes the 3SK1 devices universally
applicable, whatever control supply voltage is to be used.
Both devices can be combined with the 3SK112 basic units in
the Advanced series without the need for wiring.
Note:
Alongside the 3ZY12 device connector, the 3SK1230 power
supply can also be wired to act as a power supply for
3SK1 devices.
3SK1220 sensor expansion
With the input expansions

3SK1220 sensor expansion
3SK1230 power supply
the Advanced basic units can be made more flexible.
Benefits
Perfect adaptation of the number of inputs to suit the
application
Universally applicable thanks to the wide range of adjustable
parameters for sensor expansion (parameters as for
Advanced basic units)
A wide voltage range of 110 ... 240 V AC/DC allows the

devices to be used worldwide
Low stock keeping due to little variance
Flexible expansion of the number of sensors without the need
for additional wiring between the devices
11
PS*
= 1 UNIT
PG
= 41L
3SK1220-1AB40
3SK1230-1AW20
Version
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
(push-in)
Article No.
Price
per PU
3SK1220 input expansions

A
Sensor expansions
For safety-related expansion of the Advanced basic units by adding a further
two-channel sensor or two single-channel sensors
3SK1220-1AB40
3SK1220-2AB40
3SK1230-1AW20
3SK1230-2AW20
Note:
Can only be used in conjunction with 3ZY12 device connectors,
see page 11/20.
3SK1230 power supplies

Power supplies
For supplying Advanced basic units via 3ZY12 device connectors at
voltages of 110 ... 240 V AC/DC

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/19
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
The following accessories are available for SIRIUS 3SK1 safety
relays:
Device connectors
Terminals
Sealing covers
Push-in lugs
Coding pins
Inscription labels
Tools
Device connectors for 3SK112. and 3SK12..

The device connector allows several safety relays to be
interconnected. The last device in a series is placed on a device
termination connector. This closes the circuits that were configured with the connectors.
Device connectors are available in various versions specifically
for the 3SK1 safety relays:
For type
Device connectors
Device termination
connectors
3ZY12121BA00
(for 3SK1,
width
17.5 mm)
3ZY12122DA00
(for 3SK1,
width
22.5 mm)
3ZY12120FA01
(for 3SK1, set
for enclosure
> 45 mm)
3ZY12122BA00
(for 3SK1,
width
22.5 mm)

3SK1120
--
--
--
3SK1121
--
--
3SK1122
--
--
Output expansions
3SK1211
--
--
3SK1213
--
--
--
Input expansions
3SK1220
--
--
--
3SK1230
--
--
--
Available
-- Not available

Version
DT
Article No.
For 3SK1, width 17.5 mm
Device terminating connectors
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZY1212-1BA00
1 unit
41L
3ZY1212-2BA00
1 unit
41L
3ZY1212-2DA00
1 unit
41L
3ZY1212-0FA01
1 unit
41L
2-pole, screw terminals up to 2 x 1.5 mm or

1 x 2.5 mm
3ZY1121-1BA00
6 unit
41L
3-pole, screw terminals up to max. 2 x 1.5 mm2 or

1 x 2.5 mm
3ZY1131-1BA00
6 unit
41L
2-pole, push-in terminals up to max. 2 x 1.5 mm
3ZY1121-2BA00
6 unit
41L
3-pole, push-in terminals up to max. 2 x 1.5 mm
3ZY1131-2BA00
6 unit
41L
Device connectors for the electrical connection of SIRIUS devices in the

industrial standard mounting rail enclosure
11
Device connectors
3ZY1212-1BA00
Note:
Observe positions of the slide switch,
see manual "3SK1 safety relays",
Device terminating connector set
For 3SK1213, width > 45 mm,
comprising 3ZY1212-2FA00 and 3ZY1210-2AA00
3ZY1212-2DA00
Terminals for SIRIUS devices in the industrial standard mounting rail

enclosure
Removable terminals
3ZY1121-1BA00
11/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
17.5 mm
(for 3SK1120 and 3SK1220)
22.5 mm
(for all 3SK1 devices except 3SK1120 and 3SK1220)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZY1321-1AA00
5 units
41L
3ZY1321-2AA00
5 units
41L
Push-in lugs
For wall mounting
3ZY1311-0AA00
10 units
41L
Coding pins
For removable terminals of SIRIUS devices
in the industrial standard mounting rail enclosure;
enable the mechanical coding of terminals
3ZY1440-1AA00
12 units
41L

For SIRIUS devices
3RT2900-1SB20
100 340 units
41B
Accessories for enclosures

Sealing covers
3ZY1321-2AA00
3ZY1311-0AA00
3ZY1440-0AA00
IC01_00181
Blank labels
3RT2900-1SB20

Screwdrivers
3.0 mm x 0.5 mm, length approx. 200 mm,
A
3RA2908-1A
1 unit
41B
3RA2908-1A
see Chapter 16 "Appendix" "External Partners".
11
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/21
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3TK28 Safety Relays

3TK2826 with DIP switch:
OFF
Schematic
Without crossover
monitoring
NC/NO evaluation
2 x 1-channel
Debounce time for
sensor inputs 50 ms
SIRIUS 3TK282. safety relay
Safety relays with relay enabling circuits

safety with floating contacts
SIRIUS safety relays with relay enabling circuits are not only extremely space-saving thanks to their compact design, they also
offer extra safety with positively driven NO and feedback contacts in pairs. If one of the contact welds, the other assumes the
disconnection of the circuit. A positively driven feedback contact
(NC) then performs the fault detection of the faulty NO contact.
For two-hand operation consoles in press control systems, the
3TK2834 press control device serves as a safe evaluation unit,
see IC 10 AO.
3SK121. expansion units are available to increase the number of
enabling circuits, see page11/18.
3TK2826 safety relays
11
The 3TK2826 is a parameterizable safety relay. It is used as an

evaluation unit for typical safety chains (identify, evaluate,
realize). A number of functions can be set using the DIP
switches on the front. The 3TK2826 is therefore universally
applicable.
Safety sensors (e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP device) are connected
at the input side while contactors or valves for disconnecting the
"hazardous function" are connected at the output side. The
3TK2826 performs the monitoring of the sensor and actuator
functions as well as the safe disconnection of the outputs
(enabling circuits).
11/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
DIP
switch
No.
ON
Switching
mat operation
NC/NC evaluation
1 x 2-channel
Debounce time for

sensor inputs 10 ms
Sensor input
Monitored start
Cascading input
Monitored start
Without start test
Without automatic start

after mains failure
ON
1
2
3
Sensor input
Autostart
Cascading input
Autostart
With start test
Automatic start after

mains failure
(not permitted in connection with a start
test)
NSC0_00933a
Overview
Benefits
General
Compact design
Floating safe outputs
3TK2834 safety relay also suitable for press and punch
controls, see IC 10 AO
Can be used up to an ambient temperature of max. 70 C
Connection for all common sensor types
Many functions available in just one device
Status displays
Extended diagnostic capabilities
Approvals (EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508, UL/CSA)
Reporting of trip faults in the actuator circuit
Floating outputs
Wide-range device
Sensor condition saved in the event of voltage failure
Siemens AG 2013


Type
Basic units
3TK2826
24 V DC
Wide voltage range
24 V DC tv
Wide voltage range tv
Sensors
Inputs
Electronic
--
--
With contacts
Magnetically operated switch

(Reed contacts)
Safety mats
Auto
Monitored
Cascading
input
24 V DC
Key-operated switch
--
--
--
--
Stop category 0
4 NO
4 NO
2 NO
2 NO
Stop category 1
--
--
2 NO
2 NO
Stop category 0
--
--
--
--
Stop category 1
--
--
--
-1 NO + 2 NC
Start
Enabling circuit,
floating
Enabling circuit,
electronic
Floating
1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
Electronic
--
--
Standards
IEC 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 61508
IEC 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 61508
IEC 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 61508
IEC 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 61508
TV, UL, CSA
TV, UL, CSA
TV, UL, CSA
TV, UL, CSA
SIL level max.

according to
IEC 61508
Performance level PL
according to
ISO 13849-1
7.8 x 10-9 1/h
7.8 x 10-9 1/h
7.8 x 10-9 1/h
7.8 x 10-9 1/h
--
Test certificates
Probability of
a dangerous failure
per hour (PFHd)
24 V DC
--
24 V AC/DC
--
--
--
--
24 V AC
--
--
--
--
115 V AC
--
--
--
--
230 V AC
--
--
--
--
24 ... 240 V AC/DC
--
--
Available
-- Not available
1)
Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts, otherwise Category 3.
2)
For expansion of Siemens safety products.
3)
Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts, otherwise SIL level 2 or

Performance level PL d.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/23
11
Signaling outputs
Siemens AG 2013

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41L
3TK2826-1BB40
3TK2826-2BB40

voltage Us
Start
OFF-delay tv
DT
Article No.
V
DT
Screw terminals
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Basic units
With floating enabling circuits
3TK2826
24 DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
Auto/monitored
Auto/monitored
---
A
A
3TK2826-1BB40
3TK2826-1CW30
A
C
3TK2826-2BB40
3TK2826-2CW30
With time-delayed enabling circuits

3TK2826 tv
24 DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
Auto/monitored
Auto/monitored
0.05 ... 3
0.05 ... 3
C
C
3TK2826-1BB41
3TK2826-1CW31
C
C
3TK2826-2BB41
3TK2826-2CW31
24 DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
Auto/monitored
Auto/monitored
0.5 ... 30
0.5 ... 30
A
C
3TK2826-1BB42
3TK2826-1CW32
C
C
3TK2826-2BB42
3TK2826-2CW32
24 DC
24 ... 240 AC/DC
Auto/monitored
Auto/monitored
5 ... 300
5 ... 300
C
C
3TK2826-1BB44
3TK2826-1CW34
C
C
3TK2826-2BB44
3TK2826-2CW34
Note:
11
For additional 3TK28 safety relays see

Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014.
11/24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Benefits
Permanent function checking

No wear because switched electronically
High switching frequency
Long electrical endurance
Evaluation of electronic sensors
Sensor lead up to max. 2 000 m
Cascading possible
Compact design, low weight
Approved for the world market

Two sensor inputs (e. g. EMERGENCY-STOP, protective door)
Also suitable for protective door interlocking and OK button
Two electronic and two relay enabling circuits
SIRIUS 3TK284. safety relay
Fast, safe and wear-free switching

Evaluation units with electronic components are becoming increasingly established in safety applications, as a considerably
higher number of starting operations and electrical life of the devices is achieved with permanent functional checks and consistently wear-free operation. The compact and light devices also
permit series connection or normal operational switching, e. g.
through a PLC.
If several enabling circuits or floating enabling circuits are required in one application, the units can be expanded with expansion units from the 3SK121. series, see page 11/18.
3TK2845 multi-function units
11
Up to now, standard combinations of safety applications such as

EMERGENCY-STOP and protective door monitoring were possible only by using several individual safety relays. 3TK2845 combines several functions in a single unit. Two electronic and two
relay enabling circuits ensure safe disconnection in just a few
actions, quickly and cheaply.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/25
Siemens AG 2013


Type
Multi-function units
3TK2845
"Automatic and "Automatic and "Monitored
monitored start" monitored start" start"
tv
"Monitored
start"
OK button
tv
OK button
"Spring-type
interlocking"
"Magnet-locked
interlocking"
tv
tv
tv
Sensors
Inputs
Electronic
With contacts
Magnetically
operated switch
(Reed contacts)
Safety mats
--
--
--
--
Auto
--
--
--
--
Monitored
Cascading
input
24 V DC
Key-operated switch
Start
Enabling circuit,
floating
Stop category 0
2 NO
1 NO
2 NO
1 NO
2 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Stop category 1
--
1 NO
--
1 NO
--
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Stop category 0
Stop category 1
--
--
--
Floating
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Electronic
Enabling circuit,
electronic
Signaling outputs
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100, EN ISO 12100,
EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1, EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
IEC 61508
Standards
11
Test certificates
SIL level max.
according to
IEC 61508
according to
EN ISO 13849-1
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
6.9 x 10-9 1/h
Probability of a
dangerous failure
per hour (PFHd)
Rated control
supply voltage
24 V DC
Available
-- Not available
1)
The outputs are only safe when an external contactor is used.
11/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41L
3TK2845-1HB40
voltage Us
3TK2845-1HB41
Start
3TK2845-2DB40
OFF-delay tv
DT
Article No.
V
DT
Screw terminals
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Multi-function units
3TK2845 "Automatic and monitored start"
24 DC
1/1
--
3TK2845-1HB40
3TK2845-2HB40
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
C
C
C
3TK2845-1HB41
3TK2845-1HB42
3TK2845-1HB44
C
C
C
3TK2845-2HB41
3TK2845-2HB42
3TK2845-2HB44
--
3TK2845-1DB40
3TK2845-2DB40
--/2
--/2
--/2
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
C
C
C
3TK2845-1DB41
3TK2845-1DB42
3TK2845-1DB44
C
C
C
3TK2845-2DB41
3TK2845-2DB42
3TK2845-2DB44
1/1
--
3TK2845-1EB40
3TK2845-2EB40
1/1
1/1
1/1
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
C
C
C
3TK2845-1EB41
3TK2845-1EB42
3TK2845-1EB44
C
C
C
3TK2845-2EB41
3TK2845-2EB42
3TK2845-2EB44
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
C
C
C
3TK2845-1FB41
3TK2845-1FB42
3TK2845-1FB44
C
C
C
3TK2845-2FB41
3TK2845-2FB42
3TK2845-2FB44
0.05 ... 3
0.5 ... 30
5 ... 300
C
C
C
3TK2845-1GB41
3TK2845-1GB42
3TK2845-1GB44
C
C
C
3TK2845-2GB41
3TK2845-2GB42
3TK2845-2GB44
3TK2845 tv "Automatic and monitored start"

24 DC
1/1
1/1
1/1
3TK2845 "Monitored start"

24 DC
--/2
3TK2845 tv "Monitored start"

24 DC
3TK2845 "OK button"

24 DC
3TK2845 tv "OK button"
24 DC
3TK2845 tv "Spring-type interlocking"

24 DC
--/2
--/2
--/2
24 DC
--/2
--/2
--/2
11
3TK2845 tv "Solenoid interlocking"
Note:
For additional 3TK28 safety relays see
Catalog Add-On IC 10 AO 2014.

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/27
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Benefits
3TK2810-0 standstill monitors
No additional sensors required
Signaling of faults with diagnostics display
Standstill time can be set
Unit can be used with frequency converters
3TK2810-1 speed monitors
Menu-prompted, easy parameterization
Direct diagnosis on the display means shorter downtimes
thanks to early fault detection
Integrated protective door monitoring means greater safety
because access to the plant is allowed only in the safe state
Suitable for all standard sensors, i.e. high flexibility
SIRIUS 3TK2810 safety relays
3TK2810-0 standstill monitors

The standstill monitor increases safety in hazardous areas.
Without a sensor, it detects motor stoppage from the residual
magnetization of the rotating motor. When an adjustable
threshold value is undershot, it uses its outputs to allow access
to hazardous areas, for example by unlocking a protective door.
3TK2810-1 speed monitors
The speed monitor combines two safety functions in one unit by
continuously monitoring machines and plants for standstill and
speed.
Through simple parameterization and permanent diagnosis on
the display, faults can be quickly remedied at any time often
before they cause plant downtimes.
11
In addition to standstill and speed monitoring, the unit also features an integrated monitoring function of a protective door with
spring-type interlocking. Therefore, an additional evaluation unit
is not needed.
11/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013


Type
Type
Standstill monitors Speed monitors

3TK2810-0
Standstill monitors Speed monitors
3TK2810-1
3TK2810-0
Sensors
3TK2810-1
Signaling outputs
Inputs
Floating
Electronic
--
Electronic
1 CO
2
With contacts
--
Standards
Without sensors
(measuring inputs)
--
Magnetically operated switch

(Reed contacts)
--
--
IEC 60204-1,
EN ISO 12100,
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 61508
IEC 60947-5-1,
EN ISO 13849-1,
IEC 60204-1,
IEC 61508
TV, UL, CSA
TV, UL, CSA
Safety mats
--
SIL level max.

according to
IEC 61508
1.5 x 10-8 1/h
3.38 x 10-9 1/h
24 V DC
230 V AC
--
400 V AC
--
120 ... 240 V AC/DC
--
Test certificates
--
Start
Auto
Monitored
--
Cascading
input
24 V DC
according to
ISO 13849-1
--
--
Probability of a dangerous
failure per hour (PFHd)
--
Key-operated switch
Rated control
supply voltage
--
Enabling circuit,
floating
Stop category 0
3 NO + 1 NC
Stop category 1
--
--
Stop category 0
--
--
Stop category 1
--
--
--
Enabling circuit,
electronic
Available
-- Not available
11
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41L
3TK2810-0BA01
3TK2810-0GA02

voltage Us
OFF-delay
tv
3TK2810-1BA41
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Standstill monitors
3TK2810-0
24 DC
230 AC
400 AC
0.2 ... 6
0.2 ... 6
0.2 ... 6
B
C
C
3TK2810-0BA01
3TK2810-0GA01
3TK2810-0JA01
C
C
C
3TK2810-0BA02
3TK2810-0GA02
3TK2810-0JA02
A
B
3TK2810-1BA41
3TK2810-1KA41
A
B
3TK2810-1BA42
3TK2810-1KA42
B
B
3TK2810-1BA41-0AA0
3TK2810-1KA41-0AA0
B
B
3TK2810-1BA42-0AA0
3TK2810-1KA42-0AA0
Speed monitors
3TK2810-1 for NPN/PNP proximity switches and encoders
24 DC
120 ... 240 AC/DC
0 ... 600
0 ... 600
3TK2810-1 for NAMUR proximity switches and encoders

24 DC
120 ... 240 AC/DC
0 ... 600
0 ... 600

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/29
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Accessories
Use
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
For 3TK28

For SIRIUS devices
D
3RT1900-1SB20
100
340 units
41B

3RT1900-1SB60
100 3 060 units
41B
3RT1900-1SD60
100 3 060 units
41B
For 3TK28
Push-in lugs
For screw fixing,
3RP1903
10 units
41H
For 3TK2826
Sealable covers
3TK2826-0DA00-0HA0
5 units
41L
For 3TK28
Sealing foils
3TK2820-0AA00
1 unit
41L
15-pole
3TK2810-1A
1 unit
41L
25-pole
3TK2810-1B
1 unit
41L
Connection cables
C
For connecting the speed monitor to the
3TK2810-1A or 3TK2810-1B adapter
3TK2810-0A
1 unit
41L
1 unit
41B
Blank labels

NSB0_01429b
For 3TK28
3RT1900-1SB20
Adhesive labels
For SIRIUS devices
3RP1903
Adapters and connection cables for speed monitors

For 3TK2810-1
Adapters
For connecting encoders of type
Siemens/Heidenhain
3TK2810-1A
3TK2810-1B
11
For 3TK2810-1
3TK2810-0A

For auxiliary circuit
connections
Screwdrivers
terminals 3.0 mm x 0.5 mm, length
approx. 200 mm, titanium gray/black, A
partially insulated
3RA2908-1A
3RA29 08-1A
1)

murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH see Chapter 16,
"Appendix" "External Partners".
11/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
The service-proven insulation piercing method of AS-Interface
enables not only the distributed expansion of the project data
volume using safe AS-i outputs, safe AS-i sensors and other
MSS Advanced or safety monitors (F cross traffic) but also a
highly flexible adaptation of the application, e.g. very fast connection of AS-i outputs such as LV HRC command devices,
position switches with and without interlock, or light curtains.
Safety-related disconnection using MSS or by distributed means
using safe AS-i outputs and the formation of switch-off groups
can be realized very easily. The same applies for any subsequent modifications. They are now easily possible by
re-addressing, i.e. re-wiring is no longer necessary.
The AS-i bus is connected directly to the central unit.
MSS ASIsafe
The MSS ASIsafe basic and MSS ASIsafe extended central units
are a logical development of the AS-i safety monitors based on
the 3RK3 Modular Safety System.
The 3RK3 Modular Safety System (MSS) is a freely parameterizable modular safety relay. Depending on the external circuit
version, safety-related applications up to Performance Level e
according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to IEC 62061
can be realized.
The modular safety relay enables the interconnection of several
The comprehensive error and status diagnostics provides the
possibility of finding errors in the system and localizing signals
from sensors. Plant downtimes can be reduced as the result.
The MSS comprises the following system components:
Central units
Expansion modules
Interface modules
Diagnostics modules
Parameterization software
Accessories
Central units
MSS Basic
The 3RK3 Basic central unit is used wherever more than three
safety functions need to be evaluated and the wiring parameterization of safety relays would involve great cost and effort. It
reads in inputs, controls outputs and communicates through an
interface module with higher-level control systems. An application's entire safety program is processed in the central unit. The
3RK3 Basic central unit is the lowest expansion level and fully
functional on its own, without the optional expansion modules.
MSS Advanced
The 3RK3 Advanced central unit is the consistent expansion
of the Basic central unit with the functionality of an AS-i safety
monitor. In addition to having a larger volume of project data and
scope of functionality it can be integrated in AS-Interface and
therefore make use of the many different possibilities offered by
this bus system. The function can be optionally activated in the
central unit.
Like MSS Advanced, MSS ASIsafe detects in a comparable

way to the safety monitors safe sensor technology on the AS-i
bus and switches actuators off in a safety-related manner via a
configurable safety logic. It stands out by virtue of its greater
project data volume, wider range of functions and the possibility
of increasing the integrated I/O project data volume by means of
expansion modules from the MSS system family. In this case the
range of functions, such as the number and type of the logic
elements that can be interconnected, is equivalent to that of
MSS Advanced.
Expansion modules
With the optional expansion modules, both safety-related and
standard, the system is flexibly adapted to the required safety
applications.
Interface modules
The DP interface module is used for transferring diagnostics
data and device status data to a higher-level PROFIBUS network, e.g. for purposes of visualization using HMI. When using
the Basic central unit, 32-bit cyclic data can be exchanged with
the control system. If an Advanced/ASIsafe central unit is used,
the number is doubled to 64-bit cycle data. The acyclic calling
of diagnostics data is possible with both central units.
Diagnostics modules
Faults, e.g. crossover, are indicated directly on the diagnostics
display. The fault is diagnosed directly in plain text by the
detailed alarm message. The device is fully functional upon
delivery. No programming is required.
Parameterization software
Using the MSS ES graphical parameterization tool it is very
easy to create the safety functions as well as their logical links
on the PC. You can define disconnection ranges, ON-delays,
OFF-delays and other dependencies for example.
MSS ES also offers comprehensive functions for diagnostics and
commissioning. Documentation of the MSS hardware configuration and the parameterized logic is created automatically.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/31
11
Siemens AG 2013

General data
SIMATIC
Light
array
SIMATIC
Light
array
Position
EMER- switch
GENCYSTOP
Position
EMER- switch
GENCYSTOP
PROFINET
MSS with the

Advanced
central unit
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS
IC01_00137a
IC01_00138a
DP/AS-i
and
Advanced
MSS with the

Basic central
unit
AS-Interface
Contactors
System configuration with the Basic central unit
AS-i safety
monitor
Light array
AS-i
power
supply
unit
EMERGENCYSTOP
Position
switch
ASIsafe
module
System configuration with the Advanced central unit
Controls
with
AS-i master
MSS with ASIsafe
AS-i
power
supply
unit
Light array
EMERGENCYSTOP
I/O modules
EMERGENCYSTOP
Controls
with
AS-i master
I/O modules
AS-Interface
AS-Interface
Safety
monitor
11
Load feeders
with contactors
Further development of the system design: from the safety monitor to MSS Advanced/MSS ASIsafe
11/32
Siemens IC 10 2014
Contactors
MSS Advanced/
ASIsafe
Load feeders
with contactors
IC01_00171
Siemens AG 2013

General data
MSS with ASIsafe
AS-i
power
supply
unit
I/O module
Light array EMERGENCYSTOP
PROFINET
Controls
with AS-i master
AS-Interface
Safety-related and
Safety-related
standard field modules position switch
with door interlocking
MSS ASIsafe
basic
Pushbutton and
indicator light,
EMERGENCY-STOP
MSS ASIsafe
extended
F cross traffic via AS-i
Safety-related and
standard cabinet
modules
MSS Advanced
F cross traffic via AS-i
Parameterization
software
MSS ES
Load feeders with contactors

IC01_00173
Load feeders with fail-safe

distributed AS-i outputs


MSS with ASIsafe
Article No. scheme

Modular safety system
1st - 4th
5th 6th 7th
@@@@
Device type
Device type
Connection type
Communications
@
@
Version
Example
3RK3
3RK3
11
Note:
article numbers.
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/33
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
Communication through PROFIBUS

The 3RK3 Modular Safety System can be connected to
PROFIBUS through the DP interface and exchange data with
higher-level control systems.
The MSS supports among other things:
Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s
Automatic baud rate detection
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
Exchange of 32-bit cyclic data with MSS Basic or 64-bit cyclic
data with MSS Advanced/MSS ASIsafe
Diagnostics using data record invocations
AS-Interface communication
Using the Advanced and ASIsafe central units, the
3RK3 Modular Safety System can be integrated in AS-Interface.
MSS can read in up to 31 AS-i sensors
Up to 12 preprocessed signals per MSS can be placed on the
AS-i bus, e.g. for F cross traffic or for disconnecting safe
AS-i outputs
Safe cross traffic between MSS Advanced and
MSS ASIsafe or between other AS-i safety monitors
Standard signals, e.g. for acknowledgment, can also be
applied to the bus
Industrial Ethernet
Operational
control
Controls
z. B. SIMATIC S7-300
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
IE AS-i
Link
SIMATIC
S7-1200
MSS
MSS
ASIsafe
ASIsafe
DP AS-i
Link
MSS
ASIsafe
IC01_00167
More functionality and flexibility through freely configurable

safety logic
Suitable for all safety applications thanks to compliance with
the highest safety standards in production automation
For use all over the world through compliance with all
product-relevant, globally established certifications
Modular hardware configuration
Parameterization by means of software instead of wiring
Removable terminals for greater plant availability
Distributed collection from sensors and disconnection of
actuators through AS-Interface
All MSS ES logic functions are also usable for AS-Interface,
e. g. muting, interlocking protective door
Up to 12 independent safe switch-off groups on the AS-i bus
Volume of project data can be greatly increased by means of
AS-Interface
Up to 50 two-channel enabling circuits per system
Safety-related data
Standard data
Safety cell
Integration of MSS into AS-Interface as ASIsafe Solution local
MSS with communication function see page 11/39 onwards.

11
More information on AS-Interface with ASIsafe see also

Chapter 2, "Industrial Communication".
More information on MSS ES see also Chapter 14 "Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS".
11/34
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Application
The 3RK3 Modular Safety System can be used for all safety-related requirements in the manufacturing industry and offers the
following safety functions:
Symbol
MSS Basic MSS Advanced,

MSS ASIsafe
Evaluation of any binary signals
from single-channel and
two-channel sensors
XOR
NAND
Switching mats
Evaluation of safety shutdown

mats with NC contacts and/or
crossover detection
Protective door monitoring
Evaluation of protective door

signals and/or protective flap
signals
!
NOR
!
Negation
Counter 0 -> 1
Counter 1 -> 0
Counter 0 -> 1/1 -> 0
With ON-delay
With OFF-delay
Clock-pulsing
Monitored start
Manual start
--
--
Flip-flop
Counting functions
--
Protective door interlocking
Evaluation of protective doors

with interlock and of the actuation/release of this interlock
OK buttons
Timer functions
Evaluation of OK buttons with

NO contact
Two-hand operator controls
Evaluation of two-hand operator

controls
ESPE monitoring
Evaluation of non-contact
protective devices, e.g. light
curtains and laser scanners
Start functions
--
Muting
Output functions
Standard output
Operating mode selector

switches
F output
Evaluation of operating mode

selector switches with
NO contacts
Logic element for monitoring of

AS-i input slaves
AND
OR
Evaluation of EMERGENCYSTOP devices with positiveopening contacts
Monitoring AS-i
(AS-i 2F-DI)
MSS Advanced,
MSS ASIsafe
Logic operation functions

--
EMERGENCY-STOP
Temporary bridging of
non-contact protective devices,
2/4 sensors in parallel, 4 sensors
in sequence
MSS Basic
AS-i output function

&
AS-I
--
4
4
Q
AS-I
Status functions
Element status
Available
-- Not available
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/35
11
Universal monitoring
Symbol
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Central units and expansion modules
Type
Central units
Basic
Expansion modules
Advanced ASIsafe
basic
ASIsafe
4/8F-DI
extended
2/4 F-DI 2/4 F-DI

1/2 F-RO 2F-DO
4/8 F-RO
4 F-DO 8 DI
8 DO
Screw terminals
mm
45 x 111 x 124
22.5 x 111 x 124
45 x 111 x 124
22.5 x 111 x 124
mm
45 x 113 x 124
22.5 x 113 x 124
45 x 113 x 124
22.5 x 113 x 124
g/ms
15/11
Device data
Shock resistance
(sine pulse)
Touch protection
acc. to EN 50274 or
IEC 60529
IP20
Permissible mounting
position
Vertical mounting surface (+10/-10), deviating mounting positions

are permitted for reduced ambient temperature
Minimum distances
For heat dissipation through convection from the devices 25 mm to the ventilation openings (top and bottom)
Permissible ambient
temperature
During operation
During storage and
transport
C
C
-20 ... +60

-40 ... +85
Number of sensor
inputs (1-channel)
Fail-safe
Not fail-safe
8
--
8
--
2
6
4
4
8
--
4
--
4
--
---
---
-8
---
Number of test outputs
--
--
--
--
-1
-1
-1
-1
---
2
--
---
8
--
---
---
---
-1
-1
-1
-1
---
---
-2
---
-4
---
8
--
300
300
300
160
160
160
400
135
125
160
Number of outputs
Relay outputs
- Single-channel
- Two-channel
Electronic outputs
- Single-channel
- Two-channel
Weight
300
above sea level
2 000
Environmental data
IEC 60947-5-1
11
EMC interference
immunity
Vibrations
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 ... 500
0.75
IEC 60068-2-78
Climatic withstand
capability
V
voltage Us
24 DC 15 %1)
Operating range
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Rated insulation
voltage Ui
300
300
300
300
50
300
50
300
50
50
50
Rated impulse
voltage Uimp
kV
500
500
500
500
500
Total current input
mA
185
185
185
185
60
85
85
140
78
60
Rated power at Us
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
1.5
4.8
1.9
1.5
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
---
2
1
---
2
1
---
---
---
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
--
--
--
--
0.5
10 x 106
10 x 106
10 x 106
--
10 x 106
--
10 x 106
--
--
--
(relay outputs)
AC-15 at 230 V
A
DC-13 at 24 V
A
(semiconductor outputs)
DC-13 at 24 V
A
during rated operation
1)
Operat- 10 x 106
ing
cycles
(relay)
Device current supply through a power supply unit according to IEC 60536 protection class III (SELV or PELV).
11/36
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
Central units
Expansion modules
Basic
Advanced ASIsafe
basic
ASIsafe
4/8F-DI
extended
2/4 F-DI 2/4 F-DI

1/2 F-RO 2F-DO
4/8 F-RO 4 F-DO
8 DI
8 DO
(cont.)
Switching frequency z
at rated operational
current
1/h
1 000
1 000
1 000
1 000
--
1 000
1 000
360
1 000
--
1 000
Conventional thermal
current Ith
2/1.5
2/1.5
2/1.5
2/1.5
--
--
0.5
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
---
4
6
---
4
6
---
---
---
5.14 x 10 -9 3.8 x 10-9

with AS-i,
2.8 x 10-9
without
AS-i
1.28 x 10 -5 1.7 x 10 -4
3.8 x 10-9
with AS-i,
2.8 x 10-9
without
AS-i
1.7 x 10 -4
3.8 x 10-9 1.89 x

with AS-i, 10-9
2.8 x 10-9
without
AS-i
1.7 x 10 -4 4.29 x
10-6
3.79 x
10-9
2.7 x
10-9
7.15 x
10-9
3.18 x
10-9
--
--
5.85 x
10-6
8.34 x
10-6
4.36 x
10-5
2.2 x
10-5
--
--
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
--
--
100
--
1 000
1 000
1 000
1 000
1 000
1 000
1 000
--
--
1 000
--
nF
330
330
330
330
330
330
330
--
--
330
--
Protection for output

contacts
Fuse links
LV HRC Type 3NA,
DIAZED Type 5SB,
NEOZED Type 5SE
Ooperational class gG A
Operational class quick A
Safety specifications
Probability of a
dangerous failure
Per hour (PFHd)
1/h
On demand (PFD)
Cable length from

terminal to terminal
With Cu 1.5 mm2
and 150 nF/km
Conductor capacity
11
Parameters for cables

Line resistance
Siemens IC 10 2014
11/37
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Interface and diagnostics modules
Type
Interface modules
Diagnostics modules
Screw terminals
mm
45 x 111 x 124
96 x 60 x 44
mm
45 x 113 x 124
--
g/ms
15/11
Device data
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 or IEC 60529
IP20
Vertical mounting surface (+10/-10), deviating mounting positions

are permitted for reduced ambient temperature
Minimum distances
For heat dissipation through convection from the devices 25 mm to the ventilation
openings (top and bottom)

During operation
C
C
-20 ... +60

-40 ... +85
Weight
270
2 000
90
Environmental data
IEC 60947-5-1

Vibrations
Frequency
Amplitude
Hz
mm
5 ... 500
0.75
IEC 60068-2-78
Climatic withstand capability
24 DC 15 %
24 DC 15 % via connecting cable to

the central unit
0.85 ... 1.15 x Us
Operating range
50
Rated impulse voltage Uimp
kV
500
Total current input
mA
--
24
Rated power at Us
--
0.6
More information
11
System manual "3RK3 Modular Safety System" see

11/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Central units

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 42B
3RK3111-1AA10
3RK3121-1AC00
3RK3122-1AC00
3RK3131-1AC10
Version
DT
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price per
PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Central units
3RK3 Basic
3RK3111-1AA10
3RK3111-2AA10
3RK3131-1AC10
3RK3131-2AC10
3RK3121-1AC00
3RK3121-2AC00
3RK3122-1AC00
3RK3122-2AC00
Central unit with safety-related inputs and outputs

8 fail-safe inputs
Max. 7 expansion modules can be connected
Note:
Memory module 3RK3931-0AA00 is included in the scope of supply.
3RK3 Advanced
Central units for connecting to AS-Interface
with safety-related inputs and outputs
and extended scope of functions
8 fail-safe inputs
Note:
3RK3 ASIsafe basic
11

2 fail-safe inputs
6 non-fail-safe inputs
No expansion modules can be connected
Note:
3RK3 ASIsafe extended
4 fail-safe inputs
4 non-fail-safe inputs
Note:
Notes:
More information on MSS see
www.siemens.com/sirius-mss.
More information on AS-Interface see
Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication".

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/39
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion modules, interface modules,
operating and monitoring modules

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 42B
3RK3211-1AA10
3RK3221-1AA10
3RK3231-1AA10
3RK3242-1AA10
3RK3251-1AA10
Version
3RK3311-1AA10
3RK3321-1AA10
DT
3RK3611-3AA00
3RK3511-1BA10
DT
Screw terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Spring-type
terminals
Article No.
Price
per PU
Expansion modules
4/8 F-DI
Safety-related input modules
8 inputs
3RK3211-1AA10
3RK3211-2AA10
3RK3221-1AA10
3RK3221-2AA10
3RK3231-1AA10
3RK3231-2AA10
3RK3251-1AA10
3RK3251-2AA10
3RK3242-1AA10
3RK3242-2AA10
3RK3321-1AA10
3RK3321-2AA10
3RK3311-1AA10
3RK3311-2AA10
3RK3511-1BA10
3RK3511-2BA10
3RK3611-3AA00
2/4 F-DI 1/2 F-RO

4 inputs
2/4 F-DI 2F-DO
4 inputs
4/8 F-RO
4 F-DO
8 DI
11
Standard input module

8 inputs
8 DO
Standard output module
8 electronic outputs
Interface modules
DP interface
PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS 485,
32-bit cyclic data exchange with Basic central unit
or 64-bit with Advanced central unit,
acyclic exchange of diagnostics data

Diagnostics module
--
Notes:
Connection cable required, see page 11/41.
More information on MSS see
www.siemens.com/sirius-mss.
More information on AS-Interface see
Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication"
11/40
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Connection cables (essential accessory)

Connection cable
For connection of
3UF7932-0AA00-0
Central units
with expansion modules
or interface
module
Diagnostics
modules with
central unit or
interface
module
Length 0.025 m (flat)
3UF7930-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
--
Length 0.1 m (flat)
3UF7931-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
--
Length 0.3 m (flat)
3UF7935-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
--
Length 0.5 m (flat)
3UF7932-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
--
Length 0.5 m (round)
3UF7932-0BA00-0
1 unit
42J
--
3UF7937-0BA00-0
1 unit
42J
--
3UF7933-0BA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7950-0AA00-0
5 units
42J
3RK3931-0AA00
1 unit
42C
3UF7920-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3RP1903
1 10 units
41H
PC cables and adapters

RS 232 PC cables
for communication with 3RK3 through the system interface
USB PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0

for communication with 3RK3 through the system interface,
recommended for use in connection with 3RK3
USB/serial adapters
For connecting a RS 232 PC cable
to the USB interface of a PC
3UF7941-0AA00-0
Interface covers
Interface covers
For system interface
3UF7950-0AA00-0
Memory modules
Memory modules
11
For backing up the complete parameterization of the

3RK3 Modular Safety System without a PC/PG through
the system interface
3RK3931-0AA00
Door adapters
Door adapters
For external connection of the system interface,
e.g. outside a control cabinet
3UF7920-0AA00-0
Push-in lugs
e.g. on mounting plate, 2 units required per device
Can be used for 3RK3
3RP1903
Available
-- Not available
Note:
More accessories and components that can be combined with
MSS see Chapter 2 "Industrial Communication".

Siemens IC 10 2014
11/41
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Parameterization, start-up and diagnostics software for 3RK3
Runs under Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2 or 3),
(please order separately, see page 11/41)
Windows 7 32/64 Bit Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise
(Service Pack 1)
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1314-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42B
Powerpack for MSS ES 2008 Basic to Standard
3ZS1314-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42B
Powerpack for MSS ES 2008 Standard

to Premium
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42B
Modular Safety System ES 2008 Basic

Engineering software in limited-function version
for diagnostics purposes,
communication through the system interface
3ZS1314-4CC10-0YA5
Modular Safety System ES 2008 Standard

3ZS1314-5CC10-0YA5
Modular Safety System ES 2008 Premium

11
Engineering software, software and documentation on CD,

communication through PROFIBUS or the system interface,
online diagnostics via PROFIBUS,
creating, importing and exporting macros
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YA5

engineering software, license key on USB stick, Class A,
Note:
Description of the software versions see Chapter 14 "Planning,
Configuration and Visualization for SIRIUS".
11/42
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Position and Safety Switches

Price groups
PG 41K, 42A
12/4
12/14
12/20
12/24
12/28
12/32
12/36
12/40
12/44
12/47
12/52
12/54
12/55
12/58
12/63
12/65
12/67
12/68
12/69
12/73
12/74
12/75
12/76
12/78
12/79
12/80
Introduction
SIRIUS 3SE5 mechanical position
switches
General data
3SE5, plastic enclosures
- Enclosure width 31 mm
according to EN 50047;
Control cabinet type IP40
- Enclosure width 40 mm according to
EN 50041
- Ambient temperature up to -40 C
3SE5, metal enclosures
EN 50047
EN 50041
- Enclosure width 56 mm, XL
- Ambient temperature up to -40 C
- Compact design
3SE5, open-type design
Accessories and spare parts
SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 mechanical safety
switches
With separate actuator
General data
Accessories
With solenoid interlocking
General data
Accessories
Hinge switches
General data
12/82
12/84
12/86
12/90
12/91
12/92
12/93
12/94
12/95
12/96
12/97
12/98
SIRIUS 3SF1 mechanical safety

switches for AS-Interface
General data
Plastic enclosures
Metal enclosures
With separate actuator
General data
Plastic enclosures
Metal enclosures
Accessories
With solenoid interlocking
General data
Plastic enclosures
Metal enclosures
Hinge switches
Plastic enclosures
Metal enclosures
SIRIUS 3SE6 non-contact safety

switches
Magnet
12/99 3SE66, 3SE67 magnetically operated
switches
RFID
12/101 3SE63 RFID safety switches
Note:
Conversion tool,
e.g. from 3SE2 to 3SE5 see
12
12/2
12
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Overview
3SE523.,
3SE521.
3SF12.4
3SE524.,
3SF1244
3SE513.,
3SE511.,
3SF1114
3SE512.,
3SE516.
3SF1124
40 78 38
-
56 78 38
56 100 38 31 68 33
IP65,
IP66/IP67
IP66/IP67
Mounting and Operating
operating
points acc. to
points acc. to EN 50047
EN 50047
CE, UL, CSA, CCC
IP66/IP67
IP66/IP67
IP66/IP67
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NC
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NC
2 snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
Short stroke
With 2 2 mm contact gap
3 slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 2 NC; 2 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
1 NO + 2 NC; 2 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
Special features
LED status display
Increased corrosion protection
ASIsafe integrated
Insulation voltage Ui
Conventional thermal current Ithe
Connections
Cable entry
M12 connector socket,
4-, 5- or 8-pole
Connector socket, 6-pole + PE
Actuators
Rounded plungers and
roller plungers
Roller levers and angular roller levers
Spring rod
Twist levers and rod actuators
Fork lever
Hinge switches
Page
Complete units
Modular system
Ambient temperature 40 C
ASIsafe
1 NO + 2 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
2
(1 NO + 1 NC)
2
(1 NO + 1 NC)
---2
(1 NO + 2 NC)
--
-
--
400 V
6 A/10 A (3-/2-pole)
400 V
6 A/10 A (3-/2-pole)
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1
12
Approvals
Contact blocks
Available
12/2
31 68 33
-50 53 33
40 78 38
IP65,
IP66/IP67
IP66/IP67
Mounting and Operating
Operating
Mounting and Mounting and
operating
points acc. to points acc. to operating
operating
EN 50047
points acc. to points acc. to
EN 50041
EN 50047
EN 50041
CE, UL, CSA, CCC
CE, UL, CSA, CCC
-1 NO + 1 NC
----1 NO + 2 NC
400 V
6 A/10 A (3-/2-pole)
1 M20 1.5 2 M20 1.5 1 M20 1.5 3 M20 1.5 3 M20 1.5 1 M20 1.5 1 M20 1.5
--
--
--
--
--
---
--
-
---
----
12/44
12/45
12/50
--
12/78
--12/97
12/14, 12/32
12/18, 12/34
12/28, 12/48
12/84, 12/86
12/24
12/26
12/28
12/84
12/20, 12/36
12/22, 12/38
12/31, 12/49
12/88
12/40
12/42
12/50
12/88
-- Not available
Siemens IC 10 2014
3SE5132,
3SE5112,
3SF11.4
Safety
hinge switches
Position switches, standard

Enclosure
Plastic
Metal
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
3SE5232,
3SE5212,
3SF12.4
--
12/79
--12/98
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Compact
design
Enclosure
Plastic
Metal
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
-
30 .. ..,
40 .. ..
IP66/IP67
3SE5250
Open-type
3SE5232,
3SE5242,
3SF12.4
3SE5112,
3SE5122,
3SF11.4
30 48.5 20 31 68 33,
50 53 33
IP10 or IP20
IP65,
IP66/IP67
Mounting and Mounting
operating
acc. to
EN 50047
3SE63
Safety switches
with solenoid
interlocking
RFID safety
switches
40 78 38,
56 78 38
IP66/IP67
54 185 44
-25 91 22
IP66/IP67
IP69K
Mounting
acc. to
EN 50041
EN 1088
Category 4
acc. to ISO 13849-1,
PL e acc. to
ISO 13849-1,
SIL 3 acc. to
IEC 61508
CE, TV, UL, CSA1)
Safety switches
with separate actuator
3SE5322,
3SE5312,
3SF13.4
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1
--
Approvals
CE, UL, CSA, -CCC
CE, TV, UL, CSA, CCC
CE, TV, UL, CSA,

CCC
-1 NO + 1 NC
----
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NC
--
---
---
1 NO + 2 NC
2 (1 NO + 2 NC)
--
---
---
-2
Contact blocks / outputs

Short stroke
With 2 2 mm contact gap
Electron. safety outputs
Special features
LED status display
Increased corrosion protection
ASIsafe integrated
Insulation voltage Ui
Conventional thermal current Ithe
Connections
Cable entry
----
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 2 NC;
2 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
1 NO + 2 NC
--
----
----
--
400 V
6A
400 V
6A
400 V
6A
400 V
6A
---
--
--
3 M20 1.5
--
M12 connector socket, 4-, 5- or 8-pole

Molded cables
AS-Interface
Actuators
Plungers, twist levers
Separate actuators
Page
Complete units
Modular system
ASIsafe
--
----
1 M20 1.5,
2 M20 1.5
---
--
--
---
12/52
---
12/54
---
12/63, 12/65
-12/91
12/73, 12/74
-12/95, 12/96
-12/101
--
Available
-- Not available
1)
CCC not required for voltages < 36 V.
1 M20 1.5,
3 M20 1.5
12/64, 12/66
-12/92
12
3SE5413,
3SE5423
Note:
Safety characteristics see Chapter 16,
"Appendix" "Standards and Approvals".
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/3
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3SE5 Mechanical Position Switches

General data
Overview
The innovative SIRIUS 3SE5 position switches are modern in design, compact, modular and simple to connect. They save time
and increase flexibility during installation of a whole range of
switch variants. In principle it is possible to combine any enclosure with any operating mechanism, paying due consideration
to the EN 50041 and EN 50047 standards where necessary.
Complete units
Popular versions of the position switches in standard enclosures
are available as complete units.
Enclosure sizes
The 3SE5 switches are available in five different enclosure sizes
with 2 or 3 contacts and with the XL enclosure:
Open-type position switch IP20 or IP10
Plastic enclosures according to EN 50047, 31 mm wide, IP65,
1 cable entry
Metal enclosures according to EN 50047, 31 mm wide,
IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry
Plastic and metal enclosures according to EN 50041,
40 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry
Plastic enclosures, 50 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 2 cable entries
Metal enclosures, 56 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 3 cable entries
XL metal enclosures with 4 to 6 contacts, 56 mm wide,
IP66/IP67, 3 cable entries
Enclosure variants
3SE5 position switches with plastic and metal enclosures
Modular system
The 3SE5 series features a new modular system comprising different sizes of the basic switch and an actuator which must be
ordered separately. Thanks to the modular design of the switch
the user can select the right solution for his application from numerous versions and install it himself in a very short time.
An easy plug-in method enables fast replacement of the actuator heads.
Various basic switches can be selected for the enclosures of the

3SE5 series:
With contact blocks with two or three contacts (screw terminals) designed as slow-action or snap-action contacts; the
slow-action contacts also with make-before-break
Optional LED status display
With mounted four- or five-pole M12 connector socket
(available for the wide enclosures as an accessory for
self-assembly)
With 6-pole connector socket + PE on the metal enclosures
Versions with increased corrosion protection
Versions for operating temperature up to 40 C
AS-Interface version with integrated ASIsafe electronics for all
enclosure designs (see page 12/82)
Actuator variants
All operating mechanisms can be rotated around the axis in increments of 22.5. The following actuator variants are available:
Standard, rounded and roller plungers
Spring rod
Twist levers and rod actuators with twist actuator
Fork levers with twist actuator
12
The actuator rollers are available with various materials and

diameters.
Examples of selection options in the modular system
NSC0_00829
Design
All enclosure variants have an integrated chlorinated rubber
diaphragm (high functional safety in cold and aggressive
environments).
12/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
Twist actuator for twist levers and rod levers,

with setting of switching direction to right, left or right/left
(standard for all twist actuators except fork levers)
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Mounting
LED indicators
available for all enclosure sizes except for XL.
Easy plug-in method

for fast replacement of the actuator heads
The enclosures are supplied with an LED signaling indicator

(1 green + 1 yellow). This is the first time that optical signaling equipment is also available for small standard enclosures
according to EN 50047. The LED signaling indicators are implemented in 24 V DC and 230 V AC.
Open the cover (1)

Actuate the locking lever (2)
Replace the head (turnable by 16 x 22.5) (3)
Lock and close the cover (4)
Many different contact types
Quick-connect technology
Exchangeable two and three-pole contact blocks

for all enclosure sizes
For plastic enclosures with a width of 31 mm
The three-pole contact block with snap-action or slow-action

contacts is regularly available for all enclosure forms. The same
installation space is required as for a two-pole block. The version
with 1 NO + 2 NC offers for example more safety through redundant shutdowns (2 NC contacts) with simultaneous signaling
(NO contact). The three-pole blocks are also available with
make-before-break and with 2 NO + 1 NC.
These position switches can be wired quickly and easily as

an added customer benefit. The connecting cable is first connected to the terminals of the contact block and then guided
through a slit into the cable gland opening. The time saved
through this new connection method is approx. 20 to 25 %.
A cable gland with seal must be used with the quick-connect
method.
Contact reliability
The contact blocks ensure an extremely high contact stability.
This applies even when the devices are switching low voltages
and currents, e.g. 1 mA at 5 V DC.
Positive opening q
The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically,
positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to
as "positive opening".
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/5
12
IC01
_00
2 70
Optional LED indicators
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Safety position switches
Benefits
The 3SE5 position switches differ from the previous series
through the following new characteristics:
The modular design of the product range allows a number of
versions with a smaller number of bearing types for enclosures and operating mechanisms.
All actuators can be turned around the axis in increments of
22.5 (see picture, page 12/5).
Rounded and roller plungers according to EN 50041 with
3 mm overtravel (total travel 9 mm) for greater tolerance when
switching.
All enclosure sizes now also including the small enclosure
31 mm wide are optionally available with an LED signaling
indicator (see picture, page 12/5).
All enclosure variants have an integrated chlorinated rubber
diaphragm (high functional safety in cold and aggressive
environments).
All contact blocks are replaceable (see page 12/56).
The three-pole contact blocks are available for all enclosure
sizes (see picture, page 12/5).
Elements with 1 NO + 2 NC slow-action contacts with makebefore-break and 2 NO + 1 NC.
The short-stroke contact block 1 NO + 1 NC improves the precision of the switching operation through a reduced actuation
path.
The contact block with 1 NO + 1 NC snap-action contacts with
2 x 2 mm contact opening is suitable for simultaneous disconnection and signaling, particularly in the elevator industry.
XL metal enclosures for accommodating two 2- or 3-pole contact blocks.
The plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm has simple and
fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from
approx. 20 to 25 % of the time when connecting (see picture,
page 12/5).
The ASIsafe electronic component is integrated in the
enclosure for the versions with AS-Interface connection
(see page 12/82); an additional adapter is not required.
12
Application
For controls according to IEC 60204-1 or EN 60204-1 the devices can be used as a safety position switch. To secure position
switches against changes in their position, keyed techniques
must be employed on installation.
Safety circuits
IEC 60947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1 require positive opening of the
NC contacts, i.e. for the purposes of personal safety, the assured
opening of NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical
equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to the IEC standard 60947-5-1 with the symbol q.
Category 2 according to EN ISO 13849-1 can be attained with
3SE5 position switches with q, and category 3 or 4 when using
an additional position switch, if the corresponding fail-safe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3SK1 or
3TK28 safety relays or matching devices from the ASIsafe,
SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges. The operating mechanisms (actuators) must also be connected to the enclosure by
keyed techniques. The corresponding operating mechanisms
are marked in the catalog with q.
Contacts for each application
Snap-action contacts: NC and NO contacts switch simultaneously regardless of the actuating speed (vmin = 0.01 m/s)
and contact erosion.
Slow-action contacts: Difference in travel between "NC contact opens" and "NO contact closes"; the switching speed is
the same as or proportional to the actuating speed
(vmin = 0.4 m/s).
Slow-action contacts with make-before-break: e.g. suitable for
adding a second function to a sequence control.
Operating mechanisms for each application
Standard, rounded and roller plungers
Operation in direction of the plunger axis or in case of roller
plunger with bar at right angles to the plunger axis.
The roller plunger is recommended for lateral actuation and
relatively long overtravel.
For actuators made of finely ground steel in the form of cams,
straight-edges (approach angle 30) or cam disks
With the standard position switches, mechanical positions of

moving machine parts are converted into electrical signals.
Through their modular and uniform design and large number of
variants, the devices can comply with practically all requirements in industry.
Spring rod
Can be used for undefined actuations and changing starting
conditions
Starting from any direction is possible
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. And many different actuator variants are available to
match the mechanical configuration of the moving machined
parts. Dimensions, fixing points and characteristics are largely in
accordance with the EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
Twist levers and rod actuators

For a high starting speed (v = 1.5 m/s)
Variety of starting options
Insensitive to oil, grinding dust and coarse-grained material
Adjustment of the lever in increments of 10
Can be adjusted with left or right switching
The devices are suitable for use in any climate.

Standards
IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1
The protective measure of "total insulation" by the molded-plastic
enclosure is guaranteed by the use of molded-plastic screw
glands.
12/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Fork lever
Switchable in two directions
Latching actuator
For reciprocating movements
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3SE51.., 3SE52..
3SE541.
3SE542.
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Standards
Pollution degree acc. to IEC 60664-1
4001)
400
Class 3
Class 3
kV
400 V AC,
over 300 V AC
only for equal potential2)
300 AC
10
10
A
A
A
2-pole
Ie / AC-15
6
6
3
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
3-pole
Ie / AC-15
6
3
1.5
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
2-pole
Ie / AC-15
6
6
3
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
10


---

---

0.1 106 operating cycles

--

--
With DIAZED fuse links,
With miniature circuit breaker, Char. C
A
A
A
Basic switch
With spring rod, 3SE5...-..R..
With fork lever, 3SE51..-..T..
With 3RH.1, 3RT contactors in size S00, S0
For utilization category AC-15 when
switching off Ie / AC-15 at 240 V
With utilization category DC-12/DC-13
For direct current depending on the loading of the switch
Switching frequency
Switching accuracy
For repeated switching,
measured at the plunger of the contact block
With twist actuators
Rated data according to s, u and U
Rated voltage
Switching capacity
1)
mm
V
A
6 000 operating cycles/h
0.05
0.05
300
6
Heavy duty,
A 300 / B 300 / Q 300
300
10
A 300 / Q 300
For slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC with make-before-break ("M") and

2 NO + 1 NC ("P) the following applies: 250 V.
Type
3SE523.
2)
For slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC with make-before-break ("M") and

2 NO + 1 NC ("P) the following applies: over 250 V AC only equal potential.
3) Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
3SE513.
3SE524.
3SE521.
3SE511.
3SE512.,
3SE516.
50
Zinc diecasting GD Zn Al4 Cu1

31
40
56
3SE54..
3SE525.
Zn/Al
30 / 40
-30
IP67
IP20, IP10
12

With alternating current 50/60 Hz
- At 24 V
- At 120 V
- At 240 V
For direct current
- At 24 V
- At 125 V
- At 250 V
Enclosure
Enclosure
Material
Width
mm

Ambient temperature
During operation
In operation, switch with LEDs
Storage, transport
Ultramid A3X2G7
31
40
IP65
C
C
C
IP66/IP671)
25 ... +85
25 ... +60
40 ... +90
25 ... +85 25 ... +85

--40 ... +90 40 ... +90
Any
Mounting position
Connection
1x
(M20 x 1.5)
Cable entry
2x
1x
(M20 x 1.5) (M20 x 1.5)
Solid
AWG cables
mm
mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 0.75)

1 x (0.5 ... 1.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 0.75)
1 x (AWG 20 ... 16), 2 x (AWG 20 ... 19)
Tightening torque, contact block
Nm
0.8 ... 1.0
Protective conductor connection inside enclosure

1)
--
M3.5
3
-(M20 x 1.5)
--
--
--
For twist actuators with spring rod and rod actuators: IP65/IP67.
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/7
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Dimensions of the basic switches
Enclosure width 31 mm, EN 50047,
rear with fixing holes
3SE5232, 3SE5212
33
5 22
5 22
4x6
40
IC01_00239
35,9
3
4
15
M20x1,5
4x5
7x3
NSC0_00906
NSC0_00751
31
22
42,8
68
7x3
40
4x6
12,7
6,9
13
12,5
18,5
NSC0_00752
53
20
22
M20x1,5
40
42
50
12
4,4
4,3
22
4x5
NSC0_00907
15
33
5,5
XL enclosure, width 56 mm,

with M20 1.5 connecting thread
3SE5162
7
5,4
13,5
7,7
5,4
16,3
16,3
16,3
30
40
15,3
37,3
100
NSC0_00754
5,5
56
M20x1,5
15,3
37,8
20
M20x1,5
M20x1,5
20
NSC0_00753a
60
78
78
40
30
40,5
NSC0_00939
5,3
Enclosure width 56 mm,

3SE5122
13,5
7,7
7,7
12,5

3SE5112, 3SE5132
56
5,5
15,3
37

40,5
7
5,3
16,3

30
NSC0_00804a
60
78
2
16&B

M20x1,5

M26x1,5
30
26
M12x1

0[


with 6-pole connector socket
3SE5115
7,7
12,5


with M12 connector socket
3SE5234, 3SE5214

12

rear with fixing holes
3SE5242
7,7

3SE5242
10
4,5
12,5
37,4
20
22
13
13
Contact block
(integrated)
13
Contact block
(replaceable)
4,3
Mounting plate
for 3SE5232, 3SE5212 position switch
3SX5100-1A
6,9
7,7

with M20 1.53/7 connecting thread
3SE5232, 3SE5212
15,3
37,3
Operating mechanisms for basic switches, see pages 12/9 and 12/10.
12/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Operating mechanisms for enclosure width 31 mm and 50 mm
Roller plungers, type C acc. to EN 50047
10
Roller plunger with central fixing

10
4,8
Roller levers, type E acc. to EN 50047
14,7
4,8
Twist levers, type A acc. to EN 50047
13
NSC0_00789a
20,8
0
23
0
34
24
26,5
NSC0_00787
32
7,2
23,65
30
24
NSC0_00788
8,5
30,4
22,5
19
8,5
Twist lever, roller 30 mm
30
7,2
23,65
20,8
7
R1
13
0
23
13
Angular roller lever
8,5
NSC0_00792a
23
4
R1
NSC0_00785
35,9
42,4
11,5
13
24
18
NSC0_00786
8,5
SW24
0
37
24
Operating mechanisms for enclosure width 40 mm and 56 mm

Plain plunger
Rounded plungers, type B acc. to EN 50041
NSC0_00756
28,5
38,5
13
15,5
25,5
NSC0_00755
NSC0_00940
5,5
11,5
0
23
10
8,5
23
0
23
11
23
23
50,5
7,2
24
49,5
23,65
13
12,5
41
NSC0_00757
12
R3
43
39
19
40
20
11
22
NSC0_00758
22
12
19,8
NSC0_00760a
Roller lever
24
19
50
23,65
7,2
44,4
24
24
13
NSC0_00766a
24
27
27
13
NSC0_00825a
44,4
40
23,65
24
Twist lever, rubber roller 50 mm
39
50
24
24
27
7,2
41
13
24
24
7,2
23,65
NSC0_00765a
24
13
24
13
NSC0_00820a
7,2
39
30
49,5
23,65
27
19
45
39
8,6
46,4
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/9
12
Fork lever, roller 19 mm
52,4
47
39
23,65
NSC0_00761a
Twist lever, 2 rollers 19 mm
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Operating mechanisms for all enclosure widths
Twist lever, adjustable length,
roller 19 mm

with grid hole, roller 19 mm
19

roller 30 mm
19
7,2
30
7,2
7,2
Spring rod, length 142.5 mm
24
Spring rod, length 76 mm
NSC0_00790
42,3
75,8
23,5
10
24
12/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
50
42,3
NSC0_00791
NSC0_00759
42,3
24
13
NSC0_00763
12
24
150
242,3
50
33,5
28,5
11
Spring rod, length 242.5 mm
50
142,3
113 ... 203

200
33
39
12
114,5
25,65
24
12
12
Rod actuator
13
0
24
24
8,6
24
124,5
16
24
33
39
124,5
25,65
NSC0_00827
13
24
NSC0_00826a
124,5
16
50
8,6
75 ... 129
75 ... 129
25,65
32
37
24
24

with grid hole, rubber roller 50 mm
50
7,2
13
NSC0_00793a
16
12

rubber roller 50 mm
50
32
37
24
12
roller 50 mm
55 ... 119
13
NSC0_00819a
109
24
0
25,65
24
12
16
76 ... 129,5
24
13
32
37
25,65
NSC0_00764a
44 ... 114
16
21,5
29,8
38
45,3
53
60,7
68,4
76,1
83,8
91,5
24
13
NSC0_00762a
16
32
37
25,65
109
44 ... 114
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Dimensions of the switches in compact design
12
10
30
IC01_00253
13
10
19,8
50
10
30
16,2
16
20
IC01_00255
50
4,3
8
20
18
IC01_00254
5,1
10,2
16
24
10
9,8
4,3
8
7,1
M12x1
4,3
8
12
Rounded plunger, enclosure width 30 mm,

with external seal
3SE5413-0CC22-1EA2
IC01_00256

with central fixing
3SE5413-0CC21-1EA2
16,2
6
M12x1
9,8
16
16,2
3,6
M12x1
18
30

3SE5423-0CC20-1EB1
50
12
20
16,2
40
25
50
5,1
10,2
IC01_00252
9,8
25
50
4,3
8
50
30
IC01_00268
9,8
20

3SE5413-0CC20-1EB1
10
3,6
12
10
3,6

with connecting cable
3SE5423-0CC20-1EA2
3,6

3SE5413-0CC20-1EA2
40
35,4
31,9
35,3
31,8
7
10
50
IC01_00260
5,1
10,2
10
16,5
44
17
25
4,3
8
6
12
Twist lever, enclosure width 40 mm,

3SE5423-0CN20-1EA2
30
16,2
IC01_00261
Twist lever, enclosure width 30 mm,

3SE5413-0CN20-1EA2
16
30
20
IC01_00259
50
20
4,3
8
17
26,6
10
35
5,1
10,2
50
IC01_00257
40
17
M12x1
4
12,5
16,2
50
30
10
20,3
10
25
4,3
8
20
Roller plunger, enclosure width 30 mm,

with central fixing
3SE5413-0CD21-1EA2
12
4
12,5
10,5
12,5
20,3
10,5
12
4

3SE5423-0CD20-1EA2
IC01_00258

3SE5413-0CD20-1EA2
16,2
40
16
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/11
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Circuit diagrams
Enclosure widths 31, 40, 50 and 56 mm
Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5...-.B..., -.R...
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE5...-.P...
Snap-action contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5...-.C..., -.F..., -.G..., -.H..., -.N...
22
14
22 34 14
14
22
21
13
21
13
21
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5...-.K..., -.Q...
33 13
1 NO + 2 NC with make-beforebreak, 3SE5...-.M...
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5...-.L...
22 32 14
22 36
18
14 32 22
21 31 13
21 35
17
13 31 21
XL enclosures, width 56 mm
22
14
52
44
21
13
51
43
1 NO + 2 NC with make-beforebreak, 1 NO + 1 NC, 3SE5162-0E...
22 36
18
52 66
48
22 36
18
52
44
21 35
17
51 65
47
21 35
17
51
43
2 x (1 NO + 1 NC)
3SE5162-0C...
NSC0_00941
2 x (1 NO + 2 NC) with makebefore-break, 3SE5162-0D...
NSC0_00941
2 x (1 NO + 1 NC)
3SE5162-0B...
14
22
34
42
13
21
33
41
3SE5 connector assignment

M12 connector socket, 4-pole
3SY3127

3SY3128

3SY3134
Connector sockets, 6-pole + PE

3SY3131
NSC0_00929
2
5
NSC0_00821
PE
1
NSC0_00822
2
7
8
6
4
5
NSC0_00823
Article No.
Connector
sockets
Contacts
LEDs
Connections
Type
Version
Version
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
PE
12
M12 connector sockets (4-, 5- or 8-pole)

3SE5..4-0....-1AC4 3SY3127
1 NO + 1 NC
--
21
22
13
14
--
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-0....-1AC5 3SY3128
1 NO + 1 NC
--
21
22
13
14
PE
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-0....-1AE0 3SY3127
2 NC
--
21
22
31
32
--
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-0....-1AE1 3SY3128
2 NC
--
21
22
31
32
PE
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-1C...-1AF3 3SY3128
1 NO + 1 NC
snap-action
2 LEDs
21
22
13 /
LED gn
14 /
LED ye
Ground
LED
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-1B...-1AF3 3SY3128
1 NO + 1 NC
slow-action
2 LEDs
21
22
14 /
LED gn
13/
LED ye
Ground
LED
--
--
--
--
3SE5..4-1L...-1AD4 3SY3134
1 NO + 2 NC
snap-action
2 LEDs
21
22
13 /
LED gn
14 /
LED ye
31
32
Ground
LED
PE
--
3SE5..4-1K...-1AD4 3SY3134
1 NO + 2 NC
slow-action
2 LEDs
21
22
14 /
LED gn
13/
LED ye
31
32
Ground
LED
PE
--

3SE5..5-0....-1AD0 3SY3131
1 NO + 1 NC
--
21
22
13
14
--
--
--
--
3SE5..5-0....-1AD1 3SY3131
1 NO + 2 NC
--
21
22
13
14
31
32
--
--
3SE5..5-.C...-1AF2 3SY3131
1 NO + 1 NC
snap-action
2 LEDs
21
22
13 /
LED gn
14 /
LED ye
--
Ground
LED
--
--
3SE5..5-.B...-1AF2 3SY3131
1 NO + 1 NC
slow-action
2 LEDs
21
22
14 /
LED gn
13 /
LED ye
--
Ground
LED
--
--
3SE5..5-.L...-1AD2 3SY3131
2 NC
snap-action
2 LEDs
21
22
31
32
13 /
LED gn
Ground
LED
--
--
3SE5..5-.K...-1AD2 3SY3131
2 NC
slow-action
2 LEDs
21
22
31
32
14 /
LED gn
Ground
LED
--
--
gn Green
Connected
ye Yellow
-- Not available
12/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Options
On the following pages you will find selection tables for complete
units as well as components of the modular system.
Complete units
Support function
The 3SE5/3SF1 position and safety switches can also be ordered using an online configurator.
Modular system
The differences between the units are indicated in the
selection and ordering data by the symbols shown on
orange backgrounds.
Using the modular system you can assemble switch variants
which are not available as complete units. Each complete unit
can also be supplied as a module.
A basic switch for the modular system comprises an enclosure
with a contact block and a cover. Among the basic switches the
following versions, for example, can be selected:
Basic enclosure with teflon plunger
Version with increased corrosion protection
Version with M12 connector socket and/or with 2 LEDs
Version with M12 connector socket or 6-pole + PE
This also enables a complete documentation to be prepared:
Product data sheets
Operating travel diagrams
CAD data in 2D and 3D model images
Ordering data
Product photos
www.siemens.com/sirius/configurators.
Complete units
To be ordered:
Ordering example
Required:
Position switch according to EN 50047 in a plastic enclosure
Contact block with slow-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC
Angular roller lever, metal lever and plastic roller
Version
Complete units
Article No.
Complete units Enclosure width 31 mm

With metal lever and
plastic roller 13 mm
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5232-0BF10
Ordering example 1
Ordering example 2
Required:
Angular roller lever, metal lever and plastic roller
Required:
Twist levers, high-grade steel lever and plastic roller
To be ordered separately:
To be ordered separately:
Version
Version
Modular system
Modular system
Article No.
Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm
Article No.
With teflon plunger

1 NO + 1 NC
With teflon plunger

1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5232-0BC05
Operating mechanisms
Twist actuators

Metal lever,
plastic roller
3SE5232-0BC05
Twist actuator
3SE5000-0AK00
3SE5000-0AF10
Twist levers
High-grade steel lever,
plastic roller
3SE5000-0AA31
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/13
12
Modular system
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosure width 31 mm according to EN 50047

Complete units for installation in control cabinets
2 contacts Degree of protection IP40 Cable entry by means of a locking plug with 6 mm
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Complete units1) Enclosure width 31 mm

Control cabinet type, IP40,
rounded plungers, type B, acc. to EN 50047
Flat cover
Snap-action contacts,
integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0HC05-1AB1
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0HC05-1AB2
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0HC05-1AB3
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HC05-1AB4
1 unit
41K
3SX5100-1A
1 unit
41K
Rounded
plunger, flat
cover
Flat cover
with mounting plate and screws for attachment profile
integrated2)
Rounded plungers, flat cover,

mounting plate
Standard cover
integrated2)
Rounded plungers, standard

cover
12
Standard cover
with mounting plate and screws for attachment profile
integrated2)
1 NO + 1 NC --
Mounting plate
--
Rounded plungers, standard

cover, mounting
plate
Accessories
--
Suitable for 3SE523.

and 3SE521. position switches
with a width of 31 mm
Mounting plate
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
1)
2)
The control cabinet types are not basic switches for the modular system.
Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible.
12/14
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry M20 1.51)
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Rounded plungers, type B, according to EN 50047
With teflon plunger
Rounded
plungers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0CC05
1 unit
41K
Snap-action contacts, integrated3) 1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0HC05
1 unit
41K
Short stroke, integrated3)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0FC05
1 unit
41K
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0GC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LC05
1 unit
41K
with make-before-break
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0PC05
1 unit
41K
With increased corrosion protection
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0CC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0MC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0PC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (250 V, 4 A)

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5234-0BC05-1AC4
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HC05-1AC4
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5234-0KC05-1AE0
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5234-0LC05-1AE0
1 unit
41K
With 2 LEDs, yellow/green
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5232-1KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5232-1LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5232-3KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5232-3LC05
1 unit
41K
With M12 connector socket, 5-pole (125 V, 4 A),

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5234-1BC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5234-1CC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
12

1)
A cable gland with seal must be used with the quick-connect method.
Popular versions.
3)
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/15
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Roller plungers, type C, acc. to EN 50047
With plastic roller 10 mm
Roller plungers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BD03
1 unit
41K
Integrated3)
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0HD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0FD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LD03-1AH0
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HD03-1AC4
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HD10
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0KD10
1 unit
41K
Actuator head rotated by 90


Roller plungers with central fixing

1 NO + 2 NC --
Roller plunger
with central
fixing

With metal lever and plastic roller 13 mm
Roller lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BE10
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HE10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KE10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LE10
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0CE12-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HE10-1AC4
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0LE12
1 unit
41K
With increased corrosion protection (ICP),

with high-grade steel lever and plastic roller 13 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --

Snap-action contacts, integrated3) 1 NO + 1 NC -With high-grade steel lever and plastic roller 13 mm
1 NO + 2 NC --

12
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BF10
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HF10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KF10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LF10
1 unit
41K
Angular roller
lever
1)
Popular versions.
3)
2)
12/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Spring rod
Length 142.5 mm, with plastic plunger 50 mm
3SE5232-0HR01
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HR01-1AC4
1 unit
41K


With metal lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm
Spring rod
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BK21
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HK21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KK21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LK21
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HK21-1AC4
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HK15
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HK60
1 unit
41K

Snap-action contacts, integrated3) 1 NO + 1 NC -With metal lever 35 mm and plastic roller 19 mm
Snap-action contacts, integrated3) 1 NO + 1 NC -Twist levers
Twist levers, adjustable length

With metal lever with grid hole and
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BK50
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HK50
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0LK50
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HK50-1AC4
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HK80
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HK82
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HK82-1AC4
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
12
Twist levers,
adjustable
length
Rod actuators
With aluminum rod, length 200 mm
Snap-action contacts, integrated3) 1 NO + 1 NC -With plastic rod, length 200 mm
Snap-action contacts, integrated3) 1 NO + 1 NC -With M12 connector socket, 4-pole (250 V, 4 A)
Rod actuator
1)
2)
3)
Popular versions.

Note:
If the device you require is not available as a complete unit, see
"Modular System", page 12/18.
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/17
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Basic switches Enclosure width 31 mm (with rounded plunger1))

With teflon plunger
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0CC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0HC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0FC05
1 unit
41K
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0GC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0PC05
1 unit
41K
With increased corrosion protection4)
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0CC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0MC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0PC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5234-0BC05-1AC4
1 unit
41K
3SE5234-0HC05-1AC4
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5234-0KC05-1AE0
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5234-0LC05-1AE0
1 unit
41K
With M12 plug

1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5232-1KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5232-1LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5232-3KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5232-3LC05
1 unit
41K
With 2 LEDs
12

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5234-1BC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5234-1CC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
With M12 plug

and 2 LEDs
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K, or
positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits.

2) For enclosures with widths of 31 mm, the basic switch is a complete unit
with rounded plungers.
3) Subsequent replacement of contact blocks is not possible.
4) Use corresponding high-grade steel lever.
Note:
Selection aid see page 12/13.
1)
12/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic rollers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AD03
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel rollers
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD04
1 unit
41K
Plastic rollers
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD10
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD11
1 unit
41K
Metal lever, plastic roller
13
q A
3SE5000-0AE10
1 unit
41K
Metal lever, high-grade steel roller
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE11
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel lever, plastic roller
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE13
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF13
1 unit
41K
Length 142.5 mm (spring 50 mm, plunger 50 mm)
3SE5000-0AR01
1 unit
41K
Length 76 mm (spring 23.5 mm, plunger 10 mm)
3SE5000-0AR03
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AR04
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AK00
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AA21
3SE5000-0AA22
3SE5000-0AA23
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA25
3SE5000-0AA31
3SE5000-0AA32
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA24
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
Roller plunger
With central fixing

Roller lever
Angular roller levers
Ang. roller lever
Spring rods
(for switches with snap-action contacts only)
Plunger made of plastic, spring of high-grade steel: 7
Plunger and spring made of high-grade steel:

Spring rod
Twist actuators
Twist actuators, plastic (without lever)
Switching right and/or left, adjustable
Twist actuator
Twist levers
Twist lever,
adjust. length
Rod actuator
Twist levers 21 mm, straight, type A according to EN 50047

19
19
19
with ball bearing
30
19
19
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
Twist levers 30 mm, straight1)

19
30
q B
Twist levers, adjustable length, with grid hole

Metal lever, rubber roller
19
19
50
50
19
19
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
3SE5000-0AA61
3SE5000-0AA67
3SE5000-0AA68
3SE5000-0AA62
3SE5000-0AA63

19
19
30
50
50
19
19
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA50
3SE5000-0AA51
3SE5000-0AA55
3SE5000-0AA57
3SE5000-0AA58
3SE5000-0AA52
3SE5000-0AA53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
Rod actuators
Aluminum rod, length 200 mm
Plastic rod, length 200 mm
6
6
6
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA80
3SE5000-0AA81
3SE5000-0AA82
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
q Positively driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits.

q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
1)
Can be clinch mounted (turned through 180, rear of lever).
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/19
12
Levers
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosure width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Plain plungers
With high-grade steel plunger
Plain plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LB01
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PB01
1 unit
41K
Rounded plungers, type B according to EN 50041

With plastic plunger
Rounded
plungers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BC03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CC03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KC03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LC03
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PC03
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BD05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CD05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KD05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LD05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PD05
1 unit
41K
Roller plungers
Roller levers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BE05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CE05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KE05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LE05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PE05
1 unit
41K
Roller lever
12

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BF05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CF05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LF05
1 unit
41K
Angular roller
lever
Spring rod
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CR01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LR01
1 unit
41K
Spring rod
1)
Popular versions.
12/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BJ01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CJ01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KJ01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LJ01
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PJ01
1 unit
41K
Twist levers

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CJ60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LJ60
1 unit
41K
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CJ50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LJ50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CJ80
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CJ82
1 unit
41K
Twist levers,
adjustable
length
Rod actuators, type D, acc. to EN 50041

With plastic rod, length 200 mm
12
Rod actuator
1)
Popular versions.

Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/21
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With M20 1.5 connecting thread
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5132-0CA00-1AC1
1 unit
41K
Gold-plated contacts
Basic switch
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0MA00
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PA00
1 unit
41K
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0BA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0MA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0PA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5134-0BA00-1AC4
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5134-0CA00-1AC4
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5134-0KA00-1AE0
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5134-0LA00-1AE0
1 unit
41K
With M12 plug

1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5132-1KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5132-1LA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5132-3KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5132-3LA00
1 unit
41K
With 2 LEDs

Use corresponding high-grade steel lever.
12
1)
Note:
12/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plain plungers
High-grade steel plungers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K

Plastic plungers
10
q B
3SE5000-0AC03
1 unit
41K
Plain plunger

Plastic plunger, plastic roller
Plastic plunger, high-grade steel roller
13
13
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AD05
3SE5000-0AD06
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
Roller levers
Metal lever with plastic roller, plastic base
22
q B
3SE5000-0AE05
1 unit
41K

22
q B
3SE5000-0AF05
1 unit
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AR01
3SE5000-0AR03
3SE5000-0AR04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AJ00
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AA01
3SE5000-0AA02
3SE5000-0AA03
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA04
3SE5000-0AA05
3SE5000-0AA08
3SE5000-0AA11
3SE5000-0AA12
3SE5000-0AA15
3SE5000-0AA16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA24
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
Plunger
Roller lever
Ang. roller lever
Spring rod
Spring rods (for switches with snap-action contacts only)

7
Twist actuators
For twist levers and rod actuators,
switching right and/or left, adjustable
Twist lever
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
Rod actuator
Levers
Twist levers, offset, type A according to EN 50041
Metal lever 27 mm, plastic roller
19
Metal lever 27 mm, high-grade steel roller
19
19
with ball bearing
Metal lever 27 mm, 2 plastic rollers
19
30
Metal lever 27 mm, rubber roller
50
High-grade steel lever 27 mm, plastic roller
19
High-grade steel lever 27 mm, high-gr. steel roller
19
19
19
q A
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B

19
30
q B

19
19
50
19
19
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
3SE5000-0AA61
3SE5000-0AA68
3SE5000-0AA62
3SE5000-0AA63
Twist lever, adjustable length

19
19
30
50
19
19
A
B
B
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA50
3SE5000-0AA51
3SE5000-0AA55
3SE5000-0AA58
3SE5000-0AA52
3SE5000-0AA53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
Rod actuators, type D according to EN 50041

6
6
6
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA80
3SE5000-0AA81
3SE5000-0AA82
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K

q B
q B
q B
q B
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/23
12
Twist actuator
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosure width 50 mm

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 2 (M20 1.5)
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Rounded plungers
With teflon plunger
Rounded
plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0CC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0FC05
1 unit
41K
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0GC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0PC05
1 unit
41K

With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0MC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0PC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5242-1KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5242-1LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5242-3KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5242-3LC05
1 unit
41K
With 2 LEDs
Roller plungers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BD03
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HD03
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0LD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
Roller plunger
12

1)
2)
Popular versions.
12/24
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Roller levers
Roller lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BE10
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HE10
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0LE10
1 unit
41K
3SE5244-0LE10-1AE0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole right (250 V, 4 A)

2 NC
--
Twist levers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BK21
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HK21
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0LK21
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HK50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
Twist lever

Twist lever,
adjustable
length
1)
Popular versions.
12
2)
Note:

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/25
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With teflon plunger
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0CC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0FC05
1 unit
41K
2 2 mm contact gap
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0GC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0PC05
1 unit
41K

With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0MC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0PC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5242-1KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5242-1LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5242-3KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5242-3LC05
1 unit
41K
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
With 2 LEDs


For enclosures with widths of 50 mm, the basic switch is a complete unit
2)
3)
Note:
1)
12
Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
Price
per PU
Plastic rollers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AD03
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD04
1 unit
41K
Plastic rollers
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD10
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD11
1 unit
41K
Roller plunger
With central
fixing
12/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Roller lever
13
q A
3SE5000-0AE10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE11
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE13
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF13
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AR01
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AR03
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AR04
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AK00
1 unit
41K
Angular roller
lever
Spring rods
(for switches with snap-action contacts only)
Plunger made of plastic, spring of high-grade
steel:

Spring rod
Twist actuators
Levers
Twist actuator
Twist lever
Twist levers 21 mm, straight, type A according to EN 50047

19
q A
3SE5000-0AA21
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA22
1 unit
41K

with ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA23
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA25
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA31
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA32
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA24
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA26
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA61
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA67
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA68
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA63
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA50
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA51
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5000-0AA55
1 unit
41K
50
3SE5000-0AA57
1 unit
41K
50
3SE5000-0AA58
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA52
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA53
1 unit
41K
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
Rod actuator
Rod actuators
3SE5000-0AA80
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AA81
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AA82
1 unit
41K

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/27
12
Siemens AG 2013

Ambient temperature up to 40 C

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 or IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With plastic roller 10 mm,
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5234-0CD03-1AJ1
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0CD10-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0CK31-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Roller plunger

1 NO + 1 NC --
Roller plunger
with central
fixing

With high-grade steel lever 21 mm and plastic roller 19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
Twist lever
12
With high-grade steel lever with grid hole

and plastic roller 19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0CK62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LK62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HK21-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HK62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole

Twist lever

Snap-action contacts, integrated2) 1 NO + 1 NC -Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole

Popular versions.
1)
12/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
Note:

Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 or IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With teflon plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0CC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0KC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0LC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0BC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0HC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Basic switch

With teflon plunger
Basic switch

For enclosures with widths of 31 and 50 mm, the basic switch is a
complete unit with rounded plungers.
Note:
12
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/29
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
mm
Plastic rollers
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD03-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE10-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF10-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF12-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AK00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Roller plunger
Roller lever
Angular roller
lever
Twist actuators
Twist actuator
Levers
Twist levers straight, 21 mm, type A acc. to EN 50047
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA21-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA31-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Twist lever
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
12
12/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5132-0CA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0KA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0LA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Basic switch
Note:


Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
Price
per PU
Plastic plungers
10
q B
3SE5000-0AC03-1AJ0
1 unit
41K

Plastic plunger, plastic roller
13
q B
3SE5000-0AD05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Roller levers
22
q B
3SE5000-0AE05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AJ00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Rounded
plunger
Roller plunger
Roller lever
Twist actuators
Twist actuator
12
Levers
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA01-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA11-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Twist lever
Twist lever,
adjustable
length

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/31
Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With plunger
Rounded
plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0PC05
1 unit
41K
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0MC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0PC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5214-0BC05-1AC5
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5214-0CC05-1AC5
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5214-0KC05-1AE1
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5214-0LC05-1AE1
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5212-1KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5212-1LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5212-3KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5212-3LC05
1 unit
41K

and 2 LEDs
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5214-1BC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5214-1CC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LB01
1 unit
41K
Plain plungers
12
Plain plunger

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KD03
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LD03
1 unit
41K
Roller plunger
1)
Popular versions.
12/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KD10
1 unit
41K
Roller plunger
with central
fixing

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BE10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CE10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KE10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LE10
1 unit
41K
Roller lever

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BF10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CF10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KF10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LF10
1 unit
41K
Angular roller
lever

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BK21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CK21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KK21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LK21
1 unit
41K
Twist lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CK60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KK60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LK60
1 unit
41K
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BK50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CK50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LK50
1 unit
41K

1)
Popular versions.

Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/33
12

Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With plunger
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LC05
1 unit
41K
Slow-action cont. with make-before-break 1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0PC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0BC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5212-0MC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5212-0PC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
With increased
corrosion
protection
2 NO + 1 NC --

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5214-0BC05-1AC5
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5214-0CC05-1AC5
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5214-0KC05-1AE1
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5214-0LC05-1AE1
1 unit
41K
With M12 plug

1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5212-1KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5212-1LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC q B
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC q B
3SE5212-3KC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5212-3LC05
1 unit
41K
With 2 LEDs

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5214-1BC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5214-1CC05-1AF3
1 unit
41K
12
With M12 plug

and 2 LEDs

2)
Note:
1)
Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plain plungers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K
Plastic roller
10
q A
3SE5000-0AD03
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD04
1 unit
41K
Plain plunger
Roller plunger
12/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic roller
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD10
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AE10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE11
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE13
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF13
1 unit
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AR01
3SE5000-0AR03
3SE5000-0AR04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AK00
1 unit
41K
With central fixing

Roller lever
Ang. roller levers High-grade steel lever, high-grade steel roller
Spring rod

7
Twist actuators
Levers
Twist actuator
Twist lever
Twist levers, straight, type A according to EN 50047

19
q A
3SE5000-0AA21
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA22
1 unit
41K
Metal lever 21 mm, high-grade steel roller with

ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA23
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA25
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA31
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel lever 21 mm, high-grade steel

roller
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA32
1 unit
41K
19
q B
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA24
3SE5000-0AA26
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA61
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA67
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA68
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA63
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA50
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA51
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5000-0AA55
1 unit
41K
50
3SE5000-0AA57
1 unit
41K
50
3SE5000-0AA58
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA52
1 unit
41K
19
3SE5000-0AA53
1 unit
41K
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
Rod actuator

3SE5000-0AA80
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AA81
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AA82
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AA83
1 unit
41K

1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/35
12
Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Plain plungers
Plain plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LB01
1 unit
41K

With high-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BC02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CC02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KC02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LC02
1 unit
41K
Rounded
plunger

With high-grade steel roller 13 mm, with 3 mm overtravel
Roller plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BD02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CD02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KD02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LD02
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-1CD02-1AF3
1 unit
41K

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
Roller levers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BE01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CE01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KE01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LE01
1 unit
41K
Roller lever
12

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BF01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CF01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LF01
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0CR01
1 unit
41K
Ang. roller lever
Spring rod
1 NO + 1 NC --
Spring rod
1)
Popular versions.
12/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BH01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CH01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KH01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LH01
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-0CH01-1AC5
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-1CH01-1AF3
1 unit
41K

Twist lever
1 NO + 1 NC --

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
With metal lever 27 mm and high-grade steel roller 19 mm

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BH02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CH02
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-1CH02-1AF3
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0CH24
1 unit
41K

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC --

1 NO + 1 NC --

With metal lever with grid hole and plastic roller 19 mm
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BH60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CH60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LH60
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BH50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CH50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LH50
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-1LH50-1AD4
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0CH51
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0CT11
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CH80
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CH82
1 unit
41K

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
With metal lever and high-grade steel roller 19 mm

Twist lever,
adjustable length
1 NO + 1 NC --
Fork levers, latching

1 NO + 1 NC --
Fork lever
Rod actuators, type D, acc. to EN 50041

Rod actuator
1)
Popular versions.

Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/37
12
With metal lever and 2 plastic rollers 19 mm
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0CA00-1AC1
1 unit
41K
Gold-plated contacts
Basic switch
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0MA00
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0PA00
1 unit
41K
With increased
corrosion
protection
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0BA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0CA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0KA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0LA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0MA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5112-0PA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
With M12 plug
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5114-0BA00-1AC5
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5114-0CA00-1AC5
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5114-0KA00-1AE1
1 unit
41K
2 NC
--
3SE5114-0LA00-1AE1
1 unit
41K
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (250 V, 10 A)

1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5115-0KA00-1AD1
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5115-0LA00-1AD1
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5115-0CA00-1AD0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5112-1KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5112-1LA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5112-3KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5112-3LA00
1 unit
41K

and quick-release device
With plug,
6-pole + PE
With 2 LEDs
12

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5114-1BA00-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5114-1CA00-1AF3
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-1LA00-1AD4
1 unit
41K

and 2 LEDs
With M12 plug
and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (10 A),

and 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5115-1BA00-1AF2
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5115-1CA00-1AF2
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE5115-1LA00-1AD2
1 unit
41K
24 V DC
With plug,
6-pole PE,
and 2 LEDs
1)

12/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
Note:

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plain plunger
High-grade steel plunger
Plunger
Roller lever
Ang. roller lever
Spring rod
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K

High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel
10
q B
3SE5000-0AC02
1 unit
41K

High-grade steel roller, with 3 mm overtravel
13
q B
3SE5000-0AD02
1 unit
41K
Roller lever
22
22
22
22
q A
3SE5000-0AE01
3SE5000-0AE02
3SE5000-0AE03
3SE5000-0AE04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K

22
22
22
22
q A
q B
3SE5000-0AF01
3SE5000-0AF02
3SE5000-0AF03
3SE5000-0AF04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AR01
3SE5000-0AR03
3SE5000-0AR04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AH00
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AT10
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AA01
3SE5000-0AA02
3SE5000-0AA03
3SE5000-0AA04
3SE5000-0AA05
3SE5000-0AA08
3SE5000-0AA11
3SE5000-0AA12
3SE5000-0AA15
3SE5000-0AA16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA24
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B

Plunger made of plastic, spring of high-grade steel:
7
7
Twist actuators
Twist actuators, metal (without lever)
For fork levers, latching
Twist lever
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
Fork lever
Levers
Twist levers, offset, type A according to EN 50041
Metal lever 27 mm, high-gr. steel roller with ball bearing
Metal lever 27 mm, 2 plastic rollers
Metal lever 27 mm, rubber roller
High-grade steel lever 27 mm, high-grade steel roller
19
19
19
19
30
50
19
19
19
19
q A

19
30
q B

19
19
50
19
19
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
3SE5000-0AA61
3SE5000-0AA68
3SE5000-0AA62
3SE5000-0AA63

19
19
30
50
19
19
A
B
B
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA50
3SE5000-0AA51
3SE5000-0AA55
3SE5000-0AA58
3SE5000-0AA52
3SE5000-0AA53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AT01
3SE5000-0AT02
3SE5000-0AT03
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA80
3SE5000-0AA81
3SE5000-0AA82
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
q A
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
Fork levers (for switches with snap-action contacts only)

2 metal levers, 2 plastic rollers
19
2 metal levers, 2 high-grade steel rollers
19
2 high-grade steel levers, 2 plastic rollers
19
Rod actuator


q B
6
6
6
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/39
12
Twist actuator
Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Plain plungers
Plain plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KB01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LB01
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PB01
1 unit
41K
Rounded plungers
Rounded
plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BC02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CC02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KC02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LC02
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PC02
1 unit
41K
Roller plungers
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BD02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CD02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KD02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LD02
1 unit
41K
Roller plunger
Roller levers
Roller lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BE01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CE01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KE01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LE01
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PE01
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-0CE02
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
12

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BF01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CF01
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PF01
1 unit
41K
Angular roller
lever
1)
Popular versions.
12/40
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Spring rods
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CR01
1 unit
41K
Spring rod
Twist levers
Twist lever
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BH01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CH01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KH01
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LH01
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PH01
1 unit
41K
With metal lever 27 mm and high-grade steel roller 19 mm

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CH02
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LH02
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BH60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CH60
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LH60
1 unit
41K
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BH50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CH50
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LH50
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-0CT11
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CH80
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CH82
1 unit
41K
Fork levers, latching

With metal lever and 2 plastic rollers 19 mm
1 NO + 1 NC --
12
Fork lever
Rod actuators
Rod actuator
1)
Popular versions.

Note:
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/41
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With 3 x M20 x 1.5 connecting thread
Basic switch
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-0MA00
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0BA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0CA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0KA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0LA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-0MA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5122-0PA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5122-1KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5122-1LA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC q B
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC q B
3SE5122-3KA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-3LA00
1 unit
41K
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
With increased
corrosion protect. Slow-action contacts
With 2 LEDs
Note:

1)

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
Price
per PU
12
Plain plunger
Rounded
plungers,
roller plungers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K

10
q B
3SE5000-0AC02
1 unit
41K

13
q B
3SE5000-0AD02
1 unit
41K
Roller levers
22
22
22
22
q A
3SE5000-0AE01
3SE5000-0AE02
3SE5000-0AE03
3SE5000-0AE04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K

22
22
22
22
q A
q B
3SE5000-0AF01
3SE5000-0AF02
3SE5000-0AF03
3SE5000-0AF04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AR01
3SE5000-0AR03
3SE5000-0AR04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
q B
q B
q B
Roller lever
Ang. roller lever

7
q B
q B
Spring rod
12/42
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Twist actuators
q A
3SE5000-0AH00
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AT10
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AA01
3SE5000-0AA02
3SE5000-0AA03
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA04
3SE5000-0AA05
3SE5000-0AA07
3SE5000-0AA08
3SE5000-0AA11
3SE5000-0AA12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA15
3SE5000-0AA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA24
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
Twist actuator
Twist levers
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
Fork lever
q A
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
Twist levers 35 mm, offset

19
19
q B

19
30
q B
Twist levers, adjustable length,

with grid hole
19
19
50
50
19
19
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
3SE5000-0AA61
3SE5000-0AA67
3SE5000-0AA68
3SE5000-0AA62
3SE5000-0AA63

19
19
30
50
50
19
19
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA50
3SE5000-0AA51
3SE5000-0AA55
3SE5000-0AA57
3SE5000-0AA58
3SE5000-0AA52
3SE5000-0AA53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AT01
3SE5000-0AT02
3SE5000-0AT03
3SE5000-0AT04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA80
3SE5000-0AA81
3SE5000-0AA82
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K

19
19
19
2 high-grade steel levers,
19
2 high-grade steel rollers
6
6
6
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
Rod actuator
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/43
12
Levers
Twist levers 27 mm, offset, type A according to EN 50041
19
19
19
with ball bearing
Metal lever, 2 plastic rollers
19
30
50
50
19
19
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Enclosure width 56 mm, XL

Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Complete units1) Enclosure width 56 mm, XL

Plain plungers
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0CB01
1 unit
41K
3SE5162-0EC02
1 unit
41K
Plain plunger
Rounded plungers
Slow-action contacts with
make-before-break
2 mm travel difference
Rounded
plungers
1 NO + 1 NC and
1 NO +2 NC
--
Roller plungers
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0BD02
1 unit
41K
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0CD02
1 unit
41K
Roller plungers
Roller levers
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0BE01
1 unit
41K
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0CE01
1 unit
41K
3SE5162-0CE02
1 unit
41K
3SE5162-0CF01
1 unit
41K
3SE5162-0CH01
1 unit
41K

Roller lever
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --

12
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
Angular roller
lever
Twist levers
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
Twist levers
1)
Popular versions.
12/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
Note:

Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Basic switches Enclosure width 56 mm, XL

2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0BA00
1 unit
41K
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0CA00
1 unit
41K

make-before-break
2 (1 NO + 2 NC) --
3SE5162-0DA00
1 unit
41K

Basic switch
1)
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0BA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0CA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K

make-before-break
2 (1 NO + 2 NC) --
3SE5162-0DA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Note:

1)

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
Price
per PU
Plain plungers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K

High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel 10
q B
3SE5000-0AC02
1 unit
41K

13
q B
3SE5000-0AD02
1 unit
41K
Roller levers
22
22
22
22
q A
3SE5000-0AE01
3SE5000-0AE02
3SE5000-0AE03
3SE5000-0AE04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K

22
22
22
22
q A
q B
3SE5000-0AF01
3SE5000-0AF02
3SE5000-0AF03
3SE5000-0AF04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AR01
3SE5000-0AR03
3SE5000-0AR04
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AR02
1 unit
41K
Plain plunger
Rounded
plunger
q B
q B
q B
Roller lever
Angular roller
lever

Plunger made of plastic, spring of high-grade
7
steel:
7
q B
q B
Spring rod

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/45
12
Roller plungers
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Twist actuators
q A
3SE5000-0AH00
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AT10
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AA01
3SE5000-0AA02
3SE5000-0AA03
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA04
3SE5000-0AA05
3SE5000-0AA07
3SE5000-0AA08
3SE5000-0AA11
3SE5000-0AA12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA15
3SE5000-0AA16
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
3SE5000-0AA24
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
Twist actuator
Levers
Twist levers
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
12
Fork lever
Twist levers 27 mm, offset, type A according to EN 50041

19
19
19
with ball bearing
19
30
50
50
19
19
q A
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B

19
19
q B

19
30
q B

with grid hole
19
19
50
50
19
19
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
3SE5000-0AA61
3SE5000-0AA67
3SE5000-0AA68
3SE5000-0AA62
3SE5000-0AA63

19
19
30
50
50
19
19
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA50
3SE5000-0AA51
3SE5000-0AA55
3SE5000-0AA57
3SE5000-0AA58
3SE5000-0AA52
3SE5000-0AA53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
41K
q B
q B
3SE5000-0AT01
3SE5000-0AT02
3SE5000-0AT03
3SE5000-0AT04
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K
B
B
B
B
3SE5000-0AA80
3SE5000-0AA81
3SE5000-0AA82
3SE5000-0AA83
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
41K
41K

19
19
19
2 high-grade steel levers,
19
2 high-grade steel rollers
6
6
6
6
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
q B
Rod actuator
1)
12/46
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
3SE5212-0CH22-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Rounded
plungers

With metal lever 21 mm and high-grade steel roller 19 mm,
twist actuator in metal version
1 NO + 1 NC --
Twist levers
12
Note:
"Modular system".

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/47
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU

With plunger
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0CC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0KC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0LC05-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Basic switch
1)

Version
Diameter
Note:
DT Modular system
Article No.
Price
per PU
mm
Plastic roller
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD03-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE10-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF10-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF12-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AK00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Roller plungers
Roller lever
Angular roller
lever
Twist actuators
12

Twist actuator
Levers
Twist levers straight, 21 mm, type A acc. to EN 50047
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA21-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA31-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Twist levers
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
12/48
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC
--
3SE5112-0CC02-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
--
3SE5112-0LH11-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
--
3SE5112-0CH62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
--
3SE5162-0CH60-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Rounded
plungers

With high-grade steel lever 27 mm and plastic roller 19 mm
1 NO + 2 NC
Twist lever

1 NO + 1 NC
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
Complete units Enclosure width 56 mm, XL

1 NO + 1 NC

q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K or positively
driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits.

12
Twist levers,
adjustable
length,
with grid hole
Note:
"Modular system".
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/49
Siemens AG 2013

Modular system
2, 3 or 4 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC
--
3SE5112-0CA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
--
3SE5112-0KA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
--
3SE5112-0LA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Basic switch

1 NO + 1 NC
--
3SE5122-0CA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
--
3SE5122-0KA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
--
3SE5122-0LA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0BA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
2 (1 NO + 1 NC) --
3SE5162-0CA00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Basic switch
Basic switches Enclosure width 56 mm, XL

Basic switch
q Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K or positively
12
driven actuator, necessary in safety circuits.
Note:
12/50
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
10
q B
3SE5000-0AC02-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD02-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE01-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE03-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF01-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF03-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AH00-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Rounded
plungers
Roller plungers
Roller levers
Roller lever
Angular roller
lever
Twist actuators
Twist actuator
Levers
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA01-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA11-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
Twist lever
12
Twist lever,
adjustable
length

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/51
Siemens AG 2013

Compact design
Overview
Benefits
Very compact yet with the same rating as the 3SE51 standard
switches, for notable space savings in confined installation
conditions
Various actuator versions available
Roller plungers can be rotated through 90
Twist lever can be rotated through 180;
Twist lever can be adjusted in 15 increments
Time is saved when mounting the fully assembled unit
With metal enclosure of degree of protection IP67, ideal for
use in rough industrial environments
Insensitive to electromagnetic interference
Compact design in width 30 mm
Particularly in harsh environments or on equipment with limited

space, the small 3SE54 position switches in compact design
with a depth of 16 mm and a weight of only 80 g (without cable)
are ideal. Above all the versions with molded cable can be
mounted in the most confined spaces.
3SE54 compact position switches are available in two different
widths as complete units:
The 3SE5413 series complies with the EU standard and features a 30 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a distance
of 20 mm.
The 3SE5423 series meets the requirements of the US market
and features a 40 mm wide enclosure with drilled holes at a
spacing of 25 mm.
Both the enclosure and the actuator head are made of metal and
comply with the high IP67 degree of protection. Following actuators are available:
Rounded plungers
Rounded plungers with central fixing
Rounded plungers with external seal
Roller plungers
Twist levers
12
The contact block is designed with snap-action contacts 1 NO +

1 NC. The NC contact complies with the requirements for positive opening acc. to IEC 60947-5-1.
Use in safety circuits up to Category 4 according to
EN ISO 13849-1.
Connection:
With molded cable, 2 m or 5 m long
With M12 connector socket
12/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Compact design

2 snap-action contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Degree of protection IP67 With connecting cable or M12 connector socket
Operating mechanism
Enclosure width
DT Configurator
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Complete units Enclosure width 30 or 40 mm

Rounded plungers
Standard mounting
- With 2 m cable 5 x 0.75 mm2
30
3SE5413-0CC20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CC20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CC20-1EA5
1 unit
41K
- With M12 connector socket, 5-pole
30
3SE5413-0CC20-1EB1
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CC20-1EB1
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CC21-1EA2
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CC21-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CC22-1EA2
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CC22-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CD20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CD20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CD20-1EA5
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CD20-1EB1
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CD20-1EB1
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CD21-1EA2
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CD21-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CD23-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CN20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CN20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CN20-1EA5
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CN20-1EB1
1 unit
41K
40
3SE5423-0CN20-1EB1
1 unit
41K
30
3SE5413-0CP20-1EA2
1 unit
41K
Rounded plungers
With central fixing M12 x 1
With central fixing

With external seal
With external seal

Roller plungers
Standard mounting
Roller plunger
With central fixing M12 x 1
Actuator head rotated 90
12
With plug
With plug, enclosure width 40 mm

Twist levers
Standard mounting
Twist lever
Twist levers with a smaller mounting

depth and lower height

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/53
Siemens AG 2013

Open-Type
3SE5, open-type design
Overview
Their compact design makes these switches particularly suitable for use in confined conditions. The fixing dimensions and
operating points are according to EN 50047.
The switches are equipped with two or three contacts in snapaction, slow-action or slow-action with make-before-break versions. The stroke is 6 mm.
The empty enclosure can be equipped with all contact block
versions (see page 12/56).
Improved version
NEW: The switches now have a robust metal plunger with increased abrasion resistance (instead of the teflon plunger).
This enables the switch to be approached from a 30 angle.
Open-type design

2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP20 (2 contacts), IP10 (3 contacts)
Version
Contacts
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 30 mm

With metal plunger, 6 mm
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5250-0BC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5250-0CC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5250-0KC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5250-0LC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5250-0MC05
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE5250-0PC05
1 unit
41K
Empty enclosures
without contact block
--
3SE5250-0AC05
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5050-0BA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
- Standard
3SE5050-0CA00
1 unit
41K
- 2 2 mm switching interval
3SE5050-0GA00
1 unit
41K
- Short stroke
3SE5050-0NA00
1 unit
41K
2 contacts
12
3 contacts
Empty enclosure
Contact blocks with 2 contacts
for open-type design1)
2 contacts

1)
Contact blocks with 3 contacts see page 12/56.
12/54
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


The quick-release devices and plug-in connections are used for
fast installation and replacement of position switches.
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Quick-release devices for enclosure width 40 mm
3SY3110
Adapter plates with screws
3SY3110
1 unit
41K
Base plates with locking lever
3SY3027
1 unit
41K
Connector sockets (6-pole + PE), for M20 1.5 C

For max. 250 V, 10 A
With 0.75 mm2 connecting cable,
plastic, degree of protection IP65,
ambient temperature 40 to +90 C
3SY3131
1 unit
41K
Cable boxes (6-pole + PE)1)

With terminal compartment,
can be pre-assembled,
plastic, degree of protection IP65
3SY3136
1 unit
41K
Connector sockets (4-pole), M12,

for M20 1.5, fixed
For max 250 V, 4 A, Uimp = 2500 V
With four 0.25 mm2 connecting cables,
ambient temperature -40 to +85 C
3SY3127
1 unit
41K

for M20 1.5, fixed
For max. 125 V, 4 A, Uimp = 1500 V
With five 0.25 mm2 connecting cables,
3SY3128
1 unit
41K

for M20 1.5, fixed, metal version
For max. 30 V, 2 A, Uimp = 800 V
With eight 0.25 mm2 connecting cables,
metal, degree of protection IP67,
3SY3134
1 unit
41K
M12 socket, angled, 4-pole,

For AS-Interface, max 4 A
with cabling box, max. 0.75 mm2
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
1 unit
42D
Metal
3SX9917
1 unit
41K
Plastic
3SX9918
1 unit
41K
Cable glands M20 1.5

Plastic
3SX9926
1 unit
41K
3SY3027
Plug-in connections for M20 1.5 connecting threads
3SY3136
3SY3127
3SY3134
3RK1902-4CA00-4AA0
Adapters and cable glands for M20 1.5 connecting threads

Adapters acc. to s, u and U
For cable entry from
M20 1.5 to NPT1/2
3SX9917
3SX9918
3SX9926
1)
For wiring, a crimping tool is necessary,

max. conductor cross-section 1 mm2.

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/55
12
3SY3131
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color/
contacts
DT Article No.
Black
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SE5000-0AC30
1 unit
41K
3SX5100-3B
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0AC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0AC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5132-0AA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0AC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5242-0AC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5212-0AC05
1 unit
41K
3SE5212-0AC05-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0AA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0AA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-0AA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5122-0AA00-1CA0
1 unit
41K
Enclosure width 56 mm, XL2)
3SE5162-0AA00
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0BA00
1 unit
41K
- Standard
3SE5000-0CA00
1 unit
41K
- Gold-plated contacts
3SE5000-0CA00-1AC1
1 unit
41K
- 2 2 mm switching interval
3SE5000-0GA00
1 unit
41K
- Short stroke
3SE5000-0NA00
1 unit
41K
Manuals for 3SE5, 3SF1

Configuration Manual
SIRIUS 3SE5/3SF1 Position Switches1)
Optional accessories for 3SE51, 3SE52

Protective caps, rubber
For rounded plungers acc. to EN 50047,
3SE5...-..C05
Protective cap
Adapters with screw2)
For an increase in the mounting depth
on the 3SE5000-0AH00 twist actuator,
in combination with twist lever with
adjustable length or rod actuator
Adapter
Spare parts for 3SE51, 3SE52

Empty enclosures, plastic
Empty enclosures, metal
Turquoise
Turquoise
Contact blocks with 2 contacts3)
2 contacts
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
3 contacts
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5000-0KA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5000-0LA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5000-0MA00
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 1 NC
3SE5000-0PA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5060-0BA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE5060-0CA00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5060-0MA00
1 unit
41K
12
Contact blocks for enclosure XL4)
2 contacts

1)
Download of the Configuration Manual see

Possibly required for the conversion from 3SE21 to 3SE51.
3) Unsuitable for open-type position switches; see page 12/54.
4) Equip XL enclosures only with contact combinations according to
pages 12/12, 12/44 and 12/45.
2)
12/56
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Rated voltage
LED
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Spare parts for 3SE51, 3SE52

Covers for plastic enclosures, width 31 mm
Turquoise with LED
31 mm,
turquoise with LED
24 DC
3SE5230-1AA00
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5230-3AA00
1 unit
41K
Yellow
--
3SE5230-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Yellow with LED
24 DC
3SE5230-1AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5230-3AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K

Turquoise with LED
24 DC
3SE5130-1AA00
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5130-3AA00
1 unit
41K
Yellow
--
3SE5130-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Yellow with LED
24 DC
3SE5130-1AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5130-3AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
40 mm, yellow with LED

Turquoise with LED
50 mm, turquoise
with LED
24 DC
3SE5240-1AA00
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5240-3AA00
1 unit
41K
Yellow
--
3SE5240-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Yellow with LED
24 DC
3SE5240-1AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5240-3AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Covers for metal enclosures, width 31 mm

Turquoise with LED
31 mm, turquoise
with LED
24 DC
3SE5210-1AA00
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5210-3AA00
1 unit
41K
Yellow
--
3SE5210-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Yellow with LED
24 DC
3SE5210-1AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5210-3AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K

Turquoise with LED
24 DC
3SE5110-1AA00
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5110-3AA00
1 unit
41K
Yellow
--
3SE5110-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Yellow with LED
24 DC
3SE5110-1AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5110-3AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K

Turquoise with LED
24 DC
3SE5120-1AA00
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5120-3AA00
1 unit
41K
Yellow
--
3SE5120-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Yellow with LED
24 DC
3SE5120-1AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5120-3AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
3SE5160-0AA00-1AG0
1 unit
41K
Covers for XL metal enclosures, width 56 mm

--
12
Yellow

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/57
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3SE5, 3SE2 Mechanical Safety Switches

With Separate Actuator
General data
Overview
Safety switches with separate actuator are used where the position of doors, covers or protective grilles must be monitored for
safety reasons.
3SE5 safety switches with separate actuator have the same
enclosures as the 3SE5 position switches (modular system).
Operation
The actuator head is included in the scope of supply. For actuation from four directions it can be adjusted through 4 90. The
switches can also be approached from above.
The actuator heads of the 3SE2243 and 3SE2257 switches with
special enclosures cannot be changed. The switches can be
approached from the two broad sides and from above.
The actuators are not included in the scope of supply of the
safety switches and must be ordered separately from a choice
of different versions to suit the application (see page 12/67).
The actuator is encoded. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary
devices is impossible.
Radius actuators
The safety switches with radius actuators are particularly suitable for rotary protective devices. The movable actuation key allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch
and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented.
Locking devices
A high-grade steel blocking insert for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety (see page 12/67).
3SE5 safety switches with head for separate actuator
Design
Enclosure sizes
The 3SE5 safety switches are available in four different enclosure sizes:
1 cable entry
Plastic and metal enclosures according to EN 50041, 40 mm
wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry
Plastic enclosures, 50 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 2 cable entries
Metal enclosures, 56 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 3 cable entries
Also available are safety switches in the 3SE2 series which have
been developed in this form according to general market requirements:
Molded-plastic enclosures outside of the standards, enclosure
width 52 mm, IP67
12
Enclosure versions
Various basic versions can be selected for the enclosures of the
3SE5 series:
Available with two- or three-pole contact blocks designed as
slow-action contacts
Optional LED status display
With mounted four- or five-pole M12 connector socket (available for the wide enclosures as an accessory for self-assembly)
With 6-pole connector socket + PE on the metal enclosures
Similarly with a combination of connector socket and LED indicators
For a description of the basic switches, see page 12/4.
12/58
Siemens IC 10 2014
Blocking inserts with padlock
Dust protection
A rubber cap to protect the actuator entry of the actuator head
from contamination is available for operation in dusty environments (see page 12/67).
Contact reliability
The contact blocks ensure an extremely high contact stability.
This applies even when the devices are switching low voltages
and currents, e.g. 1 mA at 5 V DC.
Positive opening q
The NC contacts of the switch are forced open mechanically,
positively-driven and reliably by the plunger. This is referred to
as "positive opening".
Siemens AG 2013

General data
accordance with EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards. The devices
are suitable for use in any climate.
Benefits
The 3SE5 safety switches with separate actuator differ from the
previous series through the following new characteristics:
All enclosure sizes with increased corrosion protection
All enclosure sizes are optionally available with an LED signaling indicator.
The three-pole contact block 1 NO + 2 NC is available for all
enclosure sizes.
The plastic enclosure has simple and fast wiring equipment
which makes it possible to save approx. 20 to 25 % of the time
when connecting.
Application
safety reasons.
The safety switch can only be operated with the matching coded
actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. Dimensions, fixing points of the enclosure are in
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1.
glands.
Safety circuits
equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to the IEC standard 60947-5-1 with the symbol q.
Category 3 according to EN ISO 13849-1 can be attained with a
safety switch with separate actuator if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed,
e.g. the 3SK1 or 3TK28 safety relays or matching units from the
ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges.
Category 4 can be achieved when using an additional 3SE5
safety switch.
Type
3SE51..-..V.., 3SE52..-..V..
3SE2257-.XX..
3SE2243-.XX..
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
400
500
Class 3
Class 3
kV
AC 400;
over 300 V AC
only equal potential
AC 500;
over 380 V AC
only equal potential
10
2-pole
3-pole
1-pole

- At 24 V
- At 120 V
- At 240 V
- At 400 V
- At 500 V
A
A
A
A
A
Ie / AC-15
6
6
3
---
Ie / AC-15
6
3
1.5
---
Ie / AC-12
10
10
10
10
10
Ie / AC-15
10
10
6
4
3
Ie / AC-12
10
10
10
10
10
Ie / AC-15
10
10
4
4
3
For direct current

- At 24 V
- At 125 V
- At 250 V
A
A
A
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
Ie / DC-13
3
0.55
0.27
Ie / DC-12
10
---
Ie / DC-13
10
---
Ie / DC-12
10
---
Ie / DC-13
10
---
A
A
A
----
----
4
1
0.5
1
0.4
0.2
4
1
0.5
1
0.4
0.2
A
A
A
-1
2
10
---
- At 110 V
- At 220 V
- At 440 V
With fuse links, quick
With miniature circuit breaker, Char. B
For utilization category AC-15 when
switching off Ie / AC-15 at 240 V

> 1 106 operating cycles

6000 operating cycles/h
Switching frequency
Minimum pull-out force for positive opening
3-pole
20
10
30
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/59
12
Standards
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3SE51, 3SE52 configuration
3SE523.-.QV40, 3SE523.-.RV40
25
3SE524.-.QV40, 3SE524.-.RV40
32,7
42
40
25
36
20,6
12,5
13
13
20,6
4,3
33
15
33
3SE512.-.QV10, 3SE512.-.RV10
36,5
32
13,5
20,6
32
36,5
20,6
12,5
32
32
M20x1,5
5,5
50
3SE511.--.QV10, 3SE511.-.RV10
NSC0_00795
15
M20x1,5
31
12,5
53
NSC0_00794
20
22
18,5 4,4
68
20
22
32,7
36
4,3
16,3
6
16,3
M20x1,5
20
2
M20x1,5
30
40,5
NSC0_00797
NSC0_00796a
5,4
5,3
78
60
78
40
56
15,3
37,3
5,5
15,3
37,8
Actuators
Standard actuator
3SE5000-0AV01
Actuator with vertical fixing

3SE5000-0AV02
10,3
NSC0_00781a
0
47
40
58
18
4,5
53
4,3
40
50
Siemens IC 10 2014
68
NSC0_00784
4,5
51,1
NSC0_00783
68
51,1
31
31
22
4,5
28
40
50
20
30
40
9,6
22
Actuator with horizontal fixing

3SE5000-0AW11
IC03_02627
9,6
Radius actuator, approach from right

3SE5000-0AV06
Radius actuator, approach from left

3SE5000-0AV04
4,5
18
15
31
NSC0_00779a
12
NSC0_00780a
40
31
58
20
31
12/60
10,3
4,5
10,3
75,6
0
28
Actuator with horizontal fixing

3SE5000-0AV03
13
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Universal radius actuator
3SE5000-0AV05
Universal radius actuator, heavy duty

3SE5000-0AV07
5,5
77
46
5
27,7
15
39,5
50
40
77
15
31
NSC0_00930
30
NSC0_00782a
50
29
5,5
40
Flexible lateral and vertical approach
30
60
15
15
27,7
60
NSC0_00931
Actuation and travel

Standard actuators
Radius actuators (all directions of approach)
Axial and lateral actuation (4 90)
Lateral actuation (4 90)
Example: Direction of approach from the left
90
< 2 mm
1,7 2,5
NSC0_00921
13-14
21-22 **
90
90
< 2 mm
mm
90
NSC0_00892
30
2,4 **
1,7 2,5
12
mm
NSC0_00893
NSC0_00923
2,4 **
13-14
21-22 **
31-32 **
30
Contact closed
Contact open
Actuator in actuator head:
NC is closed
** Positive opening point
Circuit diagrams and connector assignment see page 12/12.
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/61
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3SE2243, 3SE2257 configuration
40
28
56
40
4
5,5
4,8
3SX3217
actuator with ball locating
90
30
10
9
13
52
28,5
20,5
2
15,5
M20/M16
29
18
28
NSC0_00383b
5,5
27
75
27
40
27
29
18
16
2,5
6,5
16
7
11
fr Senkschraube M5
25,5
20,5
2,8
3SX3228
universal radius actuator
56
40
15,5
25,5
20,5
15
M20/M16
NSC0_00380c
14 8
2,8
9
13
52
30
Standard and radius actuators

Lateral actuation
*)
50
1 NC, Ident. No. 01

11
22
2,3
5,5
8
11-12
NSC0_00275a
mm
3SE3 243: 90 mm
3SE3 257: 75 mm
12

13 21 31
12
NSC0_00273a
*) Radius actuator: R min > 38 mm.
12/62
2,3
5,2 5,5
8
13-14
21-22
31-32
30
Siemens IC 10 2014
for M 5 tapping screw
2,5
6,5
27
Actuation and travel

Axial and lateral actuation
5,5
14 22 32
mm
NSC0_00274a
Contact closed
Contact open
Actuator in actuator head:
NC is closed
NSC0_00382a
5,5
R min 1
15,7
56
5,5
3SE2257, lateral and front-end actuation
NSC0_00381a
3SE2243, lateral and front-end actuation,

with 3SX3218 standard actuator
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 50047/50 mm

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm) Cable entry M20 1.5
Version1)
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

5 directions of approach
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5232-0RV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5232-0QV40
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0QV40-1AA1
1 unit
41K
With increased minimum pull-out force 30 N

1 NO + 2 NC --
With separate
actuator
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5234-0RV40-1AC4
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE5234-0QV40-1AE0
1 unit
41K
--
With M12 plug

1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5232-1RV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 230 V AC
3SE5232-3RV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5234-1RV40-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5242-0QV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5242-0RV40-1AA1
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5242-1QV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5242-3QV40
1 unit
41K

and 2 LEDs
With 2 LEDs

With 2 LEDs
1)
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately (see page 12/67).

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/63
12
With separate
actuator
Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
2 or 3 contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version1)
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5132-0QV20
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5132-1QV20
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5132-3QV20
1 unit
41K
With separate
actuator
With 2 LEDs
12
1)
12/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
Version1)
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5212-0RV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5212-0QV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5212-1RV40
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 230 V AC
3SE5212-3RV40
1 unit
41K
With separate
actuator
With 2 LEDs
12
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/65
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosure width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041/56 mm

Complete units
Version1)
Contacts
LEDs
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5112-0QV10
1 unit
41K
3SE5112-0QV10-1AA7
1 unit
41K

1 NO + 2 NC --
With separate
actuator
1 NO + 1 NC --
3SE5114-0RV10-1AC5
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE5114-0QV10-1AE1
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5115-0QV10-1AD1
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5112-1QV10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5112-3QV10
1 unit
41K
3SE5114-1RV10-1AF3
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
3SE5115-1RV10-1AF2
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0QV10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC --
3SE5122-0QV10-1AA7
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 24 V DC
3SE5122-1QV10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC 230 V AC
3SE5122-3QV10
1 unit
41K
--

With M12 plug


and 2 LEDs
With 2 LEDs
1 NO + 1 NC 24 V DC
With connector socket, 6-pole + PE (10 A),

and 2 LEDs
12
With separate
actuator
With 2 LEDs
1)
12/66
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Actuators for 3SE51, 3SE52

Standard actuators
Length 75.6 mm
3SE5000-0AV01
1 unit
41K
With vertical fixing,

length 53 mm
3SE5000-0AV02
1 unit
41K
With transverse fixing,

length 47 mm
3SE5000-0AV03
1 unit
41K
With transverse fixing, plastic1)

Length 40 mm
3SE5000-0AW11
1 unit
41K
Direction of approach from the left
3SE5000-0AV04
1 unit
41K
Direction of approach from the right
3SE5000-0AV06
1 unit
41K
Length 77 mm
3SE5000-0AV05
1 unit
41K
Length 77 mm, tab rotated 90
3SE5000-0AV05-1AA6
1 unit
41K
Length 67 mm
3SE5000-0AV07-1AK2
1 unit
41K
Length 77 mm
3SE5000-0AV07
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA2
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA3
1 unit
41K
Connector sockets (4-pole), M12, fixed

for M20 1.5
For max. 250 V, 4 A
3SY3127
1 unit
41K

for M20 1.5
For max. 125 V, 4 A
3SY3128
1 unit
41K

Plastic
3SX9926
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV01
3SE5000-0AV02
3SE5000-0AV03
3SE5000-0AW11
Radius actuators,
length 51 mm
3SE5000-0AV06
Universal radius actuators
3SE5000-0AV05-1AA6
Universal radius actuators, heavy duty
3SE5000-0AV07
Optional accessories for 3SE5

Protective caps made of black rubber
C
for the actuator head, to protect the actuator openings from
contamination
(Only for enclosure width 40 or 56 mm)
Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator head,
for up to eight padlocks
12
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA2
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA3
Connections for 3SE5, 3SE2
3SY3127
3SX9926
1)
Not suitable for safety switches with interlocking.

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/67
Siemens AG 2013


Complete units
1 or 3 contacts 3 directions of approach Degree of protection IP67
Version
Operation
DT Complete units
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Molded-plastic enclosures in special width of 52 mm

Lateral and front-end actuation1)
6 mm stroke

Holding force 5 N
3SE2243-0XX40
1 unit
41K
Holding force 30 N
3SE2243-0XX
1 unit
41K
With automatic
ejection
3SE2243-0XX30
1 unit
41K
Holding force 5 N
3SE2257-6XX40
1 unit
41K
Holding force 30 N
3SE2257-6XX
1 unit
41K
With automatic
ejection
3SE2257-6XX30
1 unit
41K
Holding force 5 N
3SE2243-0XX48
1 unit
41K
Holding force 30 N
3SE2243-0XX18
1 unit
41K
With automatic
ejection
3SE2243-0XX38
1 unit
41K
Holding force 5 N
3SE2257-6XX48
1 unit
41K
Holding force 30 N
3SE2257-6XX18
1 unit
41K
With automatic
ejection
3SE2257-6XX38
1 unit
41K
Standard actuators
(rmin = 150 mm),
length 28 mm
3SX3218
1 unit
41K
Universal radius actuator

(rmin = 45 mm),
length 34 mm
3SX3228
1 unit
41K
Radius actuator,
adjustable radius,
length 34 mm
3SX3256
1 unit
41K
Ball locating,
force adjustable up to 100 N
by 2 screws,
length 28 mm
3SX3217
1 unit
41K
Actuator, length 34 mm,

with dust protection and slit cover
3SX3234
1 unit
41K
3SX3233
3 units
41K
- Slow-action contacts
1 NO + 2 NC
1 NC
3SE2243
1 NO + 2 NC
1 NC
Accessories
Actuators
3SX3218
3SX3228
12
3SX3256
3SX3217
3SX3234
Accessories
Slit cover
(1 set = 3 units)
1)
Supplied without actuator.
12/68
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

With Solenoid Interlocking
General data
Overview
The safety switches with solenoid interlocking are exceptional
safety-related devices which prevent an unforeseen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles or other
covers as long as a dangerous situation is present
(i.e. follow-on motion of the switched-off machine).
Locking devices
A high-grade steel locking device for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety (see page 12/75).
Dust protection
from contamination is available for operation in dusty environments (see page 12/75).
Solenoid interlocking
There are two versions for interlocking the actuator:
Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle) with various
release mechanisms
Solenoid-locked (open-circuit principle)
The spring-actuated lock switch is equipped with an auxiliary
release for emergency situations or setup mode. Available as
options:
Escape release or
Emergency release
Contact blocks
The safety switches with solenoid interlocking comprise a switch

part with electromechanical interlock and a mechanical actuator
which has to be ordered separately.
They are rugged protective devices that enable the greatest
possible safety for man and machine.
The safety switches with solenoid interlocking are offered in
plastic or metal enclosures.
Dimensions (W H D): 54 mm 185 mm 43.5 mm
Operation
safety switches and must be ordered separately from a choice
of different versions to suit the application (see page 12/75).
Actuation data:
Maximum actuating speed vmax = 1.5 m/s
Minimum actuating speed vmin = 0.4 mm/s
Minimum force in the direction of actuation Fmin = 30 N
Radius actuators
The safety switches with radius actuators are particularly suitable for rotary protective devices. The movable actuation key allows even small radii to be approached. Damage to the switch
and the actuator due to inaccurate approach is prevented.
The safety switches with solenoid interlocking have one contact

block each for:
Monitoring the actuator or the position of the protective door
Monitoring the position of the solenoid
The mechanical design of the switch corresponds to the requirements of the fail-safe principle according to EN 1088.
Optical signaling equipment
The safety switches with solenoid interlocking are available with
an optional optical signaling device.
The signaling device indicates the switch position of the lock
and the protective device optically by means of 2 LEDs on the
front.
Protective device Solenoid
interlocking
Display
Meaning
Closed
Released
Actuator
to be pulled
Closed
Locked
Actuator
locked
Open
Released
Actuator
pulled
Internal wiring:
The yellow LED is pre-wired to the magnetic monitoring
NO contact.
The green LED is pre-wired to the actuator monitoring
NC contact.
LED ground is pre-wired to the ground of the solenoid.
Note:
The operational voltage must be connected to the corresponding contacts by the customer.
This voltage for the LEDs must match the operational voltage
of the solenoid (same potential).
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/69
12
3SE5 safety switch with solenoid interlocking
Siemens AG 2013

General data
There are two versions of locking:
Benefits
The new generation of 3SE53 safety switches offers
More safety through higher locking forces:
- 1300 N with plastic enclosure
- 2600 N with metal enclosure
Various release mechanisms: Lock release, escape release
and emergency release
Two contact blocks each with three contacts as standard
equipment, hence fewer versions needed
Same dimensions for all enclosure versions:
Plastic, metal or with integrated ASIsafe
An extensive range of actuators
An optional LED status display 24 V DC, 115 V AC or 230 V AC
for all switch versions
Devices with ASIsafe electronics integrated in the enclosure
(see page 12/94)
Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle)

In the standard version, the safety switch locks by means of
spring force and releases by means of electromagnetic force.
In the case of voltage failure, it reliably prevents the protective
device from opening when machine parts are still moving.
The switch is equipped with an auxiliary release for emergency
situations or setup mode.
An auxiliary release which can be secured with a lock to prevent misuse is available as a version.
Application
The safety position switches with solenoid interlocking have the
following functions:
Enabling the machine or process with closed and locked protective device
Locking the machine or process with opened protective device
Position monitoring of the protective device and solenoid interlocking
Standards
The switches comply with the standards IEC 60947-1 (Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear, General) and IEC 60947-5-1
(Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices).
Auxiliary release
Auxiliary release with lock
The 3SE5 3 safety switches are also available with an escape

release or emergency release.
Personnel working inside the hazard zone can use the escape
release feature to manually release the interlocking without
tools from the escape side (hazardous area side) so that they
can exit the hazard area. An intentional act (in this case pulling
the gray actuator) is required to release the locking mechanism
and restore the normal operating state.
The emergency release enables someone in an emergency situation to manually release the interlock without tools from the
access side (outside the hazardous area). Releasing the lock
and restoring the normal operating state must require effort
which is comparable to repair activity, in this case disassembly
of the red actuator and resetting the mechanical lock.
Approvals
12
The switches are approved for use with locking devices according to EN 1088 and EN 292, Parts 1 and 2.
Category 3 according to EN ISO 13849-1 can be attained with a
safety switch with solenoid interlocking if the corresponding failsafe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed,
e.g. the 3SK1 or 3TK28 safety relays or matching units from the
Category 4 can be achieved when using an additional
3SE5 safety switch.
These switches are approved according to UL 508, UL 50 and
UL 746-C.
Escape release from the front
The separate actuator operates in a similar way to the coding of

a key and protects against manipulation. It transmits the locking
force to the protective device and helps to monitor its position.

The second version offers locking by means of electromagnetic force and release by means of spring force. This version
has an advantage when it is necessary to quickly access the
machine after a power failure occurs, or in the case of very
short coasting times.
12/70
Siemens IC 10 2014
Emergency release from the back
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Examples of door interlocking
X-Lock door interlocking from Axelent
Door interlocking from Brhl
For the addresses of the door interlock manufacturers see

Chapter 16, "Appendix" "External Partners".
Type
3SE5322
3SE5312
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Standards
250
Class 3
kV
DC
24
50/60 Hz AC
230


- At 24 V
- At 120 V
- At 230 V
Ie / AC-15 or B300
A
A
A
6
3
1.5
A
A
A
3
0.55
0.27
Locking force, max.
1 300
2 600
Locking force according to GS-ET 19
1 000
2 000
Power consumption at Uc
3.5

0.5
For direct current

- At 24 V
- At 125 V
- At 250 V
Ie / DC-13 or Q300
12
Magnet
For utilization category AC-15 with interrupting

of Ie / AC-15 at 230 V
With utilization category DC-12/DC-13
For direct current depending on the loading of the switch
Switching frequency
6000 operating cycles/h
30 g / 11 ms
1)
Without any welds according to IEC 60947-5-1.
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/71
Siemens AG 2013

General data
3SE53 configuration
Spring-actuated lock, with auxiliary release
3SE5322-.SD2., 3SE5322-.SG2., 3SE5322-.SJ2.,
3SE5312-.SD1., 3SE5312-.SG1., 3SE5312-.SJ1.,
Spring-actuated lock, with auxiliary release with lock

3SE5322-.SE2.,
3SE5312-.SE1.
39,1
2,9
39,1
2,9
32
30
40
19,3
33
19,3
33
25,1
25,1
32
18,9
30
40
5,3
18,9
5,3
M20x1,5
16,3
43,8
94
5,5
31
Spring-actuated lock, with escape release

3SE5322-.SF2.,
3SE5312-.SF1.
16,3
43,8
40
54
5,5
87
Solenoid lock
3SE5322-.SB2.,
3SE5312-.SB1.
39,1
2,9
39,1
2,9
32
18,9
30
40
135,3
21,5
NSC0_00773
21,5
12
16,3
43,8
31
16,3
43,8
31
40
54
94
5,5
NSC0_00774
M20x1,5
M20x1,5
40
54
18,9
5,3
159
30
31
5,3
135,3
159
30
40
19,3
33
19,3
33
25,1
25,1
32
NSC0_00772
21,5
21,5
NSC0_00771
M20x1,5
31
40
54
31
135,3
159
30
135,3
159
62,1
5,5
Note:
The plastic enclosures have knock-out openings behind the
connecting thread; they are delivered therefore without protective caps.
Actuators see pages 12/60 and 12/61.
Circuit diagrams
Operating travel
Actuation see page 12/61.
Monitoring the actuator
Monitoring the solenoid
Monitoring the actuator
Slow-action contacts 1 NO + 2 NC
12 22
11 21
12/72
34
41 51
33
42 52
Siemens IC 10 2014
63
64
mm
1,7 2,5
2,4 **
NSC0_00925
11-12 **
21-22 **
33-34
30
Siemens AG 2013

With locking force greater than 1200 N

6 slow-action contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 M20 1.5 Locking force 1 300 N
Interlock1)
LEDs
Solenoid,
rated operational voltage
DT Complete units
Position monitoring:
Actuators: 1 NO + 2 NC
Solenoid: 1 NO + 2 NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
V
Price
per PU
1 300 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm

Spring-actuated locks
With auxiliary release
3SE5312-0SD2.
with lock
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SD21
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5322-0SD22
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5322-0SD23
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5322-1SD21
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5322-2SD22
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5322-3SD23
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SE21
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5322-0SE22
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5322-0SE23
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5322-1SE21
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5322-2SE22
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5322-3SE23
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SF21
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5322-0SF22
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5322-0SF23
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5322-1SF21
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5322-2SF22
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5322-3SF23
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SL21
1 unit
41K
24 DC
3SE5322-0SL21-1AJ0
1 unit
41K
3SE5312-0SE2.
With escape release from the
front
3SE5312-0SF2.

front and emergency release
from the back
- For ambient temperature up
to 40 C
With escape release from the -back and auxiliary release from -the front
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SG21
1 unit
41K
115 AC
3SE5322-0SG22
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5322-0SG23
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5322-1SG21
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5322-2SG22
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5322-3SG23
1 unit
41K
24 DC
3SE5322-0SH21
1 unit
41K
With escape release from the -back and auxiliary release with
lock from the front
With emergency release from -the back and auxiliary release -from the front
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SJ21
1 unit
41K
115 AC
3SE5322-0SJ22
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5322-0SJ23
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5322-1SJ21
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5322-2SJ22
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5322-3SJ23
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5322-0SB21
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5322-0SB22
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5322-0SB23
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5322-1SB21
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5322-2SB22
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5322-3SB23
1 unit
41K
3SE5312-0SJ2.
Solenoid locks
3SE5312-0SB2.
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/73
12
3SE5312-0SG2.
Siemens AG 2013


6 slow-action contacts 5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry 3 M20 1.5 Locking force 2 600 N
Interlock1)
LEDs
Solenoid,
rated operational voltage
DT Complete units
Position monitoring:
Actuators: 1 NO + 2 NC
Solenoid: 1 NO + 2 NC
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Configurator
Article No.
V
Price
per PU
2 600 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm

3SE5312-0SD1.
with lock
--
24 DC
3SE5312-0SD11
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5312-0SD12
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5312-0SD13
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5312-1SD11
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5312-2SD12
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5312-3SD13
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5312-0SE11
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5312-0SE12
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5312-0SE13
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5312-1SE11
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5312-2SE12
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5312-3SE13
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5312-0SF11
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5312-0SF12
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5312-0SF13
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5312-1SF11
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5312-2SF12
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5312-3SF13
1 unit
41K
3SE5312-0SE1.
front
3SE5312-0SF1.
With escape release from the -back and auxiliary release from -the front
--
24 DC
3SE5312-0SG11
1 unit
41K
115 AC
3SE5312-0SG12
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5312-0SG13
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5312-1SG11
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5312-2SG12
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5312-3SG13
1 unit
41K
24 DC
3SE5312-0SH11
1 unit
41K
3SE5312-0SG1.
With escape release from the -back and auxiliary release with
lock from the front
12
With emergency release from -the back and auxiliary release -from the front
--
24 DC
3SE5312-0SJ11
1 unit
41K
115 AC
3SE5312-0SJ12
1 unit
41K
230 AC
3SE5312-0SJ13
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5312-1SJ11
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5312-2SJ12
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5312-3SJ13
1 unit
41K
--
24 DC
3SE5312-0SB11
1 unit
41K
--
115 AC
3SE5312-0SB12
1 unit
41K
--
230 AC
3SE5312-0SB13
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 24 DC
3SE5312-1SB11
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 115 AC
3SE5312-2SB12
1 unit
41K
Yellow/Green 230 AC
3SE5312-3SB13
1 unit
41K
3SE5312-0SJ1.
Solenoid locks
3SE5312-0SB1.
1)
12/74
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Actuators for 3SE53

Standard actuators
Length 75.6 mm
3SE5000-0AV01
1 unit
41K

length 53 mm
3SE5000-0AV02
1 unit
41K

length 47 mm
3SE5000-0AV03
1 unit
41K
Direction of approach from the left
3SE5000-0AV04
1 unit
41K
Direction of approach from the right
3SE5000-0AV06
1 unit
41K
Length 77 mm
3SE5000-0AV05
1 unit
41K
Length 77 mm, tab rotated 90
3SE5000-0AV05-1AA6
1 unit
41K
Length 67 mm
3SE5000-0AV07-1AK2
1 unit
41K
Length 77 mm
3SE5000-0AV07
1 unit
41K
Protective caps made of black rubber

C
for the actuator head, to protect the actuator openings from
contamination
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA2
1 unit
41K
Blocking inserts, high-grade steel, for actuator head,

3SE5000-0AV08-1AA3
1 unit
41K
Spare keys
3SX5100-1F
1 unit
41K

for M20 1.5
For max. 250 V, 4 A
3SY3127
1 unit
41K

for M20 1.5
For max. 125 V, 4 A
3SY3128
1 unit
41K

Plastic
3SX9926
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV01
3SE5000-0AV02
3SE5000-0AV03
Radius actuators,
length 51 mm
3SE5000-0AV04
3SE5000-0AV05-1AA6
3SE5000-0AV07
Optional accessories for 3SE5
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA2
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA3
Connection for 3SE5
3SY3 127
3SX9 926

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/75
12
Spare parts for 3SE53
Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches
General data
Overview
Benefits
3SE5 hinge switches have the same enclosures as the

3SE5 position switches (modular system).
The 3SE5 hinge switches differ from the previous series through
the following new characteristics:
All actuators can be turned around the axis in increments of
22.5 (see picture, page 12/5).
The new three-pole contact block 1 NO + 2 NC is available for
all enclosure sizes (see picture, page 12/5).
The plastic enclosure with a width of 31 mm has simple and
fast wiring equipment which makes it possible to save from
approx. 20 to 25 % of the time when connecting (see picture,
page 12/5).
Application
Hinge switches
Design
Enclosure sizes
The 3SE5 switches are available as complete units in two enclosure sizes:
1 cable entry
40 mm wide, IP66/IP67, 1 cable entry
Enclosure versions
Various basic versions can be selected for the enclosures:
Available with two or three-pole contact blocks designed as
snap-action contacts
For a description of the basic switches, see page 12/4.
12
Operating mechanism
The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges. The
actuator head is included in the scope of supply. There are two
versions:
Operating mechanism with hollow shaft, inner diameter 8 mm,
outer 12 mm
Operating mechanism with solid shaft, diameter 10 mm
3SE2283 hinge switches
The 3SE2283 hinge switches with integrated hinge are available
in a special design. They are particularly suitable for use in machine doors and flaps.
12/76
Siemens IC 10 2014
The hinge switches are used in those areas where the position of
swiveling protective devices such as doors or flaps must be
monitored. With these switches, the position of the doors and
hinge switches is converted into electric signals. The switches
allow shutdown and signaling without delay in the event of a
small opening angle through the snap-action contacts with an
operating angle of 10.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. Dimensions and fixing points of the enclosures are in
accordance with EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1 or EN 60947-5-1.
glands.
Safety circuits
equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to IEC 60947-5-1 with the symbol q.
the 3SE5 hinge switches with q if the corresponding fail-safe
evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the
3TK28 or 3SK1 safety relays or matching devices from the
Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches
General data
The technical specifications are the same as for the standard
switches (see page 12/7).
Configuration
83,5
M3
2,9
50
12,5
NSC0_00811
NSC0_00812
68
68
20
22
13
12,5
20
22
13
24
4,3
24
4,3
52,8
47,8
39,8
31
10
With solid shaft

3SE5212-0.U22, 3SE5232-0.U22
12
With hollow shaft

3SE5212-0.U21, 3SE5232-0.U21
15
M20x1,5
31
33
15
M20x1,5
33
12,5
24
87,3
12,5
24
56,6
51,6
43,6
10
With solid shaft

3SE5112-0.U22, 3SE5132-0.U22
12
With hollow shaft

3SE5112-0.U21, 3SE5132-0.U21
16,3
16,3
M3
2,9
M20x1,5
30
40,5
5,3
NSC0_00813a
5,3
30
40,5
15,3
37,3
M20x1,5
NSC0_00814a
60
78
60
78
51,6
15,3
37,3
Operating travel of the shaft

13
22
**
10
21
NSC0_00918
13-14
21-22
12
14
**
20

14 32 22
13 31 21
**
10
NSC0_00919
13-14
21-22 **
31-32 **
20
Contact closed
Contact open
** Positive opening point
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/77
Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches
Enclosure width 31 mm / 40 mm

Complete units
2 or 3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP67/IP68 (40 mm) Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Snap-action
contacts
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 50047

With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 1 NC 1) q B
1 NO + 2 NC
q B
3SE5232-0HU21
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0LU21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC 1) q B
1 NO + 2 NC
q B
3SE5232-0HU22
1 unit
41K
3SE5232-0LU22
1 unit
41K
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
Operating angle 10
With solid shaft
Plastic enclosures Enclosure width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041

With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5132-0LU21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5132-0LU22
1 unit
41K
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
12
With solid shaft

1)
Contact blocks permanently integrated, replacement not available.
Spare parts
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Actuator heads
With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
3SE5000-0AU21
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AU22
1 unit
41K
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
With solid shaft
Note:
The respective actuators are included in the scope of supply for the complete units.
12/78
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches

Complete units
3 contacts Degree of protection IP66/IP67 Cable entry M20 1.5
Version
Snap-action
contacts
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Metal enclosures Enclosure width 31 mm according to EN 50047

With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5212-0LU21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5212-0LU22
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5112-0LU21
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE5112-0LU22
1 unit
41K
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
With solid shaft
Metal enclosures Enclosure width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041

With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
With solid shaft

12
Spare parts
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Actuator heads
With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
3SE5000-0AU21
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AU22
1 unit
41K
With hollow shaft

With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
With solid shaft
Note:
The respective actuators are included in the scope of supply for the complete units.
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/79
Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches
With integrated hinge
Overview
Benefits
The 3SE2283 hinge switches with built-in hinge are particularly

suitable for use in doors and flaps of machines that must be
closed to ensure the safety of operating personnel. Their thin
profile and the compact design allow them to be directly
mounted on a hinged protective cover and the stable frame.
Easy mounting through use of versions with integrated hinge

Versions with small operating angle of 4 or 8
Protection against personal injury provided by positively
driven NC contacts according to IEC 60947-5-1
Simultaneous shutdown and reporting by 1 NO + 2 NC
contacts
Type
3SE2283
250
2.5
At AC-15, 120 V
4.2
At AC-15, 250 V
At DC-13, 24 V
> 5 V / 1 mA
Min. make-break capacity

> 1 106 operating cycles
Switching frequency
Positive opening
2 mm after opening point
Enclosure material
Plastic
IP65
25 ... +65
Ambient temperature
Shock resistance
30 g/18 ms
Resistance to vibrations
20 g /10 ... 200 Hz
Cable entry
2 (M20 1.5)
Screw terminals
0.5 ... 1.5 mm2/AWG 15
Configuration
15
6,8
M20 1,5
62
92
15
19
36
13
NSC0_00611b
3SX3225 additional hinge
12
3SE2283-.GA.3 hinge switch with hinge
71
42
12
NSC0_ 00618b
76
62
92
44
71
44
Operating travel of the hinge


11 21 31
12 22 32
3 NC, Ident. No. 03

4
NSC0_00614a
Contact closed
Contact open
12/80
Siemens IC 10 2014
13,5
11-12
21-22
33-34
13
11 21 31
12 22 32
NSC0_00615a
11-12
21-22
31-32
13,5
Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches

3 contacts Degree of protection IP65 Cable entry 2 (M20 1.5)
Version
Slow-action
contacts
DT Complete units
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic enclosures with integrated hinge

(Delivery includes additional hinge and
fixing accessories)
Aluminum hinge
3SE2283
- Operating angle 4
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2283-0GA43
1 unit
41K
- Operating angle 4
3 NC
3SE2283-6GA43
1 unit
41K
- Operating angle 8
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2283-0GA53
1 unit
41K
- Operating angle 8
3 NC
3SE2283-6GA53
1 unit
41K
- Operating angle 4
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE2283-0GA44
1 unit
41K
- Operating angle 4
3 NC
3SE2283-6GA44
1 unit
41K
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
High-grade steel hinge
Accessories/spare parts
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Accessories
Additional hinge
(delivered with fixing accessories)
Made of aluminum
3SX3225
1 unit
41K
Made of high-grade steel
3SX3231
1 unit
41K
12
3SX3225

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/81
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3SF1 Mechanical Safety Switches for AS-Interface

General data
Overview
Benefits
The 3SF1 position switches with safety-related communication

can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system.
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired
up.
With the 3SF1 position switches the ASIsafe electronics component is integrated in the switch enclosure.
The new generation of 3SF1 position switches offers:

ASIsafe electronics component integrated in the enclosure,
with low power consumption < 60 mA
Status display with three LEDs
Application
With the standard position switches, mechanical positions of
moving machine parts are converted into electrical signals.
Through their modular and uniform design and large number of
variants, the devices can comply with practically all requirements in industry.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. And many different actuator variants are available to
match the mechanical configuration of the moving machined
parts. Dimensions, fixing points and characteristics are largely in
accordance with the EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
Standards
Examples of selection options in the modular system
Modular system
The position switches of the 3SF11.4 and 3SF12.4 series are designed as a modular system comprising different versions of the
basic switch and an actuator which must be ordered separately.
Thanks to the modular design of the switch the end users can
select the right solution for their application from numerous versions and install it themselves in a very short time.
Design
The 3SF1 switches are available in four different enclosure sizes:
31 mm wide, with M12 plug
with M12 plug
Plastic enclosures, 50 mm wide, with M12 plug and M12
socket
Metal enclosures, 56 mm wide, with M12 plug and M12 socket
12
Display
The switches have a status display with three LEDs:
LED 1 (yellow):
F-IN1
LED 2 (yellow):
F-IN2
LED 3 (green/red): AS-i/FAULT
Connection
Connection to the AS-Interface is by means of a 4-pole M12 connector socket (plastic version) connected to the yellow AS-Interface bus cable.
The wide enclosures (50 or 56 mm) also have an M12 socket for
connecting a second position switch. Category 4 according to
EN ISO 13849-1 is thus achieved.
12/82
Siemens IC 10 2014
The switches comply with the standards IEC 60947-1

(Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear, General) and
IEC 60947-5-1 (Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices).
Approvals
AS-Interface according to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.
With a 3SF1 position switch it is possible to achieve Category 2
according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 1 according to IEC 61508.
Categories 3 or 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 2 or 3
according to IEC 61508 can be achieved by using a second
3SE5 position switch.
The 3SF1 position switches are approved according to UL 508,
UL 50 and UL 746-C.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3SF11.., 3SF12..
General data
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 1088
Standards
According to AS-Interface specification
I/O configuration / ID configuration
0/B
ID1 code / ID2 code (Hex)
F/F
Power consumption, overall
60
mA
Inputs
Low signal range
Contact open
High signal range
Contact closed, Iin dynamic (Ipeak 5 mA)

Green/red dual LED
Status display
kV
0.6
IEC 61000-1-2
kV
IEC 61000-4-3
V/m
10
IEC 61000-4-4 (A / B)
kV
1/2

EMC resistance
Basic switches
With separate actuator, 3SF1...-..V..
PFH value
Probability of failure upon request of the safety
function, with 1 actuation per hour and
B10 = 5 106
Basic switches
1/h
4 10-9
With separate actuator, 3SF1...-..V..
1/h
2 10-9
Hinge switches, 3SF1...-..U..
1/h
2 10-9
30 g / 11 ms
Type
3SF1234
3SF1134
3SF1244
3SF1214
3SF1114
3SF1124
Enclosure
Enclosure
Material
Ultramid A3X2G7
Zinc diecasting GD Zn Al4 Cu1
31
40
50
31
40
56
Dimensions according to EN
EN 50047
EN 50041
--
EN 50047
EN 50041
--
IP65
IP66/IP67
Width
mm
Ambient temperature
During operation
25 ... +60
Storage, transport
40 ... +80
Any
Mounting position
LEDs
M12 socket, 4-pole
NSC0_00821
Status display (operating state)
LEDs
ASi/Fault
(GN/RD)
NSC0_00824
1 ASi +
1 Channel 2
2 Not assigned
2 Channel 2
3 ASi
3 Not assigned
4 Not assigned
4 Not assigned
No voltage on CommunicaAS-Interface
tion OK
chip
Communication failed
Slave has
address "0"
Safe inputs
LEDs
Not actuated
Actuated
F-IN1
(YE)
F-IN2
(YE)
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/83
12
Connector assignment
Siemens AG 2013

Plastic enclosures
Enclosure width 31 mm acc. to EN 50047 / 50 mm

Modular system
For the ASIsafe version of the position switch, the basic switch
and actuator must be ordered separately.
1 or 2 contacts 3 LEDs Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm) M12 connector socket
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Basic switches (with rounded plunger1))

With teflon plunger
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole,
channel 1 on NC contact,
channel 2 on NC contact
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1234-1KC05-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1234-1LC05-1BA1
1 unit
42A
ASIsafe basic switch

With teflon plunger
channel 2 on M12 socket, right
1 NC
24 V DC
3SF1244-1KC05-1BA2
1 unit
42A
1 NC
24 V DC
3SF1244-1LC05-1BA2
1 unit
42A

positively driven actuator for use in safety circuits.
For enclosures with widths of 31 mm and 50 mm, the basic switch is a

complete unit with rounded plungers.
12
1)
Note:
12/84
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Plastic enclosures
Version
Roller
diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic roller
10
q A
3SE5000-0AD03
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel roller
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD04
1 unit
41K
Plastic roller
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD10
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AE10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE11
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE13
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF13
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AK00
1 unit
41K
Roller plungers
With central
fixing
Roller lever
Angular roller
lever
Twist actuators with lever

Switching right or left, adjustable
Twist actuator
Levers
Twist lever
19
q A
3SE5000-0AA21
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA22
1 unit
41K

with ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA23
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA25
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA31
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA32
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA24
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA61
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA67
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA68
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA63
1 unit
41K
Twist lever,
adjustable
length
q Positively driven actuator, for use in safety circuits.

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/85
12

with grid hole
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures

Modular system
2 contacts 3 LEDs Degree of protection IP66/IP67 M12 connector socket
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With plunger
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1214-1KC05-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1214-1LC05-1BA1
1 unit
42A

12
1)
Note:
12/86
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Version
Roller
diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plain plungers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K
Plastic roller
10
q A
3SE5000-0AD03
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD04
1 unit
41K
Plastic roller
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD10
1 unit
41K
10
q B
3SE5000-0AD11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AE10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE11
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AE13
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF10
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF11
1 unit
41K
13
q A
3SE5000-0AF12
1 unit
41K
13
q B
3SE5000-0AF13
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AK00
1 unit
41K
Plain plunger
Roller plungers
With central
fixing
Roller lever
Angular roller
lever

Switching right or left, adjustable
Twist actuator
Levers
Twist lever
19
q A
3SE5000-0AA21
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA22
1 unit
41K

with ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA23
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA25
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA31
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA32
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA24
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA61
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA67
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA68
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA63
1 unit
41K

with grid hole
Twist lever,
adjustable
length

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/87
12
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures

Modular system
1 or 2 contacts 3 LEDs Degree of protection IP66/IP67 M12 connector socket
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Basic switches Enclosure width 40 mm acc. to EN 50041

2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1114-1KA00-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1114-1LA00-1BA1
1 unit
42A

1 NC
24 V DC
3SF1124-1KA00-1BA2
1 unit
42A
1 NC
24 V DC
3SF1124-1LA00-1BA2
1 unit
42A
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Note:

Version
Roller
diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
Price
per PU
Plain plungers
10
q A
3SE5000-0AB01
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel plungers, with 3 mm overtravel 10
q B
3SE5000-0AC02
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AD02
1 unit
41K
Plain plunger
12
Rounded plungers, type B, acc. to EN 50041
Rounded
plunger
13
Roller plunger
12/88
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Version
Roller
diameter
DT Modular system
Article No.
mm
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Roller levers
Roller lever
22
q A
3SE5000-0AE01
1 unit
41K
22
q B
3SE5000-0AE02
1 unit
41K
22
q B
3SE5000-0AE03
1 unit
41K
22
q B
3SE5000-0AE04
1 unit
41K
22
q A
3SE5000-0AF01
1 unit
41K
22
q B
3SE5000-0AF02
1 unit
41K
22
q B
3SE5000-0AF03
1 unit
41K
22
q B
3SE5000-0AF04
1 unit
41K
q A
3SE5000-0AH00
1 unit
41K
q B
3SE5000-0AT10
1 unit
41K
Angular roller
lever

For twist levers,
switching right or left, adjustable
Twist actuator
- For enclosure width 40 and 56 mm

Levers
Twist levers 27 mm, offset, type A, according to EN 50041
Twist lever
19
q A
3SE5000-0AA01
1 unit
41K
19
q A
3SE5000-0AA02
1 unit
41K

with ball bearing
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA03
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA04
1 unit
41K
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA05
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA07
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA08
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA11
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA12
1 unit
41K
19
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA15
3SE5000-0AA16
1 unit
41K
q B
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA24
30
q B
3SE5000-0AA26
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41K
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA60
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA61
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA67
1 unit
41K
50
q B
3SE5000-0AA68
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA62
1 unit
41K
19
q B
3SE5000-0AA63
1 unit
41K

Twist lever,
adjustable
length

Fork lever

19
q B
3SE5000-0AT01
1 unit
41K
Metal lever, 2 high-grade steel rollers
19
q B
3SE5000-0AT02
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel lever, 2 plastic rollers
19
q B
3SE5000-0AT03
1 unit
41K
High-grade steel lever, 2 high-grade steel rollers 19
q B
3SE5000-0AT04
1 unit
41K

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/89
12

with grid hole
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Benefits
The 3SF1 safety switches with safety-related communication can

be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. The
safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired up.
With the 3SF1 safety switches the ASIsafe electronics component is integrated in the switch enclosure.
The new generation of 3SF1 safety switches with separate actuator offers
ASIsafe electronics component integrated in the enclosure,
with low power consumption < 60 mA
Status display with three LEDs
Application
safety reasons.
The safety switch can only be operated with the matching coded
actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible.
Devices are available with enclosure versions to suit the particular ambient conditions. Different control tasks can be performed with the best contact blocks suited for the particular purpose. Dimensions, fixing points of the enclosure are in
accordance with EN 50041 or EN 50047 standards.
Standards
3SF1 safety switches with head for separate actuator and with integrated
ASIsafe electronics
3SF1 safety switches with separate actuator have the same

enclosures as the 3SF1 position switches.
Operation
safety switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of
different versions to suit the application (see page 12/93).
A high-grade steel blocking insert for attaching up to eight padlocks is available for even more safety.
A rubber cap to protect the actuator head from contamination is
available for operation in dusty environments.
12
Display
The switches have a status display with three LEDs:
LED 1 (yellow):
F-IN1
LED 2 (yellow):
F-IN2
LED 3 (green/red): AS-i/FAULT
Connection
Connection to the AS-Interface is by means of a 4-pole M12 connector socket (plastic version) connected to the yellow AS-Interface bus cable.
The wide enclosures (50 or 56 mm) also have an M12 socket for
connecting a second safety switch. Category 4 according to
EN ISO 13849-1 is thus achieved.
12/90
Siemens IC 10 2014

Approvals
With a 3SF1 safety switch it is possible to achieve Category 3
according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 2 according to IEC 61508.
Category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to
IEC 61508 can be achieved by using a second 3SE5 safety
switch.
The 3SF1 safety switches are approved according to UL 508,
UL 50 and UL 746-C.
Siemens AG 2013

Plastic enclosures
Overview
Contacts: 1 or 2 slow-action contacts
Status display with 3 LEDs 24 V DC;
1: FIN1, 2: FIN2, 3: AS-i/FAULT
Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm)

Version1)
Contacts
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

2 NC
3SF1234-1QV40-1BA1
1 unit
42A
1 NC
3SF1244-1QV40-1BA2
1 unit
42A
With M12 connector socket, 4-pole;

12
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/91
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Enclosure width 31 mm / 40 mm / 56 mm
Overview
Contacts: 1 or 2 slow-action contacts
1: FIN1, 2: FIN2, 3: AS-i/FAULT

Version1)
Contacts
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

2 NC
3SF1214-1QV40-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC
3SF1114-1QV10-1BA1
1 unit
42A
1 NC
3SF1124-1QV10-1BA2
1 unit
42A

With M12 connector socket, 4-pole;
12

1)
12/92
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Actuators
Standard actuators
Length 75.6 mm
3SE5000-0AV01
1 unit
41K

length 53 mm
3SE5000-0AV02
1 unit
41K

length 47 mm
3SE5000-0AV03
1 unit
41K
With transverse fixing, plastic1)

Length 40 mm
3SE5000-0AW11
1 unit
41K
Length 51 mm,
direction of approach from the left
3SE5000-0AV04
1 unit
41K
Length 51 mm,
direction of approach from the right
3SE5000-0AV06
1 unit
41K
- Length 77 mm
3SE5000-0AV05
1 unit
41K
- Length 77 mm, tab rotated 90
3SE5000-0AV05-1AA6
1 unit
41K
- Length 67 mm
3SE5000-0AV07-1AK2
1 unit
41K
- Length 77 mm
3SE5000-0AV07
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA2
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA3
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AV01
3SE5000-0AV02
3SE5000-0AV03
3SE5000-0AW11
Radius actuators
3SE5000-0AV04
3SE5000-0AV6
3SE5000-0AV05-1AA6
3SE5000-0AV07
Protective caps made of black rubber for the actuator head, C
to protect the actuator openings from contamination
12
(Only for enclosure width 40 or 56 mm)

3SE5000-0AV08-1AA2
Blocking inserts, high-grade steel,
for actuator head,
3SE5000-0AV08-1AA3
1)
Not suitable for safety switches with interlocking.

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/93
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Benefits
The 3SF1 safety switches with safety-related communication can

be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. The
safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired up.
With the 3SF1 safety switches the ASIsafe electronics component is integrated in the switch enclosure.
The new generation of 3SF13 safety switches with solenoid

interlocking offers:
More safety through higher locking forces:
- 1 300 N for the plastic version
- 2 600 N for the metal version
Various release mechanisms: Lock release, escape release
and emergency release
ASIsafe electronics integrated in the enclosure;
connected through 4-pole M12 connector socket
Current consumption of the solenoid no more than 170 mA
Two contact blocks as standard equipment, hence fewer versions needed
Same dimensions for all enclosure versions:
Plastic, metal
Status display with four LEDs
Application
3SF1 safety switch with solenoid interlocking and

with integrated ASIsafe electronics
Operation
safety switch and must be ordered separately from a choice of
different versions to suit the application (see page 12/93).
A high-grade steel blocking insert for attaching up to eight
padlocks is available for even more safety.
12

from contamination is available for operation of the enclosures in
dusty environments.

The safety switches with tumbler have the following functions:
Enabling the machine or process with closed and locked
protective device
Locking the machine or process with opened protective
device
Position monitoring of the protective device and solenoid
interlocking
Standards
Approvals
There are two versions for interlocking the actuator:

Spring-actuated lock (closed-circuit principle) with various
release mechanisms
The switches are approved for use with locking devices according to EN 1088 and EN 292, Parts 1 and 2.
For more explanations see page 12/70.

Display
The switches have a status display with four LEDs:
LED 1 (green): AS-i
LED 2 (red):
FAULT
LED 3 (yellow): F-IN1
LED 4 (yellow): F-IN2
Connection
Connection to the AS-Interface is by means of a 4-pole M12 connector socket (plastic version) connected to the yellow AS-Interface bus cable (no additional supply of auxiliary power is required thanks to the low current consumption of the solenoid of
max. 170 mA).
12/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
3SF13 safety switches with solenoid interlocking have a VDE test

mark.
With a 3SF13 safety switch with solenoid interlocking it is possible to achieve Category 3 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 2
according to IEC 61508.
Category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or SIL 3 according to
IEC 61508 can be achieved by using a second 3SE5 safety
switch.
The 3SF1 safety switches are approved according to UL 508,
UL 50 and UL 746-C.
Siemens AG 2013

Plastic enclosures
Overview
5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67
Slow-action contacts:
- Version -1BA1: ASIsafe channel 1 on 1 NC contact from the
actuator and channel 2 on 1 NC contact from the solenoid
- Version -1BA3: ASIsafe channel 1 on the first NC contact
from the actuator and channel 2 on the second NC contact
from the actuator
- Version -1BA4: ASIsafe channel 1 on 2 NC contacts from the
actuator and channel 2 on 1 NC contact from the solenoid.
A discrepancy between the two contacts of the actuator will
be evaluated already in the switch.
Solenoid: Rated operational voltage 24 V DC
1 300 N locking force
1: AS-i, 2: FAULT, 3: FIN1, 4: FIN2
Safety level
The 3SF1324-1S.21-1BA4 safety switches are also recommended where there are several protective door interlocking devices where reliable diagnostics and quick restart capability of
equipment is required.
A response is received from the magnet.
No opening of the doors after the solenoid is unlocked.
In connection with an ASIsafe MSS modular safety system or
in DP/AS-i F-Link it is possible to achieve SIL 2 according to
IEC 61508 or PL d according to ISO 13849-1.
Comparison of versions
Safety switches
Contacts
Achievable safety
level
Diagnostics
Reclosing condition
after unlocking the solenoid
Type
Actuator / solenoid
3SF1324-1S.21-1BA1
1 NC/1 NC
SIL 1 / PL c
Feedback from the solenoid
(depending on the type of evaluation)

Door does not have to be opened
SIL 2 / PL d
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1S.21-1BA3
2 NC
SIL 2 / PL d
--
3SF1324-1S.21-1BA4
2 NC/1 NC
SIL 2 / PL d
Door must be opened
Available
-- Not available

Interlock1)
Contacts
Actuators/
Solenoids
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
1300 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm

With auxiliary release with lock
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SD21-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC/--
3SF1324-1SD21-1BA3
1 unit
42A
2 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SD21-1BA4
1 unit
42A
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SE21-1BA1
1 unit
42A
With escape release from the front
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SF21-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SF21-1BA4
1 unit
42A
With escape release from the back

and auxiliary release from the front
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SG21-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SG21-1BA4
1 unit
42A
With emergency release from the back

1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SJ21-1BA1
1 unit
42A
Solenoid locks
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1324-1SB21-1BA1
1 unit
42A
2 NC/--
3SF1324-1SB21-1BA3
1 unit
42A
3SF1324-1SF21-...
3SF1324-1SB21-...
For actuators and optional accessories see page 12/93.

1)
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately.

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/95
12
3SF1324-1SD21-...
Siemens AG 2013

Metal enclosures
Overview
5 directions of approach Degree of protection IP66/IP67
Slow-action contacts:
Version -1BA1: ASIsafe channel 1 on 1 NC contact from the
actuator and channel 2 on 1 NC contact from the solenoid
Solenoid: Rated operational voltage 24 V DC
2 600 N locking force
1: AS-i, 2: FAULT, 3: FIN1, 4: FIN2
Safety level
See page 12/95.

Interlock1)
Contacts
Actuators/
Solenoids
DT Complete units
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
2600 N locking force Enclosure width 54 mm

1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SD11-1BA1
1 unit
42A
With auxiliary release with lock
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SE11-1BA1
1 unit
42A
With escape release from the front
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SF11-1BA1
1 unit
42A

1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SG11-1BA1
1 unit
42A

and auxiliary release with lock from the
front
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SH11-1BA1
1 unit
42A
With emergency release from the back

1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SJ11-1BA1
1 unit
42A
Solenoid locks
1 NC/1 NC
3SF1314-1SB11-1BA1
1 unit
42A
3SF1314-1SD11-...
3SF1314-1SF11-...
3SF1314-1SB11-...
For actuators and optional accessories see page 12/93.
Supplied without actuator. Please order separately.
12
1)
12/96
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches
Plastic enclosures
Overview
The 3SF1 safety hinge switches with safety-related communication can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally
wired up.
For the ASIsafe version of the hinge switch, the basic switch and
actuator head must be ordered separately. The basic switches
correspond to the 3SF1 position switches (use only versions with
snap-action contacts).
With the 3SF1 hinge switches the ASIsafe electronics component is integrated in the switch enclosure.
The standards and approvals are the same as for the 3SF1 standard switches (see page 12/82).
The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges.

There are two actuator variants here:
Hollow shaft, inner diameter 8 mm, outer 12 mm
Solid shaft, diameter 10 mm

Modular system
1 or 2 contacts 3 LEDs Degree of protection IP65 (31 mm) or IP66/IP67 (50 mm) M12 connector socket
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With teflon plunger,
with M12 connector socket, 4-pole,
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1234-1LC05-1BA1
1 unit
42A
24 V DC
3SF1244-1LC05-1BA2
1 unit
42A
3SE5000-0AU21
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AU22
1 unit
41K

With teflon plunger,
with M12 connector socket, 4-pole,
1 NC
Actuator heads
With hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
12
Actuator head with

hollow shaft
With solid shaft
Operating angle 10
Actuator head with

solid shaft

Siemens IC 10 2014
12/97
Siemens AG 2013

Hinge Switches
Metal enclosures
Enclosure width 31 mm / 40 mm / 56 mm
Overview
The 3SF1 safety hinge switches with safety-related communication can be directly connected using the AS-Interface bus system. The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally
wired up.
For the ASIsafe version of the hinge switch, the basic switch and
actuator head must be ordered separately. The basic switches
correspond to the 3SF1 position switches (use only versions with
snap-action contacts).
With the 3SF1 hinge switches the ASIsafe electronics component is integrated in the switch enclosure.
The standards and approvals are the same as for the 3SF1 standard switches (see page 12/82).
The hinge switches are provided for mounting on hinges.

There are two actuator variants here:
Hollow shaft, inner diameter 8 mm, outer 12 mm
Solid shaft, diameter 10 mm

Modular system
1 or 2 contacts 3 LEDs Degree of protection IP66/IP67 M12 connector socket
Version
Contacts
LEDs
DT Modular system
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

With plunger
2 NC
24 V DC
3SF1214-1LC05-1BA1
1 unit
42A
24 V DC
3SF1114-1LA00-1BA1
1 unit
42A
24 V DC
3SF1124-1LA00-1BA2
1 unit
42A
3SE5000-0AU21
1 unit
41K
3SE5000-0AU22
1 unit
41K

2 NC

1 NC
12
Actuator heads
Hollow shaft
Operating angle 10
Actuator head with

hollow shaft
Solid shaft
Operating angle 10
Actuator head with

solid shaft
12/98
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 3SE6 Non-Contact Safety Switches

Magnet
3SE66, 3SE67 magnetically operated switches
5,5
Overview
6
5,5
5
4
0_0
2
3
3
NSC
063
7a
3SE66 contact blocks and 3SE67 switching magnets
Enabling range (example)
A magnetically operated switch comprises a coded switching

magnet and a contact block (sensor unit). Evaluation requires a
safety relay or connection to a bus system.
The device has six current-sourcing semiconductor outputs

(Y1 ... Y6) which signal the state of the connected protective
devices.
3SE6806 safety relays
The 3SE6806 safety relay has two floating enabling circuits (safe
circuits) as NO contact circuits and one floating signaling circuit
as an NC contact circuit. The number of enabling circuits can be
increased by adding one or more 3TK2830 expansion modules.
Up to six protective devices (sensors) can be connected to the

safety relay.
Application
SIRIUS 3SE6 magnetically operated switches are designed for
mounting on movable protective guards (hoods, hinge switches,
doors, etc.). Evaluation can be performed by means of a safety
relay or through connection to a bus system.
The 3SE66 non-contact, magnetically operated safety switches
stand out due to their enclosed design with degree of protection
IP67. They are particularly suitable therefore for areas exposed
to contamination, cleaning or disinfecting.
A magnetic monitoring system comprises one or more magnetically operated switches and an evaluation unit, e.g. a safety
relay. When contact blocks 1 NO + 1 NC are used the 3SE6806
safety relay provides a high degree of protection against
manipulation and can be installed in safety circuits up to SIL 3
according to EN ISO 13849-1.
Combination of monitoring units and magnetically operated switches

Monitoring units
Magnetically operated switches

(contact block + switching magnet)
1 NO + 1 NC
2 NC
1 NO + 2 NC1)
3SE6605-.BA
3SE6604-2BA
3SE6606-3BA
3SE6704-.BA
3SE6704-2BA
3SE6704-3BA
Achievable SIL
(IEC 61508, IEC 62061)
Performance Level
(EN ISO 13849-1)
Relay outputs
SIRIUS safety relays, 6-fold
3SE6806-2CD00
--
SIL 3 / e
SIRIUS safety relays
3SK1111
3SK1121, 3TK2826
SIL 3 / e
SIL 3 / e
3SK1112, 3SK1122
3TK2845
---
---
SIL 3 / e
SIL 3 / e
SIRIUS safety relays with

contactor relay
3TK2850, 3TK2851, 3TK2852

3TK2853
---
---
SIL 2 / d
SIL 3 / e
ASIsafe compact safety

modules
3RK1205, 3RK1405
--
--
SIL 3 / e

(MSS)
3RK3
SIL 3 / e
SIMATIC S7-31xF-2 DP or
SIMATIC ET 200M
SM 326 F, 24 DI, 24 V DC,

SM 326 F, 8 DI, NAMUR
SIL 3
SIMATIC ET 200S
PROFIsafe
4/8 F-DI / 3 F-DO, 24 V DC

4/8 F-DI, 24 V DC
SIL 2
SIL 3
SIMATIC ET 200eco
4/8 F-DI, 24 V DC
SIL 3
SIMATIC ET 200pro
8/16 F-DI, 24 V DC,

4/8 F-DI / 4 F-DO 2 A, 24 V DC,
F-Switch
SIL 3
12
Solid-state outputs
Suitable magnetically operated switch

1)
The second NC is a signaling contact, not a safety contact.
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/99
Siemens AG 2013

Magnet
3SE66, 3SE67 magnetically operated switches

Version
Size
Contacts
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
Round sensor units

Switching magnets (coded)
M30
3SE6704-1BA
1 unit
41K
3SE6704-1BA
Contact blocks
With cable, 3 m
M30
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6605-1BA
1 unit
41K
With M12 plug, 4-pole
M30
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6605-1BA02
1 unit
41K
25 88
--
3SE6704-2BA
1 unit
41K
3SE6505-1BA
Rectangular sensor units

3SE6704-2BA
Contact blocks
With cable, 3 m
With cable, 10 m
With M8 plug, 4-pole
25 88
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6605-2BA
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE6604-2BA
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6605-2BA10
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE6604-2BA10
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE6605-2BA01
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE6604-2BA01
1 unit
41K
25 33
--
3SE6704-3BA
1 unit
41K
25 33
1 NO + 1 NC
25 88
25 88
3SE660.-2BA
Contact blocks
With cable, 3 m
3SE660.-3BA
3SE6605-3BA
1 unit
41K
With cable, 5 m
3SE6605-3BA05
1 unit
41K
With cable, 10 m
3SE6605-3BA10
1 unit
41K
With cable, 15 m
3SE6605-3BA15
1 unit
41K
With cable, 1 m
25 33
1 NO + 2 NC1) A
3SE6606-3BA
1 unit
41K
Spacers
25 88
--
3SX3260
1 unit
41K
Spacers
25 33
--
3SX3261
1 unit
41K
Accessories
12
3SX3260
3SX3261
1)
The second NC is a signaling contact, not a safety contact.
Version
Number of
sensors
Enabling/sig- DT Article No.

naling circuits
Safety relays
with relay output, 6-fold
2 NO / 1 NC
Price
per PU
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41K
Monitoring units
X
3SE6806-2CD00
3SE6806-2CD00
For more monitoring units see Chapters 2, 8, 9 and 11 as well as Catalog IK PI.
12/100
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

RFID
RFID 3SE63 safety switches
Overview
Spacers (approx. 3 mm high) to facilitate cleaning under the
installation surface when using high-pressure cleaners, for example
Coding
Family coded
These safety switches are delivered ready to use, i.e. no programming is necessary.
Individually coded, programmable once
The assignment of safety switch and actuator thus created is
irreversible.
The actuator is programmed simply by routine during startup,
thus permanently preventing any form of tampering by means of
a replacement actuator.
Individually coded, programmable several times
RFID 3SE63 non-contact safety switches comply with the highest safety requirements, SIL3 or Cat. 4, for monitoring the positions of movable protective devices.
An RFID safety switch consists of a coded RFID switch with an
8-pole M12 connector plug and an identical RFID actuator.
The switch is available in several versions:
Family coded with M12 plug or with additional 18 N magnetic
catch as an option
Individually coded, programmable once, with M12 plug or
with additional 18 N magnetic catch as an option
Individually coded, programmable more than once (an unlimited number of times), with M12 plug or version with additional
18 N magnetic catch
The procedure for programming a new actuator can be repeated

an unlimited number of times. When a new actuator is programmed the previous code becomes invalid. A protected coding process allows new actuators to be programmed for service
purposes.
After this, a ten-minute lockout provides enhanced tamper protection. The green LED flashes until the lockout time has ended
and the new actuator has been detected. If the operational voltage is interrupted during this time, the ten-minute guard time is
restarted.
Programming procedure for individual coding
1. Apply operational voltage to safety sensor
2. Move actuator into detection range:
red LED lights up, yellow LED flashes (1 Hz).
3. After 10 s it changes to a shorter flashing frequency (3 Hz).
In this state switch off operational voltage.
The actuator is therefore available in two versions

Standard
With 18 N magnetic catch
4. After the next time the operational voltage is switched on, the
actuator is detected again to activate the programmed actuator
code. The activated code is thus stored permanently.
The magnetic catch keeps doors and hinge switches closed

with permanent magnets.
Diagnostics
Mounting and maintenance

Various options for mounting save on enclosure variants:
Mounting of the switch on the right or left side
The actuator can be mounted on all sides
Quick and easy mounting thanks to universal mounting holes
Standard gauge/holes for 3SE6 magnetically operated
switches
Fine adjustment thanks to slotted holes
Little adjustment or maintenance required
Threshold indication by LED display on the switch for quick
and easy adjustment during mounting and maintenance
Molded switch allows it to be used as an end stop for small
and medium-sized doors
Note:
Keep metal parts and cuttings away from the vicinity of the
switch
Minimum distance between two switches 100 mm
The RFID safety switch indicates its operating state including

faults by means of the LED indicator in the switch and the shortcircuit proof diagnostics output. The signals can then be used
for central displays or non-safety-related control tasks.
There are two diagnostics functions:
Crossover monitoring
Open-circuit monitoring
External voltage monitoring
Ambient temperature too high
Wrong or defective actuator
Switching interval threshold identification with LED display
The signal combination "diagnostics output switched off" and
"safety outputs still switched on" can be used to move the machine into a controlled stop position.
Any crossover or a fault that is not currently compromising the
safe function of a safety switch results in the disconnection of the
safety channels after a 30-minute delay. However, the diagnostics output switches off instantaneously.
Optional accessories (mounting)

Covers for sealing mounting holes, also suitable for tamperproofing screw fixings
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/101
12
Non-contact RFID safety switches

with maximum tamper resistance
Siemens AG 2013

RFID
Mode of operation of the diagnostics LEDs
Application
The safety switch indicates not only its operating state, but also
faults by means of LEDs in three colors at the ends of the RFID
switch.
The green LED indicates readiness for operation when the
control supply voltage is connected.
The yellow LED indicates that there is an actuator in detection
range. If the actuator is in the switching interval threshold, this
is indicated by flashing. This flashing can be used to identify
a change in the distance between sensor and actuator at an
early stage (e.g. as a result of the sagging of a protective
door). The installation should be tested before the distance increases further, the safety outputs switch off and the machine
stops.
The red LED indicates the individual causes of the fault by
means of defined flashing frequencies.
Benefits
Maximum tamper resistance by means of individual coding of
switches and actuators at the highest safety level
Plastic enclosure with integrated connector
Two solid-state short-circuit proof safety outputs, each 250 mA
Integrated crossover, open circuit and external voltage
monitoring, with series circuit as far as the control cabinet
Safety and diagnostics signals can be connected in series
Series connection of safety circuits in Cat. 4/PL e/SIL 3
LED status indication including switching interval threshold indication for quick and easy adjustment during installation and
maintenance
Short-circuit proof conventional diagnostics output
Optional version with magnetic catch for interlocking hinge
switches or small doors even when de-energized
Highly rugged thanks to the use of tested enclosure materials,
resistant to aggressive cleaning products, with a degree of
protection of up to IP69K
Fine adjustment thanks to slotted holes
Little adjustment or maintenance required
Molded switch allows it to be used as an end stop for small
and medium-sized doors
RFID non-contact safety switches are designed for use in safety

circuits, and are used to monitor the positions of movable protective devices. They monitor the positions of rotating, laterally
sliding or removable protective devices using the coded electronic actuator.
Their high degree of protection (IP69K) and the use of cleaning
product-resistant materials means that these switches are optimized for use under extreme environmental conditions.
Their electronic operating principle makes these switches ideal
for metalworking machinery.
The switches have a larger switching interval and switching displacement than mechanical switches, improve the mounting tolerance of the protective door, and offer a wide range of diagnostics options.
The RFID switches can be connected to all standard evaluation
units suitable for solid-state inputs and in which the built-in
crossover monitoring function can be deactivated, e.g.:
Monitoring units
Relay outputs
3SK1111-.AB30, 3SK1121
3TK2826-.BB4.
Solid-state outputs
3SK1112, 3SK1122
3TK2841, 3TK2842, 3TK2845

3TK2853-.BB40
Modular Safety System (MSS)
3RK3 (safe inputs)
SIMATIC ET 200S
6ES7138-4FA0.-0AB0,
6ES7138-4FC0.-0AB0
SIMATIC ET 200M
6ES7326-1BK0.-0AB0
SIMATIC ET 200eco
6ES7148-3FA00-0XB0
SIMATIC ET 200pro
6ES7148-4F.00-0AB0
These safety categories can be achieved in safety circuits:

Category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1
PL e according to EN ISO 13849-1
SIL 3 according to IEC 61508
Type
3SE63
General data
3SE63
Standards
12
Type
Enclosure material
IEC 60947-5-3, IEC

61508, EN ISO 13849-1
Glass-fiber reinforced
thermoplast,
self-extinguishing
800
Rated conditional short-circuit current
100
IP69K

(PELV according to EN 60204-1)
V DC 24 15/+10 %
Ambient temperature
During operation
-25 ... +70
During storage, transport
-25 ... +85
32
3
II
Protection class
III
A
0.6
Shock resistance
30 g / 11 ms
10 ... 55 Hz /
amplitude 1 mm
Smallest operational current Im
mA
0.5
No-load supply current I0
mA
35
12/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

RFID
Type
3SE63
Inputs/outputs
Safety inputs X1/X2
Input voltage
V DC 24 15/+10 %
Power consumption per input
mA
Max. rated operational current Ie
0.25
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12/DC-13

at Ue
0.25
Voltage drop Ue
<1
Switching frequency
Hz
Response time, max.
ms
100
Risk time, max.
ms
200
Recovery, max.
IC01_00087
p operation
Safety outputs OSSD1/OSSD2
X
x > S ar > 16 mm
U (OSSD1/
OSSD2)
p operation
Diagnostics output
Max. rated operational current Ie2 max
0.05
Rated operational current Ie/DC-12/DC-13

at Ue
0.05
Voltage drop Ue
<2
Operational current
mA
150
Conductor capacity, max.
nF
50
24 V
0
< 200 ms
Switching interval: Output signal
Connector assignment
5
6
7
2
IC10_00090
RFID switch
3SE6315
Pin 1: A1 rated operational voltage 24 V DC

Pin 2: X1 safety input 24 V DC
Pin 3: A2 grounding
Pin 4: OSSD1 safety output
Pin 5: OUT conventional diagnostics output
Pin 6: X2 safety input 24 V DC
Pin 7: OSSD2 safety output
Pin 8: Not used
22
6,2
4,5
IC01_00088
78
74
The side area permits a maximum height offset of the switch and
actuator of 8 mm (e.g. mounting tolerance or due to sagging of
the protective door). The transverse offset also equals max.
8 mm.
A-A
Directions of approach and switching interval
max. 18 mm
S ar
max. 8 mm
S ao
18,5
M 12 x 1
25
12
IC01_00086
RFID actuator
3SE6310
6,2
S ao < 10 mm
91
78
OSSD1 /
OSSD2
IC01_00089
S ar > 16 mm
S OFF
4,5
S n = 12 mm
A-A
Sn
1
9
2 mm
S ON
Switching interval: Output signal with hysteresis
S OFF
25
22
Siemens IC 10 2014
12/103
Siemens AG 2013

RFID

With M12 connector, 8-pole
Version/coding
Latching/length
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Rectangular safety switches 91 mm x 25 mm

RFID safety switches
Family coded
None
3SE6315-0BB01
1 unit
41K
3SE6315-1BB01
1 unit
41K
Individually coded,
programmable several times
None
3SE6315-0BB02
1 unit
41K
3SE6315-1BB02
1 unit
41K
Individually coded,
programmable once
None
3SE6315-0BB03
1 unit
41K
3SE6315-1BB03
1 unit
41K
None
3SE6310-0BC01
1 unit
41K
3SE6310-1BC01
1 unit
41K
3SX5600-1G
1 unit
41K
3SE6315
RFID actuators
Standard
3SE6310
Covers and spacers
One pack (1 unit) contains
8 covers and 4 spacers
3SX5600-1G
Connecting cables, 8-pole,
with 1 straight M12 socket
Length 3 m
3SX5601-2GA03
1 unit
41K
Length 5 m
3SX5601-2GA05
1 unit
41K
Rated voltage 30 V
Rated current 2 A
Length 10 m
3SX5601-2GA10
1 unit
41K
3SX5601-2GA
12
For monitoring units see Chapter 2, "Industrial Communication"

"AS-Interface" and Chapter 11, "Safety Technology" as well as
Catalogs IK PI and ST 70.
12/104
Siemens IC 10 2014

13
Siemens AG 2013
Commanding and
Signaling Devices
13/2
13/4
13/7
13/9
13/11
13/13
13/17
13/18
13/20
13/26
13/32
13/35
13/44
13/46
13/50
13/55
13/65
13/69
13/70
13/71
13/72
13/73
13/75
13/80
13/81
13/83
13/85
Introduction
SIRIUS 3SB2 pushbuttons and
indicator lights, 16 mm
General data
Complete units
Actuators and indicators
Contact blocks and lampholders
Insert labels and insert caps
Name plates
Mounting parts and components
SIRIUS 3SB3 pushbuttons and
indicator lights, 22 mm
General data
Actuators and indicators, plastic,
round, 22 mm
Complete units
Coordinate switches, complete
Actuators and indicators, plastic,
square, 26 mm 26 mm
Complete units
Actuators and indicators, metal,
round, 22 mm
Complete units
Components for actuators and indicators
AS-Interface F adapters for
Special locks
Inscriptions
Laser inscriptions
Inscriptions by laser printer
Insert labels
Name plates
Buttons and lenses
Lamps, acoustic signal transformers
and keys
Protective covers
Enclosures
13/88 General data
13/89 Enclosures with standard fittings
13/91 Empty enclosures
13/92 Customized enclosures
13/93 Contact blocks and lampholders
13/95 Inscription labels for enclosures
13/97 Accessories for enclosures
Enclosures for AS-Interface
13/98 General data
13/99 AS-Interface enclosures
with standard fittings
13/100 Components for AS-Interface
enclosures
IK PI1) Enclosures and front panel modules
for AS-Interface
SIRIUS 3SB3 two-hand operation

consoles
13/101 Plastic and metal enclosures
SIRIUS 3SE7, 3SF2 cable-operated
switches
13/102 3SE7 metal enclosures
13/106 3SF2 cable-operated switches
for AS-Interface
SIRIUS 3SE2, 3SE3 foot switches
13/107 Plastic and metal enclosures
SIRIUS 8WD4 signaling columns
13/109 General data
13/112 8WD42 signaling columns,
50 mm diameter
13/114 8WD44 signaling columns,
70 mm diameter
SIRIUS 8WD5 integrated signal lamps
13/118 8WD53 integrated signal lamps,
70 mm diameter
Note:
Conversion tool,
e.g. from 3SB1 to 3SB3 see
1)
See Catalog IK PI
"Industrial Communication"
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
13
Price groups
PG 41J, 41K, 42A
Siemens AG 2013
Commanding and Signaling Devices

Introduction
Overview
3SB2
3SB30, 3SB32
3SB31, 3SB33
3SB35, 3SB36
16 mm
Plastic, round
22 mm
Plastic, round
26 mm 26 mm
Plastic, square
22 mm
Metal, round
1)
1)
--
--
----
----
----
--
--
--
---
(with solder connections)
--
--
Pushbuttons and indicator lights

Designs
Nominal diameter
Version
Actuators
Pushbuttons and switches
Illuminated pushbuttons and switches
Mushroom pushbuttons
Push-pull buttons
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom
pushbuttons
Selector switches
Key-operated switches
Special actuators
Coordinate switches
Twin pushbuttons
Potentiometer drives
Indicators
Indicator lights
Acoustic signaling devices
Contact blocks
Single-pole
Two-pole
Lampholders
Wedge bases
BA 9s bases
With integrated LED
Connections
Plug-in connection
Screw terminals
Solder pins
AS-Interface
Standard
-- Not available
Optional
13
1)
Only pushbuttons, no pushbutton switches.
AS-Interface solutions
Commanding and signaling devices of the SIRIUS 3SB3 series
can be connected to the AS-Interface communication system
quickly and easily with the help of various solutions.
For AS-Interface solutions see catalog IK PI
"SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication".
AS-Interface EMERGENCY-STOP according to ISO 13850
Using a special F adapter, EMERGENCY-STOP control devices
according to ISO 13850 can be directly connected through the
standard AS-Interface with safety-related communication
(see page 13/69).
13/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
AS-Interface enclosures
Enclosures with standard fittings are listed in this catalog.
For customized enclosures, use the 3SB3/3SF5 configurator to
select the elements for equipping (see page 13/98).
AS-Interface front panel modules
The front panel module has one 4I/4O slave for connection of
four 3SB3 commanding or signaling devices (see Catalog IK PI).
Note:
Safety characteristics see Chapter 16,
"Appendix" "Standards and Approvals" "Overview".
Siemens AG 2013
Commanding and Signaling Devices

Introduction
3SB38
3SB386
3SE7, 3SF2
3SE29, 3SB39
Enclosures
Two-hand operation
consoles
Cable-operated
switches
Foot switches
---
-----
--
--
--
----
--
---
----
---
--
--
8WD42, 8WD44
8WD53
Signaling columns
Integrated signal lamps
--
--
---
Enclosures
Plastic
Metal
Actuators
Pushbuttons and switches
Illuminated pushbuttons and switches
Push-pull buttons
pushbuttons
Selector switches
Bowden wires
Indicators
Indicator lights
Acoustic signaling devices
Contact blocks
Single-pole
Two-pole
Three-pole
Four-pole
Connections
13
Screw terminals
Molded cables
Plug-in connection
AS-Interface
Enclosures
Plastic
Metal
Lighting
Incandescent lamps
LEDs
Flashlights
Connections
Screw terminals
AS-Interface
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/3
Siemens AG 2013
3SB2 Pushbuttons and Indicator Lights, 16 mm

General data
For PCB mounting
Overview
The 3SB2 pushbuttons and indicator lights are provided for front
plate mounting and rear connection with flat connectors. For use
on printed circuit boards, contact blocks and lampholders with
solder pins are also available.
For use on printed circuit boards, special contact blocks and

lampholders for soldering into the printed circuit board are available. For this purpose, the contact blocks and lampholders are
fitted with 0.8 mm x 0.8 mm solder pins of length 3.5 mm.
Standards
F
E
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1,
IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-5 for
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons
D
C
B
Version with flat connector
A
G
G
D
C1
NSD0_00010b
F1
Actuator
Front panel
Spacer
Holder
Lampholder/
actuator
F PCB
A
B
C
D
E
A1
F2
E
D
Connection methods
C1
B1
A2
F2
Flat connectors
D
C2
A3
NSD0_00001b
B2
Application
The devices are climate-proof and suitable for marine applications.
A1 Button, flat
13
A2 Illuminated button, flat

A3 Screw lens for indicator light
B1 Insert label, for labeling
B2 Insert cap, for labeling
C1
C2
D
E
Collar with extruded front ring

Collar for indicator light
Frame for rectangular design
Wedge base lamp, W2 x 4.6d
F1 Holders
F2 Lampholder with holder
G Contact blocks (1 NO or 1 NC) for snapping onto the holder
or onto the lampholder
13/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
Safety EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons according to

ISO 13850
For controls according to IEC 60204-1 or EN 60204-1, the mushroom pushbuttons of the 3SB2 series are suitable for use as
safety EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons.
Safety circuits
IEC 60947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1 require positive opening,
i.e. for the purposes of personal safety, the assured opening of
NC contacts is expressly stipulated for the electrical equipment
of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to
IEC 60947-5-1 with the symbol q.
the EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons if the corresponding fail-safe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3SK11 safety relays, the 3RK3 Modular Safety
System (see Chapter 11, "Safety Technology") or matching units
from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3SB2

IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-5
Standards
250
10
Alternating current AC-12

- At Ue = 24 ... 230 V
10
Alternating current AC-15

- At Ue = 24 ... 230 V
Direct current DC-12

- At Ue = 24 V
- At Ue = 60 V
- At Ue = 110 V
- At Ue = 230 V
A
A
A
A
6
5
2.5
1

- At Ue = 24 V
- At Ue = 60 V
- At Ue = 110 V
- At Ue = 230 V
A
A
A
A
3
1.5
0.7
0.3
Rated operational current Ie at rated operational voltage Ue
Contact stability
Test voltage/test current
Lamps
Bases
Rated voltage
Rated power, max.
5 V/1 mA
V
W
Wedge base W2 x 4.6d

6, 12, 24, 30, 48, 60
1
Short-circuit protection weld-free according to IEC 60947-5-1

DIAZED fuse links, utilization category gG
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic according to IEC 60898
10 A TDz, 16 A Dz
10 A
For utilization category AC-15 with 3RT1015 to 3RT1026 contactors
10 x 106 operating cycles

Connection of contact blocks and lampholders behind the front plate
Contact chambers of the contact blocks behind the front plate
IP00
IP40
With voltages > 50 V AC or 120 V DC, insulation sleeves must be
fitted to the unassigned tab connections.
Finger-safe according to EN 50274 and BGV A3
Data according to UL and CSA

Rated voltage
Contact blocks
Indicator light (lamp with wedge base W2 4.6d)
V
V
250 AC
60; 1 W
5
B 300, R 300
Switching capacity

Pushbuttons
Actuators, rotary or latching
Illuminated pushbuttons

Climatic withstand capability
Climate-proof; suitable for marine applications

C
C
C

Actuators and indicators with protective cap
IP65
IP67
Protective measures
For mounting in metal front plates and enclosures
The actuators and lens assemblies must not be included

in the protective measures.
The protective measure "Total insulation" is retained.
For fitting into enclosures with total insulation

Shock amplitude
Shock duration
Shock form
25 ... +70
25 ... +60
40 ... +80
13
Ambient temperature
During operation, non-illuminated devices and complete with LED
During operation, devices with incandescent lamp
ms
50 g
11
Half-sine
More technical information, see Reference Manual

"Commanding and signaling devices".
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/5
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Configuration
For PCB mounting
Design
The command point comprises the actuator e.g. 3SB2 pushbutton, illuminated pushbutton or indicator light , which is
mounted in the front plate, and a contact block and a lampholder
which are soldered to the PCB. For this purpose, the contact
blocks and lampholders are fitted with 0.8 mm x 0.8 mm solder
pins of length 3.5 mm.
Mounting and fixing:

Mounting dimensions according to EN 50007
(not applicable to EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons)
+0,2
Mounting dimensions according to EN 50007.

The actuators are mounted in the same way as 3SB2 front plate
mounting devices.
The contact blocks and lampholders are plugged into the
printed circuit board by means of their solder pins and can be
flow-soldered. After soldering, the devices must be flush with the
board and perpendicular to it. The printed circuit board must be
supported on spacing bolts so that it cannot sag or bend more
than 0.1 mm.
Minimum clearance
Round version
19
19
Square version
without inscription label
21
21
Round and square version

with inscription label
21
32
For 2 selector switches with 3 switch positions,

latching, side by side
21
21
Length a of spacing bolts:

a = 44-0.2 minus front plate thickness.
1...6
44-0,2
1,5...2,5
20,2
NSD0_00002a
16,2
Mounting and fixing:
Two design versions can be mounted:

Round design: The 3SB2 pushbuttons and indicator lights are
assembled with the modules actuator, holder, contact block
and lampholder. Depending on the specific application, various versions can be assembled. Complete units are offered
for the most commonly used applications.
Square design: With square, black frames the round units can
be given a square look. The frames are inserted underneath
the round actuators. Further mounting is the same as for the
round version.
NSD0_00011a
19
Illuminated pushbutton with solder pin connection
Max. distance between

spacing bolts
1.5 mm
80 mm
2.5 mm
150 mm
When using EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons always 50 mm

These details are based on epoxy resin glass fiber mat.
Solder terminal 1.3+0,1

12,7 4,2
10,16
19
PCB thickness
1...6
One or two contact blocks can be mounted on the holder. They

are inserted into the holder with slide slots and held down with
two snap brackets.
To avoid bending the PCB when the control device is operated,

sufficient spacing bolts must be provided as shown in the table
below:
7,6
13
NSD0_00140a
50
Solder pin spacing
19
Pushbutton (flat) with holder and contact block
If a command point is fitted with an indicator light or illuminated

pushbutton, a lamp socket with lampholder must be used instead of a holder. It is suitable for incandescent lamps or LEDs
with bases of type W2 x 4.6d.
Siemens IC 10 2014
NO, NC
La
NO, NC
NSD0_00012a
For mounting, the actuator or the lens assembly is inserted from

the front into the hole in the front plate. Four small nubs ensure a
secure fitting in the hole. The holder is plugged on from the back
and snaps automatically into place. The module is fixed to the
holder with two screws so that it is immune to vibrations.
13/6
When using name plates, the

length a is reduced by 0.8 mm.
Siemens AG 2013

Complete units

Version
Contact
blocks
Color of
handle
DT Flat connectors
Article No.
Pushbuttons
with flat button
with raised button
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons
with flat button
1 NO
1 NC
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear1)
}
B
}
B
}
B
}
B
3SB2202-0AB01
3SB2203-0AB01
3SB2203-0AC01
3SB2202-0AD01
3SB2202-0AE01
3SB2202-0AF01
3SB2202-0AG01
3SB2202-0AH01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button
Lampholder W2 x 4.6d
without lamp2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Red
Yellow1)
Green
Blue
Clear1)
}
B
}
B
}
3SB2207-0AC01
3SB2206-0AD01
3SB2206-0AE01
3SB2206-0AF01
3SB2206-0AH01
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button
with incandescent lamp 24 V
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Red
Yellow1)
Green
Blue
Clear1)
}
B
}
B
}
3SB2227-0AC01
3SB2226-0AD01
3SB2226-0AE01
3SB2226-0AF01
3SB2226-0AH01
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised button
1 NO
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Black
Red
Yellow
Blue
Clear1)
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2202-0LB01
3SB2203-0LC01
3SB2202-0LD01
3SB2202-0LF01
3SB2202-0LH01
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with raised button
without lamp2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Red
Yellow1)
Green
Blue
Clear1)
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2207-0LC01
3SB2206-0LD01
3SB2206-0LE01
3SB2206-0LF01
3SB2206-0LH01
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with raised button
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Red
Yellow1)
Green
Blue
Clear1)
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2227-0LC01
3SB2226-0LD01
3SB2226-0LE01
3SB2226-0LF01
3SB2226-0LH01
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
3SB2203-1AC01
1 unit
41J
1 NC q 4) Red
pushbuttons according to ISO 13850,
latching3)
Latches automatically when pressed;
unlatches by turning the mushroom head
counterclockwise,
with yellow name plate
with inscription "NOT-HALT"
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbuttons
Inscription is possible by inserting a label.
2)
Wedge base lamps see "Accessories", page 13/18.
3)
The mushroom pushbutton cannot be combined with 3SB2902-0AB name

plate or 3SB2902-0AA single frame.
4)
Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
13
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/7
Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
Version
Contact
blocks
Color of
handle
DT Flat connectors
Article No.
Selector switches
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Selector switches with

2 switch positions
Switching sequence O-I,
62 operating angle,
latching
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB2202-2AB01
3SB2202-2AC01
3SB2202-2AE01
3SB2202-2AG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

3 switch positions
Switching sequence I-O-II,
2 62 operating angle,
latching
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB2210-2DB01
3SB2210-2DC01
3SB2210-2DE01
3SB2210-2DG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

3 switch positions
momentary contact type
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB2210-2EB01
3SB2210-2EC01
3SB2210-2EE01
3SB2210-2EG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Lock No. Key removal DT Flat connectors

position
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Version
Contact
blocks
Article No.
Price
per PU
1 NO
1 NO
SB2
SB2
O
O+I
}
B
3SB2202-4LA01
3SB2202-4LB01
1 1 unit
1 1 unit
41J
41J
CES key-operated
switches1),
3 switch positions
CES key-operated switch Switching sequence I-O-II,
latching
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
SB2
SB2
O
I + O + II
B
B
3SB2210-4PA01
3SB2210-4PB01
1 1 unit
1 1 unit
41J
41J
CES key-operated
switches1),
3 switch positions
1 NO, 1 NO
SB2
3SB2210-4QA01
1 1 unit
41J
CES key-operated
switches1),
2 switch positions
62 operating angle,
latching
13
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
1)
Also available with additional locking systems. The Article No. must be supplemented with "Z", the order code "Y01" and the required lock number.
Version
Color of
screw lens
DT Flat connectors
Article No.
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Indicator lights
without lamp1)
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Clear
}
B
}
}
B
3SB2204-6BC06
3SB2204-6BD06
3SB2204-6BE06
3SB2204-6BG06
3SB2204-6BH06
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Clear
}
B
}
}
B
3SB2224-6BC06
3SB2224-6BD06
3SB2224-6BE06
3SB2224-6BG06
3SB2224-6BH06
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
1)
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
Wedge base lamps see "Accessories", page 13/18.
13/8
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
Color of
handle
DT Article No.
Pushbuttons
with flat button
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear1)
}
}
B
}
}
}
B
with flat button
Red
Yellow1)
Green
Blue
White
Clear1)
Pushbuttons
with raised button
with raised button
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3SB2000-0AB01
3SB2000-0AC01
3SB2000-0AD01
3SB2000-0AE01
3SB2000-0AF01
3SB2000-0AG01
3SB2000-0AH01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
}
B
}
B
}
B
3SB2001-0AC01
3SB2001-0AD01
3SB2001-0AE01
3SB2001-0AF01
3SB2000-0AG01
3SB2000-0AH01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
Clear1)
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2000-0LB01
3SB2000-0LC01
3SB2000-0LD01
3SB2000-0LF01
3SB2000-0LG01
3SB2000-0LH01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red
Yellow1)
Green
Blue
Clear1)
B
B
}
B
B
3SB2001-0LC01
3SB2001-0LD01
3SB2001-0LE01
3SB2001-0LF01
3SB2000-0LH01
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
3SB2000-1AC01
1 unit
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons and
illuminated pushbuttons
with flat button
Pushbutton and
illuminated pushbutton
with raised button
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons Red

acc. to ISO 13850, latching2)
Latches automatically when pressed; unlatches
by turning the mushroom head counterclockwise
EMERGENCY-STOP
1)
2)
The mushroom pushbutton cannot be combined with 3SB2902-0AB name

plate or 3SB2902-0AA single frame.
Version
Color of
handle
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Selector switches with 2 switch positions

62 operating angle,
latching
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB2000-2AB01
3SB2000-2AC01
3SB2000-2AE01
3SB2000-2AG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

50 operating angle,
(reset from the right)
Black
Red
Green
C
B
B
3SB2000-2BB01
3SB2000-2BC01
3SB2000-2BE01
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J

90 operating angle,
latching
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB2000-2HB01
3SB2000-2HC01
3SB2000-2HE01
3SB2000-2HG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

2 x 62 operating angle,
latching
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB2000-2DB01
3SB2000-2DC01
3SB2000-2DE01
3SB2000-2DG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB2000-2EB01
3SB2000-2EC01
3SB2000-2EE01
3SB2000-2EG01
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

latching
Black
3SB2000-2JB01
1 unit
41J
Selector switches

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/9
13
Selector switches
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Lock No. Key

removal
position
DT Article No.
CES key-operated switches1)

with 2 keys,
2 switch positions
62 operating angle,
latching
SB2
O+I
O
B
}

with 2 keys,
2 switch positions
50 operating angle,
CES key-operated switch momentary contact type
with 2 keys,
3 switch positions
latching
SB2
SB2

with 2 keys,
3 switch positions
SB2
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3SB2000-4LB01
3SB2000-4LA01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
3SB2000-4MA01
1 unit
41J
I+O+II
O
B
B
3SB2000-4PB01
3SB2000-4PA01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
3SB2000-4QA01
1 unit
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
1)
Also available with additional locking systems. The Article No. must be
supplemented with "Z", the order code "Y01" and the required lock number.
Version
Color of
screw lens
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Indicator lights
Indicator lights
}
B
}
B
}
B
3SB2001-6BC06
3SB2001-6BD06
3SB2001-6BE06
3SB2001-6BF06
3SB2001-6BG06
3SB2001-6BH06
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2001-6CC06
3SB2001-6CD06
3SB2001-6CE06
3SB2001-6CF06
3SB2001-6CH06
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights, smooth

for inscription with insert caps1)
Insert caps, see "Accessories", page 13/15.
13
1)
Indicator lights
Red
with concentric rings
Yellow
(inscription with insert caps is not possible) Green
Blue
White
Clear
13/10
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
Graphic symbols Operating travel
DT Flat connectors
Contact closed
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
5 units
41J
Contact open
Article No.
Price
per PU
Contact blocks and lampholders with

flat connectors 2 2.8 0.8 mm according to IEC 60760
Holders for fixing the actuator and the contact blocks
}
Holders for 2 contact blocks

Inscription with identification
number 1-2
3SB2908-0AA
Holder
Lampholders with holder for fixing the actuator and the contact blocks
Lampholders
W2 x 4.6d
without lamp
X1
(L+)
Lampholders
W2 x 4.6d
X1
(L+)
X2
(L-)
3SB2304-2A
1 unit
41J
NSD0_00003
With 6 V incandescent lamp
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00003
3SB2304-2F
1 unit
41J
3SB2304-2H
1 unit
41J
3SB2404-3D
1 unit
41J
3SB2404-0B
1 unit
41J
3SB2404-0C
1 unit
41J
Lampholders
Voltage reducers1)
For connecting the
3SB2908-1AE lamp (48 V) to
230 V AC
X1
X2
NSD0_0005a
Voltage reducer
Contact blocks for fixing in the holder or lampholder

Contact blocks
with one contact2)
1 NO
.3
.4
Contact blocks
1 NC q 3)
NSD0_00008
3-4
0 1
mm
Use fixpoint terminal according to IEC 60439-1.
2)
For plug-in and insulation sleeves see "Accessories", page 13/19.
3)
NC with positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
1-2
0 1
mm
13
1)
NSD0_00009
.1
.2

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/11
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Graphic
symbols
Operating travel
DT Solder pin
connections
Contact closed
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
Contact open
Article No.
Price
per PU
Contact blocks and lampholders with solder pins

Holders for contact block
with solder pins
For mounting the actuators in the
front panel
Lampholders
Wedge base W2 x 4.6d1)
(L+) X1
3SB2908-0AB
5 units
41J
3SB2455-2A
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-0B
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-0C
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-0J
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-0E
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-0F
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-1B
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-1C
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-1J
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-1E
1 unit
41J
3SB2455-1F
1 unit
41J
(L-) X2
Holder
Contact blocks
1 NO
.3
.4
1 NC
q 2)
1 NO + 1 NC
q 2)
2,3
NSD0_00017
.1
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
Contact block
with solder pins
NSD0_00015
3-4
0 1
mm
1,6
13 21
NSD0_00019
21-22
0 1
mm
14 22
1,6
1 NO + 1 NO
13 23
14 24
1 NC + 1 NC
q 2)
NSD0_00021
13-14
23-24
0 1
mm
NSD0_00023
11 21
12 22
2,3
21-22
11-12
0 1
mm
1,6
Contact blocks and lampholders, wedge base W2 x 4.6d1)
1 NO
13 X1
14 X2
1 NC
0 1
mm
2,3
NSD0_01083
21 X1
22 X2
21-22
0 1
mm
1,6
1 NO + 1 NC
q 2)
13
Contact block and

lampholder
with solder pins
q 2)
NSD0_01082
13-14
13 21 X1
14 22 X2
NSD0_00019
21-22
0 1
mm
1,6
1 NO + 1 NO
13 23 X1
14 24 X2
1 NC + 1 NC
q 2)
NSD0_00021
13-14
23-24
0 1
mm
2,3
NSD0_00023
11 21 X1
12 22 X2
21-22
11-12
0 1
mm
1,6
1)
The lamp is not included in the scope of supply.
2)
NC with positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
13/12
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories and Spare Parts
Overview
Clear pushbuttons, illuminated pushbuttons and indicator lights
can be fitted with insert labels and caps for identification purposes.
The insert labels and insert caps are made of a milky-transparent plastic with black lettering; they can be fitted in any 90 angle.
Inscriptions
The inscriptions have upper case initial letters. Graphic symbols,
including those not listed in the catalog, are according to
ISO 7000 or IEC 60417.
For customized inscriptions see "Options", page 13/16.

Inscription/Symbol
Symbol No.
DT Insert labels
For pushbuttons and
illuminated pushbuttons, flat
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
For self-inscription
Blank
3SB2901-4AA
100 10 units
41J
Ein
Aus
Auf
Ab
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-4AB
3SB2901-4AC
3SB2901-4AD
3SB2901-4AE
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
Vor
Zurck
Rechts
Links
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-4AF
3SB2901-4AG
3SB2901-4AH
3SB2901-4AJ
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
Halt
Zu
Langsam
Strung
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-4AK
3SB2901-4AL
3SB2901-4AN
3SB2901-4AQ
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
On
Start
Stop
Reset
Test
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-4EB
3SB2901-4EK
3SB2901-4EL
3SB2901-4EM
3SB2901-4EN
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
0
1
2
3
4
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-4RA
3SB2901-4RB
3SB2901-4RC
3SB2901-4RD
3SB2901-4RE
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
5
6
7
8
9
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-4RF
3SB2901-4RG
3SB2901-4RH
3SB2901-4RJ
3SB2901-4RK
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
With inscription
Graphic ON/OFF symbols

5008 IEC
3SB2901-4MB
100 10 units
41J
I (On)
5007 IEC
3SB2901-4MC
100 10 units
41J
II (On)
--
3SB2901-4MD
100 10 units
41J
13
O (Off)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/13
Siemens AG 2013

Inscription/Symbol
Symbol No.
DT Insert labels
For pushbuttons and
illuminated pushbuttons, flat
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Graphic equipment symbols

Electric motor
0011 ISO
3SB2901-4PA
100 10 units
41J
Horn
5014 IEC
3SB2901-4PB
100 10 units
41J
Pump
0134 ISO
3SB2901-4PD
100 10 units
41J
Coolant pump
0355 ISO
3SB2901-4PE
100 10 units
41J
Graphic motion symbols

Motion in direction of arrow (straight)
5022 IEC
3SB2901-4NA
100 10 units
41J
Motion in direction of arrow (diagonal)
--
3SB2901-4NB
100 10 units
41J
Clockwise rotation
0004 ISO
3SB2901-4NC
100 10 units
41J
Counterclockwise rotation
--
3SB2901-4ND
100 10 units
41J
Fast motion
0266 ISO
3SB2901-4NE
100 10 units
41J
Increase (plus)
5005 IEC
3SB2901-4NG
100 10 units
41J
Decrease (minus)
5006 IEC
3SB2901-4MC
100 10 units
41J
--
3SB2901-4QB
100 10 units
41J
Graphic control symbols

Clamp
Release
--
3SB2901-4QC
100 10 units
41J
Brake off
0021 ISO
3SB2901-4QE
100 10 units
41J
Lock
0022 ISO
3SB2901-4QF
100 10 units
41J
Unlock
0023 ISO
3SB2901-4QG
100 10 units
41J
On/Off, momentary contact
5011 IEC
3SB2901-4QJ
100 10 units
41J
Manual operation
0096 ISO
3SB2901-4QK
100 10 units
41J
Automatic sequence
0017 ISO
3SB2901-4QL
100 10 units
41J
Customized inscriptions
Any inscription
3SB2901-4AZ
1 line of text with up to 6 characters with 3 mm letter height.

B
Please add the appropriate order code to the Article No. and specify B
the line of text required.
B
K0Y
1 unit
41J
K1Y or K2Y
1 unit
41J
K5Y
1 unit
41J
3SB2901-4AZ
1 unit
41J
1 unit
41J
Other graphic symbols
Please add the order code "K3Y" to the Article No. and specify the
serial number and the applied standard (ISO 7000 or IEC 60417).
13
Any inscription or symbol

inscription or the symbol required.
13/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
K3Y
B
3SB2901-4AZ
K9Y

Siemens AG 2013

Inscription/Symbol
Symbol No.
DT Insert caps
For pushbuttons and illuminated pushbuttons, raised
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Blank
3SB2901-5AA
100 10 units
41J
On
Aus
Auf
Zu
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-5EB
3SB2901-5AC
3SB2901-5AD
3SB2901-5AL
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
0
1
2
3
4
C
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-5RA
3SB2901-5RB
3SB2901-5RC
3SB2901-5RD
3SB2901-5RE
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
5
6
7
8
9
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-5RF
3SB2901-5RG
3SB2901-5RH
3SB2901-5RJ
3SB2901-5RK
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
With inscription
Graphic ON/OFF symbols

O (Off)
5008 IEC
3SB2901-5MB
100 10 units
41J
I (On)
5007 IEC
3SB2901-5MC
100 10 units
41J
Motion in direction of arrow
5022 IEC
3SB2901-5NA
100 10 units
41J
--
3SB2901-5NB
100 10 units
41J
Increase (plus)
5005 IEC
3SB2901-5NG
100 10 units
41J
Decrease (minus)
5006 IEC
3SB2901-5MC
100 10 units
41J
Clamp
--
3SB2901-5QB
100 10 units
41J
Release
--
3SB2901-5QC
100 10 units
41J
Graphic motion symbols
Graphic control symbols
Any inscription
3SB2901-5AZ

B
B
K0Y
1 unit
41J
K1Y or K2Y
1 unit
41J
K5Y
1 unit
41J
3SB2901-5AZ
1 unit
41J
1 unit
41J
3SB2901-5AZ
K9Y
13
K3Y

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/15
Siemens AG 2013

Inscription/Symbol
Symbol No.
DT Insert caps
For indicator lights
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
41J
Price
per PU
Blank
3SB2901-7AA
100 10 units
Betrieb
3SB2901-7AP
100
1 unit
41J
Strung
3SB2901-7AQ
100 10 units
41J
With inscription
Graphic symbols
Pump
0134 ISO
3SB2901-7PD
100 10 units
41J
Manual operation
0096 ISO
3SB2901-7QK
100 10 units
41J
Any inscription
3SB2901-7AZ

B
B
K0Y
1 unit
41J
K1Y or K2Y
1 unit
41J
K5Y
1 unit
41J
3SB2901-7AZ
1 unit
41J
1 unit
41J

K3Y
B

3SB2901-7AZ
K9Y
Options
13
Labels and caps can be inscribed with text and symbols not
listed in the ordering data. Append the following order codes to
the Article No.:
Text line in upper/lower case, always upper case for beginning
of line (e.g. "Lift"): K0Y
Text line in upper case (e.g. "LIFT"): K1Y
Text line in lower case (e.g. "lift"): K2Y
Text line in upper/lower case, all words begin with upper case
letters (e.g. "Lift Out"): K5Y
Symbol with number according to ISO 7000 or IEC 60417:
K3Y
Any inscription or symbols according to order form supplement: K9Y
When ordering, specify the required inscription in plain text in
addition to the Article No. and order code. In the case of special
inscriptions with words in languages other than German, give
the exact spelling and specify the language.
13/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
One line with up to 6 characters with 3 mm letter height is

possible for the inscription (see ordering example 1).
Symbols can also be ordered with numbers according to
ISO 7000 or IEC 60417 (see ordering example 2 and 3).
For special symbols (order code K9Y), a CAD drawing in
DXF format can be submitted.
Ordering example 1
3SB29014AZ
K1Y
Z = pump
Ordering example 2
3SB29014AZ
K3Y
Z = 5008 IEC
Ordering example 3
3SB29014AZ
K3Y
Z = 1118 ISO

Siemens AG 2013

Name plates
Overview
The name plates consist of a black plastic label holder and an
inscription label (silver with black print) for sticking in place.
Inscriptions
The inscriptions (also special inscriptions) are lower case with
upper case initial letters. Graphic symbols, including those not
listed in the catalog, are according to ISO 7000 or IEC 60417.
Note mounting dimensions!

Inscription/Symbol
Symbol No.
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Inscription labels, self-adhesive, 9.5 mm 18.5 mm

Blank
3SB2901-2AA
100 10 units
41J
Ein
Aus
Auf
Zu
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-2AB
3SB2901-2AC
3SB2901-2AD
3SB2901-2AL
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
Vor
Zurck
Schnell
Langsam
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-2AF
3SB2901-2AG
3SB2901-2AM
3SB2901-2AN
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
Betrieb
Strung
Einrichten
B
B
B
3SB2901-2AP
3SB2901-2AQ
3SB2901-2AR
100 10 units
100 10 units
100 10 units
41J
41J
41J
On
Off
Start
Reset
Fault
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2901-2EB
3SB2901-2EC
3SB2901-2EL
3SB2901-2EM
3SB2901-2EW
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Hand Auto
Manual 0 Auto
Man 0 Auto
B
B
B
3SB2901-2BA
3SB2901-2BE
3SB2901-2ET
100 10 units
100 10 units
100 10 units
41J
41J
41J
Graphic symbols
O (Off)
5008 IEC
3SB2901-2MB
100 10 units
41J
I (On)
5007 IEC
3SB2901-2MC
100 10 units
41J
O I (horizontal)
--
3SB2901-2MF
100 10 units
41J
5002 IEC
3SB2901-2NA
100 10 units
41J
3SB2901-2XZ
Customized inscriptions or symbols

(see Options)
K0Y
1 unit
41J
K1Y, K2Y or K3Y
1 unit
41J
K5Y
1 unit
41J
K9Y
1 unit
41J
3SB2902-0AB
100 10 units
41J
Label holders
Label holders for inscription labels
Options
The labels can be inscribed with text and symbols not listed in
the ordering data. Append the following order codes to the
Article No.:
Text line(s) in upper/lower case, upper case always for beginning of line (e.g. "Lift out"): K0Y
Text line(s) in upper case (e.g. "LIFT OUT"): K1Y
Text line(s) in lower case (e.g. "lift out"): K2Y
Text line(s) in upper/lower case, all words begin with upper
case letters (e.g. "Lift Out"): K5Y
K3Y
Any inscription or symbols according to order form supplement: K9Y

Two lines of 11 characters are permitted with 4 mm letter height
(1 line) or 3 mm (2-line).
ISO 7000 or IEC 60417 (see ordering example).
Ordering example
3SB29012XZ
K3Y
Z = 1118 ISO
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/17
13
The label holders must not be used with the

3SB2...-1AC01 EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton.
Siemens AG 2013


Version
Lamp
voltage
Color
DT Article No.
Buttons, flat
For pushbuttons
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Buttons, flat
For illuminated pushbuttons
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
Buttons, raised
For pushbuttons
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SB2910-0AB
3SB2910-0AC
3SB2910-0AD
3SB2910-0AE
3SB2910-0AF
3SB2910-0AG
3SB2910-0AH
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2910-0CC
3SB2910-0CD
3SB2910-0CE
3SB2910-0CF
3SB2910-0AG
3SB2910-0AH
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Clear
B
B
B
B
3SB2910-0BB
3SB2910-0BC
3SB2910-0BD
3SB2910-0BH
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons, raised
For illuminated pushbuttons
Red
Yellow
Clear
B
B
B
3SB2910-0DC
3SB2910-0DD
3SB2910-0BH
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41J
41J
41J
Screw lenses
With concentric rings
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2910-1AC
3SB2910-1AD
3SB2910-1AE
3SB2910-1AF
3SB2910-1AG
3SB2910-1AH
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Screw lenses
Smooth, for inscription with insert cap
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB2910-1BC
3SB2910-1BD
3SB2910-1BE
3SB2910-1BF
3SB2910-1BH
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
3SB2908-2AJ
1 unit
41J
C
B
B
A
B
B
3SB2908-1AA
3SB2908-1AB
3SB2908-1AC
3SB2908-1AD
3SB2908-1AE
3SB2908-1AF
100
100
100
100
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons and lenses1)
3SB2910-0AF
3SB2910-0CF
3SB2910-0BD
3SB2910-0DD
3SB2910-1AD
3SB2910-1BE
Keys for actuators

Keys
For CES key-operated switch,
lock No. SB2
3SB2908-2AJ
Lamps, wedge bases2)

Incandescent lamps
Wedge base W2 4.6d, 1.0 W
AC/DC
6
12
24
30
48
60
Clear
LED lamps, super-bright

Wedge base W2 4.6d
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Blue
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3901-1SB
3SB3901-1RB
3SB3901-1TB
3SB3901-1UB
3SB2908-1BD
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
28 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Blue
B
B
B
B
C
3SB3901-1SE
3SB3901-1RE
3SB3901-1TE
3SB3901-1UE
3SB3901-1VE
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
3SB2908-2AB
1 unit
41J
3SB2908-1AE
13
3SB39 01-1SB
3SB2908-1BD
Lamp extractors
For lamps with bases W2 4.6d
3SB2908-2AB
1)
Included in the scope of supply of actuators or indicator lights.
2)
Included in the scope of supply of some complete units.
13/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Accessories for command points

Single frames for square design1)
3SB2902-0AA
100
10 units
41J
Name plates, yellow, 50 mm

As backing plate for EMERGENCY-STOP, self-adhesive
Blank
With German inscription "NOT-HALT"
With German inscription "NOT-AUS"
}
}
}
3SB2908-2AF
3SB2908-2AG
3SB2908-2AK
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Blanking plugs
Black plastic
(degree of protection IP65)
3SB2908-3AA
1 unit
41J
Protective caps, clear

Silicone, for pushbuttons with flat and raised button
3SB2908-3AB
1 unit
41J
Plug-in sleeves
For flat connectors 2.8 0.8 mm, cross-section 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
3SB2908-8AA
100 250 units
41J
Insulation sleeves
For flat connectors, attachable from the front
3SB2908-8AB
100 250 units
41J
Complete connectors2)
For connecting contact blocks and lampholders
(up to 10 connections)
3SB2908-8AD
1 unit
41J
Plug-in sleeves
For flat connectors 2.8 0.8 mm,
with locating spring for latching in complete connector
3SB2908-8AE
100
10 units
41J
Dismantling tools
For holders and lampholders with holder
3SB2908-2AA
1 unit
41J
Mounting tools
For buttons and screw lenses
3SB2908-2AC
1 unit
41J
3SB2902-0AA
3SB2908-2AG
3SB2908-3AA
3SB2908-1
Flat connectors
3SB2908-8AA
3SB2908-8AB
Ensures finger-safety according to EN 50274 and BGV A3

3SB2908-8AD
3SB2908-8AE
Tools
Crimping tools for non-insulated connections,

type KRBC 0560
3SB2908-2AC
13
3SB2908-2AA
6179 0950
For plug-in sleeves (both versions)

Manufacturer: Lapp Kabel, Stuttgart, Germany
E-mail: info@lappkabel.de
Website: www.lappkabel.de
6179 0950
1)
Not suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons.
2)
Required 3SB2908-8AE plug-in sleeves for flat connectors 2.8 0.8 mm

are not included in the scope of supply.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/19
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Front plate mounting
D
C
B
E
D
A
F
NSD0_00029b
C
B
A
B
C
D
E
F
Actuator
Front plate
Holder
Contact block
Lampholder
Support element
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Actuator
Front plate
Holder
Holder for printed circuit-board
Lampholder
Contact block
PCB
For actuators see pages 13/26 to 13/64.

For contact blocks and lampholders see pages 13/65 to 13/67.
For holders see page 13/68.
Mounting on printed circuit boards
G
F
E
D
C
NSD0_00030b
B
A
D
A
13
For contact blocks for mounting on printed circuit boards see page 13/68.
13/20
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Design
Mounting of the contact blocks
The 3SB3 series is a modular range of commanding and signaling devices for front plate mounting and rear conductor connection. As an alternative, individual elements can also be supplied
for use on printed circuit boards. Complete units are offered for
the most commonly used applications.
Two contact blocks can be snapped onto the actuator in the

standard version.
When three contact blocks or illuminated actuators are required,
an additional holder must be plugged onto the actuator from the
rear.
3SB3901-0AB holder for 3 contact blocks or for 2 contact
blocks and 1 lampholder
3SB3901-0AC holder with pressure plates for actuating a central contact block when using a selector switch, key-operated
switch and twin pushbutton with 3 contact blocks
For illuminated pushbuttons, illuminated switches and illuminated selector switches the holder is included in the scope of
supply as standard.
Contact blocks
The contact blocks are fitted with slow-action contacts (NO contact or NC contact) with double operating contacts. These ensure a high switching reliability even with small voltages and currents, such as 5 V/1 mA. They are suitable for use in electronic
systems as well as conventional controls.
Standards
The 3SB3 series is available:

Made of molded plastic in flat, round and square design
Made of metal in round design
The devices are of modern industrial design and can be
mounted rapidly by a single person. The operating surfaces
of the pushbuttons and illuminated pushbuttons are concave.
The lenses of the indicator lights are convex.
The metal version with a high degree of protection according to
IP67 and NEMA 4 is available for the world market.
One command point comprises:
An actuator or lens assembly in front of the control panel
A holder for mounting behind the control panel
Up to 3 contact blocks and/or 1 lampholder behind the control
panel
A comprehensive range of accessories for inscription
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1,

IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1,
IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-5
for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons
Connection methods
The devices are available with screw terminals (box terminals),
spring-type terminals or solder pins.
Screw terminals
Support function
The 3SB3 pushbuttons and indicator lights can also be ordered
via an online configurator.
13
Actuators and indicators and complete units
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/21
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Benefits
Application
Environmental conditions
The devices are climate-proof (KTW 24) and suitable for standard industrial applications and operation in marine applications. For operation in oily atmospheres (organic oils/lubricants)
we recommend actuators which are marked as "solvent-resistant".
AS-Interface solutions
IC0
1_ 0
0 24
The 3SB3 commanding and signaling devices can be connected to the AS-Interface communication system quickly and
safely with the help of various solutions.
3SB3 pushbuttons and indicator lights contribute to energy
Lower power consumption by means of LED technology
Long service life
The following solutions are available:

ASIsafe EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons
(see page 13/69)
AS-Interface enclosures with 1 to 6 command points
(see page 13/98)
AS-Interface front panel modules for 4 command points
(see Catalog IK PI, "SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication")
"Intrinsic safety" type of protection EEx i according to
The pushbuttons and indicator lights in round design can also
be used in hazardous areas. The 3SB34..-0. contact blocks and
the 3SB34..-1A lampholders (with 3SB3901-1.A LED lamp) with
screw terminals or spring-type terminals can be used.
Safety EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons according to
ISO 13850
For controls according to IEC 60204-1 or EN 60204-1, the mushroom pushbuttons of the 3SB3 series are suitable for use as
safety EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons.
Safety circuits
The IEC 60947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1 standards require positive
opening, i.e. for the purposes of personal safety, the assured
equipment of machines in all safety circuits and marked according to IEC 60947-5-1 with the symbol q.
13

the EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons if the corresponding fail-safe evaluation units are selected and correctly installed, e.g. the 3SK11 safety relays, the 3RK3 Modular Safety
System (see Chapter 11, "Safety Technology") or matching units
from the ASIsafe, SIMATIC or SINUMERIK product ranges.
13/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3SB3400-0,
3SB3420-0
3SB1400-0J 3SB3400-1,
3SB3420-1
3SB3403-0,
3SB3423-0
3SB3403-1,
3SB3423-1
3SB3411-0
3SB3411-1

IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-5, EN 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-5
Standards
Screw terminals
Connection type

For pollution degree according to IEC 60947-1
400
Class 3
250
Class 3
400
Class 3
kV
10
--
10
Alternating current 50/60 Hz, AC-12

- At Ue = 24 ... 230 V
- At Ue = 400 V
A
A
10
10
---
Alternating current 50/60 Hz, AC-15

- At Ue = 24 ... 230 V
- At Ue = 400 V
A
A
6
3
6
4

- At Ue = 24 V
- At Ue = 48 V
- At Ue = 110 V
- At Ue = 230 V
A
A
A
A
10
5
2.5
1

- At Ue = 24 V
- At Ue = 48 V
- At Ue = 110 V
- At Ue = 230 V
A
A
A
A
3
1.5
0.7
0.3
Contact stability
Test voltage
Test current
V
mA
Solder pins
250
Class 3
60
Class 3
1.5
--
10
--
10
10
---
10
--
---
---
6
3
---
4
--
---
10
-2
0.5
-----
10
5
2.5
1
-----
10
5
2.5
1
-----
5
-0.5
0.2
-----
3
1.5
0.7
0.3
-----
3
1.5
0.7
0.3
-----
5
1
---
5
1
---
5
1
---
Lampholders
--
BA 9s
--
BA 9s
--
Wedge
bases
Lamps
--
Incandescent lamps,
glow lamps
and LED
lamps
--
Incandescent lamps,
glow lamps
and LED
lamps
--
Incandescent lamps
and LED
lamps

at rated operational voltage Ue
Dz10 A
Dz 16 A
A
For utilization category AC-15 with 3RT2015 to
3RT2026 contactors
With utilization category DC-12, DC-13
Switching frequency
10

With direct current it depends on the operational voltage, the breaking current, the circuit inductance
and the switching frequency
1/h

Connections
Contact chambers

IP20
IP40
Touch protection according to EN 50274 and

BGV A3
13
Short-circuit protection, weld-free,

acc. to IEC 60947-5-1
DIAZED fuse links,
utilization category gG
DIAZED fuse links,
quick according to DIN VDE 0635
--
IP40
--
IP40
Finger-safe
Finger-safe
--
Conductor cross-sections1)
Finely stranded, without end sleeves
Finely stranded, with end sleeves to DIN 46228
Solid
Solid with end sleeves to DIN 46228
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
-2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)

2 x (1 ... 1.5)
2 x (0.5 ... 0.75)
2 x AWG 18 ... 14
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)

2 x (0.25 ... 0.75)
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
-2 x AWG 24 ... 16
------
Tightening torque, terminal screw
Nm
0.8
--
--
Solder pins
mm2 --
--
0.8 0.8
1)
--
For standard screwdriver size 2 or Pozidriv 2.
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/23
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
3SB3400-0,
3SB3420-0
3SB3400-1,
3SB3420-1
3SB3403-0,
3SB3423-0
3SB3403-1,
3SB3423-1
3SB3411-0
3SB3411-1
--
300
--
300
--
--
10
--
10
--
Data according to UL and CSA

V AC 300
Conventional thermal current (uninterrupted current) A
10
Switching capacity
A 300, R 300,
A 600 same polarity
Rated voltage (lamps)

Lamp with BA 9s base
V AC --
125
--
125
--
--
Lamp with wedge base
V AC --
60
--
60
--
60
Lampholders with integrated LED
--
24 AC/DC,
110 AC,
230 AC
--
24 AC/DC,
110 AC,
230 AC
--
--
Rated power (lamps)
--
2.5
--
2.5
--
Type
3SB30, 3SB32
3SB31, 3SB33
3SB35, 3SB36

Enclosure material
Plastic
Design
Round
Metal
Terminal designation acc. to EN 50013
Identification number on the holder,

function digit on the contact block
Snap-on label
Square
Round
Tightening torques
Screw on holder
Nm
Max. 1
Pushbuttons
Actuators, rotary or latching

Key-operated switch with key monitoring

Switching frequency
1/h

Climate-proof KTW24;
suitable for marine applications
Climatic withstand capability acc. to EN ISO 6270-2

Ambient temperature
During operation, non-illuminated and with LED
25 ... +70
During operation, devices with incandescent lamp
25 ... +60
40 ... +80

Actuators and indicators, standard
IP66
IP65
IP67 and NEMA Type 4
IP67
IP67
--
Key-operated switch with key monitoring
IP54
--
--
Twin pushbuttons (3SB31)
IP65
--
--
Protective measures
When mounted on metal front plates and enclosures, the

actuators and lens assemblies are not to be included in the
protective measures.
- with protective caps
When mounted in insulated enclosures, the "total insulation"

protective measures are met.
Grounding with grounding

screw is necessary for
operation with protective
extra-low voltage (PELV).
13
Shock resistance according to IEC 60068-2-27

For half-sine shock type, 11 ms shock duration
Devices without incandescent lamp
50 g
Devices with incandescent lamp
30 g

Acceleration at frequency 20 ... 200 Hz
5g
Type
3SB38 0.-0, 3SB380.-1
--
3SB380.-2, 3SB380.-3
Enclosures
Enclosure material
Plastic
Metal
Plastic, round
Metal, round
IP65
Resistance to extreme climates acc. to DIN 50017
KTW 24
KTW 24
13/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Mounting depth
Configuration
The 3SB3 devices can be easily and quickly mounted:
Actuators or indicator lights are positioned in the opening of
the front plate from the front
Position the holder from the rear
Tighten the screw on the holder
Snap on the contact block or the lampholder directly onto the
actuator from the back
NSD0_00217
49
29
30
20
Pushbuttons with two contact blocks
For a switchboard thickness of 3 to 6 mm, the holder is reversed

and mounted in the direction of the arrow at 36 mm and the
fixing screw is located on the upper right. In this case, the fixing
screw must be rotated anticlockwise to its limit before mounting
the holder.
max. 24
The holder for the round versions is set to a switchboard thickness of 1 to 4 mm when delivered and is placed in the direction
of the arrow 14 mm on the actuator/indicator from the back.
The fixing screw is located underneath, on the right.
max. 24
Mounting and fixing
49
29
30
NSD0_00218
The control panel depth of 1 to 4 mm can be compensated with

the holder for the square version.
When label holders, protective caps or similar accessories are
used, the greatest permissible control panel thickness must be
reduced by the wall thickness of the accessory part.
10
30
Mounting dimensions on front plates

Illuminated pushbuttons with lampholder and two contact blocks
+0,2
29
30
63
NSD0_00151
Minimum clearance
Contact blocks (1 contact) and lampholder

For front plate mounting, with screw terminals
For front plate mounting with spring-type terminals
For use on PCB, with solder pin connections
301)
301)
301)
45
301)
301)

For front plate mounting
301)
50
When using holders for inscription labels

12.5 mm x 27 mm
27.0 mm x 27 mm
301)
301)
452)
60
NSD0_00220a
10
30
Illuminated pushbuttons with lampholder and two contact blocks with two
contacts
Mounting on printed circuit boards
60 mm with contact blocks having two contacts.
NC
4
2.54
min. 7.62
max. 10.16
min. 7,62,
max. 10,16
1
2
3
4
Solder pin
1.3 +0.1
PCB holder
Centring hole
4.2 +0.1
Lampholder
Illuminated pushbutton with solder pins
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/25
13
2)
NO 1
5.08
For mushroom pushbutton, EMERGENCY-STOP and push-pull button:

Note mushroom diameter d = 40 mm or 60 mm.
15.24
20.32
1)
NSD0_00226a
NSD0_00227b
45
NSD0_00150
22,3 -0
max. 24
26,0 -0
+0,4
Siemens AG 2013

Actuators and Indicators, Plastic, Round, 22 mm
Complete units

The following applies to all complete units:
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Rated voltage of
lamp
Color of
handle
Contacts
for front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with flat button
--
Pushbutton with
flat button
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
1 NO
1 NC
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
}
B
}
B
}
B
}
3SB3202-0AA11
3SB3203-0AA11
3SB3203-0AA21
3SB3202-0AA31
3SB3202-0AA41
3SB3202-0AA51
3SB3202-0AA61
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3202-0AA11-0CC0
3SB3203-0AA11-0CC0
3SB3203-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3202-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3202-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3202-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3202-0AA61-0CC0
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3201-0AA11
3SB3201-0AA21
3SB3201-0AA31
3SB3201-0AA41
3SB3201-0AA51
3SB3201-0AA61
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3201-0AA11-0CC0
3SB3201-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3201-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3201-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3201-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3201-0AA61-0CC0
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
1 NO
1 NC
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
C
B
B
B
C
3SB3202-0BA11
3SB3203-0BA11
3SB3203-0BA21
3SB3202-0BA31
3SB3202-0BA51
3SB3202-0BA61
-------
Black
Red
Yellow
Blue
White
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
C
C
C
3SB3201-0BA11
3SB3201-0BA21
3SB3201-0BA31
3SB3201-0BA51
3SB3201-0BA61
------
Pushbuttons with raised button
Illuminated pushbuttons with flat button

With integrated LED
(incl. holder for 3 elements)
13
Illuminated pushbutton
with flat button
24 AC/DC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3246-0AA21
3SB3245-0AA31
3SB3245-0AA41
3SB3245-0AA51
3SB3245-0AA61
3SB3245-0AA71
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3246-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3245-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3245-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3245-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3245-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3245-0AA71-0CC0
24 AC/DC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3247-0AA21
3SB3247-0AA31
3SB3247-0AA41
3SB3247-0AA51
3SB3247-0AA61
3SB3247-0AA71
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3247-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3247-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3247-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3247-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3247-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3247-0AA71-0CC0
110 AC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3250-0AA21
3SB3257-0AA31
3SB3257-0AA41
3SB3257-0AA51
3SB3257-0AA61
3SB3257-0AA71
-------
110 AC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
C
B
B
3SB3251-0AA21
3SB3251-0AA31
3SB3251-0AA41
3SB3251-0AA51
3SB3251-0AA61
3SB3251-0AA71
-------

1)
The inscription 1 NO + 1 NC means that a contact block with two contacts

is used (3SB3400-0A or 3SB3403-0A).
2)
13/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Rated voltage of
lamp
Color of
handle
Contacts
for front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons
With integrated LED
230 AC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3254-0AA21
3SB3253-0AA31
3SB3253-0AA41
3SB3253-0AA51
3SB3253-0AA61
3SB3253-0AA71
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3254-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3253-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3253-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3253-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3253-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3253-0AA71-0CC0
230 AC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3255-0AA21
3SB3255-0AA31
3SB3255-0AA41
3SB3255-0AA51
3SB3255-0AA61
3SB3255-0AA71
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3255-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3255-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3255-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3255-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3255-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3255-0AA71-0CC0
with flat button

With BA 9s lampholder, without lamp
--
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3207-0AA21
3SB3206-0AA31
3SB3206-0AA41
3SB3206-0AA51
3SB3206-0AA61
3SB3206-0AA71
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3207-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3206-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3206-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3206-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3206-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3206-0AA71-0CC0
--
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3205-0AA21
3SB3205-0AA31
3SB3205-0AA41
3SB3205-0AA51
3SB3205-0AA61
3SB3205-0AA71
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3205-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3205-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3205-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3205-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3205-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3205-0AA71-0CC0
1 NC
3SB3203-1CA21
3SB3203-1CA21-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1CA21
3SB3201-1CA21-0CC0
with flat button
Push-pull buttons
Mushroom push-pull buttons, 40 mm, latching,
with pull-to-unlatch mechanism
--
Red
Mushroom push-pull
button
2)
13
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/27
Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Version
Color of
handle/
Lock No.
Contacts
for front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Selector switches
Selector switches, 2 switch positions
Switching sequence O-I, 50 operating angle
Latching
Black
1 NO
3SB3202-2KA11
3SB3202-2KA11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-2KA11
3SB3201-2KA11-0CC0
1 NO
3SB3202-2HA11
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-2HA11
--
1 NO, 1 NO
3SB3210-2DA11
3SB3210-2DA11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC,
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3208-2DA11
3SB3208-2DA11-0CC0
1 NO, 1 NO
3SB3210-2EA11
3SB3210-2EA11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC,
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3208-2EA11
3SB3208-2EA11-0CC0

Selector switches
Latching
Black

Switching sequence I-O-II, 2 x 50 operating angle
Latching
Momentary
contact type
Black
Black
RONIS key-operated switches, 2 switch positions
With 2 keys, removal position O + I,
switching sequence O-I, 50 operating angle
Latching
SB 30
1 NO
3SB3202-4AD11
3SB3202-4AD11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-4AD11
3SB3201-4AD11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC,
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3100-8AC61
RONIS key-operated
switch
Twin pushbuttons
Twin pushbuttons,
With flat, square buttons2)
13
With I/O
inscription
White/White
--
Twin pushbutton
with flat buttons
1)

2)
Mounting the twin pushbuttons in 3SB38 enclosure is not possible.

13/28
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Color of handle
Contacts
for front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
EMERGENCY-STOP control devices

according to ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-.5,
with holder and yellow name plate, 80 mm, with inscription
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons,
40 mm, with positive latching function,
With rotate-to-unlatch mechanism
German inscription
"NOT-HALT"
Red
Red
With rotate-to-unlatch
mechanism
1 NC
3SB3203-1HA20
1 NC with installation
monitoring
3SB3266-1HA20
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1HA20
1 NC
3SB3203-1HR20
--
monitoring
3SB3266-1HR20
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1HR20
--
3SB3203-1HA20-0CC0
--
3SB3201-1HA20-0CC0
English inscription
"EMERGENCY STOP"
Red
Red
French inscription
"ARRET DURGENCE"
Red
1 NC
3SB3203-1HP20
--
Red
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1HP20
--
With rotate-to-unlatch mechanism and mechanical

switch position indication
German inscription
"NOT-HALT"
Red
Red
With rotate-to-unlatch
mechanism and switch
position indication
1 NC
3SB3203-1HA26
monitoring
3SB3266-1HA26
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1HA26
1 NC
3SB3203-1HR26
--
monitoring
3SB3266-1HR26
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1HR26
--
3SB3203-1HA26-0CC0
--
3SB3201-1HA26-0CC0
English inscription
"EMERGENCY STOP"
Red
Red
With pull-to-unlatch mechanism

German inscription
"NOT-HALT"
Red
1 NC
3SB3203-1TA20
--
Red
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1TA20
--
Red
1 NC
3SB3203-1TR20
--
Red
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3201-1TR20
--
With pull-to-unlatch
mechanism
13
English inscription
"EMERGENCY STOP"

Can be used with 3SK11 safety relays or the 3RK3 Modular Safety System;
see Chapter 11, "Safety Technology".
Certificate:
1)


Siemens IC 10 2014
13/29
Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Rated voltage of lamp
Color of lens
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
V
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Indicator lights
Indicator lights with smooth lens1)
With integrated LED
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3244-6AA20
3SB3244-6AA30
3SB3244-6AA40
3SB3244-6AA50
3SB3244-6AA60
3SB3244-6AA70
110 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3248-6AA20
3SB3248-6AA30
3SB3248-6AA40
3SB3248-6AA50
3SB3248-6AA60
3SB3248-6AA70
230 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3252-6AA20
3SB3252-6AA30
3SB3252-6AA40
3SB3252-6AA50
3SB3252-6AA60
3SB3252-6AA70
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3252-6AA20-0CC0
3SB3252-6AA30-0CC0
3SB3252-6AA40-0CC0
3SB3252-6AA50-0CC0
3SB3252-6AA60-0CC0
3SB3252-6AA70-0CC0
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3204-6AA20
3SB3204-6AA30
3SB3204-6AA40
3SB3204-6AA50
3SB3204-6AA60
3SB3204-6AA70
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3204-6AA20-0CC0
3SB3204-6AA30-0CC0
3SB3204-6AA40-0CC0
3SB3204-6AA50-0CC0
3SB3204-6AA60-0CC0
3SB3204-6AA70-0CC0
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3244-6BA20
3SB3244-6BA30
3SB3244-6BA40
3SB3244-6BA50
3SB3244-6BA60
3SB3244-6BA70
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3244-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3244-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3244-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3244-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3244-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3244-6BA70-0CC0
110 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3248-6BA20
3SB3248-6BA30
3SB3248-6BA40
3SB3248-6BA50
3SB3248-6BA60
3SB3248-6BA70
230 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3252-6BA20
3SB3252-6BA30
3SB3252-6BA40
3SB3252-6BA50
3SB3252-6BA60
3SB3252-6BA70
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3252-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3252-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3252-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3252-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3252-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3252-6BA70-0CC0
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3204-6BA00
3SB3204-6BA20
3SB3204-6BA30
3SB3204-6BA40
3SB3204-6BA50
3SB3204-6BA60
3SB3204-6BA70
B
B
B
B
B
B
-3SB3204-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3204-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3204-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3204-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3204-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3204-6BA70-0CC0
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3240-6BA00
3SB3240-6BA20
3SB3240-6BA30
3SB3240-6BA40
3SB3240-6BA50
3SB3240-6BA60
3SB3240-6BA70
Indicator light
with smooth lens
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3244-6AA20-0CC0
3SB3244-6AA30-0CC0
3SB3244-6AA40-0CC0
3SB3244-6AA50-0CC0
3SB3244-6AA60-0CC0
3SB3244-6AA70-0CC0
-------

--
Indicator lights with lens

with concentric rings1)
With integrated LED

with concentric rings
-------
13
--
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
With BA 9s lampholder, with LED

130 AC
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
--------

1)
Inscription by inserting a label is not possible.
13/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
Version
Rated voltage Color of

of lamp
lens
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Signaling devices
Acoustic signaling devices, IP651)
Continuous tone 2.4 kHz,
24 AC/DC
operational current min. 4 mA, 115 AC/DC
sound pressure
230 AC/DC
min. 80 dB/10 cm
X1
(L+)
Black
B
B
B
Color of
handle
DT Without connection
3SB3233-7BA10
3SB3234-7BA10
3SB3235-7BA10
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00003
Acoustic signaling device

1)
Mounting in 3SB38 enclosures only with the 3SB3400-1A lampholder for

front plate mounting, which is included.
Version
Degree
of protection
Article No.
Price
per PU
Special devices
Actuators for
potentiometers1)2),
30 ... 32 mm long
IP65
Black
With shaft 6 mm
3SB1000-7CH07
1 unit
41J
With shaft 6.3 mm (1/4 Inch)
3SB1000-7CJ07
1 unit
41J
3SB3000-0EA11
1 unit
41J
Actuator for
potentiometers
Pushbuttons with extended stroke1)
For actuating relays (possible to connect the
3SX1335 extension plunger)
12 mm stroke
IP65
Black
Pushbuttons with
12 mm stroke
Mounting in 3SB38 enclosure is not possible.
2)
The potentiometer is not included in the scope of supply.
13
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/31
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Operation
The 3SB1400-0J contact block is used, which due to its depth
cannot be built into 3SB38 enclosures.
Switches are available as follows:
With 2 or 4 switch positions
Latching or momentary contact type
With or without mechanical interlocking
In the case of switches with mechanical interlock in O position,
the switch is unlatched with the unlatching button at the front of
the actuating lever.
Inscriptions
A name plate consisting of a black, plastic label holder and two or
four adhesive, silver-colored inscription labels of 27 mm x 27 mm
in size is available for labeling purposes. These labels can be
supplied with and without customized inscription.
Coordinate switch with contact blocks
Coordinate switches control auxiliary circuits permitting movements in various directions of machines and equipment.
The switches are designed for front plate mounting.
They are climate-proof.

Version
Operating travel
DT Screw terminals
Contact closed
Contact open
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Coordinate switches
2 switch positions, 1 NO per direction
Horizontal, momentary contact type
A 0 B
NSD0_01079
A
B
43-44
33-34
0
NSD0_01077
Without mechanical interlocking in the O position
Coordinate switch,
2 switch positions
With plastic front ring, black
3SB1201-7DV01
1 unit
41J
With metal front ring
3SB1201-7DV20
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7DW01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7DW20
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7FV01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7FV20
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7FW01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7FW20
1 unit
41J
With mechanical interlocking in the O position
D
0
C
NSD0_01080
Vertical, momentary contact type
13-14
23-24
D
C
0
NSD0_01078
13
13/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Operating travel
DT Screw terminals
Contact closed
Contact open
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Coordinate switches
Horizontal, latching
43-44
33-34
A 0 B
NSD0_01079
A
B
0
NSD0_01077
Coordinate switch,
2 switch positions
3SB1201-7EV01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7EV20
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7EW01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7EW20
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7GV01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7GV20
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7GW01
1 unit
41J
3SB1201-7GW20
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7JV01
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7JV20
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7JW01
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7JW20
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7KV01
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7KV20
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7KW01
1 unit
41J
3SB1208-7KW20
1 unit
41J
Vertical, latching
13-14
23-24
NSD0_01080
D
0
C
D
C
0
NSD0_01078

D
A 0 B
C
NSD0_00076
Momentary contact type
43-44
33-34
A
B
13-14
23-24
D
C
0
Coordinate switch,
4 switch positions
NSD0_00077
43-44
33-34
A
B
13-14
23-24
D
C
0
NSD0_00077

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/33
13
D
A 0 B
C
NSD0_00076
Latching
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
Contact blocks
Symbols/
operating travel
DT Screw terminals
Contact closed
Contact open
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Spare contact blocks

Contact blocks with
2 contacts
1 NO, 1 NO
(included in scope of
supply of switch)
.3 .3
3SB1400-0J
.4 .4
A
B
.3/.4
.3/.4
0
3SB1400-0J
NSD0_00109a
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Name plates
Label holders for coordinate switches
2 switch positions, horizontal, 89 mm x 30 mm
3SB1906-0AU
1 unit
41J
2 switch positions, vertical, 30 mm x 89 mm
3SB1906-0AV
1 unit
41J
4 switch positions
3SB1906-0AW
1 unit
41J
3SB1906-2AA
100 10 units
41J
Inscription labels 27 mm 27 mm,

silver-colored, adhesive
Without inscription
With customized inscription (engraved)
3SB1906-2XZ
Text lines (up to 5 lines each with 11 characters)
3SB1906-0AV
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y,

or K5Y
1 unit
41J
Graphic symbol with No.
K3Y
1 unit
41J
K9Y
1 unit
41J
3SB1906-0AW
For black plastic labels see page 13/76.
Options
These labeling plates can be inscribed with text or symbols.
5 lines with 11 characters each in a letter height of 4 mm are
possible.
13
Ordering notes
Append the following order codes to the Article No.:
Text line(s) in upper/lower case, upper case always for beginning of line (e.g. "Lift out"): K0Y
K3Y
Any inscription or symbol according to order form supplement: K9Y

In the case of multi-line inscriptions, the text must be assigned
to the respective line, e.g. "Z1 = Lift, Z2 =Lower".
ISO 7000 or IEC 60417.
Ordering example
A label inscribed with symbol No. 1117 according to ISO 7000 is
required:
3SB19 06-2XZ
K3Y
Z = 1117 ISO
Other ordering examples see page 13/79.
13/34
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
Inscriptions
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons with holder1)

Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Gray
Clear2)
}
}
B
}
B
}
B
B
3SB3000-0AA11
3SB3000-0AA21
3SB3000-0AA31
3SB3000-0AA41
3SB3000-0AA51
3SB3000-0AA61
3SB3000-0AB51
3SB3000-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Green
Red
White
Black
Blue
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-0AA81
3SB3000-0AB01
3SB3000-0AB11
3SB3000-0AB21
3SB3000-0AC81
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised button
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-0BA11
3SB3000-0BA21
3SB3000-0BA31
3SB3000-0BA41
3SB3000-0BA51
3SB3000-0BA61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised button,
latching by pressing in and
turning to the right,
unlatches by turning to the left
Black
Red
}
B
3SB3000-0CA11
3SB3000-0CA21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised front ring
(height 13 mm)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-0AA12
3SB3000-0AA22
3SB3000-0AA32
3SB3000-0AA42
3SB3000-0AA52
3SB3000-0AA62
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised front ring,
castellated
(height 13 mm)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-0AA13
3SB3000-0AA23
3SB3000-0AA33
3SB3000-0AA43
3SB3000-0AA63
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
(height 18.5 mm)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-0AA14
3SB3000-0AA24
3SB3000-0AA34
3SB3000-0AA44
3SB3000-0AA54
3SB3000-0AA64
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button
Amber2)
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
C
}
}
}
B
B
}
3SB3001-0AA01
3SB3001-0AA21
3SB3001-0AA31
3SB3001-0AA41
3SB3001-0AA51
3SB3001-0AA61
3SB3001-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with raised button
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-0BA21
3SB3001-0BA31
3SB3001-0BA41
3SB3001-0BA51
3SB3001-0BA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with flat button,
latching, unlatches
by pressing again
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Gray
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
3SB3000-0DA11
3SB3000-0DA21
3SB3000-0DA31
3SB3000-0DA41
3SB3000-0DA51
3SB3000-0DA61
3SB3000-0DB51
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button,
latching, unlatches
by pressing again,
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-0DA21
3SB3001-0DA31
3SB3001-0DA41
3SB3001-0DA51
3SB3001-0DA61
3SB3001-0DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with flat button
I
O
I
O
R
With flat button
With raised button,

latching
With raised front ring
With raised front ring,

castellated
with raised button

1)
Also available without holder. Supplement Article No. with "-Z" and quote
order code "B01". Price reduction on request.
2)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/35
13
With raised button
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Mushroom pushbuttons with holder1)2)

Mushroom pushbuttons, 30 mm
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-1DA11
3SB3000-1DA21
3SB3000-1DA31
3SB3000-1DA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
}
}
B
B
3SB3000-1GA11
3SB3000-1GA21
3SB3000-1GA31
3SB3000-1GA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-1QA11
3SB3000-1QA21
3SB3000-1QA31
3SB3000-1QA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated mushroom pushbuttons,

30 mm
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-1DA21
3SB3001-1DA31
3SB3001-1DA41
3SB3001-1DA51
3SB3001-1DA61
3SB3001-1DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

40 mm
Yellow
Green
White
Clear
B
B
B
C
3SB3001-1GA31
3SB3001-1GA41
3SB3001-1GA61
3SB3001-1GA71
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Mushroom pushbutton,
30 mm
40 mm
60 mm
13
Illuminated mushroom
pushbutton, 30 mm
pushbutton, 40 mm
1)
2)
Maximum permissible equipment: 3 single-pole or 2 double-pole contact

blocks. When using the 3SB3901-0AB holder, the central command point
must not be empty.
13/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Push-pull buttons with holder1)2)

Push-pull buttons, 30 mm, latching,
pull to unlatch
Black
Red
Yellow
B
B
B
3SB3000-1EA11
3SB3000-1EA21
3SB3000-1EA31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J

pull to unlatch
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
}
}
B
C
3SB3000-1CA11
3SB3000-1CA21
3SB3000-1CA31
3SB3000-1CA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

pull to unlatch
Black
Red
B
B
3SB3000-1RA11
3SB3000-1RA21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
Push-pull buttons, 30 mm,

can be illuminated,
latching, pull to unlatch,
(including holder for 3 elements)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-1EA21
3SB3001-1EA31
3SB3001-1EA41
3SB3001-1EA51
3SB3001-1EA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Push-pull buttons, 40 mm,

can be illuminated,
latching, pull to unlatch,
(including holder for 3 elements)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-1CA21
3SB3001-1CA31
3SB3001-1CA41
3SB3001-1CA51
3SB3001-1CA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Push-pull button,
30 mm
Push-pull button,
40 mm
Push-pull button,
30 mm,
can be illuminated
Push-pull button,
40 mm,
can be illuminated
2)
Maximum permissible equipment: 3 single-pole or 2 double-pole contact

blocks. When using the 3SB3901-0AB holder, the central command point
must not be empty.

13

1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/37
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Version
Illumination
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Selector switches with holder1)

90 operating angle,
latching
Non-illuminated

50 operating angle,
latching

50 operating angle,
Illuminated
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-2HA11
3SB3000-2HA21
3SB3000-2HA41
3SB3000-2HA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
(incl. holder for Yellow
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-2HA21
3SB3001-2HA31
3SB3001-2HA41
3SB3001-2HA51
3SB3001-2HA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3000-2KA11
3SB3000-2KA21
3SB3000-2KA41
3SB3000-2KA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-2KA21
3SB3001-2KA31
3SB3001-2KA41
3SB3001-2KA51
3SB3001-2KA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3000-2LA11
3SB3000-2LA21
3SB3000-2LA41
3SB3000-2LA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-2LA21
3SB3001-2LA31
3SB3001-2LA41
3SB3001-2LA51
3SB3001-2LA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3000-2DA11
3SB3000-2DA21
3SB3000-2DA41
3SB3000-2DA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-2DA21
3SB3001-2DA31
3SB3001-2DA41
3SB3001-2DA51
3SB3001-2DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3000-2EA11
3SB3000-2EA21
3SB3000-2EA41
3SB3000-2EA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-2EA21
3SB3001-2EA31
3SB3001-2EA41
3SB3001-2EA51
3SB3001-2EA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3000-2GA11
3SB3000-2GA21
3SB3000-2GA41
3SB3000-2GA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-2GA21
3SB3001-2GA31
3SB3001-2GA41
3SB3001-2GA51
3SB3001-2GA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-2FA11
3SB3000-2FA21
3SB3000-2FA41
3SB3000-2FA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
C
B
3SB3001-2FA21
3SB3001-2FA31
3SB3001-2FA41
3SB3001-2FA51
3SB3001-2FA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated
Non-illuminated
Non-illuminated

Non-illumi2 x 50 operating angle,
nated
latching
Non-illuminated
13
Illuminated

Non-illuminated

nated
momentary contact type to the
left, latching to the right

nated
latching to the left, momentary
contact type to the right

1)
13/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Lock version
Type
DT Configurator
Lock
Key
No./color removal
position
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Key-operated switches with holder1)

Key-operated switches with 2 keys, 2 switch positions
Switching sequence O-I, RONIS
50 operating angle,
latching
SB 30
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3000-4HD11
3SB3000-4HD01
3SB3000-4HD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J

50 operating angle,
RONIS key-operated switch latching
CES
SB 30
O+I
O
I
}
}
B
3SB3000-4AD11
3SB3000-4AD01
3SB3000-4AD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
SSG 10
O+I
O
I
}
}
B
3SB3000-4LD11
3SB3000-4LD01
3SB3000-4LD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
LSG 1
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-4LF01
3SB3000-4LF11
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
CES with key SSG 10

monitoring2)
3SB3000-4LD05
1 unit
41J
BKS
S1
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3000-5AD11
3SB3000-5AD01
3SB3000-5AD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
E1 for
VW3)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-5AE01
3SB3000-5AE11
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E2 for
VW3)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-5AE21
3SB3000-5AE31
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E7 for
VW3)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-5AE41
3SB3000-5AE51
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E9 for
VW3)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-5AE61
3SB3000-5AE71
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73038
O+I
Light blue O
B
B
3SB3000-3AG11
3SB3000-3AG01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73037
Red
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-3AH11
3SB3000-3AH01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73034
Black
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-3AJ11
3SB3000-3AJ01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73033
Yellow
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3000-3AK11
3SB3000-3AK01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
SB 30
3SB3000-4BD01
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
3SB3000-4MD01
1 unit
41J
41J
CES key-operated switch
O.M.R.4)
BKS key-operated switch

50 operating angle,
CES
3SB3000-4MF11
1 unit
S1
3SB3000-5BD01
1 unit
41J
O.M.R.4)
73038
O
Light blue
3SB3000-3BG01
1 unit
41J
73037
Red
3SB3000-3BH01
1 unit
41J
73034
Black
3SB3000-3BJ01
1 unit
41J
73033
Yellow
3SB3000-3BK01
1 unit
41J

1)
2)
For key-operated switches with key monitoring, the enclosed holder

3SB3901-0AB must be used.
The key scan is performed by a 3SB34 single-pole NC contact block which
must be snap-mounted in the center position. Scanning of the switch positions must be performed by additional contact blocks which are snapmounted on the actuator.
Special locks can be ordered only with order code "Y01".
3)
Keys are not included in scope of supply.
4)
According to FIAT standards; also available for other users.

BKS and CES special locks see page 13/70.
13
O.M.R. key-operated switch
LSG 1
BKS
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/39
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Lock version
Type
DT Configurator
Lock
Key
No./color removal
position
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

Switching sequence I-O-II, RONIS
latching
SB 30
I+O+II
O
I+II
I
II
O+I
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-4DD11
3SB3000-4DD01
3SB3000-4DD41
3SB3000-4DD21
3SB3000-4DD31
3SB3000-4DD51
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
CES
SSG 10
I+O+II
O
O+I
I+II
I
II
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3000-4PD11
3SB3000-4PD01
3SB3000-4PD51
3SB3000-4PD41
3SB3000-4PD21
3SB3000-4PD31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
CES with
key monitoring
SSG 10
3SB3000-4PD05
1 unit
41J
RONIS key-operated switch
BKS
S1
I+O+II
II
B
C
3SB3000-5DD11
3SB3000-5DD31
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
O.M.R.3)
73038
I+O+II
Light blue O
B
B
3SB3000-3DG11
3SB3000-3DG01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73037
Red
O
O+I
B
B
3SB3000-3DH01
3SB3000-3DH51
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73034
Black
I+O+II
O
B
B
3SB3000-3DJ11
3SB3000-3DJ01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
73033
Yellow
I+O+II
3SB3000-3DK11
1 unit
41J
SB 30
3SB3000-4ED01
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
3SB3000-4QD01
1 unit
41J
S1
3SB3000-5ED01
1 unit
41J
73034
Black
3SB3000-3EJ01
1 unit
41J
SB 30
O+II
O
II
B
B
B
3SB3000-4GD61
3SB3000-4GD01
3SB3000-4GD31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
SSG 10
O+II
O
B
B
3SB3000-4SD61
3SB3000-4SD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
S1
3SB3000-5GD01
1 unit
41J
SB 30
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3000-4FD51
3SB3000-4FD01
3SB3000-4FD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
SSG 10
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3000-4RD51
3SB3000-4RD01
3SB3000-4RD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
BKS
S1
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3000-5FD51
3SB3000-5FD01
3SB3000-5FD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
O.M.R.3)
73038
O
Light blue
3SB3000-3FG01
1 unit
41J
73034
Black
3SB3000-3FJ21
1 unit
41J

CES
BKS
O.M.R.3)

to the left,
CES
latching to the right
BKS
O.M.R. key-operated switch 2 x 50 operating angle,
latching to the left,
CES
to the right
13
2)

1)
2)
For key-operated switches with key monitoring, the enclosed holder

3SB3901-0AB must be used.
The key scan is performed by a 3SB34 single-pole NC contact block which
must be snap-mounted in the center position. Scanning of the switch positions must be performed by additional contact blocks which are snapmounted on the actuator.
Special locks can be ordered only with order code "Y01".
3)
13/40
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of
handle
Approval DT Configurator
Article No.
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
EMERGENCY-STOP control devices acc. to ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5

with holder1)2), can also be used with safety relays3)
B
3SB3000-1FA20
1 1 unit
41J
Without switch position indicator
3SB3000-1HA20
1 1 unit
41J
With mechanical switch position

indicator
3SB3000-1HA26
1 1 unit
41J
Black
3SB3000-1HA10
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with positive latching according to
ISO 13850, with pull-to-unlatch
mechanism
Red
3SB3000-1TA20
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 60 mm,
ISO 13850, with rotate-to-unlatch
mechanism
Red
3SB3000-1AA20
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with RONIS lock,
lock No. SB 30, with positive latching
according to ISO 13850, unlocking
only possible using key
Red
3SB3000-1BA20
1 1 unit
41J
Red
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with CES lock,
lock No. SSG 10, with positive latching
3SB3000-1KA20
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with BKS lock,
lock No. S1, with positive latching
Red
3SB3000-1LA20
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with O.M.R. lock,
lock No. 73037, with positive latching
Red
3SB3000-1MA20
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 32 mm,
with positive latching
according to ISO 13850,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism
Red
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
mechanism
Red
Mushroom diameter 32 mm
Mushroom pushbuttons, 40 mm,

Mushroom diameter 40 mm,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechan. ISO 13850, with rotate-to-unlatch
with switch position indicator
mechanism

pull-to-unlatch mechanism

with RONIS key-oper. switch

with CES key-operated switch

1)
2)
The yellow backing plates must be ordered separately, see "Accessories"

on page 13/85.

3)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/41
13
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of lens DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Signaling elements with holder1)
Indicator light with

concentric rings
Indicator lights
with smooth lens2)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3001-6AA00
3SB3001-6AA20
3SB3001-6AA30
3SB3001-6AA40
3SB3001-6AA50
3SB3001-6AA60
3SB3001-6AA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
with lens with concentric rings2)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3001-6BA00
3SB3001-6BA20
3SB3001-6BA30
3SB3001-6BA40
3SB3001-6BA50
3SB3001-6BA60
3SB3001-6BA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Acoustic signaling devices, IP403)

For acoustic signal transformer 24 V DC4)
(without BA 9s base)
Black
3SB3000-7AA10
1 unit
41J
Acoustic signaling device

4)

1)
2)
3)
For acoustic signaling devices, IP65, see Complete units, page 13/31.
Version
Inscriptions
Following must also be ordered:

- 3SB1902-2BN acoustic signal transformer, see "Accessories", page 13/82
- lampholder with screw terminals
3SB3400-1A for front plate mounting or
3SB3420-1A for base mounting
Devices assembled in this way are suitable for use in enclosures.
Lampholders with spring-type terminals cannot be used.
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Twin pushbuttons with indicator light with holder1)2)

Twin pushbuttons
with indicator light,
with flat, square buttons,
incl. holder for 3 elements
I/O3)
I/O3)
Green/Red
White/Black
B
B
3SB3101-8BC21
3SB3101-8BC31
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
/3)
Green/Red
3SB3101-8BC81
1 unit
41J
Twin pushbuttons
with flat and raised,
square buttons,
incl. holder for 3 elements
I/O3)
I/O3)
Green/Red
White/Black
B
B
3SB3101-8DC21
3SB3101-8DC31
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
13
Twin pushbutton
with flat buttons
Twin pushbuttons
with flat and
raised buttons
1)
2)
13/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
3)
Black inscription for green, red and white buttons;

white inscription on black button.

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Inscriptions
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Price
per PU
Twin pushbuttons with holder1)2)

Twin pushbuttons,
with flat, square buttons
Twin pushbuttons,
with flat and raised,
square buttons
I/O3)
I/O3)
Green/Red
White/Black
/3)
I/O3)
I/O3)
B
B
3SB3100-8AC21
3SB3100-8AC31
White/White
3SB3100-8AC61-0AD0
1
1
1
Green/Red
White/Black
B
B
3SB3100-8CC21
3SB3100-8CC31
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
100 10 units
41J
Twin pushbutton
with flat buttons
1)
2)
3)
Black inscription for green, red and white buttons;

white inscription on black button.
Version
Use
DT Article No.
Label holders 70 mm x 30 mm
for inscription label
12.5 mm x 27 mm1)
Twin pushbuttons
3SB3922-0AY
Protective caps, clear

Silicone, for degree of protection IP67
Twin pushbuttons
with flat buttons
3SB3921-0AQ
Price
per PU
Accessories for twin pushbuttons
Label holders
1
1 unit
41J
Protective cap
Mounting in 3SB38 enclosure is not possible.
For inscription labels see pages 13/75 and 13/76.
13
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/43
Siemens AG 2013

Actuators and Indicators, Plastic, Square, 26 mm 26 mm
Complete units

Version
Rated voltage of lamp
Color of Contacts for

handle front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons
with flat button
--
Pushbuttons
Illuminated
pushbuttons
with flat button
With integrated LED
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
24 AC/DC
Illuminated
pushbuttons
with flat button
With integrated LED
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Illuminated
pushbuttons
with flat button
With BA 9s
lampholder
without lamp
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
230 AC
--
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
1 NO
1 NC
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3302-0AA11
3SB3303-0AA11
3SB3303-0AA21
3SB3302-0AA31
3SB3302-0AA41
3SB3302-0AA51
3SB3302-0AA61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
C
B
3SB3301-0AA11
3SB3301-0AA21
3SB3301-0AA31
3SB3301-0AA41
3SB3301-0AA51
3SB3301-0AA61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3346-0AA21
3SB3345-0AA31
3SB3345-0AA41
3SB3345-0AA51
3SB3345-0AA61
3SB3345-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3347-0AA21
3SB3347-0AA31
3SB3347-0AA41
3SB3347-0AA51
3SB3347-0AA61
3SB3347-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
C
B
C
B
B
3SB3354-0AA21
3SB3353-0AA31
3SB3353-0AA41
3SB3353-0AA51
3SB3353-0AA61
3SB3353-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
C
B
C
C
B
3SB3355-0AA21
3SB3355-0AA31
3SB3355-0AA41
3SB3355-0AA51
3SB3355-0AA61
3SB3355-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3307-0AA21
3SB3306-0AA31
3SB3306-0AA41
3SB3306-0AA51
3SB3306-0AA61
3SB3306-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3305-0AA21
3SB3305-0AA31
3SB3305-0AA41
3SB3305-0AA51
3SB3305-0AA61
3SB3305-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
13

1)

2)
13/44
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
Version
Color of
handle
Contacts for
front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

according to ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5,
with holder and yellow name plate, 80 mm, with inscription2)
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbuttons,
40 mm,
with positive latching
function,
with rotate-to-unlatch
mechanism
Red
3SB3303-1HA20
1 unit
41J
1 NO + 1 NC q
3SB3301-1HA20
1 unit
41J
1 NC
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
mechanism
Certificate:
Version
Rated voltage
of lamp
1)

is used (3SB3400-0A).
2)
German inscription "NOT-HALT".
Color of lens
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Signaling devices
Indicator lights
with integrated LED
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3344-6AA20
3SB3344-6AA30
3SB3344-6AA40
3SB3344-6AA50
3SB3344-6AA60
3SB3344-6AA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
with integrated LED
230 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3352-6AA20
3SB3352-6AA30
3SB3352-6AA40
3SB3352-6AA50
3SB3352-6AA60
3SB3352-6AA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
with BA 9s lampholder
(without lamp)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3304-6AA20
3SB3304-6AA30
3SB3304-6AA40
3SB3304-6AA50
3SB3304-6AA60
3SB3304-6AA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
13

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/45
Siemens AG 2013


Version
Color of handle DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons and switches with holder1)

Pushbuttons
with flat button
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear2)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3110-0AA11
3SB3110-0AA21
3SB3110-0AA31
3SB3110-0AA41
3SB3110-0AA51
3SB3110-0AA61
3SB3110-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
(height 13 mm)
Black
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
C
B
B
3SB3110-0AA12
3SB3110-0AA22
3SB3110-0AA42
3SB3110-0AA52
3SB3110-0AA62
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5 units
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised front ring, castellated
(height 13 mm)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
C
C
C
C
B
C
3SB3110-0AA13
3SB3110-0AA23
3SB3110-0AA33
3SB3110-0AA43
3SB3110-0AA53
3SB3110-0AA63
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
5 units
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3111-0AA21
3SB3111-0AA31
3SB3111-0AA41
3SB3111-0AA51
3SB3111-0AA61
3SB3111-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons, latching,
with flat button,
unlocking by pressing again
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
C
B
3SB3110-0DA11
3SB3110-0DA21
3SB3110-0DA31
3SB3110-0DA41
3SB3110-0DA51
3SB3110-0DA61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated pushbuttons, latching,

with flat button
(incl. holder for 3 elements),
unlocking by pressing again
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3111-0DA21
3SB3111-0DA31
3SB3111-0DA41
3SB3111-0DA51
3SB3111-0DA61
3SB3111-0DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
Pushbutton
Pushbutton with raised

front ring, castellated
Pushbutton
13

1)
2)
13/46
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Version
Illumination
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Selector switches with holder1)

50 operating angle,
latching
Selector switches
50 operating angle,
Selector switch,
illuminated
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3110-2KA11
3SB3110-2KA21
3SB3110-2KA41
3SB3110-2KA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3111-2KA21
3SB3111-2KA31
3SB3111-2KA41
3SB3111-2KA51
3SB3111-2KA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
B
C
C
C
3SB3110-2LA11
3SB3110-2LA21
3SB3110-2LA41
3SB3110-2LA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
C
C
C
B
3SB3111-2LA21
3SB3111-2LA31
3SB3111-2LA41
3SB3111-2LA51
3SB3111-2LA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
C
C
3SB3110-2DA11
3SB3110-2DA21
3SB3110-2DA41
3SB3110-2DA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
C
B
3SB3111-2DA21
3SB3111-2DA31
3SB3111-2DA41
3SB3111-2DA51
3SB3111-2DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
C
C
3SB3110-2EA11
3SB3110-2EA21
3SB3110-2EA41
3SB3110-2EA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated
Red
3 elements)
Green
Blue
Clear
C
C
B
C
B
3SB3111-2EA21
3SB3111-2EA31
3SB3111-2EA41
3SB3111-2EA51
3SB3111-2EA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated
Non-illuminated

latching
Selector switches
Selector switch,
illuminated
Non-illuminated
Non-illuminated

nated
momentary contact type to the left,
Black
Green
White
B
C
B
3SB3110-2GA11
3SB3110-2GA41
3SB3110-2GA61
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J

latching to the left, momentary
contact type to the right
Black
Red
Green
B
C
B
3SB3110-2FA11
3SB3110-2FA21
3SB3110-2FA41
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated


13
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/47
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Lock version
Type
DT Configurator
Lock
Key
No./color removal
position
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

50 operating angle,
latching
RONIS
SB 30
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3110-4AD11
3SB3110-4AD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
CES
SSG 10
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3110-4LD11
3SB3110-4LD01
3SB3110-4LD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
LSG 1
O+I
O
C
B
3SB3110-4LF01
3SB3110-4LF11
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E2 for
VW2)
3SB3110-5AE31
1 unit
41J
E7 for
VW2)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3110-5AE41
3SB3110-5AE51
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E9 for
VW2)
3SB3110-5AE71
1 unit
41J
73037
Red
3SB3110-3AH01
1 unit
41J
73034
Black
O+I
3SB3110-3AJ11
1 unit
41J
BKS
O.M.R.3)

50 operating angle,
RONIS
SB 30
3SB3110-4BD01
1 unit
41J
CES
SSG 10
3SB3110-4MD01
1 unit
41J

CES
latching
13

O.M.R. key-operated switch 2 x 50 operating angle,
CES
SB 30
I+O+II
3SB3110-4DD11
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
I+O+II
O
B
B
3SB3110-4PD11
3SB3110-4PD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
SB 30
3SB3110-4ED01
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
3SB3110-4QD01
1 unit
41J
Switching sequence I-O-II, CES

to the left,
SSG 10
3SB3110-4SD01
1 unit
41J
Switching sequence I-O-II, CES

to the right
SSG 10
O+I
3SB3110-4RD51
1 unit
41J

1)
2)
3)
13/48
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of
handle
Approval DT Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to ISO 13850 and

IEC 60947-5-5 with holder1)2), can also be used with safety relays3)
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
ISO 13850,
Red
3SB3110-1HA20
1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with RONIS key-operated switch
(with 2 keys), lock No. SB 30,
ISO 13850,
unlocking only possible using key
Red
3SB3110-1BA20
1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with CES key-operated switch
(with 2 keys), lock No. SSG 10,
ISO 13850,
Red
3SB3110-1KA20
1 unit
41J
Red
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with BKS key-operated switch
(with 2 keys), lock No. S1, with positive
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton with latching according to ISO 13850,
3SB3110-1LA20
1 unit
41J
Red
3SB3110-1MA20
1 unit
41J
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton with rotateto-unlatch mechanism
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton with
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with O.M.R. key-operated switch
(with 2 keys), lock No. 73037
ISO 13850,
unlocking only using key
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton with
3)
2)
Yellow backing plates must be ordered separately, see "Accessories" on

page 13/85.
Version
Color of lens
DT Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
13

1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

Indicator lights
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
White
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3111-6AA20
3SB3111-6AA30
3SB3111-6AA40
3SB3111-6AA50
3SB3111-6AA70
3SB3111-6AA60
Indicator lights
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/49
Siemens AG 2013

Actuators and Indicators, Metal, Round, 22 mm
Complete units

The following applies to all complete units:
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Rated voltage of
lamp
Color of
handle
Contacts for
front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with flat button
--
Pushbutton with
flat button
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
1 NO
1 NC
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
}
B
}
B
}
B
}
3SB3602-0AA11
3SB3603-0AA11
3SB3603-0AA21
3SB3602-0AA31
3SB3602-0AA41
3SB3602-0AA51
3SB3602-0AA61
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3602-0AA11-0CC0
3SB3603-0AA11-0CC0
3SB3603-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3602-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3602-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3602-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3602-0AA61-0CC0
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3601-0AA11
3SB3601-0AA21
3SB3601-0AA31
3SB3601-0AA41
3SB3601-0AA51
3SB3601-0AA61
3SB3601-0AA71
B
B
C
C
B
B
3SB3601-0AA11-0CC0
3SB3601-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3601-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3601-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3601-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3601-0AA61-0CC0
--

With integrated LED (incl. holder for 3 elements)
24 AC/DC
with flat button
110 AC
13
230 AC
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3646-0AA21
3SB3645-0AA31
3SB3645-0AA41
3SB3645-0AA51
3SB3645-0AA61
3SB3645-0AA71
C
B
B
C
B
C
3SB3646-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3645-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3645-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3645-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3645-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3645-0AA71-0CC0
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3647-0AA21
3SB3647-0AA31
3SB3647-0AA41
3SB3647-0AA51
3SB3647-0AA61
3SB3647-0AA71
B
C
B
B
B
C
3SB3647-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3647-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3647-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3647-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3647-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3647-0AA71-0CC0
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
D
3SB3650-0AA21
3SB3657-0AA31
3SB3657-0AA41
3SB3657-0AA51
3SB3657-0AA61
3SB3657-0AA71
-------
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
D
B
B
3SB3651-0AA21
3SB3651-0AA31
3SB3651-0AA41
3SB3651-0AA51
3SB3651-0AA61
3SB3651-0AA71
-------
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
}
B
}
D
B
}
3SB3654-0AA21
3SB3653-0AA31
3SB3653-0AA41
3SB3653-0AA51
3SB3653-0AA61
3SB3653-0AA71
C
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3654-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3653-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3653-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3653-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3653-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3653-0AA71-0CC0
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
D
B
B
3SB3655-0AA21
3SB3655-0AA31
3SB3655-0AA41
3SB3655-0AA51
3SB3655-0AA61
3SB3655-0AA71
C
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3655-0AA21-0CC0
3SB3655-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3655-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3655-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3655-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3655-0AA71-0CC0

1)

2)
13/50
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Rated voltage of
lamp
Color of
handle
Contacts for
front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Pushbuttons
--
with flat button
Red2)
Amber2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
D
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3607-0AA21
3SB3606-0AA01
3SB3606-0AA31
3SB3606-0AA41
3SB3606-0AA51
3SB3606-0AA61
3SB3606-0AA71
Red2)
Amber2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3605-0AA21
3SB3605-0AA01
3SB3605-0AA31
3SB3605-0AA41
3SB3605-0AA51
3SB3605-0AA61
3SB3605-0AA71
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3607-0AA21-0CC0
-3SB3606-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3606-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3606-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3606-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3606-0AA71-0CC0
3SB3605-0AA21-0CC0
-3SB3605-0AA31-0CC0
3SB3605-0AA41-0CC0
3SB3605-0AA51-0CC0
3SB3605-0AA61-0CC0
3SB3605-0AA71-0CC0
with flat solvent-resistant button3),
with integrated LED (incl. holder for 3 elements)
24 AC/DC
with flat button
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NC
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
1 NO
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3646-0AA21-0PA0
3SB3645-0AA31-0PA0
3SB3645-0AA41-0PA0
3SB3645-0AA51-0PA0
3SB3645-0AA61-0PA0
3SB3645-0AA71-0PA0
-------
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3647-0AA21-0PA0
3SB3647-0AA31-0PA0
3SB3647-0AA41-0PA0
3SB3647-0AA51-0PA0
3SB3647-0AA61-0PA0
3SB3647-0AA71-0PA0
-------
1 NC
3SB3603-1CA21
3SB3603-1CA21-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-1CA21
3SB3601-1CA21-0CC0
Mushroom push-pull buttons,
40 mm, latching
with pull-to-unlatch mechanism
--
Red
Mushroom
push-pull button
2)
3)
Not suitable for laser inscription.

13

1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/51
Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Version
Color of
handle/
Lock No.
Contacts for
front plate
mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Selector switches
Latching
Selector switches
Black
1 NO
3SB3602-2KA11
3SB3602-2KA11-0CC0
Standard
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-2KA11
3SB3601-2KA11-0CC0
Heavy duty
1 NO
3SB3602-2PA11
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-2PA11
--

2 x 50 operating angle
Latching
Black
Heavy duty
Momentary
contact type
Black
Heavy duty
3SB3610-2DA11
3SB3610-2DA11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC, }
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3608-2DA11
3SB3608-2DA11-0CC0
1 NO, 1 NO
1 NO, 1 NO
3SB3610-2SA11
--
1 NO + 1 NC, D
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3608-2SA11
--
3SB3610-2EA11
3SB3610-2EA11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC, B
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3608-2EA11
3SB3608-2EA11-0CC0
1 NO, 1 NO
3SB3610-2TA11
--
1 NO + 1 NC, D
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3608-2TA11
--
1 NO, 1 NO
RONIS key-operated switches, 2 switch positions
With 2 keys, removal position O + I,
switching sequence O-I, 50 operating angle
Latching
SB 30
1 NO
3SB3602-4AD11
3SB3602-4AD11-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-4AD11
3SB3601-4AD11-0CC0
RONIS key-operated
switch
13
1)
13/52
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Color of handle
Contacts for front

plate mounting1)
DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
according to ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-.5,
with holder and yellow name plate, 80 mm, with inscription
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons,
40 mm, with positive latching function,
German inscription "NOT-HALT"
Red
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
mechanism
3SB3603-1HA20
1 NC with installation q
monitoring
3SB3666-1HA20
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-1HA20
3SB3601-1HA20-0CC0
1 NC, 1 NC
--
3SB3611-1HA20-0CC0
1 NC
3SB3603-1HA20-0CC0
--
English inscription "EMERGENCY STOP"

Red
3SB3603-1HR20
--
monitoring
3SB3666-1HR20
--
3SB3601-1HR20
--
1 NC
3SB3603-1HP20
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-1HP20
--
1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
French inscription "ARRET DURGENCE"
Red
With rotate-to-unlatch mechanism and

mechanical switch position indicator
Red
3SB3603-1HA26
monitoring
3SB3666-1HA26
3SB3601-1HA26
1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3603-1HA26-0CC0
--
3SB3601-1HA26-0CC0

EMERGENCY-STOP
mechanism and switch
position indicator
Red
3SB3603-1HR26
--
monitoring
3SB3666-1HR26
--
3SB3601-1HR26
--
1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
With pull-to-unlatch mechanism, solvent-resistant

Red
1 NC
3SB3603-1TA20
3SB3603-1TA20-0CC0
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-1TA20
3SB3601-1TA20-0CC0
1 NC, 1 NC
--
3SB3611-1TA20-0CC0

Red
3SB3603-1TR20
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-1TR20
--
1 NC
3SB3603-1TP20
--
1 NO + 1 NC
3SB3601-1TP20
--
French inscription "ARRET DURGENCE"

Red
13
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
with pull-to-unlatch
mechanism
1 NC

Certificate:
1)
Meaning of the inscription:

1 NO + 1 NC : One contact block is delivered with two contacts
(3SB3400-0A or 3SB3403-0A).
1 NC, 1 NC:
Two contact blocks are delivered with one contact each
(2 x 3SB3403-0C).

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/53
Siemens AG 2013

Complete units
PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 41J
Rated voltage
of lamp
Color of lens DT Screw terminals
Configurator
Article No.
V
Configurator
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Indicator lights
with concentric rings1)
with integrated LED
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3644-6BA20
3SB3644-6BA30
3SB3644-6BA40
3SB3644-6BA50
3SB3644-6BA60
3SB3644-6BA70
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3644-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3644-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3644-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3644-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3644-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3644-6BA70-0CC0
110 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3648-6BA20
3SB3648-6BA30
3SB3648-6BA40
3SB3648-6BA50
3SB3648-6BA60
3SB3648-6BA70
B
C
B
C
B
B
3SB3648-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3648-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3648-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3648-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3648-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3648-6BA70-0CC0
230 AC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3652-6BA20
3SB3652-6BA30
3SB3652-6BA40
3SB3652-6BA50
3SB3652-6BA60
3SB3652-6BA70
C
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3652-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3652-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3652-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3652-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3652-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3652-6BA70-0CC0
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3604-6BA20
3SB3604-6BA30
3SB3604-6BA40
3SB3604-6BA50
3SB3604-6BA60
3SB3604-6BA70
B
C
B
C
B
C
3SB3604-6BA20-0CC0
3SB3604-6BA30-0CC0
3SB3604-6BA40-0CC0
3SB3604-6BA50-0CC0
3SB3604-6BA60-0CC0
3SB3604-6BA70-0CC0
Indicator lights

--
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear

13
1)
13/54
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
Inscriptions
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Gray
Clear2)
}
}
B
}
B
}
B
B
3SB3500-0AA11
3SB3500-0AA21
3SB3500-0AA31
3SB3500-0AA41
3SB3500-0AA51
3SB3500-0AA61
3SB3500-0AB51
3SB3500-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Green
Red
White
Black
Blue
B
B
B
B
D
3SB3500-0AA81
3SB3500-0AB01
3SB3500-0AB11
3SB3500-0AB21
3SB3500-0AC81
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with flat solvent-resistant
button3)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
}
B
B
B
B
C
3SB3500-0AA11
3SB3500-0AA21-0PA0
3SB3500-0AA31-0PA0
3SB3500-0AA41-0PA0
3SB3500-0AA51-0PA0
3SB3500-0AA61-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with raised button
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-0BA11
3SB3500-0BA21
3SB3500-0BA31
3SB3500-0BA41
3SB3500-0BA51
3SB3500-0BA61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
(height 15.5 mm)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-0AA12
3SB3500-0AA22
3SB3500-0AA32
3SB3500-0AA42
3SB3500-0AA52
3SB3500-0AA62
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button
Amber2)
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
B
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3501-0AA01
3SB3501-0AA21
3SB3501-0AA31
3SB3501-0AA41
3SB3501-0AA51
3SB3501-0AA61
3SB3501-0AA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat solvent-resistant
button3)
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-0AA21-0PA0
3SB3501-0AA31-0PA0
3SB3501-0AA41-0PA0
3SB3501-0AA51-0PA0
3SB3501-0AA61-0PA0
3SB3501-0AA71-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with raised button
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-0BA01
3SB3501-0BA21
3SB3501-0BA31
3SB3501-0BA41
3SB3501-0BA51
3SB3501-0BA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with flat button,
latching,
unlatches by
pressing again
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Gray
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
3SB3500-0DA11
3SB3500-0DA21
3SB3500-0DA31
3SB3500-0DA41
3SB3500-0DA51
3SB3500-0DA61
3SB3500-0DB51
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
with flat button,
latching,
unlatches by pressing again
Amber2)
Red2)
Yellow2)
Green2)
Blue2)
White
Clear2)
D
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-0DA01
3SB3501-0DA21
3SB3501-0DA31
3SB3501-0DA41
3SB3501-0DA51
3SB3501-0DA61
3SB3501-0DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Pushbuttons
with flat button
Pushbutton with flat button
I
O
I
O
R
Pushbutton with raised button
Pushbutton
with flat button
with raised button
Pushbutton
with flat button

1)
Also available without holder. Supplement Article No. with "Z" and quote
2)
3)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/55
13
Pushbuttons with holder1)
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of handle DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Mushroom pushbuttons with holder1)

Black
Red
Yellow
Green
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-1DA11
3SB3500-1DA21
3SB3500-1DA31
3SB3500-1DA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-1GA11
3SB3500-1GA21
3SB3500-1GA31
3SB3500-1GA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-1QA11
3SB3500-1QA21
3SB3500-1QA31
3SB3500-1QA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

30 mm
Amber
Yellow
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-1DA01
3SB3501-1DA31
3SB3501-1DA41
3SB3501-1DA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

40 mm
Amber
Yellow
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-1GA01
3SB3501-1GA31
3SB3501-1GA41
3SB3501-1GA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

60 mm
Amber
Yellow
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-1QA01
3SB3501-1QA31
3SB3501-1QA41
3SB3501-1QA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

pull to unlatch
Black
Red
B
B
3SB3500-1EA11
3SB3500-1EA21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J

pull to unlatch
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
B
B
B
C
3SB3500-1CA11
3SB3500-1CA21
3SB3500-1CA31
3SB3500-1CA41
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

pull to unlatch
Black
Red
B
B
3SB3500-1RA11
3SB3500-1RA21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J

pull to unlatch,
can be illuminated,
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-1EA01
3SB3501-1EA21
3SB3501-1EA31
3SB3501-1EA41
3SB3501-1EA51
3SB3501-1EA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

pull to unlatch,
can be illuminated,
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
C
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-1CA01
3SB3501-1CA21
3SB3501-1CA31
3SB3501-1CA41
3SB3501-1CA51
3SB3501-1CA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

pull to unlatch,
can be illuminated,
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
C
B
B
C
C
D
3SB3501-1RA01
3SB3501-1RA21
3SB3501-1RA31
3SB3501-1RA41
3SB3501-1RA51
3SB3501-1RA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
30 mm
40 mm
pushbutton, 60 mm
13
Push-pull button, 30 mm
Push-pull button,
40 mm
Push-pull button,
60 mm, can be illuminated
1)
13/56
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Version
Illumination
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Selector switches with holders

Black
Red
Green
White
}
A
B
B
3SB3500-2HA11
3SB3500-2HA21
3SB3500-2HA41
3SB3500-2HA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
with solvent-resistant
knob1)
Black
Red
Green
B
B
B
3SB3500-2HA11-0PA0
3SB3500-2HA21-0PA0
3SB3500-2HA41-0PA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
standard version1),
(incl. holder
for 3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
C
C
C
C
C
B
3SB3501-2HA01
3SB3501-2HA21
3SB3501-2HA31
3SB3501-2HA41
3SB3501-2HA51
3SB3501-2HA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Switching sequence Non-illuminated,

O-I,
standard version1)
50 operating angle,
latching
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3500-2KA11
3SB3500-2KA21
3SB3500-2KA41
3SB3500-2KA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
knob1)
Black
Red
Green
B
D
B
3SB3500-2KA11-0PA0
3SB3500-2KA21-0PA0
3SB3500-2KA41-0PA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
standard version1),
(incl. holder
for 3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-2KA01
3SB3501-2KA21
3SB3501-2KA31
3SB3501-2KA41
3SB3501-2KA51
3SB3501-2KA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
knob1) (incl. holder
for 3 elements)
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2KA21-0PA0
3SB3501-2KA41-0PA0
3SB3501-2KA51-0PA0
3SB3501-2KA71-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Black
Red
Green
White
C
D
D
D
3SB3500-2PA11
3SB3500-2PA21
3SB3500-2PA41
3SB3500-2PA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
heavy-duty version,
(incl. holder
for 3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2PA01
3SB3501-2PA21
3SB3501-2PA31
3SB3501-2PA41
3SB3501-2PA51
3SB3501-2PA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
long handle
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-3PA11
3SB3500-3PA21
3SB3500-3PA41
3SB3500-3PA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
long handle,
(incl. holder
for 3 elements)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-3PA21
3SB3501-3PA31
3SB3501-3PA41
3SB3501-3PA51
3SB3501-3PA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

O-I,
standard version1)
90 operating angle,
latching
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
standard version, 90
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
standard version, 50
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
heavy-duty version
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
long handle

13
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/57
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Version
Illumination
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3500-2LA11
3SB3500-2LA21
3SB3500-2LA41
3SB3500-2LA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
B
B
B
3SB3500-2LA11-0PA0
3SB3500-2LA21-0PA0
3SB3500-2LA41-0PA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
standard version1),
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-2LA01
3SB3501-2LA21
3SB3501-2LA31
3SB3501-2LA41
3SB3501-2LA51
3SB3501-2LA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
knob1) (incl. holder
for 3 elements)
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
B
3SB3501-2LA21-0PA0
3SB3501-2LA41-0PA0
3SB3501-2LA51-0PA0
3SB3501-2LA71-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-2QA11
3SB3500-2QA21
3SB3500-2QA41
3SB3500-2QA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
heavy-duty
version,
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2QA01
3SB3501-2QA21
3SB3501-2QA31
3SB3501-2QA41
3SB3501-2QA51
3SB3501-2QA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
long handle
Black
Red
Green
D
D
D
3SB3500-3QA11
3SB3500-3QA21
3SB3500-3QA41
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
long handle,
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-3QA21
3SB3501-3QA31
3SB3501-3QA41
3SB3501-3QA51
3SB3501-3QA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

O-I,
standard version1)
50 operating angle,
momentary contact
type
Non-illuminated,
knob1)
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
standard version
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
heavy-duty version
Selector switch,
2 switch positions,
long handle
13
1)
13/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Version
Illumination
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

}
B
B
B
3SB3500-2DA11
3SB3500-2DA21
3SB3500-2DA41
3SB3500-2DA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Red
Green
B
C
B
3SB3500-2DA11-0PA0
3SB3500-2DA21-0PA0
3SB3500-2DA41-0PA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Selector switch,
3 switch positions,
standard version
Illuminated,
standard version 1)
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-2DA01
3SB3501-2DA21
3SB3501-2DA31
3SB3501-2DA41
3SB3501-2DA51
3SB3501-2DA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
knob1)
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
B
D
B
D
3SB3501-2DA21-0PA0
3SB3501-2DA41-0PA0
3SB3501-2DA51-0PA0
3SB3501-2DA71-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Selector switch,
3 switch positions,
heavy-duty version
Non-illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Black
Red
Green
White
C
D
D
D
3SB3500-2SA11
3SB3500-2SA21
3SB3500-2SA41
3SB3500-2SA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
heavy-duty version,
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2SA01
3SB3501-2SA21
3SB3501-2SA31
3SB3501-2SA41
3SB3501-2SA51
3SB3501-2SA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
long handle
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-3SA11
3SB3500-3SA21
3SB3500-3SA41
3SB3500-3SA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Selector switch,
3 switch positions,
long handle
Illuminated,
long handle,
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-3SA21
3SB3501-3SA31
3SB3501-3SA41
3SB3501-3SA51
3SB3501-3SA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Switching sequence
I-O-II,
2 x 50 operating
angle,
momentary contact
type
Non-illuminated,
standard version1)
Black
Red
Green
White
}
B
B
B
3SB3500-2EA11
3SB3500-2EA21
3SB3500-2EA41
3SB3500-2EA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
knob1)
Black
Red
Green
B
B
B
3SB3500-2EA11-0PA0
3SB3500-2EA21-0PA0
3SB3500-2EA41-0PA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
standard version1),
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-2EA01
3SB3501-2EA21
3SB3501-2EA31
3SB3501-2EA41
3SB3501-2EA51
3SB3501-2EA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
knob1)
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
B
B
B
D
3SB3501-2EA21-0PA0
3SB3501-2EA41-0PA0
3SB3501-2EA51-0PA0
3SB3501-2EA71-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
13
Black
Red
Green
White

I-O-II,
standard version1)
2 x 50 operating
angle,
latching
Non-illuminated,
knob1)

1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/59
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Version
Illumination
Color of
handle
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Switching sequence
Non-illuminated,
I-O-II,
heavy-duty
2 x 50 operating angle, version
Selector switch,
3 switch positions,
standard version
Selector switch,
3 switch positions,
heavy-duty version
Switching sequence
I-O-II,
to the left,
Selector switch,
3 switch positions,
long handle
13
Switching sequence
I-O-II,
to the right
Black
Red
Green
White
C
D
D
D
3SB3500-2TA11
3SB3500-2TA21
3SB3500-2TA41
3SB3500-2TA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
heavy-duty version,
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2TA01
3SB3501-2TA21
3SB3501-2TA31
3SB3501-2TA41
3SB3501-2TA51
3SB3501-2TA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
long handle
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-3TA11
3SB3500-3TA21
3SB3500-3TA41
3SB3500-3TA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
long handle,
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-3TA21
3SB3501-3TA31
3SB3501-3TA41
3SB3501-3TA51
3SB3501-3TA71
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
standard version1)
Black
Red
Green
White
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-2GA11
3SB3500-2GA21
3SB3500-2GA41
3SB3500-2GA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
standard version1),
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
B
D
D
3SB3501-2GA01
3SB3501-2GA21
3SB3501-2GA31
3SB3501-2GA41
3SB3501-2GA51
3SB3501-2GA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-2VA11
3SB3500-2VA21
3SB3500-2VA41
3SB3500-2VA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2VA01
3SB3501-2VA21
3SB3501-2VA31
3SB3501-2VA41
3SB3501-2VA51
3SB3501-2VA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
long handle
Black
Red
D
D
3SB3500-3VA11
3SB3500-3VA21
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
standard version1)
Black
Red
Green
White
B
D
B
B
3SB3500-2FA11
3SB3500-2FA21
3SB3500-2FA41
3SB3500-2FA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
standard version1),
(incl. holder for
3 elements)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
B
D
B
3SB3501-2FA01
3SB3501-2FA21
3SB3501-2FA31
3SB3501-2FA41
3SB3501-2FA51
3SB3501-2FA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-2UA11
3SB3500-2UA21
3SB3500-2UA41
3SB3500-2UA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Illuminated,
heavy-duty version
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Clear
D
D
D
D
D
D
3SB3501-2UA01
3SB3501-2UA21
3SB3501-2UA31
3SB3501-2UA41
3SB3501-2UA51
3SB3501-2UA71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Non-illuminated,
long handle
Black
Red
Green
White
D
D
D
D
3SB3500-3UA11
3SB3500-3UA21
3SB3500-3UA41
3SB3500-3UA61
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J

1)
13/60
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Lock version
Type
DT Configurator
Lock
Key
No./color removal
position
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

50 operating angle,
latching
CES

BKS

O.M.R.3)

50 operating angle,
CES
SB 30
O+I
O
I
}
}
B
3SB3500-4AD11
3SB3500-4AD01
3SB3500-4AD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
SSG 10
O+I
O
I
}
}
B
3SB3500-4LD11
3SB3500-4LD01
3SB3500-4LD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
LSG 1
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3500-4LF01
3SB3500-4LF11
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
S1
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3500-5AD11
3SB3500-5AD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E1 for
VW2)
3SB3500-5AE11
1 unit
41J
E2 for
VW2)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3500-5AE21
3SB3500-5AE31
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E7 for
VW2)
O+I
O
B
B
3SB3500-5AE41
3SB3500-5AE51
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
E9 for
VW2)
3SB3500-5AE71
1 unit
41J
73038
O+I
Light blue O
I
B
B
B
3SB3500-3AG11
3SB3500-3AG01
3SB3500-3AG21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
73037
Red
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3500-3AH11
3SB3500-3AH01
3SB3500-3AH21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
73034
Black
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3500-3AJ11
3SB3500-3AJ01
3SB3500-3AJ21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
73033
Yellow
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3500-3AK11
3SB3500-3AK01
3SB3500-3AK21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
SB 30
3SB3500-4BD01
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
3SB3500-4MD01
1 unit
41J
41J
LSG 1
3SB3500-4MF11
1 unit
BKS
S1
3SB3500-5BD01
1 unit
41J
O.M.R.3)
73038
O
Light blue
3SB3500-3BG01
1 unit
41J
73037
Red
3SB3500-3BH01
1 unit
41J
73034
Black
3SB3500-3BJ01
1 unit
41J
73033
Yellow
3SB3500-3BK01
1 unit
41J

2)
3)
13
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/61
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Lock version
Type
DT Configurator
Lock
Key
No./color removal
position
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

latching
SB 30
I+O+II
O
I+II
I
II
O+I
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-4DD11
3SB3500-4DD01
3SB3500-4DD41
3SB3500-4DD21
3SB3500-4DD31
3SB3500-4DD51
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
CES
SSG 10
I+O+II
O
I+II
I
II
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3500-4PD11
3SB3500-4PD01
3SB3500-4PD41
3SB3500-4PD21
3SB3500-4PD31
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
BKS
S1
O
I+II
C
C
3SB3500-5DD01
3SB3500-5DD41
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
O.M.R.2)
73038
I+O+II
Light blue
3SB3500-3DG11
1 unit
41J
73037
Red
I+O+II
3SB3500-3DH11
1 unit
41J
73034
Black
I+O+II
O
B
B
3SB3500-3DJ11
3SB3500-3DJ01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J

CES
BKS
SB 30
3SB3500-4ED01
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
3SB3500-4QD01
1 unit
41J
S1
3SB3500-5ED01
1 unit
41J
O.M.R.
73034
Black
3SB3500-3EJ01
1 unit
41J

CES
to the left,
SB 30
O+II
O
B
B
3SB3500-4GD61
3SB3500-4GD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
SSG 10
O+II
O
II
B
B
B
3SB3500-4SD61
3SB3500-4SD01
3SB3500-4SD31
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
BKS
S1
O+II
O
C
C
3SB3500-5GD61
3SB3500-5GD01
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
O.M.R.
73033
Yellow
II
3SB3500-3GK31
1 unit
41J

CES
to the right
BKS
SB 30
O+I
3SB3500-4FD51
1 unit
41J
SSG 10
O+I
O
I
B
B
B
3SB3500-4RD51
3SB3500-4RD01
3SB3500-4RD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
S1
O+I
O
I
C
B
B
3SB3500-5FD51
3SB3500-5FD01
3SB3500-5FD21
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J

2)
13
1)
13/62
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of Appro- DT Configurator

handle val
Article No.
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5

with holder1)2), can also be used with safety relays3)
pushbuttons, 32 mm,
mechanism
Standard version
3SB3500-1FA20
1 1 unit
41J
Solvent-resistant4)
3SB3500-1FA20-0PA0
1 1 unit
41J
3SB3500-1HA20
1 1 unit
41J
3SB3500-1HA20-0PA0
1 1 unit
41J
3SB3500-1HA26
1 1 unit
41J
3SB3500-1HA10
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
mechanism
Red
Without switch position indicator

Without switch position indicator,
solvent-resistant4)
with rotate-to-unlatch mech- With mechanical switch position indicator

anism with switch position Mushroom pushbuttons, 40 mm,
Black
indicator
with positive latching acc. to ISO 13850,
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
ISO 13850,
with pull-to-unlatch mechanism4)
Red
3SB3500-1TA20
1 1 unit
41J
pushbuttons, 60 mm
With positive latching according to
ISO 13850,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism4)
Red
3SB3500-1AA20
1 1 unit
41J
Red
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with RONIS key-operated switch
(with 2 keys), lock No. SB 30, with positive
latching according to ISO 13850,
3SB3500-1BA20
1 1 unit
41J
Red
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with CES key-operated switch,
Mushroom diameter 40 mm, (with 2 keys), lock No. SSG 10, with
with RONIS key-oper. switch positive latching according to ISO 13850,
3SB3500-1KA20
1 1 unit
41J
Red
3SB3500-1LA20
1 1 unit
41J
Red
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with O.M.R. key-operated switch
Mushroom diameter 40 mm, (with 2 keys), lock No. 73037, with
positive latching according to ISO 13850,
with CES key-operated
unlocking only using key
switch
3SB3500-1MA20
1 1 unit
41J

pull-to-unlatch mechanism
pushbuttons, 40 mm,
with BKS key-operated switch,
(with 2 keys), lock No. S1, with positive
latching according to ISO 13850,
3)
1)
4)
2)
Yellow backing plates must be ordered separately, see "Accessories" on

page 13/85.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/63
13
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Color of
lens
DT Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Indicator light
with smooth lens
Indicator lights
with lens with concentric rings2)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
}
B
}
B
B
}
3SB3501-6BA00
3SB3501-6BA20
3SB3501-6BA30
3SB3501-6BA40
3SB3501-6BA50
3SB3501-6BA60
3SB3501-6BA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
with smooth lens2)
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
}
B
3SB3501-6AA00
3SB3501-6AA20
3SB3501-6AA30
3SB3501-6AA40
3SB3501-6AA50
3SB3501-6AA60
3SB3501-6AA70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Indicator lights
with smooth solvent-resistant lens2)3)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3501-6AA20-0PA0
3SB3501-6AA30-0PA0
3SB3501-6AA40-0PA0
3SB3501-6AA50-0PA0
3SB3501-6AA60-0PA0
3SB3501-6AA70-0PA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

2)
3)
13
1)
13/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Components for Actuators and Indicators

Version
Graphic
symbols
Operating travel
DT Screw terminals
Contact closed
Article No.
Contact open
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Contact blocks for front plate mounting

Contact blocks with one contact
Mounting depth 50 mm
1 NO
NSD0_00015
.3
3-4
0 1
mm
1 NO with
.4
3SB3400-0B
1 NC
1 NC with
3SB3400-0B
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0BA
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0C
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0CA
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0M
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0A
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0AA
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0N
1 unit
41J
2,3
NSD0_00017
.1
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
1,6
monitoring contact1)
NSD0_00017
.1
3SB3400-0M
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
1,6
Contact block with 2 contacts

Mounting depth 63 mm (including unit labeling plate)
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
with gold-plated contacts
1 NO + 1 NC with
dust protection2)
.3 .1
.4 .2
1 NO leading + 1 NC lagging
3SB3400-0A
.7 .5
1 NO leading + 1 NC lagging
.8 .6
2 NO
.3 .3
2 NO with
.4 .4
2 NO with
dust protection2)
q
2 NC with
2 NC with dust
NSD0_00037b
7-8
5-6
0 1 2 3
mm
1,3 2,2
3SB3400-0H
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0HA
1 unit
41J
NSD0_00039
3-4
3-4
0 1
mm
B
D
3SB3400-0D
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0DA
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0P
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0E
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0EA
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-0Q
1 unit
41J
3SB3400-2A
1 unit
41J
2,3
2 NC
protection2)
NSD0_00038
3-4
1-2
0 1 2 3
mm
1,6 2,3
.1 .1
.2 .2
NSD0_00040
1-2
1-2
0 1 2
mm
1,6
Blocks with 2 diodes type 1N 4007

URMS = max. 250 V
IFAV = 0.8 A
at Tu = 60 C
(L+)
X5
X7
(L-)
X6
X8
NSD0_00113
13
3SB3400-2A
qPositive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
Can be used with 3SK1, 3TK28 safety relays or the 3RK3 Modular Safety
System; see Chapter 11, "Safety Technology".
1)
The NC contact opens automatically upon disconnection of the actuator.

On delivery, the contact is open (= safe state).
Activation (= NC contacts on the non-actuated control device are closed)
takes place upon first-time actuation after the contact block is snapped
onto the actuator.
Unsuitable for mounting in 3SB38 enclosures.
2)
With 3SB3901-0CH dust protection shield (see page 13/85).

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/65
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Graphic symbols
Rated voltage
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
V
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

BA 9s lampholders, mounting depth 50 mm
Without lamp
X1
(L+)

(3SX1344)
X1
(L+)
With integrated voltage reducer

and with 130 V lamp
(3SX1731)1)2)
X1
With built-in resistor for longer

endurance and
with 130 V lamp (3SX1731)1)3)
X1
(L+)
X2
(L-)
Acc. to lamp
3SB3400-1A
1 unit
41J
24 AC/DC
3SB3400-1D
1 unit
41J
230/240 AC
3SB3400-1C
1 unit
41J
110/130
AC/DC
3SB3400-1B
1 unit
41J
230/240 AC
3SB3400-1F
1 unit
41J
Acc. to lamp
3SB3400-1G
1 unit
41J
Acc. to lamp
3SB3400-1L
1 unit
41J
Acc. to lamp
3SB3400-1H
1 unit
41J
24 AC/DC
B
}
}
B
}
3SB3400-1PA
3SB3400-1PB
3SB3400-1PC
3SB3400-1PD
3SB3400-1PE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
110 AC
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3400-1QA
3SB3400-1QB
3SB3400-1QC
3SB3400-1QD
3SB3400-1QE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC
B
}
}
B
}
3SB3400-1RA
3SB3400-1RB
3SB3400-1RC
3SB3400-1RD
3SB3400-1RE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
127 / 24
240 / 24
260 / 24
400 / 24
B
B
D
B
3SB3400-3A
3SB3400-3C
3SB3400-3E
3SB3400-3F
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
127 / 6
240 / 6
400 / 6
480 / 6
600 / 6
B
B
B
B
D
3SB3400-3M
3SB3400-3P
3SB3400-3S
3SB3400-3U
3SB3400-3W
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
NSD0_00003
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00003
3SB3400-1A
X2
NSD0_00042
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00041
BA 9s lampholders, mounting depth 66 mm,

with separate lamp test function4)
With integrated voltage reducer X5
and with 130 V lamp (3SX1731)1) X1
X2
NSD0_00043
Without lamp
3SB3400-1F
For incandescent lamp,

max. 2.6 W;
for LED lamp,
24/48/230 V AC/DC5)
AC/DC-LED
X5
X1
(L+)
Without lamp
X5
X2

max. 2.6 W;
for LED lamp, AC or DC
Without lamp
max. 2.6 W;
for glow lamp, AC
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00044b
X1
(L-)
(L+)
NSD0_00045
X5
X1
(L+)
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00046a
Lampholders with integrated LED

3SB3400-1PA
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
X1
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
X1
X2
NSD0_01292b
k
k
X2
NSD0_01296b
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
X1
k
k
X2
13
NSD0_01296b
Transformers
For snapping onto 3SB3400-1A
lampholder
For incandescent lamp AC,
max. 2 W
X1
X2
NSD0_00047
Mounting depth: 97 mm
3SB3400-3.
1)
The voltage reducer can only be used with this lamp.
2)
Also suitable for LED lamp 230 V AC, 3SB3901-1.F
3)
Also suitable for LED lamp 130 V AC, 3SB3901-1.D
4)
The lampholder with separate lamp test function can not be installed in an
enclosure.
5)
Not suitable for LED lamps which are suitable only for AC or DC.
13/66
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Rated voltage
of lamp/
Graphic
symbol
V
Operating travel/color DT Spring-type

terminals
Contact closed
Article No.
Contact open
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU

Contact blocks with one contact, mounting depth 50 mm
1 NO
NSD0_00015
.3
3-4
0 1
mm
1 NO with
.4
3SB3403-0B
1 NC
1 NC with
monitoring contact1)
3SB3403-0B
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0BA
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0C
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0CA
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0M
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0A
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0AA
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0H
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0HA
1 unit
41J
2,3
NSD0_00017
.1
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
1,6
NSD0_00017
.1
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
1,6
Contact blocks with 2 contacts, mounting depth 63 mm
3SB3403-0M
1 NO + 1 NC
1 NO + 1 NC
with gold-plated
contacts
NSD0_00038
.3 .1
3-4
1-2
0 1 2 3
mm
1,6 2,3
.4 .2
1 NO leading +
1 NC lagging
.7 .5
1 NO leading +
1 NC lagging
.8 .6
2 NO
.3 .3
NSD0_00037b
7-8
5-6
0 1 2 3
mm
1,3 2,2
3SB3403-0D
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0DA
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0E
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-0EA
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-1A
1 unit
41J
3SB3403-1C
1 unit
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3403-1PA
3SB3403-1PB
3SB3403-1PC
3SB3403-1PD
3SB3403-1PE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3403-1QA
3SB3403-1QB
3SB3403-1QC
3SB3403-1QD
3SB3403-1QE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3403-1RA
3SB3403-1RB
3SB3403-1RC
3SB3403-1RD
3SB3403-1RE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
NSD0_00039
3-4
3-4
0 1
mm
2 NO with
.4 .4
3SB3403-0A
2,3
2 NC
2 NC with
NSD0_00040
.1 .1
1-2
1-2
0 1 2
mm
1,6
.2 .2
BA 9s lampholders, mounting depth 50 mm

Without lamp2)
Acc. to lamp
X1
X2
(L-)
(L+)
With integrated voltage

reducer and with 130 V lamp
(3SX1731)2)3)
230/240 V AC
Lampholders with
integrated LED
24 V AC/DC
NSD0_00003
NSD0_00042
X1
k
X2
NSD0_01292b
110 V AC
X1
k
3SB3403-1PA
X2
NSD0_01296b
230 V AC
X1
k
k
X2
NSD0_01296b
2)
Not suitable for square command devices.
1)
3)
Use these lamps only.
The NC contact opens automatically upon disconnection of the actuator.

On delivery, the contact is open (= safe state). More explanations see footnote 1) on page 13/65. Unsuitable for mounting in 3SB38 enclosures.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/67
13
3SB3403-1C
X2
X1
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Graphic
symbols
Operating travel
DT Solder pin
connections
Contact closed
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Contact open
Contact blocks for use on printed circuit boards

1 NO
.3
.4
1 NC
.1
3SB3411-0B
.2
NSD0_00015
3-4
0 1
mm
3SB3411-0B
1 unit
41J
3SB3411-0C
1 unit
41J
3SB3411-1A
1 unit
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
2,3
NSD0_00017
1-2
0 1
mm
1,6
Wedge base lampholders W2 x 4.6d

Mounting depth: 44 mm
Without lamp
X1
(L+)
X2
(L-)
NSD0_00003
3SB3411-1A
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Holders for 3 contact blocks, for front plate mounting

Holders for pushbuttons and switches1)
For snapping on 3 blocks
(for illuminated pushbuttons and illuminated selector switches the
holder is included in the scope of supply)
3SB3901-0AB
100 20 units
41J
Holders for selector switches,

key-operated switches and twin pushbuttons
With pressure plate for actuating the central contact block of three
contact blocks2)
3SB3901-0AC
100 10 units
41J
3SB3901-0AW
100 10 units
41J
3SB3901-0AA
100 10 units
41J
3SB3901-0AB
3SB3901-0AC
Pressure plates for use on printed circuit boards

Pressure plates for selector switches and key-operated switches
For actuating the central contact block of three contact blocks2)
3SB3901-0AW
Accessories for printed circuit boards

Holders for printed circuit boards
For mounting the command devices on the printed circuit board
(screw is included in the scope of supply)
13
16
21
3SB3901-0AA
1)
Holder also for mushroom pushbutton and push-pull button.
2)
The pressure plates can be removed to meet individual requirements.
13/68
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

AS-Interface F adapters
for EMERGENCY-STOP devices
Overview
The AS-Interface F adapter is used to connect an EMERGENCYSTOP device according to ISO 13850 from the 3SB3 series to the
AS-Interface bus system. The F adapter is suitable for control
devices with mounting on front plates.
The F adapter has a safe AS-Interface 2E slave and is snapped
from behind onto the EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton. In the 2E/1A expanded version, an output is also available
for actuating an indicator light with LED.
Depending on the version, screw terminals or spring-type terminals or the insulation piercing method are used for connecting to
the AS-Interface bus cable. Addressing is performed using the
AS-Interface connection or the integrated addressing socket.
Safety category 4 (SIL 3) is achieved with the adapter.
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton with F adapter for bus connection

Version
DT Screw terminals
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
AS-Interface F adapter for 3SB3 EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom

pushbuttons
For mounting on front plates
2I
3SF5402-1AA03
1 unit
42A
2I/1O, with output for LED control
3SF5402-1AB03
1 unit
42A
Version
DT Spring-type
terminals
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SF5402-1AA03
Article No.
Price
per PU

pushbuttons
2I
3SF5402-1AA04
1 unit
42A
3SF5402-1AB04
1 unit
42A
Version
DT Insulation piercing
method
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Article No.
Price
per PU

pushbuttons
2I
3SF5402-1AA05
1 unit
42A
3SF5402-1AB05
1 unit
42A
3SF5402-1AA05

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/69
13
3SF5402-1AA04
Siemens AG 2013

Special locks
Options
Special locks for key-operated switches
Master and master-pass key systems
The BKS and CES plastic and metal key-operated switches,

round and square versions, can be optionally equipped with
special locks.
The following key systems can be supplied with BKS and CES
key-operated switches:
Central lock systems
Master key systems
Central master key systems
Master-pass key systems
In this case the Article No. of the matching key-operated switch

must be supplemented with "-Z", the matching order code
"Y01" or "Y02" and the required lock number.
Order code
Y01
Y02
In accordance with
the table of special
locks
No
Yes
When placing an order you must supplement the Article No.

of the matching key-operated switches with "-Z" and quote the
order code "Y03".
Normal delivery time 25 working days
5 working days
Please enquire for price and delivery time.
Additional price
per unit
On request
On request
Ordering example
3SB3000-4LD01-Z
Y01
Z = SSG18
3SB3000-4LD01-Z
Y02
Z = SSG11
Available special locks

with order code "Y02"
Article No.
with order code
Key-operated switch
CES SSG 11 to SSG 15
3SB3...-4LD01-Z
Y02
Sub
group
key
3SB3...-4LD11-Z
Y02
3SB3...-4LD21-Z
Y02
3SB3...-4MD01-Z
Y02
3SB3...-4PD..-Z
Y02
3SB3...-4QD..-Z
Y02
3SB3...-4RD..-Z
Y02
3SB3...-4SD..-Z
Y02
BKS E1, E2, E7, E91)
BKS E91)
3SB3...-5AD..-Z
Y02
3SB3...-5BD01-Z
Y02
3SB3...-5DD..-Z
Y02
3SB3...-5ED01-Z
Y02
3SB3...-5FD01-Z
Y02
3SB3...-5GD01-Z
Y02
3SB3...-5FD51-Z
Y02
13
pushbuttons
CES SSP 9
3SB3...-1KA20-Z
Y02
BKS E2, E7, E91)
3SB3...-1LA20-Z
Y02
1)
Delivery of these BKS key-operated switches (locks for VW) without key.
Ordering notes
For all special locks, an additional price applies.
The order code "Y01" or "Y02" must be quoted in accordance with the above table. Automated processing of the order with a defined delivery time can be guaranteed only for
correctly submitted orders.
For applications in which access security is important and
several lock numbers are used, we recommend the use of
BKS or CES key-operated switches.
Special locks for VW (E1, E2, ...) will be delivered without keys,
all others with 2 keys.
13/70
Siemens IC 10 2014
Master
pass key
Main
group key
NSD0_00075
Example of master-pass key system
Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Laser inscriptions
Overview
Inscription of actuators and indicators
Ordering notes
Actuators and indicators of plastic as well as metal version can

be optionally inscribed with a laser.
When ordering, supplement the Article No. of the actuator or the

indicator light with "Z" and an order code:
of line (e.g. "Lift out"): Y10
Text in upper case (e.g. "LIFT OUT"): Y11
Text in lower case (e.g. "lift out"): Y12
Text in upper/lower case, all words begin with capital letters
(e.g. "Lift Out"): Y15
Symbol with number according to ISO 7000 or IEC 60417: Y13
Any inscription or symbol according to order form supplement: Y19
Additional price per unit for Y10 to Y19 on request.
the exact spelling and specify the language (see ordering example 1).
Pushbutton (metal) with laser inscription
The actuators of the pushbuttons, illuminated pushbuttons,

mushroom pushbuttons, illuminated mushroom pushbuttons
and twin pushbuttons can be inscribed as well as the lenses of
the indicator lights.
Selector switches can be inscribed only if they are made of
plastic (only one text line on the front ring).

to the respective line, e.g. "Z1 = Lift, Z2 =Lower". For long words
you can also specify the end-of-line division.
For special symbols (order code Y19), a CAD drawing in BMP,
GIF, JEPG, PDF, PNG or TIFF format must be submitted. For special inscriptions (order code Y19): document in DOC or XLS format.
E-mail to: sirius-attach.aud@siemens.com
Ordering example 1
A round pushbutton with the inscription "Reset" is required:
3SB30000AA41Z
Y10
Z = Reset (English)
Ordering example 2
A square pushbutton inscribed with symbol No. 5389 according
to IEC 60417 is required:
3SB31100AA31Z
Y13
Z = 5389 IEC
Ordering example 3
Version
A letter height of 4 mm is used as standard for text inscriptions:
A round pushbutton inscribed with symbol No. 1118 according

to ISO 7000 is required:
3SB30000AA41Z
Y13
Z = 1118 ISO
13
Pushbutton and selector switch (plastic) with laser inscription
The typeface used is Arial. Other letter heights and typefaces

are possible, but must be specified when ordering.
For round buttons and lenses, the possible number of characters per line is:
10 characters for one line of text
8 characters for 2 lines of text
6 characters for 3 lines of text,
but 10 characters in the middle line
On square buttons and lenses, 10 characters are possible
per line.
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/71
Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Inscriptions by laser printer
Overview
Label inscriptions
Using the "Label Designer" software, which can be downloaded
from the Internet, and the inscription labels for laser inscription
you can create your own customized labels with a standard laser
printer.
The self-adhesive or snap-on labels can be stuck or snapped
onto the corresponding label holders (see Name plates). Round
labels are provided for inserting in illuminated pushbuttons and
switches.
The labels are suitable for printing with one to three lines of text
or symbols.
For applications with more exacting requirements we
recommend factory-printed inscription labels and insert labels
(laser-printed or engraved depending on the type).
For the "Label Designer" software see
www.siemens.com/sirius-label-designer

Version
Color
DT Article No.
Insert labels
for inserting in round illuminated pushbuttons
and illuminated switches
Milky
Inscription labels 12.5 mm x 27 mm

for sticking onto label holder
White
Inscription labels 27 mm x 27 mm
for sticking onto label holder
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SB3901-2AB
100 480 units
41J
3SB3902-2AA
100 480 units
41J
White
3SB3903-2AA
100 480 units
41J
Inscription labels 17.5 mm x 28 mm

for snapping onto label holder
White
3SB3905-2AA
100 784 units
41J
Inscription labels 22 mm x 22 mm
for sticking onto enclosure
White
3SB3906-2AA
100 700 units
41J
13
Labels for printing
13/72
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Insert labels
Overview
Pushbuttons (clear) and illuminated pushbuttons with a flat button can be fitted with insert labels for identification purposes, but
indicator lights cannot.
These insert labels are made of clear, semi-transparent plastic
with black inscription; they can be fitted in any 90 angle.
Inscriptions
The inscription is in upper/lower case, all words begin with upper case letters. Graphic symbols, including those not listed in
the catalog, are according to ISO 7000 or IEC 60417
(see page 13/74).
The insert labels without inscription are suitable for user marking
with permanent pen.

PU (UNIT) = 100 (customized inscription: 1)
PS*
= 10 units (customized inscription: 1 unit)
Inscription/Symbol
PG
Symbol No.
= 41J
DT Round range
Article No.
DT Square range
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Insert labels
Blank
3SB1901-4AS
3SB3940-4AA
Ein
On
Aus
Off
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4AB
3SB1901-4EB
3SB1901-4AC
3SB1901-4EC
B
B
B
B
3SB3940-4AB
3SB3940-4EB
3SB3940-4AC
3SB3940-4EC
Auf
Up
Ab
Down
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4AD
3SB1901-4ED
3SB1901-4AE
3SB1901-4EE
B
B
B
B
3SB3940-4AD
3SB3940-4ED
3SB3940-4AE
3SB3940-4EE
Vor
Forward
Zurck
Reverse
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4AF
3SB1901-4EF
3SB1901-4AG
3SB1901-4EG
B
B
B
B
3SB3940-4AF
3SB3940-4EF
3SB3940-4AG
3SB3940-4EG
Rechts
Right
Links
Left
B
C
B
C
3SB1901-4AH
3SB1901-4EH
3SB1901-4AJ
3SB1901-4EJ
Auf
Open
Zu
Close
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4AD
3SB1901-4EP
3SB1901-4AL
3SB1901-4EQ
Schnell
Fast
Langsam
Slow
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4AM
3SB1901-4ER
3SB1901-4AN
3SB1901-4ES
Betrieb
Running
Strung
Fault
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4AP
3SB1901-4EV
3SB1901-4AQ
3SB1901-4EW
Einrichten
Reset
B
B
3SB1901-4AR
3SB1901-4EM
-3SB3940-4EM
Test
Start
Halt
Stop
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-4EN
3SB1901-4EK
3SB1901-4AK
3SB1901-4EL
B
B
B
-3SB3940-4EK
3SB3940-4AK
3SB3940-4EL
3SB1901-4MB
3SB3940-4MB
With inscription
-----
3SB3940-4AD
-3SB3940-4AL
-3SB3940-4AM
-3SB3940-4AN
---3SB3940-4AQ
--
O (Off)
5008 IEC
I (On)
5007 IEC
3SB1901-4MC
3SB3940-4MC
II (On)
--
3SB1901-4MD
3SB3940-4MD
III (ON)
--
3SB1901-4ME
Electric motor
0011 ISO
3SB1901-4PA
5022 IEC
3SB1901-4NA
3SB3940-4NA
Increase, plus
5005 IEC
3SB1901-4NG
3SB3940-4NG
Decrease, minus
5006 IEC
3SB1901-4NH
3SB3940-4NH
13
With graphic symbol
---
With customized inscription

For inscriptions or symbols see "Options"
3SB1901-4AZ
3SB3940-4AZ
Text line(s) or symbol with No.
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y,

K3Y or K5Y
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y,

K3Y or K5Y
K9Y
K9Y

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/73
Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Insert labels
Options
Ordering notes
the ordering data.

Text line(s) in upper/lower case, upper case always for
beginning of line (e.g. "Lift out"): K0Y
K3Y
By default, a letter height of 4 mm (for a single line of text) or

3 mm (for 2 or 3 lines of text) is used for text inscriptions.
The typeface used is Arial. Other letter heights and typefaces
are possible, but must be specified when ordering.
For round insert labels, the maximum possible number of characters per line is:
10 characters for one line of text
8 characters for 2 lines of text
6 characters for 3 lines of text, but 10 characters in the middle
line
On square insert labels, 10 characters are possible per line.
Examples for customized inscription

you can also specify the end-of-line division (see ordering example 1).
Lift
Off

Two-line inscription in upper/lower case lettering (K0Y)
LIFT
For special symbols (order code K9Y), a CAD drawing in BMP,

GIF, JEPG, PDF, PNG or TIFF format must be submitted. For special inscriptions (order code K9Y): document in DOC or XLS format.
Ordering example 1
Single-line inscription in upper case lettering (K1Y)
A label with 2 lines of text is required:

3SB19014AZ
K1Y
Z1 = LIFT
Z2 = LOWER
lift
off
down
Ordering example 2
Three-line inscription in lower case letters (K2Y)
A label inscribed with symbol No. 5011 according to IEC 60417

is required:
3SB19014AZ
K3Y
Z = 5011 IEC
Ordering example 3
13
Symbol number 5011 according to IEC 60147 (K3Y)

required:
3SB19014AZ
K3Y
Z = 1118 ISO
Any symbol according to order form supplement (K9Y)
13/74
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Name plates
Overview
The name plates consist of a black plastic label holder and an
inscription label (black with white print or silver-colored with
black print) for sticking or snapping in place. They are not suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons.
Inscriptions
The inscription is in upper/lower case, all words with upper case
initial letters. The typeface is Arial. Graphic symbols, including
those not listed in the tables, are according to ISO 7000 or
IEC 60417 (see page 13/79).
Self-adhesive labels
There are 2 sizes available for the round and square ranges:
Label holders 30 mm 45 mm 7 mm
with inscription label 12.5 mm 27 mm.
Label holders 30 mm 60 mm 7 mm
with inscription label 27 mm 27 mm.
Snap-on labels
The following version is available for the round range:
Label holders 29.8 mm 51 mm 3 mm
with inscription label 17.5 mm 28 mm
(inscription area: 17.5 mm 27 mm)

PU (UNIT) = 100
PS*
= 10 units
PG
= 41J
Inscriptions
DT Black
Article No.
DT Silver-colored
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Inscription labels, self-adhesive,

12.5 mm 27 mm
Blank
3SB3902-1AA
3SB1901-2AA
Ein
On
Aus
Off
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1AB
3SB3902-1EB
3SB3902-1AC
3SB3902-1EC
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AB
3SB1901-2EB
3SB1901-2AC
3SB1901-2EC
Auf
Up
Ab
Down
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1AD
3SB3902-1ED
3SB3902-1AE
3SB3902-1EE
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AD
3SB1901-2ED
3SB1901-2AE
3SB1901-2EE
Vor
Forward
Zurck
Reverse
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1AF
3SB3902-1EF
3SB3902-1AG
3SB3902-1EG
3SB1901-2AF
-3SB1901-2AG
--
Rechts
Right
Links
Left
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1AH
3SB3902-1EH
3SB3902-1AJ
3SB3902-1EJ
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AH
3SB1901-2EH
3SB1901-2AJ
3SB1901-2EJ
Auf
Open
Zu
Close
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1AD
3SB3902-1EP
3SB3902-1AL
3SB3902-1EQ
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AD
3SB1901-2EP
3SB1901-2AL
3SB1901-2EQ
-----
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AM
3SB1901-2ER
3SB1901-2AN
3SB1901-2ES
Schnell
Fast
Langsam
Slow
Halt
Stop
Start
Test
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1AK
3SB3902-1EK
3SB3902-1EL
3SB3902-1EN
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AK
3SB1901-2EK
3SB1901-2EL
3SB1901-2EN
Betrieb
Running
Strung
Fault
3SB3902-1AP
-3SB3902-1AQ
3SB3902-1EW
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2AP
3SB1901-2EV
3SB1901-2AQ
3SB1901-2EW
---
B
B
3SB1901-2AR
3SB1901-2EM
3SB3902-1BC
3SB3902-1BA
3SB3902-1EU
---
B
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-2BC
3SB1901-2BA
3SB1901-2EU
3SB1901-2BE
3SB1901-2ET
B
B
Einrichten
Reset
Stop Start
Hand Auto
Man Auto
Hand O Auto
Man O Auto
B
B
B
13
With inscription
For label holders see page 13/78.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/75
Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Name plates
PS*
PG
= 41J
Inscriptions
DT Black
Article No.
DT Silver-colored
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU

12.5 mm 27 mm
With graphic symbol
O
I
II
III
B
B
3SB3902-1MB
3SB3902-1MC
---
B
B
C
B
3SB1901-2MB
3SB1901-2MC
3SB1901-2MD
3SB1901-2ME
OI
I O II
1 O 2
1 2
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3902-1MF
3SB3902-1MG
-3SB3902-1ML
3SB1901-2MF
3SB1901-2MG
3SB1901-2MK
--
B
B
3SB3902-1NJ
3SB3902-1NA
B
B
3SB1901-2NA
3SB1901-2NJ

3SB3902-1XZ
3SB1901-2XZ
Text line(s)
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
Symbol with No.
K3Y
K3Y
K9Y
K9Y
Inscriptions
DT Black
Article No.
DT Silver-colored
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU

27 mm x 27 mm
Blank
3SB3903-1AA
Ein
On
Aus
Off
B
B
B
B
3SB3903-1AB
3SB3903-1EB
3SB3903-1AC
3SB3903-1EC
-----
Auf
Ab
B
B
3SB3903-1AD
3SB3903-1AE
---
Vor
Zurck
Rechts
Links
B
B
B
B
3SB3903-1AF
3SB3903-1AG
3SB3903-1AH
3SB3903-1AJ
-----
Auf
Zu
B
B
3SB3903-1AD
3SB3903-1AL
---
Halt
Start
B
B
3SB3903-1AK
3SB3903-1EL
---
Betrieb
Strung
B
B
3SB3903-1AP
3SB3903-1AQ
---
Stop Start
Hand Auto
B
B
3SB3903-1BC
3SB3903-1BA
---
3SB3903-1MB
--
3SB3903-1MC
--
OI
3SB3903-1MF
--
3SB3903-1NA
--
3SB1906-2AA
13
With inscription
With graphic symbol

3SB3903-1XZ
3SB1906-2XZ
Text line(s)
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
Symbol with No.
K3Y
K3Y
K9Y
K9Y
13/76
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Name plates
PS*
PG
= 41J
Inscriptions
DT Black
Article No.
DT Silver-colored
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Inscription labels, for snapping on,

17.5 mm x 28 mm
Blank
3SB3905-1AA
3SB1904-2AA
Ein
On
Aus
Off
B
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AB
3SB3905-1EB
3SB3905-1AC
3SB3905-1EC
B
B
B
B
3SB1904-2AB
3SB1904-2EB
3SB1904-2AC
3SB1904-2EC
Auf
Up
Ab
Down
B
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AD
3SB3905-1ED
3SB3905-1AE
3SB3905-1EE
3SB1904-2AD
-3SB1904-2AE
--
Vor
Forward
Zurck
Reverse
B
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AF
3SB3905-1EF
3SB3905-1AG
3SB3905-1EG
B
B
B
3SB1904-2AF
-3SB1904-2AG
3SB1904-2EG
Rechts
Right
Links
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AH
3SB3905-1EH
3SB3905-1AJ
B
B
B
3SB1904-2AH
3SB1904-2EH
3SB1904-2AJ
Auf
Open
Zu
Close
B
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AD
3SB3905-1EP
3SB3905-1AL
3SB3905-1EQ
3SB1904-2AD
-3SB1904-2AL
--
Halt
Stop
Start
Test
B
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AK
3SB3905-1EK
3SB3905-1EL
3SB3905-1EN
B
B
B
B
3SB1904-2AK
3SB1904-2EK
3SB1904-2EL
3SB1904-2EN
Betrieb
Running
Strung
Fault
B
B
B
B
3SB3905-1AP
3SB3905-1EV
3SB3905-1AQ
3SB3905-1EW
B
B
B
B
3SB1904-2AP
3SB1904-2EV
3SB1904-2AQ
3SB1904-2EW
---
B
B
3SB1904-2AR
3SB1904-2EM
B
B
B
3SB3905-1BC
3SB3905-1BA
3SB3905-1EU
--
B
B
C
B
3SB1904-2BC
3SB1904-2BA
3SB1904-2EU
3SB1904-2ET
O
I
B
B
3SB3905-1MB
3SB3905-1MC
B
B
3SB1904-2MB
3SB1904-2MC
OI
I O II
1 O 2
3SB3905-1MF
---
B
B
B
3SB1904-2MF
3SB1904-2MG
3SB1904-2MK
B
B
3SB3905-1NA
3SB3905-1NJ
B
B
3SB1904-2NA
3SB1904-2NJ
With inscription
Einrichten
Reset
Stop Start
Hand Auto
Man Auto
Man O Auto
With graphic symbol

3SB3905-1XZ
3SB1904-2XZ
Text line(s)
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
Symbol with No.
K3Y
K3Y
K9Y
K9Y
13

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/77
Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Name plates
Version
DT Black
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
100 10 units
41J
Price
per PU
Label holders for inscription labels 12.5 mm 27 mm

For round range, flat
3SB3922-0AV
For potentiometer drives 3SB1000-7CH071)
3SB3922-0AS
1 unit
41J
For square range, flat
3SB3942-0AX
100
5 units
41J
For round range, flat
3SB3923-0AV
100 10 units
41J
For round range, raised
3SB3923-0AX
1 10 units
41J
For potentiometer drives, flat
3SB3923-0AS
1 unit
41J
For square range, flat
3SB3943-0AX
100
1 unit
41J
3SB3925-0AV
100 10 units
41J
3SB3922-0AV
Label holders for inscription labels 27 mm x 27 mm
3SB3923-0AV
Label holders for inscription labels 17.5 mm x 28 mm

For round design
3SB3925-0AV
This label holder can also be used for pushbuttons with dust covers if the
front plate thickness of 3 mm is not exceeded.
13
1)
13/78
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Inscriptions
Name plates
Options
Ordering notes
the ordering data.

Text line(s) in upper/lower case, upper case always for
beginning of line (e.g. "Lift out"): K0Y
K3Y
The following letter heights are used as standard for text inscriptions:
Label size 12.5 mm 27 mm: maximum 3 lines with letter
height 4 mm (1-line), 3.5 mm (2-line) or 2.5 mm (3-line)
Label size 27 mm 27 mm: maximum 5 lines with letter height
4 mm (1- to 5-line)
Label size 17.5 mm 28 mm: maximum 3 lines with letter
height 4 mm (1- and 2-line) or 3 mm (3-line)
Up to 11 characters per line are possible. The typeface used is
Arial. Other letter heights and typefaces are possible, but must
be specified when ordering.

For special symbols (order code K9Y), a CAD drawing in BMP,

GIF, JEPG, PDF, PNG or TIFF format must be submitted. For special inscriptions (order code K9Y): document in DOC or XLS format.
Ordering example 1

3SB39021XZ
K1Y
Z1 = LIFT
Z2 = LOWER
Ordering example 2
is required:
Ordering example 3
required:
3SB39021XZ
K3Y
Z = 1118 ISO
13
3SB39021XZ
K3Y
Z = 5011 IEC
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/79
Siemens AG 2013

Buttons and lenses

Version
Color
DT Article No.
Buttons, flat
For round illuminated pushbuttons and
illuminated switches, plastic version
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3930-0CA6
Buttons, flat
For round pushbuttons and switches,
metal version
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
3SB3930-0EA3
Buttons, raised
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SB3930-0CA2
3SB3930-0CA3
3SB3930-0CA4
3SB3930-0CA5
3SB3930-0CA6
3SB3930-0CA7
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3930-0EA1
3SB3930-0EA2
3SB3930-0EA3
3SB3930-0EA4
3SB3930-0EA5
3SB3930-0EA6
3SB3930-0EA7
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red
Green
Clear
B
B
B
3SB3930-0DA2
3SB3930-0DA4
3SB3930-0DA7
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41J
41J
41J
Buttons, raised
For round pushbuttons and switches,
metal version
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3930-0FA1
3SB3930-0FA2
3SB3930-0FA3
3SB3930-0FA4
3SB3930-0FA5
3SB3930-0FA6
3SB3930-0FA7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons, flat
illuminated switches, metal version
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3930-0GA0
3SB3930-0GA2
3SB3930-0GA3
3SB3930-0GA4
3SB3930-0GA5
3SB3930-0GA6
3SB3930-0GA7
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons, flat, solvent-resistant2),

switches, metal version
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3930-0GA20-0PA0
3SB3930-0GA30-0PA0
3SB3930-0GA40-0PA0
3SB3930-0GA50-0PA0
3SB3930-0GA60-0PA0
3SB3930-0GA70-0PA0
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons, raised
illuminated switches, metal version
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3930-0HA0
3SB3930-0HA2
3SB3930-0HA3
3SB3930-0HA4
3SB3930-0HA5
3SB3930-0HA6
3SB3930-0HA7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Lenses, smooth
For round indicator lights,
plastic and metal version
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3930-6BA0
3SB3930-6BA2
3SB3930-6BA3
3SB3930-6BA4
3SB3930-6BA5
3SB3930-6BA6
3SB3930-6BA7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Lenses with concentric rings

For round indicator lights,
plastic and metal version
Amber
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3930-6CA0
3SB3930-6CA2
3SB3930-6CA3
3SB3930-6CA4
3SB3930-6CA5
3SB3930-6CA6
3SB3930-6CA7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons, flat
For square illuminated pushbuttons and
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3950-0CA2
3SB3950-0CA3
3SB3950-0CA4
3SB3950-0CA5
3SB3950-0CA6
3SB3950-0CA7
100
100
100
100
100
100
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Lenses, smooth
For square indicator lights, plastic version
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Clear
B
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3950-6AA2
3SB3950-6AA3
3SB3950-6AA4
3SB3950-6AA5
3SB3950-6AA6
3SB3950-6AA7
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Buttons and lenses for round version1)
3SB3930-0DA4
3SB3930-0FA4
3SB3930-0GA3
3SB3930-0HA4
13
3SB3930-6BA3
3SB3930-6CA3
Buttons and lenses for square version
3SB3950-0CA6
3SB3950-6AA2
1)
In scope of supply of pushbuttons or indicator lights.
2)
13/80
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Lamps, acoustic signal transformers and keys

Version
Rated voltage Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Lamps, BA 9s bases1)
3SB1902-0AY
Incandescent lamps 1.2 W

Length up to 28 mm,
max. bulb diameter 10 mm
24 AC/DC
Clear
3SB1902-0AY
1 10 units
41J
Incandescent lamps 2 W
Length up to 28 mm,
max. bulb diameter 10 mm
6 AC/DC
12 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
30 AC/DC
48 AC/DC
60 AC/DC
Clear
A
A
A
B
B
A
3SX1342
3SX1343
3SX1344
3SB1902-2AF
3SB1902-1AP
3SR9424
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Incandescent lamps 2.6 W

Length 28 mm,
bulb diameter 10 mm
110 ... 130

AC/DC2)
Clear
3SX1731
1 10 units
41J
Multi-incandescent lamps 1.2 W

Endurance 25 000 h,
high resistance to vibration
24 AC/DC
3SB1902-2BU
1 10 units
41J

Length up to 28 mm,
max. bulb diameter 10 mm,
max. operational current 15 mA
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
}
B
}
B
B
3SB3901-1CA
3SB3901-1BA
3SB3901-1DA
3SB3901-1PA
3SB3901-1QA
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
48 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3901-1CC
3SB3901-1BC
3SB3901-1DC
3SB3901-1PC
3SB3901-1QC
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
130 AC,
70 ... 90 DC,
if X1 at "+"3)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3901-1CD
3SB3901-1BD
3SB3901-1DD
3SB3901-1PD
3SB3901-1QD
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC,
110 ... 160
DC,
if X1 at "+"3)
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3901-1CF
3SB3901-1BF
3SB3901-1DF
3SB3901-1PF
3SB3901-1QF
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3901-1CG
3SB3901-1BG
3SB3901-1DG
3SB3901-1PG
3SB3901-1QG
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
LED lamps
Length up to 28 mm,
max. bulb diameter 10 mm,
max. operational current 15 mA
22 ... 32 DC
Red
Yellow
Green
D
D
D
3SB1902-4AJ
3SB1902-4BJ
3SB1902-4CJ
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41J
41J
41J
LED lamps, flashing (1.4 Hz)

Length up to 28 mm,
bulb diameter 10 mm,
operational current 24 ... 29 mA
24 DC
Red
Yellow
Green
B
C
C
3SB1902-4LC
3SB1902-4MC
3SB1902-4NC
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41J
41J
41J
Clear
Clear
Green
A
A
C
3SX1703
3SX1701
3SX1702
1 10 units
1 10 units
1 10 units
41J
41J
41J
3SB1902-2AD
41J
3SB3901-1PA
3SB1902-4MC
110 AC
Glow lamps4)
Length 28 mm, bulb diameter 10 mm, 220 AC
operational current approx. 1.8 mA
220 AC
Lamp extractors
For lamps with BA 9s base
1 unit
3SB1902-2AD
1)
Essential accessories when using lampholders with BA 9s base and

delivery without lamp.
2)
Also for 230 V when used with a 3SB3400-1C voltage reducer.
3)
Not suitable for 3SB3400-1G lampholder with separate lamp test function.
Can be used with 3SB3400-1L.
4)
Due to the inherent orange color of glow lamps and their lower luminance
level compared to incandescent lamps, it is recommended that they
should only be used with clear or red screw lenses and in areas where
ambient light levels are not very high.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/81
13
3SX1703
Siemens AG 2013

Lamps, acoustic signal transformers and keys
Version
Rated voltage Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Lamps, Wedge bases1)

Incandescent lamps
Wedge base W2 4.6d, 1.0 W
6 AC/DC
12 AC/DC
24 AC/DC
30 AC/DC
48 AC/DC
60 AC/DC
Clear
C
B
B
A
B
B
3SB2908-1AA
3SB2908-1AB
3SB2908-1AC
3SB2908-1AD
3SB2908-1AE
3SB2908-1AF
100
100
100
100
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

Wedge base W2 4.6d,
operational current 10 mA
24 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Blue
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3901-1SB
3SB3901-1RB
3SB3901-1TB
3SB3901-1UB
3SB2908-1BD
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
28 AC/DC
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Blue
B
B
B
B
C
3SB3901-1SE
3SB3901-1RE
3SB3901-1TE
3SB3901-1UE
3SB3901-1VE
1
1
1
1
1
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
10 units
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Lamp extractors
For lamps with bases W2 4.6d
3SB2908-2AB
1 unit
41J
Lamp adapters
For fitting a lamp
with a wedge base socket
into a BA 9s lampholder
3SB1902-1AU
1 unit
41J
3SB1902-2BN
1 unit
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SB2908-1AE
3SB3901-1SB
3SB3901-1VE
3SB2908-2AB
3SB1902-1AU
Acoustic signal transformers, BA 9s base

Acoustic signal transformers
For acoustic signaling devices2)
operational current 25 mA, 0.6 W,
sound pressure 80 dB/10 cm
24 ... 28 DC
3SB1902-2BN
1)
Can be used with lamp adapters in lampholders with BA 9s base.
2)
For increased protection, the IP65 acoustic signaling device

(complete unit) can be used.
Version Lock
Color
DT Article No.
SB 30
--
3SB3910-4A
1 unit
41J
S1
--
3SY1066
1 unit
41J
CES
LSG 1
SSG 10
SSP 9
----
B
B
A
3SB1910-2F
3SY1054
3SY1052
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
O.M.R.
73038
73037
73034
73033
Light blue
Red
Black
Yellow
C
B
B
D
3SB1910-2L
3SB1910-2M
3SB1910-2N
3SB1910-2P
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
Manufacturer
Lock No.
RONIS
BKS
Price
per PU
Keys for actuators1)
3SY1054
13
1)
Included in scope of supply of the key-operated switches and the

EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons with lock.
Also available with special lock. Supplement Article No. with "-Z" and
quote the required lock in plain text. Additional price on request.
This does not include locks for VW and main and general locking systems.
13/82
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Protective covers

Version
Use
Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Protective caps1), degree of protection IP67

Material: elastolan
Protective caps
For round version
Flat button (plastic)
Clear
3SB3921-0AJ
1 unit
41J
Flat button (metal),

raised button (plastic)
Clear
3SB3921-0AM
1 unit
41J
PVC
Raised button (metal)
Clear
3SB1902-2AN
1 unit
41J
Protective caps
For square version
Clear
3SB3941-0AJ
1 unit
41J
Clear
3SB3921-0AH
1 unit
41J

raised button (plastic)
Clear
3SB1902-0AK
1 unit
41J
Raised button (metal)
Clear
3SB1902-0AN
1 unit
41J
Protective caps
For round version
Selector switch
(plastic and metal,
normal handle)
Clear
3SB3921-0BA
1 unit
41J
Protective caps
For round version
Mushroom push-pull button,

40 mm (plastic and metal)
Clear
3SB1902-2BH
1 unit
41J
pushbutton, 40 mm
(plastic and metal)
Clear
3SB3921-0BU
1 unit
41J
Clear
3SB3941-0AH
1 unit
41J
3SB3921-0AJ
3SB3941-0AJ
Material: silicone
Protective caps
For round version
3SB3921-0AH
3SB1902-0AK
3SB1902-0AN
3SB3921-0BA
13
3SB1902-2BH
3SB3921-0BU
Protective caps
For square version
3SB3941-0AH
1)
No protective caps can be used with 3SB38 plastic enclosures.

For the 3SB38 metal enclosures, protective caps can only be used
together with single-pole contact blocks for front plate mounting.
In addition, the base plate must be removed.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/83
Siemens AG 2013

Protective covers
Version
Use
Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Other protective caps1)

Sealable caps
For round version
Black
3SB1902-0AL
1 unit
41J

raised button (plastic)2)
Clear
3SB1902-2AR
1 unit
41J
Dust covers
For use in dusty
environments
BKS, CES, O.M.R. key-operated

switch
Clear
3SB3921-0BT
1 unit
41J
3SB3921-0AK
1 unit
41J
3SB3921-0AP
1 unit
41J
Yellow
3SB3921-0AX
1 unit
41J
Yellow
3SB3921-0CG
1 unit
41J
Black
3SB3921-0AS
1 unit
41J
3SB1902-0AL
3SB1902-2AR
3SB3921-0BT
Protective collars for front plates

Yellow
Protective collars for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom
EMERGENCY-STOP3) pushbutton without key-operated Gray
For round version
switch
pushbutton with key-operated
switch
3SB3921-0AX
Protective collars for 3SB3...-1AA20

EMERGENCY-STOP EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
for 5 padlocks3)
For round version
3SB3921-0CG
Sun collars
For round version
3SB3921-0AS
Blanking plugs for spare command points for front plates

Blanking plugs
For round version
Plastic version
Black
3SB3921-0AA
1 10 units
41J
Blanking plugs
For square version
Plastic version
Black
3SB3941-0AA
1 unit
41J
Blanking plugs
(plastic)
for round version
Metal version
Aluminized
3SB1902-0AQ
1 10 units
41J
13
3SB3921-0AA
3SB3941-0AA
3SB1902-0AQ
1)
Unsuitable for mounting in 3SB38 enclosures.

Not to be used with label holder.
2)
Maximum control panel thickness 2 mm.
3)
The protective collar must only be used to protect against inadvertent actuating and must be fitted to allow unimpeded actuation of the EMERGENCYSTOP mushroom pushbutton.
13/84
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013


Version
Use
Inscriptions
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Yellow name plates for EMERGENCY-STOP

For use on front plates
Name plates, round
Self-adhesive,
external diameter
60 mm,
internal diameter
23 mm
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
(round version)
Blank
3SB3921-0DY
1 unit
41J
Customized
inscription1)
3SB3921-0DZ K1Y
1 unit
41J
Name plates, round

Self-adhesive,
external diameter
80 mm,
internal diameter
23 mm
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
(round version)
Blank
3SB3921-0AB
1 unit
41J
4 languages,
de2), en, it, es
3SB3921-0BW
1 unit
41J
NOT-HALT
3SB3921-0AC
1 unit
41J
NOT-AUS
3SB3921-0CK
1 unit
41J
EMERGENCY
STOP
3SB3921-0AD
1 unit
41J
ARRET
DURGENCE
3SB3921-0AG
1 unit
41J
EMERGENZA
3SB3921-0AN
1 unit
41J
Customized
inscription1)
3SB3921-0AZ K1Y
1 unit
41J
Blank
3SB3941-0AB
1 unit
41J
NOT-HALT
3SB3941-0AC
1 unit
41J
NOT-AUS
3SB3941-0BX
1 unit
41J
EMERGENCY
STOP
3SB3941-0AD
1 unit
41J
3SB3921-0AC
3SB3921-0BW
3SB3921-0DA
Name plates, round EMERGENCY-STOP

Self-adhesive,
external diameter
(square version)
80 mm,
cutout 26 mm 26 mm
Name plates, round
1 mm thick,
external diameter
75 mm,
internal diameter
22.5 mm
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
(round version)
Blank
3SB1902-2BA
1 unit
41J
NOT-HALT
3SB1902-2BB
1 unit
41J
NOT-AUS
3SB3921-0CH
1 unit
41J
Name plates,
illuminated, round
self-adhesive,
external diameter
60 mm,
internal diameter
23 mm3)
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbutton
(round version)
Blank
3SB3921-0DA
1 unit
41J
NOT-HALT
3SB3921-0DK
1 unit
41J
NOT-AUS
3SB3921-0DC
1 unit
41J
EMERGENCY
STOP
3SB3921-0DD
1 unit
41J
As signaling device for

EMERGENCY-STOP,
with plug-in terminal
for 24 V AC/DC4)
Inscription labels
Inscription labels
For supporting dust
resistance
Contact blocks
3SB3901-0CH
100 10 units
41J
Contact blocks
3TX4210-0H
100
41B
3SB3901-0CH
100
units
The customized inscription, e.g. in other languages than specified in the

table, occurs in capital letters according to the order code "K1Y"
(compare "Options" page 13/79).
2)
With German inscription "NOT-HALT"
3)
For front plate thickness of max. 4 mm.
4)
The illuminated label can also be operated through the

AS-Interface F adapter (see page 13/69).

13
3TX4210-0H
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/85
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Use
DT Article No.
Pushbuttons,
push-pull buttons,
with front plate mounting
Holders with pressure plate

Selector switches,
For actuating the central contact key-operated switches and
2)
block of 3 contact blocks
twin pushbuttons with front
plate mounting
Selector switches and keyPressure plates

For actuating the central contact operated switches for use on
PCBs or with base mounting
block of 3 contact blocks2)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SB3901-0AB
100 20 units
41J
3SB3901-0AC
100 10 units
41J
3SB3901-0AW
100 10 units
41J
3SB3931-0AA
1 10 units
41J
Holders
For plastic version, square
3SB3951-0AA
1 unit
41J
Holders
For metal version, round
3SB3931-0AC
1 10 units
41J
Grounding screws
For grounding metal actuators
for fitting in front plates and
enclosures made of
non-conducting materials, e.g.
3SB38 plastic enclosures
3SB3921-0BD
100 50 units
41J
Holders and pressure plates

Holders
For snapping on 3 blocks1)
3SB3901-0AB
3SB3901-0AC
3SB3901-0AW
Holders for commanding and signaling elements3)

Holders
For plastic version, round
As-supplied state for front

plate thickness 1 ... 4 mm
3SB3931-0AA
3SB3951-0AA
3SB3931-0AC
3SB3921-0BD
The holder for illuminated commanding devices is included in the scope of

supply.
2)
The pressure plates can be removed one by one to meet individual

requirements.
3)
The matching holder for actuators and indicators is included in the scope
of supply (exception: Order with order code "B01").
13
1)
13/86
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Use
Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Tools
Blanking tools
26 mm 26 mm,
for square version
3SB3941-0AF
1 unit
41J
Hole drilling templates

For 30 mm x 30 mm grid,
horizontal,
for round and square versions
3SB1902-2BG
1 unit
41J
Mounting tools (plastic)

For buttons and lenses, metal version
3SB3921-0BC
1 unit
41J
Mounting tools
For potentiometer drives and for
pushbuttons with extended stroke
3SX1707
1 unit
41J
Dismantling tools
Blocks with
For contact blocks and lampholders screw terminals
3SB3901-0CB
1 unit
41J
Dismantling tools
With springFor contact blocks and lampholders type terminals
3SB3901-0CG
1 unit
41J
3SB3921-0AU
1 unit
41J
1 unit
41J
100 10 units
41J
3SB3941-0AF
3SB1902-2BG
3SB3921-0BC
3SX1707
3SB3901-0CB
Various accessories
Black
Single frames
For square design of the round
version
3SB3921-0AU
Adapter parts
Adapters for 30.5 mm mounting hole,
comprising a metal disk with an
adhesive layer on one side,
As thrust ring
for a thin
molded-plastic
front plate
3SB3921-0AE
Printed circuit board holders

For mounting the command devices
on the printed circuit board (screw is
included in the scope of supply)
Contact blocks
and lampholders for
solder
connection
3SB3901-0AA
Extension plungers
For compensation of the distance
between a pushbutton and the
unlatching button of an overload
relay
Pushbuttons
with extended
stroke
3SX1335
16
21
13
3SB3921-0AE
3SB3901-0AA
1
1 unit
41J
3SX1335

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/87
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
General data
Overview
Enclosures with standard fittings
I
H
E
C2
A
B
NSD0_00049b
C1
Enclosures with standard and customized equipment
Enclosed pushbuttons and indicator lights are used as hand operated control devices for separately allocated control units and
cabinets.
Enclosures with handle are available for suspension

(e.g. for crane control units).
A
B
C1
C2
D
E
F
G
H
I
The enclosed pushbuttons and indicator lights are available with

conventional controls as well as for connection to the AS-Interface bus system.
The following versions are available:
with 1 to 3 command points
Enclosures with customized equipment
with 1 to 6 command points
Empty enclosures (individual parts must be ordered separately)
Top part of enclosure

Inscription labels
Pushbutton
Indicator light
Holder
Contact designations
Contact blocks, lampholders for floor mounting
Bottom part of enclosure
Identification letters for the command points
Identification number
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1
Customized enclosures
On request enclosures with more than 6 command points can
also be supplied with AS-Interface connection.
Use the configurator for selection.
For AS-Interface enclosures see page 13/98.
Application
The devices are climate-proof (KTW 24) according to
EN ISO 6270-2 and suitable for stationary use
(weather-protected) and for use in marine applications.
13
Type
3SB380.-0, 3SB380.-1
3SB380.-2, 3SB380.-3
Enclosure material
Plastic
Metal
Plastic, round
Metal, round
IP65
Climatic withstand capability according to EN ISO 6270-2
KTW 24
Enclosures

for half-sine shock type, 11 ms shock duration
Devices without incandescent lamp
50 g
Devices with incandescent lamp
30 g

Acceleration at frequency 20 ... 200 Hz
13/88
Siemens IC 10 2014
5g
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Overview
Enclosures with standard fittings are available with:
1 to 3 command points
Operational voltage up to 400 V
Vertical mounting type
Plastic enclosures are equipped with plastic actuators and indicators, metal enclosures are equipped with metal actuators
and indicators
Contact blocks and lampholders for base mounting
(are snapped into the enclosure base); screw terminals (box
terminals) as standard; some versions also with spring-type
terminals (Article No. ends with -0CC0)
Color of enclosure cover:

Gray, RAL 7035
Yellow, RAL 1004 for EMERGENCY-STOP
Color of enclosure base:
Black, RAL 9005

Equipment
Contact block
function
Number of DT Screw terminals

command
points
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Plastic enclosures with standard fittings

Cable entry top and bottom each 1 x M20
A = Pushbutton green, label "I"
1 NO
3SB3801-0DA3
1 unit
41J
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
1 NC
3SB3801-0DB3
1 unit
41J
A = Pushbutton white, label "I"
1 NO
3SB3801-0DD3
1 unit
41J
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
1 NC
3SB3801-0DE3
1 unit
41J
With yellow top part,

without protective collar
1 NC q
3SB3801-0DG3
1 unit
41J
2 NC q
3SB3801-0EG3
1 unit
41J

with protective collar1)
1 NC q
3SB3801-0DF3
1 unit
41J
2 NC q
3SB3801-0EF3
1 unit
41J
B = Pushbutton green, label "I"

1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3802-0DA3
1 unit
41J
B = Pushbutton white, label "I"

1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3802-0DB3
1 unit
41J
C = Indicator light clear,

label without inscription,
B = Pushbutton green, label "I",
BA 9s2),
3SB3803-0DA3
1 unit
41J
1 NO,
1 NC
C = Pushbutton black, label "II"

B = Pushbutton black, label "I",
1 NO,
1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3803-0DB3
1 unit
41J

B = Pushbutton white, label "I",
BA 9s2),
3SB3803-0DC3
1 unit
41J
3SB3801-0DA3
A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom
pushbuttons,
red, 40 mm,
ISO 13850 and rotate-to-unlatch
mechanism
3SB3801-0.F3
1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3803-0DA3
1)
The protective collar must only be used to protect against inadvertent actuating and must be fitted to allow unimpeded access to the EMERGENCYSTOP mushroom pushbutton.
2)
Only lampholder; order lamp separately.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/89
13
3SB3802-0DA3
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Equipment
Contact
block
function
Number of DT Screw terminals

command
points
Spring-type
terminals2)
PU PS*
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PG
Configurator
Article No.
Price
per PU
Metal enclosures with standard fittings

Cable entry top and bottom each 1 x M20
A = Pushbutton green, label "I"
1 NO
3SB3801-2DA3
1 unit
41J
1 NC
3SB3801-2DB3
1 unit
41J
A = Pushbutton white, label "I"
1 NO
3SB3801-2DD3
1 unit
41J
1 NC
3SB3801-2DE3
1 unit
41J
1 NC q
3SB3801-2DG3
1 unit
41J
2 NC q
3SB3801-2EG3
1 unit
41J
2 NC q 2) 1
3SB3801-2EG10-0CC0
1 unit
41J
1 NC q
3SB3801-2DF3
1 unit
41J
2 NC q
3SB3801-2EF3
1 unit
41J
2 NC q
3SB3801-2EA30
1 unit
41J
2 NC q 2)
3SB3801-2EA30-0CC0
1 unit
41J
With gray top part,

with protective collar for
5 padlocks1)
2 NC2)
3SB3801-2EB30-0CC0
1 unit
41J
B = Pushbutton green, label "I"

1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3802-2DA3
1 unit
41J
B = Pushbutton white, label "I"

1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3802-2DB3
1 unit
41J

B = Pushbutton green, label "I",
BA 9s3),
3SB3803-2DA3
1 unit
41J
1 NO,
1 NC
C = Pushbutton black, label "II"

B = Pushbutton black, label "I",
1 NO,
1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3803-2DB3
1 unit
41J

B = Pushbutton white, label "I",
BA 9s3),
3SB3803-2DC3
1 unit
41J
3SB3801-2DB3
pushbuttons,
red, 40 mm,
mechanism
3SB3801-2.F3

- With M12 plug
pushbuttons,
red, 60 mm,
mechanism
3SB3801-2EB30-0CC0

with protective collar for
5 padlocks1)
A = mushroom pushbutton,
60 mm, black,
with positive latching and
rotate-to-unlatch mechanism
3SB3802-2DA3
13
3SB3803-2DA3
1 NO,
1 NC
3SB3803-2DB3
3)
Only lampholder; order lamp separately.
1)
2)
-0CC0: Contact blocks with spring-type terminals.
13/90
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Empty enclosures

Version
Number of DT Configurator
command
points
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Empty enclosures, plastic

Cable entry top and bottom
each 1 x M20 for 1 to 3 command points,
each 1 x M25 for 4 and 6 command points
For contact blocks, lampholders and accessories
with snap-on base mounting,
also single-pole front plate blocks can be used
(switching state is maintained upon opening),
with gray top part
1
2
3
4
6
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3801-0AA3
3SB3802-0AA3
3SB3803-0AA3
3SB3804-0AA3
3SB3806-0AA3
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

3SB3801-0AB3
1 unit
41J

3SB3801-0AD3
1 unit
41J
1
2
3
4
6
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3801-2AA3
3SB3802-2AA3
3SB3803-2AA3
3SB3804-2AA3
3SB3806-2AA3
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J

3SB3801-2AB3
1 unit
41J

3SB3801-2AD3
1 unit
41J
With gray top part,

3SB3801-2AE3
1 unit
41J

with protective collar for 3 padlocks 1),
for mushroom 40 mm,
can be locked (BKS, CES, O.M.R.)
3SB3801-2EC3
1 unit
41J
3SB3802-0AA3
For EMERGENCY-STOP, for contact blocks and
accessories with snap-on base mounting,
(switching state is maintained upon opening)
3SB3801-0AB3
Empty enclosures, metal

Cable entry top and bottom
each 1 x M20 for 1 to 3 command points,
each 1 x M25 for 4 and 6 command points
For contact blocks, lampholders and accessories
with snap-on base mounting,
(switching state is maintained upon opening),
with gray top part
3SB3804-2AA3
For EMERGENCY-STOP, for contact blocks, lampholders and accessories with snap-on base mounting, also single-pole front plate blocks can be used
(switching state is maintained upon opening)
3SB3801-2AB3
13
3SB3801-2AD3
3SB3801-2EC3
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/91
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Customized enclosures
Overview
Customized enclosures are available with:
Operational voltage up to 400 V
One command point comprises:
1 actuator or indicator
Up to 3 contact blocks or
up to 2 contact blocks + 1 lampholder
1 inscription label
For plastic enclosures the command points are equipped as
standard with plastic actuators and indicators, for metal enclosures they are equipped with metal actuators and indicators.
For cable entry in each case, a hole is provided at the top and
bottom:
For M20 for 1 to 3 command points
For M25 for 4 and 6 command points
Ordering notes (selection by configurator)

To order customized enclosures with the 3SB3 control devices
(except suspended pushbuttons), use the 3SB3/3SF5 configurator to select the blocks for equipping. An electronic order form
will be generated for the additional options. Configurator see
Electronic Catalog CA01 on DVD or
Industry Mall, www.siemens.com/industrymall
Supplement the Article No. with the order code "K0Y"
(as already listed in the selection table).
The list price of the complete enclosure is generated in the
configurator for the customized equipment.
Please send the resulting electronic order form along with your
order by e-mail to our Competence Center at
sirius-attach.aud@siemens.com
If you are unable to access either catalog, please contact our
Technical Assistance.

Version
Number of DT Configurator
command
points
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU1)
Plastic enclosures
With contact blocks and lampholders
for base mounting
1
2
3
4
6
C
C
C
B
B
3SB3801-0AZ K0Y
3SB3802-0AZ K0Y
3SB3803-0AZ K0Y
3SB3804-0AZ K0Y
3SB3806-0AZ K0Y
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
With single-pole contact blocks and lampholders

for front plate mounting
1
2
3
4
6
C
C
C
B
B
3SB3801-1AZ K0Y
3SB3802-1AZ K0Y
3SB3803-1AZ K0Y
3SB3804-1AZ K0Y
3SB3806-1AZ K0Y
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
With contact blocks and lampholders

for base mounting
1
2
3
4
6
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3801-2AZ K0Y
3SB3802-2AZ K0Y
3SB3803-2AZ K0Y
3SB3804-2AZ K0Y
3SB3806-2AZ K0Y
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
With single-pole contact blocks and lampholders

1
2
3
4
6
C
C
C
C
C
3SB3801-3AZ K0Y
3SB3802-3AZ K0Y
3SB3803-3AZ K0Y
3SB3804-3AZ K0Y
3SB3806-3AZ K0Y
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Suspended pushbuttons
With holding plate and handle,
customized equipment2)
max. 6
3SB3887-1AZ K0Y
1 unit
41J
3SB3803-.AZ
Metal enclosures
13
3SB3803-.AZ
3SB3887-1AZ
1)
The prices depend on the equipment selected.
2)
Order forms for customized orders are available from Technical

Assistance.
13/92
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures

For self-equipping of the enclosures
Version
Rated voltage/
Graphical
symbol
Operating travel/color DT Screw terminals

Contact closed
Article No.
Contact open
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Contact blocks for base mounting

1 NO
3SB3420-0B
1 unit
41J
3SB3420-0BA
1 unit
41J
3SB3420-0C
1 unit
41J
3SB3420-0CA
1 unit
41J
3SB3420-1A
1 unit
41J
Clear
3SB3420-1C
1 unit
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
}
}
B
}
3SB3420-1PA
3SB3420-1PB
3SB3420-1PC
3SB3420-1PD
3SB3420-1PE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
D
B
3SB3420-1QA
3SB3420-1QB
3SB3420-1QC
3SB3420-1QD
3SB3420-1QE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3420-1RA
3SB3420-1RB
3SB3420-1RC
3SB3420-1RD
3SB3420-1RE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Blue
Green/Yellow
B
B
B
3SB3901-0AG
3SB3901-0AH
3SB3901-0AJ
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
3-4
0 1
mm
.4
3SB3420-0B
NSD0_00015
.3
1 NO with
1 NC
1 NC with
2,3
.1
NSD0_00017
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
1,6
BA 9s lampholders
Without lamp
Acc. to lamp
X1
X2
(L-)
(L+)
NSD0_00003
With integrated voltage

230/240 V AC
reducer and with 130 V lamp
X2
X1
1)
(3SX1731)
3SB3420-1A
NSD0_00042
Lampholders
with integrated LED
24 V AC/DC
X1
k
X2
NSD0_01292b
110 V AC
X1
k
3SB3420-1PE
X2
NSD0_01296b
230 V AC
X1
k
k
X2
NSD0_01296b
Fixpoint terminals
3SB3901-0AH
1)
13
The voltage reducer can only be used with this lamp.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/93
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Version
Rated voltage/
Graphical
symbol
Operating travel/color DT Spring-type

terminals
Contact closed
Article No.
Contact open
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Contact blocks for base mounting

1 NO
1 NC
1 NC with
1 unit
41J
3SB3423-0BA
1 unit
41J
3SB3423-0C
1 unit
41J
3SB3423-0CA
1 unit
41J
1,6
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3423-1PA
3SB3423-1PB
3SB3423-1PC
3SB3423-1PD
3SB3423-1PE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
B
D
D
D
D
3SB3423-1QA
3SB3423-1QB
3SB3423-1QC
3SB3423-1QD
3SB3423-1QE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Yellow
Red
Green
Blue
White
D
B
B
B
B
3SB3423-1RA
3SB3423-1RB
3SB3423-1RC
3SB3423-1RD
3SB3423-1RE
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Black
Blue
Green/Yellow
B
B
B
3SB3423-2F
3SB3423-2G
3SB3423-2H
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
100 10 units
41J
2,3
.1
NSD0_00017
1-2
0 1
mm
.2
Lampholders with
integrated LED
3SB3423-0B
3-4
0 1
mm
.4
3SB3423-0B
NSD0_00015
.3
1 NO with
24 V AC/DC
X1
k
X2
NSD0_01292b
110 V AC
X1
k
k
X2
NSD0_01296b
230 V AC
X1
k
k
X2
NSD0_01296b
Fixpoint terminals
3SB3423-2G
Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
Accessories
Pressure plates for selector switches and key-operated switches B
For actuating the central contact block of 3 contact blocks1)
3SB3901-0AW
3SB3901-0AW
13
1)

requirements.
13/94
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Inscription labels for enclosures
Overview
Black labels
The inscription labels (black with white inscription or silvercolored with black print) have an adhesive layer on the back.
The size of the labels is 22 mm 22 mm.
Inscriptions
The inscriptions have upper case initial letters. The typeface is
Arial. Graphic symbols, including those not listed in the catalog,
are according to ISO 7000 or IEC 60417 (see page 13/96).

PU (UNIT) = 1
PS*
PG
= 41J
Inscriptions
DT Black
Article No.
DT Silver-colored
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Inscription labels, self-adhesive, 22 mm x 22 mm

Blank
3SB3906-1AA
3SB1901-3AA
Ein
On
Aus
Off
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AB
3SB3906-1EB
3SB3906-1AC
3SB3906-1EC
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AB
3SB1901-3EB
3SB1901-3AC
3SB1901-3EC
Auf
Up
Ab
Down
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AD
3SB3906-1ED
3SB3906-1AE
3SB3906-1EE
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AD
3SB1901-3ED
3SB1901-3AE
3SB1901-3EE
Auf
Open
Zu
Close
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AD
3SB3906-1EP
3SB3906-1AL
3SB3906-1EQ
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AD
3SB1901-3EP
3SB1901-3AL
3SB1901-3EQ
Vor
Forward
Zurck
Reverse
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AF
3SB3906-1EF
3SB3906-1AG
3SB3906-1EG
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AF
3SB1901-3EF
3SB1901-3AG
3SB1901-3EG
Rechts
Right
Links
Left
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AH
3SB3906-1EH
3SB3906-1AJ
3SB3906-1EJ
3SB1901-3AH
-3SB1901-3AJ
--
Schnell
Fast
Langsam
Slow
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AM
3SB3906-1ER
3SB3906-1AN
3SB3906-1ES
Betrieb
Running
Strung
Fault
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AP
3SB3906-1EV
3SB3906-1AQ
3SB3906-1EW
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AP
3SB1901-3EV
3SB1901-3AQ
--
Einrichten
Start
Reset
Test
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AR
3SB3906-1EL
3SB3906-1EM
3SB3906-1EN
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AR
3SB1901-3EL
3SB1901-3EM
3SB1901-3EN
Halt
Stop
NOT-HALT
NOT-AUS
EMERGENCY STOP
B
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1AK
3SB3906-1EK
3SB3906-1AS
3SB3906-1AV
3SB3906-1EY
B
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3AK
3SB1901-3EK
3SB1901-3AT
3SB1901-3AS
3SB1901-3EY
Lfter
Pumpe
Khlung
Heizung
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1CA
3SB3906-1CB
3SB3906-1CC
3SB3906-1CD
Beleuchtung
Filter
Motor
Kompressor
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1CE
3SB3906-1CF
3SB3906-1CG
3SB3906-1CH
B
B
3SB1901-3CE
--3SB1901-3CH
O
I
II
III
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1MB
3SB3906-1MC
3SB3906-1MD
3SB3906-1ME
B
B
B
B
3SB1901-3MB
3SB1901-3MC
3SB1901-3MD
3SB1901-3ME
O I (horizontal)
I O II (horizontal)
I O (vertical)
II O I (vertical)
B
B
B
B
3SB3906-1MF
3SB3906-1MG
3SB3906-1MH
3SB3906-1MW
B
B
B
C
3SB1901-3MF
3SB1901-3MG
3SB1901-3MH
3SB1901-3MW
3SB3906-1NA
3SB1901-3NA
With inscription
3SB1901-3AM
-3SB1901-3AN
--
-3SB1901-3CB
---
13
With graphic symbol

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/95
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures
Inscription labels for enclosures
Inscriptions
DT Black
Article No.
DT Silver-colored
Price
per PU
Article No.
Price
per PU
Inscription labels, self-adhesive, 22 mm x 22 mm

Text line(s)
3SB3906-0XZ
3SB1901-3XZ
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
K0Y, K1Y, K2Y or

K5Y
Symbol with No.
K3Y
K3Y
K9Y
K9Y
Options
Ordering notes
the ordering data.

of line (e.g. "Lift out"): K0Y
K3Y
A letter height of 4 mm is used as standard for text inscriptions

(1 to 3 lines).
Up to 11 characters per line are possible. The typeface used is
Arial. Other letter heights and typefaces are possible, but must
be specified when ordering.



DXF format should be submitted to:
sirius-attach.aud@siemens.com
Ordering example 1
3SB39060XZ
K1Y
Z1 = LIFT
Z2 = LOWER
Ordering example 2
13

is required:
3SB39060XZ
K3Y
Z = 5011 IEC
Ordering example 3
required:
3SB39060XZ
K3Y
Z = 1118 ISO
13/96
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Enclosures

Version
Color/
inscription
DT Article No.
Blanking plugs
For plastic version, round
Black
Blanking plugs (plastic)

For metal version, round
Aluminized
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SB3921-0AA
1 10 units
41J
3SB1902-0AQ
1 10 units
41J
Holders for pushbuttons and switches

For snapping on 3 blocks,1)
3SB3901-0AB
100 20 units
41J
Holders for selector switches and keyoperated switches with pressure plate
For actuating a central contact block,
for front plate mounting2)
3SB3901-0AC
100 10 units
41J
Pressure plates for selector switches

and key-operated switches
For actuating a central contact block,
for base mounting2)
3SB3901-0AW
100 10 units
41J
3SB1902-1AQ
1 unit
41J
NOT-HALT
3SB1902-2AQ
1 unit
41J
NOT-AUS
3SB3921-0CJ
1 unit
41J
With recess for

inscription label
3SB3921-0BV
1 unit
41J
M20 cable gland

incl. hexagonal nut
3SB3901-0CK
1 unit
41J
M25 cable gland

incl. hexagonal nut
3SB3901-0CM
1 unit
41J
M20 hexagonal nuts

For cable glands
3SB3901-0CL
100 10 units
41J
M25 hexagonal nuts

For cable glands
3SB3901-0CN
100 10 units
41J
M20/M20
3SB3901-0CS
1 unit
41J
M20/M253)
3SB3901-0CT
1 unit
41J
M25/M25
3SB3901-0CU
1 unit
41J
M20/M20
3SB3901-0CP
1 unit
41J
M20/M25
3SB3901-0CQ
1 unit
41J
Blanking plugs for spare command points
3SB3921-0AA
3SB1902-0AQ
Holders and pressure plates
3SB3901-0AB
3SB3901-0AC
3SB3901-0AW

Yellow name plates
As backing plate for
EMERGENCY-STOP, self-adhesive
3SB1902-1AQ
Without inscription
With inscription
3SB3901-0CK
Connecting pieces
For connecting 2 plastic enclosures
3SB3901-0CS
Connecting pieces
For connecting 2 metal enclosures
3SB3901-0CP
1)
The holder for illuminated commanding devices is included in the scope of

supply.
2)

requirements.
3)
Not suitable for plastic enclosures with 6 command points.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/97
13
3SB3901-0CL
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Installation of AS-Interface slaves
The following slave types are available for connecting the
command points:
Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs
Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs
F Slave with two secure inputs for EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton
The following table shows the maximum number of equippable
slaves:
AS-Interface enclosures with customized equipment
Distributed command devices of the 3SB3 series can be quickly

connected to the AS-Interface using AS-Interface enclosures.
Using suitable components you can make your own enclosures
with integrated AS-Interface or flexibly modify existing enclosures.
Enclosures for
Number of slaves
for enclosures
without
EMERGENCY-STOP
Number of slaves
for enclosures
with EMERGENCY-STOP
1 command point
Not available
1 x F slave
2 command points 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O
Not available
1 x slave 4I/4O or
4I/3O + 1 x F slave
4 command points 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O1)
2 x slave 4I/4O or
4I/3O + 1 x F slave1)
2 x slave 4I/4O or
4I/3O + 1 x F slave
1)
Applies to plastic enclosures. For metal enclosures with 4 command

points, only 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O is possible.
Connection
One set of links is required in each case to connect a slave to
contact blocks, to lampholders and to the connection element.
The connection elements are mounted in the front-end cable
glands and are used for connection of the AS-Interface or for
bringing unused inputs or outputs out of the enclosure.
NSD0_01414
For connection to AS-Interface can be selected between:

Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable. The cable is contacted by the insulation piercing method and routed past the
enclosure on the outside (possible only with plastic enclosure).
Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round cable. The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for
metal enclosure).
Connection using M12 plug.
If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an enclosure are used for connecting the command devices, free inputs
and outputs can be routed on request to the outside through an
M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the enclosure.
13
EMERGENCY-STOP enclosures
Enclosures
To supply inputs with power, the S+ connection of the slave must

be assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT connection
must be assigned.
Color of enclosure cover:

Gray, RAL 7035
Yellow, RAL 1004, for EMERGENCY-STOP
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or

the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is
not required.
Color of enclosure base:

Black, RAL 9005
Customized enclosures (selection by configurator)

To order customized 3SF58 AS-Interface enclosures with the
3SB3 control devices, use the 3SB3/3SF5 configurator to select
the blocks for equipping. An electronic order form will be generated for the additional options.
Related ordering notes see page 13/92.
13/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

AS-Interface enclosures with standard fittings
Overview
Enclosures with EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons
are fitted with two NC contact blocks, which are wired to the safe
slave. The contact blocks and lampholders (with spring-type terminals) of the control device, and the AS-Interface slaves, are
mounted in the base of the enclosure and are cable-connected.
Enclosures with standard fittings are available with:

Operational voltage through AS-Interface (approx. 30 V)
Vertical mounting type
Plastic enclosures are equipped with plastic actuators and indicators, metal enclosures are equipped with metal actuators
and indicators
The enclosures without EMERGENCY-STOP each have one user
module with 4I/3O; the enclosures with EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbuttons have a safe AS-Interface slave integrated in the enclosure.
The plastic enclosures are designed with a connection for the

AS-Interface flat cable (the cable is run along the outside of the
enclosure). For metal enclosures, the AS-Interface cable is run
inside the enclosure.
The housing with EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons
with an M12 connector is also available.

Equipping options
(A, B, C = identification letters of the command points)
No. of command points
DT Configurator
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
B 3SF5811-0AA10
1 unit
42A
Article No.
Price
per PU
AS-Interface enclosures, plastic

With M12 top connector
A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbuttons, red,
with rotate-to-unlatch mechanism, 1 NC, 1 NC
Yellow enclosure top
With terminal for insulation piercing method at top

3SF5811-0AA08
3SF5812-0DA00

Yellow enclosure top, with protective collar1)
1
1
A 3SF5811-0AA08
A 3SF5811-0AB08
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42A
42A
B = Pushbutton green, label "I", 1 NO

A = Pushbutton red, label "O", 1 NO
A 3SF5812-0DA00
1 unit
42A
B = Pushbutton white, label "I", 1 NO

A = Pushbutton black, label "O", 1 NO
A 3SF5812-0DB00
1 unit
42A
C = Indicator lights clear,

label without inscription
A 3SF5813-0DA00
1 unit
42A

A 3SF5813-0DC00
1 unit
42A
C = Pushbutton black, label "II", 1 NO

B = Pushbutton black, label "I", 1 NO
A 3SF5813-0DB00
1 unit
42A
1
1
C 3SF5811-2AA10
C 3SF5811-2AB10
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42A
42A

1
1
A 3SF5811-2AA08
A 3SF5811-2AB08
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42A
42A

A 3SF5812-2DA00
1 unit
42A

A 3SF5812-2DB00
1 unit
42A

A 3SF5813-2DA00
1 unit
42A

A 3SF5813-2DC00
1 unit
42A
C = Pushbutton black, label "II", 1 NO

B = Pushbutton black, label "I", 1 NO
A 3SF5813-2DB00
1 unit
42A
AS-Interface enclosures, metal

With M12 top connector
With cable gland at top
3SF5813-2DA00


1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/99
13
3SF5811-2AB08
Siemens AG 2013

Components for AS-Interface enclosures

For self-equipping of the enclosures
Version
Number of
command
points
DT Article No.
F slave, 2 safe inputs,

for plastic enclosure,
EMERGENCY-STOP, without protective collar
1 ... 6

for plastic or metal enclosure,
EMERGENCY-STOP, with protective collar
A/B slave, 4I/3O

for plastic enclosure
Slave, 4I/4O,
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SF5500-0BA
1 unit
42A
3SF5500-0DA
1 unit
42A
2 ... 6
3SF5500-0BB
1 unit
42A
2 ... 6
3SF5500-0BC
1 unit
42A
For F slave
3SF5900-0BA
1 unit
42A
For slave 4I/4O or A/B slave 4I(3O)
3SF5900-0BB
1 unit
42A
1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CA
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CB
1 unit
42A
1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CC
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CD
1 unit
42A
For plastic enclosures

AS-Interface slaves
3SF5500-0BA
3SF5500-0BB
Sets of links
Connection elements
3SF5900-0CA
For AS-Interface shaped cable,

connection by insulation piercing method,
For AS-Interface
connection using M12 plug,
3SF5900-0CC
3SF5900-0CG
For bringing out unused inputs/outputs

through an M12 socket, for plastic enclosure
1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CE
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CF
1 unit
42A

cable is routed into the enclosure,
for plastic or metal enclosure
1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CG
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CH
1 unit
42A
For round cable,

1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CJ
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CK
1 unit
42A

for metal enclosure,
EMERGENCY-STOP, without protective collar
1 ... 6
3SF5500-0CA
1 unit
42A

for plastic or metal enclosure,
EMERGENCY-STOP, with protective collar
3SF5500-0DA
1 unit
42A
For metal enclosures

AS-Interface slaves
3SF5500-0CB
A/B slave, 4I/3O, for metal enclosure
2 ... 6
3SF5500-0CB
1 unit
42A
Slave, 4I/4O, for metal enclosure
2 ... 6
3SF5500-0CC
1 unit
42A
For F slave
3SF5900-0BA
1 unit
42A
For slave 4I/4O or A/B slave 4I(3O)
3SF5900-0BB
1 unit
42A
Sets of links
Connection elements
13
3SF5900-0CG
For AS-Interface
connection using M12 plug, for metal enclosure
1 ... 3
3SF5900-2CC
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-2CD
1 unit
42A
For bringing out unused inputs/outputs

through an M12 socket, for metal enclosure
1 ... 3
3SF5900-2CE
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-2CF
1 unit
42A
1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CG
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CH
1 unit
42A
1 ... 3
3SF5900-0CJ
1 unit
42A
4 ... 6
3SF5900-0CK
1 unit
42A
3RK1901-3QA00
100 10 units
42C

3SF5900-0CJ
For round cable,

Spare parts
Cable clips
For cable adapters
3RK1901-3QA00
13/100
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
3SB3 Two-Hand Operation Consoles

Plastic and metal enclosures
The standard equipment comprises:
2 black mushroom pushbuttons, 40 mm, 1 NO + 1 NC,
Article No. 3SB3000-1GA11 or 3SB3500-1GA11
1 red EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton according
to ISO 13850, 40 mm, with positive latching, 2 NC,
Article No. 3SB3000-1HA20 or 3SB3500-1HA20
Overview
The plastic version can be retrofitted with up to 8 customized

command points. The surface of the console has premachined
breaking points for this purpose.
Application
The two-hand operation consoles are required for use with machines and systems that have hazardous areas, in order to direct
both hands of the operator to one position.
Operator panels are primarily used on presses, stamping machines, printing presses and paper converting machines, in the
chemical industry and in the rubber and plastics industries.
Two-hand operation console with metal enclosure
Equipment
The two-hand operation consoles are pre-equipped with
3SB3 command devices. In the case of plastic enclosures the
command points are equipped as standard with actuators and
indicators made of plastic, in the case of metal enclosures they
are equipped with actuators and indicators made of metal.
The control command is given by pressing the two mushroom

pushbuttons on the sides simultaneously (within 0.5 s of each
other) and must be maintained for as long as a hazard exists.
For the further processing of control commands, suitable evaluation units are used, e.g. 3SK11 safety relays or the 3RK3 Modular Safety System (see Chapter 11, "Safety Technology").
Standards
The two-hand operation consoles comply with the requirements
of EN 574.

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Metal enclosures, degree of protection IP65

Two-hand operation consoles, metal enclosure
3SB3863-4BB
With standard fittings
3SB3863-4BB
1 unit
41J
With standard fittings and 4 additional holes

for 22.5 mm command devices1)
3SB3863-4BA
1 unit
41J
Empty enclosure, unequipped
3SB3863-4BC
1 unit
41J
Two-hand operation consoles, plastic enclosure

With standard fittings and premachined breaking points
for 8 additional 22.5 mm1) command devices,
with holes for metric cable glands
3SB3863-1BB3
1 unit
41J
Stands for two-hand operation consoles

With holes for metric cable glands
3SB3901-0AQ3
1 unit
41J
Plastic enclosures, degree of protection IP65
3SB3863-1BB3
3SB3901-0AQ
1)
See 3SB3 Pushbuttons and Indicator Lights, 22 mm, page 13/20.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/101
13
Accessories
Siemens AG 2013
3SE7, 3SF2 Cable-Operated Switches

3SE7 metal enclosures
Overview
Contact blocks
The switches for wire lengths up to 50 m are supplied with
1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NC contacts and those up to 75 m with
1 NO + 3 NC contacts. The switches for wire lengths from
2 x 75 m and the conveyor belt unbalance protection device
are supplied with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts.
The NC contacts of the cable-break or cable-pull signaling are
positive opening. The NO contact can be used, for example, for
signaling purposes.
Free position and display
Cable-operated switches with one-side operation are held in
free position by the pre-tension on the turnbuckle.
On switches with interlocking, with a pretensioned cable, the
locking must be deactivated beforehand in order to return the
cable-operated switch to its original position.
The cable-operated switch and the conveyor belt unbalance
tracker can be supplied optionally with a factory-fitted LED (red,
24 V DC). This light in innovative chip-on-board technology allows the operating state of the switch to be visible at a distance
of at least 50 m.
3SE7 cable-operated switches
The cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for

EMERGENCY-STOP devices on particularly endangered system
components.
As the effective range of a cable-operated switch is only limited
by the length of the trip-wire, large systems can also be protected. Cable-operated switches (requiring pulling at both ends)
and conveyor belt unbalance trackers are used primarily for
monitoring very long belt systems.
Application
Standards
The switches are equipped with positive latching and positive
NC contacts and are thus suitable for operation in EMERGENCYSTOP devices according to EN ISO 13850.
Type
3SE7120
3SE7150
3SE7140
3SE7141
3SE7160
3SE7310
General data
Standards
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1;

IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1; EN ISO 13850
Approvals
UL/CSA
Electrical design
Contacts electrically isolated from each other
Electrical load
2-pole, at AC-15
400 V AC, 6 A
400 V AC, 6 A
250 V AC, 2 A
400 V AC, 6 A
--
3-pole, at AC-15
250 V AC, 2 A
--
--
--
--
4-pole, at AC-15
--
--
--
400 V AC, 6 A
400 V AC, 6 A
Minimum
24 V AC/DC, 10 mA
75
2 x 75
6 (slow)
> 1 million operating cycles
Contact material
Fine silver
By pulling or breaking of wire
Operation
Wire length, maximum
10
25
50
Distance between wire supports, max.
2.5
13
Enclosures
Enclosure material
GD Al alloy, coated (color), dark black RAL 9005
Cover
Shock-resistant thermoplast
IP65

Ambient temperature
IP65
3 x (M20 x 1.5)
2 x (M25 x 1.5)
Designed for M5
Mounting
Fixing spacing
mm
30 and 40
Cable entry
2 x (M20 x 1.5)
Connection type
Screw terminals M3.5, self-lifting clamp terminal
13/102
IP67
25 ... +70
Siemens IC 10 2014
1 x (M16 x 1.5)
Siemens AG 2013


Version
Wire
length
Contacts
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Cable-operated switches
Metal enclosures, IP65
(cover made of molded plastic)
10
Without latching, only cable pull

monitoring
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7120-2DD01
1 unit
41K
With latching and button reset
2 NC
3SE7120-1BF00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE7120-1BH00
1 unit
41K
Without latching
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7150-2DD00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7150-1BD00
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE7150-1BF00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 2 NC
3SE7150-1BH00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7150-1CD00
1 unit
41K
Without latching
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7150-2DD04
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7150-1BD04
1 unit
41K
- With yellow lid
3SE7120-1BH00
(cover made of molded plastic),
with alignment window
25
- With yellow lid

With latching and key unlatching
3SE7150-1BD00
3SE7150-1BH00
with alignment window,
with LED, red, 24 V DC
25
3SE7150-1BD04
(cover made of molded plastic)
50
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7140-1BD00
1 unit
41K
2 NC
3SE7140-1BF00
1 unit
41K
In addition with LED, red, 24 V DC
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7140-1BD04
1 unit
41K
With latching and key unlatching
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7140-1CD00
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 3 NC
3SE7141-1EG10
1 unit
41K
41K
3SE7140-1B.00

with EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom,
75

with actuation on both sides
2 x 75

2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7160-1AE00
1 unit
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE7160-1BD00
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7160-1AE04
1 unit
41K
3SE7160-1AE00

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/103
13
3SE7141-1EG10
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Contacts
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Conveyor belt unbalance trackers

2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7310-1AE00
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE7310-1AE04
1 unit
41K
3SE7310-1AE00
Accessories
Configuration of the cable-operated switches
Short lengths of wire up to 25 m
Wire clamp,
simplex,
oval,
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Wire clamp,
simplex,
oval,
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AC
Turnbuckle
M6 x 60
3SE7950-1AB
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AC
Wire,
Wire clamp,
simplex,
4 mm
oval,
3SE7910
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Eyebolt
M8
3SE7920-1AB
Wire clamp,
simplex,
oval,
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Eyebolt
M8
3SE79201AB
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AC
NSC0_00288e
SIRIUS
cable-operated
switch
3SE7120
3SE7150
Long lengths of wire up to 50 m
Wire clamp,
simplex,
oval,
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Wire clamp,
simplex,
oval,
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AD
Turnbuckle
M6 x 60
3SE7950-1AB
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AD
Use of a tension spring is essential for lengths of wire
Wire clamp,
Wire,
simplex,
4 mm
oval,
3SE7910
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AD
Wire clamp,
simplex,
oval,
4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
Wire roller, rotatable

3SE7921-1AC
Tension spring
35 N
3SE7931-1AD
Eyebolt
M10
3SE79201AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AD
25 m.
NSC0_00289g
SIRIUS
cable-operated
switch
3SE7140
Pulling from both sides up to 2 x 75 m
Wire clamp, Turnbuckle

Wire
Wire
simplex,oval, M6 x 60
clamp,
clamp,
simplex, 4 mm
3SE7950-1AB simplex,
3SE7941-1AC
oval, 4 mm
oval,
4 mm
3SE7
SIRIUS
941-1AC
3SE7
cable-operated
941-1AC
switch
Eyebolt M10
3SE7160
3SE7921-1AC
3SE7920-1AC
3SE7921-1AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AD
3SE7930-1AD
Tension spring
up to 2 x 50 m:
3SE7931-1AD
up to 2 x 75 m:
3SE7931-1AE
Use of a tension spring is essential for lengths of wire
25 m.
Wire
Wire
Tension spring
clamp,
clamp,
up to 2 x 50 m:
simplex,
simplex,
3SE7931-1AD
oval,
oval,
up to 2 x 75 m:
4 mm
4 mm
3SE7931-1AE
3SE7
3SE7
941-1AC
941-1AC
Wire rollers, rotatable
3SE7921-1AC
Wire eye, 4 mm
3SE7930-1AD
NSC0_00499f
13
Wire, 4 mm
3SE7910
Note:
Large temperature fluctuations require corresponding compensation springs. For reliable connection the PVC sheath must be re-
13/104
Siemens IC 10 2014
moved from the clamping area of the steel bowden wire. Bowden
wire supports must be used at the recommended intervals.
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Wire length/
diameter
DT Article No.
Steel wires, with red plastic sheath,

4 mm1)
10 m
15 m
20 m
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3SE7910-3AA
1 unit
41K
3SE7910-3AB
1 unit
41K
3SE7910-3AC
1 unit
41K
50 m
3SE7910-3AH
1 unit
41K
Oval
2 x 4 mm
3SE7941-1AC
1 unit
41K
Single (1 set = 4 units)
2 x 4 mm
3SE7942-1AA
4 units
41K
Simplex (1 set = 4 units)
2 x 4 mm
3SE7943-1AC
4 units
41K
Duplex (1 set = 4 units)
2 x 4 mm
3SE7944-1AC
4 units
41K
13 N
3SE7931-1AB
1 unit
41K
35 N, for bowden wires up to 50 m
3SE7931-1AD
1 unit
41K
> 35 N, for bowden wires up to 2 75 m
3SE7931-1AE
1 unit
41K
3SE7921-1AC
1 unit
41K
3SE7921-1AA
1 unit
41K
3SE7930-1AD
4 units
41K
Including M8 nut
3SE7920-1AB
1 unit
41K
Including M10 nut
3SE7920-1AC
1 unit
41K
M6 x 60
3SE7950-1AB
1 unit
41K
M6 x 110
3SE7950-1AD
1 unit
41K
LED lamps, red

24 V DC
25 mm diameter;
for M20 x 1.5 connection
3SX3235
1 unit
41K
Trip-wire with fixing
Wire clamps, galvanized white
Tension springs (zinc-plated)

to maintain the counter tension
Wire rollers for changing the direction of the

wire, rotatable
4 mm
Fixtures for the wire rollers

(incl. fixing nuts)
Wire eyes for changes in wire direction and

improved power transmission at the fixing
points (1 set = 4 units)
4 mm
Eyebolts for fixing the wire
Turnbuckles for precise adjustment of the pretension
1)
13
Spare parts
Diameter including casing; the diameter of the steel wire is 3.2 mm.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/105
Siemens AG 2013

3SF2 cable-operated switches for AS-Interface
Overview
Application
SIRIUS cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for
EMERGENCY-STOP devices on particularly endangered system
components.
As the effective range of a cable-operated switch is only limited
by the length of the trip-wire, large systems can also be protected.
Standards
The switches with positive latching are suitable for operation in
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to EN ISO 13850. They
can achieve up to category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 3 according to IEC 61508.
3SF2 cable-operated switch with AS-Interface adapter
AS-Interface cable-operated switches can be directly connected via the bus system AS-Interface with safety-oriented
communication.
The safety functions no longer have to be conventionally
wired up.

Version
Basic switches
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
ASIsafe cable-operated switches

(cover made of molded plastic), with dust protection,
latching acc. to ISO 13850,
with button reset,
2 NC contacts
For wire lengths up to 10 m,
3SE7120-1BF00 q C
3SF2120-1BF00-0BA1
1 unit
42A
For wire lengths up to 25 m,

3SE7150-1BF00 q C
3SF2150-1BF00-0BA1
1 unit
42A
For wire lengths up to 50 m
3SE7140-1BF00 q B
3SF2140-1BF00-0BA1
1 unit
42A
13
3SF2120-1BF00-0BA1
3SF2150-1BF00-0BA1
3SF2140-1BF00-0BA1
qPositive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K.
13/106
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
3SE2, 3SE3 Foot Switches

Overview
The switches have two contact blocks, each with one NO contact and one NC contact. The NO contacts and NC contacts of
the two contact blocks are connected for easy connection of a
single-phase motor. The normal workflow is initiated by pressing
down the pedal as far as the pressure point so that the two
NO contacts close and the motor starts to run.
If in the event of danger the pedal is pressed beyond the resistance of the pressure point, the positively driven NC contacts will
open and the motor is stopped. At the same time the independent latching takes effect and holds the NC contacts in open position. This prevents the machine parts from continuing to run out
of control or from being restarted.
After the hazard is eliminated, the machine can only be restarted
after manually releasing the switch using a pushbutton on the
top of the enclosure. The contacts are then released again and
return to their initial position (the NO contacts are open and the
NC contacts are closed).
Standard switches
The 3SE29 and 3SE39 foot switch range encompasses versions
in a metal enclosure for rugged applications as well as versions
with plastic enclosure for less harsh environments. The devices
can be supplied with or without a cover and have fixing holes for
them to be screwed to the floor.
Depending on the particular application, the metal enclosures
can be ordered in latching or momentary-contact versions. The
momentary-contact pedal switch in the plastic enclosure has
one microswitch (changeover contact) per actuating pedal.
Safety foot switches
The 3SE2924-3AA20 single-pedal safety foot switches are used
on machines and plants as OK switches when operation by
hand is not possible. The switches are interlocked according to
EN ISO 13850 and bear the CE mark in accordance with the machinery directive.
The safety foot switches are protected by a guard hood against
accidental operation.
Type
3SE29
3SE39
Metal and plastic enclosures

IEC 60947-5-1
Standards
Electrical load
At AC-15, 400 V
- 1 NO + 1 NC
10
--
- 2 NO + 2 NC
--
- 3SE2924-3AA20 (2 NO + 2 NC) A
At 250 V AC
10
- 1 NO + 1 NC
10 (slow)
--
- 2 NO + 2 NC
6 (slow)
--
- 3SE2924-3AA20 (2 NO + 2 NC) A
10 (slow)
--
- 1 CO contact
--
5 (slow)
> 106 operating cycles
Material
Enclosures
Aluminum
casting
Impact-resistant
thermoplast,
self-extinguishing according to
UL 94 VO
Covers
Thermoplast
Guard hoods
Aluminum
casting
Metal
IP65
IP65
Ambient temperature
C -25 ... +80
Connection
Cable entry,
metric
-10 ... +75

Cable AWG20,
UL Style 2464,
length 3 m
Application example
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/107
13
3SE29 foot switch with metal enclosure
Siemens AG 2013
3SE2, 3SE3 Foot Switches


Version
Slow-action conDT Article No.

tacts for each pedal
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Metal enclosures, degree of protection IP65

Momentary-contact foot switches,
single pedal
M20 x 1.5 cable entry
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2902-0AB20
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE2903-1AB20
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2902-0AA20
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE2903-1AA20
1 unit
41K
Without hood
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2912-2AB20
1 unit
41K
With hood
two pedals
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2912-2AA20
1 unit
41K
Without hood
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2932-0AB20
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE2932-1AB20
1 unit
41K
1 NO + 1 NC
3SE2932-0AA20
1 unit
41K
2 NO + 2 NC
3SE2932-1AA20
1 unit
41K
Safety foot switches,

2 NO + 2 NC
single pedal, with hood,
M20 x 1.5 cable entry,
with interlock according to ISO 13850,
NO closes as momentary contact
type, NC opens with latching
3SE2924-3AA20
1 unit
41K
Without hood
With hood
3SE290.-.AA20
3SE291.-.AA20

single pedal
3SE2932-.AB20
With hood
3SE2932-.AA20
3SE2924-3AA20
Plastic enclosures, degree of protection IP65

Momentary-contact pedal switches, Microswitch
3 m cable
Single pedal
3SE3902-4CA20
- Without hood
1 CO contact
3SE3902-4CB20
1 unit
41K
- With hood
1 CO contact
3SE3902-4CA20
1 unit
41K
2 1 CO
3SE3934-5CB20
1 unit
41K
13
Two pedals, without hood
3SE3934-5CB20
13/108
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
8WD4 Signaling Columns

General data
Overview
The 8WD4 signaling columns are flexible in design and versatile
in use.
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
6
7
8
8
12
13
15
9
10
11
12
NSC0_00726c
14
Acoustic element 8WD42.0-0FA

Light element 8WD42
AS-Interface adapter element 8WD4228-0BB
Connection element 8WD4208-0AA
Bracket for wall mounting 8WD4208-0CD
Adapter for single-hole mounting 8WD4208-0EH
Foot for mounting 8WD4208-0DE
Pipe 8WD4208-0EF/8WD4308-0E.
Foot for mounting with pipe 8WD4308-0DB
Foot for mounting with pipe (> 400 mm) 8WD4308-0DC
Adjustable-angle foot for mounting on pipes 8WD4408-0DF
Socket 8WD4308-0DD
Socket (magnetic fixing) 8WD4308-0DE
Bracket for mounting with foot 8WD4408-0CC
8WD42 signaling column (width 50 mm) with up to 4 elements
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
Acoustic element 8WD44
Light element 8WD44
AS-Interface adapter element 8WD4428-0BD/8WD4428-0BE
Connection element for mounting on bracket,
base and floor 8WD4408-0AB/8WD4408-0AE
Connection element for mounting on pipe
8WD4408-0AA/8WD4408-0AD
Bracket for wall mounting 8WD4308-0CA
Bracket for wall mounting (two-sided) 8WD4308-0CB
Socket 8WD4308-0DD
Bracket for base mounting 8WD4408-0CD
Pipe 8WD4208-0EF/8WD4308-0E.
Foot with pipe 8WD4308-0DA
Socket (magnetic fixing) 8WD4308-0DE
Foot for mounting with pipe 8WD4308-0DB
Foot for mounting with pipe (> 400 mm) 8WD4308-0DC
Adjustable-angle foot for mounting on pipes 8WD4408-0DF
Bracket for mounting with foot 8WD4408-0CC
8WD44 signaling columns (width 70 mm) with up to 5 elements
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/109
13
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
NSC0_00727d
14
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Two product series are available:
8WD42
- Thermoplast enclosure, diameter 50 mm
- Degree of protection IP54
- Up to 4 elements can be mounted between the connection
element and the cover
8WD44
- Thermoplast enclosure, diameter 70 mm
- Advanced design and significantly improved illumination
- Fast and flexible connection using spring-type terminals
- Integrated degree of protection IP65
- Up to 5 elements can be mounted between the connection
Application
8WD4 signaling columns are used in machines or in automatic
processes for monitoring complex procedures or as visual or
acoustic warning devices in emergency situations, e.g. for displaying individual assembly stages.
Communication capability
Connection to AS-Interface
The 8WD4 signaling columns can be directly connected to the
AS-Interface bus system through an adapter element that can
be integrated in the column. Wiring outlay is reduced as the result. The two-wire bus cable is fixed to the terminals in the connection element. Up to four signaling elements can be mounted
on it using an adapter element.
A/B technology enables the connection of up to 62 slaves on one
AS-Interface system.
Connection
The signaling elements are wired up using the screw terminals
in the connection element, screw terminals on the 8WD42 and
screw or spring-type terminals on the 8WD44.
Cable outlet
The connecting cables can be guided either downwards or sideways through the cable gland using an adapter that can be
screwed under the foot. This makes wiring easier if there is no
access from below.
Connection to AS-Interface
8WD42:
Signaling columns, mounting examples
The illustrated examples are from the left:

8WD42: Cover (no No.), four light elements %,
connection element (, pipe ,, foot 8WD44: Acoustic element with cover $,
two light elements %, connection element ),
foot with pipe /
8WD44: Cover (no No.), four light elements %, AS-Interface
adapter element &, connection element (, bracket for wall
mounting *
8WD44: Cover (no No.), three light elements %, AS-Interface
adapter element &, connection element ), foot with pipe /
Note:
The cover is supplied with the connection element.
13
Benefits
Choice of various light and acoustic elements with different
functions:
continuous light, blinklight, flashlight and rotating light; buzzer
and siren
Light elements with particularly long-lasting LEDs
Variety of colors: red, yellow, green, white or blue
Optimized illumination through improved prism technology
with the 8WD44
Acoustic elements can be adjusted in tone and volume
Extremely resistant to shock and vibrations
Easy connection and quick lamp change with secure bayonet
mechanism
Communication capability through connection to AS-Interface
13/110
Siemens IC 10 2014
The two-wire bus cable is fixed to the screw terminals in the connection element. The adapter element must be the first module
to be mounted on the connection element. A maximum of four
signaling elements can then be mounted on it.
The 8WD4228-0BB adapter element is a standard slave.
8WD44:
The two-wire bus cable is fixed to the screw or spring-type terminals in the connection element. The adapter element must be
the first module to be mounted on the connection element. The
signaling elements can then be mounted on it.
The 8WD4428-0BE adapter element is a standard slave.
A maximum of four signaling elements can be mounted on it.
The 8WD4428-0BD adapter element with A/B technology enables the connection of up to 62 slaves on one AS-Interface system. The addressing socket provides user-friendly parameterization of the AS-Interface elements. A maximum of three
signaling elements can be mounted on it.
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
8WD42
8WD44
UL, CSA
UL, CSA
Light elements with incandescent lamp
(AC values for 50/60 Hz)
(AC values for 50/60 Hz)
Continuous light
12 V, 24 V, 115 V, 230 V AC/DC
12 V, 24 V, 115 V, 230 V AC/DC
Blinklight
24 V AC/DC/125 mA;
115 V AC/20 mA; 230 V AC/15 mA
24 V AC/DC/125 mA;
115 V AC/20 mA; 230 V AC/15 mA
Flashlights
--
24 V DC/125 mA;
115 V AC/20 mA; 230 V AC/35 mA
Max. inrush current, blinklight/flashlight
--
500 mA
Continuous light
24 V AC/DC/60 mA
24 V AC/DC/25 mA;
115 V AC/25 mA; 230 V AC/25 mA
Blinklight
24 V AC/DC/60 mA;
115 V AC/60 mA; 230 V AC/60 mA
24 V AC/DC/40 mA
Rotating light
--
24 V AC/DC/70 mA
Buzzer element
(tone: pulsating or continuous tone)
80 dB:
85 dB:
24 V AC/DC/25 mA;
115 V AC/25 mA; 230 V AC/25 mA
24 V AC/DC/25 mA;
115 V AC/25 mA; 230 V AC/25 mA
Siren element
(8 tones + amplification can be set, 100 dB)
--
24 V AC/DC/80 mA;
115 V AC/30 mA; 230 V AC/16 mA
Siren element (108 dB)
--
24 V DC/100 mA
Max. 5
7
2
--
4 106 flashes
IO code/ID code
8/F
8/E
Power supply
Operational voltage
Power consumption Imax
Through bus cable

18.5 ... 31.6
50
Through bus cable

18.5 ... 31.6
100
Protective measures
Watchdog
Short-circuit/overload protection
Reverse polarity protection
Induction protection
External back-up fuse M 1.6 A
N/A
Outputs
4 relay outputs
3 solid-state outputs
Load voltage
V
V
External auxiliary voltage

0 ... 30 DC
0 ... 230 AC
Through bus cable or external auxiliary voltage,

switch-selectable
Current carrying capacity Imax

- With external auxiliary voltage
- Without external auxiliary voltage
A
A
1.5
--
0.3
0.2
20 ... +50
20 ... +50
Enclosure material
Thermoplast (polyamide), impact-resistant,

black
Thermoplast (polyamide), impact-resistant,

black
Light elements
Thermoplast (polycarbonate)
Thermoplast (polycarbonate)
IP54
IP54
IP65 (seal premounted with every module)

IP65
20 ... +50
20 ... +50
General data
Approvals
Light and acoustic elements

Rated voltage, power consumption
Light elements with integrated LED
Acoustic elements
Power consumption
Incandescent lamps, base BA 15d
Flashlight, flash energy
W
Ws
Endurance
Flashlights
V
mA
Enclosures
Mounting
Horizontal (for base mounting,
foot with 25 mm pipe)
Horizontal (single-hole mounting)
Vertical with bracket
Light elements
Acoustic elements, AS-i adapter elements
Connection
Tightening torque
M3 screw terminal
mm2 Max. 2.5
Nm Max. 0.5
Spring-type terminals/M3 screw terminals

Max. 2.5
/ max. 0.5
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/111
13
AS-Interface adapter elements
Siemens AG 2013

8WD42 signaling columns, 50 mm diameter
Overview
Features:
Thermoplast enclosure, diameter 50 mm
Up to four elements can be mounted between the connection


Version
Rated voltage
Color
DT Article No.
24 AC/DC
Black
115 AC
Black
230 AC
Black
24 ... 230 AC/DC
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
8WD4220-0FA
1 unit
41J
8WD4240-0FA
1 unit
41J
8WD4250-0FA
1 unit
41J
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4200-1AB
8WD4200-1AC
8WD4200-1AD
8WD4200-1AE
8WD4200-1AF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4220-5AB
8WD4220-5AC
8WD4220-5AD
8WD4220-5AE
8WD4220-5AF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
115 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4240-5AB
8WD4240-5AC
8WD4240-5AD
8WD4240-5AE
8WD4240-5AF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4250-5AB
8WD4250-5AC
8WD4250-5AD
8WD4250-5AE
8WD4250-5AF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4220-5BB
8WD4220-5BC
8WD4220-5BD
8WD4220-5BE
8WD4220-5BF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
115 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4240-5BB
8WD4240-5BC
8WD4240-5BD
8WD4240-5BE
8WD4240-5BF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4250-5BB
8WD4250-5BC
8WD4250-5BD
8WD4250-5BE
8WD4250-5BF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4220-0CB
8WD4220-0CC
8WD4220-0CD
8WD4220-0CE
8WD4220-0CF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
For 4 signaling
elements 24 V DC
Black
8WD4228-0BB
1 unit
41J
Acoustic elements1)
Buzzer elements 80 dB,
pulsating or continuous tone,
adjustable by means of a wire
jumper
Light elements for incandescent lamps/LEDs, BA 15d bases2)

Continuous light elements

13
Blinklight elements
Flashlight elements
Adapter elements for AS-Interface

with external auxiliary voltage
1)
One acoustic element can be mounted per signaling column. The cover is
included in the scope of supply of the acoustic elements and fixed in
place.
2)
The lamp is not included in the scope of supply. Please order separately.
13/112
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Rated voltage
Color
DT Article No.
Black
Plastic, for mounting

on pipes
Price
per PU
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
8WD4208-0AA
1 unit
41J
8WD4308-0DB
1 unit
41J
Metal, for pipe lengths

> 400 mm
8WD4308-0DC
1 unit
41J
Plastic, for base mounting (without pipe)
8WD4208-0DE
1 unit
41J
Adjustable-angle feet
for positioning in 7.5 increments1)
Plastic, for mounting

on pipes, incl. rubber
seal
8WD4408-0DF
1 unit
41J
Pipes, single
Length 100 mm
8WD4208-0EF
1 unit
41J
Length 150 mm
8WD4308-0EE
1 unit
41J
Length 250 mm
8WD4308-0EA
1 unit
41J
Length 400 mm
8WD4308-0EB
1 unit
41J
Length 1 000 mm
8WD4308-0ED
1 unit
41J
Side cable outlet
8WD4308-0DD
1 unit
41J
Side cable outlet, with

magnetic fixing2)
8WD4308-0DE
1 unit
41J
8WD4408-0CC
1 unit
41J
Connection elements
Connection elements with cover
For mounting on pipes, floors and angles
Essential part for assembling the signaling columns
Mounting
Feet, single
Sockets for feet
Brackets for mounting with foot
Brackets for wall mounting

(plastic)
Mounting without feet

and pipe
8WD4208-0CD
1 unit
41J
Adapters for single-hole

mounting
Mounting without feet

and pipe,
with M18 thread and
fixing nut
8WD4208-0EH
1 unit
41J
Lamps
Base BA 15d
24 AC/DC
Clear
8WD4328-1XX
1 10 units
41J
115 AC
Clear
8WD4348-1XX
1 10 units
41J
230 AC
Clear
8WD4358-1XX
1 10 units
41J
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4428-6XB
8WD4428-6XC
8WD4428-6XD
8WD4428-6XE
8WD4428-6XF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
115 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4448-6XB
8WD4448-6XC
8WD4448-6XD
8WD4448-6XE
8WD4448-6XF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4458-6XB
8WD4458-6XC
8WD4458-6XD
8WD4458-6XE
8WD4458-6XF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
LEDs
Base BA 15d
For labeling panels see 8WD44, page 13/117.

1)
Markings for 30, 45, 60 and 90.
2)
For horizontal mounting, only 1 element is recommended.
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/113
13
Incandescent lamps, 5 W
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Features:
Thermoplast enclosure, diameter 70 mm
Advanced design and significantly improved illumination
Fast and flexible connection using spring-type terminals
Integrated degree of protection IP65

Up to five elements can be mounted

Version
Rated voltage
Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Acoustic elements1)
Buzzer elements 85 dB,
pulsating or continuous tone,
adjustable by means of a wire
jumper
24 AC/DC
Black
8WD4420-0FA
1 unit
41J
115 AC
Black
8WD4440-0FA
1 unit
41J
230 AC
Black
8WD4450-0FA
1 unit
41J
Siren elements,
multi-tone, 100 dB,
8 tones and volume are adjustable
24 AC/DC
Black
8WD4420-0EA2
1 unit
41J
115 AC
Black
8WD4440-0EA2
1 unit
41J
230 AC
Black
8WD4450-0EA2
1 unit
41J
Siren elements 108 dB, IP40
24 DC
Black
8WD4420-0EA
1 unit
41J
Light elements for incandescent lamps/LEDs, BA 15d bases2)

12 ... 230 AC/DC
Red
8WD4400-1AB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4400-1AC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4400-1AD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4400-1AE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4400-1AF
1 unit
41J
Light elements with integrated flash lamps3)

Flashlight elements with integrated 24 DC
electronic flash
115 AC
230 AC
One acoustic element can be mounted per signaling column. The cover is
included in the scope of supply of the acoustic elements and fixed in
place.
2)
The lamp is not included in the scope of supply. Please order separately.
3)
The lamp is included in the scope of supply.
8WD4420-0CB
1 unit
41J
8WD4420-0CC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4420-0CD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4420-0CE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4420-0CF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4440-0CB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4440-0CC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4440-0CD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4440-0CE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4440-0CF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4450-0CB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4450-0CC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4450-0CD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4450-0CE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4450-0CF
1 unit
41J
13
1)
Red
Green
13/114
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Rated voltage
Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

24 AC/DC
115 AC
230 AC
Blinklight elements
24 AC/DC
115 AC
230 AC
Rotating light elements
24 AC/DC
Red
8WD4420-5AB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4420-5AC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4420-5AD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4420-5AE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4420-5AF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4440-5AB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4440-5AC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4440-5AD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4440-5AE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4440-5AF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4450-5AB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4450-5AC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4450-5AD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4450-5AE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4450-5AF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4420-5BB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4420-5BC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4420-5BD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4420-5BE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4420-5BF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4440-5BB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4440-5BC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4440-5BD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4440-5BE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4440-5BF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4450-5BB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4450-5BC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4450-5BD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4450-5BE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4450-5BF
1 unit
41J
Red
8WD4420-5DB
1 unit
41J
Green
8WD4420-5DC
1 unit
41J
Yellow
8WD4420-5DD
1 unit
41J
Clear
8WD4420-5DE
1 unit
41J
Blue
8WD4420-5DF
1 unit
41J
Adapter elements for AS-Interface

With/without external auxiliary
voltage, switchable
A/B technology
For 3 signaling
elements 24 V DC
Black
8WD4428-0BD
1 unit
41J
Standard AS-i
For 4 signaling
elements 24 V DC
Black
8WD4428-0BE
1 unit
41J
For mounting on pipes
8WD4408-0AA
1 unit
41J
For mounting on brackets and floors
8WD4408-0AB
1 unit
41J
For mounting on pipes
8WD4408-0AD
1 unit
41J
For mounting on brackets and floors
8WD4408-0AE
1 unit
41J
Cover (replacement)
8WD4408-0XA
1 unit
41J
Connection elements with cover
Black
Screw terminals
1)
The connection element with cover is an essential part for assembling the
signaling columns.

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/115
13
Connection elements1)
Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Mounting
Foot with pipe
Pipe length 100 mm
8WD4308-0DA
1 unit
41J
Feet, single
Plastic, for mounting on pipes A
8WD4308-0DB
1 unit
41J
Metal,
for pipe lengths > 400 mm
8WD4308-0DC
1 unit
41J
Adjustable-angle feet
for positioning in 7.5 increments1)
Plastic,
for mounting on pipes,
incl. rubber seal
8WD4408-0DF
1 unit
41J
Pipes, single
Length 100 mm
8WD4208-0EF
1 unit
41J
Length 150 mm
8WD4308-0EE
1 unit
41J
Length 250 mm
8WD4308-0EA
1 unit
41J
Length 400 mm
8WD4308-0EB
1 unit
41J
Length 1 000 mm
8WD4308-0ED
1 unit
41J
Side cable outlet

(can also be used
without feet)
8WD4308-0DD
1 unit
41J
Side cable outlet,

with magnetic fixing2)
8WD4308-0DE
1 unit
41J
For single-sided mounting
8WD4308-0CA
1 unit
41J
For double-sided mounting
8WD4308-0CB
1 unit
41J
8WD4408-0CC
1 unit
41J
Sockets for feet
Brackets for wall mounting

(mounting without feet and pipe)
13
Brackets for mounting with foot
Brackets for base mounting
Mounting without feet and

pipe
8WD4408-0CD
1 unit
41J
Adapter for mounting on pipes

according to NPT
Mounting on pipes, 25 mm, A

with NPT 1/2" thread
8WD4308-0DF
1 unit
41J
1)
Markings for 30, 45, 60 and 90.
2)
For horizontal mounting, only 1 element is recommended.
13/116
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
Rated voltage
Color
DT Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Lamps
Incandescent lamps, 5 W
Base BA 15d
24 AC/DC
Clear
8WD4328-1XX
1 10 units
41J
115 AC
Clear
8WD4348-1XX
1 10 units
41J
230 AC
Clear
8WD4358-1XX
1 10 units
41J
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4428-6XB
8WD4428-6XC
8WD4428-6XD
8WD4428-6XE
8WD4428-6XF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
115 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4448-6XB
8WD4448-6XC
8WD4448-6XD
8WD4448-6XE
8WD4448-6XF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD4458-6XB
8WD4458-6XC
8WD4458-6XD
8WD4458-6XE
8WD4458-6XF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
8WD4408-0FA
1 unit
41J
LEDs
Base BA 15d
Inscriptions
Labeling panels
With fixing accessories for mounting on pipe 25 mm
Inscription area/ step 50 mm x 140 mm
13
Suitable for standard labels, e.g.

Zweckform 3425
Herma 4457

Siemens IC 10 2014
13/117
Siemens AG 2013
8WD5 Integrated Signal Lamps

8WD53 integrated signal lamps, 70 mm diameter
Overview
Design
Features:
Thermoplast enclosures, diameter 70 mm
Rated voltage 24 V, 115 V, 230 V AC/DC
Ambient temper. -20 to +50 C, incandescent lamp up to 60 C
The special shape of the integrated signal lamps means that the
light is emitted optimally in every direction (to the sides and upwards). Continuous lights (with incandescent lamp or LED) and
single-flash lights are available in five colors.
The LED versions of the integrated signal lamps offer a considerably longer endurance than the incandescent lamp versions.
All integrated signal lamps have a high degree of protection IP65
and are made of a material highly resistant to impact.
Mounting
8WD53 integrated signal lamps can be mounted directly at any
point of the machine for the purpose of giving visual signals.
They are mounted by means of a Pg 29 screw base with nut.
8WD53 integrated signal lamps

Version
Rated voltage
Color
DT Article No.
12 ... 230 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
115 AC
Price
per PU
PU (UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
8WD5300-1AB
8WD5300-1AC
8WD5300-1AD
8WD5300-1AE
8WD5300-1AF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
A
A
A
A
A
8WD5320-0CB
8WD5320-0CC
8WD5320-0CD
8WD5320-0CE
8WD5320-0CF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
D
8WD5340-0CB
8WD5340-0CC
8WD5340-0CD
8WD5340-0CE
8WD5340-0CF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
230 AC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
D
A
A
D
8WD5350-0CB
8WD5350-0CC
8WD5350-0CD
8WD5350-0CE
8WD5350-0CF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Continuous light
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD5320-5AB
8WD5320-5AC
8WD5320-5AD
8WD5320-5AE
8WD5320-5AF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Blinklight lamps
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD5320-5BB
8WD5320-5BC
8WD5320-5BD
8WD5320-5BE
8WD5320-5BF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
Rotating lights
24 AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
Blue
A
A
A
A
A
8WD5320-5DB
8WD5320-5DC
8WD5320-5DD
8WD5320-5DE
8WD5320-5DF
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
41J
41J
41J
41J
41J
8WD5308-0EG
1 unit
41J
Luminaires for incandescent lamps/LED, BA 15d base

Continuous lights1)
Luminaires with integrated flash lamp

Single-flash lights with integrated
electronic flash
13
Luminaires with integrated LED
Accessories for mounting (optional)

Pipe adapter
For mounting on pipes2)
1)
Lamp not included in scope of supply, see Signaling Columns, page 13/117.
13/118
Siemens IC 10 2014
2)
Pipes and feet see Signaling Columns, page 13/116.

14
Siemens AG 2013
Parameterization,
Configuration and
Visualization with SIRIUS
Price groups
PG 200, 346, 42B, 42C, 42D, 42H,
42J, 4N1
Introduction
14/5
Soft Starter ES
14/9
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter

block library for SIMATIC PCS 7
14/13
Motor Starter ES
14/17
SIRIUS motor starter block library for

SIMATIC PCS 7
14/20
14/24
SIMOCODE ES
14/28

for SIMATIC PCS 7
14/31

for SIMATIC PCS 7
14/33
14
14/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Parameterization, Configuration and Visualization with SIRIUS

Introduction
Overview
SIRIUS ES engineering software (E-SW)
Intuitive, efficient and future-proof the engineering programs

of the SIRIUS ES software family
The programs of the SIRIUS ES software family enable:
The SIRIUS ES programs such as Motor Starter ES,

Soft Starter ES, MSS ES and SIMOCODE ES are available in
three versions which differ in user-friendliness, scope of
functions and price:
Basic
The Basic version contains all basic functions that are needed
to parameterize devices. These include both parameterization
functions and also operator control, diagnostics and test functions.
Standard
The Standard version contains the basic functionality plus
standard functions. The standard functions include parameterization with the aid of integrated graphic editors, creation
of typicals, parameter export, analog value recording and
parameter comparison.
Premium
Die Premium versions contain the complete functionality of
the software package. Besides the standard functionality,
this includes communication functions such as access via
PROFIBUS/PROFINET and S7 routing.
Note:
The scope of functions depends on the SIRIUS ES program,
for details see the descriptions of the individual products.
14
Intuitive engineering from the word go

The SIRIUS ES programs enable you to focus on your engineering task. Thanks to the intuitive layout and simple navigation, a clearly arranged configuring of device functions and
their parameters is possible online and offline. The task- and
user-oriented portal views as well as the flexible screen layout,
the uniform look and feel for all program editors and finally the
graphic network and device configuration provide support.
Efficient parameterization for quick success
Faster start-up is achieved by the use of local and global
libraries. The joint hardware configuration for all components
in the application also assists in the efficient parameterization
and simple networking of system components. Not least, integrated system diagnostics offers fast troubleshooting and efficient fault analysis, thus making it possible to shorten startup
times even further and to minimize production downtimes.
Future-oriented basis for innovative results
All future product developments are seamlessly integrated
into the TIA Portal. Investments made up to now are still safe
tomorrow. To harmonize engineering in all performance
classes, the SIRIUS ES programs in TIA Portal are scalable
and upwardly compatible. In the event of an upgrade, existing
projects can easily be transferred and integrated into the
next product level. Even existing SIRIUS ES projects in
version 2007 can easily be migrated to the TIA Portal
software version.
The next generation of SIRIUS ES programs, such as
SIMOCODE ES V12 (TIA Portal), is based on the central
engineering framework Totally Integrated Automation Portal
(TIA Portal), which provides the user with a consistent, efficient
and intuitive solution for all automation tasks. Thus, the TIA Portal
is also the integrated working environment for the programs in
the SIRIUS software family. The same operator control concept,
the elimination of interfaces and a high degree of user-friendliness make it possible to quickly integrate SIRIUS devices into an
automation process and start them up with the TIA Portal.
Besides SIMOCODE ES Version 12, which is based on the central engineering framework Totally Integrated Automation Portal
(TIA Portal), the 2007 version of the software continues to be
available for commissioning, operation and diagnostics of
SIMOCODE pro.
14/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Efficient engineering and startup with graphic user interfaces and simple
network and device configuration
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Types of delivery and license
The programs of the SIRIUS ES software family are available as
follows:
Floating license the license for any one user at any one time
- Authorizes any one user
- Independent of the number of installations (unlike the
single license which is allowed to be installed once only)
- Only the actual use of the program has to be licensed
Combo license - license for parallel use
- Licensed parallel use of the TIA Portal version and
SIRIUS ES Version 2007
- For all other properties such as floating license
Trial license (free use of all program functions for 14/21 days
for test and evaluation purposes, included on every product
CD/DVD, available in the download file of the SIRIUS ES
program in the Service&Support portal)
Following delivery versions are available in addition for the

programs of the SIRIUS ES software family:
Upgrade
Switching from an old to a new version with expanded
functions, e.g. upgrade from Motor Starter ES 2006 to
Motor Starter ES 2007
Powerpack
Special pack for switching within the same software version
to a more powerful version with more functionality, e.g.
Powerpack Motor Starter ES 2007 for switching from Standard
to Premium
To keep you up to date at all times we offer a special service
which supplies you automatically with all service packs and
upgrades.
License download
User-friendly license key download from our Mall (for selected
countries) as an easy and quick way for you to receive additional licenses for your software.
www.siemens.com/tia-online-software-delivery.
Article number scheme for the engineering software


@@@@
SIRIUS engineering software
13th 14th 15th 16th
Software type
Package designation 1
Hardware, operating system
Data carriers
Serial number
Function status
Product category
0
@
Language
Delivery versions
License type
Example
3ZS1
3ZS1
Note:
article numbers.
Safety note:
14

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/3
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Block libraries for SIMATIC PCS 7
The PCS 7 block libraries for SIMOCODE, motor starters, soft
starters and AS-Interface can be used for simple and easy integration of the corresponding units into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. PCS 7 block libraries contain the diagnostics and driver blocks corresponding with the diagnostics and
driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the elements (symbols and faceplate) required for operator control and process
monitoring.
The PCS 7 block libraries supplied on CD-ROM allow the user to
run the required engineering software on the engineering station
(single license) including the runtime software for executing the
AS modules in an automation system (single license). If the
AS modules are to be used in additional automation systems,
the corresponding number of runtime licenses are required
which are supplied without a data carrier.
Advanced Process Library (APL) faceplates and blocks for control and
measured data of the SIMOCODE pro block library for PCS 7
Article number scheme of the block libraries for SIMATIC PCS 7


@@@@
SIRIUS engineering software
13th 14th 15th 16th
Software type, standard FB/FC
Type
Function status, start of delivery
Product category
Language (multilingual)
Y
@
Delivery versions
License type
3ZS1
Example
14
3ZS1
Note:
Safety note:

article numbers.

14/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Soft Starter ES
Overview
Easy and clearly arranged parameter setting of the 3RW44 soft starter
with Soft Starter ES 2007
Graphic presentation of measured values with the trace function

(oscilloscope function) of Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard and Premium
The Soft Starter ES software permits the quick and easy parameterization, monitoring and diagnostics of SIRIUS 3RW44 HighFeature soft starters for service purposes.
The device parameters can be configured directly on the PC and
transferred to the soft starter through a serial cable or an optional
PROFIBUS/PROFINET interface.
Additional functions
Efficient engineering with three program versions
Easy creation of typicals

Typicals can be created for devices and applications with only
minimum differences in their parameters. These typicals contain all the parameters which are needed for the parameterization. In addition it is possible to specify which of these parameters are fixed and which can be adapted, e. g. by the startup
engineer.
The Soft Starter ES software program is available in three versions which differ in their user-friendliness, scope of functions
and price.
Soft Starter ES
Basic
Standard
Premium
Access through the local interface

on the device
Parameter assignment
Operating
Diagnostics
Creation of typicals
--
1)
Parameter export
--
Comparison functions
--
Standard-compatible printout
according to EN ISO 7200
--
Service data
(slave pointer, statistics data)
--
Access through
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
--
--
Group functions
--
--
Teleservice through MPI
--
--
S7 routing
--
--
--
--
Standard-compatible printouts
The software tool greatly simplifies machine documentation. It
enables parameterization printouts according to EN ISO 7200.
The elements to be printed are easy to select and group as
required.
Group function
For the user-friendly parameterization of numerous devices or
applications of the same type, the programs of the SIRIUS ES
software family offer a group function which enables the parameterization of several devices to be read out or written
through PROFIBUS/PROFINET. In conjunction with typicals it
is even possible to selectively adapt the same parameters in
any number of parameterizations.
The Soft Starter ES Premium version supports the use of MPI
Teleservice (comprising the Teleservice software and various
Teleservice adapters) for remote diagnostics of the devices.
This facilitates diagnostics and maintenance, and it shortens
response times for service purposes.
14
Function available
1)
Typicals with Service Pack 1 and higher.
Siemens IC 10 2014
14/5
Siemens AG 2013

Soft Starter ES
Soft Starter ES is available as follows:
- Independent of the number of installations (unlike the single
license which is allowed to be installed once only)
- Trial license (free use of all program functions for 14 days for
test and evaluation purposes, included on every product
CD, available in the download file of the SIRIUS ES program
in the Service&Support portal).
Following delivery versions are available in addition for
Soft Starter ES 2007:
Upgrade
functions, e.g. upgrade from Soft Starter ES 2006 to
Soft Starter ES 2007.
Powerpack
Powerpack Soft Starter ES 2007 for switching from Standard
to Premium.

upgrades.
License download
Licensing procedure
To make licensing easier, the three versions of Soft Starter ES are
available with the following license:
14 day trial license for Premium functions:
for test and evaluation purposes, included on every product CD,
available also in the download file of the SIRIUS
Soft Starter ES 2007 program in the Service&Support portal.
System requirements
Soft Starter ES 2007 parameterization, start-up and diagnostics
software for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
Basic/Standard
Premium
Product version *E04*1)
Product version *E06*2)
Operating system
Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2 or 3),

Windows 7 32/64-bit Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise (Service Pack 1)
Processor
Pentium 800 MHz/1 GHz (Windows 7)
RAM
512 Mbyte (Windows XP Professional)/1 GB (Windows 7 32 Bit)/

2 GB (Windows 7 64 Bit)
Free space on hard disk
150 Mbyte
CD-ROM/DVD drive
Yes (only when installing from CD)
Interface
Depends on PC cable: serial (COM) or USB
PC cable/parameterization cable/connection cable
Yes
PROFIBUS/PROFINET communication module (optional)
--
1)
SIRIUS 3RW44 with product version *E04*. Installed in starters delivered

after December 2005.
2)
SIRIUS 3RW44 with product version *E06*. Installed in starters delivered

after May 2006.
Yes
Benefits
14
Transparent setting of the device functions and their parameters online and offline
Effective diagnostics functions on the soft starter and display
of the most important measured values
Trace function (oscilloscope function) for recording measured
values and events (in the Soft Starter ES Standard and
Premium versions)
14/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Complete transparency thanks to printout, logbook and event

memory
High degree of user-friendliness convenient user interface,
with German, English and French as possible operating languages
Time savings through shorter startup times
Fast, low-cost licensing using a simple licensing procedure
(available online too)
Siemens AG 2013

Soft Starter ES

Soft Starter ES parameterization and service software
for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters
Version
DT
Article No.
License key download, Class A, without CD

Upgrade for Soft Starter ES 2006
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1313-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-5CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42H
Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic

Engineering software in limited-function version for
diagnostics purposes, software and documentation on CD,
3ZS1313-4CC10-0YA5
Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard


Powerpack for Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic
Notes:
14
For description of the software versions see page 14/5.

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/7
Siemens AG 2013

Soft Starter ES
Version
DT
Article No.
Upgrade for Soft Starter ES 2006
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1313-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-6CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42H
3ZS1313-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42H
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
RS 232 PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
Optional PROFIBUS communication module

for SIRIUS 3RW44
3RW4900-0KC00
1 unit
42H
Optional PROFINET communication module

for SIRIUS 3RW44
3RW4900-0NC00
1 unit
42H
Soft Starter ES 2007 Premium

PROFIBUS/PROFINET/STEP7 Object Manager

communication through the system interface or
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
Powerpack for Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
Notes:
Please order PC cable separately, see Accessories.
Accessories
Price
per PU
for communication with Soft Starter ES through the system
interface
USB PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0

for communication with Soft Starter ES through the system
interface
USB/serial adapters
For connecting the RS 232 PC cable to the USB interface
of a PC, recommended for use in conjunction with
Soft Starter ES
14
3UF7941-0AA00-0
14/8
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter block library
for SIMATIC PCS 7
Overview
3RW44 soft starter PCS 7 block library contains the diagnostics
and driver blocks corresponding with the SIMATIC PCS 7 diagnostics and driver concept as well as the elements (symbols and
faceplates) required for operator control and process monitoring.
Integrated functionality for optimal process control
for all process control systems
In addition to the general sensor technology, the motor feeder
data is increasingly being integrated into the process control
system. By integrating the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters into the
process control system it becomes possible to prevent errors in
the motor feeder simply and reliably, or to detect these errors
quickly and rectify them. Downtimes are reduced to a minimum
or can be prevented before they happen.
For example, the output and display of the key measured values
calculated by the 3RW44 is also a good aid for being able to assess and monitor the current system status.
Easy integration with the PCS 7 block library
The PCS 7 block library can be used for simple and easy integration of SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters into the SIMATIC PCS 7
process control system. The focus here is simple configuration.
The function of the modules is based on the PCS 7 standard
libraries and is optimally harmonized with the functions of the
SIRIUS 3RW44.
Users who have previously integrated motor feeders into conventional technology via signal blocks and motor or valve blocks
or, for example, already have experience with SIMOCODE modules, are easily able to switch to SIRIUS 3RW44.
Evaluation of additional motor feeder measurements

All measured values calculated by the soft starter, such as current, voltage and output of the feeder, are displayed and output
via the measured value blocks. A key advantage here is that
where required, a wide range of information on important motor
feeder measurements is available, e.g. for load monitoring.
The 3RW44 is not only able to detect measured values here,
but also to react if these values are exceeded or undershot, for
example, via custom settings e.g. with a motor disconnection
or with a warning.
The faceplate for the measured values is accessed from the
motor block faceplate.
All blocks required for the automation systems are provided by

the PCS 7 block library as are the block symbols and faceplates
for the operator station required for monitoring and control.
With the integration of the SIRIUS 3RW44 into SIMATIC PDM, the
system-wide device parameterization and diagnostics of the
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are possible from a central point.
Motor block for the direct control of the drive
To reduce the amount of configuring work required, functions for

signal processing and technological functions are integrated
into one motor block.
The important measured value the current in the motor feeder
is recorded via the 3RW44 and monitored for motor protection.
The motor current is accessible from the I&C system via the motor
blocks.
The block symbols and faceplates for the motor blocks display
the motor feeders on the operator station and provide all the required information for monitoring and control as well as detailed
diagnostics.
Faceplate for measured values
Evaluation of maintenance-related motor feeder data

The 3RW44 has powerful functions to detect and monitor maintenance-related motor feeder data. For example, the operating
and downtimes of the motor, operating cycles and overload tripping events are detected and stored directly on the device. If required, the information already on the device is available via the
statistics block in the I&C system. The display is provided on a
separate faceplate for the statistics block on the operator
station.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter PCS 7 block library supplied
on CD-ROM allows the user to run the required engineering software on the engineering station (single license) including the
runtime software for executing the AS modules in an automation
system (single license). If the AS modules are to be used in additional automation systems, the corresponding number of runtime licenses are required which are supplied without a data carrier.
Siemens IC 10 2014
14/9
14
The low-voltage motors started and protected by SIRIUS 3RW44

soft starters can be integrated into the process automation via
the motor blocks. This means that they form the interface
between the process control system and the motors controlled
by the SIRIUS 3RW44.
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
Benefits
Uniform and continuous integration into SIMATIC PCS 7
Standardized blocks for simple integration and optimal
operation
Including Advanced Process Library (APL) in Version V8
Greater process transparency due to greater information

density in the process control system
System-wide device parameterization and diagnostics with
SIMATIC PDM

Version
DT Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter block library for SIMATIC PCS 7

Version V8 with Advanced Process Library (APL)
3ZS1633-1XX02-0YA0
1 unit
42H
3ZS1633-2XX02-0YB0
1 unit
42H
3ZS1633-1XX02-0YE0
1 unit
42H

Scope of supply:
3ZS1633-1XX02-0YA0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V8
Required for using the AS modules of the engineering software V8
on an additional automation system within a plant
Type of delivery:
one license for one automation system,
SIRIUS 3RW44, V6.0 or V7
to version SIRIUS 3RW44 V8
Scope of supply:
for PCS 7 version V 8.0
14
Type of delivery:
14/10
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
Version
DT Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter block library for SIMATIC PCS 7

Version V7
3ZS1633-1XX00-0YA0
1 unit
42H
3ZS1633-2XX00-0YB0
1 unit
42H
3ZS1633-1XX10-0YE0
1 unit
42H

Scope of supply:
for PCS 7, version V 6.1/V7.0/V7.11)
3ZS1633-1XX00-0YA0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V7
or the engineering software migration V7-V8 on an additional
automation system within a plant
Type of delivery:
one license for one automation system,
V6.1/V7.0/V7.1 of the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter block library
for PCS 7
Conditions of use:
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter block library for PCS 7 for the
PCS 7 version V6.1, V7.0 or V7.1
directly onto a system with PCS 7 version V8.0;
installation of the previous version is unnecessary.
Scope of supply:
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters into the PCS 7 process control
system, for PCS 7 version V8.0
Type of delivery:
runtime licenses
For earlier versions of the engineering software, SP1 can be downloaded

from www.siemens.com/sirius-engineering.
14
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/11
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
More information
Programming and Operating Manual for PCS 7 Block Library
for SIRIUS Soft Starter 3RW44 V6.1/V7.0 + SP1 see
Programming Manual and GETTING STARTED are valid for

engineering software V7 and engineering software
migration V7-V8.
14
Getting Started for PCS 7 Block Library for

SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter V6.1/V7.0 + SP1 see
Note:
14/12
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Motor Starter ES
Overview
Motor Starter ES
Motor Starter ES is used for start-up, parameterization,

diagnostics, documentation and the preventative maintenance
of the motor starters in the SIMATIC ET 200S, ET 200pro,
ECOFAST and M200D product families.
Interfacing is performed
Through the local interface on the device
With PROFIBUS DP V1 capable motor starters from any point
in PROFIBUS or in PROFINET (applies to ET 200S DP V1/
ET 200pro/ECOFAST/M200D)
With PROFINET capable motor starters from any point in
PROFINET or in PROFIBUS (applies to ET 200S DP V1,
ET 200pro/M200D)
Using Motor Starter ES, the communication-capable motor starters are easily parameterized during start-up, monitored during
normal operation and successfully diagnosed for service purposes. Preventative maintenance is supported by a function for
reading out diverse statistical data (e. g.operating hours, operating cycles, cut-off currents, etc.). The user is supported during
these procedures with comprehensive Help functions and plain
text displays.
Motor Starter ES can either be used as a stand-alone program
or it can be integrated into STEP 7 via an Object Manager.
The Motor Starter ES software program is available in three versions which differ in their user-friendliness, scope of functions
and price.
Motor Starter ES
Basic
Standard
Premium
ET 200S High-Feature
PROFIBUS IM
ET 200S High-Feature
PROFINET IM
ECOFAST AS-Interface
High-Feature
--
ECOFAST PROFIBUS
ET 200pro PROFIBUS IM
ET 200pro PROFINET IM
M200D AS-Interface Standard
( )
M200D PROFIBUS
M200D PROFINET
Basic
Premium
Operating
Diagnostics
--
--
--
Standard-compliant printout
--
Service data
(slave pointer, statistics data)
--
Access through PROFIBUS
--
--
Access through PROFINET
--
--
S7 routing
--
--
--
--
STEP 7 Object Manager
--
--
Trace function
--
Function available
The elements to be printed are easy to select and group as required.
engineer.
The Motor Starter ES Premium version supports the use of MPI
Motor Starter ES is available as follows:
in the Service&Support portal)
14

Standard

on the device
Function available, () Available with restricted functionality

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/13
Siemens AG 2013

Motor Starter ES
Following delivery versions are also available for
Motor Starter ES 2007:
Upgrade
functions, e.g. upgrade from Motor Starter ES 2006 to
Powerpack
Powerpack Motor Starter ES 2007 for switching from Standard
to Premium

upgrades.
License download
System requirements
Parameterization, start-up and diagnostics software
For ECOFAST Motor Starter, SIMATIC ET 200S High-Feature Starter,
SIMATIC ET 200pro Starter and M200D (AS-I Standard, PROFIBUS,
PROFINET)
Operating system
Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2 or 3)

Windows 7 32/64 Bit Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise (Service Pack 1)
Processor
RAM
512 Mbyte (Windows XP Professional)/1 GB (Windows 7 32 Bit)/

2 GB (Windows 7 64 Bit)
Monitor resolution
1024 x 768
Free space on hard disk1)
400 Mbyte
CD-ROM/DVD drive
Interface
Yes
PROFIBUS card/PROFIBUS processor
Optional, for parameterization and diagnostics through PROFIBUS
Ethernet interface/PROFINET card
Optional, for parameterization and diagnostics through PROFINET
1)
Additional free space recommended, e.g. for swap-out file.
Benefits
14
Fast, error-free configuration and startup of motor starters

even without extensive previous knowledge
Transparent setting of the device functions and their
parameters online and offline
Effective diagnostics functions on the soft starter and display
of the most important measured values
14/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Trace function (oscilloscope function) for recording measured

values and events (included in the Motor Starter ES Standard
and Premium software version for M200D PROFIBUS and
PROFINET).
Siemens AG 2013

Motor Starter ES

For ECOFAST Motor Starter, SIMATIC ET 200S High-Feature
Starter, SIMATIC ET 200pro Starter and M200D (AS-I Standard,
PROFIBUS, PROFINET)
Version
DT
Article No.

Upgrade for Motor Starter ES 2006
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1310-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-5CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42D
Motor Starter ES 2007 Basic

Engineering software in limited-function version for
diagnostics purposes, software and documentation on CD,
3ZS1310-4CC10-0YA5
Motor Starter ES 2007 Standard


Powerpack for Motor Starter ES 2007 Basic
Notes:
14

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/15
Siemens AG 2013

Motor Starter ES
Version
DT
Article No.
Upgrade for Motor Starter ES 2006
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1310-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-6CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42D
3ZS1310-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42D
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Control module 2DI LC COM
3RK1903-0CH20
1 unit
42D
6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0
1 unit
200
3RK1922-2BP00
1 unit
42D
6SL3555-0PA00-2AA0
1 unit
346
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
Motor Starter ES 2007 Premium

PROFIBUS/PROFINET/STEP7 Object Manager

communication through the system interface or PROFIBUS
Powerpack for Motor Starter ES 2007 Standard
Notes:
Accessories
Price
per PU
For ET 200S High-Feature starter, Failsafe starter A
LOGO! PC cables
For ET 200S High-Feature starter
3RK1903-0CH20
Serial data connection between ET 200pro MS/FC,

M200D and laptop/PC/PG or MS
USB interface cable
Serial data connection between ET 200pro MS/FC,
M200D and laptop/PC/PG or MS
USB/serial adapters
14
For connecting an RS 232 PC cable to the USB interface

ET 200S/ECOFAST/ET 200pro motor starters
14/16
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIRIUS motor starter block library
for SIMATIC PCS 7
Overview
The SIRIUS Motor Starter PCS 7 block library supplied on
CD-ROM allows the user to run the required engineering software on the engineering station (single license) including the
runtime software for executing the AS modules in an automation
system (single license). If the AS modules are to be used in additional automation systems, the corresponding number of runtime licenses are required which are supplied without a data carrier.
With the SIRIUS motor starter PCS 7 block library,

SIRIUS ET 200S and ET 200pro motor starters can be easily and
simply integrated into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The SIRIUS motor starter PCS 7 block library contains the
diagnostics and driver blocks corresponding to the SIMATIC
PCS 7 diagnostics and driver concept as well as the elements
(symbols and faceplates) required for operator control and
process monitoring.
Easy integration with the PCS 7 block library
The PCS 7 block library can be used for simple and easy integration of SIRIUS ET 200S and ET 200pro motor starters into the
SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system V7.0, V7.1 and V8.0. The
focus here is simple configuration. The function of the modules
is based on the PCS 7 standard libraries and is optimally harmonized with the functions of the SIRIUS motor starters.
Faceplate for diagnostics
Users who have previously integrated motor feeders into PCS 7

are easily able to switch to SIRIUS motor starters.
All blocks required for the automation systems are provided by
the PCS 7 block library as are the block symbols and faceplates for the operator station required for monitoring and control.
Regardless of whether, for example, the motor starter is controlled directly, or its current value is to be read out and status,
warning and error signals are to be displayed, the right modules
are always available.
Connection to powerrate
The SIRIUS motor starters can be connected to powerrate. The
block provides the possibility of integrating the motor starters
into energy management.
The current values are supplied directly from the motor starter
block, while the voltage and the power factor (p.f.) must be entered manually.
Faceplate for energy management with powerrate

operation

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/17
14
Benefits
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7

Version
DT Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG

3ZS1630-1XX01-0YA0
1 unit
42D
3ZS1630-2XX01-0YB0
1 unit
42D
3ZS1630-1XX01-0YE0
1 unit
42D
3ZS1630-1XX10-0YE0
1 unit
42H

Scope of supply:
SIRIUS motor starters into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7 version V 7.0/V7.1
3ZS1630-1XX00-0YA0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V7
or the engineering software migration V7-V8 on an additional
automation system within a plant
Type of delivery:
Upgrade for SIRIUS motor starter block library
for SIMATIC PCS 7 V6.1/V7.0 to V7.0/V7.1
Scope of supply:
for PCS 7 version V7.0 or V7.1
Type of delivery:
For upgrading (migrating) an existing engineering software V7 of
the SIRIUS motor starter block library for PCS 7
Conditions of use:
SIRIUS motor starter block library for PCS 7
for the PCS 7 version V7.0 or V7.1
Scope of supply:
14
Type of delivery:
runtime licenses
14/18
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
More information
Programming and Operating Manual for SIRIUS Motor Starter
PCS 7 Block Library V7.1 see
Programming Manual and GETTING STARTED are valid for

engineering software V7 and engineering software
migration V7-V8.
14
Getting Started for SIRIUS Motor Starter PCS 7 Block Library

V7.1 see
Note:

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/19
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Selection of SIMOCODE pro device configuration in SIMOCODE ES V12
Parameterize easily and ergonomically with the CFC-based graphics

editor of SIMOCODE ES V12
SIMOCODE ES is the central software for configuration, startup,

operation and diagnostics of SIMOCODE pro.
Online functions for startup and diagnostics

To this end, SIMOCODE ES provides powerful functions for startup and diagnostics of motor feeders. Besides a detailed display
of status information and the causes of faults, all available measurement and statistics data can be retrieved online. Access to
the fault and event memory and also to analog values recorded
on the device, e.g. current or voltage, is also possible.
Version 12, which is based on the central engineering framework

Totally Integrated Automation Portal (TIA Portal), is available in
addition to SIMOCODE ES Version 2007.
SIMOCODE ES V12 is integrated seamlessly when further
TIA Portal-based software exists such as STEP 7 or WinCC, thus
enabling users to achieve a consistent, efficient and intuitive
solution for all automation tasks.
Users who use SIMOCODE ES V12 as stand-alone software also
profit from these advantages, through.
Three program versions
The user can choose between three different versions of
SIMOCODE ES: SIMOCODE ES Basic, SIMOCODE ES Standard
and SIMOCODE ES Premium. While SIMOCODE ES Basic is a
powerful tool for startup or maintenance personnel,
SIMOCODE ES Standard and Premium are the perfect tools for
engineers or configuration engineers on account of their larger
scope of functions and integrated graphics editor. Unlike the
Standard version, SIMOCODE ES Premium also permits parameterization and diagnostics through PROFIBUS. Indication of all
operating, service and diagnostics data supplies important information about the current state of the motor and plant at all
times everywhere on the PROFIBUS.
14
Working with libraries

Users can create copy templates for SIMOCODE pro device
configuration and can manage them in global or project libraries.
Thus, individual modules and diagrams and also complete device configurations can be saved as reusable elements for frequently occurring tasks.
Integrated graphics editor
The graphics editor is a part of SIMOCODE ES Standard and
SIMOCODE ES Premium. It is based on the Continuous Function
Chart (CFC) and adds a powerful tool to the parameterizing
interface that enables easy parameterization of devices by
Drag&Drop. Extremely compact documentation of all configured
parameters is possible, as is the graphic online presentation of
the configured device functions including all signal states during
operation.
14/20
Siemens IC 10 2014
Startup functions of SIMOCODE ES V12
Siemens AG 2013


SIMOCODE ES V12
Basic
Standard Premium

on the device
Parameter assignment in list form
Parameter printing in list form
Operating
Diagnostics
Test
Service data
Analog value recording1)
Parameterizing with convenient

graphical display
--
Parameterizing with the integrated

graphics editor (CFC-based)
--
Printing of diagrams
--
Parameter comparison
--
Access through PROFIBUS
--
--
--
--
S7 routing
--
--
Function available
1)
For SIMOCODE pro V.
SIMOCODE ES V12 offers numerous advantages of the
TIA Portal that can be used in an integrated working environment.
Seamless integration when using other TIA Portal-based
software such as STEP 7 or WinCC.
Thus, for example, the configuration for devices and networks
for all components used is created in a standardized environment.
Working with libraries
Users can create copy templates for device configuration and
can manage them in global libraries. In this way, frequently
used functions can be managed in a clearly structured
fashion.
SIMOCODE ES V12 is available as follows:

DVD, available in the download file of the SIRIUS ES
program in the Service&Support portal)
Combo license - license for parallel use
- Licensed parallel use of the TIA Portal version and
SIRIUS ES Version 2007
- For all other properties see floating license
SIMOCODE ES V12:
Upgrade
Upgrade of an old version to a new version with expanded
functions, e.g. upgrade from SIMOCODE ES 2007 to
SIMOCODE ES V12; includes a combo license for parallel
use of SIMOCODE ES 2007 and SIMOCODE ES V12
Powerpack
Powerpack SIMOCODE ES V12 Premium for switching from
Standard to Premium
upgrades.
License download
System requirements
SIMOCODE ES V12 parameterization, start-up and diagnostics software
for SIMOCODE pro
Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 required),
Windows 7 32/64 bit Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise (Service Pack 1),
Windows Server 2008 32 bit (Service Pack 2),
Windows Server 2008 64 bit R2 (Service Pack 1)
Processor
2 GHz (Core 2 Duo)
RAM
1 GB (Windows XP)
2 GB (other operating system)
Monitor resolution
1024 x 768
Graphics cards
32 Mbyte RAM, 24-bit color intensity
2 GB
CD-ROM/DVD drive
DVD-ROM (only when installing from DVD)
Interface
Yes
PROFIBUS interface
Siemens IC 10 2014
14
Operating system
14/21
Siemens AG 2013

Benefits
Easy parameterization with the graphics editor based on the
Continuous Function Chart (CFC) reduces engineering work
and shortens start-up times.
Clear plant documentation by means of graphic presentation
Detailed information, also when there are faults, is a help for
maintenance personnel and shortens downtimes
Universally applicable through stand-alone version or seamless integration into the central engineering framework when
other TIA Portal-based software such as STEP 7 or WinCC are
available
Parameter changes are also possible during normal operation
Users can create copy templates for device configurations
and can manage them in global libraries

Version
DT
Article No.

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1322-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES V12 Basic

Spanish/Chinese),
online functions through system interface)
SIMOCODE ES V12 Standard

Spanish/Chinese),
online functions through system interface
(CFC-based)

Spanish/Chinese),
combo license for parallel use of versions 2007 and V12
of SIRIUS ES,
online functions through system interface,
(CFC-based)
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES V12 Basic
14

Spanish/Chinese),
(CFC-based)
(CFC-based)
Notes:
14/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1322-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
RS 232 PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES V12 Premium

Spanish/Chinese),
(CFC-based)

Spanish/Chinese),
combo license for parallel use of versions 2007 and V12 of
SIRIUS ES,
(CFC-based)
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES V12 Standard
Spanish/Chinese),
(CFC-based)
PROFIBUS, parameterizing with integrated
graphics editor (CFC-based)
Notes:
Accessories
Price
per PU
USB PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0
14

for communication with SIMOCODE ES through the
system interface
system interface
USB/serial adapters
SIMOCODE ES
3UF7941-0AA00-0

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/23
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE ES
Overview
Selection of predefined control functions in SIMOCODE ES
Easy and ergonomic parameterizing with the graphics editor
Besides SIMOCODE ES Version 12, which is based on the central engineering framework Totally Integrated Automation Portal
(TIA Portal), the 2007 version of the software continues to be
available for commissioning, operation and diagnostics of
SIMOCODE pro.
Trend display of measured values

With this online function, SIMOCODE ES Standard or Premium
can present the trend of up to five different measured values. It
is thus possible for example to record and evaluate the start-up
characteristic of a motor or its behavior in different load conditions.
As a result, unnecessary plant downtimes can be consistently

prevented, for example, by changing parameters online during
operation. Control functions, protection functions and the wiring
of the control circuit are implemented in SIMOCODE pro by predefined control functions and can be readily configured using
SIMOCODE ES.
Three program versions
The user can choose between three different versions of
SIMOCODE ES: SIMOCODE ES Basic, SIMOCODE ES Standard
and SIMOCODE ES Premium. While SIMOCODE ES Basic is a
powerful tool for startup or maintenance personnel,
SIMOCODE ES Standard and Premium are the perfect tools for
engineers or configuration engineers on account of their larger
scope of functions and integrated graphics editor. Unlike the
Standard version, SIMOCODE ES Premium also permits parameterization and diagnostics through PROFIBUS/PROFINET.
Indication of all operating, service and diagnostics data supplies
important information about the current state of the motor and
plant at all times everywhere on PROFIBUS/PROFINET.
14
Object Manager for SIMATIC S7

The Object Manager is a component of SIMOCODE ES Premium. Thanks to this software tool, SIMOCODE ES is totally integrated in SIMATIC S7. If the two software packages are installed
on the PG/PC with which the SIMATIC S7 hardware configuration
is performed, then SIMOCODE ES can be called up directly from
STEP 7.
The graphics editor is a part of SIMOCODE ES Standard and
SIMOCODE ES Premium. It adds a powerful tool to the parameterizing interface that enables easy parameterization of devices
by Drag&Drop. Extremely compact documentation of all configured parameters is possible, as is the graphic online presentation of the configured device functions including all signal states
during operation.
14/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Trend displays of measured values in SIMOCODE ES
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE ES
Group function
For the user-friendly parameterization of numerous devices or
applications of the same type, the programs of the SIRIUS ES
software family offer a group function which enables the parameterization of several devices to be read out or written
through PROFIBUS/PROFINET. In conjunction with typicals it
is even possible to selectively adapt the same parameters in
any number of parameterizations.
SIMOCODE ES
Basic
Standard Premium

on the device
Operating
Diagnostics
Test
Service data
Parameterizing with the integrated

graphics editor
--
--
Parameter export
--

The SIMOCODE ES Premium version supports the use of MPI
--
Trend display of measured values
--
Parameter comparison
--
recording1)
--
Standard-compatible printout
--
Group functions
--
--
Access through
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
--
--
--
--
S7 routing
--
--
--
--
Analog value
Function available
1)
For SIMOCODE pro V.
In addition to device-specific parameterization,
SIMOCODE ES 2007 also offers the following functionality in
a uniform look and feel. These functions are available in many
SIRIUS ES programs.
The elements to be printed are easy to select and group as required.
engineer.
SIMOCODE ES is available as follows:

in the Service&Support portal)
SIMOCODE ES 2007:
Upgrade
functions, e.g. upgrade from SIMOCODE ES 2004 to
SIMOCODE ES 2007
Powerpack
Powerpack SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium for switching from
Standard to Premium
upgrades.
License download
System requirements
Operating system

Windows 7 32/64 bit Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise (Service Pack 1)
Processor
RAM
512 Mbyte (Windows XP Professional)/1 GB (Windows 7 32 bit)/

2 GB (Windows 7 64 bit)
Monitor resolution
1024 x 768
280 Mbyte
CD-ROM/DVD drive
Interface
Yes
Network adapter
100 Mbit/s Ethernet, for parameterization and diagnostics through

PROFINET
PROFIBUS card/PROFIBUS processor
Siemens IC 10 2014
14/25
14
SIMOCODE ES 2007 parameterization, start-up and diagnostics

software for SIMOCODE pro
Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE ES
Benefits
Easy parameterization reduces the amount of engineering
work and shortens start-up times
Clear plant documentation by means of graphic presentation
Detailed information, also when there are faults, is a help for
maintenance personnel and shortens downtimes
Stand-alone version and integration in SIMATIC STEP 7

enable universal use
Parameter changes are also possible during normal operation
Consistent data storage and easy configuration by means of
integration in TIA (Totally Integrated Automation)

Version
DT
Article No.

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-4CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic

3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard


Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
Notes:
14

14/26
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIMOCODE ES
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YE5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42J
3ZS1312-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42J
Version
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
RS 232 PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium

communication through PROFIBUS/PROFINET or system
interface, integrated graphics editor,

Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
Notes:
Accessories
Price
per PU
system interface
USB PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0

system interface
USB/serial adapters
14

SIMOCODE ES
3UF7941-0AA00-0

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/27
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
Overview
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library supplied on CD-ROM
allows users to run the required engineering software on an engineering station (single license) including the runtime software
for executing the AS modules in an automation system (single
license). If the AS modules are to be used in additional automation systems, the corresponding number of runtime licenses are
required which are supplied without a data carrier.
Advanced Process Library (APL) - faceplates and blocks for statistical

data of the SIMOCODE pro library for PCS 7
Advanced Process Library (APL) - faceplates and blocks for control and
measured data of the SIMOCODE pro library for PCS 7
The PCS 7 block library can be used for simple and easy integration of SIMOCODE pro into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. One focus here is on easy configuration, because
the number of required configuration steps is reduced crucially.
The configuration of the modules is based on the PCS 7 standard configuration processes and is optimally harmonized with
the functions of SIMOCODE pro. Users who have previously
integrated conventional motor feeders into PCS 7 will therefore
find it easy to switch to SIMOCODE pro.
Benefits
14

operation
14/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1632-1XX02-0YA0
1 unit
42J
3ZS1632-2XX02-0YB0
1 unit
42J
3ZS1632-1XX02-0YE0
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7

Version V8 with Advanced Process Library (APL)
Scope of supply:
3ZS1632-1XX02-0YA0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V8
software V8 within a plant
Type of delivery:
SIMOCODE pro, V6.0 or V7
to version SIMOCODE pro V8
Scope of supply:
14
Type of delivery:

Siemens IC 10 2014
14/29
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3UF7982-0AA10-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7982-0AA11-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7982-0AA13-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7982-0AA20-0
1 unit
42J
SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7 Version 7

(single license), German/English/French
Scope of supply:
for PCS7 version V7.0/V7.1
3UF7982-0AA00-0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V7
software V7 or the engineering software migration V7-V8
Type of delivery:
SIMOCODE pro, V6.0 or V6.1
to version SIMOCODE pro V7.0/V7.1
Scope of supply:
for PCS7 version V7.0 or V7.1
Type of delivery:
V7 of the SIMOCODE pro block library for PCS 7
Conditions of use:
Availability of the engineering software V7 (license) of
the SIMOCODE pro block library for PCS 7 for the PCS 7
version V7.0 or V7.1
directly onto a system with PCS 7 version V8.0; installation
of the previous version is unnecessary.
Scope of supply:
14
Type of delivery:
runtime licenses
More information
Programming and Operating Manual SIMOCODE pro Library for
PCS 7 see
14/30
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7
Overview
Supported AS-Interface modules
The AS-Interface block library for PCS 7 can be used with the
following AS-i master and link modules:
CP 343-2 (in ET 200M station) 6GK7343-2AH01-0XA0
CP 343-2P (in ET 200M station) 6GK7343-2AH11-0XA0
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced single master 6GK1415-2BA10
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced double master 6GK1415-2BA20
The AS-i CP 343-2 and CP 343-2P masters are supported within
an ET 200M station connected through PROFIBUS.
For direct connection to PROFIBUS it is possible to use
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as an AS-i single master and double
master.
AS-Interface block library for SIMATIC PCS 7: User interfaces
The AS-Interface block library for PCS 7 is integrated in the

SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system and expands it for integration of the AS-Interface system.
As the result, the advantages of AS-Interface such as the considerable reduction of wiring outlay for distributed actuators/sensors and very simple installation can also be used in a system
based on PCS 7.
The library contains modules for accessing the I/O data of AS-i
slaves, modules for diagnostics of the AS-i system, and a faceplate for the PCS 7 Maintenance Station.
Digital AS-i standard slaves and A/B slaves (according to

AS-Interface Specification V 3.0) can be used on the CP 343-2
and CP 343-2P.
In combination with DP/AS-i LINK Advanced it is also possible to
integrate analog AS-i slaves.
Hardware and software requirements
The library requires PCS 7 version V6.1, V7.0 or V7.1 and PCS 7
version V8.0.
The block library supplied on CD-ROM allows the user to run
the required engineering software on the engineering station
(single license) including the runtime software for executing the
AS modules in an automation system (single license).
If the AS modules are to be used in additional automation
systems, the corresponding number of runtime licenses are
required which are supplied without a data carrier.
No additional licenses are required in order to use the faceplates
on further operator stations.
Benefits
Easy connection of AS-Interface to PCS 7
Engineering work reduced to positioning and connecting the
blocks in the CFC
With no additional configuring steps required for connection

to the PCS 7 Maintenance Station, diagnostics for the
AS-i system is optimally guaranteed.
Application
14
The AS-Interface block library for PCS 7 is used in systems

based on PCS 7 where the actuators and sensors are to be connected using AS-Interface.
Siemens IC 10 2014
14/31
Siemens AG 2013

for SIMATIC PCS 7

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
PU
per PU (UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1635-1XX01-0YA0
1 unit
42C
3ZS1635-2XX01-0YB0
1 unit
42C
3ZS1635-1XX11-0YE0
1 unit
42C
AS-Interface block library for PCS 7

Scope of supply:
AS-Interface into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7 version V6.1, V7.0 or V7.1
3ZS1635-1XX01-0YA0
Type of delivery:
Runtime license V7
software V7 or the engineering software migration V7-V8
Type of delivery:
V7 of the AS-Interface block library for PCS 7
Conditions of use:
AS-Interface block library for PCS 7 for the PCS 7 version
V6.1, V7.0 or V7.1
Scope of supply:
AS-Interface into the PCS 7 process control system,
for PCS 7 version V 8.0
Type of delivery:
runtime licenses
More information
Note:
The Programming Manual is valid for engineering software V7
and engineering software migration V7-V8.
14
Programming Manual for the PCS 7 Block Library for

AS-Interface see
14/32
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Hardware configuration
The configuration defines the system's hardware layout. It lays
down which modules are used in the system: A central unit as a
safe control system including onboard peripherals, expansion
modules with inputs and outputs, an interface module for connecting to PROFIBUS. For better clarity the layout is shown in a
graphic presentation. In addition, the project data on the
AS-i bus can be obtained online or configured from the
AS-i library. For each module, it is optionally possible to issue an
equipment ID which is shown in the logic diagram for identification of the inputs and outputs.
The safety logic can be divided into several diagrams in order to

enable structured processing of the entire plant. The user can
freely position the functions on a quasi infinitely large drawing
board, whereby the connecting lines are drawn automatically.
If there is not enough space, more pages are automatically
added to the diagram in horizontal or vertical direction. Connecting lines extending over several pages are automatically issued
with cross-references during print-out. If required in the interest
of clarity, the user can divide a connecting line manually into two
segments, whereby the mutual reference is marked by reference
arrows. For further documentation, freely compilable comment
texts can be placed at any point in the diagram. Every point in
the logic diagram can be processed with ease by dragging and
zooming.
Every project can be saved as a file and be password-protected
from unauthorized access.
Definition of the hardware layout
Processing the safety functions in the graphics editor
Graphic parameterizing of the safety logic

by Drag & Drop
The functionality of the safety logic is laid down with a graphics
editor designed for intuitive operation. Safe monitoring functions
(EMERGENCY-STOP, non-contact protective devices/light arrays, protective doors, etc.), output functions and logic functions
(AND/OR operations, counting function, time functions, etc.),
non-safety-related input/output functions, device status functions and control functions can be dragged from the extensive
functions catalog onto the work interface by Drag&Drop.
Depending on the version, each function has several input and
output connecting points through which the functions can be
interconnected by simple mouse clicks. Double-clicking on a
function symbol opens the related features dialog window in
which all the parameters can be displayed and configured:
Scope of the function's inputs and outputs, configuring the channel type (single-/two-channel, NC contact/NO contact), activating crossover detection, defining start options, assigning the
hardware inputs and outputs, etc. Of course each function can
be issued with an individual name so that e.g. the position of a
safety switch in the plant can be documented.
AS-Interface
Evaluation of the AS-i slaves connected to the AS-i bus is also
parameterized using the tried and tested method described
above. The CTT2 diagnostics slave allows cyclical and acyclical
diagnostics to be carried out without difficulty.
In order to be able to use the AS-i functionalities, an Advanced
central unit or ASIsafe (basic/extended) must be used.
User prompting during start-up and maintenance
To start up the 3RK3 Modular Safety System, the created project
file is uploaded to the device. There are two ways of doing this:
Connect the serial (COM) or USB interface of the PC to the
device using an appropriate connection cable.
Use the DP interface to download the parameterization
through any PROFIBUS node.
Access to the device can be password-protected.
After the project is loaded, the user switches the device by
means of the software from configuring mode to test mode in
which the safety functions are tested.
Activating the diagnostics shows the status of the individual
functions in the graphic logic diagram by means of different
colors and symbols. In addition, the signal status of each input
and output can be manually overwritten ("forcing").
Siemens IC 10 2014
14/33
14
Modular Safety System ES is the engineering software for the

configuration, start-up and diagnostics of the 3RK3 Modular
Safety System. The software combines the configuring of the
hardware, the parameterization of the safety functions, and the
testing and diagnostics of the safety system.
Siemens AG 2013

If the test is completed successfully, the user releases the configuration and switches the device to protection mode, in which
case "forcing" is automatically deactivated.
Service personnel can activate the graphic diagnostics in protection mode as well. The I&M (Identification & Maintenance)
data saved in the device facilitate maintenance.
Basic
Standard Premium

on the device
Operating
Diagnostics
Test
Importing/exporting parameters
--
--
Comfort functions
--
Terminal designator
--
Work on sub-diagrams
--
Standard-compliant printout
Downloading parameterization
through PROFIBUS
--
--
Online diagnostics using

PROFIBUS
--
--
Creating, importing and exporting

macros
--
--
Function available
The program interface language can be switched during use
between German, English and French
A context-sensitive help function provides useful assistance
with questions concerning the use of the program
A consistency check informs clearly about function assignment errors; Checks are carried out automatically when a
project is saved and during the configuration test, but they
can also be initiated manually
Lists of symbols and cross-references can be issued output
for effective processing of the project file
Standards-conform printouts:
The programs of the SIRIUS ES software family make machine
documentation far easier. They enable parameterization printouts according to EN ISO 7200. The elements to be printed
are easy to select and group as required.

Modular Safety System ES 2008 is available as follows:
Floating license
- Package contains the software on CD and a floating license
on a USB stick
- The software can be installed on any number of PCs
- The floating license enables the software to be used by
1 user; after use, it can be transferred from the one PC to
another
- The CD also contains a trial license for test and evaluation
purposes (free use of all program functions on any PC for a
period of 14 days).
Following delivery versions are available in addition for Modular
Safety System ES 2008:
Powerpack
to a more powerful version with more functionality, e. g.
Powerpack Modular Safety System ES 2008 for switching
from Basic to Standard and from Standard to Premium.
upgrades on CD (floating license not included in delivery)
License download
The software can be downloaded free from the Internet
(without floating license) see
The download file also contains a trial license for test and evaluation purposes that allows free use of all program functions for a
period of 14 days. A floating license is needed to use the software after the 14 days.
System requirements
14
Modular Safety System ES 2008 parameterization, start-up and

diagnostics software (including service pack 3)
for the 3RK3 Modular Safety System
Operating system

Windows 7 32/64 bit Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise (Service Pack 1)
Processor
RAM
512 Mbyte (Windows XP Professional)/1 GB (Windows 7 32 bit)/

2 GB (Windows 7 64 bit)
Monitor resolution
1024 x 768
280 Mbyte
CD-ROM/DVD drive
Interface
PC cables for PC/PG communication
Yes
14/34
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Benefits
Convenient parameterization, operation, monitoring and testing by means of a user-friendly and clear-cut user interface
Reliable diagnostic tool
All functions, such as safety and logic functions, are available

as modules, and are easy to link to one another.
Automatic creation of comprehensive documentation of safety
functions

for the 3RK3 modular safety system
Version
DT
Article No.
A
}

Powerpack for MSS ES 2008 Basic to Standard
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3ZS1314-4CC10-0YA5
3ZS1314-4CE10-0YB5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42B
42B
B
}
3ZS1314-5CC10-0YA5
3ZS1314-5CE10-0YB5
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
42B
42B
3ZS1314-5CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-5CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YA5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-6CE10-0YB5
1 unit
42B
Powerpack for MSS ES 2008 Standard

to Premium
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YD5
1 unit
42B
3ZS1314-6CC10-0YL5
1 unit
42B
Modular Safety System ES 2008 Basic

Engineering software in limited-function version
for diagnostics purposes,
3ZS1314-4CC10-0YA5
Modular Safety System ES 2008 Standard

3ZS1314-5CC10-0YA5

Modular Safety System ES 2008 Premium

3ZS1314-6CC10-0YA5
Floating license for one user, engineering software,

Notes:
Siemens IC 10 2014
14/35
14
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
RS 232 PC cables
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3UF7940-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7941-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
3UF7946-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
for communication with the 3RK3 Modular Safety System
through the system interface
USB PC cables
3UF7940-0AA00-0
USB/serial adapters
For connecting a RS 232 PC cable to the
USB interface of a PC
14
3UF7941-0AA00-0

for communication with the 3RK3 Modular Safety System
through the system interface, recommended for use in
connection with 3RK3 Modular Safety System
14/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Products for Specific

Requirements
15/2
15/10
15/17
15/20
15/21
15/26
15/31
15/32
15/33
15/35
15/37
15/39
15/40
15/41
15/42
15/43
15/44
15/45
15/47
15/48
15/50
15/53
15/54
15/54
15/59
15/59
15/62
15/66
Introduction
Single-phase transformers
Safety, isolating, control and
mains transformers
SIRIUS 4AM safety, mains and control
transformers
SIRIUS 4AM safety and mains
transformers
SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT isolating, control and
mains transformers
Three-phase transformers
Safety, isolating, control and
mains transformers
SIRIUS 4AP, 4AU isolating, control and
mains transformers
Non-stabilized power supplies
Filtered for supply of electronic controls
SIRIUS 4AV2, 4AV4 power supplies,
filtered, single-phase
filtered, three-phase
Unfiltered for supply of general loads
SIRIUS 4AV98 power supplies,
unfiltered, single-phase
unfiltered, three-phase
SITOP power supplies
SITOP lite, single-phase
SITOP compact, single-phase
LOGO!Power, single-phase
SITOP smart, single-phase and
three-phase
SITOP modular, single-phase,
two-phase and three-phase
Special design, special use
Expansion modules
24 V DC uninterruptible power supplies
Heating control systems
With integrated power outputs
compact design
SIPLUS HCS3200 heating control
system
modular design
SIPLUS HCS716I heating control
system
- Racks
- Power output modules
15/69
15/72
15/74
15/78
15/79
15/80
15/81
15/81
15/84
15/86
15/88
15/90
15/91
15/93
15/94
15/95
15/97
15/98
15/99
15/102
15/106
15/109
15/109
15/110
SIPLUS HCS724I heating control

systems
- Central interface modules
- Power output modules
- Line-voltage sensing module
- Fan module
- Current measuring module
Without integrated power outputs
SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller
- Basic unit
- Digital modules
- Temperature modules
- Current measuring modules
- Current/voltage measuring modules
- Decoupling module
- TCP 3000 temperature control
software (optional)
Automatic door controls

For elevators
Control devices
- SIDOOR AT12 elevator door drive
- SIDOOR AT40 elevator door drive
- SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive
Power supplies
- Mains transformer
- NT40 switched-mode power supply
15/111
15/111
15/112
15/113
15/114
15/116
15/118
15/118
15/119
Additional units
- Software Kit
- Service Tool
- Emergency power module
Geared motors
Accessories
For industrial applications
Control devices
- SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate
drive
15/123 - SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door
drive
15/127 Condition monitoring systems
15/128 SIPLUS CMS1000 condition monitoring
system
15/129 Bearing Guard
15/132 Accessories
15/135 SIPLUS CMS2000
condition monitoring system
15/137 Basic units
- SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB
15/140 Expansion modules
- SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX
- Temperature modules
15/143 Accessories
Electrical charging components
15/146 Components for electric vehicle
charging stations
15/147 SIPLUS ECC1000 and ECC2000
charging controllers
15/151 - CM-100 charging controllers
15/155 - CM-230 charging controllers
according to IEC 61851 with
Ethernet connection
15/159 SIPLUS ECC8000
prefabricated function systems
Siemens
Siemens
IC 10
IC 10
2014
2014
15
Price groups
PG 15A, 470, 471, 477, 478, 42J, 4M1,
581, 582, 583, 584, 585, 586, 588, 593
15
Siemens AG 2013
Products for Specific Requirements

Introduction
Overview
Single-phase transformers
4AM
4AT
Version
Rated power
Rated
input voltage
Rated
output voltage
kVA
V AC
V AC
Safety
class
Page
Safety, isolating, control and mains transformers

SIRIUS 4AM safety, mains and control transformers
With one input voltage
0.063 ... 1.0
230 5 %; 400 5 %
24; 42
15/17
For European voltages
0.063 ... 1.0
400/230 15 V
24; 42
15/18
In multi-voltage version
0.063 ... 1.0
550 ... 208; 600 ... 230
24
15/19
0.025; 0.04
230 5 %; 400 5 %
24
15/20
230 5 %; 400 5 %;
440 5 %
110; 230
15/21
500 5 %
230
690 5 %
230
SIRIUS 4AM safety and mains transformers

SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT isolating, control and mains transformers

4AM and 4AT
with one input voltage
4AM: 0.063 ... 2.5;

4AT: 4 ... 10
4AM with one input voltage

without CUUS
4AM: 0.063 ... 2.5
15/23
I
15/24
4AM in European voltage design
4AM: 0.063 ... 2.5
400/230 15 V
2 115
15/24
4AM and 4AT

in multi-voltage version
4AM: 0.063 ... 2.5;

4AT: 4 ... 10
550 ... 208; 600 ... 230
2 115
15/25
Rated power
Rated
input voltage
Rated
output voltage
Safety
class
Page
kVA
3 AC V
3 AC V
For more products see Industry Mall and

Interactive Catalog CA 01 or www.mdexx.com.
Three-phase transformers
4AP20
4AU
Version
Safety, isolating, control and mains transformers

SIRIUS 4AP, 4AU isolating, control and mains transformers
4AP and 4AU in two-voltage version
0.63 ... 10
* 500-400/d 289-230
* 400/d 230
15/31
4AP and 4AU in multi-voltage version
0.63 ... 16
* 520 ... 360/d 300 ... 208
* 400/d 230
15/31
15

15/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Non-stabilized power supplies
4AV21/23
4AV20/22/24/26
4AV4
4AV3
4AV5
Filtered for supply of electronic controls

Ripple
<5%
<5%
<5%
<5%
<5%
Phase
Rated input voltage
115 ... 415
115 ... 415
230 ... 415
200 ... 600
400 ... 415
Rated output voltage

V DC
according to IEC 61131-2 suitable
for SIMATIC systems
V AC
24
24
24
24
24
Rated output current
1 ... 4.2
2.5 ... 18
1.5 ... 6
15 ... 180
25, 35
Connection
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Mounting
Standard rail
mounting
Screw and/or
standard rail
mounting
Screw and/or
standard rail
mounting
Screw mounting
Screw mounting
CUUS
Yes
Yes
No
4AV30 ... 4AV35: Yes, No

4AV36, 4AV38: No
15/35
15/36
15/36
15/37, 15/38
approval at 60 C
Page
4AV98
15/37
4AV96
Unfiltered for supply of general loads

Ripple
48.3 %
<5%
Phase
3
400 5 %
Rated input voltage
V AC
230 or 400
V DC
24
Rated output current/

rated power
30-27-24
4 ... 25 A
50 ... 315 W
Connection
Screw terminals/flat connectors
Mounting
Screw mounting
Screw mounting
CUUS
No
No
15/39
15/40
Page
approval
Screw terminals/flat connectors
15

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/3
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
6EP1
SITOP lite
6EP1
SITOP compact
6EP1
LOGO!Power
6EP1
SITOP smart
1, 3
120/230 AC
100 ... 230 AC,

120 ... 230 AC
100 ... 240 AC
120/230 AC,
3 AC 400 ... 500
24

Phase
Rated input voltage
V DC
24
24, 12
5, 12, 15, 24
2.5 ... 10
0.6 ... 6.5
1.3 ... 6.3
2.5 ... 40
Connection
Screw terminal connection
Mounting
Approval
u , Cu
NEC Class 2, u, Cu
u , Cu
u , Cu
Page
15/41
15/42
15/43
15/44
6EP1
SITOP modular
6EP1
6EP1
Special design, special use Expansion modules
6EP1
Uninterruptible
24 V DC power supplies

Phase
1, 2, 3
Rated input voltage
120/230 ... 500 AC,

120/230 AC,
3 AC 400 ... 500; 600 DC
120/230 AC
24 DC
24 DC
V DC
24, 48
3 ... 52
Ue approx. 0.5,
Ue approx. 1
24
5 ... 40
10
3.5 ... 20, 40, 4 x 3, 4 x 10
6 ... 40
Connection
Mounting

(except: wall mounting with
SITOP UPS500P)
Approval
u , Cu
u , Cu
NEC Class 2, u, Cu
u , Cu
Pages
15/45, 15/46
15/47
15/48, 15/49
15/50 ... 15/52
15
More power supply products see Catalog KT 10.1 "SITOP Power

Supply" or www.siemens.com/sitop.
15/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
For more information about SIPLUS extreme power supplies see

www.siemens.com/siplus-extreme.
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
SIPLUS heating control systems
SIPLUS heating controller
HCS3200
HCS716I
HCS724I
HCS300I
--
Design
Compact
Modular
Modular
Modular
Compact design
9 power channels
on only 0.12 m
192 power channels

on only 0.2 m
384 power channels

on only 0.4 m
--
System structure
Compact unit
Four rack versions for up to Central interface for up to

4 or 12 power output
16 power output modules
modules
Mounting
Screw fixing with variable Screw fixing

mounting angles
with mounting angles
Screw fixing
with fixing lugs
Snap-on mounting onto TH 35

or screw fixing using additional push-in lugs
IP65
IP00
IP20
IP20
The central solution for power outputs
Up to 4 kW per channel
Up to 2.3 kW per channel
Up to 4 kW per channel
Dependent on the solid-state

switching relay used
Power outputs
9 outputs 400 V AC

for selection:
8 or 16 output channels
230 V AC

for selection:
LA724I HP, LA724I:
12 or 24 output channels
230/400 V AC
LA724I SSR:
for controlling external
SIRIUS solid-state relays
Per digital module:

6 digital outputs
for controlling
external SIRIUS
solid-state relays,
available up to 90 A
solid-state switching devices
Integrated
--
--
External
Basic unit for connection of

4 digital modules, 4 temperature modules and 1 current
measurement or 1 current/
voltage measuring module
Power outputs
Zero-point switching triacs
--
Integrated
Integrated
--
With fine fuses in fuse

holders
With fine fuses in fuse

holders

with fine fuses in fuse
holders which can be
reached from the front
--
Control for external fans
Control for external fan

with 1 output 230 V AC
up to 500 W
--
--
--
Temperature measurement
--
--
--
Temperature module with four

temperature inputs for
Pt100/Pt1000 and
thermoelements type J/K/L
Software for temperature control
--
--
--
Optional TCP 3000 temperature control software
Current measurement
--
--
3 x 400 A
3 measuring ranges:
2.4 ... 25 A, 10 ... 100 A,
20 ... 200 A
Voltage measurement with compensation
Up to 400 V
--
Up to 400 V
Up to 690 V
Communication with higher-level control

system through PROFIBUS DP
Detection of external and Detection of external

internal faults
and internal faults
Detection of external
and internal faults
Via the current measuring

module and the current/
Easy data management with TIA
Integrated line voltage sensing for

compensation of line voltage fluctuations
Integrated
--
Optional
Optional though current/

Open-loop/closed-loop control
Communication and diagnostics
Network supply
Through plugs
Through terminals or plugs Busbar system at the front --
Connection of heat emitter
Through plugs
Through plugs
PROFIBUS DP connection
Through ECOFAST plugs Over a 9-pin Sub D socket Over a 9-pin Sub D socket Over a 9-pin Sub D socket
Connection of the 24 V DC power supply
Through ECOFAST plugs --
--
Screw terminals
Pages
15/54 to 15/58
15/69 to 15/80
15/81 to 15/94
Has this function

15/59 to 15/68
Through plugs
--
For more information see Industry Mall or

www.siemens.com/siplus-hcs.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/5
15
Connections
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Automatic door controls
SIDOOR AT12
elevator door drive
SIDOOR AT40
elevator door drive
SIDOOR ATD400V
elevator door drive
Intelligent door control system

for the operation of sliding doors

for the horizontal and vertical
operation of sliding doors

for the operation of rising doors and
rolling shutters for elevators
Control devices for elevators

Characteristics
Application
Max. dynamic door weight
120 kg
400 kg
400 kg
Automatic door weight detection

hence stable drive characteristics and
reduced service costs
SIDOOR user software

(included in the Software Kit)
enables user-friendly operation
and detailed diagnostics.
1-button operation
for the entire commissioning process
Flexible motor management
--
Three motor types for

different power requirements
--
IP20
Motor IP54,
IP40 for gear unit
for 180 to 400 kg
motor versions
Motor IP54,
IP40 for gear unit
for 400 kg
motor version
Power supply
Integrated switch-mode power

External application-optimized NT40 External application-optimized NT40
supply hence low installation costs switch-mode power supply or
switch-mode power supply or
external mains transformer
external mains transformer
Emergency power module 24 V DC
--
Optional
Optional
Communication module
Integrated CAN module
Either relay or CAN module
Integrated relay module
Communication interfaces
CANopen,
USB via USB adapter,
RS 485 hence easy system
integration
CANopen (optional),
integration

integration
Pages
15/99 to 15/101
15/102 to 15/105
15/106 to 15/108
Has this function
15
15/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Automatic door controllers for industrial applications see

next page.
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Automatic door controls (continued)
SIDOOR ATD400K
cold room gate drives
SIDOOR ATD400W
machine tool door drive
Control devices for industrial applications

Characteristics
Application

for the operation of cold room gates

for the operation of machine tool doors
Max. dynamic door weight
400 kg
400 kg

hence stable drive characteristics and
reduced service costs
SIDOOR user software

(included in the Software Kit)
enables user-friendly operation
and detailed diagnostics
1-button operation
for the entire commissioning process
"Cable-operated switch" function
When actuated, the gate opens with an adjustable

-opening width and hold-open time before closing again
automatically.
A higher force can be set for the first

10 cm of the opening movement
(lifting the gate)
--
Flexible motor management
Two motor types for

Three motor types for

Motor IP54,
IP40 for gear unit
for 400 kg
motor version
Motor IP54,
IP40 for gear unit
for 400 kg
motor version
Performance level according to

ISO 13849-1
--
"d" (limitation of force and energy)
Category according to ISO 13849-1
--
"2"
Power supply
External mains transformer
External application-optimized NT40 switch-mode

power supply or external mains transformer
Emergency power module 24 V DC
Optional
Optional
Communication module
Communication interfaces

RS 485

RS 485
Pages
15/119 to 15/122
15/123 to 15/126

www.siemens.com/sidoor.
15
Has this function
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/7
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Condition monitoring systems
SIPLUS CMS1000
SIPLUS CMS2000
SIPLUS CMS4000
16
180
Bearing monitoring: DKW, based on K(t) according to VDI 3832
Vibration monitoring: RMS based on DIN ISO 10816-3
CREST factor, etc. application-specific characteristic values
--
--
Parameterizable
--
--
Configurable
--
--
FFT, envelope curve, fingerprint comparison, trend analysis
--
Orbit analysis, free configuration of other analysis methods
--
--
Adjustable limit values for DKW and RMS: Warning and alarm
Adjustable alarm ranges for frequency spectrums
--
Limit value monitoring of analog values
--
--
Creation of own monitoring algorithms
--
--
Raw data recording: Manually or event-triggered, snapshot of -the FFT, characteristic values, long-term trend recording
Black box for process data
--
--
Traffic light status display via binary outputs
--
Local display
--
--
Parameterization and online diagnostics via standard web

browser
--
--
Software SIPLUS CMS X-Tools
--
--
Pages
15/128 to 15/134
15/135 to 15/145
See Industry Mall or

www.siemens.com/siplus-cms
Monitoring
Of motors, generators, fans, pumps, etc.
- For imbalance, misalignment, roller bearings
Max. number of vibration channels
Analysis methods
Characteristic values
Vibration analysis
Recording functions
Visualization
Has this function


www.siemens.com/siplus-cms.
15
SIPLUS ECC1000
(CM-100)
SIPLUS ECC2000
(CM-230/CM-230-C)
SIPLUS ECC8000
(SYS-101A, SYS-102A, SYS-202A)
Version
Charging controllers
for installing AC electric vehicle
charging stations according to
IEC 61851
for installing AC electric vehicle
charging stations according to
IEC 61851 with Ethernet connection
Function units (factory-wired and ready to install),

comprising a charging controller and load feeder for
installing electric vehicle charging stations according
to IEC 61851
Pages
15/151 to 15/154
15/155 to 15/158
15/159 to 15/161

www.siemens.com/siplus-ecc.
15/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Introduction
Options
Delivery time class DT
The delivery time classes are specified in the selection tables
in front of the article numbers.
The standard transport time for Germany is 1 day
(see Chapter 16 "Appendix" "Ordering notes").
Orders for transformers and non-stabilized power supplies

in customized versions or with special applications are
handled exclusively by the company mdexx GmbH.
For customized transformers and non-stabilized power supplies
not listed in our Catalog IC 10 please send your inquiries to
mdexx GmbH:
The quoted delivery time class for the 4AM, 4AT, 4AP, 4AU transformers and the 4AV non-stabilized power supplies is applicable
to an order quantity of up to 5 units.
trafo@mdexx.com
The quoted delivery time class for the SIPLUS extreme power
supplies and heating control systems is applicable to an order
quantity of up to 9 units.
mdexx GmbH will reply with all the data needed for you to place
an order.
or by fax +49 (421) 5125-333.
The quoted delivery time class for the door control systems is
applicable to an order quantity of up to 10 units.
}
Preferred type
This delivery time class applies with the degree of protection

IP00, i.e. these units can be supplied immediately from stock1)
and will be dispatched within 24 hours. The transport times
depend on the destination and the mode of delivery.
Delivery time class B is applicable to an order quantity of 6 units
and more.
Delivery time class A
The ordered units will be dispatched within 1 or 2 working days.
Delivery time class B is applicable to an order quantity of 6 units
and more.
Delivery time class B
The ordered units will be dispatched within 3 to 5 working days.
Delivery time class C is applicable to an order quantity of 6 units
and more.
Delivery time class C
The ordered units will be dispatched within 6 to 15 working days.
Delivery time class D is applicable to an order quantity of 6 units
and more.
Delivery time class D
The ordered units, including enclosure and additional options,
will be dispatched within 16 to 30 working days.
Delivery time class X
On request.
1)
This is based on standard commercial orders normal order!
More information
Transformers for converter systems from Siemens

see the following catalogs:
Catalog NC 60, SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE
Catalog DA 65.10, SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control
Catalog DA 65.11, SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
Further information:
SIPLUS extreme
see Industry Mall or www.siemens.com/siplus-extreme
see Industry Mall or www.siemens.com/siplus-hcs
For door control systems
see Industry Mall or www.siemens.com/sidoor
Conditioning monitoring systems
see Industry Mall or www.siemens.com/siplus-cms
see Industry Mall or www.siemens.com/siplus-ecc
Siemens IC 10 2014
15
For more information about power supplies, transformers,

reactors and filters, see www.siemens.com/sirius-supplying or
www.mdexx.com.
15/9
Siemens AG 2013
Single-Phase Transformers
Safety, Isolating, Control and Mains Transformers
General data
Overview
4AM../4AT.. transformers
Connection methods
With the right transformer, the right voltage will be available at

any conditions.
The transformers 4AM../4AT.. are available with screw terminals/

flat connectors.
Our transformers are the right choice for each application:

They work reliably, safely and worldwide under a wide range of
different conditions.
Screw terminals
Transformers are summarized in a user-friendly manner as:

Isolating, control and mains transformers
according to IEC 61558-2-4, -2-2, -2-1 or
Safety, control and mains transformers
according to IEC 61558-2-6, -2-2, -2-1
Flat connectors
Note:
Support function
Mains transformers with 50 V on the output side are, in the case

of SIRIUS transformers, always designed as safety transformers.
The transformers 4AM../4AT.. can also be ordered with the help

of an online configurator.
Our transformers provide optimal protection through high

permissible ambient temperatures up to 40 C or 55 C, a high
short-time rating in the case of control transformers, fuseless
design and thanks to their compliance with safety standard
IEC 61558, "Safety inside".

The online configurator is indicated in the
corresponding tables by the symbol shown
on an orange background.
Article No. scheme

Transformer product type
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th

@
13th 14th 15th 16th
Product group
Rated power
Power level
Development status
Rated input voltage
Version, e. g. coil form

Application
Connection type
Example
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
High short-time rating of the SIRIUS transformers: Lower
transformer rated power for a large number of contactors
Suitable for "fuseless design": The small inrush current means
that "circuit breakers for motor protection" can also be used on
the primary side.
CUUS
approvals for the USA and Canada: can be used

worldwide without any problems
Comprehensive type spectrum supplied from stock: rapid
availability
15
Application
Transformers are used in industrial machines, process
engineering, heating and air-conditioning equipment, etc.,
for supplying control and signaling circuits, when:
Several electromagnetic loads (e.g. contactors) have to be
controlled
Control and signaling devices are used outside the control
cabinet
The operational voltage for the loads differs from the available
voltage level
Voltage matching for machines and installations with electrical
isolation or as an autotransformer
15/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Generally our transformers are used for voltage matching of

electrical devices, e.g. in communications, medical engineering
and domestic appliances.
Siemens AG 2013
General data
General data
Transformers
Type 4AM
Version
Performance range (with IP00)
kVA
4AT
EI core
UI core
0.025 ... 2.5
> 2.5 ... 16
CUUS
Approvals
Voltage range
690
Approvals for USA, Canada
600
Rated frequency
Hz
50 ... 60
Thermal class
Acc. to UL/CSA
CLASS 130
CLASS 180
Ambient conditions
Protection against harmful ambient conditions: Complete impregnation in polyester resin

Climate-proof for installation in rooms with an external climate according to DIN 50010
Rated ambient temperature

At rated power
40
Maximum value (after power reduction

according to load characteristic1))
80
Minimum value
25
Mean value up to
80
Maximum value for 30 days/year
95
At 40 C occasionally
100
55
Protection class
Without enclosure
IP00
Up to 1 000 m above sea level (above this, power reduction is necessary)
Protective devices
External
The transformers can be protected against short circuits and overload on the primary
and secondary side with motor starter protectors, see circuit diagram.
L1
L2
L3
Q1
/> /> />
SEC
NSF0_02077
PRI
T1
For reliable protection against short circuits, overload and touch, the cables between the output terminals
of the transformer and the load must have a negligible line impedance. For more details see
DIN VDE 0100 (Erection of low-voltage systems) Part 410, Part 520 (particularly section 525) and
Part 610.
Assigned protective devices
(see "Primary-side short-circuit and overload protection with motor starter protectors" on pages 15/13
and 15/14)
Connection methods
The permissible conductor cross-sections are assigned to the specified terminal types.
Terminal arrangement1)
Refer to DIN VDE 0298-4 and IEC 60204 (VDE 0113-1) for the permissible conductor cross-sections
for the specified current according to the installation type. The terminals used are finger-safe
according to EN 50274.
Terminal versions and connectable

cross-sections1)
Other terminal sizes than standard versions on request.
Mounting position
The permissible mounting position for each version is shown in the "Project Planning Aids"1).
See Reference Manual

"Single-Phase Transformers Three-Phase Transformers",
More technical specifications see

www.siemens.com/sirius-supplying
or
15
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/11
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Rated power outputs at different ambient temperatures
With electrically separated windings
According to IEC 61558, CUUS
Transformer
Rated
power Pn
Permissible transformer load depending on the ambient temperature

ta = 60 C
ta = 55 C
ta = 50 C
ta = 45 C
ta = 40 C
ta = 35 C
ta = 30 C
ta = 25 C
Type
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
4AM transformers
4AM234
4AM264
0.025
0.04
0.021
0.0336
0.022
0.0352
0.023
0.0368
0.024
0.0384
0.025
0.04
0.026
0.0416
0.027
0.0432
0.0278
0.0444
4AM324
4AM344
4AM384
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.0529
0.084
0.134
0.0554
0.088
0.141
0.058
0.092
0.147
0.0605
0.096
0.154
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.06551)
0.1041)
0.1661)
0.0681)
0.1081)
0.1731)
0.06991)
0.1111)
0.1781)
4AM404
4AM434
4AM464
4AM484
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.21
0.265
0.336
0.42
0.22
0.277
0.352
0.44
0.23
0.29
0.368
0.46
0.24
0.302
0.384
0.48
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.26
0.328
0.416
0.52
0.27
0.34
0.432
0.54
0.278
0.35
0.444
0.555
4AM524
4AM554
4AM574
0.63
0.8
1
0.529
0.672
0.84
0.554
0.704
0.88
0.58
0.736
0.92
0.605
0.768
0.96
0.63
0.8
1
0.655
0.832
1.04
0.68
0.864
1.08
0.699
0.888
1.11
4AM614
4AM644
4AM654
1.6
2
2.5
1.34
1.68
2.1
1.41
1.76
2.2
1.47
1.84
2.3
1.54
1.92
2.4
1.6
2
2.5
1.66
2.08
2.6
1.73
2.16
2.7
1.78
2.22
2.78
3.88
4.85
6.11
4
5
6.3
4.12
5.15
6.49
4.24
5.3
6.68
4.4
5.5
6.93
4.52
5.65
7.12
4.64
5.8
7.31
4.76
5.95
7.5
8.24
10.3
8.48
10.6
9.04
11.3
9.28
11.6
9.52
11.9
4AT transformers
4
5
6.3
4AT303
4AT361
4AT363
8
10
4AT391
4AT393
1)
7.76
9.7
8
10
8.8
11
For control transformers, the values ta = 40 C apply.
Operation characteristics
According to IEC 61558-2-6, IEC 61558-2-4, IEC 61558-2-2, IEC 61558-2-1
Transformer
Type
Rated
power Pn
50 Hz ... 60 Hz
1 000 m above sea
level
degree of protection
IP00
Core size
kVA
Voltage rise in
no-load operation
(operating
temperature)
uA
approx.
Voltage drop
on rated load1)
Short-circuit
voltage1)
uR
approx.
uZ
approx.
approx.
17.6
15.3
17.6
15.3
74
76
4AM transformers: ta = 40 C/B

4AM234
4AM264
0.025
0.04
EI 60/20
EI 66/22
26
23
4AM324
4AM344
4AM384
0.063
0.1
0.16
EI 84/28
EI 84/42
EI 96/44
10
10
10.4
8.4
7.7
7.6
8.4
7.7
7.7
85
86
86
4AM404
4AM434
4AM464
4AM484
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
EI 96/58
EI 105/60
EI 120/52
EI 120/72
7.2
6.6
5.7
5
5.4
4.9
4.3
3.8
5.4
5
4.4
3.8
89
90
91
91
4AM524
4AM554
4AM574
0.63
0.8
1
EI 150/48
EI 150/65
EI 150/90
4.7
4
3.2
3.6
3
2.5
3.7
3.1
2.5
92
92
93
4AM614
4AM644
4AM654
1.6
2
2.5
EI 174/82
EI 174/102
EI 192/110
2.4
2.1
1.6
1.9
1.7
1.3
2.1
1.9
1.6
96
96
96
UI 150/75
UI 180/75
UI 180/75
3.8
5.5
4.3
2.7
3.8
3.1
2.9
3.9
3.3
95
94
95
UI 210/70
UI 210/70
4.3
3.5
3.1
2.5
3.3
3.3
95
96
4AT transformers: ta = 55 C/H

4
5
6.3
4AT303
4AT361
4AT363
8
10
15
4AT391
4AT393
Calculation of power loss PV

P = Pn (100 ) [kW]
V
1)
Winding reference temperature: 20 C.
15/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Primary-side short-circuit and overload protection with motor starter protectors
Version with one input voltage
Transformer
Rated
power
Pn
Motor starter
Rated input voltage U1N in V
protector version:
1)
Motor protection
Type
kVA
Type
690
660
600
575
550
525
500
480
460
440
415
400
380
240
230
220
208
200
190
4AM transformers
4AM234
0.025
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0DA 0DA
0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.18 0.18 0.19 0.2 0.22 0.22
4AM264
0.04
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0CA 0CA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0FA 0FA
0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.18 0.18 0.28 0.28 0.29 0.3 0.35 0.35
4AM324
0.063
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0BA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0DA 0DA 0DA 0DA 0FA 0GA 0GA 0GA 0GA 0GA
0.14 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.19 0.19 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.24 0.37 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.47
4AM344
0.1
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0DA 0DA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0GA 0JA
0.22 0.23 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.3 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.45 0.7
4AM384
0.16
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0FA 0FA 0FA 0FA

0.35 0.35 0.39 0.4
4AM404
0.25
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0HA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0JA

0.55 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.7
4AM434
0.315
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0JA
0.7
4AM464
0.4
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1DA 1DA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA
0.9 0.9 0.9 0.92 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 2.2 2.3 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
4AM484
0.5
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1AA 1AA 1AA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1EA 1FA
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.8 3.5
1FA
3.5
1FA
3.5
4AM524
0.63
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1AA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1FA
1.2 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.2 2.2 2.2 3.5
1FA
3.7
1GA 1GA 1GA

4.5 4.5 4.5
4AM554
0.8
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1CA 1CA 1CA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA
1.8 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
4AM574
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1FA
2.2 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 3
3.5
4AM614
1.6
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1FA
-3.5
4AM644
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1JA
----------4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.7 7
4AM654
2.5
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1JA

------4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.7 7
1JA
-7
1JA
-7
1JA
-7
1KA 1KA 1KA 1KA ----------4BA 4BA 4CA 4CA 4CA 4DA
9
9
9
9
14
14
17
17
17
20
0JA
0.7
1FA
-3.5
0JA
0.7
0JA
0.7
0JA 0KA 0KA

0.72 0.9 0.9
0FA 0GA 0GA 0GA 0GA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0KA 0KA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA
0.42 0.45 0.46 0.48 0.5 0.55 0.56 0.58 0.61 0.96 1
1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2
0JA
0.7
0JA
0.7
0JA
0.7
0JA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1BA 1BA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA
0.74 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.4 1.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
0JA 0JA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1CA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA
0.71 0.74 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
1FA
-3.5
1FA
-3.7
1FA
-3.9
1FA
3.5
1FA
3.5
1FA
3.5
1HA 1HA 1JA

5.5 5.7 7
1JA
7
1FA
3.5
1JA
7
1FA
3.5
1JA
7
1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1KA --------------4AA 4AA 4AA 4AA 4AA
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.6 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.6 9
11
11
11
11
11
1JA
-7
1JA
-7
1JA
-7
------4AA 4AA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4BA

11
11
14
14
14
14
4AT transformers
4AT303
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1JA
--8
1JA
--8
1KA
--9
1KA
--9
1KA
--9
1KA
--10
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-12
-4AA
-12
-4AA
-13
-4BA
-14
--4EA
22
--4EA
22
--4EA
23
--4EA
24
--4FA
28
--4FA
28
4AT361
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1KA
--10
1KA
--10
1KA
--11
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-12
-4AA
-12
-4BA
-14
-4BA
-14
-4BA
-14
-4BA
-15
-4BA
-16
-4BA
-16
-4CA
-17
--4FA
28
--4FA
28
--4FA
29
--4FA
31
--4FA
32
--4GA
36
4AT363
6.3
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4AA 4AA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4CA 4CA 4CA 4CA 4DA 4DA 4DA -------------------4GA 4GA 4GA 4GA 4GA 4HA
12
12
14
14
15
15
17
17
17
18
20
20
21
36
36
36
38
39
41
4AT391
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4BA
--15
4BA
--15
4CA
--17
4CA
--18
4CA
--18
4DA
--20
4DA
--20
4DA
--21
4DA
--22
-4EA
-23
-4EA
-24
-4EA
-25
-4FA
-28
-4HA
-42
-4HA
-43
-4HA
-45
--4JA
48
--4JA
50
--4JA
52
4AT393
10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4CA
--18
4CA
--19
4DA
--21
4DA
--22
4DA
--23
-4EA
-24
-4EA
-25
-4EA
-26
-4FA
-28
-4FA
-28
-4FA
-30
-4FA
-31
-4FA
-32
--4JA
51
--4KA
57
--4KA
57
--4KA
59
--4KA
69
--4KA
64
Two-pole or single-pole motor starter protectors can be connected

(3 conducting paths in series), see circuit diagram on page 15/11.
15
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/13
Siemens AG 2013
General data
European voltage and multi-voltage version
Transformer
Rated
power
Pn
Motor starter
protector1)
Type
kVA
Type
690
660
600
575
550
525
500
480
460
440
415
400
380
240
230
220
208
200
190
Motor starter protector version for 4AM transformers: Transformer protection

4AM234
0.025
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA
0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.12 0.19 0.2 0.2 0.23 0.24 0.25
4AM264
0.04
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0AA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0BA 0CA 0CA 0DA 0DA 0DA 0EA 0EA 0EA
0.11 0.11 0.12 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.16 0.17 0.18 0.19 0.3 0.32 0.32 0.35 0.35 0.38
4AM324
0.063
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0BA 0BA 0BA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0CA 0DA 0DA 0DA 0DA 0DA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0GA 0GA 0GA
0.15 0.15 0.17 0.18 0.19 0.2 0.2 0.21 0.22 0.23 0.25 0.26 0.27 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.49 0.5 0.55
4AM344
0.1
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0DA 0DA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0EA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0FA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0JA 0JA 0JA
0.25 0.26 0.29 0.3 0.31 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.35 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.72 0.75 0.75 0.83 0.85 0.9
4AM384
0.16
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0FA 0FA
0.39 0.4
4AM404
0.25
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0HA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0JA

0.55 0.6 0.66 0.69 0.7
4AM434
0.315
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0JA
0.7
4AM464
0.4
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1BA 1BA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA
0.9 0.9 1
1
1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.48 1.55 1.63 2.6 2.7 2.8 3
3.1 3.2
4AM484
0.5
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
1AA 1AA 1AA 1AA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1CA 1CA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA
1.1 1.1 1.3 1.35 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.65 1.75 1.85 1.9 2
3.2 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.8 4
4AM524
0.63
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
1AA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1DA 1DA 1FA
1.35 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.9 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.5 3.9
4AM554
0.8
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
1BA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1EA 1EA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA
1.5 1.8 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.9 3
3.1 5
5
5.5 5.8 6
6.3
4AM574
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1EA 1FA
2.2 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.9 3
3.1 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.8
4AM614
1.6
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
1FA
3.6
1FA
3.7
4AM644
3RV2411-@@@10
Set value in A
1FA
4.4
1GA 1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 4AA 4AA 4AA 4AA 4AA 4AA
4.6 5
5.3 5.5 5.8 6.1 6.3 6.6 6.9 7.3 7.6 8
12.5 13
13.5 14.5 15
16
4AM654
2.5
3RV2411-@@@10
3RV2421-@@@10
Set value in A
1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1JA

-----5.5 5.8 6.4 6.6 7
0GA 0GA 0GA 0GA 0GA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0HA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1AA 1AA 1AA
0.45 0.45 0.49 0.51 0.54 0.55 0.55 0.6 0.65 0.67 0.71 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.35 1.4
0JA 0JA
0.75 0.8
1FA
4.1
0JA 0JA
0.75 0.8
0JA 0JA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA 1BA
0.82 0.85 0.9 0.95 0.99 1
1.65 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.9 2
0JA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 0KA 1AA 1AA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA
0.85 0.9 0.9 1
1
1
1.1 1.2 1.24 1.3 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
1FA
4.3
1FA
4
1FA
4
1FA
4
1FA
4.5
1FA
4.7
1FA
5
1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA

6.3 6.5 6.5 7
7.6 8
1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1KA 1KA 1KA 1KA 1KA 1KA
4.5 4.7 5
5
5.4 5.6 5.9 6.2 6.3 10
10.5 11
12
12.3 12.5
1JA
-7.3
1JA
-7.5
1JA
-8
1JA
-8.3
1JA
-8.7
1JA
-9.2
1KA 1KA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4BA --------4DA

9.5 10
16
16.5 17
18.5 19
20
Motor starter protector version for 4AT transformers: Motor protection

4AT303
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1JA
--8
1JA
--8
1KA
--9
1KA
--9
1KA
--9
1KA
--10
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-12
-4AA
-12
-4AA
-13
-4BA
-14
--4EA
22
--4EA
22
--4EA
23
--4EA
24
--4FA
28
--4FA
28
4AT361
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1KA
--10
1KA
--10
1KA
--11
-4AA
-11
-4AA
-12
-4AA
-12
-4BA
-14
-4BA
-14
-4BA
-14
-4BA
-15
-4BA
-16
-4BA
-16
-4CA
-17
--4FA
28
--4FA
28
--4FA
29
--4FA
31
--4FA
32
--4GA
36
4AT363
6.3
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4AA 4AA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4BA 4CA 4CA 4CA 4CA 4DA 4DA 4DA -------------------4GA 4GA 4GA 4GA 4GA 4HA
12
12
14
14
15
15
17
17
17
18
20
20
21
36
36
36
8
39
41
4AT391
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4BA
--15
4BA
--15
4CA
--17
4CA
--18
4CA
--18
4DA
--20
4DA
--20
4DA
--21
4DA
--22
-4EA
-23
-4EA
-24
-4EA
-25
-4FA
-28
-4HA
-42
-4HA
-43
-4HA
-45
--4JA
48
--4JA
50
--4JA
52
4AT393
10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4CA
--18
4CA
--19
4DA
--21
4DA
--22
4DA
--23
-4EA
-24
-4EA
-25
-4EA
-26
-4FA
-28
-4FA
-28
-4FA
-30
-4FA
-31
-4FA
-32
--4JA
51
--4KA
57
--4KA
57
--4KA
59
--4KA
69
--4KA
64

15
1)
15/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Secondary-side short-circuit and overload protection with motor starter protector
Transformer
Type
Rated power
Pn

Version:
Motor protection1)

U2N in V
kVA
Type
230
115
110
42
24
4AM transformers
4AM234
0.025
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0AA
0.14
0DA
0.26
0DA
0.29
0HA
0.75
1AA
1.3
4AM264
0.04
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0CA
0.21
0FA
0.41
0FA
0.45
0KA
1.2
1CA
2.1
4AM324
0.063
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0EA
0.34
0HA
0.68
0HA
0.72
1BA
1.9
1EA
3.3
4AM344
0.1
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0GA
0.55
0KA
1.1
0KA
1.14
1DA
3
1GA
5.2
4AM384
0.16
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0JA
0.86
1BA
1.72
1BA
1.82
1FA
4.8
1JA
8.4
4AM404
0.25
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1AA
-1.37
1DA
-2.7
1DA
-2.8
1HA
-7.4
-4AA
13
4AM434
0.315
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1BA
-1.72
1EA
-3.4
1EA
-3.6
1JA
-9.4
-4BA
16.5
4AM464
0.4
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1CA
-2.2
1FA
-4.4
1FA
-4.6
1KA
-12
-4CA
21
4AM484
0.5
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1DA
--2.7
1GA
--5.4
1GA
--5.7
-4AA
-15
--4EA
26
4AM524
0.63
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1EA
--3.4
1HA
--6.8
1HA
--7.2
-4BA
-18.8
--4FA
33
4AM554
0.8
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
1FA
--4.4
1JA
--8.8
1JA
--9.2
-4DA
-24
--4GA
42
4AM574
3RV20 11-@@@10
3RV10 31-@@@10
3RV10 41-@@@10
Set value in A
1GA
--5.4
1KA
--10.8
1KA
--11.4
-4EA
-30
--4JA
52
4AM614
1.6
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
1JA
--8.6
-4BA
-17
-4BA
-18.5
-4HA
-48
--4LA
81
4AM644
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
1KA
--10.9
-4DA
-22
-4DA
-23
--4JA
60
--4MA
101
4AM654
2.5
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
3VF3211-@@@@@-0AA0
Set value in A
4AA
---13.6
-4EA
--27
-4EA
--28
--4KA
-72
---1BU41
125
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4CA
-21
-4GA
41
----
----
----
4AT361
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4EA
-26
-4JA
51
----
----
----
4AT363
6.3
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4FA
-32
-4KA
64
----
----
----
4AT391
3RV1031-@@@10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4GA
-41
-4LA
81
----
----
----
4AT393
10
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
4JA
51
4MA
100
---
---
---
1)
15
4AT transformers
4AT303

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/15
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Short-time rating of control transformers Pshort-t.1) = f (p.f.) for U2 = 0.95 U2N
Transformer
Type
Rated
power
Pn
kVA
Short-time rating Pshort-t.1) with p.f. of

0.1
kVA
0.2
kVA
0.3
kVA
0.4
kVA
0.5
kVA
0.6
kVA
0.7
kVA
0.8
kVA
0.9
kVA
kVA
Voltage
rise in
no-load
operation
(operating
temperature)
Voltage
drop
on rated
load
(at 20 C)
Shortcircuit
voltage
uA %
uR %
uZ %
(at 20 C)
4AM transformers
4AM324
4AM344
4AM384
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.56
0.96
1.52
0.37
0.62
0.98
0.28
0.46
0.73
0.23
0.37
0.58
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.16
0.26
0.42
0.14
0.23
0.37
0.12
0.21
0.33
0.12
0.19
0.3
0.11
0.17
0.28
10
10
10.4
8.4
7.7
7.6
8.5
7.7
7.7
4AM404
4AM434
4AM464
0.25
0.315
0.4
2.5
3.4
3.51
1.62
2.15
2.53
1.24
1.63
2
1
1.33
1.67
0.85
1.12
1.44
0.74
0.97
1.26
0.66
0.86
1.13
0.59
0.77
1
0.54
0.71
0.95
0.51
0.67
0.92
7.2
6.6
5.7
5.4
4.9
4.3
5.4
5
4.4
4AM484
4AM524
4AM554
4AM574
0.5
0.63
0.8
1.0
5.34
5.05
7.69
12.1
3.75
3.85
5.8
8.85
2.9
3.15
4.65
7
2.4
2.7
3.9
5.85
2
2.35
3.4
5
1.75
2.1
3
4.4
1.55
1.9
2.7
3.95
1.4
1.75
2.5
3.6
1.3
1.65
2.3
3.3
1.25
1.6
2.25
3.2
5
4.7
4
3.2
3.8
3.6
3
2.5
3.8
3.7
3.1
2.5
4AM614
4AM644
4AM654
1.6
2
2.5
12.1
15.8
19.6
10.3
13.5
17.3
9
11.9
15.6
8.1
10.7
14.3
7.3
9.7
13.3
6.8
9
12.5
6.4
8.5
12
6.1
8.1
11.6
5.9
7.9
11.5
6.4
8.6
13.2
2.4
2.1
1.6
1.9
1.7
1.3
2.1
1.9
1.6
31.2
44.3
40.7
25
32.5
33.4
20.9
25.8
28.4
18
21.4
24.9
16
18.5
22.5
14.4
16.1
20.3
13.2
14.4
18.7
12.2
13.1
17.5
11.6
12.1
16.7
11.7
11.6
16.9
3.8
5.5
4.3
2.7
3.8
3.1
2.9
3.9
3.3
52.7
42
43.1
37.7
36.5
34.4
31.8
31.9
28.5
30
25.6
28.4
23.4
27.3
21.9
26.7
20.8
26.8
21.3
29
4.3
3.5
3.1
2.5
3.3
3.3
45.8
48
54.9
32.6
36.7
42.1
25.4
27.9
33.8
20.9
22.6
28.4
17.8
19
24.5
15.5
16.5
21.7
13.8
14.6
19.5
12.5
13.1
17.8
11.5
12
16.5
11
11.2
16.1
4.1
5.9
4.7
2.9
4
3.2
2.9
4.1
3.3
70
64.1
53.6
53.3
43
45.8
36
40.5
31.1
36.4
27.5
33.3
24.8
30.9
22.6
29.1
21
27.9
20.4
29.4
4.6
3.7
3.2
2.6
3.3
2.9
4AT transformers
4AT303
4AT361
4AT363
4AT391
4AT393
4
5
6.3
8
10
4AT303
4AT361
4AT363
4AT391
4AT393
8
10
Pshort-t. applies to up to 300 contactor operations per hour. The specified

power is the typical maximum short-time rating.
15
1)
4
5
6.3
15/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM
safety, mains and control transformers
Overview
According to IEC 61558-2-6, -2-1, -2-2

CUUS
ta = 40 C/B
50/60 Hz AC
SIRIUS 4AM single-phase transformer

with screw terminals/flat connectors
, ,
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1

Rated input voltage U1N 230 V 5 %,
rated output voltages U2N 24 V or 42 V
CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) U2N 24 V
Cu DT2) U2N 42 V
weight
Screw terminals/
per PU
flat connectors
approx.
Configurator
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
Price
per PU
kVA
Article No.
kg
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg
Degree of protection IP00, standard version3)

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TN00-0EA0
4AM3442-4TN00-0EA0
4AM3842-4TN00-0EA0
4AM4042-4TN00-0EA0
4AM4342-4TN00-0EA0
0.260
0.260
0.320
0.600
0.710
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TV00-0EA0
4AM3442-4TV00-0EA0
4AM3842-4TV00-0EA0
4AM4042-4TV00-0EA0
--
0.260
0.260
0.320
0.580
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
1
1.44
2
2.35
3.4
5
A
A
A
A
A
4AM4642-4TN00-0EA0
4AM4842-4TN00-0EA0
4AM5242-4TN00-0EA0
4AM5542-4TN00-0EA0
4AM5742-4TN00-0EA0
1.050
1.050
1.770
1.880
1.910
D
D
D
1.100
1.100
1.700
4AM4642-4TV00-0EA0
4AM4842-4TV00-0EA0
4AM5242-4TV00-0EA0
-4AM5742-4TV00-0EA0
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TV00-0EA0
4AM3442-4TV00-0EA0
4AM3842-4TV00-0EA0
4AM4042-4TV00-0EA0
0.260
0.260
0.320
0.580
2.000
Degree of protection IP00, standard rail

mounting3)
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TN00-0EA0
4AM3442-4TN00-0EA0
4AM3842-4TN00-0EA0
4AM4042-4TN00-0EA0
0.260
0.260
0.320
0.600
0.315
0.4
0.5
1.12
1.44
2
D
D
D
4AM4342-4TN00-0EB0
4AM4642-4TN00-0EB0
4AM4842-4TN00-0EB0
0.710
1.050
1.050
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
The delivery time class depends on the quantity, see page 15/9 "Options".
3)
For types 4AM32 to 4AM40, standard rail mounting is integrated in the

standard version.
15
----

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/17
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1

CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) U2N 24 V
Cu DT2) U2N 42 V
weight
Screw terminals/
per PU
flat connectors
approx.
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Configurator
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kVA
Article No.
kg
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-5AN00-0EA0
4AM3442-5AN00-0EA0
4AM3842-5AN00-0EA0
4AM4042-5AN00-0EA0
4AM4342-5AN00-0EA0
0.280
0.290
0.340
0.590
0.750
A
A
A
D
-4AM3442-5AV00-0EA0
4AM3842-5AV00-0EA0
4AM4042-5AV00-0EA0
4AM4342-5AV00-0EA0
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
1
1.44
2
2.35
3.4
5
A
A
A
A
A
4AM4642-5AN00-0EA0
4AM4842-5AN00-0EA0
4AM5242-5AN00-0EA0
4AM5542-5AN00-0EA0
4AM5742-5AN00-0EA0
1.030
1.030 D
1.800
1.860 D
1.860 D
-4AM4842-5AV00-0EA0
-4AM5542-5AV00-0EA0
4AM5742-5AV00-0EA0
4AM3242-5AV00-0EA0
4AM3442-5AV00-0EA0
4AM3842-5AV00-0EA0
4AM4042-5AV00-0EA0
0.290
0.340
0.610
0.670
1.100
1.900
2.000

mounting3)
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-5AN00-0EA0
4AM3442-5AN00-0EA0
4AM3842-5AN00-0EA0
4AM4042-5AN00-0EA0
0.280
0.290
0.340
0.590
0.315
0.4
0.5
1.12
1.44
2
D
D
D
4AM4342-5AN00-0EB0
4AM4642-5AN00-0EB0
4AM4842-5AN00-0EB0
0.750
1.030
1.030
A
A
A
A
0.280
0.290
0.340
0.610
----
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)

standard version.

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1
Rated input voltage U1N 400/230 V 15 V,

CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) U2N 24 V
Cu DT2) U2N 42 V
weight
Screw terminals/
per PU
flat connectors
approx.
Configurator
Screw terminals/
flat connectors
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
Price
per PU
kVA
Article No.
kg
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
A
A
A
A
D
4AM3242-8JN00-0EA0
4AM3442-8JN00-0EA0
4AM3842-8JN00-0EA0
4AM4042-8JN00-0EA0
4AM4342-8JN00-0EA0
0.330
0.330
0.400
0.690
1.000
------
0.4
0.5
0.63
1
1.44
2
2.35
5
D
D
D
D
4AM4642-8JN00-0EA0
4AM4842-8JN00-0EA0
4AM5242-8JN00-0EA0
4AM5742-8JN00-0EA0
1.500
1.500
2.400
2.800
-----
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8JN00-0EA0
4AM3442-8JN00-0EA0
4AM3842-8JN00-0EA0
4AM4042-8JN00-0EA0
0.330 X
0.330
0.400 X
0.690 X
4AM3242-8JV00-0EA0
-4AM3842-8JV00-0EA0
4AM4042-8JV00-0EA0
15

mounting3)
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
15/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
0.340
0.450
0.820
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)

standard version.

Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM
Rated input voltage U1N
550-525-500-480-460-440-415-400-380-230-208 V,
rated output voltages U2N 24 V
CUUS,
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1
, ,
Rated power
Pn
DT2) Screw terminals/

flat connectors
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8DN00-0EA0
4AM3442-8DN00-0EA0
4AM3842-8DN00-0EA0
4AM4042-8DN00-0EA0
4AM4342-8DN00-0EA0
0.320
0.300
0.420
0.630
0.830
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
1
1.44
2
2.35
3.4
5
A
A
A
D
D
4AM4642-8DN00-0EA0
4AM4842-8DN00-0EA0
4AM5242-8DN00-0EA0
4AM5542-8DN00-0EA0
4AM5742-8DN00-0EA0
1.200
1.280
1.930
2.600
2.800
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8DN00-0EA0
4AM3442-8DN00-0EA0
4AM3842-8DN00-0EA0
4AM4042-8DN00-0EA0
0.320
0.300
0.420
0.630
Degree of protection IP00, standard rail mounting3)

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)

standard version.
600-575-550-525-500-480-460-440-415-400-240-230 V,
CUUS,
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1
, ,
Rated power
Pn

flat connectors
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8EN00-0EA0
4AM3442-8EN00-0EA0
4AM3842-8EN00-0EA0
4AM4042-8EN00-0EA0
4AM4342-8EN00-0EA0
0.340
0.340
0.440
0.670
0.880
0.4
0.5
0.63
1.44
2
2.35
A
A
A
4AM4642-8EN00-0EA0
4AM4842-8EN00-0EA0
4AM5242-8EN00-0EA0
1.280
1.240
2.040
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8EN00-0EA0
4AM3442-8EN00-0EA0
4AM3842-8EN00-0EA0
4AM4042-8EN00-0EA0
0.340
0.340
0.440
0.670
0.315
0.5
1.12
2
D
A
4AM4342-8EN00-0EB0
4AM4842-8EN00-0EA0
0.880
1.240

1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)

standard version.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/19
15

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM
safety and mains transformers
Overview
According to IEC 61558-2-6, -2-1

CUUS
ta = 40 C/B
50/60 Hz AC

with screw terminals/flat connectors

CUUS,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Degree of protection IP00, standard version

0.025
0.04
---
A
A
4AM2342-4TN00-0EA0
4AM2642-4TN00-0EA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.100
0.140
D
D
4AM2342-4TN00-0EB0
4AM2642-4TN00-0EB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.100
0.140
Degree of protection IP00, standard rail mounting

---
0.025
0.04
1)

CUUS,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Degree of protection IP00, standard version

0.025
0.04
---
A
A
4AM2342-5AN00-0EA0
4AM2642-5AN00-0EA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.100
0.160
D
D
4AM2342-5AN00-0EB0
4AM2642-5AN00-0EB0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.100
0.160
Degree of protection IP00, standard rail mounting

---
0.025
0.04
1)
15
15/20
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT
isolating, control and mains transformers
Overview
According to IEC 61558-2-4, -2-2, -2-1

CUUS1)
4AM: ta = 40 C/B, 4AT: ta = 55 C/H

50/60 Hz AC

with screw terminals/flat connectors (left) and
SIRIUS 4AT single-phase transformer with screw terminals (right)
, ,
1)
CUUS
approval for voltages 600 V (excl. tapping).

PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1

CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) U2N 110 V
Cu DT2) U2N 230 V

weight
Screw terminals3)/
per PU
flat connectors3)
approx.
Configurator
Screw terminals3)/
flat connectors3)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
Price
per PU
kVA
Article No.
kg
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM3442-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM3842-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM4042-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM4342-4TJ10-0FA0
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
1
1.44
2
2.35
3.4
5
A
A
A
A
A
4AM4642-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM4842-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM5242-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM5542-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM5742-4TJ10-0FA0
0.270
0.270
0.320
0.570
0.730
1.000
1.050
1.700
1.780
1.920
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TT10-0FA0
4AM3442-4TT10-0FA0
4AM3842-4TT10-0FA0
4AM4042-4TT10-0FA0
4AM4342-4TT10-0FA0
A
A
A
A
A
4AM4642-4TT10-0FA0
4AM4842-4TT10-0FA0
4AM5242-4TT10-0FA0
4AM5542-4TT10-0FA0
4AM5742-4TT10-0FA0
0.270
0.270
0.330
0.610
0.740
1.040
1.030
1.720
1.780
1.910
1.6
2
2.5
7.3
9.7
13.3
D
D
D
4AM6142-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM6442-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM6542-4TJ10-0FA0
4.100 A
4.700 A
6.400 A
4AM6142-4TT10-0FA0
4AM6442-4TT10-0FA0
4AM6542-4TT10-0FA0
3.960
4.430
6.560
16
4AT3032-4TJ10-0FA0
9.900 D
4AT3032-4TT10-0FA0
9.900

mounting4)
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM3442-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM3842-4TJ10-0FA0
4AM4042-4TJ10-0FA0
0.270
0.270
0.320
0.570
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-4TT10-0FA0
4AM3442-4TT10-0FA0
4AM3842-4TT10-0FA0
4AM4042-4TT10-0FA0
0.270
0.270
0.330
0.610
0.315
0.4
0.5
1.12
1.44
2
4AM4342-4TJ10-0FB0
---
0.730 D
D
D
4AM4342-4TT10-0FB0
4AM4642-4TT10-0FB0
4AM4842-4TT10-0FB0
0.740
1.040
1.030
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)
The 4AT types are only supplied with screw terminals.
4)

standard version.
15

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/21
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1

CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) U2N 110 V
Cu DT2) U2N 230 V

weight
Screw terminals3)/
per PU
flat connectors3)
approx.
Configurator
Screw terminals3)/
flat connectors3)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
Price
per PU
kVA
Article No.
kg
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM3442-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM3842-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM4042-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM4342-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM4642-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM4842-5AJ10-0FA0
0.280
0.280
0.340
0.600
0.750
0.980
1.040
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-5AT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5AT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5AT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5AT10-0FA0
4AM4342-5AT10-0FA0
4AM4642-5AT10-0FA0
4AM4842-5AT10-0FA0
0.280
0.270
0.320
0.640
0.760
1.020
1.020
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
A
A
A
A
D
A
4AM5242-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM5542-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM5742-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM6142-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM6442-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM6542-5AJ10-0FA0
1.700
1.770
1.850
4.130
4.700
5.900
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM5242-5AT10-0FA0
4AM5542-5AT10-0FA0
4AM5742-5AT10-0FA0
4AM6142-5AT10-0FA0
4AM6442-5AT10-0FA0
4AM6542-5AT10-0FA0
1.700
1.770
1.880
3.970
4.360
5.970
16
18.5
22.5
28.5
30
D
D
4AT3032-5AJ10-0FA0
4AT3612-5AJ10-0FA0
----
9.900 D
6.900 D
D
D
D
4AT3032-5AT10-0FA0
4AT3612-5AT10-0FA0
4AT3632-5AT10-0FA0
4AT3912-5AT10-0FA0
4AT3932-5AT10-0FA0
9.900
6.850
11.300
12.800
22.100
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM3442-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM3842-5AJ10-0FA0
4AM4042-5AJ10-0FA0
---
0.280
0.280
0.340
0.600
4AM3242-5AT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5AT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5AT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5AT10-0FA0
4AM4642-5AT10-0FB0
4AM4842-5AT10-0FB0
0.280
0.270
0.320
0.640
1.020
1.020
4
5
6.3
8
10

mounting4)
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.44
2
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)
4)

standard version.
15
A
A
A
A
D
D
15/22
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT
PS*
= 1 unit
PG
= 4M1

CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) U2N 110 V
Cu DT2) U2N 230 V

weight
Screw terminals3)/
per PU
flat connectors3)
approx.
Configurator
Screw terminals3)/
flat connectors3)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
Price
per PU
kVA
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Article No.
Price
per PU
kg
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
4
5
6.3
16
18.5
22.5
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
4AM3242-5CJ10-0FA0
4AM3442-5CJ10-0FA0
-4AM4042-5CJ10-0FA0
4AM4342-5CJ10-0FA0
---
0.240 A
0.260 A
A
0.590 A
0.670 A
A
A
4AM3242-5CT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5CT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5CT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5CT10-0FA0
4AM4342-5CT10-0FA0
4AM4642-5CT10-0FA0
4AM4842-5CT10-0FA0
0.260
0.260
0.380
0.590
0.710
1.080
1.000
--4AM5742-5CJ10-0FA0
4AM6142-5CJ10-0FA0
4AM6442-5CJ10-0FA0
4AM6542-5CJ10-0FA0
2.000
4.100
4.700
6.400
A
A
A
A
A
D
4AM5242-5CT10-0FA0
4AM5542-5CT10-0FA0
4AM5742-5CT10-0FA0
4AM6142-5CT10-0FA0
4AM6442-5CT10-0FA0
4AM6542-5CT10-0FA0
1.700
1.730
1.850
3.900
4.430
6.400
4AT3032-5CJ10-0FA0
---
9.900 D
D
D
4AT3032-5CT10-0FA0
4AT3612-5CT10-0FA0
4AT3632-5CT10-0FA0
9.900
6.900
11.300
3)
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
4)
2)

standard version.

CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)
DT2) Screw terminals3)/

flat connectors3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-5FT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5FT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5FT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5FT10-0FA0
4AM4342-5FT10-0FA0
4AM4642-5FT10-0FA0
4AM4842-5FT10-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.250
0.280
0.360
0.640
0.760
1.010
1.010
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM5242-5FT10-0FA0
4AM5542-5FT10-0FA0
4AM5742-5FT10-0FA0
4AM6142-5FT10-0FA0
4AM6442-5FT10-0FA0
4AM6542-5FT10-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
1.700
1.760
1.870
4.250
4.370
5.980
16
18.5
22.5
28.5
30
D
D
D
D
D
4AT3032-5FT10-0FA0
4AT3612-5FT10-0FA0
4AT3632-5FT10-0FA0
4AT3912-5FT10-0FA0
4AT3932-5FT10-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
9.900
6.900
11.300
12.800
22.100
A
A
A
A
D
4AM3242-5FT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5FT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5FT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5FT10-0FA0
4AM4342-5FT10-0FB0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.250
0.280
0.360
0.640
0.760
4
5
6.3
8
10
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
3)
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
4)
2)

standard version.

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/23
15
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT
Rated input voltages U1N 690 V 5 %1),
rated output voltage U2N 230 V
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.2)

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
4AM3242-5MT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5MT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5MT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5MT10-0FA0
4AM4342-5MT10-0FA0
4AM4642-5MT10-0FA0
4AM4842-5MT10-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.240
0.260
0.320
0.590
0.670
1.100
1.100
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
D
D
D
D
D
D
4AM5242-5MT10-0FA0
4AM5542-5MT10-0FA0
4AM5742-5MT10-0FA0
4AM6142-5MT10-0FA0
4AM6442-5MT10-0FA0
4AM6542-5MT10-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
1.700
1.900
2.000
4.100
4.700
6.400
D
D
D
D
4AM3242-5MT10-0FA0
4AM3442-5MT10-0FA0
4AM3842-5MT10-0FA0
4AM4042-5MT10-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.240
0.260
0.320
0.590

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1)
Without CUUS approval.
2)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
3)
4)

standard version.

Rated input voltage U1N 400/230 V 15 V,
rated output voltage U2N 2 115 V
CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)

flat connectors3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8JD40-0FA0
4AM3442-8JD40-0FA0
4AM3842-8JD40-0FA0
4AM4042-8JD40-0FA0
4AM4342-8JD40-0FA0
4AM4642-8JD40-0FA0
4AM4842-8JD40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.290
0.340
0.430
0.660
0.830
1.210
1.270
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM5242-8JD40-0FA0
4AM5542-8JD40-0FA0
4AM5742-8JD40-0FA0
4AM6142-8JD40-0FA0
4AM6442-8JD40-0FA0
4AM6542-8JD40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
2.180
2.310
2.320
4.540
4.840
6.000
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8JD40-0FA0
4AM3442-8JD40-0FA0
4AM3842-8JD40-0FA0
4AM4042-8JD40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.290
0.340
0.430
0.660
15

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
15/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)
4)

standard version.

Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AM, 4AT
Rated input voltage U1N 550-525-500-480-460-440-415-400-380-230-208 V,
CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)

flat connectors3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8DD40-0FA0
4AM3442-8DD40-0FA0
4AM3842-8DD40-0FA0
4AM4042-8DD40-0FA0
4AM4342-8DD40-0FA0
4AM4642-8DD40-0FA0
4AM4842-8DD40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.310
0.340
0.440
0.680
0.820
1.170
1.260
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM5242-8DD40-0FA0
4AM5542-8DD40-0FA0
4AM5742-8DD40-0FA0
4AM6142-8DD40-0FA0
4AM6442-8DD40-0FA0
4AM6542-8DD40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
1.990
2.190
2.250
4.520
4.260
5.470
16
18.5
22.5
28.5
30
D
D
D
D
D
4AT3032-8DD40-0FA0
4AT3612-8DD40-0FA0
4AT3632-8DD40-0FA0
4AT3912-8DD40-0FA0
4AT3932-8DD40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
9.300
7.300
12.200
13.900
23.700
A
A
A
A
D
D
4AM3242-8DD40-0FA0
4AM3442-8DD40-0FA0
4AM3842-8DD40-0FA0
4AM4042-8DD40-0FA0
4AM4642-8DD40-0FB0
4AM4842-8DD40-0FB0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.310
0.340
0.440
0.680
1.170
1.260
4
5
6.3
8
10

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.44
2
3)
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
4)
2)

standard version.
Rated input voltage U1N 600-575-550-525-500-480-460-440-415-400-240-230 V,
CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)

flat connectors3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
kg
0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.315
0.4
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
1.12
1.44
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM3242-8ED40-0FA0
4AM3442-8ED40-0FA0
4AM3842-8ED40-0FA0
4AM4042-8ED40-0FA0
4AM4342-8ED40-0FA0
4AM4642-8ED40-0FA0
4AM4842-8ED40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.290
0.390
0.400
0.650
0.860
1.260
1.210
0.63
0.8
1
1.6
2
2.5
2.35
3.4
5
7.3
9.7
13.3
A
A
A
A
A
A
4AM5242-8ED40-0FA0
4AM5542-8ED40-0FA0
4AM5742-8ED40-0FA0
4AM6142-8ED40-0FA0
4AM6442-8ED40-0FA0
4AM6542-8ED40-0FA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
2.080
2.330
2.400
4.630
4.450
5.190
A
A
A
A
D
4AM3242-8ED40-0FA0
4AM3442-8ED40-0FA0
4AM3842-8ED40-0FA0
4AM4042-8ED40-0FA0
4AM4842-8ED40-0FB0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.290
0.390
0.400
0.650
1.500

0.063
0.1
0.16
0.25
0.5
0.19
0.31
0.49
0.85
2

1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)

3)
4)

standard version.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/25
15
Siemens AG 2013
Three-Phase Transformers
General data
Overview
4AP../4AU.. transformers
Connection methods
With the right transformer, the right voltage will be available at

any conditions.
The transformers 4AP../4AU.. are available with screw terminals/

flat connectors.
Our transformers are the right choice for each application:

They work reliably, safely and worldwide under a wide range of
different conditions.
Screw terminals
Transformers are summarized in a user-friendly manner as:

Isolating, control and mains transformers
according to IEC 61558-2-4, -2-2, -2-1 or
Safety, control and mains transformers
according to IEC 61558-2-6, -2-2, -2-1 (see Industry Mall and
Interactive Catalog CA 01 or www.mdexx.com )
Flat connectors
Note:
Mains transformers with 50 V on the output side are, in the case
of SIRIUS transformers, always designed as safety transformers.
Support function
The transformers 4AP../4AU.. can also be ordered with the help
of an online configurator.
Our transformers provide optimal protection through high

permissible ambient temperatures up to 40 C or 55 C, a high
short-time rating in the case of control transformers, fuseless
design and thanks to their compliance with safety standard
IEC 61558, "Safety inside".

Article No. scheme

Transformer product type
1st 2nd 3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
A
@
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
13th 14th 15th 16th
Product group
Rated power
Power level
Development status
Rated input voltage
Protective device
Application
Connection type
4
Example
Note:
article numbers.
Benefits
High short-time rating of the SIRIUS transformers: Lower
transformer rated power for a large number of contactors
Suitable for "fuseless design": The small inrush current means
that "circuit breakers for motor protection" can also be used on
the primary side
CUUS
approvals for the USA and Canada: can be used

worldwide without any problems
Comprehensive type spectrum supplied from stock: rapid
availability
15
Application
Transformers are used in industrial machines, process
engineering, heating and air-conditioning equipment, etc.,
for supplying control and signaling circuits, when:
Several electromagnetic loads (e.g. contactors) have to be
controlled
Control and signaling devices are used outside the control
cabinet
15/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
The operational voltage for the loads differs from the available
voltage level
Voltage matching for machines and installations with electrical
isolation or as an autotransformer
Generally our transformers are used for voltage matching of
electrical devices, e.g. in communications, medical engineering
and domestic appliances.
Siemens AG 2013
General data
General data
Transformers
Type 4AP
Version
Performance range (with IP00)
kVA
4AU
3UI core
3UI core
0.16 ... 5
> 5 ... 16
CUUS
Approvals
Voltage range
690
Approvals for USA, Canada
600
Rated frequency
Hz
50 ... 60
Thermal class
Acc. to UL/CSA
CLASS 130
CLASS 180
Ambient conditions
Protection against harmful ambient conditions: Complete impregnation in polyester resin.

Climate-proof for installation in rooms with an external climate according to DIN 50010
Rated ambient temperature

At rated power
40
Maximum value (after power reduction

according to load characteristic1))
80
Minimum value
25
Mean value up to
80
Maximum value for 30 days/year
95
At 40 C occasionally
100
55
Protection class
Without enclosure
IP00
Up to 1 000 m above sea level (above this, power reduction is necessary)
Protective devices
External
The transformers are protected from short circuits and overload on the primary
and secondary side with motor starter protectors.
For reliable protection against short circuits, overload and touch, the cables between the output terminals
of the transformer and the load must have a negligible line impedance. For more details see
DIN VDE 0100 (Erection of low-voltage systems) Part 410, Part 520 (particularly section 525) and
Part 610.
Assigned protective devices
(see "Primary-side short-circuit and overload protection with motor starter protectors" on page 15/29)
Connection methods
The permissible conductor cross-sections are assigned to the specified terminal types.
Terminal arrangement1)
Refer to DIN VDE 0298-4 and IEC 60204 (VDE 0113-1) for the permissible conductor cross-sections
for the specified current according to the installation type. The terminals used are finger-safe
according to EN 50274.
Terminal versions and connectable

cross-sections1)
Other terminal sizes than standard versions on request.
Mounting position
The permissible mounting position for each version is shown in the "Project Planning Aids"1).
See Reference Manual

"Single-phase transformers Three-phase transformers",
More technical specifications see

www.siemens.com/sirius-supplying
or
15
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/27
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Rated outputs at different ambient temperatures
With electrically separated windings
According to IEC 61558, CUUS
Transformer
Type
Rated power
Pn
Permissible transformer load

depending on the ambient temperature ta of
60 C
55 C
50 C
45 C
40 C
35 C
30 C
25 C
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
4AP transformers
4AP204
4AP214
4AP254
0.63
1
1.6
0.529
0.840
1.34
0.554
0.880
1.41
0.580
0.920
1.47
0.605
0.960
1.54
0.630
1
1.60
0.655
1.04
1.66
0.680
1.08
1.73
0.699
1.11 1.78
4AP274
4AP304
4AP305
2.5
4
5
2.10
3.36
4.20
2.20
3.52
4.40
2.30
3.68
4.60
2.40
3.84
4.80
2.50
4
5.50
2.60
4.16
5.20
2.70
4.32
5.40
2.78
4.44
5.55
6.11
7.76
9.70
6.30
8
10
6.49
8.24
10.3
6.68
8.48
10.6
6.93
8.80
11
7.12
9.04
11.3
7.31
9.28
11.6
7.50
9.52
11.9
16
16.5
17
17.6
18.1
18.6
19
4AU transformers
4AU303
4AU361
4AU363
6.3
8
10
4AU393
16
15.5
Operation characteristics
According to IEC 61558-2-6, IEC 61558-2-4, IEC 61558-2-1
Transformer
Type
Rated
power Pn
50 Hz ... 60 Hz
1 000 m above
sea level
degree of
protection IP00
Core size
kVA
Voltage rise
in no-load operation
(operating
temperature)
uA
approx.
Voltage drop
on rated load1)
Short-circuit
voltage1)
uR
approx.
uZ
approx.
approx.
4AP transformers: ta = 40 C/B

4AP204
4AP214
4AP254
0.63
1
1.6
3UI 90/30
3UI 90/50
3UI 114/62
9.3
6.4
4.9
6.8
4.8
3.6
6.8
4.8
3.6
89
92
93
4AP274
4AP304
4AP305
2.5
4
5
3UI 132/70
3UI 150/75
3UI 150/75
4.5
3.5
2.8
3.4
2.6
2.1
3.4
2.7
2.2
94
95
96
2.6
3.6
3
96
94
95
2.8
96
4AU transformers: ta = 55 C/H

4AU303
4AU361
4AU363
6.3
8
10
3UI 150/75
3UI 180/75
3UI 180/75
3.8
5.1
4.1
2.6
3.6
2.9
4AU393
16
3UI 210/70
3.2
2.3
Higher ratings and other conditions on request.

Calculation of power loss PV
P = Pn (100 ) [kW]
15
15/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
1)
Winding reference temperature: 20 C.
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Primary-side short-circuit and overload protection with motor starter protectors
Transformer
Type
Rated
power
Pn
Motor starter
protectors
kVA
Type
Version:
Motor protection
520
500
480
460
440
420
400
380
360
300
288
277
265
254
242
230
220
208
1AA
1.1
1AA
1.1
1AA
1.2
1AA
1.2
1AA
1.3
1BA
1.5
1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1DA 1DA 1DA 1DA

1.8
1.9
2
2
2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.3
4AP transformers
4AP204
0.63
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0KA 0KA 1AA

0.95 0.95 1.1
4AP214
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1BA
1.5
4AP254
1.6
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1DA 1DA 1EA

2.3
2.3
2.8
1EA
2.8
4AP274
2.5
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1FA
3.6
1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1JA

4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.8
5.8
7
4AP304
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1HA 1HA 1HA 1JA

----5.7
5.7
6
7
1JA
-7
1JA
-7
1JA
-7.2
1JA
-8
1KA
-9
4AP305
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1JA
-7.2
1JA
-7.2
1JA
-8
1KA
-9
1KA
-9
1KA
-9
1KA
-9
-4AA
11
1BA
1.5
1FA
3.6
1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1CA 1DA 1EA

1.7
1.8
1.8
1.8
2
2
2.3
2.8
1FA
4
1EA
2.8
1EA
2.8
1EA
3
1FA
3.5
1FA
3.5
1EA
2.9
1EA
3.1
1EA
3.2
1EA
3.2
1EA
3.2
1EA
3.2
1FA
3.5
1FA
3.5
1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1GA 1HA 1HA 1HA 1HA

4.5
4.5
4.9
5
5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.6
1JA
7
1JA
7.5
1JA
7.5
1JA
8
1JA
8
1JA
8
1KA
9
1KA
9
-4AA
11
-4AA
11
-4AA
12
-4AA
12
-4AA
13
-4AA
13
-4BA
14
-4BA
14
-4BA
14
-4AA
11
-4AA
13
-4BA
14
-4BA
15
-4BA
15
-4BA
16
----4CA 4CA 4CA 4CA

17
17
17
17
-4BA
16
-4BA
16
------4CA 4CA 4CA 4DA 4DA 4DA

17
18
19
20
20
22
4AU transformers
4AU303
6.3
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1KA
-9
1KA
-9
1KA
-10
1KA
-10
1KA
-10
-4AA
11
-4AA
11
-4AA
12
-4AA
13
-4BA
15
4AU361
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4AA
-12
4AA
-12
4AA
-13
4AA
-13
4AA
-13
4BA
-14
4BA
-15
4BA
-15
4BA
-16
4CA 4CA 4CA 4DA 4DA 4DA -------4EA

20
20
21
22
23
24
25
4AU391
12.5
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4CA 4CA 4CA 4CA 4DA 4DA 4DA 4DA 4DA ----------4FA
9
19
20
20
20
22
22
23
25
30
-4FA
31
-4FA
32
-4FA
34
4AU393
16
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4DA 4DA 4DA 4DA -----4EA

24
24
25
25
26
-4FA
39
-4FA
40
------4HA 4HA 4HA 4HA 4HA 4HA

43
44
47
49
50
50
-4FA
28
-4FA
30
-4FA
31
-4FA
38
-4FA
37
-4FA
39
-4EA
28
-4FA
40
-4GA
43
15
-4FA
28
-4FA
35
-4EA
26
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/29
Siemens AG 2013
General data
Secondary-side short-circuit and overload protection with motor starter protectors
Transformer
Rated power
Pn

Version:
Motor protection

U2N in V
kVA
Type
400
230
4AP204
0.63
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
0KA
1.1
1BA
1.9
4AP214
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1BA
1.7
1DA
3
4AP254
1.6
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1DA
2.7
1FA
5
4AP274
2.5
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1FA
4.2
1HA
7.5
4AP304
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
1HA
6.7
1KA
12
4AP305
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1JA
-8.5
-4AA
15
4AU303
6.3
3RV2011-@@@10
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
1KA
-11
-4BA
19
4AU361
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
4AA
14
4DA
24
4AU363
10
3RV2021-@@@10
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4BA
-17
-4EA
29
4AU393
16
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
4EA
27
4HA
47
Type
4AP transformers
4AU transformers
Short-time rating of control transformers Pshort-t.1) = f (p.f.) for U2 = 0.95 U2N

Transformer
Rated
power
Pn
Type
kVA
Short-time rating Pshort-t.1) with p.f.of
Voltage rise
in no-load
operation
(operating
temperature)
Voltage
drop on
rated load
(at 20 C)
Shortcircuit
voltage
(at 20 C)
uA %
uR %
uZ %
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
kVA
2.1
4.1
8.3
1.8
3.5
6.9
1.6
3
5,9
1.4
2.7
5.2
1.3
2.4
4.7
1.2
2.2
4.2
1.1
2.1
3.9
9.3
6.4
4.9
6.8
4.8
3.6
6.8
4.8
3.6
4AP transformers
4AP204
4AP214
4AP254
0.63
1
1.6
4.5
9.3
21
3.3
6.5
14
2.6
5
10
4AP274
4AP304
4AP305
2.5
4
5
37
60
53
24
40
41
17
30
34
14
24
29
11
20
25
9.9
18
22
8.7
16
20
7.8
14
19
7
13
18
6.5
12
17
4.5
3.5
2.8
3.4
2.6
2.1
3.4
2.7
2.2
4AU transformers
4AU303
4AU361
4AU363
6.3
8
10
64,5
83
80.5
48.5
58.5
63
39
45
52
32.5
37
44
28
31.5
39
25
27.5
35
22.5
24
31,5
20.5
22
29
19
20
27.5
18.5
19
27
3.5
5.1
4.1
2.6
3.6
2.9
2.6
3.6
3
4AU393
16
85
74
66
60
55
51.5
48.5
46.5
46
51
3.2
2.3
2.8
Pshort-t. applies to up to 300 contactor operations per hour.
15
1)
15/30
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
SIRIUS 4AP, 4AU
Overview
According to IEC 61558-2-4, -2-2, -2-1

CUUS
4AP: ta = 40 C/B, 4AU: ta = 55 C/H

50/60 Hz AC
SIRIUS 4AP20 (left) and SIRIUS 4AU (right) three-phase transformers
, ,
In two-voltage version
Rated input voltage U1N 3 AC * 500-400 V/d 289-230 V,
rated output voltage U2N 3 AC * 400 V/d 230 V
CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)

flat connectors3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
kg

0.63
1
1.6
2.5
4
6.3
10
1.8
3.5
6.9
11
20
A
A
X
A
X
4AP2042-8BC40-0HA0
4AP2142-8BC40-0HA0
4AP2542-8BC40-0HA0
4AP2742-8BC40-0HA0
4AP3042-8BC40-0HA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
2.550
3.140
4.100
4.570
9.200
28
39
D
D
4AU3032-8BC40-0HA0
4AU3632-8BC40-0HA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
13.500
16.300
1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)
The 4AU transformers are only supplied with screw terminals.
3 AC * 520-500-480-460-440-420-400-380-360 V/d 300-289-277-266-254-240-230-220-208 V,
rated output voltage U2N
3 AC * 400 V/d 230 V
CUUS,
, ,
Rated power
Pn
Short-time rating
Pshort-t.1)

flat connectors3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
kVA
kVA
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
kg
0.63
1
1.6
2.5
4
6.3
8
10
16
1.8
3.5
6.9
11
20
X
X
X
X
X
4AP2042-8CC40-0HA0
4AP2142-8CC40-0HA0
4AP2542-8CC40-0HA0
4AP2742-8CC40-0HA0
4AP3042-8CC40-0HA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
2.800
2.900
4.800
5.200
9.400
28
32
39
55
D
D
D
D
4AU3032-8CC40-0HA0
4AU3612-8CC40-0HA0
4AU3632-8CC40-0HA0
4AU3932-8CC40-0HA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
16.000
13.000
21.000
43.000

1)
For p.f. = 0.5 and U2 = 0.95 U2N.
2)
3)
The 4AU transformers are only supplied with screw terminals.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/31
15
Siemens AG 2013
Non-Stabilized Power Supplies

General data
Overview
With SIRIUS power supplies, we offer a full range of first-class
products. The complete type series ensure uniform voltages and
minimum downtimes. They cover all important input voltages
worldwide.
Support function
4AV non-stabilized power supplies can also be ordered with the
help of an online configurator.
Connection methods
4AV.. non-stabilized power supplies are available with screw

terminals/flat connectors.

Screw terminals
Flat connectors
Article No. scheme
1st - 3rd 4th

@@@
Power supplies
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th 10th 11th 12th
13th 14th
4AV
Versions
20
...
26
Single-phase, filtered, ta max. 60 C/B,

suitable for connection to public supply networks and industrial
networks
30
...
35
Three-phase, filtered, ta max. 60 C/B,

networks
36,
38
Three-phase, unfiltered, ta max. 60 C/B,

networks
41
Single-phase, filtered, ta = 40 C/B,

suitable for connection to industrial networks
51
Three-phase, filtered, ta = 40 C/B,

suitable for connection to industrial networks
96
Three-phase, unfiltered, ta = 50 C/B
98
Single-phase, unfiltered, ta = 50 C/B
Power level
Application
Development status
Impregnated transformer
Serial number
Connection type
Mounting type/options
4AV
Example
Note:
article numbers.
15
15/32
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Filtered for Supply of Electronic Controls
General data
Overview
4AV2, 4AV3, 4AV4 and 4AV5 power supplies deliver a nonstabilized DC voltage of 24 V DC based on single-phase or
three-phase safety transformers with downstream rectifiers and

capacitor filtering (4AV36 and 4AV38 without capacitor filtering).
Benefits
They are also highly suitable for supplying capacitive loads,
because when the loads are connected only minimal voltage
dips occur.
The rugged design of the 4AV units makes them extremely

reliable. They are extremely stable when confronted with
external mains failures and have a damping effect on EMC.
Application
The 4AV2, 4AV3, 4AV4 and 4AV5 units are used for:
Supplying general electrical loads
Supplying control circuits
Power supply to electronic controllers They comply with the
requirements of IEC 61131-2 "Programmable logic controllers
equipment specifications and tests" and are suitable for
SIMATIC or other systems.
Ambient conditions
The units are designed for mounting in enclosed controllers and
electronics cabinets. They are climate-proof for installation in
rooms with an external climate according to DIN 50010.
Limit values
Ambient temperature with rated power and rated current for
types:
- 4AV2 and 4AV3: Up to +60 C
- 4AV4 and 4AV5: Up to +40 C
- Minimum value for all types: -25 C
Relative air humidity:
- At +40 C occasionally up to 100 %
- Annual average up to 80 %
- Occasional condensation possible
Rated power and rated current

The specifications in the selection tables are based on fixed
reference conditions in which the devices have the rated power
or rated current:
Uninterrupted duty Pn
Frequency AC 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Installation altitude up to 1 000 m above sea level
Ambient temperature ta
Single- and three-phase DC power supplies
Direct voltage 24 V DC
Limit values
IEC 61131-2
Ripple
Typical value
Conditions
4AV2
4AV3
4AV4
4AV5
5%
2.2 ... 2.7 %
4.2 %
3.0 ... 3.7 %
4.2 %
At rated current
30 V
28.8 V
28.8 V
30 V
30 V
For mains overvoltage +6 % and no-load operation
- arithmetic mean value
20.4 V
20.4 V
20.5 V
20.4 V
20.4 V
- lower peak value
19.2 V
19.3 V
19.3 V
19.2 V
19.2 V
23.5 V
23.5 V
23.5 V
23.5 V
Direct voltage 24 V DC
Upper limit
Lower limit
For mains undervoltage 10 % and rated current
Rated value
For rated mains voltage and rated current
Load rating of the power supplies with 3RT1 contactors for DC operation
Sizes S6 to S12:
Sizes S00 to S3 with DC solenoid systems:
When operating the rectifier units at 10 % mains
power at closing = power when closed. The DC power
undervoltage
supplies can be loaded up to their rated currents.
Contactor
Number of 3RT11) contactors that can be operated simultaneously with preloading

4AV20/
4AV21
4AV23
4AV22
4AV24
Type
3RT1.5
--
--
--
3RT1.6
--
--
3RT1.7
--
--
4AV26
4AV30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4AV31
4AV32
--
--
4AV33
4AV34
--
4AV35
4AV36
4AV38
14
10
22
16
42
30
11
22
15
16
12
$ No-load operation
1)
15
% Rated current
The number of contactors can be significantly increased by using
additional banks of capacitors which must be connected externally.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/33
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Primary-side short-circuit protection, secondary-side short-circuit and overload protection
Rectifier Ambient
unit
temperature
ta
Rated
output
current
Id
Type
DC A
Primary-side protection against short circuits (line protection) by means of

motor starter protector1)2) or fuse
Type

575 V 500 V
(600 V)
460 V 400 V 230 V 200 V

(480 V) (415 V) (240 V)
Secondary-side protection against

short-circuit and overload
by means of
motor starter protector
115 V or
(120 V) fuse
Type
Single-phase
4AV21
60
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
---
---
---
0CA
0.24
0FA
0.4
---
0JA
0.9
40
1.2
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
---
---
---
0DA
0.29
0FA
0.48
---
0KA
1.1
60
40
2.5
3
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
----
----
----
0FA
0.4
0.48
0HA
0.6
0.72
----
60
40
3.5
4.2
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
----
----
----
0HA
0.55
0.66
0JA
0.7
0.84
60
40
5
6
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
----
----
----
0HA
0.6
0.72
60
40
10
12
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
----
----
----
60
40
15
18
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
----
----
4AV20
4AV23
4AV22
4AV24
4AV26
Built-in electrical
short-circuit/overload
protection fuse
--
1BA
1.6
1.9
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1DA
2.5
3
----
1CA
2
2.4
Built-in electrical
short-circuit/overload
protection fuse
--
1AA
1.1
1.3
----
1DA
2.4
2.9
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1GA
5
6
1CA
1.8
2.2
1DA
2.4
2.9
----
1GA
5
6
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1KA
10
12
----
1CA
2
2.4
1EA
3.2
3.8
----
1HA
6
7.2
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4BA
15
18
4AV4101 40
1.5
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
----
----
----
0BA
0.15
0.5
0DA
0.27
1
----
----
Integrated blade-type
fuse FK2
4A
4AV4103 40
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
----
----
----
0GA
0.5
1
0HA
0.7
2
----
----
fuse FK2
7,5 A
4AV4106 40
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
----
----
----
0JA
0.8
2
0KA
1.2
1
----
----
fuse FK2
15 A
4AV4110 40
10
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
----
----
----
1BA
1.6
4
1CA
2.4
4
----
----
fuse FK2
25 A
3-phase
60
40
9/10
11/12
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
0FA
0.4
0.48
0FA
0.4
0.48
0FA
0.4
0.48
0HA
0.6
0.72
0KA
1
1.2
0KA
1
1.2
----
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1KA
9/10
11/12
60
40
13.5/15
16/18
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
0HA
0.6
0.72
0HA
0.6
0.72
0HA
0.6
0.72
0KA
1
1.2
1BA
1.6
1.9
1CA
2
2.4
----
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4BA
14/15
16/18
60
40
18/20
21.5/24
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
0HA
0.6
0.72
0KA
1
1.2
0KA
1
1.2
0KA
1
1.2
1BA
1.6
1.9
1DA
2.4
2.9
----
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4DA
18/20
21.5/24
60
40
27/30
32.5/36
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1CA
1.8
2.2
1CA
1.8
2.2
1CA
1.8
2.2
1CA
2
2.4
1EA
3.2
3.8
1FA
4
4.8
----
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4FA
28/30
32.5/36
60
40
36/40
43/48
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1CA
2
2.4
1CA
2
2.4
1CA
2
2.4
1DA
2.4
2.9
1GA
5
6
1GA
5
6
----
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4HA
36/40
43/48
60
40
45/50
54/60
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
1DA
2.4
2.9
1DA
2.4
2.9
1EA
3.2
3.8
1FA
4
4.8
1HA
6
7.2
1HA
6
7.2
----
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4JA
45/50
54/60
60
40
80
96
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
----
1HA
6
7.2
----
1HA
6
72
----
----
----
3RV1041-@@@10
Set value in A
Set value in A
4MA
80
96
60
150
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
---
1KA
10
---
1KA
12
---
---
---
3VL2716-1DC33-0AA0
Set value in A
150/800
40
180
3RV2021-@@@10
Set value in A
---
4AA
12
---
4AA
14
---
----
---
3VL3720-1DC36-0AA0
Set value in A
180/1 000
4AV5125 40
25
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
----
----
----
1BA
1.6
2
----
----
----
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
4EA
25
25
4AV5135 40
35
3RV2011-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
----
----
----
1CA
2.4
4
----
----
----
3RV1031-@@@10
Set value in A
Fuse gG in A
4FA
35
35
4AV30
4AV31
4AV32
4AV33
4AV34
4AV35
4AV36
15
4AV38
1)
In the event of a short circuit on the supply lines between the protective
device and the input side of the unit, the rated short-circuit breaking
capacity of the protection equipment must be taken into account with
regard to the maximum possible prospective short-circuit current at the
place of installation.
15/34
Siemens IC 10 2014
2)
Circuit recommendation for single-phase power supplies, see circuit

diagram on page 15/11.
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Rated output voltage U2N 24 V DC according to IEC 61131-21)
and SIMATIC for input voltage +6 % to 10 % and
load 0 % to 100 %
Safety transformer according to IEC 61558-2-6
4AV21, 4AV23: CUUS at 60 C, ;
4AV20, 4AV22, 4AV24, 4AV26: CUUS at 60 C, ;
4AV41:
4AV2: ta = max. 60 C/B,
4AV41: ta = 40 C/B
Varistor suppressor circuit
Status LED
EMC according to IEC 62041:
- 4AV2: Suitable for connection to public supply networks
(residential environments) and industrial networks
(industrial environments);
- 4AV4: Suitable for connection to industrial networks
(industrial environments)
Ripple < 5%
SIRIUS 4AV21, 4AV23 (left) and 4AV20, 4AV22 to 4AV24 (right) power
supplies
1)
IEC 61131-2: equipment specification for power supply and interface for
programmable controllers.
For limit values for 24 V DC see Reference Manual
"Power Supplies Non-Stabilized - Stabilized",

Rated input voltage U1N1) 230 (240)-115 (120) V,
rated output voltage U2N 24 V DC
CUUS,
Rated output current Id

60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Integrated standard rail mounting

1
3.5
1.2
4.2
A
A
1
1
4AV2102-2EB00-0A
4AV2302-2EB00-0A
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.280
0.390
1)
During operation at the mains voltages listed in brackets, the upper limit for
24 V DC according to IEC 61131-2 at +6 % mains voltage is met for a
basic load of 10 %. Under no-load operation, 30.6 V can be achieved.
2)
Rated input voltage U1N1) 400 (415) V,

CUUS,

60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Integrated standard rail mounting

1.2
4.2

A
A
4AV2106-2EB00-0A
4AV2306-2EB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.290
0.410
1)
basic load of 10 %. Under no-load operation, 30.6 V can be achieved.
2)
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/35
15
1
3.5
Siemens AG 2013

Rated input voltage U1N1) 400 (415)-230 (240) V with tapping 15 V,
4AV2: CUUS,
; 4AV41:

60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Screw mounting3)
2.5
5
10
15
3
6
12
18
----
1.5
3
6
A
A
A
A
4AV2000-2EB00-0A
4AV2200-2EB00-0A
4AV2400-2EB00-0A
4AV2600-2EB00-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.390
0.630
1.030
2.300
X
A
A
4AV4101-2EB00-0A
4AV4103-2EB00-0A
4AV4106-2EB00-0A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.300
0.670
0.520
A
A
X
4AV2000-2EB00-0A
4AV2200-2EB00-0B
4AV2400-2EB00-0B
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.390
0.630
1.030
X
A
A
4AV4101-2EB00-0B
4AV4103-2EB00-0A
4AV4106-2EB00-0A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.300
0.670
0.520

2.5
5
10
3
6
12
----
1.5
3
6
1)
basic load of 10 %. Under no-load operation with types 4AV4, 31.4 V can
be achieved.
2)
3)
Types 4AV20, 4AV4103 and 4AV4106 are equipped with an integrated

standard rail mounting as standard.
Rated input voltage U1N 400 (415)-230 (240)-115 (120) V,

CUUS,

60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Screw mounting2)
2.5
5
10
15
3
6
12
18
A
A
A
A
4AV2001-2EB00-0A
4AV2201-2EB00-0A
4AV2401-2EB00-0A
4AV2601-2EB00-0A
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.350
0.620
0.970
2.220
3
6
12
A
X
X
4AV2001-2EB00-0A
4AV2201-2EB00-0B
4AV2401-2EB00-0B
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.350
0.620
0.970

2.5
5
10
1)
2)
Types 4AV20 are equipped with an integrated standard rail mounting as

standard.
15
15/36
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Rated output voltage U2N 24 V DC according to IEC 61131-21)
and SIMATIC for input voltage +6 % to 10 % and
load 0 % to 100 %
4AV30 to 4AV35: CUUS at 60 C, ;
4AV36, 4AV38, 4AV51:
4AV3: ta = max. 60 C/B,
4AV51: ta = 40 C/B
Status LED
EMC according to IEC 62041:
- 4AV3 suitable for connection to public supply networks
(residential environments) and industrial networks
(industrial environments);
- 4AV5 suitable for connection to industrial networks
(industrial environments)
Ripple < 5 %
SIRIUS 4AV30 to 4AV33 (left) and

4AV38 (right) power supplies
1)
IEC 61131-2: equipment specification for power supply and interface for
programmable controllers.
For limit values for 24 V DC see Reference Manual
"Power Supplies Non-Stabilized - Stabilized",

Rated input voltage U1N * 400 (415) V with tapping 20 V, d 230 V with tapping 10 V,
CUUS,

60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558
Additional Ripple
capacitance
Buffer time for

U1 = U1N 10 %
ms

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Standard version
10
15
12
18
---
<5
<5
---
A
A
4AV3000-2EB00-0A
4AV3100-2EB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
1.470
1.420
20
30
24
36
---
<5
<5
---
A
A
4AV3200-2EB00-0A
4AV3300-2EB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
2.440
2.780
40
50
48
60
---
<5
<5
---
A
A
4AV3400-2FB00-0A
4AV3500-2FB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4.710
5.590
Additional capacitors (aluminum electrolyte)

10
15
12
18
10 000
10 000
2
3
1
0.6
X
X
4AV3000-2EB00-0C
4AV3100-2EB00-0C
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
1.470
1.420
20
30
24
36
10 000
10 000
3
4
0.4
0.7
X
X
4AV3200-2EB00-0C
4AV3300-2EB00-0C
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
2.440
2.780
40
50
48
60
10 000
10 000
3
4
0.7
0.3
X
X
4AV3400-2FB00-0C
4AV3500-2FB00-0C
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4.710
5.590
1)
Rated input voltage U1N 400 (415) V with tapping 20 V,

Ripple
60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558
DC A
DC A
25
35
<5
<5

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Standard version
---

A
A
4AV5125-2EB00-0A
4AV5135-2EB00-0A
1)
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
1.830
3.180
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/37
15
Siemens AG 2013

Rated input voltage U1N 500-400 (415) V,
CUUS,

60 C/B
IEC 61558
40 C/B
IEC 61558
Additional Ripple
capacitance
Buffer time for

U1 = U1N 10 %
ms

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Standard version
15
30
18
36
---
<5
<5
---
A
A
50
60
--
<5
--
A
1)
4AV3101-2EB00-0A
4AV3301-2EB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
1.640
2.840
4AV3501-2FB00-0A
1 unit
4M1
5.830
Rated input voltage U1N 500-400 (415) V,


60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558
DC A
DC A

flat connectors
Additional Ripple
capacitance
Buffer time for

U1 = U1N 10 %
ms
<5
<5
---
A
D
0.2
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
Article No.
PS*
PG
Price
per PU
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Standard versions (unfiltered)

80
150
96
180
---
4AV3601-2EB00-0A
4AV3801-2EB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
8.040
14.400
4AV3601-2EB00-0C
1 unit
4M1
8.040

80
96
2 10 000 4
1)
Rated input voltage U1N 575 (600)-500-460 (480)-400 (415)-230 (240)-200 V,

CUUS,

60 C/B
40 C/B
IEC 61558
IEC 61558
Additional Ripple
capacitance
Buffer time for

U1 = U1N 10 %
ms

flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
Configurator
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
CUUS
Article No.
DC A
DC A
Price
per PU
kg
Standard version
9
13.5
27
11
16
32.5
----
<5
<5
<5
----
A
A
A
4AV3002-2EB00-0A
4AV3102-2EB00-0A
4AV3302-2EB00-0A
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
1.300
1.130
2.210
36
45
43
54
---
<5
<5
---
A
A
4AV3402-2FB00-0A
4AV3502-2FB00-0A
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4.180
5.420
4AV3002-2EB00-0C
1 unit
4M1
1.300

9
11
10 000
1)
15
15/38
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Unfiltered for Supply of General Loads
unfiltered, single-phase
Overview
The 4AV98 power supplies comprise single-phase safety
transformers according to IEC 61558-2-6 with downstream
bridge connection rectifiers without capacitor filtering.
Rated output voltage Ud 24 V DC

ta = 50 C/B
Short-circuit and overload protection on the output side
with top-mounted fuse
Ripple 48 %
SIRIUS 4AV9806-6CB00-2N power supply
Application
The single-phase 4AV98 devices are especially suitable for
supplying resistive and inductive loads whose operational
voltages place no special demands with regard to ripple.
Ambient conditions
Limit values:
Ambient temperature
- At rated power or rated current: +50 C
- Minimum value: -25 C
The devices are climate-proof for installation in rooms with an

external climate according to DIN 50010.

or rated current:
Rated input voltage U1N 230 V,

rated output voltage Ud 24 V DC
Voltage rise during no-load operation DT1) Screw terminals/

uA
flat connectors
Configurator
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
Price
per PU
50
125
24
14
X
X
4AV9806-4CB00-2N
4AV9806-6CB00-2N
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.200
0.400
200
315
11
10
X
X
4AV9806-7CB00-2N
4AV9806-8CB00-2N
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
0.600
1.100
1)
Rated input voltage U1N 400 V,

rated output voltage Ud 24 V DC
Rated power P2N
Voltage rise during no-load operation DT1) Screw terminals/

uA
flat connectors
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
4AV9807-0CB00-2N
4AV9807-1CB00-2N
4AV9807-2CB00-2N
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.200
0.300
0.400
4AV9807-3CB00-2N
1 unit
4M1
0.600
Configurator
Article No.
W
50
80
125
24
18
14
X
X
X
200
11

kg
1)
Price
per PU
kg
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/39
15
Rated power P2N
Siemens AG 2013

Unfiltered for Supply of General Loads
unfiltered, three-phase
Overview
The 4AV96 power supplies comprise three-phase safety
transformers according to IEC 61558-2-6 with downstream
bridge connection rectifiers without capacitor filtering.
Rated output voltage Ud 30-27-24 V DC

ta = 50 C/B
Shield winding between input and output winding
Designed and approved according to VW equipment
specification
Ripple < 5 %
SIRIUS 4AV9604-.CB00-2N power supply
Application
VW approval
Ambient conditions
The 4AV96 three-phase units are designed and approved

according to the VW equipment specifications.
The devices are climate-proof for installation in rooms with an

external climate according to DIN 50010.
Limit values:
Ambient temperature
- At rated power or rated current: +50 C
- Minimum value: -25 C

or rated current:
Primary-side short-circuit and overload protection
Rectifier unit
Rated output
current Id
Type
DC A
Primary-side short-circuit
and overload protection
for the rectifier
with motor starter protector
Motor starter
protectors
Set
value at
400 V AC
Type
4AV9604-1CB00-2N
3RV2011-0EA10
0.28
4AV9604-5CB00-2N
12
3RV2011-0JA10
0.8
4AV9604-2CB00-2N
25
3RV2011-1CA10
1.8

Rated input voltage U1N 400 V with tapping 5 %,
rated output voltage Ud 30-27-24 V DC
15

Id
Voltage rise during

no-load operation
uA
VW material
No.

flat connectors
Configurator
Article No.
DC A
4
12
25
3.5
3.3
3.1
6142
6141
6145
15/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
X
X
X
4AV9604-1CB00-2N
4AV9604-5CB00-2N
4AV9604-2CB00-2N
1)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
Cu
weight
per PU
approx.
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
4M1
4M1
4M1
0.800
1.400
2.500
Price
per PU
kg

Siemens AG 2013
Stabilized Power Supplies

SITOP Power Supplies
SITOP lite,
single-phase
Overview
The SITOP lite range of power supplies is designed for standard
requirements in industrial environments and offers all important
functions at a favorable price, of course without compromising
quality and the proverbial SITOP reliability. The wide range input
with manual switchover supports connection to a variety of
single-phase supply systems. Thanks to the slim design, the
primary switched power supplies have a low space requirement
on the standard mounting rail, and their excellent degree of
efficiency ensures low thermal losses in the control cabinet.
Short-circuit and overload protection as well as UL approval for
export ensure problem-free use.
24 V/2.5 A, 5 A and 10 A for industrial applications with basic

requirements
Single-phase wide range input with manual switchover
Narrow width
Excellent degree of efficiency
Green LED for "24 V o.k."
Can be switched in parallel
No lateral installation clearances required
Ambient temperature range of 0 C to 60 C
(from 45 C with derating)
Cooling through natural convection
Short-circuit and overload protection
Certification acc. to UL

Version Inputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
Power supplies 24 V
2.5 A
120/230 V AC
24 V DC
(93 ... 132 V AC/ 3 %
187 ... 264 V AC)
2.5 A
32,5 x 125 x
125
6EP1332-1LB00
1 unit
593
5A
120/230 V AC
24 V DC
(93 ... 132 V AC/ 3 %
187 ... 264 V AC)
5A
50 x 125 x 125 A
6EP1333-1LB00
1 unit
593
10 A
120/230 V AC
24 V DC
(93 ... 132 V AC/ 3 %
187 ... 264 V AC)
10 A
70 x 125 x 125 A
6EP1334-1LB00
1 unit
593
6EP1332-1LB00
6EP1333-1LB00
6EP1334-1LB00
15
For other units and versions see Catalog KT 10.1

"SITOP Power Supply".

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/41
Siemens AG 2013

SITOP compact,
single-phase
Overview
The SITOP PSU100C power supply series for the low performance range features an extremely space-saving, narrow
design which makes it suitable in particular for distributed
applications in switchboxes or small control cabinets. The
switching power supply units are characterized by low power
loss over the entire load range. With losses being extremely
small even in no-load operation, these units are predestined for
example for supplying machines and plants which are often
operated in stand-by mode. The switching power supply units
have a wide range input for AC and DC networks, with plug-in
terminals which facilitate easy electrical connection.
24 V/0.6 A, 1.3 A, 2.5 A, 4 A and 3.7 A NEC Class 2;

12 V/2 A and 6.5 A
Small mounting area thanks to narrow design
Wide range input for 85 V to 264 V AC and 110 V to 300 V DC
High degree of efficiency over the entire load range,
up to 28 % energy savings compared to comparable units
Low energy consumption in no-load operation and stand-by,
possible energy savings of up to 53 %
Adjustable output voltage
Green LED for "output voltage o.k."
Plug-in terminals
Temperature range from -20 C to +70 C
Comprehensive certification, e.g. ATEX, NEC Class 2
(24 V/3.7 A)

Version Inputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
Power supplies 24 V
0.6 A
100 ... 230 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
0.6 A
22.5 x 80 x
100
6EP1331-5BA00
1 unit
584
1.3 A
100 ... 230 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
1.3 A
30 x 80 x 100
6EP1331-5BA10
1 unit
584
2.5 A
100 ... 230 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
2.5 A
45 x 80 x 100
6EP1332-5BA00
1 unit
584
4A
100 ... 230 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
4A
52.5 x 80 x
100
6EP1332-5BA10
1 unit
584
3.7 A
52.5 x 80 x
100
6EP1332-5BA20
1 unit
584
6EP1331-5BA00
6EP1331-5BA10
6EP1332-5BA00
6EP1332-5BA10
3.7 A
120 ... 230 V AC 24 V DC
NEC
(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
Class 2 110 ... 300 V DC)
6EP1332-5BA20
Power supplies 12 V
2A
100 ... 230 V AC 12 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
2A
30 x 80 x 100
6EP1321-5BA00
1 unit
584
6.5 A
100 ... 230 V AC 12 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
6.5 A
52.5 x 80 x
100
6EP1322-5BA10
1 unit
584
15
6EP1321-5BA00
6EP1322-5BA10

15/42
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

LOGO!Power,
single-phase
Overview
With LOGO!Power power supplies it is possible not only for 24 V
loads to benefit from the advantages of a stabilized power
supply loads with a 5 V, 12 V and 15 V supply voltage can now
do likewise. For each of these three voltages there are two levels
of current available, and for 24 V there is even a 4 A version in a
width of only 90 mm.
The primary switched power supplies can be used for a wide
range of different applications: In automation systems for industry and buildings, solar technology, measurement and closedloop control, sensor technology, for supplying electronic circuits
in TTL technology, etc.
Advantages of LOGO!Power power supplies:
Two performance classes each with 5 V, 12 V and 15 V;
three performance classes with 24 V
Compact design with 54 mm, 72 mm or 90 mm width
Flat step profile, ideal also for mounting in small distribution
boards
Design adapted to LOGO!
Constant current in case of overloading, for reliable connection of difficult loads such as DC/DC transformers and motors
Large setting range for the output voltage, using
potentiometers which are easy to reach from the front
Green LED indicator for "output voltage o.k."
For universal use in industry and public low-voltage systems
worldwide
Wide range input from 85 to 264 V AC for virtually any network
in the world
Large temperature range from 20 C to +70 C for universal
use
High EMC standards
Extensive approvals and certifications according to CE,
UL/cUL, FM, GL (shipbuilding) and ATEX
Constant stabilized output voltage protects connected loads
Parallel switching option permitted to increase performance
Versions for use in severe ambient conditions
(SIPLUS extreme)

Version
Inputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
Power supplies 5 V
3A
54 x 90 x 55
6EP1311-1SH03
1 unit
583
6.3 A
72 x 90 x 55
6EP1311-1SH13
1 unit
583
1.9 A 100 ... 240 V AC 12 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
1.9 A
54 x 90 x 55
6EP1321-1SH03
1 unit
583
4.5 A 100 ... 240 V AC 12 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
4.5 A
72 x 90 x 55
6EP1322-1SH03
1 unit
583
1.9 A
54 x 90 x 55
6EP1351-1SH03
1 unit
583
4A
72 x 90 x 55
6EP1352-1SH03
1 unit
583
1.3 A
54 x 90 x 55
LOGO!Power
6EP1331-1SH03
1 unit
583
SIPLUS extreme
for medial load, temperature range -25 ... +70 C
6AG1331-1SH03-7AA0
1 unit
470
LOGO!Power
6EP1332-1SH43
1 unit
583
SIPLUS extreme
6AG1332-1SH43-7AA0
1 unit
471
LOGO!Power
6EP1332-1SH52
1 unit
583
SIPLUS extreme
6AG1332-1SH52-7AA0
1 unit
470
3A
100 ... 240 V AC 5 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
6.3 A 100 ... 240 V AC 5 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
Enclosures
54 mm wide
Power supplies 12 V
Power supplies 15 V
Enclosures
72 mm wide
1.9 A 100 ... 240 V AC 15 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
4A
100 ... 240 V AC 15 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
Power supplies 24 V
Enclosures
90 mm wide
2.5 A 100 ... 240 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
4A
100 ... 240 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)

2.5 A
4A
72 x 90 x 55
90 x 90 x 55

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/43
15
1.3 A 100 ... 240 V AC 24 V DC

(85 ... 264 V AC/ 3 %
110 ... 300 V DC)
Siemens AG 2013

SITOP smart,
single-phase and three-phase
Overview
Small in size, big in performance. SITOP smart requires little
room on the standard mounting rail and offers high functionality
at an attractive price. With its good-natured overload behavior,
even loads with a high inrush current can be smoothly switched
on. If required, 50 % extra power can be supplied for a duration
of 5 s. In addition, the 24 V versions will permanently supply
120 % of the rated power provided the ambient temperature
does not exceed 45 C.
For 24 V standard applications up to 40 A
Compact design for small mounting area, no lateral clearance
required
Easy standard rail mounting
Smooth switching on of loads with high inrush current such as
DC/DC converters and motors
More performance thanks to permanent 120 % of rated power

up to an ambient temperature of 45 C (24 V versions)
Large setting range for the output voltage, using
potentiometers which are easy to reach from the front
Parallel switching option to increase performance
Extensive certifications according to UL, CSA, GL
(Germanischer Lloyd) and ATEX directives (Atmosphre
Explosible)
For universal use in industry and public low-voltage systems
worldwide
Can be combined with SITOP expansion modules and the
uninterruptible power supplies (24 V versions)
(SIPLUS extreme)

Version Inputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
DT
Article No.
50 x 125 x 125 A
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6EP1332-2BA20
1 unit
582
6EP1333-2BA20
1 unit
582
6EP1334-2BA20
1 unit
582
6AG1334-2BA20-4AA0
1 unit
471
mm
Power supplies 24 V
Limitation of input current harmonics according to IEC 61000-3-2
2.5 A
120/230 V AC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
170 ... 264 V AC)
24 V DC
3 %
2.5 A
32.5 x 125 x
125
6EP1332-2BA20
5A
120/230 V AC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
170 ... 264 V AC)
24 V DC
3 %
5A
6EP1333-2BA20
10 A
120/230 V AC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
170 ... 264 V AC)
24 V DC
3 %
10 A
70 x 125 x 125
SITOP smart
6EP1334-2BA20, SIPLUS extreme
6AG1334-2BA20- for use in severe ambient conditions
(corrosive gases, salt spray, condensation, dust,
4AA0
biologically active substances, except fauna)

20 A
120/230 V AC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
176 ... 264 V AC)
24 V DC
3 %
20 A
115 x 145 x
150
6EP1336-2BA10
1 unit
582
10 A
3 AC 400 ... 500 V 24 V DC

(3 AC 340 ... 550 V) 3 %
10 A
90 x 145 x 150 A
6EP1434-2BA10
1 unit
582
20 A
3 AC 400 ... 500 V 24 V DC

(3 AC 340 ... 550 V) 3 %
20 A
90 x 145 x 150
6EP1336-2BA10
6EP1434-2BA10
15
SITOP smart
SIPLUS extreme
6EP1436-2BA10,
6EP1436-2BA10
1 unit
582
6AG1436-2BA10-7AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1437-2BA20
1 unit
582
6AG1436-2BA107AA0
40 A
3 AC 400 ... 500 V 24 V DC

(3 AC 360 ... 550 V) 3 %
40 A
150 x 145 x
150
6EP1437-2BA20
For other units and versions see Catalog KT 10.1 "SITOP Power
Supply".
15/44
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SITOP modular,
single-, two- and three-phase
Overview
Compact basic units for single-phase, two-phase or three-phase
connections and output currents from 5 A to 40 A form the basis
of the SITOP modular stabilized supplies. Depending on the
requirements, SITOP expansion modules can be connected in
addition.
The compact design of the primary switched power supply
requires only a small mounting surface. The rugged metal
enclosure is also suitable for the harshest industrial applications.
The standard rail mounting fixture is also made of metal.
Mounting is therefore fast, easy and vibration-proof. Reliability
and quality are further characteristics of the electronic design.
The large input voltage range and the international certifications
enable operation in virtually any network worldwide. The singlephase basic units 5 A and 10A have an ultra-wide input range up
to 550 V, which even enables connection to two phases.
The robust SITOP PSU400M 6EP1536-3AA00 DC/DC converter
is characterized by a wide DC input range from 200 V to 900 V,
which permits connection to a variety of DC networks and
battery systems. On the DC link of frequency-controlled drive
systems, the efficient power supply enables a cost-efficient
mains failure concept by using the braking energy to maintain
the 24 V supply.
Rugged metal enclosure for standard rail mounting

5 A and 10 A units with ultra-wide input range up to 500 V AC
for single-phase and two-phase operation
20 A and 40 A units with wide range input for single-phase or
three-phase connection
Limitation of input current harmonics according to
IEC 61000-3-2 (except 6EP1337-3BA00)
High degree of efficiency up to 96 %
50 % extra power for connection of loads with a high power
requirement
Power boost of 300 % for the tripping of protective devices
(not on PSU400M 6EP1536-3AA00)
Adjustable output voltage up to 28.8 V
3-way status LED
Selectable short-circuit response, constant current or latching
disconnection
Changeover for parallel operation
20 A and 40 A units with single-phase and three-phase
connection, new 20 A and 40 A devices in compact design
(70 mm and 150 mm wide)
PSU400M 6EP1536-3AA00 with wide range input for
DC voltages from 200 V to 900 V
Can be combined with SITOP expansion modules and the
uninterruptible power supplies
(SIPLUS extreme)

Version
Inputs
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ue rated
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
DT
Article No.
}
D
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6EP1333-3BA00
1 unit
581
6AG1933-3BA00-2AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1334-3BA00
1 unit
581
6AG1334-3BA00-4AA0
1 unit
471
6AG1334-3BA00-2AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1336-3BA10
1 unit
581
mm
Power supplies 24 V
120 ... 230 V AC/
230 ... 500 V
(85 ... 264 V AC/
176 ... 550 V AC)
24 V DC
3 %
5A
70 x 125 x
125
SITOP modular
6EP1333-3BA00,
6AG1933-3BA00- SIPLUS extreme
for use in severe ambient conditions
2AA0
and in the extended temperature range -40 ... +70 C
10 A 120 ... 230 V AC/
230 ... 500 V
(85 ... 264 V AC/
176 ... 550 V AC)
24 V DC
3 %
10 A
90 x 125 x
125
6EP1334-3BA00, SITOP modular

.AA0
- For use in severe ambient conditions
20 A 120 ... 230 V AC
(85 ... 275 V AC or
88 ... 350 V DC)
24 V DC
3 %
20 A
90 x 125 x
125
15
5A
6EP1336-3BA10

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/45
Siemens AG 2013

SITOP modular,
single-, two- and three-phase
Version
Inputs
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ue rated
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6EP1336-3BA00
1 unit
581
6AG1936-3BA00-4AA0
1 unit
471
6AG1336-3BA00-7AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1536-3AA00
1 unit
581
6EP1436-3BA00
1 unit
581
6AG1436-3BA00-7AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1436-3BA10
1 unit
581
6EP1337-3BA00
1 unit
581
6AG1337-3BA00-7AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1437-3BA10
1 unit
581
6AG1437-3BA10-7AA0
1 unit
471
mm
Power supplies 24 V (continued)

20 A 120/230 V AC
24 V DC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
3 %
176 ... 264 V AC)
Start-up from 3/183 V AC
20 A
160 x 125 x
125
SITOP modular
6EP1336-3BA00,
4AA0,
6AG1336-3BA00(corrosive gases, salt spray, condensation, dust,
7AA0
20 A 600 V DC
(200 ... 900 V DC)
Start-up from 400 V DC
24 V DC
3 %
20 A
90 x 125 x
125
20 A 3 AC 400 ... 500 V

24 V DC
(3 AC 320 ... 550 V)
3 %
Start-up from 3 AC 340 V
20 A
160 x 125 x
125
6EP1536-3AA00
SITOP modular
6EP1436-3BA00, SIPLUS extreme
6AG1436-3BA00- for use in severe ambient conditions
7AA0
20 A 3 AC 400 ... 500 V
(3 AC 320 ... 575 V)
24 V DC
3 %
20 A
70 x 125 x
125
40 A 120/230 V AC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
176 ... 264 V AC)
Start-up from 95/190 V
AC
24 V DC
3 %
40 A
240 x 125 x
125
6EP1436-3BA10
6EP1337-3BA00,
6AG1337-3BA00- SITOP modular
7AA0
SIPLUS extreme
40 A 3 AC 400 ... 500 V
(3 AC 320 ... 575 V)
24 V DC
3 %
40 A
150 x 125 x
150
SITOP modular
SIPLUS extreme
6EP1437-3BA10,
6AG1437-3BA10- (corrosive gases, salt spray, condensation, dust,
7AA0
40 A
240 x 125 x
125
6EP1437-3BA00
1 unit
581
48 V DC
3 %
10 A
70 x 125 x
125
6EP1456-3BA00
1 unit
581
20 A 3 AC 400 ... 500 V

48 V DC
(3 AC 320 ... 550 V)
3 %
20 A
240 x 125 x
125
6EP1457-3BA00
1 unit
581
40 A 3 AC 400 ... 500 V

24 V DC
(3 AC 320 ... 550 V)
3 %
6EP1437-3BA00
Power supplies 48 V
15
10 A 3 AC 400 ... 500 V

(3 AC 320 ... 575 V)
6EP1456-3BA00
6EP1457-3BA00

15/46
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Special design, special use
Overview
SITOP flexi with steplessly adjustable output voltage:
one standard unit for various special voltages.

Version
Inputs
Outputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Dimensions
Rated (W x H x D)
current
Ia rated
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
582
mm
Power supplies 3 V to 52 V
Limitation of input current harmonics according to IEC 61000-3-2;
adjustable output voltage 3 V to 52 V,
output max. 10 A or 120 W
Max. 10 A
or 120 W
6EP1353-2BA00
120/230 V AC
(85 ... 132 V AC/
170 ... 264 V AC)
3 ... 52 V DC 10 A
1 %
75 x 125 x 125 }
6EP1353-2BA00
15


Siemens IC 10 2014
15/47
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion modules
Overview
The SITOP expansion modules offer further functions:
The signaling module can be snapped onto the side of the
6EP1...-3BA00 basic unit; with floating signaling contacts
"Output voltage o.k." and "Ready o.k."; with signal input for
remote ON/OFF switching of the basic unit.
The SITOP PSE202U redundancy module uses diodes to
disconnect two SITOP stabilized power supplies in parallel
mode. If a power supply fails, the 24 V supply is reliably
maintained. The 24 V/NEC Class 2 module can also be used to
limit the output power to 100 VA in accordance with NEC Class 2.
24 V/10 A for the disconnection of two power supplies up to
5 A or one power supply up to 10 A per redundancy module
24 V/NEC Class 2 disconnects and limits the output to the
Class 2 Limit (100 VA) of two power supplies from 5 A to 40 A
Floating relay contact
Green LED for signaling "Infeed 1 and 2 o.k."
Switching threshold adjustable from 20 V to 25 V
The two SITOP PSE200U selectivity modules and the

SITOP select diagnostics module are used in combination with
24 V power supplies for distributing the load current among up
to four current branches per module and for monitoring the individual partial currents. Overloads or short circuits in individual
branches are selectively switched off and the remaining load
current paths remain unaffected. Individually adjustable rated
current, LED, group alarm contact or signaling interface for
channel-specific evaluation via SIMATIC S7 function block,
standard rail mounting.
The buffer module bridges mains interruptions in the range of
seconds. Buffer time 200 ms at 40 A, up to 1.6 s at 5 A load
current. Multiplication possible through parallel circuit, maximum buffer time 10 s.
Versions for use in severe ambient conditions (SIPLUS extreme)
are available.

Inputs
Outputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Rated voltage
Ua rated
Dimensions
Rated current (W H D)
Ia rated
DT
Article No.

and with hard gold-plated contacts
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6EP1961-3BA10
1 unit
581
6AG1961-3BA10-7AA0
1 unit
471
6AG1961-3BA10-6AA0
1 unit
471
mm
Signaling modules
--
--
--
25 125 125
SITOP signaling modules

SIPLUS extreme
6EP1961-3BA10,
6AG1961-3BA10.AA0
SITOP PSE202U redundancy modules

24 V DC
(19 ... 29 V DC)
Ue approx.
0.5 V
10 A
30 80 100
6EP1964-2BA00
1 unit
588
24 V DC
(19 ... 29 V DC)
Ue approx.
0.5 V
3.5 A
30 80 100
(NEC Class 2)
6EP1962-2BA00
1 unit
588
6EP1961-3BA21
1 unit
588

6AG1961-3BA21-4AX0
1 unit
471

6AG1961-3BA21-7AX0
1 unit
471
6EP1964-2BA00
6EP1962-2BA00
24 V DC
Ue approx.
(24 ... 28.8 V DC) 0.5 V
20 A
70 125 125
SITOP redundancy modules

SIPLUS extreme
15
6EP1961-3BA21,
6AG1961-3BA21.AX0
15/48
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Expansion modules
Inputs
Outputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Rated voltage
Ua rated
Dimensions
Rated current (W H D)
Ia rated
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
SITOP PSE200U selectivity modules

24 V DC
(22 ... 30 V DC)
--
4x3A
(0.5 ... 3 A)
72 80 72
6EP1961-2BA11
1 unit
586
24 V DC
(22 ... 30 V DC)
--
4 x 10 A
(3 ... 10 A)
72 80 72
6EP1961-2BA21
1 unit
586
6EP1961-2BA11,
6EP1961-2BA21
SITOP PSE200U selectivity modules with single-channel signaling

24 V DC
(22 ... 30 V DC)
--
4x3A
(0.5 ... 3 A)
72 80 72
6EP1961-2BA31
1 unit
586
24 V DC
(22 ... 30 V DC)
--
4 x 10 A
(3 ... 10 A)
72 80 72
6EP1961-2BA41
1 unit
586
6EP1961-2BA00
1 unit
586
6EP1961-3BA01
1 unit
588
6AG1961-3BA01-7AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1961-2BA31,
6EP1961-2BA41
SITOP select diagnostics modules

24 V DC
(22 .. 30 V DC)
--
4 x 10 A
(2 ... 10 A)
72 90 90
24 V DC
(24 .. 28.8 V DC)
Ue approx.
1V
40 A
70 125 125
6EP1961-2BA00
Buffer modules
SITOP buffer modules

SIPLUS extreme
6EP1961-3BA01,
6AG1961-3BA017AA0

15


Siemens IC 10 2014
15/49
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The DC-UPS systems are used for example in machine-tool
building, in the textile industry, on all types of production lines
and filling plants, and in conjunction with 24 V industrial PCs.
They prevent the negative consequences which often result from
mains failures.
To combat prolonged mains failures the 24 V SITOP power

supply units can be upgraded into a 24 V DC uninterruptible
power supply.
SITOP offers two systems for this purpose:
Capacitors for 24 V buffering in the minutes range
Battery modules as energy stores which provide a buffer in the
hours range

DC-UPS with capacitors
For use in the control cabinet, the SITOP UPS500S 15 A basic
unit comes in a 2.5 and 5 kWs version. For longer buffer times it
is possible to attach up to three SITOP UPS501S expansion
modules with 5 kWs. The SITOP UPS500P basic units have
degree of protection IP65 and are suitable for distributed use.
In many PC-based automation solutions, greater damage can

be prevented in case of mains failure by putting the system into
a defined status.
The necessary backup of operating data and the subsequent
controlled shutdown of the PC generally occurs within one
minute. The highly capacitive double-layer capacitors of the
SITOP UPS500 store enough energy to shut down PC-based
systems safely and also offer unique advantages.
The USB interface and the software tool enable simple

communication with a PC.
The capacitors themselves have a very long service life even at

very high ambient temperatures. No maintenance or replacement of the energy storage unit is necessary, which means that
the DC-UPS pays for itself after just a short time. And because
the capacitors emit no gas, there is no need for control cabinet
air extraction. Short charging times quickly restore the buffer
readiness after a mains failure.
Version Inputs
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Outputs
Rated
voltage
Ua rated
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W H D)
DT
Article No.
120 125
125
120 125
125
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6EP1933-2EC41
1 unit
585
6EP1933-2EC51
1 unit
585
70 125
125
6EP1935-5PG01
1 unit
585
400 (without
plug) x
80 x 80
6EP1933-2NC01
1 unit
585
mm
SITOP UPS500S
Basic units 15 A
2.5 kWs 24 V DC
(22 ... 29 V DC)
5 kWs infeed through
SITOP 24 V DC
24 V DC
3 %
15.2 A +
approx.
2.3 A
(charging
mode)
SITOP UPS501 expansion modules

5 kWs
6EP1933-2EC.1,
6EP1935-5PG01
Infeed through
basic unit
--
--
SITOP UPS500P
Basic units 7 A, degree of protection IP65
6EP1933-2NC01
24 V DC
24 V DC
(22.5 ... 29 V DC) 3 %
infeed through
10 kWs SITOP 24 V DC
470 (without
plug) x
80 x 80
6EP1933-2NC11
1 unit
585
6EP1975-2ES00
1 unit
585
6EP1933-2NC11
Connector set for SITOP UPS500P1)

with input and output connector and assembled UPS cable in 2 m
length
5 kWs
1)
The connector set must be ordered as optional equipment.
7A+
approx.
2A
(charging
mode)
DC-UPS with battery modules see page15/51 onwards.
15

15/50
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

DC-UPS with battery modules
If the 24 V power supply has to be intermittently stored or a larger
buffer power is required, the DC-UPS power supply lead power
packs offers optimal maintenance-free security.
It bridges any mains failures for hours and delivers up to 40 A.
This enables processes or subprocesses to be continued,
measured values to continue to be recorded without interruption
and communication is maintained.
All relevant signals are made via non-floating contacts, and also
optionally via a serial interface or USB. The software tool enables
easy integration on the software side.
High-performance industrial PCs require a somewhat higher

energy demand and must be powered down. Especially if a
large panel continues to be operated during the shutdown.
The sophisticated battery management of the compact DC-UPS
modules enables optimal battery charging and thus dependable buffer readiness. The active battery test function even
checks the age of the battery. This makes preventive battery
replacement unnecessary and leads to significant cost
savings.
Version
Inputs
Outputs
Rated voltage
Rated voltage
Ue rated
Ua rated
The 24 V DC uninterruptible power supply with battery modules

is comprised of DC UPS modules with 6 A, 15 A or 40 A output
current and the battery modules 1.2 Ah, 3.2 Ah, 7 Ah and 12 Ah
(containing lead rechargeable batteries with corrosion-resistant
lead-calcium high-performance grid plates and glass fiber
fleece) and 2.5 Ah (containing "high-temperature rechargeable
batteries" type Reinblei).
Versions for use in severe ambient conditions (SIPLUS extreme)

are available.
DT
Article No.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
SITOP DC UPS modules
- With serial interface
6EP1931-2DC21
1 unit
585
6EP1931-2DC31
1 unit
- With USB interface
585
6EP1931-2DC42
1 unit
585
6EP1931-2EC21
1 unit
585
- With serial interface
6EP1931-2EC31
1 unit
585
6EP1931-2EC42
1 unit
585
6AG1931-2EC21-2AA0
1 unit
471
6EP1931-2FC21
1 unit
585
6EP1931-2FC42
1 unit
585
6AG1931-2FC21-7AA0
1 unit
471
Rated
current
Ia rated
Dimensions
(W H D)
Price
per PU
mm
DC UPS modules
6A
6EP1931-2DC..
15 A
DC 24 V
24 V DC
6A
(DC 22 ... 29 V) (mains operation:
21.5 ... 28.5 V,
battery operation:
27.0 ... 18.5 V)
DC 24 V
24 V DC
15 A
21.5 ... 28.5 V,
battery operation:
27.0 ... 18.5 V)
50 125 125
50 125 125
6EP1931-2EC..,
6AG1931-2EC21- - With USB interface
2AA0
SIPLUS extreme
40 A
DC 24 V
24 V DC
40 A
21.5 ... 28.5 V,
battery operation:
27.0 ... 18.5 V)
102 x 125 x
125

- With USB interface
6EP1931-2FC..,
6AG1931-2FC21- SIPLUS extreme
7AA0
15
Battery modules for DC-USP modules see page 15/52.

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/51
Siemens AG 2013

Version
Charging
voltage
at +25 C
Outputs
Ucharge
Ua rated
Rated voltage
Dimensions
(W H D)
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mm
Battery modules
For DC-UPS modules 6 A
1.2 Ah
27.0 V DC
24 V DC
(end of charge voltage:
27.0 V DC,
exhaustive discharge
protection:
18.5 V DC)
96 106 108 }
6EP1935-6MC01
1 unit
585
6EP1935-6MC01
For DC-UPS modules 6 A and 15A

2.5 Ah/
27.7 V DC
high temperature
rechargeable
battery
24 V DC
27.7 V DC,
protection:
18.5 V DC)
265 151 91 }
6EP1935-6MD31
1 unit
585
27.0 V DC
24 V DC
27.0 V DC,
protection:
18.5 V DC)
190 151 82 }
6EP1935-6MD11
1 unit
585
186 x 168 x
121
6EP1935-6ME21
1 unit
585
253 x 168 x
121
6EP1935-6MF01
1 unit
585
3.2 Ah
For DC-UPS modules 6 A to 40 A

7 Ah
27.0 V DC
12 Ah
27.0 V DC
24 V DC
27.0 V DC,
protection:
18.5 V DC)
6EP1935-6ME21

15

15/52
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013
Heating Control Systems

General data
Overview
To increase the quality and quantity of a heat-treated product it
is important to be able to focus the energy required with the
highest level of precision in terms of both time and space. The
SIPLUS HCS ensures utmost precision in the control of electrical
heating elements such as infrared heaters.
Three heating control systems are available:
With integrated power outputs compact design
With integrated power outputs modular design
Without integrated power outputs
The SIPLUS HCS family of heating control systems saves time,
costs and resources when it comes to configuring, commissioning, operation and maintenance.
SIPLUS HCS heating control systems:

Industrial heating processes maximum precision and
efficiency
In manufacturing processes where temperature plays a crucial
role, deviations of just a few degrees can cause enormous
quality problems. To avoid this and to minimize rejection rates,
high-precision and reliable, individual control of the electrical
heating elements is essential.
Nearly all industrially manufactured products undergo heat
treatment. Even slight deviations in the heating process can lead
to a huge impairment of product quality.
This is achieved by:

Simple integration into existing automation systems such as
SIMATIC and SIMOTION
Low wiring outlay and user-friendly engineering
Intelligent diagnostics options for swift fault detection
Service-friendly design thanks to ready-to-use function and
data blocks
Reduced volume in the control cabinet with spacing savings
of up to 50 %
For an overview of available heating control systems,
see page 15/5.
For more information, see Industry Mall or
Benefits
Significantly increased plant availability thanks to detailed,
intelligent diagnostics functions and fast localization of faults
in the heating process
Simple integration into existing automation systems
Automation from a single source: Easy data management

with TIA
Easy commissioning with STEP 7 and TIA portal
Application
They are used above all in the following industries and plants:
Plastics industry: thermoforming, blow molding, injection
molding and extrusion
Automotive industry: drying tunnels in paint shops
Food and beverage industry, e.g. packaging lines and
PET blow molding
15
The SIPLUS HCS heating control systems are designed for use
in the SIMATIC industrial automation system and the SIMOTION
motion control system.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/53
Siemens AG 2013

With Integrated Power Outputs Compact Design
General data
Overview
The distributed solution for deployment in proximity to heating
elements ideally suited for the linear setup of heat emitter
arrays, for example when controlling heat emitter arrays to heat
preforms in PET blow molding machines.
Overview
The SIPLUS HCS3200 heating control system was developed as
a compact solution for controlling linear heat emitter arrays.
Thanks to the high IP65 degree of protection, it can be used
independently of a control cabinet in a distributed location near
the emitters.
SIPLUS HCS3200 heating control system with fixing brackets
Benefits
Rugged thanks to high IP65 protection
Application
Heating solutions which require distributed connection of the
heating control system with a high degree of protection, e.g.
- PET blow molding machines
- Roasting/baking/melting/drying of foodstuffs
Applications with a small number of heater elements, e.g.
- Vulcanizing machines
- Spot repair emitters
- Drying of coatings on headlights
Design
15
The main components of the HCS3200 heating control system

are:
HCS3200 device built into a metal enclosure with IP65 degree
of protection
Four mounting brackets for attaching the device (included in
scope of supply)
15/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
Applications requiring medium outputs, e.g.

- Welding of tanks
- Drying of paint, e.g. on gas tanks
- Drying of coatings on alloy wheel rims
- Forming of loudspeaker covers
- Drying the screen printing on screens
Siemens AG 2013

Function
Communications
Are executed via PROFIBUS DP at 12 Mbit/s
For importing the parameter settings from the higher-level
control system
For transferring the diagnostics information to the higher-level
control system
Communication takes place via the ECOFAST X3/X4 plugs
and can be looped through from device to device using daisy
chaining.
Performance features
Calculation of output control variables of power output
channels
Setpoints can be adjusted from 0 % to 100 % in increments
of 1 %
Zero cross-switching solid-state relays (SSR)
External fan output for connection of a 230 V AC fan
up to 500 W
Power supply to the main circuit

The power supply is two-phase with a voltage of 400 V AC
( 10 %)
The mains frequency is 50/60 Hz ( 5 %)
Power supply to the internal electronics
The internal electronics of the device must be supplied with
24 V DC 20 % (PELV = Protective Extra Low Voltage)
The maximum current consumed per device is 0.25 A
Connection for 24 V DC power supply and PROFIBUS DP via
the ECOFAST X3/X4 plugs
The 24 V DC supply can be looped through from device to
device using daisy chaining
Power outputs
Nine power outputs are available for each device
Max. 4 000 W switching capacity per output
Max. 25 200 W switching capacity per device
Diagnostics
Fan output
The following faults are detected:

Heating element fault
Breakdown of solid-state relay (SSR)
Incoming line fuse has tripped
Outgoing fuse has tripped or solid state relay (SSR) has high
resistance
Monitoring of the fan outlet
An external 230 V AC fan with a maximum output of 500 W can

be operated.
Air extraction
An internal fan is used in order to obtain uniform heat distribution within the enclosure. The fan is controlled according to the
internal temperature and is also monitored. If the fan is not
functioning correctly, a fault is signaled to the user
The internal fan is available as an accessory and can be
replaced if it becomes defective
The SIPLUS HCS3200 heating control system is fitted with a sensor for monitoring the internal temperature. When a temperature
threshold that is permanently set in the hardware is overshot, all
the outputs (power outputs and the external fan) are automatically switched off to prevent damage to the device.
Fuses
Two gG 16 A fuses per power output for protecting the power
outputs
One gG 4 A fuse for protecting the fan output
All fuses are fitted in fuse holders and are easily accessible
Integration
The SIPLUS HCS3200 heating control system is a distributed
I/O device. It communicates via the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus with
the SIMATIC S7 controller.
PROFINET
A complete system includes the following components:

Higher-level control through SIMATIC S7 automation system
with integrated interface for PROFIBUS DP or SIMOTION
PROFIBUS DP
Cabling
Heat emitter array
HMI panel (optional)
PROFIBUS DP
SIMATIC
S7-1200
SIMATIC HMI
TP1200 Comfort
SIPLUS
HCS3200
Heat
emitter
array
15
SP01_00027
Application example with SIMATIC and SIPLUS HCS3200
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/55
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6BK1932-0BA00-0AA0
Product designation
HCS3200 fan
General data
Type of control of heat emitters
Half-wave control
Type of load
Resistive load
Reference designations according to IEC 81346-2
Degree of pollution
Approvals/Certificates
CE
Supply voltage
AC
Type of voltage of the supply voltage

Supply voltage at AC rated value
400
Relative negative tolerance

Relative positive tolerance
%
%
10
10
1
2
Relative symmetrical tolerance
Hz
Hz
50
60
5
Switching capacity current per phase maximum
63
Breaking capacity, short-circuit current limit (Icu)

at 400 V, rated value
kA
25
Supply voltage frequency
Optocoupler between main circuit and PELV
Type of electrical isolation

Maximum permissible power carrying capacity
25 200
Connector socket, 4-pole + PE
Type of electrical connection for supply voltage

Type of connectable conductor cross-sections for supply voltage
Finely stranded for AWG cables
mm
AWG
3 x (6 ... 25), 1 x PE (6 ... 16)

3 x (8 ... 4), 1 x PE (10 ... 6)
Power electronics
Number of outputs
For fans
For heating power
1
9
Number of heat emitters per output, maximum
Output voltage at the output

For heating power
For fans
V
V
400
230
Per output
For fans per output
W
W
200 ... 4 000

60 ... 500
Output voltage at the output for heating power, rated value
400
Power carrying capacity
No
Electrical separation between the outputs

Version of short-circuit protection
At the output for fan
For heating power per output
4 A melting fuse
16 A melting fuse
Type of electrical connection at output for heater and fan
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections for heater and fans

mm
AWG
20 x (1.5 ... 4), 1 x PE (1.5 ... 16)

20 x (18 ... 12), 1 x PE (16 ... 6)
Measuring inputs for voltage

Yes
Product function voltage measuring
Communications
Yes
Protocol is supported PROFIBUS DP protocol
PROFIBUS DP
Interface version
Transmission rate for PROFIBUS DP, maximum
Type of electrical connection of the PROFIBUS interface
Mbit/s
12
ECOFAST
Display
2
Type of status display using LEDs
LED green = status indicator

LED red = fault indicator
15
Number of status displays
15/56
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6BK1932-0BA00-0AA0
Product designation
HCS3200 fan
Auxiliary circuit
External
Design of the power supply
DC
Type of voltage
Supply voltage for electronics
24
Relative symmetrical tolerance of the input voltage
20
Consumed current for electronics maximum
0.25
Product function temperature monitoring
Yes
Type of temperature monitoring
NTC thermistors
Fuse diagnostics
Blown fuse
Open circuit
Heat emitter break
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mechanical features
Mounting position
Vertical
Type of mounting
Screw mounting
Type of ventilation
Self-ventilation
Shock resistance
15 g/11 ms/3 shocks/axis

25 g/6 ms/1 000 shocks/axis
During operation according to IEC 60068-2-6
During storage according to IEC 60068-2-6
10 ... 58 Hz/0.075 mm, 58 ... 150 Hz/1 g

5 ... 9 Hz/3.5 mm, 9 ... 500 Hz/1 g
IP65
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
300
380
200
Conducted interference injection BURST
2 kV power supply cables/1 kV signal cables
Conducted interference injection SURGE

On supply cables:
1 kV symmetrical, 2 kV asymmetrical,
(24 V DC supply only with external protective measure)
On PROFIBUS DP cable:
1 kV asymmetrical
Conducted interference injection as high-frequency interference

10 V (0.15 ... 80 MHz)
4 kV contact discharge/8 kV air discharge
10 V/m (80 ... 1 000 MHz), 3 V/m (1.4 ... 2.0 GHz),
1 V/m (2.0 ... 2.7 GHz)
According to IEC 61000-6-4:2007 + A1:2011
III
Climatic ambient conditions

Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
0 50
-40 +70
-40 +70
hPa
hPa
860 1 080
660 1 080
At 25 C during operation maximum

At 50 C during operation maximum
%
%
95
50
Installation altitude at height above sea level maximum
2 000
Air pressure
During operation
During storage
15
Relative humidity
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/57
Siemens AG 2013


Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6BK1932-0BA00-0AA0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477

HCS3200 fan
6BK1932-0BA00-0AA0
with fixing brackets
More information
15
For more product details see the operating instructions

"SIPLUS HCS3200 Heating control system",
15/58
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

With Integrated Power Outputs Modular Design
General data
Overview
The cost-optimized, space-saving solution for use in a central
control cabinet with an almost unlimited number of power
outputs, e.g. for controlling the heat emitter arrays in thermoforming machines or drying ovens in the automotive industry.
SIPLUS HCS716I heating control system:

General data
Overview
The SIPLUS HCS716I heating control system was developed as
a cost-optimized controller of heat emitter arrays in thermoforming machines. It is suitable for all generally available radiation devices such as quartz, quartz material, ceramic, halogen
and infrared radiation devices.
The SIPLUS HCS716I can be used wherever resistive loads of
small to medium output require switching at low-cost in an industrial environment.
The SIPLUS HCS716I range is comprised of four racks and three
power output modules.
SIPLUS HCS716I heating control system
Benefits
High degree of modularity in terms of number of channels and
channel performance
Application
The SIPLUS HCS716I heating control system is used,
for example, to switch the small and medium output heat emitter
arrays in thermoforming machines, drying ovens and packaging
machines.
The SIPLUS HCS716I is a distributed I/O unit (slave) that

communicates over the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus with a higherlevel control system (master) such as SIMATIC S7/SIMOTION.
Design
Fan unit with one or three fans (option)
Communication over PROFIBUS DP, e.g. with SIMOTION,
SIMATIC S7, or industrial PC
Plug-in card system on the front
15
The main components of the SIPLUS HCS716I heating control

system are:
19" rack with bus board for inserting up to 4 or up to 12 power
output modules, as well as a control module and CPU module
Power output modules in double-height Eurocard format with
8/16 output channels
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/59
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Integration
SIMATIC MP377
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOTION D4x5 with
SINAMICS S120
and servomotors
SIPLUS
heating
control
system
Heat emitter array
G_PM01_EN_00009
SIPLUS
HCS716I
Application example with SIMOTION, SINAMICS and SIPLUS HCS716I
Type
6BK17002AA002AA100AA1
0AA1
2AA700AA0
2AA800AA0
3AA000AA0
Racks
Product designation
Hinged
frame
6BK17002BA704BA800AA1
0AA0
Power output modules
Mounting frame
With
Without
flange
flange
Narrow
version
Expansion LA716
frame
LA716I
CE, KCC
Supply voltage
AC

230
Relative negative tolerance

Relative positive tolerance
%
%
18
15
Hz
Hz
%
50
60
5
--
230

1
2
Communications
PROFIBUS DP
System interface
Mounting position
Horizontal
Vertical
Type of mounting
In one
hinged
frame
Type of ventilation
Self-ventilation or forced ventilation
Interface version
Mechanical features
Rear panel control cabinet
Fixing clips in racks
10 ... 58 Hz/0.15 mm, 58 ... 150 Hz/1 g

5 ... 9 Hz/3.5 mm, 9 ... 500 Hz/1 g
IP00
Dimensions
mm
mm
mm
15
Width
Height
Depth
15/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
483
265.5
350
4CA000AA0
510
310
330
202.7
309.5
287
31
233.4
241
279
LA716I HP
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
6BK17002AA002AA100AA1
0AA1
2AA700AA0
2AA800AA0
3AA000AA0
Racks
Product designation
Hinged
frame
6BK17002BA704BA800AA1
0AA0
4CA000AA0

Mounting frame
With
Without
flange
flange
Narrow
version
Expansion LA716
frame
LA716I
LA716I HP

On supply cables
- 1 kV symmetrical
- 2 kV asymmetrical
On PROFIBUS DP cable
- 1 kV asymmetrical
Conducted interference injection

as high-frequency interference
10 V effective in the frequency range 0.15 ... 80 MHz,

modulation 80 % AM with 1 kHz,
assessment criterion A
10 V/m (80 ... 1 000 MHz), 3 V/m (1.4 ... 2.0 GHz), 1 V/m (2.0 ... 2.7 GHz)
According to IEC 61000-6-4:2007 + A1:2011
III
--
On power supply and signal

cables
- 1 kV symmetrical
- 2 kV asymmetrical
10 V (0.15 ... 80 MHz)

Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
0 55
-40 +70
-40 +70
hPa
hPa
860 1 080
660 1 080
95
2 000
Air pressure
During operation
During storage
Relative humidity
At 25 C
- Max.
maximum
More information
15

"Heater controller SIPLUS HCS716I",
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/61
Siemens AG 2013

Racks
Overview
The rack is the mechanical framework of the SIPLUS HCS716I
and contains all the modules required to control the power
outputs.
These are available in four different versions:
Rack hinged frame
Rack mounting frame
Rack mounting frame without flange
Rack mounting frame, narrow version, and expansion frame,
narrow version
Rack hinged frame
The CPU module and the control module are located at the rear
of the rack. This rack is suitable for installation in a hinged frame.
Rack mounting frame without flange 6BK1700-2AA70-0AA0
Rack mounting frame, narrow version, and

expansion frame, narrow version
The CPU module and the control module are also located on the
right side of the rack. This rack is suitable for installation in a control cabinet. It accommodates up to four power output modules
and can be extended with the expansion frame to take a further
four power output modules. The expansion frame is mounted on
the left of the mounting frame, narrow version, and is connected
to it by a cable.
A fan unit is also available as an accessory. It is fitted to the rack
mounting frame, narrow version, and to the expansion frame,
narrow version, from underneath.
Rack hinged frame 6BK1700-2AA00-0AA1
Rack mounting frame

right side of the rack. This rack is suitable for direct installation
in a control cabinet.
Rack mounting frame narrow version 6BK1700-2AA80-0AA0 (right),

and expansion frame narrow version 6BK1700-3AA00-0AA0 (left),
with fan units 6BK1700-2GA10-0AA0 attached below
Rack mounting frame 6BK1700-2AA10-0AA1
15
right side of the rack. This rack is suitable for installation in a
control cabinet. In contrast to the mounting frame, this version
has no mounting bracket (flange) at the front.
Fan unit 6BK1700-2GA10-0AA0
15/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Racks
Design
19" rack
- Rear panel for CPU module, control module and bus module
- Mountings for 4 or 12 power output modules
- Partition as cover when slots are not all populated
CPU module with PROFIBUS interface module
Control module
- Power supply for the modules of the heating control system
- Decoding for controlling the power output modules
Bus module
- Contains 4 or 12 direct plug-in connectors for connecting the
control module to the power output modules
Heat dissipation possible with optional fan units
Function
Communications
PROFIBUS DP
- Import of the parameter settings from the higher-level control
system
- Transfer of the diagnostics information to the higher-level
control system
Internal system bus via bus PCB
Controlling and monitoring up to 192 power channels
Calculation of the emitter manipulated variables of the power
output channels
Setpoint values are adjustable in 1 % increments from 0 % to
100 %
Diagnostics
Evaluating the diagnostics information of the connected
power output modules
Automatic detection of the mains frequency
Forced ventilation
Depending on the switching capacity and ambient temperature,
the rack may have to be force-ventilated. Fan units for this purpose are available as optional accessories (see page 15/65).
For detailed information see the operating instructions
"SIPLUS HCS716I Heating Control System",
Type
6BK17002AA00-0AA1
Product designation
Racks
2AA10-0AA1
2AA70-0AA0
Hinged frame Mounting frame

With
Without
flange
flange
2AA80-0AA0
Narrow
version
3AA00-0AA0
Expansion
frame
General data
Number of slots
12
Type of power output module connectable
LA716/LA716I/LA716I HP
Pollution degree
Supply voltage
Active power input
15
Mains failure buffering time
ms
20
Recovery time after mains failure, typical
kW
kW
176
67

With fan per rack
Without fan per rack
59
22
Plug, 2-pole

Solid
mm
mm
AWG
1 x (0.2 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
24 ... 12
mm
mm
mm
483
265.5
350
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
510
310
330
202.7
309.5
287
Communications
Yes

Transmission rate for PROFIBUS DP, maximum
Mbit/s
12
9-pin sub D socket
Type of status displays using LEDs
LED green = status indicator

LED red = fault indicator
15
Display
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/63
Siemens AG 2013

Racks

Number Type of power
of
output module
slots
connectable
Interface
version
DT
Article No.
12
LA716/LA716I/
LA716I HP
PROFIBUS DP
12
LA716/LA716I/
LA716I HP
PROFIBUS DP
LA716/LA716I/
LA716I HP
PROFIBUS DP
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6BK1700-2AA00-0AA1
1 unit
477
6BK1700-2AA10-0AA1
1 unit
477
6BK1700-2AA70-0AA0
1 unit
477
6BK1700-2AA80-0AA0
1 unit
477
6BK1700-3AA00-0AA0
1 unit
477
Rack hinged frame
6BK1700-2AA00-0AA1
Rack mounting frame
6BK1700-2AA10-0AA1

12
6BK1700-2AA70-0AA0
Rack mounting frame, narrow version

Mounting frame, narrow version
4
LA716/LA716I/
LA716I HP
PROFIBUS DP
Expansion frame, narrow version

4
LA716/LA716I/
LA716I HP
PROFIBUS DP
6BK1700-3AA00-0AA0 (left) with

6BK1700-2AA80-0AA0 (right)
with fan units attached below
15
Accessories see next page.
15/64
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Racks
Accessories
Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
For rack hinged frame, rack mounting frame and

rack mounting frame without flange
Fan units1)
230 V AC with 3 fans
On request 1)
115 230 V AC/24 V DC

with 3 fans and speed monitoring
On request 1)
These are fitted to the racks from below.
For rack mounting frame, narrow version and expansion frame,

narrow version
Fan unit
6BK1700-2GA10-0AA0
230 V AC with 1 fan

This is attached from below to the rack mounting
frame, narrow version and to the expansion frame,
narrow version.
6BK1700-2GA10-0AA0
1)
Fan units for the rack hinged frames, rack mounting frames and rack
mounting frames without flange are available from:
HEITEC AG see Chapter 16 "Appendix" "External partners".
More information
15


Siemens IC 10 2014
15/65
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The power output modules are an important component of the
SIPLUS HCS716I heating control system.
Three different power output modules can be used depending
on the application:
LA716 power output module the universal version
LA716I power output module the innovative version
LA716I HP power output module the HighPower version
LA716 power output module

The universal power output module provides 16 channels for
switching on resistive loads. A maximum of 650 W can be used
for each output channel.
LA716I power output module
The innovative power output module provides 16 channels for
switching on resistive loads. A maximum of 1 150 W can be used
LA716I HP power output module
The HighPower version provides 8 channels for switching on
resistive loads. A maximum of 2 300 W can be used for each
output channel.
LA716 (left), LA716I (center) and LA716I HP (right) power output

modules
Design
Connection of the heat emitter via two 8-pole mating
connectors (The heat emitters and the mating connectors are
ordered separately)
Mains infeed at the front:

- LA716 power output module: 3-pole terminal (Lx/N/Ly)
- LA716I and LA716I HP power output modules: 3-pole plug
connector (Lx/N/Ly)
Function
Protector elements
Power triacs with zero crossover switching
Protection of triacs and opto-triacs against overvoltages by
Transil diodes
Output power
16 power output channels 230 V each
(8 outputs each per phase)
Max. 10 400 W switching capacity per module
15
There is an NTC thermistor on the heat sink for monitoring its
temperature. In the event of an overtemperature, this temperature-dependent resistor issues a signal to the higher-level control
system.
15/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
Fuses
Each output is protected with a 5 A fuse in an accessible fuse
holder for the protection of the power triacs.
A fuse cover is available as touch protection.
A plexiglass cover is available on the front side as touch
protection.
A plexiglass cover is available on the front side as touch protection.
Diagnostic option
Standard diagnostics are provided for detecting the following
faults:
Circuit breaker triac at high resistance or internal fuse blown
Channel fuse blown on the module
External faults such as a blown fuse, broken heat emitter or
broken cable
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6BK1700-2BA70-0AA1
Product designation

LA716
6BK1700-4BA80-0AA0
6BK1700-4CA00-0AA0
LA716I
LA716I HP
General data
Full-wave control
Type of load
Resistive load
Pollution degree
Supply voltage
Switching capacity current per phase, maximum
23
Optocoupler between main circuit and SELV/PELV
32

Of the module for delta connection at 40 C
- With fan maximum
- Without fan maximum
Maximum permissible
W
W
W
10 400
6 200
10 400
14 720
6 500
14 720
Terminal 3-pole

Type of connectable conductor cross-sections for
supply voltage
Solid
mm
mm
AWG
1 x (0,2 ... 6)
1 x (0.25 ... 4)
22 ... 10
1 x (0,2 ... 10)

1 x (0.25 ... 6)
24 ... 8
1 x (0,2 ... 10)

1 x (0.25 ... 6)
24 ... 8
Power electronics
Number of outputs for heating power
16
Number of heat emitters per output, maximum
Output voltage with wye connection
230
Version of the overvoltage protection
Transil diodes

Per output
75 650
Output current at the output for heating power,

rated value
75 1 150
75 2 300
10
Type of short-circuit protection for heating power

per output
5 A melting fuse
10 A melting fuse
No
Type of electrical connection at output for heater
8-pole socket connector
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections for

heater
Solid
mm
mm
AWG
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)

1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)
28 ... 16
mm
mm
mm
31
233.4
241
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
279
Auxiliary circuit
Supply through racks
Yes
NTC thermistors
Diagnostics function
Voltage diagnostics
Blown fuse
Open circuit
Heat emitter break
Yes
Yes
Yes
15
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/67
Siemens AG 2013


Number of outputs
for heating power

per output
max.
DT
Article No.
650
1 150
2 300
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6BK1700-2BA70-0AA1
1 unit
477
6BK1700-4BA80-0AA0
1 unit
477
6BK1700-4CA00-0AA0
1 unit
477

16
6BK1700-2BA70-0AA1

16
6BK1700-4BA80-0AA0

8
6BK1700-4CA00-0AA0
Accessories
Version
For power output module
Type
LA716, LA716I
LA716I HP
200021116
A5E00186303
LA716I, LA716I HP
LA716, LA716I, LA716I HP
A5E30280233
A5E00507233
Fuse
5 A quick/250 V
10 A quick/250 V
Mating connectors
3-pole for mains connection
8-pole for connection of the heat emitters
More information
15

15/68
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
The SIPLUS HCS724I heating control system controls and
switches heat emitter arrays and other resistive loads of medium
to high output in the industrial environment.
It is connected through PROFIBUS DP and can be used together
with for example SIMATIC S7 to form a highly modern and
powerful automation system. As an option, a line-voltage
sensing module can be integrated in order to compensate
automatically and internally for variations in the line voltage.
SIPLUS HCS724I heating control system
Benefits
Time savings by means of adaptation to each production
process
Excellent product quality thanks to integrated line voltage

compensation
Application
The SIPLUS HCS724I heating control system is used
for example for controlling heat emitter arrays:
Thermoforming machines
Blow molding machines

Plastic welding machines
Drying ovens
Design
The main components of the SIPLUS HCS724I heating control
system are:
Central interface module
LA724I/LA724I HP/LA724I SSR power output modules:
Up to 16 power output modules can be connected.
Line-voltage sensing module (option)
Fan module (option)
Current measuring module (option)

Communication over PROFIBUS DP, e.g. with SIMOTION,
SIMATIC S7, or industrial PC
The central interface module and the LA724I/LA724I HP/LA724I
SSR power output modules are installed in a metal enclosure
and mounted on a mounting plate in the control cabinet.
Customized, distributed solutions are also possible.
Integration
PROFIBUS DP
SIMATIC S7-300
(e.g. with
CPU 317-2DP)
HCS724I
MPI
SIPLUS Heating Control

System
SIMATIC
MP277 Touch
Heat emitter array
G_PM01_EN_00010
15
Application example with SIMOTION, SINAMICS and SIPLUS HCS724I
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/69
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
6BK17002BA300AA0
6ES71713AA000AA0
6BK17002BA400AA0
Central interface Power output modules

Line-voltage
module
LA724I
LA724I HP LA724I SSR sensing
module
Fan
module
Current
measuring
module
Pollution degree
--
AC
--
--
230
--
---
18
15
---
4 connecting
cables with
ring terminal
lug
Plug,
2-pole
Terminal
16-pole
Product designation
6BK17002BA004BA700AA0
0AA0
2BA100AA0
6ES71711XX006AA0
General data
Q
CE, KCC
Supply voltage
AC

230
Relative negative tolerance of the supply voltage

Relative positive tolerance of the supply voltage
%
%
18
15
400
Terminal 2-pole
Busbars or
ring terminal lugs
PROFIBUS DP
System interface
Communications
Interface version
--
Mechanical features
Mounting position
Vertical
Type of mounting
Screws in fixing lugs on the top and bottom
--
Type of ventilation
Selfventilation
Horizontal
Vertical
Mounting
clips
Screws in
fixing lugs
on the top
and bottom
Shock resistance

25 g/6 ms/1 000 shocks/axis
10 ... 58 Hz/0.15 mm, 58 ... 150 Hz/1 g

5 ... 9 Hz/3.5 mm, 9 ... 500 Hz/1 g
IP20
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
50
480
210
86
22
160
100
50
162
15

On supply
On power supply and signal cables
cables
- 1 kV symmetrical
- 1 kV
- 2 kV asymmetrical
symmetrical
- 2 kV
asymmetrical
On
PROFIBUS DP
cable
- 1 kV
asymmetrical
Conducted interference injection as

high-frequency interference
10 V (0.15 ... 80 MHz)
Limit value class A acc. to EN 55011 Group 1
III
15/70
Siemens IC 10 2014
150
77.5
115
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
6BK17002BA300AA0
6BK17002BA004BA700AA0
0AA0
2BA100AA0
6ES71711XX006AA0
Central interface Power output modules

Line-voltage
module
LA724I
LA724I HP LA724I SSR sensing
module
Product designation
6ES71713AA000AA0
6BK17002BA400AA0
Fan
module
Current
measuring
module

Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
0 55
-40 +70
-40 +70
During operation
During storage
hPa
hPa
860 1 080
660 1 080

maximum
2 000
95
Air pressure

At 25 C
- Max.
More information
15

"SIPLUS HCS724I Heating control system",
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/71
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The central interface module is the intelligent processor module
of the SIPLUS HCS724I heating control system.
Design
Module encapsulated in a metal enclosure

Two LEDs for operating state (green) and fault indication (red)
PROFIBUS DP interface (up to 12 Mbaud)
Rotary switch for setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Serial interface RS 232 C
Parallel bus interface for the power output modules

Possibility of connecting a maximum of 16 LA724I/
LA724I HP/LA724I SSR power output modules per central
interface module
Expansion slot for line-voltage sensing module (optional)
Function
Communications
PROFIBUS DP
Import of the parameter settings from the higher-level control
system
Transfer of the diagnostics information to the higher-level
control system
Parallel bus (internal)
Controlling and monitoring up to 384 power channels
15
Calculation of the emitter manipulated variables of the power
channels
Setpoint values are adjustable in 0.5 % increments from 0 %
to 100 %
Even load distribution over all power channels and over all
SIPLUS HCS724I heating control systems operated as an
integrated group
Simple adaptation to each production process through the
selection of up to four operating modes
The various power output modules can be used in mixed
operation
15/72
Siemens IC 10 2014
Diagnostics
Evaluation of diagnostics information from connected power
output modules
Phase-sequence detection indicating whether phases L1, L2,
and L3 are properly connected
Automatic detection of the line frequency
Grid synchronization
In order to ensure synchronization of the power output modules
with the connected power supply, the system is synchronized
with phase L1. The respective switch-on times for phases L2 and
L3 are then calculated automatically.
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6BK1700-2BA30-0AA0
General data
Type
6BK1700-2BA30-0AA0
Communications
LA724I
LA724I HP
LA724I SSR
Type of power output module

connectable
(Up to 16 power output

modules can be
connected)
Supply voltage
Yes
Protocol is supported
PROFIBUS DP protocol
Transmission rate for PROFIBUS DP,
maximum
Mbit/s
12
9-pin sub D socket
Type of electrical connection of the

PROFIBUS interface
Displays
AC
LED green = status

indicator
LED red = fault
indicator
Supply voltage at AC, rated value
230
Relative negative tolerance of the

supply voltage
Relative positive tolerance of the
supply voltage
18
15
Dimensions

Rated value 1
Rated value 2
Hz
Hz
%
50
60
5
Active power input
35
Mains failure buffering time
ms
20
Recovery time after mains failure,

typical
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
50
480
210
Terminal 2-pole
Type of electrical connection for

supply voltage
Type of connectable conductor
cross-sections for supply voltage
Solid
mm
mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
26 ... 14

Interface version
Type of power output module DT

connectable
Article No.
LA742I
LA724I HP
LA724I SSR
6BK1700-2BA30-0AA0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
Central interface modules

PROFIBUS DP
15
6BK1700-2BA30-0AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/73
Siemens AG 2013

LA724I SSR power output module
Overview
The power output modules are an important component of the
SIPLUS HCS724I heating control system.
Three different power output modules can be used depending
on the application:
LA724I power output module the universal version
LA724I HP power output module the HighPower version
LA724I SSR power output modules the high-current version
There are no power triacs here. Control of the load is handled via
external SSR solid-state relays.
Output power
(8 outputs per phase)
Max. 1 150 W switching capacity per output
Max. 7 360 W switching capacity per phase
12 power output channels 230 V/400 V each
(4 outputs per phase)
Max. 2 300 W/4 000 W switching capacity per output
Max. 9 200 W switching capacity per phase with wye
connection and max. 16 000 W switching capacity with delta
connection
24 channels with one digital control signal of 24 V (8 outputs per
phase)
Forced ventilation
LA724I and LA724I HP power output modules
LA724I (left), LA724I HP (center) and LA724I SSR (right) power output
modules

The universal power output module provides 24 channels for
switching on resistive loads. A maximum of 1 150 W can be used
The HighPower output module provides 12 channels for
switching on resistive loads for voltages up to 400 V/max. and
10 A per channel.
The 24-channel power output module is the high-current power
output module for controlling external SSR solid-state relays
(up to 90 A/load).
Modules encapsulated in a metal enclosure

Connection of the phases via busbars
Connection of the heat emitter via mating connectors (the heat
emitters and the mating connectors are ordered separately).
Channel fuses at the front
Heat dissipation with the optimal fan module is possible for the
LA724I and LA724I HP power output modules,
see page 15/79
Internal parallel bus interface
Four diagnostics LEDs for displaying channel/module faults
Function
Protector elements
15
For detailed information see the operating instructions

"SIPLUS HCS724I Heating Control System",
There is an NTC thermistor on the heat sink for monitoring its
temperature. This temperature-dependent resistance sends a
signal at 92 C 3 C to SIMATIC S7-300. A second switching
threshold at 100 C 3 C switches off the power outputs of the
module.
Supply voltage monitoring
Design

Power triacs with zero crossover switching
Protection of the triacs and opto-triacs by means of Transil
diodes against overvoltage
15/74
Depending on the switching capacity and ambient temperature,

these power output modules may have to be force-ventilated.
For this purpose, a fan module is available as an option, see
page 15/79.
Siemens IC 10 2014

The connected 24 V DC supply is monitored for failure. In case
of failure, the outputs to the solid-state relay (SSR) are shut
down.
The drivers of the control outputs are monitored for correct
functioning.
Fuses
For each power output, there is a 5 A fuse in one of the fuse
holders accessible from the front for protecting the power
triacs, as well as a 32 A fuse per phase for limiting the phase
current.
For each power output, there is a 10 A fuse in a fuse holder
accessible from the front for protecting the power triacs, as
well as a 40 A fuse per phase for limiting the phase current.
Protection for each channel is to be provided externally.
Siemens AG 2013

Diagnostic option
As an alternative, two different diagnostics methods are

possible:
Through diagnostics of the voltages from the load circuit, the
following faults can be detected:
- Solid-state relay (SSR) cannot be switched, infeed to SSR interrupted or external channel fuse dropped
- Solid-state relay (SSR) cannot be switched, broken emitters
or broken conductors
Through diagnosis via the external current measuring module
(see page 15/80) the following faults can also be detected
(these diagnostics are recommended for fault detection on
parallel switched emitters):
- Rated power on the channel is overshot
- Rated power on the channel is undershot
Standard diagnostics are provided for detecting the following

faults:
Internal fuse defective or triac at high-resistance
Triac failed
External faults such as a blown fuse, broken heat emitter or
broken cable
If several heat emitters are connected to one output in parallel,
failure of an individual heat emitter is detected by means of
extended diagnostics.
Type
6BK1700-2BA00-0AA0
Product designation

LA724I
6BK1700-4BA70-0AA0
6BK1700-2BA10-0AA0
LA724I HP
LA724I SSR
General data
Half-wave control
--
Type of load
Resistive load
Solid-state relay (SSR)
Supply voltage
AC

230

%
%
18
15
Hz
Hz
%
50
60
5
A
A
120
32
400

Rated value 1
Rated value 2
Relative symmetrical tolerance of the supply voltage
frequency
----
Current switching capacity

Per busbar a maximum of
Per phase a maximum of
40
--
Optocoupler between main circuit and SELV/PELV

Power carrying capacity of the module
For delta connection at 40 C
- With fan maximum
With wye connection at 40 C
- With fan maximum
Maximum permissible power carrying capacity
kW
kW
---
36.5
22.6
---
kW
kW
22
14.4
21
13
---
kW
22
48
--
12
--
Busbars or ring terminal lugs
Power electronics
Number of outputs for heating power
24
Number of heat emitters per output maximum
--
Output voltage
With wye connection
With delta connection
V
V
230
--
400
Transil diodes
Version of the overvoltage protection
----

Per output
75 1 150
75 4 000
--
Output current at the output for heating power, rated value A
10
--
Type of short-circuit protection for heating power per

output
5 A melting fuse
16 A melting fuse
--
No
--
Type of electrical connection at output for heater
--
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)

1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)
28 16
----
Solid
mm
mm
AWG
Siemens IC 10 2014
15
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections for heating
15/75
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6BK1700-2BA00-0AA0
Product designation

LA724I
6BK1700-4BA70-0AA0
6BK1700-2BA10-0AA0
LA724I HP
LA724I SSR
Digital outputs
Supply voltage at DC
Rated value
--
20.4 28.8
--
2-pole plug
---
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)

28 14
Number of semiconductor outputs
--
24
Type of the switching output
--
Semiconductor output
(high side switch)

Type of connectable conductor cross-sections for supply
voltage
mm
AWG
--
DC
Output voltage for DC, rated value
--
24
Output voltage
--
18.4 28.8
Output current at digital output when signal <1> max.
--
0.05
Electrical isolation between outputs and system interface
--
No
Switching performance
--
Monostable
Property of the output short-circuit-proof
--
Yes
Type of electrical connection on the digital outputs
--
8-pole plug
----
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)

1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)
28 14
Internal
Externally by 6-pole
connector for current
measuring module
mm
mm
AWG
----
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)

1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)
28 14
V
V
---
230
400
--
----
1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)

1 x (0.2 ... 1.5)
28 16
Type of voltage for the output voltages
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections on the

digital outputs
Solid
mm
mm
AWG
Measuring inputs for current

Type of electrical connection on the measuring inputs for
current
measuring inputs for current
Solid

Diagnostics voltage
With wye connection of rated value
Rated value with delta connection
voltage
measuring inputs for voltage
Solid
mm
mm
AWG
Displays
1 LED green = status indicator

3 LED red = fault indicator per phase
Auxiliary circuit
Power supply via central interface
Yes
--
NTC thermistors
--
Diagnostics function
Voltage and power diagnostics
Blown fuse
Open circuit
Heat emitter break
Yes
Yes
Yes
15
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
15/76
mm
mm
mm
Siemens IC 10 2014
50
480
210
Siemens AG 2013


Number of
outputs for
heating power
Number of
semiconductor
outputs
Power carrying capacity DT

per output
Article No.
Max.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

24
--
1 150
6BK1700-2BA00-0AA0
1 unit
477
--
4 000
6BK1700-4BA70-0AA0
1 unit
477
24
--
6BK1700-2BA10-0AA0
1 unit
477
6BK1700-2BA00-0AA0

12
6BK1700-4BA70-0AA0

--
6BK1700-2BA10-0AA0
Accessories
Version
For power output module
Type
For connection of the heat emitters

(3 units required per power output module)
LA724I, LA724I HP
40018384
For the 24 V DC supply
LA724I SSR
A5E00210675
For connection of the solid state relay (SSR)

(3 units required per power output module)
LA724I SSR
A5E00043661
For connection of the current measuring module
LA724I SSR
A5E00210670
For voltage diagnostics

(3 units required for each power output module)
LA724I SSR
41818384
5 A quick/250 V
LA724I
200021116
16 A slow/500 V
LA724I HP
A5E01204540
Mating connectors
Fuse
Recommendation for solid-state relay (SSR) to be used
15
SIRIUS SC solid-state relays/contactors

e.g. 3RF2350-1AA02:
Solid-state contactor 50 A,
40 C,
control voltage 24 V,
screw terminals

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/77
Siemens AG 2013

Line-voltage sensing module
Voltage measuring for advanced diagnostics
Overview
In order to measure the voltage values for advanced diagnostics, a line-voltage sensing module is required for each central
interface.
The measured voltage value is used for fault detection for
parallel switched emitters.
Note:
Line-voltage sensing module
The line-voltage sensing module is an optional module for mains

voltage sensing and correction.
The line-voltage sensing module is inserted from the front into
the enclosure of the central interface module. The slot is located
in the busbar area. If the line-voltage sensing module is not
used, the opening is sealed with the busbar cover. When the
line-voltage sensing function is used, the cover provides touch
protection.
The central interface is only delivered ex works without a linevoltage sensing module. If you want to compensate for linevoltage fluctuations, you must order both modules (line-voltage
sensing module and central interface module) and connect
them together on site.
Type
6ES7171-1XX00-6AA0
Supply voltage
Power supply via central
interface

Product function current measurement
Design
No
Connection of the phases L1, L2, L3 and of the neutral

conductor via cable with Teflon insulation
Printed circuit-boards terminals for central connection
Function
Line-voltage compensation
This function is required, if output power is to be automatically
corrected in strongly fluctuating networks.
To implement this function, a line-voltage sensing module must
be plugged in to at least one central interface module in a
network of several HCS724I heating control system.
Yes

Operational voltage
At 50 Hz at AC
V
At 60 Hz at AC
V
Relative measuring accuracy rela- %
tive to the measured voltage value
Hz
Operating frequency
187 264
187 264
3
50 60
M6 ring terminal lug
Type of electrical connection on

the measuring inputs for voltage
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
86
22
160
The correction factors are calculated and transmitted to the

PROFIBUS DP master. The DP master then distributes these
values to all HCS724I DP slaves.

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6ES7171-1XX00-6AA0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
Line-voltage sensing module1)

230
6ES7171-1XX00-6AA0
Inserted in the central interface module.
15
1)
15/78
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Fan module
Overview
Type
6ES7171-3AA00-0AA0
Supply voltage
230
Relative negative tolerance of the

supply voltage
Relative positive tolerance of the
supply voltage
18
15
Fan module for installation underneath two power output modules
Rated value 1
Hz
Rated value 2
Hz
Relative symmetrical tolerance of the %
supply voltage frequency
The fan module is available for reliable heat dissipation of the

LA724I and LA724I HP power output modules. The fan module
is a standard fan in an IP00 enclosure.
Active power input
The fan module can be connected to

2 LA724I or LA724I HP power output modules

or
1 central interface module and 1 LA724I or LA724I HP power
output module
6
Terminal 2-pole

supply voltage
Solid
50
60
5
mm
mm
AWG
1 x (0.2 ... 2.5)

1 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
24 ... 12
mm
mm
mm
100
50
162
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth

Supply voltage at AC
Rated value
DT
Article No.
6ES7171-3AA00-0AA0
Fan module1)
230
6ES7171-3AA00-0AA0
Mounted below two LA724I / LA724I HP power output modules in each
case.
15
1)

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/79
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
Type
6BK1700-2BA40-0AA0

Yes
Product function current

measurement
Current measuring range
Relative measuring accuracy
relative to the measured current
value
A
%
1 ... 400
1
Hz
Hz
50
60
Operating frequency
Rated value 1
Rated value 2

the main circuit
The current measuring module is an optional module for diagnostics-based current measurement when connected to the
LA724I SSR power output module.
The module is required when heat emitters are connected in
parallel and failure of a single heat emitter is to be detected
using a current measurement.
Diameter of the feed-through

opening
22
mm
mm
mm
150
77.5
115
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
It is mounted in the control cabinet on a sturdy mounting surface

(recommended) or on a standard mounting rail.

DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6BK1700-2BA40-0AA0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477

1 ... 400
6BK1700-2BA40-0AA0
Accessories
Version
Type
Mating connectors
A5E00210670
It is recommended that a 3 x 2-core cable is used with a crosssection of 0.75 mm2 whose cores are twisted together in pairs.
It is not necessary to use a shielded cable.
15
for connection of the current

measuring module to the LA724I SSR
power output module
Note on the cable to be used between the LA724I SSR power

output module and the current measuring module
15/80
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Without Integrated Power Outputs
General data
Overview
Variable output power by indirect control of electrical heating
elements, e.g. via solid-state contactors. User-friendly control is
possible by means of the TCP 3000 temperature control
software.
SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller:

General data
Overview
SIPLUS HCS300I is an industrial heating controller which uses
solid-state relays (SSR) or contactors to control resistive loads.
SIPLUS HCS300I was developed on the basis of the SIMOCODE
system.
SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller
Benefits
Easy control of SIRIUS solid-state relays (SSR) using preassembled cables
Reduced wiring outlay thanks to distributed application

User-friendly TCP 3000 control software available
Application
SIPLUS HCS300I is an industrial heating controller,
e.g. for extruders and injection molding machines.
Design
The SIPLUS HCS300I is designed for snap-on mounting onto
TH 35 standard mounting rails according to IEC 60715 or for
screw fixing using additional push-in lugs.
If your application requires more than 16 temperature measuring
channels or 24 digital outputs, a second SIPLUS HCS300I basic
unit can be connected to the higher-level automation system.
Another 16 temperature measuring channels or 24 digital
outputs are then available.
15
SIPLUS HCS300I can be adapted to your special application by

using various modules:
The basic unit handles the central functions and communicates with the higher-level automation system.
Digital modules expand the SIPLUS HCS300I heating control
system with additional digital outputs via which solid-state
relays (SSR) or contactors are switched.
Temperature modules process analog temperature values
supplied by the temperature sensors of your plant.
The current measuring module measures the load currents,
the current/voltage measuring module measures the load
currents and the voltages of the heating or cooling devices,
and delivers the measured values to the basic unit.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/81
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Integration
PLC
Main circuit
L1
L2
L3
with temperature
control software
TCP 3000
PROFIBUS DP
2x
temperature
module
1x
Basic unit
3x
digital
module
1 x current
measuring
module
or
1 x current/
voltage
measuring
module
SIPLUS
HCS300I
PM01_00011c
Solidstate relay
(SSR)
8 temperature sensors
16 heating or cooling zones
Application example SIPLUS HCS300I
Type
6BK17003BA20-0AA0
6BK17006BK1700- 6BK17006BK17006BK17002BA80- 4BA50- 4BA603BA30- 3BA40- 3BA50- 3BA60- 3BA70- 3BA80- 4BA400AA0 0AA0 0AA0
0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0
Product designation
Basic unit
Digital modules Tempera- Current

version
ture
measuring modules
module
1
2
2.4 ... 10 ...
20 ...
25 A
100 A
200 A
Current/voltage
measuring modules
2.4 ...
25 A
10 ...
100 A
20 ...
200 A
45
85
71
55
94
97
120
95
145
Decoupling
module
General data
Reference designations
According to DIN 40719 expanded
according to IEC 204-2 according to
IEC 750
Pollution degree
F
F
CE, cuus, c-tick
Communications
PROFIBUS DP
Interface version
System interface
Mechanical features
Mounting position
Any
Type of mounting
Snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail according to

IEC 60715 or screw fixing with additional push-in lug
Shock resistance
15g/11 ms
Vibration resistance during operation

5 ... 500 Hz/3.5 mm amplitude, 1 g, 10 cycles, 1 octaves/min
15
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
15/82
mm
mm
mm
Siemens IC 10 2014
45
106
115
22.5
92
22.5
102
45
84
45
55
94
72
120
95
145
22.5
92
115
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Type
6BK17003BA20-0AA0
6BK17006BK1700- 6BK17006BK17006BK17002BA80- 4BA50- 4BA603BA30- 3BA40- 3BA50- 3BA60- 3BA70- 3BA80- 4BA400AA0 0AA0 0AA0
0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 0AA0
Product designation
Basic unit
Digital modules Tempera- Current

version
ture
measuring modules
module
1
2
2.4 ... 10 ...
20 ...
25 A
100 A
Current/voltage
measuring modules
2.4 ...
25 A
200 A
10 ...
100 A
20 ...
200 A
Decoupling
module
BURST

SURGE
On supply
cables:
- 1 kV symmetrical
- 2 kV asymmetrical
On signal
cables
- > 30 m
unshielded:
1 kV symmetrical,
2 kV asymmetrical
- > 30 m
shielded:
2 kV asymmetrical

10 V (0.15 ... 80 MHz)
6 kV contact
discharge/
8 kV air
discharge
IEC 61131: Class A; conducted and radiated interference: EN 55011/CISPR11

(corresponds to degree of severity A)
--
On supply cables
- 1 kV symmetrical
- 2 kV asymmetrical
On signal cables
- > 30 m unshielded:
0.5 kV symmetrical,
1 kV asymmetrical
4 kV contact discharge/
8 kV air discharge
On supply cables
- 1 kV symmetrical
- 2 kV asymmetrical
On signal cables:
- > 30 m unshielded:
1 kV symmetrical,
2 kV asymmetrical
- > 30 m shielded:
2 kV asymmetrical
6 kV contact discharge/
8 kV air discharge
III
--

Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
-25 +60
-40 +80
-40 +80
hPa
hPa
795 1 080
660 1 080
Air pressure
During operation
During storage
Installation altitude at height above m

sea level maximum
2 000
More information
15
For more product details see system manual

"SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller",
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/83
Siemens AG 2013

Basic unit
Overview
Benefits
Three digital relay outputs for switching ohmic loads
Communication with the higher-level automation system over
PROFIBUS DP
Local control of the system
Four digital inputs for detecting external signals
Basic unit
The basic unit handles the central functions of the SIPLUS

HCS300I heating controller and communicates with the higherlevel automation system.
Type
6BK1700-3BA20-0AA0
General data
Max.
4 digital modules and 4 temperature modules
1 current measuring module or
1 current/voltage measuring module
1 decoupling module
Switchgears connectable
Supply voltage
DC

Supply voltage 1 at DC, rated value
24

%
%
15
20
Active power input
7
Screw terminals

Solid
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
Digital inputs
Type of electrical connection on the digital inputs
Screw-type connection with removable terminal
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections on the digital inputs

Solid
15
15/84
Siemens IC 10 2014
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
Siemens AG 2013

Basic unit
Type
6BK1700-3BA20-0AA0
Digital outputs
DC

Rated value
24 125

Solid
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG

1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
3
Number of outputs as contacting switching element

Output voltage
24 125
Output current at digital output when signal <1>
Monostable
Monostable relays
Yes
No
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections on the digital outputs

Solid
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG

1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
Communications
Yes

Mbit/s
Transmission rate for PROFIBUS DP maximum
12
9-pin sub D socket
Displays
Type of sstatus displays using LEDs
Device: 4 states
BUS: 2 states
GEN.FAULT: 2 states
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
45
106
115

Supply voltage 1
at DC, rated value
Switching devices connectable
DT
Article No.
Max.
6BK1700-3BA20-0AA0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
Basic unit
24
4 digital modules
and
4 temperature modules
1 current measuring module
or
1 current/voltage measuring
module
1 decoupling module
15
6BK1700-3BA20-0AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/85
Siemens AG 2013

Digital modules
Overview
Benefits
Six digital 24 V DC outputs in the form of "high-side" switches
Up to four digital modules can be connected to a basic unit
Up to 24 digital output signals (with four digital modules) can
be switched to loads of up to 500 mA
Control of the digital outputs by means of a higher-level automation system that communicates with the SIPLUS HCS300I
basic unit via PROFIBUS DP
Easy control of solid-state relays (SSR) possible using preassembled cables
Digital modules
The digital modules expand the SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller with additional digital outputs via which solid-state relays
(SSR) or contactors are switched.
Type
6BK1700-2BA80-0AA0
6BK1700-4BA50-0AA0
Version 1
Version 2
Digital outputs
Supply voltage at DC, rated value
20.4 28.8

Solid
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
Number of semiconductor outputs
Semiconductor output (high side switch)

DC

Output voltage for DC rated value
24
Output voltage
19.4 28.8
Output current at digital output when signal <1> max.
mA
500
Switching frequency of the outputs for resistive load max.
Hz
50
Note
For a digital module 50 Hz;

for maximum configuration of at least 20 Hz
No
Monostable
Yes
Product function control for solid-state-relay via assembled connecting

cable
Yes
Type of electrical connection for auxiliary and control circuits
Screw terminals
Screw terminal with removable

terminal, cable assembly
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections on the digital outputs

Solid
15
15/86
Siemens IC 10 2014
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
Screw terminal with removable

terminal
Siemens AG 2013

Digital modules
Type
6BK1700-2BA80-0AA0
6BK1700-4BA50-0AA0
Version 1
Version 2
Displays
Type of as status displays using LEDs
Continuous light: Ready

Flashing light: No connection to the basic unit
Auxiliary circuit
Supply through basic unit
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
22.5
92
115

Version
Type of electrical
connection on the
digital outputs
Output current at
digital output
when signal <1>
max.
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
mA
Digital modules
Version 1
Screw terminal with 500

removable terminal,
cable assembly
6BK1700-2BA80-0AA0
1 unit
477
Version 2
Screw terminal with

removable terminal
6BK1700-4BA50-0AA0
1 unit
477
500
15
6BK1700-.BA.0-0AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/87
Siemens AG 2013

Temperature modules
Overview
Benefits
Up to four analog sensor measuring circuits in 2-wire
technology or two analog sensor measuring circuits in 4-wire
technology
Up to four temperature modules per basic unit which can
detect up to 16 analog temperature values
The compensation method for measurements with thermocouples can be set to one of the following:
- No compensation
- Internal compensation
- External compensation
- Compensation via the higher-level automation system
Resolution of temperature values to one decimal point
Automatic calibration on powering up assures high measuring
accuracy
Different sensor types are supported for use in solid, liquid, or
gaseous media: Pt100; Pt1000; TC type J, K, L
Temperature module
Temperature modules process analog temperature values

supplied by a plant's temperature sensors.
Type
6BK1700-4BA60-0AA0
Analog channels
Product component input for analog temperature sensor
Yes
Type of connection method
2- and 4-conductor technology
Number of analog inputs

For 2-wire system
For 4-wire system
4
2
Physical measurement principle
Sigma-Delta Modulation
Measurement accuracy
Typical 1 K,
Pt100 up to max. 1.3 K
A/D conversion time at analog input
ms
600
Typical sensor circuit
210
No
Electrical separation between the channels

Impulse withstand voltage of the outputs, max.
15
Typical temperature drift per C
%/C
0.00115
Offset temperature per K, max.
K/K
0.1
Type of electrical connection for temperature sensors

Type of connectable conductor cross-sections
for temperature sensors
Solid
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
C
C
0 400
0 400
C
C
C
0 400
0 400
0 400
Sensors that can be connected

Temperature measuring range
- At pt100
- At pt1000
With thermoelement
- Type J
- Type K
- Type L
Digital outputs
15
15/88
Siemens IC 10 2014
Yes
Siemens AG 2013

Temperature modules
Type
6BK1700-4BA60-0AA0
Displays

Flashing light: No connection to the basic unit
Auxiliary circuit
Yes
Diagnostics function open circuit
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
22.5
102
115

For 2-wire system
For 4-wire system
DT
Article No.
6BK1700-4BA60-0AA0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
Temperature modules
15
6BK1700-4BA60-0AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/89
Siemens AG 2013

Overview
The current measuring module measures the load currents of the
heating or cooling devices, and delivers the values to the basic
unit.
The module must be selected according to the expected
maximum current of all connected loads.
There are three different versions:
Current measuring modules 2.4 A to 25 A
Current measuring modules 10 A to 100 A
Current measuring modules 20 A to 200 A
Benefits
Current measurement on a feeder
Current ranges between 2.4 A and 200 A
Type
6BK1700-3BA30-0AA0
Product designation

2.4 ... 25 A
6BK1700-3BA40-0AA0
10 ... 100 A
6BK1700-3BA50-0AA0
20 ... 200 A
General data
Basic unit
Expansion modules (digital module or temperature module)
Decoupling module
Can be connected to

Yes

2.4 25
Relative measuring accuracy relative to the measured current

value
Adjustable current response value
2.4 25
Hz
Hz
50
60
10 100
20 200
10 100
20 200
Operating frequency
Rated value 1
Rated value 2
Type of electrical connection for the main circuit
Auxiliary circuit
Diameter of the feed-through opening
mm
7.5
14
25
mm
mm
mm
45
84
45
55
94
72
120
95
145
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth

DT
Article No.
2.4 ... 25
10 ... 100
20 ... 200
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6BK1700-3BA30-0AA0
1 unit
477
6BK1700-3BA40-0AA0
1 unit
477
6BK1700-3BA50-0AA0
1 unit
477
15
6BK1700-3BA.0-0AA0
15/90
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Overview
In addition to measuring the load currents, the current/voltage
measuring module can also be used to measure phase voltages
in a single or three-phase system.
There are three different versions:
Current/voltage measuring modules 2.4 A to 25 A
Current/voltage measuring modules 10 A to 100 A
Current/voltage measuring modules 20 A to 200 A
Benefits
Current measurement on a feeder
Current ranges between 2.4 A and 200 A
Measurement of phase voltages up to 400 V (e.g. UL1) or

phase-to-phase voltages up to 690 V (e.g. UL1-UL2)
Measurement in three-phase current systems or single-phase
AC systems
Type
6BK1700-3BA60-0AA0
Product designation

2.4 ... 25 A
6BK1700-3BA70-0AA0
10 ... 100 A
6BK1700-3BA80-0AA0
20 ... 200 A
General data
Basic unit
Expansion modules (digital module or temperature module)
Decoupling module
Can be connected to

Yes

2.4 25
Relative measuring accuracy relative to the measured current

value
Hz
Hz
50
60
10 100
20 200
Operating frequency
Rated value 1
Rated value 2
Type of electrical connection for the main circuit

Diameter of the feed-through opening
mm
7.5
14
25

Yes

Operational voltage
at 50 Hz at AC
at 60 Hz at AC
V
V
110 690
110 690
Relative measuring accuracy relative to the measured voltage

value
Operating frequency
Hz
50 60

voltage
measuring inputs for voltage

mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
15
Solid
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/91
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6BK1700-3BA60-0AA0
Product designation

2.4 ... 25 A
6BK1700-3BA70-0AA0
6BK1700-3BA80-0AA0
10 ... 100 A
20 ... 200 A
55
94
97
120
95
145
Auxiliary circuit
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
45
85
71

Current
measuring
range
Operating
frequency
Hz
Operational voltage
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
At AC
At AC
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG

2.4 ... 25
50 ... 60
110 ... 690
110 ... 690
6BK1700-3BA60-0AA0
1 unit
477
10 ... 100
50 ... 60
110 ... 690
110 ... 690
6BK1700-3BA70-0AA0
1 unit
477
20 ... 200
50 ... 60
110 ... 690
110 ... 690
6BK1700-3BA80-0AA0
1 unit
477
15
6BK1700-3BA.0-0AA0
15/92
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Decoupling module
Overview
If a mixed configuration is planned with temperature module,
digital module and current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module, it must be checked first whether a decoupling module is required.
If
(number (temperature module) * 2 + number (digital module) * 1
+ number (current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module) * 4) > 14,
a decoupling module will be needed.
Example calculation see system manual
"SIPLUS HCS300I heating controller",
Decoupling module
Note:
A decoupling module must be used:

When using a current/voltage measuring module, if the supply
system is not grounded.
When using a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module when the system bus has reached its
maximum current consumption.
For this equation, each module type is weighted with a specific

current factor, see table
Module
Current factor
Temperature modules
Digital modules
Current measuring module,

current/voltage measuring module
Benefits
Electrical separation of the current/voltage measuring module
from the previous expansion modules (digital module,
temperature module) or a basic unit
Power supply for a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module when the system bus has reached its
maximum current consumption
Type
6BK1700-3BA60-0AA0
Supply voltage
Type
6BK1700-3BA60-0AA0
Displays
Screw terminals

supply voltage
Solid
Auxiliary circuit
mm
mm
mm
mm
AWG
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 4),

2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5),
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1 x (20 ... 14),
2 x (20 ... 16)
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
22.5
92
115
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477

Interface version
DT
Article No.
System interface
6BK1700-4BA40-0AA0
Decoupling modules
15
6BK17004BA40-0AA0

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/93
Siemens AG 2013

TCP 3000 temperature control software (optional)
Overview
More information
For more information, please contact your Siemens sales office.
TCP 3000 temperature control software
In order to control SIPLUS HCS300I from the higher-level automation level, a suitable automation system such as a programmable logic controller (PLC) is required. Together with the
TCP 3000 temperature control software the result is a powerful
automation solution for controlling heating or cooling units.
15
The following licenses can be purchased optionally for the

TCP 3000 temperature control software:
Initial license TCP 3000
Type A4027462-A0443
Runtime license TCP 3000
Type A4027462-A0444
15/94
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Automatic Door Controls

General data
Overview
For elevators
Passenger elevators
Freight elevators
Rising doors and
rolling shutters
For rail applications

Interior railway doors
Platform screen doors
1_
P0
00
1a
01

Cold room doors / gates
Protective machine doors / gates
Machine tool doors
Automatic door controllers
Design
Door control system is the general term for a controller of access
systems.
The SIDOOR product family is primarily intended for the operation of sliding doors, whereby these doors can be operated both
horizontally and vertically.
Door control systems are characterized by the fact that there are
always two defined states for the open and closed position of the
door.
The door is always controlled, regulated and operated between
these positions according to the guidelines of the respective
application.
In a defined learn run via "1-button operation", the door system
independently determines the values for the door width, the
dynamic door weight and the drive direction of the geared motor
and stores these data in a non-volatile memory.
The travel curve transitions are rounded off so that the door
movement is smooth and jerk-free.
15
SIDOOR automatic door control systems
The optimum travel behavior at the door is automatically

calculated and consistently adhered to.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/95
Siemens AG 2013

General data
Speed
OPEN
Cutter
distance
OPEN
Acceleration ramp
OPEN
Reversing ramp
OPEN_CLOSE
Braking ramp
OPEN
Creep distance
OPEN
V max OPEN
Cutter speed
OPEN
Creep speed
OPEN
Cutter speed
CLOSE
Creep speed
CLOSE
Displacement
Cutter
distance
CLOSE
Braking ramp
CLOSE
Reversing ramp
CLOSE_OPEN
SP01_00006
V max CLOSE
Creep distance
CLOSE
Acceleration
ramp CLOSE
Speed
CLOSE
Creep speed
Reduced speed in the vicinity of the OPEN position of the elevator door (creep distance)
Cutter speed
Reduced speed in the vicinity of the CLOSED position of the elevator door (cutter distance)
Creep distance
Range of door travel in the vicinity of the OPEN position
Cutter distance
Range of door travel in the vicinity of the CLOSED position
Vmax
Maximum permissible door speed
Reversing ramp OPEN_CLOSE

Reversing ramp CLOSE_OPEN
Travel reverses from the OPEN to the CLOSE direction

Travel reverses from the CLOSE to the OPEN direction
Note:
When reversing from the open to the close direction, the door is braked with the reversing ramp OPEN_CLOSE, and starts the
closing movement with the acceleration ramp CLOSE.
15
Travel curve
15/96
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
General data
Overview
SP01_00015
For elevators
Passenger elevators
Freight elevators
Rising doors and rolling shutters
Automatic door controllers for elevators
Overview
The product-specific property of elevator door controllers is
based on the fact that the closing weights/closing springs
integrated in the shaft doors are also taken into account.
These weights/springs are integrated in the shaft doors so that

open doors close automatically if the cabin is not at the relevant
floor.
The elevator door drive also serves to move the doors in their
opening direction and supports their closing movement.
15
6
3
7
10
13
11
12
Door
14
leaves
SP01_00007
Open
Closed
<= Door =>
Complete motor mounting
Deflector unit and clamping device
1 Geared motor
2 4 x locking hexagonal safety bolts M5 x 10
Deflector unit
3 Rubber-metal anti-vibration mount
11 Mounting bracket for the deflector unit and tensioning device
12 Tensioning lug for the deflector unit and tensioning device
5 Mounting bracket for the motor mounting
13 Tensioning screw M6 x 30
Mounting material for door clutch holder
15 Toothed belt (length 4 m)

7 Door clutch holder
8 Clamping plate
15
Mounting suggestion for door control systems
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/97
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices
Overview
SIDOOR control devices are electronic controllers that are
connected to the power supply via an internal or external power
supply unit and can operate one or more application-specific
motors. They are generally connected to the higher-level controller via digital or serial interfaces and can be configured via a
user interface.
Control devices SIDOOR AT12, SIDOOR AT40 and SIDOOR ATD400V
More information
15
For an overview of elevator door control devices SIDOOR AT12,

SIDOOR AT40 and SIDOOR ATD400V see page 15/7.
15/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
SIDOOR AT12 elevator door drive
Overview
8
2
6
3
4
5
SP01_00008
1 Line voltage connection
5 CANopen connection
2 Connection
- Service Tool or
- Software Kit
6 Connection for input and output signals

7 Connection for motor
3 Operating state LED
8 Connection for 24 V DC/120 mA output voltage
4 Learn run button
SIDOOR AT12 SIDOOR enables the quick, easy and flexible

movement, installation and configuration of a wide range of
elevator door systems.
For dynamic door weights up to 120 kg
4 kg maximum counterweight
Operating temperature 0 to +50 C
Opening width 0.3 to 2.4 m

Integrated switch-mode power supply
Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC, 120 mA (short-circuit-proof)
CANopen interface (integrated in the control device)
Benefits
1-button operation for the entire commissioning process

Optimum and stable drive characteristics
Reduced service requirements and costs
SIDOOR user software (part of the Software Kit, not included
in the scope of supply, see page 15/111) enables user-friendly
operation and detailed diagnostics.
Small footprint thanks to compact design

Automated functions for enhanced safety
Application
The current operating states are indicated via an LED with a
flashing code integrated in the SIDOOR AT12 elevator door drive
or externally via the Service Tool, see page 15/112.
The maintenance-free, variable speed drive unit comprises a

DC motor with non-self-locking gearing. The SIDOOR M2
geared motor (24 V DC/1.8 A; motor for max. total door weight of
120 kg) must be ordered separately see page 15/115.
Power transmission is via a toothed belt, which passes over a

guide pulley and can be fitted with two door clutch holders.
These accessories are not included in the scope of supply see
page15/116 onward.
Operation of the door drive does not require a limit switch. The
door width and the "OPEN" / "CLOSED" positions are determined
automatically.
This enables it to drive both single-sided and centrally opening

doors.
15
The SIDOOR AT12 comfort elevator door drive is an intelligent

door control system which enables the opening and closing of
cabin and shaft doors at adjustable speeds and accelerations.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/99
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Design
The SIDOOR AT12 elevator door drive system consists of several components:
Version
Type
Page
6FB1111-1AT20-1AT1
15/101
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
15/111
15/112
6FB1103-0AT1.-5MA0
15/115
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
15/116
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
15/117
15/117
Control devices
(with integrated switch-mode power supply)
The following individual components are ordered separately:

Additional Units
to enable the universal use and maintenance of the door drive system
Software Kit
Service Tool
DC geared motors
SIDOOR M2 geared motor (max. door weight of 120 kg)
Accessories for the complete system
Also see overview diagram, page 15/97
Rubber-metal anti-vibration mount
for low-noise operation of the door drive system
- for the SIDOOR M2 geared motor
Mounting bracket
for flexible accommodation of the rubber-bonded metal
- for the deflector unit
for the toothed belt to be set to the required belt tension
Door clutch holder
for connecting the respective door leaf by means of a toothed belt
Deflector unit
for the toothed belt STS for attaching to the door system
Toothed belt STS
as connection between the door system and the final positions of the door
- 4 m long
- 45 m long
Configuration
During initial commissioning, please note the following:
For mechanical installation and configuration, see
- "SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive" Manual,
- "SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive Manufacturer-Specific
CANopen Objects" Compact User Manual,
Electrical configuration and commissioning:
- Push the door into the "CLOSED" position
- Plug in the motor connector
- Plug in the power plug
Programming
The Software Kit is available as an additional unit (see
page 15/111) and allows quick and easy updating of the
firmware using the Siemens HCS12 Firmware Loader.
15
User-friendly parameter setting and oscilloscope function is

carried out via the SIDOOR User Software (part of the Software
Kit).
15/100
Siemens IC 10 2014
- Press and hold the learn run button

- Switch on line voltage
- The learn run starts automatically; the learn run button can
be released when the door starts moving.
- On completion of the learn run, the door is in the "CLOSED"
position and the LED shows a steady green light.
- Briefly press the learn run button to open the door fully.
- Press the button again when the door is in its "OPEN" end
position to fully close the door.
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Type
6FB1111-1AT20-1AT1
General data
230

of the supply voltage
15
6FB1111-1AT20-1AT1
Hz
50 60
kg
C
C
0 50
-20 +85
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage

At AC
Type
Counterweight for M2 motor,
max.
IP20
Relative humidity
Input voltage
Per DC input
10 28
No condensation
--
mm
mm
mm
260
45
105
Dimensions
Input current
Per DC input
mA
6 18
Product feature
Control inputs isolated
Control inputs p-switching
Output current
at 24 V DC output, maximum
Yes
Yes
mA
120
Width
Height
Depth
Standards
Type of inspection
TV prototype tested
Yes
Property
of the 24 V DC output
According to EN 81
CE marking
Note
CAUTION: Do not supply with

external voltage!
Yes
Yes
Short-circuit-proof
Overload-proof
output relay at 30 V
At DC
mA
10 500
Opening width of door
0.3 2.4
Yes
Yes
Standard
For EMC
For safety
EN 12015/EN 12016
IEC 60950-1:2006
Standard for communication

interfaces CANopen,
CiA standard 301, profile 417
Yes

Product designation
DT
Article No.
6FB1111-1AT20-1AT1
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478

SIDOOR AT12 control device
with integrated switch-mode power supply
6FB1111-1AT20-1AT1
More information
15
For further product details, see

"SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive" Manual,
"SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive Manufacturer-specific
"SIDOOR Software Kit" Installation Instructions,

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/101
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Overview
1
2
3
5
8
SP01_00009a
7
6
1 Connection for emergency power module
6 Connection for input signals
2 Relay module
7 Control panel
3 Terminal module
8 Connector
- NT40 switch-mode power supply or
- Mains transformer
9 Connection for motor
4 Connection for 24 V DC/400 mA output voltage

5 Connection
- Software Kit or
- Service Tool
SIDOOR AT40 elevator door drive (relay module version)
SIDOOR AT40 SIDOOR enables the quick, easy and flexible

movement, installation and configuration of a wide range of
elevator door systems.
Version:
- Relay module
- CAN module
4 to 8 kg maximum counterweight
(depending on motor version)
Operating temperature -20 to +50 C
Flexible motor management (three different motor types),
automatic detection
Opening width 0.3 to 4 m

Emergency power input via special emergency power module
24 V DC 15 %
Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 15 %; 0.4 A
(short-circuit-proof)
Output stage short-circuit-proof
Supports power-optimized operation in the elevator cabin
Vandal-proof
Degree of protection IP54 for 180 to 400 kg motor versions,
gear unit IP40
Benefits
SIDOOR User Software (part of the Software Kit, not included
15
15/102
Siemens IC 10 2014
Integrated terminal module enables simple setup and

diagnostics via an event and statistics memory
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Application
The SIDOOR AT40 comfort elevator door drive is an intelligent
door control system which enables the opening and closing of
cabin and shaft doors at adjustable speeds and accelerations.
door width and the "OPEN/CLOSED" positions are determined
automatically.

DC motor with non-self-locking gearing.
The current operating states are indicated by a 7-segment

display directly in the SIDOOR AT40 elevator door drive. They
can also be displayed externally with the aid of the Software Kit
or Service Tool, see page 15/111 onward.
Three different motors are available:

SIDOOR M2 geared motor (24 V DC/1.8 A; motor for max.
overall door leaf weight of 120 kg)

deflector unit and can be fitted with two door clutch holders.
These accessories are not included in the scope of supply, see
page 15/116 onward.
doors.
These must be ordered separately, see page 15/115.
Design
The SIDOOR AT40 elevator door drive system consists of several components:
Version
Type
Page
6FB1111-0AT10-3AT2
6FB1111-1AT10-3AT3
15/105
15/105
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0
15/109
15/110
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
15/111
15/112
15/113
6FB1103-0AT1.-5MA0
6FB1103-0AT1.-4MB0
6FB1103-0AT1.-3MC0
15/115
15/115
15/115
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
15/116
15/116
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
15/117
15/117
Control devices
(incl. terminal module and relay or CAN module)
Relay module
CAN module
The following individual components must be ordered separately:

Power supplies
Mains transformer
NT40 switch-mode power supply
Additional units
Software Kit
Service Tool
Emergency power module
DC geared motors

- For the SIDOOR M2 and SIDOOR M3 geared motors
- For the SIDOOR M4 geared motor
Mounting bracket
- For the SIDOOR M2 to SIDOOR M4 geared motors
- For the deflector unit
Door clutch holder
Deflector unit
for the toothed belt STS for attaching on the door system
Toothed belt STS
- 4 m long
- 45 m long
15

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/103
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Configuration
- Connect NT40 switch-mode power supply to 230 V AC
mains supply
- Connect NT40 switch-mode power supply output to input of
the SIDOOR AT40 elevator door drive
- The learn run starts automatically and the learn run button
can be released
position and the 7-segment display indicates "u"
- The door can now be moved via the "OPEN" and "CLOSED"
buttons with the default profile

For mechanical installation and configuration, see
- "SIDOOR Door Control Systems AT40, ATD400K, ATD400S,
ATD400V, ATD400W" Manual,
- "SIDOOR Elevator Door Drive AT40 Manufacturer-specific
- Open the device cover
Programming
carried out via the SIDOOR user software (part of the Software
Kit).
The Software Kit is available as an additional unit

(see page 15/111) and allows quick and easy updating of the
Type
6FB1111-0AT10-3AT2
6FB1111-1AT10-3AT3
General data
36
10 28
mA
9 27
Input voltage
Per DC input
Input current
Per DC input
Product feature
Output current at 24 V DC output, maximum
Yes
Yes
mA
400
Property of the 24 V DC output

Note
Short-circuit-proof
CAUTION: Do not supply with external voltage!

Yes
Product expansion, optional
Switching capacity current of output relay

At 230 V
- At AC
At 50 V
- At DC
mA
10 1 000
mA
10 1 000
0.3 4
kg
kg
kg
4
6
8
C
C
-20 +50
-40 +50
Counterweight
For M2 motor max.
For M3 motor max.
For M4 motor max.
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
IP20
Relative humidity
No condensation
10 93
mm
mm
mm
320
60
80
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Standards
Type of inspection TV prototype tested
Yes
15
According to EN 81
CE marking
Yes
Yes
Standard
For EMC
For safety
EN 12015/EN 12016
IEC 60950-1:2006
Standard for communication interfaces CANopen,

No
15/104
Siemens IC 10 2014
Yes
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:

Product designation
DT
Article No.
SIDOOR AT40 controller relay
SIDOOR AT40 CAN controller
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6FB1111-0AT10-3AT2
1 unit
478
6FB1111-1AT10-3AT3
1 unit
478
6FB1111-0AT10-3AT2
6FB1111-1AT10-3AT3
More information
15

"SIDOOR Door Control Systems AT40, ATD400K, ATD400S,
"SIDOOR Elevator Door Drive AT40 Manufacturer-specific

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/105
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive
Overview
1
2
3
5
8
SP01_00033
7
6
1 Emergency power module connection
6 Input signal connection
2 Relay module
7 Control panel
3 Terminal module
8 Connection
- NT40 switch mode power supply or
- Mains transformer
4 Output voltage 24 V DC/400 mA connection

5 Connection
- Software Kit or
- Service Tool
9 Motor connection
SIDOOR ATD400V the SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive

enables the quick, easy and versatile installation, configuration
and operation of vertical elevator door systems, such as rising
doors and roller shutters.
Relay module design

24 V DC 15 %
Vandal-proof
Degree of protection:
- Motor IP54
- Gear unit, IP40
Benefits

SIDOOR User Software (part of the Software Kit, not included

Integrated relay module for the "OPEN" position, "CLOSED"
position and "Reversing" functions
15
Application
The SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive for rising doors and
rolling shutters is an intelligent door control system that enables
the operation of vertical door systems on elevators at adjustable
speeds and accelerations.

display directly in the SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive.
They can also be displayed externally with the aid of the
Software Kit or Service Tool, see page 15/111 onward.

DC motor with non-self-locking gearing. The SIDOOR M4
geared motor (30 V DC/4.0 A; motor for max. dynamic door
weight of 400 kg) must be ordered separately, see page 15/115.

page 15/116 onward.
automatically.
15/106
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Design
The SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive system consists of several components:
Version
Type
Page
6FB1111-1AT10-3VE2
15/108
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0
15/109
15/110
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
15/111
15/112
15/113
6FB1103-0AT1.-3MC0
15/115
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
15/116
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
15/117
15/117
Control devices
(incl. terminal module and relay module)

Power supplies
Mains transformer
Additional units
Software Kit
Service Tool
DC geared motors
Mounting bracket
Door clutch holder
Deflector unit
Toothed belt STS
- 4 m long
- 45 m long
Configuration
Mechanical installation and configuration see
- Connect NT40 switch-mode power supply to 230 V AC

mains supply
the SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drive
can be released.
position and the 7-segment display indicates "u".
buttons with the default profile.
Programming
15

carried out via the SIDOOR user software (part of the Software
Kit).
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/107
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Control devices:
Type
6FB1111-1AT10-3VE2
General data
Type
6FB1111-1AT10-3VE2

V
Relative positive tolerance of the %

supply voltage
36
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
0.3 4
C
C
-20 +50
-40 +50
IP20
Input voltage
Per DC input
10 28
mA
9 27
Relative humidity
No condensation
Input current
Per DC input
Product feature
Output current
at 24 V DC output, maximal
Yes
Yes
mA
400
Width
Height
Depth
10 93
mm
mm
mm
320
60
80
Standards
Yes
Type of inspection
TV prototype tested
Property
of the 24 V DC output
Dimensions
According to EN 81
CE marking
Short-circuit-proof
CAUTION: Do not supply with

external voltage!
Yes
Product expansion optional
For EMC
For safety
EN 12015/EN 12016
IEC 60950-1:2006
Standard for communication

interfaces CANopen,
No
Note
Switching capacity current of

output relay
At 230 V
- At AC
At 50 V
- At DC
mA
10 1 000
mA
10 1 000
Yes
Yes
Standard

Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6FB1111-1AT10-3VE2
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478

SIDOOR ATD400V controller relay,
vertical rising door/rolling shutter
6FB1111-1AT10-3VE2
More information
15

15/108
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Power supplies
Overview
SIDOOR AT40 and SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drives
SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drive
SIDOOR ATD400S platform screen door drive
SIDOOR power supplies connect the control devices to the

respective country-specific power supply.
These power supplies can be used for the various SIDOOR
control devices:
Mains transformer
SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drives and
Power supplies:
Mains transformer
Overview
The mains transformer is a standard power supply unit operated
with 230 V AC ( 15 %) 50/60 Hz from the SIDOOR product
range and can be used for all control devices that do not have
an integrated power supply unit. The SIDOOR AT12 elevator
door drive, for example, has an integrated power supply unit.
Mains transformer 6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
Type
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
General data
230
Relative symmetrical tolerance of the supply voltage
15
Hz
50 60

At AC
Operational current of protection at input during installation, max. A
10
IP54
Output current maximum rated value
15.9
mm
65
Dimensions
Height
Standards
Standard
For EMC
EMC directive 2004/108/EC, EN 12015, EN 12016

Product designation
DT
Article No.
SIDOOR mains transformer
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478
Mains transformer
15
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
More information
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/109
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Power supplies:
Overview
The SIDOOR NT40 switch-mode power supply is operated at

50/60 Hz, 230 V AC ( 15 %) to power the following SIDOOR
door controllers:
It is particularly suited for door systems with high door weights.
On the output side, the power supply unit delivers a voltage of
36 V DC (3 %) SELV at a rated output power of < 100 W.
In order to enable fast acceleration/deceleration of the doors by
the controller, the device can briefly (< 2 s) deliver a current of
15 A (corresponds to a short-time power output of 540 W).
Type
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0
General data
230

of the supply voltage
15
At AC
Hz
47 63
Input current at rated value

of input voltage 230 V,
rated value
0.7
Operational current of protection A

at input during installation, max.
10
Current consumption for 2 s,

maximum
3.5
Absorbed apparent power,

maximum
VA
650
Efficiency at 100 W emitted

active power at 230 V AC
90
Equipment protection class
2
IP54
36
Output voltage
for DC rated value
Note
SELV
Output current
2.5
Active power input, maximum

Rated value
100
Temporary overload current

for a maximum of 2 s
15
C
C
C
-20 +55
No direct exposure to the sun
-20 +50
-40 +70
No condensation
10 93
Installation altitude at height

above sea level, maximum
2 000
mm
mm
mm
270
55
80
Ambient temperature
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0 NT40 switch-mode power supply
During operation
- Note
During storage
During transport
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Standards
Standard
For EMC
EMC directive 2004/108/EC,

EN 12015, EN 12016
For safety
IEC 60950-1:2006

Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478

SIDOOR NT40 switch-mode power supply
15
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0
More information
15/110
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Additional units
Overview
The additional units from SIDOOR meet a range of customer
requirements in order to ensure the universal implementation
and maintenance of the system.
These additional units are simple to connect to the de-energized
controller via the interfaces provided and are available for use
as soon as the power supply is connected.
Up to three additional units are available for the SIDOOR control

devices:
- Service Tool
- Software Kit
SIDOOR AT40 and SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drives,
SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drive,
- Service Tool
- Software Kit
- Emergency power module
Additional units:
Software Kit
Overview
The SIDOOR Software Kit enables two functionalities:
The Siemens HCS Firmware Loader lets you update the
operating software of the following control devices, i.e. install
new firmware:
- SIDOOR AT12, SIDOOR AT40 and
SIDOOR ATD400V elevator door drives
- SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drives and
- SIDOOR ATD400S platform screen door drive
The SIDOOR User Software lets you configure, parameterize
and analyze the door control system.
The Software Kit contains a USB adapter for connecting the
SIDOOR controller to another device, such as a a PC.
SIDOOR Software Kit
Design
The Software Kit consists of:
SIDOOR User Software: User-friendly parameter adjustment
and oscilloscope function
Siemens HCS12 Firmware Loader: Updating the firmware

USB adapters: The hardware interface for the control device
Accessories: Connection cable and manual

Product designation
DT
Article No.
SIDOOR Software Kit

with USB adapter
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478
15
Software Kit
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
More information
"SIDOOR User Software" Operating Instructions,

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/111
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Additional units:
Service Tool
Overview
The Service Tool can be used to input run commands, change
run parameters and read out learned parameters, door states,
input/output signals and service data.
The Service Tool is connected to the various control devices by
the respective cable:
SIDOOR AT12, SIDOOR AT40 and SIDOOR ATD400V elevator
door drives
You do not need to open the cover of the control device to do
this.
Note:
If the Service Tool is in the "Quick adjustment" or
"Total adjustment" menu, the run commands of the control device
are blocked via the commend inputs.
SIDOOR Service Tool

Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
SIDOOR Service Tool
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478
Service Tool
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
More information
15
Further product details, see

"SIDOOR Service Tool" Compact User Manual,
15/112
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Additional units:
Overview
Type
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
Supply voltage from emergency

power supply at DC
24

of the supply voltage from
emergency power supply
15
Current of emergency power

supply, rated value
1.6
Energy demand for one opening Wh

and closing cycle, max.
2.4
Battery capacity
Recommended
For one opening and closing
cycle at 24 V
Ah
Ah
2
0.1
Operating current of fuse

protection at input of battery
during installation slow-blow
C
C
-20 +50
-40 +50
mm
mm
mm
105
35
71
Ambient temperature
SIDOOR emergency power module
The emergency power module is connected between the power

supply unit and the voltage input of the control devices:
During operation
During storage
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
In the event of a power failure, this module switches the power

supply from the switch mode power supply to the 24 V DC
emergency power supply (battery).
During the switchover, the controller receives the command to
reduce the travel speed of the door to initial speed in order to
prevent excessive discharging of the connected batteries.

Product designation
DT
Article No.
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478

SIDOOR emergency power module
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
More information
15
For further product details see "SIDOOR Door Control Systems

AT40, ATD400K, ATD400S, ATD400V, ATD400W" Manual,

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/113
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Geared motors
Overview
SIDOOR geared motors are a combination of gear unit, motor,
and sensor. They are easy to connect to the controller via the
interface provided and are automatically detected during
commissioning.
The geared motors must be selected according to the dynamic
door weight. There are two different versions each of the
SIDOOR M2 to M4 geared motors respectively:
SIDOOR M2 geared motors (max. door weight of 120 kg)
- Pinion left 6FB1103-0AT10-5MA0
- Pinion right 6FB1103-0AT11-5MA0
- Pinion left 6FB1103-0AT10-4MB0
- Pinion right 6FB1103-0AT11-4MB0
- Pinion left 6FB1103-0AT10-3MC0
- Pinion right 6FB1103-0AT11-3MC0
The gear outlet direction is defined as left or right when viewing
the gear unit from the front.
Picture below:
SIDOOR M2 geared motor 6FB1103-0AT10-5MA0 (pinion left)
Picture center:
SIDOOR M3 geared motor 6FB1103-0AT10-4MB0 (pinion left)
Picture above:
SIDOOR M4 geared motor 6FB1103-0AT10-3MC0 (pinion left)
Type
6FB1103-0AT10-5MA0,
6FB1103-0AT11-5MA0
Product designation
SIDOOR geared motors
6FB1103-0AT10-4MB0,
6FB1103-0AT11-4MB0
6FB1103-0AT10-3MC0,
6FB1103-0AT11-3MC0
M2
M3
M4
24
30
30
Velocity maximum
m/s
0.5
0.65
0.75
Of gear unit
Of motor
IP20
IP20
IP40
IP54
IP40
IP54
Gear ratio
15
15
15
Number of pulses per revolution, maximum
100
100
100
Operational current rated value
1.8
Weight of door, max.
kg
120
180
400
C
C
-20 +50
-40 +85
-20 +50
-40 +85
-20 +50
-40 +85
mm
mm
mm
mm
206.5
90
48
90
236
98
63
85
275
115
63
105
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
Dimensions
Length of the motor
Height of motor
Diameter of motor
Width of gear unit including drive pinion
15
15/114
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Geared motors

Product designation
DT
Article No.
With pinion left
With pinion right
With pinion left

With pinion right
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6FB1103-0AT10-5MA0
1 unit
478
6FB1103-0AT11-5MA0
1 unit
478
6FB1103-0AT10-4MB0
1 unit
478
6FB1103-0AT11-4MB0
1 unit
478
With pinion left
6FB1103-0AT10-3MC0
1 unit
478
With pinion right
6FB1103-0AT11-3MC0
1 unit
478
SIDOOR M2 geared motors

SIDOOR M2 geared motor
for max. door weight of 120 kg
6FB1103-0AT10-5MA0
(version pinion left)

6FB1103-0AT10-4MB0

6FB1103-0AT10-3MC0
Accessories
The following accessories are available for the SIDOOR M2 to
SIDOOR M4 geared motors:
Rubber-metal anti-vibration mount for low-noise door
operation
- 6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0 for SIDOOR M2 and SIDOOR M3
geared motors (door weights up to 180 kg)
- 6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0 for SIDOOR M4 geared motor
(door weights up to 400 kg)
Mounting bracket 6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0 for the geared motor
mount for flexible accommodation of the rubber-bonded metal
More information
For further product details, see Manuals
"SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive",
ATD400V, ATD400W",
15

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/115
Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Accessories
Overview
A comprehensive range of accessories is available for the

SIDOOR elevator door systems.
This is necessary to ensure low-noise operation of the door by
the controller. The geared motors can be optimally integrated
into the respective door drive system.
Rubber-metal anti-vibration mounts for geared motors

Type
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
Product
designation
SIDOOR rubber-metal anti-vibration mount

For M2, M3 geared motor For M4 geared motor
for door weights up to
for door weights up to
180 kg
400 kg

To ensure low-noise door operation, the SIDOOR geared motors
are integrated in the door system using rubber-metal antivibration mounts.
Rubber-metal anti-vibration mount 6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0 for
SIDOOR M2 and SIDOOR M3 geared motors (door weights up
to 180 kg)
Rubber-metal anti-vibration mount 6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0 for
SIDOOR M4 geared motors (door weights up to 400 kg)
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
Dimensions
Length
mm
of the rubberbonded metal
Width
mm
Height
mm
230
230
78
78
35
78
Type
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
Product
designation
SIDOOR mounting bracket
Mounting bracket
Mounting bracket
Two different mounting brackets are available with elongated
holes:
Mounting bracket 6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0 for the SIDOOR M2
to SIDOOR M4 geared motors for flexible accommodation of
the rubber-bonded metal
Mounting bracket 6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0 for the deflector unit.
This enables the toothed belt to be set to the required belt
tension.
Door clutch holder
The door clutch holder 6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0 serves to connect
the respective door leaf by means of a toothed belt while also
functioning as a toothed-belt lock. One door clutch holder per
door leaf is required.
mm
mm
mm
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
mm
mm
mm
Type
The door system is moved between the final positions of the door
using the toothed belt STS 6FB1104-0AT0.-0AB0. Two different
toothed belt lengths are available.
135
100
60
Type
Deflector unit
Toothed belt STS
230
90
60
Door clutch holder
Deflector unit
The toothed belt STS is redirected via this deflector unit.
With tensioning device

for deflector pulley
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
The toothed-belt lock can accommodate both open ends of the

toothed belt.
The deflector unit 6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0 contains an embedded

belt pulley and can be mounted on the door system.
For geared motor
68
40
43
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
Dimensions
Diameter of belt pulley
incl. shoulder ring
Width of belt pulley
incl. shoulder ring
Height of holder
incl. belt pulley
Width of holder
incl. belt pulley
Length of holder
mm
61
mm
25
mm
100
mm
55
mm
70
Toothed belt STS

Type
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
STS-S8M
Length
45

Product designation
DT
Article No.
For M2, M3 geared motor

door weights up to 180 kg
For M4 geared motor for

door weights up to 400 kg
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
1 unit
478
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
1 unit
478
15
SIDOOR rubber-metal anti-vibration mount

For low-noise operation of the door drive system
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
15/116
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

For Elevators
Accessories
Product designation
DT
Article No.
For geared motors

With take-up for guide pulley for the deflector unit

Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
1 unit
478
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
1 unit
478
SIDOOR door clutch holder

For connecting the respective door leaf with the toothed
belt
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
1 unit
478
SIDOOR deflector unit

For the toothed belt STS for attaching to the door system
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
1 unit
478
4 m long
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
1 unit
478
45 m long
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
1 unit
478
Mounting bracket
SIDOOR mounting bracket
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
Door clutch holder
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
Deflector unit
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
Toothed belt STS

SIDOOR toothed belt STS
As connection between the door system and the final
positions of the door
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
Further product details:

For the rubber-metal anti-vibration mount 6FB1104-0AT020AD0 (for SIDOOR M2 and SIDOOR M3 geared motors)
see Manuals
- "SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive",
ATD400V, ATD400W",

For the rubber-metal anti-vibration mount 6FB1104-0AT010AD0 (for SIDOOR M4 geared motor) see Manual
ATD400V, ATD400W",
For mounting bracket, door clutch holder, deflector unit and
toothed belt, see Manuals
- "SIDOOR AT12 Elevator Door Drive",
ATD400V, ATD400W",
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/117
15
More information
Siemens AG 2013

For Industrial Applications
General data
Overview
Cold room doors / gates
Protective machine doors / gates
Machine tool doors
1_
P0
00
The product-specific application/requirement lies in complying

with the special industrial requirements regarding functional
safety and the door closing mechanisms. Protective machine
doors and power-actuated doors and gates comply with the
safety standard ISO 13849-1 (Safety of Machinery and
Machinery Directive).
3
01
Automatic door controllers for industrial applications
Control devices
Overview
SIDOOR control devices are electronic controllers that are
connected to the power supply via an external power supply unit
and can operate one or more application-specific motors.
More information
15
Overview of SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drives and

SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drives, see page 15/7.
15/118
Siemens IC 10 2014
They are generally connected to the higher-level application via

digital or serial interfaces and can be configured via a user
interface.
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:
SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drive
Overview
1
2
3
5
8
SP01_00035
7
6
2 Relay module
7 Control panel
3 Terminal module
8 Mains transformer connection
9 Motor connection
5 Connection
- Software Kit or
- Service Tool
SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drive (type Basic)
The SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drive enables the quick,
easy and flexible movement, installation and configuration of a
wide range of cold room gate systems.
Two different actuator versions are available, in which digital
input 1 is assigned a different functionality.
Relay module version
- Type Basic for connection of a light barrier
- Type 1 for connection of a gate interlock
Flexible motor management (two different motor types),
automatic detection

24 V DC 15 %
Vandal-proof
gear unit IP40
The "cable-operated switch" function is supported. Pulling the
cable opens the door to an adjustable opening width.
Pulse mode: The function remains active until a new command
arrives.
Hold-open time can be parameterized
A higher force can be set for the first 10 cm of the opening
movement (lifting the gate)
Benefits
SIDOOR User Software (Part of the Software Kit, not included
operation and detailed diagnostics
15
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/119
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:
Application
The SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drive is an intelligent
door control system which enables cold room gates to be
opened and closed at adjustable speeds and accelerations.
automatically.

The current operating states are indicated by a 7-segment display directly in the SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drive. They
can also be displayed externally with the aid of the Software Kit
or Service Tool, see page 15/111 onward.
Two different motors are available:


page 15/116 onward.
doors.
Design
The SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drive system is made up of several components:
Version
Type
Page
6FB1141-1AT10-3KU2
6FB1141-1AT11-3KU2
15/122
15/122
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
15/109
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
15/111
15/112
15/113
6FB1103-0AT1.-4MB0
6FB1103-0AT1.-3MC0
15/115
15/115
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
15/116
15/116
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
15/117
15/117
Control devices
SIDOOR ATD400K cold room gate drives
(including terminal module and relay module)
Type Basic supports the light barrier function
Type 1 supports the gate interlock function

Power supplies
Mains transformer
Additional units
Software Kit
Service Tool
DC geared motors
Mounting bracket
Door clutch holder
Deflector unit
for the toothed belt STS for attaching to the door system
Toothed belt STS
- 4 m long
- 45 m long
Configuration
15

15/120
Siemens IC 10 2014

can be released
- The gate can now be moved via the "OPEN" and "CLOSED"
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:
Programming

Kit).
Type
6FB1141-1AT10-3KU2,
6FB1141-1AT11-3KU2
General data
36
10 28
mA
9 27
Input voltage
Per DC input
Input current
Per DC input
Product feature
Yes
Yes
mA
400

Note
Short-circuit-proof

Yes
Product expansion, optional

At 230 V
- At AC
At 50 V
- At DC
mA
10 1 000
mA
10 1 000
0.3 4
C
C
-20 +50
-40 +50
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
IP20
Relative humidity
No condensation
10 93
mm
mm
mm
320
60
80
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Standards
Yes
Certificate of suitability CE marking
Yes
For EMC
For safety
IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-3

IEC 60335-1:2010
Performance level (PL) according to ISO 13849-1
15
Standard
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/121
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:

Product designation
DT
Article No.
Type Basic with relay module
Type 1 with relay module
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6FB1141-1AT10-3KU2
1 unit
478
6FB1141-1AT11-3KU2
1 unit
478

SIDOOR ATD400K control device for cold room gate
6FB1141-1AT10-3KU2
6FB1141-1AT11-3KU2
More information
Additional components for the SIDOOR ATD400K cold room
gate drive:
Power supplies see page 15/109 onwards.
Additional units see page 15/111 onwards.
Geared motors see page 15/115.
15

15/122
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:
Overview
1
2
3
9
5
SP01_00032a
7
6
2 Relay module
7 Control panel
3 Terminal module
8 Connection
- NT40 switch mode power supply
- Mains transformer

5 Connection
- Software Kit or
- Service Tool
9 Motor connection
The SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drive enables the

quick, easy and flexible movement, installation and configuration of a wide range of industrial door drive systems.
Relay module version
Flexible motor management (three different motor types),
automatic detection

24 V DC 15 %
Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 15 %;
0.4 A (short-circuit-proof)
Vandal-proof
gear unit IP40
Benefits
SIDOOR User Software (Part of the Software Kit, not included
operation and detailed diagnostics
15
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/123
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:
Application
The SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drive is an intelligent
door control system which enables protective doors for machine
tools to be opened and closed at adjustable speeds and
accelerations.
Three different motors are available:
automatically.
display directly in the SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door
drive. They can also be displayed externally with the aid of the
Software Kit or Service Tool, see page 15/111 onward.
page15/116 onward.
doors.
Design
The SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door control drive system is made up of several components:
Version
Type
Page
6FB1141-1AT10-3WE2
15/126
6FB1112-0AT20-2TR0
6FB1112-0AT20-3PS0
15/109
15/110
6FB1105-0AT01-6SW0
6FB1105-0AT01-6ST0
6FB1115-0AT10-4CP0
15/111
15/112
15/113
6FB1103-0AT1.-5MA0
6FB1103-0AT1.-4MB0
6FB1103-0AT1.-3MC0
15/115
15/115
15/115
6FB1104-0AT02-0AD0
6FB1104-0AT01-0AD0
15/116
15/116
6FB1104-0AT01-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT02-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0CP0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT03-0AS0
15/117
6FB1104-0AT01-0AB0
6FB1104-0AT02-0AB0
15/117
15/117
Control devices
(incl. terminal module and relay module)

Power supplies
Mains transformer
Additional units
Software Kit
Service Tool
DC geared motors
Mounting bracket
Door clutch holder
Deflector unit
Toothed belt STS
- 4 m long
- 45 m long
15
Configuration
Manual "SIDOOR Door Control Systems AT40, ATD400K,
ATD400S, ATD400V, ATD400W",
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/58531074
15/124
Siemens IC 10 2014
- Connect NT40 switch-mode power supply unit to 230 V AC

mains supply
the SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drive
can be released
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:
Programming

Kit).
Type
6FB1141-1AT10-3WE2
General data
36
10 28
mA
9 27
Input voltage
Per DC input
Input current
Per DC input
Product feature
Yes
Yes
mA
400

Note
Short-circuit-proof

Yes
Product expansion optional

At 230 V
- At AC
At 50 V
- At DC
mA
10 1 000
mA
10 1 000
0.3 4
C
C
-20 +50
-40 +50
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
IP20
Relative humidity
No condensation
10 93
mm
mm
mm
320
60
80
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Standards
Yes
Certificate of suitability CE marking
Yes
For EMC
For safety
IEC 61000-6-2/IEC 61000-6-4

IEC 60950-1:2006
Performance level (PL) according to ISO 13849-1
15
Standard
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/125
Siemens AG 2013

Control devices:

Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
6FB1141-1AT10-3WE2
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
478
SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool door drives

SIDOOR ATD400W control device for machine tool
doors with relay module
6FB1141-1AT10-3WE2
More information
Additional components for the SIDOOR ATD400W machine tool
door control drive system:
Power supplies see page 15/109 onwards.
Additional units see page 15/111 onwards.
Geared motors see page 15/115.
15

15/126
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
With the Condition Monitoring System from Siemens you can
constantly monitor your machines and plants. Maintenance
procedures can be planned better and only performed when
they are actually necessary predictive maintenance.
For an overview of Condition Monitoring Systems see page15/8.
15
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/127
Siemens AG 2013

SIPLUS CMS1000 Condition Monitoring System
General data
Overview
Design
SIPLUS CMS1000 consists of two components:
SIPLUS CMS1000 Bearing Guard
SIPLUS CMS1000 Sensor
Signal lamp
SIMATIC
SIPLUS CMS1000
Bearing Guard
Sensor
Bearing guard and sensor with connecting cable
Requiring absolutely no expert knowledge, SIPLUS CMS1000

offers an easy introduction to condition monitoring.
In monitoring, the SIPLUS CMS1000 condition monitoring
system works on the basis of characteristic values.
Additional advantages at a glance:
Permanent monitoring for protection of machines
Effective monitoring of important processes and systems
Energy efficiency support
Early detection of damage
Planned maintenance instead of spontaneous repairs
Reduction in maintenance costs
Increased plant availability
Optimum utilization of the service life of the units
Application
SIPLUS CMS1000 is the entry-level system for condition
monitoring of roller bearings in an industrial environment.
With the SIPLUS CMS1000 condition monitoring system,
mechanical components such as motors, generators, fans or
pumps can be monitored on the basis of characteristic values.
Mechanical wear and other damage-related causes can thus be
detected in time before a total failure of the mechanical component in the plant occurs.
15
SIPLUS CMS1000 can be integrated into the Totally Integrated

Automation (TIA) architecture.
15/128
Siemens IC 10 2014
KT01_00456a
Connection via
floating signaling
contacts
Drive
System configuration with SIPLUS CMS1000
Mode of operation
The bearing guard analyzes the measured values according to
VDI 3832 procedures (DKW) and DIN ISO 10816-3 (RMS) and
signals a limit violation on the display and via floating contacts.
The sensor detects vibration acceleration of the monitored roller
bearing as well as general component and machine vibrations.
More information
"SIPLUS CMS1000" Operating Instructions,
Siemens AG 2013

Bearing Guard
Overview
Design
The bearing guard consists of four terminal blocks A, B, C and
D, a display and corresponding control elements. The terminal
blocks are coded and therefore constitute non-interchangeable
connection elements.
Function
The bearing guard reliably analyzes the status condition of
machines and roller bearings and signals limit violations via
floating contacts.
Bearing Guard 6AT8001-1AA00
Functions:
A cost-efficient solution for monitoring roller bearings
Diagnostics procedure according to VDI 3832 and
DIN ISO 10816-3
Monitoring motors with fixed speed
Teach mode for easy commissioning (learning mode) via LCD
Adjustable limit values for warning and alarm
Limit signaling via two floating contacts
The compact design of the SIPLUS CMS1000 Bearing Guard is

the core component of the complete system.
15
It analyses the measured signals from the sensor:

For analysis of the condition of rolling-contact bearings
according to VDI 3832 (DKW)
Machine monitoring RMS according to DIN ISO 10816-3
Signaling of limit violations via floating contacts
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/129
Siemens AG 2013

Bearing Guard
Type
6AT8001-1AA00
Type
Product designation
SIPLUS CMS1000 Bearing

Guard
Connections
Product description
Device for monitoring

mechanical vibrations based on
characteristic values
Of the inputs and outputs

For auxiliary and control circuit
General data
Terminals
IP20
Product function
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
-25 +60
-25 +60
-25 +60
Relative humidity without

condensation during operation
5 95
Current typically consumed

at 24 V with DC
0.21
Total active power loss, typical
3.5
Type of electrical connection
P
P
Supply voltage
AC/DC
Type of voltage of the supply

voltage
Supply voltage 1
V
24
115 240
115 240
Installation/fixing/dimensions
Yes
Connectable conductor crosssection for auxiliary contacts

Solid
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
mm
0.5 4
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
0.5 2.5
Structural design
Distance to be maintained with
side-by-side mounting
At the top
At the front
At the side
At the bottom
Plastic
M3
Tightening torque for screw

terminals
Standard
Inputs/outputs
Number of sensor inputs
For IEPE sensors
For MEMS sensors
-1
Number of disable inputs
Number of speed inputs
Number of signaling outputs
Design of switching input of the

disable inputs 24 V DC
Yes
Input voltage at speed input

24 V DC digital
Yes
Range of input voltage at speed

input -10 V ... +10 V
Yes
Range of input current at speed

input
No
Yes
Type of switching output of the

signaling outputs
Relay outputs
15
0 mA ... 20 mA
4 mA ... 20 mA
Siemens IC 10 2014
Size 2 and Pozidriv 2
Size of screwdriver bit
Vertical
45
106
86
25
80
0
25
Design of thread
of connection screw
Type of mounting
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Material of the enclosure
Recommended
Dimensions
No
Product function
bus communication
Vertical
15/130
Yes
Removable terminal for main

circuit
Removable terminal for auxiliary
and control circuit
Mounting position
Width
Height
Depth
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
Communications
According to DIN 40719
expanded according to IEC 204-2
At DC
At 50 Hz
- At AC
At 60 Hz
- At AC
6AT8001-1AA00
Nm
0.8 1.2
For interference immunity

For safety
IEC 61326-1, IEC 61326-2-3

IEC 61010-1
CE
Siemens AG 2013

Bearing Guard

Product designation
DT
Article No.
6AT8001-1AA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477

For analysis of the state of roller bearings in accordance
with VDI 3832 and signaling of limit violations
6AT8001-1AA00
More information
15
For more product details refer to the "SIPLUS CMS1000"

Operating Instructions,

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/131
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
The following accessories, to be ordered separately, are available for the SIPLUS CMS1000 condition monitoring system:
Sensor for detection of vibration acceleration of roller bearings
Cable for connection of bearing guards and sensors
- 4 m long
- 10 m long
- 30 m long
Adapters for connection of the sensor to various motors

- M6/M6, M6/M8
- M6/SPM
Design
Cable
Sensor
Sensor 6AT8001-1AA00-1XA0
SIPLUS CMS1000 Sensor is designed with ground insulation. It

consists of one M12 sensor cable connector and an M6 thread
for adaptation to the machine chassis.
Technical features:
Industry-standard design
Sensor on the basis of MEMS technology
(Micro Electro Mechanical Systems)
Quick and easy installation (e.g. on fans, pumps and motors)
High degree of protection IP67
15
The sensor reliably records the vibration acceleration of rollingcontact bearings and converts this into an analog, differential
voltage signal.
15/132
Siemens IC 10 2014
Pin
Assignment
Core color
1
2
3
4
VCC_S
GND_S
VIBVIB+
Shield
Brown
White
Blue
Black
Knurled nut
KT01_00457
The SIPLUS CMS1000 Bearing Guard and Sensor are

connected via the sensor cable. For connection of the sensor,
the cable is configured with an M12 connector socket that
matches the sensor.
Terminal assignment M12 connector socket
Adapters
Two different adapters are available for installing the
SIPLUS CMS1000 Sensor in the correct measuring position:
M6/M6 or M6/M8 adapters
for motors with a condition monitoring for bearings connection
with M6 or M8 threads
M6/SPM adapters
for IEC squirrel-cage motors with the option of bearing monitoring Q01/G50. A measuring nipple is mounted here for SPM
shock pulse measurement to check bearing vibration.
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Sensor
Type
6AT8001-1AA00-1XA0
Product designation
SIPLUS CMS1000 SENSOR
Product description
Vibration acceleration sensor for the SIPLUS CMS1000 Bearing Guard
General data
Stainless steel
IP67
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
-40 +120
-40 +120
-40 +120
During operation
5 95
Measuring range vibration acceleration
-5 +5
Measuring range vibration frequency
Hz
0 6 500
Sensitivity of the vibration acceleration

sensor typical
mV/g 312
Relative humidity with condensation
0.02
According to DIN 40719 expanded
according to IEC 204-2 according to IEC 750
B
B
Type of power supply
Through basic unit
Installation and mounting instructions
In the load zone of the bearing, radial to the drive axis
Type of mounting
Screw via M6 thread
Dimensions
Length
Diameter
mm
mm
64
22
Connections
Electronics
Type of the electric connection of the

inputs and outputs
4-pole socket M12
Communications
No
Product function bus communication
Standards/approvals/certificates
Standard
For safety
For interference immunity
IEC 61010-1
IEC 61326-1
CE
Cable
Type
6AT8001-1AA00-1AA4
6AT8001-1AA00-1AB1
6AT8001-1AA00-1AB3
Product designation
SIPLUS CMS1000
CABLE-MEMS-44-0004
SIPLUS CMS1000
CABLE-MEMS-44-0010
SIPLUS CMS1000
CABLE-MEMS-44-0030
Product description
4 x 0.34 mm PUR cable shielded, M12, open end
General data
Cable length
10
30
Adapters
Type
6AT8001-2AA10-1AM0
6AT8001-2AA10-1SA0
Product designation
SIPLUS CMS1000 Adapter M6/M6, M6/M8
SIPLUS CMS1000 Adapter M6/SPM
Product description
Thread adapter for mounting the

SPM adapter for IEC squirrel-cage motors with the

option of bearing monitoring Q01, G50
M6/M6, M6/M8
M6/SPM
15
General data
Design of thread
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/133
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Product designation
Cable length DT
Article No.
SIPLUS CMS1000 SENSOR
--
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6AT8001-1AA00-1XA0
1 unit
477
6AT8001-1AA00-1AA4
1 unit
477
10
6AT8001-1AA00-1AB1
1 unit
477
30
6AT8001-1AA00-1AB3
1 unit
477
--
6AT8001-2AA10-1AM0
1 unit
477
--
6AT8001-2AA10-1SA0
1 unit
477
Sensor
Vibration acceleration sensor for the
6AT8001-1AA00-1XA0
Cable
SIPLUS CMS1000 CABLE-MEMS-44-0004
4 x 0.34 mm PUR cable shielded, M12,
open end
open end
open end
Adapter
SIPLUS CMS1000 Adapter M6/M6, M6/M8
Thread adapter for mounting the
SIPLUS CMS1000 Adapter M6/SPM
SPM adapter for IEC squirrel-cage motors
with the option of bearing monitoring Q01,
G50
For more product details refer to the "SIPLUS CMS1000"

Operating Instructions,
64
22
M12x1
M6
25
22
SW
More information
10
53
KT01_00458
15
Sensor 6AT8001-1AA00-1XA0
15/134
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

General data
Overview
Machine monitoring RMS according to DIN ISO 10816-3
Detailed identification of damage with frequency-selective
diagnostics
Raw data recording and export to SIPLUS CMS X-Tools
Trend recording and analysis
Monitoring of process variables
Reporting of upper limit violations
Permanent monitoring for protection of machines
Effective monitoring of important processes and systems
Energy efficiency support
Early detection of damage
Planned maintenance instead of spontaneous repairs
Reduction in maintenance costs
Increased plant availability
Optimum utilization of the service life of the units
SIPLUS CMS2000 condition monitoring system
The modular and configurable SIPLUS CMS2000 condition

monitoring system is a web-based system which can be easily
parameterized.
It provides the following benefits:
Analysis of the condition of roller bearings according to
VDI 3832 (DKW)
The SIPLUS CMS2000 condition monitoring system can be

expanded on a modular basis, e.g. with the
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion module for expanding
the IEPE vibration channels
Temperature module for direct connection of temperature
sensors (Pt100, Pt1000, )
Benefits
Visualization and parameterization of the SIPLUS CMS2000 are
easily performed using a web browser, without the need for
additional software. Handling has therefore been considerably
simplified for the service personnel.
Additional advantages:
Monitoring of everything from individual machines to complex
drive trains
No additional software is required for parameterization and

visualization
Proactive maintenance through detailed and early localization
of damage
Fast full diagnostics at a glance
Event-triggered notification to the service center
Expert analysis based on raw data
Application
In addition to the productivity of a plant, lifecycle costs are
increasingly becoming the focus of attention. Increasing plant
availability is an important topic in all areas where machines are
used.
Continuous plant monitoring and thus the early detection of
impending failures are a suitable measure to minimize
downtimes. Status-oriented maintenance permits an increase in
availability with a simultaneous reduction of lifecycle costs.
Visualization and parameterization of the SIPLUS CMS2000 are

easily performed using a web browser, without the need for
additional software. Handling has therefore been considerably
simplified for the service personnel both locally as well as in
remote operation.
SIPLUS CMS2000 is modularly expandable, e.g. with the
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion module and with the
temperature module from the SIMOCODE range.
Design
The SIPLUS CMS2000 is a compact condition monitoring system
that can be operated as a stand-alone or in combination with a
remote service center (LAN interface).
15
The SIPLUS CMS2000 condition monitoring system comprises:

SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB
A maximum of two SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion
modules and/or additionally a maximum of two temperature
modules
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/135
Siemens AG 2013

General data
SIPLUS CMS X-Tools for further
analysis
SCADA
e. g. via WinCC, PCS7,
Maintenance Station
SIMATIC IPC
Remote access
e. g. via cRSP/ePS
SP01_00026
Ethernet
SIPLUS CMS2000
Configuration:
1 Basic Unit VIB
1 VIB-MUX
2 temperature modules
Binary signals
LAN
SIMATIC controller
Up to 16 IEPE vibration sensors

for modular connection
Additional monitoring:
Speed
Temperature measurement (Pt100, Pt1000, ...)
e. g. pressure sensors via analog inputs
Drive train:
Drive
Gear
Bearing
Pump
System configuration with SIPLUS CMS2000
Mode of operation
More information
Application
Mechanical components
Motors, generators, fans, pumps, etc.
Damage analysis
Imbalance, misalignment,
roller bearings, etc.
Analysis methods
Bearing monitoring
Vibration monitoring
Vibration analysis
DKW, based on K(t)

according to VDI 3832
RMS based on DIN ISO 10816-3
FFT, envelope curve, fingerprint comparison, trend analysis parameterizable
Monitoring function
Adjustable limit values for DKW and

RMS: Warning, alarm
Frequency spectra
Adjustable warning and alarm bands
Analog inputs
Limit value monitoring
Temperature inputs
Limit value monitoring
15
Recording function
Raw data recording: Manually or
event-triggered, snapshot of the FFT,
characteristic values, long-term trend
recording
Saving
Output
Outputs
Binary outputs e.g. for traffic light status

indicator
Parameterization and
visualization
Web browser
15/136
Siemens IC 10 2014

"SIPLUS CMS2000 Condition Monitoring Systems"
Operating Instructions ,
Siemens AG 2013

Basic units:
Overview
The SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB is used for:
Monitoring of motors, generators, pumps, fans or other
mechanical components
Recording and analysis of vibrations, speed and temperature
It is modularly expandable via the system interface, e.g. using
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion modules and temperature modules.
Design
The SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB comprises:
Integrated diagnostics software
Two IEPE interfaces for vibration sensors
Two analog inputs, one of which can be parameterized as a
speed input
One speed input
Two digital inputs, three digital outputs
The following accessories can also be ordered:

Shield support for grounding the cable ends
VIB-SENSOR vibration sensor for recording vibrations
SIMOCODE connection cable and CABLE-MIL connecting
cable in different lengths
Accessories see page 15/145.
Function
SIPLUS CMS X-Tools the powerful analysis
software
The raw data recorded on the SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB
can be forwarded to the SIPLUS CMS X-Tools analysis software
for detailed diagnostics (not included in the scope of supply, see
or www.siemens.com/siplus-cms).
SIPLUS CMS X-Tools can be used to logically combine the various parameters and signals as the basis for expert diagnostics. The interface to management systems can be structured
flexibly.
15
The following range of functions is available by default in the

SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB:
Characteristic values (bearing monitoring,
vibration monitoring)
Frequency-selective analysis using FFT, H-FFT
Trend analysis
Limit monitoring of frequency bands, process variables,
temperature
Recording with time stamp of trend values, raw data,
frequency spectra, alarm log
Easy damage localization based on fingerprint comparison
Output of system and status messages
Extraction of raw data for further diagnostics
Web server and e-mail notification
Time synchronization via LAN
Diagnostics suppression via inhibit input
Representation via SIPLUS CMS X-Tools with raw signal, envelope curves
spectrum, orbit representation and 2D histogram
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/137
Siemens AG 2013

Basic units:
Type
6AT8002-1AA00
Product designation
Product description
Basic unit for monitoring vibrations in mechanical components based on

characteristic values and frequency-selective analysis functions
General data
IP20
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
-20 +65
-20 +85
-20 +85
Relative humidity without condensation during operation
5 95
2.6
Vibration acceleration

kHz
0.002 10
Scanning frequency maximum
kHz
46.875
According to DIN 40719 expanded according to IEC 204-2 according
to IEC 750
P
P
Supply voltage
DC

Supply voltage 1
At DC
24
Mounting position
Vertical
Recommended
Vertical
Type of mounting
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
45
106
124
Inputs/outputs
Number of disable inputs
Number of speed inputs
Number of signaling outputs

For IEPE sensors
For MEMS sensors
2
0
Number of trigger inputs
Product function monitoring of sensor inputs
Yes
Input voltage
At disable input with 24 V DC
At speed input 24 V DC digital
At trigger input with 24 V DC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Range of input voltage

At analog input -10 V ... +10 V
At speed input -10 V ... +10 V
Yes
No
Range of input current

At analog input
- 0 mA ... 20 mA
- 4 mA ... 20 mA
At speed input
- 0 mA ... 20 mA
- 4 mA ... 20 mA
Type of switching output of the signaling outputs
No
Yes
No
No
Electronic
Connections
15

15/138
Siemens IC 10 2014
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
Siemens AG 2013

Basic units:
Type
6AT8002-1AA00
Product designation
Product description
Basic unit for monitoring vibrations in mechanical components based on

characteristic values and frequency-selective analysis functions
Terminals
Product function
Removable terminal for main circuit
Removable terminal for auxiliary and control circuit
Yes
Yes

Solid
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
mm
0.5 4
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
0.5 2.5
Communications
Yes
Type of data transmission
Exporting of raw data as WAV file for further analyses

(e.g. using SIPLUS CMS X-Tools) can be downloaded via browser
Interface version
Ethernet interface
SIMOCODE interface
Yes
Yes
Software/services
Web browser
Browser software required

Service
As web server HTTP
For open IE communication TCP/IP
Yes
Yes
Product function diagnostics via email
Yes
Structural design
Modular construction, basic unit can be expanded by means of expansion
modules
Type of hardware configuration
Plastic

Gigabyte
Memory capacity total
Approvals
CE, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142, C-Tick

Product designation
DT
Article No.
6AT8002-1AA00
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
1 unit
477
Basic units
Basic unit for monitoring mechanical plant components
through recording and analysis of vibrations, speed and
temperature
6AT8002-1AA00
More information
15
For more product details refer to the

"SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB" Operating Instructions,

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/139
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion modules:
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX, temperature modules
Overview
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion modules and temperature modules can be connected to the SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic
Unit VIB via the SIMOCODE system interface.
Temperature modules
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion modules
Each temperature module has three inputs for the connection of

up to three analog temperature sensors (sensor types:
Pt100/Pt1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC).
Up to two SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion modules can

be connected to SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB to expand the
vibration channels. In this way, the number of vibration channels
can be expanded modularly from 2 to a maximum of 16 channels.
Up to two temperature modules can be connected to the

SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB.
SIMOCODE connection cable for connecting the

SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB to the temperature modules,
see page 15/145.
The following configuration options are possible:

Basic unit without expansion:
2 time-synchronous, continuously sampled vibration channels
Basic unit with one SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX:
8 + 1: 8 channels via the SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX in multiplex mode, 1 channel continuous and independent of the
channels connected to the SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX
Basic unit with two SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX:
16 vibration channels in multiplex mode
SIMOCODE connection cable for connecting the
SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB to the
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX, see page 15/145.
Temperature module 3UF7700-1AA00-0
15
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion module 6AT8002-2AA00
15/140
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion modules:
Type
6AT8002-2AA00
Product designation
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX
Product description
Circuit of 8 IEPE measurement inputs on one IEPE output in multiplex

operation; channel control through the basic unit via the system interface
General data
IP20
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
-20 +65
-25 +85
-25 +85
5 95
Relative humidity without condensation

During operation
Vibration acceleration

kHz
0.002 10
P
According to DIN 40719 expanded according to IEC 204-2

Supply voltage
DC

Supply voltage 1 at DC, rated value
24
Active power input, maximum
2.4
Mounting position
Vertical
Recommended
Vertical
Type of mounting
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
45
106
124
Inputs/outputs
For IEPE sensors
Number of outputs
Connections
Screw terminals
Screw terminals
Terminals
Product function
Removable terminal for auxiliary and control circuit
Removable terminal for main circuit
Yes
Yes

Solid
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
mm
0.5 4
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
0.5 2.5
Communications
Type of interface SIMOCODE interface
Yes
Structural design
Plastic
Approvals
CE, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142, C-Tick
Temperature modules
15
Technical specifications see Chapter 10 "Monitoring and Control

Devices" "SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control
Devices" "SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 Motor Management and
Control Devices".
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/141
Siemens AG 2013

Expansion modules:

Version
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6AT8002-2AA00
1 unit
477
3UF7700-1AA00-0
1 unit
42J

Up to two SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion modules D
can be connected to SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB.
Up to 8 IEPE vibration channels can be connected to each
expansion module.
6AT8002-2AA00
Temperature modules
Up to two temperature modules can be connected to the
SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB.
Each temperature module has three inputs for the

connection of up to three temperature sensors.
3UF7700-1AA00-0
More information
For more product details see "SIPLUS CMS2000 Condition
Monitoring Systems" Operating Instructions,
15
For more information about the 3UF7700-1AA00-0 temperature

module see Chapter 10 "Monitoring and Control Devices"
"SIMOCODE 3UF Motor Management and Control Devices"
"SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 Motor Management and Control
Devices".
15/142
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Overview
SIMOCODE connection cable
VIB-SENSOR S01 vibration sensor
SIMOCODE connection cable 3UF7930-0AA00-0
VIB-SENSOR S01 vibration sensor 6AT8002-4AB00
The connection cable is used for connecting the SIPLUS

CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB to the SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX
expansion modules and the temperature modules via the
SIMOCODE system bus interface.
The VIB-SENSOR S01 vibration sensor with IEPE (Integrated

Electronics Piezo-Electric) interface can be connected directly
to the SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB and the SIPLUS
CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion module.
The connection cable with a length of 0.025 m must be used for

side-by-side mounting of the basic unit with SIPLUS CMS2000
VIB-MUX expansion modules or temperature modules on a
TH 35-15 standard mounting rail according to IEC 60715.
The sensor detects vibration accelerations in the frequency

range from 0.5 Hz to 15 kHz with a resolution of 100 mV/g.
Shield support
A threaded screw with an M8 male thread for mounting at the

measuring point is included in the scope of supply.
The connection cable is connected to the vibration sensor via
the MIL connector.
CABLE-MIL connection cable
Shield support 6AT8002-4AA00
The shield support comprises two shield clamps and five clamp
terminals. One shield clamp is attached to the standard
mounting rail above and below the basic unit. The sensor cable
shields are connected to the sensor leads by means of the terminal clamps.
CABLE-MIL connection cables 6AT8002-4AC03, 6AT8002-4AC10
The VIB-SENSOR S01 vibration sensor is connected to the

SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB or the SIPLUS CMS2000
VIB-MUX expansion module by means of the CABLE-MIL
connection cable.
This high-quality industrial cable is made of black polyurethane
and is preassembled on one end with a MIL connector
(MIL-C5015). The open cable end of the shielded two-wire cable
is connected directly to the screw terminals of the basic unit.
The connection cable is available in lengths of 3 and 10 m.
15
A separate shield support must be ordered for the

EMC-compliant connection of signal and encoder cables to the
SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB and the SIPLUS CMS2000
VIB-MUX expansion module.
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/143
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
Type
3UF7930-0AA00-0
Product brand name
SIRIUS
Product designation
Connection cable
General data
Ambient temperature
During operation
During storage
During transport
C
C
C
-25 +60
-40 +80
-40 +80
5 95
Relative humidity
During operation
Shield support
Type
6AT8002-4AA00
Product brand name
SIPLUS CMS
Product designation
SIPLUS CMS2000 shield support
General data
Type of mounting
Number of signal cables connectable to the

shield support

Type
6AT8002-4AB00
Product brand name
SIPLUS CMS
Product designation
VIB-SENSOR S01
General data
Piezo-quartz sensor with integrated evaluation electronics

Frequency of the sensor application
At 3 dB
Hz
Sensitivity of the vibration acceleration

sensor, typical
mV/g 100
Resolution of measured value of vibration

acceleration of sensor, minimum
0.002
Measuring range vibration acceleration

Full-scale value
50
Resonance frequency
kHz
23
10 14
0.5 15 000
Signal voltage
At DC
IEPE 2 to 10 mA
Type of power supply
MIL-C5015

Cable length maximum
80
Ambient conditions
IP65
-50 +120
Design
Stainless steel
Mounting type other mounting

Note
Including mounting bolts UNF1/4-28 on M8
15

Type
6AT8002-4AC03
Product brand name
SIPLUS CMS
Product designation
CABLE-MIL-300 connection cable
Product category
Industrial cables
6AT8002-4AC10
General data
MIL-C5015/open cable end
Type of insulation
Black polyurethane
Braided shielding with stranded drain wire
Type of shield
-25 +122
Cable length
15/144
Siemens IC 10 2014
10
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories

Product designation
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
3UF7930-0AA00-0
1 unit
42J
6AT8002-4AA00
1 unit
477
6AT8002-4AB00
1 unit
477

Length 3 m
6AT8002-4AC03
1 unit
477

Length 10 m
6AT8002-4AC10
1 unit
477

Connection cable
For side-by-side mounting of
SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB and
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion modules or
3UF7700-1AA00-0 temperature modules
3UF7930-0AA00-0
Shield support
SIPLUS CMS2000 shield support
For the EMC-compliant connection of
signal and encoder cables to the
SIPLUS CMS2000 Basic Unit VIB or the
SIPLUS CMS2000 VIB-MUX expansion module
6AT8002-4AA00

VIB-SENSOR S01
Piezoelectric sensor for connection to the
6AT8002-4AB00

For connection of VIB-SENSOR S01 vibration sensors to the
6AT8002-4AC03
More information
15
For more product details see "SIPLUS CMS2000 Condition

Monitoring Systems" Operating Instructions,

Siemens IC 10 2014
15/145
Siemens AG 2013
Electrical Charging Components

Components for Electric Vehicle Charging Stations
General data
Overview
The SIPLUS Electrical Charging Components (ECC) range
covers products for the charging of batteries for various applications, e.g. charging controllers for the installation of an electric
vehicle charging infrastructure.
Charging controllers and function units for electric vehicle

charging solutions
The success of electric vehicles (EVs) depends on the
availability of a reliable charging infrastructure!
SIPLUS ECC offers specific components for EV charging solutions which supplement the tried-and-tested Siemens industrial
automation and control portfolio. In addition SIPLUS ECC comprises prefabricated function units for the installation of reliable
and standards-conform electric vehicle charging stations.
The SIPLUS ECC portfolio:
(according to IEC 61851 charging mode type 3)
Preassembled, tested and ready-to-fit function units
For an overview of Electrical Charging Components,
see page 15/8.
More information
15

www.siemens.com/siplus-ecc.
15/146
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

SIPLUS ECC1000 and ECC2000
Overview
SIPLUS ECC charging controllers are available in various
versions:
CM-100
Compact, low-cost charging controller for home charging applications. The versions available cover all the charging currents
defined in IEC/EN 61851.
3 AC
RCCB
SIRIUS
motor
protector
SIPLUS ECC1000 and ECC2000 charging controllers
The charging controller is the central component in electric

vehicle charging stations. SIPLUS ECC charging controllers
comply with the charging standard IEC 61851 Mode 3.
SIPLUS
ECC1000
CM-100
IC03_00927
Charging system with SIPLUS ECC1000
15
They perform the following functions:

Transferring the maximum charging current from the charging
station to the electric vehicle
Detecting the charging cable and its reliable current carrying
capacity
Safety functions
Evaluating the status signals from the electric vehicle
Controlling the load tap-off
Signaling the charging states by means of LEDs
SIRIUS
power
contactor
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/147
Siemens AG 2013

CM-230/CM-230-C standalone version
the charging operation viewed through the web interface. The
build-in sensor technology on the CM-230 standalone version
enables the monitoring of humidity and temperature.
This charging controller with Ethernet connection is used for

home and public charging applications. The controllers' parameters can be changed and current information about the state of
Evaluation/diagnostics and, if
applicable, parameterization via
web server
3 AC
RCCB
Ethernet
SIRIUS
motor
protector
SIRIUS
power
contactor
SIPLUS
ECC2000
CM-230
IC03_00928
Charging system with SIPLUS ECC2000
CM-230 managed version

This charging controller with Ethernet connection is used for
complex public charging applications. The controller is typically
used as a separate I/O module in combination with other charging controllers which are integrated through Ethernet in a higherlevel control system.
The managed version offers greater flexibility for the system

integrator/operating company, e.g. individual controlling of free
I/O modules.
A function block (FB) is available for linking to SIMATIC controllers.
SIPLUS HMI
SIMATIC S7 controller
3 AC
3 AC
RCCB
RC circuit
breaker
(RCCB)
Ethernet
SIRIUS
motor
starter
protector
SIRIUS
power
contactor
SCALANCE X
Ethernet switch
SIRIUS
motor
protector
SIPLUS
ECC2000
CM-230
SIPLUS
ECC2000
CM-230
SIRIUS
power
contactor
IC03_00929
15
Multiple charging system with SIPLUS ECC2000
15/148
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013

Type
5TT32002KK30
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC1000
Product designation
CM-100
DC version
1KK20,
2KK20,
3KK20,
4KK20,
6KK20
6FE10213CM10-1AA0
3CM10-2AA0
3CM10-3AA0
SIPLUS ECC2000
CM-230
AC version
Managed version
CM-230-C
Standalone version
Standalone version,
DC version
General data
Product description
Controlling and monitoring of the energy-related components in the charging station, used in communicating
with the electric vehicle according to IEC 61851, Mode 3
Suitability for use
Simple AC charging systems
Simple/complex AC charging systems
Type of sensor
--
Humidity/temperature
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
-25 +60
-25 +55
--
Product function
Load management
Bus communication
Removable terminal for auxiliary and
control circuit
Ambient temperature
During operation
Installation altitude at height above sea m

level, maximum
2 000
IP degree of protection at the front
IP20
Pollution degree
3, according to IEC/EN 61010-1
Type of mounting
Snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rail according to IEC 60715
Standard for safety
According to IEC 61010-1/EN 61010-1 (2nd edition) or

UL 61010-1 (2nd edition)
72
91
71
108
Dimensions
mm
mm
mm
72
15
Width
Height
Depth
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/149
Siemens AG 2013

Accessories
SIRIUS switching and protection equipment is suitable in
particular for three-phase charging stations, even under
demanding ambient conditions. They enable perfect switching
and protection in SIPLUS ECC1000 and SIPLUS ECC2000
charging systems.
SIRIUS protection equipment

SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protectors for plant protection: Safe
protection against overload and short circuit
Advantages:
Modular system with coordinated components and a
standardized range of accessories
Switching and protection equipment in service-proven
industry quality
Uniform connection systems:
Screw terminals, spring-type terminals and ring terminal lug
connections
Environmentally-friendly production and materials, recycling
capability, low power loss
Ambient operating temperatures: -25 C to +60 C
(+70 C with derating)
SIRIUS switchgear
SIRIUS 3RT2 power contactors: Reliable startup and shutdown
of the supply voltage for the charging process
Motor starter protector for plant protection
3RT2 power contactor
15
More information
For more information on these and other components that are
suitable in particular for the design of charging systems with
SIPLUS ECC1000 and SIPLUS ECC2000 can be found under:
SIRIUS switching and protection equipment:
- Contactors for special applications, see Chapter 4
"Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
Special Applications"
- Power contactors for switching motors, see Chapter 3
"Switching Devices Contactors and Contactor Assemblies
for Switching Motors"
- Motor starter protectors / circuit breakers, see Chapter 7,
"Protection Equipment"
Protection, switching, measuring and monitoring devices, see
Catalog LV 10 "Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical
Installation Technology":
- 5SM3 RCCB circuit breakers
- 7KT PAC and 7KM PAC measuring devices
- 5SD7 surge arresters
Power supplies:
- 6EP1 LOGO!Power and SIPLUS extreme 7AG1 power
supplies see Catalog KT 10.1 "SITOP Power Supply"
15/150
Siemens IC 10 2014
For operating instructions and other technical specifications see

Siemens AG 2013

CM-100 charging controllers
Type
5TT32001KK20
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC1000
Product designation
CM-100
2KK20
3KK20
4KK20
6KK20
2KK30
General data
Version of the control element
of the charging station
Charging mode 3 according to IEC 61851
Product description
Controlling and monitoring of the energy-related components in the charging station,

used in communicating with the electric vehicle according to IEC 61851
Charging current maximum
16
20
32
16
Pollution degree
Insulation voltage with pollution
degree 3, rated value
13
IP20

V
230
Supply voltage
AC
DC
V
V
230
184 264
---
V
V
110
88 126
---
V
V
---
24
18 28
At 50 Hz
At 60 Hz
Hz
Hz
47.5 52.5
57 63
---
Consumed current at rated value of

the supply voltage
mA
100
300

Supply voltage
At 50 Hz
- Rated value
- Rated value for AC
At 60 Hz
- Rated value
- Rated value for AC
Supply voltage
At DC, rated value
At DC
Symmetrical tolerance of the mains
frequency
Communications
No

Vehicle communication
Ethernet protocol
EIB/KNX protocol
Yes
No
No
Display
1
Number of LEDs
Display version
For normal operation
As status display of the inputs/outputs
For fault signal
Green, blinking/permanently lit, waiting for EV/charging operation active

Orange, blinking (1 Hz), unit waiting for enabling
Red, blinking/flashing, fault
Inputs/outputs
Number of interfaces
2
DC
Type of voltage for the input voltages

Input voltage
05
0
Auxiliary circuit
4
Number of NO contacts for auxiliary

contacts
Operational current of the auxiliary
contacts
A
A
A
0.75
0.75
1
15
At 230 V at AC
At 110 V at AC
At 24 V at DC
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/151
Siemens AG 2013

Type
5TT32001KK20
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC1000
Product designation
CM-100
2KK20
3KK20
4KK20
6KK20
2KK30
Terminals
Contact assignment
Of socket 1 at PIN 1
L: 110/230 V AC connection
N: 110/230 V AC connection
I+24 V: 24 V DC connection
(SELV)
M: 24 V DC connection (SELV)
Contact assignment
FE: Functional ground (part of the vehicle interface, plug connection according to IEC 61851)
PX: Proximity (part of the vehicle interface, plug connection according to IEC 61851)
CP: Control Pilot (part of the vehicle interface, plug connection according to IEC 61851)
Contact assignment
AV: Auxiliary voltage (readout voltage for own digital inputs)

EN: Enable (digital input for module release)
HL: Hatch Lock (digital input for connector lock status)
Contact assignment
P1: "Power" relay contact for switching load contactor
P2: "Power" relay contact for switching load contactor
V1: Ventilation relay contact for switching fan

V2: Ventilation relay contact for switching fan
H1: Hatch relay contact for switching interlock
H2: Hatch relay contact for switching interlock
S1: Signal relay contact for fault messages
S2: Signal relay contact for fault messages
Ambient conditions
at height above sea level maximum
2 000
C
C
C
-25 +70
-25 +60
-25 +70
0 95
Ambient temperature
During storage
During operation
During transport
15
During operation
15/152
Siemens IC 10 2014
P1: "Power"
relay contact
for switching
load
contactor
13A branch
P2: "Power"
relay contact
for switching
load
contactor
13A branch
P1: "Power" relay contact for

switching load contactor
P2: "Power" relay contact for

switching load contactor
Siemens AG 2013

Type
5TT32001KK20
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC1000
Product designation
CM-100
2KK20
3KK20
4KK20
6KK20
2KK30
Suitable for operation in a residential, public and industrial environment

Suitable for use in industrial and residential areas

BURST
4 kV/5 kHz AC supply cables and functional ground,

2 kV/5 kHz control cables and relay outputs
2 kV/5 kHz DC supply cables,

2 kV/5 kHz control cables and
relay outputs

SURGE
Asymmetrical: AC supply cable 4 kV/12;

Control cables and functional ground 2 kV/42;
relay outputs 4 kV/12; assessment criterion B
Symmetrical: AC supply cables 2 kV/2;
relay outputs 2 kV/2; assessment criterion B
Asymmetrical:
DC supply cable 0.5 kV/12,
1 kV/42; Control cables and
functional ground 2 kV/42;
relay outputs 4 kV/12;
assessment criterion B
Symmetrical:
DC supply cables 0.5 kV/2
1 kV/42;
relay outputs 2 kV/2;
80 MHz ... 1 GHz 10 V/m, 1.4 ...2 GHz 3 V/m, 2 ... 2.7 GHz 1 V/m, assessment criterion A
4 kV contact discharge/8 kV air discharge, assessment criterion B
Shock resistance
During transport
15 g/11 ms/3 shocks per axis

1 000 shocks/axis, 25 g, 6 ms half-sine
During transport
During operation
5 ... 8.4 Hz/3.5 mm deflection, 8.4 ... 500 Hz/1 g

4 kV
Impulse withstand voltage rated value

3 V effective in the frequency range 0.15 ... 80.0 MHz, modulation 80 % AM with 1 kHz,
Interference immunity against

magnetic fields with energy-related
frequencies
A/m
100 at 50 Hz and 60 Hz, assessment criterion A
Contact reliability
Finger-safe
Touch protection against electric

shock
Oper- 80 000 at 1 A, inductive load

ating
cycles
Mounting position
Vertical, on horizontal standard mounting rail
Wellamid 6600-PA66-GV 30 HWV0CP
Type of mounting
Dimensions
mm
mm
mm
72
91
71
15
Width
Height
Depth
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/153
Siemens AG 2013

Type
5TT32001KK20
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC1000
Product designation
CM-100
2KK20
3KK20
4KK20
6KK20
2KK30
Connections
Combicon connection GMSTB 2.5
Combicon connection MSTB 2.5
Version of connector assignment

Of the outputs
Of the inputs
Product function: removable terminal

for the auxiliary and control circuit
Yes
Connectable conductor cross-section

Solid
mm
0.5 2.5
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
0.5 2.5
AWG number
As coded connectable conductor
cross-section
20 14

Supply voltage
Charging current
DT
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
SIPLUS ECC1000 (CM-100) charging controller

110 ... 230 AC
13
16
20
32
13/32
A
A
A
A
A
5TT3200-1KK20
5TT3200-2KK20
5TT3200-3KK20
5TT3200-4KK20
5TT3200-6KK20
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
24 DC
16
5TT3200-2KK30
1 unit
15A
5TT3200-.KK.0
SP01_00001
107
15
72
64
SIPLUS ECC1000 (CM-100) charging controllers

5TT3200-1KK20,
5TT3200-2KK20,
5TT3200-2KK30,
5TT3200-3KK20,
5TT3200-4KK20,
5TT3200-6KK20
15/154
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

CM-230 charging controllers acc. to IEC 61851
with Ethernet connection
Type
6FE1021-3CM10-1AA0
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC2000
Product designation
CM-230
managed version
6FE1021-3CM10-2AA0
6FE1021-3CM10-3AA0
CM-230
stand-alone version
CM-230-C
standalone version
General data
Charging current
Typical
16
Adjustable charging current
6 80
Product function load management
Yes
Product description
Controlling and monitoring of the energy-related components in the charging

station, used in communicating with the electric vehicle according to IEC 61851
Suitability for use
Simple/complex AC charging systems
Standard for charging mode electric vehicle
IEC/ISO 61851
Standard for safety
According to IEC 61010-1/EN 61010-1 (2nd edition) or UL 61010-1 (2nd edition)
IP20
Pollution degree
Insulation voltage with pollution degree 3,

rated value
--
Type of sensor
V
230
Supply voltage
DC

Supply voltage
At DC, rated value
At DC
V
V
24
18 28
Consumed current at rated value of the supply voltage
mA
300
Communications
Yes
Type of data transmission to the I&C system
Ethernet
Vehicle communication according to IEC 61851
Ethernet protocol
EIB/KNX protocol
Yes
Yes
No
Display
1
Number of LEDs
Display version
For normal operation
As status display of the inputs/outputs
Green, blinking/permanently lit, waiting for EV/charging operation active

-Orange, blinking (1 Hz/5 Hz),
unit waiting for enabling/
pre-heat charging post
Red, blinking/flashing, fault
(see "SIPLUS ECC CM-230 Operating Instructions",
For fault signal
Inputs/outputs
Number of interfaces according to IEC 61851
8
DC
Type of voltage for the input voltages

Input voltage
0 28
DC
Output voltage
18 28
Output current at digital output when signal <1> rated value
0.3
Yes
Yes
Product function control plug interlock

Note
24 (solenoid)
Auxiliary circuit
8
Number of NO contacts for auxiliary contacts

Operational current of the auxiliary contacts
A
A
A
0.75
0.75
1
15
At 230 V at AC
At 110 V at AC
At 24 V at DC
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/155
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6FE1021-3CM10-1AA0
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC2000
Product designation
CM-230
managed version
6FE1021-3CM10-2AA0
6FE1021-3CM10-3AA0
CM-230
stand-alone version
CM-230-C
standalone version
Terminals
Contact assignment
L+24 V: 24 V DC connection (SELV)

M: 24 V DC connection (SELV)
Contact assignment
FE: Functional ground (part of the vehicle interface,

plug connection according to IEC 61851)
PX: Proximity (part of the vehicle interface,
CP: Control Pilot (part of the vehicle interface,
Contact assignment
1L: Root R1 ... R4

R1: Relay Output 1
R2: Relay Output 2
R3: Relay Output 3
R4: Relay Output 4
R1 (P): Power tap-off enabling relay

R2 (V): Fan relay
R3 (H): Interlock relay
R4 (S): Signaling relay
Contact assignment
2L: Root R5 ... R8

R5: Relay Output 5
R6: Relay Output 6
R7: Relay Output 7
R8: Relay Output 8
R5 (HT): Heating relay
R5 (P): Relay Output 5
Contact assignment
O socket 5 at PIN 6
24 V: Infeed for 24 V
24 V: Infeed for 24 V outputs O1 ... O8
outputs TR, O1 ... O8
TR: Trip, 24 V output
Not used
RX: Receive line (RS 232)
TX: Send line (RS 232)
1M: 24 V DC negative (SELV/PELV)
24 V: 24 V DC Plus (SELV/PELV) connection
Contact assignment
O1: 24 V switching
O1 (RC): 24 V-switching output status charging
output 1
tap-off (ready to charge)
O2: 24 V switching
O2 (E): 24 V-switching output error status (error)
output 2
O3: 24 V switching
O3 (CS): 24 V switching output status cable
output 3
connected (cable status)
O4: 24 V switching
O4 (V): 24 V-switching output status vehicle
output 4
connected (vehicle connected)
O5: 24 V switching
O5 (VC): 24 V switching output charging status
output 5
(vehicle charging)
O6: 24 V switching output 6
3M: Reference point 24 V outputs O1 ... O8
Contact assignment
I1: 24 V input 1
I1 (EN): 24 V input module enabling
I2: 24 V input 2
I2 (HL): 24 V input status interlock
I3: 24 V input 3
I3 (CB): 24 V input circuit breaker status
I4: 24 V input 4
I3 (RCCB): 24 V input RCCB switch
I5: 24 V input 5
I4 (IO): 24 V input emergency release
I6: 24 V input 6
I7: 24 V input 7
I8: 24 V input 8
2M: Reference point 24 V inputs I1 ... I8
Contact assignment
15
15/156
Siemens IC 10 2014
RJ45: Ethernet 10/100
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6FE1021-3CM10-1AA0
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC2000
Product designation
CM-230
managed version
6FE1021-3CM10-2AA0
6FE1021-3CM10-3AA0
CM-230
stand-alone version
CM-230-C
standalone version
Ambient conditions
Installation altitude at height above sea level maximum
2 000
C
C
C
-25 +70
-25 +55
-25 +70
0 95
Ambient temperature
During storage
During operation
During transport
Relative humidity
During operation
EMC emitted interference according to IEC 61000-6-3
EMC interference immunity according to IEC 61000-6-2
Suitable for use in industrial and residential areas

2 kV/5 kHz DC supply cables, 1 kV/5 kHz control cables,

relay outputs, RS 232 and Ethernet, assessment criterion B

Asymmetrical:
DC supply cables 0.5 kV/12;
Control cables, functional ground, RS 232 interface 1 kV/42;
Relay outputs 2 kV/12; Ethernet-cable (shield) 1 kV direct;
Symmetrical: DC supply cable 0.5 kV/2;
80 MHz ... 1 GHz 10 V/m, modulation 80 % AM with 1 kHz,

80 MHz ... 1 GHz 3 V/m, 1.4 ... 2 GHz 3 V/m, 2.0 ... 2.7 GHz 1 V/m,
modulation 80 % AM with 1 kHz, assessment criterion A
Shock resistance
During transport according to IEC 60068-2-29

1 000 shocks/axis, 25 g, 6 ms half-sine

Conducted interference injection as high-frequency

interference according to IEC 61000-4-6
3 V effective in the frequency range 0.15 ... 80.0 MHz,

modulation 80 % AM with 1 kHz,
Interference immunity against magnetic fields with

energy-related frequencies according to IEC 61000-4-8
A/m
4
Finger-safe
Touch protection against electric shock

Contact reliability
Oper- 80 000 at 1 A, inductive load

ating
cycles
Mounting position
Vertical, on horizontal standard mounting rail
Wellamid 6600-PA66-GV 30 HWV0CP
Type of mounting
Lexan 915R
Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
mm
mm
mm
108
91
72
Connections
Combicon connection GMSTB 2.5

Version of connector assignment

Of the outputs
Of the inputs

Product function: removable terminal for the auxiliary and

control circuit
Yes
mm
0.5 2.5
mm
mm
0.5 2.5
0.5 2.5
15
Connectable conductor cross-section

Solid
Finely stranded
- With end sleeves
AWG number
As coded connectable conductor cross-section
20 14
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/157
Siemens AG 2013


Version
Supply voltage Charging

current
V
DT
Article No.
6 80
(adjustable
through web
interface)
X
X
6 80
(adjustable
through web
interface)
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
6FE1021-3CM10-1AA0
1 unit
477
6FE1021-3CM10-2AA0
1 unit
477
6FE1021-3CM10-3AA0
1 unit
477
SIPLUS ECC2000 charging controllers (CM-230/CM-230-C)

24 DC
CM-230
Managed
Standalone
24 DC
CM-230-C
Standalone
6FE1021-3CM10-.AA0
SP01_00002
91
108
65
72
15
SIPLUS ECC2000 charging controllers (CM-230/CM-230-C)

6FE1021-3CM10-1AA0,
6FE1021-3CM10-2AA0,
6FE1021-3CM10-3AA0
15/158
Siemens IC 10 2014

Siemens AG 2013

SIPLUS ECC8000 prefabricated function units
Overview
Function units are pre-wired, tested and ready-to-fit subsystems
for electric vehicle charging stations. The function units
comprise not only the charging controller but also the complete
power tap-off with RCCB, circuit breaker and load contactor.
Other components are also included in the function units
according to the intended application, e.g. electric heaters to
extend the permissible temperature range, controllers for the
charging plug interlock, and calibrated power meters. Switch
disconnectors and terminal strip connections enable easy
commissioning and reduce the amount of work during servicing
calls.
SIPLUS ECC8000 SYS-102A function unit
Benefits
The prefabricated and certified function units enable the quick
installation of standards-conform charging stations for system
integrators.
15
Customer-specific adaptations are possible (on request).
Siemens IC 10 2014
15/159
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6FE1086-0SY00-0AA0
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC8000
Product designation
SYS-101A
6FE1086-0SY00-1AA0
6FE1086-3SY00-0AA0
SYS-102A
SYS-202A
General data
Product description
Prefabricated function unit for Prefabricated function unit for Prefabricated function unit for
installation in wall box
installation in a simple
installation in a public/semienclosures in a residential
charging post
public charging posts
environment (e.g. garage)
Suitability for use
Function unit for charging

stations at home (home
charging)
Product component charging tap-offs
Yes
Number of charging tap-offs
Number of interfaces according to IEC 61851
Charging current
16
Function unit for wall boxes or Function unit for professional

simple charging posts
charging posts in the public
area
2
2
13 / 32
(automatic switchover)
32 each
Product function
Load management
Control plug interlock
- Note
Energy measurement
No
No
-No
Yes
Yes
24 V/12 V (motor)
Yes
Number of energy measuring stations
Standard for charging mode electric vehicle
IEC/ISO 61851
Pollution degree
2 (cabinet requirement)
Type of sensor
--
IP00
Type A
RCCB type
m
1 000
During storage
During operation
During transport
C
C
C
-40 +75
-20 +45
-40 +75
Relative humidity during operation, maximum
95

maximum
Ambient temperature
Product component heating
No
Product function overvoltage protection
No
-20 +60
-5 +45
-20 +60
Yes
Inputs
AC

Operational voltage rated value for AC
400
Input voltage
360 440
Mains frequency 1, rated value
Hz
50
Insulation voltage, rated value
440
TNS
Suitability of use for network form

Current at AC, rated value
18
Outputs
15
Phase number of outputs
15/160
Siemens IC 10 2014
35
72
Siemens AG 2013

Type
6FE1086-0SY00-0AA0
Product brand name
SIPLUS ECC8000
Product designation
SYS-101A
6FE1086-0SY00-1AA0
6FE1086-3SY00-0AA0
SYS-102A
SYS-202A
Communications
No
Yes
Type of data transmission to the I&C system
--
Ethernet
Vehicle communication according to IEC 61851

Ethernet protocol
Yes
No
Yes

2 kV/5 kHz AC supply cables and functional ground,

1 kV/5 kHz control cables and input/output signals

Asymmetrical: Supply cables 2 kV, signal cables > 30 m 1 kV, assessment criterion B
Symmetrical: Supply cables 1 kV, assessment criterion B
80 MHz ... 1 GHz 3 V/m, 1.4 ... 2 GHz 3 V/m, assessment criterion A
80 MHz ... 1 GHz 10 V/m assessment criterion B
2.0 ... 2.7 GHz 1 V/m
Conducted interference injection as high-frequency

interference according to IEC 61000-4-6
3 V effective in the frequency range 0.15 ... 80.0 MHz, assessment criterion A
Interference immunity against magnetic fields

with energy-related frequencies
A/m
EMC emitted interference according to

IEC 61000-6-3
Shock resistance

1 000 shocks/axis, 25 g, 6 ms
5 ... 500 Hz/1 g/10 cycles

5 ... 150 Hz/1 g/10 cycles
Mechanical data
Mounting position
Vertical
Type of mounting
Screw mounting
Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
mm
mm
mm
370
230
150
900
240
200
270

Product
designation
Type of voltage
of the supply
voltage
Input
voltage
Charging current DT
1
Article No.
Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS*
PG
SIPLUS ECC8000
SYS-101A
AC
360 440 16
--
6FE1086-0SY00-0AA0
1 unit
477
SYS-102A
AC
360 440 13
32
6FE1086-0SY00-1AA0
1 unit
477
SYS-202A
AC
360 440 32
--
6FE1086-3SY00-0AA0
1 unit
477
6FE1086-0SY00-0AA0
More information
15
For operating instructions and other technical specifications see


Siemens IC 10 2014
15/161
Siemens AG 2013

15
Notes
15/162
Siemens IC 10 2014
16
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
16/2
Glossary
16/8
Training
16/9
Ordering notes
16/14
Further documentation
16/16
16/23
Quality management
16/24
Siemens contacts
16/25
Siemens Solution Partners

Automation
16/26
External partners
16/27
16/28
16/29
16/30
Online services
Information and ordering
in the internet and on DVD
Information and download center,
Social media, Mobile media
Industry services
Your machines and plant can do
more with Industry Services
Industry Services for the entire life
cycle
Software licenses
16/36
Subject index
16/44
Article number index
16/70
Conditions of sale and delivery
16
16/34
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Glossary
"a" release
Bypass operation
Short designation for a current-sensitive delayed overload

release.
When a motor ramp-up is completed, the thyristors on SIRIUS

soft starters are fully operated and the complete mains voltage
is applied therefore to the motor terminals. As no controlling of
the motor voltage is necessary during operation, the thyristors
are bridged by internal bypass contacts designed for AC1 current. The waste heat arising during uninterrupted duty due to
thyristor power loss is thus reduced. This reduces heating of the
switchgear environment.
"n" release
Short designation for an instantaneous electromagnetic electronic release.
8US busbar adapters
8US busbar adapters enable the mechanical mounting and
electrical contacting of motor starter protectors/circuit breakers,
load feeders or compact starters on a single busbar system.
CLASS (time)
Adapters for screw fixing
Closed power
Adapters for screw fixing can be used for mounting a compact

starter onto a flat surface.
This refers to the power consumption of a contactor's solenoid

coil which results from the continuously absorbed current and is
required to hold the magnetic system in the closed state.
Approvals
Approval of controls and switchgears on the basis of sometimes
mandatory national standards which exist in addition to sets of
rules such as "IEC", "CENELEC" and "CEE". For example, UL certification or CSA certification are required for the North American
market (USA, Canada). Additional marking is also mandatory in
such cases, i.e. the certification symbol must be applied as an
inscription to the device.
Arc quenching space
During a control's switching operations, in particular during
disconnection of highly inductive load currents or short-circuit
currents, the ionized gases produced by the arc are forced out
through the arc chute openings. To ensure that the concentration
of these ionized gases does not reach a hazardous level, a certain clearance is required above or in front of the device. This arc
quenching space is quoted by the manufacturer (normally on
the dimensional drawings) and depends on the presence of
exposed live conductors (e.g. busbars), conducting structures
and insulation partitions at the control. Arc chute attachments
can be mounted onto large motor starter protectors in order to
reduce the clearance and therefore the space required in the
control cabinet. No arc quenching space is required for vacuum
circuit breakers and vacuum contactors because the arc does
not leave the vacuum chute and no ionized gases are released.
AS-Interface
AS-Interface is an open, international standard according to
EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2 for process and field communication. Leading manufacturers of actuators and sensors all over
the world support the AS-Interface. Interested companies are
provided with the electrical and mechanical specifications by
the AS-Interface Association.
Auxiliary switch blocks for compact feeders
Optional auxiliary switch blocks in versions with 2 NO, 2 NC or
1 NO plus 1 NC.
AWG (American Wire Gauge)
A standard wire size used in the USA, which is based on the
cross-sectional area of the conductor or wire. With each AWG
number the cross-sectional area is incremented by 26 %. The
thicker the wire, the smaller the AWG number.
Basic module
16
Function modules are comprised of at least one basic module,

supplemented by coupling modules as required. The basic
module includes the control logic and, in the case of wye-delta
modules, the time setting for ramp-up in star mode, and a 10-pin
plug connector for accommodating the plug of the coupling
modules.
16/2
Siemens IC 10 2014
See also Trip class (CLASS).
Connection methods
SIRIUS offers the right connection method for every environment: Screw terminals, spring-type terminals or ring terminal lug
connections.
Contactor
A switching device with only one off position, usually without mechanical lock, which is not operated manually and which, under
normal conditions, can switch on, transmit and switch off the circuit, including normal overload currents. Contactors are preferably used for high switching frequencies. A distinction is made
between contactors for switching motors (motor load switches)
and contactor relays for control.
Control kit
An aid for manually closing the main contacts by actuating a
handle.
Coupling module
Function modules are comprised of at least one basic module,
supplemented by coupling modules as required. The coupling
module includes one NO contact and a 10-pole connecting cable with plugs to the coupling module and the basic module; it is
used for the mutual interlocking of wye and delta operation. The
communication-capable version transmits the signals of the
other contactors and realizes the electrical interlocking (reversing/wye-delta starting); there is no integrated connecting cable.
Current limiting with soft starters
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters continuously measure the phase
current (motor current) by means of integrated current transformers. During the start-up operation, the flowing motor current
can be actively limited by the soft starter. The current limiting
function is superimposed on the voltage ramp function. This
means that as soon as a parameterized current limit value is
reached, the voltage ramp is aborted and the motor is started
with the current limiting function until the ramp-up is completed.
On SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters the current limiting is always
active. If the current limiting potentiometer is set to the far right
(maximum), the starting current is limited to the factor 5 of the set
rated motor current.
The current limit value is set as a factor of the rated motor current
to the required current during start-up. Due to the current unbalance in the start-up operation, the set current corresponds to the
arithmetic mean over the 3 phases.
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Glossary
Current monitoring relay
Function module for wye-delta starting
Current monitoring relays are used for underload monitoring and

overload monitoring of motors or other loads. The level of current
permits extensive conclusions to be drawn about the powered
process or plant, e.g. a torn belt, no-load operation of a pump,
tool wear, hoist overload or blockage. With multi-phase monitoring it is possible in addition to perform phase sequence, phase
failure or residual current monitoring. If the measured current
values lies outside the defined range there will follow an instant
or time-delayed alarm or disconnection.
Function modules for wye-delta starting are used for changing

over from star mode to delta mode. They are comprised of one
basic module and two coupling modules. The electrical interlocks are already included in the modules.
Range between the smallest and the biggest value of the current
to which the release can be set.
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms enable the operation of motor starter protectors/circuit breakers and compact
starters with closed control cabinet doors.
Electrical interlock
The electrical interdependence of controls through circuit-related measures. Customary for contactor controls: For example,
a contactor is only allowed to be switched on when another contactor was switched off first. Auxiliary contacts or auxiliary
switches are used to implement an electrical interlock.
Endurance
The period in which the control works problem-free under normal
operating conditions. It is expressed in numbers of operating
cycles (operating cycles), electrical endurance (contact erosion
of the contacts) and mechanical endurance (operating cycles
without load).
Explosion protection
Essential for the use of electrical equipment in potentially explosive atmospheres according to EN 50014 (VDE 0170 / 0171).
Explosion protection requires equipment which is liable to produce ignition-capable electric arcs (plasma) during operation to
be enclosed in a flameproof casing. The explosive mix can enter
the enclosure, but an ignition-capable flame produced during an
explosion inside the casing is prevented from escaping to the
outside.
Fast short-circuit trip unit
A motor starter protector/circuit breaker's release which provides short-circuit protection for the downstream load or cable.
In the event of a short circuit, the fast short-circuit trip unit must
disconnect all poles of the motor starter protector/circuit breaker
instantaneously or with a short-time delay.
Function module
Function modules are differentiated according to their use:
For reversing starting
For wye-delta starting
Function modules are also available in communication-capable
versions with AS-i or IO-Link in order to create a link to a higherlevel control system.
Function module for direct-on-line starting
These function modules are used for the time-delayed switching
of contactors.
Function module for reversing starting
Function modules for reversing starting are used for operating
reversing starters. The version without a fieldbus interface is
comprised of bridge modules, the version for AS-Interface or
IO-Link has one basic module and one coupling module. In all
three cases the electrical interlocks of the two directional contactors are already included.
Heavy starting exists if a motor requires more than 10 to 15 s

from being switched on to reaching its rated speed on account
of its special load conditions. When heavy starting exists, the
load torque of the machine to be driven is greater during startup than in rated operation. It takes longer to reach the rated
speed because large centrifugal masses need to be accelerated (e.g. on rolling mills, centrifuges, etc.). The protection of
heavy-starting motors requires special overload relays (heavystarting relays, solid-state overload relays) or thermistor motor
protection devices.
Heavy starting with soft starters
According to the specific boundary conditions, the SIRIUS soft
starter has to be selected for heavy starting characteristics
(CLASS 20 start-up) at least one power level higher than the
rating of the motor used. Sample set values and device sizes are
listed in tables in the product manual list.
The infeed system for 3RA6 enables several compact starters to
be fed in through one modular infeed system with permanent
wiring.
Intrinsic device protection for soft starters
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters have integrated intrinsic device protection which prevents thermal overloading of the thyristors. This
is realized on the one hand by current measurement using transformers in the three phases and additionally by temperature
measurement using thermal sensors on the thyristor heat sink. If
the internal permanently set switch-off value is exceeded, the
soft starter will switch off automatically.
Inverse-time delayed overload trip unit ("a" release)
A thermal overload release which works with a time delay that
decreases as the current increases.
IO-Link
IO-Link is a new communication standard for sensors and actuators - defined by the PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO).
IO-Link technology is based on the point-to-point connection of
sensors and actuators to the control system. As such it is not a
bus system but an upgrade of the classic point-to-point connection. Extensive parameter and diagnostics data are transmitted
in addition to the cyclic operating data for the connected sensor
and actuators. The connection method is based on a three-pole
standard cable or 3 individual wires.
Leakage current
When the current flow is controlled by means of semiconductors,
there can be no electrical separation in the device. A small
residual current, i.e. leakage current, still flows therefore in the
disconnected state when a load is connected.
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assembly
A switchgear and controlgear assembly is a combination of one
or more low-voltage controls with related units for controlling,
measuring and indicating, plus the related protective and control
devices. It must be fully assembled under the manufacturer's
responsibility, with all internal electrical and mechanical connections and structural parts.
16
Current setting range (of an electronic release)
Heavy starting
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/3
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Glossary
Main control switch
Overload release
Every industrial machine covered by IEC 60204 Part 1

(VDE 0113, Part 1) must be fitted with a main control switch
which disconnects the entire electrical equipment from the
mains for the duration of cleaning work, maintenance, repairs
and lengthy downtimes. Usually a switch which can be operated
by hand is stipulated in order to prevent electrical or mechanical
hazards. A main control switch can also be an emergency-stop
device.
An overload trip unit is an electronic release for protecting

against overload.
The following requirements must be met:
The motor current changes in proportion to the voltage applied

to the motor. The starting current is thus reduced by the factor of
the voltage applied to the motor.
1. Handle can be reached from the outside

2. Only one "Off" position and one "On" position with allocated
stops
With phase control of two inverse-parallel switched thyristor

pairs, the rms value of the motor voltage on SIRIUS soft starters
is increased within a selectable starting time from a selectable
starting voltage to the rated motor voltage.
3. Identification of the two positions with "0" and "I"
The torque changes in squared proportion to the voltage applied

to the motor. The starting torque is thus reduced in squared proportion to the voltage applied to the motor.
4. "Off" can be locked
5. Mains terminals with cover to prevent touching by accident

6. The switching capacity must comply with AC-23 in the case
of motor load switches and AC-22 in the case of load-break
switches (utilization category)
A product feature which enables a protective device to respond

also during single-phase operation of a three-phase asynchronous motor before the motor suffers thermal damage
(DIN VDE 0660 Part 102).
7. Positive indication of the switch position
Pick-up power
Mirror contact for power contactors

A mirror contact is an NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with an NO main contact (according to EN 60947-5-1,
Appendix F).
The pick-up power is the power consumption of a contactor's

solenoid coils which is required to set the magnetic system in
motion. With alternating current operation this is usually higher
than the closed power. With direct current operation on SIRIUS
contactors, the pick-up power equals the closed power.
Modular systems
Polarity balancing for soft starters
The SIRIUS modular system offers everything that you need for
switching, starting, protecting and monitoring motors and industrial systems. It is a modular selection of standard components
which are optimally coordinated, can be combined with ease
and use the same accessories.
On two-phase controlled SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters the current resulting from superimposition of the two controlled phases flows in the uncontrolled phase. The advantages
of two-phase control lie in the more compact size, compared for
example to a three-phase solution, and in the lower device
costs.
Motor protection
Protection of induction motors against overload and short circuit,
i.e. protection of the winding insulation against unacceptable
heating.
Generally key-operated switching devices that switch on, control
and switch off currents in circuits under normal operating conditions. Under prescribed conditions that are not normal through
to short circuit, they can also switch on the current, control it for
a specified interval and interrupt it.
Mounting methods
SIRIUS offers a maximum of configuration flexibility. The system
components can be configured on a feeder-oriented or lineoriented basis.
Off-delay
The time span effected by a timing relay or timer (e.g. on contactors) between the opening command for the contacts of the timing relay or timer and the actual reaching of their original position.
ON period in %
The relative ON period in % is the ratio between load period and
cycle duration for loads which are frequently disconnected and
switched on.
Operating range
16
Phase control for soft starters
The range in which a contactor's actuating voltage is allowed to

deviate from the rated actuating voltage without the reliable
operation of the control being impaired (e.g. dropping out of the
contactor).
16/4
Siemens IC 10 2014
A negative physical effect of the two-phase control during startup is the occurrence of DC components due to the leading-edge
phase and the superimposition of the phase currents, which can
lead to severe noise generation on the motor. The SIEMENS patented "Polarity Balancing" control method was developed to prevent the DC components during start-up.
"Polarity Balancing" reliably eliminates these direct current components during the ramp-up phase. It creates a motor ramp-up
that is uniform in speed, torque and current rise. At the same
time the acoustic quality of the starting operation comes close to
the quality of a three-phase controlled starting operation. This is
made possible by the on-going dynamic harmonizing or balancing of current half-waves of different polarity during the motor
ramp-up.
Positively-driven contact in contactor relays
Positively-driven contact elements are a combination of
"n" NO contact and "m" NC contact which are designed such that
they cannot be closed simultaneously (EN 60947-5-1,
Appendix L).
Preferred circuit for wye-delta starters
In the preferred circuit for a clockwise rotating motor the motor
terminals are correctly connected when phase L1 is connected
to motor terminals U1 and V2, L2 to V1 and W2, and L3 to W1
and U2. This order should be observed during installation in order to minimize the changeover current peak in a clockwise rotating motor when switching over from wye to delta.
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Glossary
Protection technology
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn
Basically a distinction is drawn between two current-based protection technologies: Thermal and solid-state protection. Motor
starter protectors and thermal overload relays protect with
bimetal trip units; solid-state overload relays, 3RW40 soft starters and 3RA6 compact starters protect on a solid-state basis.
The electronic options feature not only a far lower power loss but
also a wide setting range of 1:4, which means that they offer a
far smaller variance than the thermal releases. The SIRIUS
modular system has the right solution for each switching
technology.
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity of a motor starter

protector/circuit breaker is (according to IEC 60947-2 and EN
60947-2) the value of the short-circuit current that it can switch
off at the rated operational voltage, rated frequency and specified power factor (or specified time constant). The value of the
prospective current applies (in the case of alternating current:
rms value of the AC components) as specified by the manufacturer. With AC motor starter protectors/circuit breakers the rated
short-circuit breaking capacity must be independent of the size
of the DC components (DC component). The rated short-circuit
breaking capacity means that the motor starter protector/circuit
breaker can disconnect any current up to the rated short-circuit
breaking capacity at a line-frequency recovery voltage of 110 %
of the rated operational voltage.
With SIRIUS soft starters, the length of the set ramp time defines
in which time the motor voltage is raised from a selected starting
voltage to the mains voltage. This has an influence on the motor's acceleration moment, which drives the load during the
ramp-up operation. As the result, a longer ramp time has a
smaller acceleration moment throughout the motor ramp-up. The
latter is therefore longer and smoother. The length of the ramp
time should be selected such that the motor reaches its rated
speed within this period. If the time selected is too short, i.e. if
the ramp time ends before the motor ramp-up is finished, a very
high starting current will arise at this moment and can reach the
value of the direct-on-line starting current at this speed.
Ramp-down time
On SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters the "ramp-down time" potentiometer can be used to define how long the power supply to the
motor is to be upheld after the ON command is removed. During
this ramp-down time the torque generated in the motor is
reduced using a voltage ramp function and the application is
brought to a smooth halt.
Rated conditional short-circuit current Iq
Guaranteed short-circuit breaking capacity of controlgear
assemblies and load feeders, also referred to as the rated
conditional short-circuit current.
Rated data of the control circuit
The most important rated data of the control circuit for selecting
a contactor are the rated control supply voltage Us (the voltage
of the coil connection) with related frequency (e.g. 50 Hz) and
the power consumption of the coil (pick-up power and closed
power).
Rated data of the main circuit
The most important rated data of the main circuit for selecting a
contactor are the rated operational current Ie (the current which
is defined by the conditions of use) or the rated power (motor rating) and the corresponding rated voltage Ue.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
The peak value of a surge voltage of specified form and polarity
to which, under specified test conditions, electrical equipment
can be subjected without failing and to which the clearances refers. The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must correspond to, or be greater than, the transient overvoltages that
occur in the system in which the equipment is installed.
This applies
for alternating current with every value of the power factor, but
not lower than specified in the respective testing guidelines,
for direct current, unless otherwise stated by the manufacturer, with every time constant but not greater than defined in
the respective testing directive.
The short-circuit breaking capacity does not apply for line-frequency recovery voltage of more than 110 % of the rated operational voltage.
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu
The maximum short-circuit current Ik (limit value of the rated
short-circuit breaking capacity) which the motor starter protector/circuit breaker can disconnect under defined conditions.
Determined with test sequence III, switching sequence O-t-CO
(O = Open, t = Time, CO = Close-Open). After the test, the motor
starter protector/circuit breaker may be restricted in its functions.
Recovery time
After a protection function in a control (e.g. motor starter protector/circuit breaker, soft starter, overload relay or current monitoring relay) has tripped, the motor cannot be restarted until a recovery time has elapsed. The recovery time varies in length
according to the cause of the fault. Details can be found in the
related product documentation.
Response delay
The response delay is the time from the beginning of a
command's entry to the first making of the contact, e.g. at the
contactor.
RoHS
EC Directive 2002/95/EC concerning the restriction of certain
dangerous substances in electrical and electronic devices regulates the use of hazardous substances in devices and components. The directive and its respective implementation in national law is known for short by the abbreviation RoHS
(Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances).
Short-circuit strength
The voltage value which specifies the insulation resistance of the

control or accessory part and to which the insulation tests and
creepage and clearances refer. On no account must the highest
rated operational voltage exceed the rated insulation voltage.
Resistance of a control in the closed state with its parts

(e.g. releases) or of a complete switchgear against the electrodynamic (dynamic short-circuit strength) and thermal (thermal
short-circuit strength) stress that occurs in the event of a short
circuit. The characteristic for the dynamic stress is the peak
short-circuit current as the highest instantaneous value of the
short-circuit current. The characteristic for the thermal stress of
the short-circuit current is the rms value of the short-circuit current for its duration.
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)
Compared to the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity

Icu, the test conditions are more exacting and the short-circuit
current is usually lower. Determined with test sequence II,
switching sequence O-t-CO-t-CO (O = Open , t = Time ,
CO = Close-Open). After the test, the motor starter protector/circuit breaker must be unrestricted in its functions.
A discrete level (one of three possible levels) for defining the

requirements to be met by the safety integrity of safety-related
control functions. SIL 3 is the highest and SIL 1 the lowest safety
integrity level.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/5
16
Ramp time
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Glossary
Smooth ramp-down
The same principle is used during the ramp-down operation as

for soft starting. This way the torque generated in the motor is
slowly reduced, thus enabling a smooth ramp-down of the application.
On inverse-time (thermally) delayed overload releases and relays, the tripping time is influenced not only by the current but
also by the ambient temperature. The effect of the ambient temperature is compensated by an additional bimetal strip which is
not heated by the current. Solid-state compensation is possible
for solid-state overload relays.
During a smooth ramp-down, the free or natural ramp-down of

the load is prolonged. This function is set if there is a need to prevent the load from being stopped abruptly. Applications involving small mass inertia values or high counter-rotating torques are
typical examples.
Soft starters
A motor starter which reduces the motor's starting torque (tightening torque) and starting current in order to reduce vibrations
on the driven machine and current peaks in the line supply. The
starting torque is reduced because the control supply voltage at
the beginning is lower than the motor's rated voltage (the starting torque is proportional to the square of the applied voltage).
The terminal voltage can be increased as soon as the motor is
running. Classic methods for reducing the terminal voltage are
for example wye-delta starting, start-up through resistors in the
stator and starting with an autotransformer. The use of solid-state
motor controllers with switched thyristor circuits for controlling
the terminal voltage on squirrel-cage motors is becoming increasingly widespread. See also Soft starting and Smooth rampdown.
Soft starting
During the start-up operation, the absorbed starting current and
the starting torque generated in the motor are regulated by a
solid-state soft starter on the basis of the motor voltage control
(phase control).
Starting current
Three-phase asynchronous motors have a high direct-on-line
starting current. Depending on the motor version it can amount
to between three times and fifteen times the rated operational
current. Seven to eight times the rated motor current can be
taken as a typical value.
Starting voltage
With SIRIUS soft starters, the level of the starting voltage defines
the switch-on torque of the motor. A lower starting voltage results
in a lower tightening torque and a lower starting current. The
starting voltage should be selected such that the motor starts up
immediately and smoothly once the start command goes to the
soft starter.
Start-up detection on soft starters
SIRIUS 3RW40 soft starters feature internal start-up detection.
When a motor ramp-up is detected, the motor voltage is increased immediately to 100 % of the mains voltage. The internal
bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.
Switching frequency
Number of operating cycles per unit of time (e.g. 15 operations
per hour).
To prevent thermal overloading of the SIRIUS soft starters, it is
imperative to comply with the maximum permissible switching
frequency. The switching frequency of SIRIUS soft starters size
S0 to S3 can be increased by using an optional auxiliary fan.
16
Switching technology
Basically a distinction is drawn between two switching technologies: On the electromechanical side there are contactors, contactor assemblies and compact starters which can be used to
implement solutions for direct-on-line starting, reversing starting
and wye-delta starting. Frequent switching or reversing, soft
starting and smooth ramp-down are performed on the other
hand with solid-state controls: solid-state switching devices and
soft starters. The SIRIUS modular system has the right solution
for each switching technology.
16/6
Siemens IC 10 2014
Terminals for "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controller

(Type E)"
The terminals comply with the required clearance and creepage
distances according to UL 508 (type E).
Protection of the motor through temperature sensors fitted in the
windings (PTC sensors). These directly monitor the winding temperature.
Three-phase busbars
The three-phase busbar enables several motor starter protectors/circuit breakers or compact starters to be fed in through one
feeder terminal.
Tightening torque
The tightening torque and the breakdown torque can normally
be assumed to amount to between two and four times the rated
torque. For the loaded machine this means that the start-up and
acceleration forces give rise to a higher mechanical load on the
machine and the goods being conveyed than compared to
operation at rated values.
Time-delayed auxiliary switch
A component which unites various auxiliary switch combinations
and as a general rule can also be retrofitted to a control.
Timing relays
A control with solid-state time delay which opens or closes
contacts after a delay according to the set time.
Trip class (CLASS)
The trip class of an inverse-time delayed overload relay
(including thermal and solid-state overload relays and releases)
indicates the maximum tripping time under a given load from
cold. The trip class number (e.g. CLASS 10, 20, 30) stands for
the maximum permissible tripping time in seconds when the
relay is loaded with symmetrical 3-pole loading from cold with
7.2 times the current setting (IEC 947-4-1; DIN VDE 0660
Part 107). Trip classes 20 and 30 are used for example for motor
protection in heavy starting conditions.
Tripping characteristic
The graphical representation of the connection between the tripping time and the influencing variable is shown in the tripping
characteristic curve. The time/current diagram shows for example how long the release or the tripping relay takes to respond to
a specific current.
Tripping current (of an overload release)
Value of the current at which a trip releases within a specified
time.
Two-phase control
Two of three active phases are controlled by means of semiconductors. With SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters, for example, two inverse-parallel switched thyristors lie in each of the
phases L1 and L3. Phase L2 is passed through the starter as an
uncontrolled phase using a copper link and is connected directly to the corresponding output terminal.
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Glossary
distinction between two different types of coordination which are
referred to as type of coordination "1" and type of coordination
"2". Any short circuits that occur are cleared safely by both types
of coordination. The only differences concern the extent of the
damage caused to the device by a short circuit.
With type of coordination "1" the fuseless load feeder may be
non-operational after a short circuit has been cleared. Damage
to the contactor or to the overload release is permissible. For
3RA2 load feeders, the motor starter protector itself always
achieves type of coordination "2".
By contrast, with type of coordination "2" there must be no damage to the overload release or to any other component after a
short circuit has been cleared. The 3RA2 fuseless load feeder
can resume operation without needing to be partially renewed.
At most, welding of the contactor contacts is permissible if they
can be disconnected easily without any significant deformation.
According to EN 60947-4-1, the intended use and stress of
power contactors can be identified by specifying the utilization
category in conjunction with the rated operational current or motor rating and the rated voltage. An example of this is utilization
category AC-3 for starting and switching off squirrel-cage motors.
Voltage ramp
With SIRIUS 3RW30 and 3RW40 soft starters, soft starting is
achieved using a voltage ramp. The motor's terminal voltage is
raised during an adjustable starting time from a parameterizable
starting voltage to the mains voltage.
Wye-delta contactor assembly
A contactor assembly which during start-up switches the motor
into a star circuit (one third the starting current compared to
delta starting) and after a while changes over to the delta circuit.
Wye-delta contactor assemblies are used where a high starting
current has to be prevented in order to reduce the effects on the
mechanical components or mains.
Wye-delta starter
16
See Wye-delta contactor assembly
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/7
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Training
Faster and more applicable know-how:

Hands-on training from the manufacturer
Siemens Industry Training provides you with comprehensive
support in solving your tasks.
Training by the market leader in the industry enables you to
make independent decisions with confidence. Especially where
the optimum and efficient use of products and plants are concerned. You can eliminate deficiencies in existing plants, and
exclude expensive faulty planning right from the beginning.
Highlights Siemens Industry Training

Top trainers
Our trainers are skilled teachers with direct practical experience.
Course developers have close contact with product development, and directly pass on their knowledge to the trainers.
Practical experience
The practical experience of our trainers enables them to teach
theory effectively. But since theory can be pretty drab, we attach
great importance to practical exercises which can comprise up
to half of of the course time. You can therefore immediately implement your new knowledge in practice. We train you on stateof-the-art methodically/didactically designed training equipment. This training approach will give you all the confidence you
need.
Wide variety
With a total of about 300 local attendance courses, we train the
complete range of Siemens Industry products as well as interaction of the products in systems.
Tailor-made training
We are only a short distance away. You can find us at more than
50 locations in Germany, and in 62 countries worldwide. You
wish to have individual training instead of one of our
300 courses? Our solution: We will provide a program tailored
exactly to your personal requirements. Training can be carried
out in our Training Centers or at your company.
First-class know-how directly pays for itself: In shorter startup

times, high-quality end products, faster troubleshooting and reduced downtimes. In other words, increased profits and lower
costs.
Achieve more with Siemens Industry Training
Shorter times for startup, maintenance and servicing
Optimized production operations
Reliable configuration and startup
Minimization of plant downtimes
Flexible plant adaptation to market requirements
Compliance with quality standards in production
Increased employee satisfaction and motivation
Shorter familiarization times following changes in technology
and staff
Contact
Visit our site on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/sitrain
or let us advise you personally.
Siemens Industry Training Customer Support Germany:
Phone: +49 (911) 895-7575
Fax:
+49 (911) 895-7576
16
E-Mail: info@sitrain.com
16/8
Siemens IC 10 2014
The right mixture: Blended learning

"Blended learning" is a combination of various training media
and sequences. For example, a local attendance course in a
Training Center can be optimally supplemented by a teach-yourself program as preparation or follow-up. Additional effect:
Reduced traveling costs and periods of absence.
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Ordering notes
Things you should know about Catalog IC 10

Catalog IC 10 contains all selection and orderrelevant data.
Delivery time class (DT)
} Preferred type
A 1 or 2 working days
B 3 to 5 working days
C 6 to 15 working days
D 16 to 30 working days
X
On request
Preferred types are available immediately from

stock, i.e. are dispatched within 24 hours.
Normal quantities of the products are usually delivered within the specified time following receipt of
your order at our branch.
In exceptional cases, the actual delivery time may
differ from that specified.
The delivery times apply up to the ramp at Siemens AG (products ready

for dispatch). The transport times depend on the destination and type of
shipping. The standard transport time for Germany is 1 day.
The delivery times specified here represent the situation in October 2013.
They are continuously optimized. For more up-to-the-minute information,
please visit our site at www.siemens.com/sirius/mall.
Note:
Delivery time classes for "Products for specific requirements"
see page 15/9.
Price units (PU)

The price unit defines the number of units, sets or
meters to which the specified price applies.
Packaging sizes (PS)
The packaging size defines the number, e.g. of
units, sets or meters, for outer packaging.
For multi-unit packing and reusable packaging see page 16/13.
Only the quantity defined by the packaging size or

a multiple thereof can be ordered.
Price groups (PG)
Each product is assigned to a price group.
Dimensions
16
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/9
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Ordering notes
Symbols
In Catalog IC 10 you will find the symbols and their
explanations listed alongside.
Connections
They are used in conjunction with an orange background to mark and highlight special selection criteria
(e.g. connections, types of coordination, etc.).
Combicon connection
Insulation piercing method
Fast Connect
Flat connectors
Bus connections
Screw terminals
Distinguishing between units
ToC
ToC
Complete units
Modular system
16
Support function
16/10
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Ordering notes
Logistics
General
Packaging, packing units
With regard to delivery service, communications and environmental protection, our logistics service ensures "quality from the
moment of ordering right through to delivery". By designing our
infrastructure according to customer requirements and implementing electronic order processing, we have successfully optimized our logistics processes.
The packaging in which our equipment is dispatched provides

protection against dust and mechanical damage during transport, thus ensuring that you receive our products in a perfect
state.
To achieve this, we supply the preferred types marked

with } ex warehouse.
We regard the DIN ISO 9001 certification and consistent quality
checks as an integral part of our services.
Electronic order processing is fast, cost-efficient and error-free.
Please contact us if you want to benefit from these advantages.
With our multi-unit packaging and reusable packaging, we offer

you specific types of packaging that are both kind to the environment and tailored to your requirements:
Your advantages at a glance:
Lower order costs
Cost savings through uniform-type packaging:
low/no disposal costs
Reduced time and cost thanks to short unpacking times
"Just-in-time" delivery directly to the production line helps reduce stock: cost savings through reduction of storage area.
Cost savings through reduction of storage area
Fast assembly thanks to supply in sets
Standard Euro boxes corresponding to the Euro pallet
modular system suitable for most conveyor systems
Active contribution to environmental protection
Unless stated otherwise in the "Selection and ordering data" of
this catalog, our products are supplied individually packed.
For small parts/accessories, we offer you economical packaging units as standard packs containing more than one
item, e.g. 5, 10, 50 or 100 units. It is essential that whole number multiples of these quantities be ordered to ensure satisfactory quality of the products and problem-free order processing.
The products are delivered in a neutral carton. The label includes warning notices, the CE mark and product description
information in English and German.
In addition to the Article No. (MLFB) and the packed number of
items in the packaging the Instr. Article No. is also specified for
the operating instructions. It can be obtained from your local
Siemens representative (you will find a list of your local Siemens
contacts at www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
The device Article No. of most devices can also be acquired
through the EAN barcode to simplify ordering and storage
logistics.
The related master data are available from your local Siemens
representative.
16
We are proud of our personal consulting service, on-time

deliveries and 1-day transport within Germany.
We select our packaging for maximum environmental compatibility and reusability (e.g. crumpled paper for protection during
transport in packages up to 32 kg) and, in particular, with a view
to reducing waste.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/11
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Ordering notes
Multi-unit and reusable packagings
Reusable packaging (uniform type)
The devices listed in the table on page 16/13 can be ordered in

multi-unit or reusable packagings (further versions on request).
If ordering multi-unit or reusable packagings for the first time,
please first consult your local Siemens representative with regard to pack type, quantity, delivery time and the precise order
designation. Use of the reusable packaging is reserved solely
for customers that have signed a packaging return agreement
with their Siemens representative in advance.
Multi-unit and reusable packagings are not available as a pack
type for all products. Some products are unsuited for this pack
type and would only involve an increased risk of damage in transit.
For both pack types, the quantity of devices ordered
(per Article No.) must be divisible by the pack quantity. If this is
not the case, the electronic order processing system rounds up
to the next integer multiple of packagings.
Standard Euro box (ENK) made of durable molded plastic with foam
inserts
Standard reusable packagings contain uniform-type,

non-packed individual products (1 device type) in a reusable
standard Euro box (ENK) made of durable molded plastic with
foam inserts for protection during transport.
The standard Euro box (ENK) also serves as transport packaging. The reusable packagings (ENK) plus foam inserts are returned by the customer (free of charge) to the supply base.
Please contact your Siemens representative to clarify the delivery details or conditions for set supply or delivery in reusable
packaging (ENK) (to find Siemens representatives, see
www.siemens.com/automation/partner). Suitable arrangements
will then be agreed with you.
Set deliveries (reusable, different devices)
On request, we also deliver order-related packs of larger quantities of devices in a standard Euro box (ENK).
Products in a quantity sufficient to fill a multi-unit packaging:

1/2 (W96) and 1/4 (W97) ENK
16
As standard, multi-unit packs contain uniform-type, unpacked

single devices (1 device type) in an appropriately sized carton
made of recyclable cardboard. The products of the SIRIUS
range can be ordered in units of 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 and 1/8 standard
Euro boxes (ENK).
16/12
Siemens IC 10 2014
Please contact your Siemens representative to clarify the

delivery details or conditions for set supply or delivery in
reusable packagings. Suitable arrangements will then be
agreed with you.
Packaging dimensions
Packing material
Length
Height
Width
mm
mm
mm
ENK
598
220
396
W95
W96
W97
W98
576
380
290
290
192
187
187
98
380
290
190
190
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Ordering notes
Multi-unit and reusable packaging, quantity in units, supplied in indivisible pack quantities
Size
Reusable
Multi-unit
X95 (1/1 ENK) W95 (1/1 ENK) W96 (1/2 ENK) W97 (1/4 ENK)
W98 (1/8 ENK)
Contactors
3RT201.1A..1/2
3RT201.1B..1/2
3RT201.2 A/B...
S00
S00
S00
144
72
120
----
72
72
60
40
40
32
----
3RT202.1 A/B ..0

3RT202.2 A/B ..0
S0
S0
48
40
---
24
18
12
8
---
3RT103..A..0/4
3RT103..B..0
3RT103..B..4
S2
S2
S2
30
24
24
30
24
24
15
15
15
----
----
---
351
321
---
240
196
120
100
60
50
Contactor relays
3RH21 ..1A ..0
3RH21 ..1B ..0
3RH21 ..2A/B ..0
S00
S00
S00
144
72
120
----
72
72
60
40
40
32
----

3RV2011...1 /0/5
3RV2011...2 /0/5
S00
S00
43
34
---
24
16
12
8
---
3RV2021...1 /0/5
3RV2021...2 /0/5
S0
S0
43
34
---
24
16
12
8
---
3RV1031... 0/5
S2
24/24
24/--
12/12
Thermally delayed overload relays

3RU2116..B0
3RU2116..C0
S00
S00
64
56
---
32
24
16
12
---
3RU2126..B0
3RU2126..C0
S0
S0
56
48
---
32
24
16
12
---
3RU1136..B0
S2
36
36
18
-------
-137
192
137
137
192
137
137
-----
--96
----
27
27
48
--48
16
16
24
16
---

3RH29111F./GA/HA ..
3RH2911-2 ... .
Solid-state timing relays

3RP1505...20
3RP1505...30
3RP151/2..A.30
3RP152..B.30
3RP154..B.31
3RP1574 .N.30
Devices
3SB pushbuttons and indicator lights

Complete units and actuators
(except EMERGENCY-STOP, mushroom pushbuttons
and key-operated switches)
Complete units and actuators (EMERGENCY-STOP,
mushroom pushbuttons and key-operated switches)
Contact blocks
Holder
Supports, blanking plugs
5/--
2/--
Reusable
Multi-unit
X95
X90
W95
W96
--
50
--
--
--
20
--
--
----
150
100
50
----
----
When ordering products in multi-unit packagings, the Article No.

of the product concerned must be supplemented with "Z" and,
in addition, the order code X90, or for products from the SIRIUS
range, the order code W9..
Example:
3RT20241AB00Z W96
+ quantity: 24
Ordering special versions

For ordering products that differ from the versions listed in the catalog, the article number specified in the catalog must be supplemented with "Z"; the required features must be specified by
means of the alphanumeric order codes or in plain text.
For products packed in reusable packaging, the Article No.

must be supplemented with "Z" and the order code X95.
Example:
3RT20241AB00Z X95
+ quantity: 48
Small orders
When small orders are placed, the costs associated with order
processing are greater than the order value. We recommend
therefore that you combine several small orders. Where this is
not possible, we unfortunately have to charge a processing
supplement of 20.00 to cover our costs for order processing
and invoicing for all orders with a net goods value of less than
250.00.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/13
16
Devices
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Overview
Industrial controls
We regard product support as just as important as the products
and systems themselves.
Visit our site on the Internet for a comprehensive range of
material on SIRIUS Industrial Controls, such as
Overview of the entire product portfolio
Always up to date with newsletters, podcasts, blogs and
twitter
Access to interesting videos on the YouTube channel
Access to contact persons in more than 190 countries
Operating instructions and manuals for direct download
and much, much more all conveniently and easily accessible
at:
Information and download center

You will find information material such as catalogs, customer
magazines, brochures and trial versions of software for Industrial
Controls on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/sirius/infocenter
You can order the available documents or download them in
popular file formats (PDF, ZIP) from this site.
16
Catalogs are now also available as e-books.
16/14
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Manual package SIRIUS Innovations Modular System
This manual package contains all important SIRIUS Innovations
manuals.
You can download the individual manuals from the Internet.

Please switch over to the website in the language you require.
Products
Manual / title
Article number
Download from
SIRIUS Innovations
System Overview
System manual
"SIRIUS Innovations
System Overview".
3ZX1012-0RA01-5AB1
3ZX1012-0RT20-5AB1
3ZX1012-0RF34-5AB1
Contactors and
Manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RT2
3RT2, 3RH2 and 3RA23/24 Contactors/Contactor Assemblies".
Solid-state switching
devices
3RF34
Manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RF34
Solid-State Switching Devices".
Soft starters
3RW
Manual
3ZX1012-0RW30-1AB1
"SIRIUS 3RW30/3RW40 Soft Starters".
Manual
"SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters".
3ZX1012-0RW44-1AB1
Motor starter protectors/

circuit breakers
3RV2
Manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RV2
Motor Starter Protectors".
3ZX1012-0RV20-5AB1
Overload relays
3RU2, 3RB30/31
Manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS
3RU2/3RB3 Overload Relays".
3ZX1012-0RU20-5AB1
Solid-state
overload relays
3RB24
Manual
"3RB24 Solid-State Overload Relays
for IO-Link".
3ZX1012-0RB24-0AB0
Monitoring relays
3UG4/3RR2
Manual
"3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relays".
3ZX1012-0UG40-0AB0
Monitoring relays
3UG48/3RR24
Manual
"3UG48/3RR24 Monitoring Relays
for IO-Link".
3ZX1012-0UG48-0AB1
relays
3RS1/3RS2
Manual
"3RS1/3RS2 Temperature
Monitoring Relays".
3ZX1012-0RS10-1AB1
relays
3RS14/3RS15
Manual
"3RS14/3RS15 Temperature
Monitoring Relays for IO-Link".
3ZX1012-0RS14-0AB0
Load feeders
3RA21/22
Manual
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS
3RA21/22 Load Feeders".
3ZX1012-0RA21-5AB1
Compact feeders
3RA6
System manual
"SIRIUS 3RA6 Compact Feeders".
3RA6991-0A
3ZX1012-0RA28-5AB1
Function modules
Manual
3RA28
"SIRIUS Innovations SIRIUS 3RA28
for mounting on contactors Function Modules for Mounting on
3RT2 Contactors".
Manual
"SIRIUS Function Modules for
AS-Interface".
3ZX1012-0RA27-0AB0
Manual
"SIRIUS Function Modules
for IO-Link".
3ZX1012-0RA27-1AB1
Electronic modules
4SI SIRIUS
Manual
"Distributed I/O System ET 200S
SIRIUS 4SI Electronic Modules
(3RK1005-0LB00-0AA0)".
3ZX1012-0LB00-0AA0
Selection data for

load feeders
Configuration manual
"Configuring SIRIUS Innovations
Selection Data for Fuseless and
Fused Load Feeders".
3ZX1012-0RA21-1AB0
Configuration manual
3ZX1012-0RA21-3AB0
"Configuring SIRIUS Innovations for
UL Selection Data for Fuseless and
Fused Load Feeders".
16
Function modules
3RA27
for connection to the
higher-level control
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/15
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Approvals, test certificates, characteristic curves

An overview of the certificates available for Industrial Control
products along with more technical documentation can be
consulted daily on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals
In the following standards, the so-called B10 values for calculating the safety integrity or safety integrity level (SIL) in functional
safety at a high or continuous demand rate are required also for
electromechanical switchgear:
IEC 62061 "Safety of machines Functional safety of safetyrelated electrical, electronic and programmable electronic
control systems",
ISO 13849-1 "Safety of machines Safety-related components
of controls Part 1: General principles".
Failure rates of electromechanical components are required for
calculating the safety integrity or safety integrity level (SIL) in
functional safety:
- in the manufacturing industry at
a high demand rate
- in the process industry at
a low demand rate
Further requirements are laid down in IEC 61511-1 "Functional
safety Safety instrumented systems for the process industry
sector Part 1: Framework, definitions, system, hardware and
software requirements".
The German versions of the above standards are:
EN 62061 (VDE 0113-50), October 2005, which since
31.12.2005 has been harmonized as EN 62061 under the
Machinery Directive,
EN ISO 13849-1:2008,
EN 61511-1 (VDE 810-1).
Product support: Approvals/certificates
The TV-tested Safety Evaluation Tool assists in calculating the

safety function as verification for the machine documentation.
It is available on the Internet at
www.siemens.com/safety-evaluation-tool.
At www.siemens.com/safety-integrated you will also find examples of functions with calculations according to the current standards.
Definitions
(t) dt is the probability that a unit which has not failed by a

certain time t will fail in the following interval (t; t +dt).
Failure rates have the dimension 1/time unit, e.g. 1/h.
Failure rates for components are often specified in FIT (failures
in time unit): 1 FIT equals 10-9/h.
From the failure rate it is possible to derive a (mathematical)
distribution function of the failure probability:
F(t) = 1 - exp(-t), with as constant failure rate
The mean value of this exponential distribution is also referred
to as:
- Mean Time To Failure (MTTF) in the case of irreparable
components; 63.2 % of components fail by the MTTF.
- Mean Operating Time Between Failures (MTBF) in the case
of reparable components.
MTTF = 1/
(MTTF is a statistical mean value but no guarantee for endurance)
Electromechanical components are often irreparable components. In general, the failure rate of monitored units changes with
age.
16
Product support: Characteristics
16/16
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
The B10 value for devices subject to wear is expressed in
number of operating cycles:
it is the number of operating cycles after which 10 % of the test
specimens fail in the course of an endurance test (or: the number of operating cycles after which 10 % of the devices have
failed).
For low demand rates (mainly in the process industry), the failure
rate and not the B10 value is used to determine the failure probability.
With the help of the B10 value and a simplified formula (see
section 6.7.8.2.1 of EN 62061), the user can then calculate the
total failure rate of an electromechanical component:
= 0.1 x C/B10
with C = operating cycles per hour. C is specified by the user.
The failure rate is made up of safe (S) and dangerous (D)
failures:
= S+ D
or
D = [share of dangerous failures in %] x
S = [share of safe failures in %] x
The failure rate of the dangerous failures D of the components
used is needed for further calculations.
Listed in the following table are the standard B10 values and the
share of dangerous failures for SIRIUS product groups at a high
demand rate.
Standard B10 values (at a high demand rate)
(electromechanical components)
Standard
B10 value1)
(operating
cycles)
B10d =
B10
Share of dangerous failures
Calculation example
A protective door is monitored by a position switch with a separate actuator.
The protective door is opened 4 times an hour.
The overall failure rate of the position switch is:
Standard B10 values at a high demand rate
SIRIUS product group
The B10d value used in EN ISO 13849-1:2008 is determined as

follows:
Share of
dangerous
failures
= 0.1 C/B10 [failures/h]

= 0.1 4/1000000 = 4 10-7 [failures/h]
The dangerous failure rate is calculated with:
D = 20 % of = 0.2 4 10-7 [failures/h]
D = 8 10-8 [failures/h]
Standard failure rates (at a low demand rate)
On the basis of the failure rates, it is possible to calculate the
average probability of failure on demand (PFDavg) of a
PLT protective device.
A so-called low demand rate is assumed, meaning the rate of
demand on the safety-related system amounts to no more than
once a year and is not greater than double the frequency of the
repeat test.
A repeat test once a year is recommended for electromechanical components in order to reveal passive faults.
For special applications it is possible, in agreement with the inspecting institution (e.g. a technical inspectorate, government
agency or the like) to extend the test intervals by using suitable
solutions (e.g. a multi-channel version etc.).
Listed in the following table are the standard failure rates and the
share of dangerous failures for SIRIUS product groups at a low
demand rate.
Standard failure rates at a low demand rate

(with positive-opening contacts)
Standard
failure rates
(in FIT)1)
Share of
dangerous
failures2)

100
20 %
Cable-operated switches for

EMERGENCY-STOP function
100
20 %
20 %
Standard position switches/basic switches

100
20 %
1 000 000
20 %
Position switches with separate actuator

100
20 %
Hinge switches
1 000 000
20 %
Position switches with tumbler

100
20 %
Pushbuttons (non-latching),
with positive-opening contacts)
10 000 000
20 %
Hinge switches
100
20 %
Pushbuttons (non-latching)
100
20 %
Contactors/motor starters
(with positively-driven contacts or
mirror contacts)
100
< 40 %
SIRIUS product group

30 000
20 %
- rotated to unlatch (also with lock)
100 000
20 %
Cable-operated switches for

EMERGENCY-STOP function
100 000
50 %
10 000 000
20 %
Position switches with separate actuator

1 000 000
Position switches with tumbler

Standard position switches/basic switches

Contactors/motor starters for switching

motors:
- 3RT/3TF6/3TB
1 000 0002)
73 %
- 3TC
1 000 0002)
73 %
1 000 000
73 %
Contactor relays and auxiliary switches

(with positively driven contacts, and
at I < 0.3 Ie)
1)
Only applies under the conditions specified in the technical specifications.
2)
Calculation of the B10 values was based on 66 % of the rated current

value Ie.
(electromechanical components)
1)
The failure rates specified in the table were limited to 100 FIT.
2)
Valid only under the previously mentioned conditions.
16
- pulled to unlatch
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/17
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Standards
IEC
EN
DIN VDE
Title
60947-1
60947-2
60947-3
60947-1
60947-2
60947-3
----
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear: General rules

Circuit-breakers
Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
60947-4-1
60947-4-2
60947-4-3
60947-4-1
60947-4-2
60947-4-3
----
Contactors and motor starters - Electromechanical contactors and motor starters

Contactors and motor-starters - AC semiconductor motor controllers and starter
Contactors and motor-starters - AC semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads
60947-5-1
60947-5-2
60947-5-3
60947-5-1
60947-5-2
60947-5-3
----
60947-5-5
60947-5-5
--
60947-5-6
60947-5-6
--
60947-5-7
60947-5-8
60947-5-9
60947-5-7
60947-5-8
60947-5-9
----
Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
Control circuitdevices and switching elements - Proximity switches
Control circuit devices and switching elements - Requirements for proximity devices with defined
behaviour under fault conditions (PDDB)
Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function
Control circuit devices and switching elements - DC interface for proximity sensors and switching
amplifiers (NAMUR)
Control circuit devices and switching elements - Requirements for proximity devices with analogue output
Control circuit devices and switching elements - Three-position enabling switches
Control circuit devices and switching elements - Flow rate switches
60947-6-1
60947-6-2
60947-6-1
60947-6-2
---
Multiple function equipment - Transfer switching equipment

Multiple function equipment - Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS)
60947-7-1
60947-7-2
60947-7-3
60947-7-1
60947-7-2
60947-7-3
----
Ancillary equipment - Terminal blocks for copper conductors

Ancillary equipment - Protective conductor terminal blocks for copper conductors
Ancillary equipment - Safety requirements for fuse terminal blocks
60947-8
60947-8
--
Control units for built-in thermal protection (PTC) for rotating electrical machines
62026-2
50295
--
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Controller-device interfaces (CDIs): Actuator sensor interface
(AS-i)
60269-1
60269-4
60269-1
60269-4
0636-1
--
Low-voltage fuses: General requirements

Low-voltage fuses: Supplementary requirements for fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor devices
60050-441
--
--
International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Switchgear, controlgear and fuses
61439-1
61439-2
--
61439-1
61439-2
50274
----
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: General rules

Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
61140
61140
--
Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and equipment
60664-1
60664-1
--
Insulation coordination for electrical equipment in low-voltage systems: Principles, requirements and tests
60204-1
--
60204-1
50178
---
Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines: General requirements
60079-14
60079-14
--
60079-2
60079-2
--
61810-1
61812-1
60999-1
61810-1
61812-1
60999-1
----
Electromechanical elementary relays: General requirements

Time relays for industrial and residential use: Requirements and tests
Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for screw-type and screwlesstype clamping units: General requirements and particular requirements for clamping units for conductors
from 0,2 mm2 up to 35 mm2 (included)
61558-1
61558-1
0570-11)
Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products

General requirements and tests
61558-2-1
61558-2-1
0570-2-11)
61558-2-2
61558-2-2
0570-2-21)
61558-2-4
61558-2-4
0570-2-41)
61558-2-6
61558-2-6
0570-2-61)
61558-2-9
61558-2-9
0570-2-91)
61558-2-12
61558-2-12
0570-2-121)
61558-2-13
61558-2-13
0570-2-131)
61558-2-15
61558-2-20
61558-2-15
61558-2-20
0570-2-151)
0570-2-201)
Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies incorporating
separating transformers for general applications
Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies incorporating control transformers
Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating
transformers
Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating
safety isolating transformers
Particular requirements and tests for transformers and power supply units for class III handlamps for
tungsten filament lamps
Particular requirements and tests for constant voltage transformers and power supply units for constant
voltage
Particular requirements and tests for auto transformers and power supply units incorporating auto transformers
Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers for the supply of medical locations
Particular requirements and tests for small reactors
62041
62041
0570-101)
Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and combinations thereof - EMC requirements
60076-11
60076-11
--
Power transformers: Dry-type Transformers
61000-4-1
61000-4-1
--
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): Testing and measuring techniques - Overview of IEC 61000-4 series
61000-6-2
61000-6-3
61000-6-2
61000-6-3
0839-6-2
--
61000-6-4
61000-6-4
--
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic standards - Immunity for industrial environments

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): Generic standards - Emission standard for residential, commercial
and light-industrial environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): Generic standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
60044-1
60044-1
--
Instrument transformers: Current transformers
VDE classification.
16
1)
16/18
Siemens IC 10 2014
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Protection against electric shock - Protection
against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts
Electronic equipment for use in power installations

Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres: Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres: Pressurized Enclosures p
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
UL
CSA C22.2
ASME
JIS
Title
506
508
60947-1
60947-4-1A
-----
-----
-----
489
1012
---
---
---
Specialty transformers
Industrial control equipment
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactor and motor starters Electromechanical contactors and motor starters
Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches, and circuit breaker enclosures
Power units other than CLASS 2
1561
5085
60601-1
----
----
----
1604
--
--
--
1059
-486A-486B --
---
---
Dry-type general purpose and power transformers

Low-voltage transformers
Medical electrical equipment, Part 1: General requirements for safety (IEC 60601, EN 60601,
VDE 0750-1)
Electrical equipment for use in CLASS I and II, Division 2 and CLASS III hazardous (Classified) locations
Terminal blocks
Wire connectors
486E
--
--
--
Equipment wiring terminals for use with aluminum and/or copper conductors
50
50E
---
---
---
Enclosures for electrical equipment. Non-environmental considerations

Enclosures for electrical equipment - Environmental considerations
---
No. 66
No. 14
No. 60947-1
No. 60947-4-1A
-----
-----
---
No. 5
No. 107-1
---
---
Specialty transformers
Industrial control equipment
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactor and motor starters
Electromechanical contactors and motor starters
Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures
General use power supplies
--
--
A17.5 / B 44.1 --
--
--
--
Elevator and escalator electrical equipment
C 8201-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear; Contactors and motor-starters
Approval requirements valid in different countries

Siemens low-voltage switchgear and controlgear are designed,
manufactured and tested according to the relevant German
standards (DIN and VDE), IEC publications and European standards (EN) as well as CSA and UL standards. The standards assigned to the single devices are stated in the relevant parts of
this catalog.
As far as is economically viable, the requirements of the various
standards valid in other countries are also taken into account in
the design of the equipment.
In some countries (see table below), an approval is required for
certain low-voltage switchgear and controlgear components.
Depending on the market requirements, these components have
been submitted for approval to the authorized testing institutes.
In some cases, CSA for Canada and UL for the USA only
approve special switchgear versions. Such special versions are
listed separately from the standard versions in the individual
parts of this catalog.
For this equipment, partial limitations of the maximum permissible voltages, currents and ratings can be imposed, or special
approval and, in some cases, special identification is required.
For use on board ship, the specifications of the marine classification societies must be observed (see table below). In some
cases, they require type tests of the components to be approved.
Testing bodies, approval identification and approval requirements

Country
Canada 1)
USA 1)
China
Government-appointed or private, officially

recognized testing bodies
CSA UL
(USA)
UL
CQC
Mark of conformity
c u cU
c UUS
c UUS
c uUS
c uUS
Approval requirement
Remarks
UL and CSA are authorized to grant approval certificates in accordance with Canadian and North American regulations. Please note:
These approvals are not recognized in many cases and must be covered by additional approvals issued by the national testing agency.
1)
More information about UL and CSA see page 16/22.
+
CCC
For guide numbers and file numbers for approvals, please visit
www.siemens.com/automation/support and select "Product Support".
Marine classification societies

Country
Germany
United
Kingdom
France
Norway
CIS
Italy
Poland
USA
Name
Germanischer
Lloyd
Lloyds
Register of
Shipping
Bureau
Veritas
Det Norske
Veritas
Russian
Maritime
Register of
Shipping
Registro
Italiano
Navale
Polski
Rejestre
Statkw
American
Bureau of
Shipping
Codes
GL1)
LRS
BV
DNV1)
RMRS
RINA
PRS
ABS
DNV and GL have merged and call themselves the DNV/GL Group.
16
1)
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/19
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
CE marking
Manufacturers of products which fall within the subject area to
which EC directives apply must identify their products, operating
instructions or packaging with a CE mark of conformity.
By attaching the CE marking, the manufacturer confirms that the
product conforms to the relevant basic requirements of all directives applicable to the product. The mark of conformity is a mandatory requirement for putting products into circulation throughout the EC.
All the products in this catalog are in conformance with the

EC directives and bear the CE mark of conformity.
Low-voltage directive
EMC directive
Machinery directive
Ex protection directive
The CE marking: >.
ALPHA/LOVAG
Siemens AG sits in the ALPHA committee of "ALPHA im VDE".
List of LOVAG members
The responsibility of manufacturers and the high quality of products are promoted by "ALPHA im VDE" by means of supportive
procedural guidelines for testing equipment according to the
currently valid standards.
SGS BELGIUM NV
Division SGS CEBEC
ALPHA in VDE
ASEFA
ACAE
IMQ S.p.A
Intertek Semko AB
APPLUSS + CTC
Providing specific conditions are fulfilled, "ALPHA im VDE" can

also issue officially recognized product certificates if required.
As a member of LOVAG, "ALPHA im VDE" is also working towards obtaining international recognition for declarations of conformity and certificates.
LOVAG (Low-Voltage Agreement Group) is a body comprising
international specialists from certification bodies and industry
who are working together to create a standardized European
certificate.
Accident prevention
16
Test certificates and approvals from IFA (institute for occupational safety and health of the German social accident insurance), SUVA (Swiss institute for accident prevention), BG ETEM
(German trade association for energy, textiles, electrical goods
and media products) and VDE are available for some devices in
safety control systems. For details, see the respective product
descriptions.
16/20
Siemens IC 10 2014
Belgium
Germany
France
Italy
Sweden
Spain
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Ex protection certificates for SIRIUS controls

Motor protection devices that protect a motor installed in a potentially explosive atmosphere against overloading must comply
with certain special requirements. These requirements are laid
down in the following standards:
EN 60079-0
EN 60079-1
EN 60079-7
EN 60079-14
EN 60079-17
EN 60947-1
EN 60947-4-1
EN 60947-5-1
EN 60947-8
Certification
July 1, 2003 saw the dawning of a new era in the field of explosion protection. Since this date, only those devices and protection systems that have been certified for operation in potentially
explosive atmospheres according to directive 94/9/EC can be
brought into circulation within the European Union.
Selection box
Only those motor protection devices that have been constructed

according to the above-mentioned standards and which have a
declaration of conformity from the manufacturer based on a prototype test certificate may be brought into circulation within the
member states of the EC.
The quality management system of the manufacturer is also subjected to certain requirements and a "QM certificate" must be obtained for the manufacturer from a recognized authority.
Certification of the QM system
A certificate of approval for quality assurance production has
been issued by DEKRA EXAM GmbH1) with the number
BVS 11 ATEX ZQS/E111 of DEKRA EXAM GmbH1) according to
Directive 94/9/EC.
This certificate is valid for equipment groups I and II and
categories M2 and 2: Safety and control devices for electrical
equipment.
Description of certificate with view and download option
Certificates
Identifying markings
For the 3RV, 3RU, 3RB, 3UF, 3RN and 3RW motor protection
devices, the corresponding declarations of conformity and
prototype test certificates for Category M2, 2G, and in some
cases 2D, are available and can be supplied on request.
All equipment must be marked in according to the ATEX guideline. The ATEX identification code contains the equipment group,
the approved environment, the number of the certification
authority and other technical data that was determined from the
type test.
Declarations of conformity and prototype test certificates are

available at www.siemens.com/sirius/support for viewing and
downloading.
1)
DEKRA EXAM GmbH

The certification authority of the "DEKRA EXAM GmbH" numbered as
authority number 0158 according to Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EC of the
European Parliament and Council dated March 23, 1994, certifies that
Siemens Amberg and Cham maintains a quality system for production that
satisfies Appendix IV of this Directive.
Certificate of the AS-International Association for AS-Interface products
16
AS-Interface products are tested and certified by the

AS-International Association. The products have been tested in
an accredited test laboratory according to testing guidelines.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/21
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Special standards for the USA and Canada

In the USA and Canada, for machine tools and processing machines in particular, supply lines are laid using rubber insulated
cable enclosed in heavy-duty steel piping similar to that used for
gas or water pipe systems.
The tubing system must be completely watertight and electrically conductive (especially sleeving and elbows). Since the
tubing system can also be grounded, the cable entries of enclosed units equipped with heavy-gauge or metric threads must
be fitted with metal adapters between these threads and the
tube thread. The necessary adapters are specified for the
switchgear as accessories; they should be ordered separately
unless otherwise specified.
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for auxiliary circuits

(e.g. contactor relays, commanding and signaling devices and
auxiliary switches/auxiliary contacts in general) are generally
only approved by CSA and UL for "Heavy Duty" or "Standard
Duty" and are identified either with these specifications in addition to the maximum permissible voltage or by using an abbreviation.
The abbreviations are harmonized with IEC 60947-5-1
Appendix 1 Table A.1 and correspond to the stated utilization
categories.
For various switching devices detailed in the catalog, a note has
been included to the effect that, above a certain voltage, the
auxiliary switches/auxiliary contacts can only be used if they
have the same polarity. This means that the input terminals can
only be connected to the same pole of the actuating voltage,
e.g. "600 V AC above 300 V AC same polarity".
Different features of UL approvals (for USA and Canada)

Recognized Component
Listed Product
Devices are identified on the rating plate

using the "UL recognition mark":
USA:
U, cUUS
Canada:
cU, cUUS
Devices are identified using the "UL listing mark" on the rating plate
e.g. USA: u LISTED XXX
Canada: cu LISTED XXX
IND. CONT. EQ.
IND. CONT. EQ.
(XXX stands for: UL Code Classification Number)
Devices are approved as modules for "factory wiring", i.e.:

as devices for installation in control systems, which are selected, installed,
wired and tested entirely by trained personnel in factories, workshops or
elsewhere, according to the operating conditions.
Devices are approved for "field wiring", i.e.:

As devices for installation in control systems, which are completely wired by
trained personnel in factories, workshops or elsewhere.
As single devices for sale in retail outlets in the USA/Canada.
If devices are u or cu approved as "listed products", they are also approved

as U or cU "recognized components".
More information about UL and CSA see page 16/19.
Special standards for Russia, Australia and China

C-Tick licensing for Australia
EAC approval for Russia
New C-Tick mark

EAC mark
GOST mark
Since 15.02.2013 Russia, Kazakhstan and Belarus have been

united in the EAC customs union. An EAC approval as replacement for the GOST mark is required for all products that are to be
sold in Russia.
All devices delivered to any part of the Russian Federation must
have this customs certification.
The provisional transition period in which the GOST mark will
remain valid ends on 15.03.2015.
Old C-Tick mark
The C-Tick license is required for marketing Siemens components in Australia. Electronic devices must provide proof of EMC
clearance in Australia, similar to the CE mark of conformity laid
down by the EMC directive applicable in the EC and bear the
"C-Tick" mark. These requirements have been in force since
October 1st, 1999.
A new C-Tick mark has been introduced on 01.03.2013. The
transition period in which the old C-Tick mark will remain valid is
three years.
CCC approval
16
Since August 1, 2003, CCC approval is required for many

products that are marketed in China.
16/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Quality management
Quality management
The quality management system of our "Control Components
and Systems Engineering" Business Unit of the "Industry
Automation" Division complies with the international standard
EN ISO 9001.
Certificates
For information about available certifications of the quality management system for Industrial Controls products, please visit
website address:
www.siemens.com/system-certificates/ce
16
The products and systems described in this catalog are developed, manufactured and sold under application of a certified
quality management system according to ISO 9001. The certificates are recognized in all IQ Net countries.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/23
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Siemens Contacts
Partners at Industry Automation and Drive Technologies

At Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies, more
than 85 000 people are resolutely pursuing the same goal: longterm improvement of your competitive ability. We are committed
to this goal. Thanks to our commitment, we continue to set new
standards in automation and drive technology. In all industries
worldwide.
At your service locally, around the globe for consulting, sales,
training, service, support, spare parts ... on the entire Industry
Automation and Drive Technologies range.
Your personal contact can be found in our Contacts Database at:
www.siemens.com/automation/partner
16
You start by selecting a

Product group,
Country,
City,
Service.
16/24
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Siemens Solution Partner Automation
Overview
Siemens Solution Partner Automation
Solution Partner Finder
Solution Partner: Highest quality - guaranteed

The products and systems from Siemens Industry Automation
and Drive Technologies offer the ideal platform for all automation
applications.
Under the name of Siemens Solution Partner Automation,
selected system integrators around the world act as uniformly
qualified solution providers for the Siemens range of products
and services in the fields of automation and drives. Day after
day, they utilize their qualified product and system know-how as
well as their excellent industry expertise to your advantage for
all requirements.
The Siemens Solution Partner Program helps you to find the
optimum partner for your specific requirements.
Support is provided by the Solution Partner Finder, a comprehensive online platform that showcases the profiles of all our
solution partners. You can convince yourself of the competence
of the respective Solution Partner by means of the references
provided. Various search criteria are available for this purpose.
Once you have located a partner, you are only one small step
away from contacting them.
Find the right partner here for your specific task and convince
yourself of the solution competence provided:
Additional information on the Siemens Solution Partner Program
is available online at:
www.siemens.com/automation/solutionpartner
16
The partner emblem is the guarantee and indicator of proven

quality. The basis for this are defined quality features that identify
Solution Partners as reliable and competent solution providers:
Solution quality
Always a good result with tried and tested solutions expertise.
Expert quality
Certified technical competence ensures maximum efficiency.
Project quality
With proven project experience straight to the target.
Portfolio quality
Comprehensive portfolio for state-of-the-art solutions from a
single source.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/25
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
External partners
Our partner companies Your partners

AXELENT GmbH
Sigmaringer Strae 112
D-70567 Stuttgart
Tel.: +49 (711) 252 509-0
Fax.: +49 (711) 252 509-49
E-Mail: sales@axelent.de
Lumberg GmbH & Co.

Im Gewerbepark 2
D-58579 Schalksmhle
Tel.: +49 (2355) 83-01
Fax: +49 (2355) 83-263
E-Mail: info@lumberg.de
Franz Binder GmbH & Co.

Postfach 1152
D-74148 Neckarsulm
Katalog Steckverbinder
Tel.: +49 (7132) 325-0
Fax: +49 (7132) 325-190
E-Mail: info@binder-connector.de
mat Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik

Dr. Becker GmbH
Rudolf-Diesel-Strae 22
D-22941 Bargteheide
Tel.: +49 (4532) 2021-01
Fax: +49 (4532) 2021-21
E-Mail: info@m-a-t.de
Internet: www.m-a-t.de
Hans Georg Brhl GmbH

Waldstrae 63 b
D-57250 Netphen
Tel.: +49 (2737) 5934-45
Fax: +49 (2737) 5919-46
E-Mail: info@schutzeinrichtungen.com
EPHY-Mess
Gesellschaft fr Elektro-Physikalische Messgerte mbH
Berta-Cramer-Ring 1
D-65205 Wiesbaden-Delkenheim
Tel.: +49 (6122) 9228-0
Fax: +49 (6122) 9228-99
E-Mail: info@ephy-mess.de
Internet: www.ephy-mess.de
FESTO AG & Co
Ruiterstr. 82
D-73734 Esslingen
Tel.: +49 (711) 347-0
Fax: +49 (711) 347-2144
E-Mail: info@festo.de
GMC-I Messtechnik GmbH
Thomas-Mann-Str. 16-20
D-90471 Nrnberg
Tel.: +49 (911) 8602-111
Fax: +49 (911) 8602-777
E-Mail: info@gossenmetrawatt.com
16
Harting Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG

Simeonscarr 1
D-32427 Minden
Tel.: +49 (571) 8896-0
Fax: +49 (571) 8896-282
E-Mail: solution-partner@harting.com
mdexx GmbH
Richard-Dunkel-Strae 120
D-28199 Bremen
Tel.: +49 (421) 5125-0
Fax: +49 (421) 5125-333
E-Mail: Transformatoren@mdexx.com
Internet: www.mdexx.com
Murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH
Fabrikstrae 10
D-71570 Oppenweiler
Tel.: +49 (7191) 482-0
Fax: +49 (7191) 482-280
E-Mail: info@murrplastik.de
Internet: www.murrplastik.de
Murrelektronik GmbH
Falkenstrae 3
D-71570 Oppenweiler
Tel.: +49 (7191) 47-0
Fax: +49 (7191) 47-130
E-Mail: info@murrelektronik.com
Pepperl+Fuchs Vertrieb Deutschland GmbH
Lilienthalstrae 200
D-68307 Mannheim
Tel.: +49 (621) 776 111
Fax: +49 (621) 776 271 111
E-Mail: info@de.pepperl-fuchs.com
Siebert Industrieelektronik GmbH
Postfach 1180
D-66565 Eppelborn
Tel.: +49 (6806) 980-0
Fax: +49 (6806) 980-999
Internet: www.siebert.de
HEITEC AG
Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 61
D-91052 Erlangen
Tel.: +49 (9131) 877-0
Fax: +49 (9131) 877-199
E-Mail: info@heitec.com
Internet: www.heitec.de
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG

Hansastrae 27
D-32423 Minden
Tel.: +49 (571) 887-0
Fax: +49 (571) 887-169
E-Mail: info@wago.com
KnorrTec
Kapellenbergstrae 34
D-93175 Beratzhausen
Tel.: +49 (9493) 951 96 90
Fax: +49 (9493) 951 96 79
E-Mail: solution-partner@knorrtec.de
Weidmller GmbH & Co. KG

Ohmstrae 9
D-32758 Detmold
Tel.: +49 (5231) 1428-0
Fax: +49 (5231) 1428-159
E-Mail: solution-partner@weidmueller.com
KUPEK GmbH
Beschaffung und Logistik
Cortendorfer Strae 94
D-96450 Coburg
Tel: +49 (9561) 2346-0
Fax: +49 (9561) 2346-20
E-Mail: info@kupek.de
WITTWER Industrielle Elektronik

Hembacher Str. 4, Postfach 1147
D-90588 Schwarzenbruck-Lindelburg
Tel.: +49 (9183) 90 105-0
Fax: +49 (9183) 90 105-55
E-Mail: info@wittwer.com
16/26
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Online Services
Information and Ordering
in the Internet and on DVD
Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies in the WWW

A detailed knowledge of the range of products and services
available is essential when planning and configuring automation
systems. It goes without saying that this information must always
be fully up-to-date.
Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies has
therefore built up a comprehensive range of information in the
World Wide Web, which offers quick and easy access to all data
required.
Under the address
www.siemens.com/industry
you will find everything you need to know about products, systems and services.
Product Selection Using the Interactive Catalog CA 01 of Industry

Detailed information together with convenient interactive
functions:
The interactive catalog CA 01 covers more than 80 000 products
and thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies product base.
Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the
fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives.
All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to
work with and intuitive.
After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the
press of a button, by fax or by online link.
Information on the interactive catalog CA 01 can be found in the
Internet under
www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
or on DVD.
Easy Shopping with the Industry Mall

The Industry Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG
on the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of products presented in electronic catalogs in an informative and attractive way.
Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure from
selection through ordering to tracking of the order to be carried
out online via the Internet.
Numerous functions are available to support you.
For example, powerful search functions make it easy to find the
required products, which can be immediately checked for availability. Customer-specific discounts and preparation of quotes
can be carried out online as well as order tracking and tracing.
Please visit the Industry Mall on the Internet under:
16
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/27
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Online Services
Social Media, Mobile Media
Downloading Catalogs
In addition to numerous other useful documents, you can also
find the catalogs listed on the back inside cover of this catalog
in the Information and Download Center. Without having to register, you can download these catalogs in PDF format or increasingly as digital page-turning e-books.
The filter dialog box above the first catalog displayed makes it
possible to carry out targeted searches. If you enter MD 3 for
example, you will find both the MD 30.1 and MD 31.1 catalogs.
If you enter ST 70 both the ST 70 catalog and the associated
news or add-ons are displayed.
Visit us on the web at:
www.siemens.com/industry/infocenter
Social Media
Connect with Siemens through social media: visit our social networking sites for a wealth of useful information, demos on products and services, the opportunity to provide feedback, to exchange information and ideas with customers and other
Siemens employees, and much, much more. Stay in the know
and follow us on the ever-expanding global network of social
media.
Connect with Siemens Industry at our central access point:
www.siemens.com/industry/socialmedia
Or via our product pages at:
www.siemens.com/automation
or
www.siemens.com/drives
To find out more about Siemens' current social media activities
visit us at:
www.siemens.com/socialmedia
Mobile Media
Discover the world of Siemens.
We are also constantly expanding our offering of cross-platform
apps for smartphones and tablets. You will find the current Siemens apps at the app store (iOS) or at Google Play (Android).
16
The Siemens app, for example, tells you all about the history, latest developments and future plans of the company with informative pictures, fascinating reports and the most recent press
releases.
16/28
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Industry Services
Your machines and plant can do more
with Industry Services.
Whether it is production or process industry - in view of rising
cost pressure, growing energy costs, and increasingly stringent
environmental regulations, services for industry are a crucial
competitive factor in manufacturing as well as in process industries.
All over the world Siemens supports its customers with product,
system, and application-related services throughout the entire
life cycle of a plant. Right from the earliest stages of planning,
engineering, and building, all the way to operation and modernization. These services enable customers to benefit from the
Siemens experts unique technological and product knowledge
and industry expertise.
Thus downtimes are reduced and the utilization of resources is
optimized. The bottom line: increased plant productivity, flexibility, and efficiency, plus reduced overall costs.
Discover all advantages of our service portfolio:
www.siemens.com/industry-services
{GjGMGG
lGz
lGMG G
lGz
{GjGMGG
lGz
lGMG
lGz
tGM G
vGz
Modernization
Modernization
Planning
Planning
Online Support
Technical Support
Spare Parts
Repair Services
Field Services
Training
Operation
Operation
{GjGMGG
lGz
Engineer
Engineer
&
& Build
Build
lGMG
lGz
wGtGMGG
jGt
zG
lGMGlG
tGMGvGz
G_DA65_EN_00270
16
Siemens supports its clients with technology based Services across a plants entire life cycle.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/29
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Industry Services
Industry Services
for the entire life cycle
Online Support
Online support is a comprehensive information system for all
questions relating to products, systems, and solutions that
Siemens has developed for industry over time. With more than
300,000 documents, examples and tools, it offers users of automation and drive technology a way to quickly find up-to-date information. The 24-hour service enables direct, central access to
detailed product information as well as numerous solution examples for programming, configuration and application.
The content, in six languages, is increasingly multimediabased
and now also available as a mobile app. Online supports
Technical Forum offers users the opportunity to share information with each other. The Support Request option can be used
to contact Siemens technical support experts. The latest content, software updates, and news via newsletters and Twitter ensure that industry users are always up to date.
www.siemens.com/industry/onlinesupport
Online Support App
Using the Online Support app, you can access over 300,000
documents covering all Siemens industrial products - anywhere,
any time. Regardless of whether you need help implementing
your project, fault-finding, expanding your system or are planning a new machine.
The search function retrieves product information and articles

and supports you with a personalized suggestion list. You can
find your favorite pages articles you need frequently under
mySupport. You also receive selected news on new functions,
important articles or events in the News section.
You have access to FAQs, manuals, certificates, characteristics

curves, application examples, product notices (e.g. announcements of new products) and information on successor products
in the event that a product is discontinued.
Just scan the product code printed on the product directly using
the camera of your mobile device to immediately see all technical information available on this product at a glance. The graphical CAx information (3D model, circuit diagrams or EPLAN macros) is also displayed. You can forward this information to your
workplace using the e-mail function.
Scan the QR code

for information on
our Online Support
app.
The app is available free of charge from the Apple App Store
(iOS) or from Google Play (Android).
www.siemens.com/industry/onlinesupportapp
Technical Support
16
The ability to quickly analyze system and error messages and

take appropriate action are key factors in ensuring that plants
run safely and efficiently. Questions can arise at any time and in
any industry, whether its an individual product or a complete automation solution. Siemens technical support offers individual
technical assistance in matters related to functionality, how to
operate, applications, and fault clearance in industrial products
and systems at any time and globally, over the phone, by email, or via remote access. Experienced experts from Siemens
answer incoming questions promptly. Depending on the requirements, they first consult specialists in the areas of development,
on-site services, and sales. Technical support is also available
for discontinued products that are no longer available. Using the
support request number, any inquiry can be clearly identified
and systematically tracked.
16/30
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Industry Services
Industry Services
Spare Parts
Drive and automation systems must be available at all times.
Even a single missing spare part can bring the entire plant to a
standstill and result in substantial financial losses for the operator. The spare parts services from Siemens protects against
such losses with the aid of quickly available, original spare
parts that ensure smooth interaction with all other system components. Spare parts are kept on hand for up to ten years; defective parts can be returned. For many products and solutions,
individual spare parts packages ensure a preventive stock of
spare parts on-site. The spare parts services is available around
the world and around the clock. Optimum supply chain logistics
ensure that replacement components reach their destination as
quickly as possible. Siemens logistics experts take care of planning and management as well as procurement, transportation,
customs handling, warehousing, and complete order management for spare parts.
Repair Services
Reliable electrical and electronic equipment is crucial for operating continuous processes. That is why it is essential that motors and converters always undergo highly specialized repair
and maintenance. Siemens offers complete customer and repair
services on site and in repair centers as well as technical
emergency services worldwide. The repair services include all
measures necessary to quickly restore the functionality of defective units. In addition, services such as spare parts logistics,
spare parts storage and rapid manufacturing are available to
plant operators in all verticals. With a global network of certified
repair shops operated by Siemens as well as third parties, Siemens handles the maintenance and overhaul of motors, converters, and other devices as an authorized service partner.
Field Services
16
Its a top priority in all industries: the availability of plants and

equipment. Siemens offers specialized maintenance services
such as inspection and upkeep as well as rapid fault clearance
in industrial plants worldwide, continuously, and even with
emergency services as needed. The services include startup as
well as maintenance and fault clearance during operation. The
startup service includes checking the installation, function tests,
parameterization, integration tests for machines and plants, trial
operation, final acceptance, and employee training. All services,
including remote maintenance of drives, are also available as elements of customized service contracts.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/31
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Industry Services
Industry Services
Training
Increasingly, up-to-date knowledge is becoming a determining
factor in success. One of the key resources of any company is
well-trained staff that can make the right decision at the right moment and take full advantage of the potential. With SITRAIN
Training for Industry, Siemens offers comprehensive advanced
training programs. The technical training courses convey expertise and practical knowledge directly from the manufacturer.
SITRAIN covers Siemens entire product and system portfolio in
the field of automation and drives. Together with the customer,
Siemens determines the companys individual training needs
and then develops an advanced training program tailored to the
desired requirements. Additional services guarantee that the
knowledge of all Siemens partners and their employees is always up-to-date.
Technical Consulting & Engineering Support

The efficiency of plants and processes leads to sustainable economic success. Individual services from Siemens help save substantial time and money while also guaranteeing maximum
safety. Technical consulting covers the selection of products and
systems for efficient industrial plants. The services include planning, consulting, and conceptual design as well as product
training, application support, and configuration verification in
all phases of a plants lifecycle and in all questions related to
product safety. Engineering support offers competent assistance throughout the entire project, from developing a precise
structure for startup to product-specific preparation for implementation as well as support services in areas such as prototype
development, testing and acceptance.
Energy & Environmental Services
16
Efficient energy use and resource conservation these top sustainability concerns pay off both for the environment and for
companies. Siemens offers integrated solutions that unlock all
technical and organizational potential for successful environmental management. Customized consulting services are aimed
at sustainably lowering the cost of energy and environmental
protection and thus increasing plant efficiency and availability.
The experts provide support in the conceptual design and implementation of systematic solutions in energy and environmental management, enabling maximum energy efficiency and optimized water consumption throughout the entire company.
Improved data transparency makes it possible to identify savings potential, reduce emissions, optimize production processes, and thereby noticeably cut costs.
16/32
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Industry Services
Industry Services
Modernization & Optimization Services
High machine availability, expanded functionality and selective
energy savings in all industries, these are decisive factors for
increasing productivity and lowering costs. Whether a company
wants to modernize individual machines, optimize drive systems, or upgrade entire plants, Siemens experts support the
projects from planning to commissioning.
Expert consulting and project management with solution responsibility lead to security and make it possible to specifically identify savings potential in production. This secures investments
over the long term and increases economic efficiency in operation.
Plant Maintenance & Condition Monitoring

Modern industrial plants are complex and highly automated.
They must operate efficiently in order to ensure the companys
competitive strength. In addition, the steadily increasing networking of machines and plants require consistent security concepts. Maintenance and status monitoring as well as the implementation of integrated security concepts by Siemens experts
support optimum plant use and avoid downtime. The services include maintenance management as well as consulting on maintenance concepts, including the complete handling and execution of the necessary measures. Complete solutions also cover
remote services, including analysis, remote diagnosis, and remote monitoring. These are based on the Siemens Remote Services platform with certified IT security.
Service Contracts
16
Making maintenance costs calculable, reducing interfaces,

speeding up response times, and unburdening the companys
resources the reduced downtimes that these measures
achieve increase the productivity of a plant. Service contracts
from Siemens make maintenance and repairs more cost-effective and efficient. The service packages include local and remote maintenance for a system or product group in automation
and drive technology. Whether you need extended service periods, defined response times, or special maintenance intervals,
the services are compiled individually and according to need.
They can be adjusted flexibly at any time and used independently of each other. The expertise of Siemens specialists and
the capabilities of remote maintenance thus ensure reliable and
fast maintenance processes throughout a plants entire lifecycle.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/33
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Software Licenses
Overview
Software types
Software requiring a license is categorized into types.
The following software types have been defined:
Runtime software
This includes all software products for creating (engineering)
user software, e.g. for configuring, programming, parameterizing, testing, commissioning or servicing.
Data generated with engineering software and executable
programs can be duplicated for your own use or for use by thirdparties free-of-charge.
Runtime software
This includes all software products required for plant/machine
operation, e.g. operating system, basic system, system expansions, drivers, etc.
The duplication of the runtime software and executable programs created with the runtime software for your own use or for
use by third-parties is subject to a charge.
You can find information about license fees according to use in
the ordering data (e.g. in the catalog). Examples of categories of
use include per CPU, per installation, per channel, per instance,
per axis, per control loop, per variable, etc.
Information about extended rights of use for parameterization/configuration tools supplied as integral components of the
scope of delivery can be found in the readme file supplied with
the relevant product(s).
License types
Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies offers various types of software license:
Floating license
Single license
Rental license
Rental floating license
Trial license
Demo license
Demo floating license
Floating license
The software may be installed for internal use on any number of
devices by the licensee. Only the concurrent user is licensed.
The concurrent user is the person using the program. Use
begins when the software is started.
A license is required for each concurrent user.
Single license
Unlike the floating license, a single license permits only one
installation of the software per license.
The type of use licensed is specified in the ordering data and
in the Certificate of License (CoL). Types of use include for
example per instance, per axis, per channel, etc.
One single license is required for each type of use defined.
16
Rental license
A rental license supports the "sporadic use" of engineering
software. Once the license key has been installed, the software
can be used for a specific period of time (the operating hours do
not have to be consecutive).
One license is required for each installation of the software.
16/34
Siemens IC 10 2014
Rental floating license

The rental floating license corresponds to the rental license,
except that a license is not required for each installation of the
software. Rather, one license is required per object (for example,
user or device).
Trial license
A trial license supports "short-term use" of the software in a nonproductive context, e.g. for testing and evaluation purposes.
It can be transferred to another license.
Demo license
The demo license support the "sporadic use" of engineering software in a non-productive context, for example, use for testing
and evaluation purposes. It can be transferred to another
license. After the installation of the license key, the software can
be operated for a specific period of time, whereby usage can be
interrupted as often as required.
One license is required per installation of the software.
Demo floating license
The demo floating license corresponds to the demo license,
except that a license is not required for each installation of the
software. Rather, one license is required per object (for example,
user or device).
Certificate of license (CoL)
The CoL is the licensee's proof that the use of the software has
been licensed by Siemens. A CoL is required for every type of
use and must be kept in a safe place.
Downgrading
The licensee is permitted to use the software or an earlier version/release of the software, provided that the licensee owns
such a version/release and its use is technically feasible.
Delivery versions
Software is constantly being updated.
The following delivery versions
PowerPack
Upgrade
can be used to access updates.
Existing bug fixes are supplied with the ServicePack version.
PowerPack
PowerPacks can be used to upgrade to more powerful software.
The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL
(Certificate of License) with the PowerPack. This CoL, together
with the CoL for the original product, proves that the new software is licensed.
A separate PowerPack must be purchased for each original
license of the software to be replaced.
Upgrade
An upgrade permits the use of a new version of the software on
the condition that a license for a previous version of the product
is already held.
The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL with
the upgrade. This CoL, together with the CoL for the previous
product, proves that the new version is licensed.
A separate upgrade must be purchased for each original license
of the software to be upgraded.
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Software Licenses
Overview
License key
Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies supplies
software products with and without license keys.
The license key serves as an electronic license stamp and
is also the "switch" for activating the software (floating license,
rental license, etc.).
The complete installation of software products requiring license
keys includes the program to be licensed (the software) and the
license key (which represents the license).
Software Update Service (SUS)

As part of the SUS contract, all software updates for the respective product are made available to you free of charge for a period
of one year from the invoice date. The contract will automatically
be extended for one year if it is not canceled three months
before it expires.
The possession of the current version of the respective software
is a basic condition for entering into an SUS contract.
You can download explanations concerning license conditions from
www.siemens.com/automation/salesmaterial-as/catalog/en/
terms_of_trade_en.pdf
16
ServicePack
ServicePacks are used to debug existing products.
ServicePacks may be duplicated for use as prescribed according to the number of existing original licenses.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/35
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
16
A
Acoustic signal transformers
for acoustic signaling devices ....................13/82
Actuators ....................13/9, 13/10, 13/35 ... 43,
..................................... 13/46 ... 49, 13/55 ... 63
For safety switches ........ 12/67, 12/68, 12/75
Adapters
For position switches ............................ 12/55
For safety relays ................................... 11/30
For contactor relays ...................... 5/13, 5/31
For contactors ............................. 3/60, 3/144
Add-on modules
For AS-i
- For 3RA6 compact starters ................. 8/74
Addressing units for AS-Interface ................ 2/81
Analog I/O modules
For AS-Interface ........................... 2/57 ... 58
Analyzers
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/83
Arc chutes
For contactors ................ 3/116, 3/134, 4/24,
.............................................. 4/55, 4/64, 4/65
AS-i Power24V ..............................................2/17
AS-Interface ........................................2/14 ... 88
24 V supply modules for K45F LS .......... 2/27
Addressing units .................................... 2/81
Analyzer ................................................. 2/83
ASIsafe ......................................... 2/18 ... 26
Cable plugs ................................... 2/82, 2/85
Cable-operated switches ................... 13/106
Communication modules ....................... 2/65
Compact modules ........................ 2/49 ... 59
Connections for LOGO! ......................... 2/70
Contactors ..................................... 3/34, 3/37
Control cables ........................................ 2/88
Counter modules .................................... 2/67
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbuttons ............ 13/69, 13/99
Enclosures for pushbuttons and
indicator lights ........................... 13/98 ...100
Extension plug ........................................ 2/80
F adapter .............................................. 13/69
F90 ......................................................... 2/63
Flat module ............................................. 2/64
Ground-fault detection modules ............ 2/68
Hinge switches .......................... 12/97, 12/98
I/O modules .................................. 2/48 ... 64
K20 ......................................................... 2/48
K45 ......................................................... 2/48
K60 ......................................................... 2/48
K60R in degree of protection
IP68/IP69K .............................................. 2/51
M12 feeders ....................... 2/52, 2/56, 2/80,
.............................................. 2/82, 2/85, 2/86
Masters ......................................... 2/28 ... 32
Overvoltage protection module .............. 2/69
Position switches ........................ 12/82 ... 98
Power supply units ........................ 2/71, 2/72
Routers ......................................... 2/36 ... 47
S22.5 ...................................................... 2/61
S45 ......................................................... 2/61
Signaling columns ................. 13/112, 13/115
Slaves .............................. 2/48 ... 70, 13/100
16/36
Siemens IC 10 2014
AS-Interface compact modules ......... 2/49 ... 59

AS-Interface shaped cables ........................ 2/78
ASIsafe ............................................... 2/18 ... 26
Cable-operated switches ......................... 2/3
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons ............. 2/4
K20F ....................................................... 2/25
K45F ....................................................... 2/25
K45F LS (light sensor) ............................ 2/25
Position switches ...................................... 2/3
S22.5F ..................................................... 2/25
Safety modules ....................................... 2/25
ASIsafe CD ................................................... 2/24
Assembly kits
For contactor assemblies ........ 3/156, 3/162,
................................................... 3/171, 3/179
ATEX
Motor starter protectors ................. 7/8, 7/15,
....................................................... 7/45, 7/50
Overload relays ..... 7/89, 7/90, 7/100, 7/101,
........................... 7/110, 7/112, 7/120, 7/122,
.............................7/131, 7/133, 7/140, 7/141
SIMOCODE pro ...................................... 10/4
Thermistor motor protection ................... 10/4
(SIDOOR) .................................. 15/6, 15/7, 15/9
For elevators ........................................... 15/6
For industrial applications ...................... 15/7
Auxiliary releases
For molded case motor starter
protectors ................................................ 7/80
For motor starter protectors ......... 7/26, 7/28,
....................................................... 7/62, 7/64
For 3RA6 compact starters ..................... 8/69
For contactors .............4/24, 4/62, 4/64, 4/65
For contactors and contactor relays
......................................................3/48 ... 57,
............................... 3/103 ... 106,3/126, 5/30
- Laterally mountable ................. 3/55, 3/105
- Snap-on ............................................. 3/143
- Solid-state compatible .. 3/56, 3/106, 3/125
- Solid-state time-delay ..... 3/57, 3/99, 3/107
For contactors and contactor relays ..... 3/134
Solid-state compatible ............................ 4/62
Auxiliary switches
For molded case motor starter
protectors ................................................ 7/80
............................................. 7/59, 7/61 ... 63
Auxiliary terminals
For contactors ........................... 3/109, 3/110
B
Base plates
For contactor assemblies .......... 3/161, 3/179
BaseUnit for CM AS-i Master ........................ 2/35
Basic units
SITOP ................................................... 15/50
Battery modules, SITOP ............................. 15/52
Blanking plugs
For pushbuttons and indicator lights ... 13/84
Block libraries for SIMATIC PCS 7
AS-Interface .............................. 14/31, 14/32
SIMOCODE pro ......................... 14/28, 14/30
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters .......... 14/9 ... 12
SIRIUS motor starters ................. 14/17 ... 19
Box terminal blocks ........................ 7/129, 7/150
Box terminals
For contactors ...................................... 3/125
Buffer modules, SITOP ............................... 15/49
Bus adapter for ET 200SP ............................ 2/34
Busbar adapters
For 3RA1 load feeders ........................... 8/53
For motor starter protectors .........7/29, 7/31,
........................................................ 7/65, 7/66
Busbar systems
For motor starter protectors ........ 7/29 ... 31,
........................................................ 7/65, 7/66
Buttons for pushbuttons ................. 13/18, 13/80
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
Contact blocks
For joystick switches ............................. 13/34
For magnetically operated switches ... 12/100
For pushbuttons ....................... 13/11, 13/12,
............................... 13/65 ...68, 13/93, 13/94
For wye-delta starting ..............3/164 ... 179,
................................................... 3/181, 3/182
- Complete units ......................3/164 ... 170,
........................ 3/173 ... 178, 3/181, 3/182
- Components for customer assembly
................................... 3/171 ... 172, 3/179
Reversing contactor assemblies
- Complete units ......................3/150 ... 155,
................................... 3/158 ... 160, 3/180
- Components for customer assembly
....................... 3/156 ... 157, 3/161 ... 163
Contactor bases ........................................... 7/42
Contactor relays ................................... 5/4 ... 38
For railway applications ................ 5/35 ... 38
Latched ................................................... 5/15
With auxiliary switch block ............ 5/10, 5/11
With extended operating range ....5/35 ... 38
Contactors
Accessories ............ 3/40 ... 63, 3/96 ... 111
Capacitor contactors .............................. 4/40
For railway applications ................ 4/45 ... 55
For special applications ............... 4/12 ... 65
For switching DC voltage ............. 4/56 ... 65
For switching motors ...................3/6 ... 144,
....................................................... 4/45 ... 53
- Vacuum contactors ..................3/91 ... 124
- With auxiliary switch block ........3/28 ... 36,
....................................... 3/83 ... 86, 3/142
- With DC solenoid system ................... 3/127
For switching resistive loads .........4/12 ... 24
Spare parts ..................... 3/64, 3/112 ... 116
With extended operating range ....4/45 ... 55
Contacts
For contactors .......................... 3/116, 3/134,
.............................................. 4/24, 4/64, 4/65
Control cables
For AS-Interface ...................................... 2/88
For IO-Link ............................................ 2/102
For 3RA6 compact starters ..................... 8/69
Control devices ................................ 10/1 ... 186
Control kit (manual operation)
For 3RA6 compact starters ........... 8/68, 8/69
For contactors and contactor relays
....................................................... 3/60, 5/14
Control transformers
Single-phase ......... 15/10 ... 19, 15/21 ... 25
Three-phase ............................... 15/26 ... 31
Converters .................................................. 6/105
Coordinate switches ....................... 13/32, 13/33
Counter modules
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/67
Coupling links
For 3TF contactors ............................... 3/125
For contactors and contactor relays ..... 3/46,
................................. 3/60, 3/101, 3/109, 5/23
Coupling contactors
For switching auxiliary circuits ............... 5/32
For switching motors ................ 3/145 ... 149
Coupling relays
Narrow design .............................. 5/39 ... 50
Relay couplers ........... 5/42, 5/43, 5/51, 5/52
Relay couplers
with plug-in connection ................. 5/45, 5/46
Semiconductor couplers ............... 5/47, 5/50
With industrial housing .................. 5/51, 5/52
Plug-in relay couplers .................. 5/53 ... 62
Covers
For 3RW30 soft starters .......................... 6/16
For contactors .............. 3/110, 3/125, 3/133,
........................................................ 4/24, 4/63
For solid-state switching devices .. 6/76, 6/93
For temperature monitoring relays ..... 10/171
Covers, sealable
For 3RM1 motor starters ............... 8/84, 8/97
For insulation monitoring relays ......... 10/122
For monitoring relays ....10/75, 10/83, 10/146
For motor starter protectors ................... 7/69
For overload relays ................................. 7/98
For temperature monitoring relays ..... 10/159
For timing relays ................................... 10/67
CP 343-2 master for AS-Interface ................ 2/31
C-PLUG for AS-Interface .................... 2/38, 2/47
For overload relays ................... 7/145 ... 147
Current monitoring ...... 10/71 ... 75, 10/95 ... 97
For IO-Link ........ 10/79 ... 83, 10/133 ... 135
Current transformers
for overload protection ............................... 10/28
Customer assembly
of fuseless load feeders ................................. 8/5
16
C
Cable clips for cable adapters
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/87
Cable releases for RESET ............... 7/97, 7/109,
......................................................... 7/118, 7/129
Cable sets for ASIsafe .................................. 2/24
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/87
Cable-operated switches .....13/3, 13/102 ...106
For ASIsafe ............................................... 2/3
Capacitor contactors .................................... 4/40
Central units
For modular safety system ................... 11/39
Circuit breakers ....................................7/7 ... 72
CM 1243-2 master for AS-Interface .... 2/28, 2/29
CM 243-2 master for AS-Interface ................ 2/30
CM 4xIO-Link ................................................2/95
CM AS-i Master for ET 200SP ....................... 2/33
Coding pins
For 3RM1 motor starters ......................... 8/97
For 3SK1 safety relays ......................... 11/21
Coil connection modules
For contactors ........................................ 3/61
Coil repeat terminals ...................................3/161
Communication modules
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/65
For M200D motor starters
- For PROFIBUS ............................ 9/45, 9/51
- For PROFINET ............................ 9/45, 9/51
Compact distributors for AS-Interface .2/56, 2/86
Compact starters, 3RA6 ............. 8/3, 8/55 ... 82
For IO-Link .............................................. 2/90
Condition monitoring systems,
SIPLUS CMS ....................................... 15/8, 15/9
Connecting cables
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/52
For coupling relays ..... 5/43, 5/50, 5/59, 5/61
For overload relays .................... 7/148, 7/149
Connection cables
For SIMOCODE pro .............................. 10/19
Connection methods
Connection modules
For contactors ........................................ 3/61
Connectors, mechanical .............................3/163
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/37
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
16
D
Data decoupling modules ............................ 2/74
DC UPS modules, SITOP ..................15/50 ... 52
Delay blocks, pneumatic
For contactors ........................................ 3/58
Device connectors
For 3RM1 motor starters ................ 8/94, 8/95
Device daisy chain connectors
Device termination connectors
Diagnostics modules
For modular safety system .......... 2/23, 11/40
Diagnostics modules, SITOP select ...........15/49
Digital I/O modules
For AS-Interface ........................... 2/50 ... 56
Direct-on-line soft starters
ET 200S High-Feature .......................... 8/109
3RA11 load feeders ..................... 8/46 ... 47
3RA21 load feeders ..................... 8/16 ... 23
3RA61 compact starters ........................ 8/64
3RA64 compact starters
for IO-Link ...................................... 2/90, 8/66
3RM10 motor starters ............................. 8/89
3RM11 Failsafe motor starters ............... 8/91
ET 200pro ......................................... 9/3 ... 7
M200D .......................................... 9/37 ... 51
MCU ............................................. 9/62 ... 70
Disconnecting module
ET 200pro ............................................... 9/10
Distance protection ......................................7/61
Door controllers (SIDOOR),
automatic ................................... 15/6, 15/7, 15/9
For motor starter protectors 7/32, 7/67, 7/68
DP/AS-i F-Link
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/41
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/36
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/39
16/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
E
(ECC) .................................................. 15/8, 15/9
Electrical remote RESET ................... 7/98, 7/109
Electronic modules
For IO-Link .................................... 2/98, 2/99
EMC suppression modules for contactors ... 3/60
EMERGENCY-STOP door-coupling
rotary operating mechanisms
For motor starter protectors .......... 7/32, 7/68
EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbuttons ......... 13/7, 13/9, 13/27,
..................... 13/29, 13/41, 13/45, 13/49, 13/53,
.................................. 13/63, 13/89, 13/90, 13/99
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons
For ASIsafe ............................................... 2/4
Empty enclosures
Enclosure concept
Enclosures
For motor starter protectors .........7/37 ... 39,
....................................................... 7/71, 7/72
For pushbuttons and indicator lights .....13/3,
...................................................... 13/88 ...99
....................................................... 7/71, 7/72
End covers ................................................... 7/43
Modular safety system ES ..........14/33 ... 35
Motor Starter ES ..........................14/13 ... 16
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) ........14/20 ... 23
SIMOCODE ES ...........................14/24 ... 27
Soft Starter ES .................................14/5 ... 8
ET 200eco PN for IO-Link ............................ 2/99
ET 200pro
Frequency converters ............................. 9/35
I/O modules .................................. 9/30 ... 33
Interface modules .........................9/19 ... 29
Motor starters ..................................9/3 ... 18
Software .................................................. 9/36
ET 200pro FC frequency converters ............ 9/35
ET 200S
4SI IO-Link .............................................. 2/97
4SI SIRIUS for IO-Link ............................ 2/98
Fail-safe I/O modules ................8/150 ... 153
I/O modules ..............................8/140 ... 149
Interface modules .....................8/132 ... 139
IO-Link master modules ....................... 8/154
Motor starters and
safety motor starters ...................8/98 ... 131
Software ................................................ 8/155
Technology modules .................8/143 ... 146
Terminal modules for power modules
and electronic modules ............8/147 ... 149
ET 200S Safety motor starters ........ 8/113 ... 131
ET 200SP ...................................................... 2/33
Evaluation modules ......................... 7/137, 7/144
Expansion modules
For infeed system for 3RA6 ...................8/77,
....................................................... 8/79 ... 80
For modular safety system ......... 2/22, 11/40
SITOP .................................................... 15/50
Expansion modules, SITOP ........................ 15/48

Expansion plug ............................................. 7/43
Explosion protection (ATEX)
Motor starter protectors ..................7/8, 7/15,
........................................................ 7/45, 7/50
Overload relays ..... 7/89, 7/90, 7/100, 7/101,
............................ 7/110, 7/112, 7/120, 7/122,
............................. 7/131, 7/133, 7/140, 7/141
SIMOCODE pro ...................................... 10/4
Thermistor motor protection ................... 10/4
Extension plug for AS-Interface .................... 2/80
F
F90 for AS-Interface ..................................... 2/63
Fans
For 3RW40 soft starters ................. 6/33, 6/34
Flat module
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/64
Foot switches ...................... 13/3, 13/107, 13/108
Front plates
........................................................ 7/71, 7/72
Function expansion modules ..................... 7/138
Function modules
Converters ............................................ 6/105
For contactors .......................... 3/183 ... 197
For solid-state switching devices .......... 6/68,
..................................................... 6/98 ... 109
Heating current monitoring .................. 6/107
Load monitoring ................................... 6/106
Power controllers .................................. 6/108
Power regulators .................................. 6/109
Fuse monitoring ............................................ 7/59
G
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/68
H
Handheld devices
For motor starters ................................... 9/57
Heating control systems ................................. 6/4
Heating control systems (HCS), SIPLUS .....15/5,
....................................................................... 15/9
Heating current monitoring ......................... 6/107
Heavy starting
With 3RW40 soft starters .............. 6/29 ... 31
With 3RW44 soft starters
- In inline circuit ........................... 6/51 ... 53
- In inside-delta circuit ................. 6/59 ... 60
Hinge switches ...................... 12/2, 12/76 ... 81,
......................................................... 12/97, 12/98
Hybrid cables ............................................... 9/19
Hybrid fieldbus connections ..............9/75 ... 76
Active ........................................... 9/75 ... 76
Passive ......................................... 9/75 ... 76
Hybrid link modules
For motor starter protectors ......... 7/33 ... 36
Hybrid technology
On 3RM1 motor starters ......................... 8/83
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
IO-Link components ..................................... 2/93
IO-Link Master ET200S
4SI SIRIUS .............................................. 2/98
Isolating transformers
Single-phase ......... 15/10 ... 16, 15/21 ... 25
Three-phase ................................15/26 ... 31
Isolator modules
ET 200pro ................................................. 9/9
....................................................... 7/62, 7/64
J
Jumper plugs
For AS-Interface ...................................... 2/59
K
K20 for AS-Interface ..................................... 2/48
K20F for ASIsafe .......................................... 2/25
K45 mounting plates
For AS-Interface ...................................... 2/87
For ASIsafe ............................................. 2/27
K45F for ASIsafe .......................................... 2/25
K45F LS (light sensor) for ASIsafe ............... 2/25
K60 mounting plates
For AS-Interface ..........2/50, 2/52, 2/59, 2/87
K60R in degree of protection IP68/IP69K
for AS-Interface ............................................ 2/51
For rotary buttons and switches ............13/8,
........................... 13/10, 13/28, 13/39, 13/40,
.............................13/48, 13/52, 13/61, 13/62
L
Label sets for timing relays ........................ 10/67
Labels .......................................................... 6/70
For monitoring relays ............... 10/75, 10/83,
............................................... 10/122, 10/146
For overload relays .........7/99, 7/109, 7/119,
................................................... 7/130, 7/150
For temperature monitoring relays .....10/159,
............................................................. 10/171
For thermistor motor protection .......... 10/180
For timing relays ................................... 10/67
Labels, blank ..................................... 3/63, 3/111
Lampholders
For pushbuttons and indicator lights ...13/11,
........................................ 13/12, 13/65 ... 68,
................................................... 13/93, 13/94
Lamps
For pushbuttons and indicator lights
- BA 9s ................................................. 13/81
- Wedge bases ......................... 13/18, 13/82
For signaling columns, integrated signal lamps
- BA 15d ............................... 13/113, 13/117
Latched contactor relays ............................. 5/15
Latching blocks, mechanical
For contactors ............................. 3/58, 3/109
LED modules
For displaying contactor operation ........3/60,
............................................................... 3/109
LEDs
- BA 9s ................................................. 13/81
- Wedge bases ......................... 13/18, 13/82
For signaling columns, integrated signal lamps
- BA 15d ............................... 13/113, 13/117
Lenses for indicator lights .............. 13/18, 13/80
Level monitoring
Level monitoring relays .......... 10/115 ... 117
Probes for filling level monitoring ....... 10/118
Lever-type rotary operating mechanisms
For molded case motor starter protectors 7/81
Line monitoring .................................10/87 ... 91
For IO-Link ............................. 10/127 ... 129
Link modules
For motor starter protectors 7/33 ... 35, 7/70
For contactors ................ 3/63, 3/111, 3/125,
.................................................... 3/171, 3/179
For miniature contactors ........................ 4/68
Load feeders ................................................ 6/70
Load feeders, 3RA1
Fuseless ................................ 8/2, 8/41 ... 54
Load feeders, 3RA2 ..................... 8/2, 8/4 ... 40
Load monitoring ......................................... 6/106
Locking devices
For contactors ........................................ 4/24
LOGO!
Accessories ......................................... 10/39
AS-Interface connections for LOGO! ... 10/38
CM EIB/KNX communication modules . 10/36
CMS unmanaged ................................. 10/37
Contact ................................................. 10/40
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/70
Modular basic versions ........................ 10/30
Modular expansion modules ................ 10/34
Modular pure versions ......................... 10/32
Software ............................................... 10/41
LOGO! logic modules ......................10/29 ... 41
LOGO!Power .............................................. 15/43
M
M12 addressing cable for AS-Interface ....... 2/82
M12 cable plug for AS-Interface ........ 2/82, 2/85
For AS-Interface .......................... 2/86, 2/102
M12-T distributors
For AS-Interface ............................ 2/52, 2/86
M200D ................................................9/37 ... 61
Magnetically operated switches ... 12/99, 12/100
For 3RA6 compact starters ........... 8/69, 8/70
Mains transformers
Single-phase .............................. 15/10 ... 25
Three-phase ............................... 15/26 ... 31
16
I
I/O modules
For AS-Interface ........................... 2/48 ... 64
For IO-Link ............................................ 2/100
I/O system
ET 200pro ................................................. 9/3
ET 200S ........................... 8/98, 8/132 ... 154
IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 for AS-Interface .. 2/38, 2/47
IE/AS-i LINK PN IO
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/45
Incandescent lamps
- BA 9s ................................................. 13/81
- Wedge bases ......................... 13/18, 13/82
For signaling columns and
integrated signal lamps
- BA 15d ............................... 13/113, 13/117
Indicator lights .............. 13/2, 13/4, 13/8, 13/10,
................................. 13/30, 13/31, 13/42, 13/45,
.............................................. 13/49, 13/54, 13/64
Indicators ..................13/10, 13/42, 13/49, 13/64
Infeed system
For 3RA6 compact starters .......... 8/76 ... 82
For motor starter protectors ......... 7/40 ... 43
Infeed terminals
For contactors ........................... 3/171, 3/179
Inscription labels
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/88
For contact blocks (pushbuttons) ........ 13/85
For enclosures (pushbuttons) .............. 13/95
For solid-state switching devices ........... 6/70
Insert labels
For pushbuttons and
indicator lights ........ 13/13 ...16, 13/73 ... 74
for ungrounded AC networks . 10/107 ... 109
For ungrounded DC and
AC networks ........................... 10/110 ... 114
Insulation stop
for spring-type terminals .......... 3/63, 3/111, 5/14
Integrated signal lamps .................. 13/3, 13/118
Interface converters, 3RS17 .........10/181 ... 186
Interface modules
For ET 200SP .......................................... 2/34
For modular safety system .......... 2/23, 11/40
Interlocks
For contactor assemblies ..................... 3/161
IO-Link ..............................................2/89 ... 102
3RA6 compact starters .......................... 2/90
3RA64 direct-on-line starters ................. 2/90
3RA65 reversing starters ........................ 2/90
Contactors ..................................... 3/34, 3/37
Electronic modules ........................ 2/98, 2/99
ET 200eco PN ........................................ 2/99
ET 200S 4SI IO-Link ............................... 2/97
I/O modules .......................................... 2/100
Masters ......................................... 2/95 ... 99
Overload relays ........................ 7/139 ... 144
SIRIUS ET 200S 4SI ............................... 2/98
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/39
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
Masters
For AS-Interface ........................... 2/28 ... 32
For IO-Link .................................... 2/95 ... 99
MCU ....................................................9/62 ... 71
For contactors ........................................ 4/24
For contactors ............................. 3/58, 3/109
Mechanical RESET .....7/97, 7/108, 7/118, 7/129
Miniature contactors .....3/135, 3/142, 4/25, 4/66
Modular safety system ES ................14/33 ... 35
Modules
For ET 200pro ............................... 9/19 ... 35
For ET 200S .............................. 8/132 ... 154
Molded case motor starter protectors ...........7/4,
.............................................................7/73 ... 81
Molded-plastic enclosures
........................................................ 7/71, 7/72
Momentary-contact foot switches.................13/3,
..................................................... 13/107, 13/108
Monitoring devices ...........................10/1 ... 186
Monitoring relays
Accessories ........................... 10/122, 10/146
Current monitoring 10/71 ... 75, 10/79 ... 83,
............................10/95 ... 97, 10/133 ... 135
For mounting onto contactors .... 10/68 ... 83
For stand-alone installation ...... 10/68 ... 122
For stand-alone installation
for IO-Link ..........10/76 ... 83, 10/123 ... 146
Insulation monitoring .............. 10/105 ... 114
Level monitoring ..................... 10/115 ... 117
Line monitoring ..10/87 ... 91, 10/127 ... 129
..........................10/98 ... 100, 10/136 ... 139
Probes for filling level monitoring ....... 10/118
Residual current monitoring .. 10/101 ... 103,
................................................. 10/140 ... 142
Residual-current transformers ............ 10/104
Speed monitoring .................. 10/119 ... 121,
................................................. 10/143 ... 145
Voltage monitoring 10/92 ... 94, 10/130 ... 132
Monitoring units
For magnetically operated switches ... 12/100
Motor management and control devices
SIMOCODE pro ............................ 10/5 ... 27
Motor protection ..... 7/19 ... 21, 7/55, 7/56, 7/78
Motor Starter ES ............................... 14/13 ... 16
Motor starter modules
M200D for PROFIBUS/PROFINET 9/45, 9/51
Motor starter protectors ........ 7/2, 7/3, 7/7 ... 72
Explosion protection (ATEX) .......... 7/8, 7/15,
....................................................... 7/45, 7/50
Motor protection .................. 7/19 ... 21, 7/56
Starter combinations ............................... 7/22
System protection ................................... 7/24
Transformer protection .................. 7/23, 7/25
Voltage transformer circuit breakers ....... 7/61
Motor starters
3RM1 .................................... 8/3, 8/83 ... 97
ET 200pro .......................................9/3 ... 18
ET 200S .............................. 8/3, 8/98 ... 131
ET 200S Failsafe ............... 8/3, 8/113 ... 114
For AS-Interface
- 24 V DC ......................................9/72 ... 74
- M200D ....................................... 9/37 ... 44
- MCU ....................... 9/62 ... 64, 9/67 ... 70
For use in the control cabinet ....... 8/1 ... 155
For use in the field ..........................9/1 ... 74
High degree of protection ...............9/1 ... 74
M200D .......................................... 9/37 ... 61
MCU ..............................................9/62 ... 71
Motorized operating mechanisms
For motor starter protectors ...................... 7/7
Mushroom pushbuttons and switches ...... 13/27,
.......................13/29, 13/36, 13/37, 13/53, 13/56
N
Name plates
For EMERGENCY-STOP
mushroom pushbuttons ............ 13/19, 13/85
For joystick switches ............................. 13/34
For pushbuttons and
indicator lights ................ 13/17, 13/75 ... 79
Normal starting
With 3RW40 soft starters ..............6/26 ... 28
- In inline circuit ............................ 6/48 ... 50
- In inside-delta circuit .................6/57 ... 58
16
O
OFF-delay devices
For contactors and contactor relays ......3/58,
....................... 3/107, 3/143, 5/14, 5/23, 5/30
ON-delay devices
For contactor relays ................................ 5/23
For modular safety system ......... 2/23, 11/40
Operator panels ......................................... 7/149
Overload relays ................. 7/5, 7/6, 7/82 ... 150
Explosion protection (ATEX) ........ 7/89, 7/90,
................ 7/100, 7/101, 7/110, 7/112, 7/120,
................. 7/122, 7/131, 7/133, 7/140, 7/141
Overvoltage protection module
For AS-Interface ...................................... 2/69
16/40
Siemens IC 10 2014
P
PC cables for PC/PG communication
For soft starters ...................................... 14/8
PE infeeds
For infeed system for 3RA6 ........... 8/77, 8/81
Phase barriers
Plug-in bases
For contactors ...................................... 3/144
For contactors and contactor relays ...... 5/31
For coupling relays ...............5/58, 5/59, 5/61
Plug-in connections
Plug-in connectors ....................................... 7/42
Pneumatic delay blocks
For contactors ........................................ 3/58
Position switches ................................12/2 ... 98
Ambient temperature -40 C ..... 12/28, 12/47
For AS-Interface ......................... 12/82 ... 98
For ASIsafe ............................................... 2/3
Hinge switches .....12/76 ... 81, 12/97, 12/98
Metal enclosures ............... 12/2, 12/32 ... 53
Open-type ................................... 12/2, 12/54
Plastic enclosures ............. 12/2, 12/14 ... 31
With separate actuator .............. 12/58 ... 68,
.........................................12/91, 12/92, 12/93
With solenoid interlocking ......... 12/69 ... 75,
.................................................... 12/95, 12/96
Power controllers ........................................ 6/108
Power factor and
active current monitoring ................10/98 ... 100
For IO-Link ............................. 10/136 ... 139
Power regulators ......................................... 6/109
Power relays (miniature contactors) ............. 4/66
Power supplies ................................... 15/3, 15/4
Filtered ....................................... 15/32 ... 38
Non-stabilized ............................ 15/32 ... 40
Single-phase ..................15/35, 15/36, 15/39
SIPLUS extreme .............15/43 ... 46, 15/48,
.................................................... 15/49, 15/51
SITOP .......................15/4, 15/9, 15/41 ... 52
Stabilized .................................... 15/41 ... 52
Three-phase ...................15/37, 15/38, 15/40
Unfiltered ........................15/32, 15/39, 15/40
Power supply units
For AS-Interface ............................ 2/71, 2/72
Power supply units, 30 V .............................. 2/72
Power terminal connectors ................ 9/15, 9/17,
............................................................. 9/54, 9/56
Probes for filling level monitoring ............. 10/118
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connectors
For AS-Interface ............................ 2/38, 2/40
For AS-Interface ............................ 2/38, 2/40
For AS-Interface ............................ 2/38, 2/40
PROFIenergy
For ET 200S HF motor starters ............. 8/109
For PROFINET M200D motor starters .... 9/46
Protective caps
For pushbuttons ........................ 13/19, 13/83
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
R
Redundancy modules, SITOP ....................15/48
Relay couplers ........ 5/42, 5/43, 5/45, 5/46, 5/52
Remote RESET, electrical ................. 7/98, 7/109
Repeaters for AS-Interface ...........................2/79
RESET for overload relays
Cable releases ..... 7/97, 7/109, 7/118, 7/129
Electrical remote ......................... 7/98, 7/109
Mechanical ........... 7/97, 7/108, 7/118, 7/129
Residual current monitoring .........10/101 ... 103
................................................. 10/101 ... 103
for IO-Link ............................... 10/140 ... 142
Residual-current transformers ............ 10/104
Residual-current transformers ..................10/104
Reversing contactor assemblies ...3/150 ... 155,
............................................. 3/158 ... 160, 3/180
Reversing starters
3RA12 load feeders ..................... 8/48 ... 49
3RA22 load feeders ..................... 8/24 ... 31
3RA62 compact starters ........................ 8/65
3RA65 compact starters for IO-Link 2/90, 8/67
3RM12 motor starters ............................. 8/90
3RM13 Failsafe motor starters ............... 8/92
ET 200pro ......................................... 9/3 ... 7
M200D .......................................... 9/37 ... 51
MCU ............................................. 9/62 ... 70
RFID .................................... 12/3, 12/101 ... 104
For motor starter protectors 7/32, 7/67, 7/68
Routers
For AS-Interface ........................... 2/36 ... 47
S
S22.5 data decoupling modules ......... 2/74, 2/76
S22.5 for AS-Interface .................................. 2/61
S22.5F for ASIsafe ....................................... 2/25
S45 for AS-Interface ..................................... 2/61
Safety modules for ASIsafe .......................... 2/25
ET 200pro Safety motor starters ............. 9/10
Safety relays, 3SK1
Accessories .............................. 11/20, 11/21
Advanced basic units ........................... 11/17
Code conversion table ......................... 11/12
Input expansions .................................. 11/19
Output expansions ............................... 11/18
Standard basic units ............................. 11/16
Safety relays, 3TK28
Accessories .......................................... 11/30
With relay enabling circuits .........11/22 ... 24
With solid-state enabling circuits 11/25 ... 27
With special functions ............... 11/28, 11/29
Safety Solution local
Safety Solution PROFIsafe
Safety switches
For AS-Interface ..........................12/82 ... 98
Hinge switches ................. 12/2, 12/76 ... 81
Magnetically operated switches 12/99, 12/100
RFID .............................. 12/3, 12/101 ... 104
With separate actuator ..... 12/3, 12/58 ... 68
With solenoid interlocking . 12/3, 12/69 ... 75
Safety system, 3RK3, modular ......... 11/31 ... 42
Safety transformers
Single-phase ...............................15/10 ... 25
Three-phase ................................15/26 ... 31
Scale covers
Screw adapters (fixing)
For contactors ......................................... 3/62
Screwdrivers ....... 3/63, 3/111, 5/14, 7/34, 7/70,
.........................7/99, 7/109, 7/119, 7/130, 7/150
Sealable covers
For 3SK1 safety relays .......................... 11/21
For AS-Interface ...................................... 2/62
For ASIsafe ............................................. 2/24
For contactor relays ................................ 5/14
For contactors ............................. 3/61, 3/110
For overload relays .......... 7/98, 7/118, 7/129
For safety relays .................................... 11/30
For solid-state switching devices 6/106 ... 109
Sealing caps
For AS-Interface ..................2/50, 2/52, 2/54,
.............................................. 2/56, 2/59, 2/87
For ASIsafe ............................................. 2/27
For IO-Link ............................................ 2/102
Sealing sets
For AS-Interface ...................2/50, 2/59, 2/88
Selectivity modules, SITOP PSE200U ........ 15/49
Selector switches
For rotary buttons and switches ...13/8, 13/9,
............................ 13/28, 13/38, 13/47, 13/52,
............................. 13/57, 13/58, 13/59, 13/60
Semiconductor couplers .............................. 5/50
Semiconductor motor contactors
Three-phase, 3RF34 ................. 6/113 ... 116
Shunt releases
........................................................ 7/62, 7/64
SIDOOR automatic door controllers ............15/6,
............................................................. 15/7, 15/9
Signaling columns .............. 13/3, 13/109 ... 117
Signaling modules, SITOP .......................... 15/48
Signaling switches
........................................................ 7/62, 7/64
SIMATIC
ET 200pro ................................................. 9/3
- Modules ..................................... 9/19 ... 35
ET 200S .................................................. 8/98
- Modules ................................. 8/132 ... 154
SIMOCODE ES .................................14/24 ... 27
SIMOCODE ES (TIA Portal) ..............14/20 ... 23
SIMOCODE pro 3UF7
Accessories ............................... 10/19 ... 27
Basic units ................................. 10/14, 10/15
Expansion modules ................... 10/16, 10/17
Fail-safe expansion modules ............... 10/18
Operator panels ................................... 10/15
Single-phase transformers ....... 15/2, 15/9 ... 25
SIPLUS
(SIDOOR) .............................15/6, 15/7, 15/9
Condition monitoring systems
(CMS) ............................................ 15/8, 15/9
(ECC) ............................................. 15/8, 15/9
Heating control systems (HCS) ..... 15/5, 15/9
Modules for ET 200S ................ 8/132 ... 151
SIPLUS extreme 15/43 ... 46, 15/48, 15/49, 15/51
SIPLUS LOGO!
Accessories ......................................... 10/39
Modular basic versions ........................ 10/31
Modular expansion modules ................ 10/35
Modular pure versions ......................... 10/33
SITOP compact .......................................... 15/42
SITOP expansion modules ......................... 15/49
SITOP lite .................................................... 15/41
SITOP modular ............................... 15/45, 15/46
SITOP PSE200U selectivity modules .......... 15/49
SITOP smart ............................................... 15/44
SITOP special design and special use ...... 15/47
SIWAREX
Modules for ET 200S ................ 8/145 ... 146
Slaves for AS-Interface ....................... 2/48 ... 70
16
Protective collars
For pushbuttons and indicator lights ... 13/84
Pushbuttons and indicator lights .................13/2,
...........................................................13/4 ... 100
Nominal diameter 16 mm ............. 13/4 ... 19
Nominal diameter 22 mm ......... 13/20 ... 100
Pushbuttons and switches ........13/2, 13/4, 13/7,
................................... 13/9, 13/20, 13/26, 13/35,
....................... 13/44, 13/46, 13/50, 13/51, 13/55
Push-in lugs
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/62
For overload relays ............................... 7/150
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/41
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
16
SlimLine for AS-Interface ..............................2/61

Soft Starter ES ......................................14/5 ... 8
Soft starters .................................. 6/2, 6/5 ... 67
For High-Feature applications 6/2, 6/37 ... 67
- Inline circuit ...................... 6/48, 6/51, 6/54
- Inside-delta circuit ............ 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
For standard applications ....... 6/2, 6/8 ... 36
Software
For SIRIUS .................................... 14/1 ... 36
Solder pin adapters
For contactors ........................................ 3/62
Solenoid coils
For contactors .... 3/64, 3/112 ... 115, 3/126,
..........................3/134, 4/24, 4/53, 4/55, 4/64
Solid-state contactors .............. 6/68, 6/84 ... 97,
.........................................................6/110 ... 119
Single-phase 3RF23 ..................... 6/85 ... 93
Three-phase, 3RF24 ..................... 6/94 ... 97
Solid-state overload relays .................7/82 ... 88
For High-Feature applications .. 7/131 ... 150
For IO-Link ................................ 7/139 ... 144
For standard applications ........ 7/110 ... 130
Solid-state relays ...................... 6/68, 6/71 ... 83
Single-phase 3RF20 ..................... 6/77 ... 80
Single-phase 3RF21 ..................... 6/72 ... 76
Three-phase, 3RF22 ..................... 6/81 ... 83
Solid-state reversing contactors
Three-phase, 3RF34 .................. 6/117, 6/119
Solid-state switching devices ... 6/3, 6/68 ... 118
For resistive loads ...................... 6/68 ... 109
For switching motors ................ 6/110 ... 119
Spacers
Speed monitoring .........................10/119 ... 121
For IO-Link .............................. 10/143 ... 145
Starter combinations .................. 7/22, 7/57, 7/79
Supply modules, 24 V, for K45F LS (light sensor)
For ASIsafe ............................................. 2/27
Surge suppressors
For contactor relays ............ 5/13, 5/22, 5/31
For contactors ..... 3/59, 3/108, 3/125, 3/133,
................................... 3/144, 4/24, 4/63, 4/65
Switching magnets ...................................12/100
System components ..................................... 2/15
System manuals
For 3RA6 compact starters .................... 8/73
For 3RR2 monitoring relays ....... 10/75, 10/83
For AS-Interface ..................................... 2/86
For motor starter protectors ................... 7/34
For overload relays .......... 7/99, 7/119, 7/149
For SIRIUS Innovations ............... 3/63, 6/116
System protection ............................... 7/24, 7/60
16/42
Siemens IC 10 2014
T
Temperature monitoring relays ..... 10/147 ... 171
Analogically adjustable ..........10/151 ... 153
Digitally adjustable .................10/154 ... 158
Digitally adjustable, for IO-Link 10/166 ... 170
For IO-Link ..............................10/160 ... 171
Terminal blocks
....................................................... 7/43, 7/69
For overload relays ............................... 7/129
Terminal covers
For contactors .................3/61, 3/110, 3/125,
............................................ 3/133, 4/24, 4/63
For current transformers ....................... 10/28
For infeeds with screw connection
for 3RA6 ........................................ 8/77, 8/82
For overload relays 7/98, 7/109, 7/129, 7/150
For SIMOCODE pro .............................. 10/21
For solid-state switching devices . 6/76, 6/93
Terminal modules
For ET 200S motor starters
- Failsafe ............................................... 8/115
- High-Feature ...................................... 8/110
- Power modules .................................. 8/112
- Safety modules local and
PROFIsafe ............................8/125 ... 126
- Standard ................................8/106 ... 107
Terminal supports ................. 7/97, 7/108, 7/118
For 3RR2 monitoring relays ...... 10/75, 10/83
Terminals
For 3SK1 safety relays .......................... 11/20
TH 35 standard mounting rails ..................... 7/43
Thermal overload relays ..................... 7/82 ... 88
For standard applications ...........7/89 ... 109
Thermistor motor protection, 3RN1
Explosion protection (ATEX) ................... 10/4
For PTC sensors .....................10/172 ... 180
Three-phase
Busbars ................................7/30, 7/42, 7/65
Infeed terminals ............................ 7/30, 7/66
Three-phase busbar system
........................................................ 7/65, 7/66
Three-phase busbar systems
Three-phase infeed system
Three-phase transformers 15/2, 15/9, 15/26 ... 31
Timing relay blocks
For contactors and contactor relays ..... 3/99,
.................................................... 3/107, 3/186
Timing relays
3RP15 in industrial enclosure,
22.5 mm ..................................... 10/51 ... 56
3RP15, 3RP20 accessories .................. 10/67
3RP20 in enclosure, 45 mm ....... 10/57 ... 59
3RT19 for mounting
onto contactors .......................... 10/64 ... 66
7PV15 in enclosure, 17.5 mm .... 10/60 ... 63
Tools for spring-type terminals
For contactors ....................3/63, 3/111, 5/14
For interface converters ..................... 10/186
For monitoring relays ................10/75, 10/83,
................................................ 10/122, 10/146
For overload relays ......... 7/99, 7/109, 7/119,
.................................................... 7/130, 7/150
For safety relays ........................ 11/21, 11/30
For temperature monitoring relays .... 10/159,
............................................................. 10/171
Transformer protection .............. 7/23, 7/25, 7/58
Transformers .................. 15/2, 15/9, 15/10 ... 31
Twin pushbuttons ................. 13/28, 13/42, 13/43
Two-hand operation consoles ........ 13/3, 13/101
Type E Starters
Phase barriers ............................... 7/33, 7/34
Terminal blocks ....................7/33, 7/34, 7/69
Terminals ....................................... 7/30, 7/66
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Subject index
U
........................................................ 7/62, 7/64
Uninterruptible power supplies,
SITOP ................................................15/50 ... 52
For contact blocks (pushbuttons) ........ 13/85
For monitoring relays ................10/75, 10/83,
................................................ 10/122, 10/146
For overload relays ......... 7/99, 7/109, 7/119,
.................................................... 7/130, 7/150
For safety relays ........................ 11/21, 11/30
For solid-state switching devices ........... 6/70
For temperature monitoring relays .... 10/159,
............................................................. 10/171
USB/serial adapters
For 3RK3 modular safety system ......... 14/36
For motor starters ................................. 14/16
For SIMOCODE ......................... 14/23, 14/27
For SIMOCODE pro .............................. 10/19
For soft starters ...................................... 14/8
V
Vacuum contactors ...........................3/91 ... 124
Very heavy starting
- In inline circuit ........................... 6/54 ... 56
- In inside-delta circuit ................. 6/61 ... 62
Voltage monitoring ............................10/92 ... 94
For IO-Link .............................. 10/130 ... 132
Voltage transformer circuit breakers ............7/61
16
W
Wiring kits
Wiring modules
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/43
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Overview
Article No.
Page
3RA11
Page
3RA2110-0DD15-1A
8/20
3RA11
8/46
3RA2110-0DD15-1B
8/22
3RA13
3/159, 3/160
3RA2110-0DE15-1A
8/17
3RA14
3/176 ... 178
3RA2110-0DE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-0DH15-1A
8/21
3RA19
3RA190
8/37, 8/52
3RA2110-0DH15-1B
8/23
3RA191
8/36
3RA2110-0EA15-1A
8/16
3RA1921-1A
8/35
3RA2110-0EA15-1B
8/18
3RA1921-1D
7/35, 8/35
3RA2110-0ED15-1A
8/20
3RA1923
3/161, 8/51
3RA2110-0ED15-1B
8/22
3RA1924
3/161, 8/51
3RA2110-0EE15-1A
8/17
3RA1931
6/17, 6/34, 7/70, 8/51
3RA2110-0EE15-1B
8/19
3RA1932
3/163, 3/179, 8/52
3RA2110-0EH15-1A
8/21
3RA1933
3/162, 3/163, 3/179, 8/51 ... 53
3RA2110-0EH15-1B
8/23
3RA1941
6/17, 6/34, 7/70, 8/51
3RA2110-0FA15-1A
8/16
3RA1942
3/163, 3/179, 8/52
3RA2110-0FA15-1B
8/18
3RA1943
3/162, 3/163, 3/179, 8/51, 8/52
3RA2110-0FD15-1A
8/20
3RA1952-2A
3/161
3RA2110-0FD15-1B
8/22
3RA1952-2E
3/179
3RA2110-0FE15-1A
8/17
3RA1952-2F
3/179
3RA2110-0FE15-1B
8/19
3RA1953-2A
3/162
3RA2110-0FH15-1A
8/21
3RA1953-2B
3/179
3RA2110-0FH15-1B
8/23
3RA1953-2M
3/162
3RA2110-0GA15-1A
8/16
3RA1953-2N
3/179
3RA2110-0GA15-1B
8/18
3RA1953-3
3/163
3RA2110-0GD15-1A
8/20
3RA1954
3/161
3RA2110-0GD15-1B
8/22
3RA1962-2A
3/161
3RA2110-0GE15-1A
8/17
3RA1962-2E
3/179
3RA2110-0GE15-1B
8/19
3RA1962-2F
3/179
3RA2110-0GH15-1A
8/21
3RA1963-2A
3/162
3RA2110-0GH15-1B
8/23
3RA1963-2B
3/179
3RA2110-0HA15-1A
8/16
3RA1972-2A
3/161
3RA2110-0HA15-1B
8/18
3RA1972-2E
3/179
3RA2110-0HD15-1A
8/20
3RA1972-2F
3/179
3RA2110-0HD15-1B
8/22
3RA1973-2A
3/162
3RA2110-0HE15-1A
8/17
3RA1973-2B
3/179
3RA2110-0HE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-0HH15-1A
8/21
3RA21
16
Article No.
3RA2110-0BA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-0HH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-0BA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-0JA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-0BD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-0JA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-0BD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-0JD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-0BE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-0JD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-0BE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-0JE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-0BH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-0JE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-0BH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-0JH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-0CA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-0JH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-0CA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-0KA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-0CD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-0KA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-0CD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-0KD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-0CE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-0KD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-0CE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-0KE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-0CH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-0KE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-0CH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-0KH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-0DA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-0KH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-0DA15-1B
8/18
16/44
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RA2110-1AA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1HA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1AA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1HA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1AD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1HD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1AD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1HD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1AE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1HE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1AE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1HE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1AH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1HH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1AH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1HH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1BA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1JA16-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1BA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1JA16-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1BD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1JD16-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1BD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1JD16-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1BE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1JE16-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1BE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1JE16-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1BH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1JH16-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1BH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1JH16-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1CA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1KA17-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1CA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1KA17-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1CD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1KD17-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1CD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1KD17-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1CE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1KE17-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1CE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1KE17-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1CH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1KH17-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1CH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1KH17-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1DA15-1A
8/16
3RA2110-4AA18-1A
8/16
3RA2110-1DA15-1B
8/18
3RA2110-4AA18-1B
8/18
3RA2110-1DD15-1A
8/20
3RA2110-4AD18-1A
8/20
3RA2110-1DD15-1B
8/22
3RA2110-4AD18-1B
8/22
3RA2110-1DE15-1A
8/17
3RA2110-4AE18-1A
8/17
3RA2110-1DE15-1B
8/19
3RA2110-4AE18-1B
8/19
3RA2110-1DH15-1A
8/21
3RA2110-4AH18-1A
8/21
3RA2110-1DH15-1B
8/23
3RA2110-4AH18-1B
8/23
3RA2110-1EA15-1A
8/16
3RA2120-1FA24-0A
8/16
3RA2110-1EA15-1B
8/18
3RA2120-1FA24-0B
8/18
3RA2110-1ED15-1A
8/20
3RA2120-1FD24-0A
8/20
3RA2110-1ED15-1B
8/22
3RA2120-1FD24-0B
8/22
3RA2110-1EE15-1A
8/17
3RA2120-1FE24-0A
8/17
3RA2110-1EE15-1B
8/19
3RA2120-1FE24-0B
8/19
3RA2110-1EH15-1A
8/21
3RA2120-1FH24-0A
8/21
3RA2110-1EH15-1B
8/23
3RA2120-1FH24-0B
8/23
3RA2110-1FA15-1A
8/16
3RA2120-1GA24-0A
8/16
3RA2110-1FA15-1B
8/18
3RA2120-1GA24-0B
8/18
3RA2110-1FD15-1A
8/20
3RA2120-1GD24-0A
8/20
3RA2110-1FD15-1B
8/22
3RA2120-1GD24-0B
8/22
3RA2110-1FE15-1A
8/17
3RA2120-1GE24-0A
8/17
3RA2110-1FE15-1B
8/19
3RA2120-1GE24-0B
8/19
3RA2110-1FH15-1A
8/21
3RA2120-1GH24-0A
8/21
3RA2110-1FH15-1B
8/23
3RA2120-1GH24-0B
8/23
3RA2110-1GA15-1A
8/16
3RA2120-1HA24-0A
8/16
3RA2110-1GA15-1B
8/18
3RA2120-1HA24-0B
8/18
3RA2110-1GD15-1A
8/20
3RA2120-1HD24-0A
8/20
3RA2110-1GD15-1B
8/22
3RA2120-1HD24-0B
8/22
3RA2110-1GE15-1A
8/17
3RA2120-1HE24-0A
8/17
3RA2110-1GE15-1B
8/19
3RA2120-1HE24-0B
8/19
3RA2110-1GH15-1A
8/21
3RA2120-1HH24-0A
8/21
3RA2110-1GH15-1B
8/23
3RA2120-1HH24-0B
8/23
16
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/45
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
3RA2120-1JA24-0A
8/16
3RA22
3RA2120-1JA24-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0BA15-2A
8/24
3RA2120-1JD24-0A
8/20
3RA2210-0BA15-2B
8/26
3RA2120-1JD24-0B
8/22
3RA2210-0BD15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-1JE24-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0BD15-2B
8/30
3RA2120-1JE24-0B
8/19
3RA2210-0BE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-1JH24-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0BE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-1JH24-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0BH15-2A
8/29
3RA2120-1KA24-0A
8/16
3RA2210-0BH15-2B
8/31
3RA2120-1KA24-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0CA15-2A
8/24
8/20
3RA2210-0CA15-2B
8/26
8/22
3RA2210-0CD15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-1KE24-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0CD15-2B
8/30
3RA2120-1KE24-0B
8/19
3RA2210-0CE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-1KH24-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0CE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-1KH24-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0CH15-2A
8/29
3RA2120-4AA26-0A
8/16
3RA2210-0CH15-2B
8/31
3RA2120-4AA26-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0DA15-2A
8/24
3RA2120-4AD26-0A
8/20
3RA2210-0DA15-2B
8/26
3RA2120-4AD26-0B
8/22
3RA2210-0DD15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-4AE26-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0DD15-2B
8/30
3RA2120-4AE26-0B
8/19
3RA2210-0DE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-4AH26-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0DE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-4AH26-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0DH15-2A
8/29
8/16
3RA2210-0DH15-2B
8/31
3RA2120-4BA27-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0EA15-2A
8/24
3RA2120-4BD27-0A
8/20
3RA2210-0EA15-2B
8/26
3RA2120-4BD27-0B
8/22
3RA2210-0ED15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-4BE27-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0ED15-2B
8/30
3RA2120-4BE27-0B
8/19
3RA2210-0EE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-4BH27-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0EE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-4BH27-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0EH15-2A
8/29
3RA2120-4CA27-0A
8/16
3RA2210-0EH15-2B
8/31
3RA2120-4CA27-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0FA15-2A
8/24
3RA2120-4CD27-0A
8/20
3RA2210-0FA15-2B
8/26
3RA2120-4CD27-0B
8/22
3RA2210-0FD15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-4CE27-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0FD15-2B
8/30
8/19
3RA2210-0FE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-4CH27-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0FE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-4CH27-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0FH15-2A
8/29
3RA2120-4DA27-0A
8/16
3RA2210-0FH15-2B
8/31
3RA2120-4DA27-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0GA15-2A
8/24
3RA2120-4DD27-0A
8/20
3RA2210-0GA15-2B
8/26
3RA2120-4DD27-0B
8/22
3RA2210-0GD15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-4DE27-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0GD15-2B
8/30
3RA2120-4DE27-0B
8/19
3RA2210-0GE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-4DH27-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0GE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-4DH27-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0GH15-2A
8/29
3RA2120-4EA27-0A
8/16
3RA2210-0GH15-2B
8/31
3RA2120-4EA27-0B
8/18
3RA2210-0HA15-2A
8/24
8/20
3RA2210-0HA15-2B
8/26
8/22
3RA2210-0HD15-2A
8/28
3RA2120-4EE27-0A
8/17
3RA2210-0HD15-2B
8/30
3RA2120-4EE27-0B
8/19
3RA2210-0HE15-2A
8/25
3RA2120-4EH27-0A
8/21
3RA2210-0HE15-2B
8/27
3RA2120-4EH27-0B
8/23
3RA2210-0HH15-2A
8/29
3RA2120-1KD24-0A
3RA2120-1KD24-0B
3RA2120-4BA27-0A
3RA2120-4CE27-0B
3RA2120-4ED27-0A
16
3RA2120-4ED27-0B
16/46
Siemens IC 10 2014
Article No.
Page
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RA2210-0HH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1EH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-0JA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1FA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-0JA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1FA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-0JD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1FD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-0JD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1FD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-0JE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1FE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-0JE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1FE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-0JH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1FH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-0JH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1FH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-0KA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1GA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-0KA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1GA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-0KD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1GD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-0KD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1GD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-0KE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1GE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-0KE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1GE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-0KH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1GH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-0KH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1GH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1AA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1HA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1AA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1HA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1AD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1HD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1AD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1HD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1AE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1HE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1AE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1HE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1AH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1HH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1AH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1HH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1BA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1JA16-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1BA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1JA16-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1BD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1JD16-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1BD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1JD16-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1BE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1JE16-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1BE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1JE16-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1BH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1JH16-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1BH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1JH16-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1CA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1KA17-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1CA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1KA17-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1CD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1KD17-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1CD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1KD17-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1CE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1KE17-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1CE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1KE17-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1CH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1KH17-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1CH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1KH17-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1DA15-2A
8/24
3RA2210-4AA18-2A
8/24
3RA2210-1DA15-2B
8/26
3RA2210-4AA18-2B
8/26
3RA2210-1DD15-2A
8/28
3RA2210-4AD18-2A
8/28
3RA2210-1DD15-2B
8/30
3RA2210-4AD18-2B
8/30
3RA2210-1DE15-2A
8/25
3RA2210-4AE18-2A
8/25
3RA2210-1DE15-2B
8/27
3RA2210-4AE18-2B
8/27
3RA2210-1DH15-2A
8/29
3RA2210-4AH18-2A
8/29
3RA2210-1DH15-2B
8/31
3RA2210-4AH18-2B
8/31
3RA2210-1EA15-2A
8/24
3RA2220-1FB24-0A
8/24
3RA2210-1EA15-2B
8/26
3RA2220-1FB24-0B
8/26
3RA2210-1ED15-2A
8/28
3RA2220-1FD24-0A
8/28
3RA2210-1ED15-2B
8/30
3RA2220-1FD24-0B
8/30
3RA2210-1EE15-2A
8/25
3RA2220-1FF24-0A
8/25
3RA2210-1EE15-2B
8/27
3RA2220-1FF24-0B
8/27
3RA2210-1EH15-2A
8/29
3RA2220-1FH24-0A
8/29
16
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/47
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RA2220-1FH24-0B
8/31
3RA2220-4CH27-0B
8/31
3RA2220-1GB24-0A
8/24
3RA2220-4DB27-0A
8/24
3RA2220-1GB24-0B
8/26
3RA2220-4DB27-0B
8/26
3RA2220-1GD24-0A
8/28
3RA2220-4DD27-0A
8/28
3RA2220-1GD24-0B
8/30
3RA2220-4DD27-0B
8/30
3RA2220-1GF24-0A
8/25
3RA2220-4DF27-0A
8/25
3RA2220-1GF24-0B
8/27
3RA2220-4DF27-0B
8/27
3RA2220-1GH24-0A
8/29
3RA2220-4DH27-0A
8/29
3RA2220-1GH24-0B
8/31
3RA2220-4DH27-0B
8/31
3RA2220-1HB24-0A
8/24
3RA2220-4EB27-0A
8/24
3RA2220-1HB24-0B
8/26
3RA2220-4EB27-0B
8/26
3RA2220-1HD24-0A
8/28
3RA2220-4ED27-0A
8/28
3RA2220-1HD24-0B
8/30
3RA2220-4ED27-0B
8/30
3RA2220-1HF24-0A
8/25
3RA2220-4EF27-0A
8/25
3RA2220-1HF24-0B
8/27
3RA2220-4EF27-0B
8/27
3RA2220-1HH24-0A
8/29
3RA2220-4EH27-0A
8/29
3RA2220-1HH24-0B
8/31
3RA2220-4EH27-0B
8/31
3RA2220-1JB24-0A
8/24
3RA23
3RA2220-1JB24-0B
8/26
3RA231
3/153
3RA2220-1JD24-0A
8/28
3RA232
3/155
3RA2220-1JD24-0B
8/30
3RA24
3RA2220-1JF24-0A
8/25
3RA241
3/168
8/27
3RA242
3/170
3RA2220-1JH24-0A
8/29
3RA27
3RA2220-1JH24-0B
8/31
3RA2711-0
3/157, 3/172, 3/192
3RA2220-1KB24-0A
8/24
3RA2711-1
3/157, 3/172, 3/191
3RA2220-1KB24-0B
8/26
3RA2711-2
3/157, 3/172, 3/191
3RA2220-1KD24-0A
8/28
3RA2712-1A
3/196
3RA2220-1KD24-0B
8/30
3RA2712-1B
3/157, 3/196
3RA2220-1KF24-0A
8/25
3RA2712-1C
3/172, 3/197
8/27
3RA2712-2A
3/196
8/29
3RA2712-2B
3/157, 3/196
8/31
3RA2712-2C
3/172, 3/197
3RA2220-4AB26-0A
8/24
3RA28
3RA2220-4AB26-0B
8/26
3RA2220-1JF24-0B
3RA2220-1KF24-0B
3RA2220-1KH24-0A
3RA2220-1KH24-0B
3RA2220-4AD26-0A
3RA2220-4AD26-0B
3RA2220-4AF26-0A
8/30
8/25
3RA2220-4AF26-0B
8/27
3RA2220-4AH26-0A
8/29
3RA2220-4AH26-0B
8/31
3RA2220-4BB27-0A
8/24
3RA2220-4BB27-0B
8/26
3RA2220-4BD27-0A
8/28
3RA2220-4BD27-0B
8/30
3RA2220-4BF27-0A
8/25
3RA2220-4BF27-0B
3/58, 3/186
3RA2812
3/58, 3/186
3RA2813
3/57
3RA2814
3/57
3RA2815
3/57
3RA2816
3/172, 3/187
3RA29
3RA290
3/63, 3/111, 5/14, 6/17, 6/34, 6/76,

6/93, 6/116, 7/34, 7/70, 7/99, 7/109,
7/119, 7/130, 7/150, 8/39, 8/73, 8/82,
10/75, 10/83, 10/122, 10/146, 10/159,
10/171, 10/180, 10/186, 11/21, 11/30
3RA2910
3/157, 3/172, 3/186, 3/187, 3/192,

3/197
8/27
3RA2911-0
3/187
8/29
3RA2911-1
7/35, 7/36, 8/39
8/31
3RA2911-2
6/17, 7/35, 7/36, 8/35, 8/36
8/24
3RA2912-0
3/187
8/26
3RA2912-2
3/156
8/28
3RA2913-1
8/38
3RA2220-4CD27-0B
8/30
3RA2913-2A
3/156, 3/187, 3/191, 3/196, 8/36
3RA2220-4CF27-0A
8/25
3RA2913-2B
3/171, 3/187, 3/191, 3/197, 8/36
3RA2220-4CF27-0B
8/27
3RA2913-3D
3/156
3RA2220-4CH27-0A
8/29
3RA2913-3E
3/156
3RA2220-4BH27-0A
3RA2220-4BH27-0B
3RA2220-4CB27-0A
3RA2220-4CB27-0B
3RA2220-4CD27-0A
16
8/28
3RA2811
16/48
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RA2913-3K
3/171
3RB295
7/147
3RA2916
3/62, 8/36
3RB296
7/147
3RA2921-1A
7/35, 8/35
3RB298
7/129, 7/138, 7/148, 7/150
3RA2921-1B
6/17, 6/34, 6/116, 6/119, 7/35,

8/35, 8/36
3RB3016-1
7/115
3RB3016-2
7/116
3RB3026-1
7/115
3RB3026-2
7/116
3RB31
7/117
3RB39
7/118
3RA2921-2A
7/35, 8/35
3RA2921-2F
7/36, 8/35
3RA2921-2G
6/17, 6/34, 7/35, 8/36
3RA2922-1
8/37
3RA2922-2
3/156
3RF
3RA2923-1B
8/37
3RF202
6/79
3RA2923-1D
8/38
3RF203
6/79
3RA2923-1E
8/38
3RF205
6/79, 6/80
3RA2923-2A
3/156, 3/187, 3/191, 3/196, 8/36
3RF207
6/79
3RA2923-2B
3/171, 3/187, 3/191, 3/197, 8/36
3RF209
6/79
3RA2923-3
3/156
3RF2120-1A
6/74
3RA2924
3/171
3RF2120-1B
6/75
3RA2926
3/62, 8/36
3RF2120-2
6/75
3RF2120-3
6/76
3RF2130-1A
6/74
3RF2130-1B
6/75
3RF2150-1A
6/74
3RF2150-1B
6/75
3RF2150-2
6/75
3RF2150-3
6/76
3RF2170-1A
6/74
3RF2170-1B
6/75
3RF2170-1C
6/75
3RF2190-1A
6/74
3RF2190-1B
6/75
3RF2190-2
6/75
3RF2190-3
6/76
3RF22
6/83
3RF23
6/88 ... 93
3RF24
6/96, 6/97
3RF29
6/76, 6/93, 6/105 ... 109
3RF3403
6/119
3RF3405
6/115, 6/119
3RF3410-1BB
6/115
3RF3410-1BD
6/119
3RF3410-2
6/115
3RF3412
6/115
3RF3416
6/115
3RF39
6/116, 6/119
3RA61
8/64
3RA62
8/65
3RA64
8/66
3RA65
8/67
3RA681
8/79
3RA682
8/80
3RA683
8/79
3RA686
8/81
3RA687
8/81
3RA688
8/82
3RA689
8/81, 8/82
3RA691
8/69
3RA692
8/69, 8/70
3RA6931
8/70
3RA6932
8/70
3RA6933
8/70
3RA6935
3/192, 7/149, 8/70
3RA6936
3/192, 7/149, 8/70, 10/19
3RA694
8/69
3RA695
8/69
3RA697
8/75
3RB
3RB1
7/69, 7/150
3RB2036-1
7/126
3RB2036-2
7/127
3RB2046-1
7/126
3RB2046-2
7/127
3RB2056-1
7/126
3RB2056-2
7/127
3RB2066-1
7/126
3RH1
3RB2066-2
7/127
3RH191
8/33
3RB21
7/128
3RH1921-1C
3/104, 8/50
3RB22
7/137
3RH1921-1D
3/105
3RB23
7/137
3RH1921-1E
3/105
3RB24
7/144
3RH1921-1F
3/103, 3/106, 8/50
3RB290
7/147
3RH1921-1H
3/103
3RB292
10/20
3RH1921-1J
3/105
3RG
3RG9002
2/63
3RG9004
2/63
3RG9005
2/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
16
3RA6
16/49
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RH1921-1K
3/105
3RH2140-2B
5/11
3RH1921-1L
3/104
3RH2140-2H
5/33
3RH1921-1M
3/104, 8/50
3RH2140-2J
5/34
3RH1921-1X
3/103
3RH2140-2K
5/34, 5/36
3RH1921-2C
3/104
3RH2140-2M
5/33
3RH1921-2D
3/105, 3/106
3RH2140-2S
5/34
3RH1921-2E
3/105
3RH2140-2V
5/34
3RH1921-2F
3/103, 3/106
3RH2244-1A
5/10
3RH1921-2H
3/103
3RH2244-1B
5/11
3RH1921-2J
3/105, 3/106
3RH2244-2A
5/10
3RH1921-2K
3/105
3RH2244-2B
5/11
3RH1921-2X
3/103
3RH2262-1A
5/10
3RH1924
3/109
3RH2262-1B
5/11
3RH2262-2A
5/10
16
3RH2
3RH2122-1A
5/10
3RH2262-2B
5/11
3RH2122-1B
5/11
3RH2422-1A
5/15
3RH2122-1H
5/33
3RH2422-1B
5/15
3RH2122-1J
5/34
3RH2431-1A
5/15
3RH2122-1K
5/34
3RH2431-1B
5/15
3RH2122-1M
5/33
3RH2440-1A
5/15
3RH2122-1S
5/34
3RH2440-1B
5/15
3RH2122-1V
5/34
3RH2911-1A
3/54
3RH2122-2A
5/10
3RH2911-1B
3/54, 8/33
3RH2122-2B
5/11
3RH2911-1D
3/55, 8/33
3RH2122-2H
5/33
3RH2911-1F
3/54
3RH2122-2J
5/34
3RH2911-1G
5/12
3RH2122-2K
5/34, 5/36
3RH2911-1H
3/53
3RH2122-2L
5/36
3RH2911-1L
3/54
3RH2122-2M
5/33
3RH2911-1M
3/54, 8/33
3RH2122-2S
5/34
3RH2911-1N
3/56
3RH2122-2V
5/34
3RH2911-1X
3/55
3RH2131-1A
5/10
3RH2911-2DA
3/55, 8/33
3RH2131-1B
5/11
3RH2911-2DE
3/56
3RH2131-1H
5/33
3RH2911-2F
3/54
3RH2131-1J
5/34
3RH2911-2G
5/12
3RH2131-1K
5/34
3RH2911-2H
3/53
3RH2131-1M
5/33
3RH2911-2N
3/56
3RH2131-1S
5/34
3RH2911-2X
3/55
3RH2131-1V
5/34
3RH2921-1
3/55, 8/33
3RH2131-2A
5/10
3RH2921-2
3/55, 3/56, 8/33
3RH2131-2B
5/11
3RH2924
3/60
3RH2131-2H
5/33
3RK1
3RH2131-2J
5/34
3RK10
2/11, 2/98, 8/154
3RH2131-2K
5/34, 5/36
3RK11
2/24, 2/50, 2/54, 2/58, 2/62
3RH2131-2M
5/33
3RK12
3RH2131-2S
5/34
2/26, 2/50, 2/54, 2/55, 2/58, 2/62,

2/66, 2/67
3RH2131-2V
5/34
3RK13
8/105, 8/109, 8/114, 9/7 ... 9,

9/12, 9/13, 9/43, 9/44, 9/51
3RH2140-1A
5/10
3RK14
3RH2140-1B
5/11
2/26, 2/50, 2/52, 2/54, 2/55, 2/62,

2/64, 2/66, 2/68, 2/70, 9/74, 10/38
3RH2140-1H
5/33
3RK18
2/24
3RH2140-1J
5/34
3RK19
3RH2140-1K
5/34
3RH2140-1M
5/33
3RH2140-1S
5/34
3RH2140-1V
5/34
2/24, 2/27, 2/29, 2/50, 2/52, 2/54,

2/56, 2/59, 2/69, 2/75, 2/77, 2/80,
2/82, 2/85 ... 88, 2/102, 8/75, 8/107,
8/110 ... 112, 8/115, 8/124, 8/126,
8/128 ... 131, 9/16 ... 18, 9/25, 9/26,
9/28, 9/30, 9/34, 9/35, 9/55 ... 61,
9/74, 9/76, 12/55, 13/100, 14/16
3RH2140-2A
5/10
16/50
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
3RK2
Article No.
Page
3RK435
9/65
3RK2100-1CQ0
2/50
3RK5
3RK2100-1CQ2
2/54
3RK5
3RK2100-1CT
2/55
3RK7
3RK2100-1E
2/54
3RK7
3RK2200-0CE
2/62
3RM
3RK2200-0CG
2/62
3RM10
8/89
2/50, 2/54, 2/55
3RM11
8/91
3RK2200-0CT
2/54, 2/55
3RM12
8/90
3RK2200-0DQ0
2/50
3RM13
8/92
3RK2200-0DQ2
2/54
3RM1910-1
8/95
3RK2200-1
2/50
3RM1910-6
8/95
3RK2207
2/58
3RM192
8/95
3RK2400-0
2/54
3RN
3RK2400-1
2/50, 2/54, 2/55, 2/62, 2/66
3RN100
10/179
3RK3
3RN101
10/179
3RK311
11/39
3RN102
10/180
2/21, 11/39
3RN106
10/180
3RK313
2/21, 11/39
3RP
3RK314
2/44
3RP150
10/55
3RK32
2/22, 11/40
3RP151
10/55
3RK33
2/22, 11/40
3RP152
10/55
3RK35
2/23, 11/40
3RP153
10/56
2/23, 11/40
3RP154
10/56
11/41
3RP155
10/56
3RK4
3RP156
10/56
3RK4320-3AQ
9/69
3RP157
10/56
9/67
3RP1901
10/67
3RK4320-3BQ
9/69
3RP1902
3RK4320-3BR
9/67
2/24, 2/62, 6/17, 10/67, 10/122,

10/146, 10/159
3RK4320-3CQ
9/69
3RP1903
3RK4320-3CR
9/67
2/24, 2/62, 6/17, 7/150, 10/20, 10/67,

10/122, 10/146, 10/159, 10/171,
10/180, 11/30, 11/41
3RK4320-3DQ
9/69
3RP2
10/59
3RK4320-3DR
9/67
3RR
3RK4320-3EQ
9/69
3RK312
3RK36
3RK39
3RK4320-3AR
3RK4320-3ER
3RK4320-3FQ
3RK4320-3FR
9/67
9/69
9/67
3RK4320-3GQ
9/69
3RK4320-3GR
9/67
3RK4320-3HQ
3RK4320-3HR
3RK4320-3JQ
3RK4320-3JR
3RK4320-3KQ
3RK4320-3KR
3RK4320-3LQ
3RK4320-3LR
3RK4320-3MQ
3RK4320-3MR
3RK4320-3NQ
3RK4320-3NR
3RK4320-3PQ
3RK4320-3PR
9/69
9/67
9/69
9/67
9/69
9/67
9/69
9/67
9/69
9/67
9/69
9/67
9/69
9/67
3RK4320-5
9/70
3RK434
9/66
2/29, 2/34, 2/77
3RR21
10/74
3RR22
10/74
3RR24
10/82
3RR29
10/75, 10/83
3RS
3RS100
10/153
3RS101
10/153
3RS102
10/153
3RS103
10/153
3RS104
10/156, 10/158
3RS110
10/153
3RS112
10/153
3RS114
10/156
3RS1440
10/168
3RS1441
10/170
3RS15
10/168
3RS17
10/185, 10/186
3RS18
5/52
3RS2040
10/156
3RS2041
10/158
3RS21
10/156
16
3RK2200-0CQ
2/101
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/51
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
3RT10
Page
3RT1064-2N
3/88
3RT1034-1A
3/83
3RT1064-6A
3/87
3RT1034-1B
3/85
3RT1064-6N
3/88
3RT1034-3A
3/83
3RT1064-6P
3/89
3RT1034-3B
3/85
3RT1065-2A
3/87
3RT1035-1A
3/83
3RT1065-2N
3/88
3RT1035-1B
3/85
3RT1065-6A
3/87
3RT1035-1X
4/51
3RT1065-6N
3/88
3RT1035-3A
3/83
3RT1065-6P
3/89
3RT1035-3B
3/85
3RT1066-2A
3/87
3RT1035-3K
4/50
3RT1066-2N
3/88
3RT1035-3X
4/51
3RT1066-6A
3/87
3RT1036-1A
3/83
3RT1066-6N
3/88
3RT1036-1B
3/85
3RT1066-6P
3/89
3RT1036-1X
4/51
3RT1075-2A
3/87
3RT1036-3A
3/83
3RT1075-2N
3/88
3RT1036-3B
3/85
3RT1075-6A
3/87
3RT1036-3K
4/50
3RT1075-6N
3/88
3RT1036-3X
4/51
3RT1075-6P
3/89
3RT1044-1A
3/84
3RT1076-2A
3/87
3RT1044-1B
3/86
3RT1076-2N
3/88
3RT1044-1X
4/51
3RT1076-6A
3/87
3RT1044-3A
3/84
3RT1076-6N
3/88
3RT1044-3B
3/86
3RT1076-6P
3/89
3RT1044-3K
4/50
3RT12
3RT1044-3X
4/51
3RT12
3RT1045-1A
3/84
3RT13
3RT1045-1B
3/86
3RT1336-1A
4/19
3RT1045-1X
4/51
3RT1336-1B
4/20
3RT1045-3A
3/84
3RT1344-1A
4/19
3RT1045-3B
3/86
3RT1344-1B
4/20
3RT1045-3K
4/50
3RT1346-1A
4/19
3RT1045-3X
4/51
3RT1346-1B
4/20
3RT1046-1A
3/84
3RT14
3RT1046-1B
3/86
3RT1446-1A
4/10
3RT1046-1X
4/51
3RT1446-1B
4/10
3RT1046-3A
3/84
3RT145
4/11
3RT1046-3B
3/86
3RT146
4/11
3RT1046-3K
4/50
3RT147
4/11
3RT1046-3X
4/51
3RT15
3RT1054-1A
3/87
3RT1535-1A
4/39
3/88
3RT1535-1B
4/39
3RT1054-1P
3/89
3RT16
3RT1054-3A
3/87
3RT1054-1N
3RT1054-3N
3RT1055-2A
16
Article No.
3/88
3/87
3RT1055-2N
3/88
3RT1055-6A
3/87
3/95
3RT161
4/43
3RT162
4/43
3RT164
4/43
3RT19
3RT1900-1SB1
3/111, 6/70
3RT1900-1SB2
3/111, 6/17, 6/34, 6/70, 7/99, 7/109,

7/119, 7/130, 7/150, 9/24, 9/30,
10/67, 10/122, 10/159, 10/180, 11/30
3RT1055-6N
3/88
3RT1055-6P
3/89
3RT1056-2A
3/87
3RT1900-1SB5
2/88
3RT1056-2N
3/88
3RT1900-1SB6
3RT1056-6A
3/87
3/111, 6/70, 7/109, 7/130, 10/122,

10/146, 10/159, 10/171, 10/180,
11/30
3RT1056-6N
3/88
3RT1900-1SD
3RT1056-6P
3/89
3/111, 6/70, 7/109, 7/130, 10/122,

10/146, 10/159, 10/171, 10/180,
11/30
3RT1064-2A
3/87
16/52
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Page
Article No.
Page
3RT1900-4
3/61, 8/33
3RT1965-6V
3/116
3RT1916-2
3/107
3RT1965-7
3/116
3RT1916-4BA
3/171, 4/68
3RT1966-1
3/108
3RT1916-4BB
3/63, 4/68
3RT1966-4B
3/111, 3/179
3RT1916-4J
3/63, 3/111
3RT1966-4E
3/110, 6/32, 6/65, 7/129, 7/150, 10/21
3RT1916-4K
3/62
3RT1966-4G
3/110, 6/32, 6/65, 7/129, 7/150, 10/21
3RT1916-4R
3/61, 8/33
3RT1966-5A
3/114
3RT1926-1B
3/108, 8/50
3RT1966-5N
3/115
3RT1926-1Q
3/109
3RT1966-6A
3/116
3RT1926-2
3/107, 10/66
3RT1966-6D
3/116
3RT1926-3
3/109
3RT1966-6V
3/116
3RT1926-4B
3/171
3RT1966-7
3/116
3RT1926-4M
3/110
3RT1975-5A
3/114
3RT1926-4P
3/62
3RT1975-5N
3/115
3RT1926-4R
3/61, 8/33
3RT1975-5P
3/115
3RT1934-5A
3/112
3RT1975-6A
3/116
3RT1934-5B
3/113
3RT1975-6V
3/116
3RT1934-6
3/116
3RT1975-7
3/116
3RT1935-5
3/112
3RT1976-6A
3/116
3RT1935-6
3/116
3RT1976-6D
3/116
3RT1936-1
3/108, 8/50
3RT1976-6V
3/116
3RT1936-4BA
3/179
3RT1976-7
3/116
3RT1936-4BB
3/111
3RT20
3RT1936-4E
3/110, 6/16, 6/32, 7/69, 7/109, 7/129
3RT2015-1AB
3/28
3/116
3RT2015-1AF
3/28
3RT1936-7
3/116
3RT2015-1AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT1944-5
3/113
3RT2015-1B
3/33, 3/34
3RT1944-6
3/116
3RT2015-1C
3/29
3RT1945-5
3/113
3RT2015-1F
3/33, 3/34
3RT1945-6
3/116
3RT2015-1H
3/146
3RT1946-4BA
3/179
3RT2015-1J
3/147
3RT1946-4BB
3/111
3RT2015-1K
3/148
3RT1946-4E
3/110, 6/16, 6/32, 7/69, 7/109, 7/129
3RT2015-1M
3/146
3RT1946-4F
3/109, 6/16, 6/32, 7/69
3RT2015-1S
3/148
3RT1946-4G
7/69
3RT2015-1V
3/147
3RT1946-6
3/116
3RT2015-2AB
3/28
3RT1946-7
3/116
3RT2015-2AF
3/28
3/116
3RT2015-2AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT1954-7
3/116
3RT2015-2B
3/33, 3/34
3RT1955-4
3/110, 6/32, 6/65, 7/129, 7/150, 10/21
3RT2015-2C
3/29
3RT1955-5
3/114, 3/115
3RT2015-2F
3/33, 3/34
3RT1955-6
3/116
3RT2015-2H
3/146
3RT1955-7
3/116
3RT2015-2J
3/147
3RT1956-1
3/108
3RT2015-2K
3/148
3RT1956-4B
3/111, 3/179
3RT2015-2M
3/146
3RT1956-4E
3/110, 6/32, 6/65, 7/129, 7/150, 10/21
3RT2015-2S
3/148
3RT1956-4G
3/110, 6/32, 6/65, 7/129, 7/150, 10/21
3RT2015-2V
3/147
3RT1956-6
3/116
3RT2016-1AB
3/28
3RT1956-7
3/116
3RT2016-1AF
3/28
3RT1964-6A
3/116
3RT2016-1AP
3/28, 3/29
3/116
3RT2016-1B
3/33, 3/34
3/116
3RT2016-1C
3/29
3RT1965-5A
3/114
3RT2016-1F
3/33, 3/34
3RT1965-5N
3/115
3RT2016-1H
3/146
3RT1965-5P
3/115
3RT2016-1J
3/147
3RT1965-6A
3/116
3RT2016-1K
3/148
3RT1936-6
3RT1954-6
3RT1964-6V
3RT1964-7
16
Article No.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/53
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
16

Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RT2016-1M
3/146
3RT2023-1AF
3/30
3RT2016-1S
3/148
3RT2023-1AL
3/32
3RT2016-1V
3/147
3RT2023-1AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2016-2AB
3/28
3RT2023-1BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2016-2AF
3/28
3RT2023-1BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2016-2AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT2023-1C
3/32
3RT2016-2B
3/33, 3/34
3RT2023-1F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2016-2C
3/29
3RT2023-1K
3/149
3RT2016-2F
3/33, 3/34
3RT2023-2AB00
3/30
3RT2016-2H
3/146
3RT2023-2AB04
3/31
3RT2016-2J
3/147
3RT2023-2AF
3/30
3RT2016-2K
3/148
3RT2023-2AL
3/32
3RT2016-2M
3/146
3RT2023-2AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2016-2S
3/148
3RT2023-2BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2016-2V
3/147
3RT2023-2BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2017-1AB
3/28
3RT2023-2C
3/32
3RT2017-1AF
3/28
3RT2023-2F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2017-1AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT2023-2K
3/149
3RT2017-1B
3/33, 3/34
3RT2024-1AB00
3/30
3RT2017-1C
3/29
3RT2024-1AB04
3/31
3RT2017-1F
3/33, 3/34
3RT2024-1AF00
3/30
3RT2017-1H
3/146
3RT2024-1AF04
3/31
3RT2017-1J
3/147
3RT2024-1AL
3/32
3RT2017-1K
3/148
3RT2024-1AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2017-1M
3/146
3RT2024-1BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2017-1S
3/148
3RT2024-1BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2017-1V
3/147
3RT2024-1BM
3/35
3RT2017-2AB
3/28
3RT2024-1C
3/32
3RT2017-2AF
3/28
3RT2024-1D
3/36
3RT2017-2AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT2024-1F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2017-2B
3/33, 3/34
3RT2024-1K
3/149
3RT2017-2C
3/29
3RT2024-1N
3/38
3RT2017-2F
3/33, 3/34
3RT2024-2AB00
3/30
3RT2017-2H
3/146
3RT2024-2AB04
3/31
3RT2017-2J
3/147
3RT2024-2AF00
3/30
3RT2017-2K
3/148, 4/47
3RT2024-2AF04
3/31
3RT2017-2L
4/47
3RT2024-2AL
3/32
3RT2017-2M
3/146
3RT2024-2AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2017-2S
3/148
3RT2024-2BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2017-2V
3/147
3RT2024-2BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2018-1AB
3/28
3RT2024-2BM
3/35
3RT2018-1AF
3/28
3RT2024-2C
3/32
3RT2018-1AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT2024-2D
3/36
3RT2018-1B
3/33, 3/34
3RT2024-2F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2018-1C
3/29
3RT2024-2K
3/149
3RT2018-1F
3/33, 3/34
3RT2024-2N
3/38
3RT2018-2AB
3/28
3RT2025-1AB00
3/30
3RT2018-2AF
3/28
3RT2025-1AB04
3/31
3RT2018-2AP
3/28, 3/29
3RT2025-1AF00
3/30
3RT2018-2B
3/33, 3/34
3RT2025-1AF04
3/31
3RT2018-2C
3/29
3RT2025-1AL
3/32
3RT2018-2F
3/33, 3/34
3RT2025-1AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2018-2K
4/47
3RT2025-1BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2018-2L
4/47
3RT2025-1BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2023-1AB00
3/30
3RT2025-1BM
3/35
3RT2023-1AB04
3/31
3RT2025-1C
3/32
16/54
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Page
Article No.
Page
3RT2025-1D
3/36
3RT2027-1BM
3/35
3RT2025-1F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2027-1C
3/32
3RT2025-1K
3/149
3RT2027-1D
3/36
3RT2025-1N
3/38
3RT2027-1F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2025-2AB00
3/30
3RT2027-1K
3/149
3RT2025-2AB04
3/31
3RT2027-1N
3/38
3RT2025-2AF00
3/30
3RT2027-2AB00
3/30
3RT2025-2AF04
3/31
3RT2027-2AB04
3/31
3RT2025-2AL
3/32
3RT2027-2AF00
3/30
3RT2025-2AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2027-2AF04
3/31
3RT2025-2BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2027-2AL
3/32
3RT2025-2BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2027-2AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2025-2BM
3/35
3RT2027-2BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2025-2C
3/32
3RT2027-2BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2025-2D
3/36
3RT2027-2BM
3/35
3RT2025-2F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2027-2C
3/32
3RT2025-2K
3/149, 4/48
3RT2027-2D
3/36
3RT2025-2N
3/38
3RT2027-2F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2025-2X
4/48
3RT2027-2K
3/149, 4/48
3RT2026-1AB00
3/30
3RT2027-2N
3/38
3RT2026-1AB04
3/31
3RT2027-2X
4/48
3RT2026-1AF00
3/30
3RT2028-1AB00
3/30
3RT2026-1AF04
3/31
3RT2028-1AB04
3/31
3RT2026-1AL
3/32
3RT2028-1AF00
3/30
3RT2026-1AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2028-1AF04
3/31
3RT2026-1BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2028-1AL
3/32
3RT2026-1BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2028-1AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2026-1BM
3/35
3RT2028-1BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2026-1C
3/32
3RT2028-1BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2026-1D
3/36
3RT2028-1BM
3/35
3RT2026-1F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2028-1C
3/32
3RT2026-1K
3/149
3RT2028-1F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2026-1N
3/38
3RT2028-1N
3/38
3RT2026-2AB00
3/30
3RT2028-2AB00
3/30
3RT2026-2AB04
3/31
3RT2028-2AB04
3/31
3RT2026-2AF00
3/30
3RT2028-2AF00
3/30
3RT2026-2AF04
3/31
3RT2028-2AF04
3/31
3RT2026-2AL
3/32
3RT2028-2AL
3/32
3RT2026-2AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2028-2AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2026-2BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2028-2BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2026-2BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2028-2BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2026-2BM
3/35
3RT2028-2BM
3/35
3RT2026-2C
3/32
3RT2028-2C
3/32
3RT2026-2D
3/36
3RT2028-2F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2026-2F
3/35, 3/36
3RT2028-2N
3/38
3RT2026-2K
3/149, 4/48
3RT2028-2X
4/48
3RT2026-2N
3/38
3RT23
3RT2026-2X
4/48
3RT2316-1A
4/15
3RT2027-1AB00
3/30
3RT2316-1B
4/16
3RT2027-1AB04
3/31
3RT2316-2A
4/15
3/30
3RT2316-2B
4/16
3/31
3RT2317-1A
4/15
3RT2027-1AL
3/32
3RT2317-1B
4/16
3RT2027-1AP
3/30, 3/31
3RT2317-2A
4/15
3RT2027-1BB40
3/35, 3/37
3RT2317-2B
4/16
3RT2027-1BB44
3/35, 3/36
3RT2325-1A
4/15
3RT2027-1AF00
3RT2027-1AF04
16
Article No.
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/55
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RT2325-1B
4/16
3RT2926-4BA
3/171
3RT2325-2A
4/15
3RT2926-4BB
3/63
3RT2325-2B
4/16
3RT2926-4E
3/61
3RT2326-1A
4/15
3RT2926-4M
3/60
3RT2326-1B
4/16
3RT2926-4R
3/61
3RT2326-2A
4/15
3RT2926-5
3/64
3RT2326-2B
4/16
3RU11
3RT2327-1A
4/15
3RU1136-1HB
7/105
3RT2327-1B
4/16
3RU1136-1HD
7/107
3RT2327-2A
4/15
3RU1136-1JB
7/105
4/16
3RU1136-1JD
7/107
3RU1136-1KB
7/105
3RT2327-2B
3RT25
3RT2516-1A
4/35
3RU1136-1KD
7/107
3RT2516-1B
4/36
3RU1136-4AB
7/105
3RT2516-2A
4/35
3RU1136-4AD
7/107
3RT2516-2B
4/36
3RU1136-4BB
7/105
3RT2517-1A
4/35
3RU1136-4BD
7/107
3RT2517-1B
4/36
3RU1136-4DB
7/105
3RT2517-2A
4/35
3RU1136-4DD
7/107
3RT2517-2B
4/36
3RU1136-4EB0
7/105
3RT2518-1A
4/35
3RU1136-4EB1
7/106
3RT2518-1B
4/36
3RU1136-4ED
7/107
3RT2518-2A
4/35
3RU1136-4FB0
7/105
3RT2518-2B
4/36
3RU1136-4FB1
7/106
3RT2526-1A
4/35
3RU1136-4FD
7/107
3RT2526-1B
4/36
3RU1136-4GB0
7/105
3RT2526-2A
4/35
3RU1136-4GB1
7/106
3RT2526-2B
4/36
3RU1136-4GD
7/107
3RU1136-4HB0
7/105
16
3RT29
3RT2900-1SB1
3/63, 6/116, 6/119
3RU1136-4HB1
7/106
3RT2900-1SB2
3/63, 6/17, 6/34, 6/116, 6/119, 7/99,

7/109, 7/119, 7/130, 7/150, 8/39,
8/73, 10/75, 10/83, 10/146, 10/171,
11/21
3RU1136-4HD
7/107
3RU1146-4DB
7/105
3RU1146-4DD
7/107
3RT2900-1SB6
3/63, 6/116, 6/119
3RU1146-4EB
7/105
3RT2916-1B
3/59, 5/13, 8/34
3RU1146-4ED
7/107
3RT2916-1C
3/59, 5/13, 8/34
3RU1146-4FB
7/105
3RT2916-1D
3/59, 5/13, 8/34
3RU1146-4FD
7/107
3RT2916-1E
3/59, 5/13, 8/34
3RU1146-4HB
7/105
3RT2916-1G
3/60, 5/13
3RU1146-4HD
7/107
3RT2916-1J
3/59, 5/13
3RU1146-4JB0
7/105
3RT2916-1L
3/59, 5/13
3RU1146-4JB1
7/106
3RT2916-1P
3/60
3RU1146-4JD
7/107
3RT2916-2
3/58, 5/14
3RU1146-4KB0
7/105
3RT2916-4B
3/171
3RU1146-4KB1
7/106
3RT2916-4E
3/61, 7/98
3RU1146-4KD
7/107
3RT2916-4J
3/63, 5/14, 6/116
3RU1146-4LB0
7/105
3RT2916-4M
3/60, 3/61, 5/14
3RU1146-4LB1
7/106
3RT2924
3/64
3RU1146-4LD
7/107
3RT2926-1B
3/59, 8/34
3RU1146-4MB0
7/105
3RT2926-1C
3/59, 8/34
3RU1146-4MB1
7/106
3RT2926-1E
3/59, 8/34
3RU1146-4MD
7/107
3RT2926-1J
3/59
3RU19
3RT2926-1M
3/59
3RU1900-1A
6/33, 7/108, 7/129
3RT2926-1Q
3/60
3RU1900-1B
6/33, 7/109, 7/129
3RT2926-2
3/58
3RU1900-1C
6/33, 7/109, 7/129
3RT2926-3
3/58
3RU1900-2
6/33, 7/98, 7/109
16/56
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RU193
7/108
3RU2116-1DB1
7/96
3RU194
7/108
3RU2116-1DC0
7/95
3RU2116-1DC1
7/96
3RU21
7/95
3RU2116-1EB0
7/95
3RU2116-0AB1
7/96
3RU2116-1EB1
7/96
3RU2116-0AC0
7/95
3RU2116-1EC0
7/95
3RU2116-0AC1
7/96
3RU2116-1EC1
7/96
3RU2116-0BB0
7/95
3RU2116-1FB0
7/95
3RU2116-0BB1
7/96
3RU2116-1FB1
7/96
3RU2116-0BC0
7/95
3RU2116-1FC0
7/95
3RU2116-0BC1
7/96
3RU2116-1FC1
7/96
3RU2116-0CB0
7/95
3RU2116-1GB0
7/95
3RU2116-0CB1
7/96
3RU2116-1GB1
7/96
3RU2116-0CC0
7/95
3RU2116-1GC0
7/95
3RU2116-0CC1
7/96
3RU2116-1GC1
7/96
3RU2116-0DB0
7/95
3RU2116-1HB0
7/95
3RU2116-0DB1
7/96
3RU2116-1HB1
7/96
3RU2116-0DC0
7/95
3RU2116-1HC0
7/95
3RU2116-0DC1
7/96
3RU2116-1HC1
7/96
3RU2116-0EB0
7/95
3RU2116-1JB0
7/95
3RU2116-0EB1
7/96
3RU2116-1JB1
7/96
3RU2116-0EC0
7/95
3RU2116-1JC0
7/95
3RU2116-0EC1
7/96
3RU2116-1JC1
7/96
3RU2116-0FB0
7/95
3RU2116-1KB0
7/95
3RU2116-0FB1
7/96
3RU2116-1KB1
7/96
3RU2116-0FC0
7/95
3RU2116-1KC0
7/95
3RU2116-0FC1
7/96
3RU2116-1KC1
7/96
3RU2116-0GB0
7/95
3RU2116-4AB0
7/95
3RU2116-0GB1
7/96
3RU2116-4AB1
7/96
3RU2116-0GC0
7/95
3RU2116-4AC0
7/95
3RU2116-0GC1
7/96
3RU2116-4AC1
7/96
3RU2116-0HB0
7/95
3RU2126-1
7/95
3RU2116-0HB1
7/96
3RU2126-4
7/95, 7/96
3RU2116-0HC0
7/95
3RU29
3RU2116-0HC1
7/96
3RU290
7/97
3RU2116-0JB0
7/95
3RU291
7/97, 7/98, 7/118, 10/75, 10/83
3RU2116-0JB1
7/96
3RU292
7/97, 7/98, 7/118, 10/75, 10/83
3RU2116-0JC0
7/95
3RV10
3RU2116-0JC1
7/96
3RV103
7/55
3RU2116-0KB0
7/95
3RV104
7/55
3RU2116-0KB1
7/96
3RV106
7/78
3RU2116-0KC0
7/95
3RV107
7/78
3RU2116-0KC1
7/96
3RV108
7/78
3RU2116-1AB0
7/95
3RV11
3RU2116-1AB1
7/96
3RV113
7/56
7/95
3RV114
7/56
3RU2116-1AC1
7/96
3RV13
3RU2116-1BB0
7/95
3RV133
7/57
3RU2116-1BB1
7/96
3RV134
7/57
3RU2116-1BC0
7/95
3RV135
7/79
3RU2116-1BC1
7/96
3RV136
7/79
3RU2116-1CB0
7/95
3RV137
7/79
3RU2116-1CB1
7/96
3RV138
7/79
3RU2116-1CC0
7/95
3RV14
3RU2116-1CC1
7/96
3RU2116-1DB0
7/95
3RU2116-1AC0
3RV14
16
3RU2116-0AB0
7/58
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/57
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
3RV16
Page
3RV2011-0BA10
7/19
3RV1611-0
7/59
3RV2011-0BA15
7/20
3RV1611-1
7/61
3RV2011-0BA20
7/19
3RV2011-0BA25
7/20
3RV2011-0CA10
7/19
3RV2011-0CA15
7/20
3RV17
7/60
3RV17
3RV19
3RV1901-0
7/63
3RV2011-0CA20
7/19
3RV1901-1
7/59, 7/61, 7/63, 8/50
3RV2011-0CA25
7/20
3RV1901-2
7/63
3RV2011-0DA10
7/19
3RV1902-1AB0
7/64
3RV2011-0DA15
7/20
3RV1902-1AB4
7/64
3RV2011-0DA20
7/19
3RV1902-1AF
7/64
3RV2011-0DA25
7/20
3RV1902-1AM
7/64
3RV2011-0EA10
7/19
3RV1902-1AP
7/64, 8/50
3RV2011-0EA15
7/20
3RV1902-1AS
7/64
3RV2011-0EA20
7/19
3RV1902-1AV
7/64
3RV2011-0EA25
7/20
3RV1902-1DB
7/64
3RV2011-0FA10
7/19
3RV1902-1DF
7/64
3RV2011-0FA15
7/20
3RV1902-1DP
7/64, 8/50
3RV2011-0FA20
7/19
3RV1902-1DS
7/64
3RV2011-0FA25
7/20
3RV1902-1DV
7/64
3RV2011-0GA10
7/19
3RV1903
7/39, 7/72
3RV2011-0GA15
7/20
3RV1908
7/69
3RV2011-0GA20
7/19
3RV1915-1
3/171, 7/30, 8/71
3RV2011-0GA25
7/20
3RV1915-2
7/30
3RV2011-0HA10
7/19
3RV1915-3
7/30
3RV2011-0HA15
7/20
3RV1915-6
7/30, 8/71
3RV2011-0HA20
7/19
3RV1917
7/43
3RV2011-0HA25
7/20
3RV1921
7/64
3RV2011-0JA10
7/19
3RV1922
7/64
3RV2011-0JA15
7/20
3RV1923
7/38, 7/39, 7/72
3RV2011-0JA20
7/19
3RV1925
8/71
3RV2011-0JA25
7/20
3RV1927
7/42
3RV2011-0KA10
7/19
3RV1933
7/72
3RV2011-0KA15
7/20
3RV1935-1
3/179, 7/65
3RV2011-0KA20
7/19
3RV1935-3
7/65
3RV2011-0KA25
7/20
3RV1935-5
3/179, 7/66
3RV2011-1AA10
7/19
3RV1935-6
7/66
3RV2011-1AA15
7/20
3RV1936
7/68
3RV2011-1AA20
7/19
3RV1938
7/64
3RV2011-1AA25
7/20
3RV194
7/68
3RV2011-1BA10
7/19
3RV1952
7/80
3RV2011-1BA15
7/20
3RV1955
7/81
3RV2011-1BA20
7/19
3RV1956
7/81
3RV2011-1BA25
7/20
3RV196
7/81
3RV2011-1CA10
7/19
3RV1975
7/81
3RV2011-1CA15
7/20
3RV1976
7/81
3RV2011-1CA20
7/19
3RV1982
7/80
3RV2011-1CA25
7/20
3RV1985
7/81
3RV2011-1DA10
7/19
3RV1986
7/81
3RV2011-1DA15
7/20
3RV199
7/80
3RV2011-1DA20
7/19
3RV2011-1DA25
7/20
3RV2011-1EA10
7/19
3RV2011-1EA15
7/20
3RV2011-1EA20
7/19
3RV2011-1EA25
7/20
3RV20
16
Article No.
3RV2011-0AA10
7/19
3RV2011-0AA15
7/20
3RV2011-0AA20
7/19
3RV2011-0AA25
7/20
16/58
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RV2011-1FA10
7/19
3RV2902-1DS
7/28
3RV2011-1FA15
7/20
3RV2902-1DV
7/28
3RV2011-1FA20
7/19
3RV2908
7/34, 7/98
3RV2011-1FA25
7/20
3RV2915
7/30, 8/71
3RV2011-1GA10
7/19
3RV2917-1
7/42
3RV2011-1GA15
7/20
3RV2917-4
7/42
3RV2011-1GA20
7/19
3RV2917-5
7/42, 7/43, 8/82
3RV2011-1GA25
7/20
3RV2917-6
7/43
3RV2011-1HA10
7/19
3RV2917-7
7/42
3RV2011-1HA15
7/20
3RV2921
7/27
3RV2011-1HA20
7/19
3RV2922
7/28
3RV2011-1HA25
7/20
3RV2925
3/171, 6/16, 6/32, 7/30, 8/71
3RV2011-1JA10
7/19
3RV2926
7/32, 7/68, 8/72
3RV2011-1JA15
7/20
3RV2927-5
7/42
3RV2011-1JA20
7/19
3RV2927-7
7/42
3RV2011-1JA25
7/20
3RV2928-0
7/34, 8/37
3RV2011-1KA10
7/19
3RV2928-1A
7/27
3RV2011-1KA15
7/20
3RV2928-1H
7/34, 8/70
3RV2011-1KA20
7/19
3RV2928-1K
7/34
3RV2011-1KA25
7/20
3RV2928-4
7/34, 7/98
3RV2011-4AA10
7/19
3RV293
7/68
3RV2011-4AA15
7/20
3RV294
7/68
3RV2011-4AA20
7/19
3RW30
3RV2011-4AA25
7/20
3RW300
6/15
7/19
3RW301
6/15
3RV2021-1
7/19
3RW302
6/15
3RV2021-4
7/19, 7/20
3RW303
6/15
3RW304
6/15
3RV2021-0
3RV21
3RV211
7/21
3RW40
3RV212
7/21
3RW4024-.B
6/26
3RW4024-.T
6/27
3RV23
3RV231
7/22
3RW4026-.B
6/26, 6/29
3RV232
7/22
3RW4026-.T
6/27, 6/30
3RW4027-.B
6/26, 6/29
3RV24
3RV241
7/23
3RW4027-.T
6/27, 6/30
3RV242
7/23
3RW4028-.B
6/26
3RW4028-.T
6/27
3RV27
3RV271
7/24
3RW4036-.B
6/26, 6/29
3RV272
7/24
3RW4036-.T
6/27, 6/30
3RW4037-.B
6/26, 6/29
3RV28
3RV281
7/25
3RW4037-.T
6/27, 6/30
3RV282
7/25
3RW4038-.B
6/26
3RW4038-.T
6/27
3RW4046-.B
6/26
3RW4046-.T
6/27
3RW4047-.B
6/26, 6/29
3RW4047-.T
6/27, 6/30
3RW405
6/28, 6/31
3RW407
6/28, 6/31
3RV29
3RV2901-0
7/27
3RV2901-1
7/27, 8/32
3RV2901-2
7/27, 8/32
3RV2902
7/28, 8/32
3RV2902-1AB
7/28
3RV2902-1AF
7/28
3RV2902-1AM
7/28
3RW44
3RV2902-1AP
7/28, 8/32
3RW4422-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57
3RV2902-1AS
7/28
3RW4422-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58
3RV2902-1AV
7/28
3RW4422-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RV2902-1DB
7/28
3RW4423-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RV2902-1DF
7/28
3RW4423-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RV2902-1DP
7/28, 8/32
3RW4423-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53
Siemens IC 10 2014
16
16/59
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3RW4424-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RW4465-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RW4424-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RW4466-.BC.4
6/48, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RW4424-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RW4466-.BC.5
6/49, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RW4425-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RW4466-.BC.6
6/50, 6/56
3RW4425-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RW49
3RW4425-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RW4900-0A
6/64
3RW4426-.BC.4
6/48, 6/57
3RW4900-0K
6/64, 14/8
3RW4426-.BC.5
6/49, 6/58
3RW4900-0N
6/64, 14/8
3RW4426-.BC.6
6/50
3RW4900-0P
6/32
3RW4427-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RW492
6/33
6/49, 6/52, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RW493
6/34, 6/65
6/50, 6/53
3RW494
6/33, 6/34, 6/65
3RW4434-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59
3RW495
6/65
3RW4434-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60
3RW496
6/65
3RW4434-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RX
3RW4435-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RX90
2/78, 9/58
3RW4435-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RX95
2/71, 2/73
3RW4435-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RX98
3RW4436-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
2/56, 2/63, 2/80, 2/82, 2/85, 2/86,

9/20, 9/21, 9/26, 9/29 ... 31, 9/33
3RW4436-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RW4436-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53
3RW4443-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3RW4443-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3RW4443-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3RW4444-.BC.4
6/48, 6/57, 6/59
3SB2
3RW4444-.BC.5
6/49, 6/58, 6/60
3SB2000-0
13/9
3RW4444-.BC.6
6/50
3SB2000-1
13/9
3RW4445-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3SB2000-2
13/9
3RW4445-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3SB2000-4
13/10
3RW4445-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53
3SB2001-0
13/9
3RW4446-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57
3SB2001-6
13/10
3RW4446-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58
3SB2202-0
13/7
3RW4446-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3SB2202-2
13/8
3RW4447-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3SB2202-4
13/8
3RW4447-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3SB2203
13/7
3RW4447-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3SB2204
13/8
3RW4453-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3SB2206
13/7
3RW4453-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3SB2207
13/7
3RW4453-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3SB221
13/8
3RW4454-.BC.4
6/48, 6/57
3SB222
13/7, 13/8
3RW4454-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/58
3SB23
13/11
3RW4454-.BC.6
6/50
3SB2404-0
13/11
3RW4455-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3SB2404-3
13/11
3RW4455-.BC.5
6/49, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3SB245
13/12
3RW4455-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53, 6/56
3SB2901-2
13/17
3RW4456-.BC.4
6/48, 6/57
3SB2901-4
13/13, 13/14
3RW4456-.BC.5
6/49, 6/58
3SB2901-5
13/15
3RW4456-.BC.6
6/50
3SB2901-7
13/16
3RW4457-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/57, 6/59
3SB2902-0AA
13/19
3RW4457-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/58, 6/60
3SB2902-0AB
13/17
3RW4457-.BC.6
6/50, 6/53
3SB2908-0AA
13/11
6/48, 6/54, 6/57, 6/61
3SB2908-0AB
13/12
3RW4458-.BC.5
6/49, 6/55, 6/58, 6/62
3SB2908-1
13/18, 13/82
3RW4458-.BC.6
6/50, 6/56
3SB2908-2
13/18, 13/19, 13/82
3RW4465-.BC.4
6/48, 6/51, 6/54, 6/57, 6/59, 6/61
3SB2908-3
13/19
3RW4465-.BC.5
6/49, 6/52, 6/55, 6/58, 6/60, 6/62
3SB2908-8
13/19
3RW4427-.BC.5
3RW4427-.BC.6
16
3RW4458-.BC.4
16/60
Siemens IC 10 2014
3SB1
3SB10
13/31
3SB12
13/32, 13/33
3SB14
13/34
3SB19
13/34, 13/73, 13/75 ... 77,

13/81 ... 85, 13/87, 13/95, 13/97
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3SB291
13/18
3SB3205
13/27
3SB3206
13/27
3SB30
3SB3000-0A
13/35
3SB3207
13/27
3SB3000-0B
13/35
3SB3208
13/28
3SB3000-0C
13/35
3SB321
13/28
3SB3000-0D
13/35
3SB323
13/31
3SB3000-0E
6/33, 7/97, 7/108, 7/118, 7/129, 13/31
3SB324
13/26, 13/30
3SB3000-1A
13/41
3SB325
13/26, 13/27, 13/30
3SB3000-1B
13/41
3SB326
13/29
3SB3000-1C
13/37
3SB33
3SB3000-1D
13/36
3SB3301-0
13/44
3SB3000-1E
13/37
3SB3301-1
13/45
3SB3000-1F
13/41
3SB3302
13/44
3SB3000-1G
13/36
3SB3303
13/44, 13/45
3SB3000-1H
13/41
3SB3304
13/45
3SB3000-1K
13/41
3SB3305
13/44
3SB3000-1L
13/41
3SB3306
13/44
3SB3000-1M
13/41
3SB3307
13/44
3SB3000-1Q
13/36
3SB3344
13/45
3SB3000-1R
13/37
3SB3345
13/44
3SB3000-1T
13/41
3SB3346
13/44
3SB3000-2
13/38
3SB3347
13/44
3SB3000-3
13/39, 13/40
3SB3352
13/45
3SB3000-4
13/39, 13/40
3SB3353
13/44
3SB3000-5
13/39, 13/40
3SB3354
13/44
3SB3000-7
13/42
3SB3355
13/44
3SB3001-0
13/35
3SB34
3SB3001-1
13/36, 13/37
3SB3400-0
13/65
3SB3001-2
13/38
3SB3400-1
13/66
3SB3001-6
13/42
3SB3400-2
13/65
3SB3400-3
13/66
3SB31
3SB3100-8AC2
13/43
3SB3403
13/67
3SB3100-8AC3
13/43
3SB341
13/68
3SB3100-8AC6
13/28, 13/43
3SB3420
13/93
3SB3100-8C
13/43
3SB3423-0
13/94
3SB3101
13/42
3SB3423-1
13/94
3SB3110-0
13/46
3SB3423-2
13/94
3SB3110-1
13/49
3SB35
3SB3110-2
13/47
3SB3500-0
13/55
3SB3110-3
13/48
3SB3500-1
13/56, 13/63
3SB3110-4
13/48
3SB3500-2
13/57 ... 60
3SB3110-5
13/48
3SB3500-3
13/57 ... 62
3SB3111-0
13/46
3SB3500-4
13/61, 13/62
3SB3111-2
13/47
3SB3500-5
13/61, 13/62
13/49
3SB3501-0
13/55
3SB3501-1
13/56
3SB3111-6
3SB32
13/26
3SB3501-2
13/57 ... 60
3SB3201-1
13/27, 13/29
3SB3501-3
13/57 ... 60
3SB3201-2
13/28
3SB3501-6
13/64
3SB3201-4
13/28
3SB36
3SB3202-0
13/26
3SB3601-0
13/50
3SB3202-2
13/28
3SB3601-1
13/51, 13/53
3SB3202-4
13/28
3SB3601-2
13/52
3SB3203-0
13/26
3SB3601-4
13/52
13/27, 13/29
3SB3602-0
13/50
13/30
3SB3602-2
13/52
3SB3203-1
3SB3204
16
3SB3201-0
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/61
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3SB3602-4
13/52
3SB388
13/92
3SB3603-0
13/50
3SB39
3SB3603-1
13/51, 13/53
3SB3901-0AA
13/68, 13/87
3SB3604
13/54
3SB3901-0AB
13/68, 13/86, 13/97
3SB3605
13/51
3SB3901-0AC
13/68, 13/86, 13/97
3SB3606
13/51
3SB3901-0AG
13/93
3SB3607
13/51
3SB3901-0AH
13/93
3SB3608
13/52
3SB3901-0AJ
13/93
3SB3610
13/52
3SB3901-0AQ
13/101
3SB3611
13/53
3SB3901-0AW
13/68, 13/86, 13/94, 13/97
13/54
3SB3901-0CB
13/87
13/50, 13/51
3SB3901-0CG
13/87
3SB3646
13/50, 13/51
3SB3901-0CH
13/85
3SB3647
13/50, 13/51
3SB3901-0CK
13/97
3SB3648
13/54
3SB3901-0CL
13/97
3SB3650
13/50
3SB3901-0CM
13/97
3SB3651
13/50
3SB3901-0CN
13/97
3SB3652
13/54
3SB3901-0CP
13/97
3SB3653
13/50
3SB3901-0CQ
13/97
3SB3654
13/50
3SB3901-0CS
13/97
3SB3655
13/50
3SB3901-0CT
13/97
3SB3657
13/50
3SB3901-0CU
13/97
3SB366
13/53
3SB3901-1B
13/81
3SB3901-1C
13/81
3SB3644
3SB3645
16
3SB38
3SB3801-0AA
13/91
3SB3901-1D
13/81
3SB3801-0AB
13/91
3SB3901-1P
13/81
3SB3801-0AD
13/91
3SB3901-1Q
13/81
3SB3801-0AZ
13/92
3SB3901-1R
13/18, 13/82
3SB3801-0D
13/89
3SB3901-1S
13/18, 13/82
3SB3801-0E
13/89
3SB3901-1T
13/18, 13/82
3SB3801-1
13/92
3SB3901-1U
13/18, 13/82
3SB3801-2
13/90 ... 92
3SB3901-1V
13/18, 13/82
3SB3801-3
13/92
3SB3901-2
13/72
3SB3802-0AA
13/91
3SB3902-1A
13/75
3SB3802-0AZ
13/92
3SB3902-1B
13/75
3SB3802-0D
13/89
3SB3902-1E
13/75
3SB3802-1
13/92
3SB3902-1M
13/76
3SB3802-2
13/90 ... 92
3SB3902-1N
13/76
3SB3802-3
13/92
3SB3902-2
13/72
3SB3803-0AA
13/91
3SB3903-1
13/76
3SB3803-0AZ
13/92
3SB3903-2
13/72
3SB3803-0D
13/89
3SB3905-1
13/77
3SB3803-1
13/92
3SB3905-2
13/72
3SB3803-2
13/90 ... 92
3SB3906-1
13/95
3SB3803-3
13/92
3SB3906-2
13/72
3SB3804-0AA
13/91
3SB391
13/82
3SB3804-0AZ
13/92
3SB392
13/43, 13/78, 13/83 ... 87, 13/97
3SB3804-1
13/92
3SB393
13/80, 13/86
3SB3804-2
13/91, 13/92
3SB394
13/73, 13/78, 13/83 ... 85, 13/87
3SB3804-3
13/92
3SB395
13/80, 13/86
3SB3806-0AA
13/91
3SE22
3SB3806-0AZ
13/92
3SE224
12/68
3SB3806-1
13/92
3SE225
12/68
3SB3806-2
13/91, 13/92
3SE228
12/81
3SB3806-3
13/92
3SE29
3SB386
13/101
3SE29
16/62
Siemens IC 10 2014
13/108
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Page
3SE3
3SE3
13/108
3SE50
3SE5000-0AA0
Article No.
Page
3SE5160
12/57
3SE5162
12/44, 12/45, 12/49, ,12/50, 12/56
3SE52
12/23, 12/31, 12/39, 12/43, 12/46,
12/51, 12/89
3SE5000-0AA1
12/23, 12/31, 12/39, 12/43, 12/46,

12/51, 12/89
3SE5000-0AA2
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/30, 12/35,

12/39, 12/43, 12/46, 12/48, 12/85,
12/87, 12/89
3SE5000-0AA3
12/19, 12/27, 12/30, 12/35, 12/48,

12/85, 12/87
3SE5000-0AA5
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/35, 12/39,

12/43, 12/46
3SE5210
12/57
3SE5212
12/32 ... 34, 12/47, 12/48, 12/56,

12/65, 12/79
3SE5214
12/32, 12/34
3SE5230
12/57
3SE5232
12/14 ... 18, 12/28, 12/29, 12/56,

12/63, 12/78
3SE5234
12/15 ... 18, 12/28, 12/63
3SE5240
12/57
3SE5242
12/24 ... 26, 12/28, 12/29, 12/56,

12/63
3SE5000-0AA6
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/30, 12/31,

12/35, 12/39, 12/43, 12/46, 12/48,
12/51, 12/85, 12/87, 12/89
3SE5244
12/25
3SE5000-0AA8
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/35, 12/39,

12/43, 12/46
3SE5250-0A
12/54
3SE5250-0B
12/54
12/23, 12/34, 12/39, 12/42, 12/45,

12/87, 12/88
3SE5250-0C
12/54
3SE5250-0K
12/54
3SE5250-0L
12/54
3SE5250-0M
12/54
3SE5250-0P
12/54
3SE5000-0AB
3SE5000-0AC
3SE5000-0AD
3SE5000-0AE
12/23, 12/31, 12/39, 12/42, 12/45,

12/51, 12/56, 12/88
12/19, 12/23, 12/26, 12/30, 12/31,
12/34, 12/35, 12/39, 12/42, 12/45,
12/48, 12/51, 12/85, 12/87, 12/88
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/30, 12/31,
12/35, 12/39, 12/42, 12/45, 12/48,
12/51, 12/85, 12/87, 12/89
3SE53
3SE531
12/74
3SE532
12/73
3SE5000-0AF
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/30, 12/35,

12/39, 12/42, 12/45, 12/48, 12/51,
12/85, 12/87, 12/89
3SE54
3SE5000-0AH
12/39, 12/43, 12/46, 12/51, 12/89
3SE6
3SE5000-0AJ
12/23, 12/31
3SE63
12/104
3SE5000-0AK
12/19, 12/27, 12/30, 12/35, 12/48,

12/85, 12/87
3SE66
12/100
3SE67
12/100
12/19, 12/23, 12/27, 12/35, 12/39,

12/42, 12/45
3SE68
12/100
3SE5000-0AR
3SE5000-0AT
12/39, 12/43, 12/46, 12/89
3SE5000-0AU
12/78, 12/79, 12/97, 12/98
3SE5000-0AV
12/67, 12/75, 12/93
3SE5000-0AW
12/67, 12/93
3SE5000-0B
12/56
3SE5000-0C
12/56
3SE5000-0G
12/56
3SE5000-0K
12/56
3SE5000-0L
12/56
3SE5000-0M
12/56
3SE5000-0N
12/56
3SE5000-0P
12/56
3SE505
12/54
3SE506
12/56
3SE51
3SE54
12/53
3SE7
3SE71
13/103
3SE73
13/104
3SE79
13/105
3SF
3SF1114-1K
12/88
3SF1114-1L
12/88, 12/98
3SF1114-1Q
12/92
3SF1124-1K
12/88
3SF1124-1L
12/88, 12/98
3SF1124-1Q
12/92
3SF1214-1K
12/86
3SF1214-1L
12/86, 12/98
3SF1214-1Q
12/92
3SF1234-1K
12/84
3SF1234-1L
12/84, 12/97
3SF1234-1Q
12/91
3SF1244-1K
12/84
3SE5110
12/57
3SE5112
12/36 ... 38, 12/49, 12/50, 12/56,

12/66, 12/79
3SE5114
12/36 ... 38, 12/66
3SF1244-1L
12/84, 12/97
3SE5115
12/38, 12/66
3SF1244-1Q
12/91
3SE5120
12/57
3SF131
12/96
3SE5122
12/40 ... 42, 12/50, 12/56, 12/66
3SF132
12/95
3SE5130
12/57
3SF2
13/106
3SE5132
12/20 ... 22, 12/31, 12/56, 12/64,

12/78
3SF5
13/69, 13/99, 13/100
3SE5134
12/22
Siemens IC 10 2014
16
Article No.
16/63
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
3SK111
11/16
3TD
3/180
3SK112
11/17
3TE
3/182
3SK121
11/18
3TF
3SK122
11/19
3TF2001-0A
3/141
3SK123
11/19
3TF2001-0B
3/141
3TF2001-3A
3/142
3TF2001-3B
3/142
3TF2001-6A
3/142
3SK
3TD, 3TE
3SR
3SR
13/81
3SX
3SX133
6/33, 7/97, 7/108, 7/118, 7/129, 13/87
3TF2001-6B
3/142
3SX134
13/81
3TF2001-7A
3/142
3SX1701
13/81
3TF2001-7B
3/142
3SX1702
13/81
3TF2010-0A
3/141
3SX1703
13/81
3TF2010-0B
3/141
3SX1707
13/87
3TF2010-3A
3/142
3SX173
13/81
3TF2010-3B
3/142
3SX321
12/68
3TF2010-6A
3/142
3SX322
12/68, 12/81
3TF2010-6B
3/142
3SX323
12/68, 12/81, 13/105
3TF2010-7A
3/142
3SX325
12/68
3TF2010-7B
3/142
3SX326
12/100
3TF2211-0A
3/141
3SX5100-1A
12/14
3TF2211-0B
3/141
3SX5100-1F
12/75
3TF2222-0A
3/141
3SX5100-3
12/56
3TF2222-0B
3/141
3SX56
12/104
3TF2801-0A
3/141
3SX991
12/55
3TF2801-0B
3/141
3SX992
12/55, 12/67, 12/75
3TF2810-0A
3/141
3TF2810-0B
3/141
3SY
3SY1
13/82
3TF2911-0A
3/141
3SY3
12/55, 12/67, 12/75
3TF2911-0B
3/141
3TF2922-0A
3/141
3TB
3TB5017-0B
3/132
3TF2922-0B
3/141
3TB5017-0L
4/53
3TF6833-1D
3/124
3TB5217-0B
3/132
3TF6833-1Q
3/124
3TB5217-0L
4/53
3TF6833-8D
3/124
3TB5417-0B
3/132
3TF6833-8Q
3/124
3TB5417-0L
4/53
3TF684
3/123
3TB5617-0B
3/132
3TF6933-1D
3/124
3TB5617-0L
4/53
3TF6933-1Q
3/124
3TF6933-8D
3/124
3TF6933-8Q
3/124
3TF694
3/123
3TC
16
Page
3TC4417-0A
4/60
3TC4417-0B
4/60
3TC4417-0L
4/55
3TG
3TC4817-0A
4/60
3TG1001-0A
4/68
3TC4817-0B
4/60
3TG1001-0B
4/68
3TC4817-0L
4/55
3TG1001-1A
4/68
3TC5217-0A
4/60
3TG1001-1B
4/68
3TC5217-0B
4/60
3TG1010-0A
4/68
3TC5217-0L
4/55
3TG1010-0B
4/68
3TC5617-0A
4/60
3TG1010-1A
4/68
3TC5617-0B
4/60
3TG1010-1B
4/68
3TC5617-0L
4/55
3TH2
3TC7414-0
4/61
3TH2022-0A
5/28
3TC7414-1
4/61
3TH2022-0B
5/28
3TC7814-0
4/61
3TH2022-3A
5/29
3TC7814-1
4/61
3TH2022-3B
5/29
16/64
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3TH2022-6A
5/29
3TH4355-0A
5/21
3TH2022-6B
5/29
3TH4355-0B
5/21
3TH2022-7A
5/29
3TH4364-0A
5/21
3TH2022-7B
5/29
3TH4364-0B
5/21
3TH2031-0A
5/28
3TH4373-0A
5/21
3TH2031-0B
5/28
3TH4373-0B
5/21
3TH2031-3A
5/29
3TH4382-0A
5/21
3TH2031-3B
5/29
3TH4382-0B
5/21
3TH2031-6A
5/29
3TH4391-0A
5/21
3TH2031-6B
5/29
3TH4391-0B
5/21
3TH2031-7A
5/29
3TH4394-0A
5/21
3TH2031-7B
5/29
3TH4394-0B
5/21
3TH2040-0A
5/28
3TK
3TH2040-0B
5/28
3TK10
4/23
3TH2040-3A
5/29
3TK11
4/23
3TH2040-3B
5/29
3TK12
4/23
3TH2040-6A
5/29
3TK13
4/23
3TH2040-6B
5/29
3TK14
4/23
3TH2040-7A
5/29
3TK15
4/23
3TH2040-7B
5/29
3TK17
4/23
3TH2244-0A
5/28
3TK191
4/24
3TH2244-0B
5/28
3TK192
4/24
3TH2253-0A
5/28
3TK193
4/24
3TH2253-0B
5/28
3TK194
4/24
5/28
3TK195
4/24
3TH2262-0B
5/28
3TK196
4/24
3TH2271-0A
5/28
3TK197
4/24
3TH2271-0B
5/28
3TK2022-0A
4/31
3TH2280-0A
5/28
3TK2022-0B
4/31
3TH2280-0B
5/28
3TK2022-3A
4/32
3TH2722-0A
5/28
3TK2022-3B
4/32
3TH2722-0B
5/28
3TK2022-6A
4/32
3TH2731-0A
5/28
3TK2022-6B
4/32
3TH2731-0B
5/28
3TK2022-7A
4/32
3TH2740-0A
5/28
3TK2022-7B
4/32
3TH2740-0B
5/28
3TK2031-0A
4/31
3TK2031-0B
4/31
3TH2262-0A
3TH4
3TH4244-0A
5/20
3TK2031-3A
4/32
3TH4244-0B
5/20
3TK2031-3B
4/32
3TH4244-0L
5/38
3TK2031-6A
4/32
3TH4253-0A
5/20
3TK2031-6B
4/32
3TH4253-0B
5/20
3TK2031-7A
4/32
3TH4253-0L
5/38
3TK2031-7B
4/32
3TH4262-0A
5/20
3TK2040-0A
4/31
3TH4262-0B
5/20
3TK2040-0B
4/31
3TH4262-0L
5/38
3TK2040-3A
4/32
3TH4271-0A
5/20
3TK2040-3B
4/32
3TH4271-0B
5/20
3TK2040-6A
4/32
3TH4280-0A
5/20
3TK2040-6B
4/32
3TH4280-0B
5/20
3TK2040-7A
4/32
3TH4293-0A
5/20
3TK2040-7B
4/32
3TH4293-0B
5/20
3TK2810-0A
11/30
3TH4310-0A
5/21
3TK2810-0B
11/29
3TH4310-0B
5/21
3TK2810-0G
11/29
3TH4346-0A
5/21
3TK2810-0J
11/29
3TH4346-0B
5/21
3TK2810-1A
11/30
16
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/65
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3TK2810-1B
11/29, 11/30
3TY2482
4/64
3TK2810-1K
11/29
3TY2520
4/64
3TK2820
10/75, 10/122, 10/159, 10/171, 11/30
3TY2522
4/64
3TK2826-0
11/30
3TY2560
4/64
3TK2826-1
11/24
3TY2562
4/64
3TK2826-2
11/24
3TY2740
4/65
3TK284
11/27
3TY2741
4/65
3TY2742
4/65
3TX
3TX2
4/65
3TY278
4/65
3TX40
5/23
3TY6443-0B
4/64
3TX41
5/23
3TY6443-0L
4/55
3TX42
5/22, 13/85
3TY6483-0A
4/64
3TX44
3/143, 3/144, 5/30, 5/31
3TY6483-0B
4/64
3TX47
5/23
3TY6483-0L
4/55
3TX650
3/133, 4/63
3TY6500
3/134
3TX652
3/110, 3/133
3TY6501-1A
3/134, 4/64
3TX654
3/110, 3/133, 4/63
3TY6501-1E
3/134
3TX7002-1
5/42
3TY6501-1K
4/62
3TX7002-2
5/42
3TY6501-1L
4/62
3TX7002-3
5/50
3TY6502
3/134
3TX7002-4
5/50
3TY6503-0B
3/134
3TX7003
5/42
3TY6503-0L
4/53
3TX7004
5/43, 5/50, 5/59, 5/61
3TY6520
3/134
3TX7005
5/43, 5/50
3TY6522
3/134
3TX7014-1
5/45
3TY6523-0A
4/64
3TX7014-7
5/46, 10/186
3TY6523-0B
3/134, 4/64
3TX7015
5/46
3TY6523-0L
4/53
3TX709
3/125
3TY6540
3/134
3TX7402-3A
5/22
3TY6542
3/134
3TX7402-3D
5/22
3TY6543-0B
3/134
3TX7402-3G
4/63, 5/22
3TY6543-0L
4/53
3TX7402-3H
4/63, 5/22
3TY6560
3/134
3TX7402-3J
4/63, 5/22
3TY6561-1A
3/134, 4/64
3TX7402-3K
4/63, 5/22
3TY6561-1B
3/134, 4/64
3TX7402-3L
4/63, 5/22
3TY6561-1E
3/134
3TX7402-3R
5/22
3TY6561-1K
4/62
3TX7402-3S
5/22
3TY6561-1L
4/62
3TX7402-3T
5/22
3TY6562
3/134
3TX7402-3U
5/22
3TY6563-0B
3/134, 4/64
3TX7402-3V
5/22
3TY6563-0L
4/53
3TX744
10/28
3TY6566
4/64
3TX746
3/133, 4/63, 10/28
3TY74
4/64
3TX7500
3/110, 6/32, 6/65
3TY75
3/125, 3/126, 4/62
3TX7506
10/28
3TY7680
3/126
3TX752
3/133, 4/63
3TY7681
3/126
3TX753
10/28
3TY7683-0C
3/126
3TX757
3/125
3TY7683-0D
3/126
3TX7680-0D
3/125
3TY7683-0Q
3/126
3TX7680-0E
3/125
3TY7684
3/126
3TX7686
3/125, 10/28
3TY7690
3/126
3TX7690
3/125
3TY7693-0C
3/126
3TX7696
3/125, 10/28
3TY7693-0D
3/126
3TY7693-0Q
3/126
16
3TY
3TY2440
4/64
3UF
3TY2442
4/55, 4/64
3UF18
10/28
3TY2480
4/64
3UF19
10/21
16/66
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
3UF70
10/14
3ZS1630
14/18
3UF7100
10/15
3ZS1632
10/26, 14/29
3UF7101
10/15
3ZS1633
6/63, 14/10, 14/11
3UF7102
10/15
3ZS1635
2/10, 2/13, 14/32
3UF7103-1A
10/15
3ZY
3UF7103-1B
10/15
3ZY11
8/96, 11/20
3UF7104
10/15
3ZY1121
11/20
3UF7110
10/15
3ZY1122
8/96
3UF7111
10/15
3ZY12
8/95, 11/20
3UF7112
10/15
3ZY13
8/97, 10/20, 11/21
10/15
3ZY14
8/97, 11/21
3UF7113-1B
10/15
4AM
3UF7114
10/15
4AM2
15/20
3UF715
10/15
4AM3
15/17 ... 19, 15/21 ... 25
3UF72
10/15
4AM4
15/17 ... 19, 15/21 ... 25
3UF73
10/16, 10/18
4AM5
15/17 ... 19, 15/21 ... 25
3UF74
10/16
4AM6
15/21 ... 25
3UF75
10/16
4AP
3UF76
10/17
4AP
3UF77
10/16, 15/142
4AT
3UF79
6/64, 7/149, 10/19, 10/20, 10/27,

11/41, 14/8, 14/16, 14/23, 14/27,
14/30, 14/36, 15/145
3UG
3UG3
10/118
3UG450
10/117
3UG451
10/91
3UG458
10/109, 10/114
3UG461
10/91
3UG462
10/97, 10/103
3UG463
10/94
3UG464
10/100
3UG465
10/121
3UG481
10/129
3UG482
10/135, 10/142
3UG483
10/132
3UG484
10/139
3UG485
10/145
3UG4981
10/122
3UG4983
10/114, 10/122
3UL
3UL23
10/104
3UL29
10/104
3ZS
3ZS1310-4
14/15
3ZS1310-5
14/15
3ZS1310-6
14/16
3ZS1312-4
10/24, 14/26
3ZS1312-5
10/24, 14/26
3ZS1312-6
10/25, 14/27
3ZS1313-4
6/63, 14/7
3ZS1313-5
6/63, 14/7
3ZS1313-6
6/63, 14/8
3ZS1314
11/42, 14/35
3ZS1322-4
10/22, 14/22
3ZS1322-5
10/22, 14/22
3ZS1322-6
10/23, 14/23
15/31
4AT3032-4
15/21
4AT3032-5
15/22, 15/23
4AT3032-8
15/25
4AT3612-5A
15/22
4AT3612-5C
15/23
4AT3612-5F
15/23
4AT3612-8
15/25
4AT3632-5A
15/22
4AT3632-5C
15/23
4AT3632-5F
15/23
4AT3632-8
15/25
4AT3912-5A
15/22
4AT3912-5F
15/23
4AT3912-8
15/25
4AT3932-5A
15/22
4AT3932-5F
15/23
4AT3932-8
15/25
4AU
4AU
15/31
4AV
4AV20
15/36
4AV21
15/35
4AV22
15/36
4AV23
15/35
4AV24
15/36
4AV26
15/36
4AV3000
15/37
4AV3002
15/38
4AV3100
15/37
4AV3101
15/38
4AV3102
15/38
4AV32
15/37
4AV33
15/37, 15/38
4AV34
15/37, 15/38
4AV35
15/37, 15/38
4AV36
15/38
Siemens IC 10 2014
16
3UF7113-1A
16/67
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
4AV38
15/38
6EP133
15/41 ... 46
4AV4
15/36
6EP135
15/43, 15/47
4AV5
15/37
6EP1434
15/44
4AV9
15/39, 15/40
6EP1436
15/44, 15/46
6EP1437
15/44, 15/46
6EP145
15/46
6EP15
15/46
15/48 ... 52
5TT
15/154
5TT
6AG
6AG1052-1
10/31
6EP19
6AG1052-2
10/33
6ES
6AG1053
10/39
6ES5
6AG1055
10/35, 10/39
8/132,l 8/133, 8/135, 8/136,

8/138, 8/139
6AG1057
10/39
6ES7
6AG1131
8/141
6AG1132
8/141
2/11, 2/32, 2/34, 2/35, 2/38, 2/40,

2/56, 2/86, 2/96 ... 99, 2/102,
8/132 ... 148, 8/150 ... 154, 9/13,
9/18 ... 24, 9/26 ... 35, 9/61, 9/76,
15/78, 15/79
6AG1134
8/142
6FB
6AG1135
8/142
6FB1103
15/115
6AG1138
8/134, 8/140, 8/144, 8/151
6FB1104
15/116, 15/117
6AG1151-1
8/138
6FB1105
15/111, 15/112
6AG1151-3
8/139
6FB1111-0
15/105
6AG1151-7
8/132, 8/135
6FB1111-1
15/101, 15/105, 15/108
6AG1151-8
8/133, 8/136
6FB1112-0AT20-2
15/109
6AG1193-4C
8/149
6FB1112-0AT20-3
15/110
6AG1193-4J
8/132
6FB1115
15/113
6AG1331
15/43
6FB1141-1AT10-3K
15/122
6AG1332
15/43
6FB1141-1AT10-3W
15/126
6AG1334
15/44, 15/45
6FB1141-1AT11
15/122
6AG1336
15/46
6FE
6AG1337
15/46
6FE102
15/158
6AG1436-2
15/44
6FE108
15/161
6AG1436-3
15/46
6FX
6AG1437
15/46
6FX2
8/144
6AG1931
15/51
6FX5
8/143, 8/144
6AG1933
15/45
6GK
6AG1936
15/46
6GK12
2/79
6AG1961-3BA0
15/49
6GK14
2/38, 2/40, 2/47
6AG1961-3BA1
15/48
6GK19
6AG1961-3BA2
15/48
2/38, 2/40, 2/47, 8/133, 8/136 ... 138,

9/19 ... 29, 9/32, 9/33, 10/39
6GK5200
8/139
6GK5201
8/139
6GK5202
8/139
6GK5208
9/24, 9/27
6AT
6AT8001
6AT8002
15/131, 15/134
15/139, 15/142, 15/145
6BK
6BK1700-0
10/36
6GK57
9/23
6BK1700-2
15/64, 15/65, 15/68, 15/73, 15/77,

15/80, 15/87
6GK71
10/37
6GK72
2/30
6BK1700-3
15/64, 15/85, 15/90, 15/92
6GK73
2/32
6BK1700-4
15/68, 15/77, 15/87, 15/89, 15/93
6GT
6BK19
15/58
6GT
16
6ED
9/33
6SL
6ED1050
10/39
6SL30
9/35
6ED1052
10/30, 10/32
6SL32
9/35
6ED1055
10/34, 10/39
6SL35
9/18, 9/35, 9/57, 14/16
6ED1056
10/39
6XV
6ED1057
8/129, 10/39, 10/40, 14/16
6XV182
9/20, 9/21, 9/23, 9/25, 9/28, 9/33
6ED1058
10/41
6XV183
2/38, 2/40, 8/132, 8/134, 9/19 ... 21,

9/23, 9/25, 9/26, 9/28, 9/29,
9/32, 9/33, 9/60, 9/61
6XV184
8/133, 8/136, 8/138, 9/22, 9/25, 9/28,

9/61
6EP
6EP131
15/43
6EP132
15/42, 15/43
16/68
Siemens IC 10 2014
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Article No.
Page
Article No.
Page
6XV186
9/19, 9/21, 9/32
LZS:PT1704
5/59
6XV187
9/21 ... 23, 9/25, 9/26, 9/28, 9/29,

9/61, 10/39
LZS:PT170P
5/59
LZS:PT170R
5/59
LZS:PT2
5/57
LZS:PT3
5/57
LZS:PT5
5/57
LZS:PT7
5/58
LZS:PTM
5/59, 5/61
LZS:RT1701
5/61
LZS:RT1704
5/61
LZS:RT170P
5/61
LZS:RT170R
5/61
LZS:RT3
5/60
LZS:RT4
5/60
LZS:RT7
5/61
7MH
7MH46
8/145
7MH47
8/145, 8/146
7MH49
8/145, 8/146
7PV
7PV150
10/63
7PV151
10/63
7PV153
10/63
7PV154
10/63
7PV155
10/63
7PV157
10/63
8US
8US101
7/66
8US106
7/66, 8/53
8US11
7/66
8US12
7/31, 7/66, 8/38, 8/53, 8/72
8US1998-1A
8/39, 8/53
8US1998-1BA0
8/39
8US1998-1BA1
7/31, 8/38
8US1998-1C
7/31, 8/38
8US1998-2
7/31, 8/38
8US1998-7
8/36
LZX
LZX:M
5/59
LZX:P
5/58
LZX:R
5/61
Z23
Z23
2/82
8WA
8WA284
8/142, 8/145, 8/146, 8/148, 8/153
8WA286
8/142, 8/145, 8/146, 8/148, 8/153
8WA8
8/148, 8/153
8WD
8WD4200
13/112
8WD4208
13/113, 13/116
8WD422
13/112
8WD424
13/112
8WD425
13/112
8WD4308-0C
13/116
8WD4308-0D
13/113, 13/116
8WD4308-0E
13/113, 13/116
8WD432
13/113, 13/117
8WD434
13/113, 13/117
8WD435
13/113, 13/117
8WD4400
13/114
8WD4408
13/113, 13/115 ... 117
8WD4420-0
13/114
8WD4420-5
13/115
8WD4428-0
13/115
8WD4428-6
13/113, 13/117
8WD4440-0
13/114
8WD4440-5
13/115
8WD4448
13/113, 13/117
8WD4450-0
13/114
8WD4450-5
13/115
8WD4458
13/113, 13/117
8WD5
13/118
LZS:M
5/59
LZS:PT1702
5/59
16
LZS
Siemens IC 10 2014
16/69
Siemens AG 2013
Appendix
Conditions of sale and delivery
1. General Provisions
By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software
products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the
following Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery (hereinafter
referred to as "T&C"). Please note that the scope, the quality and
the conditions for supplies and services, including software
products, by any Siemens entity having a registered office
outside Germany, shall be subject exclusively to the General
Terms and Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. The
following T&C apply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft, Germany.
1.1 For customers with a seat or registered office in
Germany
For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany, the
following applies subordinate to the T&C:
the "General Terms of Payment"1) and,
for software products, the "General License Conditions for
Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers
with a Seat or Registered Office in Germany"1) and,
for other supplies and services, the "General Conditions for
the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical and
Electronics Industry"1).
1.2 For customers with a seat or registered office outside
Germany
For customers with a seat or registered office outside Germany,
the following applies subordinate to the T&C:
the "General Terms of Payment"1) and,
for software products, the "General License Conditions for
Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers
with a Seat or Registered Office outside of Germany"1) and
for other supplies and/or services, the "General Conditions for
Supplies of Siemens Industry for Customers with a Seat or
Registered Office outside of Germany"1).
16
2. Prices
The prices are in (Euro) ex point of delivery, exclusive of
packaging.
The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices. It
shall be charged separately at the respective rate according to
the applicable statutory legal regulations.
Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will charget
the prices valid at the time of delivery.
To compensate for variations in the price of raw materials (e.g.
silver, copper, aluminum, lead, gold, dysprosium and neodym),
surcharges are calculated on a daily basis using the so-called
metal factor for products containing these raw materials. A
surcharge for the respective raw material is calculated as a
supplement to the price of a product if the basic official price of
the raw material in question is exceeded.
The metal factor of a product indicates the basic official price
(for those raw materials concerned) as of which the surcharges
on the price of the product are applied, and with what method of
calculation.
An exact explanation of the metal factor can be downloaded at:
To calculate the surcharge (except in the cases of dysprosium
and neodym), the official price from the day prior to that on which
the order was received or the release order was effected is used.
To calculate the surcharge applicable to dysprosium and
neodym ("rare earths"), the corresponding three-month basic
average price in the quarter prior to that in which the order was
received or the release order was effected is used with a onemonth buffer (details on the calculation can be found in the
explanation of the metal factor).
16/70
Siemens IC 10 2014
3. Additional Terms and Conditions

The dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the
German law on units in measuring technology, data in inches
apply only to devices for export.
Illustrations are not binding.
Insofar as there are no remarks on the individual pages of this
catalog - especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights
given - these are subject to change without prior notice.
4. Export regulations
We shall not be obligated to fulfill any agreement if such
fulfillment is prevented by any impediments arising out of
national or international foreign trade or customs requirements
or any embargoes and/or other sanctions.
Export of goods listed in this catalog may be subject to licensing
requirements. We will indicate in the delivery details whether
licenses are required under German, European and US export
lists. Goods labeled with "AL" not equal to "N" are subject to
European or German export authorization when being exported
out of the EU. Goods labeled with "ECCN" not equal to "N" are
subject to US re-export authorization.
The export indications can be viewed in advance in the
description of the respective goods on the Industry Mall, our
online catalog system. Only the export labels "AL" and "ECCN"
indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices
are authoritative.
Even without a label, or with label "AL:N" or "ECCN:N", authorization may be required i .a. due to the final disposition and
intended use of goods.
If you transfer goods (hardware and/or software and/or
technology as well as corresponding documentation, regardless
of the mode of provision) delivered by us or works and services
(including all kinds of technical support) performed by us to a
third party worldwide, you must comply with all applicable
national and international (re-)export control regulations.
If required for the purpose of conducting export control checks,
you (upon request by us) shall promptly provide us with all information pertaining to the particular end customer, final disposition and intended use of goods delivered by us respectively
works and services provided by us, as well as to any export
control restrictions existing in this relation.
The products listed in this catalog may be subject to
European/German and/or US export regulations. Any export
requiring approval is therefore subject to authorization by the
relevant authorities.
Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
1) The text of the Terms and Conditions of Siemens AG can be

downloaded at
Siemens AG 2013
Catalogs
Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and Low-Voltage Power Distribution
Further information can be obtained from our branch offices
listed at www.siemens.com/automation/partner
System Solutions for Industry
Interactive Catalog on DVD
Catalog
Products for Automation and Drives, Low Voltage Power CA 01

Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology
Building Control
GAMMA Building Control
Drive Systems
SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units
SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
SINAMICS GM150, SINAMICS SM150
Medium-Voltage Converters
ROBICON Perfect Harmony
Medium-Voltage Air-Cooled Drives
Germany Edition
Digital: SINAMICS G180
Converters Compact Units, Cabinet Systems,
Cabinet Units Air-Cooled and Liquid-Cooled
SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and
Cabinet Modules
SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units
SINAMICS DCM Converter Units
SINAMICS DCM Cabinet
SINAMICS and Motors for Single-Axis Drives
Three-Phase Induction Motors SIMOTICS HV,
SIMOTICS TN
Series H-compact
Series H-compact PLUS
Asynchronous Motors Standardline
Synchronous Motors with Permanent-Magnet
Technology, HT-direct
DC Motors
SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70 Digital Chassis
Converters
SIMOREG K 6RA22 Analog Chassis Converters
Digital: SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RM70 Digital
Converter Cabinet Units
SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems
SIEMOSYN Motors
MICROMASTER 420/430/440 Inverters
MICROMASTER 411/COMBIMASTER 411
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO
ET G1
D 11
D 12
D 15.1
D 18.1
D 21.3
D 23.1
D 23.2
D 31
D 84.1
D 86.1
D 86.2
DA 12
DA 21.1
DA 21.2
DA 22
DA 45
DA 48
DA 51.2
DA 51.3
DA 65.10
DA 65.11
DA 65.3
DA 65.4
Note: Additional catalogs on SIMODRIVE or SINAMICS

drive systems and SIMOTICS motors with SINUMERIK
and SIMOTION can be found under Motion Control
Low-Voltage Three-Phase-Motors
SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors
MOTOX Geared Motors
SIMOGEAR Geared Motors
SIMOGEAR Gearboxes with adapter
D 81.1
D 87.1
MD 50.1
MD 50.11
Mechanical Driving Machines

FLENDER Standard Couplings
FLENDER High Performance Couplings
FLENDER SIG Standard industrial gear unit
FLENDER SIP Standard industrial planetary gear units
MD 10.1
MD 10.2
MD 30.1
MD 31.1
Process Instrumentation and Analytics

Field Instruments for Process Automation
Digital: SIPART Controllers and Software
Products for Weighing Technology
Digital: Process Analytical Instruments
Digital: Process Analytics,
Components for the System Integration
Digital: These catalogs are only available as a PDF
and/or as an e-book.
FI 01
MP 31
WT 10
PA 01
PA 11
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and

Electrical Installation Technology
Catalog
SENTRON SIVACON ALPHA

Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring
Devices, Switchboards and Distribution Systems
Standards-Compliant Components for
Photovoltaic Plants
3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A
Digital: 3VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A
Digital: SIVACON System Cubicles, System Lighting
and System Air-Conditioning
Digital: ALPHA Distribution Systems
ALPHA FIX Terminal Blocks
SIVACON S4 Power Distribution Boards
SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems
Digital: DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets
LV 10
Motion Control
SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE
Automation Systems for Machine Tools
SINUMERIK & SINAMICS
Equipment for Machine Tools
SINUMERIK 840D sl Type 1B
SINUMERIK 808
SINUMERIK 828
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 & SIMOTICS
Equipment for Production Machines
Drive and Control Components for Cranes
LV 11
LV 35
LV 36
LV 50
LV 51
LV 52
LV 56
LV 70
ET D1
NC 60
NC 61
NC 62
NC 81.1
NC 82
PM 21
CR 1
Power Supply
Power Supply SITOP
KT 10.1
Safety Integrated
Safety Technology for Factory Automation
SI 10
SIMATIC HMI/PC-based Automation

Human Machine Interface Systems/
PC-based Automation
ST 80/
ST PC
SIMATIC Ident
Industrial Identification Systems
ID 10
SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems

Products for Totally Integrated Automation
SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System
System components
SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System
Technology components
Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7
Process Control System
ST 70
ST PCS 7
ST PCS 7 T
ST PCS 7 AO
SIMATIC NET
IK PI
SIRIUS Industrial Controls

SIRIUS Industrial Controls
IC 10

PDF versions of the catalogs are available on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/industry/infocenter
There youll find additional catalogs in other languages.
Please note the section Downloading catalogs on page
Online services in the appendix of this catalog.
Siemens AG 2013
Industrial Security
Siemens provides automation and drive products
with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants or machines. They are
an important component in a holistic industrial
security concept. With this in mind, our products
undergo continuous development. We therefore
recommend that you keep yourself informed with
respect to our product updates. Please find further
information and newsletters on this subject at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
To ensure the secure operation of a plant or
machine it is also necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept)
and to integrate the automation and drive
components into a state-of-the-art holistic
industrial security concept for the entire plant or
machine. Any third-party products that may be in
use must also be taken into account. Please find
further information at:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
Get more information

Control Components and Systems Engineering:
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Control Components and
Systems Engineering
Postfach 2355
90713 FRTH
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/automation
so_IC10_2014_EN_umschlag.indd 2
Subject to change without prior notice

Article No. E86060-K1010-A101-A4-7600
C.8107.10.20 / Dispo 68201
KG 1213 7. S 1680 En
Printed in Germany
Siemens AG 2014
Industrial Controls
SIRIUS
The information provided in this catalog contains merely general

descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result
of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms
of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject to
change without notice.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names
of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties
for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Token fee: 12.00
19.12.2013 12:53:03

SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2014 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2014 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens AG 2013

Answers for industry.

Products for Automation and Drives

Low-Voltage Power Distribution and

Information and Download Center

Only available in German

Further information about industrial controls:

The products and systems described in this

8 Load Feeders and Motor Starters

Please contact your local Siemens branch

12 Position and Safety Switches

13 Commanding and Signaling Devices

Printed on paper from

14 Parametrization, Configuration and

CM 1243-2 communication module

AS-Interface digital I/O modules IP67 - K60

Article No.: 3RK7243-2AA30-0XB0

Article No.: 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1

Article No.: 3RK2200-0CQ00-0AA3,

AS-Interface digital I/O modules IP67 K45

30 V power supply units

AS-Interface DCM 1271 data decoupling

Article No.: 3RK2200-0DQ20-0AA3,

Article No.: 3RX9511-0AA00, 3RX9512-0AA00,

Article No.: 3RK7271-1AA30-0AA0

AS-Interface Extension Plug Compact

IO-Link master module CM 4xIO-Link

Article No.: 3RK1901-1MX02

Article No.: 3RK1904-2AB02

Article No.: 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0

PROFINET communication module

SIRIUS 3RV2 motor starter protector, size S0

SIRIUS 3RV2 circuit breaker acc. to UL 489/

Article No.: 3RW4900-ONC00

Article No.: 3RV2021-0..10, 3RV2021-0..20,

Article No.: 3RV2721-4.D10, 3RV2821-4.D10

Pages 7/19, 7/22

Pages 7/24, 7/25

SIRIUS 3RB24 solid-state overload relay

SIRIUS 3RA2 load feeder

SIRIUS 3RM1 motor starter

Article No.: 3RB2483-4A.1

Article No.: 3RA2120-1., 3RA2220-1.

Article No.: 3RM1.

Pages 8/16, 8/24

SIMATIC ET 200S motor starter

SIRIUS M200D PROFINET motor starter

Motor management system

Article No.: 3RK1301-.....-0AB4,

Article No.: 3RK1395-. +

Article No.: 3UF7020

Motor management system

Article No.: 3UF7011

Article No.: 3UF7510

Article No.: 3UF7600

SIRIUS 3UG46 residual-current

Residual current transformer

SIRIUS 3UG4 insulation monitor

Article No.: 3UG4625

Article No.: 3UL23

Article No.: 3UG4581, 3UG4582, 3UG4583

SIRIUS 3UG48 monitoring relay

SIRIUS 3UG48 residual current monitoring